(TM) Honda Manual de Taller Honda Civic 2006 Al 2009 en Ingles

INTRODUCTION
• How to Use This Manual G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n

• I
This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover. Specifications
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
reference system.
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing;
• Parts disassembly sequence.
• Bolt torques and thread sizes. E n g i n e Electrical
• Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting. E n g i n e M e c h a n i c a l
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
E n g i n e C o o l i n g
r- Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety Fuel a n d E m i s s i o n s
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment. !A
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms
including:
T r a n s a x l e
• S a f e t y L a b e l s — on the vehicle.
• Safety Messages —
preceded by a safety alert symbol and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
PfiTMtrall You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
you don't follow instructions.
WTOEISnircicI You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
F i l i C T n i S i y i You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
instructions.
• I n s t r u c t i o n s — how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest

product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text,
figures, and tables.
As you read this manual, you will find information that is

preceded by a 1 N O T I C E | symbol. The purpose of this message is
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
First Edition 12/2008 HONDA M O T O R C O . , LTD.

All Rights Reserved S e r v i c e Publication Office
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
A s sections with * include S R S components;

special precautions are required w h e n servicing.
marked sections are not included in this

manual, see Volume 2. 2006-09 Civic H y b r i d
Vol . 1 of 2
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS)
The Civic Hybrid SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard
above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, seat belt buckle tenssoners in the front seat
belt buckles, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information
necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk { * ) on the
contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items
requires special precautions and tools, and should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service w o r k should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags, side airbags, and/or side curtain airbags.
• Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor w h e n the
ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0); otherwise, the
system may fail in a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the steering
c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a high-voltage system. The high voltage cables and their covers
are identified by orange coloring. The safety labels are attached to high voltage and other related parts (see page 1-7).
You must be familiar w i t h the IMA system before working around it. Make sure you have read the Service Precautions
in the IMA section before performing repairs or service (see page 12-3).
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes

'06 Model 1-2
'07 Model 1-3
'08 Model 1-4
'09 Model 1-5
Identification Number Locations 1-6

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-7
Under-hood Emission Control Label 1-9
Lift and Support Points 1-10
Towing 1-11
Parts Marking 1-12
Service Precautions 1-13
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
'06 Model Engine Number
Vehicle Identification Number LDA2 - 1000001
JHm rAo o 2 G 5 000001 I

a
b c de 9h a. Engine Type
LDA2:1.3 L SOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport
Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle Fuel-injected engine
JHM: Honda Motor Co., Ltd. b. Serial Number
Honda passenger vehicle
Line, Body and Engine Type
FA3: Civic Hybrid/LDA2 lotor Number
Body Type and Transmission Type
6:4-door Sedan/CVT MF5 - 1000001
Vehicle Grade (Series)
2: MX
Check Digit
Model Year a
6: '06
Factory Code SViotor Type
S:Suzuka Factory in Japan MF5: DC brushless-3 phases
Serial Number Serial Number
000001 —: USA models
800001—: Canada models
Transmission Number
SPSA - 1000001
a. Transmission Type
SPSA: CVT
b. Serial N u m b e r
Paint Code
Code Color USA Canada
models models
Vehicle Identification N u m b e r
and Federal Motor Vehicle
NH-578 Taffeta White O
COLOR
S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Certification L a b e l . LABEL
NH-684P Magnetic Pearl O O
NH-700M Alabaster Silver o o
and Canadian Motor Vehicle Metallic
Safety S t a n d a r d Certification Label. NH-701M Galaxy Gray Metallic o
BG-51M Opal Silver Blue o o
Metallic
1-2
'07 Model Engine Number
JHM FA3 6 2 * 7 S 000001
b c d e gh a. Engine Type
J H M : Honda Motor Co., Ltd. b. Serial Number
Line, Body and Engine Type
FAS: Civic Hybrid/LDA2 Motor Number
Body Type and Transmission Type
2: MX
Check Digit
Model Year a
7:'07
Factory Code a. Motor Type
Serial Number b. Serial Number
000001—: USA models
Transmission Number
SPSA - 2000001
SPSA: CVT
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
models models
and Federal Motor Vehicle COLOR
NH-578 Taffeta White O O
Safety S t a n d a r d Certification Label. LABEL NH-684P Magnetic Pearl o o
Safety S t a n d a r d Certification Label. NH-701M Galaxy Gray Metallic o
Metallic
1-3
General information
Chassis and Paint Codes (cont'd!
m Model Engine Number
J H M TAS G 2 ""' S 3 GGG001

a b
a b c d e f g h a. Engine Type
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle Fuel-injected engine
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
FA3: Civic Hybrid/LDA2 Motor Number
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
6: 4-door Sedan/CVT MF5 - 1000001
d. Vehicle Grade (Series)
2: M X
e. Check Digit
a b
!. !Y!odel Year
8: '08
g. Factory Code a. Motor Type
h. Serial Number b. Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : USAmodels
800001 — : Canada models
Transmission Number
SPSA - 3000001
a b
SPSA: CVT
b. Serial Number
»aint Code
models models
NH-578 Taffeta White
and Federal Motor Vehicle COLOR
S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Certification Label. LABEL NH-684P Magnetic Pearl O O
NH-700M Alabaster Silver o O
V e h i c l e Identification N u m b e r
S a f e t y S t a n d a r d Certification Label. NH-701M Galaxy Gray Metallic o
Metallic
1-4
f
§3 Model Engine Number
JHM FAS 6 2 * 9 S 000001

a
b c de 9 a. Engine Type
b. Line, Body and Engine Type
FA3: Civic Hybrid/LDA2 Motor Number
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
2: MX
Check Digit
Model Year
9: '09
Factory Code a. Motor Type
h. Serial Number b. Serial Number
0 0 0 0 0 1 - : USA models
Transmission Number
SPSA - 3000001
SPSA: CVT
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
models models
V e h i c l e Identification N u m b e r
and Federal Motor Vehicle
NH-578 Taffeta White O O
COLOR
Safety S t a n d a r d Certification Label. LABEL
NH-684P Magnetic Pearl o O
Safety S t a n d a r d Certification Label. NH-731P Crystal Black Pearl o o
NH-737M Polished Metal o
Metallic
NH-756P Spectrum White o o
Pearl
B-537M Atomic Blue Pearl o o
1-5
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
Front Passenger's Compartment:
Located on driver's and passenger's doorjambs. TENSIONER CAUTION
(cont'd)
1-7
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)
HIGH V O L T A G E BATTERY MODULE

WARNING DANGER
1-8
Uoder-hood Emission Control Label
Emission Group Identification Test Group and Evaporative Family
Example: Test Group
'06-07 Models
i H N X V 01.3 CDH
VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION
a b cd e
CATALYST
8 "E ' cWTIfLTw AND IN bS"

l WrsULT a. Model Year
6: '06
(H) (ED 7: '07
HONDA MOTOR CO. , ITD RMX-AOO
8: '08
9: '09
b. Manufacturer Subcode
'08-09 M o d e l s
HNX: HONDA
INFORMATION " 'VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION" c. Family Type
y-i fttwi u<s'iti» tow *n
COOLANT raS! BE REPLACED AK0B1K 10
"WTEWCE HUE' SLS C3DE ;
CONFORMS TO REGULATIONS ; 2008MY V: LDV
08 AT ! 18 J fEARS WH C
I HEVER COMES FR I ST
TJEREF
:A".H
'LW
EN
i teP EVP* i SIMS U. S. EPA : T2B2 / CFV ULEV/IIEV LDV OBD : CA OBO 11 FUEL : GASOLINE d. Displacement Group
AYSAD UC
SESI3^ÊCQJMtMED^GE'
0'. REPA
i CH
I C- THE CiUO
iaO
EA
i|
!.'
ARB : LEV 11 SULEV / AT PZEV PC OBD : CA OBO 11 FUEL : GASOLINE
THS I COOLANT IS PKE-M«XED WTIH * TsTlS e. Sequence Characters
l l " ^ , ' ^ 'T ' « 0 T Wlfi '
1 1
M (
W U - T W C , T W C , A/F SENSOR, H 0 2 S , EG R, SFI

KM D.LL*: TfE CMH>f XCP: '06 model
8HNXV01. 3ZCP
MKCK OB JDS K COOLANT
f THE RESERVE TAN*C NOT THE MM
I TOA. 8HNXR0096BCA
JCP: '07 model
>T0= FuFl'S ' W W l f'i --; cOfLK
IG
SYSTEM READ T»E 0A1EFS MANUAL
' CHECK AT <OJR <•<•• OtALEP HONDA MOTOR CO. , LTD. RMX—AQ2 1.3L ZCP: '08 model
CDH: '09 model
'06 Model
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 2 Evaporative Family:
AND CFV ULEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2006
MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS AND
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2006 i HNX R 0096 V Z A
MODEL YEAR NEW LEV II SULEV PASSENGER CARS.
THIS VEHICLE HAS ALSO BEEN CERTIFIED AS AN AT-
PZEV BY CALIFORNIA AIR RESOURCES BOARD. EPA
a b cd e
CERTIFICATION TEST FUEL FOR CFV: EPA UNLEADED
GASOLINE.
a. Model Year
'07 Model 6: '06
THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 2 7: '07
AND CFV ULEV REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 8: '08
MODEL YEAR NEW PASSENGER CARS AND 9: '09
CALIFORNIA REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 b. Manufacturer Subcode
MODEL YEAR NEW LEV II SULEV PASSENGER CARS. HNX: HONDA
THIS VEHICLE HAS ALSO BEEN CERTIFIED AS AN AT- c. Family Type
PZEV BY CALIFORNIA AIR RESOURCES BOARD. EPA R: EVAP/ORVR
CERTIFICATION TEST FUEL FOR CFV: EPA UNLEADED d. Canister Working Capacity Group
GASOLINE. e. Sequence Characters
'08 Model
CONFORMS TO REGULATION: 2008 M Y
'09 Model
CONFORMS TO REGULATION: 2009 MY
General Information
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack
such as the suspension or the fuel tank f r o m the rear of
the vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle w i t h tall 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
f r o m the rear of the vehicle, the center of gravity can shift lever in the P position.
change, causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
Vehicle Lift
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
1. Position the lift blocks (A) under the vehicle's front bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center
support points (B) and rear support points (C). the jacking bracket on the jack lift platform (C), and
jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety
stands under it.
2. Raise the lift a f e w inches, and rock the vehicle

gently to be sure it is f i r m l y supported.
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the

vehicle support points for solid contact w i t h the lift 4. Position the safety stands under the support points,
blocks. and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
Safety Stands 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

support points as for a frame vehicle lift. Always use
safety stands w h e n w o r k i n g on or under any vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
1-10
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be t o w e d , call a professional
t o w i n g service. Never t o w the vehicle behind another
vehicle w i t h a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Tow Truck Equipment — The operator loads

the vehicle on the back of a f lad-bed t o w truck. This is
the best way of transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate flat-bed t o w truck equipment, the

vehicle is equipped w i t h front t o w i n g hooks (A), front
tie d o w n hook slots (B), rear t o w i n g hook (C), and rear
tie d o w n hook slots (D).
The t o w i n g hooks can be used w i t h a winch to pull the

vehicle onto the flat-bed t o w truck, and the tie d o w n
hook slots can be used to secure the vehicle to the
flat-bed t o w truck.
Front:
(cont'd)
1 - 1 1
General Information
Towing (cont'd) Parts Marking

Wheel Lift Equipment — The t o w truck uses t w o To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front or rear) and marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
lifts t h e m off the ground. The other t w o wheels remain Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement
on the g r o u n d . This is an acceptable w a y of towing the body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These
vehicle. labels should not be removed. The original engine or
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the
Sling-type Equipment — The t o w truck uses metal replacement engine or transmission.
cables w i t h hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's labels during body repair. Mask the labels before
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this repairing the part.
method of t o w i n g is attempted. This method of towing
the vehicle is unacceptable.
If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed t o w

truck, it should be towed w i t h the front wheels off the
ground. If the vehicle is damaged, and must be t o w e d
w i t h the f r o n t wheels on the g r o u n d , or w i t h all four
wheels on the ground, do this;
• Release the parking brake.

• Start the engine.
• Shift to D, then to N.
• Turn off the engine.
• Leave the ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I) so the
steering wheel does not lock.
• Make sure all accessories are turned off to minimize
battery current draw.
It is best to t o w the vehicle no farther than 50 miles

(80 km), and keep the speed below 35 m p h (55 km/h).
1 NOTICE 1
• Improper t o w i n g preparation will damage the
transmission. Follow the above procedure exactly. If
you cannot shift the transmission or start the engine,
the vehicle must be transported on a flat-bed t o w
truck.
• Trying to lift or t o w the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed t o support the vehicle's w e i g h t
1-12
Service Precautions
IMA S f stem
The Civic Hybrid has an Auto-Stop system that shuts the engine off under certain conditions to improve fuel economy
w h e n the vehicle comes to a stop. In Auto-Stop mode, driver input, such as releasing the brake pedal, causes the
engine to restart.
Before servicing the Civic Hybrid, turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) and remove the key so the engine cannot be
started.
Before performing any service on the Civic Hybrid's IMA system, make sure to turn the battery module switch OFF and
wait 5 minutes before working on the vehicle (see page 12-3).
1-13
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical 2-2
Engine Assembly ... 2-2
Cylinder Head 2-3
Engine Block 2-4
Engine Lubrication 2-5
Cooling System 2-5
Fuel and Emissions 2-5
CVT and CVT Differential 2-6
Steering 2-10
Suspension 2-10
Brakes - 2-11
Air Conditioning 2-11
Design Specifications
Dimensions .... 2-12
Weight 2-12
Engine 2-12
Starter 2-12
IMA Motor 2-12
IMA Battery 2-12
IMA Motor Controller 2-12
CVT 2-12
Steering 2-13
Suspension .... 2-13
Tires 2-13
Wheel Alignment 2-13
Brakes 2-13
Air Conditioning 2-13
Electrical Ratings 2-14
Body Specifications 2-15
Engine Electrical
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w S e r v i c e Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12V
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Spark plug Type N G K : ILFR6J-11K
DENSO: SK20HPR-L11
Gap 1.0—1.1 m m (0.039—0.043 in.)
Ignition t i m i n g A t idle InNorP 10±2°BTDC
C h e c k t h e red mark
Starter Output 1.0 k W
C o m m u t a t o r mica depth 0 . 4 0 - 0 . 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 1 6 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.) 0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 m m (0.001 in.) m a x . 0.05 m m (0.002 in )
C o m m u t a t o r O.D. 2 8 . 0 - 2 8 . 1 m m ( 1 . 1 0 2 - 1 . 1 0 6 in.) 27.5 m m (1.083 i n )
Brush length 1 1 . 1 - 1 1 . 5 m m ( 0 . 4 4 - 0 . 4 5 in.) 4.3 m m (0.17 in.)
Engine Assembly
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w
2
Compression Pressure Minimum 980 kPa (10.0 k g f / c m , 1 4 2 psi)
Check t h e engine w i t h the starter Maximum 2
200 kPa (2.0 k g f / c m , 28 psi)
cranking variation
2-2
Cylinder Head
Head Warpage 0.07 m m (0.0028 in.) 0.08 m m (0.0031 in.)
Height 1 1 9 . 9 - 1 2 0 . 1 m m (4.720—4.728 in.)
Camshaft End play 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.) 0.3 m m (0.01 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance 0 . 0 5 0 - 0 . 0 8 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 0 3 5 in.) 0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
Total runout 0.03 m m (0.001 in.) m a x . 0.04 m m (0.002 in.)
C a m lobe height Intake 1st 29.700 m m (1.1692 in.)
2nd 35.568 m m (1.4003 in.)
3rd 36.060 m m (1.4196 in.)
Exhaust 1st 29.900 m m (1.1771 in.)
2nd 35.699 m m (1.4054 in.)
Valve C l e a r a n c e (cold) Intake 0 . 1 5 - 0 . 1 9 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.)
Exhaust 0 . 2 4 - 0 . 2 8 m m ( 0 . 0 0 9 - 0 . 0 1 1 in.)
S t e m O.D. Intake 5 . 4 8 - 5 . 4 9 m m (0.2157—0.2161 in.) 5.45 m m (0.215 in.)
Exhaust 5 . 4 5 - 5 . 4 6 m m ( 0 . 2 1 4 6 - 0 . 2 1 5 0 in.) 5.42 m m (0.213 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 5 0 m m (0.0008—0.0020 in.) 0.08 m m (0.003 in.)
Exhaust 0 . 0 5 0 - 0 . 0 8 0 m m (0.0020—0.0031 in.) 0.11 m m (0.004 in.)
V a l v e seat Width Intake 0 . 8 5 0 - 1 . 1 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 3 3 5 - 0 . 0 4 5 3 in.) 1.60 m m (0.063 in.)
Exhaust 1 . 2 5 0 - 1 . 5 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 9 2 - 0 . 0 6 1 0 in.) 2.00 m m (0.079 in.)
S t e m installed height Intake 4 7 . 7 - 4 8 . 1 m m ( 1 . 8 7 8 - 1 . 8 9 4 in.) 48.4 m m (1.906 in.)
Exhaust 4 7 . 6 - 4 8 . 0 m m ( 1 . 8 7 4 - 1 . 8 9 0 in.) 48.3 m m (1.902 in.)
Valve spring Free l e n g t h Intake NIPPON H A T S U J O :
53.25 m m (2.096 in.)
CHUO HATSUJO:
53.26 m m (2.097 in.)
Exhaust S U N CALL:
57.32 m m (2.257 in.)
CHUO HATSUJO:
57.31 m m (2.256 in.)
Valve guide I.D. Intake 5 . 5 1 - 5 . 5 3 m m ( 0 . 2 1 7 - 0 . 2 1 8 in.) 5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
Exhaust 5 . 5 1 - 5 . 5 3 m m ( 0 . 2 1 7 - 0 . 2 1 8 in.) 5.55 m m (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake 1 6 . 2 5 - 1 6 . 7 5 m m ( 0 . 6 4 0 - 0 . 6 5 9 in.)
Exhaust 1 6 . 2 5 - 1 6 . 7 5 m m ( 0 . 6 4 0 - 0 . 6 5 9 in.)
Rocker a r m Arm-to-shaft clearance 0 . 0 1 7 - 0 . 0 4 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 3 - 0 . 0 0 1 8 in.) 0.067 m m (0.0026 in.)
2-3
Engine Block
Block W a r p a g e of deck 0.07 m m (0.003 in.) m a x . 0.10 m m (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter 7 3 . 0 0 - 7 3 . 0 2 m m ( 2 . 8 7 4 0 - 2 . 8 7 4 8 in.) 73.07 m m (2.8767 in.)
Bore taper 0.05 m m (0.002 in )
Reboring limit 0.25 m m (0.01 in.)
Piston S k i r t O.D. at 13 m m (0.5 in.) f r o m 7 2 . 9 8 - 7 2 . 9 9 m m ( 2 . 8 7 3 2 - 2 . 8 7 3 6 in.) 72.97 m m (2.8728 in.)
b o t t o m o f skirt
C l e a r a n c e in c y l i n d e r 0 . 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 4 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 1 6 in.) 0.05 m m (0.002 in.)
Ring g r o o v e w i d t h Top 1 . 0 5 0 - 1 . 0 6 0 m m ( 0 . 0 4 0 9 - 0 . 0 4 1 3 in.) 1.07 m m (0.042 in.)
Second 1 . 2 2 0 - 1 . 2 3 0 m m (0.0481 - 0 . 0 4 8 4 in.) 1.250 m m (0.0492 in)
Oil 2 . 0 0 5 - 2 . 0 2 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 8 9 - 0 . 0 7 9 5 in.) 2.050 m m (0.0807 in.)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0 . 0 6 5 - 0 . 0 9 0 m m (0.0025—0.0035 in.) 0.15 m m (0.006 in.)
Second 0 . 0 3 0 - 0 . 0 5 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 2 - 0 . 0 0 2 2 in.) 0.13 m m (0.005 in )
Ring end gap Top 0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.) 0.60 m m (0.024 in )
Second 0 . 3 5 - 0 . 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 0 in.) 0.65 m m (0.026 in.)
Oil 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.) 0.80 m m (0.031 in.)
Piston pin O.D. 1 7 . 9 9 6 - 1 8 . 0 0 0 m m ( 0 . 7 0 8 5 - 0 . 7 0 8 7 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance 0 . 0 1 0 - 0 . 0 1 8 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 0 7 in.)
C o n n e c t i n g rod Pin-to-rod interference 0 . 0 1 9 - 0 . 0 3 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 7 - 0 . 0 0 1 4 in.)
Small-end bore diameter 1 7 . 9 6 4 - 1 7 . 9 7 7 m m (0.707—0.708 in.)
Large-end bore diameter 43.0 m m (1.69 in.)
End play installed on crankshaft 0 . 1 5 - 0 . 3 0 m m ( 0 . 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 1 2 in.) 0.40 m m (0.016 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter 4 9 . 9 7 6 - 5 0 . 0 0 0 m m ( 1 . 9 6 7 6 - 1 . 9 6 8 5 in.)
Rod journal diameter 3 9 . 9 7 6 - 4 0 . 0 0 0 m m ( 1 . 5 7 3 9 - 1 . 5 7 4 8 in.)
Rod/main journal taper 0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) 0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 m m (0.0002 in.) 0.010 m m (0.0004 in.)
End play 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 1 4 in.) 0.45 m m (0.018 in.)
Runout 0.03 m m (0.0012 in.) m a x . 0.04 m m (0.0016 in.)
Crankshaft M a i n bearing-to-journal oil clearance 0 . 0 1 8 - 0 . 0 3 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 7 - 0 . 0 0 1 4 in.) 0.050 m m (0.0020 in.)
bearing Rod bearing clearance 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 3 8 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 8 - 0 . 0 0 1 5 in.) 0.050 m m (0.0020 in.)
2-4
specs
Engine Lubrication
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w j S e r v i c e Limi
Engine oil Capacity Engine overhaul 3.8 L (4.0 U S qt)
Oil change 3.2 L (3.4 U S qt)
including filter
Oil change 3.0 L (3.2 U S qt)
w i t h o u t filter
Oil p u m p Inner rotor-to-outer rotor clearance 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 1 4 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008 in.)
P u m p housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0 . 1 0 - 0 . 1 8 m m ( 0 . 0 0 4 - 0 . 0 0 7 in.) 0.20 m m (0.008 in )
P u m p housing-to-rotor axial clearance 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 0 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.) 0.15 m m (0.006 in )
Relief v a l v e Relief v a l v e , oil p r e s s u r e w i t h oil A t idle 2
70 kPa (0.7 k g f / c m , 10 psi) m i n .
t e m p e r a t u r e at 176 °F (80 °C) A t 3,000 r p m 2
3 4 0 kPa (3.5 k g f / c m , 50 psi) m i n .
Pooling System
Radiator C o o l a n t capacities ( i n c l u d i n g e n g i n e , Engine overhaul 6.0 L (1.59 U S gal)
heater, hoses, and reservoir) Coolant change 4.75 L (1.25 U S gal)
U s e H o n d a L o n g Life A n t i f r e e z e /
Coolant Type 2
Coolant reservoir Coolant capacity 0.4 L (0.11 U S gal)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 2
9 3 - 1 2 3 kPa ( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 1 8 psi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 1 7 6 - 1 8 3 °F ( 8 0 - 8 4 °C)
Fully o p e n 203 °F (95 °C)
V a l v e lift at f u l l y o p e n 8.0 m m (0.31 in.) m i n .
D r i v e belt Tension Auto-tensioner
:
uel and Emissions
item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w
Fuel p r e s s u r e Pressure w i t h fuel pressure gauge 2
2 6 0 - 3 1 0 kPa ( 2 . 7 - 3 . 2 k g f / c m , 3 8 - 4 6 psi)
connected
Fuel t a n k Capacity 46.6 L (12.3 U S gal)
Engine idle Idle s p e e d w i t h o u t l o a d In N o r P 820±50 rpm
Idle s p e e d w i t h h i g h electrical l o a d In N o r P 820±50 rpm
(A/C s w i t c h O N , t e m p e r a t u r e set t o
m a x c o o l , b l o w e r f a n o n H i g h , rear
w i n d o w defogger O N , and headlights
on high beam)
2-5
CVT and CVT Differential
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w | S e r v i c e Limit
Continuously Capacity Fluid change 2.8 L (3.0 U S q t )
variable U s e H o n d a CVTF Overhaul 5.1 L (5.4 U S q t )
transmission
fluid
2
Hydraulic Forward clutch pressure A t 1,700 r p m in 1 . 5 7 - 1 . 8 4 M P a ( 1 6 . 0 - 1 8 . 8 k g f / c m , 2 2 8 - 2 6 7 psi)
pressure D
2
Heverse brake pressure A t 1,700 r p m in 1 . 5 7 - 1 . 8 4 M P a ( 1 6 . 0 - 1 8 . 8 k g f / c m , 2 2 8 - 2 6 7 psi)
R
2
Drive pulley pressure A t 1,700 r p m in 0 . 2 4 - 0 . 5 4 M P a ( 2 . 5 - 5 . 5 k g f / c m , 3 6 - 7 8 psi)
N
2
Driven pulley pressure A t 1,700 r p m in 0 . 8 3 - 1 . 1 3 M P a (8.5—11.5 k g f / c m , 1 2 0 - 1 6 4 psi)
N
2
Lubrication pressure A t 3,000 r p m in 0 . 2 5 - 0 . 4 0 M P a ( 2 . 5 - 4 . 1 k g f / c m , 3 6 - 5 8 psi)
IN
Stall speed C h e c k w i t h v e h i c l e o n level g r o u n d D, S, L, R 2,350 r p m 2,200-2,500 rpm
ATF p u m p ATF p u m p drive gear shaft O.D. 9 . 9 8 - 9 . 9 9 m m ( 0 . 3 9 2 9 - 0 . 3 9 3 3 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF p u m p driven gear shaft O.D. 9 . 9 8 - 9 . 9 9 m m ( 0 . 3 9 2 9 - 0 . 3 9 3 3 in.) When worn or damaged
A T F p u m p b o d y b u s h i n g I.D. Drive gear shaft 1 0 . 0 0 0 - 1 0 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 9 3 7 - 0 . 3 9 4 3 in.) When worn or damaged
Driven gear shaft 1 0 . 0 0 0 - 1 0 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 9 3 7 - 0 . 3 9 4 3 in.) When worn or damaged
ATF p u m p gear side clearance 0 . 0 1 5 - 0 . 0 3 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 0 6 - 0 . 0 0 1 4 in.)
Clearance between ATF p u m p gear Drive gear 0 . 0 3 5 0 - 0 . 0 5 0 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 0 2 0 in.)
and body Driven gear 0 . 0 3 5 0 - 0 . 0 5 0 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 0 2 0 in.)
Clutch Clearance between clutch end-plate Forward clutch 0 . 6 - 0 . 8 m m ( 0 . 0 2 4 - 0 . 0 3 1 in.)
and t o p disc Start clutch 0 . 5 - 0 . 7 m m ( 0 . 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.)
Reverse brake 0 . 5 5 - 0 . 7 0 m m ( 0 . 0 2 2 - 0 . 0 2 8 in.)
Clutch return spring free length Forward clutch 30.5 m m (1.20 in.) 28.5 m m (1.12 in.)
Start clutch 35.8 m m (1.41 in.) 33.8 m m (1.33 in.)
Reverse brake 18.1 m m (0.71 in.) 16.1 m m (0.63 in.)
Clutch disc thickness Forward clutch 1.94 m m (0.076 in.) When worn or damaged
Start clutch 1.94 m m (0.076 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse brake 2.00 m m (0.079 in.) When worn or damaged
Clutch plate thickness Forward clutch 2.00 m m (0.079 in.) W h e n discolored
Start clutch 2.30 m m (0.091 in.) W h e n discolored
Reverse brake 1.95 m m (0.077 in.) W h e n discolored
F o r w a r d clutch-end plate thickness Mark 4 2.7 m m (0.106 in.) W h e n discolored
Mark 5 2.8 m m (0.110 in.) W h e n discolored
M a r k 10 3.3 m m (0.130 in.) W h e n discolored
2-6
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w Service Limit
Clutch (cont'd) R e v e r s e brake e n d - p l a t e t h i c k n e s s Markl 3.6 m m (0.142 in.) When discolored
Mark A 3.7 m m (0.146 in.) When discolored
Mark 2 3.8 m m (0.150 in.) When discolored
Mark B 3.9 m m (0.154 in.) When discolored
MarkC 4.1 m m (0.161 in.) When discolored
MarkD 4.3 m m (0.169 in.) When discolored
MarkE 4.5 m m (0.177 in.) W h e n discolored
MarkF 4.7 m m (0.185 in.) When discolored
Input shaft D i a m e t e r of n e e d l e b e a r i n g c o n t a c t F l y w h e e l side 1 9 . 9 8 7 - 2 0 . 0 0 0 m m ( 0 . 7 8 6 9 - 0 . 7 8 7 4 in.) When worn or damaged
area Forward clutch 1 9 . 9 8 7 - 2 0 . 0 0 0 m m ( 0 . 7 8 6 9 - 0 . 7 8 7 4 in.) When worn or damaged
side
Thrust clearance ATF p u m p drive 0 . 3 7 - 0 . 6 5 m m ( 0 . 0 1 5 - 0 . 0 2 6 in.)
sprocket hub
P l a n e t a r y carrier 0 . 0 5 0 - 0 . 1 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 0 - 0 . 0 0 4 5 in.)
Feed p i p e O.D. Drive pulley feed 6 . 9 7 - 6 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 2 7 4 - 0 . 2 7 5 in.) 6.95 m m (0.274 in.)
pipe
Forward clutch 1 1 . 4 7 - 1 1 . 4 8 m m ( 0 . 4 5 1 6 - 0 . 4 5 2 0 in.) 11.45 m m (0.451 in.)
feed pipe
Feed p i p e b u s h i n g I.D. Drive pulley feed 7 . 0 0 0 - 7 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 2 7 5 6 - 0 . 2 7 6 2 in.) 7.030 m m (0.277 in.)
pipe
Forward clutch 1 1 . 5 0 0 - 1 1 . 5 1 8 m m ( 0 . 4 5 2 8 - 0 . 4 5 3 5 in.) 11.533 m m (0.454 in.)
feed pipe
Sealing ring g r o o v e w i d t h 2 . 0 0 - 2 . 1 0 m m ( 0 . 0 7 9 - 0 . 0 8 3 in.) 2.105 m m (0.083 in.)
22 x 28 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s C 1.15 m m (0.045 in.) When worn or damaged
(ATF p u m p d r i v e s p r o c k e t h u b ) D 1.40 m m (0.055 in.) When worn or damaged
E 1.65 m m (0.065 in.) When worn or damaged
F 1.90 m m (0.075 in.) When worn or damaged
G 2.15 m m (0.085 in.) When worn or damaged
H 2.40 m m (0.094 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont'd)
2-7
CVT and CVT Differential (cont'd)
Input shaft 25 x 31 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s A 1.05 m m (0.041 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont'd) (planetary carrier) B 1.12 m m (0.044 in.) When worn or damaged
C 1.19 m m (0.047 in.) When worn or damaged
D 1.26 m m (0.050 in.) When worn or damaged
I 1.61 m m (0.063 in.) When worn or damaged
J 1.68 m m (0.066 in.) When worn or damaged
K 1.75 m m (0.069 in.) When worn or damaged
L 1.82 m m (0.072 in.) When worn or damaged
M 1.085 m m (0.0427 in.) When worn or damaged
N 1.155 m m (0.0455 in.) When worn or damaged
0 1.225 m m (0.0482 in.) When worn or damaged
p 1.295 m m (0.0510 in.) When worn or damaged
Q 1.365 m m (0.0537 in.) When worn or damaged
R 1.435 m m (0.0565 in.) When worn or damaged
S 1.505 m m (0.0593 in.) When worn or damaged
T 1.575 m m (0.0620 in.) When worn or damaged
U 1.645 m m (0.0648 in.) When worn or damaged
V 1.715 m m (0.0675 in.) When worn or damaged
w 1.785 m m (0.0703 in.) When worn or damaged
Drive pulley Diameter of needle bearing contact Flywheel side 2 4 . 0 0 7 - 2 4 . 0 2 0 m m ( 0 . 9 4 5 - 0 . 9 4 6 in.) When worn or damaged
shaft area Forward clutch 2 4 . 0 0 7 - 2 4 . 0 2 0 m m ( 0 . 9 4 5 - 0 . 9 4 6 in.) When worn or damaged
side
I.D. A t sealing ring 2 4 . 0 0 7 - 2 4 . 0 2 0 m m ( 0 . 9 4 5 - 0 . 9 4 6 in.) When worn or damaged
Driven pulley Diameter of needle bearing contact Start clutch side 4 3 . 9 8 1 - 4 3 . 9 9 1 m m ( 1 . 7 3 1 5 - 1 . 7 3 1 9 in.) When worn or damaged
shaft area
Thrust clearance Start clutch side 0 — 0 . 1 3 m m (0—0.005 in.)
25.5 m m c o t t e r t h i c k n e s s A 2.90 m m (0.114 in.) When worn or damaged
(start c l u t c h h u b ) B 3.00 m m (0.118 in.) When worn or damaged
S t a r t c l u t c h f e e d p i p e O.D. End cover side 6 . 9 7 - 6 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 2 7 4 - 0 . 2 7 5 in.) 6.95 m m (0.274 in.)
Flywheel 8 . 9 7 - 8 . 9 8 m m ( 0 . 3 5 3 - 0 . 3 5 4 in.) 8.95 m m (0.352 in.)
housing side
D r i v e n p u l l e y s h a f t f e e d p i p e O.D. 1 1 . 4 7 - 1 1 . 4 8 m m ( 0 . 4 5 1 6 - 0 . 4 5 2 0 in.) 11.45 m m (0.451 in.)
Start clutch feed pipe bushing I.D. End cover side 7 . 0 0 0 - 7 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 2 7 5 6 - 0 . 2 7 6 2 in.) 7.030 m m (0.277 in.)
Flywheel 9 . 0 0 0 - 9 . 0 1 5 m m ( 0 . 3 5 4 - 0 . 3 5 5 in.) 9.030 m m (0.356 in.)
housing side
Driven pulley shaft feed pipe bushing 1 1 . 5 0 0 - 1 1 . 5 1 8 m m ( 0 . 4 5 2 8 - 0 . 4 5 3 5 in.) 11.533 m m (0.454 in.)
I.D.
Secondary drive gear sealing ring 2 . 5 0 0 - 2 . 6 5 0 m m ( 0 . 0 9 8 - 0 . 1 0 4 in.) 2.655 m m (0.105 in.)
groove width
S t a r t c l u t c h e n d p l a t e I.D. 8 8 . 9 0 0 - 8 8 . 9 3 5 m m ( 3 . 5 0 0 - 3 . 5 0 1 in.) When worn or damaged
2-8
Item Measurement Qualification S t a n d a r d or N e w Service Limit
Final drive shaft Secondary drive gear thrust clearance 0—0.15 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
25 x 35 m m t h r u s t s h i m t h i c k n e s s A 2.8 m m (0.110 in.) When worn or damaged
B 2.9 m m (0.114 in.) When worn or damaged
I 3.6 m m (0.142 in.) When worn or damaged
J 3.7 m m (0.146 in.) When worn or damaged
K 3.8 m m (0.150 in.) When worn or damaged
L 3.9 m m (0.154 in.) When worn or damaged
M 4.0 m m (0.157 in.) When worn or damaged
Park g e a r a n d When worn or damaged
pawl
CVT differential P i n i o n s h a f t c o n t a c t area I.D. 1 5 . 0 1 0 - 1 5 . 0 2 8 m m ( 0 . 5 9 1 - 0 . 5 9 2 in.)
carrier Clearance b e t w e e n carrier a n d p i n i o n 0 . 0 2 6 - 0 . 0 6 2 m m ( 0 . 0 0 1 - 0 . 0 0 2 in.) 0.1 m m (0.004 in.)
shaft
Driveshaft/intermediate shaft contact 2 6 . 0 2 5 - 2 6 . 0 4 5 m m ( 1 . 0 2 4 6 - 1 . 0 2 5 4 in.)
area I.D.
Clearance between carrier a n d 0 . 0 4 5 - 0 . 0 8 6 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 3 in.) 0.12 m m (0.005 in.)
driveshaft/intermediate shaft
C l e a r a n c e b e t w e e n set r i n g a n d c a r r i e r 0—0.15 m m ( 0 — 0 . 0 0 6 in.) Adjust
b e a r i n g o u t e r race
CVT differential Backlash 0 . 0 5 - 0 . 1 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 - 0 . 0 0 6 in.)
pinion gear
2-9
Steering
Steering wheel R o t a t i o n a l p l a y m e a s u r e d at o u t s i d e 0 — 1 0 m m (0—0.39 in.)
edge w i t h engine running
Initial t u r n i n g l o a d m e a s u r e d a t 3 4 N (3.5 kgf, 7.7 Ibf)
outside edge with engine running
Gearbox A n g l e o f rack g u i d e s c r e w l o o s e n e d 7±3°
f r o m locked position
Suspension
Wheel alignment Camber Front -0°03'±30'
Rear ( w i t h o u t I OS —0°45'
"C" marks on the

rear u p p e r a r m )
Rear ( w i t h "C" -0°54' + v
' 0 5
'-o»45'
marks on the
Caster Front 7°06'±1 °
Total toe-in Front 0 ± 2 m m ( 0 ± 0 . 0 8 in.)
Rear 2 + 2
-i mm (0.08 + 0 0 8
-o.o4 in.)
Front w h e e l t u r n i n g angle Inward 39°53'±2'

Outward 31°48'
(reference)
Wheel Runout Axial 0—0.7 m m (0—0.03 in.) 2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
Radial 0—0.7 m m (0—0.03 in.) 1.5 m m (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0 — 0 . 0 5 m m (0—0.002 in.)
Rear 0—0.05 m m (0—0.002 in.)
2-10
Brakes
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w | Service Limit
P a r k i n g brake Distance traveled w h e n lever pulled 8 t o 10 clicks
w i t h 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibf) o f f e r e e
Brake p e d a l Pedal h e i g h t (carpet m o v e d aside) 158 m m (6 1/4 in.)
Free p l a y 1—5 m m (1/16—3/16 in.)
Brake d i s c Thickness Front 2 0 . 9 - 2 1 . 1 m m ( 0 . 8 2 - 0 . 8 3 in.) 19.0 m m (0.75 in.)
Rear ('09 m o d e l ) 8 . 9 - 9 . 1 m m ( 0 . 3 5 - 0 . 3 6 in.) 8.0 m m (0.31 in.)
Runout 0.04 m m (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism 0.015 m m (0.0006 in.)
Brake p a d Thickness Front 9 . 5 - 1 0 . 5 m m ( 0 . 3 7 - 0 . 4 1 in.) 1.6 m m (0.06 in.)
Rear ('09 m o d e l ) 8 . 3 - 9 . 4 m m ( 0 . 3 3 - 0 . 3 7 in.) 1.6 m m (0.06 in.)
Rear b r a k e Brake d r u m I.D. 2 1 9 . 9 - 2 2 0 . 0 m m ( 8 . 6 5 7 - 8 . 6 6 1 in.) 221 m m (8.70 in.)
('06-08 m o d e l s ) Brake s h o e l i n i n g t h i c k n e s s 4.5 m m (0.18 in.) 2.0 m m (0.08 in.)
Mr Conditioning
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or N e w
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
C a p a c i t y or s y s t e m 4 0 0 - 4 5 0 g (14.1 - 1 5 . 9 oz)
R e f r i g e r a n t oil Type SE-10Y (P/N 3 8 8 9 9 - R C J - A 0 1 o r 3 8 8 9 9 - R M X - A 0 1 )
Capacity of c o m p o n e n t s Condenser 5 0 m L ( 1 2/3 fl-oz)
Evaporator 4 0 m L ( 1 1/3 fl-oz)
Each line a n d 1 0 m L ( 1 / 3 fl-oz)
hose
Receiver 1 0 m L ( 1 / 3 fl-oz)
Compressor 1 3 0 - 1 4 0 m L (4 1 / 3 - 4 2/3 fl-oz)
Compressor Field c o i l r e s i s t a n c e A t 68 °F (20 °C) 3.05 - 3 . 3 5 Q
Pulley-to-armature plate clearance 0 . 3 5 - 0 . 6 5 m m ( 0 . 0 1 4 - 0 . 0 2 6 in.)
2-11
Item Measurement Qualification Specification
DIMENSIONS Overall length 4,489 m m (176.7 in.)
Overall w i d t h 1,752 m m (69.0 in.)
Overall height 1,430 m m (56.3 in.)
Wheelbase 2,700 m m (106.3 in.)
Track Front 1,501 m m (59.1 in.)
Rear 1,529 m m (60.2 in.)
Seating capacity Five (5)
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle W e i g h t Rating (GVWR) 1,720 kg (3,792 lbs)
ENGINE Type W a t e r - c o o l e d , 4-stroke S O H C i-VTEC g a s o l i n e e n g i n e
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 73.0 x 80.0 m m (2.87 x 3.15 in.)
3
Displacement 1,339 c m ( m L ) (82 c u in.)
Compression ratio 10.8
Valve train C h a i n d r i v e n , S O H C i-VTEC 2 v a l v e s per c y l i n d e r
Lubrication system Forced, w e t s u m p , w i t h trochoid p u m p
Fuel r e q u i r e d R e g u l a r U N L E A D E D g a s o l i n e w i t h 87 P u m p O c t a n e N u m b e r o r
higher
STARTER Type Gear r e d u c t i o n
Normal output 1.0 k W
Normal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 s e c o n d s
D i r e c t i o n OT r o t a t i o n C o u n t e r c l o c k w i s e as v i e w e d f i u m u r i v e e n d
IMA MOTOR Type DC b r u s h l e s s
I M A BATTERY Type 7.2 V N i - M H
Number 22
Output 158.4 V
IMA MOTOR Type Motor Control Module (MCM)
CONTROLLER
CVT Type Electronically-controlled continuously variable transmission,
m u l t i plates w e t s u m p , h y d r a u l i c
Primary reduction D i r e c t 1:1
Gear ratio Low—High 2.526-0.421
Reverse 4.508-1.874
Final r e d u c t i o n Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 3.938
2-12
Item Measurement Qualification Specification,
STEERING Type E l e c t r i c a l p o w e r - a s s i s t e d rack a n d p i n i o n
O v e r a l l ratio 13.52
T u r n s , lock-to-lock 2.71
Steering wheel diameter 3 6 0 m m (14.2 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front I n d e p e n d e n t M a c P h e r s o n s t r u t w i t h stabilizer, c o i l s p r i n g
Rear I n d e p e n d e n t d o u b l e w i s h b o n e w i t h s t a b i l i z e r , coil s p r i n g
Shock absorber F r o n t a n d rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TIRES Size F r o n t a n d rear P195/65R15 89S
Spare T125/70D15 95M
WHEEL Camber Front -0°03'
ALIGNMENT Rear ( w i t h o u t - 1 °39'
" C " marks on the
Rear ( w i t h " C " -0°54'
marks on the
Caster Front 7 °06'
Total toe-in Front 0 m m (0 in.)
Rear 2 m m (0.08 in.)
Front wheel t u r n i n g angle Inward 39°53'
Outward 31°48'
(reference)
BRAKES T y p e of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting d r u m
('06-08 m o d e l s )
Rear P o w e r - a s s i s t e d s e l f - a d j u s t i n g s o l i d disc
('09 m o d e l )
T y p e of p a r k i n g b r a k e M e c h a n i c a l a c t u a t i n g , rear w h e e l s
Pad f r i c t i o n s u r f a c e area Front 2
41.5 c m (6.43 sq i n . ) x 2
2
Rear ('09 m o d e l ) 20.6 c m (3.19 sq i n . ) x 2
S h o e f r i c t i o n s u r f a c e area Rear 2
73.9 c m (11.45 s q i n . ) x 2
('06-08 m o d e l s )
AIR Compressor Type Scroll
CONDITIONING Capacity Belt: 7 5 m L (4.58 c u in.)/rev.
M o t o r : 15 m L (0.92 c u in.)/rev.
M a x i m u m speed Belt: 10,000 r p m
M o t o r : 5,000 r p m
Lubricant 130 m L (4 1/3 fl-oz)
capacity
Lubricant type SE-10Y
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Radial
Motor input 220 W / 1 2 V
Speed control Infinitely variable
3
Maximum 470 m (16,571 cu ft)/h
capacity
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type D r y , s i n g l e p l a t e , P o l y - V belt d r i v e
Electrical p o w e r 42 W m a x i m u m at 12 V
c o n s u m p t i o n at
68 °F (20 °C)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Quantity 4 0 0 - 4 5 0 g ( 1 4 . 1 - 1 5 . 9 oz)
(cont'd)
2-13
' Item Measurement Qualification Specification
ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V - 3 5 A h / 2 0 HR (12 V - 2 8 A h / 5 HR)
RATINGS Fuses Under-hood 100 A , 80 A , 7 0 A , 50 A , 40 A , 30 A , 20 A , 15 A , 10 A , 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
{'06-07 m o d e l s )
Under-hood 100 A , 7 0 A , 60 A , 50 A , 40 A , 30 A , 20 A , 15 A , 10 A , 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
('08-09 m o d e l s )
Under-dash 30 A , 20 A , 15 A , 10 A , 7.5 A
fuse/relay box
Auxiliary under- 15 A , 10 A , 7.5 A
hood fuse/relay
box
Light bulbs Headlight 12 V - 6 0 W ( H B 3 )
high beam
Headlight 12 V - 5 1 W ( H B 4 )
low beam
Front side 12 V - 2 1 / 5 W
marker/parking/
t u r n signal lights
Side t u r n signal LED
lights
Rear t u r n s i g n a l 12V-21 W
lights
Rear s i d e m a r k e r 12V-5W
lights
Brake/taillights 12 V - 2 1 / 5 W
Inner t a i l l i g h t 12V-5W
High m o u n t LED
brake light
Back-up lights 12V-21 W
License plate 12 V - 5 W
lights
Front individual 12V-8W
m a p lights
Ceiling light 12 V - 8 W
Gauge lights LED
Indicator lights LED
Trunk light 12V-5W
Dash lights 12 V - 0 . 8 4 W
Brightness
controller and
o d o m e t e r select/
reset s w i t c h l i g h t
Hazard w a r n i n g 12 V - 0 . 5 6 W
switch light
Power w i n d o w LED
switches
Power mirror LED
switch light
Washer reservoir Capacity 2.5 L (2.6 U S qt)
(USA models)
Capacity 4.5 L (4.8 U S q t )
(Canada m o d e l s )
2 - 1 4
Body Specifications
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids

Maintenance Minder
General Information
Maintenance Main Items
Maintenance Sub Items
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of the lubrication points and the type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and the
various work procedures (such as Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each
section.
Application Lubricant or Fluid

A Engine Honda Motor Oil:
American Honda P/N 08798-9022 (0W-20)
Honda Canada P/N 08798-8023C (0W-20)
Look for the API certification seal on the oil container. Make sure
it says "For Gasoline Engines/'
SAE viscosity: See chart.
B CVT Honda CVTF: P/N 08200-9006
Always use Honda CVTF. Using a non-Honda CVTF can affect
shift quality.
C Brake system (including ABS/VSA lines) Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid: P/N 08798-9008
Always use Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Honda brake
fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the life of the system.
D Caliper piston boots and seals, piston pins Honda Silicone Grease: P/N 08C30-B0234M
and boots
E Brake servo unit clevis pin Multipurpose Grease
F Battery terminals
G Fuel fill door
H Trunk hinges
1 Hood hinges and hood latch
J Rear brake shoe linkage Molykote 44MA
K Air conditioning compressor Compressor Oil: SE-10Y (P/N 38899-RCJ-A01 or 38899-RMX-
A01) for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
L Cooling system Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2: P/N OL999-9001
API C E R T I F I C A T I O N S E A L R e c o m m e n d e d E n g i n e Oil
E n g i n e oil viscosity f o r a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e ranges
3-2
Maintenance Minder
General Information
Information Display
The maintenance minder is an important feature of the information display. Based on engine and transmission
operating conditions, the Civic Hybrid's onboard computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine oil and the CVT
fluid life. The system also displays the remaining engine oil life along w i t h the code for other scheduled maintenance
items needing service.
MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR INFORMATION DISPLAY
Driver's Side Dashboard:
i mph km/h
0
4
If
SEL/RESET BUTTON
3-4
Service Information 3. W h e n the ignition switch is ON (II), and the
remaining engine oil life is 1 % to 5 %, the message
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is s h o w n as a "SERVICE" (A) is displayed along w i t h engine o i l
percentage on the information display. To see the life and the same maintenance item code(s).
current engine oil life, turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), then push and release the SEL/RESET
button repeatedly until the engine oil life displays.
SBFMGEOLUFE%
C 0
OIlUFEVo
o n
O u
4 . W h e n the ignition switch is ON (II), and the

remaining oil life is 0 %, the engine oil life indicator
(A) blinks. Pressing the SEL/RESET button cancels
the display, but the maintenance minder indicator
stays on.
2. When the ignition switch is ON (II), and the
remaining engine oil life is 6 % to 15 %, the
remaining engine oil life (A) and other scheduled
SERVICE OIL LIFE %
maintenance item(s) needing service are displayed. A 0 n
$
The maintenance minder indicator (B) also comes
on w h e n the engine oil life is 15 % or less. To
cancel the display and the indicator, press the SEL/
RESET button.
• Complete list of maintenance main items (C)

(see page 3-7).
• Complete list of maintenance sub items (D) 5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the engine
(see page 3-8). oil life indicator shows a negative mileage, for
example "—10," on the display. If the negative
mileage is between 0 and —9, the indicator is
displayed for only a f e w seconds when the ignition
OILUFE% switch is turned to ON (II). The negative mileage
remains displayed after the vehicle is driven more
{B C 3 O than 10 miles (for USA models) or 10 km (for
Canada models) after 0 % oil life is reached, and
u the display cannot be canceled. This means the
C D
indicated maintenance item(s) should have been
done more than 10 miles (or 10 km) ago.
f
B seiwce miles
A
s
(cont'd)
3-5
Maintenance Minder
General Information (cont'd)
Resetting the Maintenance Information Resetting Individual Maintenance Items

Display
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
NOTE; data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
• The vehicle m u s t be stopped to reset the display.
• If a required service is done and the display is not 2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
reset, or if the maintenance display is reset w i t h o u t
doing the service, the system will not show the 3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
proper maintenance t i m i n g . This can lead to serious and the powertarain control module (PCM). If It
mechanical problems because there will be no doesn't communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
accurate record of w h e n the required maintenance is (see page 11-213).'
needed.
• The engine oil life and the maintenance Item(s) can 4. Select GAUGES In the BODY ELECTRICAL w i t h the
be Independently reset w i t h the HDS. HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5. Select ADJUSTMENT In the GAUGES w i t h the HDS.
2. Push and release the SEL/RESET button repeatedly 6. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
until the engine oil life indicator is displayed. w i t h the HDS.
3. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for about 7. Select RESET In the SERVICE REMINDER w i t h the
10 seconds. The engine oil life Indicator and the HDS.
maintenance Item code(s) w i l l blink, then release
the button. 8. Select the Individual maintenance Item you wish to
reset.
NOTE; If you are resetting the display w h e n the
engine oil life Is more than 15 %, make sure any
maintenance Item(s) requiring service are done
before resetting the display.
4. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for another

5 seconds. The maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to " 1 0 0 " .
OILUFE%
1UU
3 - 6
Maintenance Main Items
If the message "SERVICE" does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every
year.
NOTE;
• Replace the brake fluid every 3 years (independent of the maintenance messages in the information display).
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
• Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3, only if they are noisy.
Symbol Maintenance Main Items

A Replace engine oil (see page 8-10).
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 3.0 L (3.2 US qt).
B Replace engine oil and oil filter (see page 8-11).
Engine oil capacity w i t h oil filter: 3.2 L (3.4 US qt).
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-3).
• Check pads and discs for wear (thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts.
• Check the wheel cylinder for leaks.
• Check the brake linings for cracking, glazing, wear, or contamination.
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7).
Check the number of clicks (8 to 10) w h e n the parking brake lever is pulled with 196 N (20 kgf, 44 Ibf)
of force.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gearbox boots (see page 17-5).
• Check steering linkage.
• Check boots for damage and leaking grease.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3).
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4).
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including ABS/VSA lines (see page 19-34).
Check the master cylinder and ABS/VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels, condition of fluid, and check for leaks.
• Engine coolant (see page 10-6)
• CVT fluid (CVTF) (see page 14-175)
• Brake fluid (see page 19-95)
• Windshield washer fluid
Inspect exhaust system* (see page 9-8).
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspect fuel lines* (see page 11-352) and connections* (see page 11-354).
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) will
not void the customer's emissions warranties. However, Honda recommends that all maintenance services be done at
the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
3-7
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Sub Items
Number Maintenance Sub Items
1 Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condition.
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
2 Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-371).
Replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km), if the vehicle is driven primarily in dusty conditions.
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-99).
• If the vehicle is driven mostly in areas that have high concentrations of dust, pollen, or soot in the air,
replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
• Replace the filter whenever airflow f r o m the heating and air conditioning system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 10-9).
Look for cracks and damage, then check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator.
3 Replace CVT fluid (see page 14-176).
Capacity: 2.8 L (3.0 US qt); use Honda CVTF.
4 Replace spark plugs (see page 4-20).
Use ILFR6J-11K (NGK) or SKJ20HPR-L11 (DENSO).
Inspect valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-10).
Intake: 0.15—0.19 m m (0.006—0.007 in.), Exhaust: 0.24—0.28 m m (0.009—0.011 in.)
5 Replace engine coolant (see page 10-6).
Capacity (including the reservoir): 4.75 L (1.25 US gal); use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type
2. . ..
3-8
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
above the glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, seat belt buckle tensioners in the front seat
necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the
ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the Ignition switch Is turned to LOCK (0); otherwise, the
system may fail In a collision, or the airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are Identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
c o l u m n , front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, In the front seats,
In the roof side, and around the floor, Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
IMA components are located In this area. The IMA is a high-voltage system. The high voltage cables and their covers
are Identified by orange coloring. The safety labels are attached to high voltage and other related parts (see page 1-7).
You must be familiar w i t h the IMA system before w o r k i n g around it. Make sure you have read the Service Precautions
Engine Electrical
Starting System
Component Location Index ... 4-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index 4-3
Circuit Diagram 4-4
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting ... 4-5
Starter Performance Test 4-9
Starter Removal and Installation 4-10
Starter Overhaul 4-12
Ignition System
Component Location Index ... 4-17
Circuit Diagram 4-18
Ignition Timing Inspection 4-19
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation 4-20
Spark Plug Inspection 4-20
Charging System
Refer to the IMA Section 12
Cruise Control
Component Location Index ......................................... 4-22
Cruise Control Input Test 4-26
* Cruise Control Combination Switch
Test/Replacement 4-28
Starting System
Component Location Index
Overhaul, page 4-12
4-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Engine does not start 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
(does not crank) 2. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
3 Test the 12 V battery for a low state of charge (see page
22-61).
4. Check the starter (see page 4-5).
5. Check the starter cut relay (see page 22-64).
6. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-211).
7. Check the ignition switch or wire (see page 22-66).
Engine cranks, but does 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Weak or fouled spark
not start 2. Check for IMMOBI status and function (see page plugs
22-295).
3. Check the fuel pressure:
• '06 model (see page 11-350)
• '07-09 models (see page 11-350)
4. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-363).
5. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-352).
6. Check the throttle body (see page 11 -369).
7. Check for low engine compression (see page 6-6).
8. Check for a damaged or broken cam chain.
9. Do the powertrain control module (PCM) reset in the
PGM-FI INSPECTION menu to cancel ALL INJECTORS
STOP w i t h the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS).
Engine is hard to start 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). Weak or fouled spark
2. Check the fuel pressure: plugs
• '06 model (see page 11-350)
• '07-09 models (see page 11-350)
3. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-363).
4. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-352).
Engine cranks slowly 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the 12 V battery for a low state of charge (see page
22-61).
3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-5).
4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.
5. Check for excessive drag in the transmission.
4-3
Starting System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH

12 V
BATTERY
No. 1(100 A) No, 2 (50 A) 3 /BAT"
ST HOT in START (I
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 23 (7.5 A) Q15
STARTER
CUT
RELAY
(ST CUT)
BLK/RED BLU/BLK
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH RANGE SWITCH
-4
Starter System Circuit Tr©yfoleshooting
Special Tools Required 6. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI
Alternator, Regulator, Battery & Starter tester OTC3131 INSPECTION menu w i t h the HDS.
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program 888-424-6857 7. Turn the IMA battery module switch OFF (see page
12-4).
NOTE:
• Air temperature must be between 59 and 100 °F 8. Set the parking brake, then w i t h the shift lever in N
(15 and 38 °C) during this procedure. or P, turn the ignition switch to START (III).
• After the inspection, you must reset the powertrain
control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM will Does the starter crank the engine normally?
continue to stop the fuel injectors from operating.
• The 12 V battery must be in good condition and fully Y E S — T h e starting system is OK. Go to step 33.
charged.
NO—Go to step 9.
1. Connect the alternator, regulator, battery & starter
tester (OTC3131) to the battery as shown. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: The probe is not used for battery testing. 10. Check the 12 V battery condition (see page 22-61).
Check electrical connections at the battery, the
negative battery cable to body, the engine ground
cables, and the starter for looseness and corrosion.
Then try starting the engine again.
Does the starter crank the engine?
YES—Repairing the loose connection corrected the

problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 33.
NO—Based on the following symptoms, take the

appropriate action: •
• If the starter does not crank the engine at all, go

to step 11.
• If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
2. Do the BATTERY TEST. slowly, go to step 3 1 .
• If the starter does not disengage f r o m the
Does the display indicate GOOD or GOOD, LOW flywheel ring gear when you release the key,
CHARGE? replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it,
and check for the following:
Y E S — T h e battery is OK. Go to step 3. - Starter solenoid and switch malfunction
- Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning
NO—If the display indicates BAD BATTERY, replace clutch
the battery, then retest. If the display indicates
CHARGE & RETEST, charge the battery, then retest.

data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
5. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle

and the PCM. If it does not communicate,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
(cont'd)
4-5
Starting System
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370). 15. Remove the starter cut relay f r o m the under-dash
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-64).
12. Remove the Intake air duct (see step 8 on page 5-3).
Is the relay OK?
13. Make sure the shift lever Is In N or P, and set the
parking brake, then disconnect the S terminal Y§=S—Goto step 16.
connector (A) f r o m the starter. Connect a j u m p e r
w i r e f r o m the battery positive terminal to the S NO—Replace the starter cut relay. H
terminal.
16. Check the ignition switch (see page 22-66).
Is the ignition switch OK?
Y E S — G o t o step 17.
NO—Replace the ignition switch. •
17. Measure the voltage between starter cut relay 4P

socket terminal No. 2 and body ground w i t h the
ignition switch in START (III).
s > I A R T E R C U T H E L A Y €P S O C K E T
1
2
Does the starter crank the engine? 4 3
Y E S — G o to step 14. ,
NO—Remove the starter, and repair or replace It as

necessary. •
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
14. Check the No. 23 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is there battery voltage?
Is the fuse OK?
Y E S — G o to step 18.
YES—Reinstall the No. 23 (7.5 A) fuse In the under-
dash fuse/relay box. Go to step 15. NO—Repair open In the wire between the under-
dash fuse/relay box and the ignition switch. If the
NO—Replace the fuse. If the fuse continues to blow, wire Is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/relay
locate and repair the short In the circuit between box.B
the under-dash fuse/relay box and the PCM. 11
18. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4-6
19. Check for continuity between starter cut relay 4P 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
23. Remove the j u m p e r wire.
STARTER C U T RELAY 4P SOCKET
24. Measure the voltage between starter cut relay 4P
1 socket terminal No. 3 and body ground w i t h the
ignition switch in START (III).
2
4 3 STARTER C U T RELAY 4P SOCKET
1
2
Is there continuity?
YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between Terminal side of female terminals
the under-dash fuse/relay box and the starter. •
NO—Go to step 20. Is there battery voltage?
20. Connect the S terminal connector to the S terminal. Y E S — G o t o step 25.
21. Connect the starter cut relay 4P socket terminals NO—Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box. •
No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire, and turn the
ignition switch to START (III). 25. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
S T A R T E R C U T R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
26. Reinstall the starter cut relay.
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and j u m p the

SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the ignition switch
1 JUMPER to LOCK (0).
WIRE '
2
NOTE: This must be done to protect the PCM f r o m
4 3 damage.
28. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
Terminal side of f e m a l e terminals
Does the starter crank the engine?
YES—Go to step 22.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the under-

dash fuse/relay box and the starter. •
(cont'd)
4-7
Starting System
Starter System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
29. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 3 1 . Do the STARTING TEST with the alternator,
terminal A12 and body g r o u n d w i t h the ignition regulator, battery & starter tester.
switch in START (III).
NOTE: The probe is used for starter testing.
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
S T C (WHT) OTC3131
14 | 5 |6 |7 8 | 9|
10 12 13|14|15J16 17 18 19
20 21 / 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 V 33 34 35
13613T 38139 140 L / | 4 2 43|44|
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the under-

dash fuse/relay box and PCM connector terminal
A12. If the wire is OK, replace the under-dash fuse/
relay b o x . B
Does the display indicate cranking voltage greater
30. Measure the voltage between PCM connector than or equal to 8.5 V and is the current draw less
terminal A7 and body g r o u n d w i t h the ignition than or equal to 350 A?
switch in START (III).
S T S (LT B L U ) NO—Replace the starter, or remove and

disassemble it, and check for these problems: •
\/\/ / \ 4 I 5 I6 I 7 8 |9|
• Drag in the starter armature
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 23 24 25 • Shorted armature w i n d i n g
26 27 28 2 9 [ / l 3 1 \ / 33 34 35 • Excessive drag in the engine
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44| • Open circuit in starter armature commutator
segments
• Excessively w o r n starter brushes
• Open circuit in the starter brushes
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals • Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
• Faulty overrunning clutch
Y E S — U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest

software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
g o o d PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). •
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the under-

dash fuse/relay box and PCM connector terminal
A7.B
4-8
Starter Performance Test
32. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and 1. Disconnect the S terminal connector f r o m the
the flywheel ring gear for damage. Replace any starter.
damaged parts.
2. Make the connection for this test using the thickest
33. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) in the PGM-FI (gauge) wire possible (preferably the same gauge
INSPECTION menu to cancel ALL INJECTORS as used on the vehicle).
STOP w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave
34. Turn the IMA battery module switch ON (see page the battery connected for more than 5 seconds.
12-4).
35. If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays no

segment, start the engine, and hold it between
3,500 r p m and 4,000 rpm without load (in N or P)
until the BAT displays at least three segments.
36. Do the start clutch pressure control calibration

procedures (see page 14-172).
© e
3. Connect the battery as s h o w n , and check for

continuity between the B terminal and the starter
body. If there is continuity, it is working properly.
4. Disconnect the battery f r o m the starter body as

s h o w n , and check for continuity between the B
terminal and the starter body. If there is no
continuity, it is working properly.
4-9
Starting System
Starter Performance Test (cont'd) Starter Removal and Installation
5. Remove the starter (see page 4-10). Removal
6. Clamp the starter f i r m l y in a vise. 1. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-63).
7. Connect the starter to the battery as s h o w n , and 2. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370).
confirm that the motor runs.
3. Remove the intake air duct (see step 8 on page 5-3).
4. Disconnect the positive starter cable (A) and the S

terminal connector (B) f r o m the starter, and remove
the upper radiator hose bracket (C).
8. If the electric current meets the specification w h e n

the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is
working properly.
Specification
Electric Current: 80 A or less
5. Remove the t w o bolts holding the starter, then

remove the starter.
4-10
/ - + I
• ENGINE I
i. > j
Installation 3. Install the intake air duct (see step 51 on page 5-20).
1. Install the starter, then tighten the mounting bolts. 4. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370).
6 M 1.0 m m
10 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 ibf-ft) 5. Do the battery installation procedure (see page
22-63).
6. Turn the IMA battery module switch OFF (see page

12-4).
7. Start the engine to make sure the starter works

properly.
8. Turn the IMA battery module switch ON (see page

12-4).

segments, start the engine, and hold it between
3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in N or P)
2. Connect the positive starter cable (A) and the S

terminal connector (B) to the starter, and install the
upper radiator hose bracket (C). Make sure the .
crimped side of the ring terminal faces away f r o m
the starter when you connect it.
4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul
4-12
Armature Inspection and Test 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter Is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
1. Remove the starter (see page 4-10).
Commutator Diameter ..
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning Standard (Mew): 28.0-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in.)
of this procedure. Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage f r o m

contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
6. Measure the commutator (A) runout.
• If the commutator runout is w i t h i n the service

limit, check the commutator for carbon dust or
4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is brass chips between the segments.
dirty or burnt, resurface it w i t h an emery cloth or a • If the commutator runout is not within the service
lathe to the specifications in step 5, or recondition limit, replace the armature.
w i t h # 500 or # 600 sandpaper (B).
Commutator Runout
NOTE: Use plastic protectors on vice jaws to Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
prevent damaging the armature. Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
(cont'd)
4-13
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), 9. Place t h e armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
undercut the mica w i t h a hacksaw blade to the Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the c o m m u t a t o r segments. The undercut should the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (D). the armature.
Commutator Mica Depth

Standard (New); 0.40—0.50 mm (0.016—0.020 In.)
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
10. Use an ohmmeter to check for continuity between

the commutator (A) and the armature coil core (B),
and between the commutator and the armature
8. Use an o h m m e t e r t o check for continuity between shaft (C). If there is continuity, replace the armature.
the segments of the commutator. If there is an
open circuit between any segments, replace the
armature.
4-14
Starter Brush Inspection Planetary Gear Inspection
11. Measure the brush length. If it is not w i t h i n the 13. Check the planetary gears (A) and the internal ring
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. gear (B). Replace t h e m if they are w o r n or damaged.
Brush Length
Standard {New): 11.1-11.5 mm ( 0 . 4 4 - 0 . 4 5 In.)
Service Limit; 4.3 mm (i.17 in.)
Starter Brush Holder Test
12. Check for continuity between the ( + ) brushes (A)

and the (—) brushes (B). If there is continuity,
replace the brush holder assembly.
(cont'd)
4-15
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)

Overrunning Clutch Inspection Starter Reassembly
14. Holding the drive gear (A), turn the gear shaft (B) 17. Install the brush into the brush holder, and set the
clockwise. Check that the drive gear comes out to armature (A) in the brush holder (B).
the other end. If the drive gear does not move
smoothly, replace the gear cover assembly. NOTE: To seat the new brushes, slip a strip of # 500
or # 600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between
B
the commutator and the each brush, and smoothly
rotate the armature. The contact surface of the
brushes will be sanded to the same contour as the
commutator.
15. Holding the drive gear, turn the gear shaft

counterclockwise. The gear shaft should rotate
freely. If the gear shaft does not rotate smoothly,
replace the gear cover assembly.
16. If the drive gear is w o r n or damaged, replace the

overrunning clutch assembly; the gear is not B
available separately. Check the condition of the
flywheel ring gear. Replace it if the starter drive 18. While squeezing a spring (C), insert it in the hole on
gear teeth are damaged. the brush holder, and push it until it bottoms.
Repeat this for the other three springs (D, E, and F).
19. Install the armature and the brush holder assembly

into the housing.
NOTE: Make sure the armature stays in the holder.
4-16
ignition System
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
SPARK PLUG IGNITION COIL

I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 4-20 Ignition T i m i n g I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 4-19
R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 4-20
4-17
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram
4-18
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 9. A i m the light toward the pointer (A) on the cam
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). chain case. Check the ignition t i m i n g under a no
load condition (headlights, blower fan, rear w i n d o w
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle Ignition Timing

and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does 1 0 ± 2 ° BTDC (RED mark (B)) at idle in N or P
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-213).
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,

diagnose and repair the cause before continuing
w i t h this test.
5. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

3,000 rpm with no load (in N or P) until the radiator
fan comes on, then let it idle.
6. Check the idle speed (see page 11-332).
7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
8. Connect the t i m i n g light to the exhaust side No. 1 10. If the ignition t i m i n g differs f r o m the specification,
ignition coil harness. check the cam t i m i n g . If the cam timing is OK,
update the PCM if it does not have the latest
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
system works properly, and the PCM was
substituted, replace the original PCM (see page
11-238).
11. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
4-19
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the engine cover (see step 6 on page 5-3). 1. Remove the spark plugs, then inspect the
electrodes and the ceramic insulator.
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors, then
remove the intake side ignition coils (A) and the • Burned or w o r n electrodes may be caused by
exhaust side ignition coils (B). these conditions:
- Advanced ignition t i m i n g
1
6 x 1.0 m m
- Loose spark plug
10 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
- Plug heat range too hot
- Insufficient cooling
• Fouled plugs may be caused by these conditions:

- Retarded ignition t i m i n g
- Oil in combustion chamber
- Incorrect spark plug gap
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
W o r n or d e f o r m e d
electrodes
• Improper gap
• Oil-fouling
• Carbon deposits
Damaged
• Cracked center
gasket
electrode insulator
Cracked
insulator
3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of
removal.
2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,

clean the electrode w i t h a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
• Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this will damage the electrode.
• W h e n using a sandblaster spark plug cleaner, do
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.
4-20
3. Do not adjust the gap of iridium tip plugs (A);
replace the spark plug if the gap is out of
specification.
Electrode Gap
Standard (New): 1.0-1.1 mm (0.039-0.043 in.)
4. Replace the plug at the specified interval or if the

center electrode is rounded (A). Use only the spark
plugs listed.
Spark Hugs: ILFR6J-11K (NGK)

SK20HPR-L11 (DENSO)
5. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to

the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head, finger-tight. Torque t h e m to 18 N-m
(1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibfft).
Cruise Control
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR
Test, page 22-168

Pedal H e i g h t A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 19-6
Test, p a g e 14-211
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-212
4-22
-Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Cruise control cannot be Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs
set (see page 22-6).
2. Check the No. 12 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box, and the No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-26).
4. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-28).
Cruise control can be se , 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DT C? Faulty gauge control
but the cruise main (see page 22-6). module (TACH)
indicator does not come 2. Do the gauge control module (TACH) self-diagnostic
on function procedure (see page 22-223).
4. Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Faulty gauge control
but the cruise control (see page 22-6). module (TACH)
indicator does not come 2. Do the gauge control module (TACH) self-diagnostic
on function procedure (see page 22-223).
Test the cruise control indicator signal input.
Vehicle does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Open circuit, loose or
accelerate accordingly (see page 22-6). disconnected terminal:
when the resume/accel 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-26). ORN
button is pressed Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input.
4-28).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs • Short to power on
cancel w h e n the brake (see page 22-6). the BRN wire
pedal is pressed 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-26). • Faulty brake pedal
Test the brake pedal position switch signal input. position switch
3. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-168).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Short to ground on the
cancel w h e n the cruise (see page 22-6). YEL wire
control main button is 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-26).
pressed Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
4-28).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs Open circuit, loose or
, cancel w h e n the cancel (see page 22-6). disconnected
button is pressed 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-26). terminals: LTGRN or
Test the cruise control cancel switch signal input. ORN
• 4-28).
(cont'd)
4-2
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3) and body DTCs • Faulty brake pedal
resume w h e n the (see page 22-6). position switch
resume/accel button is 2. Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment • Open circuit, loose or
pressed (with the cruise (see page 19-6). disconnected
control main button 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-26). terminals: ORN wire
pressed on, and set Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal Input.
speed temporarily Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
canceled by pressing the 4. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
brake pedal) 4-28).
4-24
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
CPU
1
CRUISE WARNING
11
CONTROL DRIVER F-CAN
DIMMING CIRCUIT TRANSCEIVER
CIRCUIT
TRANS- OUTPUT SHAFT

MISSION (COUNTERSHAFT)
RANGE SPEED SENSOR
SWITCH
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (TACH) THROTTLE BODY TP SENSOR A/B
4
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Input Test
NOTE: Always make sure that y o u have the latest Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) software.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does not
communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs (see page 11-3).
5. Do the f o l l o w i n g tests w h i l e monitoring parameters In the PGM-FI DATA LIST w i t h the. HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control Inputs,
flex the circuit wires, and note if any of the test results change.
Signal to be tested Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause If result Is not obtained
Brake pedal Brake pedal pressed, CRUISE BRAKE SW ° Faulty brake pedal position switch
position then released should indicate OFF • Blown No. 3 (10 A) fuse in the under-
switch signal w h e n the brake pedal is dash fuse/relay box
pressed and ON w h e n • An open in the wire between the PCM
the brake pedal is and the brake pedal position switch
released. • A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the brake pedal position switch
Transmission Shift lever in D and S SHIFT/CLUTCH SW • Faulty transmission range switch
range switch should Indicate ON in P, • An open in the wire between the PCM
signal R, N, and L a n d OFF in and the transmission range switch
DandS. • A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
Cruise control Cruise control main CRUISE MASTER • Faulty cruise control main switch
main switch button pressed and (MAIN) SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
signal released indicate ON w h e n the control module (TACH) and the cruise
cruise control main control main switch
button is pressed and • A wire shorted to ground between the
OFF w h e n the cruise gauge control module (TACH) and the
control main button is cruise control main switch
released.
Set switch Set/decel button CRUISE SET SW ° Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released should Indicate ON • An open in the wire between the gauge
w h e n the set/decel control module (TACH) and the cruise
button Is pressed and control combination switch
OFF w h e n the set/decel • A wire shorted to ground between the
button Is released. gauge control module (TACH) and the
cruise control combination switch
4-26
Signal to be tested Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Resume Resume/accel button CRUISE RESUME SW @
Faulty cruise control combination switch
switch signal pressed and released should indicate ON 9
An open in the w i r e between the gauge
w h e n the resume/accel control module (TACH) and the cruise
button is pressed and control combination switch
OFF when the resume/ • A wire shorted to ground between the
accel button is released. gauge control module (TACH) and the
Cancel switch Cancel button CRUISE CANCEL SW • Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released should indicate ON 8
An open in the wire between the gauge
w h e n the cancel button control module (TACH) and the cruise
is pressed and OFF control combination switch
when the cancel button • A wire shorted to ground between the
is released. gauge control module (TACH) and the
Cruise control Start the engine, CRUISE INDICATOR Faulty gauge control module (TACH)
indicator press the cruise should indicate ON
signal control main switch when the cruise control
on, and drive the is set and OFF when
vehicle above the cruise control is
25 mph (40 km/h), canceled.
w i t h the cruise
control set and
cancel the cruise
control.
4-27
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement
S R S components are located In this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
S R S component locations (see page 24-11) and the cruise control combination switch position
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before according to the table.
doing repairs or service.
• If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-184). the cruise control combination switch failure
occurred on the cruise control input test, check
2. Remove the steering wheel trim (see page 17-6). and repair the wire harness on the switch circuit.
• If there is no continuity in one or more positions,
replace the switch.
W i r e side of
female terminals
3. Remove the combination switch (A).
\ ^ Terminal
6 7 3 4 5
Position \ ^
Cruise control
m a i n s w i t c h (ON) O- -O
Cruise control
main s w i t c h (OFF)
Set/decel
(PRESSED) O -O
Resume/accel r\
(PRESSED) KJ
r\
Cancel
(PRESSED)
- o
4-28
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (if engine maintenance is required)
necessary to safely service the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the
contents page include or are located near SRS components. Servicing; disassembling, or replacing these items
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M (if engine maintenance is required)
You must be familiar w i t h the IMA system before working around it. Make sure you have read the Service Precautions
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Special Tools 5-2
Engine Removal 5-3
Engine Installation * 5-12
Engine Mount Replacement 5-22
Cylinder Head .. 6-1

Engine Block ..... 7-1
Engine Lubrication 8-1
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System 9-1
Engine Assembly
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty
® 07AAK-SNAA120 Universal Lifting Eyelet 2
5-2
Engine Removal
Special Tools Required' 6. Remove the engine cover.
• Universal lifting eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T1256 *
• 2006 Civic engine hanger VSB02C000025 *
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 *
• : These special tools are available through Honda
Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• To avoid damaging wire and terminals, unplug the
wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring,
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support

rod in the lower hole). 7. Remove the resonator (see page 11-371).
8. Remove the intake air duct
9. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370).
2. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-63).
3. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel

(see page 20-140).
4. Turn the IMA battery module switch OFF (see page

12-4).
5. Relieve the fuel pressure, '06 model (see page

11-345), '07-09 models (see page 11-347).
(cont'd)
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
10. Disconnect the positive starter cable (A), then 12.. Disconnect the PCM connectors (A).
remove the harness clamp (B) and the g r o u n d
cable (C).
13. Disconnect the engine wire harness connectors (A),

11. Remove the powertrain control module (PCM) then remove the harness clamp (B) on the left side
cover (A), then remove the bolts (B). of the engine compartment.
B . A
5-4
14. Disconnect the vacuum hose. 17. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-10).
18. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove

the radiator cap.
19. Raise the vehicle on the lift.
20. Remove the front wheels.
21. Remove the front undercover (A) and the splash

shield (B).
15. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP)

canister purge valve connector (A), then remove
the harness clamp (B).
22. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
23. Drain the CVT fluid (CVTF) (see page 14-176).
24. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10).
16. Disconnect the purge joint f r o m the bracket (C), 25. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
then remove the fuel pipe nut (D) and the EVAP
canister purge valve bracket bolts (E). 26. Remove the radiator (see page 10-12).
(cont'd)
S"*§
Engine Assembly
27. Remove the A/C compressor, then disconnect the 30. Make reference marks (A) across the steering joint
A/C compressor clutch connector (A) w i t h o u t and the steering gearbox pinion shaft. Remove the
disconnecting the A/C hoses. Do not bend the A/C steering joint bolt (B), then disconnect the steering
hoses excessively. joint f r o m the steering gearbox pinion shaft (C).
NOTE: Hang the A/C compressor w i t h a rope.
28. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6).

3 1 . Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped), and
29. Remove the steering joint cover (A). discard it. The center guide is for factory assembly
use only.
5-6
32. Remove the IMA motor power cable clamps (A), 34. Disconnect the IMA motor power cable connector
then remove the bolt (B). (see page 12-3).
NOTE: If the motor power cable terminals are wet,

dry t h e m w i t h a clean t o w e l Do not use
compressed air.
33. Disconnect the water bypass hose (A) and the

heater hoses (B). 35. Remove the shift cable. Do not bend the shift cable
excessively (see page 14-203).
36. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector (A) and

the CVT Input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor
connector (B), then remove the clamp (C).
37. Remove the IMA motor power cable mounting

bolts (D).
(cont'd)
5-7
Engine Assembly
39. Remove the under-floor three w a y catalytic 45. Install the universal lifting eyelet (07AAK-SNAA
converter (TWC). 120) to the threaded hole (A) on the cylinder head
w i t h a 10 x 1.25 m m bolt (B).
40. Disconnect the front stabilizer link (see page 18-25).
41. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints

(see page 18-20).
46. Install the front leg assembly (A), the hook (B), and
42. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all the w i n g nut (C) to an A and Reds engine support
precision-finished surfaces w i t h new engine oil. Tie hanger (AAR-T1256) onto the 2006 civic engine
plastic bags over the driveshaft ends. hanger (VSB02C000025). Carefully position the
engine hanger on the vehicle, and attach the hook
43. Disconnect the steering gearbox harness to the universal lifting eyelet ID). Tighten the w i n g
connectors (A). nut by hand to lift and support the engine/IMA
motor/transmission.
NOTE: Be careful when working around the

windshield.
VSB02C000025
44. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
5-8
47. Make sure the hoist brackets are positioned 50. Loosen the m i d stiffener mounting bolts (A) on
properly. Raise the vehicle on the lift. both sides.
48. Remove the lower torque rod mounting bolts.
Replace.
51. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016)

to the front subframe by hanging the belt (A) over
49. Make the appropriate reference lines (A) at the both the front of the front subframe, then secure the belt
sides of the front subframe that line up w i t h the with its stop (B), then tighten the w i n g nut (C).
edge on the body (B).
A A
(cont'd)
5-
Engine Assembly
52. Raise the jack and line up the slots in the front 56. Attach a chain hoist (A) to the universal lifting
subframe arms w i t h the bolt holes on the jack base, eyelet (B), and the transmission hook (C). Lift the
then carefully attach t h e m w i t h four bolts. engine/IMA motor/transmission until its securely
supported by the chain hoist, and remove the
53. Remove the four bolts securing the front subframe, engine support hanger and the 2006 civic engine
and lower the front subframe. hanger.
Replace. Replace.
55. Install the universal lifting eyelet to the threaded

hole (A) on the cylinder head w i t h a 8 x 1.25 m m 57. Remove the transmission mount bracket support
bolt (B). bolt and nuts.
5-10
58. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount bracket (B).
59. Check that the engine/IMA motor/transmission is

completely free of vacuum hoses, fuel hoses,
coolant hoses, and electrical w i r i n g .
60. Slowly lower the engine/IMA motor/transmission

about 150 m m (6 in.). Check once again that all
hoses and electrical w i r i n g are disconnected and
free f r o m the engine/IMA motor/transmission, then
lower it all the w a y and support it.
61. Disconnect the chain hoist f r o m the engine/IMA

motor/transmission.
62. Raise the vehicle, and remove the engine/IMA

motor/transmission f r o m under the vehicle.
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation
Special Tools Required
• Universal lifting eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
• : These special tools are available t h r o u g h Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857
1. Install the lower torque rod bracket, then tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
74 N m
(7.5 k g f - m , 5 4 Ibf ft)
Replace.
5-12
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift, and position the 4. Install the universal lifting eyelet to the threaded
engine/IMA motor/transmission under the vehicle. hole (A) on the cylinder head with a 10 x 1.25 m m
Be sure that they are properly aligned. Carefully bolt (B).
lower the vehicle until the engine/IMA motor/
transmission is properly positioned in the engine
compartment. Make sure the vehicle is not resting
on any part of the engine/IMA motor/transmission.
3. Attach a chain hoist (A) to the universal lifting

eyelet (07AAK-SNAA120) and the transmission
hook (B). Carefully raise the engine/IMA motor/
transmission w i t h the chain hoist into place.
the w i n g nut (C) to an A and Reds engine support
hanger (AAR-T1256) onto the 2006 civic engine
hanger (VSB02C000025). Carefully position the
to the universal lifting eyelet (D). Tighten the w i n g
nut by hand to lift and support the engine/IMA
motor/transmission.
NOTE: Be careful w h e n working around the

windshield.
(cont'd)
5-13
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd!
6. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then 9. Set the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) to
loosely tighten the mounting bolts and n u t the front subframe by hanging the belt (A) over the
front of the front subframe, then secure the belt
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in w i t h its stop (B), then tighten the w i n g nut (C).
the sequence given in the f o l l o w i n g steps. Failure
to f o l l o w this sequence m a y cause excessive noise
and vibration, and reduce bushing life.
10. Line up the slots in the front subframe arms w i t h

the bolt holes on the jack base, then carefully attach
t h e m w i t h four bolts, raise the front subframe up to
the body.
11. Loosely install the new front subframe mounting

bolts.
7. Loosely tighten the transmission mount bracket
support bolt and nuts.
14 x 1.5 m m 14 x 1.5 m m
8. Remove the chain hoist and the universal lifting 103 N m 103 N m
e y e l e t then raise the vehicle on the lift. (10.5 k g f - m , (10.5 kgf-m,
7 5 . 9 Ibf-ft) * 7 5 . 9 Ibf-ft)
Replace. Replace.
5-14
12. Align the reference marks (A) w i t h the edge of the 15. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolts.
body (B), then tighten the bolts,on the front
subframe to the specified torque.
' 12x1.25 mm
6 4 IM-m
(6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
A A 17. Tighten the side engine mount bracket mounting

bolts and nut in the numbered sequence shown.
13. Remove the jack and the front subframe adapter.
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
14. Tighten the m i d stiffener mounting bolts on both
sides.
1 2 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N-m
(6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 ibf-ft)
Replace. 18. Install the ground cable (A).
(cont'd)
5-15
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
19. Tighten the transmission mount bracket support 24. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints
bolt and nuts. (see page 18-20).
25. Connect the front stabilizer links (see page 18-25).
26. Install the under-floor TWC (A); use new gaskets (B),
new self-locking nuts (C) and new bolts (D).
12x1.25 mm - 7 4 N-m
7 4 IM-m (7.5 kgf-m, 54 Ibfft)
(7.5 kgf m , 5 4 Ibfft) Replace.
20. Remove the engine support hanger, the 2006 civic

engine hanger, and the universal lifting eyelet.
22. Connect the steering gearbox harness connectors 27. Install the splash shield (A) and the front
(A). undercover (B).
23. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft,

then install the driveshafts (see page 16-20). Make
sure each ring " c l i c k s " Into place In the differential
and the Intermediate shaft.
5-16
28. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 33. Connect the water bypass hose (A) and the heater
hoses (B).
29. Install the IMA motor power cable mounting bolts
(A).
B C
34. Install the bolt (A), then install the IMA motor
power cable clamps (B).
10 N m (1.0 kgf m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
30. Install the harness clamp (B), then connect the

solenoid harness connector (C) and the CVT input
shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor connector (D).
3 1 . Install the shift cable (see page 14-203).
32. Connect the IMA motor power cable connector.
NOTE: If the motor power cable terminals are wet,

dry t h e m w i t h a clean towel. Do not use
compressed air.
(cont'd)
5-17
Engine Assembly
35. Align the reference marks (A) on the steering joint 38. Loosely install the A/C compressor mounting bolts
and the steering gearbox pinion shaft. Connect the and the compressor through bolt in the numbered
steering joint (B) to the steering gearbox pinion sequence shown. Failure to follow this sequence
shaft (C). Tighten the steering joint bolt. may reduce the life of the drive.
®B
10 x 1.25 m m
(2.9 kgf-m, 21 ibf-ft)
36. Install the steering joint cover.

45 N m 45 N m
(4.6 k g f - m , 3 3 . 2 I b f f t ) (4-6 k g f - m ,
3 3 . 2 Ibf-ft)
39. Tighten the A/C compressor mounting bolts (A, C),

then tighten the A/C compressor through bolt (B) to
the specified torque.
40. Connect the A/C compressor clutch connector (D).
41. Install the radiator (see page 10-12).
37. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-9).
5-18
42. Install the drive belt (see page 10-10). 45. Connect the vacuum hose.
43. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

purge valve bracket bolts (A) and the fuel pipe nut
(B), then connect the purge joint to the bracket (C).
B
/ 6 x 1.0 m m
/ 1 2 N - m ( 1 . 2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
46. Install the harness clamp (A), then connect the

engine wire harness connectors (B) on the left side
of the engine compartment.
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4-4 Install the harness clamp (D), then connect the

EVAP canister purge valve connector (E).
(cont'd)
5-19
Engine Assembly
47. Connect the powertrain control module (PCM) 49. Install the harness clamp (A) and the ground cable
connectors (A). (B), then connect the positive starter cable (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
8 x 1.25 mm 12 N m
9 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
(0
48. Install the bolts (A), then install the PCM cover (B).
50. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370).
51. Install the intake air duct.
A
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
5-20
52. Install the resonator (see page 11-371). 62. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed
the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h the heater
53. Install the engine cover. valve open (see step 9 on page 10-7).
63. Check for fluid leaks.
64. Do the PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
65. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
66. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP

pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
67. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-332).
68. Inspect the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-19).
69. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-6).
70. Do the start clutch pressure calibration procedures

(see page 14-172).
54. Install the under-cowl panel and the cowl cover
(see page 20-140). 7 1 . If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays no
segment, start the engine, and hold it between
55. Install the front wheels. 3,500 r p m and 4,000 rpm without load (in N or P)
56. Do the battery installation procedure'(see page
22-63).
57. Turn the IMA battery module switch ON (see page

12-4).
58. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to

ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
lines. Repeat this operation three times, then check
fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
59. Refill the engine with the recommended engine oil

(see page 8-10).
60. Refill the transmission w i t h CVT fluid (CVTF)

(see page 14-176).
6 1 . Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that

the A/T gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
5-21
Engine Assembly
Engine Mount Replacement
Exploded View
10 x 1.25 m m 12 x 1.25 m m 12 x 1.25 m m
38 N m 74 N m 54 N m
(3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 Ibf-ft) (7.5 k g f - m , 5 4 Ibf-ft) (5.5 k g f - m , 4 0 I b f f t ) , 1 2 x 1.25 m m
Replace. Replace. 72 N m
1 2 x 1.25 m m (7.3 k g f - m , 5 3 I b f f t )
64 N m
(6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t ) 1 0 x 1.25 m m
49 N m
(5.0 k g f - m , 3 6 I b f f t )
10 x 1.25 m m
49 N m
(5.0 k g f - m , 3 6 I b f f t )
"32 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
1 2 x 1.25 m m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
74 N m
(7.5 k g f - m , 5 4 I b f f t )
12 x 1.25 m m
74 N m
(7.5 k g f - m , 5 4 I b f f t )
Replace.
1 2 x 1.25 m m
64 N m
(6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 I b f f t )
L O W E R T O R Q U E R O D
5-22
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools 6-2
Component Location Index 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection 6-6
VTEC Rocker A r m Test 6-7
Valve Clearance Adjustment 6-10
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation .............. 6-12
Cam Chain Removal 6-14
Cam Chain Installation 6-16
Chain Case Oil Seal Installation 6-20
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement 6-21
Cylinder Head Cover Removal 6-22
Cylinder Head Cover Installation 6-22
Cylinder Head Removal 6-24
Camshaft Sprocket Removal ....................................... 6-27
Camshaft Sprocket Installation 6-28
CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation 6-30
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage 6-31
Rocker Arm Assembly and Camshaft Removal ......... 6-32
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly 6-33
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection 6-34
Camshaft Inspection 6-35
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal 6-38
Valve Inspection 6-39
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-39
Valve Guide Replacement 6-40
Valve Seat Reconditioning 6-42
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation 6-44
Rocker Arm Assembly and Camshaft Installation ..... 6-45
Cylinder Head Installation 6-45
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
® 07AAJ-PNAA101 Air Pressure Regulator 1
® 07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 m m 1
® 07JAA-001020A Socket, 19 m m 1
® 07JAB-001020A Holder Handle 1
© 07NAB-001040A Holder Attachment, 50 m m 1
® 07 PAD-0010000 Stem Seal Driver 1
® 07757-PJ1010A Valve Spring Compressor Attachment 1
® 07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver, 5.5 m m 1
® 07746-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 1
@ 07749-0010000 Driver 1
® 07VAJ-P8A010A VTEC Air Adapter 1
© ® ® ® ®
6-2
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BOLT

R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 6-12
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
6-4
LOST MOTION HOLDER
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-32
I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 6-45
LOST MOTION A S S E M B L Y
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

VTEC Rocker A r m Test,
p a g e 6-7
Rocker A r m A s s e m b l y R e m o v a l ,
SPRING RETAINER p a g e 6-32
Rocker A r m a n d Shaft Disassembly/
R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 6-33
Rocker A r m a n d Shaft Inspection,
p a g e 6-34
EXHAUST VALVE
SPRING
CYLINDER HEAD PLUG
EXHAUST VALVE CAMSHAFT

SEAL P O S I T I O N {CMP}
PULSE PLATE
VALVE SPRING R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 6-30
SEAT
EXHAUST VALVE O-RING

GUIDE
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) S E N S O R
CAMSHAFT
INTAKE V A L V E SPRING
INTAKE V A L V E S E A L
R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-38
Installation, p a g e 6-44
INTAKE V A L V E GUIDE
CYLINDER HEAD
R e m o v a l , page 6-24
Installation, p a g e 6-45
EXHAUST VALVE
INTAKE V A L V E R e m o v a l , p a g e 6-38
Installation, page 6-44
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After the inspection, y o u must reset the 12. Step on the accelerator pedal to open the throttle
powertrain control module (PCM). Otherwise, the PCM fully, then crank the engine with the starter motor
will continue to stop the fuel injectors f r o m operating. and measure the compression.
1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating Compression Pressure:

2
temperature (cooling fan comes on). Above 980 kPa (10.0 kgf/cm ,142 psi)
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Measure the compression on the remaining
cylinders.
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). Maximum Variation:
2
Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm , 28 psi)
14. If the compression is not within specifications,
5. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle check the following items, then remeasure the
and the PCM. If it does not communicate, compression.
t r o u b l e s h o o t t h e DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
• Incorrect valve clearance
6. Select ALL INJECTORS STOP in the PGM-FI • Confirmation of cam timing
INSPECTION menu w i t h the HDS. • Damaged or w o r n cam lobes
• Looseness exhaust side spark plug
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). • Damaged or w o r n valves and seats
• Damaged cylinder head gasket
8. Remove the four intake side ignition coils (see page • Damaged or w o r n piston rings
4-20). • Damaged or w o r n piston and cylinder bore
9. Remove the four intake side spark plugs. 15. Remove the compression gauge f r o m the spark
plug hole.
10. Attach the compression gauge to a spark plug hole.
16. Install the four intake side spark plugs.
NOTE: Use a compression gauge w i t h a connecting
length (between the edge and the flange) of less 17. Install the four intake side ignition coils (see page
than 23 m m (0.9 in.). 4-20).
18. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) in the PGM-FI

INSPECTION menu to cancel ALL INJECTORS
STOP with the HDS.

2 1 . Turn the IMA battery module switch ON (see page

12-4).
22. Clear any IMA DTCs that may have been set while
doing this inspection procedure.

11. Turn the IMA battery module switch OFF (see page segment, start the engine, and hold it between
12-4). 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in N or P)
6-6
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required 5. Push on the exhaust 1st rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
• A i r pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101 cylinder. Make sure that the exhaust 1st rocker arm
•VTEC air adapter 07VAJ-P8A010A and the exhaust 2nd rocker arm (B) are
mechanically connected by the rocker arm pistons
1. Start the engine and let it run for 5 minutes, then and that the exhaust 2nd rocker arm does not move
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). w h e n pushed manually.
2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22). • If the exhaust 2nd rocker arm does not move
independently, go to step 6.
3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC) (see • If the exhaust 2nd rocker arm moves
step 2 on page 6-10). independently, remove and disassemble the
rocker arm assembly, and check that the rocker
4. Push on the intake 1st rocker arm (A) for the No. 1 arm pistons between the exhaust 1st and 2nd
cylinder. Make sure that the intake 1st rocker arm rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm or
and the intake 2nd rocker arm (B) are mechanically rocker arm piston needs replacing, replace the
connected by the rocker arm pistons and that the rocker arms for the cylinder as an assembly, then
intake 2nd rocker arm does not move when pushed retest.
manually. Then move the intake 3rd rocker arm (C)
for the No. 1 cylinder. The intake 3rd rocker arm
should move independently of the intake 1st rocker
arm.
• If the intake 2nd rocker arm does not move

independently and the intake 3rd rocker arm
moves independently, go to step 5.
• If the intake 2nd rocker arm moves
independently, remove and disassemble the
arm pistons between the intake 1st and 2nd
rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker a r m or
rocker arm piston needs replacing, replace the
rocker arms for the cylinder as an assembly, then
retest.
• If the intake 3rd rocker arm does not moves
independently, remove and disassemble the
arm pistons between the intake 2nd and 3rd
rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm or
rocker arm piston needs replacing, replace the
rocker arms for the cylinder as an assembly, then
retest.
(cont'd)
6-7
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd!
6. Check that the air pressure on the shop air 10. Push on the Intake 1 st rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
compressor gauge Indicates over 400 kPa cylinder. Make sure that the intake 1st rocker arm
2
(4.0 kgf/cm , 47 psi). and the Intake 3rd rocker arm (B) are mechanically
connected by the rocker arm pistons and that the
7. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-10). Intake 3rd rocker arm does not move when pushed
manually.
8. Install the VTEC air adapter (A) to the cam chain
side Inspection hole, then connect the air pressure • If the Intake 3rd rocker arm does not move
regulator (B). Independently, go to step 11.
• If the intake 3rd rocker arm moves Independently,
07AAJ-PNAA101
remove and disassemble the rocker arm
assembly, and check that the rocker arm pistons
07VAJ-P8A010A between the Intake 1st and 3rd rocker arms move
smoothly. If any rocker arm or rocker arm piston
needs replacing, replace the rocker arms for the
cylinder as an assembly, then retest.
9. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the

specified air pressure.
Specified Air Pressure:

2
200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm ,28 psi)
11. Tighten the valve on the air pressure regulator,

then remove the VTEC air adapter.
12. Install the VTEC air adapter (A) to the transmission

side Inspection hole, then connect the air pressure
regulator (B).
07AAJ-PNAA101
07VAJ-P8A010A
6-8
13. Move the Intake 2nd rocker arm (A) and the intake 14. Move the exhaust 2nd rocker arm (A) for the No. 1
3rd rocker arm (B) for the No. 1 cylinder. The intake cylinder. The exhaust 2nd rocker arm should move
2nd and the intake 3rd rocker arm should move independently of the exhaust 1st rocker arm (B).
independently of the intake 1st rocker arm (C).
• • If the exhaust 2nd rocker arm moves
• If the intake 2nd and 3rd rocker arms move independently, go to step 15.
independently, g o t o step 14. • If the exhaust 2nd rocker arm does not move
• If the intake 2nd or intake 3rd rocker arm does independently, remove and disassemble the
not move independently, remove and rocker arm assembly, and check that the rocker
disassemble the rocker arm assembly, and check arm pistons between the exhaust 1st and 2nd
that the rocker arm pistons between the intake rocker arms move smoothly. If any rocker arm or
1st and 2nd rocker arms move or intake 1st and rocker arm piston needs replacing, replace the
3rd smoothly. If any rocker arm or rocker arm rocker arms for the cylinder as an assembly, then
piston needs replacing, replace the rocker arms retest.
for the cylinder as an assembly, then retest.
C A 15. Tighten the valve on the air pressure regulator,

then remove the VTEC air adapter.
16. Repeat step 4 to 15 on the remaining cylinders

rocker arms w i t h each piston at TDC. When all the
rocker arms pass the test, go to step 17.
17. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).

Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment

NOTE: Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to 4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
the data link connector (DLC), and monitor the engine screw (B) and the end of the valve stem on No. 1
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1. Adjust the valve cylinder and slide it back and f o r t h ; you should feel
clearance only w h e n the ECT 1 temperature is less than a slight amount of drag.
100 °F (38 °C).
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
2. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The

" U P " mark (A) on the camshaft sprocket should be
at the top, and the TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft
sprocket should line up w i t h the top edge of the
chain case.
i ' A
5. If you feel too much.or too little drag, loosen the

locknut (A), and turn the adjusting screw (B) until
the drag on the feeler gauge is correct.
3. Select the correct feeler gauge for the valves you

are going to check.
Valve Clearance
intake: 0.15—0.19 mm {§.006—0.007 in.)
Exhaust: 0.24—0.28 mm (0.009—0.011 in.)
EXHAUST
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

6. Tighten the locknut and recheck the clearance.
Repeat the adjustment if necessary.
Specified Torque
20 N m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the nut threads.
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
INTAKE
6-10
7. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 3 11. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 2
piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket
w i t h the top edge of the chain case. w i t h the top edge of the head.
8. Check the valve clearance on the No. 3 cylinder; 12. Check the valve clearance on the No. 2 cylinder;
adjust it if necessary. adjust it if necessary.
9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise. Align the No. 4 13. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22).
piston TDC groove (A) on the camshaft sprocket
w i t h the top edge of the chain.
10. Check the valve clearance on the No. 4 cylinder;

adjust it if necessary.
6-
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation

Special Tools Required Installation
• Holder handle 07JAB-001020A
• Holder a t t a c h m e n t 50 m m 07NAB-001040A 1. Remove any oil and clean the crankshaft pulley (A),
• Socket, 19 m m 07JAA-001020A the crankshaft (B), the bolt (C), and the washer (D).
or a commercially available 19 m m socket Lubricate w i t h new engine oil as shown.
O: Clean
Removal | | ; L u b r i c a t e w i t h n e w e n g i n e oil
2. Remove the front undercover and the splash shield

(see step 21 on page 5-5).
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-10).
4. Hold the crankshaft pulley w i t h the holder handle

(A) and the holder attachment (B).
2. Install the crankshaft pulley while moving the

engine forward and loosely install the crankshaft
pulley.
3. Install the lower torque rod mounting bolts (see

step 15 on page 5-15).
4. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.
07JAA-001020A
5. Install the under-floor TWC (see step 26 on page
B A (or c o m m e r c i a l l y
07NAB-001040A 07JAB-001020A available) 5-16).
5. Remove the crankshaft pulley bolt w i t h a 19 m m

socket (C) and a breaker bar.
6. Remove the under-floor three w a y catalytic

converter (TWC) (see step 39 on page 5-8).
7. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block

u n d e r t h e oil pan.
8. Remove the lower torque rod mounting bolts (see

9. Remove the crankshaft pulley while moving the

engine f o r w a r d .
6-12
6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Do not use an 7. Install the drive belt (see page 10-10).
impact wrench.
8. Install the splash shield and the front undercover
-1 Hold the pulley w i t h the holder handle (A) and (see step 27 on page 5-16).
the holder attachment (B), then tighten the bolt
to 37 N m (3.8 kgf-m, 27 Ibf-ft) w i t h a torque 9. Install the front wheels.
wrench and a heavy duty 19 m m socket (C). If
the pulley bolt or crankshaft are new, tighten
the bolt to 177 N-m (18.0 kgf-m, 130 Ibf-ft), then
remove the bolt and tighten it to 37 N-m
(3.8 kgf-m, 27 Ibf-ft).
-2 Mark the bolt head (D) and the crankshaft

pulley (E) as s h o w n , then tighten the bolt an
additional 90 ° (The mark on the bolt head lines
up w i t h the mark on the crankshaft pulley).
6-13
C f linder Head
Cam Chain Removal

NOTE: Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields. 10. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount bracket (B).

4. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its t o p dead center

(TDC) mark (A) lines up w i t h the pointer (B).
11. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor

connector (A), then remove the dipstick tube
mounting bolt (B) and the harness clamps (C).
5. Remove the water p u m p pulley (see step 4 on page

10-5).
7. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
9. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block

under the engine block.
6-14
J s o o o o in i
12. Remove the chain case (A), then remove the CKP 14. A p p l y new engine oil to the sliding surface of the
pulse plate (B). cam chain tensioner slider (A).
13. Measure the cam chain separation. If the distance 15. Hold the cam chain tensioner slider w i t h a
is less than the service limit, replace the cam chain screwdriver, then remove the bolt (B), and loosen
and the cam chain tensioner. the bolt (C).
Standard Distance: 19 mm (0.75 in.) 16. Remove the cam chain tensioner slider.
Service Limit: 15 mm (0.59 in.)
(cont'd)
6-15
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Removal (cont'd) Cam Chain Installation
17. Remove the cam chain tensioner (A) and the cam NOTE: Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
chain guide (B).
1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TDC). Align
the TDC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (B) on the oil pump.
18. Remove the cam chain.

2. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The "UP" mark (A) on
the camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the
TDC grooves (B) on the camshaft sprocket should
line up w i t h the top edge of the cylinder head.
6-16
3. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket 5. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the cam
w i t h the colored piece (A) aligned w i t h the TDC chain tensioner mounting bolt (A).
mark (B) on the crankshaft sprocket
4. Install the cam chain on the camshaft sprocket w i t h 2 2 N-m 12 N-m

the pointer (A) aligned w i t h the center of the t w o (2.2 k g f - m , 16 Ibf-ft) (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 ibf-ft)
colored pieces (B).
6. Install the cam chain tensioner (B) and the cam
chain guide (C).
7. Install the cam chain tensioner slider, and tighten

the lower side bolt loosely.
(cont'd)
6-17
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Installation (cont'd)
8. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the 13. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
cam chain tensioner slider (A). 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the cylinder
head and the engine block mating surface of the
chain case. Install the component within 5 minutes
of applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
• Apply a 1.5 m m wide bead of liquid gasket along
the broken lines (A).
• Apply a 3.0 m m w i d e bead of liquid gasket to the
engine block upper surface contact areas (B) on
the chain case.
• If y o u apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
• If too much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
9. Turn the cam chain tensioner clockwise to

compress the cam chain tensioner slider. Install the
remaining bolt, then tighten the t w o bolts.
10. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil
seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal
(see page 6-20).
11. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the chain

case mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
12. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
6-18
14. Install the crankshaft position (CKP) pulse plate (A) 16. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then
and the chain case (B). tighten the mounting bolts and nut in the
numbered sequence shown.
NOTE:
6 x 1.0 m m
• Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
10 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
w i t h oil.
• Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the chain case.
17. Install the ground cable (B).

8 x 1.25 m m 6 x 1.0 m m
31 N m 12 N m 18. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.
(3.2 k g f - m , 2 3 Ibf-ft) (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
19. Install the oil pan (see page 7-27).

15. Install the harness clamps (A) and the dipstick tube
mounting bolt (B), then connect the CKP sensor 20. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
connector (C).
22. Install the water pump pulley (see step 4 on page

10-5).
23. Install the drive belt (see page 10-10).

25. Install the front wheels.
26. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP

pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
6-19
Cylinder Head
Chain Case Oil Seal Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Measure the distance between the chain case
• Driver 07749-0010000 surface (A) and the oil seal (B).
•Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
Oil Seal installed Height;
1. Use the driver and the attachment to drive a new 34.5—35.2 m m (1.38—1.39 in.)
oil seal squarely into the chain case to the specified
installed h e i g h t
6-20
CKP PuSse Plate Replacement
1. Remove the front wheels. 14. Install the CKP pulse plate.
2. Remove the front undercover and the splash shield 15. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil
(see step 21 on page 5-5). seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal
(see page 6-20).
4. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center case mating surfaces, the bolt, and the bolt holes.
(TDC) mark lines up with the pointer (see step 2 on
page 6-10). 17. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
5. Remove the water pump pulley (see step 4 on page 18. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
10-5). 08718-0003 or 08718-0009, evenly to the cylinder
head and the engine block mating surface of the
6. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-22). chain case. Install the component within 5 minutes
of applying the liquid gasket (see step 13 on page
7. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12). 6-18).
8. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11). NOTE:

• If you apply liquid gasket P/N 08718-0012, the
9. Support the engine with a jack and a w o o d block component must be installed within 4 minutes.
under the engine block. • • If too much t i m e has passed after applying the
10. Remove the ground cable, then remove the side residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
engine mount bracket (see step 10 on page 6-14).
19. Install the chain case (see step 14 on page 6-19).
11. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
connector, then remove the harness clamp and the 20. Install the harness clamps and the dipstick tube
dipstick tube mounting bolt (see step 11 on page mounting bolt, then connect the CKP sensor
6-14). connector (see step 15 on page 6-19).
12. Remove the chain case (see step 12 on page 6-15). 21. Install the side engine mount bracket, then install
the ground cable (see step 16 on page 6-19).
13. Remove the CKP pulse plate (A).
22. Remove the jack and the w o o d block.
23. Install the oil pan (see page 7-27).
24. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
26. Install the water pump pulley (see step 4 on page

10-5).

30. Do the crankshaft (CKP) pattern clear/CKP pattern

learn procedure (see page 11-4).
6-21
Cylinder Head
C f Under Head Cover Removal Cylinder Head Cover Installation
1. Remove the engine cover (see step 6 on page 5-3). 1. Check the spark plug seals (A) for damage. If the
seal is damaged, replace the spark plug seals.
2. Remove the eight ignition coils (see page 4-20).
3. Remove the harness holder (A) and disconnect the

breather hose (B).
2. Thoroughly clean the head cover gasket (B) and the

groove.
3. Install the head cover gasket in the groove of the

cylinder head cover (C).
4 Remove the cylinder head cover. 4. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.
5. Apply a 3.0 m m w i d e bead of the liquid gasket, P/N

08717-0004, 08718-0001,08718-0003, or 08718-
0009, on the chain case mating areas (A). Install the
component w i t h i n 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
component must be installed within 4 minutes.
6-22
6. Once the cylinder head cover (A) is on the cylinder 9. Connect the breather hose (A) and install the
head, slide the cover slightly back and forth to seat harness holder (B).
the head cover gasket.
6 x1.0 mm 6x1.0 mm
7. Inspect the cover washer (B). Replace any washer

that is damaged or deteriorated. 10. Install the eight ignition coils (see page 4-20).
8. Tighten the bolts in three steps. In the final step, 11. Install the engine cover (see step 53 on page 5-21).
tighten all bolts in sequence shown to 12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft). 12. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before
filling the engine with oil.
® ® ® ®
6-23
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal

NOTE: 7. Disconnect the camshaft position (CMP) sensor (A)
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging the painted and the ECT sensor 1 connector (B), then remove
surfaces, the harness clamp (C).
• To avoid damaging the wire and terminals, unplug
the w i r i n g connectors carefully while holding the
connector portion.
• Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC), and monitor the engine
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1. To avoid
damaging the cylinder head, wait until the ECT 1
temperature drops below 100 °F (38 °C) before
loosening the cylinder head bolts.
• Mark all w i r i n g and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other w i r i n g or
hoses, or interfere w i t h other parts.
• Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11 -345).

8. Remove the eight ignition coils (see page 4-20).
2. Remove the engine cover (see step 6 on page 5-3).
9. Remove the harness holder and disconnect the
3. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). breather hose (see step 3 on page 6-22).
4. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370). 10. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP)
canister purge valve connector, then remove the
5. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3). harness clamp (see step 15 on page 5-5).
6. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A), then 11. Disconnect the purge joint f r o m the bracket, then
remove the harness clamp (B) and the connecting remove the fuel pipe nut and remove the EVAP
pipe (C). canister purge valve bracket bolts (see step 16 on
page 5-5).
12. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the lower

radiator hose (B), the water bypass hose (C), and
the heater hoses (D).
6-24
13. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-10). 23. Make a reference mark (A) across the camshaft
sprocket and the cam chain.
14. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center
(TDC) mark lines up w i t h the pointer (see step 4 on
page 6-14).
15. Remove the water p u m p (see page 10-5).
17. Remove the warm-up three way catalytic converter

(WU-TWC) (see page 11-377).
18. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
19. Support the engine w i t h a jack and a w o o d block 24. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley.
under the oil pan.
25. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the
20. Remove the ground cable, then remove the side cam chain tensioner through the oil return hole in
engine mount bracket (see step 10 on page 6-14). the cylinder head.
21. Disconnect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor (A)

and the harness clamp (B), then remove the
dipstick tube (C).
22. Remove the chain case.
(cont'd)
6-25
Cylinder Head
C f Under Head Removal (cont'd)
26. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket 29. Remove the top bolt that secures the cam chain
wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt. guide.
30. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent

27. Turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam warpage, loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a
chain tensioner, then install the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt (B) t i m e ; repeat the sequence until all bolts are *
in the bolt hole (C) in the engine block t h r o u g h the loosened.
cam chain tensioner (D).
© © ® © ©
NOTE:
• Turning torque should not exceed 44 N-m
(4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) when turning the camshaft.
• Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
28. Hold the camshaft w i t h a 27 m m open-end w r e n c h ,

then remove the camshaft sprocket.
® © @ © ©
3 1 . Remove the cylinder head.
6-26
Camshaft Sprocket Removal
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields. 4. Remove the cylinder head plug.
2. Make a reference mark (A) across the camshaft

sprocket and the cam chain.
5. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket

wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
3. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the

cam chain tensioner through the oil return hole in
the cylinder head.
6. Remove the maintenance bolt (B), and turn the

camshaft clockwise to compress the cam chain
tensioner, then install the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt (C) in the
bolt hole (D) in the engine block through the
maintenance hole and the cam chain tensioner (E).
NOTE:
(4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) w h e n turning the camshaft.
(cont'd)
6-27
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Sprocket Removal Camshaft Sprocket Installation

(cont'd)
•NOTE: Keep the cam chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
7. Hold the camshaft w i t h a 27 m m open-end wrench, 1. Install the cam chain around the camshaft sprocket
then loosen the camshaft sprocket bolt. aligned w i t h the reference mark (A), then install the
camshaft sprocket on the camshaft.
2. Hold the camshaft w i t h a 27 m m open-end wrench,

then tighten the bolt.
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and

8. Remove the camshaft sprocket bolt, then remove flange.
the camshaft sprocket.
Specified Torque: 56 N m (5.7 kgf-m, 41 Ibf-ft)
NOTE: Hang the cam chain w i t h a wire.
6-28
14 x 1.25 m m
2 0 N-m (2.0 k g f - m , 15 ibf-ft)
5. Turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam

chain tensioner, then remove the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt
(B).
NOTE:
(4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft) when turning the camshaft.
6. Install the maintenance bolt (C) with a new washer

(D).
Cylinder Head
CMP Pulse Plate Removal and Installation

Removal 6. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate.
3. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

purge valve bracket (see step 16 on page 5-5).
4. Remove the cylinder head plug.
5. Hold the camshaft w i t h a 27 m m open-end w r e n c h ,

then loosen the bolt.
6-30
Cylinder Head Inspection for
Warpage
Installation
1. Install the CMP pulse plate (A). Hold the camshaft 1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-24).
w i t h a 27 m m open-end wrench (B), then tighten
the bolt (C). 2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-35).
NOTE: Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads. 3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure
along the edges, and three ways across the center
Warpage
Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.0028 in.)
• If warpage is less than 0.08 m m (0.0031 in.)

cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.08 m m (0.0031 in.) and
0.2 m m (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
• M a x i m u m resurface limit is 0.2 m m (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 120 m m (4.72 in.).
Cylinder Head Height

Standard (New): 119.9—120.1 mm
(4.720-4.728 in.)
PRECISION S T R A I G H T E D G E
14 x 1.5 m m
3 4 N - m (3.5 k g f - m , 2 5 Ibf-ft)
2. Install the new cylinder head plug.
3. Install the EVAP canister purge valve bracket (see

6-
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm Assembly and Camshaft Removal

1. Remove the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-27). 4. Remove the lost motion holder (A), the lost motion
assembly (B), and the rocker arm assembly (C),
2. Loosen the locknuts and the adjusting screws (A). then remove the camshaft (D).
3. Remove the lost motion holder bolts and the

camshaft holder bolts. To prevent damaging the
camshaft, loosen the bolts in sequence t w o turns at
a t i m e , in a crisscross pattern.
© ©
© © © ©
6-32
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE;
• Identify parts as they are removed so they can be reinstalled in their original location.
• Remove the rocker shaft bolts before disassembling the rocker arms.
• Inspect the rocker shaft and the rocker arms (see page 6-34).
• If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in their original location.
• Prior t o reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry t h e m , and apply new engine oil to any contact points.
• Apply new engine oil to the threads of the rocker shaft bolts w h e n installing t h e m .
• When replacing the rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware f r o m the new rocker arm assembly.
LOST MOTION HOLDER BOLT

8 x 1.25 mm
2 2 N - m (2.2 k g f - m , 1 6 I b f f t )
LOST MOTION HOLDER
LOST MOTION (Y
0
K
ASSEMBLY "
ROCKER SHAFT
ROCKER SHAFT BOLT ROCKER SHAFT BOLT

8 x 1.25 m m 8 x 1.25 m m
2 0 N - m (2.0 k g f - m , 14 Ibf-ft)
2 0 N-m (2.0 k g f - m , 14 I b f f t ) / L O S T MOTION
* ASSEMBLY
No. 5
CAMSHAFT
HOLDER
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4

CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER EXHAUST INTAKE
1st a n d 2 n d 1st, 2nd a n d 3rd
ROCKER ARM ROCKER ARM
ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY
6-33
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-32). 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker a r m , and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-33). Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New); 0.017—0.045 mm
-3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at the first rocker (0.0003-0.0018 in.)
location. Service Limit: 0.067 m m (0.0026 in.)
6. Repeat for all the rockers and both shafts. If the

4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter. clearance is over the limit, replace the rocker shaft
and all over-tolerance rocker arms. If any rocker
arm needs replacement, replace all five rocker
arms in that set (intake 1st, 2nd, 3rd, exhaust 1st
. and 2nd).
6-34
Camshaft Inspection
Rocker A r m s NOTE: Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection.
7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Slide them Into 1. Remove the rocker a r m assembly (see page 6-32).
the rocker arms. If they do not move smoothly,
replace the rocker arm set. 2. Put the camshaft, the camshaft holders, and the
lost motion holder on the cylinder head, then
NOTE: tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
• Apply new engine oil to the rocker a r m pistons
w h e n reassembling. Specified Torque
• When reassembling the intake 1st and exhaust 8 mm Bolts:
1st rocker arms (B), carefully apply air pressure 22 N m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibfft)
to the oil passage of the rocker arm. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flange.
8 mm Bolts: © @
20 N m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flange.
6 mm Bolt: ©
12 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flange.
@ @ © @ ® ® ©
8. Reassemble the rocker a r m assembly (see page

6-33).
9. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-45). ® ® © ® © ®
(cont'd)
6-35
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection (cont'd)
3. Seat the camshaft by pushing it away f r o m the 5. Loosen the lost motion bolder bolts and the
camshaft pulley end of the cylinder head. camshaft holder bolts t w o turns at a time, in a
crisscross pattern. Then remove the lost motion
4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the holder and the camshaft holders f r o m the cylinder
camshaft, then push the camshaft back and forth head.
and read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
service limit, replace the cylinder head and recheck. 6. Lift the camshaft out of the cylinder head, wipe it
If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the
camshaft. camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or
excessively w o r n .
Camshaft End Play
Standard (New): §.§5—0.15 mm (§.§§2—§.§§6 In.) 7. Clean the camshaft journal surfaces in the cylinder
Service Limit: 0.3 mm (§.§1 in.) head, then set the camshaft back in place. Place a
plastigage strip across each journal.
8. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts

to the specified torque as shown in step 2.
9. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest

part of plastigage on each journal.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is w i t h i n

limits, g o t o step 11.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 10.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance

(0.0020-0.0035 in.)
6-36
10. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported 11. Measure the cam lobe height.
on V-blocks.
Cam Lobe Height Standard (New):
• If the total runout of the camshaft is w i t h i n the INTAKE EXHAUST
service limit, replace the cylinder head. 2nd 35.568 m m 35.699 m m
• If the total runout is beyond the service limit, (1.4003 in.) (1.4054 in.)
replace the camshaft and recheck the camshaft- 3rd 36.060 m m
to-holder oil clearance. If the oil clearance is still (1.4196 in.)
beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder 1st 29.700 m m 29.900 m m
head. (1.1692 in.) (1.1771 in.)
2nd 1st 3rd 1st 2nd

Camshaft Total Runout
Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max.
EXHAUST INTAKE
6-37
Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Special Tools Required 6. Install the valve guide seal remover.
Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled in its
original position.
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-24).
2. Remove the rocker a r m assembly and the camshaft

(see page 6-32).
3. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and a plastic

mallet (B), lightly tap the spring retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
7. Remove the valve seal.
4. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and

the valve spring compressor. Compress the valve
spring and remove the valve cotters.
07757-PJ1010A
8. Remove the valve spring seat.
5. Remove the valve spring compressor, the valve

spring compressor attachment, the spring retainer,
the valve spring and the valve.
6-38
Valve Inspect Ion Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-38).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-38).
Intake Valve Dimensions 2. Slide the valve out of its guide about 10 m m
A Standard (New): 34.85—35.15 m m (0.39 in.), then measure the stem-to-guide
(1.372-1.383 in.) clearance w i t h a dial indicator while rocking the
B Standard (New): 117.65-118.15 m m stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble
( 4 . 6 3 2 - 4 . 6 5 2 in.) method).
C Standard (New): 5.48—5.49 m m
(0.2157-0.2161 in.) • If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
C Service Limit: 5.45 m m (0.215 in.) recheck it using a new valve.
• If the measurement is n o w within the service
Exhaust Valve Dimensions limit, reassemble using a new valve.
A Standard (New); 29.85—30.15 m m • If the measurement w i t h a new valve still
(1.175-1.187 in.) exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
B Standard (New): 117.75-118.25 mm
( 4 . 6 3 5 - 4 . 6 5 9 in.) Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
C Standard (New): 5.45—5.46 m m Standard (New): 0.04—0.10 mm
(0.2146-0.2150 in.) (0.002-0.004 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.42 m m (0.213 in.) Service Limit: ~ 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.004-0.006 in.)
3. Subtract the O.D. of the valve stem, measured w i t h

a micrometer, f r o m the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured w i t h an inside micrometer or a ball
gauge.
Take the measurements in three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.0008-0.0020 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.0020-0.0031 in.)
6-39
C f Under Head
Valve Guide Replacement

Special Tools Required 5. Working f r o m the camshaft side, use the driver and
•Valve guide driver, 5.5 m m 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 m m
•Valve guide reamer, 5.5 m m 07HAH-PJ7A100 (0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line w i t h the
6-39). valve guide to prevent damaging the driver. Wear
safety goggles or a face shield.
2. As illustrated, use a commercially available air-
impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out toward
diameter of the valve guides. In most cases, the the camshaft side of the head.
same procedure can be done using the valve guide
driver and a conventional hammer.
5.3 m m
(0.21 in.)
. 87 m m _ . 57 m m
(3.43 in.) (2.24 In.)
10.8 m m
(0.42 in.)
3. Select the proper replacement guides, and chill

t h e m in the freezer section of a refrigerator for at
least an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300 °F (150 °C). Monitor the temperature
w i t h a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 °F (150 °C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
7. If a valve guide will not move, drill it out with a

8 m m (5/16 in.) bit, then try again.
NOTE: Drill guides only in extreme cases; you

could damage the cylinder head if the guide breaks.
8. Take out the new guide(s) f r o m the freezer, one at a

t i m e , as you need t h e m .
6-40
9. Apply a thin coat of new engine oil to the outside of 10. Coat both the reamer and the valve guide w i t h
the new valve guide. Install the guide f r o m the cutting oil.
camshaft side of the head; use the valve guide
driver to drive the guide into the specified installed 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise the full length of the
height (A) of the guide (B). If you have all eight valve guide bore.
guides to do, you may have to reheat the head.
Valve Guide Installed Height:

16.25-16.75 mm (0.640-0.659 in.)
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while

drawing it f r o m the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearances w i t h a valve (see page 6-39).

Verify that a valve slides in the intake and exhaust
valve guides without sticking.
15. Inspect the valve seating, if necessary renew the

valve seat using a valve seat cutter (see page 6-42).
6-41
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspect valve stem-to-guide clearance (see page 3. Carefully cut a 45 °seat, removing only enough
6-39). If the valve guides are w o r n , replace t h e m material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat.
(see page 6-40) before cutting the valve seats.
4. Bevel the upper edge of the seat w i t h the 30 ° cutter
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a and the lower edge of the seat w i t h the 60 °cutter.
valve seat cutter. Check the width of the seat and adjust accordingly.
5. Make one more very light pass w i t h the 45 °cutter

to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
cutters.
Valve Seat Width

Intake:
(0.0335-0.0453 in.)
Exhaust:
(0.0492-0.0610 in.)
6-42
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve 8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,
seating: Apply Prussian Blue c o m p o u n d (A) to the and measure the valve stem installed height (A).
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the Intake Valve Stem Installed Height
seat several times. . Standard (New): 47.7—48.1 mm
(1.878-1.894 in.)
B Service Limit: 48.4 mm (1.906 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

(1.874-1.890 in.)
Service Limit: 48i3 mm (1.902 in.)
7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by

the blue c o m p o u n d , should be centered on the seat.
• If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you

must make a second cut w i t h the 60 ° cutter to
move it d o w n , then one more cut w i t h the 45 °
cutter to restore seat w i d t h .
• If it is too low (close to the valve edge), y o u must 9. If the valve stem installed height is over the service
make a second cut with the 30 ° cutter to move it limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still over
up, then make one more cut w i t h the 45 ° cutter the service limit, replace the cylinder head; the
to restore seat w i d t h . valve seat in the head is too deep.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made w i t h

the 45°cutter.
6-43
Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring. Place the end of the valve
* Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 spring w i t h the closely w o u n d coils t o w a r d the
•Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A cylinder head.
1. Coat the valve stems w i t h new engine oil. Install 6. Install the spring retainer.
the valves in the.valve guides.
7. Install the valve spring compressor attachment and
2. Check that the valves move up and d o w n smoothly. the valve spring compressor. Compress the spring
and install the valve cotters.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
07757-PJ1010A
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the 5.5 m m

side of the stem seal driver (B).
NOTE; The exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring

(D), and the intake valve seal (E) has a white spring
(F). They are not interchangeable.,
07PAD-0010000
8. Remove the valve spring compressor and the valve

spring compressor attachment
9. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem t w o or three

times w i t h a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
seating of the valve and the valve cotters. Tap the
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend
the stem.
\ \
) ?
£ * — ^
ft
1/
>
f
i
6-44
Rocker Arm Assembly and Cylinder Head Installation
Camshaft Installation
NOTE: Keep the c a m chain away f r o m magnetic fields.
1. Reassemble the rocker a r m assembly (see page 1. Clean the cylinder head and the engine block
6-33). surface.
2. Apply new engine oil to the camshaft lobes and 2. Install the new cylinder head gasket (A) and the
journals. dowel pins (B) on the engine block. Always use a
new cylinder head gasket.
3. Install the camshaft (A), the rocker arm assembly
(B), the lost motion assembly (C) and the lost
motion holder (D).
3. Set the crankshaft to t o p dead center (TDC). Align

the TDC mark on the crankshaft sprocket with the
pointer on the oil pump (see step 1 on page 6-16).
4. Set the No. 1 piston at TDC. The " U P " mark on the
camshaft sprocket should be at the top, and the
TDC grooves on the camshaft sprocket should line
up with the t o p edge of the cylinder head (see step
2 on page 6-16).
4. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flange. 5. Install the cylinder head on the engine block.
Tighten each bolt t w o turns at a time in sequence.
6. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
Specified Torque point A and point B.
8 mm Bolts: 22 N m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 ibf-ft)
50 m m (2.0 in.)
8 mm Bolt: © @ 20 N-m (2.0 kgf-m, 14 Ibfft)
6 mm Bolt: @ 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft) 45 m m (1.8 in.)
CD © d) (D ® 7. If either diameter is less than 10.6 m m (0.42 in.

replace the cylinder head bolt.
5. Install the camshaft sprocket (see page 6-28).
6. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-10).

(cont'd)
6-45
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
8. Apply new engine oil to the threads and flange of 11. Install the cam chain guide mounting top bolt.
all cylinder head bolts. Be sure to install the
165 m m long head bolt (A) in the location s h o w n .
® © © © ®
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 M m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
9. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence t o 12. Install the cam chain around the camshaft sprocket
29 N-m (3.0 kgf-m, 22 Ibf-ft), use a beam-type aligned with the reference mark (A), then install the
torque wrench. When using a preset-click-type camshaft sprocket on the camshaft.
torque wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not
overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise while y o u are
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it f r o m the
first step.
10. Tighten all cylinder head bolts an additional 130 °.
NOTE; Remove the cylinder head bolt if you

tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 6 of the procedure.
6-46
13. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and flange. 16. Hold the crankshaft pulley and set the socket
Hold the camshaft w i t h a 27 m m open-end wrench, wrench (A) on the camshaft sprocket bolt.
then tighten the bolt.
Specified Torque: 56 N m (5.7 kgf-m, 41 ibf-ft)
17. Turn the camshaft clockwise to compress the cam

chain tensioner, then remove the 6 x 1.0 m m bolt
(B).
14. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley.
NOTE:
15. Apply new engine oil to the sliding surface of the • Turning torque should not exceed 44 N-m
cam chain tensioner through the oil return hole in (4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibf-ft), when turning the camshaft.
the cylinder head. • Do not turn the camshaft counterclockwise.
18. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. If the oil
seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal
(see page 6-20).

case mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
20. Clean and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
(cont'd)
6-47
Cylinder Head
C f linder Head Installation (cont'd)
2 1 . Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001, 23. Set the edge of the chain case (A) to the edge of the
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the cylinder oil pan (B), then install the chain case on the engine
head and engine block mating surface of the chain block (C). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the
case. Install the component w i t h i n 5 minutes of oil pan and chain case mating area.
applying the liquid gasket (see step 13 on page
6-18). NOTE: When Installing the chain case, do not slide
the bottom surface on the oil pan mounting surface.
NOTE:
• Apply a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of liquid gasket along
the broken lines.
engine block upper surface contact areas on the
chain case.
component must be installed w i t h i n 4 minutes.
• If too much t i m e has passed after applying the
22. Apply liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001, or 08718-0009

evenly to the oil pan mating surface of the chain
case. Install the component w i t h i n 5 minutes of
applying the liquid gasket. 8 x 1.25 m m 6 x 1.0 m m
31 N m 12 N m
(3.2 k g f - m , 2 3 Ibf-ft) (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b M t )
NOTE:
• Apply a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of liquid gasket along
the broken lines (A).
shaded area (B).
• If t o o much t i m e has passed after applying the
6-48
24. Install the dipstick tube (A) w i t h a new O-ring (B). 32. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), the lower
Connect the crankshaft position (CKP) sensor - radiator hose (B), the water bypass hose (C), and
connector (C) and the harness clamps (D). the heater hoses (D).
S x 1.0 m m
B 1 0 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 ibf-ft)
3 3 . Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
25. Install the side engine mount bracket, then tighten purge valve bracket bolts and the fuel pipe nut,
the mounting bolts and nut In the numbered then connect the purge joint to the bracket (see step
sequence s h o w n (see step 16 on page 6-19). 43 on page 5-19).
26. Install the ground cable (see step 17 on page 6-19). 34. Install the harness clamp, then connect the EVAP
canister purge valve connector (see step 44 on
27. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12). page 5-19).
28. Install the w a r m - u p three w a y catalytic converter

(WU-TWC) (see page 11-377).
30. Install the water pump (see page 10-5).
3 1 . Install the drive belt (see page 10-10).
(cont'd)
6-49
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
35. Install the harness clamp (A), then connect the 37. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).
camshaft position (CMP) sensor (B) and the engine
coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1 connector (C). 38. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370).
39. Install the engine cover (see step 53 on page 5-21).
40. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and

connectors are installed correctly.
41. Inspect for fuel leaks. Turn the ignition switch to

ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel p u m p
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation three times, then check
for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
42. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, and bleed

valve open (see step 9 on page 10-7).
36. Install the connecting pipe (A) w i t h a new O-ring (B).
Install the harness clamp (C), then connect the 43. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn
knock sensor connector (D). procedure (see page 11-4).
44. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-332).
45. Inspect the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-19).
6-50
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools 7-2
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection 7-5
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-6
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement 7-8
Oil Pan Removal 7-11
Crankshaft and Piston Removal 7-12
Crankshaft Inspection 7-14
Block and Piston Inspection 7-15
Cylinder Bore Honing 7-17
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-18
Piston Ring Replacement 7-21
Piston Installation 7-23
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection 7-24
Crankshaft Installation 7-25
Oil Pan Installation 7-27
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal
Installation - In Car 7-29
Sealing Bolt Installation 7-30
Engine Block
Special Tools
® 07PAF-0010400 Piston Base Head 1
07PAF-0010500 Piston Base Head Insert 1
(D 07ZAD-PNA0100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
© 07749-0010000 Driver 1
® 07973-6570201 Adjustable Piston Pin Driver Head 1
(D 07973-6570500 Piston Base 1
© 07973-6570600 Piston Base Spring 1
® 07973-6890200 Adjustable Piston Pin Driver Shaft 1
® 07973-6890300 Pilot Collar 1
® 07973-6890400 Piston Pin Base Insert 1
© © © © ©
© ® © © . ®
7-2
(Jter !j.

Engine Block
Component Location Index {cont'd)
PISTON RINGS
R e p l a c e m e n t p a g e 7-21
PISTON
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-12
M e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-15
P I S T O N PIN
R e m o v a l , p a g e 7-18
I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 7-20
CONNECTING ROD
E n d P l a y , p a g e 7-5
S m a l l E n d M e a s u r e m e n t , p a g e 7-19
ENGINE BLOCK
C y l i n d e r Bore I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
W a r p a g e I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 7-15
SEALING BOLTS C y l i n d e r B o r e H o n i n g , p a g e 7-17
I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 7-30 Ridge R e m o v a l , s t e p 6 o n p a g e 7-12
CONNECTING ROD
BEARINGS
Oil C l e a r a n c e , p a g e 7-8
S e l e c t i o n , p a g e 7-9
D O W E L PINS
CONNECTING ROD
BEARING CAP
CONNECTING ROD BOLTS
7-4
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-14). Push the crankshaft f i r m l y away f r o m the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
2. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft f i r m l y back
gauge (A) between the connecting rod (B) and the t o w a r d the indicator; the dial reading should not
crankshaft (C). exceed the service limit.
Connecting Rod End Play Crankshaft End Play

Standard (New): 0.15—0.30 mm Standard (New): 0.10—0.35 mm
(0.006-0.012 in.) (0.004—0.014 in.)
Service Limit: 0.40 mm (0.016 in.) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
5. If the end play is beyond the service limit, replace

the thrust washers and recheck, if it is still beyond
the service limit, replace the crankshaft (see page
3. If the connecting rod end play is beyond the service 7-12).
limit, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it
is still beyond the service limit, replace the
crankshaft (see page 7-12).
7-5
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement
Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow,
remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
1. Remove the bearing cap and the bearing halves of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing w i t h
(see page 7-12). the same color code, and recheck the clearance. Do
not file, s h i m , or scrape the bearings or the caps to
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half w i t h a adjust clearance.
clean shop t o w e l .
7. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
• 3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
journal. color listed above or below that one), and check
again. If the proper clearance cannot be obtained
4. Reinstall the bearing half and the bearing cap, then by using the appropriate larger or smaller bearings,
tighten the bolts to 25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft) replace the crankshaft (see page 7-12) and start
+ 40 ° (see step 18 on page 7-26). over.
NOTE;
• Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and
flanges.
• Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
5. Remove the bearing cap and the bearing half again,

and measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journai Oil Clearance

Standard (New): 0.018 — 0.036 mm
(0.0007 - 0 . 0 0 1 4 in.)
7-6
Main Bearing Selection Main Journal Code Location
Crankshaft Bore Code Location 2. The main journal codes are stamped on the
crankshaft in either location.
1. Letters have been stamped on the end of the
engine block as a code for the size of each of the
five main journal bores. Write d o w n the crank bore
codes.
If you can't read the codes because of accumulated
dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush
or scraper. Clean t h e m only w i t h solvent or
detergent.
No. 1 J O U R N A L No. 5 J O U R N A L
(PULLEY END) (FLYWHEEL END)
No. 5 J O U R N A L No. 1 J O U R N A L
(cont'd)
7-7
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Connecting Rod Bearing
Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
3. Use the crank bore codes and the crank journal Connecting Rod Bearing Clearance
codes to select the appropriate replacement Inspection
bearings from the following table.
1. To check rod bearing-to-journal oil clearance,
NOTE: Color code Is on the edge of the bearing. remove the bearing cap (see page 7-12).
Crank • Larger crank bore
bore 2. Remove the connecting rod cap and the bearing
code B half.
Main
journal
code - • S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker) 3. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and the bearing
Red Yellow Green half w i t h a clean shop t o w e l .
Pink
Pink Yellow Green Brown 4. Place plastigage across the-rod journal.
Yellow Green Brown Black 5. Reinstall the bearing half and connecting rod cap,
and tighten the bolts.
Green Brown Black Blue
Smaller Smaller NOTE:

main bearing • Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads and .
journal (Thicker)
flanges.
• Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.
Tightening Torque:
10 N m {1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft) + S 0 °
6. Remove the connecting rod cap and the bearing

half and measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance

(0.0008-0.0015 in.)
7-8
7. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
complete bearing w i t h the same color code, and 1. Inspect the connecting rod for cracks and heat
recheck the clearance. Do not file, s h i m , or scrape damage.
the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations
8. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the 2. Each connecting rod falls into one of four tolerance
color listed above or below that one), and check ranges (from 0 to 0.024 m m (0.0009 in.), in
clearance again. If the proper clearance cannot be 0.006 m m (0.0002 in.) increments) depending on
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller the size of its big end bore.
bearings, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-12) It's then stamped w i t h a number or bar (1, 2, 3, or 4)
and start over. indicating the range. You may find any
combination of 1, 2, 3, or 4 in any engine.
If the codes are indecipherable because of an
accumulation of dirt and dust, do not scrub them
w i t h a w i r e brush or scraper. Clean t h e m only w i t h
solvent or detergent.
Normal Bore Size: 43.0 mm (1.69 in.)
(cont'd)
7-
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location 4. Use the big end bore codes and the rod journal
codes to select appropriate replacement bearings
3. The connecting rod journal codes are stamped on f r o m the following table.
the crankshaft In either locations.
NOTE: Color code is on the edge of the bearing.
Big e n d • Larger big e n d bore
bore
Rod
code B
journal
code - • S m a l l e r bearing (Thicker)
1 Red Pink Yellow Green
2 Pink Yellow Green Brown
3 Yellow Green Brown Black
4 Green Brown Black Blue

If
Smaller Smaller
rod bearing
journal (Thicker)
No. 4 J O U R N A L Wo. 1 J O U R N A L
7-10
OSS Pan Removal
1. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-10)., 18. Remove the harness clamps (A) and the mounting
bolt (B), then remove the dipstick tube (C).
2. If the engine is already out of the vehicle, go to step
18.
3. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6), then,

remove the steering joint bolt (see step 30 on page
5-6).

6. Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly

(see page 10-12).
7. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector,

then remove the A/C compressor (see step 27 on
page 5-6).
8. Remove the intake manifold bracket and the

harness clamp (see step 10 on page 9-3).
9. Remove the under-floor three w a y catalytic

converter (TWC) (see step 39 on page 5-8).
10. Disconnect the front stabilizer links (see page

18-25).
11. Disconnect the suspension lower arm ball joints

(see page 18-20).
12. Disconnect the steering gearbox harness

connectors (see step 43 on page 5-8).
13. Attach the universal lifting eyelet (see step 45 on

page 5-8), and the engine support hanger (see step
46 on page 5-8).
14. Remove the lower torque rod mounting bolts (see

15. Make the appropriate reference line at the both side

front subframe that line up w i t h the edge on the
body (see step 49 on page 5-9).
16. Loosen the mid stiffener mounting bolts (see step

50 on page 5-9).
17. Using the front subframe adapter (see step 51 on

page 5-9), then remove the front subframe (see
(cont'd)
7-11
Engine Block
Oil Pan Removal (cont'd) Crankshaft and Piston Removal
20. Remove the t w o bolts securing the transmission. 1. Remove the engine/IMA motor/transmission
assembly (see page 5-3).
2. Remove the IMA motor housing (see page 12-195).
3. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-14).
4. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-24).
5. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil

p u m p (B).
21. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan.
22. Insert a flat blade screwdriver where s h o w n , and

separate the oil pan f r o m the engine block.
6. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon

around the top of each cylinder, remove it w i t h a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the pistons as they are pushed out.
23. Remove the oil pan.
NOTE: Lower the oil pan carefully not to damage A

the IMA motor (resolver stator).
7-12
7. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage, 12. Use the w o o d e n handle of a hammer (A) to drive
loosen the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a t i m e ; out the piston/connecting rod assembly (B).
repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
© © ® © C D
8. Remove the bearing cap. 13. Reinstall the bearing cap and bearings on the
engine block.
9. Remove the connecting rod caps/bearings. Keep all
caps/bearings in order. 14. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps
after removing each piston/connecting rod
10. Lift the crankshaft out of the engine block, being assembly.
careful not to damage the journals.
15. To avoid mix-up on reassembly, mark each piston/
connecting rod assembly with its cylinder number.
NOTE: The existing number on the connecting rod

does not indicate its position in the engine block, it
indicates the rod bore size.
11. Remove the upper bearing halves f r o m the

connecting rods, and set them aside with their
respective caps.
7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft Inspection
Out-of-Round and Taper Straightness
1. Remove the crankshaft f r o m the engine block 6. Place the V-blocks on a surface plate.
(see page 7-12).
7. Check the total runout w i t h the crankshaft
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages w i t h pipe supported on V-blocks.
cleaners or a suitable brush.
8. Measure the runout on all of the main journals.
3. Clean the keyway slot and the threaded holes for Rotate the crankshaft t w o complete revolutions.
damage. The difference between measurements on each
journal must not be more than the service limit.
4. Measure the out-of round at the middle of each rod
and the main journal in t w o places. The difference Crankshaft Total Runout
between measurements on each journal must not Standard (New): 0.03 mm (0.0012 in.) max.
be more than the service limit. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Journal Out-of-Round
1 r
5. Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and the
main journal. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
than the service limit.
Journal Taper
7-14
Block and Piston Inspection
1. Remove the crankshaft and the pistons (see page 4. Measure the wear and taper in direction X and Y at
7-12). three levels in each cylinder as shown. If
measurements In any cylinder are beyond the
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. oversize bore service Limit, replace the engine
block. If the engine block Is to be rebored, refer to
3. Measure the piston skirt diameter (A) at a point step 7 after reboring. .
13 m m (0.5 in.) f r o m the bottom of the skirt.
Cylinder Bore Size
Piston Skirt Diameter Standard (New): 73.00—73.02 mm
Standard (New): 72.98—72.99 mm (2.8740-2.8748 in.)
(2.8732-2.8736 in.) Service Limit; 73.07 mm (2.8767 in.)
Service Limit: 72.97 mm
(2.8728 in.) Oversize
Oversize Piston Skirt Diameter 0.25; 7 3 . 2 5 - 7 3 . 2 7 mm (2.8839-2.8846 in.)

0.25: 73.23-73.24 mm (2.8831 - 2 . 8 8 3 5 in.)
Reboring Limit: 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) max.
Bore Taper
Limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
(cont'd)
7-15
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection (cont'd)
5. Hone any scored or scratched cylinder bores. 7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance
6. Check the top of the engine block for warpage. is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the
Measure the along the edges and across the center piston and the engine block for excessive wear.
as s h o w n .
Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance
Engine Block Warpage Standard (New): 0.010—0.040 mm
Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. (0.0004-0.0016 in.)
Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
|<; S E R V I C E LIMIT
0 . 0 5 m m ( 0 . 0 0 2 in.)
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing
1. Measure the cylinder bores (see page 7-15). 3. W h e n honing is complete, thoroughly clean the
If the engine block is to be reused, hone the engine block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinders and remeasure the bores. Only a scored cylinder bores w i t h hot soapy water, then dry and
or scratched cylinder bore must be honed. oil t h e m immediately to prevent rusting.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and a fine NOTE: Never use solvent, it will only redistribute
(400 grit) stone in a 60 degree cross-hatch pattern. the grit on the cylinder walls.
NOTE: 4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the

• Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer stone, cylinder bores after honing the engine block to the
such as Sunnen, A m m c o , or equivalent. service limit, rebore the engine block. Some light
• Do not use stones that are w o r n or broken. vertical scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is
not deep enough to catch your fingernail and does
not run the full length of the bore.
7-17
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement

Special Tools Required 3. Assemble and adjust the length of the piston pin
• Piston base 07973-6570500 driver head and shaft to 57 m m (2.2 in.).
• Piston base spring 07973-6570600
5 7 m m (2.2 in.)
• Piston pin base insert 07973-6890400
• Piston base head 07PAF-0010400
• Pilot collar 07973-6890300
• Piston base head insert 07PAF-0010500
•Adjustable piston pin driver shaft 07973-6890200
•Adjustable piston pin driver head 07973-6570201
Disassembly
1. Assemble the piston base (A), piston base spring

07973-6570201 07973-6890200
(B), piston pin base insert (C), and piston base head
(D) as s h o w n .
With the arrow on top of the piston pointing up,
07PAF-0010400
place the piston assembly (A) on the piston base (B)
07973-6890400
Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the
piston against the piston base head inserts (C) as
shown.
07973-6570500
07973-6570600
2. Temporarily install the pilot collar over the piston

pin base insert (A), and adjust the piston base head
inserts as s h o w n , then tighten the screws (B).
Remove the pilot collar.
07973-6890300 07PAF-0010500
5. Press the pin (D) out w i t h the piston pin driver (E),
the pilot collar (F), and a hydraulic press.
1 mm
7-18
Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin
diameter and the piston pin hole diameter In the
NOTE: Inspect the piston, the piston pin, and the .piston.
connecting rod w h e n they are at room temperature.
Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. Standard (New): 0.010—0.018 mm
(0.0004-0.0007 in.)
Piston Pie Diameter
(0.7085-0.7087 in.)
2. Zero the dial Indicator to the piston pin diameter.
4. Check the difference between the piston pin

diameter and the connecting rod small end
diameter.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance

(0.0007-0.0014 in.)
(cont'd)
7-19
Engine Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (cont'd)
Reassembly 2. Insert the pilot collar (A) into the piston and the
connecting rod.
1. Assemble the piston w i t h the arrow (A) pointing up
and the connecting rod w i t h the embossed marks
(B) on the same side.
3. With the arrow on top of the piston and the

embossed mark on the connecting rod facing up,
place the piston assembly (B) on the piston base (C).
Be sure you position the recessed flat area of the
piston against the piston base head inserts (D) as
shown.
4. Press the pin (E) in w i t h the piston pin driver (F) and
a hydraulic press.
7-20
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove the piston f r o m the engine block (see page 4. Using a piston, push a new ring (A) into the
7-12). cylinder bore 15—20 m m (0.6—0.8 in.) f r o m the
bottom.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (B).
1 5 — 2 0 mm ( 0 . 3 — 0 . 8 in.)
3. Clean all the ring grooves thoroughly w i t h a
squared-off broken ring, or a ring groove cleaner
w i t h a blade to fit the piston grooves. File d o w n the 5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) w i t h a feeler
blade, if necessary. The top ring grooves are gauge:
1.0 m m (0.04 in.) w i d e , the second ring groove is
1.2 m m (0.05 in.) w i d e , and the oil ring groove is • If the gap is too small, check to see if y o u have
2.0 m m (0.08 in.) wide. Do not use a wire brush to the proper rings for your engine.
clean the ring grooves, or cut the ring grooves • If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
deeper with the cleaning tool. diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-15).
If the bore is over the service limit, the engine
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated f r o m the block must be rebored.
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
Piston Ring End -Gap
Top Ring:
(0.006-0.012 in.)
Second Ring:
(0.014-0.020 in.)
Oil Ring:
(0.008-0.028 in.)
(cont'd)
7-21
Engine Block
Piston Ring Replacement (cont'd)
6. Install the rings as shown. The top ring (A) has a 7. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
Z1R mark and the second ring (B) has a R mark. The ring-to-groove clearances:
manufacturing marks (C) must be facing upward.
Top Ring Clearance
(0.0025-0.0035 in.)
Second Ring Clearance

(0.0012-0.0022 in.)
8. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they

do not bind.
9. Position the ring end gaps as shown:

Piston Ring Dimensions:
About 9 0 °
T o p Ring (Standard) OIL RING G A P S E C O N D RING G A P
A : 2 . 3 m m (0.09 in.)
B: 1.0 m m (0.04 in.)
S e c o n d Ring (Standard) About 45 1
A : 3.0 m m (1.2 in.)

B: 1.2 m m (0.05 in.)
T O P R I N G G A P and OIL RING G A P

SPACER RING GAP
P I S T O N PIN
7-22
Piston Installation
If the Crankshaft is Already Installed 6. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and
check the connecting rod-to-rod journal alignment
1. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for before pushing the piston into place.
each cylinder.
7. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the plastigage (see page 7-8).
ring compressor, and the cylinder bore.
8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-24).
3. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is 9. Apply new engine oil to the bolt threads, then
securely in place. install the rod caps w i t h bearings. Tighten the bolts
to 10 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft).
4. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly w i t h
the arrow (A) facing the cam chain side of the 10. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 °.
engine.
NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
back to step 7 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
back to the specified angle.
5. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the

cylinder, and tap it in using the w o o d e n handle of a
hammer (A).
Maintain d o w n w a r d force on the ring compressor
(B) to prevent the rings f r o m expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
(cont'd)
7-23
Engine Block
Piston Installation (cont'd) Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection
If the Crankshaft is-Not installed 1. Measure the diameter.of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B w i t h a micrometer.
1. A p p l y new engine oil to the piston, Inside of the
30 mm
ring compressor, and the cylinder bore. (1.18 in.)
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then Install the

ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
securely in place.
3. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly w i t h

the arrow (A) facing the cam chain side of the
engine.
'A 2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point

A and point B.
Point A—Point B = Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter
Specification: 0—0.05 mm (0—0.002 in.)
4. Position the piston/connecting rod assembly in the
cylinder, and tap it In using the w o o d e n handle of a 3. If the difference in diameter is out of tolerance,
hammer (A). replace the connecting rod bolt.
Maintain d o w n w a r d force on the ring compressor
(B) t o prevent the rings f r o m expanding before
entering the cylinder bore.
5. Position all pistons at top dead center (TDC).
7-24
Crankshaft Installation
Special Tools Required 11. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 10 N-m
-Driver 07749-0010000 ' (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft).
• Oil seal driver attachment 07ZAD-PNA0100
12. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 °.
1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance w i t h
plastigage (see page 7-8). NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if y o u
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage back to step 7 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
(see page 7-6). back to the specified angle.
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and

the connecting rods.
4. Apply new engine oil to the inside of the main

bearings and the rod bearings.
5. Hold the crankshaft so rod journal No. 2 and rod

journal No. 3 are straight up, then lower the
crankshaft into the engine block.
6. Apply new engine oil to the thrust washer surfaces.

Install the thrust washers (A) in the No. 4 journal of
the engine block.
13. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the
bearing cap mating surfaces.
14. Clean and dry the bearing cap mating surfaces.
15. Apply a 1.5 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket, P/N

08717- 0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0003, or
08718- 0009, along the broken lines (A). Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
; NOTE:
7. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-24). component must be installed w i t h i n 4 minutes.
8. Apply new engine oil to the threads of the liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
connecting rod bolts. residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
9. Seat the rod journals into the connecting rod No. 1

and the connecting rod No. 4. Line up the mark (B)
on the connecting rod and cap, then install the caps
and bolts finger-tight.
10. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise, and seat the rod

journals into the connecting rod No. 2 and the
connecting rod No. 3. Line up the mark on the
connecting rod and cap, then install the caps and
bolts finger-tight.
(cont'd)
7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft Installation (cont'd)
16. Put the bearing cap on the engine block. 23. Use the driver and the oil seal driver attachment to
drive a new crankshaft oil seal squarely into the
17. Apply new engine oil t o the threads of the bearing engine block to the specified installed height.
cap bolts.
18. Tighten the bearing cap bolts in sequence to 07749-0010000

25 N-m (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibfft).
07ZAD-PNA0100
24. Measure the distance between the crankshaft (A)

@ ® © and the oil seal (B).
19. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 40 ' Oil Seal Installed Height: 7—8 mm (0.28—0.31 in.)
40 ° 7—8 mm
( 0 . 2 8 - 0 . 3 1 in.)
20. Clean the excess liquid gasket off the engine block.
2 1 . Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the

crankshaft oil seal.
22. Apply a light coat of new engine oil t o the lip of the
crankshaft oil seal.
7-26
Oil Pan Installation
25. Install the dowel pins (A) and a new O-ring (B) on 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the oil pan
the oil pump (C), then align the inner rotor with the mating surfaces, the bolts, and the bolt holes.
crankshaft, and install the oil pump.
2. Clean and dry the oil pan mating surfaces and the
O-ring'groove.
3. Install the dowel pins (A), and install the new

O-ring (B) and the oil pan gasket (C) on the oil pan.
6x 1.0 m m
10 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
4. A p p l y liquid gasket, P/N 08718-0001, or
26. Install the oil screen (D) with a new gasket (E). 08718-0009, evenly to the engine block mating
surface of the oil pan and to the inside edge of the
27. Install the cylinder head (see page 6-45). threaded bolt holes. Install the component within 5
minutes of applying the liquid gasket.
28. Install the cam chain (see page 6-16).
NOTE:
29. Install the IMA motor housing (see page 12-195). • A p p l y a 1.5 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket
along the broken line (A).
30. Install the engine/IMA motor/transmission • A p p l y a 5.0 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket to
assembly (see page 5-12). the shaded area (B).
NOTE; When any crankshaft or connecting rod component must be installed w i t h i n 4 minutes.
bearing is replaced, run the engine at idle until it • If too much time has passed after applying the
reaches normal operating temperature, then liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
continue to run it for about 15 minutes. residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
(cont'd)
7-27
Engine Block
Oil Pan Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the oil pan. 8. Install the lower torque rod bracket mounting bolts.
NOTE; Raise the oil pan carefully not to damage

IMA motor (resolver stator).
6. Tighten the bolts in three steps. Wipe off the excess

liquid gasket on the each side of the crankshaft
pulley and the flywheel.
Specified Torque
©: 24 N m (2.4 kgf-m, 17 Ibf-ft)
® - @ : 12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
12 x 1.25 m m
7 4 N m (7.5 k g f - m , 5 4 I b f f t )
Replace.
9. Install the dipstick tube (A) w i t h a new O-ring (B),

then install the mounting bolt (C) and the harness
clamps (D).
@ ® © © ® ®
7. Tighten the t w o bolts securing the transmission.
7-28
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil
Seal Installation - In Car
10. If the engine is still in the vehicle, do the following
steps.
11. Using the front subframe adapter (see step 9 on •Driver 07749-0010000
page 5-14), then loosely install the new front • Oil seal driver attachment 07ZAD-PNA0100
subframe mounting bolts (see step 11 on page
5-14). 1. Remove the IMA motor housing (see page 12-195).
12. Align the reference marks w i t h the edge of the 2. Remove the transmission end crankshaft oil seal.
body, then tighten the mounting bolts (see step 12
on page 5-15). 3. Clean and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.
13. Tighten the mid stiffener mounting bolts (see step 4. Apply a light coat of new engine oil around the
14 on page 5-15). crankshaft oil seal.
14. Install the lower torque rod mounting bolts (see 5. Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the
step 15 on page 5-15). crankshaft and to the lip of the crankshaft oil seal.
15. Remove the engine support hanger and the 6. Using the driver and the oil seal driver attachment,
universal lifting eyelet. drive in the crankshaft oil seal until the driver
attachment bottoms against the engine block. Align
16. Connect the steering gearbox harness connectors the hole in the driver attachment w i t h the pin on the
(see step 22 on page 5-16). crankshaft.
07749-0010000
17. Connect the suspension lower arm ball joints
(see page 18-20).
18. Connect the front stabilizer links (see page 18-25).
19. Install the under-floor three way catalytic converter

( T W O (see step 26 on page 5-16).
20. Install the intake manifold bracket and the harness

clamp (see step 8 on page 9-6).
21. Install the A/C compressor, then connect the A/C 7. Measure the distance between the crankshaft (A)
compressor clutch connector (see step 38 on page and the oil seal (B).
5-18).
Oil Seal Installed Height: 7—8 mm (0.28—0.31 in.)
22. Install the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly
(see page 10-12).

25. Install the steering joint bolt (see step 35 on page

5-18), then install the steering wheel (see page
17-9).
26. After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes before 8. Clean any excess grease off the crankshaft, and
filling the engine oil. check that the oil seal lip is not distorted.
27. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-6). 9. Install the IMA motor housing (see page 12-195).
7-29
Engine Block
Sealing Bolt Installation
NOTE: W h e n installing the sealing bolt, always use a
new washer.
24 x1.5 mm Replace.
5 4 N-m
15.5 kgf-m, 40 Ibf-ft)
7-30
Engine Mechanical
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ..... . 8-2
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram .. 8-5
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting (Open) 8-6
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting (Short) ... 8-7
Oil Pressure Switch Test .................. 8-8
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement 8-8
Oil Pressure Test 8-9
Engine Oil Replacement 8-10
Engine Oil Filter Replacement 8-11
Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement 8-12
Oil Pump Overhaul 8-13
Oil/Air Separator Installation 8-16
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty
® 07AAA-PLCA100 Oil Filter Wrench
© 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
(D 07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
®-i 07406-0020201 A/T Pressure Hose 1
®-2 07406-0070301 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel J
®-3 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 1.
®-4 07MAJ-PY40120 .A/T Pressure Hose, Adapter 1
®-1,®-2, ®-3, ®-4
8-2
Engine Lubrication
Symptom Diagnostic procedure ^s© check for
Excessive engine oil consumption 1. Verify the engine oil filler cap, the oil drain bolt, Check the
and the oil filter are tight. maintenance
2. Check for oil leaks. records, w o r n out
3. . Check for w o r n valve guide(s) (see page 6-39) or engine oil will burn
w o r n valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-39). off at a highter rate
4. Check for a damaged or w o r n piston ring(s)
(see page 7-21).
5. Check for damaged or w o r n engine internal parts
(cylinder wall, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-15).
Low oil pressure indicator does not 1. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit An open in the
come on w i t h the ignition switch in troubleshooting (Open) (see page 8-6). wire between the
ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). gauge control
module (TACH)
and the oil
pressure switch
Low oil pressure indicator stays on 1. Check the engine oil level. A wire shorted to
2. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit ground between
troubleshooting (Short) (see page 8-7). the gauge control
3. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). module (TACH)
4. Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-9). and the oil
5. Check the oil filter for clogging. pressure switch
6. Check the oil screen for clogging.
7. Check the relief valve.
8. Test the oil p u m p (see page 8-14).
8-4
Low OS! Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
D2
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE (TACH)
CANH
LOW
F-CAN OIL /
CANL TRANSCEIVER PRESSURE (
INDICATOR
i — T WARNING
CPU DRIVER
CIRCUIT
WHT RED
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

oJ (Closed: Lost pressure)
Engine Lubrication
Low Oil Pressure indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (OpenJ
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). OIL P R E S S U R E PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

SWITCH CONNECTOR
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does OPSW
(YEL/RED)
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit OPSW
(see page 11-213). {YEL/RED) h 12 3 I 4 M 6 7 8 l / l
10 / 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
/
21 23 / 25
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,
26 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing |36|/ 42 43(441
w i t h this test.
W i r e side of
5. Check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the PGM-FI female terminal T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is ON indicated? Is there continuity?
YES—Replace the gauge control module (TACH) Y E S — U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest
(see page 2 2 - 2 5 5 ) . • software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
N O — G o t o step 6. symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then check the
oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). NO—Repair open in the wire between the oil
pressure switch and PCM connector terminal B7.B
Is the oil pressure switch OK?
NO—Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).

m
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and j u m p the

SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM

f r o m damage.
8. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P) and the oil

pressure switch connector.
8-6
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 10. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II), and j u m p the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0).
NOTE; This step must be done to protect the PCM
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle f r o m damage.
-and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
(see page 11-213).
12. Check for continuity between the oil pressure
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC Is present, switch connector and body ground.
.diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing
with this test. • •
OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH C O N N E C T O R
5. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE

SWITCH in the PGM-FI DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
1
Is OFF indicated? OPSW
(YEL/RED)
YES—Replace the gauge control module (TACH)

(see page 2 2 - 2 5 5 ) . •
NO—Go to step 6.
W i r e side of female terminal
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector Is there continuity?

(see page 8-8).
YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between
8. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE the oil pressure switch and PCM connector terminal
SWITCH In the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS. B7.B
Is OFF indicated? NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
~ YES—Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then go good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
to step 9. symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
NO—-Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then go
to step 10.
9. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).
Is the oil pressure switch OK?
YES—Do the oil pressure test (see page 8-9).
NO—Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).
8-7
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Remove the front undercover and the splash shield 1. Remove the front undercover and the splash shield
(see step 21 on page 5-5). (see step 21 on page 5-5).
2. Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly 2. Remove the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly
(see page 10-12). (see page 10-12).
3. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting 3. Remove the A/C compressor without disconnecting
the A/C hoses (see step 27 on page 5-6). the A/C hoses (see step 27 on page 5-6).
NOTE: Hang the A/C compressor with a rope. NOTE: Hang the A/C compressor w i t h a rope.
4. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A) 4. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector (A),
f r o m the oil pressure switch (B). then remove the oil pressure switch (B).
5. Check for continuity between the positive terminal

• (C) and the engine (ground). There should be 5. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the switch
continuity w i t h the engine stopped. There should and the switch mounting hole.
be no continuity w i t h the engine running.
6. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the
oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil
pressure switch.
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause

liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of
the new oil pressure switch.
7. Loosely install the compressor mounting bolts and

the compressor through bolt in the numbered
sequence s h o w n . Failure to f o l l o w this sequence
may reduce the life of the drive (see step 38 on
page 5-18).
8. Install the A/C condenser fan shroud assembly

(see page 10-12).

8-8
Oil Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A gauge registers no oil pressure. Repair the problem
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 before continuing.
• A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
• A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 3. A l l o w the engine to reach operating temperature
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A (fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should
•A/T pressure hose, adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 be:
If the low oil pressure indicator stays on w i t h the engine Engine Oil Temperature: 176 T (80 °C)
running, check the engine oil level. If the oil level is Engine Oil Pressure:
correct: At Idle: 2
70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm ,10 psi) min.
2
At 3,000 rpm: 340 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm ,50 psi) min.
1. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (A)
(see page 11-317), and install the oil pressure hose, 4. If the oil pressure is not w i t h i n specifications,
the pressure gauge adapter, the A/T pressure hose, inspect these items:
the A/T low pressure gauge w/panel, the A/T
pressure hose, 2,210 m m , and the A/T pressure • Blocking of oil filter.
hose, adapter, then reinstall the rocker arm oil • Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page
pressure sensor. 8-13).
• Blocking of oil screen.
• Inspect the oil pump (see page 8-14).
07ZAJ-S5AA200 07NAJ-P07010A
8-9
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil- Replacement
1. W a r m up the engine. 5. Refill the engine w i t h the recommended engine oil
(see page 3-2). -
2. Remove the five clips and the t w o bolts securing
the front undercover, then open the front Capacity
undercover. ' A t Oil Change:
B A
Replace. 39 N-m
(4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)
4. Reinstall the drain bolt w i t h a new washer (B).
8-10
Engine Oil Filter Replacement
7. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check Special Tools Required
for oil leakage. Oil filter wrench 07AAA-PLCA100
8. If the maintenance minder required engine o i l 1. Remove the five clips and the t w o bolts securing
replacement, reset the maintenance minder the front undercover, then open the front
(see page 3-4), and this procedure is complete. If undercover (see step 2 on page 8-10).
the maintenance minder did not require engine oil
replacement, go to step 9. 2. Remove the oil filter w i t h the oil filter wrench.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Inspect the filter to make sure the rubber seal is not
stuck to the oil filter seating surface of the engine.
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). 4. Inspect the threads (A) and the rubber seal (B) on
the new filter. Clean the seat on the oil pan, then
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter
rubber seal. Use only filters w i t h a built-in bypass
12. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle system.
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
(see page 11-213).
13. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL w i t h the

HDS.
14. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES w i t h the HDS.
15. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the ADJUSTMENT

w i t h the HDS.
16. Select RESET in the SERVICE REMINDER with the

HDS.
17. Select RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with the 5. Install the oil filter by hand.
HDS.
6. After the rubber seal seats, tighten the oil filter
NOTE; If y o u changed the ATF at the same time clockwise w i t h the oil filter wrench.
w i t h the engine oil, select RESETTING THE ENGINE
OIL LIFE A N D ATF w i t h the HDS instead. Tighten: 3/4 Turn Clockwise
Tightening Torque: 12 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 ibf-ft)
07AAA-PLCA100
(cont'd)
8-11
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Filter Replacement Oil Filter Feed Pipe Replacement
(cont'd)
1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-11).
7. If four numbers or marks (1 to 4 or • to • • • • ) 2. Remove the oil filter feed pipe.

are printed around the outside of the filter, y o u can
use the f o l l o w i n g procedure to tighten the filter.
• Spin the filter on until its seal lightly seats against

the oil pan, and note which number or mark Is at
the bottom.
• Tighten the filter by turning It clockwise
three numbers or marks f r o m the one you noted.
For example, If number 2 is at the bottom w h e n
t h e seal Is seated, tighten the filter until the
number 1 comes around the bottom.
3. Install the t w o 20 x 1.5 m m nuts (A) onto the new oil

filter feed pipe. Hold the nut w i t h a w r e n c h , then
tighten the other nut.
Number when rubber N u m b e r after t i g h t e n i n g .

seal Is seated.
4. Tighten the oil filter feed pipe to 74 N-m (7.5 kgf-m,
54 Ibf-ft), then remove the nuts f r o m the oil filter
Number or 1 2 3 4 feed pipe.
Mark w h e n or or or or
rubber seal • ••• 5. Install the oil filter (see page 8-11).
is seated
Number or 4 1 2 3
Mark after or or or or
tightening •••• w
8. After Installation, fill the engine w i t h oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than 3
minutes, then check for oil leakage.
8-12
Oil Pomp Overhaul
Exploded View
O-RING
Replace.
PUMP HOUSING
m
kgf-m, 4 Ibf-ft)
OIL P U M P C O V E R
OUTER ROTOR
INNER ROTOR
RELIEF VALVE
Valve must slide freely
in h o u s i n g bore.
Replace if s c o r e d .
SPRING
SEALING BOLT
3 9 N-m (4.0 kgf-m, 29 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
8-13
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Oil Pump Removal Oil Pump Inspection
1. Remove the c a m chain (see page 6-14). 1. Remove the screws f r o m the pump housing, then
separate the housing and the cover.
2. Remove the oil screen (A), then remove the oil
p u m p (B). 2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance
between the inner rotor (A) and the outer rotor (B).
If the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the oil pump.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

Standard (New); 0 . 0 2 - 0 . 1 4 mm (0.001-0.006 In.)
Service Limit: 0.20 mm {0.008 in.)
3. Check the pump housing-to-rotor axial clearance

between the rotor (A) and the p u m p housing (B). If
the p u m p housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the oil pump.
Pump Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance

Standard (New); 0.02—0.08 mm (0.001—0.002 in.)
8-14
4. Check the p u m p housing-to-outer rotor radial Oil Pump Installation
clearance between the outer rotor (A) and the
pump housing (B). If the p u m p housing-to-outer 1. Install the dowel pins (A) and a new O-ring (B) on
rotor radial clearance exceeds the service l i m i t the oil p u m p (C), then align the inner rotor w i t h the
replace the oil pump. crankshaft, and install the oil pump.
Pump Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

Standard (New): 0.10—0.18 mm (0.004—0.007 in.)
10 N m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
5. Inspect both rotors and the pump housing for 2. Install the oil screen (D) w i t h a new gasket (E).
scoring or other damage. Replace parts, if
necessary. 3. Install the cam chain (see page 6-16).
6. Apply liquid thread lock to the pump housing

screws, then install the oil p u m p cover.
7. Check that the oil pump turns freely.
8-15
Engine Lubrication
Oil/Air Separator Installation
1. Clean and dry the oil/air separator mating surfaces,
the bolts, and the bolt holes.
2. A p p l y a 1.5 m m w i d e bead of the liquid gasket, P/N

08717- 0004, 08718-0001, 08718-0003, or
08718- 0009, along the broken line (A). Install the
component w i t h i n 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
• If too much t i m e has passed after applying the
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket
3. Install the oil/air separator.
NOTE: Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the

engine w i t h oil.
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
8-16
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation 9-2
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement 9-8
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
RESONATOR
BRACKET 6 x 1.0 m m 8 x 1.25 m m
10 N m 24 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft) (2.4 k g f - m , 17 Ibf-ft)
EGR CHAMBER COVER
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
EGR VALVE GUARD \ GASKET

BRACKET \ Repl
EXHAUST GAS
RECIRCULATION
(EGR) V A L V E
8 x 1.25 m m
24 N m
(2.4 k g f - m , 17 Ibf-ft)
GASKET
Replace.
GASKET
Replace.
INTAKE MANIFOLD
R e p l a c e if c r a c k e d o r
if t h e m a t i n g s u r f a c e s
are d a m a g e d .
8 x 1.25 m m
24 N m
(2.4 k g f m , 17 Ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 m m
24 N-m
(2.4 k g f - m , 17 Ibf-ft) THROTTLE BODY
GASKET
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE Replace.
P R E S S U R E (MAP) S E N S O R
INTAKE MANIFOLD THROTTLE FLANGE PLATE

CHAMBER
8 x 1.25 m m
INTAKE MANIFOLD 24 N m
BRACKET (2.4 k g f m , 17 Ibf-ft)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
9-2
Removal 11. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 12. Disconnect the water bypass h o s e (A) and the
vacuum hose (B), and the throttle actuator
2. Remove t h e engine cover (see step 6 on page 5-3). connector (C).
3. Remove the resonator (see page 11-371).
5. Remove t h e air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370).
6. Remove the front grille cover.
13. Disconnect the water bypass hose (A).

(see step 21 o n p a g e 5-5).
10. Remove the intake manifold bracket bolts (A) and

the A/C compressor harness clamp (B).
(cont'd)
9-3
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
14. Disconnect the EGR valve connector (A), the intake 16. Disconnect the positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
manifold sub-harness connector (B), and the clamp hose (A).
(C), then remove the ground cables (D).
17. Remove the intake manifold assembly.

15. Disconnect the fuel injector connectors (A), rocker
arm oil control valve connectors (B), and the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor connector (C), then remove
the engine wire harness f r o m the brackets (D).
9-4
Installation 3. Install the engine wire harness to the brackets (A),
then connect the fuel injector connectors (B), rocker
1. Install the intake manifold assembly (A) and tighten arm oil control valve connectors (C) and rocker arm
the bolts/nuts in a crisscross pattern in three steps, oil pressure sensor connector (D).
beginning w i t h the inner bolt. Use a new gasket (B).
yS x 1.25 m m
/ 2 4 N-m
y {2.4 k g f - m , 17 Ibf-ft)
4. Connect the EGR valve connector (A), the intake

manifold sub-harness connector (B), and the clamp
2. Connect the PCV hose (A). (C), then install the ground cables (D).
(cont'd)
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
5. Connect the water bypass hose (A). 8. Install the intake manifold bracket bolts (A), then
install the A/C compressor harness clamp (B).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
24 N m
6. Connect the water bypass hose (A) and the vacuum

hose (B), and the throttle actuator connector (C).
A
6x 1.0 mm
10 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 ibf-ft)

12. Install the front grille cover.
9-6
14. Install the intake air duct (see step 51 on page 5-20).
15. Install the resonator (see page 11-371).
16. Install the engine cover (see step 53 on page 5-21).
17. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
18. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and

connectors are installed correctly.

the air f r o m the cooling system with the heater
- valve open (see step 9 on page 10-7).
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts w h e n reassembling.
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N - m (2.2 kgf m, 18 ibf-ft)
Replace.
T i g h t e n t h e bolts in steps,
alternating side-to-side.
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
1 0 3
Radiator Cap Test "
1
Radiator Test . 0-3
Fan Motor Test 10-4
1 0 4
Thermostat Test . "
1 0 - 5
Water Pump Inspection •
Water Pump Replacement 10-5
1 0 6
Coolant Check • "
1 0 - 6
Coolant Replacement •
1 0 - 8
Thermostat Replacement -
Drive Belt Inspection 10-9
Drive Belt Replacement 10-10
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Inspection 10-10
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Replacement 10-11
Radiator and Fan Replacement - 10-12
Fan Controls
Component Location Index • 10-16
Circuit Diagram • 10-18
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting ... 10-19
Cooling System
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE RADIATOR

(ECT) SENSOR 2 T e s t , p a g e 10-3
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 11-233 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 10-12
10-2
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test
1. Walt until the engine is cool, then carefully remove 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
the radiator cap (A). Wet the radiator cap seal w i t h the radiator cap, and fill the radiator w i t h engine
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially coolant to the base of the filler neck.
available pressure tester (B).
2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)
B to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93—123 kPa
2
( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 kgf/cm , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
2. Apply a pressure of 93—123 kPa

2
( 0 . 9 5 - 1 . 2 5 k g f / c m , 1 4 - 1 8 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks and a drop in

pressure. *
4. Remove the tester, and check for engine oil in the

c o o l a n t ^ n d / o r coolant in the engine oil.
5. Reinstall the radiator cap.
10-3
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test

1. Disconnect the 2P connectors f r o m the radiator and Replace the thermostat if it is stuck in the open position
the A/C condenser fan motors. at r o o m temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:

T e r m i n a l side of
male terminals
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.
Do not let the thermometer (B) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
2. Test each motor by connecting battery power t o

terminal No. 2 and ground to terminal No. 1.
3. If a motor fails to run or does not run smoothly,

replace it (see page 10-12).
2. Heat the water, and check the temperature w i t h a

thermometer. Check the temperature at which the
thermostat first opens, and at which it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat w h e n it is

fully open.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 8.0 m m (0.31 in.)
Starts Opening: 176—183 °F (80 —84 °C)
Fully Open: 203 °F (95 °C)
10-4
Water Pump Inspection Water Pump Replacement
1. Remove the front undercover and the splash shield 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
(see step 21 on page 5 - 5 ) .
2. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-10). (see step 21 on page 5-5).
3. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 10-11). 3. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-10).
4. Turn the water p u m p pulley counterclockwise. 4. Remove the water pump pulley mounting bolts.
Check that it turns freely. If it does not turn
smoothly, replace the water p u m p (see page 10-5).
NOTE: When you check the water pump, you may

see a small amount of " w e e p i n g " f r o m the bleed
holes (A). This is normal.
5. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 10-11).
6. Remove the five bolts securing the water pump,

then remove the water pump (A) w i t h water pump
pulley.
5. Install the auto-tensioner (see page 10-11).

7. Inspect and clean the O-ring groove and the mating

surface with the engine block.
8. Install the water p u m p w i t h a new O-ring (B) in the

reverse order of removal.
10. Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant, then bleed


10-5
Cooling System
Coolant Check Coolant Replacement
1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. 1. Wait until the engine is cool, then carefully remove
Make sure it is between the M A X mark (A) and the the radiator cap.
MIN m a r k ( B ) .
2. Start the engine. Set the heater temperature control
dial to m a x i m u m heat, then turn the ignition switch
to LOCK (0). Make sure the engine and radiator are
cool t o the touch.
3. Remove the five clips and the t w o bolts securing

the front undercover, then open the front
undercover (see step 2 on page 8-10).
4. Loosen the drain plug (A), and drain the coolant.
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it
between the MIN mark and the M A X mark, then
inspect the cooling system for leaks.
5. Remove the drain bolt (A) f r o m the rear side of the

engine block.
A
78 N m
(8.0 k g f - m , 5 8 Ibf-ft)
6. After the coolant has drained, reinstall the drain

bolt w i t h a new washer.
7. Tighten the radiator drain plug securely.
8. Remove, drain, and reinstall the coolant reservoir.
10-6
9. Loosen the air bleed bolt (A) on the connecting pipe 12. Loosely install the radiator cap.
joint.
13. Start the engine and let it run until it w a r m s up (the
A
10 N-m
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
14. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator,
and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
Type 2, if needed.
15. Put the radiator cap on securely, then run the

engine again, and check for leaks.
17. If the maintenance minder required engine coolant

replacement, reset the maintenance minder
(see page 3-4), and this procedure is complete. If
10. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 the maintenance minder did not require engine
(P/N OL999-9001) into the radiator and the coolant coolant replacement, g o t o step 18.
reservoir, and tighten the bleed bolt as soon as
coolant starts to run out in a steady stream. 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 19. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
into the radiator up to the base of the filler neck. ; data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
NOTE: | 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

• Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant ;
Type 2. Using a non-Honda coolant can result in 2 1 . Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
corrosion, causing the cooling system to and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does
malfunction or fail. not communicate, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
• Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a (see page 11-213).
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do
not add water. 22. Select GAUGES in the BODY ELECTRICAL w i t h the
HDS.
Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the coolant
reservoir capacity of 0.4 L (0.11 U S gal)) 23. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES w i t h the HDS.
At Coolant Change: 4.75 L (1.25 U S gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 6.0 L (1.59 U S gal) 24. Select SERVICE REMINDER in the ADJUSTMENT
w i t h the HDS.
25. Select RESET in the SERVICE REMINDER w i t h the

HDS.
26. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 5 RESET w i t h the

HDS.
10-7
Cooling System
Thermostat Replacement
Removal Installation
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 1. Remove all of the old liquid gasket f r o m the water
passage, thermostat housing mating surfaces, the
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370). bolts, and the bolt holes.
3. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A), the lower 2. Apply a 1.5 m m wide bead of the liquid gasket on
radiator hose (B), the heater hoses (C), and the the water passage, P/N 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
water bypass hose (D). 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, along the broken lines
(A). Install the component within 5 minutes of
applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
component must be installed with 4 minutes.
3. Install the rubber seal (A) on the thermostat (B),

then install the thermostat w i t h the pin (C) up.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
4. Install the water passage (D).
NOTE: After assembly, wait at least 30 minutes

before filling the engine with coolant.
10-8
Drive Belt Inspection
5. Connect the upper radiator hose (A), the lower 1. Inspect the belt for cracks or damage. If the belt is
radiator hose (B), the heater hoses (C), and the cracked or damaged, replace it.
water bypass hose (D).
2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within
the standard range (B) as s h o w n . If it is out of the
standard range, replace the drive belt (see page
10-10).

the air f r o m the cooling system w i t h t h e heater
10-9
Cooling System
Drive Belt Replacement Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Inspection
1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) to relieve tension f r o m
the drive belt (B), and remove the drive belt.
1. Check whether there is a change in the position of
the auto-tensioner indicator before starting the
engine and after starting the engine. If there Is a
change in the position, replace the auto-tensioner.
2. Check for abnormal noise f r o m the tensioner pulley.

2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal. If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley.
3. Remove th§ drive belt (see page 10-10).
4. Move the auto-tensioner w i t h i n Its limit w i t h the

wrench In the direction shown. Check that the
tensioner moves smoothly and without any
abnormal noise. If the tensioner does not move
, smoothly or you hear abnormal noise, replace the
tt
auto-tensioner.
10-10
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Replacement
5. R e m o v e t h e a u t o - t e n s i o n e r (see p a g e 10-11).
6. Install t h e t e n s i o n e r pulley. 1. Remove the drive belt (see page 10-10).
7. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using t w o 8 m m 2. Remove the water p u m p pulley bolts.
b o l t s (B) a n d a v i s e (C) as s h o w n . D o n o t clamp the
auto-tensioner itself.
3. Remove the auto-tensioner pulley.
10 x 1.25 m m
27 N m
(2.8 k g f - m , 2 0 Ibf-ft)
8. Set the torque wrench (D) on the pulley bolt.
9. Align the indicator (E) on the tensioner a r m w i t h the

center mark (F) on the tensioner base by using the
torque w r e n c h , and measure the torque. If the
torque value is out of specification, replace the
auto-tensioner.
NOTE: If the indicator exceeds the center mark,

recheck the torque.
Auto-Tensioner Spring Torque:

1 0 - 1 3 N m ( 1 . 0 - 1 . 3 k g m , 7 . 3 - 9 . 4 Ibf-ft)
(cont
10
Cooling System
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Radiator and Fan Replacement
Replacement (cont'd)
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
4. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner. 2. Remove the front wheels.

4. Remove the engine cover (see step 6 on page 5-3). -
5. Remove the resonator (see page 11-371).
8. Remove the front grille cover.
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N m
(2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
5. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner in the reverse

order of removal.
3. Remove the clips (A) and the radiator mount upper

bracket/cushion (B).
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
10-12
10. Disconnect the hood latch switch connector (A), 12. Remove the harness clamps (A), then disconnect
then remove the mounting bolts (B) and the clamps the radiator fan motor connector (B), A/C
(C). condenser fan motor connector (C), and the
harness clamps (D).
(1.0 k g f m , 7 . 2 ibf-ft)
11. Disconnect the reservoir hose (A) and remove the

mounting bolts (B), then remove the water filler (C).
13. Remove the bulkhead.
B
6x 1.0 m m
6 x 1.0 m m
10 N - m
10 N-m
( 1 . 0 k g f - m , 7 . 2 ibf-ft)
( 1 . 0 k g f - m , 7 . 2 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
10-13
Cooling System
Radiator and Fan Replacement (cont'd)

14. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A) and the 20. Disconnect the upper radiator hose (A) and the
lower radiator hose (B), then remove the water water filler hose (B).
lower pipe mounting bolts (C).
c
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N - m 21. Remove the mounting bolts (A), then pull up the
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
radiator fan shroud assembly (B) and the A/C
condenser fan shroud assembly (C).
A
6 x 1.0 m m
16. Drain the CVT fluid (CVTF) (see page 14-176). 7 N-m
(0.7 k g f - m , 5 Ibf-ft)
17. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) and the lower
radiator hose (B).
18. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)

sensor 2 connector (C), then remove the clamp (D).
10-14
22. Pull up the radiator (A), then remove the ECT
sensor 2 (B), the drain plug (C), the O-rings (D), and
the lower cushions (E).
B
10 x 1.25 m m
12 N - m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 ibf-ft)
23. Install the radiator in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the upper and lower cushions are set
securely.
24. Install the bulkhead in the reverse order of removal.

Apply touch-up paint to the bulkhead mounting
bolts.
25. Adjust the hood latch alignment (see page 20-129).

Fan Controls
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

(ECT) SENSOR 2
Replacement, page 11-233
10-16
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for
Engine overheats 1. Check the coolant level.
2. Check for any engine coolant leakage (from
gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on the radiator
and the A/C condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for damaged or deformed fan shroud.
6. Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan
relays (see page 22-64).
7. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
8. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect the water p u m p (see page 10-5).
10. Check for plugged or deteriorated radiator
hose.
11. Check for plugged heater core or hoses.
12. Check for damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan does not run at Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting Cleanliness and
high speed (see page 10-19). tightness of all
connectors
Both the radiator fan and the A/C Radiator and A/C condenser fan low speed circuit Cleanliness and
condenser fan do not run at low troubleshooting (see page 21-78). tightness of all
speed connectors
The A/C condenser fan does not A/C condenser fans high speed circuit Cleanliness and
run at high speed troubleshooting (see page 21-82). tightness of all
connectors
10-17
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX ^: '07 —09 models
y
1 2 UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
No. 1(100 A) No. 2 (50 A) No. 36 (10 A)
& 3 ( BAT \4 G12
No. 11
(15 A)
PGM-FI
RADIATOR
SUB
FAN
RELAY
DIODE
1
No. 7
, (20 A)
No. 15 No. 6
(7.5 A) (20 A) RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
A/C
-f- DIODE
FAN
CONTROL
RELAY
A/C
CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
F16
BLK BLU PUR
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)

SENSOR2
A/C
RADIATOR f\
M \ CONDENSER FAN l N
MOtOR 1
MOTOR
2(1}*
1
A4
10-18
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 7 (20 A) fuse In the under-hood fuse/ 4. Connect fan control relay 5P socket terminals No. 1
relay box and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under- and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
dash fuse/relay box.
FAN C O N T R O L R E L A Y 5P S O C K E T
Are the fuse(s)OK?
NO—Replace the fuse, if the fuse continues to blow, JUMPER WIRE

locate and repair the short in the circuit between
the under-hood fuse/relay box and the A/C 5 4 3
condenser fan motor, and the under-dash fuse/
relay box and the under-hood fuse/relay box. •
2. Remove the radiator fan relay and the fan control Terminal side of female terminals
relay f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box, and test
it (see page 22-64).
5. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals
Are the relays OK ? No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
Y E S — G o t o step 3. R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
NO—Replace the radiator fan relay and/or fan

control relay. •
1
JUMPER WIRE
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P 2
4 3
R A D I A T O R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
1 T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
2
4 3 Does the radiator fan run at high speed?
N O — G o t o step 6.
Terminal side of female terminals
Y E S - G o t o step 4.
NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay b o x . B
(cont'd)
10-19
Fan Controls
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
6. Remove the j u m p e r wires, then check for continuity 8. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P
between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No. 2 socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan motor 2P
and body ground. connector terminal No. 2.
f AIM OUIM I n U L r t C L H ! O r OVJ"L»3X!£ t i e r m m a i siae oi femaie muii'maia
1
BLK 2
4 3
BRN
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s R A D I A T O R F A N M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity ?
Y E S — G o t o step 7. . . Y E S — G o to step 9.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between fan control NO—Repair open in the wire between radiator fan
relay 5P socket terminal No. 2 and body ground. • relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No. 2.11
7. Test the radiator fan motor (see page 10-4).
Is the motor OK?
NO—Replace the radiator fan motor (see page

10-12).•
10-20
9. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan motor 2P
connector terminal No. 1. 11. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
socket terminal No. 3 and body g r o u n d .
RADIATOR F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
1
2
RADIATOR F A N M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the under-hood fuse/relay box and the Y E S — G o t o step 12. :
' .
radiator fan motor, the under-hood fuse/relay box
and body ground ( G 3 0 1 ) . • NO—Repair open in the wire between the under-
dash fuse/relay box and the under-hood fuse/relay
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between fan control box.fl
relay 5P socket terminal No. 1 and radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No. 1.B 12. Measure the voltage between fan control relay 5P
1
2
5 4 3
NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.M
(cont'd)
10-21
Fan Controls
#
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont d)
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 20. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P
socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal
14. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the A5.
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
i ermmai side ot temaie terminals

and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it does GRY
(see page 11-213).
17. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, then turn the

ignition switch to LOCK (0).
A/ / I 4 I5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM 20 21 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
f r o m damage. 36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)

19. Check for continuity between radiator fan relay 4P

socket terminal No. 4 and PCM connector terminal Is there continuity?
A4.
Y E S — U p d a t e the PCM (see page 11-236) if it does
not have the latest software, or substitute a known-
s y m p t o m goes away w i t h a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). •
NO—Repair open in the wire between fan control

relay 5P socket terminal No. 3 and PCM connector
terminal A 5 . i l
PUR
w / |4 | 5 |6 | T 8 I 9 |
10 / 12 13T14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21
/ 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 43 [441
NO—Repair open in the wire between radiator fan

relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and PCM connector
terminal AAM
10-22
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M (if fuel and emissions maintenance is required)
You must be familiar w i t h the IMA system before w o r k i n g around it. Make sure y o u have read the Service Precautions
uei and Emission
Fuel and Emissions Systems Fuel Supply System
Special Tools 11-2 Component Location Index 11-334
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 11-3 DTC Troubleshooting 11-336
DTC Troubleshooting Index .......................... 11-3 Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting 11-341
Symptom Troubleshooting Index 11-13 Fuel Pressure Relieving 11-345
System Description 11-15 Fuel Pressure Test 11-350
How to Set Readiness Codes 11-56 Fuel Line Inspection 11-352
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
PGM-FI System Precautions 11-354
Component Location Index 11-59 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
DTC Troubleshooting 11-61 Removal 11-355
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting 11-196 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 11-212 Installation 11-358
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting 11-213 Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation 11-361
Injector Replacement 11-228 Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement 11-363
A/F Sensor Replacement 11-230 Fuel Filter Replacement 11-363
Secondary H02S Replacement 11-230 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit ^ m ' m ^
CKP Sensor Replacement .............................. 11-231 Replacement 11-364 WJKy^<jg^
CMP Sensor Replacement 11-231 Fuel Pulsation Damper Replacement 11-364 m^\^3L^
MAP Sensor Replacement 11-232 Fuel Tank Replacement 11-365 g^^v^^^^^§
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor Replacement 11-232 Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test 11-366
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement 11-233 Low Fuel Indicator Test 11-367
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement 11-233
Knock Sensor Replacement .......................... 11-234 Intake Air System
ELD Replacement 11-235 Component Location Index 11-368
PCM Update 11-236 Throttle Body Test 11-369
PCM Replacement 11-238 Throttle Body Cleaning 11-370
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation 11-370
Electronic Throttle Control System Air Cleaner Element
Component Location Index 11-240 Inspection/Replacement 11-371
DTC Troubleshooting 11-241 Intake Air Resonator
APP Sensor Signal Inspection 11-277 Removal/Installation 11-371
Accelerator Pedal Module Throttle Body Removal/Installation 11-372
Removal/Installation 11-277 Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly 11-373
3-Stage i-VTEC System Catalytic Converter System

Component Location Index 11-279 Component Location Index 11-374
DTC Troubleshooting 11-280 DTC Troubleshooting „ 11-375
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter
.Removal/Installation 11-317 Removal/Installation
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor Under-floor Three Way Catalytic Converter
Removal/Installation 11-317 Removal/Installation
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Removal/Installation 11-318 EGR System
Idle Control System DTC Troubleshooting 11-380
Component Location Index 11-319 EGR Valve Replacement 11-392
DTC Troubleshooting 11-320
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 11-329 PCV System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Component Location Index 11-393
Troubleshooting 11-330 DTC Troubleshooting 11-394
Idle Speed Inspection 11-332 PCV Valve Inspection 11-396
PCM Idle Learn Procedure ............................. 11-333 PCV Valve Replacement 11-396
IWAP System
EVAP Canister Replacement 11-424
FTP Sensor Replacement 11-425
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement 11-425
EVAP Canister Purge Valve Replacement .... 11-426
EVAP Canister Filter Replacement ................ 11-426
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools
© 07AAA-SNAA100 Fuel Pump Module Locknut Wrench 1
© 07AAJ-S6MA150 Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 1
© 07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0—4 in.Hg 1
© 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
© . 07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
®-1 07406-0020201 A/T Pressure Hose 1
©-2 07406-0070301 A/T Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
®-3 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m 1
®-4 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Adapter 1
© 07406-004000B Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
11-2
General Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures If the MIL stays o n , connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side
The term intermittent failure means a system may have of the dashboard.
had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the malfunction
indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not come o n ,
check for poor connections or loose terminals at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out,
the original problem may have been intermittent.
Service Information
Periodically, new PCM software or new service

procedures may become available. Always check
online for the latest software or service information
related to the DTCs or symptoms you are
troubleshooting.
Opens and Shorts 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Open and short are c o m m o n electrical terms. An open 4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM
is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't go to the
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-213).
wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something w o n ' t work at all. With complex electronics 5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
(such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something Also check the freeze data and/or on-board
works, but not the way it's supposed to. snapshot data, and download any data found. Then
refer to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, and
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
System)
NOTE:
If the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on • Freeze data indicates the engine conditions w h e n
the first malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A). malfunction was detected.
• The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, on-board
. NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), and snapshot, current data, and other powertrain
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for control module (PCM) data.
15—20 seconds (see page 11-56). • For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are f o u n d , go to MIL troubleshooting

(see page 11-212).
If the MIL did not stay on

If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability
problem, do the s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
If you can't duplicate the DTC

Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the
PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not
continue through the procedure. To do so will only
result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced
PCM.
(cont'd)
11-3
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
HDS Clear Command PCM Reset
The PCM stores various specific data to correct the 1. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS while the engine is
system even if there is no electrical power such as stopped.
when the battery negative terminal or No. 19 Fl MAIN
(15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
failed parts should be cleared by using the CLEAR
C O M M A N D of the HDS, if parts are replaced. 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
30 seconds.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet
this purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and CKP 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and
pattern clear. DTC clear c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and readiness
codes. This must be done w i t h the HDS after 5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The PCM reset c o m m a n d erases all stored DTC codes, 6. Do the start clutch pressure control calibration
freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and procedure (see page 14-172).
all specific data to correct the system except CKP
pattern. If the CKP pattern data in the PCM was cleared, CKP Pattern Clear/CKP Pattern Learn
y o u must do the CKP pattern learn procedure. The CKP
pattern clear command erases only CKP pattern data. Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HDS)
This c o m m a n d is for repair of a misfire or the CKP
sensor. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
Scan Tool Clear Command
If you are using a generic scan tool to clear c o m m a n d s ,

be aware that there is only one setting for clearing the
PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time (CKP
pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes, freeze data,
on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you clear all
c o m m a n d s , you then need to do these procedures, in
this order: PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333);
CKP pattern learn procedure; Test-drive to set readiness
codes to complete (see page 11-56).
DTC Clear
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS while the engine is

stopped. 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM
and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-213).
30 seconds.
4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT v
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and MENU w i t h the HDS.
disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING w i t h the HDS,
and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
11-4
Learn Procedure (without the HDS) How to End a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator 1. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
fan comes on.
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) f r o m an engine speed 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm w i t h the
transmission in L. 4. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
3. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road; Decelerate NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system.
(with the throttle fully closed) f r o m an engine speed If you replace the PCM, it will have a different
of 5,000 rpm down to 3,000 rpm w i t h the immobilizer code. For the engine to start, you must
transmission in L. rewrite the immobilizer code w i t h the HDS.
4. Repeat step 2 and 3 several times.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait

30 seconds.
(cont'd)
11-5

How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 5. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the
Connectors PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above
the terminal you need to check.
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system for up to 30 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK (0). J u m p i n g the SCS line after turning
the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this function.
Disconnecting the PCM during this function, w i t h o u t
j u m p i n g the SCS line first, can damage the PCM.
2. Remove the cover (A).
6. Connect one side of the patch cord terminals (A) to

a commercially available digital multimeter (B),
and connect the other side (C) to a commercially
available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool
No. 3563 or equivalent) (D).
3. Lift up the under-hood fuse/relay box (D).
7. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at the terminal

test port f r o m the terminal side. Do not force the
E
tips into the terminals.
I NOTICE I
• For accurate results, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
4. Remove the coolant reservoir (E). Disconnect PCM probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
connectors A, B, and C. they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols incorrect measurement.
( A = 0 , B = A , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for • Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
identification. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
11-6
Substituting the PCM 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
CHECK, and follow the screen prompts.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation continue this procedure.
w i t h the latest HDS software version
• HDS pocket tester 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
• GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
software version 7. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
Any one of the above updating tools can be used.
NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute
a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures. 9. Remove the cover (A).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)

10. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM

and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-213). If
you are returning f r o m DLC circuit troubleshooting,
skip steps 5 and 6, and clean the throttle body after
substituting the PCM (see page 11-370).
4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-7
General Troubleshooting informatic f cont'd)
11. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C. OBD Status
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols The OBD status shows the current system status of
( A = 0 , B = A , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
identification, used to see if the repair was successfully completed.
The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed
12. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. as:
NOTE: If the IMA battery level indicator (BAT) on ° PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully
the gauge indicates zero level, start the engine, and finished.
hold it between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm w i t h o u t • FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
load (in P or N) until the IMA battery level indicator failed.
(BAT) indicates at least three segments. ° EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
13. Do the battery installation procedure (see page running.
22-63). • NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of
the enable conditions for the DTC.
NOTE: DTC P0630 VIN Not Programmed or
Mismatch may be stored because the VIN has not
been p r o g r a m m e d into the PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
15. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
16. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
17. Enter the immobilizer code that you got f r o m the i N ,

and use the PCM replacement procedure in the
HDS; it allows you to start the engine.
18. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software.
19. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
20. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean

the throttle body (see page 11-370).
22. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
23. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system or

the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
audio presets. Set the clock (on vehicle w i t h o u t
navigation).
11-8
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC T w o Drive Cycle Detection I t e m MIL Note
(MIL indication ) Detection
P0101 (50)
P0102(50) o Mass A i r Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem
Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit L o w Voltaqe
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-61)
11-62)
P0103(50) Mass A i r Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-65)
P0106(5) o M a n i f o l d A b s o l u t e Pressure ( M A P ) S e n s o r C i r c u i t R a n g e / ON (see page 11-67)
Performance Problem
P0107(3) M a n i f o l d A b s o l u t e Pressure ( M A P ) S e n s o r C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see p a g e 11-68)
P0108(3) M a n i f o l d A b s o l u t e Pressure ( M A P ) S e n s o r C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see p a g e 11-70)
P0111 (10) o Intake A i r T e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) S e n s o r C i r c u i t R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e ON (see p a g e 11-73)
Problem
P0112(10) Intake A i r T e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) S e n s o r C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see p a g e 11-74)
P0113(10) Intake A i r T e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) S e n s o r C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see p a g e 11-75)
P0116(86) o E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 C i r c u i t R a n g e / ON (see p a g e 11-78)
Performance Problem
P0117 (6) E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a q e ON (see p a g e 11-79)
P0118(6) E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see p a g e 11-80)
P0122 (7) T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r A C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see p a g e 11-241)
P0123(7) T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r A C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a q e ON (see p a g e 11-243)
P0125(86)
o E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 M a l f u n c t i o n / S l o w
Response
ON (see p a g e 11-83)
P0128(87) o Cooling System Malfunction ON (see page 11-84)

P0133(61) o A i r Fuel Ratio (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) M a l f u n c t i o n / S l o w R e s p o n s e ON (see page 11-85)
P0134(41) o A i r Fuel Ratio (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) H e a t e r S y s t e m M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see page 11-86)
P0135(41) A i r Fuel Ratio (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) H e a t e r C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see page 11-87)
P0137(63) S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)) ON (see page 11-91)
Circuit L o w Voltage
P0138(63) S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)) ON (see p a g e 11-93)
Circuit High Voltage
P0139(63) o S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)) ON (see p a g e 11-96)
S l o w Response
P0141 (65) S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2)) ON (see p a g e 11-97)
Heater C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n
P0171 (45) Fuel S y s t e m T o o L e a n ON (see page 11-101)
P0172(45) o Fuel S y s t e m T o o Rich ON (see page 11-101)
P0222 (7) T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r B C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a q e ON (see page 11-245)
P0223 (7) T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r B C i r c u i t H i q h V o l t a q e ON (see page 11-248)
P0300 (75) o R a n d o m Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-102)
and any
c o m b i n a t i o n of
the f o l l o w i n g :
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304 (74)
P0301 (71) No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-104)
P0302 (72) o No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-104)
P0303 (73) o No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-104)
P0304 (74)
P0325 (23) o No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
Knock Sensor Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-104)
11-113)
P0335 (4) C r a n k s h a f t P o s i t i o n (CKP) S e n s o r N o S i q n a l ON (see page 11-115)
P0339 (4) C r a n k s h a f t P o s i t i o n (CKP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t I n t e r m i t t e n t I n t e r r u p t i o n ON (see page 11-118)
P0351 (15) Intake S i d e I g n i t i o n C o i l P o w e r C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see page 11-119)
P0352 O 5 ) E x h a u s t S i d e I g n i t i o n Coil P o w e r C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see page 11-121)
P0365 (8) Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor N o Signal ON (see page 11-123)
P0369 (8) C a m s h a f t P o s i t i o n (CMP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t I n t e r m i t t e n t I n t e r r u p t i o n ON (see page 11-126)
P0401 (80) o E x h a u s t Gas R e c i r c u l a t i o n (EGR) I n s u f f i c i e n t F l o w ON (see page 11-380)
P0404O2) o E x h a u s t Gas R e c i r c u l a t i o n (EGR) V a l v e C i r c u i t R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e ON (see page 11-381)
Problem
P0406O2) E x h a u s t Gas R e c i r c u l a t i o n (EGR) V a l v e P o s i t i o n S e n s o r C i r c u i t H i g h ON (see p a g e 11-384)
Voltage
P0420 (67) o Catalyst S y s t e m Efficiency B e l o w T h r e s h o l d ON (see p a g e 11-375)
N O T E : T h e a b o v e DTCs are i n d i c a t e d w h e n t h e PGM-FI s y s t e m is s e l e c t e d in t h e H D S .

S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n DTCs c a u s e t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L is o n a n d n o DTCs are i n d i c a t e d in t h e PGM-FI s y s t e m , select t h e A / T
s y s t e m , a n d c h e c k f o r a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n DTCs.
* : T h e s e DTCs are i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e SCS line is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .
(cont'd)
11-
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd!
DTC T w o Drive C y c l e Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication) Detection
P0443 (92) E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) C a n i s t e r P u r g e V a l v e C i r c u i t ON (see p a g e 11-398)
Malfunction
P0451 (91) O Fuel T a n k P r e s s u r e (FTP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e P r o b l e m ON (see page 11-401)
P0452 (91) Fuel T a n k P r e s s u r e (FTP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-402)
P0453 (91) Fuel T a n k P r e s s u r e (FTP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-405)
P0455 (90)
o E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) S y s t e m L a r g e Leak D e t e c t e d
E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) S y s t e m V e r y S m a l l Leak D e t e c t e d
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-408)
11-408)
P0456 (90)
o
P0457 (90)
o E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) S y s t e m Leak D e t e c t e d / F u e l Fill Cap
Loose or Missing
ON (see page 11-412)
P0461 (121) Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e S e n d i n g U n i t ) R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e OFF (see p a g e 11-336)

Problem
P0462 (121) Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e S e n d i n g U n i t ) C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e OFF (see page 11-336)
P0463 (121) Fuel Level S e n s o r (Fuel G a u g e S e n d i n g U n i t ) C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e OFF (see page 11-338)
P0496 (92)
o E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) S y s t e m H i g h P u r g e F l o w D e t e c t e d ON (see page 11-414)
P0497 (90)
P0498O17)
o E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) S y s t e m L o w P u r g e F l o w D e t e c t e d
E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) C a n i s t e r V e n t S h u t V a l v e C i r c u i t L o w
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-414)
11-417)
Voltage
P0499 (117) E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) C a n i s t e r V e n t S h u t V a l v e C i r c u i t H i g h ON (see p a g e 11-420)
Voltage
Idle C o n t r o l S y s t e m R P M L o w e r T h a n E x p e c t e d ON (see page 11-320)
P0506 0 4 )
o
P0507 (14)
o Idle C o n t r o l S y s t e m R P M H i g h e r T h a n E x p e c t e d
C o l d S t a r t Idle A i r C o n t r o l S y s t e m P e r f o r m a n c e P r o b l e m
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-322)
11-127)
P050A(167)
o
P050B (167)
P0522 (22)
o Cold Start Ignition T i m i n g Control System Performance Problem
Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit L o w Voltage
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-129)
11-280)
P0523 (22) Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-283)
P0532 (191) A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit L o w Voltage OFF (see page 11-323)
r
P0533 0 9 1 ) A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit High Voltage OFF (see page 11-325)
P0563 (34) P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e (PCM) P o w e r S o u r c e C i r c u i t U n e x p e c t e d OFF (see page 11-132)
Voltage
P0602 (196) P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e (PCM) P r o g r a m m i n g E r r o r ON (see p a g e 11-134)
P0603(131) 1
P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e (PCM) I n t e r n a l C o n t r o l M o d u l e K e e p ON (see p a g e 11-135)
Alive M e m o r y (KAM) Error
P0606 (0) P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e (PCM) P r o c e s s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see p a g e 11-135)
P060A(131) P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e (PCM) ( A / T S y s t e m ) I n t e r n a l C o n t r o l ON (see p a g e 11-136)
Module Malfunction
P062F.O96) 2
P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e (PCM) I n t e r n a l C o n t r o l M o d u l e K e e p ON (see p a g e 11-135)
Alive M e m o r y (KAM) Error
P0630(139) VIN Not P r o g r a m m e d or Mismatch ON (see p a g e 11-136)
P0685(135)
o• P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e (PCM) P o w e r C o n t r o l C i r c u i t / I n t e r n a l
Circuit Malfunction
ON (see p a g e 11-137)
P1024(115) V a l v e Pause S y s t e m (VPS) S t i c k i n g O n OFF (see p a g e 11-286)

P1109 (13) B a r o m e t r i c P r e s s u r e (BARO) S e n s o r C i r c u i t O u t o f R a n g e H i g h ON (see p a g e 11-138)
P1116 (86)
o E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 1 R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e
Problem
ON (see p a g e 11-139)

S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n DTCs c a u s e t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . if t h e M I L is o n a n d n o DTCs are i n d i c a t e d i n t h e PGM-FI s y s t e m , select t h e A / T
* : T h e s e DTCs are i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e S C S line is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .

* 1:'06-08 m o d e l s
* 2:'09 model
11-10
DTC T w o Drive C y c l e Detection Item Note
(MIL indication) Detection
P1157(48) A i r Fuel R a t i o (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) A F S C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see page 11-141)
P1172 (61) A i r Fuel R a t i o (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) C i r c u i t O u t o f R a n g e H i g h ON (see page 11-143)
P1286(114)
P1287 (114)
o Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S e n s o r S t u c k L o w ON (see page 11-287)
P1288(114) o Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S w i t c h C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON

ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-289)
11-292)
P1289 (114) o Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S w i t c h C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
P128A(114)
o
o
Rocker A r m Oil Pressure S e n s o r S t u c k H i g h
V a l v e Pause S y s t e m (VPS) S t u c k OFF
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-295)
11-296)
P128B (114)
P1297 (20) o V a l v e Pause S y s t e m (VPS) M a l f u n c t i o n
Electrical L o a d D e t e c t o r (ELD) C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
ON
OFF
(see
(see
page
page
11-297)
11-144)
P1298 (20) Electrical L o a d D e t e c t o r (ELD) C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e OFF (see page 11-146)
P1454 (91) o Fuel T a n k Pressure (FTP) S e n s o r C i r c u i t R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e P r o b l e m ON (see page 11-421)
P1658 (40) E l e c t r o n i c T h r o t t l e C o n t r o l S y s t e m (ETCS) C o n t r o l Relay O N ON (see page 11-250)
Malfunction
P1659 (40) E l e c t r o n i c T h r o t t l e C o n t r o l S y s t e m (ETCS) C o n t r o l Relay OFF ON . (see p a g e 11-252)
Malfunction
P1683 (40) Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-256)
P1684 (40) Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-257)
P16D5(132) F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n (Internal M a l f u n c t i o n ) ON (see page 11-148)
P16D6 0 3 2 ) I M A - C A N M a l f u n c t i o n (Internal M a l f u n c t i o n ) ON (see page 11-148)
P2101 (40) E l e c t r o n i c T h r o t t l e C o n t r o l S y s t e m (ETCS) M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see page 11-258)
P2118(40) Throttle Actuator Current Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-260)
P2122 (37) A c c e l e r a t o r Pedal P o s i t i o n (ARP) S e n s o r A ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) ON (see page 11-262)
S e n s o r D) C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
P2123 (37) A c c e l e r a t o r Pedal P o s i t i o n # \ P P ) S e n s o r A ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) ON (see p a g e 11-265)
S e n s o r D) C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e
P2127 (37) A c c e l e r a t o r Pedal P o s i t i o n (y^PP) S e n s o r B ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) ON (see p a g e 11-266)
S e n s o r E) C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
P2128 (37) A c c e l e r a t o r Pedal P o s i t i o n (APP) C e n s o r B ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) ON (see p a g e 11-269)
S e n s o r E) C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e
P2135 (7) T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) S e n s o r A/B.lnc,orrect V o l t a g e C o r r e l a t i o n ON (see p a g e 11-271)
P2138 (37) A c c e l e r a t o r Pedal P o s i t i o n (APP) S e n s o r A / B ( T h r o t t l e P o s i t i o n (TP) ON (see p a g e 11-273)
S e n s o r D/E) I n c o r r e c t V o l t a g e C o r r e l a t i o n
P2176(40) T h r o t t l e A c t u a t o r C o n t r o l S y s t e m Idle P o s i t i o n Hot L e a r n e d ON (see p a g e 11-275)
P2183 0 9 2 )
o E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 2 C i r c u i t R a n g e /
Performance Problem
ON (see p a g e 11-149)
P2184(192) E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 2 C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-151)

P2185(192) E n g i n e C o o l a n t T e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) S e n s o r 2 C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-152)
P2195(48) A i r Fuel Ratio (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) S i g n a l S t u c k L e a n ON (see page 11-155)
P2227(13)
o B a r o m e t r i c Pressure ( B A R O ) S e n s o r C i r c u i t R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e
Problem
P2228(13) B a r o m e t r i c Pressure ( B A R O ) S e n s o r C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-157)

P2229(13) B a r o m e t r i c Pressure ( B A R O ) S e n s o r C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-158)
P2238(48) A i r Fuel R a t i o (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) A F S + C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-158)
P2252(48) A i r Fuel Ratio (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) A F S — C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-160)
P2270 (63)
o S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
C i r c u i t S i g n a l S t u c k Lean
P2271(63) ON (see p a g e 11-162)

o S e c o n d a r y H e a t e d O x y g e n S e n s o r ( S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2))
C i r c u i t S i g n a l S t u c k Rich
P2279O09) (see p a g e 11-394)
P2413(12) o Intake A i r S y s t e m Leak D e t e c t e d ON
o E x h a u s t Gas R e c i r c u l a t i o n (EGR) S y s t e m M a l f u n c t i o n ON (see p a g e 11-386)
N O T E : T h e a b o v e DTCs are i n d i c a t e d w h e n t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m is s e l e c t e d in t h e H D S .
S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n DTCs cause t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L is o n a n d n o DTCs a r e i n d i c a t e d in t h e PGM-FI s y s t e m , select t h e A / T
* : T h e s e DTCs a r e i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e SCS line is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .
(cont'd)
11-11
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

DTC T w o Drive C y c l e D e t e c t i o n Item MIL Note
(MIL indication') Detection
E v a p o r a t i v e E m i s s i o n (EVAP) C a n i s t e r V e n t S h u t V a l v e S t u c k C l o s e d ON
P2422(117)
o Malfunction
(see p a g e 11-421)
P2610O32) P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( P C M ) I g n i t i o n Off I n t e r n a l T i m e r ON (see p a g e 11-163)

Malfunction
VTEC S y s t e m Stuck O N
P2647
P2648
(114)
(21)
o Rocker A r m Oil C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d 2 C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
Oi\T^
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-301)
11-302)
P2849 (21) Rocker A r m Oil C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d 2 C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-303)
P2651 (114) V a l v e Pause S y s t e m (VPS) S t u c k OFF ON (see page 11-306)
P2652
P2653
014)
(38)
o V a l v e Pause S y s t e m (VPS) S t u c k O N
Rocker A r m Oil C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d 1 C i r c u i t L o w V o l t a g e
ON
ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-307)
11-308)
P2654 (38) Rocker A r m Oil C o n t r o l S o l e n o i d 1 C i r c u i t H i g h V o l t a g e ON (see page 11-310)
P2A00 (61)
o A i r Fuel Ratio (A/F) S e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) C i r c u i t R a n g e / P e r f o r m a n c e
Problem
ON
P3400(114)
110028(126)
o V a l v e Pause S y s t e m (VPS) S t u c k OFF
F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ( B U S - O F F ) ON
(see
(see
page
page
11-313)
11-164)
U 0 0 3 7 (112) I M A - C A N M a l f u n c t i o n (BUS-OFF) ON (see page 11-165)
U0110 0 2 6 ) F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ( P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( P C M ) - M o t o r C o n t r o l ON (see page 11-170)
Module (MCM))
U 0 1 1 1 (126) F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ( P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( P C M ) - B a t t e r y ON (see p a g e 11-175)
Condition M o n i t o r (BCM))
,110121 ( 1 2 6 ) * 3
F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ( P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( P C M ) - A n t i - L o c k OFF (see p a g e 11-177)
Brake S y s t e m ( A B S ) M o d u l a t o r - C o n t r o l U n i t )
U0122(126)* 4
F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ( P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( P C M ) - V S A OFF (see p a g e 11-179)
Modulator-Control Unit)
U 0 1 2 9 (126) F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ( P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( P C M ) - S e r v o U n i t ) OFF (see p a g e 11-181)
U0155(126) F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ( P o w e r t r a i n C o n t r o l M o d u l e ( P C M ) - G a u g e ON (see p a g e 11-183)
Control Module)
111205(112) IMA-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Motor ON (see p a g e 11-185)
Control Module (MCM))
111206(112) I M A - C A N M a l f u n c t i o n (Powertrain Control M o d u l e (PCM)-Battery ON (see p a g e 11-190)
Condition Monitor (BCM) Module)
U 1 2 0 7 (112) I M A - C A N M a l f u n c t i o n (Powertrain Control M o d u l e (PCM)-A/C OFF (see p a g e 11-192)
Compressor Driver)

S o m e a u t o m a t i c t r a n s m i s s i o n DTCs c a u s e t h e M I L t o c o m e o n . If t h e M I L is o n a n d n o DTCs a r e i n d i c a t e d in t h e P G M - F I s y s t e m , select t h e A / T
* : T h e s e DTCs a r e i n d i c a t e d b y a b l i n k i n g M I L w h e n t h e S C S line is j u m p e d w i t h t h e H D S .
* 3: W i t h A B S
* 4: W i t h V S A s y s t e m
11-12
Symptom) I troubleshooting Index
W h e n the vehicle has one of these s y m p t o m s , check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the. HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

Engine will not start 1. Test the 12 V battery (see page 22-61). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set, 2. Test the starter (see page 4-9). • No ignition spark
IMA motor works OK) 3. Check the fuel pressure; • Intake air leaks
• '06 model (see page 11-350). • Locked up engine
• '07-09 models (see page 11-350). • Broken cam chain
4. Troubleshoot the fuel pump circuit (see page 11-341). • Fuel contamination
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213). • No power to PCM
(MIL comes on and stays o n , • No ground to PCM
no DTCs set, starter or IMA • Shorted reference
motor works OK) voltage
MIL comes on and stays on, Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-212).
or never comes on at all, no
DTCs set
Engine will not start Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-291).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine starts but stalls Check the immobilizer system (see page 22-291).
immediately
:
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays
on or flashes)
Engine is hard to start 1. Test the 12 V battery (see page 22-61). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure; • Intake air leaks
• '06 model (see page 11-350). • Fuel contamination
• '07-09 models (see page 11-350). • Weak spark
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-370).
Cold fast idle too low 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-332).
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-370).
Cold fast idle too high 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). Intake air leaks
3. Do the throttle position learning check (see page
11-369).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). Intake air leaks
3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-369).
4. Troubleshoot the A/C signal circuit (see page 11-329).
After w a r m i n g up, idle speed Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-369). Incorrect valve "
is below specification without adjustment
load
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
After w a r m i n g up, idle speed Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-277). Intake air leaks
is above specification without
load
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
(cont'd)
11-13

Low power Check the fuel pressure; • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) • '06 model (see page 11-350). • Incorrect camshaft
• '07-09 models (see page 11-350). timing
• Incorrect engine oil
level
• Fuel contamination
Auto idle stop system does Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
not w o r k circuit (see page 11-330).
Engine stalls 1. Check the idle speed (see page 11-332). • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure; • Faulty harness and
• '06 model (see page 11-350). sensor
• '07-09 models (see page 11-350). connections
3. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). • Fuel contamination
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
circuit (see page 11-330).
Difficult to refuel 1. Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister • Malfunctioning gas
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) and the fuel tank. station filling
2. Check the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube between nozzle.
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank. • Filler neck
3. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-365). restriction
• Faulty fuel tank
vapor control valve
Fuel overflows during 1. Inspect the fuel filler neck for restrictions. Malfunctioning gas
refueling 2. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-365). station filling nozzle.
(No DTCs set)
HDS does not communicate Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213). Correct HDS
w i t h the PCM or the vehicle software
11-14
S f stem Description
Electronic Control S f stem
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powertrain control module (PCM).
Self-diagnosis
The PCM detects a failure of a signal a sensor or another control unit and stores a Temporary DTC or a DTC.
Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle (DTC P0457 turn on the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) during the third drive cycle). W h e n a DTC is stored, the PCM turns on the MIL by a
signal sent to the gauge control module, via F-CAN.
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit, the PCM stores a DTC and
turns on the MIL immediately.
• Two Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or f r o m another control unit in the first drive cycle, the PCM
stores a Temporary DTC. If the failure continues in the second drive cycle, the PCM stores a DTC and turns on the
MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor or another control unit, the PCM ignores that signal and
substitutes a pre-programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a DTC to be
stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition

When the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the PCM turns on the MIL via the F-CAN circuit for about 15 to 20 seconds
t o check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes five times. If all readiness
codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode

After the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), the PCM stays on (up to 30 minutes). If the PCM, connector is
disconnected during this time, the PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery or j u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
(cont'd)
11-15
Fuel and Emissions S f stems
System Description (cont'd)
PCM Electrical Connections
IGNITION COIL
RELAY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
© N o . 1 M A I N FUSE (100 A)
© N o . 19 Fl M A I N (15 A )
© N o . 2 IG M A I N (50 A)
© N o . 23 BACK UP (10 A)
© N o . 12 STOP & HORN
(15 A)
© N o . 18 IGNITION COIL
(20 A)
(IN) (15 A)
(EX) (15 A)
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
© N o . 3 ALTERNATOR
(10 A)
© N o . 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A)
© N o . 36 IG2 HAC (A/C)
(10 A)
© N o . 23 STS (7.5 A)
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX:
© N o . 15 0 I L L V L (7.5 A)
© N o . 11 Fl S U B (15 A)
© N o . 21 D B W (THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CONTROL)
(15 A)
11-16
MAP SENSOR
No. 1 1 N J E C T O R
CKP SENSOR
(cont'd)
11-17
S f stem Description (cont'd)
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
0
ECTSENSOR
To < I HfiT^
SPARK
PLUG
No. 1 INTAKE SIDE

IGNITION COIL A/CPRESSURE
SENSOR
SPARK
No. 2 INTAKE SIDE

IGNITION COIL
TO •<—h-nnp-^
SPARK ~ FTP SENSOR
PLUG C17 IGPLS3I
No. 3 INTAKE SIDE

IGNITION COIL
To «#=H~^P#
SPARK
9 C18 IGPLS4I
No. 4 INTAKE SIDE

IGNITION COIL
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID 1
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID 2
To
SPARK C23 IGPLS1E
No. 1 EXHAUST SIDE

IGNITION COIL
To < # ~ f ^ 0 P #
SPARK
i-nnn—' C24IGPLS2E S-NET5V A44 =#• To MICU
No. 2 EXHAUST SIDE

IGNITION COIL
To <^ m^?
r
SPARK C25IGPLS3E
OIL PRESSURE
No. 3 EXHAUST SIDE SWITCH
IGNITION COIL BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION
To <4-+-TnP+r SWITCH
SPARK •0 C19IGPLS4E
No. 4 EXHAUST SIDE

IGNITION COIL -1JL-
11-18
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
AFS+ C29
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE A/F SENSOR
(SENSOR 1)
SH02S C27
S02SHTC B4
SECONDARY
H02S
(SENSOR 2)
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE

(TACH)
LG2 C44
VSSOUT A29 ->> To AUDIO UNIT
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR J - t
VCC5 A24
1
APSB A18
To MICU 4" APPSENSOR A/B
(cont'd)
11-19

PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
CVT l?«?U7 G K A F T
(DRIVE P U L L E Y )
????
SPEED SENSOR
CVT DRIVE
PULLEY PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVE
DRLS+ B44
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT

CVT DRIVEN
(DRIVEN P U L L E Y )
PULLEY PRESSURE
SPEED SENSOR
CONTROL VALVE
DNLS+ B35
START CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL V A L V E
SCLS+ B25 ^ 3
mm INHIBITOR
SOLENOID
* 1 : '06 model
*2: '07-©9 models
11-20
IMACANH A38 ] To A/C
V COMPRESSOR
^ ( DRIVER,
B
ff T V4
== ==
IMACANL A39 =#* J MCM, BCM MODULE
=Q C39 SG3
C4 ETCSM+
THROTTLE SHIFTLOCK SOLENOID

ACTUATOR
THROTTLE
BODY
TEST
TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
(ASI models
except Canada)
ROCKER ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
1 EPS CONTROL UNIT
P C M A ( • ) (44P) P C M B (A) <44P) P C M C ( O ) (44P)
1717 s
> | 4 I 5 | 6 I7S | 9 I
I
I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 |6 | 7 8 | 9 I
i
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
10
20
/21 12 23 24 25
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
i / X i
20 21 22 23 24 25
2627 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / 3 3 3 4 3 5 28|29[30|31 [32|33c 26 27 29|30|31132 33
/ /
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 | 3 I X l ^ X l 4^ [41J 42 [• 136 \ / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
(cont'd)
11-21
Vacuum Hose Routing
To EVAPORATIVE
\
FRONT OF THROTTLE BODY
VEHICLE
11-22
Vacuum Distribution
0 AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

@
® SECONDARY H E A T E D OXYGEN S E N S O R
(SECONDARY H02S) ( S E N S O R 2)
®F U E L P U M P
@ FUELTANK
(D MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE P R E S S U R E ( M A P ) S E N S O R AIR CLEANER
© E N G I N E COOLANT TEMPERATURE ( E C T ) S E N S O R RESONATOR
@
EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION (EGR) VALVE and

@ I N T A K E AIR
POSITION SENSOR
® M A S S AIR F L O W (MAF) S E N S O R / ®
I N T A K E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT)
(6) CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR @ POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION (PCV) VALVE
SENSOR
(23) W A R M U P THREE W A Y CATALYTIC CONVERTER ( W U - T W C )

® CAMSHAFT POSITION ( C M P ) S E N S O R © UNDER-FLOOR T HREE WAY C A T A L Y T I C C O N V E R T E R ( T W C )
® KNOCK SENSOR
(D INTAKE S I D E IGNITION C O I L @E VAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER

© EXHAUST S I D E IGNITION COIL ® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE V A L V E
(TD OIL PRESSURE SWITCH @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) C A N I S T E R V E N T SHUT VALVE
@ F U E L T A N K P R E S S U R E (FTP)
dD INJECTOR ® FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
® THROTTLE BODY SENSOR
® FUEL PULSATION D AMPER ® EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER FILTER

© FUEL FILTER
(cont'd)
11 -v3
System Description fcont'd)
PCM inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( • ) (44P)
36 37 38 39 40 42 43 44
CANH CANL IMA BKSW WEN IGP2 s-
IMA
CANL
CANH NET5V
XT tr
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is a b o u t 12 V.
Terminal W i r e color Terminal name Description Signal

number
4 PUR FANL (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
5 GRY FANH (RADIATOR FAN Drives A/C condenser fan With A/C condenser fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) relay With A/C condenser fan stopped: battery voltage
6 GRN M R L Y (PGM-FI M A I N D r i v e s PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 1 With i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
R E L A Y 1) P o w e r s o u r c e f o r DTC With i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
memory
7 LTBLU STS (STARTER SWITCH Detects starter switch signal W i t h s t a r t e r s w i t c h O N (III): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
SIGNAL) W i t h s t a r t e r s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 0 V
8 ORN IGP1 (POWER S O U R C E 1) Power source for PCM W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
circuit
9 BLK SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
10 LT G R N VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister v e n t W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
E M I S S I O N (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER V E N T S H U T
VALVE)
12 WHT STC ( S T A R T E R C U T Drives starter cut relay W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h in S T A R T (III): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
RELAY)
13 BRN B K S W N C (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b r a k e p e d a l
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal released: battery voltage
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b r a k e p e d a l
pressed: about 0 V
14 RED A C C (A/C C O M P R E S S O R Drives A/C compressor With compressor ON: about 0 V
CLUTCH RELAY) clutch relay W i t h c o m p r e s s o r OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
15 BRN IMOFPR ( I M M O B I L I Z E R D r i v e s PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 2 A b o u t 0 V f o r 2 s e c o n d s after t u r n i n g i g n i t i o n s w i t c h
FUEL P U M P R E L A Y ) (FUEL P U M P ) O N (II), t h e n b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
16 LT G R N A C P D (A/C P R E S S U R E Detects A/C pressure With A/C switch ON: about 1.7-4.8 V
SENSOR) sensor signal (depending o n A/C pressure)
17 YEL A P S A (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r p e d a l
P E D A L P O S I T I O N (APP) p r e s s e d : a b o u t 4.7 V
SENSOR A) W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r p e d a l
r e l e a s e d : a b o u t 0.5 V
18 PUR A P S B (ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r p e d a l
P E D A L P O S I T I O N (APP) p r e s s e d : a b o u t 2.3 V
S E N S O R B) W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d a c c e l e r a t o r p e d a l
r e l e a s e d : a b o u t 0.25 V
19 RED VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
voltage
20 YEL E T C S R L Y (ELECTRONIC Drives electronic throttle W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
THROTTLE CONTROL c o n t r o l s y s t e m (ETCS) (4.0 V m o m e n t a r i l y )
S Y S T E M (ETCS) C O N T R O L c o n t r o l relay
RELAY)
21 PNK S U B R L Y (PGM-FI D r i v e s PGM-FI s u b r e l a y W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
SUBRELAY)
11-24
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A ( • ) (44P)
4 5 6 7 8 9
FANL FANH MRLY STS IGPl SG6
10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 r
• VSV STC BKSW ACC IMO ACPD APSA APSB VCC6
FPR
20 21 23 24 25
ETCS SUB ELD VCC5 VCC4
RLY RLY
1 26 27 28 29 31 33 34 35 r
FTP SLS NEP VSS SCS ECT2 SG5 SG4
OUT
36 37 38 39 40 42 43 44
CANH CANL IMA IMA BKSW WEN IGP2
CANH CANL NET5V
Terminal side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
N O T E : S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is a b o u t 12 V .

number
23 ORN ELD (ELECTRICAL L O A D Detects ELD s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.1 — 4.8 V
DETECTOR (ELD)) ( d e p e n d i n g o n e l e c t r i c a l load)
24 LT G R N VCC5 ( S E N S O R V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor reference W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
voltage
25 YEL VCC4 (SENSOR V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor reference W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
voltage
26 LT G R N FTP (FUEL T A N K Detects FTP s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d f u e l f i l l c a p
PRESSURE (FTP) S E N S O R ) r e m o v e d : a b o u t 2.5 V
27 PNK S L S (SHIFT LOCK D r i v e s s h i f t lock s o l e n o i d W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), in t h e P, b r a k e p e d a l
SOLENOID) pressed, and accelerator released:
battery voltage
28 BLU NEP (ENGINE SPEED Outputs engine speed pulse W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : pulses
PULSE)
29 BLU V S S O U T (VEHICLE SPEED Sends vehicle speed signal Depending o n vehicle speed: pulses
SIGNAL OUTPUT)
31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l W i t h service check signal shorted using the HDS:
SIGNAL) about 0 V
W i t h service c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5.0 V
33 GRN ECT2 (ENGINE C O O L A N T Detects ECT s e n s o r 2 s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.1—4.8 V
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
S E N S O R 2)
34 BLU S G 5 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensor g r o u n d Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
35 BLU S G 4 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensor g r o u n d Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
36 WHT C A N H (CAN Sends communication W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
HIGH)
37 RED CANL (CAN Sends c o m m u n i c a t i o r W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
LOW)
38 WHT IMACANH (CAN Detects c o m m u n i c a t i o n W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal t o BCM m o d u l e ,
HIGH) M C M , and A/C compressor
driver
39 RED I M A C A N L (CAN Detects c o m m u n i c a t i o n W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal to BCM m o d u l e ,
LOW) M C M , and A/C compressor
driver
40 LT G R N B K S W (BRAKE P E D A L Detects b r a k e p e d a l W i t h brake pedal released: a b o u t 0 V
POSITION S W I T C H ) position switch signal W i t h brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
42 RED W E N (WRITE E N A B L E Detects w r i t e e n a b l e s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
SIGNAL)
43 ORN IGP2 (POWER S O U R C E 2) Power source f o r PCM W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
circuit
44 PNK S-NET5V (SERIAL Sends serial W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
C O M M U N I C A T I O N FOR c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 5.0 V
IMMOBILIZER)
(cont'd)
11-25
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B { ) (44P)
P32 EGP, j c z L c i J / \ ^ Li., .J! J /I

I THTC 1 / | PG2 T '
•
10
INH
SOL
21
12
A T P N ATPP
13
ATPR
14
ATPL
15 16
ATPS NDR
17
23
18
VCC2
/ 25
ATPD ECT1 SCLS+
26 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
• VTS2 ATP EGRP V G + IAT VQ- SG2 VTS1 DNLS-
LI
FWD
38 40 41 42 43 44
PG1 CVT S C L S - DNLS- DRLS- DRLS+
PG1

number
1 BRN PG2 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
2 • BLU/RFH EGR ( E X H A U S T G A S D r i v e s EGR v a l v e W i t h EGR o p e r a t i n g : d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
R E C I R C U L A T I O N (EGR) W i t h EGR n o t o p e r a t i n g : a b o u t 0 V
VALVE)
3 YEL/BLU PCS ( E V A P O R A T I V E Drives EVAP canister purge W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t b e l o w 113 °F
E M I S S I O N (EVAP) valve (45 °C): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
C A N I S T E R PURGE V A L V E ) W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g , e n g i n e c o o l a n t a b o v e 113 °F
(45 °C): d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
4 GRN/WHT S02SHTC (SECONDARY Drives rear secondary W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
HEATED O X Y G E N SENSOR H 0 2 S h e a t e r ( s e n s o r 2) W i t h w a r m e d up engine running: duty controlled
(SECONDARY H02S)
HEATER ( S E N S O R 2))
6 BLK C V T P G 2 (POWER G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
GROUND)
7 YEL/RED O P S W (OIL PRESSURE Detects engine oil pressure W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 0 V
SWITCH) signal W i t h engine running: battery voltage
8* WHT/BLK V E L 2 (CVT SPEED S E N S O R Detects CVT speed sensor W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II):
(SECONDARY)) (secondary) a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
W i t h v e h i c l e m o v i n g : a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
10 GRN/BLK I N H S O L (INHIBITOR Driver's inhibitor solenoid W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in P, N , D, S, a n d L:
SOLENOID CONTROL) valve battery voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in R p o s i t i o n : a b o u t 0 V
12 BLK/RED ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In N: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H N) switch N position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n N : a b o u t 5.0 V
input
13 BLU/BLK ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In P: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H P) switch P position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n P: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
input
14 WHT ATPR ( T R A N S M I S S I O N Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In R: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H R) switch R position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n R: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
input
15 BLU ATPL (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In L: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H L) switch L position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n L: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
input
16 BLU/WHT ATPS (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In S: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H S) switch S position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n S: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
input
*: '06 model
11-26
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B { 1 (44P)
_n XL
1 2 3 7 8
PG2 EGR PCS CVT OPSW
PG2 VEL2
10 12 13 14 15 16 17
INH A T P N ATPP ATPR ATPL ATPS NDR VCC2
SOL
T e r m i n a l side of female t e r m i n a l s

number
17 RED/BLU NDR (CVT I N P U T S H A F T Detects C V T i n p u t s h a f t W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II):
(DRIVE PULLEY) SPEED (drive pulley) speed sensor a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
SENSOR) signal W i t h e n g i n e i d l i n g in N : a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
18 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor voltage W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
21 PNK ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In D: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H D) switch D position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n D: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
input
23 RED/WHT ECT1 ( E N G I N E C O O L A N T Detects ECT s e n s o r 1 s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.1—4.8 V
T E M P E R A T U R E (ECT) (depending on engine coolant temperature)
S E N S O R 1)
25 YEL S C L S + (CVT S T A R T D r i v e s CVT start c l u t c h W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
C L U T C H PRESSURE pressure control valve
CONTROL VALVE + S I D E )
26 YEL V T S 2 (ROCKER A R M OIL Drives rocker a r m oil A t idle: a b o u t 0 V
C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D 1) control solenoid 1
28 RED ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In D a n d S: a b o u t 0 V
RANGE SWITCH FWD switch FWD position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n D a n d S: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
POSITION)
29 WHT/BLK EGRP ( E X H A U S T G A S D e t e c t s EGR v a l v e p o s i t i o n W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : 1.2—3.0 V
R E C I R C U L A T I O N (EGR) sensor signal ( d e p e n d i n g o n EGR v a l v e lift)
VALVE POSITION SENSOR)
(cont'd)
11-27
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B { ) (44P)
n n
1 .!. 2 3 4 6 7
tGR PCS SG2S CVT OFSVv •A ~ I /
10 12 13
HTC V
14 15
PG2
16 17 18 H
• INH ATPN ATPP ATPR ATPL ATPS NDR VCC2
SOL
21 23 25
ATPD ECT1 SCLS+
26 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
• VTS2 ATP EGRP V G + I AT VG- SG2 VTS1 DNLS-
FWD
36 40 41 42 43 44
PG1 CVT SCLS- DNLS- DRLS- DRLS+
PG1
n

number
30 RED/BLK V G + ( M A S S AIR F L O W Detects M A F sensor signal At idle: 1 . 1 - 1 . 6 V
( M A F ) S E N S O R SIDE)
(between V G + t e r m i n a l and VG — terminal)
31 RED/YEL I A T ( I N T A K E AIR Detects IAT sensor signal W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.1—4.0 V
T E M P E R A T U R E (IAT) ( a b o u t 1.8 V at n o r m a l o p e r a t i n g t e m p e r a t u r e )
SENSOR)
32 BLK/RED V G - ( M A S S AIR F L O W Ground for M A F sensor
( M A F ) S E N S O R SIDE) signal
33 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensor ground Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
34 GRN/YEL V T S 1 (ROCKER A R M OiL Drives rocker a r m oil A t idle: about 0 V
C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D 1) control solenoid 1
35 GRN/WHT D N L S + (CVT D R I V E N D r i v e s CVT d r i v e n p u l l e y W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
P U L L E Y PRESSURE pressure control valve
36 BLK PG1 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
40 BLK C V T P G 1 (POWER G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
GROUND)
41 PNK/BLU S C L S - (CVT S T A R T Drives CVT start clutch W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
CONTROL VALVE - S I D E )
42 PNK/BLK D N L S - (CVT D R I V E N Drives CVT driven pulley W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
43 GRN/YEL D R L S - (CVT DRIVE D r i v e s CVT d r i v e p u l l e y W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
44 BLU/WHT D R L S + (CVT DRIVE D r i v e s CVT d r i v e p u l l e y W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
11-28
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C O (44P)
N O T E ; S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is a b o u t 12 V.
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 WHT/GRN IG1ETCS ( I G N I T I O N Detects i g n i t i o n s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
S I G N A L ETCS)
2 BP i P G M E T C S (POWER G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
G R O U N D ETCS)
3 YEL E T C S M - (THROTTLE Ground for throttle actuator W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
ACTUATOR - S I D E )
4 YEL/RED E T C S M + (THROTTLE Drives throttle actuator W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
ACTUATOR +SIDE)
5 BRN INJ1 ( N o . 1 INJECTOR) Drives No. 1 injector A t idle: d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
6 RED I N J 2 ( N o . 2 INJECTOR) Drives No. 2 injector W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
7 BLU I N J 3 ( N o . 3 INJECTOR) Drives N o . 3 injector
8 YEL I N J 4 ( N o . 4 INJECTOR) Drives N o . 4 injector
9 BLK/WHT A F S H T C (AIR FUEL R A T I O Drives A/F s e n s o r heater W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
(A/F) S E N S O R HEATER (sensor 1) With w a r m e d up engine running: about 0 V
C O N T R O L (SENSOR 1))
10 WHT N D N (CVT O U T P U T S H A F T Detects C V T o u t p u t s h a f t In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n P o r N: p u l s e s
DRIVEN PULLEY) SPEED (driven pulley) speed
SENSOR) sensor signal
11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects M A P s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 3.0 V
A B S O L U T E PRESSURE A t i d l e : a b o u t 1.0 V ( d e p e n d i n g o n e n g i n e s p e e d )
(MAP) SENSOR)
12 GRN VCC3 (SENSOR V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor reference W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
voltage
13 YEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor reference W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
voltage
14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensor g r o u n d Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
15 YEL/GRN IGPLS1I ( N o . 1 I N T A K E D r i v e s N o . 1 intake s i d e W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
SIDE I G N I T I O N COIL ignition coil W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
PULSE)
16 BLU/RED IGPLS2I ( N o . 2 I N T A K E D r i v e s N o . 2 intake s i d e
SIDE I G N I T I O N COIL ignition coil
PULSE)
17 BLK/RED IGPLS3I ( N o . 3 I N T A K E D r i v e s N o . 3 intake s i d e
PULSE)
18 WHT/RED IGPLS4I ( N o . 4 I N T A K E D r i v e s N o . 4 intake side
PULSE)
19 WHT/BLU IGPLS4E ( N o . 4 E X H A U S T D r i v e s N o . 4 e x h a u s t side
PULSE)
20 RED/BLK T P S A (THROTTLE Detects TP s e n s o r A s i g n a l With throttle fully o p e n : a b o u t 3.9 V
POSITION (TP) S E N S O R A ) With throttle fully c l o s e d : a b o u t 0.9 V
21 RED/BLU T P S B (THROTTLE Detects T P s e n s o r B s i g n a l With throttle fully o p e n : a b o u t 4.1 V
POSITION (TP) S E N S O R B) With throttle fully c l o s e d : a b o u t 1.7V
(cont'd)
11-29
:
uel and Emissions Systems
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (O) (44P)

number
22 WHT/BLK POILCS (ROCKER A R M OIL Detects rocker a r m oil W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.5 V
PRESSURE S E N S O R ) pressure sensor signal W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : a b o u t 0.7 V
(depending o n engine oil pressure)
23 WHT IGPLS1E(No. 1 EXHAUST Drives N o . 1 e x h a u s t side W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
SIDE I G N I T I O N COIL ignition coil W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
PULSE)
24 WHT/GRN IGPLS2E ( N o . 2 E X H A U S T Drives No. 2 e x h a u s t side
PULSE)
25 WHT/BLK IGPLS3E ( N o . 3 E X H A U S T Drives No. 3 exhaust side
PULSE)
26 BLK/WHT I G R T N I ( I N T A K E SIDE Detects intake side ignition W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
I G N I T I O N COIL R E T U R N coil p o w e r source
SIGNAL)
27 WHT/RED S H 0 2 S (SECONDARY Detects s e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S W i t h t h r o t t l e f u l l y o p e n e d f r o m idle w i t h w a r m e d u p
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR ( s e n s o r 2) s i g n a l e n g i n e : a b o u t 0.6 V
(SECONDARY H02S) W i t h t h r o t t l e q u i c k l y c l o s e d : b e l o w 0.4 V
( S E N S O R 2))
29 GRN A F S + (AIR FUEL R A T I O Detects A/F sensor
(A/F) S E N S O R ( S E N S O R 1) ( s e n s o r 1) s i g n a l
+SIDE)
30 RED A F S — (AIR FUEL R A T I O Detects A/F sensor
(A/F) S E N S O R ( S E N S O R 1) ( s e n s o r 1) s i g n a l
-SIDE)
31 GRN CMP (CAMSHAFT Detects C M P sensor signal W i t h engine running: pulses
P O S I T I O N (CMP) S E N S O R )
32 BLU CKP (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
P O S I T I O N (CKP) S E N S O R )
33 BLU/BLK V T P S W (ROCKER A R M OIL Detects rocker a r m oil A t idle: a b o u t 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) pressure switch signal
36 BLK/YEL IG1 ( I G N I T I O N S I G N A L ) Detects ignition signal W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
38 YEL I G R T N E ( E X H A U S T SIDE Detects exhaust side W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
I G N I T I O N COIL R E T U R N ignition coil p o w e r source
SIGNAL)
39 BLU SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
40 BRN/YEL L G 1 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) Ground circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
42 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor signal W i t h engine knocking: pulses
43 WHT/RED V E L 1 (CVT SPEED Detects CVT speed sensor Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SENSOR) W h e n v e h i c l e is s t o p p e d : a b o u t 0 V
44 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
11-30
PGM-FI System Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a the PCM to determine ignition t i m i n g and t i m i n g for
sequential multiport fuel injection system. fuel injection of each cylinder and engine misfire
detection.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay
When the PCM receives a demand for cooling f r o m the TtKMINAL O-RING
A/C system, it delays the compressor f r o m being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth MAGNET
transition to the A/C mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor

The A/F sensor operates over a w i d e air/fuel range. The
A/F sensor is installed upstream of the WU-TWC, and - * i"
sends signals to the PCM which varies the'duration of
fuel injection accordingly.
{••
SENSOR
ELEMENT TERMINALS
CVT Output Shaft (Driven pulley) Speed Sensor
This sensor detects driven pulley speed.
O-RING
HEATER MAGNET
TERMINALS
TERMINAL
C
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor
!.:-- - r -
The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
1:,--; -,
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge.
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 and 2
The CMP sensor detects the position of the No. 1 ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent
cylinder as a reference for sequential fuel injection to resistors (thermistors). The resistance decreases as the
each cylinder, engine coolant temperature increases.
O-RING .TERMINAL
THERMISTOR
TERMINAL
MAGNET
O-RING
(cont'd)
11-31
Ignition Timing Control Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication (In relation
The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic ignition timing to Readiness Codes)
at various engine speeds and manifold absolute The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of
pressure. It also adjusts the t i m i n g according to engine the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If
coolant temperature and intake air temperature. the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gene
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has
Injector Timing and Duration been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part
The PCM contains the m e m o r y for basic discharge of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are
duration at various engine speeds and manifold set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete,
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be
read out f r o m the m e m o r y , is further modified by finished.
signals sent f r o m various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration. To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,
By monitoring long term fuel t r i m , the PCM detects long turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start the
term malfunctions in the fuel system and sets a engine. The MIL will come on for 15—20 seconds. If it
diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) if needed. then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not
Knock Sensor complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the
The knock control system adjusts the ignition t i m i n g to engine as described in the procedures (see page 11-56).
minimize knock.
TERMINAL (IAT) Sensor

The mass air f l o w (MAF) sensor/intake air temperature
(IAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor, it is
located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the
hot wire and thermistor changes due to intake air
temperature and air flow. The control circuit in the MAF
sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set
temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the
control circuit, then output to the PCM.
DIAPHRAGM
• a
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
HOT WIRE
into electrical signals to the PCM.
IAT S E N S O R
(THERMISTOR)
O-RING
11-32
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor {Secondary H02S) Electronic Throttle Control System
The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the w a r m up three w a y The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic
catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection see a functional layout of the system.
accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an
internal heater. The PCM compares the H02S output Idle control: When the engine is idling, the PCM
w i t h the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle
efficiency. The secondary H02S is located on the speed according to engine loads.
WU-TWC.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is
pressed, the PCM opens the throttle valve depending
SENSOR on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal.
ZIRCONIA
TERMINALS
ELEMENT
Cruise control: The PCM controls the throttle actuator to
maintain set speed w h e n the cruise control is operating.
The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise
control actuator.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor

As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
HEATER HEATER
TERMINALS
varies the signal voltage to the PCM.
APPSENSOR A/B
i ^ ACCELERATOR
PEDAL MODULE
(cont'd)
11-33
Throttle Body Idle Control System
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine When the engine is cold, the A/C compressor is on, the
coolant f r o m the cylinder head to prevent icing of the transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the
throttle plate. nower steer! no !o3d is hloh or the cite motor is
charging, the PCM sends signals to the throttle position
to maintain the correct idle speed.
Brake Pedal Position Switch

The brake pedal position switch signals the PCM when
the brake pedal is pressed.
Electrical Power Steering (EPS) Signal

The EPS signals the PCM w h e n the power steering load
is high.
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Cutoff Control

During deceleration w i t h the throttle valve closed,
cjrrcr.t tc the injectors is uui on IKJ Ssnpiuve mei
economy at engine speeds over 1,100 rpm. Fuel cutoff
also occurs w h e n the engine speed exceeds 6,500 r p m ,
regardless of the position of the throttle valve, to
T H R O T T L E A C T U A T O R
protect the engine f r o m over-revving. When the vehicle
is stopped, the PCM cuts the fuel at engine speeds over
4,500 rpm. On a cold engine, fuel cut occurs at a lower
engine speed.
Fuel Pump Control

When the ignition is turned to ON (II), the PCM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 which feeds current to the fuel
p u m p for 2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With
the engine running, the PCM grounds PGM-FI main
relay 2 and feeds current to the fuel pump. When the
engine is not running and the ignition is on, the PCM
cuts ground to PGM-FI main relay 2 which cuts current
to the fuel pump.
PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2

PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the PCM,
power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main
relay 2. PGM-FI main relay 2 is energized to supply
power to the fuel p u m p for 2 seconds w h e n the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II), and w h e n the engine is
cranking or running.
11-34
3 Stage i-VTEC System
The 3 stage i-VTEC system changes the intake valve lift (low lift, high lift, pause) and exhaust valve lift (normal lift,
pause) characteristics t o improve fuel economy and power output. There are t w o rocker a r m oil control solenoids in
this system to control the engine oil passage that leads to the intake and exhaust rocker arms and controls the intake
and the exhaust valve lift. The engine oil pressure is monitored w i t h the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor and the rocker
arm oil pressure switch.
Operating Condition
Vehicle stop mode (Idle stop)

The engine stops idling if the IMA battery is sufficiently charged.
Start running mode (Engine and IMA motor)
The engine runs on the low lift cam. The IMA motor increases torque.
Slow acceleration mode (Engine only)
The engine runs on the low lift cam. The IMA motor does not assist.
Low speed cruise mode (IMA motor only)
The IMA motor runs the vehicle by itself if the IMA battery is sufficiently charged. The intake and exhaust valves pause
to reduce valve spring compression and pumping loss.
Acceleration from low speed mode (Engine and IMA motor)
The engine runs on the low lift cam. The IMA motor increases torque.
High acceleration from low speed mode (Engine and IMA motor)
The engine runs on the high lift cam. The IMA motor increases torque.
High speed cruise mode (Engine only)
The engine runs on the low lift cam. The IMA motor does not assist.
Deceleration mode (IMA battery charge)
The intake and exhaust valves pause and reduce engine braking force. The IMA motor simulates engine braking force
by regenerative charging of the IMA battery.
Drive Start Slow Low speed High High s p e e d Deceleration

Stop Acceleration
pattern running acceleration cruise acceleration cruise
Valve Valve
Engine Idle stop L o w lift L o w lift L o w lift High l i f t L o w lift
pause pause
IMA Motor Stop Assist Stop M o t o r only Assist Assist Stop Charge
ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST
Assist ^^^^^^
amount r ~j
(Gauge) i" • :
!
^^^^^^
CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG
(cont'd)
11-35
System Operation
L o w Lift Operation
R o c k e r a r m o i l c o n t r o l s o l e n o i d s 1 a n d 2 a r e b o t h OFF. E n g i n e o i l p r e s s u r e f r o m t h e o i l p u m p is l e a d t o O U T 1 a n d
p u s h e s p i s t o n A ( i n s i d e t h e intake r o c k e r a r m No. 1 a n d N o . 2) t o t h e r i g h t side. T h i s makes i n t a k e r o c k e r arms N o . 1
and No. 2 unified and the intake valve will lift w i t h the l o w camshaft specification.
High Lift Operation
Rocker arm o i l control solenoid 1 is ON, and rocker a r m oil control solenoid 2 is OFF. The engine oil pressure f r o m the
oil p u m p is lead t o OUT 2 and pushes piston B (inside the intake rocker arm No. 2 and No. 3) t o the left side. This
makes intake rocker arms No. 2 and No. 3 unified and the intake valve will lift w i t h the high camshaft specification.
Valve pause operation
Rocker a r m oil control solenoids 1 and 2 are both ON. The engine oil pressure f r o m the oil p u m p is lead t o OUT 3 and
pushes piston A (inside the intake rocker a r m No. 1 and No. 2) t o the left side and piston C (inside the exhaust rocker
a r m No. 1 and No. 2) to the right side. This separates intake rocker arms No. 1 and No. 2 and exhaust rocker arms
No. 1 and No. 2 causing the intake valve and the exhaust valve to stop.
Rocker arm Rocker a r m Rocker arm oil Rocker arm oil Rocker arm activation
oil control oil control pressure pressure (Rocker arm oil control valve oil
solenoid 1 solenoid 2 sensor signal switch signal pressure output)
Low valve OFF OFF High OFF IN side rocker a r m : Low lift
lift mode EX side rocker arm: Normal lift
(OUT1)
High valve ON OFF Low ON IN side rocker arm: High lift
lift mode EX side rocker a r m : Normal lift
(OUT 2)
Valve pause ON ON Low OFF IN side rocker a r m : Pause
mode EX side rocker arm: Pause (OUT 3)
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE

ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID 2
11-36
Catalytic Converter System Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU-TWC) The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses f r o m escaping
and Under-floor Three Way Catalytic Converter (Under- into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
floor TWC) manifold.
The WU-TWC/TWC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C0 ), nitrogen (N ), and
2 2
water vapor.
WU-TWC (ATTACHED TO THE CYLINDER HEAD)
<4pm : B L O W - B Y V A P O R
< = • : F R E S H AIR
UNDER-FLOOR TWC
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout

of the system.
EGR Valve
The EGR valve lowers peak combustion temperatures
and reduces oxides of nitrogen emissions (NOx) by
recirculating exhaust gas through the intake manifold
and into the combustion chambers.
To EXHAUST
(cont'd)
11-37
#
S f stem Description (cont d)
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor
System The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM.
Refer to the system diagram to see a functional layout
of the svstem. S E N S O R UNIT
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor f r o m
the fuel tank until it can be purged from, the EVAP
canister into the engine and burned.
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

W h e n the engine coolant temperature is below 113 T
(45 °C), the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
cutting v a c u u m to the EVAP canister.
O-RING
OUT
t
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP
canister.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls veniing uf
the EVAP canister.
O-RING VALVE O-RING
11-38
Fuel Cap Warning Message To make the message go off (With the HDS)
The PCM detects a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an Procedure

evaporative system leak, and alerts the driver by
showing a warning message in the gauge display. 1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
First drive cycle 2. Clear the Temporary DTC with the HDS.
The first time a leak is detected a CHECK FUEL CAP
message appears in the gauge display (A). To scroll to 3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP
another message, press the select/reset button. The FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
CHECK FUEL CAP message appears each time you the HDS.
restart the engine until the system turns the message
off. Turn the engine off then replace or tighten the fuel To make the message go off (Without the
fill cap until it clicks at least once.
HDS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.

S h o w s " C H E C K F U E L CAP" in t h e 2. Start the engine, then turn the ignition switch to
gauge display LOCK (0).
3. Repeat step 2 t w o more times.
(cont'd)
11-39

Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram
The electronic throttle control system consists of the throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor A/B, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor A/B, the electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the PCM.
APP From
SENSOR A • YEL • -YEL - ETCS CONTROL
• YEL - RELAY
BLU
APP VARIOUS
SENSOR B SENSORS
-LTGRN-
- P U R —
— BLU — THROTTLE
BODY
PCM
YEL/RED-
BLK -YEL •
-THROTTLE
4 - ACTUATOR
G R N —
-RED/BLK • -TP SENSOR A
-RED/BLU •
n-
BLU
-TP SENSOR B
11-40
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) System Diagram
The EGR system reduces oxides of nitrogen (NOx) emissions by recirculating exhaust gas through the EGR valve and
the intake manifold into the combustion chambers. The PCM m e m o r y contains the ideal EGR valve position for
various operating conditions.
The EGR valve position sensor detects the amount of EGR valve lift, and sends it to the PCM. The PCM then compares
it w i t h the ideal lift in its m e m o r y (based on signals sent from other sensors). If there is any difference between the t w o ,
the PCM cuts current to the EGR valve.
I WHT/BLK
INTAKE MANIFOLD
(cont'd)
11-41
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Diagram
The EVAP controls minimize the a m o u n t of fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor f r o m the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged f r o m the canister into the engine and burned.
The EVAP canister is purged by drawing fresh air through it and into a port on the intake manifold.
The purging vacuum Is controlled by the EVAP canister purge valve, w h i c h operates whenever engine coolant
temperature is above 113 T (45 °C).
FUEL TANK VAPOR EVAP CANISTER EVAP CANISTER

FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE FILTER VENT SHUT VALVE
11-42
PCM Circuit Diagram
PCM 24P JUNCTION

CONNECTOR
I 11 111 I
-YEL/BLK -YEL/BLK
-BRN- -BRN
3
' T ~
1 No. 1 INJECTOR
I —r— I C101
-YEL/BLK
ORN
-RED- -RED—•
> £ No. 2 INJECTOR
A
-YEL/BLK
-BLU
> K No. 3 INJECTOR
-YEL/BLK
-YEL
No. 4 INJECTOR
-YEL/BLK
-BRN/YEL
CMP SENSOR
-YEL/BLK
-BRN/YEL•
CKPSENSOR
(cont'd)
11-43

PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
- YEL/BLU
• WHT/BLK • - GRN/YEL•
ROCKER ARM
12 V OIL PRESSURE
SENSOR
- GRN/YEL •
I"
[ ^ 1
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID1
B26 G102
ROCKER ARM
24P JUNCTION 24P JUNCTION OIL CONTROL
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR SOLENOID 2
m m ,, rrn
I ~~|C13
• YEL/RED •
- GRN/RED —
• GRN/WHT ~
MAPSENSOR
EGR VALVE
POSITION
SENSOR
YEL/BLU —•
WHT/BLK —
GRN/YEL —
BLU/RED —
6 Z 3
BLK-
• RED/BLK MAF
SENSOR
• BLK/RED • • BLK/ORN •
—GRN/YEL< I AT
• GRN/YEL •
RED/YEL • SENSOR
•RED/YEL• r
Hi - GRN/YEL -
• RED/WHT - • RED/WHT
ECTSENSOR 1
* 1 : '06 m o d e l
* 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s
D
11-44
TRED/BLU •
KNOCK S E N S O R
BRN/YEL
R O C K E R ARM
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
-BLU/BLK
1
-BRN/YEL
1
-BLK •
PG1
B1
PG2
C2
24P
JUNCTION
BRN/YEL CONNECTOR
-BRN/YEL -
LG1 BRN/YEL
C44
-BRN/YEL•
C101
BRN/YEL
TP S E N S O R
"XL
VCC3
C20
31
-RED/BLK-
TPSA
C21
=RED/BLU-
TPSB
C39
THROTTLE
SG3 ACTUATOR
C4 THROTTLE BODY
-YEL/RED •
ETCSM+
ETCSM-
(cont'd)
11-45
S f stem Descripti:ion (cont'd)

PCM Circuit Diagiiram (cont'd)
12P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
rrrm
•1u
SPARK
PLUG
SIDE IGNITION COIL
11-46
TEST TACHOMETER
CONNECTOR
(All models
except Canada)
*2: ' 0 7 - 0 9 m o d e l s
EPS CONTROL UNIT
(cont'd)
11-47

f~" "I
jHBH 0 0
X B17
NDR~ -RED/BLU •
-YEL/BLU
-RED/BLU
-GRN/YEL
CVT INPUT SHAFT (DRIVE PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
-YEL/RED
-WHT —
-GRN/WHT•
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
YEL/RED 1,
(YEL/BLU)*2
-GRN/RED* WHT/RED — 2
GRN/WHT 3
(GRN/YEL)*2
CVT SPEED SENSOR
-YEL/BLU
-WHT/BLK - -WHT/BLK
-GRN/YEL
CVT SPEED SENSOR
(SECONDARY)
-BLU/WHT — BLU/WHT "

DRLS+
B43 — GRN/YEL •
-GRN/YEL CVT DRIVE PULLEY PRESSURE
DRLS- CONTROL VALVE
-GRN/WHT
B35
—GRN/WHT-
DNLS+
B42
— PNK/BLK -
-PNK/BLK CVT DRIVEN PULLEY PRESSURE
DNLS- CONTROL VALVE
B25
-YEL < YEL
SCLS+
B41
— PNK/BLU
-PNK/BLU CVT START CLUTCH PRESSURE
SCLS- CONTROL VALVE
B10 5
— GRN/BLK
2
-GRN/BLK •
INHIBITOR
SOLENOID
* 1 : '06 m o d e l
*2: '07-09 m o d e l s
11-48
(cont'd)
11-49
2n r z
AFS+
C30
•-VW—|
AFS-
C9
-BLK/WHT A / F SENSOR
If (SENSOR 1)
WHT/RED 1
SH02S -GRN/YEL •
B4
-GRN/WHT•
' 57 -BLK/ORN -
SECONDARY
H02S
(SENSOR 2)
-YEL/RED 4 "
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
-YEL •
VCC4
A17 -YEL •
APSA
A35
-BLU •
SG4
A24
-LT GRN •
VCC5
A18 -PUR —
APSB
A34
-BLU •—-
J7
APP SENSOR A / B
-PNK •
13
SHIFT L O C K
SOLENOID
11-50
C204
12
-WHT • -WHT < To A/C COMPRESSOR
IMACANH DRIVER, MCM,
A39
11 BCM MODULE
-RED . -RED -
*2; '07-09 models
(cont'd)
11-51

A42
RED -
WEN
BRN/
YEL
A36
WHT JUNCTION BOX
CANH
A37
RED -
CANL
A29
BLU -
VSSOUT
To ABS f<£»
MODULATOR-CONTROL
UNIT
6P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
DATA
LINK
CONNECTOR
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
(TACH)
*3: With T P M S
*4: '08 model
*5: '06-07 m o d e l s
*6: '06-08 m o d e l s
11-52
JUNCTION BOX
To YAW
RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION
SENSOR
To B C M 1 ^~
MODULE "
C901
12P 4
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
To MCM J 4~
MODULE
T o AUDIO UNIT 4~
To S R S UNIT
j To TPMS
* 3 : W i t h TOMS
*7: With A B S
*8: W i t h V S A
[ 'II model
(cont'd)
11-5
^X
^x
^x
^x
^x
^x\
11-54
STARTER
CUT RELAY
(ST CUT)
FUSES:
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX:
( D N o . 21 D B W ( T H R O T T L E
A C T U A T O R C O N T R O L ) (15 A )
© N o . 18 I G N I T I O N C O I L (20 A )
© N o . 14 I G N I T I O N C O I L ( I N ) (15 A )
© N o . . 13 I G N I T I O N C O I L ( E X ) (15 A ) IGNITION SWITCH
IG1 HOT in ON (II)
© N o . , 19 F l M A I N (15 A )
and START (III)
© N o . , 11 Fi S U B (15 A )
© N o . , 15 O I L L V L (7.5 A )
© N o . 2 I G M A I N (50 A )
© N o . 2 3 B A C K U P (10 A )
© N o . 12 S T O P & H O R N (15 A )
© N o . 1 M A I N F U S E (100 A )
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:

© N o . 3 A L T E R N A T O R (10 A )
© N o . 2 3 S T S (7.5 A )
© N o . 2 F U E L P U M P (15 A )
© N o . 3 6 I G 2 H A C ( A / C ) (10 A )
© N o . 10 M E T E R (7.5 A )
How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
(Sn relation to Readiness Codes) Code
The vehicle has certain readiness codes that are part of NOTE:
the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. If • Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to
the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone LOCK (0) during the procedure.
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
been reset, these readiness codes are reset to disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. • Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
If all of t h e m are not set to complete, the vehicle may traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch
fail the emission test, or the test cannot be finished. the readiness code f r o m incomplete to complete.
• The readiness code will not switch to complete until
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, all the enable criteria are met.
turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the • If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15—20 seconds. If it MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
then goes off, the readiness codes are set to complete. complete until you correct the fault.
If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are
not set to complete. To set readiness codes f r o m Enable Criteria
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the
appropriate code. • ECT SENSOR 1 at 158 °F (70 °C) or more.
• IAT SENSOR at 20 T ( - 7 °C) or more.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the • Vehicle speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
OBD status in the DTC MENU w i t h the HDS (see page
11-8). This screen displays the code, the current data list Procedure
of the enable criteria, and the status of the readiness
testing. 1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link
connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS
• CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions

w i t h short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,

check for a Temporary DTC w i t h the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were
probably not met; repeat the procedure.
11-56
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and
S f stem Monitor and Readiness Code Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery NOTE:

is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the • Do not turn the ignition switch t o ACC (I) or to
PCM is reset w i t h the HDS. LOCK (0) during the procedure.
9
All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
Enable Criteria disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
• Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
9
Engine at idle. Enable Criteria
• ECT SENSOR 1 and SENSOR 2 between 176 °F (80 °C)
and 212 °F (100 °C). ECT SENSOR 1 at 140 °F (60 °C) or more.
• MAP sensor less than 46.6 kPa (14 in.Hg, 350 mmHg).
• Vehicle speed (VSS) 0 m p h (0 km/h). Procedure
• IAT SENSOR between 32 °F (0 °C) and 212 T (100 °C).
Procedure
2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. w i t h short periods of steady cruise. During the
. drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
2. Start the engine. 5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
readiness code should switch f r o m incomplete to
3. Select EVAP TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h complete.
the HDS, then select the FUNCTION TEST in the
EVAP TEST MENU. 3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU w i t h the
• If the result is normal, readiness is complete. HDS.
• If the result is not normal, go to the next step.
• If the screen shows complete, readiness is
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one complete.
or more of the enable criteria were probably not • If the screen shows not complete, go t o the next
met; repeat the procedure. step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, the

enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST MENU. Check the ECT SENSOR 1 in the
ALL DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. If the ECT SENSOR 1
is less than 140 °F (60 °C), run the engine until it is
more than 140 °F (60 °C), then repeat the procedure.
(cont'd)
11-57
How to Set Readiness Codes (conf
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor EGR Monitor and Readiness Code
Readiness Code .
NOTE:
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery • Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to
is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the LOCK (0) during the procedure.
PCM is reset with the HDS. • All readiness codes are cleared w h e n the battery is
disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
Procedure PCM is reset w i t h the HDS.
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The Enable Criteria
readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete. ECT SENSOR 1 at 176 °F (80 °C) or more.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete, Procedure

check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC,
repeat the procedure. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code 2. Start the engine.
• This readiness code is always set to available 3. Drive at a steady speed with the transmission in
because misfiring is continuously monitored. D position, at 50—62 mph (80—100 km/h) or above
• Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if for more than 10 seconds.
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
• Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter 4. With the transmission in D position, decelerate
holds at its current value, if the throttle position f r o m 62 m p h (100 km/h) or above by completely
changes more than a predetermined value, or if releasing the throttle for at least 5 seconds. If the
driving conditions fall outside the range of any engine is stopped during this procedure, go to
related enable criteria. step 3 and do the procedure again.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code 5. Check the OBD status screen for DTC P0401 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
• This readiness code is always set to available •>
because the fuel system is continuously monitored ° If it is passed, readiness is complete.
during closed loop operation. ° If it is not passed, go to step 3 and retest.
• Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter,
EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
• Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and

Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because

the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
11-58
PGM-FI S f stem
C A M S H A F T POSITION (CMP) S E N S O R

(ECT) S E N S O R ' 1
INTAKE SIDE C V T O U T P U T SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY)

IGNITION COIL SPEED SENSOR
M A S S AIR F L O W (MAF) S E N S O R /
E X H A U S T SIDE INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
IGNITION COIL (IAT) S E N S O R
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 11-232
ELECTRICAL
LOAD D E T E C T O R (ELD)
PGM-FI
SUBRELAY
IGNITION COIL
RELAY
PGM-FI
MAIN RELAY 1
POWERTRAIN CONTROL M O D U L E (PCM)

U p d a t e , page 11-236
S u b s t i t u t i o n , p a g e 11-7

CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(ECT) S E N S O R 2
(CKP) S E N S O R
Replacement,
p a g e 11-231
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
KNOCK SENSOR P R E S S U R E (MAP) SENSOR
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-234 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-232
(cont'd)
11-59
PGM-FI System
11-60
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit Range/ 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
any on-board snapshot, and review the general HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0106, P2228, and/or P2229 are stored at the Is there about 0.2 gm/s or 0.5 V?
same time as DTC P0101, troubleshoot those DTCs
first, then recheck for DTC P0101. Y E S A G o to step 7.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these N O A G o to step 13.

parts:
• PCV hose
• Intake air duct 8. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm and
• Air cleaner 3,000 rpm.
• Purge (PCS) line ' 9. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Are the parts OK ?
Does the reading change?
Y E S A G o t o step 2.
N O A R e p a i r or replace the damaged parts, then go Y E S A G o t o step 10.
to step 15.
N O A G o to step 13.
2. Check for damage or looseness of the air duct at
the air cleaner. 10. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in
P or N) until the radiator fan comes o n , then let it
Is it OK? idle.
YES A G o to step 3. 11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
NOAReconnect or replace the air duct in the air
cleaner, then go to step 15. • ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element. • MAP SENSOR
• MAF SENSOR
Is it dirty?
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the
YESAReplace the air cleaner element (see page DTCs MENU with the HDS.
11-371), then go to step 15.
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF
sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11 and
recheck.
(cont'd)
11-61
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd}

13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
14. Replace the MAF sensor/JAT sensor (see page NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
11-232). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
2 seconds.
16. Reset the PGM with the HDS.
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). . HDS.
18. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: Is about 0 gm/s, or 0.1 V or less indicated?
• ENGINE SPEED • Y E S ^ G o t o step 3.

• VSS
• MAP SENSOR N O ^ I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
• MAF SENSOR t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. a
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Check the No. 3 ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse in the
Is DTC P0101 indicated? under-dash fuse/relay box.
Y E S ^ C h e c k for poor connections or loose Is the fuse OK?

terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the
PCM, then g o t o step 1. Y E S ^ G o t o step 4.
N O ^ G o to step 20. N O ^ R e p a i r short in the wire between the MAF

sensor and the No. 3 ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse.
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the Also replace the No. 3 ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse,
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. then go to step 20.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Y E S ^ T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other 5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19, connector.
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor/
IAT sensor and the PCM, then g o t o step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
11-62
7. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT 10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5 and body
ground. 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector

M A F S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
terminal B30 and body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
1 2 3 4 5
IG1
(BLK/ORN) h Iz 3 I 4 | / | 6 | 7 8 /
/ /
1 10 •
12 13|14|15|16 17 18
1 / 21 23 25
•
/
26 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
|36|/ t 1 / M)|41 142 4 3 | 4 4 |
i '""i
J
VG+ (RED/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals

Y E S A G o to step 8.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the No. 3
ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse and the MAF sensor/IAT YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM
sensor, then go to step 20. (B30) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to
step 2 1 .
9. Measure the resistance between MAF sensor/IAT
ground.
1 2 3 4 5
VG+
(RED/BLK)
Is there 190-210 k&?
(cont'd)
11-63
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting fcont'd)

13. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT 14. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IAT sensor
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM (see page 11-232).
connector terminal B30.
15. Reconnect all connectors.
MA¥ S E N S O R / I A T S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4 5
VG+ (RED/BLK) 17. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
2,000 rpm without load (in P or N).
3 ]4 1x16 [7 3 3 19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

12 13 14 15 16 17
23 25
26 29 3 0 3 1 32 33 34 35
Is DTC P0102 indicated?
36|>VyiJI0.l41 [42 43 44
VG+ (RED/BLK)
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals NOAReplace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor

(see page 11-232), then go to step 20.
N O ^ R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
(B30) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
step 2 1 .
23. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose

PCM, then g o t o step 1.
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
11-64
26. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P©103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage
27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
g o o d PCM (see page 11-7). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
2 seconds.
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
Y E S ^ C h e c k for poor connections or loose HDS.
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- Is about 202 gm/s, or 4.89 V or more indicated?
g o o d PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. Y E S A G o t o step 3.
N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other at the MAF sensor and the PCM. •
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. S 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P

connector.
6. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
(cont'd)
11-65
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT 8. Reconnect PCM connector B (44P).
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM
connector terminal B32. 9. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector
terminals No. 3 and No. 4 w i t h a jumper wire.
1 2 3 4 5
V G - (BLK/RED)
W i r e side of female terminals / V

P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P) 1 2 3 4 5
VG+ (RED/BLK) V G - (BLK/RED)
h 12 3 | 4 | / | 6 | 7 8 l/l
• •
10 12 13|14|15|1£ ) 17 18 JUMPER WIRE
• 21 23 25 •
26 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
| 3 6 | / / | / | 4 0 | 4 1 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
" I I u
V G - (BLK/RED)

11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
(B32) and the MAF sensor, then go t o step 15. Is DTC P0103 indicated?
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page

11-232).
11-66
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P0106: MAP Sensor Circuit Range/
Performance Problem
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YESACheck for poor connections or loose and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the • PCV valve
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, a • PCV hose
• Purge (PCS) line
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). • Throttle body
• Intake manifold
Are there any leaks?
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- YES ARepair or replace the damaged part(s), then
good PCM (see page 11-7). go to step 7.
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. N O A G o to step 2.
Is DTC P0103 indicated? 2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
YESACheck for poor connections or loose fan comes on, then let it idle.
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- 3. Test-drive the vehicle for 10 seconds in the range of
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM these recorded freeze data parameters:
was substituted, go to step 1.
• ENGINE SPEED
N O A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is • VSS
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the • APPSENSOR
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0106 in the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED. Intermittent

failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 2 and recheck.
(cont'd)
11-67
PGM-FI System
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), DTC P0107: MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
6. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-232). NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
8. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
3,000 r p m without load (in P or N) until the radiator Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or
fan comes o n , then let it idle. less indicated?
11. Test-drive the vehicle for 10 seconds in the range of Y E S A G o to step 3.

these recorded freeze data parameters:
NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
• ENGINE SPEED t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
• VSS at the MAP sensor and the PCM.B
• APPSENSOR
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go 6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
to step 1. HDS.
N O A G o to step 13. Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 V or

less indicated?
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Y E S A G o to*step 12.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? N O A G o to step 7.
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other 7. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12, connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
M A P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 10.
VCC1 SGI
(YEL/RED) (GRN/WHT)
11-68
Is there about 5 V? 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Y E S A G o t o step 16. 13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
N O A G o to step 8. 14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P
connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
MAP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
10. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector / V

terminal C13 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No. 1. MAP
(GRN/RED)
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
2 3
(Q) W i r e side of
female terminals Wire side of female terminals
VCC1 (YEL/RED) P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
i Is there continuity?
I 1 I 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 J 9 |
•
1 0 11 1 2 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM
i : (C11) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
26 2 7 / 29|30|31132 33
/ /
M/ 38139 140 | / | 4 2
43|44|

(C13) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
11-69
PGM-FI S f stem

16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-232). NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
13 Reconnect all connectors. t m i ihlochootinri in f o r m at ion /egg page 11-3).
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 4.49 V or more indicated?
Is DTC P0107 Indicated? Y E S A G o to step 3.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
to step 1. at the MAP sensor and the PCM. •
JSSOATroubleshootlng is complete. If any other 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
23. Reconnect all connectors. 5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2
and No. 3 with a jumper wire.
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- M A P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
good PCM (see page 11-7).

1
Is DTC P0107 indicated? MAP (GRN/RED) SG1 (GRN/WHT)

JUMPER WIRE
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. Wire side of female terminals
N O A l f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is

complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-70
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the 11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more indicated? 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Y E S A G o to step 8. terminal No. 3.
^ , ISGI (GRN/WHT)
8. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the MAP sensor 3P 1
connector. W i r e side of (Q)
female terminals
9. Measure the voltage between MAP sensor 3P PCM

C O N N E C T O R C (44P) SG1 (GRN/WHT)
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3.
?—i 1—i 1—•!
| 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 a I 9 I
•
M A P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
• 1
26 27 /29|30|31132 33 / /
1 3 6 \ / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
VCC1 SGI
(YEL/RED) (GRN/WHT)
Wire side of female terminals N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
(C14) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20.
Is there about 5 V?
(cont'd)
11-71
PGM-FI S f stem
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
15. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 19. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-232).
16. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P), 9Q Rtat^nrtfiQct ~*!! connectors*
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector 21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
terminal No. 2. 22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
1 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

MAP (GRN/RED) Wire side of
female terminals Is DTC P0108 indicated?
MAP (GRN/RED) P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)

YESACheck f o r poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
1 I 2 3 I4 | 5 |6 | T
I 8 I 9 I to step 1.
•
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
24 25
1 20 21 22 23
r IMOATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
26 27 29|30|31 ]32 33 V
3 6 / 38|39|40|/|42 43|44| Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •

YES A G o to step 25. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM
(C11) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20. 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. if the
PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good PCM
substituted, go to step 1.
N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

11-72
DTC P0111: IAT Sensor Circuit Range/ 12. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the IAT SENSOR change 76 °F (42 °C) or
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general more?
YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
ECT sensor 1/2 and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor. at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. •
Are the connections and terminals OK? N O A G o to step 13.
Y E S A G o to step 2. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOARepair the connectors or terminals, then go to 14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
step 15. 11-232).
2. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
11-232).
3. A l l o w the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to cool to the
ambient temperature. 17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
4. Note the ambient temperature. 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
5. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to the 5P Is DTC P0111 indicated?

connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air
cleaner. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). PCM, then go to step 1.
7. Note the value of the IAT SENSOR quickly in the NOATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
DATA LIST with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting B
8. Compare the value of IAT SENSOR and the
ambient temperature.
Does the value of IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 °F

(3 °C)or more?
9. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor f r o m the 5P

connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on the MAF sensor/
IAT sensor for a f e w seconds. Do not apply the heat
longer than a f e w seconds or you will damage the
sensor.
11. Connect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor to the 5P

connector, but do not install the sensor onto the air
cleaner.
11-73
PGM-FI S f stem
#
DTC Troubleshooting (cont d)
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data ground.
troubleshootinq information (see oaae 11-3), iViAr o t i v o u n / i H l O C l u o u n O r t,UIMI\9t:<Lr I U r i
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II),
2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the 1 2 3 4 5

HDS. IAT
(RED/YEL)
Is about 356 °F (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated?
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. • Is there continuity?
3. Turn thp i n n i t i n n s w i t c h t n I C\CV ( 0 \ Y E S A R s p o j r short in the wire between the MAF

sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM (B31), then go t o
4. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P step 13.
connector.
N O A G o t o step 18.
5. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
6. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS. 12. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-232).
indicated? 13. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S A G o t o step 7. 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
N O A G o to step 11. 15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). Is DTC P0112 indicated?

PCM, then go t o step 1.

. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
11-74
18. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0113:1 AT Sensor Circuit High Voltage
19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
good PCM (see page 11-7). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DTCP0112 indicated ? 2. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the Is about ~40°F ( -40 °C) or less, or 4.92 V or
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- more indicated?
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. Y E S A Q o to step 3.
N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is IMO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor and the PCM. •
* Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

connector.
5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector

terminals No. 1* and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
2 3 4 5
SG2 IAT
(GRN/YEL) (RED/YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
7. Check the IAT SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS.
Is about -40°F (-40 °C) or less, or 4.92 V or

more indicated?
(cont'd)
11-75
PGM-FI S f stem
9. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the MAF sensor/IAT 13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
sensor 5P connector.
15. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
11. Measure the voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 5P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2 and body connector terminal B33.
ground.
MAF S E N S O R / I A T ' S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5
SG2 (GRN/YEL)

1 2 3 4 5 P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
IAT
(RED/YEL)
I 1 I 23|4l/|6 r 8 M •
,
1213|14|15|16 177 18
1
10
21 23 25 •
I
26 2829|30|3113233I 3435
|36|/ /|/l40|41 |4 43|44|
SG2 (GRN/YEL)

Is there about 5 V?
(B33) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to
step 22.
11-76
17. J u m p t h e S C S line with the HDS. 21. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-232).
19. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 5P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM 23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
M A F S E N S O R / S A T S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4 5
IAT ( R E D / Y E L ) 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s


PCM, then go to step 1.
IMOATroubleshooting is complete. If any other

SAT ( R E D / Y E L )
indicated DTCs troubleshooting H
I e r m i n a l side of female t e r m i n a l s
Y E S A G o to step 27. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
(B31) and the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, then go to 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
step 22.

PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
IMOAlf the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

11-77
PGM-FI System
#
DTC P0116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Range/ 10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 °F (10 °C) or
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general more?
Y E S A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. m
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS. N O A G o to step 11.
Is about 176 °F (80 °C) or more, or 0.78 V or less 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicated?
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233).
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS. 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333V
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator
fan comes o n , then let it idle. Is DTC P0116 indicated?
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the YESACheck for poor connections or loose
HDS. terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 °F (10 °C) or
more? N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other
YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. •
6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST

w i t h the HDS.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
11-78
DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general E C T S E N S O R 1 2P C O N N E C T O R
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the ECT1

HDS. (RED/WHT)

indicated?
Y E S A G o t o step 3. Wire side of female terminals
N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. •
YESARepair short in the wire between ECT sensor
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 1 and the PCM (B23), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect ECT sensor 1 2P connector. N O A G o to step 18.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the 12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233).
HDS.
indicated? 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Y E S A G o t o step 7. 15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
N O A G o to step 11. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. Is DTC P0117 indicated?
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). YESACheck for poor connections or loose

terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

indicated DTCs troubleshooting.B
(cont'd)
11-79
PGM-FI System

18. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0118: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High
Voltage
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
good PCM (see page 11-7). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
YES A C h e c k for poor connections or loose HDS.
terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM Is about ~40°F (-40 °C) or less, or 4.92 V or
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was more indicated?
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. •
4. Disconnect ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No. 1

E C T S E N S O R 1 2P C O N N E C T O R
SG2 ECT1
(GRN/YEL) (RED/WHT)
J U M P E R WIRE
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals

HDS.

more indicated?
11-80
9. Remove the jumper wire f r o m ECT sensor 1 2P 13. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
connector.
15. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. terminal B33.
ECT S E N S O R 1 2P C O N N E C T O R
ECT SENSOR 1 2P C O N N E C T O R
1 2
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
ECT1 PCM C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
(RED/WHT)
I
1 I 2123l4l/[6
13 14 15 17 6
23 25
26 29[30|31 [32333435
36|>MXl40l41 41 43 44
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V? Terminal side of female terminals
Y E S A G o t o step 12. Is there continuity?
N O A G o to step 16. Y E S A G o t o step 27.

(B33) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
11-81
PGM-FI System
17. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. 21. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233).
18. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 22. Reconnect all connectors.
19. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P 23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector
terminal B23. 24. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
2 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

ECT1 (RED/YEL)
Is DTC PC)118 indicated?
PCM C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
1 2 3 I 4 l/l 6 I 7 step 1.
10 1213 14 15 17618
23 25 N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete, !f any other
26 29l30j31132 3B34 Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
36 AO 41• r \4Z 43 44 indicated DTCs troubleshooting. J i
ECT1 (RED/YEL)
Terminal side of female terminals 27. Reconnect all connectors.
Is there continuity? 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-236),* or substitute a known-
Y E S A G o to step 27. '° good PGM (see page 1 T-7)v "
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
(B23) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
Is DTC P0118 Indicated? m .

was updated, substitute a known-good PCM

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the
11-82
DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow 7. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
Response
Is the thermostat OK ?
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general YESACheck for poor connections or loose
troubleshooting information (see page .11-3). terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
PCM. If the connections and terminals are OK,
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233), then go to
more. step 8.
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the NOAReplace the thermostat (see page 10-8), then
HDS. go to step 8.
Is about 0°F (-18 °C) or less indicated? 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YESACheck for poor connections or loose 9. A l l o w the engine to cool to 104 °F (40 °C) or less.
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
PCM. If the connections and terminals are OK, 10. Check the temperature difference between ECT
replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233). SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 is about 50 °F
(10 °C) in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
11. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). goes up to about 158 °F (70 °C).
4. A l l o w the engine to cool to 104 °F (40 °C) or less. Does ECT SENSOR 2 also show about 158 °F
(70 °C)?
5. Make sure the temperature difference between ECT
SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR 2 is about 50 °F Y E S A G o to step 1 and recheck.
(10 °C) in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. •
6. Start the engine, and let it idle until ECT SENSOR 1
goes up to about 158 °F (70 °C).
Does ECT SENSOR 2 also show about 158 °F

(70 °C)?
N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.B
11-83
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC P0128; Cooling System Malfunction 11. Compare the value of the recorded ECT SENSOR 2
and the present value of ECT SENSOR 2.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze'data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Did temperature rise 16 °F (9 °C) or more?
Y E S A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. •
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
N O A T e s t the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go
3. Turn the blower switch to LOCK (0). to step 12.
4. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST w i t h the 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
HDS.
Is it OFF?
14. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
Y E S A Q o to step 5. between 21 °F ( - 6 °C) and 104 °F (40 °C).
N O A W a i t until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
6.
16. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15—75 m p h
5. Check the radiator fan operation. (24—120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Does the radiator fan keep running? 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YESACheck the radiator fan circuit (see page Is DTC P0128 indicated?
10-19), and the radiator fan relay (see page 22-64).
If the circuits and the relay are OK, g o t o step 19. YESACheck the cooling system, then go to step 1.
N O A G o to step 6. N O A G o to step 18.
6. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the
104 °F (40 °C) or less. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR Does the screen indicate PASSED?
2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
8. Start the engine, and let it idle. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, fl
9. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
36 °F (20 °C) or more f r o m the recorded M O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check the
temperature. cooling system, then go to step 1. If the screen
HDS.
11-84
19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest DTC P0133; A/F Sensor (Sensor 1)
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Malfunction/Slow Response
NOTE:
20. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is &
Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
between 21 ° F ( - 6 ° C ) a n d 104°F(40°C). any on-board snapshot, and review the general
21. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • If DTC P0139 is stored at the same time as DTC P0133,
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator troubleshoot DTC P0139 first, then recheck for DTC
fan comes on, then let it idle. P0133.
22. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15—75 mph 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(24—120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Is DTC P0128 indicated? 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the 4. Test-drive under these conditions:
good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. above 176°F(80 °C)
• Transmission in D
N O A G o to step 24. • Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0128 in the 2 6 - 8 1 mph ( 4 1 - 1 3 0 km/h).
Does the screen indicate PASSED? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is Does the screen indicate FAILED?
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other Y E S A G o to step 6.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1, sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM w a s updated, indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
go to step 20. If the PCM was substituted, go to step CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 20. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-230).
(cont'd)
11-85
PGM-FI S f stem

10. Do the PCM Idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). DTC P0134: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
System Malfunction
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator NOTE:
fan comes o n , then let it idle. • Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general
12. Test-drive under these conditions: troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0135 is stored at the same time as DTC P0134,
* • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) troubleshoot DTC P0135 first, then recheck for DTC
above 176 °F (80 °C) P0134.
• Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
2 6 - 8 1 mph ( 4 1 - 1 3 0 km/h). 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in P or
N), until the radiator fan comes on.
Is DTC P0133 indicated?'
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, Is DTC P0134 indicated?
then go to step 1.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 in the time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay,
and the PCM. •
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13, 6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 11-230).
N O A | f the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the 8. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
CONDITION, go to step 11.

terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI
subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
11-86
Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0134 in the DTC P0135: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Circuit Malfunction
Does the screen indicate PASSED? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates NOT 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on. fan comes on, then let it idle.
is DTC P0135 indicated?
MOAintermittent failure, the system is OK at this

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay,
and the PCM.H
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0),
6. Check the No. 11 Fl SUB (15 A) fuse in the under-

hood fuse/relay box.
is the fuse OK ?
(cont'd)
PGM-FI System
7. Test the PGM-FI subrelay (E) in the under-hood 10. At the sensor side, check for continuity between
fuse/relay box (see page 22-64). A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 3, and between terminals No. 1 and No. 4
individually.
A / F S E N S O R ( S E N S O R 1) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
AFS-
Is the PGM-FI subrelay OK ?
Y E S A G o to step 8. Is there continuity ?
N O A R e p l a c e the PGM-FI subrelay, then go t o step Y E S A G o to step 22.

:
23.
8. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
9. At the sensor side, measure the resistance between
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No. 3 12. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
and No. 4.
13. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector
terminal C9.
1 2 1 2
AFSHTC +B
3 4 3 4
AFSHTC (BLK/WHT)
T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s
AFSHTC
Wire side of female terminals P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P) (BLK/WHT)
12 3 4 5 8 9
10 212213 1415 1617 19
18
Is there 2.2—2.7 Q at room temperature?
20 7 J 2 9 l 3 0 l 3 1 [32J33
232425
Y E S A G o to step 10. 2627
360 38139 1401^42 43 44
r—a-
N O A G o to step 22. T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
11-88
Is there continuity? 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
Y E S A G o to step 14, 17. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P

N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (C9) terminal A 2 1 .
and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 23.
PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
1SUBRLY
14. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) f r o m the under-
X
4
S U B R L Y (PNK) P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
n— 1—ij
l/V 8 I 9 L
/ 4 5 6
1 21 13|14|15|16 17
10 / 12 718 19
r
20 232 4 25 •
26272829|/|31 V 333435
136137 38|39|40|/ 42 43|44|
Terminal side of female terminals *
15. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
4P connector terminal No. 4 and PGM-FI subrelay N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
4P connector terminal No. 2. (A21) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step 23.
A / F S E N S O R ( S E N S O R 1} 4 P C O N N E C T O R
1 2
4-B (WHT)
3 4
Terminal side of male terminals
PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y
4P C O N N E C T O R
+B
4
Terminal side of female t e r m i n a l s
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the A/F

sensor (Sensor 1) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go
to step 23.
(cont'd)
11-89
PGM-FI S f stem
18. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) from the under- 22. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
hood fuse/relay box. 11-230).

19. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector. subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
20. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P N O A G o to step 28.
connector.
21. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
4P connector terminal No. 4 and body g r o u n d .
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
1 2
+B (WHT)
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
YESARepair short in the wire between the PGM-FI

subrelay and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), and the
EVAP canister vent shut valve. Also replace the
No. 11 Fl SUB (15 A) fuse, then go to step 23.
NOAReplace the under-hood fuse/relay box

11 90
1\
-v. c<y
29. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0137: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)

Circuit Low Voltage
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- NOTE:
good PCM (see page 11-7). * Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
3 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
e
Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies to
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. the '07-09 models.
Is DTC P0135 indicated? ' 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
YESACheck for poor connections or loose 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
subrelay, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
go to step 3 1 . If the PCM was substituted, go to step fan comes on, then let it idle.
1.
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
N O A Q o to step 33.
Does the voltage stay at 0.29 (0.05)* V or less?
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Y E S A G o to step 5.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

YESA|f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM.H
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector.
IMOA|f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good 8. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 3 1 . If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates Does the voltage stay at 0.29 (0.05)* V or less?
NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes
on. Y E S A G o to step 9.
(cont'd)
11-91
PGM-FI S f stem

12. Check for continuity between secondary H02S 20. Test-drive under these conditions:
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158°F(70 °C)
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2) 4P C O N N E C T O R
• ENGINE SPEED between 1,500-3,000 rpm
• Drive 1 minute or more
SH02S
• (WHT/RED) 2 1 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
1 2
3 4 Is DTC P0137 indicated?

terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM, then go to step 1.
Is there continuity? 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS.
(C27) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go Does the screen indicate PASSED?
to step 15.
N O A G o to step 23. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 ,
14. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page connections or loose terminals at the secondary
11-230). H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
15. Reconnect all connectors. a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
19. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or

N) until the radiator fan comes on.
11-92
23. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
24. Update the PCM If It does not have the latest
25. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in P or
N) until the radiator fan comes on. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
26. Test-drive under these conditions; 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
above 158 °F (70 C ) 3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator
• Transmission in D fan comes on, then let it idle.
' • ENGINE SPEED between 1,500-3,000 rpm
• Drive 1 minute or more 4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more?
Is DTC P0137 indicated? Y E S A G o to step 5.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a at the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. •
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step
25. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
N O A G o to step 28. 6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P

connector.
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 In the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 with a jumper wire.
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2) 4 P C O N N E C T O R
YESA|f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting Is
JUMPER WIRE
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
1 2
SH02S SG2
N O A | f the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor (WHT/RED) 3 4 (GRN/YEL)
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 25. If the PCM was substituted, W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 25.
(cont'd)
11-93
PGM-FI System
8 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. 16. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more? 17. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
Y E S A G o t o step 10. 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector

terminal C27 and body ground.
P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
1
1 I 23 | 4 | 5 | 6 8| I79]
I
.
r r
11. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the secondary H02S

•
10 11 1213|14|15|16 17 1819
232425 1
(Sensor 2) 4P connector.
a 20 2122
2627/ 29|30|3113233/ /
|36l/ 38139140 1X14243K4I
12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No. 1 t o body ground w i t h a jumper wire. S H 0 2 S (WHT/RED)
S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2) 4P C O N N E C T O R

SH02S
(WHT/RED)
1 2 Is there continuity ?
JUMPER WIRE 3 4

(C27) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals to step 2 1 .

20. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
14. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. 11-230).
Does the voltage stay at 1.27 V or more? 21. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S A G o to step 15. 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM 23. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
(B33) and the secondary H 0 2 S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 2 1 . 24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
11-94
25. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 29. Reconnect all connectors.
3,000 rpm without load (In P or N) until the radiator
fan comes on, then let it idle. 30. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
26. Test-drive under these conditions: good PCM (see page 11-7).
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) 3 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in P or
' a b o v e 158°F(70 °C) N) until the radiator fan comes on.
• Engine speed between 1,500—3,000 rpm 32. Test-drive under these conditions:
• Drive about 1 minute or more
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. above 158°F (70°C)
Is DTC P0138 indicated? • Engine speed between 1,500—3,000 r p m
• Drive about 1 minute or more
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and 33. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 in the terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 3 1 . If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other N O A G o to step 34.

go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 in the
connections or loose terminals at the secondary Does the screen indicate PASSED?
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
CONDITION, go to step 25. original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other

H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-7), then g o t o step 3 1 . If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 3 1 .
11-95
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC P013S: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Slow 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
Response
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data above 158 °F (70 °C)
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general • Transmission in D
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Vehicle speed at 35 mph (56 km/h) or more
• Drive 20 seconds
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator YESACheck for poor connections or loose
fan comes on, then let it idle. terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
4. Test-drive under these conditions:
above 158°F(70 °C) 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the
• Transmission in D DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Vehicle speed at 35 m p h (56 km/h) or more
• Drive 20 seconds Does the screen indicate PASSED?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
I\IOA|f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Y E S A G o to step 6. connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
poor connections or loose terminals at the CONDITION, go to step 11.
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.

11-230).

3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator
11-96
DTC P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, measure
Heater Circuit Malfunction the resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general S E C O N D A R Y H 0 2 S ( S E N S O R 2) 4 P C O N N E C T O R

1 2
3 4 -
3. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Is DTC P0141 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
Is there 5.4— 7.3 Q at room temperature?
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Y E S A G o to step 9.
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. •
N O A G o to step 2 1 .
9. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, check for
6. Check the No. 3 ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse in the continuity between body ground and secondary
under-dash fuse/relay box. H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and
No. 4 individually.
Is the fuse OK ?
N O A R e p a i r short in the wire between the

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the No. 3
ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 3
ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse, then go to step 22.
7. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P

connector.
Y E S A G o to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-97
PGM-FI S f stem

10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
11. Measure the voltage between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4. P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
S02SHTC (GRN/WHT)
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4 P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 | 4 \/\ 6 I 7 0
10 121314 15 1617
1 2 23 25
26 2829|30l3l[32 333435
IG1 S02SHTC
(BLK/ORN) (GRN/WHT)
3 4 36 43 44
T e r m i n a l side of male terminals
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there continuity ?
Is there battery voltage? YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM
(B4) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to
Y E S A G o to step 12. step 22.
11-98
/§
16. Measure the voltage between secondary H02S 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground. 18. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
20. Check for continuity between secondary H02S

(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No. 4 and PCM
IG1
(BLK/ORN)
1 2 S02SHTC
(GRN/WHT)
3 4
S 0 2 S H T C (GRN/WHT)

TTlY i [4 L/L6J7 8 l / i •
• 1021 123 13|14|15|16 23
17 18
•
25 •
26 28 29|30|31132 3435
33
3 6 / Xl7l40|41 142 43|44|
NOARepair open in the wire between the
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the No. 3
ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse, then go to step 22.
NOARepair open in the wire between the PCM (B4)

and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step
22.
(cont'd)
11-99
PGM-FI S f stem
2 1 . Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page 28. Reconnect all connectors.
11-230).
29. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest *
22. Reconnect all connectors. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
Is DTC P0141 indicated? terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
the PCM. If the PCM was update, substitute a
YESACheck for poor connections or loose known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step •
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and . 30. If the PCM was substitute, go to step 1.
'' the PCM, then go to step 1.
32. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC p n i A i in the
27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0141 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Y E S A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs we're indicated in step 26, original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 3 1 ,
connections or loose terminals at the secondary N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If connections or loose terminals at the secondary
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
until a result comes on. updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-7), then go to step 30. If the PCM was substituted,
11-100
DTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean 2. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts:
DTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich • PCV valve

• PCV hose
NOTE: • EVAP canister purge valve
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and • Throttle body
any on-board snapshot, and review the general • Intake manifold
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Intake air duct
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as DTC P0171 and/or P0172, troubleshoot Are the parts OK ?
those DTCs first, then recheck for P0171 and/or P0172.
YESACheck the engine valve clearances and adjust
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor if necessary (see page 6-10). If the valve clearances
P0106, P0107, P0108: Manifold absolute pressure are OK, replace the injectors (see page 11-228),
(MAP) sensor then go to step 3.
P0133, P1172, P1157, P2195, P2238, P2252, P2A00: Air
fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1) N O A R e p a i r or replace parts with leaks, then go to
P0134, P0135: Air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor (Sensor 1) step 3.
heater
P0137, P0138, P0139, P2270, P2271: Secondary H02S 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater 4. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
P0401, P0404, P0406, P2413: Exhaust gas
recirculation (EGR) system 5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
P0443, P0496: EVAP canister purge valve
P1024, P1286, P1287, P1288, P1289, P128A, P128B, 6. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
P2279: Intake air leakage 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
P2647, P2648, P2649, P2651, P2652, P2653, P2654, fan comes on, then let it idle.
P3400: Valve pause system
1. Check the fuel pressure; '06 model (see page
11-350), '07-08 models (see page 11-350). • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 176°F (80°C)
Is the fuel pressure OK? • Transmission in P or N
• All electrical loads off
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take up to
NOA 80 minutes of test-driving to set. Using the HDS,
• If the pressure is too high, replace the fuel monitor the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE).
pressure regulator (see page 11-363), then go to If the AF FB AVE stays within 0.80—1.20, there is no
step 3. problem at this time.
• If the pressure is too low, check the fuel pump,
the fuel feed pipe and the fuel filter. If they are 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator (see page
11-363), then go to step 3. Is DTC P0171 or P0172 indicated?
NOATroubleshooting is complete. If any other

11-101
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Combination of the Following: 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected 3. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or
N).
DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
DTC P0303: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected Does the screen indicate FAILED?
NOTE: Y E S A G o to step 9.
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
• If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
of increased emissions during t w o consecutive . CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck.
driving cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300
(and some of the combination of P0301 through 5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
P0304) will be stored. MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
• If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
catalyst, the MIL will flash whenever the misfire
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some of the combination Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
of P0301 through P0304) will be stored. W h e n the MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
misfire stops, the MIL will remain on. counts?
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same t i m e as the random misfire DTCs, troubleshoot Y E S A G o to step 9.
those DTCs first, then recheck for random misfire
DTCs: N O A G o to step 6.
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air f l o w (MAF) sensor
P0106, P0107, P0108: Manifold absolute pressure 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
(MAP) sensor range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
P0171, P0172: Fuel system
P0335, P0339: Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor • ENGINE SPEED
P0351, P0352: Ignition coil • VSS
P0365, P0369: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor • RELTP SENSOR
P0401, P0404, P0416, P2413: Exhaust gas • CLV (calculated load value)
recirculation (EGR) system • APPSENSOR
P0506, P0507: Idle control system -ECTSENSOR 1
P1024, P1286, P1287, P1288, P1289, P128A, P128B,
P2647, P2648, P2649, P2651, P2652, P2653, P2654, 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P3400: Valve pause system P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If

a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, g o t o step 6 and recheck.
11-102
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-350).
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS. Is the fuel pressure OK?
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 YESACheck the fuel system lines and hoses, for
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any
counts? damaged parts, then go to step 15.
Y E S A G o t o step 9. NOA
• If the fuel pressure is too high, replace the fuel
NO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this pressure regulator (see page 11-363), then g o t o
time.B step 15.
• If the fuel pressure is too low, check the fuel
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). p u m p , the fuel feed pipe, and the fuel filter. If
they are OK, replace the fuel pressure regulator
10. Check the fuel quality. (see page 11-363), then go to step 15.
Is the quality good? 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Y E S A G o t o step 11. 16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
N O A D r a i n the tank and fill w i t h a known-good fuel, 17. Clear the CKP pattern w i t h the HDS.
then go to step 15.
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-20). If the spark
plugs are fouled or w o r n , replace t h e m .

• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• RELTPSENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
• APPSENSOR
• ECTSENSOR 1
13. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3

for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3

MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
counts?
(cont'd)
11-103
PGM-FI S f stem
19. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4). DTC P0301: No. 1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
20. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the DTC P0302: No. 2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P03G3: No. 3 Cylinder Misfire Detected
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS DTC P0304: No. 4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value) NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
• APPSENSOR and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
• ECTSENSOR 1 troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DTC P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
indicated?
3. Start the engine , and let it idle without load (in P or
YESACheck for a poor connection or loose N).
terminals at the ignition coils, the injectors, and the
PCM, then go to troubleshooting DTC P03GT, P0302, 4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-104). P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
N O A G o to step 22. Does the screen indicate FAILED?
22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, Y E S A G o to step 9. .
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
Y E S A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other CONDITION, wait for several minutes, and recheck.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 ,
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 5. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1 for 10 minutes with the HDS.
and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 20. MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
counts?
N O A G o to step 6. '

• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• RELTP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
• APPSENSOR
• ECTSENSOR 1
11-104
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, 12. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
Y E S A G o to step 9. counts?
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until Y E S A G o t o step 13.
CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck. IMOAintermittent misfire due to poor contact at the
ignition coil connector (no misfire at this time).
8. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 Make sure the coil connections are secure. B
for 10 minutes w i t h the HDS. 13. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire ignition coils were exchanged?
counts?
YESAReplace the faulty ignition coil (see page
Y E S A G o to step 9. 4-20), then go to step 49.
IMOAintermittent failure, the system is OK at this N O A G o to step 14.

time. Check the fuel system circuit connectors for
loose wires or poor connections. • 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 15. Exchange the spark plugs f r o m the problem
cylinder w i t h those f r o m another cylinder.
10. Exchange the ignition coils f r o m the problem
cylinder w i t h those f r o m another cylinder. 16. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
° ENGINE SPEED • RELTPSENSOR
• VSS • CLV (calculated load value)
• REL TP SENSOR • APPSENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value) • ECTSENSOR 1
• APPSENSOR
• ECTSENSOR 1
(cont'd)
11-105
PGM-FI System

17. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 22. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 • VSS
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire • RELTP SENSOR
counts? • CLV (calculated load value)
• APPSENSOR
Y E S A G o to step 18. • ECTSENSOR 1
N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t misfire due to spark plug fouling 23. Check the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
(no misfire at this time). • MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
18. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
spark plugs were exchanged? counts?
YESAReplace the faulty spark plug, then go to step Y E S A G o to step 24.

49.
NO A Intermittent misfire due to bad contact in the
N O A G o to step 19. injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check
for poor connections or loose terminals at the
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). injector. •
20. Exchange the injector f r o m the problem cylinder 24. Determine w h i c h cylinder had the misfire.
w i t h one f r o m the another cylinder.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
2 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. injector was exchanged?
YESAReplace the faulty injector (see page 11-228),

then go to step 49.
11-106
26. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connectors f r o m the 30. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P
problem cylinder. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). IGNITION COIL 3P C O N N E C T O R
28. Measure the voltage between ignition coil 3P

IGNITION COIL 3P C O N N E C T O R GND

(BRN)
(BLK)* (TV
3
+B
(BLK/WHT)
(YEL)* (V)
Wire side of female terminals Y E S A G o t o step 3 1 .
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the ignition

Is there battery voltage? coil and G102 (see page 22-16), then go to step 47.
Y E S A G o to step 29. ^ * : " exhaust side
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the ignition 3 1 . J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
coil and the No. 14 IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A) fuse
(or No. 13 IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A) fuse)*, then 32. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
go to step 47.
* : exhaust side
(cont'd)
11-107
PGM-FI S f stem
33. Check for continuity between body ground and the 34. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition
appropriate PCM connector terminal of the coil 3P connector terminal No. 1 and the
problem cylinder (see table). appropriate PCM connector terminal of the
problem cylinder (see table).
FRONT (INTAKE) SIDE:
PROBLEM PCM WIRE FRONT (INTAKE) SIDE.
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
No. 1 P0301 C15 YEL/GRN CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 2 P0302 C16 BLU/RED No. 1 P0301 C15 YEL/GRN
No. 3 P0303 C17 BLK/RED No. 2 P0302 C16 BLU/RED
No. 4 P0304 C18 WHT/RED No. 3 P0303 C17 BLK/RED
No. 4 P0304 C18 WHT/RED
REAR (EXHAUST) SIDE.
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE IEAR (EXHAUST) SIDE:
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
No. 1 P0301 C23 WHT CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 2 P0302 C24 WHT/GRN No. 1 P0301 C23 WHT
No. 3 P0303 C25 WHT/BLK No. 2 P0302 C24 WHT/GRN
No. 4 P0304 C19 WHT/BLU No. 3 P0303 C25 WHT/BLK
No. 4 P0304 C19 WHT/BLU
PCM C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
KilMl IIUIM U U I L CUIMlVbi; 5 U K
IGPLS3E
(WHT/BLK)

T e r m i n a l s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
and the ignition coil, then go to step 47. Y E S A G o to step 35.
N O A G o to step 34. N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM and

the ignition coil, then go to step 47.
11-108
35. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown 38. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
test (see page 6-6). appropriate PCM connector terminal of the
problem cylinder (see table).
Did the engine pass both tests?
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
Y E S A G o to step 36. CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
N O A R e p a i r the engine, then go to step 47. No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU
36. Do the VTEC rocker a r m test (see page 6-7). No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

Did the engine pass the test?
INJ2 (RED) INJ3 (BLU)
INJ1 (BRN) INJ4 ( Y E L )
N O A R e p a i r the VTEC rocker arm (see page 6-33), ri
I 1 I 2
3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
then go to step 47. •
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
a 1
37. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 26 27
/
29|30|31132 33 / /
3 6 1 / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
( y ) ( y )
(cont'd)
11-109
PGM-FI S f stem
39. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 44. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal of the
40. Disconnect the injector 2P connector f r o m the problem cylinder (see table).
problem cylinder.
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRF
41. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
42. Measure the voltage between injector 2P connector No. 2 P0302 C6 RED
terminal No. 1 and body ground. No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU
No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL
I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
INJ2 (RED) INJ3 (BLU)
INJ1 (BRN) INJ4 (YEL)
IGP ri
(YEL/BLK) Tilt
•
3 |4 |5 |6 | 7 8 | 9 |
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
i i
26 27 / 29|30|31132 33 / /
3 6 1 / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the injector and the injector, then go to step 47.
and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 47.
11-110
45. Check for continuity between appropriate injector 46. At the injector side, measure the resistance
2P connector terminal No. 2 and the appropriate between injector 2P connector terminals No. 1 and
PCM connector terminal of the problem cylinder No. 2.
(see table).
I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No. 1 P0301 C5 BRN
No. 2 P0302 C6 RED 1 2
No. 3 P0303 C7 BLU
IGP INJ
No. 4 P0304 C8 YEL
I N J E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
INJ
LT 2
Is there 10- 13 Q?
INJ2 (RED) INJ3 (BLU) Y E S A G o t o step 57.

INJ1 (BRN) INJ4 (YEL)
. NOAReplace the injector (see page 11-228), then
1 1 n23 |4|5|6 7n8 9

go to step 47.
I
10 111213|14|15|16 17 1819
202122^ > < r 23/24/25
2627 29|30|3113233
|36\/ 38|39|40|/ 42 43|44| 48. Reconnect all connectors.
NOARepair open in the wire between the PCM and

the injector, then go to step 47.
(cont'd)
11 111
PGM-FI S f stem
5 1 . Clear the CKP pattern w i t h the HDS. 56. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
53. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
54. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 55,
range of these recorded freeze data parameters; go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. H
• ENGINE SPEED N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

• VSS connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
• RELTP SENSOR the injector, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
• CLV (calculated load value) screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
• APPSENSOR result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
• E C T SENSOR 1* CONDITION, go to step 54.
55°. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. .57. Reconnect all connectors.
Is DTC P0301;P0302 ,P0303,

h or P0304 . 58. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
indicated? - _ 0
/ software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
I good PCM (see page 11-7). "
YESACheck for poor connections or loose-
terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the 59. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
PCM, then g o t o troubleshooting DTC P0300, P0301, range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-102).,
• ENGINE SPEED
N O A G o to step 56. • VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load yalue)
9
• APP SENSOR \ •. ,
• ECT SENSOR 1
60. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS:
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304

indicated?

terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 59: If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
11-112
Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302, DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction
Does the screen indicate PASSED? and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
Y E S A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 60, 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
NO A |f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil, fan comes on, then let it idle.
the injector, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then 4. Hold the engine speed between 3,000—4,000 rpm
go to step 59. If the PCM was substituted, go to step for at least 10 seconds.
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT 5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
OF CONDITION, go to step 59.
NO A|intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

at the knock sensor and the PCM. •
8. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector

(see page 11-234).
(cont'd)
11-113
PGM-FI System
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C42 and body ground. terminal C42 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
If II
I 1 I 2123 I 4 I 5 I 6 | T
8|9| h U
3 I 4 I 5 I 6 I 78 I 9 I
1021
11 13|14|15|16 231724
1825
19 1021
1122 13|14|15|16 1724
1819
•
12
•
20 22 1 •
20
23 /25 1
2627 29|30|31132 33/ / 2627 29|30|31132 / 33
|36|/ 38|39|40|/ 42 43|44| 38[39|40|/|42 431441
KS (RED/BLU) KS (RED/BLU)
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity ? Is there continuity? *
YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM Y E S A G o t o step 13. •] ,

(C42) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
N O A G o to step 11. (C42) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
11. Connect the knock sensor 1P connector terminal to 13. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-234).
body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
KNOCK SENSOR IP CONNECTOR
KS (RED/BLU) 17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
J U M P E R WIRE
18. Hold the engine speed between 3,000—4,000 rpm
for at least 10 seconds.

Y E S A G o t o step 2 1 .
11-114
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the DTC P0335: CKP Sensor No Signal
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19, 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor 3. Start the engine.
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17. 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
2 1 . Update the PCM if it does not have the latest Is DTC P0335 indicated?
good PCM (see page 11-7). Y E S A G o to step 5.
22. Hold the engine speed between 3,000—4,000 rpm N O A I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
for at least 10 seconds. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the CKP sensor and the PCM. •
6. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector.
terminals at the knock sensor and the PCM. If the 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(see page 11-7), then go to step 22. If the PCM was 8. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P
substituted, go to step 1. connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
N O A G o to step 24. C K P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R

1
IGP (YEL/BLK)
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • Wire side of female terminals

connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor Is there battery voltage?
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step Y E S A G o t o step 9.
22. if the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22. NOARepair open in the wire between the CKP
sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1, then g o t o step 19.
(cont'd)
11-115
PGM-FI System
9. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CKP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
1? Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

1 2 3 terminal C32 and body ground.
CKP(BLU)
1 I 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 68| |7 9 |
10 11 1213|14|15|16 17 1819
•
20 2122 232425 1
2627/ 29]30[31132 33/ /
38|39|40|/|42 43|44|
C K 3P ( B-L~ U- )
U ; J J
Is there about 5 V?
10. Measure the voltage between CKP sensor 3P Is there continuity?

CKP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
(C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to

1 2 3
LG (BRN/YEL) j [ IGP (YEL/BLK)
C K P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
Wire side of female terminals 1 2 3

CKP(BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the CKP W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

sensor and G102 (see page 22-16), then go to step
19.
11-116
16. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal C32 and body g r o u n d .
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
1 i l
1 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 B 19:
a 28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
10 11 12 13|14[15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
H 1
/ / Is DTC P0335 indicated?
26 27
J
29|30|31132 33
36 \ / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / —
( r
42t /
J
43|44|
— ' —
CKP (BLU)
terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the

Is there continuity? complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Y E S A G o to step 26. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
18. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-231).
2 1 . Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
22. Clear the CKP pattern w i t h the HDS.
24. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).

terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
MOATroubleshooting is complete. If any other

indicated DTCs troubleshooting. B
11-117
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC P0339: CKP Sensor Intermittent 8. Remove the cam chain case (see page 6-14), and
Interruption check for damage to the CKP sensor pulser plate.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the pulser plate damaged?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YESAReplace the CKP sensor pulser plate
(see page 11 -231), then go to step 11.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-231).
4. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS. 11. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
Are 0 counts indicated ? 12. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
Y E S A G o to step 7. 13. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
N O A G o to step 5 . 14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 15. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
16. Start the engine, and let it Idle for 10 seconds.
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
6. Check the CKP NOISE in the DATA LIST w i t h the Is DTC P0339 indicated?
HDS.
Are 0 counts indicated? terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
N O A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
at the CKP sensor and the PCM. •
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals

at these locations:
• CKP sensor
• PCM
° Engine ground
9
Body ground
Are the connections and terminals OK?
N O A R e p a i r the connectors or terminals, then go to

step 11.
11-118
DTC P0351: intake Side Ignition Coil Power 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Circuit Malfunction terminal C26 and body ground.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
n—n :
I 1 I 2n 3 I 4 I 5 I 6, |n 87| 9 |
10 11 1213|14|15|16 17 1819
•

•
2021V22 232425 1
2 62 7 29 |
3 0|
3 113233/ /
38|39|40|/|42 43|44|
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. |3
IGRTNI (BLK/WHT)

NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the No. 14 IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A) fuse, the Y E S A G o to step 10.
intake side ignition coil, and the PCM.H
N O A G o to step 23;
10. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
5. Check the No. 14 IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A) fuse in connector terminal C26 and body ground while
the under-hood fuse/relay box. disconnecting the 3P connector f r o m each intake
side ignition coil, one at time.
Is the fuse OK ?
Did any ignition coil cause an open when it was
Y E S A G o to step 11. disconnected?
N O A G o to step 6. YESAReplace the ignition coil that caused an open

w h e n it was disconnected, then go to step 16.
N O A R e p a i r short in the wire between the No. 14
7. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A) fuse, the intake side
ignition coil and the PCM (C26), then go to step 16.
8. Remove the No. 14 IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A) fuse
f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box. 11. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-119
PGM-FI S f stem

14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminal C26 and body g r o u n d .
I 1 I 23 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 | 19. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

10 111213|14|15|16 17 1819
202122 232425
2627 29|30|3113233/ / 1
3C / 38|39|40|/|42 43|44| 21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
IGRTNi (BLK/WHT)

terminals at the No. 14 IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A)
fuse, the intake side ignition coil, and the PCM, then
Is there battery voltage ? go to step 1.
Y E S A G o t o step 22. N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other

N O A G o to step 15. indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
15. Test the ignition coil relay (B) in the under-hood 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
fuse/relay box (see page 22-64).


terminals at the No. 14 IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A)
fuse, the intake side ignition coil, and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was
Is the ignition coil relay OK? substituted, go to step 1.
YESARepair open in the w i r e between the No. 14 N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
IGNITION COIL (IN) (15 A) fuse and the PCM (C26). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
If the wire is OK, replace the under-hood fuse/relay original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
box (see page 22-59), then go to step 16. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
N O A R e p l a c e the ignition coil relay, then go to step
16.
11-120
DTC P§352: Exhaust Side Ignition Coil Power 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Circuit Malfunction terminal C38 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)

ll ll I
JO . . . . •.
I
I1 I 2
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 | 9 |
17 18 19
10 11 12 13|14|15|16
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 20 21 22 23 24 25 1

26 27
36 \ / /29|30|31132
38 |39|40|/
33
42
/ /
43|44|
I IGRTNE (YEL)
NO A | intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the No. 13 IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A) fuse, the Y E S A G o to step 10.
exhaust side ignition coil, and the PCM.B
10. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
5. Check the No. 13 IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A) fuse in connector terminal C38 and body ground while
the under-hood fuse/relay box. disconnecting the 3P connector f r o m the each
exhaust side ignition coil, one at time.
Is the fuse OK ?
Did any ignition coil cause an open when it was
Y E S A G o to step 11. disconnected ?
N O A G o to step 6. YESAReplace the ignition coil that caused an open

w h e n it was disconnected, then go to step 16.
N O A R e p a i r short in the wire between the No. 13
7. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A) fuse, the exhaust side
ignition coil and the PCM (C38), then go to step 16.
8. Remove the No. 13 IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A) fuse
f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay box. 11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-121
PGM-FI S f stem
14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
I 1 I2 3 |4|5|6| 7 8 | 9 | 19. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

10 11 1213|14|15|16 17 1819 •
202122 232425 20. Do the PCM idle ieam procedure (see page 11-333).
2627 29|30|3113233/43144!/
•
1361/ 38|39|40|/|42 2 1 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

I IGRTNE (YEL)
X) Is DTC P0352 indicated?

terminals at the No. 13 IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A)
fuse, the exhaust side ignition coil, and the PCM,
Is there battery voltage? then go to step 1.
Y E S A G o to step 22. N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other

N O A G o to step 15. indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •
15. Test the ignition coil relay (B) in the under-hood 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
fuse/relay box (see page 22-64).


terminals at the No. 13 IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A)
fuse, the exhaust side ignition coil, and the PCM. If
Is the ignition coil relay OK? substituted, go to step 1.
YESARepair open in the w i r e between the No. 13 N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
IGNITION COIL (EX) (15 A) fuse and the PCM (C38). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
If the wire is OK, replace the under-hood fuse/relay original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
box (see page 22-59), then go to step 16. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . ^
NOAReplace the ignition coil relay, then go to step
16.
11-122
/
DTC PG38S: CMP Sensor No Signal 8. Measure the voltage between CMP,sensor 3P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1GP ( Y E L / B L K )
Is DTC P0365 indicated? Wire side of female terminals
NO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Y E S A G o t o step 9.
at the CMP sensor and the PCM. •
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the CMP
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 18.
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector. 9. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P
CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
2 3
CMP (GRN)
Is there about 5 ¥?
(cont'd)
11 •" 123
PGM-FI S f stem
10. Measure the voltage between CMP sensor 3P 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CMP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

y \ IGP terminal C31 and body ground.
1
(YEL/BLK)
LG P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
(BRN/YEL) I—(y
. r 3 | 4 | 5 [ 6 |87| 9• |
i .
10 1
11213|14|15|16 17 182519
•
h I 2
202122 2324 1
2627 29|30|3113233/ /
136\/ 38139 14C |/| 4243|44|
CMP (GRN)
/s there battery voltage?
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the CMP
sensor and G102 (see page 22-16), then go to step
18. Is there continuity?

(C31) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18.
11-124
15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor 3P 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminal C31. 17. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-231).
C M P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
C M P (GRN)
1 2 3 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
p . , . r
11 1213|14|15|16 17 1819
3 10
2021232 |4 | 5 |623|/27
a
4/25 1
262 7 29|
3 0|
3 113 2 3 3
36 L /
38139 14dI / I 4 2 u43|44|
O 1 1
CMP (GRN)
Terminal side of female t e r m i n a l s
terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
N O A J r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other
(C31) and the CMP sensor, then go to step 18. 23. Reconnect all connectors.


terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the

indicated DTCs troubleshooting. M
11-125
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC P0369: CMP Sensor Circuit Intermittent 8. Check for damage to the CMP sensor pulser plate
Interruption (see page 6-30).
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data Is the pulser plate damaged ?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YESAReplace the CMP sensor pulser plate
2 . Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
10. Replace the CMP sensor (see page 11-231).
4. Check the CMP NOISE in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Are 0 counts indicated? 12. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
Y E S A G o to step 7. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
N O A G o to step 5. 14. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM, then go
6. Check the CMP NOISE in the DATA LIST w i t h the to step 1.
HDS.
Are 0 counts indicated? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the

at the CMP sensor and the PCM. •
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals

at these locations:
• CMP sensor
• PCM
• Engine g r o u n d
• Body g r o u n d
N O A R e p a i r the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 11.
11-126
DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control 6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
System Performance Problem 1 is 1 2 2 ° F ( 5 0 ° C ) o r l e s s .
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data 7. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs other than Does the screen indicate FAILED?
P050A indicated?
Y E S A Q o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
N O A G o to step 3. failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the throttle
3. Check for poor connection or blockage at the intake body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM. If
air duct. the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
Is it OK? CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
Y E S A G o t o step 4. 10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.
NOAReconnect or repair the intake air duct, then
go to step 20. Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
VALVE normal?
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing.
Is it OK?
NOAReplace the throttle body (see page 11-372),
Y E S A G o to step 5. then go to step 20.
NOAReplace the air cleaner (see page 11-370), 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
then go to step 20. 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
5. Check for dirt or debris on the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YESAReplace the air cleaner element (see page

(cont'd)
11-127
PGM-FI S f stem
12. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST w i t h 20. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm
for at least 30 seconds. 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
13. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m , check 22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
23. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
Is there about 3.9— 5.5 gm/s? 1 is 122 °F (50 °C) or less.
Y E S A G o t o step 14. 24. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
N O A R e p l a c e the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page
11-232), then go to step 20. 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is DTC P050A indicated?
15. A l l o w the engine to cool to ambient temperature. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
16. Note the ambient temperature. sensor, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). N O A G o to step 26.
18. Note the value of IAT SENSOR quickly in the DATA 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
LIST w i t h the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
19. Compare the value of the IAT SENSOR w i t h the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 °F Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
(3 °C) or more from the ambient temperature? go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
YESAReplace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
(see page 11-232), then go to step 20. connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, and the PCM, then go
N O A C h e c k for dirt, carbon, or damage in the to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
throttle bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the idling until a result comes on. If the screen
throttle body (see page 11-370), then go to step 20. indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 23.
If there is damage in the throttle bore, replace the
throttle body (see page 11-372), then go to step 20.
11-128
DTC P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing 6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
Control System Performance Problem 1 is 122°F(50°C) or less.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs other than Does the screen indicate FAILED?
P050B indicated?
Y E S A G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
N O A G o to step 3. failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the CKP
3. Check for a loose connection or a blockage at the sensor, the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
intake air duct. sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
Is it OK? a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
10. Check the ignition t i m i n g (see page 4-19).
NOAReconnect or repair the intake air duct, then
go to step 25. Is the ignition timing OK?
4. Check for damage to the air cleaner housing. Y E S A G o to step 12.
Is it OK? N O A G o to step 11.
Y E S A G o to step 5. 11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page
11-231) and the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page
NOAReplace the air cleaner housing (see page 6-21).
Is the CKP sensor and/or the CKP sensor pulser
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element. plate damaged?
Is it dirty? YESAReplace the CKP sensor (see page 11-231)

and/or the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page 6-21),
YESAReplace the air cleaner element or remove then go to step 25.
the debris (see page 11-371), then go to step 25.
(cont'd)
11-129
PGM-FI S f stem
12. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h 24. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
the HDS. ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL individually.
VALVE normal?
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4 °F (3 °C)
Y E S A Q o to step 13. from the ambient temperature?
NOAReplace the throttle body (see page 11-372), YESAReplace the sensor that differed more than
then go to step 25. 5.4 °F (3 °C) f r o m the ambient temperature, then go
to step 25.
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator N O A C h e c k and repair any problems w i t h the
fan comes o n , then let it idle. f o l l o w i n g items. Repair or replace t h e m if needed,
then go to step 25. If every item is OK, go to step
14. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST w i t h 32.
the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm
for at least 30 seconds. • Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
• Valve pause system
15. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 r p m , check • Engine oil
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. • A/C system
Is there about 3.9—5.5 gm/s? 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Y E S A G o to step 16. 26. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
NOAReplace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (see page 27. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 1 is 1 2 2 ^ ( 5 0 ^ ) or less.
17. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). 29. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
18. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-233). 30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
19. A l l o w the sensors to cool to ambient temperature. Is DTC P050B indicated?
20. Note the ambient temperature. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
21. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor
sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install t h e m . 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). N O A G o to step 3 1 .
23. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR

2 quickly in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
11-130
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Y E S ^ T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g ' is complete. If any other Y E S A | f the PCM was updated,troubleshooting is

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor, ECT N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep the throttle body, the MAF/IAT sensor, ECT
idling until a result comes on. If the screen sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 28. was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-7), then g o t o step 33. If the PCM was
32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
good PCM (see page 11-7). the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 33.
1 is 122 °F ( 5 0 * 0 or less.
Is DTC P050B indicated?

!
terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF/IAT sensor, ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and
the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
33. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
N O A G o to step 36. *-
11-131
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC P0563: PCM Power Source Circuit 10. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
Unexpected Voltage terminal A6 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). M R L Y (GRN)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). >|4|5|6| r 8 I 9 L

1 10 /
12
13|14|15|16 177 1819 •
21 / 232425 •
20
26 28291/131L/ 333435
27
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 136137 38|39|40|/|42 43|44|
4. Wait 10 seconds.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Is DTC P0563 Indicated? Y E S A G o to step 13.
Y E S A G o to step 7. N O A G o to step 1 1 .
N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this 11. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals hood fuse/relay box.
at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM.B
11-132
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminal A6 and body ground. terminal A8 and body ground.
P G M C O N N E C T O R A (44P) P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
M R L Y (GRN) IGP1 (ORN)
i
/I 4 I 5 I6 I 7 8 I 9 I > | 4 1 5 1 6 I 7
•
10 /12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 11 710T 7A* 12 13|14|15|16 17 188 19I 9 L
• •
20 21 / 23 24 25 20 21 23 24 25
• •
•
26 27 28 33 34 35 26 27 28 2 9 H 3 1 K 33 34 35
136 ] 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44| 136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM YESARepair short to power in the wire between
(A6) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 16. the PCM (A8) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then g o t o
step 16.
13. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-
hood fuse/relay box. 15. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-64).
Is PGM-FI main relay 1 OK?
NOAReplace PGM-FI main relay 1, then g o t o step

16.
(cont'd)
11-133
PGM-FI System

16. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0602: PCM Programming Error
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOTE:

18. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. any on-board snapshot, and review the general
19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). • This DTC is indicated w h e n a PCM update is not
completed.
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). • Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to
LOCK (0) while updating the PCM. If you do, the PCM
2 1 . Wait 10 seconds. can be damaged.
22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 1. Do the PCM update procedure (see page 11-236).
Is DTC P0563 indicated? 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose Is DTC P0602 indicated?

terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM, then
go to step 1. YESAReplace the original PCM (see page 11-238).

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the N O A U p d a t e is complete. If any other Temporary
indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. •


terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM. If

11-134
DTC P0603: PCM internal Control Module DTC P0606: PCM Processor Malfunction
Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
('06-08 models) NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
DTC P062F: PCM Internal Control Module troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
f
( 09, model) 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NOTE: 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

any on-board snapshot, and review the general 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
• Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
to '06-08 models.
• Information marked w i t h a double asterisk (* *) 5. Wait 40 seconds.
applies to '09 model.
1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? time.il
Y E S A G o to step 4. 7. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

IMOAintermittent failure, the system is OK at this good PCM (see page 11-7).
time. •
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Wait 40 seconds.
Is DTC P0603* (P062FY * indicated?
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
was substituted, go to step 1. good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 8. If the
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the |\IOA|f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, m Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated D T C s troubleshooting. B
11-135
PGM-FI S f stem
DTC P060A: PCM (A/T system) Internal DTC P0630: VIN Not Programmed or
Control Module Malfunction Mismatch
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE:

and any on-board snapshot, and review the general • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). any on-board snapshot, and review the general
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). • This DTC is stored only when the PCM does not have
the VIN information of the vehicle. Use the HDS to
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. input the missing VIN information.
• Information marked with an asterisk (*) applies
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. to '06-08 models.
• Information marked w i t h a double asterisk (* *)
Is DTC P060A indicated? applies to '09 model.
Y E S A G o t o step 4. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this 2. Check the VIN w i t h the HDS.

time.B
Does the HDS show the vehicle's VIN?
• 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a k n o w n - Y E S A G o to step 5.
3. Input the VIN to the PCM w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P060A indicated?
. Does the screen show COMPLETE?
Y E S A | f the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM Y E S A G o to step 5.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the Is DTC P0603* (P062F)* * indicated?
indicated D T C s troubleshooting. M
Y E S A G o to the DTC P0603* (P062F)* *
troubleshooting (see page 11-135). •

5 seconds.
11-136
8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P068§; PCM Power Control Circuit/
Internal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
Y E S A G o to step 9. • Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are &
If the problem doesn't return after you clear the DTC,
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs or it this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose
troubleshooting. • terminals at the IGP line connectors before replacing
the PCM.
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM 5. Start the engine, and let it idle for 30 seconds.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

time. 11

(cont'd)
11-137
PGM-FI S f stem

15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P1109: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of
Range High
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known- and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
good PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 10. If the troubleshooting Information (see page 11-3).
|\IOA|f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the 2. Start the engine.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are Indicated, go to the 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
N O A I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system Is OK at this

t i m e . 11


• N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

11-138
DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Range/ 8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233).
Performance Problem
9. A l l o w ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambient temperature.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 10. Note the ambient temperature.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116, not install it on the engine.
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
P1116. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are the connections and terminals OK? 14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4 °F
N O A R e p a i r the connectors or terminals, then go to (3 °C) or more from the ambient temperature?
step 27.
YESAReplace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233), then
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). go to step 27.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. •
time?
15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
N O A G o to step 4. HDS.
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes. Is about 100 °F (38 °C) or less indicated?
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST w i t h the YESAReplace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233), then
HDS. go to step 27.
Is about 100 °F (38 °C) or less indicated? N O A G o to step 17.
YESAReplace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233), then 17. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes.
go to step 27.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less indicated?
7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). YESAReplace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-233), then
g o t o step 27.
(cont'd)
11-139
PGM-FI S f stem
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). 28. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
2 1 . Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233) and ECT 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
sensor 2 (see page 11-233).
22. A l l o w the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
23. Note the ambient temperature.
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install t h e m . PCM, then g o t o step 1.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other
2 quickly in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
individually.

from the ambient temperature?
YES A R e p l a c e the sensor that differed more than

5.4 °F (3 °C) f r o m the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.

11-140
DTC P1157: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Circuit 9. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Malfunction 4P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector
terminal C29.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4 P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). AFS+ (GRN)
1 2 -
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 3 4
2. Clear the DTG w i t h the H D S . '
P C M CONNECTOR C (44P)
3. Start the engine, and wait 1 minute. i r ll
1
1 234 5 ;
10 121314 151617 1819
20 22 232425
Is DTC P1157 indicated? 2627 29 30 31 323
36M381^9 140 |Xl42l43l44
Y E S A G o to step 5. AFS-j- (GRN)
NO A I intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. •
6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. (C29) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
12.
7.. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
(cont'd)
11-141
PGM-FI System

10. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 11. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
4P connector terminal No. 1 and PCM connector 11-230).
terminal C30.
A F S - (RED) 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1 2
3 4 14. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

1
12 3 4 5
12131415 1617 1819 Is DTC P1157 indicated?
20 2122 232425
26 38139
29 |40 323
30 31\yW YESACheck for poor connections or loose
36 tx—x r — c r43 44 terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
V 1 '— A ^F S1- ( IR E D )
1 1
then go to step 1. If the connections and terminals
Terminal side of female terminals are OK, go to step 18. >
Is there continuity? N O A G o to step 17.
Y E S A G o t o step 11. 17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1157 in the
(C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step Does the screen indicate PASSED?
12.

(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
until a result comes on.
11-142
18. Update the PCM If It does not have the latest DTC P1172: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- of Range High
19. Start the engine, and let It Idle. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
good PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 19. If the 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. 3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator
fan comes o n , then let it idle.
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1157 in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Y E S A i f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 20, poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
. NO A | f the screen Indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 19. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen Indicates 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOT COMPLETED, keep Idling until a result comes
on. 6. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-230).

(cont'd)
11-14
PGM-FI S f stem
11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage
Is DTC P1172 indicated? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YESACheck for poor connections or loose troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
then go to step 1. 1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
N O A G o to step 12. 2. Check the ELD In the DATA LIST with the HDS.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the Is 72 A or more indicated?
NOAInterrnittent failure, the system Is OK at this
YESATroubleshooting Is complete. If any other time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated In step 11, at the ELD and the PCM. H
3. Turn t h e Ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor 4. Disconnect the E L D 3P connector.
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step T. If the
screen Indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a 5. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
result comes on. If the screen Indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 10. 6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 72 A or more indicated?
8. Jump the S C S l i n e with the H[DS.
11-144
terminal A23 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
/ | 4 | 5 | 6 |8|9l 7 22. Start the engine.

10 1213|14|15|16 17 1819 •
•
20 21 232425 •
2627282 9 / 1 3 1 1 / 333435
1
23. Turn on the headlights.
13613T 38|39|40 | / | 4 ? 431441

ELD fORN)
Terminal side of female terminals YESACheck for poor connections or loose

terminals at the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was
Is there continuity? 11-7), then go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
(A23) and the ELD, then go to step 13. N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
N O A G o to step 20. original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). indicated D T C s troubleshooting H
12. Replace the ELD (see page 11-235).
18. Turn on the headlights.

terminals at the ELD and the PCM, then go to step
1.

11-145
PGM-FI S f stem

DTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage 7. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector
terminal No. 3 and PCM connector terminal A23.
• E L D 3P C O N N E C T O R
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST w i t h t h e HDS.

1 2 3
Is 0.2 A or less indicated? ELD (ORN)
Y E S A G o t o step 3. P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
NO A intermittent failure, the system Is OK at this > | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7

!w• /
10 12
13|14|15|16 1 7 24 18 1 9
a
at the ELD and the PCM. •

2 0 21
23 25
1
3 5
•
26 27 28 2 9 1 / | 3 1 1 / 33 34

136137
38|39|40|/|4? 4 3 | 4 4 |
ELD (ORN)
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector.
5. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). Is there continuity?
6. Measure the voltage between ELD 3P connector Y E S A G o t o step 10.

terminal No. 1 and body ground.
ELD 3P C O N N E C T O R
(A23) and the ELD, then go to step 12.
1 12 13
IG1 ( Y E L )
N O A C h e c k the No. 3 ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse In

the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK,
repair open In the wire between the No. 3
ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse and the ELD, then go to
step 12.
11-146
10. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector 17. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal No. 2 and body ground. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
ELD 3P C O N N E C T O R
Is DTC Ft298 indicated?

2 3
GND (BLK)
terminals at the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
NOARepair open in the wire between the ELD and

G301 (see page 22-18), then go to step 12.
11. Replace the ELD (see page 11-235).
Is DTC PI298 indicated?

11-147
PGM-FI System
DTC P16D5: F-CAN Malfunction (Internal DTC P16D6:1 MA-CAN Malfunction (Internal
Malfunction) Malfunction)
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P16D5 indicated? Is DTC P16D6 indicated?
Y E S A G o to step 4. Y E S A G o t o step 4.
NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
t i m e . If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are t i m e . If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. • troubleshooting. B
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a k n o w n - software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7). g o o d PCM (see page 11-7).
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known- Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM g o o d PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. was substituted, go to step 1.
N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-148
DTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Range/ 9. A l l o w ECT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do
any on-board snapshot, and review the general not install it on the engine.
• If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P2183, 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
P2183. 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the
DATA LIST with the HDS.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. 14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 2 and the
Does ECT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 °F (3 °C) or more
Y E S A G o to step 2. ' from the ambient temperature?
NOARepair the connections or terminals, then go YESAReplace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-233), then
to step 27. go to step 27.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.H
Are DTC P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same 15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes.
time?
Y E S A G o to step 15. HDS.
N O A G o to step 4. Is about 100 °F (38 °C) or less indicated?
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 minutes. YESAReplace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233), then
go to step 27.
HDS. N O A G o to step 17.
Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less indicated? 17. Let the engine idle for 10 minutes.
YESAReplace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-233), then 18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
go to step 27. HDS.
N O A G o to step 6. Is about 131 °F (55 °C) or less indicated?
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YESAReplace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-233), then
go to step 27.
7. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6).
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-233).
(cont'd)
11-149
PGM-FI System
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-6). 28. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-233) and ECT 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
sensor 2 (see page 11-233).
22. A l l o w the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
Is DTC P2183 Indicated?
24. Connect the ECT sensors to their 2P connectors, but terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
do not install t h e m . PCM, then go to step 1.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other
2 quickly in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. 53
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
individually.

from the ambient temperature?
YESAReplace the sensor that differed more than

5.4 °F (3 °C) f r o m the ambient temperature, then go
to step 27.

11-150
DTC P2184; ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
connector terminal No. 2 (1)* and body ground.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and '06 model
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). E C T S E N S O R 2 2P C O N N E C T O R
• Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies
to '07-09 models.

ECT2
2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the (GRN)
HDS.

indicated?
NO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this '07-09 models

at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. Efl E C T S E N S O R 2 2P C O N N E C T O R
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.

ECT2
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). (GRN)

HDS.
Is about 356 °F (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

indicated?
N O A G o to step 11. YESARepair short in the wire between ECT sensor

2 and the PCM (A33), then go to step 13.
(cont'd)
11-151
PGM-FI S f stem

11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High
Voltage
12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-233).
NOTE:
13. Reconnect all connectors. • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
* Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies
15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. to '07-09 models.
16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 2. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about-40 °F (-40 °C) or less, or 4.92 V or
YESACheck for poor connections or loose more indicated?
terminate at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to
step 1. Y E S A G o to step 3.
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other MO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM. •
18. Reconnect all connectors. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
good PCM (see page 11-7).* 5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No. 1
20.,Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

SG6 (BLK) ECT2 ( G R N )
(see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was (ECT2 ( G R N ) ) * (SG6 ( B L K ) ) *
JUMPER WIRE

original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other W i r e side of female terminals
11-152
7. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST w i t h the 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
HDS.
more indicated? 14. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
Y E S A Q o to step 8. 15. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P

connector terminal No. 1 (2)* and PCM connector
N O A G o to step 20. terminal A9.
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). '06 model
9. Remove the jumper w i r e f r o m ECT sensor 2 2P
connector.
1 2
10. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). S G 6 (BLK)
— (
11. Measure the voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P W i r e side of female terminals
connector terminal No. 2(1)* and body ground. PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P) S G 6 (BLK)
4 |5|6 | 7 8 I S
'06 model ' , .
/ I
12 17 1819 •
1
10 13|14|15|16
20 21
23242 5•
ECT SENSOR 2 2 P CONNECTOR
26272829|/|311/ 33343I44I
4 35
•
13613T 38|39|40|/|42
'07-09 models

1 2
SG6 (BLK)
'07-09 models W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P) S G 6 (BLK)

ECT S E N S O R 2 2 P C O N N E C T O R
Is there about 5 V? N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (A9)

and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
11-153
PGM-FI S f stem
17. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. 2 1 . Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-233).
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 22. R e c o n n e c t al! ônnortnrc
19. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P 23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
connector terminal No. 2 (1)* and PCM connector
terminal A33. 24. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
'06 model 25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

1 2 Is DTC P2185 indicated?

ECT2 (GRN)
step 1.
NO A J r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. Sf any other

indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •

ECT2 (GRN)
T e r m i n a l side of female t e r m i n a l s 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
'07-09 models good PCM (see page 11-7).
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR

/ V
2 Is DTC P2185 indicated?
ECT2 (GRN)
•
/ | 4 | 5
| 6 | 7 8|9l substituted, go to step 1.
10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
1
20 21
/ 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 1 / ] 3 1 | / 33 34 35
•
13613T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 ? 43|44| complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
ECT2 (GRN) Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •

(A33) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
11-154
DTC P2195:'A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Stuck Lean
7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page ;
NOTE; 11-230).
• Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and
any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC
w i t h the HDS. 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
• If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176, or a
combination of P2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138, 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
or P2127 and P2138 are stored at the same time,
troubleshoot t h e m first, then recheck for DTC P2195. Is DTC P2195 indicated?
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1). YESACheck for poor connections or loose
Is the A/F sensor loose or disconnected in the then go to step 1.
exhaust pipe?
N O A G o to step 2. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Is DTC P2195 indicated? (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen indicated NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
YESACheck for poor connections or loose until a result comes on.
then go to step 13.

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
(cont'd)
11-155
PGM-FI System

13. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Circuit Range/
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Performance Problem
NOTE:
14. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. I • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P0107, P0108, P1128, and/or P1129 are stored
Is DTC P2195 indicated? at the same time as DTC P2227, troubleshoot those
DTCs first, then recheck for DTC P2227.
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good 2 seconds.
w a s substituted, go to step 1. 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 in the 2.9 V at sea level indicated?
Y E S A G o to step 3
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the 3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15, 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor 5. Test-drive under these conditions:
(Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
go to step 14. If the PCM was substituted, go to step above 158°F(70°C)
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep • Transmission in D
idling until a result comes on. • REL TP SENSOR between 12 deg and 26 deg for
3 seconds


failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
recheck.
11-156
7. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest DTC P2228: BARO Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
good PGM (see page 11-7). NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
fan comes o n , then let it idle. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
9. Test-drive under these conditions: 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
above 158 °F (70 °C) Is about 53 kPa (15,6 in.Hg, 397 mmHg), or 1.31 V
• Transmission In D or less indicated?
• REL TP SENSOR between 12 deg and 26 deg for
3 seconds Y E S A G o to step 3.
10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
3. Update the PCM If it does not have the latest
YESACheck for poor connections or loose software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, good PCM (see page 11-7).
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
go to step 8. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
1.
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 In the terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. substitute a known-good PCM (seepage 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting Is complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
original PCM (see page 11-238). if any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 10, indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. B

connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
substituted, g o t o step 1. If the screen Indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 8.
11-157
PGM-FI S f stem

DTC P2229: BARO Sensor Circuit High DTC P2238: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) A F S +
Voltage Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
the HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.2 In.Hg, 1,200 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more indicated? 7s DTC P2238 indicated?
Y E S A G o to step 3. Y E S A G o to step 4.
N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time.il time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. ^
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a k n o w n - 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, 8. Check for continuity between PCM connector
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then terminal C29 and body ground.
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other | 1 | 2 3 I 4 | 5 I 6 I87I 9 i
10 11 1213|14|15|16 17 1819
i

indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • •
2027
2122 232425 1
26 29|30|31132 33/43(44
/
136/ 38 39 140 |/| 42
AFS+ (GRN)
LJ —

(C29) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
10.
11-158
9. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2238 In the
11-230). DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
10. Reconnect all connectors. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
12. Reset the PCM with the HDS. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
14. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
screen Indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
Is DTC P2238 indicated? until a result comes on.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose 16. Update the PCM If It does not have the latest
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
then go to step 1. If the connections and terminals good PCM (see page 11-7).
are OK, g o t o step 16.

good PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 17. If the
. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.


N O A | f the screen Indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If

PCM (see page 11 -7), then go to step 17. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen Indicates
NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes
on.
11-159
PGM-FI S f stem

DTC P2252: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS— 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Circuit Low Voltage terminal C30 and body ground.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
TTTt p c
8 I9I
• 3 4 5 6 7
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 20 21 22 23 24 25 1
•
26 27 29|30|31132 33 / /
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 1 3 6 1 / 3 8 | 3 9 | I 0 | / 42 43|44|
A F S — (RED)
3. Start the engine, and let it Idle.

Y E S A G o to step 5. Is there continuity?
NO A intermittent failure, the system Is OK at this YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM
t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals (C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go t o step
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. • 11.
5 . Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). N O A G o to step 10.
6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 10. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-230).
11-160
14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is DTC P2252 indicated?
Is DTC P2252 indicated? Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known-

YESACheck for poor connections or loose PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
then go to step 1. If the connections and terminals N O A G o to step 20.
are OK, go to step 17.
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2252 in the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
YESAJroubleshooting is complete. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15, go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
N O A l f the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step 1. If
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 18. If the PCM
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes
until a result comes on. on.

. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
11-161
PGM-FI System
DTC P2270: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
DTC P2271: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
Circuit Signal Stuck Rich 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). fan comes on, then let it idle.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) *
above 158 °F (70 *€).-
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • Vehicle speed between 35—55 m p h (56 —
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator 88 km/h)
fan comes o n , then let it idle. • Drive 1 minute or more
4. Test-drive under these conditions: 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) Is DTC P2270 or P2271 indicated?

C
above 158°F(70 €)
• Vehicle speed between 35—55 m p h (56 — YESACheck for poor connections or loose
88 km/h) terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
• Drive 1 minute or more the PCM, then go to step 1.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271 N O A G o to step 14.
in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271
Does the screen indicate FAILED? in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Y E S A G o to step 6. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
N O A l f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
poor connections or loose terminals at the go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting H
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF connections or loose terminals at the secondary
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck. H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
11-230).
11-162
DTC P2610: PCM Ignition Off Internal Timer DTC P2A00: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit
Malfunction Range/Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
Is DTC P2610 indicated? fan comes o n , then let it idle.
Y E S A G o to step 4. 4. Test-drive under these conditions:
IMOAintermittent failure, the system is OK at this • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are above 158 °F (70 °C)
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs • Transmission in D
troubleshooting. • • Vehicle speed between 25—55 mph (40 —
88 km/h) for 5 minutes
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest • Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- (88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate
good PCM (see page 11-7). (with throttle fully closed) for 6 seconds or more
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM Y E S A G o to step 6.
N O A l f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-230).
(cont'd)
11-163
PGM-FI S f stem

10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). DTC U0028: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
11. Test-drive under these conditions: NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
above 158°F (70 °C)
• Transmission in D 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
• Vehicle speed between 25—55 m p h (40 —
88 km/h) for 5 minutes 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
• Drive at a steady speed between 55—75 mph
(88—120 km/h) for 10 seconds, then decelerate 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
(with throttle fully closed) for 6 seconds or more
Is DTC U0028 indicated?
Is DTC P2A00 indicated?
YESACheck for poor connections or loose t i m e . If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM, indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
then go to step 1. troubleshooting. •
N O A G o to step 13. 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2A00 in the good PCM (see page 11-7).
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12, Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
CONDITION, g o t o step 11. indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-164
DTC U0037: IMA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) 12. Connect PCM connector terminal A38 t o body
ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). •

> | 4 |5 |6 | 7 ®I L 9
10 12 13|14|15J16 17 18 19
V
20 21 23 24 25
•
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. •

26 27 28 2 9 / 1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
13613T 38139 140 | / | 42 431441
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. I M A C A N H (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
Y E S A G o to step 4. Terminal side of female terminals
IMOAintermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 13. Check for continuity between BCM module
at the M C M , the BCM module, the A/C compressor connector terminal A20 to body g r o u n d .
driver, and the PCM.B
B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
4. Check for DTCs in the IMA system w i t h the HDS.

IMACANH (WHT)
Y E S A G o to step 5. | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 [91/111112 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20

21|22|23|/|/|/|/|28|29|30|/|/|33|34|/36|37|38|/40|
6. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. W i r e side of female terminals

8. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-118).
9. Turn the battery module switch OFF.
10. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). (A38) and the BCM module (A20), then go to step
41.
11. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P)
(see page 12-182).
(cont'd)
11-165
PGM-FI S f stem
14. Connect PCM connector terminal A39 to body 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
> l 4 |5 | 6 |7 8 | 9 l
19. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
•
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
10
/
20 21
•
23 24 25 •
i
26 27 28 29|/|31 V 33 34 35 20. Measure the resistance between BCM module
431441 connector terminals A20 and A40 w i t h connector
13613T
I7T42
38|39 140
connected.
IMACANL (RED)
J U M P E R WIRE
BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P)
15. Check for continuity between BCM module I1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 9|/|11|12 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
connector terminal A40 to body ground.
21|22|23M/M/28|29|30M/133|34M36|37|38|/|40|
IMACANL (RED)
BCM M O D U L E CONNECTOR A (40P)
|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
n n Wire side of f e m a l e terminals
9|/|11|12
21I22I23I/1/I/1/I28I29I30I/I/133I34M36I37I38I/I40I
IMACANL (RED) Is there about 50.4-61.6 Q ?
21. Check the value of the resistance again.
Is there continuity? Is there about 1 Q or less?
Y E S A G o to step 47. YESARepair short in the wires between the PCM

(A38: IMACANH line) and (A39: IMACANL line),
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM then go to step 4 1 .
(A39) and the BCM module (A40), then go to step
41. N O A G o to step 29.
11-166
22. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 28. Check for continuity between BCM module
connector terminal A40 and body ground.
BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A ( 4 0 P )
24. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182).
25. Disconnect the M C M 20P connector (see page

| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | / | 1 1 | 1 2 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
12-186). 21|22|23M/I/I/128|29|30|/|XI33|34M36|37|38|/|40|
IMACANI (RED)
26. Disconnect the A/C compressor driver 4P connector
(see page 21-109). St
27. Check for continuity between BCM module
connector terminal A20 to body ground.
BCM M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A ( 4 0 P )
IMACANH (WHT) YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM

| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | / | 1 1 | 1 2 13|U|15|16|17|18|19|20 (A39) and the BCM module (A40), then go to step
/
2l|22|23| /M/ |/|28|29|30M/|33|34M36|37|38|yl40|
/ 41.

Is there continuity? 31. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182).
YES ARepair short in the wire between the PCM 32. Disconnect the M C M 20P connector (see page
(A38) and the BCM module (A20), then go to step 12-186).
41.
N O A G o to step 28. (see page 21-109).
(cont'd)
11-167
PGM-FI S f stem
34. Connect the BCM module connector A (40P), then 37. Measure the resistance between BCM module
measure the resistance between BCM module connector terminals A20 and A40.
connector terminals A20 and A40 w i t h connector
connected. B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
I M A C A N H (WHT)
|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 9M11|12 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20

2li22|23|/MXIX|28|29|30M/|33|34M36i37|^|/l40|
9MACANH (WHT)
13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
n n
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9|/|11|12 I M A C A N L (RED)
2l|22|23|y1/M/l28|29|30|/1/l33|34M36|37|38|yl40|
/
I M A C A N L (RED)

Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ ?
Is there about 108- 132 Q ? Y E S A G o to step 38,
Y E S A G o t o step 35. N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good the M C M (see page

12-8), then go to step 41 and recheck. If DTC U0037
N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good BCM module is not indicated, replace the original M C M
(see page 12-8), then go t o step 41 and recheck. If (see page 12-186), then g o t o step 4 1 .
DTC U0037 is not indicated, replace the original
BCM module (see page 12-182),then g o t o step 4 1 . 38. Disconnect the M C M 20P connector.
35. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P) 39. Reconnect the A/C compressor driver 4P connector.
(see page 12-182).
36. Reconnect the M C M 20P connector.
11-168
40. Measure the resistance between BCM module 46. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
connector terminals A20 and A40.
terminals at the M C M , the BCM module, the A/C
compressor driver, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
I M A C A N H (WHT)
I 1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 91/111112 13|14|15|16|17|18|19!20 N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other

2ll22|23|/1XI/|/|28|29|30|/[/|33|34|/l36|37l«Iyl40| Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
I M A C A N L (RED) indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
Wire side of female terminals 48. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then t u r n the
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ? 49. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Y E S A G o to step 47. good PCM (see page 11-7).
N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good the A/C compressor 50. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
driver (see page 21-109), then go to step 41 and
recheck. If DTC U0037 is not indicated, replace the Is DTC U0037 indicated?
original A/C compressor driver (see page 21-109),
then go to step 4 1 . YESACheck for poor connections or loose
41. Reconnect all connectors. compressor driver, and the PCM. If the PCM w a s
42. Reinstall the JPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). to step 1.
43. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). IMOA|f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
44. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
45. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). indicated DTCs troubleshooting. M
11-169
PGM-FI System
DTC U0110: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-MCM) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: 8. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-118).

any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Turn the battery module switch OFF.
• Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to 10. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
the '06-07 models.
12. Check for poor connections at the MCM 20P
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Are the connections OK?
Are DTC U0028 and U0110 indicated at the same Y E S A G o t o step 13.
time?
N O A R e p a i r the poor connections at the MCM 20P
Y E S A G o to troubleshooting for DTC U0028. • connector, then go to step 33.
N O A Q o to step 4. 13. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector (see page

12-186).
14. Reconnect the BCM module connector A (40P),
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. then turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure
the voltage between MCM 20P connector terminal
Is DTC U0110 indicated? No. 18 and body ground within 1 second.
Y E S A G o t o step 6. MCM 2 0 P CONNECTOR

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 1— -n
at the M C M , the BCM module, and the PCM. •
1 2 3 5 6 8 9 10
4
11 / ' / '14 15 16 17 18 19 20
7
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS IGA2-1 (RED)
again.
Are DTC U0110 and U1205 indicated at the same

time?
Y E S A G o t o step7.
N O A G o to step 16. Is there battery voltage?
11-170
15. Check for continuity between body ground and 22. Check for continuity between BCM module
MCM 20P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 9* connector terminal A1 and M C M 20P connector
individually. " terminal No. 20.
MCM 20P C O N N E C T O R BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P)
CANH (WHT)
LG2 ( B R N ) LG1 (BRN)*
1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 18191/111112|13|14|15|16|17118|19[26
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ^1 iza|2L3|>n>^l>"l^ ^1^3130 l^l^l^ [34-1^1 ^ 1 3 T | ^ P ^ T ^ T
11 / 14 / ' / 17 18 19 20 W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
MCM 20P CONNECTOR
-i n CANH
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10 (WHT)
11 / '14V' / 17 18 19 20
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there continuity ? Is there continuity ?
Y E S A U p d a t e the M C M if it does not have the latest Y E S A G o to step 23.

good M C M (see page 12-8), then go to step 33 and N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the BCM
recheck. If DTC U0110 is not indicated w i t h a module (A1) and the M C M (No. 20), then go to step
known-good M C M , replace the original M C M 33.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the MCM

(No. 2 and/or No. 9) and G102 (see page 22-16),
then go to step 33.
20. Remove the BCM module connector A (40P)

(see page 12-182).

12-186).
(cont'd)
11-171
PGM-FI S f stem

23. Check for continuity between BCM module 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector terminal A21 and M C M 20P connector
terminal No. 10. 25. Remove M C M relay 2, and test it (see page 22-64).
Is MCM relay 2 OK?

I 1 I 2 I 3 14 | 5 I 6 j 7J 81 9 1/111Il2|13|l4l15|16ll7ll8|l9f20 Y E S A G o to step 26.

21122123M/1/M28|29|30l>|/133|54M36|37138M40[
CANL Wire side of female terminals NOAReplace M C M relay 2, then go to step 33.
(RED)
26. Check the + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary
MCM 20P CONNECTOR CANL
(RED) under-hood fuse/relay box.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Is the fuse OK?

11 /
/
14 ' / 17 18 19 20
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Y E S A G o to step 27.
NOA
Is there continuity? • Repair short in the wire between the + B - I M A 2
(10 A) fuse and M C M relay 2. Also replace the
Y E S A U p d a t e the M C M if it does not have the latest + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse, then go to step 33.
software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known- • Repair short in the wire between the MCM relay 2
good M C M (see page 12-8), then go t o step 33 and and the M C M , the IPU module fan. Also replace
recheck. If DTC U0110 is not indicated w i t h a the + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse, then go to step 33.
known-good M C M , replace the original M C M
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the BCM

module (A21) and the M C M (No. 10), then g o t o
step 33.
11-172
27. Measure the voltage between M C M relay 2 4P 28. Check for continuity between MCM relay 2 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. connector terminal No. 1 and MCM 20P connector
terminal No. 18.
MCM R E L A Y 2 4P C O N N E C T O R
MCM RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
IGA2-1 (RED)
+ B (BLU)
m
2
mi
MCM 20P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Wire side of female terminals /
11 V 14
/
17 18 19 20
IGA2-1 (RED)
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the + B IMA2
(10 A) fuse and M C M relay 2, then go to step 33. JMOARepair open in the wire between the M C M
(No. 18) and M C M relay 2, then go to step 33.
(cont'd)
11-173
PGM-FI System
#
29. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P) 31. Remove M C M relay 1.

(see page 12-182).
32. Check for continuity between M C M relay 1 4P
30. Check for continuity between M C M relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 1 and M C M relay 2 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and BCM module connector terminal No. 4.
connector terminal A12.
IGA (PNK)
1
2
m
IGHLD2 Wire side of
(LT GRN) female terminals
BCM MODULE 1GHLD2

CONNECTOR A (40P) (LT GRN)
r
|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20 m
n
9|/|11|12
IGA (PNK)
21I22I23M/1XM28I29I30IX1/133I34I/136I37I38M40I
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
Y E S A G o to step 3 1 . Y E S A U p d a t e the BCM module if it does not have

the latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the BCM a known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then
module (A12) and M C M relay 2, then go t o step 33. go to step 33 and recheck. If DTC U0110 is not
' indicated w i t h a known-good BCM module, replace
the original BCM module (see page 12-182), then
go to step 33.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between M C M relay 1

and MCM relay 2, then go to step 33.
11-174
33. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC U0111: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-BCM
module)
35. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
37. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
39. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Are DTC U0028 and U0111 indicated at the same
time?
Y E S A G o to troubleshooting for DTC U0028. •
terminals at the MCM, the BCM module, and the N O A G o to step 4.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the 5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
N O A I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

(cont'd)
11-175
PGM-FI System

10. Remove BCM module connector A (40P) (see page 13. Check for continuity between BCM module
12-182). connector terminal A21 and MCM 20P connector
terminal No. 10.
12-186).
n n
12. Check for continuity between BCM module | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | / | 1 1 | 1 2 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
21I22I23IXMXM28I29I30IXM33I34M36I37I38I/I40I
CANL W i r e side of female terminals
terminal No. 20. (RED)
BCM M O D U L E CONNECTOR A (40P) MCM 20P CONNECTOR CANL

(RED)
CANH (WHT)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 61 T I S | 9|/1l1|l2|13|14|15h6|17|18|19|20
11 V 14
211221231>1X1>U128129^^
/ /
17 18 19 20
MCM 20P CONNECTOR

i n CANH Is there continuity?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10. (WHT)
11 / V '14 V 17 18 19 20 Y E S A U p d a t e the BCM module if it does not have
W i r e side of female terminals the latest-software-(see p"age 1*2-1.81), or substitute
a known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then
go to step 14 and recheck. If DTC U0111 is not
Is there continuity? indicated w i t h a known-good BCM module, replace
Y E S A G o t o step 13. go to step 14.
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the BCM N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the BCM
module (A1) and the M C M (No. 20), then go t o step module (A21) and the M C M (No. 10), then go to
14. step 14.
11-176
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC U0121: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-ABS
16. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
18. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). Are DTC U0028 and U0121 indicated at the same
time?
Y E S A G o to troubleshooting for DTC U0028.B
terminals at the M C M , the BCM module, and the 3. Clearthe DTC w i t h the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the Is DTC U0121 indicated?

at the ABS modulator-control unit, and the PCM. •
5. Check for communication to the ABS with the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the ABS

modulator-control unit?
N O A G o to the DLC circuit troubleshooting

(see page 11-213). •
8. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P

connector.
(cont'd)
11-177
PGM-FI System

9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P) 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A37 and ABS modulator-control unit 25P
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector connector terminal No. 17.
terminal A36 and ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector terminal No. 1.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) /I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9

•
/ |
4 j 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 ]
20 21
/12 13|14|15|16 17
23
18 19
24 25
•
28 2 9 | / | 3 1 1 / 33
I
20 21
12 13|14|15|16 17
23
18
24
19
25
• /
13613T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2
34 35
43|44
•
I CANL (RED)
/
27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 \ / 33
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2
34 35
43)44-1
A B S MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
CANH (WHTJi T e r m i n a | S i e of female terminals
d
25P CONNECTOR
Y A B S MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
1 2 3
/A 145 156 /16 248 259 ]
CANH (WHT) 25P CONNECTOR 10
17 18
12
/
1 2 3
/ 5 6
/ 8 9
10
17 18
12
/ / 14 15 16
24 25
CANL (RED)
YESASubstitute a known-good ABS modulator-
Y E S A G o to step 11. control unit (see page 19-154), then go to step 12
and recheck. If DTC U0121 is not indicated, replace
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM the original ABS modulator-control unit (see page
(A36) and the ABS modulator-control unit, then go 19-154), then go to step 12.
to step 12.
(A37) and the ABS modulator-control unit, then go
to step 12.
11-178
12. Reconnect all connectors. DTC U0122; F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA
14. Reset the PCM w i t h t h e HDS. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting Information (see page 11-3).
15. Do the PCM Idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
Y E S A l f DTC U0121 Indicated, check for poor time?
connections or loose terminals at the ABS
modulator-control unit and the PCM, then go to Y E S A G o to troubleshooting for DTC U0028. •
step 1.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are Indicated, go to the 3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

at the VSA modulator-control unit and the PCM.B
5. Check for communication to the VSA system w i t h

the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the VSA

modulator-control unit?
N O A G o to the DLC circuit troubleshooting

(see page 11-213). •
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P

connector.
(cont'd)
11-179
PGM-FI S f stem
terminal A36 and VSA modulator-control unit 37P terminal A37 and VSA modulator-control unit 37P
connector terminal No. 15. connector terminal No. 1.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
i—— 8 I9I
/ I 4 |5 |6 |7 8 9 V l 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
•
• 12 13|14|15|T6 17 18 19 / / ' 1 2 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
/
20 21 23 24 25 20 2 / 23 24 25 •
•
/ /
•
• 27 28 291/1311/ 33 34 35 /2- 7 28 291/1311/ 33 34 35
7
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44 13613" 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
CANH (WHT) CANL (RED)

Terminal side of female terminals T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
37P CONNECTOR CANL V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
(RED) 37P CONNECTOR
1|/|3|/|/|6|7|8|9|10|11|/| 13 14 1 1. / 1. 3. 1. / .1 ./ 1. 6 1 , 7 l 8 l 9 h 0 l n l / r 13 14
11? 1/1 V l / J / 1 p K°l/J21 \IA/1
1
36 37 ,.51/1171X1/1191201X1211221/1
36 37
(WHT) AA7AA?AAAAAAy\A 1/1/1261/12^
Wire side of female terminals W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity ? Is there continuity?
Y E S A G o t o step 11. YESASubstitute a known-good VSA modulator-

- t | " , t (see page 19-236), then go to step 12
c o n r o un
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM and recheck. If DTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
(A36) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
to step 12. 19-236), then g o t o step 12.

(A37) and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go
to step 12. ,
11-180
12. Reconnect all connectors. DTC U0129: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Servo
Unit)
14. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
Y E S A l f DTC U0122 indicated, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the VSA Are DTC U0028 and U0129 indicated at the same
modulator-control unit and the PCM, then go to time?
step 1.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the N O A G o to step 4.

at the servo unit and the PCM. •
6. Check for communication to the advanced"

hydraulic booster system with the HDS.
Does the HDS communicate with the servo unit?
YESACheck for DTCs in the hydraulic booster

system w i t h the HDS, then go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. •
(cont'd)
11-181
PGM-FI S f stem
8. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector. 11. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
9. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
servo unit 25P connector terminals No. 7 , No. 23,
and No. 24 individually. 13. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
S E R V O UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
G N D (BLK) 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

1 2
/ / 145 6 167 8 9 Is DTC U0129 indicated?
10
/ / 23 24 25
17 18
12
// / G N D (BLK) G N D
. (BLK)
terminals at the servo unit and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

Wire side of female terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting 5
YESASubstitute a known-good servo unit

(see page 19-100), then go to step 10 and recheck. If
DTC U0129 is not indicated, replace the original
servo unit, then go to step 10.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the servo

unit (No. 7, No. 23, and/or No. 24) and G202
11-182
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge 10. Connect gauge control module (tach) 36P
Control Module) connector terminal No. 1 to body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E (TACH)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 36P C O N N E C T O R

C A N H (WHT)
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 1 | 2 | / | 4 | 5 | 6 [ 7 8 | 9|10|11 / | 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 | 1 7 | 1 8 |
|19|20|21 l/l/l/l/l/l 2 7 | 2 B | / | 3 0 | 3 1 | 3 Z | 3 3 | / | / | /
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. J U M P E R WIRE
Y E S A G o to step 4. Wire s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
at the gauge control module (tach) and the PCM. • terminal A36 and body g r o u n d .
4. Check for body electrical DTCs in the DTCs MENU P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)

w i t h the HDS.
lsDTCB1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated? \A/

10
/1 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
12 13|14|15|16 17
8
18 19
9
I L
•
20 21 23 24 25
Y E S A G o to step 5. i
26 27 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
N O A D o the gauge control module input test

36 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43
N
C A N H (WHT)
(see page 22-248). •

7. Remove the gauge control module (tach) (see page Is there continuity?
22-248).
8. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P
connector. N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM
(A36) and the gauge control module (tach), then go
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). to step 14.
(cont'd)
11-183
PGM-FI S f stem
12. Connect gauge control module (tach) 36P 14. Reconnect all connectors.
connector terminal No. 19 to body ground w i t h a
jumper wire. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
GAUGE C O N T R O L M n n i is P / T A r m
16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS,
36P CONNECTOR
1 | 2 | / | 4 | 5 | 68|| 9|
710|11/|13|14|15|16|17|18| 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
|19|C2A0|N211/|/|/|/|/|27|28|/|30|31132|33|/|/|/
L (RED)
Is DTC U0155 indicated? *
J U M P E R WIRE

terminals at the gauge control module (tach) and
the PCM, than go to step 1. *
JÔATroubteshooting is complete. If any other
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector indicated DTQ's troubleshooting. •
terminaj A37 and body ground.
II II
1/4/ /! 4 | 5 | 6 |3 7| 9 I
10/ 1213|14|15|16 17 1819 •
•
20 21/ 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 2425 i
262728 333435
•
|36|37 38|39|40|/|42 43|44|

C A N L (RED)
YESASubstitute a known-good gauge control

module (tach) (see page 22-255), then go to step 14
and recheck. If DTC U0155 is not indicated, replace
the original gauge control module (tach), then go t o
step 1 4 . /

(A37) and the gauge control module (tach), then go
to step 14.
11-184
DTC U1205: IMA-CAN Malfunction (PCM- 7. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).
MCM)
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Turn the battery module switch OFF.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 10. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
• Information marked w i t h an asterisk (*) applies to
the '06-07 models. 11. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182).
1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Check for poor connections at the M C M 20P
connector.
Are the connections OK?
time? N O A R e p a i r the poor connections at the M C M 20P
connector, then go to step 32.
Y E S A G o to troubleshooting for DTC U0037.B
13. Reconnect BCM module connector A (40P), then
N O A G o to step 4. turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), and measure the
voltage between M C M 20P connector terminal
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. No. 18 and body ground within 1 second.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. MCM 20P CONNECTOR

i n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 V '14
/ /V
17 18 19 20
IGA2-1 (RED)
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS

again. Wire side of female terminals

time? Is there battery voltage?
(cont'd)
11-185
PGM-FI S f stem
14. Check for continuity between body ground and 21. Check for continuity between BCM module
M C M 20P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 9* connector terminal A20 and MCM 20P connector
individually. terminal No. 11.
LG2 (BRN) L G 1 (BRN)*

| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | / | 1 1 | 1 2 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
21|22|23|/|/|//|/|2S|29|30L/|/|33|34|/|36|37|38|/|40|
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11/V 14
/
17 18 19 20 W i r e side of female terminals
MCM 20P CONNECTOR

"i n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
-11 V '14 V 17 18 19 20
/ /
IMACANH
Wire side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s (WHT) W i r e side of female terminals
Y E S A U o d a t e the M C M if it does not have the latest Y E S A G o to step 22.

software (see page 12-185), or substitute a k n o w n -
good MCM (see page 12-8), then g o t o step 32 and N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the BCM
recheck. If DTC U1205 is not indicated w i t h a module (A20) and the M C M (No. 11), then go to
known-good M C M , replace the original M C M step 32.
(see page 12-186), then g o t o step 32.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the M C M

(No. 2 and/or No. 9) and G102 (see page 22-16),
then go to step 32.
20. Disconnect the M C M 20P connector.
11-186
2 2 . Check for continuity between BCM module 23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector terminal A40 and MCM 20P connector
terminal No. 1. 24. Remove M C M relay 2, and test it (see page 22-64).
B C M MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P) Is MCM relay 2 OK?
T — — - n Y E S A G o to step 25.
|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
9|/|11|12
2li22|23|/1XI/|/l28|29|30MXl33|34|/l36|37|38|yl40|
I IMA NOAReplace M C M relay 2, then go to step 32.
CANL
(RED)
25. Check the + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary
MCM 20P C O N N E C T O R
under-hood fuse/relay box.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
IMA Is the fuse OK?
11 / 14 / ' / 17 18 19 20
CANL
(RED) V
W i r e side of female terminals Y E S A G o to step 26.
NOA
Is there continuity? • Repair short in the wire between the + B IMA2
(10 A) fuse and M C M relay 2. Also replace the
Y E S A U p d a t e the MCM if it does not have the latest + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse, then go to step 32.
software (see page 12-185), or substitute a k n o w n - • Repair short in the wire between M C M relay 2
g o o d M C M (see page 12-8), then go to step 32 and and the M C M , the IPU module fan. Also replace
recheck. If DTC U1205 is not indicated w i t h a the + B 1MA2 (10 A) fuse, then go to step 32.
known-good M C M , replace the original M C M
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the BCM

module (A40) and the MCM (No. 1), then go t o step
32.
(cont'd)
11-187
PGM-FI S f stem
26. Measure the voltage between M C M relay 2 4P 27. Check for continuity between M C M relay 2 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d . connector terminal No. 1 and M C M 20P connector
terminal No. 18.
MCM R E I A Y 2 4 P CONNECTOR MCM R E L A Y 2 4 P CONNECTOR
B (BLU)
MI
I K E W i r e side of female terminals
MCM 2 0 P CONNECTOR
i n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / 14 / '/ 17 18 19 20
Wire side of female terminals V IGA2-1 (RED)

N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the + B IMA2
(10 A) fuse and M C M relay 2, then go to step 32. N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the M C M
(No. 18) and M C M relay 2, then go to step 32.
11-188
28. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P) 30. Remove M C M relay 1.
(see page 12-182).
3 1 . Check for continuity between M C M relay 1 4P
29. Check for continuity between MCM relay 2 4P connector terminal No. 1 and M C M relay 2 4P
connector terminal No. S a n d BCM module connector terminal No. 4.
connector terminal A12.
1 IGA1 (PNK)

IGHLD2 Wire side of MCM RELAY 2 4P CONNECTOR
(LT GRN) female terminals
BCM MODULE IGHLD2

CONNECTOR A (40P) (LT GRN)
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9 | / | 1 1 | 1 2 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
21|22|23|XIXM/|28|29|30|/|/|33|34M36|37|38|/|40|
Mi IGA1 (PNK)
Y E S A G o t o step 30. Y E S A U p d a t e the BCM module if it does not have

N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the BCM a known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then
module (A12) and MCM relay 2, then go t o step 32. go t o step 32 and recheck. If DTC U1205 is not
indicated w i t h a known-good BCM module, replace
go t o step 32.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between MCM relay 1

and M C M relay 2, then go to step 32.
(cont'd)
11-189
PGM-FI System
3 2 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC U120S: IMA-CAN Malfunction (PCM-
BCM Module)
34. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the and anv on-board snapshot, and review the general
36. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
38. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Are DTC U0037 and U1206 indicated at the same
time?
terminals at the M C M , the BCM module, and the N O A G o to step 4.
PCM, then go to step 1.
4., Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the 5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

11-190
10. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182). 13. Check for continuity between BCM module
connector terminal A40 and MCM 20P connector
11. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector. terminal No.1.

BCM M O D U L E CONNECTOR A (40P)
terminal No. 11. I 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 91/111 [12 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
21|22|23|/M/1/I28|29|30|y1/|33|34M36|37|38M40|
Wire side of female terminals IMACANL

BCM M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P) (RED)
IMACANH (WHT)
| 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 9/111112 13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20 IMACANL MCM 20P CONNECTOR
21|22|23|/M/1/|28|29|30MX|33|34M36|37|38|X|40| (RED)
1 n
W i r e side of female terminals 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / ' / 14 17 18 19 20
MCM 20P CONNECTOR V
~i n Wire side of female terminals
1 2 3 4
51 e 7 8 9 10
IMACANH
(WHT)
-11
/V
'14
/ 17 18 19 20
YESAUpdate the BCM module if it does not have

Is there continuity? a known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then
g o t o step 14 and recheck. If DTC U1206 is not
Y E S A G o t o step 13. indicated w i t h a known-good BCM module, replace
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the BCM go to step 14.
module (A20) and the MCM (No. 11), then g o t o
step 14. NOARepair open in the wire between the BCM
module (A40) and the M C M (No. 1), then go to step
14.
(cont'd)
11-191
PGM-FI System
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC U1207:1 MA-CAN Malfunction (PCM-A/C
Compressor Driver)
16. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the end any on-board snapshot, and review the general '
18. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Are U0037 and DTC U1207 indicated at the same
time?
Y E S A G o to Troubleshooting for DTC P0037.B
terminals at the M C M , the BCM module, and the N O A G o to step 4.
4. Cueck f u r Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other again.
indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • Is DTC U1207 indicated?

at the M C M , the BCM module, the A/C compressor
driver, and the PCM. •
5. Check the No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse in under-dash fuse/

relay box.
Is the fuse OK ?
N O A R e p a i r short in the wire the A/C compressor

driver and the No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse. Also replace the
No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 2 1 .
11-192
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Check for continuity between BCM module
connector terminal A40 and A/C compressor driver
7. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-118). 4P connector terminal No. 3.
8. Turn the battery module switch OFF. A / C C O M P R E S S O R D R I V E R 4P C O N N E C T O R
9. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). 1 2 3 4

I M A C A N L (RED)
10. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P)
(see page 12-182). W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
n——HT
(see page 21-109). | 1 ! 2 | 3 | 4 J 5 | 6 | 7 J 8
9|/|11|12
13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20
21|22|23|/|/|/M28|29|30|/1/133|34M36|37|38|X|40|
12. Check for continuity between BCM module I M A C A N L (RED)

connector terminal A20 and A/C compressor driver W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
4P connector terminal No. 2.
A / C C O M P R E S S O R D R I V E R 4P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 Y E S A G o to step 14.
IMACANH (WHT)
N O A R e p a i r open In the wire between the BCM
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s module (A40) and the A/C compressor driver, then
go to step 19.
—IMACANH (WHT) I
| 1 | 2 | 3 14 | 5 j 6 | 7 | 8 j 9 1/111 I l 2 i l 8 l l 4 [ l 5 l 1 6 ] 1 7 l l 8 l l 9 | 2 0
21 | 2 2 l 2 3 M / > | > l 2 8 l 2 9 l 3 0 l > M 3 3 | 3 4 l / l 3 6 l 3 7 l 3 8 M 4 0 '
N O A R e p a i r open In the wire between the BCM

module (A20) and the A/C compressor driver, then
go to step 19.
(cont'd)
11-193
PGM-FI System
#
15. Measure the voltage between A/C compressor 17. Check for continuity between A/C compressor
driver 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body driver 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground. ground.
A / C C O M P R E S S O R D R I V E R 4P C O N N E C T O R A / C C O M P R E S S O R DRIVER 4 P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1G1 (BLK/YEL) GND (BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
Y E S A G o t o step 16. YESASubstitute a known-good A/C compressor

driver (see page 21-109), then g o t o step 18 and
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire the A/C compressor recheck. If DTC U1207 is not indicated, replace the
driver and the No. 9 (7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 18. original A/C compressor driver (see page 21-109),
then go to step 18.
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the A/C

compressor driver and G902, then go to step 19.
11-194
20. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
. YESACheck for poor connections or loose

compressor driver, and the PCM, then go to step 1.

PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1)
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-118).
2. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 12. Turn the battery module switch OFF.
3. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect 13. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
the HDS.
4. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals A36 and A37. 15. Disconnect the M C M 20P connector (see page
12-186).
PCM C O N N E C T O R A ( 4 4 P )
terminals A36 and A37.
I
/ | 4 | 5 |6 | 7 8 I 9 L
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
20 21 23 24 25
I i
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
136! 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
Terminal side of female terminals CANH (WHT)I [CANL (RED)
Is there about 95- 116 Q, (with ABS), 91-111 Q

(with VSA system), or 88- 107 Q (with VSA
system and TPMS)?
Y E S A G o t o F-CAN circuit troubleshooting (Part 2) Is there continuity?

(see page 11-208).
YESARepair short in the wire between PCM
N O A G o to step 5. terminals A36 and A 3 7 . •
5. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P N O A G o to step 17. .

connector (see page 22-255).

connector (see page 19-154), or the VSA
modulator-control unit 37P connector (see page
19-236) and the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor
4P connector (see page 19-234).
7. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see page

19-100).
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P)

(see page 17-82).
9. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see page

24-199).
10. With TPMS: Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P

11-196
17. Connect PCM connector terminal A36 to body 19. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
ground with a jumper w i r e . control unit 37P connector terminal No. 15 and
body ground.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
w >|4|5|6 r 8 1 9 |
10 / 12 13|14|15|16 177 18 19 •
a
i 20 2 1 23 24 25 • CANH
26 27 28 2914311/ 33 34 35
11/181/1/16!718]9]101111/] 13 14
(WHT)
136137 38|39|40|/ 42 43|44| : ^l^'^lXl^hglîxiîiîî 36 37

CANH (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
18. Check for continuity between gauge control Is there continuity?

module (tach) 36P connector terminal No. 1 and
body ground. Y E S A G o to step 20.
G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E (TACH)
3SP C O N N E C T O R (A36) and the VSA modulator-control unit.H
20. Check for continuity between y a w rate-lateral *

CANH (WHT) acceleration 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body
1|2|/|4|5|6|7 8| 9|10|11 /|13|14|15|16|17|18| ground.
119|20| 21 l / l / l / l / l / l 27|28|/|30| 31 |32|33|/|/l/
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e terminals
CANH (WHT)
YESA
• With VSA system: Go to step 19.
• With ABS: G o t o step 2 1 . W i r e side of female terminals
NOARepair open in the w i r e between the PCM

(A36) and the gauge control module (tach).B Is there continuity?
N O A R e p a i r open In the wire between the PCM

(A36) and the y a w rate-lateral acceleration
sensor. •
(cont'd)
11-197
PGM-FI S f stem
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1) (cont'd)

2 1 . Check for continuity between ABS modulator- 23. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
control unit 25P connector terminal No. 1 and body connector D (28P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
ground.
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)
A i S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
C A N H (WHT) C A N H (WHT)
1 2 3 5 6 /ft 9
11/UI/V ^ 7 | 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14|
|15|16|17|/1/|/VI/I/W|26M28
10
/
17 18
12 14 15 16
24 25

N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM (A36) and the EPS control u n i t •
(A36) and the ABS modulator-control u n i t . B
24. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector A
22. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P (28P) terminal No. 11 and body ground.
S R S U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (28P)
S E R V O U N I T 25P C O N N E C T O R
CANH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10
C A N H (WHT)
(WHT)
1 2
10 / 12/ 5 6 7 8 9
14 16
11 12 13 14 15 16
7h 8 1 / 1 / 1 / 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 2 4 1 / 1 / 1 2 7 1 2 8
17 18 /23 24 25

N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM (A36) and the SRS unit. •
(A36) and the servo unit. •
11-198
25. Check for continuity between BCM module 27. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
connector terminal A1 and body ground. 20P connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P) TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
CANH (WHT)
CANH (WHT)
|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 9 m m 2 13|14|15|16!17|18|19|20
21|22|23|/|/|/|/|28|29|30|/1/|33|34|/|36|37|38|/140|
St
W i r e side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
(A36) and the BCM module. • (A36) and the TPMS control unit.H
26. Check for continuity between MCM 20P connector

MCM 20P CONNECTOR
n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / 14 / '17 18 19 20
V CANH (WHT)
YESA
• With TPMS: Go to step 27.
• Without TPMS: G o t o step 28.

(A36) and the M C M . B
(cont'd)
11-199
PGM-FI S f stem
28. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m PCM connector A 3 1 . Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
(44P). control unit 37P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
29. Connect PCM connector terminal A37 to body
ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire. V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
37P CONNECTOR
C A N L (RED) •
1/1/ Vl4|5|6|7 8 I 9 I r 1 ]/l3l/l/l6|7|8|9|l0|lll/l

13 14
10/' 1 2 13|14|15|16 17 1819 i
I
36 37
20 21 / 232425 E
26 27" 2829|/|31|/ 333435

I
13613~ r
38|39|40|/ 42 43|44|
C A N L (RED)
JUMPER WIRE

30, Check for continuity between gauge control Y E S A G o to step 32.

body ground. N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
(A37) and the VSA modulator-control unit. 11
36P CONNECTOR 32. Check for continuity between y a w rate-lateral
acceleration sensor 5P connector terminal No. 4
and body ground.
1 I 2 I / I 4 I 5 I 68|I 79|10|11 /|13|14|15|16|17|18|
|19|CANL
20| 21(RED)
l / l / l / l / l / l 27|28l/l30|31132|33|/|/|/ YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION S E N S O R
5P CONNECTOR

CANL (RED)
YESA W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

• W i t h VSA system: Go to step 3 1 .
• W i t h ABS: Go to step 33.
(A37) and the gauge control module (tach). • Y E S A G o t o step 34.

(A37) and the y a w rate-lateral acceleration
sensor. •
11-200
33. Check for continuity between ABS modulator- 35. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
control unit 25P connector terminal No. 17 and connector D (28P) terminal No. 15 and body ground.
body ground.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
1 2 3
/ 5 6
/ 8 9 1 I / 1 3 | / | / / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14|
115116|17|/|/|/l/l/l/l/l/|26|27|28
10
/
17 18
12 14 15 16
24 25
CANL (RED)
CANL (RED)

N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM ( A 3 7 ) a n d t h e EPS control u n i t . B
(A37) and the ABS modulator-control unit.H
36. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector A
34. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P (28P) terminal No. 12 and body g r o u n d .
SERVO UNIT 25P CONNECTOR , SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A ( 2 8 P )

CANL (RED)
1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 10
10 12
17 18 / / /
14 16
A
23 24 25
11 12 13 141516
/ A /
7ll8l/ lXlXl22l23l24lXlXl27[28
CANL (RED)

NOARepair open in the wire between the PCM
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (A37) and the SRS u n i t . •
(A37) and the servo unit. •
(cont'd)
11-201
PGM-FI S f stein
37. Check for continuity between BCM module 39. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
connector terminal A21 and body g r o u n d . 20P connector terminal No. 11 and body g r o u n d .
B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P) T P M S C O N T R O L U N I T 20P C O N N E C T O R
n n
|1|2|3|4|5|6|7|8 9 | / | 1 1 | 1 2 13|l4|15|16il7|l8|l9|20 2 3 / / 8 10
2li22|23L/lXl/l/1^|29|30|/1/|a|34|/|«|37|3|/|40|
CANL (RED) C A N L (RED)
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
(A37) and the BCM module. • . (A37) and the TPMS control unit. •
38. Check for continuity between M C M 20P connector 40. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m PCM connector A
terminal No. 10 and body g r o u n d . (44P).
CANL (RED)
i n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 '0
/ /
11 V '14 '/ 17 18 19 20
YESA
• W i t h TPMS; Go to step 39.
• W i t h o u t TPMS: Go to step 40.

(A37)and the M C M . B
11-202
41. Reconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P 45. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
connector., terminals A36 and A37.
PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) / 1 4 | 5 | 6 | / 8 | 9 L

i
i
10
20 21 22/ / | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 17
23
18
24
19
25
•
i
•
10
/ I 4 | 5 | 6
12 13|14|15|16
7 8 | 9 L
17 18 19
26 27
/ 291/|31 V 33
13613T / | 3 9 | 4 0 | 4 1 142
34
/M
35
•
20 21 23 24 25 •
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35 CANH (WHT) j I CANL (RED)
13613T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
C A N L
CANH (WHT)[ [ (RED)

N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good VSA modulator-
YESA control unit (see page 19-236). If the HDS identifies
• W i t h VSA system: Go t o step 45. the vehicle, replace the original VSA modulator-
• With ABS: Go t o step 5 1 . control unit (see page 19-236). •
N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good gauge control 46. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
module (tach) (see page 22-255). If the HDS connector.
identifies the vehicle, replace the original gauge
control module (tach) (see page 2 2 - 2 5 5 ) . • 47. Reconnect the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor
5P connector.
connector.
44. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P

connector.
(cont'd)
11 -203
PGM-FI System

48. Measure the resistance between PCM connector 51. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals A36 and A37. terminals A36 and A37.
PGM CONNECTOR A (44P)

CANH ( W H T ) CANH (WHT)
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ? Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ ?
N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good y a w rate-lateral N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good ABS modulator-

acceleration sensor (see page 19-234). If the HDS control unit (see page 19-154). If the HDS identifies
identifies the vehicle, replace the original y a w rate- the vehicle, replace the original ABS modulator-
lateral acceleration sensor (see page 19-234). • control unit (see page 19-154). •
49. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P 52. Disconnect the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor
connector. 5P connector (or the ABS modulator-control unit
25P connector).
50. Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector. 53. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
11-204
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P) PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
I
w10 1 4 | 5 | 6 | 7
I L
8 9 1
/ | 4 | 5 | 6 7
©I L 9
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 10 12 13|14|15|16 17 1 8 19
•
20 21 23 24 25 • 20 21 23 24 25 •
I
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35 26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35
37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / ] 4 2 43 44 |36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
361
CANL
CANH (WHT)J L (RED) CANH (WHT)J I CANL (RED)
Terminal side of female terminals T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ? Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ?
NOASubstitute a known-good servo unit (see page NOASubstitute a known-good EPS control unit
19-100). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace (see page 17-82). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,
the original servo unit (see page 19-100). • replace the original EPS control unit (see page
17-82). •
55. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
58. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
56. Reconnect EPS control unit connectorD (28P).
59. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).
(cont'd)
11-205
PGM-FI System

/ | 4 | 5 |6 |7 8 | 9 l
•
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
20 21 23 24 25
•
29|/|311/J33 26 27 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
36 37 3 8 | 3 9 l 4 0 | X | 4 2 43 44 13613T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
» — i — i
CANH (WHT)l [ C A N L (RED) CANH (WHT)J [CANL (RED)
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ? Is there about 108- 132 Q ?
Y E S A G o to step 6 1 . Y E S A G o to step 64.
N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good SRS unit (see page N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good BCM module

24-199). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace (see page 12-8). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,
the original SRS unit (see page 24-199). • replace the original BCM module (see page 12-182).
6 1 . Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).

64. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
62. Reconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
11-206
66. Measure the resistance between PCM connector 67. Disconnect the M C M 20P connector.
68. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
- P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
/ | 4 [ 5 |6 [ 7 8|9l
•
10 12 13|U|15|16 17 18 19
/
20 21 23 24 25 B
26 27 28 2 9 | / 1 3 1 | / 33 34 35
|36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44| r
•
!/l 4 |5|6 7 8 I 9 L
CANH (WHT)I [CANL (RED) 10
20 21 / 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
r
23 24 25 r
26 27 28
29H31|/ 33 34 35
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43I44I
C A N H (WHT) I I C A N L (RED)
Is there about 2,34-2.86
YESA
kQ ?
[=
(§P

• Without TPMS: Update the PCM if it does not Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ?
have the latest software (see page 11-236), or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), YESAUpdate the PCM if it does not have the latest
then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
away w i t h a known-good PCM, replace the good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 3 8 ) . • symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good M C M (see page
12-8). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good TPMS control unit
original M C M (see page 12-186). H - (see page 18-79). If the HDS Identifies the vehicle,
replace the original TPMS control unit (see page
18-79).H
11-207
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 2)

1. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector (see page 22-255). terminal A36 and body ground.
2. W i t h VSA system; Disconnect the VSA modulator- PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P)

control unit 37P connector (see page 19-236), and
the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P
/ | 4 | 5 |6 |7 8 | 9 l
connector (see page 19-234). *
10/
•
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
20 21 23 24 25
•
3. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P •
26 27 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
connector (see page 19-154). 13613T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
CANH (WHT)
A
4. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see page
19-100).
5. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P) Terminal side of female terminals
(see page 17-82).
6. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see page Is there continuity?

24-199).
7. W i t h TPMS: Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P terminal A36 and the gauge c o n t r o l module (tach),
connector (see page 18-79). the VSA modulator-control unit, y a w rate-lateral
acceleration sensor, the ABS modulator-control
8. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-118). unit, the servo unit, the EPS control unit, the SRS
unit, the BCM module; the M C M , the TPMS control
9. Turn the battery module switch OFF. unit (with TPMS), or the DLC. •
10. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). N O A G o t o step 14.

12-186).
11-208
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector 19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
20. Reconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P
connector.
ll II
n 21. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
w 1
/ | 4 |5|6 | 7 8 I9 I
• connector.
10 / 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
20 21 / 23 24 25 •
• 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the
26 27 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44| HDS.
"a—I r—
C A N L (RED)
Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
(Q)
YESAReplace the VSA modulator-control unit
Terminal side of female terminals (see page 19-236). •
terminal A37 and the gauge control module (tach), 24. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
the VSA modulator-control unit, y a w rate-lateral connector.
acceleration sensor,the ABS modulator-control
unit, the servo unit, the EPS control unit, the SRS 25. Disconnect the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor
unit, the BCM module, the M C M , the TPMS control 5P connector.
unit (with TPMS), or the DLC.B
26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and read the
15. Reconnect all connectors. Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
16. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). YESAReplace the y a w rate-lateral acceleration
sensor (see page 19-234). B
connector. N O A G o to step 32.
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and t u r n on the

HDS.
YESAReplace the gauge control module (tach)

(see page 22-255). •
NOA
• W i t h VSA system: Go to step 19.
• W i t h ABS: Go to step 27.
(cont'd)
11-209
PGM-FI S f stem
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 2! (cont'd)
27. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). 35. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
28. Reconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P 36. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
connector.
connector. 38. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and turn on the
HDS.
30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and turn on the
HDS. Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? YESAReplace the EPS control unit (see page 17-82).
•
YESAReplace the ABS modulator-control unit
(see page 19-154). • N O A G o to step 39.
N O A G o to step 3 1 . 39. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3 1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 40. Reconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
32. Reconnect the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor

5P connector (or the ABS modulator-control unit
25P connector). 42. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and turn on the
HDS.
33. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
HDS. YESAReplace the SRS unit (see page 24-199).H
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? N O A G o to step 43.
YESAReplace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
11-210
44 Reconnect SRS unit connector A (28P). 52. Reconnect the M C M 20P connector.
45. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). 53. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
46. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll) and turn on the

f
HDS. HDS.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
YESAReplace the BCM module (see page 12-182). YESAReplace the TPMS control unit (see page
18-79).•
N O A G o to step 47. N O A U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest

47. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
48. Reconnect BCM module connector A (40P). PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). •

HDS.
YESAReplace the M C M (see page 12-186).•
NOA
• With TPMS: Go to step 5 1 .
• Without TPMS: Update the PCM if it does not
have the latest software (see page 11-236), or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7),
then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away w i t h a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 3 8 ) . •
11-211
PGM-FI System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting

2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-223). PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
Does the MIL indicator flash?

/ I 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9 I
•
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
Y E S A G o to step 3. 20 21 23 24 25 •
i
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 \ / 33 34 35
N O A S u b s t i t u t e a known-good gauge control |36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
LJ_^_i j—h
1
1
^ r—ij — 1 1 1
module (tach), and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK, S C S (BRN)

replace the original gauge control module (tach)
(see page 2 2 - 2 5 5 ) . •
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). Terminal side of female terminals
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.

Is a short indicated?
Y E S A G o to step 5. (A31), the SRS unit, and the DLC.m
N O A U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest N O A U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the g o o d PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). M PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238).•
6. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect

the HDS.
11-212
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Make sure the HDS and the HDS DLC cable are 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
not defective.
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). V S A indicator.
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). Does the VSA indicator stay on?
NOTE: Make sure the HDS is properly connected to Y E S A G o to the V S A system's general
the DLC. troubleshooting information (see page 19-162). •
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), and turn on the N O A G o to step 11.
HDS.
Y E S A G o to step 4. A B S indicator.
N O A G o to step 27. Does the ABS indicator stay on?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI Y E S A G o to the A B S general troubleshooting
system with the HDS. information (see page 19-113).
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? N O A G o to step 11.
Y E S A G o to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
N O A G o to step 5. 12. Start the engine, and watch the EPS Indicator.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Does the EPS indicator stay on?
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), and watch the Y E S A G o to the EPS system's general
S R S indicator. troubleshooting information (see page 17-19). •
Does the SRS indicator stay on? N O A G o to step 11.
Y E S A G o to the S R S general troubleshooting 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
information (see page 24-22). •
14. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the
N0A AHB (advanced hydraulic booster) Indicator.
• With VSA system: Go to step 7.
• With ABS: Go to step 9. Does the AHB indicator stay on?
* Y E S A G o to the AHB system's general

troubleshooting Information (see page 19-45). •
(cont'd)
11-213
PGM-FI System
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 23. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No. 7
and body ground.
immobilizer indicator. D A T A LINK C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
Does the immobilizer indicator stay on or flash?

K L I N E (LT B L U )
Y E S A G o to the immobilizer system's
troubleshooting (see page 2 2 - 2 8 5 ) . •
/ 4 5 6 7
12 16/
/l
NOA
\9
/
14
• W i t h o u t TPMS: Go t o step 19.
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

TPMS indicator. Is there continuity?
Does the TPMS indicator stay on? Y E S A G o to step 24.
Y E S A G o to the TPMS system's general N O A G o to step 25.

. troubleshooting (see page 18-53). •
24. Continue to check for continuity between DLC
N O A G o to step 19. terminal No. 7 and body ground, while
disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
19. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-223). • SRS unit connector A (28P)
• VSA modulator-control unit 37P connector (with
20. Check for B-CAN system DTCs without the HDS VSA)
(see page 22-68). • ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (with
ABS)
Are any B-CAN DTCs indicated? • EPS control unit connector D (28P)
• Servo unit 25P connector
Y E S A G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
• TPMS control unit 20P connector (with TPMS)
N O A G o to step 2 1 . • Audio unit 17P connector
• Under-dash fuse/relay box Q (16P) connector
Does continuity go away when one of the above
22. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC. components is disconnected?
YESAReplace the part that caused an open when it

was disconnected. •
N O A R e p a i r short in the wire between the DLC (K-

line) and the VSA modulator-control unit, or the
ABS modulator-control unit, the EPS control unit,
the servo unit, the SRS unit, the immobilizer-
keyless control unit, the TPMS control unit (with
TPMS), the audio unit, or the under-dash fuse/relay
box.H
11-214
25, Connect DLC terminal No. 7 to body ground w i t h a 27. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
jumper wire. 22-223).
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC}

28. Check for B-CAN system DTCs w i t h o u t the HDS
(see page 22-68).
K-LINE (LT B L U ) I
Is DTC B1168, B1169, and/or B1178 indicated?
/ 4 5 6 7
/}
\9 / /
12 14 16/
/ Y E S A G o t o step 4 1 .
JUMPER WIRE
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals 30. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
3 1 . Measure the voltage between DLC terminal No. 16

26. Check for continuity between body ground and - and body g r o u n d .
these connector terminals:
D A T A LINK C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
Connector Terminal
SRS unit A(28P) No. 2 4 ( L T B L U )
VSA modulator-control unit No. 2 6 ( L T B L U )
37P (with VSA system)
// // 4 5 6 7 /J
12 / I 14 / 16/
ABS modulator-control unit No. 1 0 ( L T B L U ) \9
25P (with ABS)
+B (WHT)
EPS control unit D(28P) No. 17 (LT BLU)
Servo unit 25P No. 1 0 ( L T B L U )
Immobiiizer-keyless control No. 5 (LT BLU)
unit7P
TPMS control unit 20P No. 7 (LT BLU) Terminal side of f e m a l e terminals
(with TPMS)
A u d i o unit 17P No. 6 (LT BLU)
Under-dash fuse/relay box No. 8 (LT BLU) Is there battery voltage?
Q(16P)
Is there continuity between the body ground and
each of the terminals in the chart? N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 16 and the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the
YESAReplace the part that does not communicate under-hood fuse/relay b o x . H
w i t h the HDS. •
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the DLC (K-

line) and the appropriate c o n n e c t o r . •
(cont'd)
11-215
PGM-FI S f stem
32. Measure the voltage between DLC terminals No. 4 38. Check for continuity between PCM connector
and No. 16. terminal A36 and body ground.
D A T A LINK C O N N E C T O R (DLC) PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
/I 4 | 5 | 6 |87I 9 L
10 1213|14|15|16 17 1819 •
I
G N D (BLK)
a 2 021 232425 •
4 5 6 7
26272829L/[31^ 333435
A 12 136137 38|39|40|/|42 43|44|
\9
/ /
14 16/
-B (WHT)
C A N H (WHT)
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between DLC terminal N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
No. 4 and G502 (see page 22-28). • (A36) and DLC terminal No. 6. •
33. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). 39. Connect DLC terminal No. 14 to body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
36. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.

4 5 6 7
37. Connect DLC terminal No. 6 to body ground w i t h a
j u m p e r wire.
V9
/ 12
A
14
C A N L (RED)
16/
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
C A N H (WHT)
7
121X114 16/
11-216
40. Check for continuity between PCM connector 41. Try to start the engine.
terminal A 3 7 and body ground.
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
Y E S A G o t o F-CAN circuit troubleshooting
4 | 5 | 6 | 87I 9 L
(see page 11-196). •
/ I
13|14|15|1623
1724 19 •z
•
10 12 18
2
/
021 / 29|/|31 | / 33 34 35 25 N O A G o to step 40.
272388 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42
•
26
136137 43|44| 42. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CANL (RED) 43. Check the No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-
Terminal side of female terminals Is the fuse OK?
YESARepair open in the wire between the No. 2 IG

Is there continuity? MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire
is OK, go to step 44.
Y E S A U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- N O A R e p a i r short in the wire between the No. 2 IG
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the MAIN (50 A) fuse and the under-hood fuse/relay
symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good box. Also replace the No. 2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse. •

(A37) and DLC terminal No. 14.B
(cont'd)
11-217
PGM-FI S f stem
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'i
44. Inspect the No. 19 Fl MAIN (15 A) fuse In the under- 47. Check for continuity between body ground and
hood fuse/relay box. PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 3 individually.
Is the fuse OK ?
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4 P CONNECTOR
+B
45. Remove the blown No. 19 Fl MAIN (15 A) fuse f r o m

the under-hood fuse/relay box.
46. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-

YESAReplace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-59). Also replace the No. 19 Fl MAIN
(15 A) fuse, a
11-218
48. Disconnect each of the parts or connectors below, 49. Disconnect the connectors f r o m these part;
one at a t i m e , and check for continuity between
PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminal No. 2 • PGM-FI main relay 2
and body ground. • PCM connector A (44P)
• Injectors
• PGM-FI main relay 2 • Camshaft position (CMP) sensor
• PCM connector A (44P) • Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
• Each injector 2P connector • Ignition coil relay
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 3P connector • Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector relay
• Ignition coil relay
• Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control 50. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1
relay 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y 1 4P C O N N E C T O R P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y 1 4P C O N N E C T O R
3
1 2 X
A
4-
IGP I
@
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Does continuity go away when one of the above Is there continuity?

components is disconnected?
YESARepair short in the wire between PGM-FI
YESAReplace the part that made the short to body main relay 1 and each part. Also replace the No. 19
ground go away when it was disconnected. If the Fl MAIN (15 A) fuse.H
part is the PCM, update the PCM if it does not have
the latest software (see page 11-236), or substitute NOAReplace PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the
a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If No. 19 Fl MAIN (15 A) f u s e . B
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-238). Also replace the No. 19 Fl MAIN (15 A)
fuse.B
(cont'd)
11-219
PGM-FI S f stem

5 1 . Inspect the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in t h e 55. Check f o r continuity between PGM-FI main relay 2
under-dash fuse/relay box. (FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No. 2 and
body ground.
Is the fuse OK?
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 4 P CONNECTOR
52. Remove the b l o w n No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse

X
4_
f r o m the under-dash fuse/relay box.
IG1
53. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A) f r o m the auxiliary

54. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (see page

22-64).
Is the relay OK ?
N O A R e p l a c e PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).

Also replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse. •
11-220
56. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS, then disconnect 59. Check for continuity between floor harness C651 4P
PCM connectors C (44P). connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
57. Check for continuity.between PCM connector F L O O R W I R E H A R N E S S C651 4P C O N N E C T O R

n .. n
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 9
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 FUEL PUMP
(GRN)
20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27 29|30|31132 33
136 \ / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 42 //
43|44|
IG1 ( B L K / Y E L )
T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Terminal side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity?
YESA
Is there continuity? • Repair short in the wire between the fuel unit
subharness and PGM-FI main relay 2. Also
YESARepair short in the wire between the No. 2 replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the PCM (C36), • Check the fuel unit subharness (see page 11-366),
between the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and and repair it if n e e d e d . •
PGM-FI main relay 2, or between the No. 2 FUEL
PUMP (15 A) fuse and the immobilizer control unit. NOA
Also replace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) f u s e . B • Check the fuel pump, and replace it if needed
(see page 11-364). Also replace the No. 2 FUEL
NOAReplace the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse, PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
and update the PCM if it does not have the latest • Check the fuel unit subharness (see page 11-366),
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- and repair it if needed. Also replace the No. 2
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse.B
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). • 60. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
58. Disconnect the fuel unit subharness 4P connector. 61. Disconnect PCM connectors A (44P) and C (44P).
(cont'd)
11-221
PGM-FI S f stem
63. Measure the voltage between PCM connector 66. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-
terminal C36 and body ground. hood fuse/relay box.
h |2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
•
10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
1
26 27
/ 29|30|31132 33
//
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
IG1 ( B L K / Y E L )
Is there battery voltage? 67. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1
4P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
F G i v i - r i FviAiN R E L A Y I 4r CUNNECTOR
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the No. 2
FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse and the PCM (C36). •
-fB
64. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
X
M R L Y (GRN)
r
[
1/1/ /I 4[5I6 7 8 | 9 l Terminal side of female terminals
10
20 21 / 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 25
•
•
26 27 28 2 9 1 / 1 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 43|44|
Terminal side of female terminals NOAReplace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-59). •
11-222
68. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 69. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminal A6. 70. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) f r o m the under-
P G M - F I M A I N R E L A Y 1 4P C O N N E C T O R
3
X MRLY
PCM
C O N N E C T O R A (44P) MRLY (GRN)
Is there continuity? 7 1 . Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1

Y E S A J e s t PGM-FI main: relay 1 (see page 22-64). If
the relay is OK, update the PCM if it does not have PGM-FI M A I N RELAY 1 4P C O N N E C T O R
a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known- 3
X4
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
1 2
11-238). •
iI
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (A6)
and PGM-FI main relay 1 . a

(see page 22-59). H
(cont'd)
11 -223
PGM-FI S f stem

72. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 74. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
terminal A8 and A43 individually. 75. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminals B 1 , B36, C2, C40, and C44
PGM-FI MAIN R E L A Y 1 4P C O N N E C T O R
individually.
3 PCM CONNECTORS
1 B (44P) PG2 (BRN)
IGP
r
i
1 2 3 I 4 |/| 6 | 78 M •
female terminals 10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
IGP1 I 21 23 25 m
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P) (ORN) 26 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
| 3 6 | / / I / I 40 141 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
4 5 6 7 8 9
PG1 (BLK)
13 14 1516 17 18 1 9
20 23 24 25
26 27 28 33 3 4 35
36 37 3 8 l 3 9 l 4 0 l X K 2 43 44
IGP2 (ORN) C (44P)

P G M E T C S (BRN)
_____n _
ll ll
n
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 |9|
Is there continuity? 1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 • •
20 21 22 ] ^ > < ^ 23 24 25
1
Y E S A G o to step 73. 26 27 29|30|31132 33
//
1 3 6 1 / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 42 43|44|
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (A8, LG1 LG2
A43) and PGM-FI main relay 1.B (BRN/YEL)/ \ (BRN/YEL)
73. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-64).

Is PGM-FI main relay 1 OK ?
NOAReplace PGM-FI main relay 1.B
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM ( B 1 ,
- B36, C2, C40, C44) and G102 (see page 2 2 - 1 6 ) . •
11-224
terminal C13 and body ground. terminal B18 and body ground.
PCM C O N N E C T O R C (44P) PCM C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
V C C 1 (YEL/RED) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
12 n123 4 | 5 | 6 7n 8 199 3j4l/|6 1 7

v
10 11 13|14|15|16231724
1825
I
10 1213 14 15 23 161825
20 21 22
2627 29|30|3113242 / / /28 29J30131 [323334
i
33
26TO
35
1 3 6 1 / 38|39|40|X 36 40 41 42
431441 43 44
77. Continue to check for continuity between PCM 79. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal C13 and body ground, while connector terminal B18 and body ground, while
disconnecting these connectors, one at a time: disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
• MAP sensor 3P connector • Rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P connector

• Output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor 3P • EGR valve 6P connector
• connector • Input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor 3P
• CVT speed sensor 3P connector ('06 model) connector
• CVT speed sensor (secondary) 3P connector
Does continuity go away when one of the above ('06 model)
connectors is disconnected? • CVT speed sensor 3P connector ('07-09 models)
YESAReplace the part that caused an open w h e n it Does continuity go away when one of the above
was disconnected. • parts is disconnected?
N O A R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM YESAReplace the part that caused an open w h e n it
(C13) and the MAP sensor, the output shaft (driven was disconnected. •
pulley) speed sensor or CVT speed sensor ('06
model). • N O A R e p a i r short in the wire between the PCM
(B18) and the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, the
EGR valve, the input shaft (drive pulley) speed
sensor, CVT speed sensor (secondary) ('06 model),
or CVT speed sensor ('07-09 models). •
(cont'd)
11-225
PGM-FI System
terminal C12 and body g r o u n d . terminal A25 and body ground.
P C M CONNECTOR C (44P) PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
^ CCS \Gnm/
ll ll
3 |4 ] 5 I 6] 7 8 |9I VCC4
• (YEL)
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
• 1
26 27 29|30|31132 33
//
| 3 6 | / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Y E S A G o t o step 8 1 . Y E S A G o to step 83.
8 1 . Continue to check for continuity between PCM 83. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal C12 and body g r o u n d , while connector terminal A25 and body ground, while
disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector. disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.
YESARepair short in the w i r e between the PCM YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM
(C12) and the throttle b o d y . H (A25) and the APP sensor. •
NOAReplace the throttle body (see page 11-372). • N O A R e p l a c e the accelerator pedal
module; '06-08 models (see page 11-277),
'09 model (see page 1 1 - 2 7 8 ) . •
11-226
terminal A24 and body ground. terminal A19 and body ground.
VCC5 (LT G R N )
?—i n V C C 6
!/l 4 |5 |6 |7 8 9 . (RED)
•
/ M 5 I 6 I 7 3 I9L •
10 / 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 / x 23 24 25 •
•
•
20 21
/ 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 M 3 1 | / 33 34 35
26 27 28 2 9 | / 3 1 | / 33 34 35
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44| 136137
13613T
N O A G o to step 86. N O A U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest

85. Continue to check for continuity between PCM good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
connector terminal A24 and body ground, while symptom/indication goes away w i t h a known-good
disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). •
Is there continuity? 87. Continue to check for continuity between PCM

connector terminal A19 and body g r o u n d , w h i l e
YESARepair short In the wire between the PCM disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
(A24) and the APP sensor. •
• A/C pressure sensor 3P connector
NOAReplace the accelerator pedal • FTP sensor 3P connector
'09 model (see page 11-278). • Does continuity go away when one of the above
parts is disconnected?
YESAReplace the part that caused an open w h e n it

was disconnected. •
NOARepair short in the w i r e between the PCM

(A19) and the A/C pressure sensor or the FTP
sensor. •
11-227
PGM-FI S f stem
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve the fuel pressure; '06 model (see page 11-345), '07-09 models (see page 11-347).
2. Remove the intake air resonator (see page 11-371).
3. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-370).
4. Remove the nut (A) and bolt (B).
5. Disconnect the connectors (C) f r o m the injectors, the intake side ignition coils, the EGR valve, the rocker arm oil
control valve, the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor, the MAP sensor, and the rocker arm oil pressure switch.
6. Remove the ground terminals (D).
7. Disconnect the hoses f r o m the fuel rail (E).
8. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (F) f r o m the fuel rail, then remove the injectors and fuel rail together.
9. Remove the injector clips (G) f r o m the injectors (H).
10. Remove the injectors f r o m the fuel rail.
11-228
11. Coat the new O-rings (A) w i t h clean engine oil, and insert the injectors (B) into the fuel rail (C).
I
12.8 N-m
J (1.3 k g f - m , 9 . 4 I b f f t )
12. Install the injector clips (D).
13. Coat the injector O-rings (E) w i t h clean engine oil.
14. Install the injectors into the injector base (F).
15. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts (G) and the bolt (H).
16. Install the nut (I) w i t h a new O-ring (J).
17. Reconnect the fuel hoses.
18. Connect the ground terminal.
19. Connect the connectors on the injectors, the intake side ignition coils, the EGR valve, the rocker arm oil control
valve, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, the MAP sensor, and the rocker arm oil pressure switch.
20. Install the air cleaner (see page 11-370).
21. Install the intake air resonator (see page 11-371).
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel p u m p runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel pressure in the fuel line rises. Repeat this t w o or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
11 -229
PGM-FI S f stem
A / F Sensor Replacement Secondary H02S Replacement
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required
0 2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875 or SWR2, or 0 2 sensor wrench, Snap-on YA8875 or SWR2, or
equivalent, commercially available equivalent, commercially available
1. Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel 1. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A),
(see page 20-140). then remove the secondary H02S (B).
A
2. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then
remove the A/F sensor (B).
B
44 Nm
(4.5 kgf-m, 33 Ibfft)
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

11-230
CKP Sensor Replacement C U P Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the CKP 3P connector. 1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-370).
2. Remove the CKP sensor (A). 2. Disconnect the CMP sensor 3P connector (A).
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m
8.7 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal

w i t h a new O-ring (B). 1 2 Nm
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
3. Remove the CMP sensor (B).

w i t h a new O-ring (C).
11-231
PGM-FI S f stem
MAP Sensor Replacement MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor
Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector (A).
3.4 N - m
(0.35 k g f - m , 2.5 Ibf-ft)
connector (A).
2. Remove the MAP sensor (B).

2. Remove the bolts (B).
3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor (C).

w i t h a new O-ring (D).
11-232
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ECT Sensor 2 Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6). 1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-6).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-370). 2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector (A). 3. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector (A).
4. Remove ECT sensor 2 (B).

4. Remove ECT sensor 1 (B).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal w i t h a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator w i t h
w i t h a new O-ring (C), then refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see page 10-6).
engine coolant (see page 10-6).
6. Install the splash shield.
11-233
PGM-FI S f stem
Knock Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the Intake manifold (see page 9-2).
2. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector (A).
3. Remove the knock sensor (B).
11-234
ELD Replacement
1. Remove the PCM (see page 11 -238). 5. Turn the housing over again. Using t w o flat-tip
screwdrivers, release the tabs (A), and pry up the
2. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page fuse/relay box base (B) f r o m the fuse/relay box
22-59). housing (C).
3. Remove the screw (A). NOTE: Make sure the terminals (D) are not bent or
damaged.
4. Turn the housing over, then remove the screw (A).
6. Remove the ELD (A).
11-235
PGM-FI System
PCM Update
Special Tools Required 1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II), but do not start
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester the engine.
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
w i t h the latest HDS software version 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
• HDS pocket tester • (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
• GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
software version
A n y one of the above updating tools can be used.
NOTE:
• Make sure the HDS/iN workstation has the latest HDS
software version.
• Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle Is fully charged, and connect a j u m p e r
battery (not a battery charger) to maintain system
voltage.
• Never turn the Ignition switch to ACC (I) or to
LOCK (0) during the update. If there is a problem w i t h
the update, leave the Ignition switch to ON.
• To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, A/C, 3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM
power w i n d o w s , door locks, etc.) during the update. and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the
• To ensure the latest program is Installed, do a PCM DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-213). If
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. you are returning f r o m the DLC circuit
• You cannot update a PCM w i t h a program It already troubleshooting, skip steps 4 and 5, and clean the
has. It w i l l only accept a new program. throttle body after updating the PCM (see page
• High temperature In the engine compartment might 11-370).
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If
the engine was running before this procedure, open 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
the hood, and cool the engine compartment.
• If y o u need to diagnose the Honda interface module 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
(HIM) because the HIM's red ( # 3 ) light came on or CHECK, and f o l l o w the screen prompts w i t h the
was flashing during the update, leave the Ignition HDS.
switch in ON (II) w h e n y o u disconnect the HIM f r o m
the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent PCM NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK Indicates FAILED,
damage. continue this procedure.
6. Exit the HDS diagnostic system. Select the update

mode, and f o l l o w the screen prompts to update the
PCM.
11-236
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect
the HDS/HIM f r o m the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that you were doing. If the software in
the PCM is not the latest, f o l l o w the instructions on
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI
system or the A/T system, make sure you update
both.
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires y o u to

cool the PCM, follow the instructions on screen. If
you have a problem during the update
(programming takes over 15 minutes, status bar
goes over 100 %, D or immobilizer indicator flashes,
HDS tablet freezes, etc.), f o l l o w these steps to
minimize the chance of damaging the PCM:
• Leave the ignition switch in ON (II).
• Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
• Shut down the HDS.
• Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.
• Reboot the HDS.
• Reconnect the HDS to the DLC, and do the update
again.
8. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 5, clean

the throttle body (see page 11-370).
10. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP pattern learn

procedure (see page 11-4).

PGM-FI S f stem
PCM Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Select the PGM-FI system w i t h the HDS.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation 5. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
w i t h the latest HDS software version
• HDS pocket tester 6. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
• GNA600 and an IN workstation w i t h the latest HDS CHECK, and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
software version
A n y one of the above updating tools can be used. NOTE: If the T P POSITION CHECK Indicates FAILED,
continue w i t h this procedure.
NOTE:
• Make sure the HDS is loaded w i t h the latest software 7. Select the REPLACE PCM M E N U , then select READ
version. DATA and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
• If you are replacing,the PCM after substituting a
known-good PCM, reinstall the original PCM, then do NOTE:
this procedure. • Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life
• During the procedure, is any READ DATA, WRITE data f r o m the original PCM so you can later
DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then d o w n l o a d (WRITES) It into the new PCM.
continue. • If READ DATA Indicates FAILED, continue w i t h
this procedure.
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. 8. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM

and other vehicle systems. If It doesn't, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-213). If
y o u are returning f r o m DLC circuit troubleshooting,
skip steps 4 through 7, 20 through 25, and do this
after replacing the PCM:
• Replace the engine oil (see page 8-10) and the

engine oil filter (see page 8-11).
• Clean the throttle body (see page 11-370).
11-238
12. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM (E). 21. Select IMMOBI system w i t h the HDS.
22. Enter the immobilizer code that y o u got f r o m the iN,

and use the PCM replacement procedure in the
HDS; it allows you to start the engine.
23. If the TP POSITION CHECK failed in step 6 clean the

throttle body (see page 11-370), then go to step 24.
24. If the READ DATA failed in step 8 or the WRITE

DATA failed in step 20, replace the engine oil
(see page 8-10) and engine oil filter (see page 8-11),
then go to step 25.
25. Select PGM-FI system and reset the PCM with the
HDS.

software (see page 11-236).
13. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols
( A = 0 , B = A , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for 28. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
identification.
15. Do the battery installation procedure (see page

22-63).
17. Manually input the VIN to the PCM w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: DTC P0630 VIN Not Programmed or

Mismatch may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
continue this procedure.
18. If the READ DATA (engine oil life) failed in step 7,

go to step 23. Otherwise, go to step 19.
19. Select the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
20. Select the REPLACE PCM MENU, then select WRITE

DATA and follow the screen prompts.
NOTE: If the WRITE DATA indicates FAILED,

continue with this procedure.
11-239
Electronic Throttle Control S f stem
THROTTLE A C T U A T O R and U p d a t e , page 11-236

T H R O T T L E P O S I T I O N (TP) S E N S O R S u b s t i t u t i o n , p a g e 11-7
A C C E L E R A T O R P E D A L P O S I T I O N (APP) S E N S O R
S i g n a l I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 11-277
11-240
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or less?

NO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the throttle body and the PCM. • YESARepair short In the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (C20), then go to step 18.
Are DTC P0122 and P0222 indicated at the same
time? 10. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
THROTTLE BODY 6 P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. VCC3 (GRN)
Is there about 5 V?
(cont'd)
11-241
Electronic Throttle Control System
12. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-372).
13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 18. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
terminal C12 and throttle body BP connector
terminal No. 2. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6 Is DTC PO122 indicated?

V C C 3 (GRN) W i r e side of
JL female terminals YESACheck for poor connections or loose
VCC3 (GRN) @PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
I1 I 23 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
IMQATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
10 11 12 13]14|15|16 17 18 19 •
I
23 24 25
20 21 22
I 1
indicated D T C s troubleshooting. B
26 27 29|30|31132 33 ]/
/
1 3 6 1 / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 4 3 | 4 4 |

Is there continuity? software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (C12), then go to step 18. Is DTC P0122 indicated?
• YESACheck for poor connections or loose

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the

indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . ^
11-242
DTC P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. TPSA (RED/BLK)
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the (V)

HDS.
Is there about 4.8 ¥ or more?

N O A I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V?

at the throttle body and the PCM. • Y E S A G o to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. N O A G o to step 9.
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
time?
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
(cont'd)
11-243

terminal C20 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No. 1. 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 15. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
1 2 3 4 5 6 16. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

T P S A (RED/BLK) W i r e side of
female terminals
T P S A (RED/BLK) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
terminal No. 4.
n n
h 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9 THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
1
1 0 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 1 2 3 4 5 6
26 27 29|30|31132 33
| 3 6 | / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 42
//
43|44| SG3(BLU)
n n "
1 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 9
•
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
Y E S A G o t o step 25. 20 21 22 23 24 25
1

26 27
136\/
29|30|31132 33
//
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
body and the PCM (C20), then go to step 20. SG3 (BLU)

body and the PCM (C39), then go to step 20.
11-244
18. Turn t h e ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage
19. Replace the throttle body {see page 11-372). NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
20. Reconnect all connectors. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 3. Check TP SENSOR B In the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go IMOAintermittent failure, the system Is OK at this
to step 1. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the throttle body and the PCM. •
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
Are DTC P0122 and P0222 indicated at the same
25. Reconnect all connectors. time?
26. Update the PCM if It does not have the latest Y E S A G o to step 10.
good PCM (see page 11-7). N O A G o to step 5.


(cont'd)
11-245
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P

1 2 3 4 5 6
9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P VCC3 (GRN)

1 2 3 4 5 6
TPSB (RED/BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
11. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). -
Is there continuity? 12. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
YESARepair short in the wire between the throttle 13. - Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
body a n d the PCM (C21), then g o t o step 18.
11-246
terminal No. 2. 17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-372).
T H R O T T L E B O D Y 6P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5 6 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

V C C 3 (GRN) W i r e side of
female terminals
@
VCC3 (GRN) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) 2 1 . Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
I
1 2 n3 | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 9 n 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22
^><C 23 24 25
1 Is DTC P0222 indicated?
26 27 29|30|31132 33
//
38 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
136IX YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
body and the PCM (C12),then g o t o step 18. 23. Reconnect all connectors.



11 -247
DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure the voltage between throttle body 6P
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY BP CONNECTOR

1 2 3 4 5 6
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. TPSB (RED/BLU)
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 4.8 V or more?

NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V?

at the throttle body and the PCM • Y E S A G o to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. N O A G o to step 9.
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
time?
6. Disconnect the throttle body BP connector.
11-248
terminal C21 and throttle body 6P connector terminal C39 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No. 3. terminal No. 4.
T H R O T T L E B O D Y SP C O N N E C T O R THROTTLE BODY 6 P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
TPSB ( R E D / B L U ) S G 3 (BLU)
Wire side of female terminals W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s

PCM CONNECTOR C ( 4 4 P ) PCM CONNECTOR C ( 4 4 P )
i
3 I 4 I5 Ie I T S I9I I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25
I 1 I l
26 27 / /
29|30|31132 33
/
| 3 6 1 / / 38|39|40|/|42 43|44|
26 27 29|30|31132 33
| 3 6 1 / 38|39|40|/|42
/
431441/
T P S B (RED/BLU) i "
SG3 (BLU)
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the throttle N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the throttle
body and the PCM (C21), then go to step 20. body and the PCM (C39), then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
11 -249

18. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P1658; ETCS Control Relay ON
Malfunction
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-372).
20. Reconnect all connectors. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
2. Do the ETCS TEST In the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). the HDS.
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is the RELAY circuit OK?
Is DTC P0223 indicated? YESAlntermittent failure, the system Is OK at this

YESACheck for poor connections or loose at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. •
to step 1 . ' N O A G o to step 3.
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g Is complete. If any other 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 4. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) f r o m the under-



indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •
11-250
5. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-64), 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
Is the ETCS control relay OK? 10. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
Y E S A G o to step 6. 11. Measure the voltage between PCM connector

NOAReplace the ETCS control relay, then go t o
step 13. PCM CONNECTOR C ( 4 4 P )
6. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. IG1ETCS (WHT/GRN)
n3 | 4 [ 5 | 6 |
n
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 1 2 7 8 9
•
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
8. Check for continuity between PCM connector 1
26 27
136/
29|30|31132 33
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 42
//
43 44)
PCM CONNECTOR A ( 4 4 P )
ETCSRLY •
/I4 |5|6 |7 s I 9 L
(YEL)
10
/
20 21
12 13|14|15|16 17
/ 23
18 19
24 25
K
I
1
26 27 28 2 9 / 3 1 / 33 34 35
13613T 38|39|40|/|42 43|44| YESARepair short to power in the wire between

the PCM (CD and the ETCS control relay, then go to
step 12.
Terminal side of female terminals N O A G o to step 18.

(A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go t o
step 13.
(cont'd)
11-251

12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P1659: ETCS Control Relay OFF
Malfunction
14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM, Y E S A G o t o step 4.
then go to step 1.
MO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. H
5. Check the No. 21 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR
19. Reconnect all connectors. CONTROL) (15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay
box.
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Is the fuse OK?
6. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) f r o m the under-
YESACheck for poor connections or loose hood fuse/relay box.
terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. If

11-252
7. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-64). 10. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay
Is the ETCS control relay OK?
E T C S CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
NOAReplace the ETCS control relay, then go to

step 23.
9. Measure the voltage between ETCS control relay

E T C S CONTROL RELAY 4 P CONNECTOR T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
IGP
4
M 1


Is there battery voltage? 13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

(cont'd)
11-253

14. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P 15. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
terminal C 1 . 16. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
E T C S CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
terminal A20.
4
2 E T C S CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
X
IG1ETCS
ETCSRLY
X
IG1ETCS T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
(WHT/GRN) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
n n
| 1 | 2 3 | 4 | 5 | 6|7 8 9
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 •
20 21 22 23 24 25
I
26 27 29|30|31132 33
3 6 / 38|39|40|/|42 /4 3/M ETCSRLY
(YEL)
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (CD N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 23. (A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step
23.
11-254
17. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) f r o m the under- 2 1 . Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
• hood fuse/relay box. connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
E T C S C O N T R O L R E L A Y 4P C O N N E C T O R
X 2 1
18. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. Is there continuity?
19. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). YESAReplace the under-hood fuse/relay box
terminal C1 and body ground. N O A Q o to step 28.
IG1ETCS ( W H T / G R N ) 23. Reconnect all connectors.

Is there continuity? YESACheck for poor connections or loose

terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM,
YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM then go to step 1.
(C1) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 23.
N O A G o to step 2 1 . Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, a
(cont'd)
11-255

28. Reconnect all connectors. DTC PI683: Throttle Valve Default Position
Spring Performance Problem
g o o d PCM (see page 11-7). r ~ ~IMIMMWM
Do not insert your fingers into the installed t h r o t t l e
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. body w h e n you turn the Ignition switch to ON (II) or
w h i l e the Ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, y o u
Is DTC P1659 indicated? w i l l seriously Injure your fingers if the throttle valve
Is activated.
terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
substituted, go to step 1. troubleshooting Information (see page 11-3).
N O A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting Is 1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are Indicated, go to the
Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (In P or N) until the radiator
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait

10 seconds.

at the throttle body and the PCM. H
8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle

body (see page 11-372).
11-256
9, Push the throttle valve closed as s h o w n . DTC P1684: Throttle Valve Return Spring
Performance Problem
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle

body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.

10. Release the throttle valve. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
Does the throttle valve return? 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YESACIean the throttle body (see page 11-370), 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
then g o t o step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1683 is 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
indicated, go to step 11. fan comes on, then let it idle.
N O A G o to step 11. 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait
10 seconds.
10 seconds. NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). at the throttle body and the PCM. H
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is DTC P1683 indicated? 8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
Y E S A l f the throttle body was cleaned, go to step
11. If the throttle body was replaced, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the PCM, then go to step 1.

(cont'd)
11-257

9. Push the throttle valve open as s h o w n . DTC P2101: ETCS Malfunction

body w h e n you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
is activated.


10. Release the throttle valve.
Does the throttle valve return?
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
YESACIean the throttle body (see page 11-370), the HDS.
then g o t o step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1684 is
indicated, go to step 11. 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
N O A G o to step 11. Is DTC P2101 indicated?
11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-372). Y E S A G o t o step 7.
13. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
• ENGINE SPEED
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait • VSS
10 seconds.
• APPSENSOR
Y E S A l f the throttle body was cleaned, go to step N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
11. If the throttle body was replaced, check for poor time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
and the PCM, then go to step 1. throttle body (see page 11-370). •
NO A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H 8. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle
11-258
terminals C3 and C4.
11. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS. ,
H8H
E T C S M — (YEL) E T C S M + (YEL/RED)
12. Visually check the throttle valve operation. n _ n
1 2
3
|4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 I9
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
I
Does the throttle valve operate smoothly?
YESACIean the throttle body (see page 11-370),
20 21 22 23 24 25
r-
1
then go to step 22 and recheck. if DTC P2101 is

26 27 29|30|31132 33
//
1 3 6 \ / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
indicated, go to step 19. r—a-
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there continuity?
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. Y E S A G o to step 27.
15. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. N O A R e p a i r open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C3, C4), then go to step 2 1 .
17. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 6 with a jumper wire. 20. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-372).

1 2 3 4 5 6 23. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

ETCSM- ETCSM+
(YEL) (YEL/RED) 24. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
11-259

25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current Range/
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: Performance Problem
• ENGINE SPEED NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
• VSS and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
• APPSENSOR troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 1. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P2101 indicated? 2. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
YESACheck f o r poor connections or loose 3. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then terminals C3 and C4.
clean the throttle body (see page 11-370), and go t o
step 1. P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)

indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • E T C S M - (YEL) ETCSM-f- (YEL/RED)
27. Reconnect all connectors. •

1 2 n
3 | 4 | 5 |6|7 n8 9
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 •
28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest •

MX
/
26 27 29|30|31132 33
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 42 //
43|44|
Is there about 1,0 Q or less?
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS Y E S A G o to step 4.
• APPSENSOR N O A G o to step 15.

substituted, go t o step 1.
N O A | f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is

indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •
11 -260
4. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
5. At the throttle body side, measure the resistance 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
between throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
and No. 6 with the throttle fully closed. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

13. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
-7\ - Is DTC P2118 indicated?

1 2 3 4 5 6
ETCSM- ETCSM+
to step 1.

Terminal side of male terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
Is there about 1.0 Q or less? 15. Reconnect all connectors.
Y E S A G o to step 6. 16. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
NOARepair short in the wires between PCM good PCM (see page 11-7).
connector terminals C3 (ETCSM— line) and C4
(ETCSM+ line), then go to step 7. 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-372). 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
7. Reconnect all connectors. 19. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
9. Reset the PCM with the HDS. Is DTC P2118 indicated?


11-261
DTC P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Circuit Low Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST w i t h the A P P S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R

HDS.

1 2 3 4 5 6
Y E S A G o to step 3. A P S A (YEL)

at the APP sensor and the PCM. •
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). W i r e side of female terminals
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P (A17) and the APP sensor, then go to step 24.
APP SENSOR i P CONNECTOR
11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 1 to
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
2 3 4 5 6 A P P S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R
S G 4 (BLU) J [ VCC4 ( Y E L )
® 2 3 4 5 6
A P S A (YEL)
J U M P E R WIRE
Is there about 5 V?
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
11-262
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
16. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
A P S A (YEL) Is there about 0.2 V or less?

. = « U
I
Z\A 1 5 | 6 | i 1911 ' " a Y E S A G o to step 29.
10
20 21 /
12 13|14|15il6 17 18 19
22 24 25
•
•
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 \ / 32 34 35
V
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 i / 42 4 3 1 4 4 | |
136137 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
18. Jump the S C S line with the HDS. .

Is there continuity? 20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 3 to

A P P S E N S O R BP C O N N E C T O R
(A17) and the APP sensor, then go to step 24.
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P). 1 2 3 4 5 6

V C C 4 (YEL)
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No. 1
J U M P E R WIRE
and No. 3 w i t h a jumper wire.
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
2 3 4 5 6
A P S A (YEL) V C C 4 (YEL)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
11-263

2 1 . Check for continuity between PCM connector 29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
3 1 . Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
1 good PCM (see page 11-7).
/I 4 I5 I6 I 7 8 9
1 V C C 4
10
/
20 21
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 2 5 -
(YEL) 32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
I
26 27 28 291/131 \ / 33 34 35
13613T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43144 Is DTC P2122 indicated?

terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM. If the
T e r m i n a l side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Y E S A G o to step 30. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(A25) and the APP sensor, then go to step 24. indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
23. Replace the accelerator pedal module;

'06-08 models (see page 11-277), '09 model
(see page 11-278).

terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

11-264
DTC P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST w i t h the APP S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R

HDS.

1 2 3 4 5 6
SG4 (BLU)
J U M P E R WIRE
at the APP sensor and the PCM. •
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). terminal A35 and body ground.
6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P)

/ | 4 | 5 | 6 7
8 I I
9
13|14|15|16
•
APP S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R 10
/ 12 17 18 19
•
•
20 21
/
26 27 28 2 9 / 3 1 /
23
33
24 25
34 35
•
/ V
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 43|4
*l
1 2 3 4 5 6 S G 4 ( B L U )
S G 4 (BLU) j | V C C 4 (YEL)
® T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is there continuity?
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S A G o to step 12. (A35) and the APP sensor, then go to step 14.
IMOAGo to step 7.
(cont'd)
11-265

12. Turn the Ignition switch t o LOCK (0). DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)
Circuit Low Voltage
'06-08 models (see page 11-277), '09 model NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
(see page 11-278). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)..
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the
16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. HDS.
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). Is there about 0.2 V or less?
18. Check for Temporary DTCs .or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Y E S A G o t o step 3.
Is DTC P2123 indicated? NOA|intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

YESACheck for poor connections or loose at the APP sensor and the PCM. •
to step 1. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other 4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
19. Reconnect all connectors. 6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
2 1 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
1 2 3 4 5 6
S G 5 (BLU) | I V C C 5 (LT GRN)
terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM. If the (V)
substituted, go to step 1. W i r e side of female terminals

complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the Is there about 5 V?
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the Y E S A G o t o step 7.
11-266
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
^ 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
A P S R (PUR)
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P

A P P S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5 6
! A P S R (PUR) Terminal side of female terminals
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P).
(A18) and the APP sensor, then go to step 24. 14. Connect APP sensor BP connector terminals No. 4
and No. 6 with a j u m p e r wire.
A P P S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R 1 2 3 4 5 6
A P S B (PUR) V C C 5 (LT G R N )
J U M P E R WIRE
1 2 3 4 5 6
A P S B (PUR)
J U M P E R W I R E
(cont'd)
11-267
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2 1 . Check for continuity between PCM connector
16. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS. PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
Y E S A G o t o step 29. •
V| 4 I 5 I 6 I 7 3 I 9I
VCC5
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
• (LT GRN)
20 21 23 24 25-
N O A G o to step 22. 26 27 28 2 9 M 3 1 \ / 33 34 35
•
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 431441

20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 6 to Is there continuity?

APP S E N S O R 6P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

V C C 5 (LT GRN)
J U M P E R WIRE
(see page 11-278).


to step 1.

11-268
29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P2128: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E)
3 1 . Update the PCM if It does not have the latest and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
Is DTC P2127 indicated? HDS.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose Is there about 4.0 V or more?

PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM Y E S A G o to step 3.
substituted, go to step 1. N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
IMOA|f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting Is the APP sensor and the PCM. •
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
6. Measure the voltage between APP sensor 6P

1 2 3 4
CD
cn
SG5 (BLU) | | V C C 5 (LT G R N )
Is there about 5 V?
(cont'd)
11-269
7. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). 12. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 13. Replace the accelerator pedal module;
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). (see page 11-278).
10. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No. 5 t o 14. Reconnect all connectors.
body ground w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
APP SENSOR 6 P CONNECTOR

2 3 4 5 6
S G 5 (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE

terminals at the APP sensor and the PCM, then go •
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s to step 1.

11. Check for continuity between PCM connector Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the
terminal A34 and body g r o u n d . indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) 19. Reconnect all connectors.

/ | 4 | 5 |6 |7 8|9l
• software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
10 12 13|14115|16 17 18 19
• good PCM (see page 11-7).
i
20 21
/ 23
26 27 28 2 9 | / 1 3 1 | / 33
24 25
34 35
•

|36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 Acl|44|
j
S G 5 (BLU)
YESACheck f o r poor connections or loose

PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Is there continuity? substituted, go t o step 1.
Y E S A G o to step 19. |\JOA|f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
(A34) and the APP sensor, then go t o step 14. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the
indicated D T C s troubleshooting. H
11-270
DTC P2135: TP Sensor A/B Incorrect Voltage 9. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
Correlation

body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you terminals C20 and C21.
is activated. PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data I | T P S B (RED/BLU)

and any on-board snapshot, and review the general r
troubleshooting information (see page 1 1 - 3 ) .
•
h i 2 3 | 4 | 5 I6 | T a IoI
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). I
TPSA
(RED/BLK)
26 27
/ 29|30|31132 33
//
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
2 . Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h Terminal side of female terminals
the HDS.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is there continuity?
Y E S A G o to step 5. N O A G o to step 22.

at the throttle body and the PCM. •
6. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle

body.
8. Visually check the throttle valve operation while

you clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Does the valve temporarily move to its fully

closed position?
(cont'd)
11-271

13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 22. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminals C20 and C21. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
, PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

TPSA
(RED/BLK) (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was
Terminal side of female terminals N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
YESARepair short in the w i r e between the PCM
connector terminals C20 (TPSA line) and C21 (TPSB
line), then go to step 17.

to step 1.

11-272
DTC P2138: APP Sensor A/B (TP Sensor D/E) 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Incorrect Voltage Correlation terminals A17 and A18.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)

A P S B (PUR)
2. Clear the DTC w i t h HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

IMOA|ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this Y E S A G o t o step 10.

at the APP sensor and the PCM. • N O A G o to step 2 1 .
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the 10. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
Are they the same voltage? terminals A17 and A18.
Y E S A G o to step 6. P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
A P S B (PUR)

connector terminals A17 (APSA line) and A18
(APSB line), then go to step 14.
(cont'd)
11-273
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd!

13. Replace the .accelerator pedal module; Is DTC P2138 indicated?

(see page 11-278). YESACheck for poor connections or loose
14. Reconnect all connectors. to step 1.
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other

16. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 22. Reconnect all connectors.
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). good PCM (see page 11-7).
20. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor. 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
26. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.

(see page 11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was

11-274
DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System 10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
Idle Position Not Learned performing the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed

Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle position?
body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you Y E S A G o to step 11.
is activated. N O A G o to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon on the throttle valve.

NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YESACIean the throttle body (see page 11-370),
• If DTC P2135 is stored at the same time as DTC P2176, then go to step 2 1 .
P2176. N O A G o to step 18.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 15. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
10 seconds.
16. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No. 5
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. and No. 6 with a jumper wire.
Is DTC P2176 indicated? T H R O T T L E B O D Y 6P C O N N E C T O R
NO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 1 2 3 4 5 6

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals ETCSM- ETCSM-f-
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the (YEL) (YEL/RED)
throttle body (see page 1 1 - 3 7 0 ) . •

JUMPER WIRE
7. Disconnect the intake air duct f r o m the throttle W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

body.
(cont'd)
11-275

17. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
terminals C3 and C4.
<0> terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-370), and go to
E T C S M - (YEL) E T C S M - h (YEL/RED) step 1.
ll 1 2 | 4 ] 5 | 6 8 | 9 |
r
. ri r
NO ATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
•
3 13|14|15|16 177 1819
10 1122
12 Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
• 2 021 232425 indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
2627 29|30|3113233/ /
|361/ 38|39|40|/ 42 43|44| 27. Reconnect all connectors.
Is there continuity? good PCM (see page 11-7).
Y E S A G o to step 2 7 . 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wires between the throttle Is DTC P2176 indicated?

body and the PCM (C3, C4), then go to step 20.
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-372). (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTCs troubleshooting •

10 seconds.
11-276
APP Sensor Signal Inspection Accelerator Pedal M©dyte B<&mm?@§!
Installation
NOTE:
• This procedure checks the APP sensor in this fully
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor '06-08 models
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures. 1. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector (A).
• Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS
A.
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are
indicated, troubleshoot t h e m first, then do this
procedure.
• Press the accelerator pedal several times, to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the
pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator
pedal module; '06-08 models (see page 11-277),
'09 model (see page 11-278).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 13 N m

(1.3 k g f - m ,
(A) located u n d e r t h e driver's side of the dashboard. 9.4 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove the accelerator pedal module (B).
NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately.

Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If

it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-213).
4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,

then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
• If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.

• If it is not 0 %, update the PCM if it does not have
the latest software, or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 5.
5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,

then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
• If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.

• If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal
'09 model (see page 11 -278), then go to step 1.
11-277
Accelerator Pedal Module Removal/Installation (cont'd!
'09 model 5. Set the accelerator pedal pad (A) to the pedal stop
(B).
1 . Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector (A).
6. Install the accelerator pedal module ( C ) w i t h a new

2. Remove the clip (B). clip(D).
NOTE: Do not reuse the clip once it is removed. 7 . Reconnect the APP sensor 6P connector (E).
3. Push the tab (C), and remove the accelerator pedal

pad (D) f r o m the pedal stop ( E ) .
4. Remove the accelerator pedal module (F).
NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately.

Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
11-278
3-Stage i-VTEC System
/ R O C K E R A R M OIL P R E S S U R E SENSOR
t R O C K E R A R M OIL C O N T R O L V A L V E FILTER
f ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE S W I T C H

Removal/Installation, p a g e 1 1 - 3 1 8
R O C K E R A R M OIL C O N T R O L V A L V E POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)

R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 11-317 U p d a t e , p a g e 11-236
11-279
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0S22: Rocker A r m 01! Pressure Sensor 7. Measure the voltage between rocker arm oil
Circuit Low Voltage pressure sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and
No. 3.
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR

1 2 3
2. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
LIST w i t h the HDS. VCC2 SG2
(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
N O A | n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
at the rocker arm oil pressure sensor and the Is there about 5 V?
PCM.B
4. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P
connector. 8. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
6. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA 10. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
LIST w i t h the HDS.
11-280
11. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
pressure sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 and terminal B18 and rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P
body ground. connector terminal No. 1.
R O C K E R A R M OIL P R E S S U R E
R O C K E R A R M OIL P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
( Q ) W i r e side of
POSLCS (WHT/BLK) female terminals
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
1 |2 3J4 | / 6 |7
0
18
10 12 13 14 15 16
23 25
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 26 28 29l30|81 [32 33 34 35
361/1X1/140 [41 142 43 44
Is there continuity? Terminal side of female terminals
YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM Is there continuity?

(C22) and the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, then
go to step 18. Y E S A G o to step 24.
N O A G o to step 24. NOARepair open in the wire between the PCM

(B18) and the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, then
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). g o t o step 18.
13. J u m p t h e SCS line with the HDS. 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 17. Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor
(see page 11-317).
(cont'd)
11-281
20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 24. Reconnect all connectors.
21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 25. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. good PCM (see page 11-7).
Is DTC P0522 indicated? 26. Start the engine, and let it idle.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
terminals at the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor and
the PCM, then go to step 1. Is DTC P0552 indicated?
N O A G o to step 23. YESACheck for poor connections or loose

terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure sensor and
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0522 in the the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 22, 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0522 in the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor Does the screen indicate PASSED?
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
until a result comes on. original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •

pressure sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-282
DTC P0523: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor 7. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
Circuit High Voltage LIST w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is there about 4.79 V or more?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Y E S A G o to step 8.
2. Check the OIL PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA 8. Remove the jumper wire.
LIST w i t h the HDS. 9. Measure the voltage between rocker arm oil
pressure sensor 3P connector terminals No. 1 and
Is there about 4.79 V or more? No. 3.
• Y E S A G o to step 3.
N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R

at the rocker arm oil pressure sensor and the
PCM.B
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). VCC2 SG2

(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
4. Disconnect the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor 3P

connector.
5. Connect rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P Wire side of female terminals
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3 w i t h a jumper
wire.
Is there about 5 V?
S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R Y E S A G o to step 14.

POILCS SG2
(WHT/BLK) (GRN/YEL)
J U M P E R WIRE
(cont'd)
11-283
3 Stage I-VTEC System
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C22 and rocker a r m oil pressure sensor 3P
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). connector terminal No. 2.
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
terminal B33 and rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P
1 2 3
ROCKER A R M OIL P R E S S U R E POILCS (WHT/BLK) W i r e side of
SENSOR 3P C O N N E C T O R
female terminals
POILCS (WHT/BLK) P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
W i r e side of |SG2 (GRN/YEL) If ll

female terminals 3|4 |5 |6 |7
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
PCM 20 21 22 23 24 25
C O N N E C T O R B (44P) SG2 ( G R N / Y E L ) I 1
II II
26 27
136
29|30|31132 33
//
/ 38139 1 4 0 / ] 42 43|44|
T1T2
•
3 I 4 l/| 6 |J 8 T 7 T
ij
10 12 13|14|15|16 ' 7 18 Terminal side of female terminals
i 21 ;:3 25 E
26 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
| 3 6 | / / l / l 40 141 42 43|44|
Terminal side of female terminals Y E S A G o to step 26.
Is there continuity? N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM

(C22) and the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, then
Y E S A G o to step 26. go to step 20.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(B33) and the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, then
go to step 20. 19. Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor
(see page 11-317).
11-284
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 26. Reconnect all connectors.
22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 27. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). good PCM (see page 11-7).
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 28. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Is DTC P0523 indicated? 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose Is DTC P0523 indicated?

the PCM, then go to step 1. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
N O A G o to step 25. the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0523 in the 28. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1.
Does the screen indicated PASSED?
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs MENU with the HDS.
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • Does the screen indicate PASSED?
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
pressure sensor and the PCM, then go t o step 1. If original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 29,
until a result comes on. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •

pressure sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-285
DTC Troubleshooting (conf d)

DTC P1024: Vaive Pause System (VPS) 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Sticking On
9. Remove the cylinder head cover.
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 10. Check the rocker arm operation.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Are any rocker arms locked?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Y E S A G o to step 11.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. N O A G o to step 12.
3. Try t o start the engine. 11. Check the rocker arms, the synchronizing pistons,
and the lost motion assembly (see page 6-7).
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
Are they OK?
N O A R e p a i r the rocker a r m assembly, then go to
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at step 13.
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator
fan comes o n , then let it idle. 12. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7).
5. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS. Is the VTEC rocker arm OK?
6. After testing, hold the engine speed at 2,500 r p m YESACheck the rocker arm operation again, then
w i t h o u t load (in P or N). g o t o step 13.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1024 in the NOAReplace the rocker arm assembly, then go to
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. step 13.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Y E S A G o to step 8. 14. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
poor connections or loose terminals at rocker arm
oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil control
solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
rocker a r m oil pressure sensor, and the PCM. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep testing until a
result comes o n . If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go t o step 4 and recheck.
11-286
16. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at DTC P1286: Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Sensor
3,000 rpm without load {in P or N) until the radiator Stuck Low
17. Do the VTEC T E S T in the INSPECTION MENU with • Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
the HDS. •A/T l o w pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301
•A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
18. After testing, hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm •A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
without load (in P or N ) . •A/T pressure adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
Is DTC P1024 indicated? and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil
pressure switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, 2. Check the engine oil level.
Is the level OK?
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO A Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then
go to step 14.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19, 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
5. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at rocker arm oil
control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil control solenoid Is the result OK?
2, the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor, and the PCM, then go to YESAJntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
testing until a result comes on. If the screen at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 16. control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil pressure
switch, the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor, and the
PCM.B
(cont'd)
11-287
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Start the engine.
7. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (A), and 10. Note the value of the ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE
attach the special tools as s h o w n , then attach the SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
rocker arm oil pressure sensor to the pressure
gauge adapter (B). 11. Compare the value of the ROCKER ARM OIL
PRESSURE SENSOR and the value of the oil
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of pressure gauge.
removal w i t h a new O-ring.
Are they the same values?
YESACheck the VTEC system oil line, then go to

step 12.
NOAReplace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor


the HDS.

8. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor 3P
connector. Is DTC P1286 indicated?

terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1,
pressure switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor,
11-288
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1286 in the DTC P1287: Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Switch
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Circuit High Voltage
Does the screen indicate PASSED? NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 2. Check the engine oil level.
control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil control solenoid Is the level OK?
arm oil pressure sensor, and the PCM, then go to Y E S A G o t o step 3.
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
testing until a result comes on. If the screen NO A Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 17. go to step 18.

the HDS.
Is the result OK ?

at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil
control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil pressure
switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, and the
PCM.B
7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P

connector.
(cont'd)
11-289

8. At the rocker arm oil pressure switch side, check for 9. Connect rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
continuity between rocker a r m oil pressure switch connector terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a
2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. jumper wire.
R O C K E R A R M OIL P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R R O C K E R A R M OIL P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R
V T P S W (BLU/BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
T e r m i n a l side of male terminals W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity? 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Y E S A G o t o step 9. 11. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SWITCH

in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOAReplace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
(see page 11-318), then go to step 16. Does it indicate ON?
YESARepair open in the wire between the rocker

arm oil pressure switch and G102 (see page 22-16),
then go to step 16.
11-290
13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h t h e HDS. 17. Reconnect ail connectors.
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
15. C h e c k f o r continuity b e t w e e n rocker a r m o i l 19. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.

pressure switch 2P c o n n e c t o r terminal N o . 2 a n d
PCM connector terminal C33. 20. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
R O C K E R A R M OIL P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R
the HDS.
VTPSW (BLU/BLK)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is DTC P1287 indicated?


h 12 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9| terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1,
•
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 7 18 19 rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil
20 21 22 23 24 25
• 1 pressure switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor,
26 27 29|30|31132 33
//
| 3 6 1 / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | / XI 4 3 | 4 4 |
U I |J
u " •
V T P S W (BLU/BLK) N O A G o to step 23.
Is there continuity? DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Y E S A G o to step 24. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other

(C33) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 22,
g o t o step 16. g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting H

control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil control solenoid
arm oil pressure sensor, and the PCM, then go t o
testing until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-291
3-Sfage i-VTEC System

24. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P1288: Rocker A r m Oil Pressure Switch
Circuit Low Voltage
software {see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Special Tools Required
good PCM (see page 11-7). • Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
• A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301
26. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h • A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
the HDS. • A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
•A/T pressure adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. • Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200
Is DTC P1287 indicated? NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YESACheck for poor connections or loose troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker ar m oil 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a 2. Check the engine oil level.
26. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. Is the level OK?
N O A G o to step 28. Y E S A G o to step 3.
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1287 in the NO A Ad just the engine oil to the proper level, then
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. go to step 2 1 .
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 5. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27, the HDS.
Is the result OK?
connections or loose terminals at rocker arm oil YESAlintermittent failure, the system is OK at this
control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil control solenoid time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
2, the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil
arm oil pressure sensor, and the PCM. If the PCM control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil pressure
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, and the
(see page 11 -7), then g o t o step 26. If the PCM was PCM.B
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep testing until a result comes on. If N O A G o to step 6.
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 26.
11-292
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector. 14. Check the oil pressure w h e n the Hi VTEC test is
activated.
2
Is the oil pressure above 40 kPa (0,4 kgf/cm ,
9. Check the ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 5.8 psi)?
in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
YESAReplace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
Does it indicate OFF? (see page 11-318), then go to step 19.
Y E S A G o to step 15. N O A C h e c k the VTEC system oil line, then go to

step 19.
11. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and
attach the special tools as s h o w n , then attach the 17. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
rocker arm oil pressure switch to the pressure
gauge adapter (B). 18. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil
pressure switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
NOTE; Install the parts in the reverse order of body ground.
removal w i t h a new O-ring.
R O C K E R A R M O I L P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R

(C33) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then
go to step 19.
12. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P N O A G o to step 27.
connector.
(cont'd)
11-293
3-Stage i-VTEC S f stem

19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Reconnect all connectors.
20. Reconnect all connectors. 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 29. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
24. Do the VTEC TEST In the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS. Is DTC PI288 indicated?
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
Is DTC PI288 indicated? rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil
YESACheck for poor connections or loose and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil 29. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
and the PCM, then go to step 1. N O A G o to step 3 1 .
N O A G o to step 26. 3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1288 in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other • original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. B go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. B
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at rocker arm oil connections or loose terminals at rocker arm oil
control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil control solenoid control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil control solenoid
2, the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker 2, the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker
arm oil pressure sensor, and the PCM, then go to arm oil pressure sensor, and the PCM. If the PCM
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
testing until a result comes on. If the screen (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 29. If the PCM was
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 24. substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep testing until a result comes on. If
step 29.
11 -294
DTC P1289: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor 6. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Stuck High
7. Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data (see page 11-317).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
2. Check the engine oil level. 10. Do the PCM Idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
Is the level OK? 11. Do the VTEC TEST In the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
N O A A d j u s t the engine oil to the proper level, then
go to step 8. Is DTC P1289 indicated?
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YESACheck for poor connections or loose
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil
5. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h and the PCM, then go to step 1.
the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil Does the screen indicate PASSED?
switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, and the YESATroubleshooting Is complete. If any other
PCM.B Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12,
|\IOA|f the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor
arm oil pressure sensor, and the PCM, then go to
Indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 11.
11 "235
DTC P128A: Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
OFF
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is the result OK?
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. Y E S A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil
Is DTC PI289 or P2651 Indicated? switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, and the
PCM.B
Y E S A G o to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
N O A D e p e n d i n g on the result, replace the
N O A G o to step 4. appropriate part, then go to step 9:
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). • ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE: Rocker arm oil pressure sensor
5. Check the engine oil level. (see page 11-317)
• ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 1
Is the level OK? STUCK OFF: Rocker a r m oil control valve
(see page 11-317)

go to step 11.
11-296
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P128B: Valve Pause System (VPS)
Malfunction
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
14. Do the VTEC TEST In the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Are DTC P128B and P1287 indicated at the same
time?
Is DTC P128A indicated?
Y E S A G o to troubleshooting for DTC P1287. •
' terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, N O A G o to step 4.
pressure switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Check the engine oil level.
Is the level OK?
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P128A In the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Y E S A G o to step 6.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? N O A A d j u s t the engine oil to the proper level, then
go to step 23.
YESATroubleshooting Is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 15, 6. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
N O A | f the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor
step 1. If the screen Indicates EXECUTING, keep
Indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 14.
(cont'd)
11-297
8. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the HDS.
10. ' Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
Is the result OK ? 11-317), then go t o step 23.
YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil 12. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil pressure connector.
PCM.B 13. At the rocker a r m oil pressure switch side, check for
continuity between rocker arm oil pressure switch
IMOADepending on the result, go to the 2P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
appropriate step:
ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH 2 P CONNECTOR
• ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2
STUCK OFF: Go to step 9.
• ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH
VOLTAGE: Go to step 11.
NOAReplace the rocker arm oil pressure switch

(see page 11-318), then g o t o step 2 1 .
11-298
14. Connect rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P 17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector terminal No. 2 to body ground with a
j u m p e r wire. 18. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR

20. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil

pressure switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and
PCM connector terminal C33.
VTPSW (BLU/BLK)
R O C K E R A R M OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH 2P C O N N E C T O R
JUMPER WIRE
VTPSW (BLU/BLK)

15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). I 1 I 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |

•
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
16. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SWITCH • 1
in the DATA LIST with the HDS.

26 27
361/
29|30|31132 33
//
3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 ? 43|44|
Does it indicate ON? V T P S W (BLU/BLK)

YESARepair open in the wire between the rocker
arm oil pressure switch and G102 (see page 22-16), Is there continuity?
then g o t o step 2 1 .
go to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-299
S Stage i-VTEC S f stem
21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 29. Reconnect all connectors. .
23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). good PCM (see page 11-7). ..
24. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 3 1 . Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
26. Do the VTEC TEST In the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS. Is DTC P128B indicated?
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
Is DTC P128B Indicated? rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil 3 1 . If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
and the PCM, then go to step 1. N O A G o to step 33.
N O A G o t o step 28. 33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P128B in the
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P128B in the
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other *
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
testing until a result comes on. If the screen (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 3 1 . If the PCM was
step 3 1 .
11-300
DTC P2647: VTEC System Stuck ON 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 11-317).
Is the engine oil level OK?
Y E S A G o to step 3. the HDS.
N O A A d j u s t the engine oil to the proper level, then 12. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
go to step 8.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1,
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2/the rocker arm oil
5. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with pressure switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor,
the HDS. and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Is the result OK? N O A G o to step 13.
YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2647 in the
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil pressure Does the screen indicate PASSED?
PCM.B YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
. N O A G o to step 6. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting B

indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 11.
11-301
3-Sfage i-VTEC System
DTC P2848: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
2 Circuit Low Voltage
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminal B26 and body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

the HDS.
YES A | intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

at rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 and the PCM. •
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (B26) and rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, then go
to step 12.
6. Disconnect rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 2P
connector. N O A G o to step 19.
7. At the solenoid side, measure the resistance 11. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
between rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 2P 11-317).
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2 2P CONNECTOR

the HDS.

Is there 14—30 Q at room temperature? YESACheck for poor connections or loose

terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 and
Y E S A G o to step 8. the PCM, then go to step 1.
11-302
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the DTC P2649: Rocker A r m Oil Control Solenoid
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 2 Circuit High Voltage
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step 1 2 . Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, g o t o step 16. 3. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Is DTC P2649 indicated?
2 1 . Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS. N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. at rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 and the PCM.H
Is DTC P2648 indicated? 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YESACheck for poor connections or loose 6. Disconnect rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 2P
terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 and connector.
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 7. At the solenoid side, measure the resistance
21. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. between rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 2P
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2 2 P CONNECTOR

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. S
|\IOA|f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
control solenoid 2 and the PCM. If the PCM was Is there 14—30 Q at room temperature?
11-7), then go to step 2 1 . If the PCM was substituted, Y E S A G o t o step 8.
COMPLETED, g o t o step 2 1 . N O A G o to step 11.
(cont'd)
11-303
3-Stage i-VTEC S f stem
#
8. Check f o r continuity between rocker a r m oil control 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
solenoid 2 2P connector terminal No. 1 and body terminal B26 and rocker a r m oil control solenoid 2
ground. 2P connector terminal No. 2.
R O C K E R A R M OIL C O N T R O L
R O C K E R A R M OIL C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D 2 2 P C O N N E C T O R SOLENOID 2 2P C O N N E C T O R
XV
1 2 V T S 2 (YEL)

GND (BLK)

11XUi/l 40 141J42J43144
V T S 2 (YEL)
Is there continuity? Terminal side of femafe terminals
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between rocker arm Y E S A G o to step 20.

oil control solenoid 2 and G102 (see page 22-16),
then go to step 13. N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM
(B26) and rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, then go
9.; J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. to step 13.
10. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 12. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
11-317). •

the HDS.
11-304
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the
terminals at rocker arm oil control solenoid 2 and Y E S A l f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
the PCM, then go to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
N O A G o to step 19. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Does the screen indicate PASSED? control solenoid 2 and the PCM. If the PCM was
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other 11-7), then go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • COMPLETED, go to step 22.
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1

COMPLETED, go to step 17.


the HDS.

11-305
DTC P2651: Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
OFF
7. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11-317).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
2. Check the engine oil level. 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
Is the engine oil level OK? 11. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
go to step 8. Is DTC P2651 indicated?
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YESACheck for poor connections or loose
4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker a r m oil
5. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h and the PCM, then go to step 1.
the HDS.
Is the result OK ?
Y E S A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil Does the screen indicate PASSED?
switch, the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor, and the YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
PCM.B Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12,
connections or loose terminals at rocker a r m oil
a r m oil pressure sensor, and the PCM, then go to
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, g o t o step 11.
11-306
DTC P26S2; Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck 6. Check for poor connections at the rocker a r m oil
ON pressure switch 2P connector.
Special Tools Required > Are the connections OK ?

•Pressure gauge adapter07NAJ-P0701 OA
•A/T low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 Y E S A G o to step 7.
• A/T pressure hose 07406-0020201
•A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A N O A R e p a i r t h e poor connections at the rocker arm
•A/T pressure adaptor 07MAJ-PY40120 oil pressure switch 2P connector, then go to step
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 14.
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record ail freeze data 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and
attach the special tools as shown, then attach the
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). rocker arm oil pressure switch to the pressure
gauge adapter (B).
NOTE: Install the parts in the reverse order of
Is the engine oil level OK ? removal w i t h a new O-ring.
N O A A d j u s t the engine oil t o the proper level, then

g o t o step 14.

the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES AJntermittent failure, the system is OK at this

PCM.B 9. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
3,000 rpm.
(cont'd)
11-307
3"Stag® i*\^TEC System
1 1 . Check the oil pressure. DTC P2653: Rocker A r m Oil Control Solenoid
1 Circuit Low Voltage
2
Is the oil pressure above 0 kPa (0 kgf/cm , 0 psi)?
YESAReplace the rocker arm oil control valve and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
(see page 11-317), then go to step 12. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
NOAReplace the rocker arm oil pressure switch 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Reconnect all connectors. the HDS.
15. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. Is DTC P2648 indicated?
16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). YESAjntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
17. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 and the PCM.B
the HDS.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 2P
YESACheck for poor connections or loose connector.
rocker a r m oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil 7. At the solenoid side, measure the resistance
pressure switch, the rocker a r m oil pressure sensor, between rocker a r m oil control solenoid 1 2P
and the PCM, then go to step 1. connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
N O A G o to step 19. ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 1 2 P CONNECTOR


go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. B
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s

control solenoid 1, rocker a r m oil control solenoid
2, the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker Is there 14—30 Q at room temperature?
step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep Y E S A G o to step 8.
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 17. N O A G o to step 11.
11-308
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminal B34 and body ground. terminals at rocker a r m oil control solenoid 1 and


VTS1 (GRN/YEL)
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 17,
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
IMOA|f the screen Indicates FAILED, g o t o step 1
Is there continuity? COMPLETED, go to step 16.
YESARepair short In the wire between the PCM 19. Reconnect all connectors.
to step 12. 20. Update the PCM if It does not have the latest
N O A G o to step 19. good PCM (see page 11-7).
11. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page 2 1 . Do the VTEC TEST In the INSPECTION MENU with
11-317). the HDS.
12. Reconnect all connectors. 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). Is DTC P2653 indicated?
14. Reset the PCM with the HDS. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
15. Do the PCM Idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). the PCM. If the PCM w a s updated, substitute a
16. Do the VTEC TEST In the INSPECTION MENU w i t h 2 1 . If the PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1.
the HDS.
(cont'd)
11-309
3-Stage i-¥TEC S f stem

23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2653 in the DTC P2654: Rocker A r m Oil Control Solenoid
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 1 Circuit High Voltage
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NOAJf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 3. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
connections or loose terminals at rocker arm oil the HDS.
control solenoid 1 and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11-7), then go to step 2 1 . If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT Is DTC P2654 indicated?
COMPLETED, go to step 2 1 .
N O A I n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this

at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 and the PCM.H
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 2P

connector.
7. At the solenoid side, measure the resistance

between rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 2P
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 1 2 P CONNECTOR
Is there 14—30 Q at room temperature?
11-310
8. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
solenoid 1 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body terminal B34 and rocker arm oil control solenoid 1
ground. 2P connector terminal No. 1.
R O C K E R A R M OIL C O N T R O L
ROCKER A R M OIL C O N T R O L S O L E N O I D 1 2P C O N N E C T O R S O L E N O I D 1 2P C O N N E C T O R
VTS1 (GRN/YEL)
G N D (BLK)
3 [ 4 \ / \ 6 | 7
10 12 13 1415 16 17
23 25
26 29l30]31 [3233 34 35
Wire side of female terminals 36 40 41 42 43 44
TO
VTS1 (GRN/YEL)
Is there continuity? Terminal side of female terminals
NOARepair open in the wire between rocker arm Y E S A G o t o step 20.

oil control solenoid 1 and G102 (see page 22-16),
then go to step 13. N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
9. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. to step 13.
10. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 12. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
11-317).

the HDS.

(cont'd)
11-311

19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2654 in the 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • original PCM (see pagtf V1-238). If any other
N O A l f the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1 go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting H
COMPLETED, go to step 17. N O A j f the screen indicates "FAILED, check for poor
-connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
20. Reconnect all connectors. control solenoid 1 and the PCM. If the PCM was
21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 11-7), then g o t o step 22. If the PCM was'substituted,
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
good PCM (see page 11-7). COMPLETED,* go to step 22.^

the HDS.

11-312
DTC P3400: Valve Pause System (VPS) Stuck 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
OFF
and a n y on-board snapshot, and review the general. 8. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is the result OK?
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. at rocker arm oil control solenoid 1, rocker arm oil
Are DTC P3400 and PI287, P1289, P128A, P128B, switch, the rocker arm oil pressure sensor, and the
or P2651 indicated at the same time? PCM. a
Y E S A G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H N O A D e p e n d i n g on the result, go to the

appropriate step:
• ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). VOLTAGE: Go to step 9.
• ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH HIGH
5. Check the engine oil level. VOLTAGE: Go to step 11.
Is the engine oil level OK ? 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Y E S A G o to step 6. 10. Replace the rocker arm oil pressure sensor

(see page 11-317), then go to step 2 1 .
go to step 26.
(cont'd)
11-313
3-Stage I-VTEC S f stem
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Connect rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a
12. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P j u m p e r wire.
connector.
R O C K E R A R M O I L P R E S S U R E S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R
13. At the rocker a r m oil pressure switch side, check for
continuity between rocker arm oil pressure switch
V T P S W (BLU/BLK)
ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
J U M P E R WIRE
Terminal side o f male terminals 16. Check the ROCKER A R M OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is there continuity? Does it indicate ON?
Y E S A G o t o step 14. YESARepair open in the wire between the rocker

arm oil pressure switch and G102 (see page 22-16),
N O A R e p l a c e the rocker arm oil pressure switch then go to step 2 1 .
(see page 11-318), then g o t o step 2 1 .
11-314
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
18. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 22. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
19. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 23. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
20. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil
pressure switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and Is the result OK?
PCM connector terminal C33.
YESATroubleshooting is complete. •
ROCKER ARM OIL P R E S S U R E SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
N O A D e p e n d i n g on the result, replace the

appropriate part, then go to step 24:
V T P S W (BLU/BLK)
• ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH

Wire side of female terminals VOLTAGE: Rocker arm oil pressure sensor
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) (see page 11-317)
r it ii zn
I 1 I 2 3 I 4 I 5 | 68 |IT 9 I
• ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2
STUCK OFF: Rocker arm oil control valve
10 111213|14|15|16 1724
1819
•
(see page 11-317)
202122 23 25 1 • ROCKER A R M OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 1
2627/ 29|30|311323 M3/43|44|
/ STUCK OFF: Rocker arm oil control valve
38|39|40|/hX—tr
T3—1 (see page 11-317)
V T P S W (BLU/BLK) I |
go to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
11-315
3-Stage i-VT£C System
24. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). 32. Reconnect all connectors.
27. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. 34. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
the HDS. Is DTC P3400 indicated?
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
Is DTC P3400 indicated? rocker arm oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil
rocker a r m oil control solenoid 2, the rocker arm oil 34. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
and the PCM, then go to step 1. N O A G o to step 36.
N O A G o to step 3 1 . 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P3400 in the
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P3400 in the
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
testing until a result comes on. If the screen (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 33. If the PCM was
step 34.
11-316
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Sensor
Removal/Installation Removal/Installation
1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2). 1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure sensor
connector (A).
2. Disconnect the rocker a r m oil control solenoid 1
connector (A), the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2
connector (B), the rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (C), and the rocker arm oil pressure
sensor connector (D).
2 4 IM-m 2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure sensor (B).

(2.4 k g f - m , 18 I b f f t )

3. Remove the bolts (E). w i t h a new O-ring (C).
4. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (F).

with a new rocker arm oil control valve filter (G).
11-317
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch

connector (A).
B
2 2 N-m
( 2 . 2 k g f - m , 16 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (B).
3. Install the parts In the reverse order of removal

11-318
Idle Control System
11-3
Idle Control System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower 7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
Than Expected bore.
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general bore?
Y E S A l f there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). body (see page 11 -370). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-371), then go
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go
t o step 8.
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator N O A C h e c k t h e A/C system, then go to step 17.
4. Check under these DATA LIST parameter
conditions w i t h the HDS: 9. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C) 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
• IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C)
• VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h) 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
• ST FUEL TRIM between 0 . 7 3 - 1 . 4 7 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
• FSS is CLOSED fan comes o n , then let it idle.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the 12. Check under these DATA LIST parameter
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. conditions w i t h the HDS:
Does the screen indicate FAILED? • ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C)
• IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C)
Y E S A G o to step 6. • VSS is 0 m p h (0 km/h)
• ST FUEL TRIM between 0 . 7 3 - 1 . 4 7
N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, g o t o step 15.
If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling • FSS is CLOSED
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
6. Remove the intake air duct f r o m the throttle body Is DTC P0506 indicated?
(see page 11-372).
11 ~320
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the 19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other 3,000 r p m without load (in P or N) until the radiator
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13, fan comes o n , then let it idle.
2 I. Check under these DATA LIST parameter
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 19. If conditions w i t h the HDS:
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF • ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 °F (70 °C)
CONDITION, g o t o step 11. • IAT SENSOR above 32 °F (0 °C)
• VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h)
15. Remove the intake air duct f r o m the throttle body • ST FUEL TRIM between 0 . 7 3 - 1 . 4 7
(see page 11-370). • FSS is CLOSED
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
bore.
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore? YESACheck for poor connections or loose
Y E S A l f there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
body (see page 11 -370). Also check for damage to (see page 11-7), then go to step 20. If the PCM was
the air cleaner element (see page 11-371), then go substituted, go to step 1.
to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 8. N O A G o to step 23.
N O A G o to step 17. 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the
17. Recheck w i t h different load conditions (turn on the
headlights, blower motor, rear w i n d o w defogger Does the screen indicate PASSED?
and/or A/C, change the gear position, etc.).
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
Does the screen indicate PASSED? go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
time.B connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check the A/C known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go t o step
system and/or power steering system, then go to 20. If the PCM w a s substituted, go to step 1. If the
step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to CONDITION, go to step 20.
step 17.
11-321
Idle Control System

DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Than Expected
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator Is DTC P0507 indicated?
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. to step 1.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? N O A G o to step 11.
Y E S A G o to step 5. 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the
IMOA|f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . If the screen Does the screen indicate PASSED?
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
CONDITION, recheck w i t h different load conditions Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
(electrical, A/C, gear position, etc.), then go t o go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
step 3.
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step 12. If
5. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
• PCV valve CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions
• PCV hose (turn on the headlights, blower motor, or A/C;
• EVAP canister purge valve change the gear position, etc.), then go to step 9.
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold
YESARepair or replace the leaking part(s), then go

to step 6.
11-322
12. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest DTC P0532: A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit Low
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Voltage
13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
3,000 r p m w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the A/C switch on.
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the 4. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good PCM LIST with the HDS.
substituted, go to step 1. Is there about 0.3 V or less?
N O A G o to step 15. Y E S A G o to step 5.
15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
DTCs MENU with the HDS. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the A/C pressure sensor and the PCM. •
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the 6. Disconnect the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
8. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor LIST with the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a Is there about 0.3 V or less?
13. If the PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1. If the Y E S A G o to step 10.
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF N O A G o to step 9.
(cont'd)
11-323
Idle Control System
9. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure sensor 14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
A/C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
17. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor

1 2 3 terminal A19.
V C C 6 (RED) SG6 (BLK)
A/C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3
V C C 6 ( R E D )

PCM C O N N E C T O R A (44P) V C C 6 (RED)

Is there about 5 V?
/ | 4 | 5 | 61 8 I <
10 1213|14|T5|16 17 1819
[ I
2021A X 232425
26272829|/|31 V 333435
|36|37 38|39|40|/]42 43|44|
10. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). Terminal side of female terminals
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. Is there continuity?
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). Y E S A G o to step 28.
13. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM
3P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. (A19) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to step
20.
A/C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3 P C O N N E C T O R
A\ 19. Replace the A/C pressure sensor (see page 21-9).

1 2 3
A C P D (LT G R N )

(A16) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to step
20.
11-324
22. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. DTC P0533: A/C Pressure Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
24. Start the engine, and let it idle. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
4. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
YESACheck for poor connections or loose LIST with the HDS.
terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the PCM,
then go to step 1. Is there about 4.75 V or more?
IMOATroubleshooting is complete. If any other Y E S A G o to step 5.

indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
28. Reconnect all connectors. at the A/C pressure sensor and the PCM. •
29. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
good PCM (see page 11-7). 6. Disconnect the A/C pressure sensor 3P connector.
30. Start the engine, and let it idle. 7. Connect A/C pressure sensor 3 P connector
3 1 . Turn the blower switch on.
A / C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3
A C P D (LT G R N )

terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the PCM. J U M P E R WIRE
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good

was substituted, go to step 1. W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

(cont'd)
11-325
Idle Control System

9. Check the A/C PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA 14. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
17. Check for continuity between A/C pressure sensor
N O A G o to step 22. 3P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM connector
terminal A16.
A / C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR
11. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the A/C pressure

sensor 3P connector. 1 2
Wire s i d e o f l A C P D (LT GRN)
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). female terminals (O)
13. Measure the voltage between A/C pressure sensor PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) ACPD (LT GRN)
0 8 9
4 5 6
A / C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P CONNECTOR 10
13ll4ll5ll6 17 24
1825
23 35
20
3334
26 27
36 37
38l39l40l/[42 43 44
VCC6 (RED) SG6 (BLK) Is there continuity?

Wire side of female terminals (A16) and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to step
24.
Is there about 5 V?
11-326
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). '
19. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 23. Replace the A/C pressure sensor (see page 21-9).
20. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 24. Reconnect all connectors.
21. Check for continuity between A/C pressure-sensor 25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
terminal A9. 26. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
A / C P R E S S U R E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 28. Start the engine, and let it idle.

SG6 (BLK)
P C M CONNECTOR A (44P) SG6 (BLK) 30. Turn the A/C switch on.
i—
•FT? ! / i 4 I 5 I 6J 7 8 9
10
20 21
/12 13|14|15|16 17
23
18 19
24 25 is DTC P0533 indicated?
•
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44 YESACheck for poor connections or loose
T e r m i n a l side of female terminals terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NOARepair open in the wire between the PCM (A9)
and the A/C pressure sensor, then go to step 24.
(cont'd)
11-327
Idle Control System


terminals at the A/C pressure sensor and the PCM.
PJOAlf the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go t o the
indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . •
11-328
A / C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Momentarily connect PCM connector terminal A14
t o body ground w i t h a jumper wire several times.
4. Check the A/C CLUTCH In the DATA LIST with the 17A
•
> | 4 I 5 I 6 [7 8 I 9 I
HDS.
10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
i
20 21
/ 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 L 1 3 1 / 33 34 35
•
Does it indicate ON ? 136137 38|39 4 0 1 / | 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
A C C (RED)
J U M P E R WIRE
N O A D o the A/C system test (see page 21-129). •

5. Check the A/C system.
Does the A/C system operate? Is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor
clutch?
Y E S A T h e air conditioning system circuit is OK.H
Y E S A U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest
N O A G o to step 6. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
N O A C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals
8. Activate the A/C CLUTCH in the INSPECTION at the A/C clutch relay and the PCM. If the
MENU w i t h the HDS. connections and terminals are OK, check the A/C
clutch relay (see page 22-64). If needed, repair open
is there a clicking noise from the A/C compressor in the w i r e between the PCM (A14) and the A/C
clutch? clutch relay, the other A/C systems. •
Y E S A D o the A/C system test (see page 21-129). M
11-329
Idle Control System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS, P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
Does it indicate OFF?

/ | 4 |5 | 6 | 7 8]9 I
i
Y E S A Q o t o step 3.
10
/ 12 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 17 18 19
m
20 21
i 26 27 /^-^^— 23 24 25
28 2 9 | / | 3 1 1 / 33 34 35
m
IMOAinspect the brake pedal position switch 38|39|40 | / | 4 2 43|44|

13613T
(see page 19-6). •
BKSW ( L T GRN)
3. Press the brake pedal w h i l e checking the BRAKE
SWITCH in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.

Does it change to ON?
Y E S A T h e brake pedal position switch signal circuit Is there continuity?
(BKSW line) is OK. • YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM
(A40) and the No. 12 HORN & STOP (15 A) fuse.
N O A G o to step 4. Also, replace the No. 12 HORN & STOP (15 A)
fuse.!
4. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P
connector.
11-330
9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector
terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
B R A K E P E D A L POSITION S W I T C H
4 P CONNECTOR
BKSW
(LT G R N )
JUMPER WIRE

.i
1
4 | 5 | 6 |7 8 |9
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
24 25 •
20 21
. • 26 27 28 / 23
33 34 35
130 j 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
B K S W (LT G R N )
YESARepair open in the wire between the brake

pedal position switch and the No. 12 HORN & STOP
(15 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6).B

(A40) and the brake pedal position switch. •
Idle Control System
Idle Speed Inspection
NOTE: Before checking the idle speed, check these 4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
items: 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
• The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been fan comes on, then let it idle.
reported o n , and there are no DTCs.
• Ignition t i m i n g 5. Check the idle speed without load conditions:
• Spark plugs headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
• Air cleaner conditioner off.
• PCV system
• Headlight OFF Idle speed should be: 8 2 0 ± 5 0 rpm (in P or N)
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) 6. Let the engine idle for 1 minute w i t h high electric
canister purge valve connector. load (A/C switch on, temperature set to max cool,
blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam).
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. Idle speed should be: 8 2 0 ± 5 0 rpm (in P or N)
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification,

do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
If the idle speed is still not within specification, go
to s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
7. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve

connector.

(see page 11-213).
11-332
PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The Idle learn procedure must be done so the PCM can
learn the engine Idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of

these actions:
• Replace the PCM.

• Reset the PCM.
• Update the PCM.
• Replace or clean the throttle body.
• When the engine or transmission is disassembled.
NOTE: Clearing DTCs w i t h the HDS does not require

you to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical Items (A/C, audio, lights, etc.)

are off.
2. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.-
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.

fan comes o n , or u n t i l t h e engine coolant
temperature reaches 194 °F (90 °C).
5. Let the engine Idle for about 5 minutes w i t h the

throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes o n , do not Include

its running time in the 5 minutes.
6. Verify on the HDS data list that the Idle learn

procedure Is complete.
Fuel Supply System
Component Location index
- FUEL TANK
F U E L TANK UNIT
Removal and Installation,
p a g e 11-361
FUEL PUMP
F U E L G A U G E SENDING UNIT
Test, p a g e 11-366
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR
F U E L FILTER
- F U E L FILL C A P
F U E L RAIL
FUEL LINE/
Q U I C K - C O N N E C T FITTING
P r e c a u t i o n s , p a g e 11-354
R e m o v a l , p a g e 11-355
* FUEL LINE/
Q U I C K - C O N N E C T FITTING
P r e c a u t i o n s , p a g e 11-354
R e m o v a l , p a g e 11-355
F U E L F E E D LINE F U E L V A P O R LINE
FUEL PULSATION DAMPER

11-334
11-335
Fuel Supply System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Range/Performance Problem Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
any on-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
w i t h o u t refueling to complete this diagnosis, DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-366).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK ?
. Y E S A G o to step 4.
terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the N O A i n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
gauge control module (tach).B time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the gauge control module (tach) and the fuel
"NOAReplace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page gauge sending unit.B
11 -364), then go to step 2.
5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit subharness 4P
3. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. connector (see page 11-365).
4. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Y E S A G o to the indicated DTCs Troubleshooting. Is DTC P0463 indicated?
N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. • YESAReplace the fuel gauge sending unit ,

Q " *
10. Remove the gauge control module (tach) (see page

22-255).

connector.
11-336
12. Check for continuity between floor wire harness 20. Set the float (A) to the E position.
C651 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
F L O O R W I R E H A R N E S S c 6 5 1 4P C O N N E C T O R
SIGNAL
(ORN)
1 2
3 4
LJ
/ E
' 0.4 I n .
( 8 . 9 mm)
21. Check the fuel gauge.

Does the gauge move to the empty position?
YESARepair short in the wire between the gauge
control module (tach) (signal line) and the fuel tank Y E S A G o to step 29.
unit subharness, then go to step 23.
NOAReplace the gauge control module (tach)
N O A G o to step 13. (see page 22-255), then go to step 22..
13. Remove the fuel tank (see page 11-365). 22. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
14. Check the fuel tank unit subharness for an open or 23. Reconnect all connectors.
short.
Is the harness OK?
N O A R e p a i r the fuel tank unit subharness, then go
to step 22. 27. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
15. Reconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P 28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
connector.
16. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-361).
17. Connect the fuel tank unit subharness 4P connector, terminals at the gauge control module (tach) and
and the fuel tank unit 4P connector. the fuel gauge sending unit, then go to step 1.
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NOATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
19. Clearthe DTC w i t h the HDS. indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
(cont'd)
11-337
Fuel Supply S f stem

29. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0463: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge
Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage
3 1 . Update the PCM if it does not have the latest and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a k n o w n - troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
terminals at the gauge control module (tach) and Is DTC P0463 indicated?
the fuel gauge sending unit. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page Y E S A G o to step 4.
11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. NO A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is at the gauge control module (tach) and the fuel
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the gauge sending unit. 11
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector (see step 5 on page 11-365).
6. Connect floor wire harness C651 4P connector

terminal No. 2 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
F L O O R WIRE H A R N E S S C651 4P C O N N E C T O R
G N D
(LT G R N )
J U M P E R
WIRE
11-338
> i
7. Remove t h e gauge control module (tach) (see p a g e 10. Connect floor wire harness C651 4P connector
22-255). terminal No. 1 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
8. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P F L O O R WIRE H A R N E S S C651 4P C O N N E C T O R

connector.
9. Check for continuity between gauge control SIGNAL

module (tach) 36P connector terminal No. 33 and (ORN)
1 2
body ground.
JUMPER 3 4
WIRE
G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E (TACH) 36P C O N N E C T O R
1| 2 | / | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9|10|11 /|13|14|15|16|17|18|
T e r m i n a l s i d e of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
|19|20|21|/|//|/|/|27|28|/|30|31|^|33|/|/|/
G N D (ORN)
11. Check for continuity between gauge control
body ground.
1 | 2 | / | 4 [ 5 | 6 | 7 8[ 9|10|11 /|13|14|15[16|17|18|
Y E S A G o to step 10. 119|20| 21 | / l / | / | / | / | 2 7 | 2 8 | / | 3 0 | 3 1 1 3 2 | 3 3 | / | / | /
S I G N A L (PUR)
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the gauge
control module (tach) (GND line) and the fuel tank
NOARepair open in the wire between the gauge

control module (tach) (signal line) and the fuel tank
12. Remove the fuel tank (see page 11-365).
13. Check the fuel tank unit subharness for an open or

short.
Is the harness OK ?
NOARepair the fuel tank unit subharness, then go

to step 24.
(cont'd)
11-339

14. Remove the j u m p e r wire f r o m the fuel tank unit 23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
subharness 4P connector.
24. Reconnect ail connectors.
16. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-366).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
N O A R e p l a c e the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
11-364), then go to step 23. 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
17. Connect the fuel tank unit subharness 4P connector Is DTC P0463 indicated?
and, the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
18. Reconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P terminals at the gauge control module (tach) and
connector. the fuel gauge sending unit, then go to step 1.
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). N O A T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other

20. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
2 1 . Set the float (A) to the F position. 30. Reconnect all connectors.
3 1 . Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.

F
5.6 i n . good PCM (see page 11-7).
(139.8 m m )

terminals at the gauge control module (tach) and
the fuel gauge sending unit. If the PCM was
22. Check the fuel gauge. 11-7), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
Does the gauge move to the full position?
Y E S A G o to step 30. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NOAReplace the gauge control module (tach) Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(see page 22-255), then go to step 23. indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
11-340
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting
If you suspect a problem w i t h the fuel p u m p , check that 5. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
the fuel p u m p actually runs; when it is o n , y o u will hear
some noise if you listen to the fuel fill port w i t h the fuel 6. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 8P
fill cap remove^. The fuel pump should run for connector.
2 seconds when the ignition switch is turned t o ON (II).
If the fuel pump does not make noise, check as follows: 7. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). S. Measure the voltage between under-hood fuse/
relay box 8P connector terminal No. 6 and body
2. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2 (A) f r o m auxiliary ground.
U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X 8P C O N N E C T O R
1GP ( O R N )

YESARepair open in the wire between the under-
4. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 hood fuse/relay box and PGM-FI main relay 2.M
NOA
PGM-FI M A I N R E L A Y 2 4 P C O N N E C T O R
• Replace PGM-FI main relay 1. •
• If needed, replace the under-hood fuse/relay
box.B
2 E
1GP
h
(cont'd)
11-341
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Measure the voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 13. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 2
4P connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d . 4P connector terminal No. 3 and PCM connector
terminal A15.
PGM-FI M A I N R E L A Y 2 4P C O N N E C T O R
3
3 IMOFPR
1 2 M
4
4
IG1
IMOFPR (BRN)
4 5 6 7 8 9
1314 15 16 17 18 19
20 23 24 25
26 27 28 33 34 35
Is there battery voltage? 36137j38139 [40 |Xl42143|44
Y E S A G o to step 10. Terminal side of female terminals
NOA Is there continuity ?

• Repair open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and PGM-FI main relay 2 . B Y E S A G o t o step 14.
• Check the No. 2 FUEL PUMP (15 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.il N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between PGM-FI main
• If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay relay 2 and the PCM (A15).H
box. •
14. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2.
15. Connect PCM connector terminal A6 to body
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. ground with a j u m p e r wire.
M R L Y (GRN) JUMPER WIRE
i
ZlAl 5I 6 r8 I 9 I
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 7 18 19
•
20 21 23 24 25
•
26 27 28 33 34 35
29|/|311/
|36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
11-342
16. Turn the ignition switch to O N (II). Is there battery voltage?
17. Measure the voltage between PCM connector Y E S A U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal A15 and body ground. software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-238),
then go to step 23.
/I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
i 10 12 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 17 18 1 9
20 21 23 24 25
i
N O A | f needed, replace the under-hood fuse/relay
i
• 26 27 28 29 M a 33 34 35 box, then go to step 23.
|36|37 38|39|40 M 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
IMOFPR (BRN)

25. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
voltage between floor wire harness C651 4P
Is there battery voltage? connector terminal No. 3 and body ground within
2 seconds.
F L O O R W I R E H A R N E S S C651 4P C O N N E C T O R
NOAReplace PGM-FI main relay 2.M

1 2
19. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P). 3 4
FUEL PUMP
20. Exit the SCS mode w i t h the HDS. (GRN)
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the Terminal side of male terminals
voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector
IMOFPR
2
27. Remove PGM-FI main relay 2.
(cont'd)
11-343
Fuel Supplf S f stem
Fuel Pump Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
28. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 4P connector 30. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire
31. Check for continuity between floor wire harness C
PGM-FI MAIN R E L A Y 2 4P C O N N E C T O R '
651 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body ground.
X
1 2
FUEL PUMP
IG1 3 4
GND
(BLK),
^ . , JUMPER WIRE

29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll),°and measure the
voltage between floor wire harness C651 4P
connector terminal No. 3 and body ground within Is there continuity?
2 seconds.
YESA ,
• Repair open in the wire between the floor wire
harness C651 4P connector and the fuel pump.I
• Replace the fuel pump (see page 11-364). •
1 2
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the floor
3 4 wire harness C651 4P connector and G601.H
FUEL PUMP
(GRN)
YESA
• Repair open in the wire between the floor wire <•
harness C651 4P connector and the fuel pufnp.H
• Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (see page 11-346).
•
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between PGM-FI main
relay 2 and the floor wire harness C651 4P
connector. •
11-344
Fuel Pressure Relieving
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve 8. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select
pressure f r o m the system by disabling the fuel pump Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle
and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect until it stalls.
fitting in the engine compartment.
NOTE:
With the HDS ('06 model) • Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm %
or the PCM will continue to operate the fuel

1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). pump. -
• A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. as needed (see page 11-4).
10. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure

(see page 22-62).
11. Place a rag or shop towel over the fuel pipe (A).

(see page 11-213).

12. Loosen the bolt (B).
6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
the fuel tank.
(cont'd)
11 -345
Fuel Pressure Reliewing (cont'd)
Without the HDS ('06 model) 6. Place a rag or shop towel over the fuel pipe (A).

7. Loosen the bolt (B).
2. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore
them.
4. Remove the fuel fill cap.

(see page 22-62).
11-346
Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve 6. Remove the fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
pressure f r o m the system by disabling the fuel p u m p the fuel tank.
and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect
fitting in the engine compartment. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
With the HDS ('07-09 models) 8. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select
Fuel Pump OFF, then start the engine, and let it idle
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). until it stalls.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) NOTE:

(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. • Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm
or the PCM will continue to operate the fuel
pump.
• A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear t h e m
as needed (see page 11-4).

(see page 22-62).
12. Remove the cover (A) and the quick-connect fitting

cover (B).

(see page 11-213).
13. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and

clean it if needed.
(cont'd)
11-347
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
14. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect Without the HDS ('07-09 models)
fitting (A).
2. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
15. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore
connector (B) w i t h one hand, and squeeze the them.
retainer tabs (C) w i t h the other hand to release
t h e m f r o m the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other 5. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
parts. (see page 22-62).
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer 6. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-370).
tabs pressed d o w n , and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer f r o m the line; once
. removed, the retainer must be replaced w i t h a
new one.
16. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check

it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-359).
11-348
7. Remove the cover (A) and quick-connect fitting 10. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
cover (B). connector (B) w i t h one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (C) w i t h the other hand to release
them f r o m the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
removed, the retainer must be replaced w i t h a
new one.
8. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and

clean it if needed.
9. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting (A).
11. After disconnecting the quick-connect fitting, check

it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-359).
11 -349
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Test
• Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B
Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B • Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07AAJ-S6MA150
#
06 model '07-09 models
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-345). 1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-347).
2. Remove the bolt (A). Attach the fuel pressure gauge
w i t h a new O-ring. 2. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A). Attach the
fuel pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure
gauge.
• If the engine starts, go to step 5.

• If the engine does not start, go to step 4.
4. Check to see if the fuel p u m p is running; listen to

the fuel filler port w i t h the fuel fill cap removed. 3. Reinstall the air cleaner (B) (see page 11-370).
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds w h e n the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• If the pump runs, go to step 5.

• If the p u m p does not run, do the fuel p u m p circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-341).
5. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should

2
be 2 6 0 - 3 1 0 kPa ( 2 . 7 - 3 . 2 kgf/cm , 3 8 - 4 6 psi).
• If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.

• If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-363) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-363), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
11-350
• If the engine starts, go to step 6.

• If the engine does not start, go to step 5.
5. Check t o see if the fuel pump is running; listen to

the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel p u m p should run for 2 seconds w h e n the
ignition switch is first turned on.
• If the p u m p runs, go to step 6.

• If the p u m p does not run, do the fuel p u m p circuit
troubleshooting (see page 11-341).
6. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should

2
be 2 6 0 - 3 1 0 kPa ( 2 . 7 - 3 . 2 kgf/cm , 3 8 - 4 6 psi).
• If the pressure is OK, the test is complete.

• If the pressure is out of specification, replace the
fuel pressure regulator (see page 11-363) and the
fuel filter (see page 11-363), then recheck the fuel
pressure.
Fuel Line Inspection

Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage, leaks, and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
M a k e sure the connections are

secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are f i r m l y locked in place.
11-352
Check all quick-connect fittings, and make sure they are properly positioned and tightened.
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER PURGE
VALVE
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C), (D), (E),
(F) (G) connect the fuel feed hose (H) to the fuel feed
f
pipe (I), the fuel feed hose (J) t o the fuel feed pipe (K),
the fuel feed hose to the fuel tank unit (L), the fuel tank
unit to the EVAP canister (M), the EVAP canister to the
fuel vapor line (N), fuel tank vapor recirculation tube (O)
to the fuel fill pipe (P), and the fuel fill neck tube (Q) to
the fuel fill pipe. W h e n removing or installing the fuel
feed hose, the fuel tank unit, or the fuel tank, it is
necessary t o disconnect or connect the quick-connect
fittings.
Pay attention to the f o l l o w i n g :
• The fuel feed hoses, the fuel line, and the quick-
connect fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not
to damage t h e m during welding or other heat-
generating procedures.
• The fuel feed hoses, the fuel line, and the quick-
connect fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch t h e m
w i t h a shop towel that was used for w i p i n g battery
electrolyte. Replace t h e m if they come in contact w i t h
electrolyte or something similar.
• W h e n connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, the fuel line, and the quick-connect fittings, be
careful not to bend or twist t h e m excessively. Replace
t h e m if they are damaged.
11-354
Fuel Line/Qusck-Connect Fitting
Remowal
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed f r o m the line. NOTE: Before y o u w o r k on the fuel lines and fittings,
Replace the retainer w h e n : read the Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
(see page 11-354).
• replacing the fuel feed hose.
• replacing the fuel line. 1. Relieve the fuel pressure; '06 model (see page
• replacing the fuel pump. 11-345), '07-09 models (see page 11-347).
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit. 2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt,
• replacing the fuel tank. and clean them if needed.
• it has been removed f r o m the line.
• it is damaged.
NOTE: The fuel line/quick-connect fittings retainer (D),

(E), (F), and (G) can be reused once.
If the fuel line/quick-connect fittings retainer (F) is
damaged, replace the fuel tank (see page 11-365).
Location Manufacturer Retainer Line

color diameter
A Sanoh White 0.3 in.
(6.4 m m )
B Sanoh White 0.4 in.
(9.5 m m )
C Sanoh White 0.3 in.
(6.4 mm)
E Sanoh White 0.5 in.
(12 m m )
G Tokai Natural 0.5 in.
(12 mm)
(cont'd)
11-355
Fuel Line/Quick-Gonnect Fitting Remowal (cont'd)
Fuel fill neck tube
3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect

fitting. Hold the connector (A) w i t h one hand, and Fuel tank vapor control tube
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) w i t h the other hand to
release t h e m f r o m the locking tabs (C). Pull the E A
connector off.
Fuel tank vapor control tube: Place a rag or shop

towel over the quick-connect fitting. Pull locking tab
(D). Pull the connector off.
NOTE:
o
• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
parts. •
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
removed, the retainer must be replaced w i t h a
new one.
/
11-356
Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or 5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
damage. cover the disconnected connector and line ends
w i t h plastic bags (A).
• If it is dirty, clean it.
• If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter or NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has
the fuel feed line. been removed f r o m the line.
Replace the retainer w h e n :
• replacing the fuel rail.
• replacing the fuel feed line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the fuel tank.
• it has been removed f r o m the line.
• it is damaged.
11-357
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation
NOTE: Before y o u work on the fuel lines and fittings, 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect
read the Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer f r o m
(see page 11-354). the mating line.
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if needed.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the

retainer is damaged, or after:
• replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel feed line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the fuel tank.
• removing the retainer f r o m the line.
• Use the same manufacturer's retainer and the
same size retainer w h e n the replacing the
retainer (see page 11-354).
11-358
4. Align the quick-connect fittings w i t h the line (A),
and align the retainer locking tabs (B) w i t h the
connector grooves (C). Then press the quick-
connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs
lock w i t h a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of

new engine oil on the line end.
Connection to new retainer
5. Fuel tank vapor control tube: Insert the line end (A)
into the connector end, then press the locking tab
(B).
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of

new engine oil on the line end.
Reconnection to existing retainer
Connection to new fuel line
Sanoh-made
Tokai-made
(cont'd)
11-359
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)

6. When you are reconnecting the connector w i t h the
old retainer, make sure the connection is secure
and the tabs (A) are f i r m l y locked into place; check
visually and also by pulling the connector (B).
When y o u are replacing the fuel line w i t h a new
one, make sure y o u remove the ring pull (C)
upwards after you confirm the connection is secure.
NOTE: Before y o u remove the ring pull, make sure

the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection
is not secure, the ring pull could break w h e n you try
to remove it.
Reconnection to existing retainer
Connection to new fuel line
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). The fuel p u m p

w i l l run for about 2 seconds, and fuel pressure w i l l
rise. Repeat t w o or three times, and check that
there is no leakage in the fuel supply system.
11-360
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation
Fuel pump module lockout wrench 07AAA-SNAA100 1. Temporarily attach a new base gasket (A) to the
fuel tank unit (B), then insert the fuel tank unit
Removal partially into the fuel tank.
1. Remove the fuel tank (see page 11-365). NOTE:

• Be careful not to damage the new base gasket.
2. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector. • Be careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending
unit.
3. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A). • Do not coat the base gasket w i t h oil.
(cont'd)
11-361
Fuel Tank Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd)
2. Transfer the base gasket (A) f r o m the fuel tank unit 4. Install the new locknut plate (A) and new locknut (B).
onto the fuel tank.
5. Using the special t o o l , tighten a locknut (A) to the

specified torque.
NOTE:
• After tightening, make sure the marks are still
3. Align the marks (B) on the fuel tank and the fuel aligned.
tank unit, then insert the fuel tank unit into the fuel • After installation, check the base gasket, visually
tank until it sits on the base gasket. or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
NOTE: To prevent a fuel leak, check the base gasket,

visually or by hand, to make sure it is not pinched.
A
120 N m
0 7 AA A - S N A A 1 0 0 (12.2 k g f - m , 8 8 . 2 I b f f t )
6. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector
7. Install the fuel tank (see page 11-365).
11-362
Fuel Pressure Regulator Fuel Filter Replacement
Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value; '06 model
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-361), (see page 11-350), '07-09 models (see page 11-350).
after making sure that the fuel p u m p and the fuel
2. Remove the bracket (A). pressure regulator are OK.
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Remove the ground ring (B). 3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank
unit:
4. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (C).
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal the connection is secure and the connectors (B)
w i t h new O-rings (D) and a new bracket (A). W h e n are firmly locked into place.
installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks on the • When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C),
unit and the fuel tank (see page 11-361). make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is f i r m l y locked into place. Be careful
NOTE: Coat the O-rings w i t h clean engine oil; do not to bend or twist it excessively.
not use any other oil.
Do not pinch the O-rings during installation. 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
w i t h new O-rings (D). When installing the fuel tank
unit, align the marks on the unit and the fuel tank
(see page 11-361).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil; do

not use any other oil.
11-363
Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Fuel Pulsation Damper
Unit Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-361). 1. Relieve the fuel pressure; '06 model (see page
11-345), '07-09 models (see page 11-347).
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending
unit) (A) f r o m the fuel tank unit (B). 2. Remove the engine cover.
3. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts f r o m the fuel

rail.
4. Disconnect the fuel injector connectors.
5. Remove the fuel rail.
6. Place a wrench (A) on the fuel rail (B).
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank 7. Place a wrench (C) on the fuel pulsation damper (D).
unit;
8. Remove the pulsation damper.
• When connecting the w i r e harness, make sure
the connection is secure and the connectors (C) 9. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
are f i r m l y locked into place. w i t h the new washers.
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
make sure the connection is secure. Be careful NOTE;
not to bend or twist it excessively. • Replace all washers whenever the fuel pulsation
damper is loosened or removed.
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. • If the drain hole (A) of the fuel pulsation damper
W h e n installing the fuel tank unit, align the marks cover does not face bottom, reinstall it as shown.
on the unit and the fuel tank (see page 11-361).
11-364
Fuel Tank Replacement
1. Relieve the fuel pressure; '06 model (see page 11-345), '07-09 models (see page 11-347).
3. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
4. Remove the cover (A), and the EVAP canister guard pipe (B).
5. Disconnect the fuel tank unit subharness 4P connector (C).
6. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (D).
7. Place a jack or other support under the tank (E), and secure the tank to the jack w i t h a winch strap (F).
8. Remove the strap bolts and the straps (G).
9. Remove the fuel tank.
11-365
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer 7. Measure the resistance between fuel tank unit 4P
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-226). connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3 with the float
at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR), 1/2
1. Check the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under- (HALF FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
dash fuse/relay box before testing. If you do not get the following readings, replace the
fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-364).
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
Float F 1/2 LOW E
• If no problem is f o u n d , go to step 3. Position 5.6 In. 2.9 In. 0.8 in. 0.4 In.
• If DTC B1175 or B1176 Is indicated, go to the (139.8 mm) (72.1 mm) (19.5 mm) (8.9 m m )
Indicated D T C s troubleshooting. Resistance 19 to 205.8 to 537.5 to 772 to
(O) 21 215.8 707 788
connector.
4. Measure the voltage between floor wire harness C

651 4P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h
the Ignition switch ON (II). There should be battery
voltage.
• If the voltage Is OK, check for short or open in the

fuel subharness, then go to step 5.
• If the voltage is not as specified, check for:
- a short in the ORN wire to ground.
- an open In the ORN or LT GRN wire.
F L O O R W I R E H A R N E S S C 6 5 1 4P C O N N E C T O R
ORN LT G R N
1 2
3 4
6. Remove the fuel tank unit f r o m the fuel tank

(see page 11-361).
11-366
Low Fuel Indicator Test
8. Reconnect the fuel tank unit subharness 4P 1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test (see page 22-223).
connector.
• If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.
9. Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse f r o m the • If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace
under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds, the gauge control module (tach) (see page
then reinstall it. 22-255).
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
11. Check that the pointer of the fuel gauge indicates F • If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTCs
w i t h the float at F. troubleshooting.
• If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
• If the pointer of the fuel gauge does not indicate F
replace the gauge assembly. 3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page
• If the gauge is OK, the test is complete. 11-366).
NOTE:
• The pointer of the fuel gauge returns to the
bottom of the gauge dial w h e n the ignition switch
is LOCK (0), regardless of the fuel level.
• Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse f r o m the
under-hood fuse/relay box for at least 10 seconds
after completing troubleshooting, otherwise it
may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel gauge to
indicate the correct fuel level.
11-367
Intake Air System
11-368
Throttle Body Test
Carbon Accumulation Check Throttle Position' Learning Check
NOTE; If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been NOTE; If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported o n , check for diagnostic trouble code (DTCs). reported on, check for diagnostic trouble code (DTCs).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If 3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting It doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-213). (see page 11-213).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
fan comes on, then let it idle. 5. Do the TP POSITION CHECK In the ETCS TEST. If
needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-370).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS. The reading should be below 3 deg. If It is
not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-370).
11-369
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Cleaning Air Cleaner Removal/Installation

1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor connector
(A).
body w h e n you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, y o u
is activated.
1. Check for damage to the air cleaner element. If the

air cleaner element is damaged, replace it
(see page 11-371).
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-372).
3. Clean off the carbon f r o m the throttle valve and

inside the throttle body w i t h a paper towel soaked
in throttle plate cleaner.
NOTE:
• Remove the throttle body to clean it.
• Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
• To avoid removing the m o l y b d e n u m coating, do
not clean the bearing area of the throttle shaft (A). 2. Remove the bolts (B).
• Do not spray throttle plate cleaner directly on the
throttle body. 3. Remove the air cleaner housing (C).
• Use Honda genuine throttle plate cleaner.
4. Install the throttle body (see page 11-372).
5. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS (see page 11-4).

2 seconds.
11-370
Air Cleaner Element Inspection/ Intake Air Resonator Removal/
Replacement Installation
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (A). 1. Remove the engine cover.
2. Remove the bolts (A).
2. Remove the air cleaner element (B) f r o m the air

cleaner housing (C).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or

clogging. If there is damage or clogging, replace
the air cleaner element.
NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air 3. Remove the intake air resonator (B).
cleaner element.
4. Clean and remove any debris f r o m the inside of the
air cleaner.
• If y o u did not replace the air cleaner element, this

procedure is complete.
• If the maintenance minder required air cleaner
replacement, reset the maintenance minder
(see page 3-6).
• If you replace the air cleaner element, reset the
PCM (see page 11-4), and do the PCM idle learn
11-371
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch to ON (II) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, y o u will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body, start at
step 4.
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC while the engine is stopped.
2. Select the INSPECTION MENU on the HDS.
3. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
5. Remove the cowl cover (see step 2 on page 20-140) and the under-cowl panel (see step 4 on page 20-140).
6. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-370), and the intake air duct (A).
7. Disconnect the throttle body connector (B).
8. Disconnect and plug the water bypass hoses (C) and the vacuum hose (D).
9. Remove the throttle body (E).
10. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal w i t h a new gasket (F), then do this:
• Refill the radiator w i t h engine coolant (see page 10-6).

• Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
11-372
Throttle Body Disassembly/Reassembly
O-RING
Replace.
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE STAY
Catalytic Converter System
POWERTRAIN C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM)
11-374
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 In the
Threshold DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
NOTE; Does the screen indicate FAILED?

any on-board snapshot, and review the general Y E S A G o to step 8.
6
If some of the DTCs listed below are stored at the IMOA|f the screen Indicates PASSED, Intermittent
same time as DTC P0420, troubleshoot t h e m first, failure, the system Is OK at this time. If the screen
then recheck for DTC P0420. Indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
P0137, P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
• Poor quality fuel may cause this DTC.
9. Replace the WU-TWC (see page 11-377).
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator 11. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
•. Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
above 158°F (70 °C) fan comes on, then let It Idle.
• Transmission In D
• Vehicle speed between 45—75 mph 14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle
(72—120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise speed.
control set
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) 15. Check the CAT MONITOR CONDITION in the DATA
for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise control set LIST w i t h the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the Is the condition OK?
Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
N O A G o to step 13 and recheck.
N O A | f the screen Indicates OUT OF CONDITION,

go to step 4 and recheck. If the screen Indicates
PASSED, intermittent failure the system Is OK at
this time. If the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step
8.
6. Continue test-drive until a result comes on.
(cont'd)
11-375

above 158 °F (70 °C)
• Vehicle speed between 45—75 mph (72 —
•120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise
control set
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h)
for 5 minutes or more w i t h cruise control set

Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
N O ^ G o to step 16 and recheck.
18. Continue test-drive until a result comes on.
YESACheck the fuel quality, and replace it if

needed, then go to step 1.
N O ^ G o to step 20.


IMOÎf the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

H 0 2 S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
11-376
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation
1, Remove the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page 6. Remove the WU-TWC (A) and the gasket (B).
11-230).
44 Nm
(4.5 kgf-m,
2. Remove the chamber cover.
3. Remove the under-floor TWC (see page 11-378).
4 Remove the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page

11-230). 7. Remove the WU-TWC cover.
5. Remove the right driveshaft (see page 16-4), then

remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-22).

with a new gasket.
11-377
Under-floor TWC Remowal/lnstallation
1. Remove the under-floor TWC (A).
D
33 N-m
22 N-m
2. Remove the converter cover (B).

w i t h the new gaskets (C) and the new self-locking
nuts (D).
11-378
EGR S f stem
EXHAUST G A S RECIRCULATION (EGR) V A L V E P O W E R T R A I N C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM)

R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 11-392 U p d a t e , page 11-236
11-379
EGR System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P04O1: EGR Insufficient Flow 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-392).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
fan comes o n , then let it idle. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1)
above 158°F(70°C)
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h • Transmission in D
the HDS. • Drive the vehicle at a steady speed between 55 —
75 mph (88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
Is the result OK? • During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle
fully closed) for 5 seconds
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the
above 158 °F (70 °C) connections are OK, go to step 15.
• Drive the vehicle at a steady speed between 55 — N O A G o to step 14.
75 m p h (88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
• During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the
fully closed) for 5 seconds DTCs MENU with the HDS.
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate FAILED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
YESACIean the intake manifold EGR port w i t h
throttle plate cleaner. Also, clean the passage N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
inside the EGR valve w i t h throttle plate cleaner, connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
then go to step 9. and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for CONDITION, go to step 12.
poor connections or loose terminals at the EGR
valve and the PCM. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
step 5 and recheck.
11 -380
15. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest DTC P0404: EGR Valve Circuit Range/
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Performance Problem
16. Test-drive under these conditions; and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
above 158 °F (70 °C) 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
• Drive the vehicle at a steady speed between 55 — 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
75 mph (88—120 km/h) for at least 10 seconds
• During the drive, decelerate (with the throttle 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
fully closed) for 5 seconds 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
Is DTC P0401 indicated? the HDS.
YESACheck for poor connections or loose Is the result OK?

terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this
(see page 11-7), then go to step 16. If the PCM was time. Clean any carbon build-up on the EGR valve
substituted, go to step 1. w i t h throttle plate cleaner. •
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0401 in the 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
7. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the and No. 2.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17, E G R V A L V E 6P C O N N E C T O R

connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve SG2
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a EGRP

16. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
Is there 100 kQ or more?
(cont'd)
11-381
EGR S f stem
8. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance 10. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 3. 11. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).

E G R V A L V E Gr C O N N E C T O R
EGRP VCC2 EGR (BLU/RED)

9. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P (B2) and the EGR valve, then go to step 26.
E G R V A L V E 6P C O N N E C T O R
terminal B2 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal
No. 4.
1 2 3
4
/
6
PG1 (BLK)
1 2 3
)
4
/ 6
W i r e side of
female terminals
iV
Wire side of female terminals EGR (BLU/RED) P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
3 j 4\A 6 | 7
Is there continuity? 110 2
12 13 14 15 16 17
23 25
Y E S A G o t o step 10. 26 29[30l3ll32 33 34 35
36 ^ S ^ | 4 1 I42 43 44
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the EGR r—a-
valve and G102 (see page 22-16), then go to step T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals
26.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the PCM (B2)

and the EGR valve, then go to step 26.
11-382
14. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-392). • 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
15. Clean the intake manifold EGR port w i t h throttle 25. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-392).
plate cleaner. Also, clean the passage inside the
EGR valve w i t h throttle plate cleaner. 26. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-392). 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
17. Reconnect the EGR valve 6P connector. 28. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
18. Reconnect PCM connector B (44P). | 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 30. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. fan comes on, then let it idle.
2 1 . Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). 3 1 . Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator 32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
If DTC P0404 is indicated?
the HDS. ' ••. ' YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
Is the result OK? step 1. If the connections and terminals are OK, go
to step 34.


connections or loose terminals at the EGR valve
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
(cont'd)
11-383
EGR System
34. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest DTC P0406: EGR Valve Position Sensor
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Circuit High Voltage
35. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
3,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the radiator troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
the HDS. 2. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is 4.88 V or more indicated?
YESACheck for poor connections or loose NO A Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
w a s updated, substitute a known-good PCM at the EGR valve and the PCM.B
substituted, go to step 1. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
N O A G o to step 38. 4. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
38. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0404 in the 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Measure the voltage between EGR valve 6P
Does the screen indicate PASSED? connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is E G R V A L V E 6P C O N N E C T O R

SG2 ( G R N / Y E L ) VCC2 ( Y E L / B L U )
1 2 3
4 6
/
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a W i r e side of female terminals
CONDITION, go t o step 35.
Is there about 5 V?
11-384
7. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0), 16. Do the PCM Idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
8. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector YESACheck for poor connections or loose :
terminal B33 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
No. 2. step 1.
EGR V A L V E S P C O N N E C T O R
SG2 (GRN/YEL) Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
18. 'Reconnect all connectors.

PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) 19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
1 2
3,l4!Xi6|7 0
10 1213 14 15 23 1761825 20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
26 2829l30[31132
33 34 35
36 | > V V l 4 b 141 |4feJ43144 Is DTC P0406 indicated?

SG2 (GRN/YEL)
Terminal side of f e m a l e terminals YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. if the PCM
Is there continuity? was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Y E S A G o to step 18. substituted, go to step 1.
NOARepair open In the wire between the EGR N O A | f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
valve and the PCM (B33), then go to step 13. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
11. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
12. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-392).
11-385
EGR System
DTC P2413: EGR System Malfunction 11. Measure the voltage between EGR valve 6P
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board s n a p s h o t and review the general E G R V A L V E 6P C O N N E C T O R

VCC2 ( Y E L / B L U )

4. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

the HDS.
Is the result OK? Is there about 5 V?
YESAintermittent failure, the system is OK at this Y E S A G o to step 16.

at the EGR valve and the PCM. • N O A G o to step 12.
7. Check the EGR VLS in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 0 V indicated?
9. Disconnect the EGR valve 6P connector.
11-386
12. Turn the Ignition switch t o LOCK (0). 16. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
13. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 17. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 18. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
15. Check f o r continuity between PCM connector 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B18 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal terminal B29 and body ground.
No. 3.
3 •
1 2 3 I4 | / | 6 |7 8 M
•
6
10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
•
/ /
21 23 25
•
W i r e side of
female terminals
26
36
/ 28 29|30|31132 33
/ | 4 0 | 4 1 142
34 35
43|44|
PCM C O N N E C T O R B (44P) VCC2 ( Y E L / B L U ) I K EGRP (WHT/BLK)
1 2 3 J 4 | / I 6 | 7
10 12 1314 15 16 17 18 0Zf
23 25
26 28 29l3Q[31 [32 33 34 35 T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
36 40 41 42 43 44
TO
Terminal side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM

(B29) and the EGR valve, then go t o step 44.
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the EGR
valve and the PCM (B18), then go t o step 44.
(cont'd)
11-387
EGR S f stem
20. Check for continuity between PCM connector 24. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
terminal B29 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1
No. 1. and No. 3.
EGRP (WHT/BLK) r

EGRP VCC2
11 1 2 3 I4 |/| 6 | 7
• •
10 /12 13|14|15|16 17 18
i
/
26
21
28
23
29|30|31132 33 34 35
25
•
|36|/ / | X | 4 0 | 4 1 |42 4 3 | 4 4 | Terminal side of male terminals

EGRP ( W H T / B L K )
Y E S A G o t o step 2 1 .
(B29) and the EGR valve, then go to step 44. 25. If not already done, j u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 26. If not already done, disconnect PCM connector B
(44P).
22. If not already done, disconnect the EGR valve 6P
connector. 27. Check for continuity between PCM connector
23. At the EGR valve side, measure the resistance
between EGR valve 6P connector terminals No. 1 P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
and No. 2.
EGR (BLU/RED)
EGRP SG2 |36 |41 |42J43T44

I 1 1
CM
1 3
/
CD
4
Terminal side of male terminals Is there continuity?

Is there 100kQ or more? (B2) and the EGR valve, then go to step 44.
11-388
28. Check for continuity between PCM connector 30. Reconnect PCM connector B (44P).
terminal B2 and EGR valve 6P connector terminal
No. 4. 3 1 . At the EGR valve side, connect the battery positive
terminal to EGR valve 6P connector terminal No. 4
EGR V A L V E 6 P C O N N E C T O R w i t h a jumper wire.
EGR (BLU/RED) W i r e side of

female terminals
EGR (BLU/RED) P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
H E 3l4l/l6 |7 EGR PG1

10 12 18
1 3 l l 4 l l 5 | l 6 17
e e
23 25
26 28Z9|30]31 [32333435
36|/M/l40l41 [42 43 44
Terminal side of female terminals T e r m i n a l side of male t e r m i n a l s
32. Start the engine, and let it idle. Then connect the
Y E S A G o to step 29. battery negative terminal to EGR valve 6P
connector terminal No. 6 w i t h a jumper wire.
NOARepair open in the wire between the PCM (B2)
and the EGR valve, then go to step 44. Does the engine stall or run roughly?
29. Check for continuity between EGR valve 6P Y E S A G o to step 5 1 .

1 2 3
4 6
/
PG1 (BLK)
NOARepair open in the wire between the EGR

valve and G102 (see page 22-16), then go to step
44.
(cont'd)
11-389
EGR System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)'
34. Remove the EGR valve (see page 11-392). 43. Replace the EGR valve (see page 11-392).
35. Clean the intake manifold EGR port w i t h throttle 44. Reconnect all connectors.
plate cleaner. Also, clean the passage inside the
EGR valve w i t h throttle plate cleaner. 45. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
36. Install the EGR valve (see page 11-392). 46. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
37. Reconnect all connectors. 47. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).
38. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). 48. Do the EGR TEST in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS.
4 1 . Do the EGR TEST In the INSPECTION MENU w i t h
the HDS. YESACheck for poor connections or loose
terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM, then go to
Is the result OK? step 1.
N O A G o to step 42. 50. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2413 In the

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated In step 49,
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting, m
N O A | f the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor

Indicates EXECUTING, keep Idling until a result
comes on. If the screen Indicates OUT OF
11-390
5 1 . Reconnect all connectors.


the HDS.

terminals at the EGR valve and the PCM. If the PCM



known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step ,
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
11-391
EGR S f stem
EGR Waive Replacement
1. Remove the EGR valve 6P connector (A).
2. Remove the bolts (B).
3. Remove the EGR valve (C).

w i t h a new gasket (D).
11-392
PCV System
PCV VALVE POWERTRAIN CONTROL M O D U L E (PCM)

I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 11 - 3 9 6 Update, p a g e 11 - 2 3 6
R e p l a c e m e n t page 11-396 S u b s t i t u t i o n , p a g e 11-7
11-393
PCV S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P2279: Intake A i r System Leak Detected 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general Does the screen indicate FAILED?
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
Are DTC P2279 and DTC P0101 or P0106 comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
indicated at the same time? CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
Y E S A G o to the indicated D T C s t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . • 7, Do the PCS ON/OFF in the INSPECTION MENU w i t h

the HDS.
8. Listen for a clicking sound at the EVAP canister
3. Check for vacuum leaks at these parts: purge valve.
• PCV valve Does the valve click?

• PCV hose
• Purge (PCS) line Y E S A G o to step 9.
• Throttle body
• Intake manifold NOAReplace the EVAP canister purge valve
9. Do the PCV valve test (see page 11-396).
YESARepair or replace the damaged part(s), then
go to step 14. Is the test OK?
N O A G o to step 4. Y E S A G o t o step 10.
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at NOAReplace the PCV valve (see page 11-396), then
3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator go to step 14.
fan comes o n , then let it idle for 1 minute.

N O A | f the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 6.

If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
4 and recheck.
11-394
10. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-370). 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2279 in the
11. Check for cracks or other damage at the air cleaner.
Is the air cleaner OK?
Y E S A G o to step 12. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, m
NOAReplace the air cleaner (see page 11-370),
then go to step 4. N O A j f the screen indicates FAILED, g o t o step 1
12. Remove the air cleaner element. COMPLETED, go to step 16.
13. Check for damage to the air cleaner element.
Is the air cleaner element OK?
YESACheck the camshaft t i m i n g (see page 6-10),

then go to step 14.
NOAReplace the air cleaner element (see page

11-371), then g o t o step 14.

fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
YESACheck for vacuum leaks at the PCV valve, the

PCV hose, the purge (PCS) line, the throttle body,
the brake booster hose, and the intake manifold,
then g o t o step 1.
11-395
PCV S f stem
PCV Valve Inspection PCV Valve Replacement

1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (B), and 1. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-2).
connections for leaks or restrictions.
2. Disconnect the PCV hose (A), then unscrew the PCV
valve (B), and remove it.
2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound f r o m the

PCV valve w h e n the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) w i t h your
fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the hose for
cracks or damage. If the hose is OK, replace the 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
PCV valve and recheck. w i t h a new washer (C).
11-396
EVAP System
P O W E R T R A I N C O N T R O L M O D U L E (PCM)
CAP
11-397
EVAP S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0443: EVAP Canister Purge Valve 7. Start the engine, and let it idle.
Circuit Malfunction
Is there vacuum?
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A Y E S A G o to step 8.
or equivalent commercially available
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connector.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 10. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge
valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
3,000 r p m without load (in P or N) until the radiator
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
fan comes on, then let it idle. 2P C O N N E C T O R

PCS (YEL/BLU)

at the EVAP canister purge valve and the PCM. • W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and allow the

engine to cool below 113 °F (45 °C). Is there continuity?
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the EVAP Y E S A G o t o step 11.

canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to N O A G o to step 23.
the hose.
11-398
1 1 . J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister purge
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge 2P C O N N E C T O R

IG1 (BLK/ORN)
PCS (YEL/BLU)

Is there continuity ? N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the EVAP

canister purge valve and the No. 3 ALTERNATOR
YESARepair short in the wire between the EVAP (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then
canister purge valve and the PCM (B3), then go to go to step 24.
step 24.
15. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
(cont'd)
11-399
EVAP System

2 1 . Check for continuity between PCM connector 23. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
terminal B3 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P 11-426).
1 2
Wire side of PCS (YEL/BLU)
female terminals
PCS (YEL/BLU) P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P) 28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

3l4 \X\6\7 3Zf
10 12 18
J3114|15|16 17
2334 25 YESACheck for poor connections or loose

26 29l30[31 [32 33 35 terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
36 40 41 4243)441 PCM, then g o t o step 1.
Y E S A G o to step 22. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the EVAP Does the screen indicate PASSED?
canister purge valve and the PCM (B3), then go to
step 24. YESATroubleshooting is complete. If any other
22. A t the purge valve side, measure the resistance go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
between EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector
terminals No. 1 and No. 2. N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
2P C O N N E C T O R screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.
1 2
Is there about 25 Q at room temperature?
11-400
30. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Circuit Range/
Performance Problem
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- NOTE:
good PCM (see page 11-7). • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
32. Start the engine, and let it idle. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• If DTC P2422 is stored at the same t i m e as DTC P0451,
33. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. troubleshoot DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC
P0451.
terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
good PCM (see page 1 1 - 7 ) , then g o t o step 32. If the 3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
PCM was substituted, g o t o step 1.
34. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0443 in the Does the screen indicate FAILED?
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
I sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT

connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister 6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-425).
purge valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
I
go to step 32. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.
10. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.

terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
(cont'd)
11-401
EVAP S f stem
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0451 in the DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a 4. Remove the fuel fill cap.
result comes on.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the

HDS.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (-2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg), or

0.3 V or less indicated?
7. Install the fuel fill cap.


poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
11-402
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector. 16. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 17. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
13. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the 18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 1 to
HDS. body ground with a j u m p e r wire.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (~2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg) or FTP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR

4.90 V indicated?
1 3
VCC6 (BLU)
14. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P J U M P E R WIRE

FTP S E N S O R 3 P CONNECTOR

VCC6 (BLU)
/I 4 |5 |6 |7 8 I L V(RED)
9
CC6
Wire side of female terminals 10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19

•
20 21 23 24 25
•
•
26 27 28 29|/|31 \ / 33 34 35
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 431441
Is there about 5 V?

(A19) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
11-403
EVAP System
#
DTC Troubleshooting |cont d|
20. T u r n t h e ignition s w i t c h t o LOCK (0). 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2 1 . J u m p the SCS l i n e w i t h t h e HDS. 25. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-425).
22. D i s c o n n e c t PCM connector A (44P). 26. Reconnect all connectors.
23. C h e c k for continuity between FTP sensor 3P 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

FTP (LT GRN)
to step 1.
Wire side of female terminals N O A G o to step 3 1 .
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the

Is there continuity? DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
YESARepair short in the wire between the PCM Does the screen indicate PASSED?
(A26) and the FTP sensor, then go t o step 26.
N O A G o to step 32. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30,

connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
11-404
32. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage
33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
good PCM (see page 11-7). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
34. Start the engine, and let it idle. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is DTC P0452 indicated? 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
YESACheck for poor connections or loose 4. Remove the fuel fill cap.
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM 5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
substituted, go to step 1. 6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the or more indicated?
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the 7. Install the fuel fill cap.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 35, 8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 3,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the radiator
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
34. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the Does the screen indicate FAILED?
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
until a result comes on. Y E S A G o to step 10.
N O A l f the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
(cont'd)
11-405
EVAP System
12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No. 2 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
and No. 3 w i t h a jumper w i r e .
FTP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 3 to

FTP SG6
(LT G R N ) (BLK) FTP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
JUMPER WIRE

SG6
(BLK)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS. W i r e side of female terminals
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V

or more indicated? 20. Check for continuity between PCM connector
SG6
(BLK)
15. Measure the voltage between FTP sensor 3P > | 4 I 5 I6 I7 8 I9h
•
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 3. 10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
•
20 21
/ 23
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33
24 25
34 35
i
FTP S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R 38|39|40|/|42 43|44|
136137
1 2 3
VCC6 SG6 Terminal side of female terminals
(BLU) (BLK)
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the PCM (A9)
and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
Is there about 5 V?
11-406
22. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. 27. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-425).
23. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 28. Reconnect all connectors.
24. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No. 2 to 29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
F T P S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
3 1 . Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333).

1 2 3
FTP
(LT G R N )
JUMPER WIRE
to step 1.
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals N O A G o to step 33.

25. Check for continuity between PCM connector DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.

indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.

(A26) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
(cont'd)
11-407
EVAP System
DTC Troubleshooting {cont'd)
34. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0455: EVAP System Very Large Leak
Detected
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- DTC P04§8: EVAP System Very Small Leak
good PCM (see page 11-7). Detected
36. Start the engine, and let it idle. I NOTICE I

The fuel system is designed to allow specified
37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. m a x i m u m vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate f r o m the vacuum and pressure tests as
Is DTC P0453 indicated? indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum w o u l d damage the EVAP components or
YESACheck for poor connections or loose cause eventual fuel tank failure.
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM Special Tools Required
(see page 11-7), then go to step 36. If the PCM was Vacuum Pump/Gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
substituted, go to step 1. or equivalent, commercially available
N O A G o to step 38. NOTE:

° Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
38. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the any on-board snapshot, and review the general
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create
Does the screen indicate PASSED? greater pressure/vacuum. The o p t i m u m condition for
testing is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible,
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel to
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank), just before
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other starting these procedures.
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN
TO CLICK). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight,
N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor then it clicks ?
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step tightened?
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling Y E S A G o to step 2.
NOAReplace or tighten the cap, then go to step 29.
11 -408
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) .
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap. 7. Check f o r a poor connection or damage at the fuel
tank vapor recirculation tube..
A B
Is the tube OK?
NOA
• Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube,
then go to step 29.
• If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see page
1 1 - 3 6 5 ) , then go t o step 29. -
8. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor control valve hose

(A) and fresh air hose (B) f r o m the EVAP canister
(C), and plug the EVAP canister port (D).
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the
fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YESAReplace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,

then go to step 29.
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION

Is the result OK ?

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM. •
N O A G o to step 6 .
(cont'd)
11-409
EVAP System
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (engine side) (A) f r o m 15. Reconnect the vacuum hose (engine side) to the
the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine EVAP canister purge valve.
c o m p a r t m e n t and connect a vacuum pump/gauge,
0—30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as s h o w n . 16. Disconnect the vacuum hose (EVAP canister side)
(A) f r o m the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the
engine compartment, and connect a vacuum
pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as
shown.

17. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads
11. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU 1.90 V ( - 0 . 5 9 in.Hg, - 1 5 . 1 mmHg).
with the HDS.
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the v a c u u m . If you
12. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
1.90 V (—0.59 in.Hg, —15.1 mmHg).
18. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you 1 minute with the HDS.
do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V
13. Select EVAP PCS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU (0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
with the HDS, and disconnect the vacuum p u m p /
gauge. Y E S A G o to step 19.
14. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for NOAReplace the EVAP canister purge valve
1 minute w i t h the HDS. (see page 11 -426), then go to step 15.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V (0.1 in.

Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
11-410
19. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge 21. Reconnect the vacuum hose (engine side) to the
line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP EVAP canister purge valve.
canister purge valve, or a leaking EVAP canister.
22. Disconnect the vacuum hose (EVAP canister side)
Is the line OK? (A) f r o m the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the
engine compartment, and connect a vacuum
YESAReplace these parts, then go to step 28. pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as
• FTP sensor O-ring shown.
• EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring
8
EVAP canister
NOAReconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

line, then go to step 28.
20. Reconnect the fresh air hose (A) f r o m the EVAP

canister (B).
B
B
23. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

w i t h the HDS.
24. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads

1.90 V ( - 0 . 5 9 in.Hg, - 1 5 . 1 mmHg).
NOTE; Be careful not to exceed the vacuum. If you

do, the FTP sensor can be damaged.
25. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for

A" 1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V

(0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
YESAReplace the EVAP canister vent shut valve

(cont'd)
11-411
EVAP S f stem
26. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU DTC P0457: EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel
^ w i t h the HDS. Fill Cap Loose or Missing
27. Check these parts for looseness or damage. NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data
• Fuel fill pipe troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• Fuel vapor return pipe 1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say TIGHTEN
TO CLICK), it should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight,
Are the parts OK? then it clicks.
YESACheck the fuel tank unit base gasket, Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
(see page 11-361), and check the fuel tank, then go tightened?
to step 28.
N O A R e p a i r or replace the damaged parts, then go Y E S A G o to step 2.
to step 28.
NOAReplace or tighten the cap, then go to step 19.
28. Reconnect all hoses and connectors.
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
A B

Is the result OK?
N O A C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve,
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the
fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YESAReplace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,

then go to step 19.
11-412
5. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST In the INSPECTION 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
is the result OK? * (see page 11-425).
YES A intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
at the FTP sensor, or the EVAP canister vent shut 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
valve, and the PCM. •
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). MENU with the HDS.
7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve f r o m the Is the result OK?
EVAP canister (see page 11-425).
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
shut valve. NOACheck for poor connections or loose terminals
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
10. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU 18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve.
with the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
operation. 20. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS.
A

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YESATroubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •
NOACheck for poor connections or loose terminals

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Does the valve operate?
YESACheck the routing of the EVAP canister vent

tube, then go to step 18.
11-413
EVAP S f stem

DTC P0496: EVAP System High Purge Flow DTC P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow
Detected Detected
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data Special Tools Required
and any on-board snapshot, and review the general •Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0—4 in.Hg, 07JAZ-001000B
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
MENU w i t h the HDS. 1. Check the fuel fill cap installation (The cap label
must say TIGHTEN TO CLICK. The cap should
Is the result OK? tighten 1/4 turn after it is t i g h t ) .
YESAlntermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is the fuel fill cap installed and properly
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals tightened?
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM.B Y E S A G o t o step 2.
N O A G o to step 4. N O A P r o p e r l y install the fuel fill cap, then go to

step 23.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(O).
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-426). 3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 4. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION
Is the result OK?
9. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
MENU w i t h the HDS. at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM. •
Is the result OK?
YESATroubleshooting is complete. H
5. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge
N O A C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals line between the intake manifold and the EVAP
at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, canister purge valve.
then go to step 1. Is the line OK?
NOAReconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

line, then go to step 23.
11-414
6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the EVAP 9. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the EVAP canister
canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment, purge valve.
and connect a T-fitting (C) f r o m the v a c u u m gauge
and the vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the 10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) f r o m the purge
vacuum hose as shown. line (at the EVAP canister side), and connect a
T-fitting (B) f r o m the vacuum gauge and the
07JAZ-001000B vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the hose as
shown.
7. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

w i t h the HDS.
8. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of

vacuum to the hose.
07JAZ-001000B
Does it hold vacuum?
YESAReplace the EVAP canister purge valve, then 11. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
go to step 22. w i t h the HDS.
N O A G o to step 9. 12. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of

vacuum to the hose.
Does it hold vacuum?
YESACheck for a restricted EVAP canister purge

line between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
EVAP canister, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
11-415
EVAP S f stem
13. Remove the FTP sensor w i t h its connector 17. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
connected (see page 11-425). HDS.
14. Connect a T-fitting (A) f r o m the vacuum p u m p / Is the difference more than 1.1 kPa (0.31 in.Hg,
gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, and the vacuum p u m p to the 8 mmHg) before and after applying vacuum?
FTP sensor (B) as s h o w n .
NOAReplace the FTP sensor (see page 11-425),

then go to step 22.
18. Reconnect the vacuum hoses to the EVAP canister

purge line (EVAP canister side), and reinstall the
FTP sensor.
19. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) f r o m

the EVAP canister purge valve (B), and connect a
T-fitting (C) f r o m the vacuum gauge and the
vacuum pump/gauge, 0—30 in.Hg, to the hose as
shown.
15. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the

16. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of

v a c u u m to the hose.

w i t h the HDS.
11-416
21. Slowly apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
vacuum to the hose. Circuit Low Voltage
Does the hose hold vacuum? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YESACheck for blockage at the EVAP canister port, troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
then go to step 22.
NOAReplace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-425), then go to step 22. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
22. Reconnect all hoses. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
23. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DTC P0498 indicated?
24. Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS. Y E S A G o to step 6.
25. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-333). N O A G o to step 4.
26. Do the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION 4. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
MENU with the HDS. w i t h the HDS.
Is the result OK? 5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YESATroubleshooting is complete. • Is DTC P0498 indicated?
N O A C h e c k for poor connections or loose terminals Y E S A G o t o step 6.

the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM, N O A l n t e r m i t t e n t failure, the system is OK at this
then go to step 1. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
PCM.B
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P

connector.
(cont'd)
11-417
EVAP S f stem
9. Measure the voltage between EVAP canister vent 12. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
shut valve 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground. 13. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE

2P CONNECTOR . terminal A10 and body ground.
+B (PUR) VSV
(LT G R N ) > l 4 I5 I6 I 7 8 I9 |
•
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
20 21
/
26 27 28 2 9 | / 1 3 1 | / 33
23 24 25
34 35
•
136137 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2
43(44-1

Terminal side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
N O A R e p a i r open in the w i r e between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the PGM-FI subrelay, YESARepair short in the wire between the EVAP
then go to step 18. canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A10), then go
to step 18.
11. At valve side, measure the resistance between
EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P connector 15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
terminals No. 1 and No. 2. connector terminal No. 1 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
2P C O N N E C T O R EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
1 2
V S V (LT G R N )
JUMPER WIRE

Is there about 25— 30 Q at room temperature?
11-418
16. Check for continuity between PCM connector 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

w i t h the HDS.

terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
Is there continuity? N O A G o to step 24.
Y E S A G o to step 24. 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 in the
N O A R e p a i r open in the wire between the EVAP
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A10), then go Does the screen indicate PASSED?
to step 18.
17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,
(see page 11-425). g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
18. Reconnect all connectors. N O A | f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
vent shut valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
22.
(cont'd)
11-419
EVAP System
25. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0499: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
27. Select EVAP CVS ON In the INSPECTION MENU
w i t h the HDS. 1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). •
28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0498 indicated? 3. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

w i t h the HDS.
terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step Is DTC P0499 indicated?
:
27. If the PCM, was substituted, go to step 1. '
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 In the t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
PCM.B
Y E S A l f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the good PCM (see page 11-7).
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated In step 28, 6. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • w i t h the HDS.
N O A | f the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor 7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was Is DTC P0499 indicated?
11-7), then go to step 27. If the PCM was substituted, YESACheck for poor connections or loose
go to step 1. If the screen Indicates NOT terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
COMPLETED, go to step 27. the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
11-420
Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0499 in the DTC P1454: FTP Sensor Circuit Range/
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Performance Problem
Does the screen indicate PASSED? DTC P2422: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Stuck Closed Malfunction
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other and any on-board snapshot, and review the general
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7, troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT 4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute.
HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (-0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
6. Install the fuel fill cap.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in P on



sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
PCM. Also check for a blockage in the vent hoses
and the drain joint. If the screen indicates NOT
(cont'd)
11-421
EVAP S f stem

10. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 17. Disconnect the air tube (A) f r o m the FTP sensor (B).
B
12. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve f r o m the

EVAP canister (see page 11-425).
13. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent

shut valve.

w i t h the HDS.
16. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)

operation. 18. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
A
Is it between — 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (— 0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YESACheck for a blockage in the FTP sensor air

tube or vent, then go to step 23.
20. Remove the FTP sensor (A) f r o m the EVAP canister

w i t h its connector connected (see page 11-425).
YESACheck for a blockage in the EVAP canister,

the EVAP canister filter, vent hoses, and drain joint,
then install the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and
go to step 23.
NOAReplace the EVAP canister vent shut valve

11 -422
21. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the
HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (-0.2 and YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
YES—Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP
canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
step 23. connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
NO—Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-425), then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
then go to step 23. COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
26. Start the engine, and let it idle w i t h o u t load (in P or

Is DTC P1454 and/or P2422 indicated?

terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent
shut valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO —Go to step 28.
11-423
EVAP S f stem
EVAP Canister Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift. 4. Remove the hoses (A), the FTP sensor connector
(B), the EVAP canister vent shut valve connector (C)
2. Remove the cover (A). and the bolts (D).
B C
3. Remove the EVAP canister guard pipe (A).
5. Remove the EVAP canister.
11-424
FTP Sensor Replacement E¥AP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Replacement
2. Remove the cover (see step 1 on page 11-424). 1. Remove the EVAP canister (see page 11-424).
3. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (A). 2. Remove the cap (A).
A C B
4. Disconnect the air hose (B), and then remove the

FTP sensor (C).

w i t h a new O-ring (D) and retainer (E).
d. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve (B).

with new O-rings (C) and new cap.
NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring w i t h oil.
11-425
EVAP System
EVAP Canister Purge Valve EVAP Canister Filter Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-370). 2. Disconnect the hoses (A).
2. Disconnect the hoses (A) and the EVAP canister

purge valve 2P connector (B).
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)

3. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve (C).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Remove the EVAP canister filter (B).
11-426
IMA S f stem
IMA Sf stem
Special Tools 12-2
Service Precautions 12-3
General Troubleshooting Information 12-5
DTC Troubleshooting Index 12-10
System Description 12-14
IMA System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting ......... 12-176
Charging System Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting 12-179
IPU Lid Removal/Installation 12-180
BCM Module Update ... 12-181
BCM Module Removal/Installation 12-182
DC-DC Converter Removal/Installation 12-182
PCU Removal/Installation 12-183
PCU Disassembly/Reassembly 12-185
MCM Update 12-185
MCM Replacement 12-186
Battery Module Removal/Installation 12-187
IPU Module Fan Replacement 12-188
IPU Module Air Duct Removal/Installation ................ 12-188
IPU Case Removal/Installation 12-189
Motor Power Cable Removal/Installation .................. 12-189
IMA Motor Rotor Removal/Installation 12-192
Motor Housing Removal/Installation 12-195
Motor Housing Disassembly/Reassembly 12-196
Motor Rotor Position Sensor
Removal/Installation ... 12-196
IMA System
Special Tools
® 07YAC-PHM010B Rotor Puller* 1
© 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set " 1
* : This tool is available for loan or purchase f r o m A H M Special Tools
© ©
12-2
Service Precautions
IMA System
• The IMA (integrated motor assisted) system uses If the rotor is installed by hand, it may suddenly be
high voltage (158 V) circuits. Be sure to shut off the pulled toward the stator with great force causing
electrical circuits and isolate the IMA system and serious hand or finger injury. Always use the
related parts before servicing the IMA system. special tool to remove or install a rotor assembly.
• The high voltage cables and their covers are

identified by orange coloring. The caution labels are • Keep the rotor assembly away f r o m magnetically
attached to high voltage and other related parts sensitive devices.
(see page 1-7). Be careful not to touch these cables
and parts w i t h o u t adequate protective gear. • After disconnecting the high voitage terminals,
The front floor under-cover protecting the high busbars, etc., insulate the parts w i t h insulated tape.
voltage cables is marked SS-
• As a safety w a r n i n g , attach a sign saying, WORKING
• If the 12 V battery has been discharged, or its cable ON HIGH VOLTAGE PARTS. DO NOT TOUCH! to the
has been disconnected, or the M C M (motor control steering wheel.
module) has been reset, the IMA battery level gauge
(BAT) will not display the state of charge when the Disconnecting the motor power cable connector from
engine is started. Start the engine, and hold it the motor stator
between 3,500 r p m and 4,000 rpm without load (in P
or N) until the level gauge (BAT) displays at least Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Turn the battery
three segments. module switch OFF.
• Observe the following instructions w h e n inspecting Slide the protector (A) in the direction of the arrow.
or servicing the IMA system. Push the tab (B), then raise the lever (C). Remove the
- When the IMA system indicator is o n , do the IMA motor power cable (D) f r o m the motor stator.
system troubleshooting first (see page 12-5).
- Wear insulated gloves whenever you inspect or NOTE:
service the IMA system. Be sure t o check the gloves ° If the motor power cable connector is dirty, clean it.
for pin holes, tears, or other damage. • Cover the disconnected connector (E) w i t h a plastic
- Turn the battery module switch OFF, and secure bag (F), and wrap the motor power cable terminals
the switch in the OFF position w i t h the locking with tape (G).
cover before servicing the IMA system (see Turning • If the motor power cable is wet, wait until it is dry.
off power to the high voltage circuit).
- Wait for 5 or more minutes after turning off the
battery module switch, then disconnect the
negative cable f r o m the 12 V battery (it takes about
5 minutes for the PDU capacitor to discharge).
- Before disconnecting the high voltage cable
terminals, make sure that the voltage between the
terminals is below 30 V when measured w i t h a
voltmeter.
• When servicing the parts without the insulating

sheath, be sure to use the insulated tools to prevent
short circuiting.
• The rotor assembly contains very strong magnets

and should be handled w i t h special care. People w i t h
pacemakers or other magnetically sensitive medical
devices should not handle the rotor assembly.
• Use the special tool to remove or install the rotor

assembly.
(cont'd)
12-
5MA S f stem
Service Precautions (cont'd!
Turning Off and On Power to the High 5. Wait at least 5 minutes to allow the PDU capacitors
Voltage Circuit to discharge.
The f o l l o w i n g procedure should be performed prior to 6. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
w o r k i n g on or near any high voltage components.
Follow the procedure exactly. Otherwise, you may be 7. Measure the voltage at the battery module
injured or may damage equipment. terminals (A). There should be 30 V or less. If more
than 30 V is present, there is a problem in the
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then remove circuit; do the DTC troubleshooting first.
the ignition key.
2. Remove the rear seat-back (see page 20-118).
3. Remove the battery module switch lid (A) f r o m the

battery module.
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. After service or repairs are completed:
• Make sure all the high voltage circuits are

connected properly.
• Install the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
9. Before the battery module switch is turned O N ,

make sure all the high voltage circuits are
connected properly. Then push the button (A), and
turn the battery module switch ON.
4. Turn the battery module switch (A) OFF, then check

that the bolt (B) is showing. Q7\
10. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
12-4
General Troubleshooting information
Intermittent Failures 2. If the IMA system indicator stays on, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0), then connect the HDS
The term intermittent failure means a system may have to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under
had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the IMA system the driver's side of the dashboard.
indicator on the dash does not come on, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at all connectors related
to the circuit you are troubleshooting. If the IMA system
indicator was on but then went off, the original problem
may have been intermittent.
Opens and Shorts
Open and Short are c o m m o n electrical terms. A n open

is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an
accidental connection of a wire to ground or to another
wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
something w o n ' t work at all. With complex electronics
such as the BCM module and the M C M , this can mean
something works, but not the w a y it's supposed to.
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic
System) to Check for DTCs 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle,
the BCM module, and the M C M . If it doesn't,
If the IMA system indicator has come on troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
1. Start the engine, and check the IMA system 5. Select IMA SYSTEM on the HDS.
indicator (A).
6. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data. Refer to the DTC
troubleshooting, and begin the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure.
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's

manual that came w i t h the HDS.
If you can't duplicate the DTC

Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the
BCM module and the M C M , and try to duplicate the
DTC. If the problem is intermittent and you can't
duplicate the code, do not continue through the
A procedure. To do so will only result in confusion and,
possibly, a needlessly replaced BCM module and M C M .
(cont'd)
12-5
IMA S f stem
DTC Clear Motor Rotor Position Calibration
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Do not start the Do the motor rotor position calibration whenever you
engine. do any of these actions:
2. Use the HDS to clear the DTC. • The M C M is replaced.

• The motor rotor position sensor is replaced or
NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's removed during service.
manual that came w i t h the HDS. • The IMA motor is replaced.
• The motor stator is replaced.
How to End a Troubleshooting Session • The engine assembly is replaced.
(required after any troubleshooting) • The transmission is replaced.
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
3. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC.

3,500 rpm and 4,000 r p m without load (in P or N)
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle,

4. Select IMA SYSTEM on the HDS.
5. Select the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION

CALIBRATION in the ADJUSTMENT MENU of the
HDS.
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and

12-6
Troubleshooting Circuits at the BCM Module 3. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182), then
and the MCM Connectors connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking
patch cords (B), and connect the cords t o a digital
Special Tools Required multimeter.
• Digital multimeter KS-AHM-32-003 (1) or a
A
commercially available digital multimeter
• Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (2)
If DTC troubleshooting requires voltage or resistance

checks at the BCM module and the M C M connectors,
remove the BCM module and disconnect the M C M
connectors before doing the checks.
2. Connect the backprobe adapters (A) to the stacking

patch cords (B), and connect the cords to a digital
multimeter.
(cont'd)
12-7
IMA S f stem
Substituting the MCM Substituting the BCM Module

• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester • Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
• Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation • Honda Interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
w i t h the latest HDS software version w i t h the latest HDS software version
• HDS pocket tester • HDS pocket tester
• GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS - GNA600 and an IN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
software version. software version.
A n y one of the above updating tools can be used. A n y one of the above updating tools can be used.
Use this procedure w h e n y o u have to substitute a Use this procedure w h e n y o u have to substitute a
known-good M C M during a troubleshooting procedure. known-good BCM module during a troubleshooting
procedure.
1. Remove the M C M (see page 12-186).
2. Install a known-good M C M .
2. Install a known-good BCM module.
3. Do the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION CALIBRATION In
the ADJUSTMENT MENU w i t h the HDS. NOTE: If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays
no segments, start the engine, and hold It between
NOTE: If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N)
no segments, start the engine, and hold It between until the BAT displays at least three segments.
3,500 r p m and 4,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (In P or N)
12-8
OBD Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of

each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the repair was successfully finished. The
results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed as:
• PASSED: The on-board diagnosis Is successfully

finished.
• 'FAILED: The on-board diagnosis has finished but
failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on-board diagnosis was
running, but It Is out of the enable conditions of the
DTC.
IMA System

DTC Detection Item IMA Page .
(IMA S y s t e m System
Indicator* ) 1
Indicator
P0562 (15) 2
Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module System Low Voltage ON (see page 12-40)
P0562 (94)* 2
Motor Control Module (MCM) System Low Voltage ON (see page 12-42)
P0602 (91T 2
Motor Control Module (MCM) Programming Error ON (see page 12-45) .
P0602 ( 9 2 )42
Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module Programming Error ON (see page 12-45)
P0603 (60) Motor Control Module (MCM) Internal Circuit Keep Alive . ON (see page 12-46)
M e m o r y (KAM) Error
P0607 (82) Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module Performance ON (see page 12-47)
Problem
P0A1F(112) F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module- ON (see page 12-48)
Motor Control Module (MCM))
P0A27 (46) High Voltage Contactor/Bypass Contactor Stays Activated ON (see page 12-50)
P0A3C (39) Motor Control Module (MCM) Overheating ON (see page 12-53)
P0A3F (89) Motor Rotor Position Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-54)
P0A5E (24) U Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 12-58)
P0A5F (25) U Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 12-59)
P0A61 (26) V Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 12-60)
P0A62 (27) V Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 12-61)
P0A64 (28) W Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 12-62)
P0A65 (29) W Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 12-63)
P0A78 (32) Motor Control Module (MCM) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-64)
P0A7E (72) Battery Module Overheating ON (see page 12-65)
P0A7F (78) Battery Module Deterioration ON (see page 12-65)
P0A94 (48) DC-DC Converter Output Low Voltage OFF (see page 12-66)
P0A9D (49) Battery Module Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 12-68)
P0A9E (50) Battery Module Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 12-70)
P0AA6 (59) High Voltage Circuit Isolation Problem ON (see page 12-73)
P0AA7 (76) Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module Internal Circuit ON (see page 12-80)
Malfunction
P0AC0 (65) Battery Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-81)
P0AC7 (51) Battery Module Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 12-83)
P0AC8 (52) Battery Module Temperature Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 12-85)
POACC (53) Battery Module Temperature Sensor 3 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 12-88)
POACD (54) Battery Module Temperature Sensor 3 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 12-90)
P0AE1 (62) Bypass Contactor Malfunction ON (see page 12-93)
POAEE (109) Motor Control Module (MCM) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-98)
POAEF (110) Motor Control Module (MCM) Internal Temperature Sensor ON (see page 12-99)
Circuit Low Voltage
P0AF0(111) Motor Control Module (MCM) Internal Temperature Sensor ON (see page 12-100)
P1435 (58) 3
Charge/Discharge Balance Malfunction OFF (see page 12-100)
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking IMA system indicator w h e n the SCS line is j u m p e d w i t h the HDS.
* 2: To determine the correct troubleshooting procedure for these DTCs, j u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS, and read the
flash code.
* 3: '06-08 models
12-10
DTC Detection Item IMA Page
(IMA System System
1
Indicator* ) Indicator
P1437 (41) Motor Control Module (MCM) Circuit Shorted ON (see page 12-101)
P1440 (57) Motor Control Module (MCM) Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-103)
P1446 (74) Battery Module Individual Voltage Input Deviation ON (see page 12-108)
P1448 (63) Intelligent Power Unit (IPU) Module Fan Problem ON (see page 12-110)
P1570 (66) Battery Module Individual Voltage Problem ON (see page 12-113)
P1574(68) Battery Module Temperature Signal Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-115)
P1575(12) Motor Control Module (MCM) Voltage Malfunction ON (see page 12-116)
P1585 (30) Motor Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-121)
P1586 (23) Battery Current Sensor Signal Malfunction ON (see page 12-122)
P15A4 (81) A/C Compressor Driver Relay Stays Activated ON (see page 12-125)
P15A5 (85) Motor Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-127)
P15A6 (86) U Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-130)
P15A7 (87) V Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-131)
P15A8 (88) W Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-132)
P15AA (93) Motor Rotor Position Not Learned ON (see page 12-133)
P1629 (79) Battery Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-134)
P1673 (22) Motor Control Module (MCM) Relay Stays Activated ON (see page 12-136)
P16C3 (31) DC-DC Converter Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 12-138)
U0028(107)* F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Motor Control Module (MCM)))
2
U0028(108) F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Battery Condition Monitor
s2
(BCM) Module))
U0037 (98)* 2
IMA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Motor Control Module ON (see page 12-142)
(MCM)))
U0037 (99)* 2
IMA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF (Battery Condition Monitor ON (see page 12-142)
(BCM) Module))
uoioono2r F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (CVT
2
System)-Motor Control Module (MCM))
U0100O03)* F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (CVT
2
System)-Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module)
U0110(101) F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module- ON (see page 12-149)
U0111 (100) F-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module- OFF (see page 12-154)
U0155(106) F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge Control Module-Battery Condition ON (see page 12-156)
Monitor (BCM) Module)
U1204 (55)* 2
IMA-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)- ON (see page 12-156)
Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module)
U1204 (95)* 2
IMA-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)- ON (see page 12-159)
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking IMA system indicator w h e n the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
* 2: To determine the correct troubleshooting procedure for these DTCs, j u m p the SCS line with the HDS, and read the
flash code.
(cont'd)
12-11
IMA System
DTC Troubleshooting index (cont'd)
DTC Detection Item IMA Page
(IMA S y s t e m System
1
indicator* ) Indicator
U1205 (75) I MA-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) ON (see page 12-161)
Module-Motor Control Module (MCM))
U1206 (64) I MA-CAN Malfunction (Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) ON (see page 12-166)
Module-Motor Control Module (MCM))
U1207 (80) IMA-CAN Malfunction (A/C Compressor Driver Battery ON (see page 12-168)
U1220 (34) DC-DC Converter Lost Communication W i t h Battery Condition ON (see page 12-170)
Monitor (BCM) Module
U1221 (35) Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module Lost ON (see page 12-172)
Communication w i t h DC-DC Converter
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking IMA system indicator w h e n the SCS line is j u m p e d w i t h the HDS.
12-12
W h e n the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) w i t h the HDS, If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m .
Symptom Diagnostic procedure

IMA system indicator stays on or never Troubleshoot the IMA system indicator circuit (see page 12-176).
comes on, no DTCs set
Charging system indicator stays on or Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit (see page 12-179).
never comes on, no DTCs set
HDS does not communicate w i t h the M C M , Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
the BCM module, or the vehicle
12-13
IMA System
BCM Module Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (40P)
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
1 WHT CANH (CAN Sends a n d receives W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal
HIGH)
2° PNK I G A 1 - 1 ( I G N I T I O N FOR Power source for BCM W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
ASSIST SYSTEM) m o d u l e control circuit W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e f o r a b o u t
10 s e c o n d s , t h e n a b o u t 0 V
3 PNK I G A 1 - 2 ( I G N I T I O N FOR Power source for BCM W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
ASSIST SYSTEM) m o d u l e control circuit W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e f o r a b o u t
10 s e c o n d s , t h e n a b o u t 0 V
4 WHT V B U ( V O L T A G E B A C K UP) Power source for BCM B a t t e r y v o l t a g e at all t i m e s
m o d u l e circuit
P o w e r s o u r c e f o r DTC
memory
5 BRN V C C I S O C (I. S T A T E OF Battery current sensor W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
CHARGE SENSOR power W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 0 V a f t e r 10 s e c o n d s
VOLTAGE)
6 BLK SGTB (BATTERY Battery m o d u l e Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
TEMPERATURE SENSOR (temperature sensor)
GROUND) ground
7 BLU S G I S O C (I. S T A T E OF Battery current sensor Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
CHARGE SENSOR ground
GROUND)
8' 1
BLK PG1 (POWER G R O U N D ) Ground for BCM module Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
9 BLK PG2 (POWER G R O U N D ) Ground for BCM module Less t h e n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
11 ORN IGHLD (IGNITION HOLD) Drives M C M relay 1 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h e d f r o m O N (II) t o OFF: 0—1.0 V
for several seconds, then battery voltage
12 LT G R N I G H L D 2 ( I G N I T I O N H O L D 2) Drives M C M relay 2 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h e d f r o m O N (II) t o OFF: a b o u t
0 V f o r several seconds
13 RED PRE (PRE C H A R G E Drives bypass contactor W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
CONTACTOR) momentarily
14 BLK CNT (CONTACTOR) Drives high voltage W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): m o r e t h a n 6.0 V
contactor
15 WHT T B A T T 3 (BATTERY 3 Battery m o d u l e TBATT3 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.5—4.5 V
TEMPERATURE) temperature signal 3 input (depending on battery m o d u l e temperature)
16 PUR ISOC ( + ) (I. S T A T E OF Battery current sensor W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V
CHARGE + S I D E ) signal input
17 PUR N F A N ( F A N SPEED) D e t e c t s IPU m o d u l e f a n IPU m o d u l e f a n OFF: a b o u t 0 o r 5 V
speed signal IPU m o d u l e f a n O N : p u l s e s
18 GRY S C I D B ( S E R I A L I N P U T FOR Detects p u l s i n g W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
DC-DC C O N V E R T E R ) c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal
19 GRN S C I B D (SERIAL O U T P U T Sends a n d receives W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
FOR DC-DC C O N V E R T E R ) c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal
* 1: '06-07 m o d e l s
12-14
BCM Module Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (40P)

number
20 WHT IMACANH (IMA CAN PCM, M C M , and A/C W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL compressor driver
HIGH) c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal
21 RED CANL (CAN S e n d s a n d receives W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
LOW)
1
22* BRN LG1 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) Ground for BCM module Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
23 BRN LG2 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) Ground for BCM module Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
28 GRY CNTPG (CONTACTOR Ground for high voltage Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
POWER G R O U N D ) contactor
29 YEL/BLK IG1 BCM module power W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h OFF: a b o u t 0 V
30 LT B L U FANCTL (FAN CONTROL) IPU m o d u l e f a n s p e e d IPU m o d u l e f a n OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
control signal output IPU m o d u l e f a n O N : d u t y c o n t r o l l e d
33 YEL TBATT1 (BATTERY 1 Battery m o d u l e TBATT1 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.5—4.5 V
TEMPERATURE) temperature siqnal 1 input (depending on battery module temperature)
34 GRY TBATT2 (BATTERY 2 Battery m o d u l e TBATT2 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 . 5 - 4 . 5 V
TEMPERATURE) temperature signal 2 input (depending on battery m o d u l e temperature)
36 LT G R N ISOC ( - ) (I. S T A T E OF Battery current sensor W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V
CHARGE - S I D E ) signal input
37 RED/WHT W E N (WRITE E N A B L E Write enable signal input W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
SIGNAL)
38 LT B L U S C S (SERVICE CHECK Detects s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l W i t h service check signal shorted using HDS: about
SIGNAL) 0V
W i t h s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5.0 V
40 RED IMACANL (IMA CAN PCM, M C M , and A/C W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): pulses
LOW) c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal
* 1 : '06-07 m o d e l s
(cont'd)
12-15
IMA System
BCM Module Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (14P)
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
VHB8 VHB10 VHB12 VHB4 VHB2 VHBO
7 8 9 11 12 13 14
VHB7 VHB9 VHB11 VHB6 VHB5 VHB3 VHB1

number
1 BLU/RED V H B 8 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 8 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 4/11 o f VHBO
BATTERY 8 VOLTAGE) terminal voltage input voltage (compared to VHB12 terminal)
2 YEL V H B 1 0 (HIGH V O L T A G E B a t t e r y m o d u l e N o . 10 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 2/11 o f VHBO
B A T T E R Y 10 V O L T A G E ) terminal voltage input voltage (compared to VHB12 terminal)
3 WHT V H B 1 2 (HIGH V O L T A G E B a t t e r y m o d u l e N o . 12
B A T T E R Y 12 V O L T A G E ) terminal voltage input
4 GRN/RED V H B 4 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 4 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 7/11 o f VHBO
5 BLK V H B 2 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 2 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 9/11 o f VHBO
6 RED VHBO (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 0 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : b e l o w 200 V
BATTERY 0 VOLTAGE) terminal voltage input (compared t o VHB12 terminal)
7 BLU/YEL V H B 7 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 7 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 5/11 o f VHBO
8 GRN/BLK V H B 9 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 9 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 3/11 o f VHBO
9 BLU V H B 1 1 (HIGH V O L T A G E B a t t e r y m o d u l e N o . 11 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 1/11 o f VHBO
B A T T E R Y 11 V O L T A G E ) terminal voltage input voltage (compared to VHB12 terminal)
11 PNK V H B 6 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 6 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 5/11 o f VHBO
BATTERY 6 VOLTAGE) terminal voltage input voltage (compared t o VHB12 terminal)
12 GRN/WHT V H B 5 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 5 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 6/11 o f VHBO
13 GRN V H B 3 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 3 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 8/11 o f VHBO
14 GRN/YEL V H B 1 (HIGH V O L T A G E Battery m o d u l e N o . 1 W i t h b a t t e r y m o d u l e s w i t c h O N : a b o u t 10/11 o f
BATTERY 1 VOLTAGE) terminal voltage input VHBO v o l t a g e ( c o m p a r e d t o V H B 1 2 t e r m i n a l )
12-16
MCM inputs and Outputs at the MCM Connector (20P)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
CANL LG2 S4 S3 S2 S1 R2 R1 LG1 CANL
11 19 20
14 17 18
IMA WEN VBU 1GA2-1 IGA2-2 CANH
CANH
/

number
1 RED IMACANL (IMA CAN PCM, BCM module, and A/C W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
LOW) c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal
2 BRN LG2 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) Ground for M C M Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
3 YEL S4 ( M O T O R ROTOR M o t o r rotor position sensor W i t h engine running: pulses
POSITION S E N S O R S 4 S4 s i g n a l
SIGNAL)
4 WHT S3 (MOTOR ROTOR M o t o r rotor position sensor W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
POSITION S E N S O R S 3 S3 s i g n a l
SIGNAL)
5 BLU S2 ( M O T O R ROTOR M o t o r rotor position sensor W i t h engine running: pulses
POSITION S E N S O R S2 S2 s i g n a l
SIGNAL)
6 GRN S I (MOTOR ROTOR M o t o r rotor position sensor W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
POSITION S E N S O R S 1 S1 signal
SIGNAL)
7 RED R2 ( M O T O R R O T O R Motor rotor position sensor W i t h engine running: pulses
P O S I T I O N S E N S O R R2 R2 s i g n a l
SIGNAL)
8 BRN R1 ( M O T O R R O T O R M o t o r rotor position sensor W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
P O S I T I O N S E N S O R R1 R1 s i g n a l
SIGNAL)
1
9* BRN LG1 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) Ground for M C M Less t h a n 0.1 V at all t i m e s
10 RED CANL (CAN S e n d s a n d receives W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
LOW)
11 WHT IMACANH (IMA CAN PCM, BCM module, and A/C W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
HIGH) c o m m u n i c a t i o n signal
* 1: '06-07 m o d e l s
(cont'd)
12-17
IMA System

MCM Inputs and Outputs at the M C M Connector (20P)
1 9
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 10
IMA
/
CANL LG2 S4 S3 S2 S1 R2 R1 LG1 CANL
14 17 18 19 20
c4 WEN VBU IGA2-1 IGA2-2 CANH
N O T E ; S t a n d a r d b a t t e r y v o l t a g e is a b o u t 12 V .
Terminal W i r e color Terminal n a m e Description Signal

number
14 RED/WHT W E N (WRITE E N A B L E Write enable signal input W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V
SIGNAL)
17 WHT V B U ( V O L T A G E B A C K UP) Power source for M C M B a t t e r y v o l t a g e at all t i m e s
circuit
P o w e r s o u r c e f o r DTC
memory
18 RED I G A 2 - 1 ( I G N I T I O N FOR Power source for BCM With ignition switch O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
ASSIST SYSTEM) m o d u l e control circuit With ignition switch OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e f o r s e v e r a l
seconds, then about 0 V
19* 1
RED I G A 2 - 2 ( I G N I T I O N FOR Power source for BCM With ignition switch O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
ASSIST SYSTEM) m o d u l e control circuit With ignition switch OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e f o r s e v e r a l
seconds, then about 0 V
20 WHT CANH (CAN Sends and receives With ignition switch O N (II): p u l s e s
HIGH)
* 1: '06-07 m o d e l s
12-18
IMA S f stem
The IMA (integrated motor assisted) system is a highly-efficient parallel hybrid drive system consisting of a main
power unit (gasoline-fueled engine) and the assist unit (electric IMA motor).
The engine Is an In-line 4-cylinder 8-valve power plant that has a displacement of 82 cu. In (1.339 liters). To reduce fuel
consumption, the engine is equipped w i t h i-DSI lean-burn control and a valve pause system that reduces engine
pumping loss and increases the regeneration of electric energy during deceleration.
The IMA motor, directly connected to the engine crankshaft, functions as a generator during deceleration, an engine
starter, and a motor to assist the engine that drives the wheels.
The IMA system contains the DC 158 V battery and AC synchronous motor, control system, and related accessories.
For safety, the intelligent power unit (IPU) is located behind the rear seat.
IMA MOTOR
IPU
MOTOR POWER
CABLE
(cont'd)
12-19
IMA System
Operating Condition
Vehicle stop mode (Idle stop)

The engine stops idling if the IMA battery has enough electricity left.
Start running mode (Engine and IMA motor)

The engine runs w i t h low lift cam. The IMA motor assists torque.
Slow acceleration mode (Engine only)
The engine runs w i t h low lift cam. The IMA motor does not assist.
Low speed cruise mode (IMA motor only)

The IMA motor runs the vehicle by itself if the IMA battery has enough electricity left. The intake and exhaust valves
pause to reduce valve spring compression and pumping loss.
Acceleration from low speed mode (Engine and IMA motor)
The engine runs with low lift cam. The IMA motor assists torque.
High acceleration from low speed mode (Engine and IMA motor)
The engine runs w i t h low lift cam. The IMA motor assists torque.
High speed cruise mode (Engine only)
The engine runs w i t h low lift cam. The IMA motor does not assist.
Deceleration mode (IMA battery charge)

The intake and exhaust valves pause to reduce engine braking force. The IMA motor prevents engine braking force by
charging the IMA battery.
Drive Start Slow Low speed High High s p e e d

Stop Acceleration Deceleration
pattern running acceleration cruise acceleration cruise
Valve Valve
Engine Idle s t o p L o w lift L o w lift L o w lift H i g h lift L o w lift
pause pause
IMA Motor Stop Assist Stop Motor only Assist Assist Stop Charge
ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST ASST
Assist
amount
(Gauge)
Mi ., 1 i i
nBK
||Jlf||jBg
i .
CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG CHRG
12-20
Engine start
The IMA system drives the IMA motor, starts the engine at normal start, and restarts the engine after auto-stop. The
IMA motor is directly connected to the engine crankshaft, so it is quieter than the 12 V starter. If a problem occurs with
the IMA system, for example, low battery module state of charge (SOC), low temperature, faulty IMA system, etc, the
PCM receives a signal f r o m the MCM and starts the engine w i t h the 12 V starter.
MCM
BATTERY
MODULE
Motor assisting function

During acceleration, energy is supplied f r o m the battery module to the IMA motor, and the motor generates a
m a x i m u m torque of 103 N-m (10.5 kgf-m, 76 Ibf-ft) to assist the engine. The PCM and MCM communicate to control the
assist to maintain the battery module SOC within a specified range. When the battery module SOC is below the
specified range, the MCM stops the assist to prevent over-discharge or damage to the battery. Assist is also not
available w h e n the IMA battery is very cold or very hot.
J <-] MCM
BATTERY
MODULE
•
Regenerative control (at deceleration)
During deceleration, the IMA motor, driven by the wheels, functions as a generator. It charges the battery module by
generating electrical energy. This is done by converting the kinetic energy of the vehicle during braking into electric
energy that is stored in the IMA battery. W h e n the battery module is full, regeneration stops to prevent overcharge of
the battery.
(cont'd)
12-21
IMA System
Auto Idle Stop S f stem
The auto idle stop system stops the engine automatically w h e n the vehicle comes to a stop to reduce overall fuel
consumption and minimize tailpipe emissions. Refer to the chart to see the conditions w h e n auto, idle stop occurs and
w h e n it does not occur.
Idle stop occurs: • W h e n the vehicle is driven above 7 m p h (12 km/h) in D, and then decelerated w i t h the
brake pedal pressed (operation speed varies depending on the conditions).
• W h e n the vehicle is driven above 7 m p h (12 km/h) in D after restart f r o m auto idle stop,
and then decelerated w i t h the brake pedal pressed. Under this condition, idle stop
happens only twice.
Idle stop does not • W h e n the vehicle stops suddenly by sharp application of the brake pedal.
occur: • W h e n the engine coolant temperature is low.
1
• W h e n the climate control unit prohibits the engine f r o m stopping.*
2
• W h e n the PCM (CVT system) prohibits the engine f r o m stopping.*
• When the IMA battery state of charge is low.
• When the IMA battery module temperature is low.
• W h e n the electric load on the 12 V system is high.
• W h e n the accelerator pedal is pressed.
• W h e n the windshield defrost button is pressed.
3
• When a fault is detected in a related system. *
* 1: With the ambient temperature at 5 °F (—15 °C) or below.
* 2: When the CVT fluid temperature is low.
* 3: PGM-FI system, IMA system, CVT system, A/C system, etc.
The PCM restarts the engine by signalling the M C M to drive the IMA motor and by restarting fuel injection. Refer to the
chart to see the conditions of engine restart.
Engine restart • When the brake pedal is released.

occurs: • When the shift lever is moved f r o m N to R, or f r o m D to L.
• When the accelerator pedal is pressed.
• When the engine coolant temperature is low.
• When the IMA battery state of charge is low.
12-22
A u t o Stop Indicator
When auto idle stop is operating, the auto stop indicator blinks. If the driver's door is opened during auto idle stop, the
auto stop indicator blinks and the warning buzzer sounds to remind the driver that auto stop is in operation.
AUTO STOP
INDICATOR
Battery Condition Monitor (BCM) Module

The BCM module computes the battery module state of charge (SOC) and controls the IPU module fan. The system's
SOC is computed by the BCM module using voltage, temperature, input current, and output current readings f r o m the
battery module.
INPUTS BCM MODULE OUTPUTS
MCM
BATTERY MODULE
HIGH VOLTAGE CONTACTOR
CONTROL
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR BYPASS CONTACTOR
BATTERY MODULE VOLTAGE IMA SYSTEM INDICATOR
IPU M O D U L E F A N IPU M O D U L E FAN

( O P E R A T I O N S E N S O R ) SIGNAL K K
INPUT> DTC FUNCTION BATTERY MODULE
DC-DC CONVERTER 1 O U T P U T ^> ( S T A T E O F C H A R G E )
(TEMPERATURE SENSOR) SIGNAL V V
M C M RELAY 1 A N D 2
BATTERY CELL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR SIGNAL DC-DC CONVERTER
DLC SIGNAL SYSTEM TROUBLE SIGNAL
DLC C O M M U N I C A T I O N . DLC SIGNAL

FUNCTION
A/C COMPRESSOR DRIVER
(cont'd)
12-23
IMA System

Motor Control Module (MCM)
The M C M converts 158 V DC power into 3-phase AC power to run the electric motor during assist. During regeneration,
the M C M converts AC voltage to DC.
The M C M controls the DC/AC conversion (from the IMA battery's 158 V DC to the IMA motor's 3-phase AC, and vice
versa).
The M C M is air cooled. The heat fed through the heat sink is exhausted to the trunk compartment and outside the
vehicle by the IPU module fan.
The M C M controls the IMA motor to control the assist and regeneration.
IGBT
IMA M o t o r
The IMA motor is a synchronous AC type that converts electrical energy into kinetic energy and vice versa. It assists
the engine during acceleration and starts the engine.
The motor is located between the engine and the transmission. It consists of a 3-phase coil stator and a permanent
magnet rotor that is directly connected to the engine crankshaft. A motor rotor position sensor is mounted on the back
of the engine block to detect the position of the rotor.
M O T O R STATOR
M O T O R ROTOR
12-24
Battery Module
A light-weight and compact Ni-MH (nickel-metal hydride) battery supplies energy to the IMA system.
The battery has 11 modules that are connected in series. Within each module are 12 1.2 Vcells. Total battery voltage is
a nominal 158 V, and m a x i m u m capacity is 5.5 A h .
The battery module has three built-in thermistor-type temperature sensors to monitor the abnormal battery conditions.
BATTERY MODULE
BATTERY MODULE
TEMPERATURE SENSORS
Battery Module Switch

The battery module switch is connected in series to the battery module fuse. Always turn the battery module switch to
the OFF position whenever service or checks are required on or around the high voltage circuits. Follow the service
precautions (see page 12-3).
(cont'd)
12-25
IMA S f stem
J u n c t i o n board
The junction board, mounted on the battery module, distributes high voltage energy to the IMA system. The
contactors, bypass resistor, the battery current sensor, and the battery module switch are all on the junction board.
'06-08 models
BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR BATTERY MODULE SWITCH
BYPASS RESISTOR BYPASS CONTACTOR
HIGH V O L T A G E C O N T A C T O R
'09 model
BYPASS CONTACTOR BYPASS RESISTOR
HIGH V O L T A G E C O N T A C T O R
12-26
DC-DC Converter
Instead of using an alternator to maintain the 12 V battery, the electrical system uses a DC-DC converter. The converter
converts high voltage direct current into low voltage direct current w i t h little energy loss.
If a problem is detected in the 12 V charging system, the DC-DC converter turns on the charging system indicator by
sending a signal to the gauge control module (tach) via the BCM module.
The DC-DC converter has a temperature monitoring system that will signal the BCM module if its temperature is
abnormally high. If needed, the BCM module can signal the DC-DC converter to shut d o w n .
Heat generated by the DC-DC converter is exhausted to the trunk compartment by the IPU module fan.
The DC-DC converter can also generate PGM-FI and/or IMA DTCs.
IPU MODULE MCM
A / C C O M P R E S S O R DRIVER DC-DC C O N V E R T E R
IPU M o d u l e Fan
The battery module, the M C M , the A/C compressor driver, and the DC-DC converter generate heat during assist/
regeneration. The IPU is equipped w i t h a fan to cool these parts d o w n , assure proper battery performance, and protect
the system. The fan has a control circuit and a rotation sensor that are controlled by the BCM module. The cooling air
is drawn into the battery module f r o m the top of the rear tray, then it is exhausted into the trunk compartment and
outside the vehicle through the MCM heat sink, the DC-DC converter, and the A/C compressor driver heat sink.
(cont'd)
12-27
IMA System
Power Cables
The IMA motor power cable connects the IMA motor and the motor control module (MCM). The cable feeds through
an a l u m i n u m tube for damage protection and to prevent electrical noise. The A/C compressor power cable also goes
through the a l u m i n u m tube. Another a l u m i n u m tube, parallel to the IMA motor/A/C compressor tube, houses the DC/
DC converter cable. These tubes are connected in one piece with a tube clamp (orange), and attached to the underside
of the vehicle.
A L U M I N U M TUBE A / C COMPRESSOR POWER CABLE
12-28
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
G A U G E CONTROL
M O D U L E (TACH)
FUSES;
© N o , 1 MAIN F U S E (100 A)
© N o . 2 IG M A I N (5© A )
(DNo. 2 3 B A C K U P ( 1 0 A )

© N o . I O M E T E R {7.5 A )
© N o . 3 A L T E R N A T O R (10 A )
AUXILIARY U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
© N o . 61 + B IMA 2 (10 A)
© N o . 6 2 + B IMA (7.5 A)
*1: '06 m o d e l
*2; '07-09 m o d e l s
*5: '06r08 m o d e l s
*6: '09 m o d e l
(cont'd)
12-29
IMA System
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
N
BCM MODULE
T
WHT
T
| ORN
_. 1
. RED
L_|
|12 10
WHT
l 1
RED
3*
BRN
bV I
I 1 .
I
A38
SCS
A37 | 12P
-RED/WHT - JUNCTION !
WEN CONNECTOR j
-RED/WHT
A4
-WHT 12P j
JUNCTION I
VBU CONNECTOR |
Jk A t Ak 00 A
*4 I
IGHLD
A12
"IT" 1GHLD2 -LTGRN
A29
(G1 YEL/BLK
A3
— PNK —
JHHH ik A k A k
IGHLD
A12
20P
IGHLD2 JUNCTION
A2 CONNECTOR
IGA1-1
A3
IGA1-2
llr
A29 YEL/BLK
I
j 20P JUNCTION
1
CONNECTOR U V w
m
J
2 5
-BLK 3
PG1 B .K
A9 I
-BLK
20P (12P)*3 JUNCTION .4 r j ^
CONNECTOR
9 (11)*2
-BRN f BRN
*2: '07-09 m o d e l s
* 3 : '06-07 m o d e l s
*4: '08-09 m o d e l s
12-30
IPU MODULE FAN
6P JUNCTION 6P JUNCTION 6P JUNCTION

CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
| | | -Q- | [ -pi |
I j 21 3 1 2| 3j 2j 3 I
CANH
A37
RED • 1 j—RED " 1 r—R
*2:
*3:
'07-09 m o d e l s
'06-07 m o d e l s
C 5 6 5 6
*4: '08-09 m o d e l s
*5: '06-08 m o d e l s 6P JUNCTION 6P JUNCTION 6P JUNCTION
*6: '09 m o d e l L. C O N N E C T O R . , CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
(cont'd)
12-31
IMA System
- BATTERY
^f-f-€URRENT
SENSOR
£—
12 V
*1:'06 model
* 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s
* 5 : '08-08 m o d e l s
*6: '09 m o d e l
12-32
BATTERY MODULE
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1
No. 2
No. 3
-RED
VHBO
B14
-GRN/YEL
VHB1
B5
VHB2
B13
VHB3
B4
-GRN/RED
VHB4
B12
-GRN/WHT•
VHB5
B11
VHB6
B7
-BLU/YEL
VHB7
B1
•BLU/RED
VHB8
B8
-GRN/BLK
VHB9
B2
VHB10
B9
VHB11
B3
-WHT
VHB12
12P
CONNECTOR
X TBATT1
A6
-BLK < BATTERY
SGTB MODULE
BATTERY TEMPERATURE
A34 MODULE SENSOR 3
TBATT2 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2
A15
JUNCTION BOARD
(cont'd)
12-33
IMA System
12-34
*3
[AB| [AE~
w I 00
-WHT
IMACANH
j_
IMACANL
20
CANH
10
CANL
17
-WHT •
r~"
L. IGA2-2
-RED •
IGA2-1
- BRN
-BRN
LG2
14
- RED/WHT •
* 3 : '06-07 models
/ B C M M O D U L E A (40P) BCM M O D U L E B(14P) MCM (20P)
=Q
12
2 l l 2 23| 24
3l/ 5
9 |/111112[ 13114115116117118119120| 1 2 3 | % 4 5 6 1|2|3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 l 9|10|
7 8 9
A" 12 13 14 |11|/1/|14|/|/|17|18!19|20
/ /
|/1/lXl28l2^3a/l/l33|34|/|36|37|38|/ kQ
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
12-35
IMA System
12-36
MOTOR CONTROL MODULE (MCM)
U p d a t i n g , p a g e 12-185
MCM RELAY 1 JUNCTION BOARD
BATTERY MODULE
Removal/Installation,
p a g e 12-187
BATTERY MODULE SWITCH

Service Precautions,
p a g e 12-3
BATTERY CONDITION MONITOR (BCM)

INTELLIGENT POWER UNIT MODULE
(IPU) C A S E U p d a t i n g , p a g e 12-181
Removal/Installation, S u b s t i t u t i o n , p a g e 12-8
p a g e 12-189 R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 12-182
I N T E L L I G E N T P O W E R U N I T (IPU)
DC-DC CONVERTER
MODULE FAN
R e p l a c e m e n t , page 12-188 P O W E R C O N T R O L U N I T (PCU)
D i s a s s e m b l y / R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 12-185
(cont'd)
12-37
IMA S f stem
'06-08 models
JUNCTION BOARD
BYPASS RESISTOR BYPASS CONTACTOR
'09 m o d e l
JUNCTION BOARD
BYPASS CONTACTOR BYPASS RESISTOR

12-38
IMA BATTERY LEVEL G A U G E (BAT)
Circuit T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 12-176
12-39
IMA S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0562 (15): BCM Module System Low 8. Measure the voltage between body ground and
Voltage BCM module connector terminal A4.
NOTE: BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P)

• To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting
procedure, j u m p the SCS w i t h the HDS and read the
flash code, or change the HDS setup to show HM
V B U (WHT)
codes and read the HM code.
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and 1 I 2 I 3 1 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 M l 11l2ll3ll4l15ll6|17|18|19|20|
review the general troubleshooting information |2ll22|23|/V1/1/l2M
(see page 12-5).
1. Inspect the No. 23 BACK U P (10 A) fuse in the

Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Goto step 2. Is there 12 V battery voltage?
NO—Go to step 9. Y E S — G o t o step 19.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 23
BACK UP (10 A) fuse and the BCM module (A4),
3. Check the BCM BACK UP VOLTAGE in the DATA then go to step 13.
LIST with the HDS.
9. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
Is there less than 4.0 V?
YES—Go to step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
at the No. 23 BACK U P (10 A) fuse and the BCM
module.•
12-40
12. Check for continuity between body ground and 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0562 (15) in the
BCM module connector terminal A 4 . DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

V B U (WHT)
1 I 2 | 3 1 4 | 5 I 6 1 7 I 8 1 9 \/\\ 1 |12|i3|14|15|16|17|18|li9|20,
|2l|22|23|/Vl/VlZB|2^
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the No. 23 BACK
UP (10 A) fuse and the BCM module, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes
W i r e side of female terminals on.

Y E S —Repair short in the wire between the No. 23
BACK UP (10 A) fuse and the BCM module (A4), and 2 1 . Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
replace the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse. Then go t o battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
step 13.
22. Update the BCM module if it does not have the
N O — G o t o step 20. latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8).
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). Is DTC P0562 (15) indicated?
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse and the
16. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). BCM module. If the BCM module was updated,
substitute a known-good BCM module (see page
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module w a s
substituted, go to step 1. •
Is DTC P0562 (15) indicated?
BCM module, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
12-41
IMA S f stem
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0562 (15) in the DTC P0562 (94); MCM System' Low Voltage
NOTE:
Does the screen indicate PASSED? • To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting
procedure, j u m p the SCS with the HDS and read the
Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated, flash code, or change the HDS setup to show HM
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module codes and read the HM code.
was substituted, replace the original BCM module • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or review the general troubleshooting information
DTCs were indicated in step 23, go t o the indicated (see page 12-5).
D T C s troubleshooting. •
1. Inspect the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse in the
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor under-hood fuse/relay box.
UP (10 A) fuse and the BCM module. If the BCM Is the fuse OK?
module was updated, substitute a known-good
BCM module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the Y E S — G o t o step 2.
BCM module was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the NO—Go to step 9.
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes o n .
3. Check the MCM BACK UP VOLTAGE in the DATA


at the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse and the M C M . B
12-42
8. Measure the voltage between body ground and 12. Check for continuity between body ground and
MCM 20P connector terminal No. 17. M C M 20P connector terminal No. 17.
MCM 20P C O N N E C T O R MCM 20P C O N N E C T O R
i n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
/
11 '/ '14
/ '/
17 18 19 20
V B U (WHT)
11
/ '/
14 / ' / 17 18 19 20
V B U (WHT)
W i r e side of female terminals W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is there 12 V battery voltage? Is there continuity?
YES—Goto step 19. YES—Repair short in the wire between the No. 23
BACK UP (10 A) fuse and the M C M (No. 17) and
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 23 replace the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse. Then go to
BACK UP (10 A) fuse and the M C M (No. 17), then go step 13.
to step 13.
11. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector. battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
16. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).

M C M , then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
12-43
IMA System
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0562 (94) in the 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0562 (94) in the
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17, complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
UP (10 A) fuse and the M C M , then g o t o step 1. If NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the connections or loose terminals at the No. 23 BACK
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes o n . UP (10 A) fuse and the M C M . If the MCM was
updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
20. Reconnect all connectors. keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes
on.
2 1 . Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
22. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest

good MCM (see page 12-8).

MCM. If the M C M was updated, substitute a known-
good M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the
MCM was substituted, go to step 1. •
12-44
DTC P0602 (91): MCM Programming Error DTC P0602 (92): BCM Module Programming
Error
NOTE;
• To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting NOTE:
procedure, j u m p the SCS with the HDS and read the ° To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting
flash code, or change the HDS setup to show HM procedure, j u m p the SCS w i t h the HDS and read the
codes and read the HM code. flash code, or change the HDS setup to show HM
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and codes and read the HM code.
review the general troubleshooting information • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
(see page 12-5). review the general troubleshooting information
• Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK (see page 12-5).
(0) while updating the M C M . If you do, the M C M can • Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK
be damaged. (0) while updating the BCM module. If you do, the
BCM module can be damaged.
1. Do the M C M update procedure (see page 12-185).
1. Do the BCM module update procedure (see page
2. Check for IMA system Temporary DTCs or DTCs 12-181).
w i t h the HDS.
2. Check for IMA system Temporary DTCs or DTCs
Is DTC P0602 (91) indicated? with the HDS.
YES—Replace the original MCM (see page 12-186), is DTC P0602 (92) indicated?
then go to step 1.
YES —Replace the original BCM module (see page
NO—The update is complete. If any other 12-182), then g o t o step 1.
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • NO—The update is complete. If any other
indicated DTCs troubleshooting, a
12-45
IMA System
DTC P0603 (60): MCM Interna! Circuit KAM 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0603 (60) in the
Error DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
and review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5). Y E S —If the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Is DTC PI629 (79) indicated? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the M C M . If the
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P1629 (79) M C M was updated, substitute a known-good M C M
(see page 12-134). (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
N O — G o t o step 3. NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II)
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0603 (60) in the

NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

poor connections or loose terminals at the M C M . If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes o n .

good M C M (see page 12-8).
Y E S —Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the M C M . If the M C M was updated,
substitute a known-good M C M (see page 12-8),
then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, go to
step 1.
NO—Go to step 7.
12-46
DTC P0607 (82): BCM Module Performance 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0607 (82) in the
Problem DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
(see page 12-5). Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). was substituted, replace the original BCM module
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTCs were indicated in step 6, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting, a
^ Is DTC P1629 (79) indicated?
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P1629 (79) connections or loose terminals at the BCM module.
(see page 12-134). If the BCM module w a s updated, substitute a
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then
N O — G o t o step 3. recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes
on.

poor connections or loose terminals at the BCM
module. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
on.

latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a

terminals at the BCM module. If the BCM module
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM
module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM
module was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 7.
12-47
IMA S f stem
DTC P0A1F (112): F-CAN Malfunction (BCM 10. Check for continuity between BCM module
Module-MCM) connector terminal A1 and MCM 20P connector
terminal No. 20, between BCM module connector
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, terminal A21 and M C M 20P connector terminal
and review the general troubleshooting information No. 10, between BCM module connector terminal
(see page 12-5). A 2 0 a n d M C M 20P connector terminal No. 11, and
between BCM module connector terminal A40 and
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). M C M 20P connector terminal No. 1.
] C A N H (WHT) n n I M A C A N H (WHT)
Is DTC U0037 (98) indicated? 1 I 2 | S\aJb\6\7 | 8 I 9 | / M |12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20.
[21 l 2 2 | 2 3 | A / l / l / l 2 8 | 2 9 l 3 0 M ^
C A N L (RED) I M A C A N L (RED)
YES—Do the troubleshooting for DTC U0037 (98)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s (jQ
(see page 12-142).
M C M 20P C O N N E C T O R
NO—Goto step3. IMACANL(RED)

n n CANL
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 (RED)

11
/ '/
'14 / 17 18 19 20
I I M A C A N H (WHT)
C A N H (WHT)
Is DTC POA1F (112) indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5. Is there continuity?
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Y E S — G o t o step 17.

at the BCM module and the M C M . • NO—Repair open in the wire between the BCM
module (A1, A 2 1 , A20, A40) and the M C M (No. 10,
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). No. 20, No. 11, No. 1), then go to step 11.
12-48
11. Reconnect all connectors. 21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A1F (112) in
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). Does the screen indicate PASSED?
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES—If the BCM module was updated,
14. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). was substituted, replace the original BCM module
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTCs were indicated in step 20, go to the indicated
Is DTC P0A1F (112) indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose connections or loose terminals at the BCM module
terminals at the BCM module and the M C M , then and the M C M . If the BCM module was updated,
go to step 1. substitute a known-good BCM module (see page
12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module was
N O — G o t o step 16. substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II)
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A1F (112) in until a result comes on.
the DTCs MENU with the HDS.


connections or loose terminals at the BCM module
and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition
switch ON (II) until a result comes o n .


terminals at the BCM module and the M C M . If the
BCM module was updated, substitute a known-
good BCM module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If
the BCM module was substituted, go to step 1.
N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
12-49
IMA System

DTC P0A27 (46): High Voltage Contactor/ Is there 12 V battery voltage on either terminal?
Bypass Contactor Stays Activated
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data,
and review the general troubleshooting information N O — G o t o step 8.
(see page 12-5).
8. Remove the battery module (see page 12-187).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and w a i t 30
seconds. 9. Measure the resistance between high voltage
contactor terminals (A) and (B).
'06-08 models
3. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A27 (46) in the

poor connections or loose terminals at the high
voltage contactor, the bypass contactor, the M C M ,
and the BCM module. If the screen indicates NOT

'09 model
A B
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and then turn to

LOCK (0). Wait 1 minute, then measure the voltage
between body ground and BCM module connector
, terminals A13 and A14 individually.
P R E (RED) C N T (BLK)
1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 | 6 1 7 [ 8 1 91/111112|13|14|15|16|17|18|1i 9|2Q|
l2l|22|23|/V1/^
Is there about 0 Q ?
YES—Replace the battery module (see page

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s N O — G o t o step 10.
12-50
10. Measure the resistance between high voltage 11. Reconnect all connectors.
contactor terminals (A) and (B).
12. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), and turn the
'06-08 models battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
A B

30 seconds.
Is DTC P0A27 (46) indicated?

terminals at the high voltage contactor, the bypass
contactor, the M C M , and the BCM module, then go
to step 1.


Is there 38-42 Q ? connections or loose terminals at the high voltage
contactor, the bypass contactor, the M C M , and the
YES—Replace the battery module (see page BCM module, then go to step 1. If the screen
12-187), then go to step 11. indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o step 15.
(cont'd)
12-5
IMA S f stem
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 28. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest
20. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the good MCM (see page 12-8).
latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a 30. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8). seconds.
22. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 3 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
23. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 30 32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
seconds.
24. Turn the ignition .switch to ON (II).
25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. terminals at the high voltage contactor, the bypass
contactor, the M C M , and the BCM module. If the
Is DTC P0A27 (46) indicated? MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8), then go to step 30. If the MCM was
YES—Check for poor connections or loose substituted, go to step 1.
terminals at the high voltage contactor, the bypass
contactor, the M C M , and the BCM module. If the NO—Go to step 33.
BCM module was updated, substitute a known-
good BCM module (see page 12-8), then go to step 33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A27 (46) in the
23. If the BCM module w a s substituted, go to step DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
1.
NO—Go to step 26.
Y E S — I f the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A27 (46) in the complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other
Does the screen indicate PASSED? g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated, NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module connections or loose terminals at the high voltage
was substituted, replace the original BCM module contactor, the bypass contactor, the M C M , and the
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or BCM module, then go to step 1. If the screen
DTCs were indicated in step 25, go to the indicated indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 30.
D T C s troubleshooting. •

connections or loose terminals at the high voltage
contactor, the bypass contactor, the M C M , and the
BCM module, then go to step 1. If the screen
1 ""^Jd^l
DTC P0A3C (39): MCM Overheating 7. Check the IPU module air duct or IPU module fan
for disconnections, damage, or obstructions, and
NOTE: check the IPU lid installation.
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
review the general troubleshooting information Are the IPU module air duct, the IPU module fan,
(see page 12-5). and the IPU lid OK?
• If the IPU module fan duct is blocked, DTC P0A3C
may be detected. Y E S — G o t o step 12.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO—Repair the Part(s) as needed, then go to step
8.
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P1448 (63)
(see page 12-110). Is DTC P0A3C (39) indicated?
N O — G o t o step 4. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the M C M and the IPU module fan, then
4. Check the MPI TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST go to step 1.
w i t h the HDS.
Is more than 212 °F (100 °C) indicated?
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A3C (39) in
Y E S — G o to step 7. the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
NO—Go to step 5. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. B
• IPU MODULE FAN SPEED
• VSS (MCM) NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
• Motor Speed (MCM) connections or loose terminals at the M C M and the
IPU module fan. If the screen indicates NOT
6. Check the MPI TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a
w i t h the HDS. result comes on.
Is more than 212 °F (100 °C) indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step7.

t i m e . Check for a blockage at the IPU module fan
inlet d u c t HI
(cont'd)
12-53
IMA System
12. Update the M C M If it does not have the latest DTC P0A3F (89): Motor Rotor Position Sensor
software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known- Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data,
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. and review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
Is DTC P0A3C (39) indicated?
terminals at the M C M and the IPU module fan. If 2. Start the engine, and wait 30 seconds.
the M C M was updated, substitute a known-good
M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M 3. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A3F (89) in the
was substituted, go to step 1. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 14. Does the screen indicate FAILED?
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A3C (39) in Y E S — G o t o step 4.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the motor
Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is rotor position sensor and the M C M . If the screen
complete. If the M C M w a s substituted, replace the indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 1.
original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13, 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connections or loose terminals at the M C M and the 6. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
IPU module fan. If the M C M was updated,
substituted a known-good M C M (see page 12-8), 7. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182).
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, 8. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector.
on.
12-54
9, Check for continuity between body ground and 10. Disconnect the motor roto.r position sensor 6P
these M C M 20P connector terminals individually: connector.
• No. 3 11. A t the motor rotor position sensor side, check for
• No. 4 continuity between body ground and the motor
• No. 5 rotor position sensor 6P connector terminals
•No. 8 individually.
• No. 7
M O T O R R O T O R P O S I T I O N S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R
• No. 8
M C M 20P C O N N E C T O R 82 (YEL)
S I (RED) Rl (WHT)
S 2 (BLU) S1 (GRN)
S 3 (WHT) R2 (RED)
R2
S 4 (YEL) R l (BRN) (GRN)
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 S3 S4
(BLK) (BLU)
11 / 14 / 17 18 19 20
/ 0(Q)
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES—Replace the motor rotor position sensor

YES—Goto step 10.
NO—Repair short to ground in the wire between
NO—Go to step 12. the motor rotor position sensor and the M C M , then
go to step 15.
(cont'd)
12-55
IMA S f stem
12. Measure the resistance between these M C M 20P 13. Disconnect the motor rotor position sensor 6P
connector terminals individually: connector.
• No. 4 and No. 6 14. Measure the resistance between these motor rotor
• No. S a n d No. 5 position sensor 6P connector terminals
• No. 7 and No. 8 individually:
MCM 2 0 P CONNECTOR
• No. 1 and No. 4
S I (GRN)
• No. 2 and No. 5
R2 (RED) • No. 3 and No. 6
S2 (BLU)
S 4 (YEL) R1 (BRN) M O T O R R O T O R POSITION S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 S I (RED)
S 2 (YEL)
R1 ( W H T )
11 4|/V117118|19|20
S3 (WHT)

S 3 (BLK) R2 (GRN)
S4 (BLU)
Is there 21.6-34.4 Q (No. 4 and No. 6), 19.9-
31.7 Q (No. 3 and No. 5), and 11.0- 17A Q (No. 7 Terminal side of male terminals
and No. 8)?
Y E S — G o t o step 24. I s there 21.4-34.2 Q, (No. 1 and No. 4), 19.7-

31.5 Q (No. 2 and No. 5), and 10.8- 17.2 Q (No. 3
NO—Go to step 13. and No. 6)7
YES—Repair open in the w i r e between the motor

rotor position sensor and the M C M , the go to step
15.
NO—Replace the motor rotor position sensor

12-56
15. Reconnect all connectors. 22. Reconnect all connectors.
16. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the 23. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 24. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest
18. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). good M C M (see page 12-8).
19. Start the engine. 25. Start the engine.
Is DTC P0A3F (89) indicated? Is DTC P0A3F (89) indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the motor rotor position sensor and terminals at the motor rotor position sensor and
the M C M , then go to step 1. the M C M . If the MCM was updated, substitute a
known-good M C M (see page 12-8), then go to step
N O — G o t o step 2 1 . 25. If the M C M was substituted, g o t o step 1.
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A3F (89) in the N O — G o t o step 27.
27. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A3F (89) in the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? . DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. '
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the screen indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • Y E S — I f the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor original M C M (see page 12-182). If any other
connections or loose terminals at the motor rotor Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 26,
position sensor and the M C M . If the screen go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting M
* indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the motor rotor
position sensor and the M C M , then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
12-57
IMA System
DTC P0A5E (24): U Phase Motor Current 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A5E (24) in
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
(see page 12-5). Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other
2. Check the U PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR in go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 0.25 V or less indicated? connections or loose terminals at the M C M . If the
M C M was updated, substitute a known-good M C M
Y E S — G o t o step 3. (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II)
t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals until a result comes on.
at the M C M . •

Is DTC P0A5E (24) indicated?

substitute a known-good MCM (see page 12-8),
step 1.
NO—Go to step 5.
12-58
DTC P0A5F (25): U Phase Motor Current 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A5F (25) in the
Sensor Circuit High Voltage DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the
2. Check the U PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR in go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is about 4.75 V or more indicated? connections or loose terminals at the M C M . If the
M C M was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
Y E S — G o to step 3. (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NOT COMPLETED, keep the Ignition switch ON (II)
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals until a result comes on.
at the M C M . •
3. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest


terminals at the M C M . If the MCM was updated,
then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, g o t o
step 1.
NO—Go to step 5.
12-59
IMA System

DTC P0A61 (26): V Phase Motor Current 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A61 (26) in the
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
(see page 12-5). YES—If the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
2. Check the V PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR in go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO —If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES—Go to step 3. (see page 12-8), then recheck. if the M C M was
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals until a result comes on.
at the MCM. S


step 1.
NO—Go to step 5.
12-60
Sensor Circuit High Voltage DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
2. Check the V PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR in go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
N O — I f the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Is about 4,75 ¥ or more indicated? connections or loose terminals at the M C M . If the
Y E S — G o to stepS. (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (ll)
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals until a result comes on. •
at the MCM. B


then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go to
step 1.
12-61
IMA S f stem
DTC P0A64 (28): W Phase Motor Current 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A64 (28) in the
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
2. Check the W PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR in go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Y E S — G o to step 3. (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this . NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II)
t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals until a result comes on.
at the M C M . B


step 1.
NO—Go to step 5.
12-62
Sensor Circuit High Voltage DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
(see page 12-5). Y E S — I f the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
2. Check the W PHASE MOTOR CURRENT SENSOR in go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Is about 4.75 V or more indicated? M C M w a s updated, substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M w a s
Y E S — G o t o step 3. substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals until a result comes o n .
at the MCM. •


step 1.
12-63
IMA S f stem
DTC P0A78 (32): MCM Internal Circuit 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A78 (32) in the
Malfunction DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Is DTC P1437 (41) indicated? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P1437 (41) M C M was updated, substitute a known-good M C M
(see page 12-101). (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
N O — G o t o step 3. NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II)

1.B


then recheck. If the M C M w a s substituted, go to
step 1.
12-64
DTC P0A7E (72); Battery Module Overheating DTC P0A7F (78): Battery Module
Deterioration
and review the general troubleshooting information NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data,
(see page 12-5). and review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
Replace the battery module (see page 12-187).

(see page 12-122).
NO—Go to step 3.
5. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
6. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 and

4,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the SOC
increases to 70 %.
/ . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

(see page 12-122).
NO—Replace the battery module (see page 12-187),

then go to step 8.
b. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

terminals at the battery module, the battery current
sensor, and the BCM module, then go to step 1.
(cont'd)
12-65
IMA S f stem
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A7F (78) in the DTC P0Ai4 (48): DC-DC Converter Output
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Low Voltage
Does the screen indicate PASSED? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data,
YES—-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other (see page 12-5).
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO-—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 2. Check for IMA system Temporary DTCs or DTCs
connections or loose terminals at the battery w i t h the HDS.
module, the battery current sensor, and the BCM
module, then g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates Is DTC U1221 (35) or P0562 (94) indicated?
until a result comes o n . Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC U1221 (35)
(see page 12-172), or DTC P0562 (94) (see page
12-42).
NO—Go to step 3.
4. Check under these conditions:
• Headlights on high beam

• Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
• Rear w i n d o w defogger on
5. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes.

Y E S —Goto step 7.
poor connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
converter, the + B terminal (on the under-hood
fuse/relay box), the M C M , and the No. 23 BACK UP
(10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box. If the
12-66
H IMA
7. Check the DC-DC CONVERTER INFORMATION in 10. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
Does the screen indicate NORMAL? 12. Check the + B connector (A) and — connector (B)
connections on the DC-DC converter.
YES—Goto step 8.
NO—Replace the DC-DC converter (see page
9. Check the under-hood fuse/relay box + B terminal

(A) (BLK wire) connection.
YES—Replace the DC-DC converter (see page

NO—Repair the + B connector, then go to step 13.

Is the connection OK?
Y E S - G o t o step 10. battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
NO—Repair the + B terminal connection, then go to 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
step 13.
(cont'd)
12-67
IMA System
17. Start the engine. DTC P0A9D (49): Battery Module
Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage
18. Check under these conditions;
• Headlights on high beam and review the general troubleshooting information
• Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed (see page 12-5).
• Rear w i n d o w defogger on 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
19. Let the engine idle for 2 minutes. 2. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1) in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose Is about 0.05 V or less (194 °F (90 °C) or more)
terminals at the DC-DC converter, the under-hood indicated?
fuse/relay box, the + B terminal (on the under-hood
fuse/relay box), the M C M , and the No. 23 BACK UP YES—Goto step 3.
(10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, then
go to step 1. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections, loose terminals,
N O — G o t o step 2 1 . or damaged insulation at the battery module and
the BCM m o d u l e . •
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 4. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 5. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 6. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
converter, the + B terminal (on the under-hood 8. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
fuse/relay box), the M C M , and the No. 23 BACK UP SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
(10 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box, then TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1) in the DATA LIST with
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT the HDS.
Is about 0.05 V or less (194 °F (90 °C) or more)
indicated?
YES—Go to step 9.

then go to step 12.
12-68
11. Check for continuity between BCM module 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A9D (49) in
connector terminal A33 and body ground. the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P) Does the screen indicate PASSED?

1 | 21 314 | 5 161 7 | 8 | 9 \/W 1 llffl3|14|15|16|17|18|119l20l
|21|22l23My1y1yl28|29|30lXIXl33l34lyl36|37|38M4Q
I TBATT1 (YEL) connections, loose terminals, or damaged
insulation at the battery module and the BCM
(ft)
module, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals until a result comes on.

YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
the battery module and the BCM module (A33),
then go to step 12. 21. Update the BCM module if it does not have the
N O — G o t o step 19. known-good BCM module (see page 12-8).
13. Reconnect all connectors. Is DTC P0A9D (49) indicated?
14. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the YES—Check for poor connections, loose terminals,
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). or damaged insulation at the battery module and
the BCM module. If the BCM module was updated,
15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). substitute a known-good BCM module (see page
16. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). substituted, go to step 1.
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. N O — G o t o step 23.
Is DTC P0A9D (49) indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections, loose terminals,

or damaged insulation at the battery module and
the BCM module, then g o t o step 1.
(cont'd)
12-69
IMA S f stem
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A9D (49) In DTC P0A9E (50): Battery Module
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage
and review the general troubleshooting Information
YES—If the BCM module was updated, (see page 12-5).
was substituted, replace the original BCM module 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
DTCs were indicated in step 22, go t o the indicated 2. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
D T C s troubleshooting. • SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1) in the DATA LIST w i t h
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor the HDS.
connections, loose terminals, or damaged
insulation at the battery module and the BCM Is about 4.95 V or more (-40 °F (-40 °C) or less)
module. If the BCM module was updated, indicated?
12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module was Y E S — G o t o step 3.
substituted, g o t o step 1. If the screen Indicates
NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II) NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
until a result comes on. t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the battery module and the BCM module. •
Are DTC P0A9E (50), P0AC8 (52), and POACD

(54) indicated at the same time?
NO—Go to step 4.
7. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector.
12-70
8. Connect junction board 12P connector terminal 13. Check for continuity between BCM module
No. 12 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire. connector terminal A33 and junction board 12P
J U N C T I O N B O A R D 12P C O N N E C T O R B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
n n
1 | 2 I 3 14 | 5 I 6 1 7 I 8 I 9 1 / | 1 1 |12|i3|14|15|16|17|18|19|2df
121 I Z ^ I Z S l ^ l ^ l ^ l ^ l 2 8 1 2 9 1 3 0 1 ^ 1 ^ 1 3 3 1 3 4 - 1 ^ 1 3 6 | 37|381^140
1 2 3 4 5 6 TBATT1 (YEL) 1
7 / 9 10 11 12
TBATT1 (YEL)
J U N C T I O N B O A R D 12P C O N N E C T O R
JUMPER WIRE
1 2 3 4 5 6
9 10 11 12
7 / TBATT1 (YEL)

10. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE YES —Goto step 31.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1) in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. NO—Repair open in the wire between the battery
module and the BCM module (A33), then go to step
Is about 4.95 V or more (-40 °F (-40 °C) or less) 24.
indicated?
then go to step 24. 16. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Connect junction board 12P connector terminal
No. 10 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 / 9 10 11 12
S G T B (BLK)
J U M P E R WIRE
(cont'd)
12-71
IMA S f stem

19. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1), the IMA BATTERY 25. Reconnect all connectors.
MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE
(IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 26. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
SENSOR 2), and the IMA BATTERY MODULE battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3 VOLTAGE (IMA
BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3) in 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Do all sensors indicate about 4.95 V or more
(-40 °F ( -40 °C) or less)? 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YES—Replace the battery module (see page Is DTC P0A9E (50) indicated?
N O — G o t o step 20. terminals at the battery module and the BCM
module, then go to step 1.
2 1 . Disconnect the junction board 12P connector.
30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A9E (50) in
22. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
23. Check for continuity between BCM module Does the screen indicate PASSED?
connector terminal A6 and junction board 12P
connector terminal No. 10. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
S G T B (BLK) I , n — — n ~
"1 | 2 [ 3 14 I 5 | 61 7 I 8 [91/111 |l2|13|14l15|16l17|18|19|Î] NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
T2lT22l^|/^^ connections or loose terminals at the battery
Wire side of female terminals module and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 1 . Reconnect all connectors.

7 / 9 10 11 12
S G T B (BLK)
Is there continuity ? latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a
Y E S — G o t o step 3 1 .
NO—Repair open in the wire between the battery

24.
12-72
34. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P0AA6 (59): High Voltage Circuit
Isolation Problem
Is DTC P0A9E (50) indicated?
NOTE;
YES—Check for poor connections or loose • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
terminals at the battery module and the BCM review the general troubleshooting information
module. If the BCM module was updated, (see page 12-5).
substitute a known-good BCM module-(see page • If the w r o n g A/C compressor oil was used in the A/C
12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module was system, DTC P0AA6 (59) may be set.
NO—Go to step 35.
35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0A9E (50) in
the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Is DTC P1629 (79) indicated?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Y E S - D o the troubleshooting for DTC P1629 (79)
(see page 12-134).
YES—If the BCM module was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module N O — G o t o step 3.
was substituted, replace the original BCM module
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or 3. Turn the A/C switch off.
DTCs were indicated in step 34, go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. • 4. Check the INSULATION RESISTANCE OF HIGH
VOLTAGE CIRCUIT in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at the battery Is about 350 kQ or more indicated?
module and the BCM module. If the BCM module
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM Y E S — G o t o step 5.
module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen N O — G o t o step 12.
switch ON (II) until a result comes on. 5. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
6. Check the INSULATION RESISTANCE OF HIGH

VOLTAGE CIRCUIT in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is about 350 kQ or more indicated?
(cont'd)
12-73
IMA S f stem

7. Make sure the ambient temperature is above 41 °F 16. Remove the high voltage cables (A) f r o m the IMA
(5 <C). battery.
9. Turn the A/C o n , and set it to 72 °F (22 °C).
10. Let the engine idle for 1 minute.
11. Check the INSULATION RESISTANCE OF HIGH

VOLTAGE CIRCUIT in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is there 350 kQ or more indicated?
YES—Intermittent short in one or more of these

parts:
• Battery module
• MCM
• Motor stator
• Motor power cable 17. Measure the resistance between body ground and
• A/C compressor driver battery module terminals B and C Individually.
• A/C compressor
• A/C compressor power cable NOTE: Use the 250 V range of your Insulated
• DC-DC converter resistance tester, and wear gloves.
• BCM module
• Main fuse (100 A) Is there 350 kQ or more?
N O — G o t o step 32. Y E S — G o t o step 18.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). N O — G o t o step 20.
13. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 18. Remove the battery module (see page 12-187).
14. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). 19. Check the battery module for damage (bending of
the case, burn marks, or broken insulation).
15. Check the high voltage cables (orange cable) for
poor connections and damaged insulation. Is the battery module OK?
Are the high voltage cables OK? YES—Go to step 2 1 .
YES—Go to step 16. NO—Replace the battery module, then go to step

42.
NO—Replace the high voltage cables, then go to
step 42. 20. Check the busbars on the M C M for bending or for
broken insulation.
Are the busbars OK?
YES—Goto step 2 1 .
NO—Replace the busbars, then go to step 42.
12-74
2 1 . Remove the bolts (A) f r o m the DC-DC converter and 23. Remove the tape f r o m the DC-DC converter
the A/C compressor driver. terminal, then w r a p the busbar (A) w i t h insulating
tape.
NOTE: Wrap the DC-DC converter and A/C
compressor driver terminals (B) w i t h insulating
tape.
9.8 N m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
24. Measure the resistance between body g r o u n d and

DC-DC converter terminals B and C individually.
YES—Replace the A/C compressor driver (see page

22. Measure the resistance between body ground and NO—Replace the DC-DC converter (see page
busbars A and B individually. 12-182), then go to step 42.
NOTE: Use the 250 V range of your insulated 25. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
resistance tester, and wear gloves.
(cont'd)
12-75
IMA S f stem

28. Lift the harness holder. Remove the PDU cover (A), 30. Disconnect the motor power cable (A).
and the motor power cables (B) f r o m the M C M .
NOTE:
NOTE: Wrap the motor power cables w i t h • Disconnecting the motor power cable connector
insulating tape (C). f r o m the motor stator (see page 12-3).
• If the motor power cable terminals are wet, dry
them w i t h a clean t o w e l . Do not use compressed
air.
3 1 . Measure the resistance between body ground and

motor power cable terminals A, B, and C
29. Measure the resistance between body ground and individually.
M C M terminals D, E, and F individually.
NOTE: Use the 250 V range of your insulated
NOTE: Use the 250 V range of your insulated resistance tester, and wear gloves.
resistance tester, and wear gloves.

. Y E S — G o t o step 30.

YES—Replace the motor stator (see page 12-195),
then go to step 42.
NO—Replace the motor power cable (see page

12-76
32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 36. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
33. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 37. Disconnect the A/C compressor power connector
(A) f r o m the A/C compressor driver.
34. Remove the cover (A). Disconnect the A/C
compressor power cable connector (B) f r o m the
engine compartment.
38. Measure the resistance between body ground and

A/C compressor power cable terminals A, B, and C
35. Measure the resistance between body ground and individually.
A/C compressor power cable terminals A, B, and C
individually. NOTE:
• If the A/C compressor power cable connector
NOTE: terminals are wet, dry them with a clean towel.
• If the A/C compressor power cable connector - Do not use compressed air.
terminals are wet, dry them w i t h a clean towel. • Use the 250 V range of your insulated resistance
Do not use compressed air. tester, and wear gloves.
• Use the 250 V range of your insulated resistance
tester, and wear gloves.
IT"

Is there 350 kQ or more? YES—Replace the A/C compressor driver (see page
(cont'd)
12-77
IMA System
39. Remove the A/C compressor (see page 21-110). 49. Turn the A/C on and set it to 72 °F (22 °C).
40. Drain the oil f r o m the A/C compressor. 50. Let the engine idle for 1 minute.
41. At the A/C compressor side, measure the resistance 51. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
between body ground and A/C compressor power
cable connector terminals A, B, and C individually. Is DTC P0AA6 (59) indicated?
NOTE: Y E S —Check for poor connections or loose

• If the A/C compressor power cable connector terminals at the M C M , the A/C compressor driver,
terminals are wet, dry t h e m w i t h a clean t o w e l . the motor stator, the motor power cable, and the
Do not use compressed air. BCM module, then go to step 1.
tester, and wear gloves. N O — G o t o step 52.
52. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AA6 (59) in

A


connections or loose terminals at the M C M , the A/C
compressor driver, the motor stator, the motor
power cable, and the BCM module, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
Is there 350 kQ or more? step 47.
YES—Replace the A/C compressor oil (see page 53. Reconnect all connectors.
NO—Replace the A/C compressor (see page battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
42. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). 57. Make sure the ambient temperature is above 41 °F
(5*0.
59. Turn the A/C on, and set it to 72 °F (22 °C).
47. Make sure the ambient temperature is above 41 °F
(5°C). 60. Let the engine idle for 1 minute.
12-78
6 1 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 66., Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
Is DTC P0AA6 (59) indicated? 67. Make sure the ambient temperature is above 41 °F
. (5 <C).
terminals at the M C M , the A/C compressor driver, 68. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes.
the motor stator, the motor power cable, and the
BCM module. If the BCM module was updated, 69. Turn the A/C o n , and set it to 72 °F (22 °C).
12-8), then g o t o step 57. If the BCM module was 70. Let the engine idle for 1 minute.
-NO—Go to step-62.
Is DTC P0AA6 (59) indicated?
62. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AA6 (59) in
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the M C M , the A/C compressor driver,
Does the screen indicate PASSED? the motor stator, the motor power cable, and the
BCM module. If the MCM was updated, substitute a
Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated, known-good M C M (see page 12-8), then go to step
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module 67. If the M C M was substituted, go to step 1.
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or NO—Go to step 72.
DTCs were indicated in step 6 1 , go to the indicated
DTCs troubleshooting. • 72. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AA6 (59) in
connections or loose terminals at the M C M , the A/C Does the screen indicate PASSED?
power cable, and the BCM module. If the BCM Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
module was updated, substitute a known-good complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the
BCM module (see page 12-8), then go to step 57. If . original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other
the BCM module was substituted, g o t o step 1. If Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7 1 ,
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
59.
63. Reconnect all connectors. connections or loose terminals at the M C M , the A/C
64. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the power cable, and the BCM module. If the MCM was
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
12-8), then go to step 67. If the M C M was
65. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known- NOT COMPLETED, go to step 69.
12-79
IMA System
DTC P0AA7 (76): BCM Module Internal Circuit 5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AA7 (76) in
Malfunction the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
NOTE; Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
(see page 12-5). Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). was substituted, replace the original BCM module
2. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AA7 (76) in DTCs were indicated in step 4, go to the indicated
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. DTCs troubleshooting. •
Does the screen indicate FAILED? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the BCM module.
Y E S — G o t o step 3. If the BCM module was updated, substitute a
• NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
poor connections or loose terminals at the BCM keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes
module. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, on.
go to step 1.

Is DTC P0AA7 (76) indicated?

terminals at the BCM module. If the BCM module
module was substituted, go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 5.
12-80
DTC POACO (§5); Battery Current Sensor 10. Measure the voltage between BCM module
Circuit Malfunction connector terminals A5 and A7.
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data, B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
1®
(see page 12-5).
VCCiSOC SG1SOC
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). (BRN) (BLU)
n n
1 |2|3|4|5|6|7|8|9112|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1 |21|22|23|/|/|/|/128|29|30|/1/133|34|/|36|37|38|/|40
minute.
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POACO (65) in Wire side of female terminals
Does the screen indicate FAILED? Is there 4 - 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step 5. YES—Replace the battery module (see page

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for N O — G o t o step 11.
poor connections or loose terminals at the battery
current sensor and the BCM module. If the screen 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
indicates.NOT COMPLETED, g o t o step 1.
8. Check the BCM module and the junction board 12P

connections.
NO—Repair the connections, then go to step 17.
(cont'd)
12-81
IMA S f stem
14. Check for continuity between BCM module 16. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
BCM M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
VCCiSOC (BRN)
1 I 2 | 3 j 4 1 5 | 6 1 7 | 8 | 9 1 / 1 1 |12|J3|14|115|16|17|18|1i 9|2Q|'
l2ll22|23|AÂ/l28l29|30
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0), and wait 1

minute.
W i r e side of female terminals 22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Is DTC POACO (65) indicated?
YES—Repair short t o ground in the wire between
the junction board and the BCM module (A5), then YES—Check for poor connections or loose
go t o step 16. terminals at the battery current sensor and the
NO—Go t o step 15.
15. Check f o r continuity between junction board 12P
connector terminal No. 6 and BCM module 24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POACO (65) in
connector terminal A5. the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
V C C I S O C (BRN) I ,n-
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 I 9 1 / 1 1 |12|13|14115|16|117|18|119]gol YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
|21|22|23|////^ Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,

connections or loose terminals at the battery
I V C C I S O C (BRN) current sensor and the BCM module. If the screen
2 6 indicates NOT COMPLETED, go t o step 2 1 .
10 11
NO—Repair open in the wire between the BCM

module (A5) and the junction board, then g o t o step
16.
12-82
25. Reconnect all connectors. DTC P0AC7 (51): Battery Module
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data,
27. Update the BCM module if it does not have the (see page 12-5).
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
28. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1 2. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
minute. SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
29. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). the HDS.
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is about 0.05 V or less (194 °F (90 °C) or more)
indicated?
Is DTC P0AC0 (65) indicated?
YES—Goto step 3.
terminals at the battery current sensor and the NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
BCM module. If the BCM module was updated, time. Check for poor connections, loose terminals,
substitute a known-good BCM module (see page or damaged insulation at the battery module and
12-8), then g o t o step 28. If the BCM module was the BCM m o d u l e . •
31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AC0 (65) in
the DTCs MENU with the HDS. 5. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 6. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector.
YES —If the BCM module was updated-, 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
was substituted, replace the original BCM module 8. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
DTCs were indicated in step 30, go to the indicated TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2) in the DATA LIST with
DTCs troubleshooting. • the HDS.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor Is about 0.05 V or less (194 °F (90 °C) or more)
connections or loose terminals at the BCM module. indicated?
If the BCM module was updated, substitute a
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then go YES—Goto step 9.
to step 28. If the BCM module was substituted, go
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, NO—Replace the battery module (see page 12-187),
go to step 28. then go to step 12.
(cont'd)
12""83
IMA S f stem
11. Check for continuity between BCM module 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AC7 (51) in
connector terminal A34 and body ground. the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.


go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. B
1| 2| 3I4 | 5| 6| 7 | 8 |12jl 3|14|1 B|16|1 ThaTTol^T
1211221231^1^1^1^128129 |3Q 1X1X133 |34|x136| 37|38l7[4Q
I TBATT2 (GRY) connections, loose terminals, or damaged
(9)
insulation at the battery module and the BCM
module, then go to step 1. If the screen indicates

the battery module and the BCM module (A34),
NO—Go to step 19. known-good BCM module (see page 12-8).
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
13. Reconnect all connectors. Is DTC P0AC7 (51) indicated?
14. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the YES—Check for poor connections, loose terminals,
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). or damaged insulation at the battery module and
16. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). substituted, go to step 1.
YES—Check for poor connections, loose terminals,

the BCM module, then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 18.
12-84
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AC7 (51) in DTC P0AC8 (52): Battery Module
I and review the general troubleshooting information
Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated, (see page 12-5).
was substituted, replace the original BCM module 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
DTCs were indicated in step 22, go to the indicated 2. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
DTCs troubleshooting. • SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
insulation at the battery module and the BCM Is about 4.95 V or more (-40 °F (-40 °C) or less)
12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module was Y E S - G o t o step 3.
until a result comes on. t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals

(cont'd)
12-85
MA System
No. 11 to body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e . connector terminal A34 and junction board 12P
1 I 2 I 3 14 | 5 | 6 I 7 j 81*91/11111^13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
T21|22J231/1/1/1/1^
1 2 3 4 5 6 TBATT2 (GRY) 1
7
/9 10 11 12
TBATT2 (GRY)
JUMPER WIRE
1 2 3 4 5 6

7 /
9 10 11 12
T B A T T 2 (GRY)
SENSOR 2 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE YES—Goto step 3 1 .
Is about 4.95 V or more (— 40 °F (-40 °C) or less) 24.
indicated?
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 /
9 10 11 12
S G T B (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
12-86
19. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Do all sensors indicate about 4.95 V or more •
(-40 °F ( -40 °C) or less)? 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YES—Replace the battery module (see page Is DTC P0AC8 (52) indicated?
NO—Go to step 20. terminals at the battery module and the BCM
22. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
S G T B (BLK)
J3=
TTIH I 4 | 5 I 6 | 7 I 8 [91/111 |l2|i3|14|15|16l17|18|19l2uT NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
|21J22|23l/l/l/l/|28l29l30l/l/l33l34|/36l37|381/|40 connections or loose terminals at the battery
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s module and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
J U N C T I O N B O A R D 12P CONNECTOR
I 2 3 4 5 6 3 1 . Reconnect all connectors.

7
/ 9 10 11 12
S G T B (BLK)
Is there continuity? latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a
YES—Go to step 3 1 .
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the battery

24.
(cont'd)
12-87
IMA System
34. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC POACC (53): Battery Module
YES—Check for poor connections or loose and review the general troubleshooting information
terminals at the battery module and the BCM (see page 12-5).
module. If the BCM module was updated,
substitute a known-good BCM module (see page 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
substituted, go to step 1. 2. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
N O — G o t o step 35. TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3) in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS.
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Is about 0.05 V or less (194 °F (90 °C) or more)
indicated?
Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
was substituted, replace the original BCM module time. Check for poor connections, loose terminals,
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or or damaged insulation at the battery module and
DTCs were indicated in step 34, go to the indicated the BCM module. •
connections or loose terminals at the battery 4. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM 5. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen 6. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector.
switch ON (II) until a result comes on. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

the HDS.
Is about 0.05 V or less (194 °F (90 °C) or more)

indicated?

then go to step 12.
12-88
11. Check for continuity between BCM module 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POACC (53) in
connector terminal A15 and body ground. the DTCs MENU with the HDS.

T B A T T 3 (WHT) I
go t o the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
1 | 2 I 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 I 8 1*9 1/111 [l2h3ll4|15h6[l7l18pM|
7^221231^1^1^1^1281291301^1x"l33134-1^136| 37j 381XT401
Insulation at the battery module and the BCM
X module, then go to step 1. If the screen Indicates
NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (ll)
until a result comes o n .
. the battery module and the BCM module (A15),
N O — G o t o step 19. known-good BCM module (see page 12-8).
12. Turn the ignition .switch to LOCK (0). 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
13. Reconnect all connectors. Is DTC POACC (53) indicated?
14. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the YES—Check for poor connections or loose
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). terminals at the battery module and the BCM
16. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). substituted, g o t o step 1.
Is DTC POACC (53) indicated?
YES—Check f o r poor connections, loose terminals,

the BCM module, then go to step 1.
NO—Goto step 18.
(cont'd)
12-89
IMA S f stem
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POACC (53) in DTC POACD (54): Battery Module
YES—If the BCM module was updated, (see page 12-5).
was substituted, replace the original BCM module 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
DTCs were indicated in step 22, go to the indicated 2. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE
D T C s troubleshooting. • SENSOR 3 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE
insulation at the battery module and the BCM is about 4.95 V or more (-40 °F (-40 °C) or less)
12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module was YES —Goto step 3. •
until a result comes on. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals

NO—Go to step 4.
12-90
No. 9 to body ground w i t h a jumper wire. connector terminal A15 and junction board 12P
_. ._ n n . . . T B A T T 3 (WHT)
1 | 2 | 3 14 I 5 | 61 7 ! 81 91/|11112|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
|2l|22|23|/|/|y1/|28|29|30M/|33|34|/i36|37|38M40
1 2 3 4 5 6
7
/9 10 11 12
TBATT3 (WHT) J U N C T I O N B O A R D 12P C O N N E C T O R
J U M P E R WIRE
1 2 3 4 5 6

7 /9 10 11 12
T B A T T 3 (WHT)

SENSOR 3 VOLTAGE (IMA BATTERY MODULE YES—Goto step 3 1 .
Is about 4.95 V or more (-40 °F (40 °C) or less) 24.
indicated?
YES—Goto step 11.
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 9 10 11 12
S G T B (BLK)
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
12-91
IMA System
19. Cheek the IMA BATTERY MODULE TEMPERATURE 24. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Do all sensors indicate about 4.95 V or more
(-40 °F (-40 °C) or less)? 29. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YES—Replace the battery module (see page Is DTC POACD (54) indicated?
N O — G o t o step 20. terminals at the battery module and the BCM
30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POACD (54) in
22. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. S
S G T B (BLK) | n n ~
TT2l 314 l 5 | 61 7 | 81 91/|11112|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20| I NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
121122)231X1X1X1^
module and the BCM module, then go t o step 1. If
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
J U N C T I O N B O A R D 12P C O N N E C T O R /fs\
1 2 3 4 5 6 3 1 . Reconnect all connectors.

7 / 9 10 11 12
S G T B (BLK)
Is there continuity? latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a
Y E S — G o t o s t e p 31.
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the battery

24.
12-92
34. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. DTC P0AE1 (62): Bypass Contactor
Malfunction
Is DTC POACD (54) indicated?

' terminals at the battery module and the BCM Be careful not to touch high voltage cables and
module. If the BCM module was updated, parts w h e n you turn the battery module switch ON,
substitute a known-good BCM module (see page or while the battery module switch is ON.
NO—Go to step 35. and review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POACD (54) in
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YES—If the BCM module was updated, Is DTC P0A78 (32) or P1570 (66) indicated?
was substituted, replace the original BCM module YES—Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0A78 (32)
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or (see page 12-64), or DTC P1570 (66) (see page
DTCs were indicated in step 34, go to the indicated 12-113).
NO—Go to step 3.
connections or loose terminals at the battery 3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
module and the BCM module. If the BCM module .
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen Is DTC P0AE1 (62) indicated?
. switch ON (II) until a result comes on. Y E S — G o t o step 5.

at the junctions board, the DC-DC converter, the
M C M , and the BCM m o d u l e . B
(cont'd)
12-93
IMA S f stem
8. Check the busbars (A) on the DC-DC converter and 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then measure
the M C M for bending or damaged insulation. the voltage between the battery module terminals
(A).
A
Are the busbars OK ?

Is there momentary voltage when the ignition
Y E S — G o t o step 9. switch is turned to ON (II)?
NO—Replace the busbar, then go to step 29. Y E S — G o t o step 15.
9. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). NO—Replace the battery module (see page 12-187),
then go to step 30.
10. Turn the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands f r o m
electrical shock. 16. Remove the DC-DC converter (see page 12-182).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and listen for a 17. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
clicking sound f r o m the relay inside the battery
module. 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is there a clicking sound? Is DTC P0AE1 (62) indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 12. . Y E S — G o t o step 42.
N O — G o t o step 19. NO—Replace the DC-DC converter (see page

12-94
19. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). 22. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector.
20. Measure the resistance between BCM module 23. Check for continuity between BCM module
connector terminals A13 and A28. connector terminals A13 and A28.
B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P) BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P)
„ | P R E (RED)
J3= _n I PRE (REP)
1 I 2 I 3 | 4 | 5 j 6 j 7 | 81 9 TT2i314 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 81" 9 112113114115|16|171181191201
1211221231X1//1X128|291301X1/133134|/136137138|/140
h2|J3|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
2l|22|23l/Vl/VM^
I CNTPG (GRY) CNTPG (GRY)
W i r e side of female terminals W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
is there 92.7- 113.3 Q ? Is there continuity?
YES—Goto step 26. YES—Repair short in the wire between the junction
board 12P connector and the BCM module (No. 13,
NO—Go to step 2 1 . No. 28), then go to step 30.
2 1 . Measure the resistance between BCM module NO—Replace the battery module (see page 12-187),
connector terminals A13 and A28. then go to step 30.
„ | P R E (REP)
1 I 2 | 3 I 4 | 5 I 61 7 | 8 1 9 1/111 |l2|i3|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
I CNTPG (GRY)
Is it lower (NO) or higher (YES) than a

92.7-113.3 Q?
YES—Goto step 24.
NO—Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
12-95
IMA System
25. Check for continuity between these terminals: 27. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector.
• BCM module connector terminal A13 and 28. Check for continuity between BCM module
junction board 12P connector terminal No. 7. connector terminal A13 and body ground.
• BCM module connector terminal A28 and
junction board 12P connector terminal No. 2. B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
_ n j PRE(RED)
1 I 21 3 j 4 I 5 I 6 1 7 j 81 9|/|111 |12|i3|14|15|16|17|18|19i20| PRE (RED)
|2l|22|23l/Vl/Vl^^ ,n, , , n
1 I 2 I 3 14 | 5 | 61 7 | 8 1 91/111 |12|i3|14|15|16|17|18|19|26r
I C N T P G (GRY)
l2ll22|23l/lAVl28|29^
A>K W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
@
y J U N C T I O N B O A R D 12P C O N N E C T O R
I C N T P G (GRY)
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 /
9 10 11 12
P R E (RED)
W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
YES—Repair short in the wire between the junction
YES—Replace the battery module (see page board 12P connector and the BCM module (A13),
12-187), then go to step 30. then go to step 30.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the junction NO—Replace the battery module (see page 12-187).
board 12P connector and the BCM module (A13,
A28), then go t o step 30. 29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
26. Check for continuity between BCM module 30. Reconnect all connectors.
3 1 . Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P) battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).

P R E (RED)
1 | 2 1 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 81,r>, 1, }l2|i3[14-|15|16|lT|18|19|gof,
n,
A
9 V\\
|2ilz2|23l/VlA^ 34. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC P0AE1 (62) indicated?
Wire side of female terminals YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the high voltage connector, the bypass
contactor, the DC-DC converter, the M C M , and the
Is there continuity? BCM module, then go to step 1.
Y E S — G o t o step 27. N O — G o t o step 35.
NO—Check for poor connections or loose terminals

at the junction board and the BCM module, then go
to step 36.
12-96
==rT/-:
35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AE1 (62) in 41. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AE1 (62) in
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
YES—-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 34, troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • was substituted, replace the original BCM module
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor DTCs were indicated in step 40, go to the indicated
connections or loose terminals at the high voltage D T C s troubleshooting. •
connector, the bypass contactor, the DC-DC
converter, the M C M , and the BCM module, then go NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
t o step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, connections or loose terminals at the high voltage
keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes connector, the bypass contactor, the DC-DC
on. converter, the M C M , and the BCM module. If the
BCM m o d u l e was updated, substitute a known-
36. Reconnect all connectors. good BCM module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If
the BCM module was substituted, go to step 42. If
37. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
38. Update the BCM module if it does not have the 42. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest
latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known-
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8). good MCM (see page 12-8).
39. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 43. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
Is DTC P0AE1 (62) indicated?

terminals at the high voltage connector, the bypass
BCM module. If the BCM module was updated,
(cont'd)
12-97
IMA S f stem
44. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. DTC POAEE (109): MCM Internal Circuit
Malfunction
Is DTC POAE1 (62) indicated?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose and review the genera! troubleshooting information
terminals at the high voltage connector, the bypass (see page 12-5).
BCM module. If the M C M was updated, substitute a 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
known-good M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If
the M C M was substituted, go to step 1. 2. Note the value of the MPI TEMPERATURE in the
NO—Go to step 45.
3. Start and stop the engine five times.
45. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0AE1 (62) in
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 4. Check the MPI TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS.
Does the MPI TEMPERATURE increase by 1.0 °F
Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is (0.5 °C)or more?
original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 44, time.
NO—Go to step 5.
connections or loose terminals at the high voltage 5. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest
connector, the bypass contactor, the DC-DC software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known-
converter, the M C M , and the BCM module. If the good MCM (see page 12-8).
M C M was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was 6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II) Is DTC POAEE (109) indicated?
step 1.
12-98
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POAEE (109) in DTC POAEF (110): MCM Internal Temperature
the DTCs MENU with the HDS. Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
Y E S — I f the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is (see page 12-5).
original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 2. Check the MPI VOLTAGE (MPI TEMPERATURE) in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at the M C M . If the Is there less than 1.79 V (13 °F (25 °C))?
MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was Y E S —Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates time.
until a result comes on. NO—Go to step 3.

Is DTC POAEF (110) indicated?

step 1.
NO—Go to step 5.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POAEF (110) in


original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other

MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
12-99
IMA S f stem
DTC POAFO (111): MCM internal Temperature DTC P1435 (58): Charge/Discharge Balance
Sensor Circuit High Voltage Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, NOTE:

and review the general troubleshooting information « Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
(see page 12-5). review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • If the 12 V battery is very low, or there is a problem in
the charging system, DTC P1435 (58) may be stored,
2. Check the MPI VOLTAGE (MPI TEMPERATURE) in and the charging system indicator may come on.
Is there more than 4.64 V (338 °F (170 °C))?
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
time.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
Y E S — G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known- NO—Go to step 3.
3. Connect a known-good 12 V battery to the 12 V
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. battery.
Is DTC POAFO (111) indicated? 4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose 5. Check under these conditions:

substitute a known-good MCM (see page 12-8), • Headlights on high beam
then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, go to • Blower fan at m a x i m u m speed
step 1. • Rear w i n d o w defogger on
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC POAFO (111) in

Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is


(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
12-100
6. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE 1 VOLTAGE DTC P1437 (41): MCM Circuit Shorted
through IMA BATTERY MODULE 11 VOLTAGE In
the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. NOTE:
• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
Is more than 8 V indicated in ail modules? review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
YES—Temporary lack of charging. The system is * Information marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) applies to
OK at this time. Start the engine, and hold It the '06-07 models.
between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in
P or N) until the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
displays at least three segments. •
NO—Charge and/or replace the 1.2 V battery. Turn
the ignition switch to ON (II), start the engine, and Is DTC P0AA6 (59), PI440 (57), or P15A5 (85)
watch the charging system indicator. If the indicated?
charging system indicator comes on and then goes
off after the engine starts, the system is OK at this YES—Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
time. Hold the engine speed between 3,500 and
4,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the IMA N O — G o t o step 3.
battery level gauge (BAT) displays at least three
segments. • 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1
minute.

YES—Goto step 6.
NO —If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

poor connections or loose terminals at the MCM. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 1.
10. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector.
11. Connect the BCM module connectors.
(cont'd)
12-101
IMA System

12. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II), then measure 21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1437 (41) in the
the voltage between M C M 20P connector terminal DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
No. 18, No. 19* and body ground w i t h i n 1 second.
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting •
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
/V / 14 17 18 19 20
IGA2-1 (RED) IGA2-2 (RED)*
converter and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the
©© screen Indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
Wire side of female terminals 22. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).

Is there battery voltage on both terminals?
24. Reinstall the IPU Hd (see page 12-180), then turn the
Y E S — G o t o step 22. battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
NO- 25. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest

• Repair the connection in the M C M connector, software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known-
then g o t o step 13. good M C M (see page 12-8).
• Repair open or short In the wire between the
No. 61 + B IMA 2 (10 A) fuse, M C M relay 2, and 26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1
the M C M , then go to step 13. minute.
13. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). 27. Start the engine, and let it Idle.
14. Reconnect all connectors. 28. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
15. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the Is DTC P1437 (41) indicated?
16. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). terminals at DC-DC converter and the M C M . If the
M C M w a s updated, substitute a known-good M C M
17. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
18. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 1
minute. N O — G o t o step 29.

terminals at the M C M , then go to step 1.
12-102
Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1437 (41) in the DTC PI440 (57): MCM Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
Does the screen indicate PASSED? ° Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
review the general troubleshooting information
YES—If the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is (see page 12-5).
complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the ° If the DTCs listed below are stored at the same time
original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other as DTC P1440 (57), troubleshoot DTC P1440 (57) first,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 28, then recheck for those DTCs.
• P0A5E (24), P0A5F (25): U Phase Motor Current
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor Sensor Circuit Low/High Voltage
connections or loose terminals at DC-DC converter • P0A61 (26), P0A62 (27): V Phase Motor Current
and the M C M . If the MCM was updated, substitute Sensor Circuit Low/High Voltage
a known-good M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. • P0A64 (28), P0A65 (29): W Phase Motor Current
If the MCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the Sensor Circuit Low/High Voltage
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the • P1437 (41): MCM Short Circuit
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on. • P1585 (30): Motor Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction
• P1586 (23): Battery Current Signal Circuit Problem
• P15A5 (85): Motor Current Sensor Circuit Malfunction
• P15A6 (86): U Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
• P15A7 (87): V Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
• P15A8 (88): W Phase Motor Current Sensor Circuit
Malfunction
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
2. Turn the headlights on high beam.

YES—Goto step 4.

poor connections or loose terminals at the M C M
and the motor stator. If the screen indicates NOT
(cont'd)
12-103
IMA System
6. Check the motor power cable connection (A) at the 9. Raise the harness holder. Remove the PDU cover
motor stator. (A).

9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
10. Check the motor power cable connection at the
NO—Repair the connection, then go to step 24. MCM.
7. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). Is the connection OK?
8. Check the M C M (A) and the BCM module (B) Y E S — G o t o step 11.
connections.
NO—Repair the connection, then go t o step 22.
11. Remove the motor power cables (A) f r o m the M C M .
NOTE: Wrap the motor power cables w i t h

insulating tape.
Y E S — G o t o step 9. 9.8 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
12-104
12. Check for continuity between motor power cables 14. Check for continuity between motor power cable
A and B, B and C, and C and A. terminals A and B, B and C, and C and A
individually.
is there continuity?
YES—Replace the motor power cables (see page
NO—Go to step 13. 12-189), then go to step 22.
13. Disconnect the motor power cable connector (A) NO—Replace the motor stator (see page 12-195),
(see page 12-3). then go to step 22.
NOTE: 15. Reconnect the motor power cable connector.

• Disconnecting the motor power cable connector
f r o m the motor stator (see page 12-3).
them w i t h a clean t o w e l . Do not use compressed
air.
(cont'd)
12-105
IMA System

16. Start the engine, and let it idle. Then measure the 20. Check for continuity between these terminals:
voltage between these terminals w i t h an AC
voltmeter: U terminal (A) Junction board
—terminal (D)
• The U phase terminal (A) and V phase terminal V terminal (B) Junction board
(B). —terminal (D)
• The W phase terminal (C) and V phase terminal W terminal (C) Junction board
(B) . —terminal (D)
• The U phase terminal (A) and W phase terminal Junction board U terminal (A)
(C) . + t e r m i n a l (E)
Junction board V terminal (B)
NOTE: + t e r m i n a l (E)
• W h e n using clamp-type voltmeter leads, be Junction board -H- W terminal (C)
careful not to touch any other terminals. + t e r m i n a l (E)
• Turn the battery module switch OFF.
Is each measurement about 27—48 V?
18. Remove the motor power cable f r o m the M C M .

NO—Replace the motor rotor (see page 12-192),

then go to step 2 1 .
12-106
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 34. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
22. Reconnect all connectors. 35. Turn the headlights on high beam.
23. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the 36. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC PI440 (57) indicated?
25. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). terminals at the M C M and the motor stator. If the
26. Start the engine, and let it Idle for 1 minute. and motor stator (see page 12-8), then go to step
34. If the M C M was substituted, go to step 1.
27. Turn the headlights on high beam.
Is DTC PI440 (57) indicated? DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose Does the screen indicate PASSED?
terminals at the MCM and the motor stator, then go
to step 1. Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—Go to step 29. original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other
29. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1440 (57) in the go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. IS
Does the screen indicate PASSED? connections or loose terminals at the MCM and the
motor stator. If the MCM was updated, substitute a
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other known-good M C M (see page 12-8), then go to step
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 28, 34. If the M C M was substituted, go to step 1. if the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 34.

connections or loose terminals at the M C M and the
motor stator, then go to step 1. If the screen

12-107
IMA S f stem

DTC PI446 (74): Battery Module Individual 10. Using the IMA BATTERY MODULE VOLTAGES you
Voltage Input Deviation noted in step 5, compare the voltages between the
f o l l o w i n g BCM module connector terminals and the
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data, listed IMA BATTERY MODULE VOLTAGES in the
and review the general troubleshooting information DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
(see page 12-5).
• B6 and B14, compared to IMA BATTERY
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). MODULE 1 VOLTAGE
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. MODULE 2 VOLTAGE
Is DTC P0A7F (78) indicated? MODULE 3 VOLTAGE
YES—Do the troubleshooting for DTC P0A7F (78) MODULE 4 VOLTAGE
(see page 12-65). • B4 and B12, compared to IMA BATTERY
- MODULE 5 VOLTAGE
NO—Go to step 3. • B12 and B11, compared to IMA BATTERY
MODULE 6 VOLTAGE
3. Start the engine, and wait for 1 minute. • B 7 a n d B1, compared to IMA BATTERY
MODULE 7 VOLTAGE
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1446 (74) in the • B1 and B8, compared to IMA BATTERY
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. MODULE 8 VOLTAGE
Does the screen indicate FAILED? MODULE 9 VOLTAGE
YES—Go to step 5. MODULE 10 VOLTAGE
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent MODULE 11 VOLTAGE
B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R B (14P)
poor connections or loose terminals at the battery
module and the BCM module. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 1. (BLU/RED) (YEL) (WHT) (GRN/RED) (BLK) (RED)
5. Record the value of the IMA BATTERY MODULE 1

VOLTAGE through the IMA BATTERY MODULE 11 1 2 3 4 5 6
VOLTAGE in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. i—i

7 8 9
/
11 12 13 14
VHB7 / VHB11 / VHB5 \ VHB1

7. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). (BLU/YEL) / (BLU) / (GRN/WHT) \ (GRN/YEL)
VHB9 VHB6 VHB3
(GRN/BLK) (PNK) (GRN)
9. Disconnect BCM module connector B (14P)

Is there more than 1 V difference between the
BCM module measurements and the DATA LIST
measurements?
YES —Go to step 19.

then go to step 11.
12-108
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
12. Reconnect all connectors. •IsDTC P1446 (74) indicated?
13. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the YES—Check for poor connections or loose
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). terminals at the battery module and the BCM
• 12-8), then g o t o step 23. If the BCM module was
15. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). substituted, go to step 1.
16. Start the engine, and wait for 1 minute. NO—Go to step 25.
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1446 (74) in the
terminals at the battery module and the BCM Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
module, then go to step 1. troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
N O — G o t o step 18. (see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1446 (74) in the D T C s troubleshooting. •
Does the screen indicate PASSED? connections or loose terminals at the battery
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other was updated, substitute a known-good BCM
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17, module (see page 12-8), then go to step 23. If the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • BCM module was substituted, g o t o step 1. If the
module and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
16.

23. Start the engine, and wait for 1 minute.
12-109
IMA S f stem

DTC P1448 (63): IPU Module Fan Problem 10. Connect IPU module fan 4P connector terminal
No. 3 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data,
and review the general troubleshooting Information I P U M O D U L E F A N 4P C O N N E C T O R
(see page 12-5).
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 1 2 3 4

F A N C N T L (LT B L U )
JUMPER WIRE
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P0A78 (32)

(see page 12-64).
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 11. Check for continuity between BCM module
4. Do the IPU MODULE FAN DRIVE In the
INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS. B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
Does the screen indicate OUT OF RANGE?
1 | 2 | 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |*9 1/111 |12il3|14h5|16|17|18|19|20|
NO—If the screen indicates CONDITION IS
NORMAL, Intermittent failure, the system is OK at I F A N C N T L (LT B L U )
this time. Check for poor connections or loose

@
terminals at the IPU module fan and the BCM
module.•
6. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). Is there continuity?
7. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). Y E S — G o t o step 12.
8. Disconnect the IPU module fan 4P connector. NO—Repair open In the wire between the IPU
module fan and the BCM module (A30), then go to
9. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). step 26.
12. Disconnect the j u m p e r wire f r o m the IPU module

fan 4P connector.
12-110
13. Check for continuity between BCM module 15. Check for continuity between BCM module
connector terminal A17 and body ground. connector terminal A17 and body g r o u n d .
BCM M O D U L E CONNECTOR A (40P) B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
NFAN (PUR) N F A N (PUR)

43= 43= =£L
1 1 2 1 8 1 4 [ 5 | 6 [ 7 [ 8 ] 9 l / l 11112|13|14|115|16|117|18|1iQlgOl 1 I 2 I 3 | 4 | 5 I 61 7 I 8 [ 9 M 1 1 I l 2 l l 3 l l 4 l 1 5 l l 6 l l 7 l l 8 | 1 9 | 2 0 l
l2l|22l23|/My1Xl28|29l30MXl33l34|yl36|37l38M 121 l22|23lXly1XM28l29l30lXM33|34M36|37l38l/1^
YES—Repair short in the wire between the IPU YES—Go to step 16.
step 25. NO—Repair open in the wire between the IPU
NO—Go to step 14. step 25.
14. Connect IPU module fan 4P connector terminal 16. Disconnect the jumper wire f r o m the IPU module
No. 2 to body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire. fan 4P connector.
I P U M O D U L E F A N 4P C O N N E C T O R 17. Check for continuity between IPU module fan 4P

IPU M O D U L E F A N 4P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4
NFAN (PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
1 2 3 4
G N D (BLK)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the IPU

module fan and G902, then go to step 25.
(cont'd)
12-111
IMA System
18. Reconnect BCM module connector A (40P). 24. Do the IPU MODULE FAN DRIVE in the
INSPECTION MENU w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate OUT OF RANGE?
20. Measure the voltage between IPU module fan 4P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. Y E S - G o t o step 32.
IPU MODULE F A N 4P C O N N E C T O R
N O - l f screen indicates CONDITION IS NORMAL,
replace the IPU module fan (see page 12-188), then
go to step 25.

1 2 3 4
IGA2 (RED) 26. Reconnect all connectors.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 28. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

NO—Repair open in the wire between the IPU
module fan and M C M relay 2, then go to step 25. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the IPU module fan and the BCM
21. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). module, then go to step 1.
22. Connect IPU module fan 4P connector terminals N O — G o t o step 3 1 .

No. 2 and No. 3 w i t h a jumper wire.
IPU M O D U L E F A N 4P C O N N E C T O R

1 2 3 4 Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30,
N F A N (PUR) F A N C N T L (LT BLU) go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
JUMPER WIRE NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the IPU module
fan and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If the
W i r e side of female terminals screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
12-112
32. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC P1570 (66): Battery Module Individual
Voltage Problem
34. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the and review the general troubleshooting information
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). (see page 12-5).
35. Update the BCM module if it does not have the 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8). 2. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1570 (66) in the
Y E S —Goto step 4.
terminals at the IPU module fan and the BCM NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 3. If
module. If the BCM module was updated, the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
substitute a known-good BCM module (see page 1.
substituted, go to step 1. 3. Check the IMA BATTERY MODULE 1 VOLTAGE
through IMA BATTERY MODULE 11 VOLTAGE in
N O — G o t o step 37. the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
37. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1448 (63) in the Is there more than 15 V on at least one module?
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Does the screen indicate PASSED? time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
Y E S —If the BCM module was updated,
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module N O — G o t o step 4.
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
DTCs troubleshooting. • 5. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor 6. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
connections or loose terminals at IPU module fan
and the BCM module. If the BCM module was 7. Check the terminal connections at BCM module
updated, substitute a known-good BCM module connector B (14P).
(see page 12-8), then recheck. if the BCM module
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates Are the connections OK?
until a result comes on. Y E S — G o t o step 8.
8. Disconnect BCM module connector B (14P).
(cont'd)
12-113
IMA System
9. Measure the voltage between these BCM module 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector terminals:
B 6 a n d B14
614 and B5 12. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
B 5 a n d B13 battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
B 1 3 a n d B4
B 4 a n d B12 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
B 1 2 a n d B11
B7andB1 14. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
B l and B8
B8 and B2 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
B2 and B9
B9 and B3 Is DTC P1570 (66) indicated?
BCM M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R B (14P)
terminals at the battery module and the BCM
(BLU/RED) (YEL) (WHT) (GRN/RED) (BLK) (RED)
1 2 3 i—i
4 5 6
7 8 9
/ 11 12 13 14
/
VHB7 / VHB11 /VHB5 \ VHB1 Does the screen indicate PASSED?

(BLU/YEL) / (BLU) / (GRN/WHT) \ (GRN/YEL)
VHB9 VHB6 VHB3
Are all measurements about 7.0 V or more? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Y E S — G o t o step 17. module and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
NO—Replace the battery module (see page 12-187), ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
then go to step 10.

12-114
WW 1
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P1574 (68): Battery Module Temperature
Signal Circuit Malfunction
NOTE:
YES—-Check for poor connections or loose • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
terminals at the battery module and the BCM review the general troubleshooting information
module. If the BCM module was updated, (see page 12-5).
substitute a known-good BCM module (see page • If the IPU module fan duct is blocked, DTC P1574 (68)
12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module was may be detected.
NO—Go to step 2 1 .
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Is DTC PI448 (63) indicated?
Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated, Y E S - D o the troubleshooting for DTC P1448 (63)
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module (see page 12-110).
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or NO—Go to step 4.
DTCs troubleshooting. • 4. * Record the value of IMA BATTERY TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1, IMA BATTERY TEMPERATURE
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor SENSOR 2, and IMA BATTERY TEMPERATURE
connections or loose terminals at the battery SENSOR 3 in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM 5. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. If
module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM the SOC is higher than 65 %, start the engine
module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen several times until the SOC decreases to less than
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition 65 %.
switch ON (II) until result comes on.
7. Start the engine, and hold it between 3,500 rpm

and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the SOC
increases to above 70 %.
8. Compare the value of IMA BATTERY

TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1, IMA BATTERY
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2, and IMA BATTERY
TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3 in the DATA LIST w i t h
the HDS to the values noted in step 4.
Do any of the values differ 1.0 °F (0.5 °C) or

more?

NO—Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
12-115
IMA System
9. Check the IPU module air duct and the IPU module DTC P1575 (12): MCM Voltage Malfunction
fan for disconnections, damage, or obstructions.
NOTE:
Are the IPU module air duct and the IPU module • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
fan OK? review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
YES —Replace the battery module (see page • If the battery module switch is turned OFF while the
12-187), then g o t o step 10. ignition switch is ON (II), DTC P1575 (12) may be
detected.
NO—Repair the IPU module air duct or IPU module
fan as needed, then go to step 10. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). Is DTC P0AE1 (62) indicated?
12. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Y E S - D o the troubleshooting for DTC P0AE1 (62)
(see page 12-93).
NO—Go to step 3.
YES —Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the battery module and the BCM 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait 1
module, then go to step 1. minute.
N O — G o t o step 13. 4. Compare the MPI VOLTAGE and the TOTAL

VOLTAGE OF ALL IMA BATTERY MODULES in the
13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1574 (68) in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is there more than a 10 V difference between the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? MPI VOLTAGE and the TOTAL VOLTAGE OF
ALL IMA BATTERY MODULES?
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12, YES —Goto step 8.
go to the indicated DTCs t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . ^
connections or loose terminals at the battery 5. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
module and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the 6. Start the engine, and hold it between 3,500 rpm
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on. and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the SOC
changes to 70 %.
12-116
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1575 (12) in the 15. Check for continuity between BCM module
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. connector terminals A14 and A28.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? BCM M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
YES—Go to step 2 1 .
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent | CNT (BLK)

0
failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for 1 I 2 [ 3 1 4 j 5 I 6 I 7 | 8 1 91/111 |l2|J3|l4|15|16|17|18|19|2di

poor connections or loose terminals at the M C M , 21|22|23|/1/1/1^
the high voltage connector, and the BCM module. If CNTPG (GRY)
3.
8. Record the value of the MPI VOLTAGE in the DATA W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
LIST with the HDS.
9. Compare the MPI VOLTAGE and the TOTAL Is there continuity?

VOLTAGE OF ALL IMA BATTERY MODULES in the
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. Y E S — G o t o step 16.
Is there more than a 10 V difference between the N O — G o t o step 19.

MPI VOLTAGE and the TOTAL VOLTAGE OF
ALL IMA BATTERY MODULES? 16. Check for continuity between BCM module

CNT (BLK)
11. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 1 I 21 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 1
n91X111 |12li3|14|15l16|l7|l8ll9l20|
n. ;
121 [ 2 2 | 2 3 1 X 1 X M X 1 2 8 1 2 9 ^
13. Check the high voltage cable (orange cable)

connection and busbar connection on the junction
board. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

(cont'd)
12-117
IMA Sf stem
18. Check f o r continuity between BCM module 20. Check for continuity between these terminals:
connector terminal A14 and body g r o u n d .
BCM M O D U L E CONNECTOR A ( 4 0 P )
junction board 12P connector terminal No. 1.
junction board 12P connector terminal No. 2.
CNT (BLK) BCM M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
1 I 2 l 3 1 4 1 5 I 6 1 7 [ 8 1 9 \ / \ \ 1|12|i3|14|15|16|17|18lli 9)201 | CNT (BLK)

1 2 1 1 2 2 1 2 3 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 X 1 2 8 1 2 9 1 3 0 1 X 1 X 1 3 3 1 3 4 | ^ 1 3 6 [ 37|381^140 1 I 2 | 3 1 4 | 5 1 6 | 7 | 81 9 l / l 111l2ll3ll4ll5|16|l7l18ll9l20l
I2ll22l23ly1/1y1yl28l29l30ly1yl33l34ixi36|37l38|yl40
1CNTPG (GRY)
CNT (BLK)I I
1 2 3 4 5 6
/
7 9 10 11 12
YES—Repair short t o ground in the w i r e between
the junction board 12P connector and the BCM
module (A14), then go t o step 29.
then go t o step 29. YES—Replace the battery module (see page
NO—Repair open in the wire between the junction
board 12P connector and the BCM module (A4,
A28), then go to step 29.
24. Check the BCM module connector terminals.
Are the terminals OK?
NO—Repair the BCM module connector terminals,

then go to step 29.
26. Record the values of the IMA BATTERY MODULE 1

VOLTAGE through the IMA BATTERY MODULE 11
VOLTAGE in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
12-118
27. Disconnect BCM module connector B (14P). 29. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
28. Using the IMA BATTERY MODULE VOLTAGES you 30. Reconnect all connectors.
noted in step 26, compare the voltage between the
following BCM module connector terminals and the 3 1 . Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
listed IMA BATTERY MODULE VOLTAGES in the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
MODULE 1 VOLTAGE 33. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
• B 1 4 a n d B5, compared to IMA BATTERY
MODULE 2 VOLTAGE 34. Check the SOC in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
MODULE 3 VOLTAGE 35. Start the engine, and hold it between 3,500 rpm
• B13 and B4, compared to IMA BATTERY and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the SOC
MODULE 4 VOLTAGE is 70 %.
MODULE 5 VOLTAGE 36. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
• B12 and B11 compared to IMA BATTERY
MODULE 6 VOLTAGE Is DTC P1575 (12) indicated?
MODULE 7 VOLTAGE YES—Check for poor connections or loose
• B1 and B8, compared to IMA BATTERY terminals at the M C M , the high voltage contactor,
MODULE 8 VOLTAGE and the BCM module, then go to step 1.
MODULE 9 VOLTAGE N O — G o t o step 37.
MODULE 10 VOLTAGE 37. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1575 (12) in the
• B9 and B3, compared to IMA BATTERY DTCs MENU with the HDS.
MODULE 11 VOLTAGE
B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R B (14P)

(BLU/RED) (YEL) (WHT) (GRN/RED) (BLK) (RED) Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 36,
h 2 3 j - 1 _
4 5 6 NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the M C M , the
7 8 9
/ 11 12 13 14
high voltage connector, and the BCM module, then
VHB7 / VHB11 / VHB5 \ VHB1 COMPLETED, go to step 34.
(BLU/YEL) / (BLU) / (GRN/WHT) \ (GRN/YEL)
VHB9 VHB6 VHB3
Is there more than a 1 V difference between the 40. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
BCM module measurement and the DATA LIST battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
measurement?
Y E S — G o t o step 38. latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a
NO—Go to step 47.
(cont'd)
12-119
IMA System
42. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 49. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
44. Start the engine, and hold it between 3,500 r p m software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known-
and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N) until the SOC good M C M (see page 12-8).
is 70 %.
5 1 . Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
Is DTC P1575 (12) Indicated?
53. Start the engine, and hold it between 3,500 rpm
YES—Check for poor connections or loose and 4,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N) until the SOC
terminals at the M C M , the high voltage connector, is 70 %.
and the BCM module. If the BCM module was
updated, substitute a known-good BCM module 54. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
(see page 12-8), then g o t o step 43. If the BCM
module was substituted, go to step 1. Is DTC P1575 (12) indicated?
N O — G o t o step 46. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the M C M , the high voltage connector,
46. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1575 (12) in the and the BCM module. If the M C M was updated,
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. substitute a known-good M C M (see page 12-8),
then go to step 5 1 . If the MCM was substituted, go
Does the screen indicate PASSED? to step 1.
Y E S — I f the BCM module w a s updated, N O — G o t o step 55.

was substituted, replace the original BCM module 55. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1575 (12) in the
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
DTCs troubleshooting. • Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
connections or loose terminals at the M C M , the complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the
high voltage connector, and the BCM module. If the original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other
BCM module was updated, substitute a known- Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 54,
good BCM module (see page 12-8), then go to step go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. Hi
43. If the BCM module was substituted, go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
step 43. connections or loose terminals at the M C M , the
high voltage connector, and the BCM module. If the
47. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). M C M was updated, substitute a known-good M C M
(see page 12-8), then go to step 52. If the M C M was
48. Reconnect all connectors. substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
12-120
DTC P1585 f30); Motor Current Sensor Circuit 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1585 (30) in the
Malfunction DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. -
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
is DTC P0A5E (24), P0A5F (25), P0A61 (26), NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
P0A62 (27), P0A64 (28), or P0A65 (29) indicated? connections or loose terminals at the M C M . If the
M C M w a s updated, substitute a known-good M C M
Y E S — G o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
substituted, g o t o step 1. If the screen indicates
NO—Goto step3. NOT COMPLETED, keep the Ignition switch ON (II)


the screen indicates,NOT COMPLETED, keep the
engine idling until a result comes o n .


then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, g o t o
step 1.
12-121
IMA S f stem

DTC P158S (23): Battery Current Sensor 8. Check the connection at the junction board 12P
Signal Malfunction connector.
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data, Is the connection OK?
(see page 12-5). YES—Goto step 9.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO—Repair the connection, then g o t o step: 15.
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 9. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
Are any DTCs except DTC P1586(23) and 10. Check for continuity.between body ground and
P0A7F (78) indicated? BCM module connector terminals A16 and A36
Individually.
YES—Go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
NO—Go to step 3.
3. Test-drive the vehicle using w i d e open throttle for

i S O C ( + ) (PUR)
at least 2 seconds, then decelerate w i t h light JI, A , n.
braking. 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 1
} 1,1 » I j* L L L L1 Y\\ 112]18114115[16|17118|19[20l
|2l|22|23|/1/4/^
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1586 (23) in the I S O C ( - ) (LT G R N )

YES—Go t o step 5.
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent Is there continuity?

failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check f o r
poor connections or loose terminals at the battery YES—Goto step 11.
current sensor and the BCM module. If the screen
Indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3. NO—Go to step 13.
12-122
11, Disconnect the junction board 12P connector. 14. Check for continuity between these terminals:
12. Check for continuity between body ground and • Junction board 12P connector terminal No. S a n d
BCM module connector terminals A16 and A36 BCM module connector terminal A16.
individually. • Junction board 12P connector terminal No. 4 and
BCM module connector terminal A36.
BCM M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P) B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
] ISOC (+) (PUR)

1 I 21 3 14 | 5 | 617 1 81 9 1 / | 1 1 |l2|i3|l4|15|16|17|l8l19|2Qr
i S O C (+) (PUR)
•Ji n. |2l|22l23lA/i/l/l^^
1 I 2 1 3 | 4 | 5 | 61 7 | 81 91/111 |12|13|14l15|16|117|18HI9|g0[ ISOC (—HLT GRN) 1
l2l|22l23My1/1Xl28l29l30l//l33|34|/36l37|38|/40
ISOC ( - ) ( L T GRN)
ISOC (+) (PUR) i S O C ( - ) (LT G R N )
1 2 3 i 5 6
7
/
9 10 11 12
YES—Repair short in the wire between the BCM Is there continuity?

module (A16, A36) and the junction board 12P
connector, then go to step 15. Y E S — G o t o step 23.
NO—-Replace the battery module (see page 12-187), NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the BCM
then go t o step 15. module (A16, A36) and the junction board 12P
connector, then go to step 15.
(cont'd)
12-123
IMA S f stem
17. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the 26. Test-drive the vehicle using wide open throttle for
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). at least 2 seconds, then decelerate w i t h 'light
braking.
20. Test-drive the vehicle using w i d e open throttle for
at least 2 seconds, then decelerate w i t h light YES—Check for poor connections or loose
braking. terminals at the battery current sensor and the
2 1 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. substitute a known-good BCM module (see page
12-8), then go to step 26. If the BCM module was
Is DTC PI586 (23) indicated? substituted, go to step 1.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose N O — G o t o step 28.

terminals at the battery current sensor and the
BCM module, then go to step 1. 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1586 (23) In the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
Does the screen indicate PASSED? was substituted, replace the original BCM module
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other DTCs were indicated In step 27, go to the Indicated
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 , DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor connections or loose terminals at the battery
connections or loose terminals at the battery current sensor and the BCM module. If the BCM
current-sensor and the BCM module, then go to module was updated, substitute a known-good
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go BCM module (see page 12-8), then go to step 26. If
to step 20. the BCM module was substituted, go to step 1. If
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o step
23. Reconnect all connectors. 26.

12-124
DTC P15A4 {81): A/C Compressor Driver Are the connections OK?
Relay Stays Activated
NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data,
and review the general troubleshooting information NO—Repair the connections, then go to step 15.
(see page 12-5). 9. Disconnect the A/C compressor power cable

connector (A).
NOTE:
2. Make sure the ambient temperature is above 41 °F • If the A/C compressor power cable connector
terminals are wet, dry them w i t h a clean towel.
(5°C). Do not use compressed air.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes. tester, and wear gloves.
4. Turn the A/C on, and set it to 72 T (22 °C).

Y E S — G o t o step 6. .

poor connections or loose terminals at the A/C
compressor driver and the BCM module. If the

10. Check for continuity between A/C compressor
7. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). power cable terminals B and C, C and D, and D and
B individually.
8. Remove the cover (A). Check the connections at the
A/C compressor power cable connector (B) in the Is there continuity?
engine compartment.
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf-m, NO—Replace the A/C compressor (see page
7.2 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
12-125
IMA S f stem
11. Reconnect the A/C compressor power cable. 15. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). 16. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
13. Disconnect the A/C compressor power connector
(A) f r o m the A/C compressor driver. 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
19. Make sure the ambient temperature is above 41 °F

(5 <C).
21. Turn the A/C o n , and set it 72 °F (22 °C), then let the
engine idle for 1 minute.

terminals at the BCM module and the A/C
compressor driver, then go to step 1.
14. Check for continuity between A/C compressor
power cable terminals A and B, B and C, and C and NO—Go to step 23.
A Individually.
YES—Troubleshooting Is complete. If any other

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated In step 22,
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor

and the A/C compressor driver, then go to step 1. If
the screen Indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
19.


12-126
DTC P15A5 (85): Motor Current Sensor Circuit 6. At idle, individually check the U PHASE MOTOR
Malfunction CURRENT SENSOR, V PHASE MOTOR CURRENT
SENSOR, and W PHASE MOTOR CURRENT
NOTE: Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data, SENSOR in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
(see page 12-5). Do the values vary from OA?
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds. Y E S — G o t o step 25.
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. N O — G o t o step 7.
Is DTC P0A5E (24), P0A5F (25), P0A61 (26), 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
P0A62 (27), P0A64 (28), P1440 (57), P0A3F (89),
and/or P0A65 (29) indicated? 8. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
YES—Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. 9. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
N O — G o t o step 3. 10. Lift the harness holder. Remove the PDU cover (A)
and the motor power cables (B) f r o m the M C M .
3. Test-drive the vehicle using wide open throttle for
at least 2 seconds, then decelerate w i t h light NOTE: Wrap the motor power cables with
braking. insulating tape.
B

poor connections or loose terminals at the motor
power cable, the motor stator, and the M C M . If the
5. Do the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION CALIBRATION in

the IMA ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate COMPLETE? 9.8 N m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
N O - D o the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION

CALIBRATION (see page 1 2 - 6 ) . •
(cont'd)
12-127
IMA S f stem
11. Disconnect the motor power cable connector (A) Is there more than 350 kQ?
f r o m the motor stator (see page 12-3).
NOTE;
• Disconnecting the motor power cable connector NO—Replace the motor power cable (see page
f r o m the motor stator (see page 12-3). 12-189), then go to step 18.
t h e m w i t h a clean t o w e l . Do not use compressed 13. Reconnect all connectors.
air.


A
at least 2 seconds, then decelerate w i t h light
braking.
YES—If the M C M was updated, substitute a known-

good MCM (see page 12-8), then go to step 16. If
the MCM was substituted, replace the motor stator
12. Measure the resistance between motor power
cable terminals A and B, B and C, and C and A NO—If the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
individually. complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the
NOTE; Use the 250 V range of your insulated Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
resistance tester, and wear gloves. indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
12-128
2 1 . Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). Is DTC P15A5 (85) indicated?
22. Test-drive the vehicle using wide open throttle for YES—Check for poor connections or loose
at least 2 seconds, then decelerate using light terminals at the motor power cable, the M C M , and
braking. the motor stator, If the M C M was updated,
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. then g o t o step 28. If the BCM module was
substituted, go t o step 1.
terminals at the motor power cable, the M C M , and 30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P15A5 (85) in the
the motor stator, then go to step 1. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 24. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P15A5 (85) in the Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated step 29,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23, NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • connections or loose terminals at the motor power
cable, the M C M , and the motor stator. If the M C M
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor was updated, substitute a known-good M C M
connections or loose terminals at the motor power (see page 12-8), then go to step 28. If the M C M was
cable, the M C M , and the motor stator, then go to substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go NOT COMPLETED, go to step 28.
to step 22.


at least 2 seconds, then decelerate using light
braking.
12-129
IMA S f stem
DTC Troubleshooting, (cont'd)
DTC P15A6 (86): U Phase Motor Current 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P15A6 (86) in the
Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
(see page 12-5). Y E S — I f the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Is DTC P0A5E (24), and/or P0A5F (25) NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
indicated? connections or loose terminals at the M C M , the
• high voltage connector, and the BCM module. If the
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P0A5E (24) M C M was updated, substitute a known-good M C M
(see page 12-58) and/or DTC P0A5F (25) (see page (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
12-59). substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NO—Goto step3. until a result comes on.


the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o t o step
1.


step 1.
12-130
Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
complete. If the M C M w a s substituted, replace the
Is DTC P0A61 (26) and/or P0A62 (27) indicated? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P0A61 (26) M C M was updated, substitute a known-good M C M
(see page 12-60) and/or DTC P0A62 (27) (see page (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was
N O — G o t o step 3. until a result comes on.

NO —If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

1.


step 1.
12-131
IMA S f stem
Sensor Circuit Malfunction DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Is DTC P0A64 (28) and/or P0A65 (29) indicated? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC P0A64 (28) MCM was updated, substitute a known-good MCM
(see page 12-62) and/or DTC P0A65 (29) (see page (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was
N O — G o t o step 3. until a result comes on.


1.


step 1.
12-132
DTC P15AA (93): Motor Rotor Position Not 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Learned
and review the general troubleshooting information 11. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute.
(see page 12-5).
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. Is DTC P15AA (93) indicated?
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to YES—Check for poor connections or loose
ON (ll). terminals at the motor rotor position sensor and
the M C M , then go to step 1.
Are any DTC(s) except P15AA (93) indicated?
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P15AA (93) in
Y E S — G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 6. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
6. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
7. Do the MOTOR ROTOR POSITION CALIBRATION in g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
the IMA ADJUSTMENT MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate COMPLETE? connections or loose terminals at the motor rotor
position sensor and the M C M , then go to step 1. If
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. • the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 11.
NO—Check for poor connections at the motor rotor
position sensor and the M C M . If needed, repair the
connections, then go to step 8.
12-133
I M A S f stem
DTC P1629 (79): Battery Current Sensor 11. Check for continuity between BCM module
Circuit Malfunction connector terminal A5 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)

{see page 12-5).
I V C C I S O C (BRN)
11 j 21 3 14 | 5 I 61 7 I 81 91/111 I l 2 i 1 3 l l 4 h 5 l 1 6 | l 7 | l 8 | l 9 | 2 0 |
1121 | 2 2 l 2 3 l A / M X l 2 8 l 2 9 ^
2. Check the BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR SUPPLY
VOLTAGE in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Y E S - G o t o step 3. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
at the battery current sensor and the BCM
module.• YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between
the junction board 12P connector and the BCM
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). module (A5), then go to step 13.
4. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). NO—Go to step 19.
5. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect the junction board 12P connector. 13. Reconnect all connectors.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
8. Check the BATTERY CURRENT SENSOR SUPPLY
VOLTAGE in the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is there less than 4.0 V? 16. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
YES—Goto step 9. 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO—Replace the battery module (see page 12-187), Is DTC PI629 (79) indicated?
then go to step 12.
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). terminals at the battery current sensor and the
12-134
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1629 (79) in the 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1629 (79) in the
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES—If the BCM module was updated,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated In step 17, troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • was substituted, replace the original BCM module
NO—If the screen Indicates'FAILED, check for poor DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 , go to the indicated
connections or loose terminals at the battery DTCs troubleshooting. •
current sensor and the BCM module, then go to
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes connections or loose terminals at the battery
on. current sensor and the BCM module. If the BCM
module was updated, substitute a known-good
19. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the BCM module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). BCM module was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
20. Update the BCM module if it does not have the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
is DTC P1629 (79) indicated?

terminals at the battery current sensor and the
12-135
IMA S f stem
DTC P1673 (22): MCM Relay Stays Activated 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
BCM module connector terminal A 1 1 .
NOTE; Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data,
and review the general troubleshooting information B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
(see page 12-5).

I G H L D (ORN) |~~^
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then w a i t at 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 I 5 | 61 7 | 81 91/111 )12| 13|14|15|16117|18|19|20| |
least 30 seconds. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) l2ll22l23lA/Vl/l28l29^
again.

YES—Go to step 4. Is there continuity?
NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent YES—Repair short to ground the wire between
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check f o r M C M relay 1 and the BCM module (A11), then go to
poor connections or loose terminals at M C M relay step 10.
1 and the BCM module. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 2. N O — G o t o step 9.
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Test M C M relay 1 (see page 22-64).
5. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). Is the relay OK?
6. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). Y E S — G o t o step 17.
7. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). NO—Replace M C M relay 1, then go to step 10.
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait at

least 30 seconds, then turn the ignition switch to
ON (II).
12-136
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1673 (22) in the
terminals at MCM relay 1 and the BCM module, Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
then go to step 1. troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
N O — G o t o step 16. (see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or
DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 , g o t o the indicated
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1673 (22) in the D T C s troubleshooting. •
Does the screen indicate PASSED? connections or loose terminals at MCM relay 1 and
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other substitute the BCM module (see page 12-8), then go
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15, to step 20. If the BCM module was substituted, go
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 20.
connections or loose terminals at M C M relay 1 and
the BCM module, then go to step 1. If the screen

20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait at

least 30 seconds, then turn the ignition switch to
ON (II).

terminals at MCM relay 1 and the BCM module. If
the BCM module was updated, substitute a known-
good BCM module (see page 12-8), then go to
step 20. If the BCM module was substituted, go to
step 1.
12-137
IMA S f stem
DTC P16C3 (31): DC-DC Converter 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Temperature Sensor Circuit Malfunction
Is DTC P16C3 (31) indicated?
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and YES—Check for poor connections or loose
review the general troubleshooting information terminals at the DC-DC converter and the BCM
(see page 12-5). module, then go to step 1.
• If the IPU module fan duct is blocked, DTC P16C3 (31)
may be detected. N O — G o t o step 9.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P16C3 (31) in the
Is DTC U1220 (34) or U1221 (35) indicated?
YES—Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8,
3. Check the DC-DC CONVERTER TEMPERATURE in connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
the DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. converter and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
Is it more than 419 °F (215 °C), or less than ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
-40°F (-40 °C) indicated ?

time.B
5. Check the IPU module air duct and the IPU module
fan for disconnections, damage, or obstructions.
Are the IPU module air duct and the IPU module
fan OK?
YES—Replace the DC-DC converter (see page

NO—Repair the IPU module air duct or the IPU

module fan as necessary, then go to step 6.
12-138
DTC U0028 (107): F-CAN Malfunction (BUS- 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
OFF (MCM))
NOTE;
• To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA
procedure, j u m p the SCS with the HDS and read the SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
codes and read the HM code. Is DTC U0028 (107) indicated?
review the general troubleshooting information YES—Check for poor connections or loose
(see page 12-5). terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0028 (107) in
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
SYSTEM with the HDS.
Is DTC U0028 (107) indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 4. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8,
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
' at the PCM and the MCM. • connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the
BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. if the
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
Is DTC 1)0028 (108) indicated?
NO—Go to step 10.

Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC U0028

(see page 11-164).
NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

symptom/indication goes away w i t h an updated
PCM, go to step 6. If the symptom/indication goes
away w i t h a known-good PCM, replace the original
(cont'd)
12-139
IMA S f stem
10. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest DTC U0028 (108): F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-
software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known- OFF (BCM Module))
NOTE:
11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA • To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting
SYS I EM w i t h the HDS. procedure, j u m p the SCS w i t h the HDS and read the
Is DTC U0028 (107) indicated? codes and read the HM code.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose review the general troubleshooting information
terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the (see page 12-5).
MCM. If the M C M was updated, substitute a known-
good M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
M C M was substituted, go to step 1.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0028 (107) in SYSTEM with the HDS.
YES—If the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 11, at the PCM, the BCM module, and the M C M . H
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor SYSTEM with the HDS.
connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the
BCM module, and the M C M . If the M C M was Is DTC U0028 (107) indicated?
updated, substitute a known-good M C M (see page
. 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, go ' Y E S — G o t o step 5.
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes N O — G o t o step 10.
on.
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC U0028

(see page 11-164).
NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

12-140
m
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (11). 10. Update the BCM module if it does not have the
7. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). known-good BCM .module (see page 12-8).
8. Check for IMA system Temporary DTCs or DTCs in 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA
the IMA SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC U0028 (108) indicated? Is DTC U0028 (108) indicated?
terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
MCM, then go to step 1. M C M . If the BCM module was updated, substitute a
N O — G o t o step 9. , recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to
step 1.
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. N O — G o t o step 12.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 12. M o n i t o r t h e OBD STATUS for DTC U0028 (108) in
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the was substituted, replace the original BCM module
BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the (see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the DTCs were indicated in step 11, go to theindicated
ignition switch ON (ll) until a result comes on. DTCs troubleshooting. •

BCM module, and the M C M . If the BCM module
module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
switch ON (ll) until a result comes on.
12-141
IMA S f stem

DTC U0037 (98): I MA-CAN Malfunction (BUS- 10. Check for continuity between these terminals:
OFF (MCM))
• BCM module connector terminal A20 and MCM
DTC U0037 (99): iMA-CAN Malfunction (BUS- 20P connector terminal No. 11.
OFF (BCM Module)) • BCM module connector terminal A40 and MCM
20P connector terminal No. 1.
NOTE;
procedure, j u m p the SCS with the HDS and read the n I M A C A N H (WHT)f
flash code, or change the HDS setup to show HM 1 | 21 3 14 |51 61 7 | 81 911112|13|14|115|16|117|18|119|g0l
codes and read the HM code. |21|22|23|/VT/VM^
I M A C A N L (RED)
(see page 12-5).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). I M A C A N L (RED)
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11 / V 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA I M A C A N H (WHT)
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
Is DTC U0037 (98 or 99) indicated? Is there continuity?
Y E S — G o to step 4. YES—
• Go to step 37 for DTC U0037 (98).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this • Go to step 42 for DTC U0037 (99).
time.B
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA module (A20, A40) and the MCM (No. 1, No. 11),
SYSTEM and the PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS. then g o t o step 3 1 .
Is DTC U0037 indicated? 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Y E S — G o to step 11. • 12. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
NO—Go to step 5. 13. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
12-142
14. Measure the resistance between BCM module 19. Measure the resistance between BCM module
connector terminals A20 and A40. connector terminals A20 and A40.
B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P) B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
I M A C A N H (WHT) { IMACANH (WHT)

SI
1 | 2 I 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 I 7 | 81 9 \/\\ 1 |12|i3|14|15|16|17|18|1; 9|20]
l2ll22|23MXMXl28l29|30|Xlyl33l34l/l36l37|38M
1 | 21 3 14 I 5 | 6 I 7 I 81 9 [ / 1 1 1 h2|J3|l4|l5|16ll7|18|19|a)|
l2ll22l23!AVl/l28J29l30l^
IMACANL (RED)
IMACANL (RED)
W i r e side of female terminals W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is there 50.4-61.6 Q? Is there 1 Q or less?
YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between YES—Repair short in the wire between BCM
the M C M , the A/C compressor driver, the PCM, and module connector terminals A20 and A40, then go
BCM module connector terminal A20 or A40, then to step 3 1 .
go to step 3 1 .
NO—Go to step 15.
20. Reconnect the A/C compressor driver 4P connector.
2 1 . Measure the resistance between BCM module
16. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-180), then connector terminals A20 and A40.
disconnect the MCM 20P connector.
18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P) and the A/C

compressor driver 4P connector. IMACANH (WHT) I
•n__
1 I 2 | 3 14 | 5 1 6 1 7 1 819 [XilT1T^ri4l15l16ll7|l8ll9l20l
[2ll22l23lA>lyVl28^
I M A C A N L (RED)
Is there about 2.6 kQ?
YES—Goto step 22.
NO—Replace the A/C compressor driver (see page

21-109), then go to step 3 1 .
22. Disconnect the A/C compressor driver 4P connector.
23. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P).
(cont'd)
12-143
IMA S f stem

24. Measure the resistance between BCM module 28. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector.
29. Reconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
30. Measure the resistance between BCM module
IMACANH (WHT) BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P)

_£1 CL.
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 | 5 1 6 | 7 | 81 9 |/111|12|j3|l4|15116[lT|18J19lgo|
\2\\22\23\/\A/W
I M A C A N L (RED)
IMACANH (WHT) I
-II
1 I 2 I 3 14 I 5 | 6 | 7 | 81 9 L/|l 1 |l2|i3|l4|15|16|17|18|l9|20|
[211221231^1/1X1X1281291301X1/1331341^1361371381x140
Wire side of female terminals IMACANL (RED) I
Is there 108- 132 Q?

- NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest Is there 108- 132 Q ?
'software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the YES—Go to step 3 1 .
PCM, g o t o step 3 1 . If the symptom/indication goes N O — G o t o step 42.
PCM (see page 11-238), then go to step 3 1 .
27. Measure the resistance between BCM module

IMACANH (WHT) j
} I ? 1, I j* I L !7'L1
3
5 6 8 9
G2|J3|14l15|p|17|18|19|2Dl
121|22123MXXX3129130|XX^1341X36187[31X140
IMACANL (RED)
W i r e side o f female terminals
Is about 2.6 kQ ?
12-144
3 1 . Reconnect all connectors. 37. Reconnect all connectors.
33. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 39. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest
34. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6). good M C M (see page 12-8).
35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA 40. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS in
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. the IMA SYSTEM.
Is DTC U0037 (98, 99) indicated? Is DTC U0037 (98) indicated?
terminals at the BCM module, the A/C compressor terminals at the BCM module, the A/C compressor
driver, the PCM, and the M C M , then go to step 1. driver, the PCM, and the M C M . If the M C M was
N O — G o t o step 36. 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, go
to step 1.
36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0037 (98, 99) in
the DTCs MENU with the HDS. N O — G o t o step 41.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 41. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0037 (98) in the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated on step Does the screen indicate PASSED?
35, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
YES—If the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
connections or loose terminals at the BCM module, original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other
the A/C compressor driver, the PCM, and the M C M , Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 40,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
COMPLETED, keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a
result comes on. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the BCM module,
the A/C compressor driver, the PCM, and the M C M .
If the M C M was updated, substitute a known-good
M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
(cont'd)
12-145
IMA S f stem

42. Reconnect all connectors. DTC U0100 (102): F-CAN Malfunction (PCM
(CVT System)-MCM)
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). NOTE:
n
To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting
44. Update the BCM module If it does not have the procedure, j u m p the SCS w i t h the HDS and read the
latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a flash code, or change the HDS setup to show HM
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8). codes and read the HM code.
45. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA review the general troubleshooting information
SYSTEM with the HDS. (see page 12-5).
Is DTC U0037 (99) indicated in the IMA 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
SYSTEM?
YES—Check for poor connections or loose SYSTEM with the HDS.
terminals at the BCM module, the A/C compressor
driver, the PCM, and the M C M . If the BCM module Is DTC U0028 (107) indicated?
module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM Y E S - D o the troubleshooting for DTC U0028 (107)
module was substituted, go to step 1. (see page 12-139).
N O — G o t o step 46. NO—Go to step 3.
46. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0037 (99) in the 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
Does the screen indicate PASSED? SYSTEM with the HDS.
YES—If the BCM module was updated, Is DTC U0100 (102) indicated?
was substituted, replace the original BCM module YES—Goto step 5.
DTCs were indicated in step 45, go to the indicated NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
DTCs troubleshooting. • time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the PCM and the MCM. •
connections or loose terminals at the BCM module, 5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA
the A/C compressor driver, the PCM, and the M C M . SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
If the BCM module was updated, substitute a
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then Is DTC U0100 (103) indicated?
recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to
step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, YES—Goto step 6.
on. N O — G o t o step 11.
12-146
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI 11. Update the MCM if it does not have the latest
SYSTEM and the CVT SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known-
YES—Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest Is DTC U0100 (102) indicated?
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the YES—Check for poor connections or loose
symptom/indication goes away w i t h an updated terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
PCM, go to step 7. If the symptom/indication goes MCM. If the M C M was updated, substitute a known-
away w i t h a known-good PCM, replace the original good M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the
PCM (see page 11-238), then go to step 7. M C M was substituted, go to step 1.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO—Go to step 13.
8. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0100 (102) in
SYSTEM with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Is DTC U0100(102) indicated? Y E S — I f the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is

YES—Check for poor connections or loose original MCM (see page 12-186). If any other
terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12,
M C M , then go to step 1. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—Go to step 10. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0100 (102) in BCM module, and the MCM. If the M C M was
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. updated, substitute a known-good M C M (see page
12-8), then recheck. If the MCM was substituted, go
Does the screen indicate PASSED? to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other on.

BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the
12-147
IMA System
DTC U0100 (103): F-CAN Malfunction (PCM 6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
(CVT System)-BCM Module) SYSTEM and the CVT SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?

procedure, j u m p the SCS with the HDS and read the YES—Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
codes and read the HM code. NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
review the general troubleshooting information good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If the
(see page 12-5). symptom/indication goes away w i t h an updated
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). away with a known-good PCM, replace the original
SYSTEM with the HDS. 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DTC U0028 (108) indicated? 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
YES—Do the troubleshooting for DTC U0028 (108) 9. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA
(see page 12-140). SYSTEM with the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 3. is DTC U0100 (103) indicated in the IMA

SYSTEM?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
SYSTEM with the HDS. M C M , then g o t o step 1.
Is DTC U0100(103) indicated? NO—Go to step 10.
Y E S — G o t o step 5. 10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0100 (103) in
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Does the screen indicate PASSED ?
at the PCM and the BCM m o d u l e . •
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 9,
SYSTEM with the HDS. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting H
Is DTC U0100 (102) indicated? NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES—Go to step 6. BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the
N O — G o t o step 11. ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
12-148
11. Update the BCM module if It does not have the DTC U0110 (101): F-CAN Malfunction (BCM
latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a Moduie-MCM)
NOTE:
12. Cheek for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
Is DTC U0100 (103) indicated? • If DTC U1205 (75) is stored at the same time as DTC
U0110 (101) and U0028 (108), the M C M relay is OFF
YES—Check for poor connections or loose forcibly.
terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the • Information marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) applies to
MCM. If the BCM module was updated, substitute a the '06-07 models.
recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
step 1.
NO—Go to step 13.
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC U0028 (108)
(see page 12-140).
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module 3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
DTCs troubleshooting. • Is DTC U0110 (101) indicated?
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor Y E S — G o t o step 5.

BCM module, and the MCM. If the BCM module NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM at the PCM, the BCM module, and the M C M . B
module was substituted, g o t o step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition 5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
(cont'd)
12-149
IMA System
9. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the MCM connector. 14. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
Are the connections and the terminals OK? 15. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
Y E S — G o t o step 10. 16. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182), then
NO—Repair the connections and the terminals, check for continuity between body ground and
then go to step 28. M C M 20P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 9*
individually.
MCM 20P CONNECTOR
L G 2 (BRN) LG1 (BRN)*
terminal No. 20, and between BCM module 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
connector terminal A21 and M C M 20P connector 11

/ '/ 14 / 17 18 19 20
terminal No. 10.
C A N H (WHT) n-
1 I 2 j 3 1 4 | 5 | 6 I 7 | 8 I 9 | / | 1 1 |12|i3|14l15|16|17|18|19|20r
l2ll22l23lAVVl28l29M
C A N L (RED)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the MCM
(No. 2, No. 9 ) and G102, then g o t o step 28.
C A N L (RED)
17. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector.
1 2 3 | 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
/ '/ 14 / '/ 17 18 19 20
18. Reconnect BCM module connector A.
C A N H (WHT)
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the BCM

module (A1, A21) and the M C M (No. 10, No. 20),
then go to step 28.
12-150
19. Turn the ignition switch to ON {ll) then measure . r 23. Measure the voltage between MCM relay 2 4P
the voltage between M C M 20P connector terminals connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
No. 18 and No. 19* and body ground within
1 second. M C M R E L A Y 2 4P C O N N E C T O R
i n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 / '/ '14 / '/ 17 18 19 20
IGA2-1 (RED) IGA2-2 (RED)*
®@
Is there 12 V battery voltage?
Is there 12 V battery voltage? Y E S — G o t o step 24.
Y E S — G o t o step 39. NO—Repair open in the wire between M C M relay 2

and the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse, then go to step
NO—Go to step 20. 28.
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 24. Check for continuity between MCM 20P connector
terminals No. 18 and No. 19*, and MCM relay 2 4P
2 1 . Test M C M relay 2 (see page 22-64). connector terminal No. 1.
Is the relay OK?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO—Replace MCM relay 2, then go to step 27.

11
/ / 14
/V 18 19 20
22. Check the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse.
Is the fuse OK?

the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse and MCM relay 2.
Also replace the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse, then
go to step 28.
NO—Repair open in the wire between M C M relay 2

and the MCM (No. 18, No. 19*), then go to step 28.
(cont'd)
12-151
IMA S f stem
26. Check for continuity between BCM module 28. Reconnect all connectors.
connector terminal A12 and M C M relay 2 4P
connector terminal No. 3. 29. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
IGHLD2 (LTGRN) 30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

1 I 21 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 [81 91/111 |J2|i3ll4l15|16|17|18|19|20|
I2ll22l23i/l/ly1yl28l29l30l/1/33|34l/l36l37l38l/l40
M C M R E L A Y 2 4P C O N N E C T O R
Is DTC U0110(101) indicated?

terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
MCM, then g o t o step 1.
IGHLD2 (LT G R N ) N O — G o t o step 33.
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0110 (101) in
NO—Repair open in the wire between M C M relay 2 Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 32,
and the BCM module (A12),then g o t o step 27. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
27. Check for continuity between M C M relay 1 4P NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connector terminal No. 1 and M C M relay 2 4P connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the
connector terminal No. 4. BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the
MCM RELAY 2
MCM RELAY 1
4P C O N N E C T O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
IGA (PNK)
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between M C M relay 1

and M C M relay 2, then go to step 28.
12-152
34. Reconnect all connectors. 39. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
35. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the 40. Reconnect all connectors.
36. Update the BCM module if it does not have the battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8). 42. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest
37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. good MCM (see page 12-8).
Is DTC U0110 (101) indicated? 43. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose IsDTC U0110(101)indicated?

MCM. If the BCM module was updated, substitute a YES—Check for poor connections or loose
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to MCM. If the MCM was updated, substitute a known-
step 1. good MCM (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the
MCM was substituted, go to step 1.
the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. 44. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0110 (101) in
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module Y E S — I f the M C M was updated, troubleshooting is
was substituted, replace the original BCM module complete. If the M C M was substituted, replace the
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other
DTCs were indicated in step 37, go to the indicated Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 43,
DTCs troubleshooting. • go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the
BCM module, and the M C M . If the BCM module BCM module, and the M C M . If the MCM was
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM updated, substitute a known-good MCM (see page
module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, go
module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes
switch ON (II) until a result comes on. on.
12-153
IMA System

DTC U0111 (100): F-CAN Malfunction (BCM 10. Check for continuity between BCM module
Module-MCM) connector terminal A1 and MCM 20P connector
terminal No. 20, and between BCM module
NOTE; Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data, connector terminal A21 and M C M 20P connector
and review the general troubleshooting information terminal No. 10.
(see page 12-5).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). C A N H (WHT) „

1 l 21 3 |5
14 I 61 7 | 81'91/111 |12|i3|14|15|16|17|18|19|20T
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 21|22123M/1XM^
C A N L (RED)
Y E S — D o the troubleshooting for DTC U0028 (107)
(see page 12-139).
C A N L (RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 11

/ / 14
// 17 18 19 20
C A N H (WHT)
t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO—Repair open in the wire between the BCM
at the BCM module and the M C M . • module (A1, A21), and the MCM (No. 10, No. 20),
then go to step 11.
5. Turn t h e ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
12-154
1MJ
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 19. Update the BCM module if it does not have the
14. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). known-good BCM module (see page 12-8).
terminals at the BCM module and the M C M , then terminals at the BCM module and the M C M . If the
go to step 1. BCM module was updated, substitute a known-
good BCM module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If
NO—Go to step 16. the BCM module was substituted, go to step 1.
16. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0111 (100) in N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
2 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U0111 (100) in
Does the screen indicate PASSED? the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the screen indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor was substituted, replace the original BCM module
connections or loose terminals at the BCM module (see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or
and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the screen DTCs were indicated in step 20, go to the indicated
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition DTCs troubleshooting. •
and the M C M . If the BCM module was updated,
12-155
IMA System
DTC U0155 (106): F-CAN Malfunction (Gauge DTC U1204 (55): IMA-CAN Malfunction (PCM-
Control Module-BCM Module) BCM Module)
Go to the DTC U0155 troubleshooting in the PGM-FI NOTE:

system (see page 11-183). • To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting
procedure, j u m p the SCS with the HDS and read the
(see page 12-5).

SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.

(see page 12-142).
NO—Go to step 3.


at the PCM, the BCM module, and the M C M . •

SYSTEM and the PGM-FI SYSTEM with the HDS.
Are DTC U1204 (95) and U0037 (PGM-FI

SYSTEM) indicated?
12-156
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminals A38 and A39 individually.
( / | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8|9l
r
9. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). •

10 / 1 2 13|14|T5]16 17 18 19
•
20 21 , 23 24 25 •
10. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). 26 27 28 29 | / l 3 1 1 /
i
33 34 35
136137 :38|39|40 | / l 4 2 43|44|
I M A C A N H (WHT) I M A C A N L (RED)
12. Connect BCM module connector terminals A20 and

A40 to body ground with a jumper wire. JL ±

JUMPER Is there continuity?

WIRE
I M A C A N H (WHT) [
O. YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
1 I 2 I 3 14 | 5 I 6 j 7 | 8 I 91/|11112|13|l4|15|16|l7|l8|l9|2fl
l2ll22|23|/1/Vl/^
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If
I M A C A N L (RED) symptom/indication goes away w i t h an updated
PCM (see page 11 -238), then go to step 14.
W i r e side o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM, the
BCM module (A20, A40), and the M C M (No. 1,
No. 11), then go to step 14.
(cont'd)
12-157
IMA S f stem
#
DTC Troubleshooting |cont d)
14. Reconnect all connectors. 20. Update the BCM module if it does not have the
15. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the known-good BCM module (see page 12-8).
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
17. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). Is DTC U1204 (55) indicated?
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs In the IMA YES—Check for poor connections or loose
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
MCM. If the BCM module was updated, substitute a
Is DTC U1204 (55) is indicated? known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then
recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to
YES—Check for poor connections or loose step 1.
M C M , then go to step 1. N O — G o t o step 22.
N O — G o t o step 19. 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1204 (55) in the
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1204 (55) in the
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated,
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other was substituted, replace the original BCM module
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18 (see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • DTCs were indicated in step 2 1 , go to the indicated
connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
BCM module, and the M C M , then g o t o step 1. If the connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the BCM module, and the M C M . If the BCM module
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on. was updated, substitute a known-good BCM
indicates NOT COMPLETED keep the ignition
12-158
DTC U1204 (95): IMA-CAN Malfunction (PCM- 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
MCM)
NOTE:
• To verify this is the appropriate troubleshooting 8. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
procedure, j u m p the SCS w i t h the HDS and read the
flash code, or change the HDS setup to show HM 9. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and 10. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
(see page 12-5). 11. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 12. Disconnect the M C M 20P connector.
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA 13. Connect PCM connector terminals A38 and A39 to
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
PCM CONNECTOR A ( 4 4 P )
/ I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7S I 9 I
(see page 12-142).
10/ 1213|14|15|16 17 1819 m•
I
2021/ 232425
26272829|/|31|/ 333435
NO—Go to step 3.
13613T 38|39|40|/|42 43|44|
IMACANH (WHT) IMACANL (RED)

SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. JUMPER WIRE
Is DTC U1204 (95) indicated? T e r m i n a l side of female terminals

at the PCM, the BCM module, the A/C compressor
driver, and the M C M . •

Are DTC U1204 (55) and U1204 (95) indicated at

the same time?
(cont'd)
12-159
IMA S f stem

14. Check for continuity between body ground and 15. Reconnect all connectors.
M C M 20P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 11
individually. 16. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
MCM 20P CONNECTOR
I M A C A N L (RED) 18. Clear the DTC with the HDS (see page 12-6).
-] n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the IMA
11 / ' / '14 / '/ 17 18 19 20 SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
I M A C A N H (WHT)
is DTC U1204 (95) indicated?

W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the
Is there continuity? NO—Go to step 20.
Y E S — U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1204 (95) In the
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a k n o w n - DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
good PCM (see page 11-7), then recheck. If
symptom/indication goes away w i t h an updated Does the screen indicate PASSED?
PCM, g o t o step 15. If the symptom/indication goes
away w i t h a known-good PCM, replace the original YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
PCM (see page 11-238), then go to step 15. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated In step 19,
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the M C M (No. 1, No. 11), then g o t o step 15. NO—If the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor
BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the
screen Indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
Ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
12-160
21. Update the M C M if i t does not have the latest DTC U120S (75): I MA-CAN Malfunction (BCM
software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known- Module-MCM)
NOTE:
2 2 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs i n the IMA • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, and
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5).
Is DTC U1204 (95) indicated? • If DTC U1205 (75) is stored at the same time as DTC
U0110 (101)and U0028 (108), the MCM relay is OFF
YES—Check for poor connections or loose forcibly.
terminals at the PCM, the BCM module, and the • Information marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) applies to
MCM. If the M C M was updated, substitute a known- the '06-07 models
good M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the
MCM was substituted, go to step 1. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
N O — G o t o step 23. 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1204 (95) in the Is DTC U0037 (99) indicated?
Y E S - D o the troubleshooting for DTC U0037 (99)
Does the screen indicate PASSED? (see page 12-142).
YES—If the MCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO—Go to step 3.

complete. If the M C M w a s substituted, replace the
original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other 3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. H 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor Is DTC U1205 (75) indicated?
BCM module, and the M C M . If the M C M was YES—Goto step 5.
12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, go NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes at the PCM, the BCM module, the A/C compressor
on. driver, and the MCM.B
NO—Goto step 6.
7. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4)
(cont'd)
12-161
IMA System
10. Disconnect the MCM 20P connector. 15. Check the MCM 20P connector.
11. Check for continuity between BCM module Is the connection OK ?

terminal No. 11, and between BCM module Y E S — G o t o step 16.
terminal No. 1. NO—Repair the connection, then go to step 28.
BCM MODULE CONNECTOR A (40P) 16. Remove the BCM module (see page 12-182), and
disconnect the M C M 20P connector.
IMACANH (WHT) I
—
-n
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 l 7 | 8 | 9|/1l1|12|i3|14|15|16|17|18ll9|20| 17. Reconnect BCM module connector A (40P). Then
l2ll22|23|y1/1y1Xl28l29l30Myi33|34M36|37l38lyl4O
t u r n the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
IMACANL (RED)
voltage between MCM 20P connector terminals
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s No. 18, No. 19*, and body ground within 1 second.
MCM 2 0 P CONNECTOR MCM 2 0 P CONNECTOR
IMACANL (RED)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3I 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
/ V / '/ 14 17 18 19 20 11
/ 14
/ '/ 17 18 19 20
IMACANH (WHT) I G A 2 - 1 (RED) I G A 2 - 2 (RED)*
Wire side of female terminals ®@

NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the BCM Is there 12 V battery voltage?

module (A20, A 4 0 ) a n d t h e M C M (No. 1, No. 11),
then go to step 28. Y E S — G o t o step 18.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO—Go to step 20.
13. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4). 18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12-162
19. Check for continuity between body ground and 23. Measure the voltage between M C M relay 2 4P
MCM 20P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 9* connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
individually.
LG2 ( B R N ) LG1 ( B R N ) *
3 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 2 2
' /
11
/ 14
/V 17 18 19 20 1 3 X 4


NO—Repair open in the wire between MCM relay 2
NO—Repair open in the wire between the M C M and the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse, then go to step
(No. 2, No. 9*) and G102, then go to step 28. 28.
20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 24. Check for continuity between MCM 20P connector
terminals No. 18 and No. 19% and M C M relay 2 4P
21. Test M C M relay 2 (see page 22-64). connector terminal No. 1.
MCM 20P CONNECTOR

Is the relay OK?
-i n
Y E S — G o t o step 22. 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 8 9 10
NO—Replace MCM relay 2 , then go to step 28.

11
/ V '14 / '/ 17 18 19 20
22. Check the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse.
Is the fuse OK?

the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse and M C M relay 2.
Also replace the No. 61 + B IMA2 (10 A) fuse, then
go to step 28.

and the MCM (No. 18, No. 19*), then go to step 28.
(cont'd)
12-163
IMA System
25. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). 28. Reconnect all connectors.
26. Check for continuity between BCM module 29. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
connector terminal A12 and M C M relay 2 4P battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
I G H L D 2 (LT G R N ) 3 1 . Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).

1 I 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 j 6 | 7 | 8 I 9 | / | 1 1 li2|i3|l4|15|16|17|18|19|20.
J2ll22l23l/Vl/^ 32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
MCM, then g o t o step 1. ••
I G H L D 2 (LT G R N ) 33. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1205 (75) in the
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. .
YES—Goto step 27. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 32,
and the BCM module (A12), then go to step 28. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
27. Check for continuity between MCM relay 1 4P BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the
connector terminal No. 1 and MCM relay 2 4P screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the
connector terminal No. 4. ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on.
MCM RELAY 1 MCM RELAY 2

4P CONNECTOR 4P C O N N E C T O R
IGA (PNK)
YES—Goto step 34.

and MCM relay 2, then go to step 28.
12-164
36. Update the BCM module if it does not have the 41. Update the M C M if it does not have the latest
latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a software (see page 12-185), or substitute a known-
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8). good M C M (see page 12-8).
YES—-Check for poor connections or loose YES—Check for poor connections or loose
MCM. If the BCM module was updated, substitute a MCM. If the MCM was updated, substitute a known-
known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then good M C M (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the
recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to MCM was substituted, go to step 1.
step 1.
NO—Go to step 43.
38. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1205 (75) in the DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — I f the BCM module was updated, complete. If the MCM was substituted, replace the
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module original M C M (see page 12-186). If any other
was substituted, replace the original BCM module Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 42,
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
DTCs troubleshooting. • NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor BCM module, and the M C M . If the MCM was
connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the updated, substitute a known-good M C M (see page
BCM module, and the M C M . If the BCM module 12-8), then recheck. If the M C M was substituted, go
was updated, substitute a known-good BCM to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED,
module (see page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM keep the ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes
module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen on.
indicates NOT COMPLETE, keep the ignition switch
ON (II) until a result comes on.
12-165
IMA S f stem

DTC U1206 (64): I MA-CAN Malfunction (BCM 10. Check for continuity between BCM module
Module-MCM) connector terminal A20 and M C M 20P connector
terminal No. 11, and between BCM module
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data, connector terminal A40 and M C M 20P connector
and review the general troubleshooting information terminal No 1
(see page 12-5).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). I M A C A N H (WHT)

=£1_
1 I 2 I 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 1 9 L / | l 1 |l2lll3|l4ll5|16|17|18119[20f
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. |2l|22|23|/'VlA^
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s I M A C A N L (RED)

IMACANL M C M 20P C O N N E C T O R
YES—Do the troubleshooting for DTC U0037 (98) (RED)
n n
(see page 12-142). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 /
V / 14
I M A C A N H (WHT)
17 18 19 20
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). W i r e side of female terminals
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is there continuity ?
Is DTC U1206 (64) indicated? Y E S - G o t o step 17.
Y E S — G o t o step 5. NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM, the

BCM module (A20, A40), and the MCM (No. 1,
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this No. 11), then g o t o step 11.
at the PCM, the BCM module, the A/C compressor
driver, and the M C M . •
12-166
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 19. Update the BCM module if it does not have the
14. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). known-good BCM module (see page 12-8).
15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
M C M , then go to step 1. MCM. If the BCM module was updated, substitute a
N O — G o t o step 16. recheck. If the BCM module was substituted, go to
step 1.
DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS. N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
Does the screen indicate PASSED? 2 I. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1206 (64) in the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 15, Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES—If the BCM module was updated,
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
connections or loose terminals at the PCM, the was substituted, replace the original BCM module
BCM module, and the M C M , then go to step 1. If the (see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the DTCs were indicated in step 20, go to the indicated
ignition switch ON (ll) until a result comes on. DTCs troubleshooting. •

connection or loose terminals at the PCM, the BCM
module, and the M C M . If the BCM module was
updated, substitute a known-good BCM module
(see page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
12-167
IMA S f stem

DTC U1207 (80): IMA-CAN Malfunction (A/C 9. Check the No. 22IG1 HAC (A/C) (7.5 A) fuse in the
Compressor Driver-BCM Module) under-dash fuse/relay box.
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t , r e c o r d a l l f r e e z e d a t a , Is the fuse OK?

a n d review the general troubleshooting information
(see page 12-5). Y E S — G o t o step 10.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO—Repair short to ground in the wire between
the A/C compressor driver and the No. 22 IG1 HAC
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. (A/C) (7.5 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 22 IG1 HAC
(A/C) fuse, then go to step 19.
(see page 12-142). 11. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
N O — G o t o step 3. 12. Check for continuity between BCM module

3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 4P connector terminal No. 2.
I M A C A N H (WHT)
=Q
1 I 2 | 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 1 9 L/|l 1 |12|1I3|14|15|16|17|18|119|20|
I2l|22l23[y1^

t i m e . Check for poor connections or loose terminals A / C C O M P R E S S O R DRIVER 4P C O N N E C T O R
at the BCM module, the A/C compressor driver, and
the PCM.B
1 2 3 4
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). IMACANH (WHT)
. 7. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). Is there continuity?
8. Check the A/C compressor driver 4P connector. Y E S — G o t o step 13.
Is the connector OK? NO—Repair open in the wire between the BCM
Y E S — G o t o step 9. go to step 19.
NO—Repair the connector, then go to step 19.
12-168
13. Check for continuity between BCM module 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4P connector terminal No. 3. 17. Check for continuity between A/C compressor
driver 4P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
1 1 2 1 3 U 115 1617 18 ] 9 M l I i |12|J3|14|115|16|17|18|19|20L
A / C C O M P R E S S O R DRIVER 4P C O N N E C T O R
I M A C A N L (RED)
1 2 3 4
A / C C O M P R E S S O R DRIVER 4P C O N N E C T O R I G N D (BLK)
1 2 3 4
I M A C A N L (RED)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the BCM 21-109), then go to step 19.
go to step 19. NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/C
compressor driver and G902, then go to step 19.
15. Measure the voltage between A/C compressor

driver 4P connector terminal No. 4 and body
ground.
A / C C O M P R E S S O R DRIVER 4P C O N N E C T O R
1 2 3 4
IG1 ( B L K / Y E L )
NO—Repair open in the wire between the A/C

compressor driver and the No. 22 IG1 HAC (A/C)
(7.5 A) fuse, then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
12-169
IMA System
18. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). DTC U1220 (34): DC-DC Converter Lost
Communication with BCM Module
20. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then t u r n the and r e V " ^ A /
n o n o r a i trm ibleshoctlr!'? i n f o r m a t i o n
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). (see page 12-5).
2 1 . Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
22. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6). 2. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1220 (34) in the
YES—Goto step 3.
terminals at the BCM module, the A/C compressor NO—If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
driver, and the PCM, then go to step 1. failure, the system is OK at this time. Check f o r
poor connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
N O — G o t o step 24. converter and the BCM module. If the screen
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r DTC U1207 (80) in the recheck.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23, 5. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
go t o the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
6. Disconnect the DC-DC converter 4P connector.
NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check f o r poor
connections or loose terminals at the BCM module, 7. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
the A/C compressor driver, and the PCM, then go t o
on.
12-170
8. Check for continuity between BCM module 10. Substitute a known-good DC-DC converter
connector terminal A19 and body g r o u n d . (see page 12-182).
SCIBD (GRN)
11 2 1 3 1 4 I 5 | 6 1 7 | 81 9 |/hljJ2|i3|14|15|16|17l18|19J20|, 13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
|2ll22l23lXM/lXl28l29l30lXM33l34lXl36l37l38l/1^
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Is DTC U1220 (34) indicated?
NO—Replace the original DC-DC converter
YES—Repair short in the wire between the BCM (see page 12-182), then go to step 16.
module (A19) and the DC-DC converter, then go to
step 16. 16. Reconnect all connectors.
NO—Go to step 9. 17. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
connector terminal A19 and DC-DC converter 4P 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

SCIBD (GRN)
1 I 2 I 3 14 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 I 9 \ / \ \ 11l2li3ll4|15|16|l7|l8|l19|20|
!2ll22l23ly1y1XlXl^l29l30ly1yl33l34lyl36l37l%M40
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s YES—Check for poor connections or loose
DC-DC C O N V E R T E R 4P C O N N E C T O R
terminals at the DC-DC converter and the BCM
2 3 4 N O — G o t o step 2 1 .
ISCIBD (GRN)
Is there continuity? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Y E S - G o t o step 10. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO—Repair open in the wire between the BCM go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
module (A19) and the DC-DC converter, then go to
step 16. NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
converter and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
(cont'd)
12-171
IMA S f stem
22. Update the BCM module if it does not have the DTC U1221 (35): BCM Module Lost
latest software (see page 12-181), or substitute a Communication with DC-DC Converter
NOTE: Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data,
23. Check for Temporarv DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
(see page 12-5).
terminals at the DC-DC converter and the BCM 2. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1221 (35) in the
module. If the BCM module was updated, DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
12-8), then recheck. If the BCM module was Does the screen indicate FAILED?
Y E S — G o t o step 3. .
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1220 (34) in the failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
DTCs MENU with the HDS. poor connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
converter and the BCM module. If the screen
Does the screen indicate PASSED? indicates NOT COMPLETED, g o to step 1 and
recheck.
troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(see page 12-182). If any other Temporary DTCs or 4. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
DTCs troubleshooting. • 5. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).

converter and the BCM module. If the BCM module
12-172
6. Check the DC-DC converter terminal (ORN wire) (A) 7. Disconnect the DC-DC converter 4P connector.
connection.
A
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m , 7.2 Ibf-ft) 9. Measure the voltage between DC-DC converter 4P
DC-DC C O N V E R T E R 4P C O N N E C T O R
2 3 4
IG1 ( O R N )

YES—Go to step 7.
YES—Goto step 10.
NO—Repair the connection, then g o t o step 2 1 .
NO-
• Repair open in the wire between the DC-DC
converter and the No. 3 ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse
in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to step
20.
• Check the No. 3 ALTERNATOR (10 A) fuse. If
needed, replace it, then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
12-173
IMA S f stem
12. Check for continuity between BCM module 14. Substitute a known-good DC-DC converter
connector terminal A18 and body ground. (see page 12-182).
SCIDB (GRY)
-n
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 |'9 \/\\ 1 |l2|i3|14l15|16|17|18|1;9|20. 17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
|21|22|23|AÂ^
Wire side of female terminals Is DTC U1221 (35) indicated?
NO—Replace the original DC-DC converter
YES—Repair short to ground in the wire between (see page 12-182), then go to step 20.
the BCM module (A18) and the DC-DC converter,
then go to step 2 1 . 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
N O — G o t o step 13. 21. Reconnect all connectors.
13. Check for continuity between BCM module 22. Reinstall the IPU lid (see page 12-180), then turn the
connector terminal A18 and DC-DC converter 4P battery module switch ON (see page 12-4).
. connector terminal No. 4.
SCIDB (GRY) 24. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS (see page 12-6).
-n
1 I 2 I 3 I 4 | 51 61 7 | 81 9 \/W 1 |12|i3|14|15ll6|l7|18|l9|g51
|2ll22l23lA/V1/l28l29^
Wire side of female terminals Is DTC U1221 (35) indicated?

DC-DC C O N V E R T E R 4P CONNECTOR
2 3 4 module, then go to step 1.
SCIDB (GRY)
NO—Go to step 26.

module (A18) and the DC-DC converter, then go t o
step 2 1 .
12-174
26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1221 (35) In the 31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC U1221 (35) in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES—If the BCM module was updated,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 25, troubleshooting is complete. If the BCM module
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • was substituted, replace the original BCM module
NO—If the screen Indicates FAILED, check for poor DTCs were Indicated in step 30, go to the indicated
connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC DTCs troubleshooting. •
converter and the BCM module, then go to step 1. If
the screen Indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the NO—If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
ignition switch ON (II) until a result comes on. connections or loose terminals at the DC-DC
converter and the BCM module. If the BCM module
27. Reconnect all connectors. was updated, substitute a known-good BCM
module (see, page 12-8), then recheck. If the BCM
28. Reinstall the IPU lid (seepage 12-180), then turn the module was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen
battery module switch ON (see page 12-4). Indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep the ignition
Is DTC V1221 (35) indicated?

12-175
IMA S f stem
I M A S f stem Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE; 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

• If the IMA system indicator stays on or never comes
on, do this troubleshooting (if no DTCs are set). 8. Turn the battery module switch OFF (see page 12-4).
• Information marked with an asterisk ( * ) applies to
the '06-07 models. 9. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the 10. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
IMA system indicator.
Does the IMA system indicator come on?
12. Measure the voltage between body ground and
Y E S — G o t o step 2. BCM module connector terminal A29.
N O — G o t o step 5. B C M M O D U L E C O N N E C T O R A (40P)
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), wait 2 seconds,

and watch the IMA system indicator. 1 I 2 I 3 | 4 1 5 1 6 | 7 | 8 1 9 1 / h 1 |12|13|14|15|16|17|18|19f20|
121|22|231/MA^2812913QM
Does the IMA system indicator come on and stay IG1 ( Y E L / B L K )
on?
NO—The IMA system indicator circuit is OK. •
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is there 12 V battery voltage?
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated? YES—Goto step 13.
Y E S — G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. NO-

• Repair open or short in the wire between the
NO—Go to step 5. No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the BCM module (A29).
5. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page • Check the No. 10 METER (7.5 A) fuse. If needed,
22-223). replace it. •
Does the IMA system indicator flash? 13. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
Y E S — G o t o step 6. 14. Reconnect BCM module connector A (40P).
NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
module, and recheck. If the IMA system indicator
circuit is OK, replace the original gauge control
module.•
6. Check the 12 V battery terminal connections.
NO—Repairthe connections, or replace the 12 V

battery. •
12-176
16, Measure the voltage between body ground and Is there continuity?
BCM module connector terminals A2* and A3.
YES—Update the BCM module if it does not have
the latest software (see page 12-181 ) or substitute
f
a known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then

recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away w i t h
1GA1-1
(PNK)* IGA1-2 (PNK)
a known-good BCM module, replace the original
BCM module (see page 12-182). •
1 1 2 1 3 1 4 [ 5 1 6 [ 7 [ 8 1 9 1/111 |12|i3|14|15|16|17|18|119|20|
2ll22l23l/1/1/Vl28^ NO—Repair open in the wire between G902 and the
BCM module ( A 8 \ A9), or between G102 and the
BCM module ( A 2 2 \ A 2 3 ) . B

21. Remove M C M relay 1 (A).
19. Check for continuity between body ground and

BCM module connector terminals A 8 \ A9, A22*
and A23 individually.
PG1 (BLK)* PG2 (BLK)

22. Test MCM relay 1 (see page 22-64).
H 2 1 3 | 4 1 5 [ 6 1 7 181 9 1 / | 1 1 Il2|i3|14|16||16l17|18l19l20|
|2ll22|23|/VlA^ Is the relay OK ?
LG1
(BRN)
YES—Goto step 23.
NO—Replace M C M relay 1 . 1
(cont'd)
12-177
IMA S f stem
IMA S f stem Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
23. Measure the voltage between body ground and Is there 12 V battery voltage?
M C M relay 1 4P connector terminals No. 2 and
No. 4 individually. YES—Goto step 28.
and the BCM module (A11). •

+ B (GRN/YEL)
3 1
2 2 connector terminal A2* and A3 and MCM relay 1 4P
1 X connector terminal No. 1.
-± -± -l-B (GRN/YEL) IGA1-1
(PNK)* IGA1-2(PNK)
1I 2 | 3 14 | 5 I 6 I 7 I 81 9 1/111112| 13|14|15|16|17|18|119|20l
121 [22l23M/1XM28l29l30ly1yl33l34|yl36|37|381X140
Is there 12 ¥ battery voltage?
YES—Go to step 24. A -
NO-
• Repair open or short to ground in the wire
between the No. 62 + B IMA (7.5 A) and M C M ml
relay 1.H
• Check the No. 62 + B IMA (7.5 A) fuse. If needed, IGA1-1 (PNK)* IGA1-2 (PNK)
replace i t •
• Repair short to ground in the wire between M C M
relay 1, M C M relay 2, and the BCM module ( A 2 \
A3, A 1 D . H Is there continuity?
24. Reinstall MCM relay 1. YES—Update the BCM module if it does not have
25. Disconnect BCM module connector A (40P). a known-good BCM module (see page 12-8), then
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away w i t h
26. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). a known-good BCM module, replace the original
BCM module (see page 12-182).H
BCM module connector terminal A 1 1 . NO—Repair open in the wire between M C M relay 1
and the BCM module ( A 2 \ A 3 ) . B
IGHLD (ORN)
n — n
1 I 2 | 3 | 4 I 5 | 6 | 7 | 81 91X111112|13|14|15|16|17|18|19|20|
|2l|22|23M/1X/|28|29|30|/1yl33|34|yl36|37|38M40
12-178
Charging S f stem Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 8. Start the engine, and watch the charging system

• If the 12V battery voltage is too low to operate the indicator.
starter motor, the charging system indicator may
come on, Does the charging system indicator go off?
• If the charging system indicator stays on or never
comes o n , do this troubleshooting (if no DTCs are Y E S — T h e charging system indicator circuit is
set). OK.B
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). N O — G o t o step 9.
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 9.. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-223).
Does the charging system indicator flash?
YES—-Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H
NO—Goto step3.
NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). module (tach), and recheck. If the charging system
indicator circuit is OK, replace the original gauge
4. Check the 12 V battery (see page 22-61). control module (see page 22-255). •
Is the 12 V battery OK? 10. Run the engine at idle for 2 minutes.
Y E S — G o to step 5. 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
NO—Charge or replace the 12 V battery. H Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). Y E S — G o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
6. Check the HISTORY OF DC-DC CONVERTER STOP N O — G o t o step 12.

and the HISTORY OF IPU MODULE FAN STOP w i t h
the HDS. 12. Watch the charging system Indicator.
Does the screen indicate OFF? Does the charging system indicator go off?
Y E S — G o t o step 7. Y E S — T h e IMA battery was In temporary shut d o w n

mode, due to temperature extremes. •
time.H NO—Go to step 13.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the 13. Check the MPI VOLTAGE In the DATA LIST with the
charging system indicator. HDS.
Does the charging system indicator come on? Is about 99-210 V indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 8. YES—Check the connections of the DC-DC

converter. •
NO—Do the gauge self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-223). • NO—Replace the DC-DC converter (see page
12-182). ,
12-179
IMA System
IPU Lid Removal/Installation
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands f r o m 6. Before the battery module switch is turned O N ,
electrical shock. make sure all the high voltage circuits are
connected properly. Then push the button (A), and
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a turn the battery module switch ON.
high-voltage system. You must be familiar w i t h the IMA
system before working on or around it. Make sure y o u
have read the IMA service precautions before doing
repairs or service (see page 12-3).
1. Remove the rear seat-back and the rear seat

cushion (see page 20-118).
3. Remove the bolts (A) and (B).
4. Remove the IPU lid (C).
12-180
BCM Module Update
Special Tools Required 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Do not start the
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester engine.
e
Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
w i t h the latest HDS software version 2. Connect the HDS or the Honda Interface Module
• HDS pocket tester (HIM) to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located
• GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS under the driver's side of dashboard.
software version
A n y one of the above updating tools can be used.
Use this procedure w h e n you need to update the BCM

m o d u l e during a troubleshooting procedure.
The BCM module has the programs for the IMA battery
condition monitor.
Update the BCM module if its program is not the latest.
NOTE:
software version.
• To ensure the latest programs are installed, do a BCM
module update whenever the BCM module is
substituted or replaced. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle,
• Select IMA motor and/or IMA battery in the HIM BCM the BCM module, and the M C M . If it doesn't,
module update menu. troubleshooting the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
• You can not update a BCM module w i t h the program
it already has. It will only accept a new program. 4. Do the BCM module update procedure as described
• Before y o u update the BCM module, make sure the on the HIM label and in the CM update system.
vehicle's 12 V battery is fully charged.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK
(0) while updating the BCM module. If you do, the
BCM module can be damaged.
• To prevent BCM module damage, do not operate
anything electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power
w i n d o w s , door locks, etc.) during the update.
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red ( # 3) light came on or
was flashing during the update, leave the ignition
switch in ON (II) w h e n you disconnect the HIM f r o m
the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent BCM
module damage.
12-181
IMA S f stem
BCM Module Removal/Installation DC-DC Converter Removal/
Installation
electrical shock.
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a electrical shock.
system before w o r k i n g on or around it. Make sure you IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a
have read the IMA service precautions before doing high-voltage system. You must be familiar with the IMA
repairs or service (see page 12-3). system before working on or around it. Make sure you
1. Remove the IPU lid (see page 12-180). repairs or service (see page 12-3).
2. Disconnect BCM module connectors (A). 1. Make sure the ignition switch in LOCK (0).
2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure

(see page 22-62).
3. Remove the BCM module (B).
12-182
Power Control Unit f PCU! Removal/
Installation
4. Disconnect the DC-DC converter connector (A).

electrical shock.
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a

system before working on or around it. Make sure you
2. Disconnect the DC-DC converter connector (A).
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft) (1.0 kgf m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
5. Remove the wires (B) and (C).
6. Remove the bolts (D), and the DC-DC converter (E). (1.0 kgf m , 7.2 Ibfft)
7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 3. Remove the wire (B).
8. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure 4. Lift the IPU wire harness (C).
(see page 22-62).
NOTE: If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays

no segments, start the engine, and hold it between
3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N)
(cont'd)
12-183
IMA S f stem
Power Control Unit (PCU) Removal/Installation (cont'd)

5. Remove the PCU cover (A). 10. Remove the PCU case mounting bolts (A).
A
B 9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft) 2 2 N-m
( 2 . 2 kgf-i
16 I b f f t )
9.8 N
(1.0 k g f
7.2 I b f "
B
9.8 N m
6. Remove the A/C compressor power cable (1.0 k g f - m
connector (B), and the motor power cables (C), then 7.2 Ibf-ft)
w r a p t h e m w i t h insulating tape.
NOTE: Check the position of the U phase, V phase,

and W phase cables before you disconnect t h e m . 11. Remove the bolt (B) and the clamps (C), then
disconnect the M C M connector (D).
12. Remove the PCU (E).
8. Remove the DC-DC converter (see page 12-182).
9. Remove the A/C compressor driver (see page
21-109). 14. Do the motor rotor position calibration (see page
12-6).
12-184
Power Control Unit (PCU) MCM Update
Disassemblf/Reassemblf
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) tablet tester
NOTE; Put on gloves to protect your hands f r o m • Honda interface module (HIM) and an iN workstation
electrical shock. w i t h the latest HDS software version
• HDS pocket tester
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a • GNA600 and an iN workstation w i t h the latest HDS
high-voltage system. You must be familiar w i t h the IMA software version
system before w o r k i n g on or around it. Make sure you Any one of the above updating tools can be used.
repairs or service (see page 12-3). Use this procedure w h e n y o u need to update the M C M
during a troubleshooting procedure.
1. Remove the PCU assembly (see page 12-183). The M C M has the programs for the IMA motor control.
Update the MCM if its program is not the latest.
2. Remove the cover (A), the M C M (B), the busplate
(C), and the IPU air unit (D). NOTE:
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
software version.
• To ensure the latest programs are installed, do an
M C M update whenever the M C M is substituted or
replaced.
• Select IMA motor and/or IMA battery in the HIM M C M
update menu.
9
You can not update a M C M w i t h the program it
already has. It will only accept a new program.
• Before you update the M C M , make sure the vehicle's
12 V battery is fully charged.
• Do not turn the ignition switch to ACC (I) or to LOCK
(0) while updating the M C M . If you do, the MCM can
be damaged.
• To prevent M C M damage, do not operate anything
electrical (audio system, brakes, A/C, power w i n d o w s ,
door locks, etc.) during the update.
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red ( # 3) light came on or
was flashing during the update, leave the ignition
switch in ON (II) w h e n you disconnect the HIM f r o m
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. the data link connector (DLC). This will prevent M C M
damage.
(cont'd)
12-185
IMA System
MCM Update (cont'd) MCM Replacement
1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). Do not start the NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands f r o m
engine. electrical shock.
2. Connect the HDS or the Honda Interface Module IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a
(HIM) to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located high-voltage system. You must be familiar w i t h the IMA
under the driver's side of dashboard. system before working on or around it. Make sure you
1. Remove the PCU assembly (see page 12-183).
2. Remove the cover (A), the busplate (B), and the

MCM (C).
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle,

troubleshooting the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
4. Do the M C M update procedure as described on the

HIM label and in the CM update system.
4. Do the motor rotor position calibration (see page

12-6).
12-186
Battery Module Removal/Installation
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands f r o m 6. Remove the bolts (E), then remove the battery
electrical shock, module (F).
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a 7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
system before working on or around it. Make sure you 8. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
have read the IMA service precautions before doing (see page 22-62).
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0). no segments, start the engine, and hold it between
3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure until the BAT displays at least three segments.
(see page 22-62).
4. Remove the high voltage cables (A), then wrap

them with insulating tape (B).
E
22 Nm
5. Disconnect the BCM module connector (C) and the

junction board connector (D).
12-187
IMA System
IPU Module Fan Replacement IPU Module Air Duct Removal/
Installation
electrical shock.
1. Remove the spare tire lid and the trunk front t r i m
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA Is a panel (see page 20-68).
high-voltage system. Y o u must be familiar w i t h the IMA
system before w o r k i n g on or around It. Make sure y o u 2. Remove the IPU module air outlet duct (A) and the
•have read the IMA service precautions before doing IPU module air Inlet duct (B).
A
1. Remove the PCU assembly (see page 12-183).
2. Remove the IPU module fan (A).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
12-188
IPU Case Removal/installation Motor Power Cable Removal/
Installation
electrical shock.
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a electrical shock.
system before working on or around it.. Make sure you IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a
have read the IMA service precautions before doing high-voltage system. You must be familiar w i t h the IMA
repairs or service (see page 12-3). system before working on or around it. Make sure you
1. Remove the PCU assembly (see page 12-183). repairs or service (see page 12-3).
2. Remove the IPU module fan (see page 12-188). 1. Make sure the ignition switch in LOCK (0).
3. Remove the IPU module air duct (see page 12-188). 2. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure
(see page 22-62).
4. Remove the battery module (see page 12-187).
5. Remove the brackets (A).
4. Disconnect the A/C compressor power cable
connector (A) f r o m the A/C compressor driver, then
wrap the cable end w i t h insulating tape.
5. Remove the wires (A) f r o m the DC-DC converter.
6. Remove the IPU case (B).
(cont'd)
12-189
IMA S f stem
Motor Power Cable Removal/Installation (cont'd)
6. Lift the IPU w i r e harness (A). 10. Disconnect the motor power cable connector (A)
f r o m the motor stator (B).
NOTE:
• Refer to Disconnecting the motor power cable
connector f r o m the motor stator (see page 12-3).
t h e m w i t h a clean t o w e l . Do not use .compressed
air.
7. Remove the PCU cover (A).
11. Remove the wire (A) f r o m the under-hood fuse/

relay box, then remove the clamp (B).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m ,
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
8. Remove the motor power cables (B) and w r a p t h e m
w i t h insulating tape.
Note the position of the U phase, V phase, and
W phase cables before you disconnect t h e m .
12.' Remove the cowl cover and the under-cowl panel

(see page 20-140).
12-190
13. Remove the cover (A), and disconnect the A/C 16. Remove the bolts (A) and the cover (B).
compressor power cable connector (B).
22 N m
(2.2 k g f - m , 16 i b f - f t )
17. Remove the right middle undercover (A), then

remove the clamps (B).
NOTE; Do not reuse the clamps. Replace t h e m w i t h

new ones.
15. Remove the w i r e harness clamp (C).
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
12-191
IMA S f stem
Motor Power Cable Removal/ IMA Motor Rotor Removal/
Installation (cont'd) Installation
18. Remove the clamps (A) f r o m the floor. Special Tools Required
Rotor puller 07YAC-PHM010B
NOTE: Do not reuse the clamps. Replace t h e m w i t h
new once. The motor rotor contains very strong magnets and
should be handled w i t h special care. People w i t h
pacemakers or other sensitive medical devices should
not handle the motor rotor.
If the motor rotor is installed by hand, it may

suddenly be pulled toward the motor stator w i t h
great force, causing serious hand or finger injury.
Always use the special tool to remove or install a
motor rotor.
• Keep the motor rotor away f r o m magnetically
sensitive devices.
• Do not blow air near the rotor, as metal particles
may get on the magnet.
• Store the rotor in the designated storage box and
keep it away f r o m sensitive devices during storage.
1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-178).
2. Remove the support (A).

(see page 22-62).

3,500 r p m and 4,000 rpm w i t h o u t load (in P or N)
12-192
3. Remove the sensor plate (A). 5. Slide a plastic f i l m (A) between the motor rotor (B)
and the motor stator (C).
NOTE: When installing the sensor plate, check its
insulating paint for damage.
4. Remove the motor power cable (A) f r o m the motor

stator by pushing the tab (B), raising the lever (C), 6. Remove three of the six bolts (A) as shown.
and sliding the protector (D) in the direction shown.
A
103 N - m
NOTE: (10.5 k g f m ,
• If the motor power cable connector is dirty, clean
it before removal.
• Cover the disconnected connector (E) w i t h plastic
(F), and w r a p the motor power cable terminal
w i t h tape (G).
• If the motor power cable is wet, wait until it is dry
before you w r a p it.
(cont'd)
12-193
IMA S f stem
IMA Motor Rotor Removal/Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the rotor puller guide pins, then remove the 9. Remove the motor rotor (A).
remaining three bolts (A), and remove the rotor
spacer (B).
07YAC-PHM10B
A
103 N-m
(10.5 k g f - m ,
75.9 Ibf-ft)
10. To prevent damage to the rotor magnet while

w o r k i n g on the stator, place the rotor, w i t h puller
8. Attach the rotor puller w i t h its supplied bolts. attached, into the puller case.
NOTE: W h e n installing the rotor puller, position the

puller to fit over the dowel pins (A).
07YAC-PHM10B
12-194
Motor Housing Removal/
Installation
11. install the parts In the reverse order of removal,
NOTE: Turn the handle of the rotor puller slowly 1. Remove the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-192).
when Inserting the rotor into the stator. The rotor is
drawn into the stator by magnetic force. 2. Remove the connectors (A) and the stays (B).
12. Remove the plastic f i l m .

3. Remove the bolt (C) and the motor housing (D).
13. Reconnect the motor power cable to the motor
stator. NOTE: Set the dowel pins (E) in the motor housing
before installing the motor stator on the engine.
14. Reinstall the sensor plate.
4. Remove the shielded male connector (see page
15. Reinstall the support. 12-196).
16. Install the transmission (see page 14-187). 5. Remove the terminal housing (A), and the stator (B).
17. Do the motor rotor position calibration (see page

12-6).
7. Install the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-192).
8. Do the motor rotor position calibration procedure

(see page 12-6).
12-195
IMA System
Motor Housing Disassembly/ Motor Rotor Position Sensor
Reassembly Removal/Installation
1. Remove the IMA motor housing (see page 12-195). 1. Remove the IMA motor housing (see page 12-195).
2. Remove the terminal cover (A), and the shielded 2. Remove the bolts, and the motor rotor position
male connector (B). sensor (A).
C
16 N m
(1.6 k g f - m , 12 Ibf-ft)
12 Ibf-ft)
3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. NOTE: Tighten the bolts (B) first, then tighten the
bolts (C).
4. Install the IMA motor rotor (see page 12-192).
4. Do the motor rotor position calibration procedure
5. Do the motor rotor position calibration procedure (see page 12-6).
(see page 12-6).
12-196
Transaxle
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) ... 14-1

Driveline/Axle ...» 16-1
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (if CVT maintenance is required)
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
• Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor when the
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located in the steering
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If CVT maintenance is required)
You must be familiar w i t h the IMA system before w o r k i n g around it. Make sure you have read the Service Precautions
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
CVT A / T Interlock System
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 14-3 Circuit Diagram - 14-216
DTC Troubleshooting Index 14-7 Shift Lock System Circuit
Symptom Troubleshooting Index 14-10 Troubleshooting 14-217
Component Location Index 14-28 * Key Interlock System Circuit
System Description 14-29 Troubleshooting 14-222
DTC Troubleshooting 14-67, Shift Lock Solenoid Test 14-223
Road Test 14-159 Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement 14-224
Stall Speed Test .......................................... 14-161 Shift Lock Stop Replacement 14-225
Pressure Test 14-162 Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement 14-225
CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control Valve Park Pin Switch Test •• 14-226
Solenoid Test 14-165
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control Valve Lower Valve Body
Solenoid Test 14-166 CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control Valve
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Valve Removal/Installation • 14-233
Solenoid Test 14-166 CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control Valve
Inhibitor Solenoid Test 14-167 Removal/Installation 14-233
Lower Valve Body CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Valve
Removal and Installation 14-167 Removal/Installation 14-234
CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control Valve Inhibitor Solenoid Removal/Installation ... 14-234
Replacement 14-168
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control Valve Flywheel Housing
Replacement 14-169 Final Drive Shaft Bearing Replacement .... 14-235
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Valve Input Shaft Oil Seal Replacement 14-235
Replacement 14-169
Inhibitor Solenoid Replacement 14-170 End Cower
CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) ATF Feed Pipe Replacement 14-236
Speed Sensor Replacement 14-170
CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Intermediate Housing
Speed Sensor Replacement 14-171 Manual Valve Body Disassembly,
CVT Speed Sensor Replacement 14-171 Inspection, and Reassembly 14-237
CVT Speed Sensor (Secondary)
Replacement 14-172 Transmission Housing
Start Clutch Pressure Control ATF Pump Replacement 14-238
Calibration Procedures 14-172 Driven Pulley Shaft Bearing
Start Clutch Check 14-174 Removal and Installation 14-239
CVT Fluid Level Check 14-175 Final Drive Shaft Bearing
CVT Fluid Replacement 14-176 Removal and Installation 14-239
Transmission Removal 14-178 Selector Control Shaft Removal and
Drive Plate Removal and Installation 14-186 Installation • 14-240
Transmission Installation 14-187
ATF Cooler Cleaning 14-196 Input Shaft
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement ................. 14-199 Planetary Carrier Clearance Inspection .... 14-241
ATF Filter Replacement 14-200
Shift Lever Removal 14-200 Forward Clutch
Shift Lever Installation 14-201 Clutch Disassembly • 14-242
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly 14-202 Clutch Reassembly - • 14-244
Shift Cable Replacement 14-203
Shift Cable Adjustment 14-205 Final Drive Shaft
Transmission Disassembly 14-227 Thrust Clearance Inspection 14-249
Transmission Reassembly 14-251
CVT Differential
A/T Gear Position Indicator Component Location Index 14-263
Component Location Index 14-209 Backlash Inspection 14-263
Circuit Diagram 14-210 Differential Carrier and Final Driven Gear
Transmission Range Switch Test 14-211 Replacement 14-264
Transmission Range Switch Carrier Bearing Replacement 14-264
Replacement 14-212 Oil Seal Replacement 14-265
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Carrier Bearing Side Clearance
Light Harness/Park Pin Switch Inspection 14-266
Replacement 14-214
CVT
Special Tools
© 07AAJ-PLYA100 A/T High Pressure Gauge 2
© 07AAK-SNAA120 Universal Eyelet 1
© 07JAD-PN00100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 64 x 72 m m 1
® 07JAD-PH80101 Driver Attachment, 58 m m 1
© 07LAE-PX40000 Clutch Spring Compressor Set 1
© 07MAJ-PY4011A A/T Pressure Hose, 2,210 m m
© 07MAJ-PY40120 A/T Pressure Hose Adapter
© 07NAD-PX40100 Driver Attachment, 78 x 80 m m 1
© 07TAE-P4V0110 Reverse Brake Spring Compressor 1
® 07TAE-P4V0120 Start Clutch Remover 1
© 07TAE-P4V0130 Start Clutch Installer 1
® 07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
@ 07406-0020401 A/T Oil Pressure Gauge Set 1
@ 07406-0070301 A/T Low Pressure Gauge 1
® 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 20—40 m m 1
® 07746-0010200 Driver Attachment, 37 x 42 m m 1
® 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 1
® 07746-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 1
® 07746-0030100 Driver Handle, 40 m m I.D. 1
® 07749-0010000 Driver Handle 15 x 135L 1
Must be used with a commercially available 3/8 "-16 UNF slide hammer.
® ®
Of
14-2
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda If the D indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp
Diagnostic System (HDS) (MIL) has been reported.on, or if a driveability problem
is suspected, follow this procedure:
W h e n the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (Seethe HDS user's
indicator (A) in the gauge control module (tach) (B) will manual for specific instructions.)
usually blink.
B 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select the A/T

system, and observe the DTC In the DTCs MENU on
the HDS screen.

it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-213).
4. Record the freeze data and on-board snapshot for

all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
5. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as Indicated by the DTC.
6. Clear the DTC(s) and the data.
W h e n the Honda diagnostic system (HDS) is connected 7. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
driver's side of the dashboard and the SCS mode is data, and then recheck for a DTC. If the A/T DTC
selected, it will indicate the diagnostic trouble code returns, go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
(DTC) w h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (11) and If the DTC does not return, there was an
the appropriate menu is selected. Intermittent problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

Troubleshooting
Some symptoms will not trigger the diagnostic trouble

codes (DTCs) or cause the D Indicator to blink. If the MIL
was reported on or the D indicator has been blinking,
check for the DTCs. If the vehicle has an abnormal
s y m p t o m , and there are no DTCs stored, do the
s y m p t o m troubleshooting. Check the list of probable
cause(s) for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until
you find the problem.
(cont'd)
14-3
CVT
How to Check for DTCs with the S C S Mode If the D Indicator and the MIL come on at the same t i m e ,
(retrieving the flash codes! or If a driveability problem Is suspected, f o l l o w this
procedure:
NOTE; The preferred method is to use the HDS to •
retrieve the DTCs. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge control 2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
module (tach) (B) will usually blink.
B
• it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-213).
4. Select the SCS mode, then observe the D Indicator

in the gauge control module (tach).
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short
blinks. Codes 10 and above are indicated by a
series of long and short blinks. One long blink
equals 10 short blinks. A d d the long and short
blinks together to determine the code..
E x a m p l e : DTC P 0 7 0 5 (5)
Short b l i n k s (five)
•+ H
ON pi n n n r
When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the
HDS to the DLC (A) located under the driver's side of the OFh 1 U LJ U u . ^
dashboard. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), select the
SCS mode, then the D indicator will Indicate (blink) the
DTC. E x a m p l e : D T C P 0 7 1 7 (15)
L o n g blink (one) S h o r t b l i n k s (five)
ON
10 + 5 = 15
5. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and A/T DTCs.
6. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC.
7. Clear the DTC(s) and the data.
8. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, and then recheck for DTCs. If the A/T DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting.
If the DTC does not return, there was an
intermittent problem w i t h i n the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
14-4
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 5. W h e n diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the
Connectors PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above
the terminal you need to check.
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system for about 30 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to LOCK (0). J u m p i n g the SCS line after turning
the ignition switch to LOCK (0) cancels this function.
Disconnecting the PCM during this function, without
j u m p i n g the SCS line first, can damage the PCM.
6. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to

a commercially available digital multimeter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
terminals to a commercially available banana jack
(Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
(C).
3. Lift up the under-hood fuse/relay box (D).
7. Gently insert the pin probe (male) into the terminal

test port f r o m the terminal side. Do not force the
tips into the terminals.
I NOTICE I
• For accurate results, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
4. Remove the coolant reservoir (E). Disconnect PCM probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
connectors A, B, and C. they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection, and an
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols incorrect measurement.
( A = 0 , B = A , C = 0 ) embossed on t h e m for • Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
identification. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
(cont'd)
14-5
CVT
Clear A / T DTCs Procedure H o w to End a Troubleshooting Session

(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
driver's side of the dashboard. NOTE: Reset the PCM w i t h the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and wait for

30 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and

5. Start the engine w i t h the shift lever in P or N, and

w a r m it up to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on).
6. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 31 mph
it does not, go t o the DLC circuit troubleshooting (50 km/h) or under the same conditions as those
(see page 11-213). indicated by the freeze data.
4. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen. Failure Reproduction Technique
OBD Status Make sure to f o l l o w these points while the vehicle is

raised on a lift for the test-drive.
The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is • Disable the VSA (if equipped) by pressing the VSA
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully OFF switch.
completed. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC • ABS or VSA DTC(s) may come on w h e n test-driving
are displayed as: on a lift, if the ABS or VSA DTC(s) come on, clear the
DTC(s) w i t h the HDS.
• PASSED: The on-board diagnosis is successfully
completed.
• FAILED: The on-board diagnosis has completed but
failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on-board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
14-6
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
DTC M1)
Two Drive D MIL . Detection Item Page
Cycle Indicator o
Detection
P0107 (12) Blinks ON Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) (see page 14-67)
Sensor Circuit Low Voltage
P0108(12) Blinks ON Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) (see page 14-67)
Sensor Circuit High Voltage
P0335 (88) Blinks ON Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor No (see page 14-68)
Signal
P0336 (88) Blinks ON Range/Performance Problem in (see page 14-69)
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor
Circuit
P0501 ( 3 6 ) M2)
' M3)
Blinks ON Range/Performance Problem in CVT (see page 14-70)
Speed Sensor Circuit
P0501 (36) ' M2, ,,<4i
Speed Sensor Circuit
P0502 ( 3 6 ) M2KM3)
Blinks ON Problem in CVT Speed Sensor Circuit (see page 14-70)
P0502 ( 3 6 ) ' M2) M4>
Blinks ON Problem in CVT Speed Sensor Circuit (see page 14-76)
P0603 (0) Blinks ON Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (see page 14-80)
Internal Control Module Keep Alive
M e m o r y (KAM) Error
P0705 (5) M2>
Blinks ON Short in Transmission Range Switch (see page 14-81)
Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
P0706 ( 6 ) M2)
O OFF ON Open in Transmission Range Switch (see page 14-90)
Circuit
P0716(34) M2)
Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) Speed
Sensor Circuit
P0717 (34) M2)
Blinks ON Problem in CVT Input Shaft (Drive (see page 14-93)
Pulley) Speed Sensor Circuit
(No Signal Input)
P0721 (35)" (2i
Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed
Sensor Circuit
P0722 ( 3 5 ) M2i
Blinks ON Problem in CVT Output Shaft (Driven (see page 14-99)
Pulley) Speed Sensor Circuit
(No Signal Input)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is
connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
* (3): '06 model
* (4): '07-09 models
(cont'd)
14-7
CVT
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
DTC 11
Two Drive D MIL Detection Item Page
Detection
P0746(104) O Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-104)
Valve Stuck OFF
P0777 (105) o Blinks ON CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-105)
Valve Stuck ON
P0780(100) Blinks ON Problem in Hydraulic Control System (see page 14-107)
o Blinks ON CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control (see page 14-108)
(3>
P0796(103)'
Valve Stuck OFF
o Blinks ON CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control (see page 14-109)
M4)
P0796(103)
Valve Stuck OFF
P0962 (38)* (2)
Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-110)
Valve Circuit Low Voltage
P0963 ( 3 8 ) M2)
Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-113)
Valve Circuit High Voltage
P0966 ( 3 9 ) M2)
Blinks ON CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-116)
P0967 (39)* (2)
Blinks ON CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-119)
P0970 ( 3 2 ) M2)
Blinks ON CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control (see page 14-123)
P0971 ( 3 2 ) M2)
Blinks ON CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control (see page 14-126)
P16C0 (99) OFF ON Powertrain Control Module (PCM) CVT (see page 14-129)
Control System Incomplete Update
P16D7 (107) Blinks OFF Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (see page 14-130)
Internal F-CAN Communication Circuit
Malfunction
P16D8(120) Blinks ON Powertrain Control Module (PCM) (see page 14-130)
Internal IMA CAN Communication
Circuit Malfunction
P1860 (33)* (2)
Blinks OFF Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit Low Voltage (see page 14-131)
P1861 (33)' (2)
Blinks OFF Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit High Voltage (see page 14-134)
P1890(42) Blinks OFF Problem in CVT Speed Control System (see page 14-137)
P1891 ( 4 3 ) ,(3)
Blinks OFF Problem in Start Clutch Control (see page 14-138)
System
P1891 (43)* (4)
Blinks OFF Problem in Start Clutch Control (see page 14-140)
System
P1898(1G0) o Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-142)
Valve Stuck ON or CVT Driven Pulley
Pressure Control Valve Stuck OFF
14-8
DTC m
T w o Drive D mi Detection Item Page
Cycle Indicator
Detection
CD
P1899 (100) o Blinks ON CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control (see page 14-144)
Valve Stuck OFF or CVT Driven Pulley
Pressure Control Valve Stuck ON
P2122 (20) Blinks ON Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) (see page 14-145)
Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage Input
P2123 (20) Blinks ON Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) (see page 14-145)
Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP)
Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage Input
P2159 (93)* (3)
Speed Sensor (Secondary) Circuit
P2160 ( 9 3 ) M3)
Blinks ON Problem in CVT Speed Sensor (see page 14-146)
(Secondary) Circuit (No Signal Input)
110028(107) Blinks OFF or F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) (see page 14-151)
(5>
OI\T
U0037 (120) Blinks ON IMA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) (see page 14-152)
U0121 (107) M6>
Blinks OFF F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain (see page 14-153)
Control Module (PCM)-ABS)
U0122 (107) i(7>
Blinks OFF F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain (see page 14-154)
Control Module (PCM)-VSA)
U0129(107) Blinks OFF F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain (see page 14-155)
Control Module (PCM)-Servo Unit)
U0155 (107) M5>
Blinks OFF or F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain (see page 14-156)
M 5 )
0N Control Module (PCM)-Gauge Control
Module)
U1205 (120) Blinks ON IMA-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain (see page 14-157)
Control Module (PCM)-Motor Control
Module (MCM))
U1206(120) Blinks ON IMA-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain (see page 14-158)
Control Module (PCM)-Battery
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is
connected to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
* (3): '06 model
* (4): '07-08 models
* (5): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
* (6): ABS model
* (7): VSA model
14-9
CVT
Symptom P r o b a b l e cause(s) Notes
W h e n you turn the • F-CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n line e r r o r • C h e c k t h e F-CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n line f o r a DTC (see p a g e
ignition switch to ON • Gauge control m o d u l e defective 22-243).
(II), t h e D i n d i c a t o r • PCM defective • C h e c k t h e A / T g e a r p o s i t i o n i n d i c a t o r d r i v e c i r c u i t in t h e g a u g e
c o m e s o n and stays o n c o n t r o l m o d u l e (tach) b y u s i n g t h e g a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e self-
in all s h i f t lever d i a g n o s t i c f u n c t i o n (see p a g e 22-224).
p o s i t i o n s , o r it n e v e r
c o m e s o n at all
A/T gear position • F-CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n line e r r o r • C h e c k t h e F-CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n line f o r a DTC (see p a g e
indicator does not • Gauge control m o d u l e defective 22-243).
c o m e o n w h i l e the shift • PCM defective • C h e c k t h e A / T g e a r p o s i t i o n i n d i c a t o r d r i v e c i r c u i t in t h e g a u g e
l e v e r is i n t h a t p o s i t i o n • Transmission range switch defective c o n t r o l m o d u l e (tach) b y u s i n g t h e g a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e self-
• Shift cable broken or out of a d j u s t m e n t d i a g n o s t i c f u n c t i o n (see p a g e 22-224).
• Inspect t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e s w i t c h (see p a g e 14-211).
• C h e c k f o r a l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e s h i f t l e v e r a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
c o n t r o l lever.
Shift lever cannot be • S h i f t lock s o l e n o i d d e f e c t i v e • Inspect t h e A P P s e n s o r s i g n a l (see p a g e 11-277).
moved from P while • S h i f t lock s o l e n o i d c o n t r o l c i r c u i t • T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e s h i f t lock s y s t e m c i r c u i t (see p a g e 14-217).
pressing o n the brake • S h i f t lock m e c h a n i s m d e f e c t i v e • T e s t t h e s h i f t lock s o l e n o i d (see p a g e 14-223).
pedal • Brake switch circuit • Inspect t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e s w i t c h (see p a g e 14-211).
• Brake switch defective
• Accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
• Accelerator pedal position sensor defective
• Throttle body defective
• Transmission range switch ATPP switch
s t u c k OFF
• Transmission range switch ATPP switch
line o p e n e d
Ignition switch cannot • Interlock control system circuit • T r o u b l e s h o o t t h e k e y i n t e r l o c k s y s t e m c i r c u i t (see p a g e 14-222).
be m o v e d f r o m • Key interlock solenoid stuck O N • I n s p e c t t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e s w i t c h (see p a g e 14-211).
A C C E S S O R Y (1) t o • Park p i n s w i t c h s t u c k OFF
LOCK (0) (key is p u s h e d • Transmission range switch
i n , t h e s h i f t l e v e r in P)
HDS does not DLC c i r c u i t e r r o r T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g t h e DLC c i r c u i t (see p a g e 11-213).
communicate with the
PCM
14-10
Symptom P r o b a b l e cause(s) Motes
E n g i n e d o e s n o t start 1. S h i f t c a b l e b r o k e n o r o u t of a d j u s t m e n t • C h e c k f o r a l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e shift lever a n d t h e
2. PCM defective t r a n s m i s s i o n c o n t r o l lever.
3. Transmission range switch defective • Check f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d check f o r a loose t r a n s m i s s i o n
4. Flywheel assembly defective range switch connector.
Engine runs, but 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check the drive a n d driven pulley pressure, a n d lubrication
vehicle does not m o v e or d a m a g e d p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
in a n y p o s i t i o n 2. Pulley p r e s s u r e f e e d p i p e d a m a g e d o r the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
out of round sprocket.
3. Start clutch defective • I n s p e c t t h e d i f f e r e n t i a l p i n i o n g e a r s f o r w e a r . If t h e d i f f e r e n t i a l
4. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d or o u t p i n i o n g e a r s are w o r n , r e p l a c e t h e d i f f e r e n t i a l a s s e m b l y ,
of round replace the ATF strainer, a n d t h o r o u g h l y clean the
5. Input shaft w o r n or d a m a g e d t r a n s m i s s i o n , the ATF cooler, and the ATF cooler lines.
6. Secondary drive gear or secondary • C h e c k t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
driven gear w o r n or d a m a g e d l e a k a g e a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
7. Final d r i v e n g e a r w o r n o r d a m a g e d cooler lines.
8. Su n gear w o r n or d a m a g e d • If t h e s t r a i n e r is c l o g g e d , f i n d t h e d a m a g e d c o m p o n e n t s t h a t
9. Detent lever a s s e m b l y w o r n o r caused debris.
damaged • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
10. C o n t r o l lever w o r n o r d a m a g e d connector and the transmission range switch connector.
11. Park p a w l a n d p a w l s h a f t w o r n o r
damaged
12. ATF p u m p w o r n , binding, or foreign
material in ATF p u m p
13. ATF p u m p chain or ATF p u m p
sprocket w o r n or d a m a g e d
14. L o w CVTF level
15. ATF strainer or ATF filter clogged
16. Valve body assembly defective
17. CVT driven pulley pressure control
valve defective
18. CVT drive pulley pressure control
valve defective
19. C V T start c l u t c h p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l v a l v e
defective
20. Manual valve body defective
21. M a n u a l valve lines w o r n or d a m a g e d
22. Solenoid harness w o r n or d a m a g e d
23. PCM defective
24. Transmission range switch defective
25. Flywheel drive plate w o r n or d a m a g e d
26. Flywheel assembly defective
27. Engine output l o w
(cont'd)
14-11
CVT
Vehicle does not m o v e 1. Forward clutch defective • Check t h e f o r w a r d c l u t c h p r e s s u r e .
in D, L, a n d S 2. Reverse b r a k e p i s t o n stuck, w o r n , o r • Inspect t h e c l u t c h p i s t o n , t h e c l u t c h p i s t o n check v a l v e , a n d t h e
damaged O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e .
3. Sun gear w o r n or d a m a g e d Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e b e t w e e n t h e c l u t c h e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p
4. S h i f t c a b l e b r o k e n o r o u t of a d j u s t m e n t disc. If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s o e c t t h e c l u t c h d i s c s
b. M a n u a l v a l v e iever a n d p i n w o r n a n d plates f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates are
6. Manual valve body defective w o r n o r d a m a g e d , replace t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
7. PCM defective the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
8. Transmission range switch defective • Check f o r a l o o s e s h i f t cable at t h e s h i f t lever a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
9. Engine output low c o n t r o l shaft.
• Check f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e t r a n s m i s s i o n
range switch connector.
Vehicle does not m o v e 1. Forward clutch defective • Check t h e f o r w a r d c l u t c h p r e s s u r e .
in R 2. Reverse b r a k e d e f e c t i v e • Inspect t h e c l u t c h p i s t o n , t h e c l u t c h p i s t o n check v a l v e , a n d t h e
3. Reverse b r a k e p i s t o n stuck, w o r n , o r O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e .
damaged Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e b e t w e e n t h e c l u t c h e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p
4. Planetary carrier a s s e m b l y w o r n or disc. If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e c l u t c h d i s c s
damaged a n d plates f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates are
5. Sun gear w o r n or d a m a g e d w o r n o r d a m a g e d , replace t h e m as a set. If t h e y are OK, a d j u s t
6. R i n g gear w o r n or d a m a g e d the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
7. Input shaft needle bearing w o r n or • Check f o r a l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e s h i f t lever a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
damaged c o n t r o l lever.
8. Thrust needle bearing on planetary • Check t h e r e v e r s e brake p r e s s u r e .
carrier seized, w o r n or d a m a g e d • Inspect t h e brake p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g
9. Thrust w a s h e r on planetary carrier r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e b e t w e e n
seized, w o r n o r d a m a g e d t h e brake e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f
10. S h i f t c a b l e b r o k e n o r o u t of a d j u s t m e n t t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e brake d i s c s a n d plates f o r w e a r a n d
11. M a n u a l v a l v e lever a n d p i n w o r n d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates are w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e
12. Manual valve body defective t h e m as a set. If t h e y are OK, a d j u s t t h e c l e a r a n c e w i t h t h e
13. Solenoid harness w o r n or d a m a g e d brake e n d - p l a t e .
14. Transmission range switch defective • Check t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g a n d t h e t h r u s t w a s h e r s o n t h e
15. Engine output low p l a n e t a r y c a r r i e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g o r
t h e t h r u s t w a s h e r is w o r n or d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e b e a r i n g o r
the washer, and adjust the clearance w i t h the thrust s h i m .
• Check f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
connector and the transmission range switch connector.
14-12
Symptom P r o b a b l e cause(s)
Engine stops w h e n 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • C h e c k t h e r e v e r s e brake p r e s s u r e .
shifted to D f r o m N or damaged • Inspect t h e reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the
2. Reverse b r a k e d e f e c t i v e s p r i n g retainer f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e clearance
3. R e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n stuck, w o r n o r b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e
damaged c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e d i s c s
4. Start clutch defective a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d p l a t e s a r e
5. Start clutch end-plate clearance w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y a r e O K , a d j u s t
incorrect t h e clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
6. ATF strainer or ATF filter c l o g g e d • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
7. CVT driven pulley pressure control connector and the transmission range switch connector.
valve defective • Calibrate t h e start clutch control system.
8. CVT d r i v e p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l
valve defective
9. CVT s t a r t c l u t c h p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l v a l v e
defective
10. M a n u a l valve b o d y defective
11. M a n u a l v a l v e b o d y lines w o r n o r
damaged
12. S o l e n o i d h a r n e s s w o r n or d a m a g e d
13. PCM defective
14. Start clutch control system m e m o r y in
PCM defective
Engine stops w h e n 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e f o r w a r d c l u t c h p r e s s u r e .
shifted to R f r o m N or d a m a g e d • Inspect t h e clutch piston, t h e clutch piston check valve, and the
2. Forward clutch defective O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e .
3. Start clutch defective Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e b e t w e e n t h e c l u t c h e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p
4. Start clutch end-plate clearance disc. If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e c l u t c h discs
incorrect a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d p l a t e s are
5. Planetary carrier w o r n or d a m a g e d w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y a r e O K , a d j u s t
6. Thrust needle bearing on planetary the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
carrier seized, w o r n or d a m a g e d • Check t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g a n d t h e t h r u s t w a s h e r s o n t h e
7. Thrust w a s h e r o n planetary carrier p l a n e t a r y c a r r i e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g o r
seized, w o r n o r d a m a g e d t h r u s t w a s h e r is w o r n o r d a m a g e d , replace t h e b e a r i n g o r
8. Valve b o d y assembly defective washer, and adjust the clearance w i t h the thrust s h i m .
9. CVT d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l • Check f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
valve defective connector and the transmission range switch connector.
10. CVT d r i v e p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l • Calibrate the start clutch control s y s t e m .
valve defective
11. CVT start clutch pressure control valve
defective
12. Manual valve b o d y defective
13. S o l e n o i d h a r n e s s w o r n or d a m a g e d
14. PCM defective
15. S t a r t c l u t c h c o n t r o l s y s t e m m e m o r y in
PCM defective
(cont'd)
14-13
CVT
No shift t o higher ratio 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check the drive a n d driven pulley pressure, a n d lubrication
or l o w e r ratio or d a m a g e d p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
2. Pulley p r e s s u r e f e e d p i p e d a m a g e d o r the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
3. ATF p u m p w o r n , binding or foreign • C h e c k t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d check t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
I.s A T F p u m p f e a k a g e a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
4. L o w CVTF level cooler lines.
5. ATF strainer or ATF filter clogged • If t h e s t r a i n e r is c l o g g e d , f i n d t h e d a m a g e d c o m p o n e n t s t h a t
6. Valve b o d y assembly defective caused debris.
7. CVT driven pulley pressure control • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
valve defective connector.
valve defective
10. CVT input shaft {drive pulley) a n d
o u t p u t shaft (driven pulley) speed
sensors defective
11. C V T s p e e d s e n s o r a n d CVT s p e e d
sensor (secondary) defective
('06 m o d e l )
12. CVT speed sensor defective
('07-09 m o d e l s )
13. PCM defective
Poor acceleration 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, and lubrication
or d a m a g e d p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
2. Pulley pressure feed pipe d a m a g e d o r the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
3. ATF strainer or ATF filter clogged • C h e c k t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
4. Valve b o d y assembly defective l e a k a g e a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
5. CVT driven pulley pressure control cooler lines.
valve defective • If t h e s t r a i n e r is c l o g g e d , f i n d t h e d a m a g e d c o m p o n e n t s t h a t
6. CVT drive pulley pressure control caused debris.
valve defective • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
7. M a n u a l v a l v e lines w o r n o r d a m a g e d connector.
8. Solenoid valve defective
10. CVT input shaft (drive pulley) a n d
sensors defective
11. C V T s p e e d s e n s o r a n d CVT s p e e d
('06 m o d e l )
('07-09 m o d e l s )
13. PCM defective
15. I M A m o t o r defective
14-14
Flares w h i l e d r i v i n g 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
or d a m a g e d p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , check
out of r o u n d sprocket.
3. Forward clutch defective • Check the f o r w a r d clutch pressure.
4. Reverse b r a k e d e f e c t i v e • Inspect the clutch piston, t h e clutch piston check valve, and the
5. Reverse b r a k e p i s t o n s t u c k , w o r n o r O-rings. Check the spring retainer f o r w e a r and d a m a g e .
damaged Inspect the clearance b e t w e e n t h e clutch end-plate and t h e t o p
6. Start clutch defective disc. If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e c l u t c h d i s c s
7. Start clutch end-plate clearance a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates are
incorrect w o r n o r d a m a g e d , replace t h e m as a set. If t h e y a r e OK, a d j u s t
8. Start clutch f e e d pipe d a m a g e d or out the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
of r o u n d • C h e c k t h e r e v e r s e brake p r e s s u r e .
9. L o w CVTF l e v e l • I n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e
10. ATF s t r a i n e r o r A T F f i l t e r c l o g g e d s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e
11. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e
12. Valve b o d y assembly defective c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e d i s c s
13. CVT d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates are
valve defective w o r n o r d a m a g e d , replace t h e m as a set. If t h e y a r e O K , a d j u s t
14. CVT d r i v e p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l t h e clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
valve defective • Check f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
15. CVT s t a r t c l u t c h p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l v a l v e connector.
defective
20. CVT i n p u t s h a f t ( d r i v e p u l l e y ) a n d
output shaft (driven pulley) speed
sensors defective
21. CVT s p e e d s e n s o r a n d C V T s p e e d
('06 m o d e l )
22. CVT s p e e d s e n s o r d e f e c t i v e
('07-09 m o d e l )
23. PCM d e f e c t i v e
(cont'd)
14-15
CVT
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Excessive s h o c k w h e n 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
accelerating and or d a m a g e d p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
decelerating 2. Pulley p r e s s u r e f e e d p i p e d a m a g e d o r the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
o u t of r o u n d sprocket.
3. Forward clutch defective • Check t h e f o r w a r d c l u t c h p r e s s u r e .
4. R s v s r s e brake d e f e c t i v e • Inspect t h e c l u t c h p i s t o n , t h e c l u t c h p i s t o n check v a l v e , a n d t h e
5. Reverse b r a k e p i s t o n s t u c k , w o r n o r O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e .
damaged Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e b e t w e e n t h e c l u t c h e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p
6. Start c l u t c h d e f e c t i v e disc. If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e c l u t c h d i s c s
7. Start clutch end-plate clearance a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e discs a n d plates are
incorrect w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
8. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d o r o u t the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
of r o u n d • Check t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p r e s s u r e .
9. L o w CVTF level • Inspect t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e
10. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e
11. Valve b o d y assembly defective b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e
12. CVT d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e d i s c s
valve defective a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates are
13. CVT d r i v e p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are OK, a d j u s t
valve defective the clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
14. CVT start clutch pressure control valve • Check f o r a s t o r e d D T C , a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
defective connector.
15. Manual valve b o d y defective • Check t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
16. M a n u a l valve lines w o r n or d a m a g e d leakage a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
17. PCM defective cooler lines.
18. Start clutch control s y s t e m m e m o r y in • Calibrate the start clutch control system.
PCM defective
20. IMA m o t o r defective
No engine braking 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
3. Start clutch defective * Check f o r a s t o r e d D T C , a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
4. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d or out connector.
of round
5. Valve b o d y assembly defective
6. CVT d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l
valve defective
valve defective
8. CVT start clutch pressure control valve
defective
10. Manual valve lines w o r n or d a m a g e d
12. S o l e n o i d harness w o r n or d a m a g e d
13. CVT i n p u t shaft ( d r i v e p u l l e y ) a n d
sensors defective
14. CVT speed sensor a n d CVT speed
('06 m o d e l )
('07-09 m o d e l s )
16. PCM defective
14-16
Vehicle does not creep 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
o n a f l a t r o a d in D, S, or damaged p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
and L 2. Pulley pressure feed pipe d a m a g e d or the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
3. Start clutch defective • Check t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d check t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
4. Start clutch end-plate clearance leakage a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
incorrect cooler lines.
5. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d or out • Check f o r a stored DTC, a n d check f o r a loose s o l e n o i d harness
of round connector.
6. L o w CVTF level • Calibrate the start clutch control system.
7. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d
8. Valve b o d y assembly defective
valve defective
valve defective
defective
13. M a n u a l v a l v e lines w o r n o r d a m a g e d
sensors defective
17. CVT s p e e d s e n s o r a n d C V T s p e e d
('06 m o d e l )
('07-09 m o d e l s )
19. PCM defective
20. Start clutch control s y s t e m m e m o r y in
PCM defective
(cont'd)
14-17
CVT
V e h i c l e m o v e s in N, 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check the f o r w a r d clutch pressure.
s h i f t c a b l e is p r o p e r l y or d a m a g e d • Inspect the clutch piston, t h e clutch piston check valve, and the
adjusted 2. Forward clutch defective O-rings. Check the s p r i n g retainer for w e a r a n d d a m a g e .
3. Reverse b r a k e d e f e c t i v e Inspect the clearance b e t w e e n the clutch end-plate and t h e t o p
4. R e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n stuck, w o r n o r d i s c . If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e c l u t c h d i s c s
damaged a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e discs a n d plates are
5. Input shaft w o r n or d a m a g e d w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
6. Input shaft needle bearing seized, the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
w o r n or d a m a g e d • Check t h e reverse brake pressure.
7. M a n u a l v a l v e lever a n d p i n w o r n • Inspect the reverse brake piston a n d the O-rings. Check the
8. Manual valve b o d y defective s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e
b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p d i s c . If t h e
c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e d i s c s
a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e discs a n d plates are
w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
the clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
Late s h i f t a f t e r s h i f t i n g 1. Pulley p r e s s u r e f e e d p i p e d a m a g e d o r • Check the drive and driven pulley pressure, and lubrication
f r o m N to D out of round p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
2. Forward clutch defective the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
3. Start clutch defective sprocket.
4. Start clutch end-plate clearance • Check the f o r w a r d clutch pressure.
incorrect • Inspect the clutch piston, t h e clutch piston check valve, and the
5. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d or out O-rings. Check the s p r i n g retainer f o r w e a r and d a m a g e .
of round Inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate and the t o p
6. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment d i s c . If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e c l u t c h d i s c s
7. M a n u a l valve lever and pin w o r n a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e discs a n d plates are
8. L o w CVTF level w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
9. ATF strainer or ATF filter c l o g g e d the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
10. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d • Check f o r a stored DTC, and check f o r a loose s o l e n o i d harness
11. Valve body assembly defective connector.
12. C V T start c l u t c h p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l v a l v e • C h e c k f o r a l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e s h i f t lever a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
defective c o n t r o l lever.
13. Manual valve body defective • C h e c k t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
14. M a n u a l valve lines w o r n or d a m a g e d l e a k a g e a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
15. PCM defective cooler lines.
16. Transmission range switch defective • Check f o r a stored DTC, and check f o r a loose t r a n s m i s s i o n
range switch connector.
14-18
Late s h i f t after s h i f t i n g 1. Pulley p r e s s u r e f e e d p i p e d a m a g e d o r • Check the drive a n d driven pulley pressure, a n d lubrication
f r o m N to R out of round p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
2. R e v e r s e brake d e f e c t i v e the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
3. R e v e r s e brake p i s t o n s t u c k , w o r n o r sprocket.
damaged • Check the reverse brake pressure.
4. R e v e r s e brake r e t u r n s p r i n g s / r e t a i n e r • I n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e
w o r n or damaged s p r i n g retainer f o r w e a r and d a m a g e . Inspect the clearance
5. Start clutch defective b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e
6. Start clutch end-plate clearance c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e d i s c s
incorrect a n d plates f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates are
7. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d or o u t w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
of r o u n d the clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
8. Shift cable broken or o u t of a d j u s t m e n t • Check f o r a s t o r e d D T C , a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
9. M a n u a l v a l v e lever a n d p i n w o r n connector.
10. L o w CVTF level • C h e c k f o r a l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e s h i f t l e v e r a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
11. A T F s t r a i n e r or A T F f i l t e r c l o g g e d c o n t r o l lever.
12. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d • C h e c k t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
13. Valve b o d y assembly defective leakage a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , clean t h e A T F
14. CVT start clutch pressure control valve c o o l e r lines.
defective • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e t r a n s m i s s i o n
15. Manual valve body defective range switch connector.
16. M a n u a l v a l v e lines w o r n o r d a m a g e d
18. PCM defective
(cont'd)
14-19
CVT
Unstable r p m while 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
driving or damaged p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
2. Pulley pressure feed pipe d a m a g e d or the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
3. Forward clutch defective • Check the f o r w a r d clutch pressure.
4. Reverse brake defective • Inspect the clutch piston, t h e clutch piston check valve, and the
5. Reverse brake piston stuck, w o r n or O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e .
damaged Inspect the clearance b e t w e e n t h e clutch end-plate a n d the t o p
7. Start clutch end-plate clearance a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e discs a n d p l a t e s are
8. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d or out the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
of round • Check f o r a stored DTC, a n d check f o r a loose s o l e n o i d harness
9. ATF p u m p w o r n , b i n d i n g , or f o r e i g n connector.
material in ATF p u m p • Check the reverse brake pressure.
10. L o w CVTF level • I n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e
11. ATF strainer o r ATF filter c l o g g e d s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e
12. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e
13. Valve body assembly defective c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e d i s c s
14. CVT driven pulley pressure control a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e discs a n d p l a t e s are
valve defective w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
15. CVT drive pulley pressure control the clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
valve defective • C h e c k t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
16. CVT start clutch pressure control valve leakage a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
defective cooler lines.
17. Manual valve body defective • C a l i b r a t e t h e start c l u t c h c o n t r o l s y s t e m .
21. CVT input shaft (drive pulley) a n d
sensors defective
22. CVT speed sensor and CVT speed
('06 m o d e l )
('07-09 m o d e l s )
24. PCM defective
25. Start clutch c o n t r o l s y s t e m m e m o r y in
PCM defective
26. Engine output low
27. I M A motor defective
14-20
Symptom P r o b a b l e cause(s) Noies
Excessive s h o c k w h e n 1. Forward clutch defective • Check t h e f o r w a r d c l u t c h p r e s s u r e .
starting off 2. Reverse brake defective • Inspect the clutch p i s t o n , t h e clutch piston check valve, a n d the
3. R e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n stuck, w o r n o r O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e .
damaged Inspect t h e clearance b e t w e e n t h e clutch end-plate a n d t h e t o p
5. Start clutch end-plate clearance a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d p l a t e s a r e
of round • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
7. L o w CVTF level connector.
8. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d • C h e c k t h e r e v e r s e brake p r e s s u r e .
9. Valve body assembly defective • I n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e
10. CVT driven pulley pressure control s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e
valve defective b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e
11. CVT drive pulley pressure control c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e d i s c s
valve defective a n d plates f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d p l a t e s are
12. C V T start c l u t c h p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l v a l v e w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
defective t h e clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
13. S o l e n o i d h a r n e s s w o r n or d a m a g e d • Check t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
14. PCM defective leakage a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
15. Start clutch c o n t r o l s y s t e m m e m o r y in c o o l e r lines.
PCM defective • C a l i b r a t e t h e start c l u t c h c o n t r o l s y s t e m .
(cont'd)
14-21
CVT
E x c e s s i v e v i b r a t i o n in D, 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check the f o r w a r d clutch pressure.
S , L, a n d R or d a m a g e d • Inspect the clutch piston, the clutch piston check valve, a n d t h e
2. Forward clutch defective O - r i n g s . Check t h e s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e ,
3. Reverse b r a k e d e f e c t i v e inspect the clearance b e t w e e n the clutch end-plate a n d t h e t o p
4. Reverse brake piston stuck, w o r n or d i s c . If t h e c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e c l u t c h d i s c s
damaged a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e discs a n d p l a t e s a r e
5. Start clutch defective w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
6. Start clutch end-plate clearance the clearance w i t h the clutch end-plate.
incorrect • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d check f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
7. Start clutch feed pipe d a m a g e d or o u t connector.
of round • C h e c k t h e r e v e r s e brake p r e s s u r e .
8. Input shaft w o r n or d a m a g e d • I n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e
9. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d s p r i n g retainer for w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect the clearance
10. Valve b o d y assembly defective b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p disc. If t h e
11. CVT d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e brake d i s c s
valve defective a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d plates a r e
12. CVT d r i v e p u l l e y p r e s s u r e c o n t r o l w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
valve defective t h e clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
13. CVT start clutch pressure control valve • C h e c k t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
defective l e a k a g e a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
14. Solenoid valve defective c o o l e r lines.
15. S o l e n o i d h a r n e s s w o r n or d a m a g e d • C a l i b r a t e t h e start c l u t c h c o n t r o l s y s t e m .
16. PCM defective
17. S t a r t c l u t c h c o n t r o l s y s t e m m e m o r y in
PCM defective
18. F l y w h e e l d r i v e plate w o r n o r d a m a g e d
Excessive idle v i b r a t i o n 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n S e t i d l e r p m t o t h e s p e c i f i e d i d l e s p e e d . If still n o g o o d , a d j u s t t h e
in N a n d P or damaged engine and the transmission mounts.
2. Input shaft w o r n or d a m a g e d
3. Flywheel drive plate w o r n or d a m a g e d
14-22
Noise f r o m 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n Check t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g a n d t h e t h r u s t w a s h e r s o n t h e
t r a n s m i s s i o n in N a n d P or d a m a g e d p l a n e t a r y c a r r i e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g o r
2. Input shaft w o r n or d a m a g e d t h r u s t w a s h e r is w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e b e a r i n g o r
3. Planetary carrier w o r n or d a m a g e d washer, and adjust the clearance w i t h the thrust shim.
4. Input shaft needle bearing seized,
w o r n or damaged
5. Thrust needle bearing o n planetary
carrier seized, w o r n or d a m a g e d
6. Thrust w a s h e r o n planetary carrier
seized, w o r n o r d a m a g e d
7. ATF p u m p w o r n , b i n d i n g , or f o r e i g n
m a t e r i a l in A T F p u m p
V i b r a t i o n in all 1. Flywheel drive plate w o r n or d a m a g e d
positions 2. Flywheel assembly defective
Stall s p e e d l o w 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
3. Start clutch defective • Check f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
4. Valve body assembly defective connector, and transmission range switch connector.
valve defective
valve defective
defective
o u t p u t shaft ( d r i v e n p u l l e y ) s p e e d
sensors defective
9. PCM defective
12. I M A motor defective
(cont'd)
14-23
CVT
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Stall s p e e d h i g h 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
or damaged p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
2. Pulley pressure feed pipe d a m a g e d or the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
3. Forward clutch defective • Check t h e f o r w a r d c l u t c h p r e s s u r e .
4. Reverse brake defective • Inspect the clutch p i s t o n , t h e clutch piston check valve, and the
5. Reverse brake piston stuck, w o r n or O-rings. Check the spring retainer for w e a r and d a m a g e ,
damaged inspect the clearance between the clutch end-plate and the t o p
7. Start clutch end-plate clearance a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d p l a t e s are
of round • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e s o l e n o i d h a r n e s s
9. ATF p u m p w o r n , binding, or foreign connector.
m a t e r i a l in A T F p u m p • Check t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p r e s s u r e .
10. L o w CVTF l e v e l • I n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e p i s t o n a n d t h e O - r i n g s . Check t h e
11. CVTF d e t e r i o r a t e d s p r i n g r e t a i n e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . Inspect t h e c l e a r a n c e
12. Valve b o d y assembly defective b e t w e e n t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e e n d - p l a t e a n d t h e t o p d i s c . If t h e
13. CVT driven pulley pressure control c l e a r a n c e is o u t o f t o l e r a n c e , i n s p e c t t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e discs
valve defective a n d p l a t e s f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e d i s c s a n d p l a t e s are
14. CVT drive pulley pressure control w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e m as a set. If t h e y are O K , a d j u s t
valve defective the clearance w i t h the reverse brake end-plate.
15. CVT start clutch pressure control valve • Check t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
defective l e a k a g e a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
16. Manual valve body defective cooler lines.
17. M a n u a l v a l v e lines w o r n o r d a m a g e d • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e t r a n s m i s s i o n
18. Solenoid harness w o r n or d a m a g e d range switch connector.
19. CVT input shaft (drive pulley) and
sensors defective
20. PCM defective
14-24
Judder when starting 1. S t a r t cl u t c h d e f e c t i v e • Check f o r a stored DTC, and check f o r a loose solenoid harness
off 2. CVTF deteriorated o r worn o u t connector.
3. Valve b o d y assembly defective • Check the C V T F level, and check the A T F cooler lines f o r
4. CVT s t a r t c l u t c h p r e s s u r e control v a l v e leakage and loose connections. Clean the ATF cooler lines, and
defective replace the CVTF.
5. CVT i n p u t s h a f t ( d r i v e p u l l e y ) a n d • Check the start clutch with the H D S .
o u t p u t s h a f t (driven p u l l e y ) s p e e d
sensors d e f e c t i v e
6. CVT s p e e d sensor a n d CVT s p e e d
sensor (secondary) d e f e c t i v e
('06 model)
7. CVT s p e e d sensor d e f e c t i v e
('07-09 models)
8. PCM d e f e c t i v e
Noise f r o m 1. Reverse brake defective • Check the reverse brake pressure.
transmission in R 2. Reverse b r a k e p i s t o n s t u c k , worn o r • Inspect the reverse brake piston and the O-rings. Check the
damaged spring retainer f o r wear and damage. Inspect the clearance
3. R e v e r s e b r a k e return springs/retainer between the reverse brake end-plate and the top disc. If the
worn o r d a m a g e d clearance is out of tolerance, inspect the reverse brake discs
4. Start clutch defective and plates f o r wear and damage. If the discs and plates are
5. I n p u t s h a f t worn o r d a m a g e d worn or damaged, replace them as a set. If they are O K , adjust
6. Secondary drive g e a r o r secondary the clearance with the reverse brake end-plate.
driven g e a r worn o r d a m a g e d • Check the needle bearing and the thrust washers on the
7. Final d r i v e n g e a r worn o r d a m a g e d planetary carrier f o r wear and damage. If the needle bearing or
8. Planetary carrier worn or d a m a g e d thrust washer is worn or damaged, replace the bearing or
9. Sun g e a r worn o r d a m a g e d washer, and adjust the clearance with the thrust shim.
10. Ring gear worn or d a m a g e d • Check the CVTF level, and check the A T F cooler lines f o r
11. Input shaft needle bearing seized, leakage and loose connections. If necessary, clean the A T F
worn o r d a m a g e d cooler lines.
12. T h r u s t n e e d l e b e a r i n g o n planetary
c a r r i e r s e i z e d , worn o r d a m a g e d
13. T h r u s t washer on planetary carrier
seized, worn o r d a m a g e d
14. Detent lever assembly worn o r
damaged
15. Park pawl a n d pawl shaft worn o r
damaged
16. Park pawl s p r i n g worn or d a m a g e d
19. Flywheel a s s e m b l y d e f e c t i v e
(cont'd)
14-25
CVT
Noise f r o m 1. Intermediate housing assembly w o r n • Check t h e CVTF l e v e l , a n d c h e c k t h e A T F c o o l e r lines f o r
t r a n s m i s s i o n in D, S, or d a m a g e d l e a k a g e a n d l o o s e c o n n e c t i o n s . If n e c e s s a r y , c l e a n t h e A T F
and L 2. Start clutch defective cooler lines.
3. Input shaft w o r n or d a m a g e d • Check t h e d r i v e a n d d r i v e n p u l l e y p r e s s u r e , a n d l u b r i c a t i o n
4. Secondary drive gear or secondary p r e s s u r e . If t h e p r e s s u r e is l o w o r t h e r e is n o p r e s s u r e , c h e c k
driven gear w o r n or d a m a g e d the ATF p u m p , the ATF p u m p chain, and the ATF p u m p
5. Final d r i v e n g e a r w o r n o r d a m a g e d sprocket.
6. Planetary carrier w o r n or d a m a g e d • I n s p e c t t h e d i f f e r e n t i a l p i n i o n g e a r s f o r w e a r . If t h e d i f f e r e n t i a l
7. Input shaft needle bearing seized, p i n i o n gears are w o r n , replace the differential assembly,
w o r n or d a m a g e d replace t h e ATF strainer, and t h o r o u g h l y clean t h e
8. Thrust needle bearing o n planetary t r a n s m i s s i o n , the ATF cooler, and the ATF cooler lines.
carrier seized, w o r n or d a m a g e d • Check t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g a n d t h e t h r u s t w a s h e r s o n t h e
9. Thrust w a s h e r o n planetary carrier p l a n e t a r y c a r r i e r f o r w e a r a n d d a m a g e . If t h e n e e d l e b e a r i n g o r
seized, w o r n or d a m a g e d t h r u s t w a s h e r is w o r n o r d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e t h e b e a r i n g o r
10. Detent lever a s s e m b l y w o r n or washer, a n d adjust the clearance w i t h the thrust s h i m .
damaged
11. Park p a w l a n d p a w l s h a f t w o r n o r
damaged
12. Park p a w l s p r i n g w o r n o r d a m a g e d
13. A T F p u m p w o r n , b i n d i n g , or f o r e i g n
material in ATF p u m p
14-26
Shift lever does not 1. Detent lever a s s e m b l y w o r n or • Check f o r l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e s h i f t l e v e r a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
operate smoothly damaged c o n t r o l lever.
2. C o n t r o l lever w o r n o r d a m a g e d • Check t h e p a r k p a w l s p r i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n .
3. Park p a w l a n d p a w l s h a f t w o r n o r • C h e c k f o r a s t o r e d DTC, a n d c h e c k f o r a l o o s e t r a n s m i s s i o n
damaged range switch connector.
4. Park g e a r w o r n o r d a m a g e d
6. Shift cable broken or out of a d j u s t m e n t
7. M a n u a l valve lever a n d p i n w o r n
Transmission will not 1. Detent lever assembly w o r n or • Check f o r a l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e s h i f t l e v e r a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
s h i f t i n t o P, o r damaged c o n t r o l lever.
transmission cannot 2. Control lever w o r n or d a m a g e d • Check t h e p a r k p a w l s p r i n g i n s t a l l a t i o n .
shift o u t of P 3. Park p a w l a n d p a w l s h a f t w o r n o r • Check for a stored DTC, a n d check for a loose t r a n s m i s s i o n
damaged range switch connector.
4. Park g e a r w o r n o r d a m a g e d
6. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment
7. M a n u a l v a l v e lever a n d p i n w o r n
9. PCM defective
A/T gear position 1. Detent lever assembly w o r n or • C h e c k f o r a l o o s e s h i f t c a b l e at t h e s h i f t lever a n d t h e s e l e c t o r
indicator does not damaged c o n t r o l lever.
i n d i c a t e s h i f t lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of adjustment • Check f o r a stored DTC, a n d check for a loose t r a n s m i s s i o n
positions 3. Transmission range switch defective range switch connector.
4. PCM defective
14-27
PARK PIN S W I T C H SHIFT L O C K S O L E N O I D
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY)

SPEED SENSOR
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
CVT SPEED SENSOR

(SECONDARY)
('06 model)
Replacement,
C V T SPEED SENSOR page 14-172
INHIBITOR SOLENOID
C V T S T A R T CLUTCH
P R E S S U R E CONTROL V A L V E C V T DRIVEN P U L L E Y
Replacement, page 14-168 P R E S S U R E CONTROL V A L V E
C V T INPUT SHAFT (DRIVE PULLEY) C V T DRIVE PULLEY

SPEED SENSOR P R E S S U R E CONTROL V A L V E
Replacement, page 14-170 Replacement, page 14-169
14-28
General Operation
The continuously variable transmission (CVT) is an electronically controlled automatic transmission w i t h the drive and
driven pulleys, and a steel belt. The CVT provides stepless forward speeds and one in reverse.
Transmission
A r o u n d the outside of the flywheel is a ring gear which meshes w i t h the starter drive gear w h e n the engine is being
started. The transmission has four parallel shafts: the input shaft, the drive pulley shaft, the driven pulley shaft, and
the final drive shaft. The input shaft is connected to the flywheel, w h i c h is connected to the IMA motor rotor through
the drive plate. This is connected to the end of the engine crankshaft. The drive pulley shaft and the driven pulley shaft
consists of movable and fixed face pulleys. Both pulleys are linked by the steel belt.
The input shaft includes the sun gear and the planetary gears w i t h the carrier. The drive pulley shaft includes the drive
pulley and the forward clutch. The driven pulley shaft includes the driven pulley, the start clutch, and the secondary
drive gear which is integral w i t h the park gear. The final drive shaft is positioned between the secondary drive gear
and the final driven gear. The final drive shaft includes the secondary driven gear and the final drive gear which serves
to change the rotation direction, because the drive pulley shaft and the driven pulley shaft rotate the same direction.
W h e n certain conditions of the planetary gears in the transmission are engaged by the forward clutch and the reverse
brake, power is transmitted f r o m the drive pulley shaft to the driven pulley shaft to provide L, S, D, and R positions.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and solenoid valves. Shifting
is electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The lower valve body assembly includes the main valve body, the secondary valve body, the CVT driven pulley
pressure control valve, the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve, the CVT start clutch pressure control valve, and
the inhibitor solenoid valve. These valve bodies are positioned on the lower portion of the transmission housing. The
manual valve body is bolted on the intermediate housing.
The main valve body contains the start clutch shift valve, the shift inhibitor valve, the lubrication regulator valve, and
cooler relief valve. The secondary valve body contains the pressure high (PH) regulator valve, the pressure high
control (PHC) shift valve, the start clutch back-up valve, the clutch reducing valve, and the start clutch accumulator
valve. The CVT driven pulley pressure control valve contains pulley control valve A and the driven pulley control valve
w i t h the solenoid. The CVT drive pulley pressure control valve contains pulley control valve B and the drive pulley
control valve w i t h the solenoid. The CVT start clutch pressure control valve consists of the start clutch pressure control
valve and the solenoid. These solenoids are controlled by the PCM. The manual valve body contains the manual valve
and the reverse inhibitor valve.
The ATF pump is located on the transmission housing, and it is linked with the input shaft by the sprockets and the
sprocket chain. The pulleys, the forward clutch, and the start clutch receive fluid f r o m their respective feed pipes, and
the reverse brake receives fluid f r o m an internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control
The PCM controls the shift pulley ratio through the solenoids, while receiving input signals f r o m the various sensors
and switches located throughout the vehicle. The PCM actuates the pulley control solenoids to control pulley control
valves A and B. Drive pulley pressure is regulated at pulley control valve B and applied to the drive pulley, driven
pulley pressure is regulated at pulley control valve A and applied to the driven pulley, and the pulley ratio is changed
t o their directed ratio.
(cont'd)
14-29
CVT
G e n e r a l O p e r a t i o n (cont'd)
Gear Selection
The shift lever has six positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE, S: SECOND, and L: LOW.
Position Description
P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with the park gear on the driven pulley shaft. The start
clutch and the forward clutch are released.
R: REVERSE Reverse; reverse brake engaged.
N: NEUTRAL Neutral; the start clutch and forward clutch released.
D; DRIVE General driving; the transmission automatically adjusts to keep the engine at the best speed
for driving under all conditions.
S: SECOND For rapid acceleration; the transmission selects a lower range of ratios to give better
acceleration.
L: LOW For engine braking and power for c l i m b i n g ; the transmission shifts into the lowest range of the
ratios. The IMA battery is charged at a higher rate w h e n the transmission is in LOW (L) range.
In L, the IMA charge and discharge characteristics will be different than when the vehicle is in
D or S.
In L, the battery is charged at higher rate both while driving and when the engine is idling at a
stop.
Starting the engine is possible only in P and N through the use of a slide-type, neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (A/T) Gear Position Indicator

The A/T gear position indicator in the instrument panel shows what gear has been selected without looking down at
the console.
14-30
Clutches/Reverse Brake/Planetary Gear/Pulleys
Clutches/Reverse Brake *.
The CVT uses the hydraulic-actuated clutches and brake to engage and disengage the transmission gears. When
hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch d r u m and the reverse brake piston cavity, the clutch piston and the
reverse brake piston move. This presses the friction discs and the steel plates together, locking t h e m so they do not
slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch pack to its hub-mounted gear, and through the engaged
ring gear to the pinion gears.
Likewise, w h e n the hydraulic pressure is bled f r o m the clutch pack and reverse brake piston cavity, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
D R I V E PULLEY
(cont'd)
14-31
CVI

Clutches/Reverse Brake/Planetary Gear/Pulleys (cont'd)
Start Clutch
The start clutch engages/disengages the secondary drive gear, and is located at the end of the driven pulley shaft. The
start clutch i s s u p p l i e d h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e b y its ATF feed pipe w i t h i n t h e d r i v e n p u l l e y shaft.
Forward Clutch
The f o r w a r d clutch engages/disengages the sun gear, and is located at the end of the drive pulley shaft. The forward
clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe w i t h i n the drive pulley shaft.
Reverse Brake
The reverse brake locks the planetary carrier in R, and is located inside the intermediate housing around the planetary
carrier. The reverse brake discs are mounted t o the planetary carrier and the reverse brake plates are mounted on the
intermediate housing. The reverse brake is supplied hydraulic pressure by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic
circuit.
Planetary Gear Train

The planetary gear train is only used t o switch the rotational direction of the pulley shafts in R. The planetary gear train
consists of the sun gear, the planetary pinion gears, and the ring gear. The sun gear is connected to the input shaft
w i t h splines. The pinion gears are mounted on the planetary carrier. The planetary carrier is located on the end of the
input shaft, over the sun gear. The ring gear is located in the planetary carrier, and connected t o the forward clutch
d r u m . The sun gear inputs the engine power via the input shaft t o the planetary gears, and the carrier outputs the
engine power.
In D, S, and L (forward range), the pinion gears do not rotate and revolve around the sun gear, so the carrier rotates. In
R (reverse range), the reverse brake locks the planetary carrier, and the sun gear drives the pinion gears to rotate. The
pinion gears rotate, but do not revolve around the sun gear. The pinion gears drive the ring gear in the opposite
direction f r o m the rotational direction of the sun gear.
Pulleys
Both pulleys consist of a movable face and a fixed face, and the effective pulley ratio changes w i t h engine speed. The
drive pulley and the driven pulley are linked by the steel belt. To achieve a low pulley ratio, high hydraulic pressure
works on the movable face of the driven pulley and reduces the effective diameter of the drive pulley, and a lower
hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley t o eliminate the steel belt slippage. To achieve a
high pulley ratio, high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley and reduces the effective
diameter of the driven pulley, and l o w hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley to eliminate
the steel belt slippage.
14-32
Power Flow
P Position .
H y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e Is n o t a p p l i e d t o t h e s t a r t c l u t c h , t h e f o r w a r d c l u t c h , a n d t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e . P o w e r is n o t
t r a n s m i t t e d t o t h e s e c o n d a r y d r i v e g e a r . T h e s e c o n d a r y d r i v e g e a r is l o c k e d b y t h e p a r k p a w l i n t e r l o c k i n g t h e p a r k g e a r .
N Position •
E n g i n e p o w e r t r a n s m i t t e d f r o m t h e f l y w h e e l d r i v e s t h e I n p u t s h a f t , b u t h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e is n o t a p p l i e d t o t h e f o r w a r d
c l u t c h a n d t h e r e v e r s e b r a k e . P o w e r is n o t t r a n s m i t t e d t o t h e d r i v e p u l l e y s h a f t . A l s o h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e is n o t a p p l i e d
to the start clutch.
STEEL BELT D R I V E P U L L E Y SHAFT
(cont'd)
14-33
CVT
Power Flow (cont'd)
Forward Range; D, S, and L Positions

• Forward clutch; engaged
• Reverse brake: released
• Start clutch: engaged
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the forward clutch and the start clutch, and the sun gear drives the forward clutch.
• The forward clutch drives the drive pulley shaft, w h i c h drives the driven pulley shaft linked by the steel belt.
• The driven pulley shaft drives the secondary drive gear via the start clutch.
• Power is transmitted to the secondary driven gear and the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
STEEL BELT DRIVE PULLEY SHAFT
14-34
Reverse Range; R position
• Forward clutch; released
• Reverse brake: engaged
• Start clutch: engaged
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the reverse brake and the start clutch, and the planetary carrier locks w i t h the
reverse brake.
• The sun gear drives the pinion gears to rotate, and the pinion gears drive the ring gear in the opposite direction f r o m
the rotational direction of the sun gear.
• The ring gear drives the drive pulley shaft via the forward clutch d r u m , *and the drive pulley shaft drives the driven
pulley shaft linked by the steel belt.
• The driven pulley shaft drives the secondary drive gear via the start clutch.
• Power is transmitted to the secondary driven gear and the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear.
STEEL B E L T DRIVE P U L L E Y SHAFT
14-35
CVT
Electronic Control System
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists of the powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, switches, and solenoid valves.
Shifting is electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
The PCM receives input signals f r o m the sensors, switches, and other control units, processes data, and outputs
signals for the engine control system and the CVT control system. The CVT control system includes shift control,
pulley pressure control, start clutch pressure control, and reverse inhibitor control. The PCM actuates the pulley
control solenoids to control pulley control valves A and B shifting transmission pulley ratios.
Powertrain
Engine RPM Signal
Control M o d u l e (PCM)
Accelerator Pedal Position

Sensor Signal A / T Gear Position Indicator
F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n ABS Modulator-Control U n i t * 2
3
VSA Modulator-Control U n i t *
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal Shift Control
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal Start Clutch Pressure Start Clutch Pressure
Control Signal Control Solenoid Valve
Intake Air Temperature

Sensor Signal
Pulley Pressure
Brake Pedal Position Control
Switch Signal Driven Pulley Pressure CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
Control Signal Control Valve
Start Clutch
Control
Transmission Drive Pulley Pressure CVT Drive Pulley Pressure
Range Control Signal Control Valve
Switch
Signal
Reverse Inhibitor
Control
Reverse Inhibitor Inhibitor Solenoid Valve
Control Signal
CVT Input Shaft

(Drive Pulley)
Speed Sensor Signal
IMA CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n M o t o r Control Module
CVT O u t p u t Shaft
(Driven Pulley)
Speed Sensor Signal
CVT Speed Sensor Signal
CVT Speed Sensor

(Secondary) S i g n a l *
*1:'06 model
*2: A B S model
*3: V S A model
14-36
Pulley Pressure Control/Shift Control
To reduce belt slippage and increase belt life, the PCM calculates signals f r o m the sensors and switches, and actuates
the pulley pressure control solenoid valves to maintain o p t i m u m pulley pressure. W h e n the pulley ratio is low (low
vehicle speed), high hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley and reduces the effective
diameter of the driven pulley, and a lower hydraulic pressure works on the movable face of the drive pulley to
eliminate the steel belt slippage. When the pulley ratio is high (high vehicle speed), high hydraulic pressure works on
the movable face of the drive pulley and reduces the effective diameter of the drive pulley, and a lower hydraulic
pressure works on the movable face of the driven pulley to eliminate the steel belt slippage.
The PCM compares actual driving conditions w i t h programmed driving conditions to control shifting, and it instantly
determines a drive pulley ratio f r o m various signals sent f r o m sensors and switches. The PCM activates the CVT drive
pulley pressure control valve to control pulley pressure to the pulleys. The drive pulley drives the driven pulley via a
steel belt at varying ratios ranging f r o m 2.526 to 0.421 in D.
Transmission
Range
Switch Signal
0 J u d g m e n t of
Shift L e v e r P o s i t i o n
F-CAIM C o m m u n i c a t i o n L i n e A/T Gear
Position
Indicator
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
C o r r e c t i o n of E n g i n e
Torque Signal Data
Calculation
of
Engine RPM Signal Drive Belt
Transfer
Torque
Manifold Absolute Decision
Pressure Sensor Signal of
Minimum
Required
Pulley
Pressure
C V T Input Shaft
(Drive Pulley)
Speed Sensor Signal
C V T Output Shaft
(Driven Pulley) S p e e d CVT
Sensor Signal Driven
Pulley
Fail-safe
Pressure
Control
Control
Decision Signal
of Current
Pulley Feedback
Pressure CVT
Drive
Pulley
Pressure
Accelerator Pedal Calculation Control
Position Sensor Signal of
Decision Signal
Pulley Ratio
CVT Speed Sensor of
Signal Shift
Control
Pulley
Fail-safe Pressure
CVT S p e e d S e n s o r Control
I (Secondary) Signal*
*: '06 m o d e l
(cont'd)
14-37
CVT
Electronic Control S f s t e m (cont'd)
Start Clutch Pressure Control

The hydraulic-controlled start clutch controls smooth starting-off and creeping in D, S, L, and R like a torque converter.
The PCM inputs signals f r o m the sensors, and switches, and actuates the start clutch pressure control valve to
regulate the clutch reducing pressure, and the clutch reducing pressure controls the start clutch.
Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
C o r r e c t i o n of M a n i f o l d
Absolute Pressure Sensor
Signal Data and Others
C V T Input Shaft
(Drive Pulley) S p e e d
Sensor Signal
D e c i s i o n of S t a r t
C V T Output Shaft Clutch Pressure
(Driven Pulley) S p e e d
Sensor Signal
Engine RPM Signal
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
C V T Speed Sensor Signal
Fail-safe Control
C V T Speed Sensor
(Secondary) Signal*
Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal
J u d g m e n t of
Driving M o d e
Accelerator Pedal
Position S e n s o r Signal Fail-safe Control
Transmission
Range
0
Switch Signal
@ Current Feedback
Start Clutch Pressure
Control Signal
@
H
E
*: '06 m o d e l
14-38
P C U CVT Control System Electrical Connections ('06 Model)
IGNITION SWITCH POWERTRAN

I CONTROL MODULE (PCM!
PCM Connector Terminal Locations

li=TT
1/1/1/ ALH _ 7 8| 9
6
10 12 13114J15j16 17 1
8 19 EC
13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16
• 20 21 23 24 25
26 27 28 33 34 35 29 30 31 32 29;30i31I32
| 36 | 3738 39 | 40 j / /42 43 | 44 | 36 \^^~^\m j 4% 4 2

42 43 44

CVT
Electronic Control S y s t e m (cont'd)
PCM CVT Control System Electrical Connections ('07-09 Models)
IGNITION SWITCH POWERTRAIN CONTROL MODULE (PCM)
CVT START CLUTCH

PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE
IG1 HOT in ORP
ON (II) and
START (III) —crvj>-J
PEDAL 8^»w»«J
1 DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC! I
CANH
F-CAN Transceiver INHIBITOR SOLENOID
CANL W
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT

(DRIVEN PULLEY}
SPEED SENSOR
Dash light Brightness Controller
ATPP
CVT INPUT SHAFT
ATPR (DRIVE PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
ATPN
ATPD
ATPS
ATPL
ATPFWD
IMACANH
Motor Control Module (MCM)
IMACANL CVT-PG1
CVT-PG2
4 |5| 6 7 8 | 9 h a 3 4 | 5 | 6 7
vvv
1 10
1
12 13 j14115 116 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 1617 18 19
1 20 21 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 33 34 35
/ 26 27 23130131132 33 /
V
1 36 [ 3738 39 J 40 \ / 42 43 j 44
I.
| e | / 38 39 ] 40 \ / 42 | 43 | 44 |
3
CO(44P)
14-40
PCM CVT Control S f stem inputs and Outputs
w 4
/\ I I I 5 6 7
8 I9 I | 1 | 2 3|4 | / | 6 | 7 | 1 |2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 |9 |
10
/ 12 1314|1516 17 18 19
/
10 1 2 13|14|15|16 1 7 1 8
/ 10 11 1 2 13|14|1516 17 18 1 9
2 0 21 2 3 2 4 25
/ / 21 23
/ 25 2 0 21 2 2 23 24 25
2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 M 3 1 / 3 3 3 4 35
(36J3T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
/
26 28 29 30 31132 3 3
3 6 ^ / | / | 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2
3 4 35
43|44|
26 27 29|30 31 3 2 3 3
| 3 6 [ / 38|39|40|/|42
//
43|44|
A • (44P) B A (44P) C O (44P)
Terminal W i r e Color Terminal Name Description Signal

Number
A27 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK D r i v e s s h i f t lock s o l e n o i d W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II), in P, b r a k e p e d a l
SOLENOID) pressed, and accelerator released: battery voltaqe
A31 BRN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service c h e c k s i g n a l W i t h service check signal shorted using the HDS:
SIGNAL) about 0 V
W i t h s e r v i c e c h e c k s i q n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5.0 V
A36 WHT CANH (CAN S e n d s a n d receives W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V ( p u l s e s )
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL communication signal
HIGH)
A37 RED CANL (CAN Sends and receives W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V ( p u l s e s )
LOW)
A38 WHT I M A C A N H (IMA CAN Detects c o m m u n i c a t i o n W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V ( p u l s e s )
HIGH) M C M , a n d A/C c o m p r e s s o r
driver
A39 RED IMACANL (IMA CAN Detects c o m m u n i c a t i o n W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 2.5 V ( p u l s e s )
LOW) M C M , and A/C compressor
driver
A40 LT G R N B K S W (BRAKE P E D A L Detects b r a k e p e d a l W i t h brake pedal pressed: battery voltage
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal W i t h brake p e d a l r e l e a s e d : a b o u t 0 V
(cont'd)
14-41
CVI

Electronic Control System (cont'd)
PCM CVT Control System Inputs and Outputs (cont'd)
PCM C o n n e c t o r T e r m i n a l L o c a t i o n s
w / \ 4|5|6 | 7 8| 9 I | 1|2 3|4|/|6|7 (8)M | 1| 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 |9 I
/10 12 1314 1516 17 18 19 10

/ 12 13 141516 17 18 10 11 12 13141516 17 18 19
20 21 23 24 25
/ 21 23 25 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28
W 33 34 35
|36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 43|44|
26 28 29 30J31132 33 34 35
43|44|
26 27 29|30|31132 33
//
38139 4 0 1 / | 42 43 44|
A• (44P)
B A (44P) C O (44P)
P C M C O N N E C T O R B A (44P)
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description Signal
Number
B1 BRN PG2 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
circuit
B6 BLK CVT-PG2 (CVT POWER G r o u n d circuit for PCM CVT Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
GROUND) control circuit
B8* 1
WHT/BLK VEL2 (CVT SPEED S E N S O R Detects C V T s p e e d s e n s o r W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
(SECONDARY)) (secondary) signal W i t h v e h i c l e m o v i n g : a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
B10 GRN/BLK I N H S O L (INHIBITOR Drives inhibitor solenoid W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in P, N , D, S, a n d L: b a t t e r y
SOLENOID VALVE) valve voltage
W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g in R: a b o u t 0 V
B12 BLK/RED ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In N: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H N) switch N position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n N: m o r e t h a n 5.0 V
B13 BLU/BLK ATPP ( T R A N S M I S S I O N Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In P: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H P) switch P position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n P: m o r e t h a n 5.0 V
B14 WHT ATPR ( T R A N S M I S S I O N Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n range In R: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H R) switch R position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n R: m o r e t h a n 5.0 V
B15 BLU ATPL (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In L: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H L) switch L position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n L: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
B16 BLU/WHT ATPS (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In S: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H S) switch S position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n S: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
B17 RED/BLU NDR (CVT I N P U T S H A F T Detects C V T i n p u t s h a f t W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
(DRIVE PULLEY) SPEED (drive pulley) speed sensor W i t h e n g i n e i d l i n g in N: a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
SENSOR) signal
* 1: ' 0 6 m o d e l
14-42
PG1V1 C O N N E C T O R B A (44P)
Terminal W i r e Color Terminal Name Description Signal
Number
B18 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor reference W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
voltaqe
B21 PNK ATPD (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In D: a b o u t 0 V
R A N G E S W I T C H D) switch D position signal In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n D: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
input
B25 YEL S C L S + (CVT S T A R T Drives CVT start clutch W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): pulses
C O N T R O L V A L V E - f SIDE)
B28 RED ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION Detects t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e In D, S, a n d L: a b o u t 0 V
RANGE SWITCH FWD) s w i t c h D, S, a n d L p o s i t i o n s In a n y p o s i t i o n o t h e r t h a n D, S, a n d L: b a t t e r y
signal voltaqe
B33 GRN/YEL S G 2 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensorqround Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
B35 GRN/WHT D N L S + (CVT DRIVEN Drives CVT driven pulley W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): pulses
PULLEY PRESSURE pressure control valve
CONTROL V A L V E + S I D E )
B36 BLK PG1 (POWER G R O U N D ) G r o u n d circuit for PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
circuit
B40 BLK CVT-PG1 (CVT POWER G r o u n d circuit for PCM CVT Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
GROUND) control circuit
B41 PNK/BLU S C L S - (CVT S T A R T G r o u n d f o r CVT start clutch W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 4.5 V
C L U T C H PRESSURE pressure control valve (between S C L S + terminal and SCLS— terminal)
B42 PNK/BLK D N L S - (CVT DRIVEN G r o u n d for CVT driven W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 4.5 V
P U L L E Y PRESSURE pulley pressure control (between D N L S + terminal and DNLS— terminal)
CONTROL VALVE - S I D E ) valve
B43 GRN/YEL D R L S - (CVT DRIVE G r o u n d for CVT drive pulley W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 4.5 V
PULLEY PRESSURE pressure control valve (between D R L S + terminal and DRLS— terminal)
B44 BLU7WHT D R L S + (CVT DRIVE D r i v e s CVT d r i v e p u l l e y W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s
(cont'd)
14-43
CVT
Electronic Control S f stem (cont'd)
PCM CVT Control S f stem Inputs and Outputs (cont'd)
P C M Connector Terminal Locations
w 4
/\ I I I 5 6 7
8 I 9 I I 1 I2 3 I 4 I / I 6 I 7 | 1|2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |
10
/ 12 13 1415 16 17 18 19 10
/ 12 13|14|15 16 17 18 10 11 12
20 21 22
13 1415J16 17 18 19
20 21
/ 23 24 25
/ 21 23 25
^><z/ /
29I30I31I32 33
23 24 25
26 27 28 29 M
/ 33 34 35 26 28 29J30|31 32 33 34 35 26 27
|36|37
38139140 | / | 42
43|44|
\*V / l / l 40 141 142 43J44) | 3 6 | / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 4 2 43|44|
A • (44P) B A (44P) C O(44P)
P C M C O N N E C T O R C Q (44P)
Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description Signal
Number
C10 WHT N D N (CVT O U T P U T S H A F T Detects C V T o u t p u t s h a f t W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
(DRIVEN PULLEY) SPEED (driven pulley) speed W i t h e n g i n e i d l i n g i n N : a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
SENSOR) sensor signal
C11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects M A P s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 3.0 V
A B S O L U T E PRESSURE A t i d l e : a b o u t 1.0 V d e p e n d i n g o n e n g i n e s p e e d
(MAP) SENSOR)
C13 YEL/RED VCC1 ( S E N S O R V O L T A G E ) Provides sensor reference W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5.0 V
voltage
C14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR G R O U N D ) Sensor ground Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
C32 BLU CKP ( C R A N K S H A F T Detects CKP s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h e n g i n e r u n n i n g : pulses
P O S I T I O N (CKP) S E N S O R )
C36 BLK/YEL IG1 ( I G N I T I O N S I G N A L ) Detects i g n i t i o n s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
C40 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) G r o u n d circuit f o r PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
circuit
C43 WHT/RED V E L 1 (CVT SPEED Detects C V T s p e e d s e n s o r W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0 V o r a b o u t 5.0 V
SENSOR)* 1
signal W i t h v e h i c l e m o v i n g : a b o u t 2.5 V (pulses)
VEL (CVT SPEED
2
SENSOR)*
C44 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC G R O U N D ) G r o u n d c i r c u i t f o r PCM Less t h a n 1.0 V at all t i m e s
circuit
* 1:'06 m o d e l
* 2: '07-09 m o d e l s
14-44
Self-diagnosis
If the PCM detects the failure of a signal f r o m a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another control unit, it
stores a Temporary DTC or a DTC. Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle.
W h e n a DTC is stored, the PCM blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by a signal
sent to the gauge control module via F-CAN.
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method

W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another control unit, the
PCM stores a DTC for the failure and blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the MIL immediately.
• T w o Drive Cycle Detection Method

W h e n an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another control unit in
the first drive cycle, the PCM stores a Temporary DTC. The D indicator and the MIL do not turns on at this t i m e . If the
failure continues in the second drive cycle, the PCM stores a DTC and blinks the D indicator and/or turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal f r o m a sensor, a switch, a solenoid valve, or f r o m another control unit, the
PCM ignores that signal and substitutes a pre-programmed value for t h e m that allow the automatic transmission to
continue driving. This causes a DTC to be stored and the D indicator to blink and/or the MIL to come on.
14-45
CVT
Hydraulic Control
The hydraulic control system is controlled by the ATF pump, the valves, and the solenoid valves. The ATF pump is
driven by the input shaft. The ATF pump and the input shaft are linked by the ATF pump drive chain and the sprockets.
Fluid f r o m the ATF pump f l o w s through the pressure high (PH) regulator valve to maintain specified pressure to the
drive pulley, the driven pulley, and the manual valve.
The lower valve body assembly includes the main valve body, the secondary valve body, the CVT driven pulley
pressure control valve, the CVT start clutch pressure control valve, and the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve.
The manual valve body is bolted on the intermediate housing, and houses the manual valve w h i c h switches hydraulic
pressure to meet w i t h the shift lever position.
Main Valve Body

The main valve body contains the start clutch shift valve, the shift inhibitor valve, the lubrication regulator valve, and
the cooler relief valve.
• Start Clutch Shift Valve

When a control system malfunction occurs, the start clutch shift valve receives shift inhibitor pressure (SI) and
covers the lubrication pressure bypass circuit port.
• Shift Inhibitor Valve
The shift inhibitor valve switches the fluid passage to switch the start clutch control f r o m electronic control to
hydraulic control when the electronic control system is faulty.
• Lubrication Regulator Valve
The lubrication regulator valve stabilizes the lubrication pressure to the internal circuit.
• Cooler Relief Valve
The cooler relief valve stabilizes the ATF cooler pressure and recirculation pressure to the ATF cooler and to the
internal circuit.
SHIFT INHIBITOR V A L V E
LUBRICATION REGULATOR VALVE
MAIN V A L V E BODY
START CLUTCH SHIFT VALVE
14-46
Secondary Valve Body
The secondary valve body contains the pressure high (PH) regulator valve, the pressure high control (PHC) shift valve,
the start clutch back-up valve, the clutch reducing valve, and the start clutch accumulator valve.
• PH Regulator Valve
The PH regulator valve maintains hydraulic pressure supplied f r o m the ATF p u m p , and supplies PH pressure to the
hydraulic control circuit and the lubrication circuit. PH pressure is regulated at the PH regulator valve by the PH
control pressure (PHC) f r o m PHC shift valve.
• PHC Shift Valve
The PHC shift valve supplies PH control pressure (PHC) to the PH regulator valve to regulate PH pressure in
accordance w i t h the drive pulley control pressure (DRC) or driven pulley pressure (DNC).
• Start Clutch Back-up Valve
When a control system malfunction occurs, the start clutch back-up valve supplies start clutch control B pressure
(CCB) based on shift inhibitor pressure (SI) to the start clutch.
• Clutch Reducing Valve
The clutch reducing valve receives PH pressure f r o m the PH regulator valve and regulates clutch reducing pressure
(CR).
• Start Clutch Accumulator Valve
The start clutch accumulator valve stabilizes the hydraulic pressure that is supplied to the start clutch.
START CLUTCH ACCUMULATOR VALVE
CLUTCH REDUCING VALVE
P R E S S U R E HIGH
(PH) R E G U L A T O R V A L V E
START CLUTCH BACK-UP VALVE
(cont'd)
14-47
CVT

Hydraulic Control (cont'd)
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Valve

The CVT driven pulley pressure control valve contains the driven pulley control valve with the solenoid and pulley
control valve A. The driven pulley control valve controls pulley control valve A's position, which applies driven pulley
pressure (DN) to the driven pulley. .
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control Valve

The CVT drive pulley pressure control valve contains the drive pulley control valve with the solenoid and pulley
control valve B. The drive pulley control valve controls the position of pulley control valve B which applies drive pulley
pressure (DR) to the drive pulley. The combination of the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve and the CVT drive
pulley pressure control valve, applies pulley control pressures to the respective pulleys creating complete power
transfer, eliminating steel belt slippage and increasing belt life.
CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control Valve

The CVT start clutch pressure control valve consists of the start clutch pressure control valve and the solenoid. The
CVT start clutch pressure control valve controls start clutch engagement according to the throttle opening.
CVT START CLUTCH
/
START CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVE
PULLEY CONTROL VALVE A
SOLENOID
CVT DRIVEN PULLEY
DRIVE PULLEY CONTROL V A L V E
SOLENOID
DRIVEN PULLEY CONTROL VALVE
SOLENOID
C V T DRIVE PULLEY
PULLEY CONTROL VALVE B
14-48
Manual Valve Body
The manual valve body contains the manual valve and the reverse inhibitor valve. The manual valve body is bolted on
the intermediate housing.
• Manual Valve
The manual valve mechanically uncovers/covers the fluid passage according to the shift lever position.
• Reverse Inhibitor Valve
The reverse inhibitor valve is controlled by reverse inhibitor (Rl) pressure f r o m the reverse inhibitor solenoid. The
reverse inhibitor valve intercepts the hydraulic pressure f l o w i n g to the reverse brake while the vehicle is moving
forward at speeds over about 6 mph (10 km/h).
14-49
CWI
Hydraulic F l o w
As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Transmission fluid (CVTF) is drawn through the ATF strainer
(filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, CVTF f l o w i n g f r o m the ATF p u m p f l o w s to the pressure high
(PH) regulator valve and becomes pressure high (PH) pressure. PH pressure flows to the pulley control valves and then
to the pulleys.
The PCM actuates the solenoid valves to control hydraulic pressure shifting pulley ratio and engaging the start clutch.
Hydraulic Pressure Flow Circuit Diagram

Port No. Hydraulic Pressure Port No. Hydraulic Pressure
CC Start Clutch Control LUB' Lubrication
CCB Start Clutch Control B PH Pressure High
COL ATF Cooler PHC Pressure High Control
CR Clutch Reducing RCC Recirculation
DN Driven Pulley Rl Reverse Inhibitor
DNC Driven Pulley Control RVS Reverse Brake
DR Drive Pulley RVS' Reverse Brake
DRC Drive Pulley Control SC Start Clutch
FWD Forward Clutch SI Shift Inhibitor
LUB Lubrication X Drain
START CLUTCH REVERSE BRAKE FORWARD CLUTCH DRIVE PULLEY DRIVEN PULLEY
j ^ L SC
1
LUBRICATION
I I
A
CR
SHIFT INHIBITOR REVERSE INHIBITOR PULLEY CONTROL PULLEY CONTROL
VALVE VALVE VALVEB VALVE A
I •
i D
•
I
CVT START I CVT DRIVE PULLEY CVT DRIVEN PULLEY
CLUTCH PRESSURE MANUAL VALVE PRESSURE CONTROL PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVE VALVE CONTROL VALVE
FWD
. I « DRC
INHIBITOR
SOLENOID
• l _
CLUTCH REDUCING
VALVE
LUBRICATION
REGULATOR
VALVE
PHC SHIFT
VALVE
START CLUTCH PH REGULATOR

BACK-UP VALVE VALVE
START CLUTCH
SHIFT VALVE
14-50
N Position
Fluid f r o m the ATF p u m p is regulated to high pressure at the pressure high (PH) regulator valve, and f l o w s to the
pulley control valves. The CVT driven pulley pressure control valve and the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve,
control valves A and B which applies pressure to the pulleys. The driven pulley receives pressure higher than the
pressure the drive pulley receives. Hydraulic pressure to the f o r w a r d clutch is blocked by the manual valve, and
hydraulic pressure to the start clutch is blocked by the CVT start clutch pressure control valve. Under this condition,
hydraulic pressure is not applied to the start clutch and the forward clutch.
DRIVEN PULLEY DRIVE PULLEY

START CLUTCH
START CLUTCH
ACCUMULATOR
SHIFT
INHIBITOR VALVE CVT DRIVEN
PULLEY
PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVE
CVT START
CLUTCH L S D N R P
PRESSURE
DO] CONTROL VALVE
CVT DRIVE
PULLEY PRESSURE
CLUTCH CONTROL VALVE
REDUCING VALVE
PHC SHIFT VALVE
1 PH REGULATOR VALVE
PLANETARY -
START CLUTCH -
CLUTCH CANCELLER -
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY •
(cont'd)
14-51
CVT
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
D Position, at low speed range

The manual valve is shifted into the D position, and uncovers the forward clutch pressure (FWD) port leading to the
f o r w a r d clutch. The f o r w a r d clutch pressure (FWD) f l o w s to the forward clutch, the forward clutch is engaged, and
drives the input shaft and the drive pulley shaft. The drive pulley receives low pressure, and the driven pulley receives
high pressure. The PCM actuates the CVT start clutch pressure control valve to control start clutch pressure. The start
clutch control pressure (CC) f r o m the CVT start clutch pressure control valve becomes start clutch pressure (SC) at the
shift inhibitor valve, and flows to the start clutch. The start clutch is engaged, and the vehicle moves.
PLANETARY
START CLUTCH -
CLUTCH CANCELLER '
BEARING '
DRIVEN PULLEY •
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY •
ATF C O O L E R
•ATF FILTER j
14-52
D Position, at high speed range
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM controls the CVT driven pulley pressure control
valve and the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve to provide about the same hydraulic pressure to the pulleys. The
diameter in contact w i t h the steel belt on the drive pulley and the driven pulley becomes nearly equal, and the pulley
ratio is in high. Hydraulic pressure is then applied to the start clutch and the forward clutch.
PLANETARY
START CLUTCH
CLUTCH CANCELLER
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
ATF COOLER
(cont'd)
14-53
CVT

H y d r a u l i c F l o w (cont'd)
D Position, at t o p speed range

Vehicle speed is further increased, the PCM controls the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve and the CVT drive
pulley pressure control valve to apply hydraulic pressure to the drive pulley and to the driven pulley. The drive pulley
receives high pressure and the driven pulley receives low pressure. The drive pulley provides the steel belt a large-
diameter contact and the driven pulley provides a small-diameter contact, and the result is a high pulley ratio.
Hydraulic pressure remains to apply to the start clutch and the forward clutch.

START CLUTCH
START CLUTCH
ACCUMULATOR
SHIFT
INHIBITOR VALVE
CVT START
CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVE
PLANETARY
START CLUTCH
CLUTCH CANCELLER ~>
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
ATF C O O L E R • A T F FILTER ;
14-54
R Position -
The manual valve is shifted into the R position, uncovers the reverse brake pressure (RVS) port leading to the reverse
inhibitor valve. The reverse inhibitor solenoid is turned OFF by the PCM, and reverse inhibitor pressure (Rl) is applied
to the right end of the reverse inhibitor valve. The reverse inhibitor valve is moved to the left side, and uncovers the
reverse brake pressure (RVS') port leading to the reverse brake. Clutch reducing pressure (CR) becomes reverse brake
pressure (RVS), and flows to the reverse brake via the reverse inhibitor valve. The reverse brake is engaged, and it
locks the planetary carrier.
NOTE: When used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
PLANETARY
START CLUTCH
CLUTCH CANCELLER
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
A T F COOLER
•ATF FILTER j
(cont'd)
14-55
CVT
#
H y d r a u l a c flow (cont'd)
R Position: Reverse Inhibitor Control

If R is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at speeds over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM outputs a signal to turn
ON the reverse inhibitor solenoid, and reverse inhibitor pressure (Rl) in the right end of the reverse inhibitor valve is
released. The reverse inhibitor valve is moved to the right side, and uncovers the stop reverse brake pressure port
leading to the reverse brake f r o m the manual valve. Reverse brake pressure (RVS) is not applied to the reverse brake,
and power is not transmitted to the reverse direction.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
PLANETARY
START CLUTCH
CLUTCH CANCELLER
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
ATF C O O L E R
14-56
P Position
The manual valve Is shifted into the P position, the manual valve blocks hydraulic pressure to the forward clutch.
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the start and forward clutches, and power is not transmitted to the drive pulley
shaft.
PLANETARY -
START CLUTCH
CLUTCH CANCELLER
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
ATF COOLER ! ATF FILTER
(cont'd)
14-57
CVT
Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
D Position, when an electronic control system malfunction occurs.

When an electronic control system malfunction occurs in D, and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve cannot
control the start clutch pressure circuit, the transmission creates a temporary circuit for the start clutch pressure
control to allow the vehicle to be driven.
The CVT start clutch control valve covers the start clutch control pressure {CO port leading to the shift inhibitor valve,
and the shift inhibitor valve is moved to the left side by drive pulley control pressure (DRC). Clutch reducing pressure
(CR) becomes shift inhibitor pressure (SI) at the shift inhibitor valve. Pressure then flows to the left side of the start
clutch back-up valve, and becomes start clutch control B pressure (CCB). Start clutch control B pressure (CCB)
becomes start clutch pressure (SC) at the shift inhibitor valve, and f l o w s to the start clutch. Clutch reducing pressure
(CR) also flows to the manual valve and becomes forward clutch pressure (FWD). The start clutch and the forward
clutch are engaged, and the vehicle can move.
NOTE; W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
PLANETARY •
START CLUTCH '
CLUTCH CANCELLER '
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
ATF COOLER • A T F FILTER ;
14-58
R Position, w h e n an electronic control system malfunction occurs.
When an electronic control system malfunction occurs in R, and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve cannot
control the start clutch pressure c i r c u i t the transmission creates the temporary circuit for the start clutch pressure
control to allow the vehicle to be driven.
The CVT start clutch control valve covers the start clutch control pressure (CC) port leading to the shift inhibitor valve,
and the shift inhibitor valve is moved to the left side by drive pulley control pressure (DRC). Clutch reducing pressure
(CR) becomes shift inhibitor pressure (SI) at the shift inhibitor valve. Pressure then flows to the left side of the start
clutch back-up valve, and becomes start clutch control B pressure (CCB). Start clutch control B pressure (CCB)
becomes start clutch pressure (SC) at the shift inhibitor valve, and flows to the start clutch. Clutch reducing pressure
(CR) also f l o w s to the manual valve and becomes reverse brake pressure (RVS). The start clutch and the reverse brake
are engaged, and the vehicle can reverse.
NOTE: W h e n used, " l e f t " or " r i g h t " indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
CVT DRIVE
PULLEY PRESSURE
CONTROL VALVE
PLANETARY
START CLUTCH
CLUTCH CANCELLER
BEARING
DRIVEN PULLEY
CANCELLER
DRIVE PULLEY
DRIVEN PULLEY
ATFCOOLER •ATF FILTER ;
(cont'd)
14-59
CVT
Park M e c h a n i s m
The park mechanism locks the transmission by engaging the park pawl with the park gear which is integral w i t h the
secondary drive gear. The secondary drive gear engages w i t h the secondary driven gear which is splined to the final
drive shaft, and the final drive gear integrated w i t h the final drive shaft engages the final driven gear.
Shifting to P causes the park cone (installed at the end of the park rod) to press the park pawl onto the park gear. Even
if the end of the park pawl rides on the top of the park gear teeth, slight movement of the vehicle will cause the park
pawl and the park gear to mesh w i t h each other completely because the park rod spring puts tension on the park cone.
The park pawl receives the tension (which acts to separate the park pawl f r o m the park gear) f r o m the park pawl spring.
PARK ROD
START CLUTCH
14-60
<3®
Shift L o c k System
The shift lock system prevents the shift lever f r o m mis-shifting. The shift lock solenoid is usually OFF. After starting
the engine in P, the shift lever cannot move to any other position f r o m P because the shift lock stop stops the lock pin
unless the brake pedal is pressed. W h e n the brake pedal is pressed and the accelerator pedal is not pressed, the shift
lock solenoid is O N ; the shift lock solenoid plunger in the shift lock solenoid pulls the shift lock stop to release the lock
pin. Pressing the shift lever button allows the shift lever to move to any other position. W h e n the brake pedal and the
accelerator pedal are pressed at the same time, the shift lock system is not unlocked.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID; OFF SHIhT LOCK SOLENOID: ON
(cont'd)
14-61
CVT

Shift Lock System (cont'd)
When.,the shift lock system does not operate due to mechanical or electrical trouble, you can unlock the shift lock
temporarily by inserting the ignition key into the shift lock release hole and pressing the shift lock release. When the
shift lock release is pressed, the shift lock stop releases the lock pin, and the shift lever can move to any other position.
14-62
Circuit Diagram - PCM CVT Control System ( ' § 6 model)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

IGNITION SWITCH
DATA LINK , .
CONNECTOR <L I ORN
(DLC)
7 8
\AA/
« / '12
4 , ..
13Jl4|l5Jl6 17 1 8 19 13 14 15 16
0 13 14 15 16
• 20 21 / 23 24 25
26 27 28 ~\M/ 33 34 35 29 30 31 32 29 30 31 32
/
| 36 j 3738 39 j 40 \ / 42 43 | 44
(cont'd)
14-63
CVI
#
Circuit Diagram - PCM CVT Control System ('06 model) (cont'd)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
12 V
H^SCLS+
YEL/RED - CVT START CLUTCH
PRESSURE
CONTROL
WHT/RED - VALVE
YEL/RED —<?
BLU/WHT - CVT DRIVE
CVT
OUTPUT SHAFT
(DRIVEN PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
— WHT-
GRN/YEL ——
1 PULLEY
PRESSURE
CONTROL
VALVE
YEL/RED —'
GRN/RED 1 ^ CVT DRIVEN

PULLEY
PRESSURE
CONTROL
GRN/WHT - VALVE
YEL/BLU -
CVT
SPEED SENSOR WHT/BLK -
(SECONDARY)
GRN/YEL - )L I B1Q
"1
YEL/BLU -
1
CVT
INPUT SHAFT
RED/BLU -
(DRIVE PULLEY)
SPIED SENSOR
GRN/YEL -
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
BRN/YEL
(CKP)
SENSOR
YEL/BLK
1
ORN
v-
JUL
UNDER-HOOD G102
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1
4 7 . . 1
0
1
10 12 13 j T4-115116 17 18 19 i
« 20 21 23 24 25 •
26 27 28 33 34 35
| 36 | 37 38 39 ] 40 \ / / 42 43
I 4 4
I 322 40 41 42 43 44
14-64
Circuit Diagram - PCM CVT Control S f s t e m ('07-09 models)

IGNITION SWITCH
\AA/ 4
1 ! 5 6
1 8 | 9
10
20 21
12
13 j 14 15 j 16
17 18 19
23 24 25
26 27 28
»\/\«y 33 34 35
39 | 40 \y/
[ 36 J 37
38 42 43 | 44
BA(44P) CO(44P)
(cont'd)
14-65
CVT

Circuit Diagram - PCM C V T Control S f stem ('07-09 models) (cont'd)
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
12 V
T SCLS+
YEL/RED CVT START CLUTCH
CVT PRESSURE
OUTPUT SHAFT CONTROL
— WHT — VALVE
(DRIVEN PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
#1
YEL/RED -
MANIFOLD CVT DRIVE
BLU/WHT -
ABSOLUTE PULLEY
PRESSURE PRESSURE
GRIM/RED -
(MAP) CONTROL
SENSOR GRN/YEL - VALVE
GRN/WHT -
YEL/BLU -
CVT DRIVEN
WHT/RED - -H PULLEY
PRESSURE
CONTROL
GRN/YEL - VALVE
YEL/BLU — 1
CVT
INPUT SHAFT
RED/BLU
(DRIVE PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR
GRN/YEL
- BLU -
1
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
BRN/YEL
(CKP)
YEL/BLK
1
ORN
-Q-
UNDER-HOOD G102
FUSE/RELAY BOX
PGM-FI MAIN
RELAY 1
14-66
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: Manifold Absolute Pressure 6. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
(MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage software (see page 11-236), or substitute a k n o w n -
g o o d PCM (see page 11-7).
DTC P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure
(MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least
2 minutes.
NOTE; Before y o u t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs the A/T
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). Is DTC P0107 or P0108 indicated in the A/T
SYSTEM?
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
ON (II) again. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI 1.
Is DTC P0107 or P0108 indicated in the PGM-FI
SYSTEM? 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0107 or P0108 in the
Y E S — G o to the DTC P0107 troubleshooting
(see page 11-68) or DTC P0108 troubleshooting Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
(see page 11-70) in the PGM-FI System. •
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
N O — G o t o step 5. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8,
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Is DTC P0107 or P0108 indicated in the A/T NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
SYSTEM? connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
Y E S — G o t o step 6. (see page 11-7), then go to step 7. If the PCM was
substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this COMPLETED, go to step 7.
t i m e . If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
14-67
CVT
DTC P0335: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 6. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
No Signal software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review 7. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). 2 minutes.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs the A/T
Is DTC P0335 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
3. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D, while
pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle for YES—Check for poor connections or loose
at least 30 seconds. terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI go to step 7. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. 1.
Is DTC P0335 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM? N O — G o t o step 9.
Y E S — G o to the DTC P0335 troubleshooting in the 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0335 in the DTCs
PGM-FI System (see page 1 1 - 1 1 5 ) . • MENU w i t h the HDS.
NO—Go to step 5. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DTC P0335 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, a
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs (see page 11-7), then go to step 7. If the PCM was
troubleshooting.H substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-68
DTC P0336: Range/Performance Problem In 6. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor Circuit software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review 7. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D, while
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). pressing the brake pedal, and let it idle for at least
30 seconds.
8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs the A/T
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
3. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D, while Is DTC P0336 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
pressing the brake pedal, and let the engine idle for
at least 30 seconds. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
SYSTEM with the HDS. go to step 7. If the PCM was substituted, go t o step
1.
SYSTEM? N O — G o t o step 9.
Y E S — G o to the DTC P0335 troubleshooting in the 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0336 in the DTCs
PGM-FI system (see page 11-115) or DTC P0339 MENU w i t h the HDS.
troubleshooting in the PGM-FI System (see page
11-118).• Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
NO —Go to step 5. Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8,
Y E S — G o t o step 6. connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
NO —Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 7. If the PCM was
time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
indicated, go to the indicated DTCs COMPLETED, go to step 7.
14-69
CVT
DTC P0501: Range/Performance Problem in 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CVT Speed Sensor Circuit
D T C P0502: Problem in CVT Speed Sensor
Circuit 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NOTE: 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and terminal C40 and body ground, and between PCM
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review connector terminal C44 and body ground.
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
1 2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 7 8 | 9 |
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
'06 M o d e l 20 21 22 23 24 25
1. Check for proper CVT speed sensor installation

26 27
/ 29|30|31|32 33
//
| 3 6 | / 38 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
(see page 14-171). If the sensor is installed

LG1 (BRN/YEL) I I LG2 (BRN/YEL)
incorrectly, reinstall the sensor correctly, then go to
step 26. @ @
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals

4. Block the rear wheels and raise the front of the
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and Y E S - G o t o step 11.
allow the front wheels to rotate freely, or raise the
vehicle on a lift. NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals C40, C44, and body ground
5. Start the engine, run the vehicle with the shift lever (G102), or repair poor body ground (G102), then go
to D, and the engine speed at 2,000 rpm or higher to step 26.
for at least 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the
wheels.
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0501 or P0502 in the

Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
NO—If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent

poor connections or loose terminals between the
PCM and the CVT speed sensor. If the HDS
14-70
1 1 . Connect PCM connector C (44P). 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
1 2 . Disconnect the CVT speed sensor connector. 16. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
13. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 17. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
14. Measure the voltage between CVT speed sensor 18. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. terminal C13 and CVT speed sensor connector
terminal No. 1.
CVT SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
CVT P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
SPEED S E N S O R
CONNECTOR
2 3 VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1 (YEL/RED) VCC1

(YEL/RED) h | 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27
/ 29|30|31|32 33
//
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of
36
/ 3 8 1 3 9 1 4 0 1 / | 42 431441
female terminals female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal C13 and the CVT speed sensor,
then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
14-71
CVT
19. Measure the voltage between CVT speed sensor 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
23. Check for continuity between CVT speed sensor

VEL1 (WHT/RED) SGI (GRN/WHT) CVT SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
1 2 3
VEL1 (WHT/RED)
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the CVT speed sensor (see page

14-171), then g o t o step 26. Wire side of female terminals
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

between PCM connector terminal C43 and the CVT
speed sensor connector, then go to step 26.
14-72
terminal C 1 4 and CVT speed sensor connector terminal C43 and CVT speed sensor connector
terminal No. 3. terminal No. 2.
CVT P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P) P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P) CVT

S P E E D SENSOR SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
h|2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | B7 | 9 |
SG1 (GRN/WHT) 10 11 12 13J14|15|16 17 1819
SG1 20 21 22 23 24 25
(GRN/WHT)
I l l . 3 |4 |5|6 | 7 8 9 I 26 27 29|30|31|32 33 // 1 2 3
1
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 1819 |36|/ 38|39|40|/ 42 4 3 | 4 4 |

1 2 3 20 21 22 23 24 25 VEL1 (WHT/RED) VEL1
(WHT/RED)
2627 29|30|3l|32 33 //
136 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
W i r e side of T e r m i n a l side of T e r m i n a l side of W i r e side of

female terminals female terminals female terminals female terminals
Is there continuity ? Is there continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 25. Y E S — G o t o step 32.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the CVT NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
speed sensor connector and PCM connector connector terminal C43 and the CVT speed sensor,
terminal C14, then go to step 26. then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
14-73
CVI
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (11). Is DTC P0501 or P0502 indicated?
28. Clear t h p DTC with the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between the CVT speed sensor and the
29. Start the engine, run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
to D, and keep the vehicle at speeds over 9 m p h good PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 34. If the
(15 km/h) for at least 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
stop the wheels.
Is DTC P0501 or P0502 indicated? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Y E S — C h e c k for poor connections or loose Does the HDS indicate PASSED?

PCM, then go to step 1. •YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—Goto step31. original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0501 or P0502 in the go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? connections or loose terminals between the CVT
speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
Y E S — T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g is complete. If any other substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, go to step 34. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
34. .
connections or loose terminals between the CVT
speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 29.

g o o d PCM (see page 11-7).
34. Start the engine, run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever
to D, and keep the vehicle at speeds over 9 mph
(15 km/h) for at least 10 seconds. Slow d o w n and
stop the wheels.
14-74
DTC P0501: Range/Performance Problem In 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
CVT Speed Sensor Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 8. Start the engine, run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review to D, and keep the vehicle at speeds over 24 mph
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). (40 km/h) while monitoring the Output shaft (Driven
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem pulley) Speed rpm in the Data List w i t h the HDS,
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the then release the accelerator without pressing it
transmission. again, for at least 7 seconds.
'07-09 Models 9. Check for DTC w i t h the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Is DTC P 0501 indicated?
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. YES—Check for poor connections or loose
3. Block the rear wheels and raise the front of the PCM, then g o t o step 11.
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and
allow the front wheels to rotate freely, or raise the N O — G o t o step 10.
vehicle on a lift.
10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0501 in the DTCs
4. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by MENU w i t h the HDS.
pressing the VSA OFF switch, and run the vehicle
w i t h the shift lever to L, and the engine speed at Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
4,500 rpm or higher, then release the accelerator
w i t h o u t pressing it again, for at least 6 seconds. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Slow d o w n and stop the wheels. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 9,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting M
MENU with the HDS. NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
14-171), then g o t o step 6. 1 1 . Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
NO—If the HDS indicates PASSED, intermittent good PCM (see page 11-7).
poor connections or loose terminals between the 12. Start the engine, run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever
PCM and the CVT speed sensor. If the HDS to D, and keep the vehicle at speeds over 24 mph
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4. (40 km/h) while monitoring the Output shaft (Driven
pulley) Speed rpm in the Data List w i t h the HDS,
then release the accelerator without pressing it
again, for at least 7 seconds.
(cont'd)
14-75
CVT
13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P0502: Problem in CVT Speed Sensor
Circuit
NOTE:
YES—Check for poor connections or loose • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
terminals between the CVT speed sensor and the any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
good PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 12. If the • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
'07-09 Models
MENU w i t h the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 3. Block the rear wheels, and raise the front of the
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other allow the front wheels to rotate freely, or raise the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13, vehicle on a lift.
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor to L, and the engine speed at 4,500 rpm or higher,
connections or loose terminals between the CVT then release the accelerator without pressing it
speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, again, for at least 6 seconds.
' go to step 12. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 5. Check the Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed (rpm)
1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step in the Data List w i t h the HDS.
12.
Is the Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed (rpm)
more than 100 rpm?

between the PCM and the CVT speed sensor, then
go to step 16.
NO—Go to step 6.
14-76
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Measure the voltage between CVT speed sensor
7. Disconnect the CVT speed sensor connector.
9. Measure the voltage between CVT speed sensor

1 2 3
CVT SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC2 (YEL/BLU) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
1 2 3 W i r e side of female terminals

VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Goto step 11.

connector terminal B33 and CVT speed sensor
Is there about 5 V? connector terminal No. 3, then go to step 16.
YES—Goto step 10.
(cont'd)
14-77
CVT
11. Measure the voltage between CVT speed sensor 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

1 2 3
SG2 (GRN/YEL) P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
VEL (WHT/RED) I
9 I 1 I 23 |4 | 5 | 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13|14|15J16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals 26 27

/ 29|30|31|32 33
//
| 3 6 | / 3 S | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 43|44|
I V E L (WHT/RED)
Is there about 5 V?

14-171), then g o t o step 16. T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e terminals
Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the wire

between PCM connector terminal C43 and CVT
speed sensor connector terminal No. 2, then go to
step 16.

connector terminal C43 and CVT speed sensor
connector terminal No. 2, then go to step 16.
14-78
17. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
18. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. good PCM (see page 11-7).
19. Start the engine, run the vehicle with the shift lever 24. Start the engine, run the vehicle with the shift lever
to D, and keep the vehicle at speeds over 24 mph to D, and keep the vehicle at speeds over 24 mph
(40 km/h) while monitoring the Output Shaft (40 km/h) while monitoring the Output Shaft
(Driven Pulley) Speed (rpm) in the Data List with the (Driven Pulley) Speed (rpm) in the Data List w i t h the
HDS, then release the accelerator without pressing HDS, then release the accelerator without pressing
it again, for at least 7 seconds. it again, for at least 7 seconds. Stop the wheels.
Is DTC P0502 indicated? Is DTC P0502 indicated?
terminals between the CVT speed sensor and the terminals between the CVT speed sensor and the
PCM, then g o t o step 22. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 24. If the
N O - G o t o step 2 1 . PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0502 in the DTCs NO—Go to step 26.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? MENU w i t h the HDS.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the HDS indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
connections or loose terminals between the CVT Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting B
N O - l f the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
24.
14-79
CVT
D T C P0603: Powertrain Control Module 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
(PCM) Internal Control Module Keep Alive software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
Memory (KAM) Error good PCM (see page 11-7).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). 7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
SYSTEM with the HDS. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
Is DTC P0603 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM? 1.
Y E S — G o to the DTC P0603 troubleshooting in the NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
PGM-FI System (see page 11-135). • complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
N O — G o t o step 4. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated, go to the
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T

time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
indicated, go to the indicated D T C s
troubleshooting. B
14-80
DTC P 0 7 0 5 : Short, in Transmission Range 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
9. Measure the voltage between transmission range
NOTE: switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 6.
any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review TRANSMISSION RANGE
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). SWITCH CONNECTOR
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the G N D (BRN)
transmission.
1 2 3 4
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 5 6 7 8
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. ATPP (BLU/BLK)

4. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position. Is there more than 5 V?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs Y E S — G o t o step 15.

intermittent short to body ground in the wire
between the transmission range switch and the
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 3.
7. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page

14-211).
Is the transmission range switch OK?
Y E S — W i t h the transmission range switch

connector disconnected, go to step 8.
NO—Replace the transmission range switch

(cont'd)
14-81
CVT
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). SWITCH CONNECTOR
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector G N D (BRN)

1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
A T P P (BLU/BLK)
h|2 3 i4l/|6|7 <4/|

10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
21 23 25
26 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
/ | 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 43|44|
36/1 /
T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s NO—Repair open in the wire between transmission

range switch connector terminal No. 2 and body
Is there continuity? ground (G102), or repair poor body ground (G102),
then go to step 45.
between PCM connector terminal B13 and the
transmission range switch, then go to step 45.
14-82
15. Measure the voltage between transmission range 16. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
switch connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR 18. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).

ATPR (WHT) GND (BRN)
1 2 3 4
ATPR (WHT)
5 6 7 8
lilz 3|4|/|6|7
10
/ 12 13JH|15|16 17 18
/
Wire side of female terminals / 21 23
/ 25
26
36^/
/ 28 29|30|31|324233 3443)44I
35
/1/M41
is there more than 5 V?
N O — G o t o step 16. T e r m i n a l side of female t e r m i n a l s

(cont'd)
14-83
CVI
20. Measure the voltage between transmission range 2 1 . Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR- 23. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
G N D (BRN)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
ATPN (BLK/RED)
ATPN (BLK/RED)
|l|2/ * l/l
10
3 7 (81/1
8 17 18
12 13|14|15J16
23 25
Wire s i d e o f f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s /26 21
\*V 2829J30J31J32 43|44|
S3 34 35
42
Is there more than 5 V?
N O — G o t o step 2 1 . Terminal side of female terminals
YES—Repair short t o body ground in the wire

transmission range switch, then go t o step 45.
14-84
Measure the voltage between transmission range 26. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
TRANSMISSION RANGE

G N D (BRN) A T P D (PNK)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 3|4Me|T
I'10 2 (8)M
/ 12 131415116 17 18
/
/ /
26
21
/ 23
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
25
/
M/ / ] / | 4 0 | 4 l | 4 2 43|44|
A T P D (PNK)
N O — G o t o step 26. T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

(cont'd)
14-85
CVT
30. Measure the voltage between transmission range 3 1 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
TRANSMISSION RANGE
G N D (BRN)
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
ATPS (BLU/WHT)
ATPS (BLU/WHT)
I1I2 3|4|/|6 7
10 12 13|14|15J16 17 18
21 23 25
26 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
N/ / V 1 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 43|44|
NO—Go to step 3 1 . T e r m i n a l side of female terminals

NO—Go to step 52.
14-86
Measure the voltage between transmission range 36. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0).
switch connector terminals No. 2 and N o . 4 .
TRANSMISSION RANGE
39. Check f o r continuity between PCM connector

GND (BRN) ATPL (BLU)
1 2 PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

3 4
5 6 7 ATPL (BLU)
8
I1 I 23|4|/|6 7
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
21 23 25
26 28 29I30I31I32 33 34 35
M / /VM41 42 43|44|
NO—Go t o step 36. Terminal side of female terminals

transmission range switch, then go t o step 45.
(cont'd)
14-87
CVT
40. Measure the voltage between transmission range 44 Check for continuity between PCM connector
switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 8. terminal B28 and body ground.
T R A N S M I S S I O N RANGE PCM C O N N E C T O R B (44P)

SWITCH CONNECTOR
|1|2 3|4|/l6|7 (8)M

G N D (BRN) 10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
21 23 25
26 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
3 6 /
/ A| /|40|41|42 43|44|
/
/
T P F W D (RED)
A T P F W D (RED)
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Y E S — G o to step 52. YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

NO—Go to step 4 1 . transmission range switch, then go to step 45.
14-88
45. Reconnect a l l connectors. 56. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
47. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. YES—Check for intermittent short t o body ground
48. Start the engine. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
49. W i t h the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever PCM was substituted, g o to step 1.
through a l l positions. Stop for a t least 1 second in
each position. N O — G o t o step 57.
50. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 57. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0705 in the DTCs
Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
between the transmission range switch and the Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
PCM, then go to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO—Go to step 5 1 . : Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 56,
MENU w i t h the HDS. NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for
intermittent short to body ground between the
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 54. If the PCM was
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 50, substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • COMPLETED, go to step 54.
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for

intermittent short to body ground in the wire
PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT

55. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.
14-89
CVT

DTC P0706: Open In Transmission Range 8. Adjust the shift cable (see page 14-205).
Switch Circuit
NOTE:
* Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 10. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). 11. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem pressing the VSA OFF switch, and run the vehicle
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the w i t h the shift lever in D, until the vehicle speed
transmission. reaches 30 m p h (48 km/h), then slow d o w n and
stop the wheels.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. MENU w i t h the HDS.
3. Block the rear wheels and raise the front of the Does the HDS indicate FAILED?
allow the front wheels to rotate freely, or raise the Y E S — G o t o step 13.
vehicle on a lift.
4. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
pressing the VSA OFF switch, and run the vehicle poor connections or loose terminals between the
w i t h the shift lever to D, until the vehicle speed transmission range switch and the PCM. If the HDS
reaches 30 m p h (48 km/h), then slow d o w n and indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 11.
stop the wheels.
13. Shift the shift lever to D, and check the Forward
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs Switch (ATPFWD) and A/T D Switch in the Data List
MENU w i t h the HDS. w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate FAILED? Are Forward Switch (ATPFWD) and A/T D Switch
ON?
Y E S - G o to step 6.
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check f o r N O - G o t o step 18.
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the HDS 14. Shift the shift lever to S, and check the Forward
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4. Switch (ATPFWD) and A/T S Switch in the Data List
w i t h the HDS.
Are Forward Switch (ATPFWD) and A/T S Switch
7. Inspect the transmission range switch (see page ON?
14-211).

14-90
15. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 2 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
16. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by 22. Measure the voltage between transmission range
pressing the VSA OFF switch, and run the vehicle switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 8.
w i t h the shift lever in D, until the vehicle speed
reaches 30 m p h (48 km/h), then slow d o w n and TRANSMISSION RANGE
stop the wheels. SWITCH CONNECTOR
17. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs GND (BRN)
1 2 3 4
cn
CO
7 8
Y E S — G o t o step 18. ATPFWD (RED)

failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for Wire side of female terminals
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 16. Is there battery voltage?
18. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Y E S — G o t o step 23.
19. Disconnect the transmission range switch NO—Repair open in the wire between transmission
connector. range switch connector terminal No. 8 and PCM
connector terminal B28, then go to step 25.
20. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. 23. Measure the voltage between transmission range
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR ' TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
GND (BRN)
1 2 3 4
GND (BRN) ATPD (PNK)
5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8

NO—Repair open in the wire between the
transmission range switch connector terminal NO—Repair open in the wire between transmission
No. 2 and body ground (G102), or repair poor body range switch connector terminal No. 3 and PCM
ground (G102), then go to step 25. connector terminal B21, then g o t o step 25.
(cont'd)
14-91
CVT
24. Measure the voltage between transmission range 25. Reconnect all connectors.
TRANSMjSSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR 27. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
G N D (BRN)
28. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by
1 2 3 4 w i t h the shift lever to D, until the vehicle speed
reaches 30 mph (48 km/h), then slow d o w n and
5 6 7 8 stop the wheels.
ATPS (BLU/WHT)
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals Is DTC P0706 indicated?

Is there battery voltage? * terminals between the transmission range switch
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between transmission
range switch connector terminal No. 7 and PCM 30. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs
connector terminal B16, then go to step 25. MENU with the HDS.


connections or loose terminals between the
transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 28.


w i t h the shift lever to D, until the vehicle speed
reaches 30 mph (48 km/h), then slow d o w n and
stop the wheels.
14-92
34. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P0716: Range/Performance Problem in
CVT Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) Speed Sensor
Is DTC POT06 indicated ? Circuit
YES—Check for poor connections or loose DTC P0717: Problem in CVT Input Shaft
terminals between the transmission range switch (Drive Pulley) Speed Sensor Circuit (No
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a Signal Input)
33. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NOTE:
N O — G o t o step 35. any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
35. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0706 in the DTCs • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
MENU with the HDS. and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
1. Check for proper CVT input shaft (drive pulley)
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is speed sensor installation (see page 14-170). If the
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the sensor is installed incorrectly, reinstall the sensor
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other correctly, then go to step 26.
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM 4. Block the rear wheels and raise the front of the
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and
(see page 11-7), then g o t o step 33. If the PCM was allow the front wheels to rotate freely, or raise the
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT vehicle on a lift.
with the shift lever to D, at speeds over 19 m p h
stop the wheels.


CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor and the
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 5.
(cont'd)
14-93
CVT
7. Turn the ignition switch to L O C K (0). 11. Connect PCM connector C (44P).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 12. Disconnect the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed
sensor connector.
terminal C40 and body ground, and between PCM 14. Measure the voltage between CVT input shaft
connector terminal C44 and body ground. (drive pulley) speed sensor connector terminal
No. 1 and body ground.
C V T INPUT SHAFT (DRIVE PULLEY)
I1 I 23 4 | 5 | 6 | 78 I 9 I
S P E E D S E N S O R CONNECTOR
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27
/ 29|30|31|32 33
//
| 3 6 | / 38 39|40|/|42 4 3 | 4 4 |
L G 1 (BRN/YEL) I L G 2 (BRN/YEL) V C C 2 (YEL/BLU)
@ @
Is there about 5 V?
IMO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals C40, C44, and body ground N O — G o t o step 15.
(G102), or repair poor body ground (G102), then go
to step 26.
14-94
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 19. Measure the voltage between CVT input shaft
(drive pulley) speed sensor connector terminals
16. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS. No. 2 and No. 3.
17. Disconnect PCM connector B ( 4 4 P ) . C V T INPUT S H A F T (DRIVE PULLEY)

S P E E D S E N S O R CONNECTOR
terminal B18 and CVT input shaft (drive pulley)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 1.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) C V T INPUT S H A F T NDR (RED/BLU) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
SPEED SENSOR
(DRIVE PULLEY)
CONNECTOR
V C C 2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2
|1|2 3|4|/|6 7 ( 4A (YEL/BLU) Wire side of female terminals
10
21
12 13|14|15|16 171
*/
26
/ 2 8 ,/ 2 5
Is there about 5 V?
/ 28 29|30|31|32 33c 14 35
\*V / | / | 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 ^ 1344
YES—Replace the CVT input shaft (drive pulley)

Terminal side of Wire side of
female terminals female terminals speed sensor (see page 14-170), then g o t o step 26.

connector terminal B18 and the CVT input shaft
(drive pulley) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 26.
(cont'd)
14-95
CVT
2 1 . J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. speed sensor connector terminal No. 3.
22. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P) CVT INPUT SHAFT

(DRIVE PULLEY)
23. Check for continuity between CVT input shaft (drive SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
pulley) speed sensor connector terminal No. 2 and h | 2 3|4|/|6|7 (8)1/1
body ground. 10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
21 23 25
1 2 3
C V T INPUT S H A F T (DRIVE PULLEY)
26
/ 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
SG2
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR |36|/
/ l / | 4 0 | 4 l | < 42 43|44|
(GRN/YEL)
SG2 (GRN/YEL)

NDR (RED/BLU)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the CVT
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor connector
Is there continuity? and PCM connector terminal B33, then go to step
26.
between PCM connector terminal B17 and the CVT
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor connector,
then go t o step 26.
14-96
speed sensor connector terminal No. 2. 27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
CVT INPUT SHAFT 28. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) ( D R I V E PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR 29. Start the engine, let it idle for at least 15 seconds.
CONNECTOR
Run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever to D, at speeds
NDR (RED/BLU) over 19 m p h (30 km/h) for at least 30 seconds. Slow
NDR
h|2 3|4|/|8|7 (RED/BLU) d o w n and stop the wheels.
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
// 21 23 25 30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

26
j 36
/ 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
/ / | / | 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 43|44| Is DTC P0716 or P0717 indicated?

female terminals female terminals YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between the CVT input shaft (drive
pulley) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step
Is there continuity? 1.
YES—Goto step 32. N O — G o t o step 3 1 .

connector terminal B17 and the CVT input shaft
(drive pulley) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 26.
(cont'd)
14-97
CVT
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the 35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC P0716 or P0717 indicated?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other terminals between the CVT input shaft (drive
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, pulley) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor go to step 1.
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor and the PCM, N O — G o t o step 36.
then g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 29. 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0716 or P0717 in the
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
good PCM (see page 11-7). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
34. Start the engine, let it idle for at least 15 seconds. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 35,
Run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever to D, at speeds go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
over 19 m p h (30 km/h) for at least 30 seconds. Slow
d o w n and stop the wheels. NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor and the PCM.
w a s substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
14-98
DTC P0721: Range/Performance Problem in 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed
Sensor Circuit 8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
DTC P0722: Problem in CVT Output Shaft 9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
(Driven Pulley) Speed Sensor Circuit (No
Signal Input) 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C40 and body g r o u n d , and between PCM
connector terminal C44 and body ground.
NOTE: .
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
General Troubleshooting Information {see page 14-3).
1 I
2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 78 9 I
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem 10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the 20 21 22 23 2 4 25
transmission. 26 27
/ 29|30|31|32 33
3 6 1 / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42
//
43J44
1. Check for proper CVT output shaft (driven pulley) LG1 (BRN/YEL) I I LG2 (BRN/YEL)
@
speed sensor installation (see page 14-171). If the
sensor is installed incorrectly, reinstall the sensor @
correctly, then go t o step 26,
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is there continuity?
4. Block the rear wheels and raise the front of the Y E S — G o t o step 11.
allow the front wheels to rotate freely, or raise the NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
vehicle on a lift. connector terminals C40, C44, and body ground
5. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by to step 26.
w i t h the shift lever to D, the engine speed
3,500 r p m or higher for at least 30 seconds. Slow
d o w n and stop the wheels.


CVT output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor and
the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
to step 5.
(cont'd)
14-99
CVT
11. Connect PCM connector C (44P). 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Disconnect the CVT output shaft (driven pulley) 16. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. -
speed sensor connector.
13. Turn the Ignition switch t o ON (II).
14. Measure the voltage between CVT output shaft terminal C13 and CVT output shaft (driven pulley)
(driven pulley) speed sensor connector terminal speed sensor connector terminal No. 1.
CVT OUTPUT SHAFT P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)
C V T O U T P U T SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY) (DRIVEN PULLEY)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
VCC1 (YEL/RED)
VCC1
(YEL/RED) 1|2 3 |4|5|6 7 8|9
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
VCC1 (YEL/RED) 20 21 22 23 24 25
29J30|31|32 33
26 27
3 6 ^
/38|39|40|/|42 /43|44
/
W i r e side of Terminal side of
Is there about 5 V?
Y E S — G o t o step32.
N O — G o t o step 15. connector terminal C13 and the CVT output shaft
(driven pulley) speed sensor connector, then go t o
step 26.
14-100
ryf:
19. Measure the voltage between CVT output shaft 20. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(driven pulley) speed sensor connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 3. 2 1 . J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
CVT O U T P U T SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY)

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
23. Check for continuity between CVT output shaft
(driven pulley) speed sensor connector terminal
NDN (WHT) SG1 (GRN/WHT) CVT O U T P U T SHAFT (DRIVEN PULLEY)

SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR

NDN (WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
YES—Replace the CVT output shaft (driven pulley)

speed sensor (see page 14-171), then g o t o step 26. W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

between PCM connector terminal C10 and the CVT
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor connector,
then go to step 26.
NO—Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
14-101
CVT
DTC Troubleshooting fcont d)
terminal C14 and CVT output shaft (driven pulley) terminal C10 and CVT output shaft (driven pulley)
speed sensor connector terminal No. 3. speed sensor connector terminal No. 2.
C V T O U T P U T SHAFT P C M CONNECTOR C (44P) CVT OUTPUT SHAFT P C M C O N N E C T O R C (44P)

(DRIVEN PULLEY) (DRIVEN PULLEY)
S P E E D SENSOR SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR CONNECTOR
SG1 (GRN/WHT) NDN (WHT)

SGI
(GRN/WHT) |l|2 3 |4 | 5 | 6 | 78 | 9 | NDN (WHT) 2 3 4 | 5 | 6 | 78 I 9 I
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 1C 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 2C 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 29|30|31|32 33
//
| 3 6 | / 38 3 9 1 4 0 1 / | 42 43|44|
2e 27
/ 29|30|31|32 33
//
| 3 6 | / 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 4 2 43|44|
W i r e side of Terminal side of W i r e side of Terminal side of

female terminals female terminals female terminals female terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between the CVT NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor connector connector terminal C10 and the CVT output shaft
and PCM connector terminal C14, then go to step (driven pulley) speed sensor connector, then go to
26. step 26.
14-102
26. Reconnect a l l connectors. 32. Reconnect all connectors.
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
28. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. good PCM (see page 11-7).
29. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by 34. Start the engine. Disable the VSA (if equipped) by
pressing the VSA OFF switch, and run the vehicle pressing the VSA OFF switch, and run the vehicle
with the shift lever to D, and keep the vehicle at w i t h the shift lever to D, and hold the vehicle at
speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) for at least speeds over 19 mph (30 km/h) for at least
30 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
30 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the wheels.
terminals between the CVT output shaft (driven terminals between the CVT output shaft (driven
pulley) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step pulley) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
1. updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
NO—Goto step 3 1 . go to step 1.
3 1 . Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0721 or P0722 in the N O — G o t o step 36.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the HDS indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
connections or loose terminals between the CVT Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 35,
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor and the go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. B
PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 29. NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor and the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
14-103
CVT
DTC P0746; CVT Drive Pulley Pressure 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Control Valve Stuck OFF
Is DTC P0746, P0777, or PI899 indicated?
NOTE;Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review YES—The CVT drive pulley pressure control valve
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). may be stuck OFF or the CVT driven pulley
pressure control valve may be stuck ON:
• DTC P0746 is indicated, replace the CVT drive
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169).
• DTC P0777 is indicated, replace the CVT driven
Are any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169).
simultaneously with DTC P0746? • DTC P1899 Is indicated, replace the CVT drive
pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169)
YES—Go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting, and CVT driven pulley pressure control valve
and recheck. (see page 14-169) as a set.
If any part was replaced, go to step 11..
NO—Goto step3.
NO—Go to step 6, and repeat the test-drive. If the
3. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. HDS does not indicate a DTC after the test-drive has
been done four times, the problem was an
4. Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant * Intermittent failure; the system Is OK at this time.
5. Check the IMA battery level gauge in the gauge
control module (tach). 12. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Does the IMA battery level gauge indicate more 13. Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant
than 4 segments? temperature reaches 176 °F (80 °C).
Y E S — G o t o step 6. 14. Shift the shift lever to D.
NO—Run the engine w i t h the shift lever in P, at 15. Keep pressing the brake pedal for 5 seconds.
3,500 rpm until the IMA battery level gauge
indicates at least 4 segments, then go to step 6. 16. Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle, and test-drive
the vehicle on a flat road for about 15 seconds. Do
6. Shift the shift lever to D. not release the accelerator during the test-drive.
7. Keep pressing the brake pedal for 5 seconds. 17. S l o w d o w n to a stop. After stopping keep pressing
the brake pedal for 5 seconds.
8. Accelerate f r o m a stop to full throttle, and test-drive
the vehicle on a flat road for about 15 seconds. Do 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
not release the accelerator during the test-drive.
9. S l o w d o w n to a stop. After stopping keep pressing
the brake pedal for 5 seconds. YES—Replace the transmission. •
NO—Go to step 19.
14-104
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0746 in the DTCs DTC P0777: CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
MENU with the HDS. Control Valve Stuck ON
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. H 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO—If the HDS Indicates FAILED, check for poor 2 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
drive pulley pressure control valve and the PCM, Are any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated
then g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT simultaneously with DTC P0777?
COMPLETED, go t o step 13.
Y E S — G o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,
and recheck.
NO—Go t o step 3.
4. - Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant


control module (tach).
Does the IMA battery level gauge indicate more

than 4 segments?
Y E S — G o t o step 6. ,.
NO—Run the engine w i t h the shift lever in P, at

3,500 r p m until the IMA battery level gauge
indicates at least 4 segments, then g o t o step 6.
6. Shift the shift lever to D.
7. Keep pressing the brake pedal for 5 seconds.
8. Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle, and test-drive

9. Slow d o w n to a stop. After stopping keep pressing

(cont'd)
14-105
CVT
Is DTC P0746, P0777, or P1899 indicated?
Y E S — T h e CVT driven pulley pressure control valve
may be stuck ON or the CVT drive pulley pressure YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
control valve may be stuck OFF: Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 18,
• DTC P0746 is indicated, replace the CVT drive
pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169). NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
• DTC P0777 is indicated, replace the CVT driven connections or loose terminals between the CVT
pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169). driven pulley pressure control valve and the PCM,
• DTC P1899 is indicated, replace the CVT drive then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169) COMPLETED, go to step 13.
and CVT driven pulley pressure control valve
(see page 14-169) as a set.
If any part was replaced, go to step 11.
• NO—Go to step 6, and repeat the test-drive. If the

HDS does not indicate a DTC after the test-drive has
been done four times, the problem was an
intermittent failure; the system is OK at this t i m e .
13. Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant

16. Accelerate f r o m a stop at full throttle, and test-drive


YES—Replace the transmission. H
NO—Go to step 19.
14-106
DTC P0780: Problem In Hydraulic Control 9. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
System
NOTE:
• Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data and YES—Check for poor connections or loose
any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review terminals between the CVT drive pulley pressure
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). control valve, the CVT driven pulley pressure
- This code is stored whenever DTCs P1898 and P1899 control valve, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
are detected. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1.
NOTE: P0780 means DTC P1898 and/or P1899 has 10. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0780 in the DTCs
been stored. MENU with the HDS.
Is DTC P1898 and/or P1899 indicated? Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
Y E S — G o t o DTC P1898 (see page 14-142) and/or Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
P1899 (see page 14-144) t r o u b l e s h o o t i n g . • complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
N O — G o t o step 3. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8,
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
good PCM (see page 11-7). connections or loose terminals between the CVT
drive pulley pressure control valve, the CVT driven
4. Start the engine and w a r m it up until the coolant pulley pressure control valve, and the PCM. If the
temperature reaches 176 °F (80 °C). PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
5. Shift the shift lever t o D. substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
7. Accelerate f r o m a stop until the vehicle speed

reaches 40—50 mph (65—80 km/h), and test-drive
the vehicle on a flat road for at least 15 seconds. Do

14-107
CVT
DTC P0796: CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Valve Stuck OFF
NOTE; Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot w i t h the H D S , and review 9. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). pressing the brake pedal, and run the engine at idle
for at least 5 seconds. Then test-drive the vehicle at
'06 Model speeds over 24 mph (40 km/h) for at least
15 seconds.
3. Set the parking brake, and block the front wheels
securely. YES—Replace the transmission. •
4. Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant N O — G o t o step 11.

5. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift MENU w i t h the HDS.
lever to D.
6. While pressing the brake pedal fully, press the
accelerator for 6—8 seconds to full throttle, and YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
measure the stall speed rpm in D. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
Does the engine speed exceed 3,500 rpm?
YES—Replace the CVT start clutch pressure control connections or loose terminals between the CVT
valve (see page 14-168), then go to step 7. drive pulley pressure control valve and the PCM,
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this COMPLETED, go to step 9.
time •
14-108
DTC P0796: CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON(II).
Valve Stuck OFF
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 11. Start the engine, shift the shift lever to D while
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). pressing the brake pedal, and run the engine at idle
for at least 5 seconds. Then test-drive drive the
#
§7-§9 Models vehicle at speeds over 24 m p h (40 km/h) for at least
15 seconds.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON(II).
Is DTC P0501 or P0502 indicated simultaneously
with DTC P0796? YES—Replace the Transmission. B
Y E S — G o to the DTC P0501 troubleshooting N O — G o t o step 13.

(see page 14-75) or DTC P0502 troubleshooting
(see page 14-76), and recheck. 13. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0796 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 3.
Is DTC P1891 indicated simultaneously with DTC Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 12,
P0796? go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, fl
YES—Replace the start clutch, then go to step 11. NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
N O — G o t o step 4. drive pulley pressure control valve and the PCM,
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
4. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. COMPLETED, go to step 11.
5. Set the parking brake, and block the front wheels

securely.
6. Start the engine, and w a r m it up to normal

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
7. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift

lever to D.

accelerator for 6—8 seconds at full throttle, and
measure the stall speed rpm in D.
Does the engine speed exceed 3,500 rpm?
YES—Replace the CVT start clutch pressure control

valve (see page 14-168), then go to step 9.

time.H
14-109
CVT
DTC P0962: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure 8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
Control Valve Circuit Low Voltage
9. Disconnect the CVT drive pulley pressure control •
NOTE; valve connector.
any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review 10. Measure the resistance between CVT drive pulley
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). pressure control valve connector terminals No. 1
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and No. 2.
transmission. CVT DRIVE PULLEY P R E S S U R E
CONTROL V A L V E CONNECTOR
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second. DRLS— DRLS+
(GRN/YEL) (BLU/WHT)

YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?

between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley YES—Replace the solenoid harness (see page
pressure control v a l v e . • 14-169), then go to step 15.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO—Replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control
6. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector.
7. Measure the resistance between solenoid harness

SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
DRLS-h . .
(BLU/WHT)
/ 5
2
6
3
7
4
8
DRLS—-
(GRN/YEL) I I
Terminal side of male t e r m i n a l s
Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?
YES—Goto step 11.
14-110
terminal B43 and solenoid harness connector
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). terminal No. 7, and between PCM connector
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal No. 3.
terminal B43 and body ground, and between PCM
SOLENOID P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
connector terminal B44 and body ground. HARNESS CONNECTOR
DRLS+
(BLU/WHT)
h | 2 3|4|/|6 7
(8)M
h|2 3 | 4 ^ 6 | 7 (8)M 10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
/
/5
CM
3 4
10
21
12 13|14|15|16 17 18
23
/
25 6 7 8
/
26
21 23
/
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
25
/ »/
26
/ 26
\*V /
29|30|31|32 33 34 35
] / | 4 0 | 4 l | 4 2 43|44|
DRLS—
(GRN/YEL)
/ | / | 4 0 ( 4 1 | 4 2 43|44|
DRLS- . 1 DRLS+ DRLS- DRLS+

( G R N / Y E L ) JL X (BLU/WHT) (GRN/YEL) (BLU/WHT)
Wire side of Terminal side of

Is there continuity? Y E S - G o t o step 2 1 .
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
between PCM connector terminal B43 and solenoid connector terminal B43 and solenoid harness
harness connector terminal No. 7, or repair short to connector terminal No. 1, or repair open in the wire
body ground in the wire between PCM connector between PCM connector terminal B44 and solenoid
terminal B44 and solenoid harness connector harness connector terminal No. 3, then go to step
terminal No. 3, then go t o step 15. 15.
(cont'd)
14-111
CVT
16. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (ll). Is DTC P0962 indicated?
17. Clear the DTC with the HDS. J YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between the PCM and the CVT drive
18. Start the engine, and let it Idle for at least 1 second. pulley pressure control valve. If the PCM was
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
NO — G o t o step 25.
terminals between the PCM and the CVT drive 25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0962 In the DTCs
pulley pressure control valve, then go to step 1. MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 20. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0962 in the DTCs Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
MENU w i t h the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
., original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated In step 24,
YES—Troubleshooting Is complete. If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19, NO—If the HDS Indicates FAILED, check for poor
go to t h e Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • connections or loose terminals between the PCM
and the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve. If
NO—If the HDS Indicates FAILED, check for poor . the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
connections or loose terminals between the PCM PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM
and the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve, was substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NOT COMPLETED, go to step 23.

23. Start the engine, and let it Idle for at least 1 second.
14-112
DTC P0963: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure 8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
Control Valve Circuit High Voltage
9. Disconnect the CVT drive pulley pressure control
NOTE: valve connector.
any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review 10. Measure the resistance between CVT drive pulley
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). pressure control valve connector terminals No. 1
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and No. 2.
transmission. CVT DRIVE PULLEY P R E S S U R E
CONTROL VALVE CONNECTOR
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second. DRLS— DRLS+
(GRN/YEL) (BLU/WHT)

NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?

between the PCM and the CVT drive pulley YES—Replace the solenoid harness (see page
pressure control valve. • 14-169), then go to step 18.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO—Replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control
valve (see page 14-169), then g o t o step 18.

DRLS+
(BLU/WHT)
DRLS—
(GRN/YEL)
Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?
YES—Goto step 11.
(cont'd)
14-113
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 16. Check for continuity between PCM connector
13. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II). connector terminal B44 and body ground.
14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)

connector terminal B44 and body ground.
1 2 3 | 4 | / | 6 | 7 (8)M
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18

/
21 23 25
/
26 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
/ / | / | 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 43|44|
h | 2 3|4|/|6 7
(8)M
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 DRLS- , 1 I DRLS+
/
21 23 25
/
26
j x L
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
( G R N / Y E L ) JL
(H)
JL
(O)
(BLU/WHT)
\»V /1/|40|41|42 43|44|
D R L S - . 1 I DRLS-h Terminal side of female terminals

(GRN/YEL) JL X (BLU/WHT)
(2) ©
between PCM connector terminal B43 and solenoid
Is there voltage? harness connector terminal No. 7, or repair short t o
body ground in the wire between PCM connector
YES—Repair short t o power in the wire between terminal B44 and solenoid harness connector
PCM connector terminal B43 and solenoid harness terminal No. 3, then go t o step 18.
connector terminal No. 7, or repair short to power
in the wire between PCM connector terminal B44 N O — G o t o step 17.
and solenoid harness connector terminal No. 3,
then go t o step 18.
14-114
17. Check for continuity between following PCM 18. Reconnect all connectors.
connector terminals B6, B40, and body ground
individually: 19. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

CVT-PG2 ( B L K ) ~~~ "
2 1 . Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second.
1|2 3 7
/
10 1 2 13|14J15|16 1 7 1 8
/ / 21 23 25
/ /1/M41
26 28 2 9 | 3 0 | 3 1 | 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5
42 4 3 1 4 4
CVT-PG1 ( B L K )
terminals between the PCM and the CVT drive
pulley pressure control valve, then go to step 1.
Terminal side of female terminals N O — G o t o step 23.
Is there continuity? 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0963 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
connector terminals B6, B40, and body ground YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
(G101), or repair poor body ground (G10D.B Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 22,

connections or loose terminals between the PCM
and the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve,

26. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second.
(cont'd)
14-115
CVT
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P0966: CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
Control Valve Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE:
YES—Check for poor connections or loose • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
terminals between the PCM and the CVT drive any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
pulley pressure control valve. If the PCM w a s General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
11-7), then go t o step 26. If the PCM w a s substituted, and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
go t o step 1. transmission.
N O — G o t o step 28. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0963 in the DTCs 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES—If the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the Is DTC P0966 indicated?
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated In step 27, Y E S — G o t o step 5.
go t o the Indicated D T C s troubleshooting. •
- NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
connections or loose terminals between the PCM between the PCM and the CVT driven pulley
and the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve. If pressure control valve. •
the PCM w a s updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11 -7), then go t o step 26. If the PCM 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
was substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS Indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 26. 6. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector.

DNLS+ I —|
(GRN/WHT) • ,
/ 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
DNLS—
(PNK/BLK) I I
Is there 3.8-6.8 Q ?
14-116
<gG>
8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167). 11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
9. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
valve connector.
10. Measure the resistance between CVT driven pulley terminal B35 and body ground, and between PCM
pressure control valve connector terminals No. 1 connector terminal B42 and body ground.
and No. 2.
CVT DRIVEN P U L L E Y PRESSURE
4 [ / l 6 | 7 (4/\
I 101 I 2123 |13|14|15|16 17 18
21 23 25
26 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
1 2 7 X 7 | ^ | 4 1 | 4 2 l 43 144
N/
DNLS- DNLS+ DNLS- DNLS+
(PNK/BLK) (GRN/WHT) (PNK/BLK) (GRN/WHT)
Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?
YES—Replace the solenoid harness (see page between PCM connector terminal B35 and solenoid
14-169), then g o t o step 15. harness connector terminal No. 2, or repair short to
NO—Replace the CVT driven pulley pressure terminal B42 and solenoid harness connector
control valve (see page 14-169), then go to step 15. terminal No. 6, then go to step 15.
(cont'd)
14-117
CVT
terminal No. 2, and between PCM connector 16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
terminal No. 6. 17. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
SOLENOID PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) 18. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second.
HARNESS CONNECTOR
DNLS+ 19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.

(GRN/WHT)
1 2 3 4 | / | 6 | 7
(8)1/ Is DTC P0966 indicated?
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
/
/5
2
6
3
7
4
8 26
21
/
23
/
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
3 6 | / / | / ] 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 43
25
terminals between the PCM and the CVT driven
DNLS— 144
(PNK/BLK) pulley pressure control valve, then go to step 1.
DNLS- DNLS+
(PNK/BLK) (GRN/WHT) N O — G o t o step 20.
female terminals female terminals 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS f o r P0966 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19,
connector terminal B35 and solenoid harness go t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
connector terminal No. 2, or repair open in the w i r e
between PCM connector terminal B42 and solenoid NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
harness connector terminal No. 6, then go t o step connections or loose terminals between the PCM
15. and the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve,
COMPLETED, go t o step 18.

14-118
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P0967: CVT Driven Pulley Pressure
Control Valve Circuit High Voltage
NOTE:
6
YES—Check for poor connections or loose Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
terminals between the PCM and the CVT driven any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
pulley pressure control valve. If the PCM was General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM was substituted, and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
go to step 1. transmission.
N O — G o t o step 25. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0966 in the DTCs 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
MENU with the HDS.
Y E S —If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the Is DTC P0967 indicated?
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 24, Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
connections or loose terminals between the PCM between the PCM and the CVT driven pulley
and the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve. If pressure control valve. •
• the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 23. 6. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector.

DNLS+
(GRN/WHT)
/ 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
DNLS—
(PNK/BLK)
Is there 3.8-6.8 0 ?
NO—Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
14-119
CWI
8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167). 11. J u m p the SCS line with the HDS.
9. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
v a l v e connector.
10. Measure the resistance between CVT driven pulley
pressure control valve connector terminals No. 1 14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
and No. 2. terminal B35 and body ground, and between PCM
C V T DRIVEN P U L L E Y P R E S S U R E
CONTROL V A L V E CONNECTOR PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
11 2 3|4|/|6|7
10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
23
DNLS+
/ / 21 25
DNLS—
(PNK/BLK) (GRN/WHT)
26
361/ // 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
] / | 4 0 | 4 l | 4 2 43 44
DNLS— DNLS+
(PNK/BLK) (GRN/WHT)

Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?
Is there voltage?
YES—Replace the solenoid harness (see page
14-169), then go to step 18. YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
PCM connector terminal B35 and solenoid harness
NO—Replace the CVT driven pulley pressure connector terminal No. 2, or repair short to power
control valve (see page 14-169), then go t o step 18. in the wire between PCM connector terminal B42
then go to step 18.
14-120
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Check for continuity between the f o l l o w i n g PCM
16. Check for continuity between PCM connector individually.
C V T - P G 2 (BLK)
h|2 3 | 4 | / | 8 | 7 (8) A
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
h|2 3UI/16 7 (8)
A
/ 23 25
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 / 21
10
/
21
/
25
26
/ 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
/
26
23
/
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
36
/ /|/I40|41|42 43 441
CVT-PG1 (BLK)
\*V
DNLS-
/ f / M 4 1 42 43 44
DNLS+
(PNK/BLK) (GRN/WHT)

Is there continuity? Y E S — G o to step 24.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire NO—Repair open in the wires between PCM
between PCM connector terminal B35 and solenoid connector terminals B6, B40, and body ground
harness connector terminal No. 2, or repair short to (G101), or repair poor body ground (G10D.B
terminal No. 6, then go to step 18.
N O - G o t o step 17.
(cont'd)
14-121
CWI
terminals between the PCM and the CVT driven
21. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 1 second. pulley pressure control valve. If the PCM was
2 2 . Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. 11-7), then go to step 26. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
terminals between the PCM and the CVT driven 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0967 in the DTCs
pulley pressure control valve, then go to step 1. MENU w i t h the HDS.
N O — G o t o step 23. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0967 in the DTCs Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
MENU w i t h the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 22, NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • connections or loose terminals between the PCM
and the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve. If
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
connections or loose terminals between the PCM PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 26. If the PCM
and the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve, w a s substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NOT COMPLETED, go to step 26.

14-122
DTC P0970; CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control 7. Measure the resistance between solenoid harness
Valve Circuit Low Voltage connector terminals No. 4 and No. 8.
NOTE: SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR

SCLS+, ,
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). (YEL)
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem I 1
/ 2 3 iI
H
transmission.
6 7 I3
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). S C L S -

(PNK/BLU)

3. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D while
pressing the brake pedal, and keep the shift lever in
D for at least 1 second. Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. YES—Goto step 1 1 .
Is DTC P0970 indicated? NO—Goto step8.
YES—Goto step 5. 8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 9. Disconnect the CVT start clutch pressure control
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals valve connector.
between the PCM and the CVT start clutch pressure
control valve. • 10. Measure the resistance between CVT start clutch
pressure control valve connector terminals No. 1
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). and No. 2.
6. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. CVT START CLUTCH PRESSURE

SCLS— SCLS+
(PNK/BLU) (YEL)
Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?

NO—Replace the CVT start clutch pressure control

(cont'd)
14-123
CVT
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). terminal No. 4, and between PCM connector
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector terminal No. 8.
terminal B25 and body g r o u n d , and between PCM
SOLENOID ' P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)
connector terminal B41 and body g r o u n d . HARNESS CONNECTOR
rrh , S C L S +
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P) S C L S + ~V^/ ~1 (YEL)

(YEL)
h 2 3 | 4 | / | 6 | 7 (8)
A
/
ll 2 3 | 4 | / | 8 | 7
12 13|14|15|16 17 18
2 3 4
10
/
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
23
/
10
/ 23 2E 5 6 7 8 26
21
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
25
/ 21
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 3E 36^ /VI 1 1 43[44|
26
//
4 0 4 1 4 2
SCLS—
|36^ 1/|40|41|42 43 1 I (PNK/BLU)
4
SCLS—
SCLS— SCLS+ (PNK/BLU)
(PNK/BLU) (YEL)

Is there continuity? Y E S — G o t o step 2 1 .
YES—Repair short to body ground in the w i r e NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM
between PCM connector terminal B25 and solenoid connector terminal B25 and solenoid harness
harness connector terminal No. 4, or repair short to connector terminal No. 4, or repair open in the w i r e
body ground in the w i r e between PCM connector between PCM connector terminal B41 and solenoid
terminal B41 and solenoid harness connector harness connector terminal No. 8, then go to step
terminal No. 8, then go to step 15. 15.
14-124
16. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). Is DTC P0970 indicated?
terminals between the PCM and the CVT start
18. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D while clutch pressure control valve. If the PCM was
pressing the brake pedal, and keep the shift lever in updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
D for at least 1 second. 11-7), then g o t o step 23. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.
YES—Check for poor connections or loose MENU w i t h the HDS.
clutch pressure control valve, then g o t o step 1. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
N O — G o t o step 20. Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0970 in the DTCs original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other
MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 24,
g o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting •
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other connections or loose terminals between the PCM
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19, and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve. If
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates
connections or loose terminals between the PCM NOT COMPLETED, go to step 23.
and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve,


D for at least 1 second.
14-125
CVT
DTC P0971: CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control 7. Measure the resistance between solenoid harness
Valve Circuit High Voltage connector terminals No. 4 and No. 8.
NOTE: SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR

any on-board snapshot w i t h the HUS, ana review SCLS+
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). (YEL)
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
transmission.
/ 2 3 iI
I3
LO
6 7
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). SCLS—

(PNK/BLU)

D for at least 1 second. Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. Y E S - G o t o step 11.
Is DTC P0971 indicated? NO—Go to step 8.
Y E S — G o t o step 5. 8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 9. Disconnect the CVT start clutch pressure control
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals valve connector.
between the PCM and the CVT start clutch pressure
control valve. • 10. Measure the resistance between CVT start clutch
pressure control valve connector terminals No. 1
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). and No. 2.
6. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. CVT START CLUTCH PRESSURE

1 2
SCLS- SCLS+
(PNK/BLU) (YEL)
Is there 3.8-6.8 Q?

NO—Replace the CVT start clutch pressure control

14-126
1 1 . J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 16. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B25 and body g r o u n d , and between PCM
13. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II). connector terminal B41 and body ground.
14. Measure the voltage between PCM connector P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P)

1 1 2 3 | 4 | / | 6 | 7 (B)M
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
/
/
!
P C M CONNECTOR B (44P) 21 23 26
26
/ 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 3 =
h
10
2 3 | 4 | / | e 7
12 13|14J15|16 17 18
m\A 3 6 / / | / | 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 4 3 ( 4* l
SCLS— S C L S +
(PNK/BLU) (YEL)
21 23 25
26 28 29|30|31|32 33 34
36
SCLS
A /\/\M\A\\41 43 j I4
SCLS+ Terminal side of female terminals

(PNK/BLU) K (YEL)
between PCM connector terminal B25 and solenoid
Is there voltage? harness connector terminal No. 4, or repair short t o
YES—Repair short to power in the wire between terminal B41 and solenoid harness connector
PCM connector terminal B25 and solenoid harness terminal No. 8, then go to step 18.
connector terminal No. 4, or repair short to power
in the wire between PCM connector terminal B41 N O — G o t o step 17.
then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
14-127
e v i

17. Check for continuity between following PCM 18. Reconnect all connectors.
individually. 19. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).

C V T - P G 2 (BLK) p — — —
I1I2 3|4|/|6|7 (8)M pressing the brake pedal, and keep the shift lever in
10 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
/
21 23
A/25
/
26 28 29|30|31132 33 34 35
3 6 | / / 1 / | 4 0 | 4 1 | 4 2 43|44|
C V T - P G 1 (BLK)

Terminal side of female terminals clutch pressure control valve, then go t o step 1.
Is there continuity? N O — G o t o step 23.
Y E S — G o t o step 24. 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0971 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS.
connector terminals B6, B40, and body ground Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
(G101), or repair poor body ground (G10D.B

and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve,


14-128
27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P16C0: PCM CVT Control System
Incomplete Update
NOTE:
6
YES—Check for poor connections or loose Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
terminals between the PCM and the CVT start any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
clutch pressure control valve. If the PCM was General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page * This code is indicated w h e n PCM updating is
11-7), then g o t o step 26. If the PCM was substituted, incomplete.
go to step 1. • Do not turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) while updating the PCM. If you turn
N O — G o t o step 28. the ignition switch to LOCK (0) or ACCESSORY (I)
before completion, the PCM can be damaged.
MENU w i t h the HDS. 1. Update the PCM (see page 11-236).
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is Is DTC PI SCO indicated?

original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other YES—Replace the original PCM (see page 11-238).
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27, • .

NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . *
and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve. If
14-129
CVT

DTC P18D7; PCM Internal F-CAN DTC P16D8: PCM Internal IMA CAN
Communication Circuit Malfunction Communication Circuit Malfunction
NOTE: Before you t r o u b l e s h o o t record all freeze data NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3). General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B time.B
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
good PCM (see page 11-7). good PCM (see page 11-7).
5. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 2 minutes. 5. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 2 minutes.
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
N O — G o t o step 7. NO—Go to step 7.
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P16D7 in the DTCs



substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-130
7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P16D8 in the DTCs DTC P1860: Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit Low
MENU with the HDS. Voltage
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? NOTE:

• Before y o u troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 6, and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • transmission.
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT 3. Select Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous
COMPLETED, go to step 5. Test Menu w i t h the HDS.

between the PCM and the inhibitor solenoid. •
(cont'd)
14-131
CVT
7. Measure the resistance between solenoid harness 10. Measure the resistance between inhibitor solenoid
connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR INHIBITOR S O L E N O I D C O N N E C T O R
2 3
5 6 7
INHSOL
INHSOL (GRN/BLK)
(GRN/BLK)
Terminal side of male terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Is there 11.7-21.0 Q? Is there 11.7-21.0 Q?
Y E S — G o t o step 11. YES—Replace the solenoid harness (see page

NO—Go to step 8.
NO—Replace the inhibitor solenoid (see page
8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167). 14-170), then go to step 14.
9. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid connector.
14-132
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 14. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 16. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
17. Select Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous
Test Menu with the HDS.
INHSOL (GRN/BLK) 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
h 2 3|4|/|6|7 (8)M Is DTC P1860 indicated?

10
/
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
/
26
21 23
/
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
25
YES—Check for intermittent short to body ground
36 W / L / | 4 0 | 4 1 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
between the inhibitor solenoid and the PCM, then
go to step 1.
MENU with the HDS.
between PCM connector terminal B10 and solenoid YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
harness connector terminal No. 5, then go to step Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,
14. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
N O — G o t o step 20. NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
inhibitor solenoid and the PCM, then go t o step 1. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17.

(cont'd)
14-133
CVT
22. Select Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the Miscellaneous DTC P1861: Inhibitor Solenoid Circuit High
Test Menu w i t h the HDS. Voltage
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. NOTE:

Is DTC P1860 indicated? any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
YES—Check for poor connections or loose • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
terminals between the inhibitor solenoid and the and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- transmission.
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
N O — G o t o step 24. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1860 in the DTCs 3. Select the Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the
MENU with the HDS. Miscellaneous Test Menu w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is Is DTC P1861 indicated?

original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other Y E S — G o t o step 5.
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor between the PCM and the inhibitor solenoid. •
inhibitor solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11-7), then go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted, 6. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector.
go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 22.
14-134
7. Measure the resistance between solenoid harness 10. Measure the resistance between inhibitor solenoid
connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. connector terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR INHIBITOR S O L E N O I D C O N N E C T O R
l j
/ 2 3 4
CM
5 6 7 8
INHSOL
INHSOL
(GRN/BLK)
^ (GRN/BLK)
ft)
Is there 11.7-21.0 0, ? Is there 11.7-21.0 Q?
Y E S — G o to step 11. Y E S —Replace the solenoid harness (see page

NO—Go to step 8.
NO—Replace the inhibitor solenoid (see page
8. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167). 14-170), then go to step 14.
9. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid connector.
(cont'd)
14-135
CVT
11. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 14. Reconnect all connectors.
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 15. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 16. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
terminal No. 5. 17. Select the Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu w i t h the HDS.
SOLENOID PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
HARNESS CONNECTOR INHSOL ( G R N / B L K )

h 2 3|4|/|6|7 Ml/I
A 12 13|U|15|16 17 18 YES—Check for poor connections or loose
/5 2 3 4
10
/
/26 21 28 29|30|31|32 2333 /34 2535 terminals between the inhibitor solenoid and the
6 7 8 PCM, then go to step 1.
3 6 / 42 4 3 | 4 4 |
/1/M41
INHSOL (GRN/BLK) NO—Go t o step 19.

female terminals female terminals 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1861 in the DTCs
Is there continuity? Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
Y E S — G o t o step 20. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
connector terminal B10 and solenoid harness
connector terminal No. 5, then g o t o step 14. NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
inhibitor solenoid and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 17.

14-136
22. Select the Inhibitor Solenoid Test in the DTC P1890:Problem in CVT Speed Control
System
Miscellaneous Test Menu with the HDS.
23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
Is DTC P1861 indicated? General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
YES—Check for poor connections or loose 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
terminals between the inhibitor solenoid and the
PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
PCM was substituted, go to step 1 . Are any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated
simultaneously with DTC P1890?
Y E S — G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1861 in the DTCs and recheck.
MENU with the HDS.
NO—Go to step 3.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the 4. Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other temperature reaches 176 °F (80 °C).
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 5. Check the IMA battery level gauge in the gauge
connections or loose terminals between the Does the IMA battery level gauge indicate more
inhibitor solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was than 4 segments?
11-7), then go to step 22. If the PCM was substituted, Y E S — G o t o step 6.
g o t o step 1. if the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
go to step 22. NO—Run the engine w i t h the shift lever in P, at
indicates at least 4 segments, then go to step 6.
6. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds about 37 mph

(60 km/h) for at least 1 minute.
(cont'd)
14-137
CVT
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P1891: Problem In Start Clutch Control
System
Are any DTCs indicated?
Y E S — G o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
HDS does not Indicate a DTC after the test-drive has «m Model
been done four times, go to step 08.
8. Park the vehicle on level g r o u n d , apply the parking
brake, and block all four wheels securely. 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
9. Start the engine. Are any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated
10. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift
lever to D. YES—Go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting,
and recheck.
11. While pressing the brake pedal f i r m l y , also press
the accelerator for 6—8 seconds at full throttle, and NO—Go to step 3.
measure the stall speed r p m .
Does the stall speed exceed 3,500 rpm?
YES—Replace the transmission. •
6. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D, and
12. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds about 37 m p h release the parking brake and brake pedal, then
(60 km/h) for at least 1 minute. check if the vehicle moves.
13. Check the engine speed w h e n vehicle speed is Did the vehicle move?
37 m p h (60 km/h).
YES—Go to step 7.
Is the engine speed 2,350-2,950 rpm?
NO—Replace the start clutch, then go to step 18.
t i m e . If necessary, replace the CVTF (see page
14-176), and recheck.
NO—Replace the transmission. •
14-138
7. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). 17. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
8. Reconnect the solenoid harness connector. 18. Start the engine. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds
about 37 mph (60 km/h) for at least 1 minute.
check the creeping speed on level ground. 19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is the creeping speed about 3 mph (5 km/h)? Is DTC P1891 indicated?
Y E S — G o to step 10.. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals between the CVT start clutch pressure
NO—Replace the CVT start clutch pressure control control valve and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO—Go to step 20.
10. Park the vehicle on level ground, apply the parking
brake, and block all four wheels securely. 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1891 in the DTCs
MENU with the H D S ,
11. Start the engine, and w a r m It up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
12. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
lever to D. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 19,
go to the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting E
accelerator for 6—8 seconds at full throttle, and NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
measure the stall speed rpm In D. connections or loose terminals between the CVT
start clutch pressure control valve and the PCM,
Does the engine speed exceed 3,500 rpm? then g o t o step 1. If the HDS Indicates NOT
YES—Replace the start clutch, then go to step 18.
NO—Go to step 14.
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
23. Start the engine. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds
16. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D, and about 37 m p h (60 km/h) for at least 1 minute.
release the parking brake and brake pedal, then
check if the vehicle moves.
Did the vehicle move?
Y E S — G o to step 2 1 .
(cont'd)
14-139
CVT
24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC P1891: Problem in Start Clutch Control
System
YES—Check for poor connections or loose and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
terminals between the CVT start clutch pressure General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
control valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM {see page 11-7), then '07-09 Models
1. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
N O — G o t o step 25. 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
25. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1891 in the DTCs Are any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated
MENU with the HDS. simultaneously with DTC P1891?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Y E S — G o t o step 3.
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is N O — G o t o step 4.

original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 2^
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • Is the DTC P0796 indicated simultaneously with
DTCP1891?
connections or loose terminals between the CVT YES—Replace the start clutch, then go to step 19.
start clutch pressure control valve and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good NO—Go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,
PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 23. If the PCM and recheck.
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 23. 4. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

14-140
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 18.. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
9. Reconnect the solenoid harness connector. 19. Start the engine. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds
about 37 m p h (60 km/h) for at least 1 minute.
check the creeping speed on level ground. 20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is the creeping speed about 3 mph (5 km/h)? Is DTC P1891 indicated?
Y E S — G o to step 11. YES—Check for poor connections or loose

terminals between the CVT start clutch pressure
NO—Replace CVT start clutch pressure control control valve and the PCM, then go to step 1.
11. Park the vehicle on level ground, apply the parking
brake, and block all four wheels securely. 21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1891 in the DTCs
12. Start the engine, and w a r m it up to normal
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Does the HDS indicate PASSED?
13. Firmly press the brake pedal, and shift the shift YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
lever to D. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20,
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting a
accelerator for 6—8 seconds at full throttle, and NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
measure the stall speed rpm in D. connections or loose terminals between the CVT
start clutch pressure control valve and the PCM,
Does the engine speed exceed 3,500 rpm? then g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
YES—Replace the start clutch, then go to step 19.
NO—Go to step 15.
15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
24. Start the engine. Test-drive the vehicle at speeds
17. Start the engine. Shift the shift lever to D, and about 37 m p h (60 km/h) for at least 1 minute.
(cont'd)
14-141
CVT
,25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. DTC P1898: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure
Control Valve Stuck ON or CVT Driven Pulley
Is DTC P1891 indicated? Pressure Control Valve Stuck OFF
YES—Check for poor connections or loose NOTE:

9
terminals between the CVT start clutch pressure Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
control valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
g o t o step 24. If the PCM was substituted, go to step • Keep replacement solenoid valves on hand: the CVT
1. drive pulley pressure control valve and the CVT
driven pulley pressure control valve set.
NO—Go to step 26.
MENU w i t h the HDS. 2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Are any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated
simultaneously with DTC PI898?
Y E S — I f the PCM w a s updated, troubleshooting is
• complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the Y E S — G o to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting,
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other • and recheck.
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • NO — G o t o step 3.
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor 3. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
start clutch pressure control valve and the PCM. If 4. Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good temperature reaches 176 °F (80 °C).
PCM (see page 11-7), then g o t o step 24. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates 5. Check the IMA battery level gauge in the gauge
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 24. control module (tach).
Does the IMA battery level gauge indicate more

than 4 segments?
NO—Run the engine with the shift lever in P, at

indicates at least 4 segments, then go to step 6.

reaches 40—50 mph (65—80 km/h), and test-drive
9. Slow d o w n to a stop, and after stopping keep

pressing the brake pedal for 5 seconds.
14-142
YES—Replace CVT drive pulley pressure control
valve (see page 14-169) and CVT driven pulley YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
pressure control valve (see page 14-169), then go to Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,
step 11. go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. •
NO—Go to step 6, and repeat the test-drive. If the NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
HDS does not indicate a DTC after the test-drive has connections or loose terminals between the CVT
been done four times, the problem was an drive pulley pressure control valve, CVT driven
intermittent failure; the system is OK at this time. pulley pressure control valve, and the PCM, then go
to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). to step 13.

temperature reaches 176 °F (80 °C)

reaches 40—50 m p h (65—80 km/h), and test-drive

YES—Replace the transmission. •
14-143
CVT
DTC P1899: CVT Drive Pulley Pressure 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Control Valve Stuck OFF or CVT Driven Pulley
Pressure Control Valve Stuck ON Is DTC P0746, P0777, or P1899 indicated?
NOTE: Y E S — T h e CVT drive pulley pressure control valve

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and m a y be stuck OFF or the CVT driven pulley
any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review pressure control valve may be stuck ON:
;
• Keep replacement solenoid valves on hand: the CVT • DTC P0746 is indicated, replace the CVT drive
drive pulley pressure control valve and the CVT pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169).
driven pulley pressure control valve set. • DTC P0777 is indicated, replace the CVT driven
pulley pressure control valve (see page 14-169).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). • DTC P1899 is indicated, replace the CVT drive
pulley pressure control valve (see page 14 169)
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. and CVT driven pulley pressure control valve
(see page 14-169) as a set.
Are any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated If any part was replaced, go to step 9.
Y E S — G o t o the indicated DTCs troubleshooting, HDS does not indicate a DTC after the test-drive has
and recheck. been done four times, the problem was an
intermittent failure; the system is OK at this time.
12. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS .
temperature reaches 176 °F (80 °C). 13. Start the engine, and w a r m it up until the coolant
control module (tach). 14. Shift the shift lever to D.
Does the IMA battery level gauge indicate more 15. Keep pressing the brake pedal for 5 seconds.
than 4 segments?
Y E S — G o to step 6. reaches 40—50 mph (65—80 km/h), and test-drive
NO—Run the engine w i t h the shift lever in P, at not release the accelerator during the test-drive.
indicates at least 4 segments, then go to step 6. 17. Slow d o w n to a stop, and after stopping keep
reaches 40—50 m p h (65—80 km/h), and test-drive YES—Replace the transmission. .
not release the accelerator during the test-drive. N O — G o t o step 19.

14-144
19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P1899 in the DTCs DTC P2122: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
MENU w i t h the HDS. Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) Sensor D)
Circuit Low Voltage
DTC P2123: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP)
YES—Troubleshooting is complete.' If any other Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) Sensor D)
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18, Circuit High Voltage
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
connections or loose terminals between the CVT General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
drive pulley pressure control valve, the CVT driven
pulley pressure control valve, the and the PCM, 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 13. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.


system?
Y E S — G o to the DTC P2122 troubleshooting

(see page 11-262) or DTC P2123 troubleshooting
(see page 11-265) in the electronic throttle control
system (ETCS).B
NO—Go to step 4.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T

Is DTC P2122 or P2123 indicated in the A/T

SYSTEM?

time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
(cont'd)
14-145
CVT
5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest DTC P2159: Range/Performance Problem in
software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known- CVT Speed Sensor (Secondary) Circuit
DTC P2160: Problem in CVT Speed Sensor
6. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least (Secondary) Circuit (No Signal Input)
2 minutes.
NOTE:
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs the A/T • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
Is DTC P2122 or P2123 indicated in the A/T • This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
SYSTEM? and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
#
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, 06 Model
go to step 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. Check for proper CVT speed sensor (secondary)
1. installation (see page 14-172). If the sensor is
installed incorrectly, reinstall the sensor correctly,
N O — G o t o step 8. then go to step 26.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2122 or P2123 in the 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Block the rear wheels and raise the front of the
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and
complete. If the PCM w a s substituted, replace the allow the front wheels to rotate freely, or raise the
original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other vehicle on a lift.
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • 5. Start the engine, run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever
to D, and the engine speed 2,000 r p m or higher for
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor at least 30 seconds. Slow d o w n and stop the
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the wheels.
(see page 11-7), then go to step 6. If the PCM was 6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2159 or P2160 in the
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT DTCs MENU w i t h the HDS.

PCM and the CVT speed sensor (secondary). If the
14-146
7 . Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). 11. Connect PCM connector C (44P).
8. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 12. Disconnect the CVT speed sensor (secondary)
connector.
terminal C40 and body ground, and between PCM 14. Measure the voltage between CVT speed sensor
connector terminal C44 and body ground. (secondary) connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
p c m CONNECTOR C ( 4 4 P )
c v t speed s e n s o r (secondary)
| 1 | 23 4 | 5 | 6 | 78 I 9 I
connector
10 11 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27
/ 29|30|31|32 33
38|39|40|/|42
/43j44|
/
v c c 2 (YEL/BLU)
l g 1 (brn/yel) j I l g 2 (brn/yel)
@ @
Is there about 5 V?
connector terminals C40, C44, and body ground N O — G o t o step 15.
to step 26.
(cont'd)
14-147
CVT

15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) . 19. Measure the voltage between CVT speed sensor
(secondary) connector terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
16. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HQS.
C V T SPEED SENSOR (SECONDARY)
17. D i s c o n n e c t PCM c o n n e c t o r B (44P). CONNECTOR

terminal B18 and CVT speed sensor (secondary)
connector terminal N o . 1.
VEL2 (WHT/BLK) SG2 (GRN/YEL)
CVT
P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P) SPEED SENSOR
(SECONDARY)
CONNECTOR
' f , W i r e side of female terminals
VCC2
h | 2
10
3 | 4 | / | 8 | 7
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
8
I/I (YEL/BLU)
Is there about 5 V?
21 23
/ 25
26
/ 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
36
/ / L / | < 0 | 4 1 42 4 3 | 4 4 | YES—Replace the CVT speed sensor (secondary)
T e r m i n a l s i d e of W i r e s i d e of
NO—Go t o step 20.

connector terminal B18 and the CVT speed sensor
(secondary) connector, then go to step 26.
14-148
21. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. connector terminal No. 3.

PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) CVT
SPEED SENSOR
23. Check for continuity between CVT speed sensor (SECONDARY)
CONNECTOR
(secondary) connector terminal No. 2 and body
ll|2|3|4|/|6l7Ti17T
ground. 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 17
1 2 3
28 29 30 31 32
CVT SPEED S E N S O R (SECONDARY)
CONNECTOR
SG2
(GRN/YEL)
SG2 (GRN/YEL)
T e r m i n a l side of W i r e side of
VEL2 (WHT/BLK)

NO—Repair open in the wire between the CVT
speed sensor (secondary) connector and PCM
Is there continuity? connector terminal B33, then go t o step 26.

between PCM connector terminal B8 and the CVT
speed sensor (secondary) connector, then go t o
step 26.
(cont'd)
14-149
CVT
25. Check for continuity between P C M connector 26. Reconnect all connectors.
connector terminal No. 2. 27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
CVT 28. Clear the DTC with the HDS.

SPEED SENSOR
(SECONDARY) 29. Start the engine, run the vehicle w i t h the shift lever
CONNECTOR '
VEL2 (WHT/BLK) (15 km/h) for at least 30 seconds. Slow d o w n and
VEL2
| 1 | 2 3|4 |/|6|7 8 stop the wheels.
A (WHT/BLK)
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
/
10
/ / 21 23
/ 25
26
/ 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
43 Is DTC P2159 or P2160 indicated?
/V|40|41|42 441
T e r m i n a l side of W i r e side of
female terminals female terminals YES—Check for poor connections or loose
terminals between the CVT speed sensor
(secondary) and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Is there, continuity?
NO—Goto step31.
NO—Repair open in the wire between PCM DTCs MENU with the HDS.
connector terminal B8 and the CVT speed sensor
(secondary), then go to step 26. Does the HDS indicate PASSED?


speed sensor (secondary) and the PCM, then go t o
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 29.

stop the wheels.
14-150
35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs w i t h the HDS. DTC U0028: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
Is DTC P2159 or P2160 indicated? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
YES—Check for poor connections or loose General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-3).
terminals between the CVT speed sensor
(secondary) and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
go to step 34. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
1.
N O — G o t o step 36. SYSTEM with the HDS.
36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P2159 or P2160 in the Is DTC U0028 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
YES—Go to the DTC U0028 troubleshooting in the
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? PGM-FI System (see page 1 1 - 1 6 4 ) . •
YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is N O — G o t o step 4.

original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 35, SYSTEM with the HDS.
Is DTC U0028 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
connections or loose terminals between the CVT YES—Goto step 5.
speed sensor (secondary) and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
(see page 11-7), then go to step 34. If the PCM was t i m e . If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
COMPLETED, go to step 34. troubleshooting.•

6. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least 2 minutes.
(cont'd)
14-151
C¥T
#
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T DTC U0037:1 MA-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
Is DTC U0028 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, 1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
go to step 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
1.
NO—Go to step 8. SYSTEM with the HDS.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0028 in the DTCs Is DTC U0037 indicated in the PGM-FI
MENU with the HDS. SYSTEM?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Y E S — G o to the DTC U0037 troubleshooting In the
PGM-FI System (see page 11-165). •
YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the NO—Go to step 4.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were Indicated in step 7, 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs In the A/T
goto the Indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • SYSTEM with the HDS.
NO—If the HDS Indicates FAILED, check for poor Is DTC U0037 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM YES—Goto step 5.
substituted, goto step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
COMPLETED, go to step 6. time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
Indicated, go to the indicated DTCs

6. Start the engine, and let it Idle for at least 2 minutes.
14-152
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T DTC U0121: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-ABS)
Is DTC U0037 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? and any on-board snapshot with the HDS, and review
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
go to step 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
1.
NO—Go to step 8. SYSTEM with the HDS.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0037 in the DTCs Is DTC U0121 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
YES—Go to the DTC U0121 troubleshooting in the
Does-the HDS indicate PASSED? PGM-FI System (see page 11-177).a
YES—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is ... NO—Go to step 4.

original PCM (see page 11-238). If any other 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7, - SYSTEM with the HDS.
NO—If the HDS Indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the YES—Goto step 5.
(see page 11-7), then go to step 6. If the PCM was : NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS Indicates NOT time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
• COMPLETED, go to step 6. indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
troubleshooting. H

(cont'd)
14-153
CWT
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. Modulator-Control Unit)
Is DTC U0121 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
go to step 6. If the PCM w a s substituted, go to step
1. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
NO—Go to step 8. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI

8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0121 In the DTCs
MENU w i t h the HDS. Is DTC U0122 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Y E S - G o to the DTC U0122 troubleshooting in the
PGM-FI SYSTEM (see page 11-179).B
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7, 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T
go to the indicated DTCs troubleshooting. • SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
NO—If the HDS Indicates FAILED, check for poor Is DTC U0122 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM YES—Go to step 5.
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
indicated, go to the indicated D T C s

14-154
6. Start the engine, and let it idle for at least DTC U0129: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Servo
2 minutes. Unit)
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. and any on-board snapshot w i t h the HDS, and review
terminals between the VSA modulator-control unit 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. System w i t h the HDS.
NO—Go to step 8. Is DTC U0129 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0122 in the DTCs Y E S — G o to the DTC U0129 troubleshooting in the
MENU w i t h the HDS. PGM-FI System (see page 11-181).•
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? NO—Go to step 4.
Y E S — I f the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 7, Is DTC U0129 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
connections or loose terminals at the VSA NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
modulator-control unit and the PCM. If the PCM time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
(see page 11-7), then go to step 6. If the PCM was troubleshooting. •
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 6. 5. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
(cont'd)
14-155
CVT

7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T DTC U01S5: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge
SYSTEM with the HDS. Control Module)
Is DTC U0129 indicated in the A/T..SYSTEM?. . NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
N O — G o t o step 8. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI

. SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U0129 in the DTCs
MENU with the HDS. Is DTC U0155 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Y E S — G o to the DTC U0155 troubleshooting in the
PGM-FI System (see page 11-183). • • '
go to the indicated D T C s troubleshooting. • SYSTEM w i t h the HDS.
NO—If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor Is DTC U0155 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM?
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM Y E S — G o t o step 5.
- substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
COMPLETED, go t o step 6. • time. If any other Temporary DTCs or DTCs were
troubleshooting. H

14-156
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T DTC U120§; IMA-CAN Malfunction (PCM-
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. MCM)
Is DTC U0155 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
N O — G o t o step 8. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI

MENU with the HDS. Is DTC U1205 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED? Y E S — G o t o the DTC U1205 troubleshooting in the
PGM-FI System (see page 11-185).H
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM Y E S — G o t o step 5.
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

(cont'd)
14-157
CVT
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T DTC U1206:1 MA-CAN Malfunction (PCM-
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. BCM Module)
Is DTC U1205 indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? NOTE; Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
NO—Go to step 8. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI

..MENU w i t h the HDS. Is DTC U1206 indicated in the PGM-FI SYSTEM?
Does the HDS indicate PASSED ? Y E S — G o t o the DTC U1206 troubleshooting in the
PGM-FI System (see page 11-190). •
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the NO —Go to step 4.
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM YES—Goto step 5.
(see page 11-7), then go t o step 6. If the PCM was
substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

14-158
Road Test
7. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the A/T 1. Start the engine, and w a r m it up to normal
SYSTEM w i t h the HDS. operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
Is DTC U1206 Indicated in the A/T SYSTEM? 2. Apply the parking brake, and block both rear
wheels.
terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated, 3. Start the engine, then shift the shift lever to D,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), then w h i l e pressing the brake pedal. Press the
go to step 6. If the PCM was substituted, go to step accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The
1. engine should not stall.
N O — G o t o step 8. 4. Repeat step 3 in all shift lever positions.
8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for U1206 in the DTCs 5. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
MENU w i t h the HDS. driver's side of the dashboard.


substituted, g o t o step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
7. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM,

and go to the A/T Data List. If it does not, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-213).
(cont'd)
14-159
CWT
Road Test (cont'd)

8. Prepare the HDS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT 15. Review each snapshot individually, and compare
(refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if APP Sensor A Voltage, Vehicle Speed, and Engine
needed): Speed to the following table:
• Select High Speed icon. D Position:

• Select these parameters: APP Sensor A Vehicle Engine Speed
- Vehicle Speed voltage Speed
- Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) Speed rpm 1.2 V 25 mph 900—1,300 rpm
- Input Shaft (Drive Pulley) Speed rpm (40 km/h)
- Engine Speed 2.3 V 25 mph 1,650-2,250 r p m
- APP Sensor A (V) (40 km/h)
- C V T F T e m p Sensor (V) 37 mph 1,800—2,400 rpm
- Battery Voltage (60 km/h)
- Brake Switch 62 mph 2 , 2 0 0 - 2 , 8 0 0 rpm
• Set the Trigger Type to Parameter. (100 km/h)
• Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A 4.4 V 25 mph 4,050—4,650 rpm
above 1.1 V. (40 km/h)
• Set the recording time to 60 seconds. 37 mph 4,550—5,150 rpm
• Set the Trigger point to —30 seconds. (60 km/h)
62 mph 5,050—5,650 rpm
9. Find a suitable level road. W h e n you are ready to (100 km/h)
do the t e s t press OK on the HDS.
> Position:
10. Monitor the HDS, and accelerate quickly until APP APP Sensor A Vehicle Engine Speed
Sensor A reads 1.2 V. Maintain a steady throttle voltage Speed
until the vehicle reaches a reasonable speed, then 1.2 V 25 mph 1,900—2,300 rpm
slow the vehicle, and come to a stop. (40 km/h)
37 mph 2,200—2,800 rpm
11. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded (60 km/h)
or increase the recording time setting as necessary 62 mph 2,900—3,500 rpm
and repeat step 10. (100 km/h)
2.3 V 25 mph 2,800—3,400 rpm
12. Adjust the Parameter setting to 2.2 V. Test-drive the (40 km/h)
vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS, 37 mph 3,250—3,850 rpm
accelerate quickly until APP Sensor A reads 2.3 V. (60 km/h)
Maintain a steady throttle until the vehicle reaches 62 mph 3,850—4,450 rpm
a reasonable speed, then slow the vehicle, and (100 km/h)
come to a stop. 4.4 V 25 mph 4,300—4,900 rpm
(40 km/h)
13. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded 37 mph 5,650—6,250 rpm
or increase the recording t i m e setting as necessary (60 km/h)
and repeat step 12. 62 mph 5,700—6,300 rpm
(100 km/h)
14. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to
the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the vehicle
reaches to reasonable speed, then slow to a stop,
and save the snapshot.
14-160
Stall Speed Test
L Position: 1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the

APP Sensor A Vehicle . Engine Speed proper level (see page 14-175).
voltage Speed,
1.2 V 25 m p h 2,900—3,500 rpm 2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
(40 km/h)
37 mph 3,500—4,100 rpm ' 3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
(60 km/h) driver's side of the dashboard.
62 mph 4,100—4,700 rpm
(100 km/h)
2.3 V 25 m p h 3,700—4,300 rpm
(40 km/h)
37 m p h 4,200—4,800 rpm
(60 km/h)
62 m p h 4,650—5,250 rpm
(100 km/h)
4.4 V .25 m p h 4,400—5,000 rpm
(40 km/h)
37 m p h 5,700—6,300 rpm
(60 km/h)
62 m p h 5,700—6,300 rpm
(100 km/h)
16. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16-degrees), 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
apply the brake, and shift Into P. Release the brake;
the vehicle should not move. 5. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM,
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle, DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-213).
when'stopped on an Incline in gear. Depending on
• the grade of the incline, the vehicle could roll
backwards If the brake Is released.
(cont'd)
14-161
CVI
Stall Speed Test (cont'd) Pressure Test
6. Make sure the A/C switch is OFF. Special Tools Required
• A/T high pressure gauge 07AAJ-PLYA100
7. Start the engine, and w a r m it up to normal • A/T pressure hose, 2,210 m m 07MAJ-PY4011A
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). • A/T pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
• A/T oil pressure gauge set 07406-0020401
8. Shift the shift lever to D, w h i l e pressing the brake • A/T low pressure gauge 07406-0070301
pedal firmly, then press the accelerator pedal for
6 to 8 seconds, and note the engine speed. Do not NOTE:
move the shift lever while raising the engine speed. • Do not test pressure for more than 10 seconds at a
time.
9. A l l o w 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test • Do not move the shift lever while raising the engine
w i t h the shift lever in S, L, and R. speed.
• Disable the VSA (if equipped) by pressing the VSA
NOTE: OFF switch.
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds • ABS or VSA DTC(s) may come on during the test-
at a time. drive. If the ABS or VSA DTC(s) come on, clear the
• Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic DTC(s) w i t h the HDS.
purposes only.
• Stall speed tests should be the same in D, S, L, 1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the
and R. proper level (see page 14-175).
• Do not test stall speed w i t h the A/T pressure
gauges installed. 2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of
Stall Speed rpm the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported, and
Specification: 2,350 rpm allow the front wheels to rotate freely.
Service Limit: 2,200—2,500 rpm
3. Remove the front undercover (A) (see page 20-150)
10. If the stall speeds are out of the service limit, the and the splash shield (B) (see page 20-148).
problems and probable causes are listed in the
table.
Problem Probable Causes

Stall speed r p m high • ATF p u m p output
in D, S, L, and R low
• ATF pump defective
• Clogged ATF strainer
• Pressure high (PH) B
regulator valve stuck
closed
• Slipping f o r w a r d
clutch
• Start clutch defective
Stall speed rpm high • Slipping reverse
in R brake
• Start clutch defective
Stall speed rpm low • Engine output l o w
in D, S, L, and R • Start clutch defective
• Pulley control valves
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
A and B stuck
14-162
Turn the engine off, and connect the HDS to the 7. Use the following pressure gauge, pressure hose,
DLC (A) located under the driver's side of the and pressure hose adapter. Do not allow dust or
dashboard. other foreign particles to enter the ports w h i l e
connecting the gauges.
NOTE:
• Drive pulley pressure and driven pulley pressure
2
may be above 3,430 kPa (35.0 kgf/cm , 4,989 psi)
w h e n there is a transmission problem that
causes the PCM to go into fail-safe mode.
• When troubleshooting, y o u must use the A/T
high pressure gauge to measuring drive pulley
pressure and driven pulley pressure.
A / T OIL P R E S S U R E A / T LOW PRESSURE

G A U G E SET GAUGE
07406-0020401 07406-0070301

it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting A / T HIGH PRESSURE A/T PRESSURE
GAUGE H O S E , 2,210 m m
(see page 11-213). 07AAJ-PLYA100 07MAJ-PY4011A
(2 R e q u i r e d ) (5 R e q u i r e d )
A/T PRESSURE HOSE

ADAPTER
07MAJ-PY40120
(5 R e q u i r e d )
(cont'd)
14-163
CVT
Pressure Test (cont'd)
8. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge set to the 12. Start the engine, and w a r m up the engine to normal
reverse brake pressure inspection port (A). operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
13. Shift the shift lever to D, and measure the f o r w a r d

clutch pressure at the forward clutch pressure
inspection port while firmly pressing the brake
pedal, and holding the engine speed at 1,700 r p m .
14. Shift to-R, and measure the reverse brake pressure

at the reverse brake pressure inspection port while
f i r m l y pressing the brake pedal, and holding the
engine speed at 1,700 r p m . .
15. Shift to N, and measure the drive pulley pressure at

the drive pulley pressure inspection port while
f i r m l y pressing the brake pedal, and holding the
engine speed at 1,700 r p m .
16. Measure the driven pulley pressure at the driven

9. Connect the A/T oil pressure gauge set to the pulley pressure inspection port while firmly
f o r w a r d clutch pressure inspection port (B). pressing the brake pedal, and holding the engine
speed at 1,700 r p m .
10. Connect the A/T low pressure gauge to the .
lubrication pressure inspection port (C). 17. Measure the lubrication pressure at the lubrication
pressure inspection port while f i r m l y pressing the
11. Connect the A/T high pressure gauge to the drive brake pedal, and holding the engine speed at
pulley pressure inspection port (D) and to the 3,000 r p m .
driven pulley pressure inspection port (E).
Pressure Standard
Forward 1.57-1.84 MPa
clutch 2
( 1 6 . 0 - 1 8 . 8 kgf/cm , 2 2 8 - 2 6 7 psi)
Reverse 1.57-1.84 MPa
brake 2
( 1 6 . 0 - 1 8 . 8 kgf/cm , 2 2 8 - 2 6 7 psi)
Drive 0 . 2 4 - 0 . 5 4 MPa
pulley 2
( 2 . 5 - 5 . 5 kgf/cm , 3 6 - 7 8 psi)
Driven 0 . 8 3 - 1 . 1 3 MPa
pulley 2
( 8 . 5 - 1 1 . 5 kgf/cm , 1 2 0 - 1 6 4 psi)
Lubrication 0 . 2 5 - 0 . 4 0 MPa
2
( 2 . 5 - 4 . 1 kgf/cm , 3 6 - 5 8 psi)
18. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the pressure

gauges f r o m the pressure inspection ports.
19. Install the sealing bolts and new sealing washers to

the pressure inspection ports, and tighten the bolts
to 18 N-m (1.8 kgf-m, 13 Ibf-ft). Do not reuse the old
sealing washer.
14-164
CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control
Valve Solenoid Test
20. If the pressures are out of standard, the problems
and probable causes are listed in the table.
1. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370)
Problem Probable causes and the intake air duct.
No or low forward Forward clutch
clutch pressure defective 2. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector.
No or low reverse Reverse brake
brake pressure defective
No or low drive • ATF pump defective
pulley pressure • PH regulator valve
defective
• Pulley control valve
A defective
B defective
Drive pulley pressure • PH regulator valve
too high defective
A defective
B defective
• CVT drive pulley
pressure control
valve defective 3. Measure the CVT start clutch pressure control valve
No or low driven • ATF pump defective solenoid resistance between solenoid harness
pulley pressure • PH regulator valve connector terminals No. 4 and No. 8.
defective
• Pulley control valve Standard: 3.8—6.8 Q
A defective
• Pulley control valve 4. If the resistance is out of standard, check for open
B defective or short in the solenoid harness. If the wires are OK,
• CVT driven pulley replace the CVT start clutch pressure control valve
pressure control (see page 14-168).
valve defective
Driven pulley PH regulator valve 5. Connect a jumper wire f r o m the battery positive
pressure too high defective terminal to solenoid harness connector terminal
No or low lubrication • ATF p u m p defective No. 4, and connect another jumper wire f r o m the
pressure • Lubrication valve battery negative terminal to terminal No. 8.
defective A clicking sound should be heard.
21. Install the splash shield (see page 20-148) and the 6. If no sound is heard, remove the CVT start clutch
front undercover (see page 20-150). pressure control valve, and clean it, then recheck.
Replace the CVT start clutch pressure control valve
22. Check the CVTF level (see page 14-175). if a problem recurs (see page 14-168).
14-165
CVT
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control
Valve Solenoid Test Valve Solenoid Test
1 . Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370) 1. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370)
and the intake air d u c t and the intake air duct.
2. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector. 2. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector.
3. Measure the CVT drive pulley pressure control 3. Measure the CVT driven pulley pressure control
valve solenoid resistance between solenoid valve solenoid resistance between solenoid
harness connector terminals No. 3 and No. 7. harness connector terminals No. 2 and No. 6.
Standard: 3.8—6.8 Q Standard: 3.8—6.8 Q
4. If the resistance is out of standard, check for open 4. If the resistance is out of standard, check for open
or short in the solenoid harness. If the wires are OK, or short in the solenoid harness. If the wires are OK,
replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve replace the CVT driven pulley pressure control
(see page 14-169). valve (see page 14-169).
5. Connect a j u m p e r w i r e f r o m the battery positive 5. Connect a j u m p e r wire f r o m the battery positive

terminal to solenoid harness connector terminal terminal to solenoid harness connector terminal
No. 3, and connect another j u m p e r w i r e f r o m the No. 2, and connect another j u m p e r w i r e f r o m the
battery negative terminal to terminal No. 7. battery negative terminal t o terminal No. 6.
A clicking sound should be heard. A clicking sound should be heard.
6. If no sound is heard, remove the CVT drive pulley 6. If no sound is heard, remove the CVT driven pulley
pressure control valve, and clean it, then recheck. pressure control valve, and clean it, then recheck.
Replace the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve Replace the CVT driven pulley pressure control
if a problem recurs (see page 14-169). valve if a problem recurs (see page 14-169).
14-166
Inhibitor Solenoid Test Lower Walwe Body Removal and
Installation
and the Intake air d u c t
3. Remove the front undercover (A) (see page 20-150)

and the splash shield (B) (see page 20-148).
3. Measure the Inhibitor solenoid resistance between

solenoid harness connector terminal No. 5 and
body ground.
Standard: 1 1 . 7 - 2 1 . 0 Q
4. If the resistance is out of standard, -check for open (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
or short in the solenoid harness. If the wire Is OK,
replace the inhibitor solenoid (see page 14-170). 4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the CVT fluid
(CVTF). Reinstall the drain plug and a new sealing
5. Connect a j u m p e r wire f r o m the battery positive washer (B).
terminal t o solenoid harness connector terminal
No. 5, and connect another jumper wire f r o m the
battery negative terminal to body ground.
A clicking sound should be heard.
6. If no sound Is heard, replace the inhibitor solenoid

(see page 14-170).
A
18 x 1.5 m m
49 N m
(5.0 k g f - m , 3 6 ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
14-167
CVT
Lower Valve Body Removal and CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control
Installation (cont'd) Valve Replacement
5. Remove the ATF pan (A). 1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
2. Disconnect the CVT start clutch pressure control

valve connector (A).
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
6. Remove the ATF strainer (B).
7. Remove the bolts securing the lower valve body (C),

and remove the bolt securing the solenoid harness
connector (D) while holding the lower valve body, 3. Remove the CVT start clutch pressure control valve
then remove the lower valve body. (B).
8. Install the lower valve body in the reverse order of 4. Check that the filter (C) is in good condition, replace
removal. it if it is clogged or damaged.
9. Refill the transmission w i t h CVTF (see step 5 on 5. Install a new CVT start clutch pressure control valve
page 14-177). w i t h the dowel pins (D) and the separator plate (E)
on the lower valve body (F).
procedures (see page 14-172) if any control valve of 6. Connect the CVT start clutch pressure control valve
the lower valve body is replaced. connector.
7. Install the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
14-168
CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control
Valve Replacement Valve Replacement
1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167). 1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
2. Remove the solenoid harness clamp (A). 2. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control
valve connector (A) and the inhibitor solenoid
connector (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
, (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)

3. Remove the CVT driven pulley pressure Control
3. Disconnect the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve (C), and remove the inhibitor solenoid (D)
valve connector (B). f r o m the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve.
4. Remove the seven bolts, and remove the CVT drive 4. Check that the filter (E) is in good condition, replace
pulley pressure control valve (C). The CVT start it if it is clogged or damaged.
clutch pressure control valve (D) can also be
removed. 5. Remove the O-rings (F) f r o m the inhibitor solenoid.
5. Check that the filters (E) are in good condition, 6. Install new O-rings on the inhibitor solenoid, then
replace it if it is clogged or damaged. Install the Inhibitor solenoid on a new CVT driven
pulley pressure control valve.
6. Install a new CVT drive pulley pressure control
valve w i t h the dowel pins (F) and the separator 7. Install a new CVT driven pulley pressure control
plate (G), and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve with the dowel pins (G) and the separator
valve w i t h the dowel pins (H) and the separator plate (H) on the lower valve body (I).
plate (I) on the lower valve body (J).
8. Connect the CVT driven pulley pressure control
7. Connect the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve connector and the Inhibitor solenoid
valve connector. connector.
8. Install the solenoid harness clamp. 9. Install the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
9. Install the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
14-169
CVT
Inhibitor Solenoid Replacement CVT input Shaft (Drive Pulley)
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the lower valve body (see page 14-167).
2. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid connector (A). 1. Remove-the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370)
and the intake air duct.
2. Disconnect the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed

sensor connector, then remove the CVT input shaft
(drive pulley) speed sensor (A).
3. Remove the inhibitor solenoid (B), then remove the

O-rings (C) f r o m the inhibitor solenoid.
4. Install new O-rings on a new inhibitor solenoid,

then install the inhibitor solenoid on the CVT driven
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N-m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
5. Connect the inhibitor solenoid connector.
3. Install a new O-ring (B) on a new CVT input shaft
6. Install the lower valve body (see page 14-167). (drive pulley) speed sensor, then install the CVT
input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor in the
transmission housing.
4. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then

connect the connector securely.
5. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370)

14-170
CVT Output Shaft (Driven Pulley) CVT Speed Sensor Replacement
Speed Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the air cleaner assembly {see page 11-370)
and the intake air duct. 2. Disconnect the CVT speed sensor connector, then
remove the CVT speed sensor (A).
2. Disconnect the CVT output shaft (driven pulley)
speed sensor connector, then remove the CVT '06 M o d e l
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor (A).
/ 6 x 1.0 mm
/ 12 N m
y (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
3. Install a new O-ring (B) on a new CVT output shaft

(driven pulley) speed sensor, then install the CVT
output shaft (driven pulley) speed sensor in the


3. Install a new O-ring (B) on a new CVT speed sensor,

then install the CVT speed sensor in the


14-171
CVT
CVT Speed Sensor (Secondary) Start Clutch Pressure Control
Replacement Calibration Procedures
Do the start clutch pressure control calibration

m Model procedures whenever you do any of these actions:-
1 . Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370}
and the Intake air duct. • Replace PCM
• Reset PGM
2. Disconnect the CVT speed sensor (secondary) • Update PCM
connector, then remove the CVT speed sensor • Replace the transmission
(secondary) (A). • Overhaul the transmission
• Replace the engine assembly
6x1.0 mm • Overhaul the engine assembly.
12 N-m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
• Replace the lower valve body
• Replace the start clutch
Start Clutch Pressure Control Calibration

Procedure mode
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the

driver's side of the dashboard.
3. Install, a n e w O-ring (B) on a new CVT speed sensor

(secondary), then' Install the CVT speed sensor
(secondary) In the transmission housing. (DLCO)
connect the connector securely. 2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
5. Install the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370) 3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM,
and the Intake air duct. and go to the A/T Data List. If It does not, go to the
4. Follow the HDS screen prompts In the Start Clutch

Feedback Learn (see the HDS Operator's manual).
14-172
Calibration Procedure with S C S mode Calibration by Driving the Vehicle
1. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels 1. W a r m up the engine to normal operating
securely. temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
2. W a r m up the engine to normal operating 2. Make sure that the MIL does not come on and the D
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). indicator does not blink. If the MIL comes on or the
D indicator blinks, check the fuel and emissions
3. Make sure that the MIL does not come on and the D system or the CVT control system.
indicator does not blink. If the MIL comes on or the
D indicator blinks, check the fuel and emissions 3. Start the engine without load (headlights, audio
system or the CVT control system. system, blower fan, rear w i n d o w defogger, A/C, etc.),
and let it idle.
4. Check that the IMA charge gauge indicates no
5. Connect the HDS to the DLC, and follow the screen segments. If the IMA charge gauge indicates any
prompts to short-circuit the SCS signal terminal segments, hold the engine speed between
using the tester menu. 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in Park or
neutral) until the IMA battery level gauge (BAT)
6. Press the brake pedal, and continue pressing the indicates at least three segments.
pedal until the calibration is completed.
5. Drive the vehicle w i t h the shift lever in D until the
7. Start the engine without load condition, but turn vehicle speed reaches 37 mph (60 km/h), then
the headlights on. The headlights must be on release the accelerator and decelerate without
during calibration. pressing the brake pedal for at least 5 seconds to
reach completion.
8. Shift the shift lever to N, shift to D, S, then L, and
return to N. Repeat this shifting pattern three times 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes, and
within 20 seconds after the engine is started. make sure the engine does not stall or flare when
starting off.
9. Check that the D indicator comes on when the shift
lever is in N, then goes off in 1 minute.
10. If the D indicator blinks or does not come on, or if

the indicator comes on and stays on, turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0), and restart the
procedure w i t h step 5.
11. Shift to D, and check that the D indicator comes on,

then goes off.
12. If the D indicator blinks or does not come on, or if

the indicator comes on and stays o n , turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0), and restart the
procedure w i t h step 5.
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to complete the

procedure.
14. Test-drive the vehicle to verify that a problem does

not occur on the start clutch pressure control
system.
14-173
CVT
Start Clutch Check
NOTE: If the transmission acts abnormally w h e n the 7. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever to D, while
vehicle starts off, check the start clutch w i t h the HDS. pressing the brake pedal.
1 Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 8. Accelerate f r o m a stop at over 50 % throttle (with
driver's side of the dashboard. 2.2 V of the APP sensor voltage by monitoring the
HDS), then slow d o w n to a stop.
9. Repeat step 8 t w o times.
10. Select Data List in the A/T Mode Menu, and make
sure that the Start Clutch Status is Normal w i t h the
HDS.
11. To verify that the engine stalling and the judder

w h e n starting off does not occur, test-drive the
vehicle for several minutes.
A
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the PCM,

4. Select Data List in the A/T Mode M e n u , and monitor

the Start Clutch Status w i t h the HDS.
• If the HDS indicates Normal, the start clutch is OK,

then disconnect the HDS.
• If the HDS indicates Unchecked, go to step 7.
• If the HDS indicates J u d d e r l or Judder2, replace
. the CVT fluid (CVTF) (see page 14-175), then g o t o
step 5.
5. Select Start Clutch Status Data Clear in the

Miscellaneous Test Menu, and clear the start clutch
status with the HDS.
6. Select Data List in A/T Mode M e n u , and monitor the

Start Clutch Status Diagnosis condition w i t h the
HDS.
• If the HDS indicates Not ready, w a r m up the

engine to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on), then go to step 7.
• If the HDS indicates Ready, go to step 7.
14-174
CVT Fluid Level Check
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the CVT fluid level is below the l o w e r mark, check
for fluid leaks at the transmission, the ATF filter, the
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. ATF cooler hoses, the ATF cooler lines, and the ATF
cooler line joints. If a problem is f o u n d , fix it before
2. Start the engine, and w a r m it up t o normal filling the transmission w i t h CVTF.
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on),
and turn the engine off. Do not allow the engine to NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the CVT fluid
run more than t w o cycles of the cooling fan. level is below the lower mark, one or more of these
s y m p t o m s may occur:
NOTE: Check the CVT fluid level w i t h i n • Noise f r o m transmission in D, S, L, and R.
60—90 seconds after turning the engine off. Higher • Engine runs, but vehicle does not move in any
fluid level may be indicated if the radiator fan position.
comes on twice or more. • No shift to a higher ratio or lower ratio.
• Flares while driving.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A), and w i p e it • Excessive shock w h e n accelerating and
w i t h a clean cloth. decelerating.
• Vehicle does not creep on a flat road in D, S, and
L.
• Late shift after shifting f r o m N to D or N to R.
• Unstable rpm while driving.
• Stall speed high.
7. If the level is above the upper mark, drain the CVTF

to proper level (see step 4 on page 14-176).
4. Insert the dipstick back into the tube.
5. Remove the dipstick, and check the CVT fluid level.

It should be between the upper mark (A) and the
lower mark (B) on the HOT level (C).
(cont'd)
14-175
CVT
CVT Fluid Level Check (cont'd) CVT Fluid Replacement
8. If necessary, fill the transmission w i t h CVTF NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission.
through the dipstick tube opening (A) to bring the
fluid level between the upper mark and the lower 1. Start the engine, and w a r m it up to normal
mark of the dipstick. Do not fill the fluid above the operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
upper mark. Always use Honda CVT fluid (CVTF).
Using a non-Honda CVTF can affect shift quality. 2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the
engine off.
A
3. Remove the clips and the bolts securing the front of

the undercover (see page 20-150), then open the
front undercover (see page 20-150).
9. Insert the dipstick (A) back into the tube w i t h the

dot (B) on the handle facing to the left side of the
vehicle. 9.8 N - m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
A
4. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the CVT fluid
(CVTF). Reinstall the drain .plug w i t h a new sealing
washer (B).
18x1.5 mm
4 9 N-m (5.0 kgf m , 36 Ibf-ft)
14-176
5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid 9. If the maintenance minder required to replace the
through the dipstick tube opening (A) to bring it to CVTF, reset the maintenance minder (see page 3-6),
the upper mark on the dipstick. Always use Honda and this procedure is complete. If the maintenance
CVT fluid (CVTF). Using a non-Honda CVTF can minder did not require you to replace the CVTF, go
affect shift quality. t o step 10.
CVT Fluid Capacity: 10. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
2.8 L (3.0 US qt) at change driver's side of the dashboard.
5.1 L (5.4 US qt) at overhaul
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the

HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If it does not, go
to the DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
6. Check that the CVT fluid level is between the upper 11-213).
mark (A) and the lower mark (B) of the dipstick
(see page 14-175). 12. Select BODY ELECTRICAL w i t h the HDS.
7. Insert the dipstick back into the tube w i t h the dot on 13. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGE MENU w i t h
the handle facing to the left side of the vehicle (see the HDS.
14. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER w i t h
8. Install the front undercover (see page 20-150). the HDS.
15. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 RESET, and

reset the CVTF life with the HDS.
14-177
CVT
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 9. Remove the front undercover (A) (see page 20-150)
• Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120 and the splash shield (B) (see page 20-148).
• These special tools are available through the Honda
T o o l and Equipment Program 888-424-6857.
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted B
surfaces.
• A and Reds engine support hanger AAR-T1256 must
be used w i t h the side engine mount installed.

(see page 20-140).
2. Fix the hood in the vertical position.
3. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-139).
4. Do the battery removal procedure (see page 22-63). 10. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the CVT fluid
(CVTF).
and the Intake air duct.
6. Remove the reservoir, the reservoir bracket, the

under-hood fuse/relay box bracket, the PCM, and
the PCM bracket
7. Remove the battery base and the resonator.
8. Raise the vehicle on a lift, and make sure it is

securely supported.
1 8 x 1.5 m m
49 N - m ( 5 . 0 kgf-m, 3 6 I b f - f t )
11. Reinstall the drain plug and a new sealing washer

(B).
14-178
12. Remove the harness elamp (A) f r o m its bracket (B), 15. Disconnect the solenoid harness connector (A) and
and remove the bolt securing the IMA harness the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed sensor
cover bracket (C). connector (B).
16. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) f r o m the ATF

cooler lines (B). Turn the end of the ATF cooler
13. Remove the bolt securing the upper radiator hose hoses up to prevent CVTF f r o m flowing out, then
clamp (A) on the starter (B). plug the ATF cooler hoses and the ATF cooler lines.
14. Remove the harness clamp (C) f r o m its bracket (D),

disconnect the starter cables (E), and remove the
starter.
(cont'd)
14-179
CVT
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
17. Remove the air cleaner.housing mounting bracket 22. '07-09 models: Disconnect the transmission range
switch connector (A), and remove the harness
clamp (B) f r o m its bracket (C).
18. Remove the snap pin (B) and the control pin (C)
f r o m the selector control lever (D). 23. '07-09 models: Disconnect the CVT output shaft
(driven pulley) speed sensor connector (D), and the
19. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable bracket CVT speed sensor connector (E).
(E), then separate the shift cable (F) f r o m the
selector control lever. Do not bend the shift cable 24. Remove the harness clamps f r o m the clamp
excessively. bracket.
20. '06 model; Disconnect the transmission range

switch connector (A), and remove the harness
clamp <B) f r o m its bracket (C).
21. '06 model: Disconnect the CVT output shaft (driven

pulley) speed sensor connector (D), the CVT speed
sensor connector (E), and the CVT speed sensor
(secondary) connector (F).
14-180
25. Remove the drive plate bolts (six) at the opening of 28. Install the universal eyelet (07AAK-SNAA120) to the
the starter while rotating the engine crankshaft bolt hole (A) w i t h 8 x 1.25 m m bolt (B) and spacers
pulley. (C).
07AAK-SNAA120
26. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve

connector (A), and remove the bolts securing the
connector bracket (B).
the w i n g nut (C) f r o m an A and Reds engine
support hanger (AAR-T1256) onto the engine
to the slotted hole in the universal eyelet (07AAK-
SNAA120). Tighten the w i n g nut by hand to lift and
support the engine.

windshield.
VSB02C000025
27. Remove the bolts securing the harness cover (C),

and remove the harness cover f r o m its bracket (D).
(cont'd)
14-181
CVT
30. Remove the nuts and the bolt securing both lower 32, Remove the exhaust pipe mount rubber (A).
arm and ball joint, and separate the lower arms
f r o m the ball joints. A~
33. Remove the bolt (B) securing the steering gearbox

heat shield <C).
31. Remove both mid stiffeners.
34. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting
bolts.
14-182
35. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A), 37. Remove the lower torque rod bolts (A).
the stiffener mounting bolt (B), and the stiffener (C).
36. Remove the steering gearbox mounting bolt (A) r

38. Remove the bolt (B) securing the steering gearbox
the stiffener mounting bolt (B), and the stiffener (C). heat shield (C).
39. Remove the bolts securing the ATF filter bracket (A)
and the IMA harness cover (B).
(cont'd)
14-183
CVI
40. Make reference marks (A) on the front subframe (B) 43. Remove the four bolts securing the front subframe,
that line up w i t h the edge (C) of the body. and lower the front subframe.
A B B A
44. Secure the steering gearbox to the body w i t h a

41. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) rope.
to the front subframe by looping the strap (A) over
the front of the front subframe, then secure the 45. Remove the driveshafts f r o m the differential and
strap w i t h the stop (B), then tighten the w i n g nut (C). the intermediate shaft (see step 8 on page 16-5).
Coat all precision machined surfaces w i t h clean
engine oil, then put plastic bags over driveshaft
ends.
42. Raise the jack and line up the slots in the arms w i t h
the bolt holes on the corner of the jack base, then
tighten the bolts.
46. Remove the heat shield (A) and the intermediate 50. Remove the upper and front transmission housing
shaft (B). mounting bolts.
51. Place a jack under the transmission.
47. Coat all precision machined surfaces w i t h clean 52. Remove the lower torque rod bracket.
engine oil, then put plastic bags over both ends of
the intermediate shaft.
48. Remove the ground cable terminal (A).
49. Remove the bolts and the nuts, and remove the
transmission mount cover (B), the transmission
mount/bracket (C), and the transmission mount
foot (D).
(cont'd)
14-185
CVT
Transmission Removal (cont'd) Drive Plate Removal and
Installation
53. Remove the rear and lower transmission housing
mounting bolts.
1. Remove the transmission assembly (see page
14-178).
2. Inspect the drive plate (A) and the flywheel support

(B), and replace it if it is damaged.
• 10 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N - m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 Ibf-ft)
54. Lower the transmission by loosening the w i n g nut

of the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear the side
frame.
55. Slide the transmission away f r o m the motor to

remove it f r o m the vehicle.
3. Install the drive plate and the flywheel support on
56. Remove the flywheel assembly w i t h the rubber the motor rotor (C), and secure them w i t h the bolts,
sealing ring and the dowel pins. if removed.
NOTE:
° The motor rotor contains very strong magnets
and should be handled w i t h special care.
• Extra special care must be taken on the
installation of the drive plate, it may suddenly be
pulled toward the motor w i t h great force causing
serious hand or finger injury, or damaged
components.
• Keep pieces of metal and all foreign particles out
of the motor rotor during the transmission
removal.
4. Install the transmission assembly (see page 14-187).
14-186
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Install a new rubber sealing ring (A) on the input
• Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120 shaft (B).
• These special tools are available through the Honda
Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. Clean the ATF cooler (see page 14-196).
2. Remove the used grease in the flywheel hub cap

and the flywheel splines.
3. Fill the inside of the flywheel hub cap (A) with

about 1.0 to 2.0 g (0.04 to 0.07 oz.) and coat the
flywheel hub splines (B) of Super High Temp Urea
Grease (P/N 08798-9002). Do not overfill the C Replace.
flywheel hub cap w i t h grease.
5. Install the flywheel (C) on the input shaft, and
install the 14 m m dowel pins (D) in the flywheel
housing.
6. Place the transmission on a jack, and raise the

transmission to the engine level, then fit the
transmission to the motor housing/engine.
7. Install the rear and lower transmission housing

mounting bolts.
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 kgf m , 47 Ibf-ft)
( P / N 08798-9002)
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N-m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
14-187
CVT
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
8. Install the upper and front transmission housing 9. Install the transmission mount foot (A) and the
mounting bolts. transmission mount/bracket (B) on the body w i t h
12 x 1.25 m m bolts (C) loosely.
10 x 1.25 m m
12 x 1.25 m m 3 8 N - m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 Ibf-ft)
64 N-m 6 x 1.0 m m
(6.5 k g f - m , 12 N m
47 I b f f t ) (1.2 k g f - m ,
8.7 Ibf-ft)
12 x 1.25 m m
64 N-m
kgf-m,
Ibfft)
12 x 1.25 m m E
64 N-m (6.5 k g f - m , 47 Ibfft) 12
74 N-m
(7.5 k g f - m
54 Ibfft)
Replace.
10. Secure the transmission mount bracket on the

transmission w i t h the nuts (D) and new bolt (E), and
tighten the 12 x 1.25 m m bolts (C) to the specified
torque.
11. Install the transmission mount cover (F) and the

ground cable terminal (G).
14-188
12. Install the lower torque rod bracket w i t h new bolts. 15. Install a new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (B).
A
Replace.
1 2 M 1.25 mm
74 N-m
(7.5 kgf-m,
5 4 ibf-ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
7 4 N m (7.5 kgf-m, 5 4 Ibfft) 16. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts
Replace. the transmission (differential) w i t h solvent, and dry
w i t h compressed air. Then install the left driveshaft
13. Install a new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft in the differential, be sure not to allow dust or other
(B). foreign particles to enter the transmission. Turn the
steering knuckle fully outward, and slide the
8 x 1.25 mm
driveshaft into the differential until you feel its set
22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, IS Ibf-ft)
ring fully engage the side gear.
17. Install the right driveshaft over the intermediate

shaft. Turn the steering knuckle fully outward, and
slide the driveshaft over the intermediate shaft until
you feel the set ring of the intermediate shaft fully
engage the driveshaft.
10 x 1.25 mm
kgf-m, 2 9
3 9 N - m (4.0 ibf-ft)
14. Install the intermediate shaft and the heat shield (C).
(cont'd)
14-189
CVT
Transmission installation (cont'd)
18. Set the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016) t o 2 1 . Align the reference marks (A) on the front subframe
the front subframe by looping the strap (A) over the (B) with the edge (C) of the body, and tighten the
front of the front subframe, then secure the strap mounting bolts to the specified torque.
w i t h the stop (B), then tighten the w i n g nut (C).
VSB02C000016
19. Line up the slots in the arms w i t h the bolt holes on

the corner of the jack base, and tighten the bolts,
then lift the front subframe up to the body. 22. Secure the lower torque rod with the bolts.
6 x 1.0 m m
20. Loosely install new front subframe mounting bolts.
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
12 x 1.25 m m
14 x 1.5 m m 14 x 1.5 m m 6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 Ibf-ft)
103 N m 103 N m
(10.5 k g f - m , (10.5 k g f - m ,
7 5 . 9 Ibf-ft) 7 5 . 9 Ibf-ft)
Replace. Replace. 23. Secure the steering gearbox heat shield w i t h the
bolt.
24. Remove the engine support hanger.
14-190
25, Position the steering gearbox on the gearbox 28. Install the steering gearbox mounting bracket bolts.
mounting bracket of the front subframe.
10 x 1.25 m m
3 8 N m (3.9 k g f - m , 2 8 Ibf-ft)
26. Install the gearbox stiffener (A) and the stiffener
mounting bolts, and tighten the bolts loosely.
10x1.25 mm
59 N - m (6.0 k g f m , 4 3 Ibf-ft)
29. Tighten the steering gearbox mounting bolts and

the stiffener mounting bolts to the specified torque.
27. Install the gearbox stiffener (A) and the stiffener 30. Install both m i d stiffeners with new bolts.
mounting bolts, and tighten the bolts loosely.
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 m m
Replace.
5 9 N m (6.0 k g f - m , 4 3 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
14-191
CVT
3 1 . Install both of the lower arms (A) to the ball joints 35. Secure the ATF filter bracket (A) and the IMA
(B), and loosely Install new mounting nuts and harness cover (B) with the bolts.
bolts.
tC J\. I 1(1111
5 9 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 43 Ibf-ft) 36. Remove the universal eyelet and spacers.
Replace.
07 A A K - S I M A A 1 2 0
32. Loosely tighten the nuts and the bolts in the
f o l l o w i n g order; the nut on the front (C), the nut on
the rear (D), then the bolt (E) (see page 18-22).
33. Secure the steering gearbox heat shield w i t h the

bolt.
34. Install the exhaust pipe mount rubber (A).
14-192
37. Install the harness cover (A) on its bracket (B), and 40. '06 model: Connect the transmission range switch
secure it with the bolts. connector (A), and install the harness clamp (B) on
its bracket (C).
8 x 1.25 mm 6 x 1.0 m m
26 N-m 9.8 N m
41. '06 model: Connect the CVT output shaft (driven
(2.7 kgf m , 2 0 Ibf-ft) (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
pulley) speed sensor connector (D), the CVT speed
38. Secure the connector bracket (C) w i t h the bolts, and sensor connector (E), and the CVT speed sensor
connect the EVAP canister purge valve connector (secondary) connector (F).
(D).
42. '07-09 models: Connect the transmission range
39. Attach the flywheel to the drive plate w i t h six bolts. switch connector (A), and install the harness clamp
Rotate the crankshaft pulley to tighten the bolts to (B) on its bracket (C).
1/2 of the specified torque, then to the final torque,
in a crisscross pattern. After tightening the last bolt,
check that the crankshaft rotates freely.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
43. '07-09 models: Connect the CVT output shaft
(driven pulley) speed sensor connector (D) and the
CVT speed sensor connector (E).
(cont'd)
14-193
CVT

44. Install the harness clamps on the clamp bracket. 47. Secure the shift cable holder (A) on the
transmission w i t h the bolts.
2 6 N m (2.7 k g f - m , 2 0 Ibf-ft)
45. Apply m o l y b d e n u m grease to the hole in the shift
cable end collar (A). Attach the shift cable end to 48. Install the air cleaner housing mounting bracket (B).
the selector control lever (B). Insert the control pin
(C) through the selector control lever hole (D), 49. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
through the shift cable end hole, and into the lines (B), and secure the hoses w i t h the clips (C)
selector control lever slotted hole (E) in the (see page 14-199).
direction shown. Push the control pin until its
flange (F) contacts the selector control lever surface.
— r y E
46. Insert the snap pin (G) in the direction s h o w n

through the control pin hole and out the opening
(H) of the selector control lever so that the hooked
end (I) of the snap pin snaps into the countersunk
hole (J) of the control pin.
14-194
50. Connect the CVT Input shaft (drive pulley) speed 54. Secure the IMA harness cover bracket (A) w i t h the
sensor connector (A) and the solenoid harness bolt, and install the harness clamp (B) on its bracket
connector (B). (C).
5 1 . Install the starter (A).
55. Refill the transmission with CVTF (see step 5 on

page 14-177).
56. Install the battery base and the resonator.
57. Install the PCM bracket and the PCM, then connect
the PCM connectors.
58. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box bracket, the

B reservoir bracket, and the reservoir.

60. Install the front grille cover (see page 20-139).
6 1 . Install the under-cowl panel and the cowl cover

(see page 20-140).
62. Install the battery tray and the battery, then secure
52. Connect the starter cables (B), and install the the battery with its hold-down bracket.
harness clamp (C) on its bracket (D).
63. Do the battery installation procedure (see page
53. Secure the upper radiator hose clamp (E) on the 22-63).
starter w i t h the bolt.
65. Set the parking brake. Start the engine, and shift
the transmission through all positions three times.
(cont'd)
14-195
CVT
Transmission Installation (cont'd) ATF Cooler Cleaning

66. Check the shift lever operation, the A/T gear Special Tools Required
position indicator operation, and the shift cable • ATF cooler cleaner GHTTTCF6H
adjustment. • Magnetic nonbypass spin-on filter GTHGNBP2
These special tools are available through the Honda
67. Place a floor jack under the lower a r m , and raise Tool and Equipment Program 888-424-6857.
the front suspension to load it w i t h the vehicle's
weight. Do not place the jack against the ball joint Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured
pin of the knuckle. Tighten the bolts and nuts to continuously variable transmission, you must
59 N-m (6.0 kgf-m, 43 Ibf-ft) in the f o l l o w i n g order; thoroughly clean the ATF cooler to prevent system
the nut on the front, the nut on the rear, then the contamination. Failure to do so could cause a repeat
bolt. continuously variable transmission failure.
68. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment The cleaning procedure involves heated CVTF delivered
(see page 18-6). under high pressure (100 psi). Check the security of all
hoses and connections. Always wear safety glasses or a
69. Install the splash shield (A) (see page 20-148) and face shield, along w i t h gloves and protective clothing. If
the front undercover (B) (see page 20-150). you get CVTF in your eyes or on your skin, rinse w i t h
water immediately.
• Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result

in burns and other serious injuries.
• Always wear eye protection and protective
clothing, and follow this procedure.
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid

level should be 4.5 inches f r o m the top of the filler
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill.
Use only Honda CVTF; do not use any additives.
70. Start the engine w i t h the shift lever in P or N, and

w a r m it up to normal operating temperature (the
radiator fan comes on). Turn the engine off, and
check the CVT fluid level (see page 14-175).

72. Road-test the vehicle (see page 14-159).

segments, start the engine w i t h the shift lever in P
or N, and hold it between 3,500 and 4,000 rpm
w i t h o u t load until the BAT display at least three
segments.
14-196
2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded 4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach
electrical outlet. t h e m to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo
bolts for f l o w through the ATF cooler cleaner.
I NOTICE I
Make sure the outlet has no other appliances TO H O S E T 0 BANJO BOLT
(light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords)
plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler TO RADIATOR
cleaner into an extension cord or drop light;

you could damage the unit.
3^'/RED HOSE
BLUE HOSE
110V
ELECTRICAL COOLER CLEANER
OUTLET
AIR P U R G E SHOP
VALVE AIR LINE 5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the
line that normally goes to the external filter on the
Flip the HEAT toggle switch to O N ; the green transmission).
indicator above the toggle switch comes o n . Wait
1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating 6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line.
temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use
when the temperature gauge reads 140 °F to 7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to
150 T.) 125 psi) to the air purge valve.
NOTE; If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle NOTICE

switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too The quick-connect fitting has a one-way
low for the tank heater to w o r k (see step 1 of this check valve to keep CVTF f r o m entering your
procedure). shop's air system. Do not remove or replace
the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with
the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if
your coupler is not compatible.
(cont'd)
14-197
CVT
ATF Cooler Cleaning (cont'd)
8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to O N ; the green 14. Disconnect the red and blue hoses f r o m the ATF
indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the cooler lines.
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
open and close the air purge valve periodically to 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
cause agitation and improve the cleaning process.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the 16. Disconnect the shop air f r o m the air purge valve.
5-minute cleaning period, leave the air purge valve Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
open.
17. Disconnect and stow the fittings f r o m the ATF
NOTE; While the p u m p is running w i t h the air cooler inlet and outlet lines.
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
f r o m the filler/breather tube vents. 18. Unplug the cooler cleaner f r o m the 110 V outlet.
Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner

w o r k i n g properly:
• Replace the t w o magnetic nonbypass spin-on filters

OPEN
after every 20 hours of use, based on the hour-meter,
or w h e n you notice a restriction in the flow.
• Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
• Replace the CVTF in the tank when it looks dark or
dirty.
FILLER CAP
With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR

toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off.
Leave the air purge valve open for at least
15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual
CVTF, then close the valve.
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses f r o m the ATF

cooler. N o w connect the red hose to the cooler inlet
line. HEATER
11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
TANK
12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the
p u m p run for 5 minutes. While the p u m p is running, MAGNETIC NONBYPASS
SPIN-ON FILTER
open and close the air purge valve periodically.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
5-minute cleaning period, leave the air purge valve
open.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air

purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
f r o m the filler/breather tube vents.
13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR
toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve
open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and
hoses of residual CVTF, then close the valve.
14-198
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement
Exploded V i e w
NOTE: When Installing the hose clamps, make sure not to interfere to the surrounding parts.
1. Install the ATF cooler hoses over the ATF cooler lines w i t h the clips at appropriate points in reference to the
following list.
Point Distance from Hose End to Clip (G) Hose End Contact Point
A 2 - 4 m m (0.08—0.16 in.) White Paint Mark
B 2 — 4 m m (0.08—0.16 in.) ATF Filter Housing f r o m
5 - 7 m m ( 0 . 2 0 - 0 . 2 8 in.)
C 6 - 8 m m ( 0 . 2 4 - 0 . 3 1 in.) Bulge
D
E 2 - 4 m m ( 0 . 0 8 - 0 . 1 6 in.) Bulge
F
2. Refill the transmission with ATF to the proper level (see page 14-176).
14-199
CVT
ATF Filter Replacement Shift Lever Removal
1. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses f r o m the ATF filter 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
(A).
2. Move the shift lever to R.
3. Pry the socket holder lock (A) up and off, using a

screwdriver. If the socket holder lock is w o r n ,
damaged, or cracked, replace the socket holder
lock or shift cable.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove the bolt securing the ATF filter holder (B), 4. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
and remove the ATF filter.
3. Slide the ATF cooler hose (transmission side) (C) on

a new ATF filter until the hose end contacts the
white paint mark, and secure the hose w i t h the clip
at 2—4 m m (0.1—0.2 in.) f r o m the hose end
(see page 14-199).
4. Slide the ATF cooler hose (ATF cooler side) (D) on

the ATF filter until the hose end is 5—7 m m
(0.2—0.3 in.) away f r o m the filter housing (see page
14-199).
5. Secure the ATF filter on its bracket (E) w i t h the ATF

filter holder and the bolt.
14-200
Shift Lever Installation
5. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) 1. Install the shift lever assembly.
counterclockwise, push it against the socket holder
bracket (B), then slide the socket holder to remove
the shift cable (C) f r o m the bracket Do not remove
the shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (D).
8 x 1.25 mm
2 2 N-m
(2.2 kgf-m, 16 I b f f t )
2. Connect the shift lock solenoid connector (A) and

the park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator
panel light connector (B).
3. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust

the cable (see page 14-205).
7. Remove the shift lever assembly,
14-201
CVT
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE: Make sure not t o get any silicone grease on the terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially if you
have silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
A / T G E A R POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL
SHIFT LEVER KNOB
SCREWS
2.5 N-m
(0.25 kgf-m, 1.8 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
SHIFT L E V E R S H R O U D
SHIFT L O C K
RELEASE
H A R N E S S WIRE TIE
' G R E A S E !
SILICONE GREASE
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID PLUNGER
P A R K PIN S W I T C H /
A/T GEAR POSITION
INDICATOR PANEL PLUNGER SPRING
LIGHT C O N N E C T O R
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
SHIFT LEVER
ASSEMBLY/
BRACKET BASE
SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID CONNECTOR
14-202
Shift Cable Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking 6. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of counterclockwise, push it against the socket holder
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. bracket (B), t h e n slide the socket holder to remove
the shift cable (C) f r o m the bracket. Do not remove
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). the shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (D).
3. Move the shift lever to R. \ /
4. Pry the socket holder lock (A) up and off, using a

screwdriver.
5. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
26 N-m (2.7 kgf-m, 2 0 Ibf-ft)
8. Remove the snap pin (B) and the control pin (C)
f r o m the control lever (D).
9. Remove the bolts securing the shift cable holder (E),

then separate the shift cable (F) f r o m the control
lever. Do not bend the shift cable excessively.
(cont'd)
14-203
CVT
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
10. Remove the shift cable heat shield. 17. Make sure that the transmission is in the R position
at the selector control shaft.
11. Remove t h e bolts securing shift cable bracket A.
18. A p p l y m o l y b d e n u m grease to the hole in the shift
cable end collar (A). Attach the shift cable end to
the selector control lever (B). Insert the control pin
(C) through the selector control lever hole (D),
through the shift cable end hole, and into the
selector control lever slotted hole (E) in the
direction s h o w n . Push the control pin until its
flange (F) contacts the selector control lever surface.
H
12. Remove the nuts securing shift cable bracket B and
the g r o m m e t (C).
19. Insert the snap pin (G) in the direction shown

through the control pin hole and out the opening
(H) of the selector control lever so that the hooked
end (I) of the snap pin snaps into the countersunk
hole (J) of the control pin.
6 x 1 0 mm
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t ) 20. Secure the shift cable holder on the transmission
w i t h the bolts.
13. Remove the shift cable grommet, and pull out the
shift cable (D). 21. Install the air cleaner housing mounting bracket.
14. Insert a new shift cable through the g r o m m e t hole 22. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust
(E), and install the g r o m m e t in its hole. Do not bend the cable (see page 14-205).
the shift cable excessively.
15. Secure shift cable bracket B and the g r o m m e t w i t h

the nuts.
16. - Secure shift cable bracket A w i t h the bolts.
14-204
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). 4. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A)
counterclockwise, push it against the socket holder
2. Pry the socket holder lock (A) up and off, using a bracket (B), then slide the socket holder to remove
screwdriver. If the socket holder lock is w o r n , the shift cable (C) f r o m the bracket. Do not remove
damaged, or cracked, replace the socket holder the shift cable by pulling the shift cable guide (D).
lock or shift cable.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
5. While holding the socket holder (A), rotate the

socket holder retainer (B) fully counterclockwise,
and press in the socket holder lock (C) between the
holder and the retainer.
C A
(cont'd)
14-205
CVT
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
6. Align the socket holder (A) w i t h the slot (B) in the 8. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
socket holder bracket (C), then slide the holder into Pull the shift cable back one step f r o m the P
the bracket. position so that the shift position is in R. Do not
hold the shift cable guide (B) to adjust the shift
cable.
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that

7. Rotate the socket holder retainer (A) clockwise, and the R position indicator comes on.
push the socket holder lock <B). Rotate the holder
retainer counterclockwise until the retainer stops at
the stop (C) of the holder lock to secure the shift
cable.
14-206
11. Place the shift lever in R, then insert a 6.0 m m 13. Install the shift cable end (A) over the mounting
(0.24 in.) pin (A) into the positioning hole (B) on the stud (B) by aligning its square hole (C) w i t h the
shift lever bracket through the positioning hole (C) square fitting (D) at the bottom of the stud. Do not
on the shift lever, and into the positioning hole on install the shift cable by holding the shift cable
the bracket Use only a 6.0 m m pin that is free of guide (E).
burrs.
14. Check that the shift cable end (A) is properly

installed on the mounting stud (B).
12. Check that the shift lever is secured in R.
Properly Installed:
A B
Improperly Installed:
Shift cable e n d rides o n the b o t t o m of t h e

m o u n t i n g stud.
15. If improperly installed, align the square fitting with

the square hole by rotating the mounting stud.
(cont'd)
14-207
CVT
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
16. Install and tighten the nut.
17. Remove the 6.0 m m (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
to hold the shift lever.
18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift

lever to each position, and check that the A/T gear
position indicator follows the transmission range
switch.
19. Shift the shift lever to P, and check that the shift
lock works properly. Push the shift lock release, and
check that the shift lever releases.
20. Install the center console (see page 20-79).
14-208
A/T Gear Position indicator
A/T GEAR INDICATOR

POSITION
F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n Circuit
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , page 22-243
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive Circuit Check, page 22-224
DATA LINK A / T G E A R POSITION INDICATOR

C O N N E C T O R (DLC) PANEL LIGHT HARNESS
T e s t , p a g e 14-211
14-209
A/T Gear Position Indicator
Circuit Diagram

IGNITION SWITCH
2/j>AT \ 5
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
(DLC)
..
wv
4 | 5 | 6 7 |,|, 3 « | . | . | 7 8 | 9 1
• s s
10 12 1 3 ] l 4 | i s | l 6 17 18 19 10 11 12 17 18 19
1 20 21 23 24 25 20 21 22 23 2 4 25
26 27 28
»|/|.,|/ 33 34 35 26 27
/ 2 9 J 3 0 J 3 1 | 3 2 33
//
H/
36 37 38 39 | 40 \ / / 42 43 | 44 | 38 39 | 40 \y/ 42 43 | 44 j
U 1 .
14-210
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370) 5. Remove the transmission range switch, and check
and the intake air duct. the end of the selector control shaft (A).
2. Disconnect the transmission range switch Selector Control Shaft Specifications

connector. Width (B): 6.1 - 6 . 2 mm (0.240-0.244 in.)
End Gap (0): 1.8-2.0 mm (0.07-0.08 in.)
3. Check for continuity between terminals at the

switch connector. There should be continuity 6. If the measurement of the selector control shaft
between the terminals in the following table for end is w i t h i n the standard, replace the transmission
each switch position. range switch (see page 14-212). If the measurement
is out of the standard, repair the selector control
Transmission Range Switch Connector shaft end, and recheck the transmission range
switch continuity.
Position/Connector Terminal/Signal Connections
8
GND N FWD
O o
O+O
O
o - 040
-o
4. Transmission range switch test is completed if the
test results are OK. If there is no continuity between
any terminals, go to step 5.
14-211
A/T Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
1. Move the shift lever to N. 5. Make sure the selector control shaft is in the N
position. If necessary, move the shift lever f r o m P
2. Remove the air cleaner assembly (see page 11-370) toN.
N O T E : D o n o t use the selector control shaft to
3. Disconnect the transmission range switch adjust the shift position. If the selector control shaft
connector, and remove the control shaft cover (A). tips are squeezed together it will cause a faulty
signal or position due to play between the selector
control shaft and the transmission range switch.
Set a new transmission range switch (A) to the N

position, align the cutouts (B) on the rotary-frame
w i t h the neutral positioning cutouts (C) on the
4. Remove the transmission range switch (B). transmission range switch. Then put a 2.0 m m
(0.08 in.) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to
hold the transmission range switch in the N
position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 m m (0.08 in.) feeler

gauge blade or equivalent to hold the transmission
range switch in the N position.
14-212
7. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on 9. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the repair if necessary, then connect the transmission
N position w i t h the 2.0 m m (0.08 in.) blade (C). range switch connector securely.
10. Install the selector control shaft cover on the

transmission range switch.
8. Tighten the bolts (A) on the transmission range

switch while you continue to hold the N position. 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Move the shift
Do not move the transmission range switch w h e n lever through all positions, and check the
tightening the bolts. Remove the feeler gauge (B). transmission range switch synchronization w i t h the
A/T gear position indicator.
12. Check that the engine will start w i t h the shift lever
in P and N, and will not start in any other shift lever
position.
13. Check that the back-up lights come on w h e n the

shift lever is in R.
14. Raise the vehicle on a lift, or apply the parking

brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
15. A l l o w the front wheels to rotate freely, then start

the engine, and check the shift lever operation.

14-213
A/T Gear Position indicator
A/T Gear Position Indicator Panel Light Harness/Park Pin Switch
Replacement
NOTE: The A/T gear position indicator light and the park 4 Remove the A/T gear position indicator panel light
pin switch are not available separately. Replace the A / T socket (A) f r o m the indicator panel (B).
gear position indicator light and the park pin switch as a
set. ••
1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-200).
2. Loosen the A / T gear position.indicator panel

(see page 14-202).
3. Remove the park pin switch (A) w h i l e pressing the

park pin switch lock (B).
5. Remove the harness wire tie (C), and remove the

park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator panel
light harness connector (D) f r o m the shift lever
assembly/bracket base (E).
6. Install a new park pin switch (F) on the shift lever.

Install the A/T gear position indicator panel light
bulb in socket, and install it in the indicator panel.
7. Tie the harness together w i t h a new harness wire

tie, then install the harness wire tie on the shift
lever bracket base.
8. Route the harnesses along the harness guides, and

install the clip of the connector in the bracket base.
9. Install the A/T gear position indicator panel

(see page 14-202).
10. Install the shift lever assembly (see page 14-201).
14-214
£8k
A/T Interlock System
S T E E R I N G LOCK A S S E M B L Y
K E Y INTERLOCK S O L E N O I D
Key Interlock System Circuit
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 14-222
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC) PARK PIN SWITCH SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock S y s t e m Circuit Shift Lock S y s t e m Circuit
T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 14-222 T r o u b l e s h o o t i n g , p a g e 14-217
Test, page 14-226 T e s t , p a g e 14-223
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-214 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 14-224
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
T R A N S M I S S I O N R A N G E SWITCH
14-215
A/T Interlock System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION
KEY
SWITCH
V\AV 4
I 5
I 6 7
h i '
3
4 | 5 j 6
7 8 | 9 |
•
10
20 21
/ 12 13J14J15J16 17 18 19
23 24 2 5 •
10 1 1 12
20 2 1 22
13114-j 15 j 16
17 18 19
23 2 4 2 5
"
26 27 28
I
33 34 35 26 2
'/ 2 9 | 3 0 J 3 1 J 3 2 33 /
V
| 36 | 37 38 39 40 [ / 42 43
M 3 6 / 38 39 | 40 [ /
42 | 43 | 44 j
CC(44P)
14-216
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the 4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
6. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector.
8. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid

S H I F T LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
r~i
1 2
2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). Make sure the I G 1 (YEL)
HDS communicates w i t h the PCM. If it does not, go

to the'DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page
11-213).
3. Select the Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the Wire side of female terminals
Miscellaneous Test M e n u , and check that the shift
• lock solenoid operates w i t h the HDS.
Does the shift lock solenoid work properly?
YES—Goto step 16.
NO—Check for a blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the
N O — G o t o step 4. under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the shift lock solenoid
connector and the under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
(cont'd)
14-217
A/T Interlock S f stem
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Shift the shift lever to P, and press the brake pedal. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Do not press the accelerator.
10. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2 while pressing 1^. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
the brake pedal.
terminal A27 and shift lock solenoid connector
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
terminal No. 2.
SHIFT LOCK PCM CONNECTOR A ( 4 4 P )

SOLENOID
CONNECTOR
1G1 (YEL) S L S (PNK)
V 4 I 5 I 6 I7 8 | 9 |
SLS (PNK) 1 0 / ' 1 2 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 17 1 8 1 9
I I 20 21 / 23 24 25
26 2 7 2 8 al/bll/ 33 34 35
1 2 t |36|3 7 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | /42 43|44|
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s S L S (PNK)
W i r e side of Terminal side of

Is there battery voltage? female terminals female terminals
Y E S — U p d a t e the PCM if it does not have the latest
11. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
between shift lock solenoid connector terminals good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the
No. 1 and No. 2. The shift lever must be in P. s y m p t o m goes away with a known-good PCM,
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
connector terminal A27 and the shift lock solenoid
connector. •
I G 1 (YEL) S L S (PNK)
YES—Repair short to body ground in the w i r e

between PCM connector terminal A27 and the shift
lock solenoid. •
NO—Check the shift lock mechanism. If the

mechanism is OK, replace the shift lock solenoid
(see page 14-224). •
14-218
16. Press the brake pedal. 2 1 . Connect PCM connector A (44P).
Are the brake lights ON? 22. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
NO—Repair faulty brake light circuix. „:
24. Measure the voltage between transmission range
17. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). switch connector terminals No. 2 and No. 6.
18. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. TRANSMISSION RANGE

SWITCH CONNECTOR
G N D (BRN)
20. Measure the voltage between PCM connector
terminal A40 and body ground while pressing the 1 2 3 4
brake pedal and when the brake pedal is released. 5 6 7 8
ATPP (BLU/BLK)
w / 1 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8l9|
10
20 21
/ 12 13|14|15J16 17 18 19
23 24 25
26 27 28 33 34 35
361 37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / 42 4 3 | 4 4 | Is there about 5 V?

B K S W (LT G R N )
Is there battery voltage while pressing the brake

pedal, and about 0 V when the pedal is released?
YES — G o t o step 2 1 .

connector terminal A40 and the brake position
switch. H
(cont'd)
14-219
Shift Lock S f stem Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

25. Turn the Ignition switch t o LOCK (0). 29. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal B13 and transmission range switch
26. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS. connector terminal No. 6.
27. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). P C M C O N N E C T O R B (44P) TriAiMSiViiSSiGhi i w s i G E

SWITCH CONNECTOR
ATPP (BLU/BLK)
terminal B13 and body g r o u n d .
i i
|1|2 3 4|/|8|7
10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18
1 2 3 4
ATPP (BLU/BLK)
//
26
21 23
28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
25
5 6 7 8
|1|2 3
/
10 12 13|14J15|16 17 18
/
3 6 /
/ /|40|4l|42 43|44|
ATPP (BLU/BLK)
/ / 21 23
/ 25
/
26 28 29|30|31|32 33 34 35
/ | / | 4 0 | 4 1 42 43|44|
Terminal side of
female terminals
W i r e side of
female terminals
Is there continuity? connector terminal B13 and the transmission range
switch. •
transmission range switch. •
14-220
30. Check for continuity between transmission range 3 1 . Test the transmission range switch (see page
switch connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. 14-211).
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
G N D (BRN)
1 2 3 4 (see page 14-212). •
5 6 7 8
32. Check the accelerator pedal position sensor in the
Data List w i t h the HDS. Do not press the accelerator.
Is the accelerator pedal position sensor opening

Wire side of female terminals 11 % or above, or the sensor voltage 1.60 V or
above?
Is there continuity? YES—Check the APP sensor (see page 11-277). •
YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the good PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the
s y m p t o m goes away w i t h a known-good PCM, s y m p t o m goes away w i t h a known-good PCM,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). • replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). •
NO—Repair open in the wire between transmission

range switch connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground (G102), or repair poor body ground
(G102).B
14-221
Kef Interlock S f stem Circuit Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 8. Check for continuity between park pin switch/A/T
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the gear position indicator panel light connector
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before terminal No. 3 and body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACCESSORY (I). The A / T G E A R POSITION INDICATOR
shift lever must be in P. PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector.

1 2 3 4
3 . Check if the ignition switch can be turned to P-PIN (LT B L U )
LOCK (0).
Can the ignition switch be turned to LOCK (0)?
YES—Goto step 4. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
NO—Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock

assembly (see page 1 7 - 1 5 ) . • Is there continuity?
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator
5. Move the shift lever out of P. panel light connector terminal No. 3 and the
MICU.B
6 . Check for continuity between steering lock
assembly connector terminal No. 3 and body N O — G o t o step 9.
ground.
9. Shift the shift lever to P.
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR 10. Check for continuity between park pin switch/A/T
gear position indicator panel light connector
terminals No. 3 and No. 4. Do not push the shift
lever button.
1 2 3 4 5 6
K E Y S O L (BLU)
A / T G E A R POSITION INDICATOR
PANEL LIGHT C O N N E C T O R
G N D (BLK) P-PIN ( W H T / B L K )

between the key interlock solenoid and the T e r m i n a l side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
MICU.B
NO —Goto step 7.
YES—Replace the park pin switch (see page
7. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). 14-214).•
14-222
Shift Lock Solenoid Test
11. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector F 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A) located under the
(34P) (see page 22-60). driver's side of the dashboard.
13. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/

relay box connector F (34P) No. 27 terminal and
body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY iOX

C O N N E C T O R F (34P)
1 / 22 4
3 /18 9 / A/29
11 14|15 IB|IT u 18 19
20
/ / 24 26 28 27 28 30 31 |32 33
/
ATPP (GRN)
X) 2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s it does not, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-213).
Is there about 0 V when the shift lever is in P, and 4 Select shift Lock Solenoid Test in the
is there voltage when the shift lever shifts out of Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift
P? lock solenoid operates with the HDS.
YES—Substitute a known-good under-dash fuse/ 5. Make sure that the shift lever can be moved out of
relay box, and recheck. • P when the Shift Lock Solenoid is ON.'Move the
shift lever back to P, and make sure It locks w h e n
NO—Repair short to body ground in the wire the Shift Lock Solenoid Is OFF.
between PCM connector terminal B13, the
transmission range switch, and the under-dash 6. Make sure that the shift lock releases when the shift
fuse/relay b o x . B lock release is pushed, and check that it locks w h e n
the shift lock release Is released.
7. If shift lock solenoid does not w o r k properly, go to

the shift lock system troubleshooting (see page
14-217).
14-223
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the 4. Replace the shift lock solenoid (A), the solenoid
terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially plunger (B), and the plunger spring (C) assembly.
if you have silicone grease on your hands or gloves.
1. Remove the shift iever assembly (see page 14-200).
2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector.
3. Release the lock tab (A), then remove the shift lock
solenoid (B).
5. Apply silicone grease to the tip (D) of the shift lock

stop (E), and the solenoid plunger.
6. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of

the shift lock solenoid plunger w i t h the tip of the
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into
the shift lever securely.
7. Route the shift lock solenoid harness in the guide,

and install the clip (F) on the connector on the
bracket base.
14-224
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion Replacement
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the 6. Apply silicone grease to the pin (E) on the shift
terminal part of the connectors and switches, especially lever bracket base, and install the shift lock stop
if y o u have silicone grease on your hands or gloves. over the pin.
1. Remove the shift lever assembly (see page 14-200). 7. install the shift lock release spring and the shift lock
release, apply silicone grease t o the shift lock
2. Release the lock tab (A), then remove the shift lock release mounting tip if necessary.
solenoid (B).
8. Apply silicone grease to the tip of the shift lock stop,
and install the shift lock solenoid assembly by
aligning the joint of the shift lock solenoid plunger
w i t h the tip of the shift lock stop.
9. Route the shift lock solenoid harness in the guide.
3. Remove the shift lock release (A) and the release

spring (B).
4. Remove the shift lock stop (C) and the stop cushion
(D), and replace the shift lock stop or the stop
cushion.
5. Install the shift lock stop cushion on the shift lock

stop.
14-225
Park Pin Switch Test

2. Disconnect the park pin switch/A/T gear position

indicator panel light harness connector (A).
3. Shift the shift lever to P, and check for continuity

between park pin switch/A/T gear position indicator
panel light connector terminals No. 3 and No. 4.
There should be no continuity.
4. Shift out of P, and check for continuity between

There should be continuity.
5. If the park pin switch tests OK, install the center

console (see page 20-79).
If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park
pin switch (see page 14-214).
14-226
CVT
Transmission Disassembly
• Reverse brake spring compressor 07TAE-P4V0110
• Start clutch remover 07TAE-P4V0120
1. Remove the ATF pan (A) (18 bolts), the dowel pins (B) (2), and the ATF pan gasket (C).
(cont'd)
14-227
CVT
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)

2. Remove the ATF strainer (D) (two bolts). 7. Clean the inlet opening (A) of the ATF strainer (B)
thoroughly w i t h compressed air, then check that it
3. Remove the eight bolts securing the lower valve is in good condition and that the inlet opening is
body (E), lower the lower valve body, and hold it. not clogged.
4. Remove the bolt securing the solenoid harness B A
connector (F), and remove the lower valve body,

dowel pins (G) and the solenoid harness connector
f r o m the transmission housing.
5. Remove the ATF magnets (H) (I), clean and reinstall

t h e m in the ATF pan.
6. Remove the O-ring (J) f r o m the ATF strainer, and

remove the O-ring (K) f r o m the solenoid harness
connector. Install new ones w h e n reinstalling the
lower valve body.
8. Test the ATF strainer b y pouring clean ATF through

the Inlet opening, and replace It if it is clogged or
damaged.
9. Position the transmission w i t h Its end cover facing

down.
1
*; '08 m o d e l
11. Remove the differential assembly (C).
12. Remove the ATF passage pipe (D) and the lubrication pipe (E).
13. Remove the three bolts securing the ATF p u m p drive sprocket (F), then remove the ATF p u m p drive chain (G) and
the ATF p u m p drive sprocket.
14. Remove the snap ring (H) f r o m the input shaft (I), and remove the thrust shim (J), the ATF p u m p drive sprocket
hub (K), the thrust washer (L), the thrust needle bearing (M), and the thrust washer (N) f r o m the input shaft.
15. Remove the park pawl shaft ( 0 ) and remove the park pawl spring (P) and the park pawl (Q).
r
16. Remove the final drive shaft (R), then remove the secondary driven gear (S).
17. Remove the snap ring (T) securing the start clutch (U), and remove the cotter retainer (V) and the cotters (W).
(cont'd)
14-229
CVT
Set the start clutch remover on the start clutch (A), 20. Remove the secondary drive gear f r o m the start
and attach the pawl <B) of the start clutch remover clutch.
to the park gear (C) securely. Do not place the pawl
of the start clutch remover on the start clutch guide. 21. Remove the sealing ring (A) f r o m the secondary
If the pawl contacts the start clutch guide, the clutch drive gear (B), and clean it; it will be reinstalled on a
guide may be damaged. Be sure not to allow dust new secondary drive gear w h e n assembling the
and other foreign particles to enter the driven transmission.
pulley shaft.
n
/07TAE-P4V0120
22. Remove the line bolts, then remove the ATF cooler
19. Remove the start clutch (A) f r o m the driven pulley lines.
shaft.
23. Remove the ATF dipstick guide pipe.
07TAE-P4V0120 24. Remove the transmission range switch.
25. '06 model: Remove the CVT input shaft (drive

pulley) speed sensor, the CVT output shaft (driven
pulley) speed sensor, the CVT speed sensor, and
the CVT speed sensor (secondary).
26. '07-09 models: Remove the CVT input shaft (drive

pulley) speed sensor, the CVT output shaft (driven
pulley) speed sensor, and the CVT speed sensor.
27. Turn the transmission upside d o w n , and set it on a

workbench to prevent damaging to the input shaft
and the driven pulley shaft.
14-230
28. Remove the end cover (A) (16 bolts). 30. Remove the 10.9 x 18.6 m m ATF feed pipe (C) f r o m
the manual valve body (D).
'06 model
3 1 . Remove the manual valve body, the detent spring
(E), the dowel pins (F) (two), and the separator plate
(G).
32. Remove the 8 m m ATF pipe (H).
33. '06 model: Remove the 10.9 x 46 m m ATF feed pipe

(IK
34. '07-09 models: Remove the 10.9 x 56 m m ATF feed

pipes (J).
35. '06 model: Remove the O-rings (K) f r o m the

10.9 x 46 m m ATF feed pipes (L).
36. Remove the planetary carrier/input shaft assembly

(A), then remove the ring gear (B).
* : T h i s i l l u s t r a t i o n s h o w s '07-09 m o d e l s .
37. Remove the reverse brake snap ring (C), then

remove the reverse brake end-plate (D), the brake
29. Remove the ATF feed pipes (B). discs (E), the brake plates (F), and the disc spring
(G).
(cont'd)
14-231
CVT
38. Remove the snap ring (H) securing the forward 42. Remove the snap ring (A) while compressing the
clutch end-plate (I), then remove the forward clutch return spring.
end-plate, the clutch discs (J), and the clutch plates
(K).
39. Remove the snap ring (L) securing the forward

clutch (M) to the drive pulley shaft, then remove the
forward clutch and the snap ring retainer (N).
40. Install the reverse brake spring compressor to

remove the snap ring securing the reverse brake
. return spring retainer.
C
*: T h i s illustration s h o w s '07-09 m o d e l s .
43. Remove the reverse brake spring compressor, then

remove the spring retainer/return spring assembly
(B).
44. Apply air pressure to reverse brake pressure circuit

hole (C) to remove the reverse brake piston (D).
45. Remove the roller (A).
*: This illustration s h o w s '07-09 m o d e l s .
41. Compress the return spring using the reverse brake

spring compressor. Be sure the reverse brake
spring compressor is set over the reverse brake
return springs.
46. Remove the intermediate housing (B).
47. '06 model: Remove the 10.9 x 46 m m ATF feed

pipes (C).
14-232
Lower Valve Body
CVT Start Clutch Pressure Control CVT Drive Pulley Pressure Control
Valve Removal/Installation Valve Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the CVT start clutch pressure control 1. Remove the solenoid harness clamp (A).
valve connector (A).
6 x 1.0 m m
^ - 6 x 1.0 m m 1 2 N m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
2. Disconnect the CVT drive pulley pressure control

2. Remove the CVT start clutch pressure control valve valve connector (B).
(B).
3. Remove the seven bolts, and remove the CVT drive
3. Check that the filter (C) is in good condition, replace pulley pressure control valve (C). The CVT start
it if it is clogged or damaged. clutch pressure control valve (D) can also be
removed.
4. Install the CVT start clutch pressure control valve
w i t h the dowel pins (D) and the separator plate (E) 4. Check that the filters (E) are in good condition,
on the lower valve body (F). replace it if it is clogged or damaged.
5. Connect the CVT start clutch pressure control valve 5. Install the CVT drive pulley pressure control valve
connector. w i t h the dowel pins (F) and the separator plate (G),
and the CVT start clutch pressure control valve w i t h
the dowel pins (H) and the separator plate (I) on the
lower valve body (J).
6. Connect the CVT drive pulley pressure control

valve connector.
7. Install the solenoid harness clamp.
14-233
Lower Valve Body
CVT Driven Pulley Pressure Control Inhibitor Solenoid Removal/
Valve Removal/Installation Installation
1. Disconnect the CVT driven pulley pressure control 1. Disconnect the inhibitor solenoid connector (A).
valve connector (A) and the inhibitor solenoid
connector (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove the inhibitor solenoid (B), then remove the

O-rings f r o m the inhibitor solenoid.
3. Install the O-rings (C) on the inhibitor solenoid,

then install the inhibitor solenoid on the CVT driven
4. Connect the inhibitor solenoid connector.
2. Remove the CVT driven pulley pressure control

valve (C), and remove the inhibitor solenoid (D)
f r o m the CVT driven pulley pressure .control valve.
3. Check that the filter (E) is in good condition, and

replace it if it is clogged or damaged.
4. Remove the O-rings (F) f r o m the inhibitor solenoid.
5. Install the O-rings on the inhibitor solenoid, then

install the inhibitor solenoid on the CVT driven
6. Install the CVT driven pulley pressure control valve

w i t h the dowel pins (G) and the separator plate (H)
on the lower valve body (I).
7. Connect the CVT driven pulley pressure control

valve connector and the inhibitor solenoid
connector.
14-234
Flywheel Housing
Final Drive Shaft Bearing Input Shaft Oil Seal Replacement
Replacement
• Attachment, 37 x 42 m m 07746-0010200
Special Tools Required • Driver handle 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
• Adjustable bearing puller, 20—40 m m
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A 1. Remove the input shaft oil seal f r o m the flywheel
• Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 07746-0010500 housing.
• Driver handle 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Remove the final drive shaft bearing (A) using the

20—40 m m adjustable bearing puller and a
commercially available 3/8 "-16 UNF slide hammer
(B).
2. Install a new oil seal flush w i t h 3 ± 0 . 5 m m

(0.12±0.02 in.) (A) below flywheel housing level.
Using the driver handle and the 37 x 42 m m
attachment.
2. Install a new bearing into the flywheel housing

using the driver handle and the 62 x 68 m m
attachment.
14-235
End Cover
ATF Feed Pipe Replacement
1. Remove the feed pipe flange plates (A), then 4. Install the feed pipe (A) through the feed pipe
remove the feed pipes (B) and the feed pipe flanges flange (B) by aligning the feed pipe tab (C) w i t h the
(C) f r o m the end cover (D). guide (D) on the flange.
NOTE: Replace the end cover if replacement of the

unremovable ATF feed pipes (E) is required.
6 x1.0 mm
1 2 N - m ( 1 . 2 kgf m, 8.7 I b f - f t )
F
5. Install the ATF feed pipe over the unremovable

feed pipe (E), and align the mark (F) on the feed
pipe flange between the tabs (G) on the end cover.
2. Install new O-rings (F) over the ATF feed pipes. 6. Install the feed pipe flange plate.
3. Install new O-rings (G) on the feed pipe flanges.
14-236
Intermediate Housing
Manual Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the spring seat (A), the valve spring (B), 6. Install the reverse inhibitor valve (A) and the valve
and the reverse inhibitor valve (C) f r o m the manual spring (B) in the manual valve body (C). Push the
valve body (D). valve spring in using a screwdriver (D), then install
the spring seat (E).
Reverse Inhibitor Valve Spring Specifications

(Standards)
Wire diameter: 0.9 mm (0.035 in.)
Outside diameter: 7.0 mm (0.276 in.)
Free length: 47.1 mm (1.854 in.)
Number of coils: 16.9
2. Remove the manual valve (E).
3. Check all parts for wear and damage.
4. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent, and dry with

compressed air. Blow out all passages.
5. Coat all parts w i t h CVTF during assembly.
14-237
Transmission Housing
ATF Pump Replacement
1. Remove the bolts securing the ATF pump drive 5. Install the 22 x 10 m m ATF pipe (A) and the
sprocket then remove the ATF pump drive chain 18 x 10 m m ATF pipe (B) in the transmission
and the ATF p u m p drive sprocket. housing, then install new O-rings (C) over the ATF
pipes.
2. Expand the snap ring (A) under the ATF driven
sprocket (B), and remove the ATF pump driven
sprocket f r o m the ATF pump.
3. Remove the snap ring f r o m the ATF pump.
4. Remove the ATF p u m p f r o m the transmission

housing.
6. Install a new ATF p u m p body (D) w i t h dowel pins
(E). Do not pinch the O-rings.
7. Install the snap ring (F) in the snap ring groove.
8. Install the ATF p u m p driven sprocket.
9. Install the ATF pump chain and the ATF pump drive
sprocket.
14-238
Driven Pulley Shaft Bearing Final Drive Shaft learing Removal
Removal and Installation and Installation •

• Oil seal driver attachment, 64 x 72 m m ° Adjustable bearing puller, 20—40 m m
07JAD-PN00100 07736-A01000B or07736-A01000A
0
• Driver handle 15 x 135L 07749-0010000 Attachment, 72 x 75 m m 07746-0010600
• Driver handle 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
1. Expand the snap ring using snap ring pliers, then
push the driven pulley shaft bearing out using the 1. Remove the final drive shaft bearing (A) using the
driver handle and the 64 x 72 m m oil seal driver 20—40 m m adjustable bearing puller and a
attachment. Do not remove the snap ring unless it commercially available 3/8 "-16 UNF slide hammer
is necessary to clean the groove in the (B).
07749-0010000
0 7 7 3 6 - A 0 1 0 0 0 B or
07736-A01000A
07JAD-PN00100
2. Expand the snap ring using snap ring pliers, and

install the bearing part-way into the transmission 2. Install a new bearing into the transmission housing
housing. using the driver handle and the attachment,
72 x 75 m m .
3. Release the pliers, then push the bearing d o w n into
the transmission housing until the snap ring snaps
in place around it.
07749-0010000
4. After installing the bearing, check that the snap ring

is seated in the bearing and the housing groove,
and that the ring end gap (A) is 0—9 m m (0—0.35 in.).
07746-0010600
14-239
Transmission Housing
Selector Control Shaft Removal and Installation
1. Remove the bolt (A) and the lock washer (B), then
remove the selector control lever (C) f r o m the
selector control shaft (D).
Replace. A
6 x 1.0 m m
14 N m (1.4 k g f - m , 10 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove the selector control shaft f r o m the

3. Check for fluid leaks between the transmission

housing and the oil seal (E). If there is a fluid leak,
replace the oil seal w i t h a new one.
4. Install the selector control shaft in the transmission

housing, and install the selector control lever on
the selector control shaft.
5. Install the lock bolt w i t h a new lock washer.
14-240
Input Shaft
Planetary Carrier Clearance Inspection
1. Measure the clearance between the 25 x 31 m m 3. Select and install a new thrust s h i m , and secure
thrust shim (A) and the snap ring (B) using a feeler t h e m w i t h the snap ring, then recheck.
gauge (C), in at least three places. Use the average
as the actual clearance. THRUST SHIM, 25 x 31 m m
No. Part Number Thickness
Standard: 0.050-0.115 m m (0.0020—0.0045 in.) A 90451-P4V-000 1.05 m m (0.041 in.)
B 90452-P4V-000 1.12 m m (0.044 in.)
A C 90453-P4V-000 1.19 m m (0.047 in.)
D 90454-P4V-000 1.26 m m (0.050 in.)
E 90455-P4V-000 1.33 m m (0.052 in.)
F 90456-P4V-000 1.40 m m (0.055 in.)
G 90457-P4V-000 1.47 m m (0.058 in.)
H 90458-P4V-000 1.54 m m (0.061 in.)
I 90459-P4V-000 1.61 m m (0.063 in.)
J 90460-P4V-000 1.68 m m (0.066 in.)
K 90461-P4V-000 1.75 m m (0.069 in.)
L 90462-P4V-000 1.82 m m (0.072 in.)
M 90480-P4V-000 1.085 m m (0.0427 in.)
C
N 90481-P4V-000 1.155 m m (0.0455 in.)
O 90482-P4V-000 1.225 m m (0.0482 in.)
P 90483-P4V-000 1.295 m m (0.0510 in.)
Q 90484-P4V-000 1.365 m m (0.0537 in.)
R 90485-P4V-000 1.435 m m (0.0565 in.)
2. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the S 90486-P4V-000 1.505 m m (0.0593 in.)
25 x 31 m m thrust shim (A) and measure its T 90487-P4V-000 1.575 m m (0.0620 in.)
thickness. U 90488-P4V-000 1.645 m m (0.0648 in.)
V 90489-P4V-000 1.715 m m (0.0675 in.)
w 90490-P4V-000 1.785 m m (0.0703 in.)
4. After replacing the 25 x 31 m m thrust shim, make

sure that the clearance is w i t h i n the standard.
5. Check that the snap ring outside diameter is

30.7 m m (1.21 in.) or less.
14-241
Forward Clutch
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install the clutch spring compressor on the clutch
Clutch spring compressor set 07LAE-PX40000 assembly.
1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the clutch

end-plate, the clutch discs, and the plates using a
screwdriver (B).
2. Remove the wave spring. 07LAE-PX40000
4. Be sure the clutch spring compressor (A) is

adjusted to have full contact w i t h the spring
retainer (B) on the clutch.
14-242
5. Check the placement of the clutch spring 7. Remove the snap ring (A). Then remove the clutch
compressor. If either end of the clutch spring spring compressor (B), the spring retainer (C), and
compressor is set over an area of the spring the return spring.
retainer which is unsupported by the return spring,
the retainer may be damaged.
8. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum (A), and

apply air pressure to the fluid passage to remove
6. Compress the spring until the snap ring can be the piston (B). Place a f i n g e r t i p on the other end
removed. while applying air pressure.
14-243
Forward Clutch
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Check the spring retainer (C) for wear and damage.
- Clutch spring-compressor set 07LAE-PX40000
• Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 3. Inspect the clutch discs (D), the clutch plates (E),
and the clutch end-plate (F) for wear, damage, and
1. Inspect the clutch piston (A) and the clutch piston discoloration.
check valve (B). If the clutch check valve is loose or
damaged, replace the clutch piston. • If the clutch discs are w o r n or damaged, replace
the discs as a set.
• If the clutch plates are w o r n , damaged, or
discolored, replace the plates as a set.
• If the clutch end-plate is w o r n , damaged, or
discolored, inspect the clearance between the
end-plate and the top disc, then replace the
clutch end-plate.
4. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in CVTF for a

m i n i m u m of 30 minutes.
5. Install new O-rings (A) on the clutch piston (B).
14-244
Install the piston (A) in the clutch d r u m (B). Apply tf. Install the clutch spring compressor.
pressure and rotate to ensure proper seating.
Lubricate the piston O-ring w i t h CVTF before
installing. Do not pinch the O-ring by installing the
piston w i t h excessive force.
Install the return spring (A) and the spring retainer 07LAE-PX40000
(B), and position the snap ring (C) on the retainer.
9. Be sure the clutch spring compressor (A) is

adjusted to have full contact w i t h the spring
retainer (B) on the clutch.
(cont'd)
14-245
Forward Clutch
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Check the placement of the clutch spring 12. Install the snap ring (A).
compressor. If either end of the clutch spring
compressor is set over an area of the spring
retainer w h i c h is unsupported by the return spring,
the spring retainer may be damaged.
13. Remove the clutch spring compressor.
14. Install the wave spring.
11. Compress the return spring.
14-246
15. Starting w i t h a clutch plate, alternately install the 17. Check that the snap ring end gap (A) is 7.9 m m
clutch plates and the discs. Install the clutch end- (0,311 in.) or more..
plate (A) w i t h the flat side toward the disc (B).
16. Install the snap ring (A) using a screwdriver (B).
18. Check that the clutch piston engages by applying

air pressure to the fluid passage, and also check
that the piston releases w h e n air pressure is
released.
19. Set a dial indicator (A) on the clutch end-plate (B).
20. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch end-plate

lifted up to the snap ring (C).
(cont'd)
14-247
Forward Clutch
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)

21. Release the clutch end-plate to lower the clutch 23. If the clearance is out of service limit, select a new
end-plate, then put the clutch compressor clutch end-plate from the following table.
attachment on the end-plate (A).
FORWARD CLUTCH END-PLATE

Mark Part Number Thickness (t)
4 22554-PC9-000 2.7 m m (0.106 in.)
5 22555-PC9-000 2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
22. Press the clutch compressor attachment d o w n w i t h 6 22556-PC9-000 2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
49 N (5 kgf, 11 Ibf) using a force gauge, and read 7 22557-PC9-000 3.0 m m (0.118 in.)
the dial indicator (B). The dial indicator reads the 8 22558-PC9-000 3.1 m m (0.122 in.)
clearance (C) between the clutch end-plate and the 9 22559-PC9-000 3.2 m m (0.126 in.)
top disc (D). Take measurements in at least three 10 22560-PC9-000 3.3 m m (0.130 in.)
places, and use the average as the actual clearance. 14 22574-P4V-003 3.4 m m (0.134 in.)
15 22561-P4V-003 3.5 m m (0.138 in.)
Clearance between Clutch End-plate and 16 22562-P4V-003 3.6 m m (0.142 in.)
Top Disc 17 22563-P4V-003 3.7 m m (0.146 in.)
Service Limit; 0.6—0.8 mm (0.024—0.031 in.) 18 22564-P4V-003 3.8 m m (0.150 in.)
19 22565-P4V-003 3.9 m m (0.154 in.)
20 22566-P4V-003 4.0 m m (0.157 in.)
21 22567-P4V-003 4.1 m m (0.161 in.)
22 22568-P4V-003 4.2 m m (0.165 in.)
23 22569-P4V-003 4.3 m m (0.169 in.)
24 22570-P4V-003 4.4 m m (0.173 in.)
25 22571-P4V-003 4.5 m m (0.177 in.)
24. Install a new clutch end-plate, then recheck the

clearance. If the thickest clutch end-plate is
installed, but the clearance is still over the service
limit, replace the clutch discs and the plates.
14-248
Final Drive Shaft
Thrust Clearance Inspection
NOTE; If the transmission housing, the flywheel

housing, the final drive shaft, the secondary driven gear,
or the final drive shaft bearing Is replaced, the final
drive shaft thrust clearance must be adjusted w i t h a
25 x 35 m m thrust shim.
1. Install the secondary driven gear (A) on the final

drive shaft (B), then install the final drive shaft in
the transmission housing. Install the existing
25 x 35 m m thrust washer (C).
Final Drive Shaft Bearing Cutaway View
Final Drive Shaft Cutaway View
B-
2. Measure the distance (D) between the transmission

housing surface and the thrust shim surface on the
final drive shaft, then note the measurement
(measurement D).
3. Measure the distance (E) between the flywheel

housing surface and the bearing inner race surface,
then note the measurement (measurement E).
4. Calculate the final drive shaft thrust clearance

using the formula:
Clearance
= Measurement D—Measurement E + F l y w h e e l
housing gasket thickness (0.5 mm)
Standard: 0—0.15 mm (0—0.006 in.)
NOTE: The standard of the clearance includes

thickness of the flywheel housing gasket (0.5 m m ,
0.02 in.).
(cont'd)
14-249
Final Drive Shaft
Thrust Clearance Inspection (cont'd!

5. If the clearance Is out of standard, select a
25 x 35 m m thrust shim f r o m the f o l l o w i n g table.
THRUST SHIM, 25 x 35 m m
NO. rati nitimber Tiiitkiit&S
A 90551-P4V-000 2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
B 90552-P4V-000 2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
C 90553-P4V-000 3.0 m m (0.118 in.)
D 90554-P4V-000 3.1 m m (0.122 in.)
E 90555-P4V-000 3.2 m m (0.126 in.)
F 90556-P4V-000 3.3 m m (0.130 in.)
G 90557-P4V-000 3.4 m m (0.134 in.)
H 90558-P4V-000 3.5 m m (0.138 in.)
1 90559-P4V-000 3.6 m m (0.142 in.)
J 90560-P4V-000 3.7 m m (0.146 in.)
K 90561-P4V-000 3.8 m m (0.150 in.)
L 90562-PWR-000 3.9 m m (0.154 in.)
M 90563-PWR-000 4.0 m m (0.157 in.)
14-250
CVT <3®
Transmission Reassembly
Special Tools Required 6. Install new O-rings (A) on the reverse brake piston
• Reverse brake spring compressor 07TAE-P4V0110 (B), then install the piston in the intermediate
- Start clutch installer 07TAE-P4V013Q housing (C).
1. Soak the reverse brake discs thoroughly in CVTF

for a m i n i m u m of 30 minutes.
2. '06 model: Install new O-rings (A) on the filter side

of the ATF feed pipes (10.9 x 46 m m ) (B), then
install them w i t h O-ring side into the housing.
7. Install the spring retainer/return spring assembly

(D) ; install the return springs on the spring guides
(E) on the reverse brake piston.
3. Install the dowel pins (C) (two) and a new gasket (D)
on the transmission housing (E).
4. Push the selector control shaft (F) t o w a r d the

outside of the transmission housing, then install
the intermediate housing (G).
5. Pull the selector control shaft back, then install the

roller (H) in the intermediate housing by aligning
the groove on the selector control shaft.
(cont'd)
14-251
CVT
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Install the reverse brake spring compressor 11. Check that the snap ring end gap (A) is 15 m m
through the drive pulley shaft to compress the (0.59 In.) or more.
return spring. Be sure the reverse brake spring
compressor is set over the return springs, not over _ I _ A
the reverse brake piston.
12. Install the disc spring (A) on the reverse brake

piston In the direction shown.
*; This illustration s h o w s '07-09 m o d e l s .
9. Compress the return springs and make sure that

the reverse brake spring compressor is set over the
return springs and the spring retainer tabs do not
ride on the reverse brake piston.
13. Starting w i t h the reverse brake plates (B),

alternately Install the plates and discs (C). Install
the reverse brake end-plate (D), then Install the
snap ring (E).
10. Install the snap ring in the Intermediate housing

above the spring retainer, and remove the reverse
brake spring compressor.
14-252
14. Check that the snap ring inside diameter (A) Is 18. Press the steel plate (A) d o w n w i t h 49 N (5 kgf,
143.5 m m (5.65 in.) or more, and also the snap ring 11 Ibf) using a force gauge, and read the dial
end gap (B) is 8.7 m m (0.34 in.) or more. indicator (B). The dial indicator reads the clearance
(C) between the reverse brake end-plate (D) and the
top disc (E). Take measurements in at least three
places, and use the average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.55—0.70 m m (0.022—0.028 in.)
15. Set up a dial indicator (A) on the reverse brake end-

plate (B).
19. If the clearance is out of standard, select a new

reverse brake end-plate f r o m the following table.
REVERSE BRAKE END-PLATE

1 22551-P4V-003 3.6 m m (0.142 in.)
A 22551-PWR-003 3.7 m m (0.146 in.)
2 22552-P4V-003 3.8 m m (0.150 in.)
B 22552-PWR-003 3.9 m m (0.154 in.)
3 22553-P4V-003 4.0 m m (0.157 in.)
C 22553-PWR-003 £ 1 m m (0.161 in.)
*: T h i s illustration s h o w s '07-09 m o d e l s .
4 22554-P4V-003 4.2 m m (0.165 in.)
D 22554-PWR-003 4.3 m m (0.169 in.)
16. Zero the dial indicator by lifting the top disc (C) up 5 22555-P4V-003 4.4 m m (0.173 in.)
against the reverse brake end-plate and the end- E 22555-PWR-003 4.5 m m (0.177 in.)
plate up against the snap ring (D). 6 22556-P4V-003 4.6 m m (0.181 in.)
F 22556-PWR-003 4.7 m m (0.185 in.)
17. Release the end-plate to lower the end-plate, and 7 22557-P4V-003 4.8 m m (0.189 in.)
place a steel plate across w i d t h of the reverse brake 8 22558-P4V-003 5.0 m m (0.197 in.)
end-plate.
20. If replacing the reverse brake end-plate, make sure
that the clearance is within the tolerance.
(cont'd)
14-253
CVT
21. Install the snap ring retainer (A) over the drive 25. Install the ring gear (A) on the forward clutch (B).
pulley shaft (B).
*: This illustration s h o w s '07-09 models.
26. Install the input shaft/planetary carrier assembly

(C) through the drive pulley shaft (D) by aligning
22. W r a p the drive pulley shaft splines w i t h tape to the sun gear (E) w i t h the forward clutch discs and
prevent O-ring damage. Install new O-rings (C) in aligning the planetary carrier w i t h the reverse
the drive pulley shaft O-ring grooves, then remove brake discs.
the tape.
27. Install the manual valve body separator plate (A)
23. Install the forward clutch (D) on the drive pulley and the dowel pins (B) (two) on the intermediate
shaft, then install the snap ring (E) to secure the housing, then install the manual valve body (C) and
forward clutch. the detent spring (D).
24. Check that the snap ring outside diameter (A) is

41.4 m m (1.63 in.) or less.
14-254
28. Install new O-rings (A) on the 10.9 x 18.6 m m ATF '07-09 models
feed pipe (B), then install it on the manual valve
body (C). 8 x 1.25 m m
3 7 N-m (3.8 k g f - m , 27 Ibf-ft)
'06 model
8 x 1.25 m m
37 N m (3.8 k g f - m , 27 Ibf-ft)
29. '06 model: Install new O-rings (D) on the

10.9 x 46 m m ATF feed pipe (E), then install it w i t h
the filter end.
30. '07-09 models: Install new O-rings (F) on the

10.9 x 56 m m ATF feed pipes (G), then install it w i t h
the filter end.
3 1 . Install the 8 m m ATF pipe (H) in the intermediate

housing.
32. Install the t w o dowel pins (I) and a new gasket (J)
on the intermediate housing.
33. '06 model: Install new O-rings (K) on the top of the
10.9 x 46 m m ATF feed pipes (L).
34. Install new O-rings (M) on the ATF feed pipes (N),
then install them on the manual valve body and the
intermediate housing.
35. Install the end cover (O) (16 bolts).
(cont'd)
14-255
CVT
36. Turn the transmission end cover d o w n . 41. Pull the handle (A) of the start clutch installer up,
then install the tip of it into the driven pulley shaft
37. Install the sealing ring (A) on a new secondary feed pipe hole, and set the start clutch installer on
drive/park gear (B). the start clutch. Do not allow dirt or other particles
to enter into the transmission.
38. Install the park pawl (A), the pawl spring (B), and
the pawl shaft (C) on the transmission housing, 42. Push the handle (A) of the start clutch installer, then
then move the control lever to any position other tighten the nut to seat the secondary drive/park
than P. gear on the drive pulley shaft.
43. Pull the handle of the start clutch installer up, and
39. Wrap the driven pulley shaft splines to prevent remove the start clutch installer.
O-ring damage, install new O-rings (D) in the shaft
O-ring grooves, and remove the tape.
40. Install the secondary drive/park gear (E) in the start

clutch (F), then install t h e m on the driven pulley
shaft (G).
14-256
44. Install the 25.5 m m cotters (A) to the cotter groove 49. Install the thrust washer (A), the thrust needle
on the driven pulley shaft, then measure the bearing (B), the thrust washer (C), the ATF p u m p
clearance between the cotters and the start clutch drive sprocket hub (D), and the 22 x 28 m m thrust
guide (B) using a feeler gauge (C). Take shim (E) on the input shaft (F), and install the snap
measurements in at least three places, and use the ring (G) to secure t h e m .
average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0—0.13 m m (0—0.005 in.)
45. If the clearance Is out of standard, remove the

cotters, and measure its thickness.
46. Select and install new 25.5 m m cotters as a set,

then recheck that the clearance is within the
standard.
COTTERS, 25.5 m m
A 90429-P4V-000 2.9 m m (0.114 in.) 50. Check that the snap ring outside diameter (A) is
B 90430-P4V-000 3.0 m m (0.118 in.) 26.3 m m (1.04 in.) or less.
C 90431-P4V-000 3.1 m m (0.122 in.)
D 90432-P4V-000 3.2 m m (0.126 in.)
47. Install the cotter retainer and the snap ring.
48. Check that the snap ring outside diameter (A) is

33.9 m m (1.33 in.) or less.
(cont'd)
14-257
CVT
5 1 . Measure the clearance between the 22 x 28 m m 55. Place the secondary driven gear (A) on the
thrust s h i m (A) and the snap ring (B) using a feeler transmission housing by aligning it with the
gauge (C). Take measurements in at least three secondary drive gear, then install the final drive
places, and use the average as the actual clearance. shaft (B) through the secondary driven gear into the
Standard; 0.37—0.65 mm (0.015—0.026 in.)
6 x 1.0 m m
12 IM-m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t ) c
52. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the

22 x 28 m m thrust s h i m , and measure its thickness. 56. Install the 25 x 35 m m thrust shim (C) on the final
drive shaft.
53. Select and install a new 22 x 28 thrust shim, then
recheck that the clearance is w i t h i n the standard. 57. Position the ATF pump drive sprocket (D) on the
sprocket hub (E), and put the ATF pump drive chain
THRUST S H I M , 22 x 28 mm (F) on the ATF pump drive sprocket and the ATF
No. Part Number Thickness p u m p driven sprocket (G), then secure the ATF
C 90573-P4V-000 1.15 m m (0.045 in.) p u m p drive sprocket w i t h the three bolts.
D 90574-P4V-000 1.40 m m (0.055 in.)
E 90575-P4V-000 1.65 m m (0.065 in.) 58. Install the lubrication pipe (H).
F 90576-P4V-000 1.90 m m (0.075 in.)
G 90577-P4V-000 2.15 m m (0.085 in.)
H 90578-P4V-000 2.40 m m (0.094 in.)
54. If the 22 x 28 m m thrust shim is replaced, install the

snap ring, and check that the snap ring outside
diameter is w i t h i n the tolerance.
14-258
59. Install the differential assembly (A). 63. Install a new O-ring (A) on the shift solenoid
harness connector (B).
8 M 1.25 mm
8.7 I b f f t ) 6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N m (1.2 kgf-m, 8.7 Ibfft)
64. Install the ATF pipes (C) on the lower valve body (D),
then install the shift solenoid harness connector
and the lower valve body in the transmission
housing.
65. Install a new O-ring (E) on the ATF strainer (F), then
60. Install new O-rings (B) on both ends of the ATF install the ATF strainer on the lower valve body.
passage pipe (C), then install the pipe in the pipe
joint (D) of the transmission housing, and put the 66. Install the ATF pan (A) w i t h the t w o dowel pins (B)
other end on the pipe guide (E). and a new gasket (C).
6 1 . Install the dowel pins (F) (three) and a new gasket

(G) on the transmission housing.
62. Install the flywheel housing (H) on the transmission

housing, and tighten the mounting bolts (19) with
the harness clamp bracket (I).
6 x 1.0 m m
1 2 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
14-25
CVT
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd!
67. Move the selector control lever (A) f r o m the P 69. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently on
position to the N position by turning the selector the selector control shaft (B) while holding it in the
control lever (A). N position with the 2.0 m m (0.08 in.) blade (C).
NOTE; Do not squeeze the end (B) of the selector

control shaft tips together w h e n turning. If the tips
are squeezed together it will cause a faulty control
signal or position due to the play between the
selector control shaft and the transmission range
switch.
70. Tighten the bolts (A) on the transmission range

switch while you continue to hold it in the N
position. Do not move the transmission range
switch when tightening the bolts. Remove the
feeler gauge (B).
68. To set up a new transmission range switch (A) to

the N position, align the cutouts (B) on the rotary-
frame w i t h the neutral positioning cutouts (C) on
the transmission range switch. Then put a 2.0 m m
(0.08 in.) feeler gauge blade (D) in the cutouts to
hold the switch in the N position.
NOTE: Be sure to use a 2.0 m m (0.08 in.) feeler

gauge blade or equivalent to hold the transmission
range switch in the N position.
A
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
14-260
7 1 . Install the control shaft cover on the transmission 73. '06 model: Install the CVT output shaft (driven
range switch. pulley) speed sensor (A), the CVT speed sensor (B),
and the CVT speed sensor (secondary) (C) with new
O-rings (D).
D
Replace.
6x 1.0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f - m ,
8.7 I b f f t )
72. Install the breather cap (A) on the breather pipe (B)
w i t h its arrow (C) pointing to the flywheel housing.
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
74. '07-09 models: Install the CVT output shaft (driven

pulley) speed sensor (A), and the CVT speed sensor
(B) with new O-rings (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N-m
(1.2 k g f - m ,
8.7 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 m m
12 N m
(1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
14-261
CVT
75. Install the dipstick tube (A) with a new O-ring (B).
F
12 x 1.25 m m
2 8 N m (2.9 kgf m , 21 Ibf-ft)
76. Install the CVT input shaft (drive pulley) speed

sensor (C) w i t h a new O-ring (D).
77. install the ATF cooler lines (E) with the line bolts (F)
and new sealing washers (G).
78. Install the CVTF dipstick in the tube.
14-262
CVT Differential
Component Location Index Backlash Inspection
1. Install the driveshaft and the intermediate shaft on
10x1.0 m m
98 N-m
the differential, then place the axles on V-blocks.
( 1 0 . 0 k g f - m , 7 2 . 3 Ibf-ft)
Left-hand threads 2. Check the backlash of the pinion gears (A) using a
dial indicator (B).
Standard: 0.05—0.15 m m (0.002—0.006 in.)

-(5])
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR
Replacement,
p a g e 14-264
CARRIER BEARING
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection,
p a g e 14-263
CARRIER BEARING
3. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the
differential carrier.
SET RING, 80 m m
S e l e c t i o n , p a g e 14-266
14-263
CVT Differential
Differential Carrier and Final Driven Carrier Bearing Replacement
Gear Replacement
Driver handle, 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100
1. Remove the final driven gear f r o m the differential
carrier, and replace the differential carrier or the 1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) using a
final driven gear. The final driven gear bolts have commercially available puller (B) and a spacer (C).
left-hand threads. ^
14-264
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install a new oil seal flush to the transmission
• Driver attachment, 58 m m 07JAD-PH80101 housing using the driver handle and the
• Driver attachment, 78 x 80 m m 07NAD-PX40100 ' 78 x 80 m m driver attachment
• Driver handle 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
07JAD-PH80101
14-265
CVT Differential
Carrier Bearing Side Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 3. Install the three dowel pins (A) and new gasket (B)
Driver handle, 40 m m I.D. 07746-0030100 on the transmission housing (C).
8 x 1.25 m m
1. Install the set ring in the transmission housing. 2 9 N m (3.0 kgf m , 2 2 Ibf-ft)
2. Install the differential assembly in the transmission

housing, then drive the differential to seat in the
housing using the 40 m m driver handle.
07746-0030100 4. Place the flywheel housing (D) on the transmission

housing.
5. Install the housing bolts w i t h the harness clamp

bracket (E), and tighten them in a crisscross pattern
at least t w o steps.
14-266
6. Measure the clearance between the set ring and the
carrier bearing outer race using a feeler gauge.
Standard: 0—0.15 m m (0—0.006 in.)
7. If the clearance is out of standard, remove the set

ring, and measure its thickness.
8. Select a new set ring f r o m the following table.
SET RING, 80 m m
1 90414-689-000 2.5 m m (0.098 in.)
2 90415-689-000 2.6 m m (0.102 in.)
3 90416-689-000 2.7 m m (0.106 in.)
4 90417-689-000 2.8 m m (0.110 in.)
5 90418-689-000 2.9 m m (0.114 in.)
6 90419-PH8-000 3.0 m m (0.118 in.)
9. Install a new set ring, and recheck the clearance

and make sure it is w i t h i n the standard.
14-267
Driveline/Axle
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools ..... 16-2
Component Location Index . 16-3
Driveshaft Inspection 16-4
Driveshaft Removal ........... 16-4
Driveshaft Disassembly - 16-7
Dynamic Damper Replacement 16-10
Driveshaft Reassembly .... ••• 16-11
Driveshaft Installation 16-20
Intermediate Shaft Removal 16-22
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly ...... 16-23
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly 16-25
Intermediate Shaft Installation 16-28
Driveline/Axle
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qtty
© 07GAD-PH70201 Oil Seal Driver, 64 m m 1
® 07JAF-SH20400 Support Base Attachment 1
® 07XAC-001010A Threaded Adapter, 22 x 1.5 m m 1
® 07746-0010400 Bearing Driver Attachment, 52 x 55 m m 1
® 07746-0030400 Inner Bearing Driver Attachment, 35 m m 1
© 07749-0010000 Driver Handle, 15 x 135L 1
® 07947-SB00100 Oil Seal Driver, 44.5 m m 1
® 07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
® ®
16-2
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 16-10

Removal, page 16-22
D i s a s s e m b l y , p a g e 16-23
R e a s s e m b l y , p a g e 16-25
16-3
Drlveline/Axle
Driveshaft Inspection Driveshaft Removal
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift.
<B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is 2. Remove the front wheels.
f o u n d , replace the boot and the boot bands.
3. Pry up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),
then remove the nut.
2. Check the driveshaft for cracks and damage. If any

damage is f o u n d , replace the driveshaft.
4. Drain the transmission fluid, then reinstall the drain
3. Check the inboard joint (E) and the outboard joint plug with a new sealing washer (see page 14-176).
(F) for cracks and damage. If any damage is f o u n d ,
replace the inboard joint or the outboard joint as an 5. Remove the nuts and the bolt, then separate the
assembly. lower arm using a prybar.
4. Hold the inboard joint and turn the front wheel by

hand, then make sure the joint is not excessively
loose. If necessary, replace the inboard joint or the
outboard joint as an assembly.
16-4
6 . Separate the driveshaft outboard joint f r o m the Left driveshaft: Pry the inboard joint (A) f r o m the
front hub using a plastic hammer. differential using a prybar. Remove the driveshaft
as an assembly.
NOTE;
• Do not pull on the driveshaft ( B ) , or the inboard
joint may come apart. Pull the inboard joint
straight out to avoid damaging the oil seal.
• Be careful not to damage the oil seal using the
prybar.
7. Pull the knuckle o u t w a r d , and separate the

driveshaft outboard joint f r o m the front hub.
(cont'd)
16-5
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)

9. R i g h t d r i v e s h a f t : D r i v e t h e i n b o a r d j o i n t (A) o f f o f 11. R e m o v e t h e s e t r i n g (A) f r o m t h e I n t e r m e d i a t e s h a f t .
the Intermediate shaft using a drift and a hammer.
R e m o v e t h e d r i v e s h a f t as a n a s s e m b l y .
NOTE:
• D o n o t p u l l o n t h e d r i v e s h a f t (B), o r t h e I n b o a r d
j o i n t m a y c o m e a p a r t . Pull t h e I n b o a r d j o i n t
straight o u t t o a v o i d d a m a g i n g t h e oil seal.
• Be c a r e f u l n o t t o d a m a g e t h e o i l s e a l u s i n g t h e
prybar.
10. R e m o v e t h e s e t r i n g (A) f r o m t h e l e f t d r i v e s h a f t
inboard joint.
16-6
Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required Low profile type
-Threaded adapter, 2 2 x 1.5 m m 07XAC-001010A
• Slide hammer, 5/8"-18 UNF, commercially available
• Boot band pliers, commercially available
• Puller, commercially available
Inboard Joint Side
1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage

the boot,
• If the boot band is a welded type (A), cut the boot

band.
• If the boot band is a double loop type (B), lift up
the band end (C), and push it into the clip <D).
• If the boot band is a low profile type (E), pinch the
boot band using commercially available boot 2. Make marks (A) on each roller (B) and ihe inboard
band pliers (F). joint (C) to identify the locations of the rollers to the
grooves in the inboard joint. Then remove the
Welded type inboard joint on a clean shop towel (D). Be careful
not to drop the rollers w h e n separating t h e m f r o m
the inboard joint.
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the

rolling surface.
Double loop type
(cont'd)
16-7
Driweline/Axle
Driweshaft DIsassemblf (conf d) -
3 . Make marks (A) on the rollers (B) and the spider (C) Outboard Joint Side
to identify the locations of the rollers on the spider,
then remove the rollers. 1. Remove the boot bands (A). Lift up the three tabs
(B) using a screwdriver, then release the band. Be
NOTE: Do not engrave or scribe any marks on the careful not to damage the boot.
rolling surfaces.
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard

4. Remove the circlip (D). joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
A
5. Make marks (E) on the spider and the driveshaft (F)
to identify the position of the spider on the shaft.
6. Remove the spider.
NOTE: If necessary, use a commercially available

puller.
7. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damaging the boot.
8. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
9. Remove the vinyl tape.
16-8
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and 8.. Remove the stop ring f r o m the driveshaft.
the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft ( B ) at the same

level as the outboard joint end (C).
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft w i t h vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damaging the boot.
5. Securely clamp the driveshaft in a bench vise w i t h

a shop towel.
6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the

22 x 1.5 m m threaded adapter (B) and a
commercially available 5/8"-18 UNF slide hammer
(C).
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to

damage the boot.
1 1 . Remove the vinyl tape.
7. Remove the driveshaft f r o m the bench vise.
16
Driveline/Axle
Dy namic Damper Replacement
1. Remove the inboard joint (see page 16-7).
2. Remove the dynamic damper band (see step 1 on

page 16-7).
3. Remove tne dynamic damper (A).
4. Install new dynamic damper, and adjust the

distance (A) as s h o w n .
NOTE:
• Install the dynamic damper that has "SNC-003"
mark (B) to the left driveshaft.
• Install the dynamic damper that has " S N C - 9 0 1 "
mark to the right driveshaft.
A: 2 8 7 . 5 - 2 9 2 . 5 m m ( 1 1 . 3 2 - 1 1 . 5 2 in.)
5. Install the dynamic damper band (see step 11 on

page 16-14).
6. Install the inboard joint (see page 16-12).
16-10
Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
INBOARD JOINT ROLLERS
DOUBLE LOOP BANDS

(Replacement parts only)
Replace.
S E T RING
Replace.
INBOARD BOOT
Use the grease i n c l u d e d

in t h e i n b o a r d b o o t set.
S T O P RING
Replace.
LOW PROFILE BAND
Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
EAR CLAMP BANDS

Replace.
OUTBOARD JOINT
O U T B O A R D B O O T (TPE)
TGREASEI
Use the grease included

in t h e o u t b o a r d b o o t set.
(cont'd)
16-11
Driveline/Axle
Driweshaft Reassemblf (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by aligning
• Boot band t o o l , KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
available of the driveshaft.
• Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent,
commercially available
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during

this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side
1. W r a p the splines w i t h vinyl tape (A) to prevent

damaging the inboard boot.
4. Install a new circlip (C) into the driveshaft groove.

Always rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure
it is fully seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) w i t h the high
shoulders (C) facing outward, and note these items:
• Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on

the spider by aligning the marks (D) you made.
2. Install the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then • Hold the driveshaft pointed up to prevent the
remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the rollers f r o m falling off.
inboard boot.
16-12
6. Pack the inboard joint w i t h the joint grease 8. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and the
included in the new inboard boot set. inboard joint (C).
Grease quantity
^ inboard joint
'06-08 models: 1 0 0 - 1 1 0 g ( 3 . 5 - 3 . 9 oz)
'09 model: 9 0 - 1 0 0 g ( 3 . 2 - 3 . 5 oz)

in t h e i n b o a r d b o o t set.
7. Fit the inboard joint onto the driveshaft and note .

these items:
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by

aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard
joint and the rollers.
• Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is
pointing up to prevent it f r o m falling off.
(cont'd)
16-13
Driveline/Axle
Driweshaft Reassembif (cont'd)

9. Adjust the length (A) of the driveshafts to the figure 11. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the
a s s h o w n , then adjust the boots to halfway inboard joint, then install a new double loop band
between full compression a n d full extension. Bleed (A) onto the boot (B).
excess air f r o m the boots by inserting a flat-tipped
screwdriver between the boot and the joint. NOTE: Pass the end of the new double loop band
through the clip (C) twice in the direction of the
Left, driweshaft f o r w a r d rotation of the driveshaft.
A : 4 9 1 . 0 - 4 9 6 . 0 m m ( 1 9 . 3 3 - 1 9 . 5 3 in.)
Right driveshaft
A : 4 5 2 . 0 - 4 5 7 . 0 m m ( 1 7 . 8 0 - 1 7 . 9 9 in.)
12. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
10. Install new boot bands. 13. Mark a position (A) on the band 10—14 m m
(0.4—0.6 in.) f r o m the clip (B).
• For the double loop type, go to step 11.
• For the low profile type, go to step 20.
16-14
14. Thread the free end of the band through the nose 17. U n w i n d the boot band tool, and cut off the excess
section of the commercially available boot band free end of the band to leave a 5— 10 m m
tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on (0.2—0.4 in.) tail protruding f r o m the clip.
the w i n d i n g mandrel (B).
18. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it d o w n using a

hammer.
NOTE:
• Make sure the band and the clip do not interfere
15. Using a wrench on the w i n d i n g mandrel of the boot w i t h anything on the vehicle and the band does
band t o o l , tighten the band until the marked spot not move.
(C) on the band meets the edge of the clip. • Clean any grease remaining on the surrounding
surfaces.
16. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of
the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the A
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
19. Repeat steps 11 through 18 for the band on the

other end of the b o o t
(cont'd)
16-15
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
20. Install a new low profile band (A) onto the boot (B), Outboard Joint Side
then hook the tab (C) of the band.
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
A
damaging the outboard boot.
Replace.
B
Replace.
21. Close the hook portion of the band using

commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
hook the tabs (B) of the band. 2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and the
outboard boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be
careful not to damage the outboard boot.
3. Make sure to check the size of a new stop ring.
NOTICE
To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage,
make sure you install a new stop ring.
Stop Ring Specifications

Overall Diameter (A): 24.5 mm (0.96 in.)
Wire Diameter (B): 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
22. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat steps 20 and 2 1 .
16-16
4. Install the stop ring (A) into the driveshaft groove 6. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)
(B). until the stop ring (C) is close to the joint.
A
Replace.
5. Pack about 35 g (1.2 oz) grease included in the new

outboard boot set into the driveshaft hole in the
outboard joint. 7. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
driveshaft and the joint, and tap or hit the assembly
NOTE: If you are installing a new outboard joint, onto a hard surface f r o m a height of about 10 cm
the grease is already installed. (4 in.).
NOTE: Do not use a hammer as excessive force

may damage the driveshaft. Be careful not to
damage the threaded section (A) of the outboard
joint.
(cont'd)
16-17
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Check the alignment of the paint mark (A) y o u 9. Pack the outboard joint (A) w i t h the remaining joint
made w i t h the outboard joint end (B). grease included in the new outboard boot set.
1 NOTICE 1 Total grease quantity

To avoid driveshaft and vehicle damage, the Outboard joint: 95—105 g (3.4—3.7 oz)
shaft must be all the w a y into the outboard
joint to ensure the stop ring is properly
seated.

in t h e o u t b o a r d b o o t set.
10. Fit the boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) and the
outboard joint (C). Bleed any excess air f r o m the
boot by inserting a flat-tipped screwdriver between
the boot and the joint.
16-18
Inspect the length (A) of the driveshafts to the 12 Close the ear portion (A)' of the band using
figure as s h o w n , then adjust the boots to halfway commercially available boot band pliers
between full compression and full extension. (Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent) (B).
6.0 mm
( 0 . 2 4 In.) MAX.
J
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX.
14. Repeat steps 12 and 13 for the band on the other

end of the b o o t
16-19
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: Before starting installation, make sure the 3. Install a new set ring (A) into the set ring groove (B)
mating surfaces of the joint and the splined section are of the intermediate shaft.
clean.
1. Apply about 5 g (0.18 oz) moly 60 paste

(P/N 08734-0001) to the contact area (A) of the
outboard joint and the front wheel bearing.
NOTE: The paste helps to prevent noise and

vibration.
4. Apply 0.5—1.0 g (0.02—0.04 oz) of super high t e m p

urea grease (P/N 08798-9002) to the w h o l e splined
surface (A) of the right driveshaft. After applying
grease, remove the grease f r o m the splined
grooves at intervals of 2—3 splines and f r o m the
set ring groove (B) so that air can bleed f r o m the
(P/N 08734-0001) intermediate shaft.
2. Install a new set ring (A) into the set ring groove (B)
r-^=k GREASE!
of the left driveshaft inboard joint.
(P/N 08798-9002)
Replace.
16-20
5. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the 8. Connect the knuckle (A) onto the lower a r m (B).
differential thoroughly w i t h solvent or brake During installation, install a new flange bolt and
cleaner, and dry w i t h compressed air. new self-locking nuts. After lightly tightening all
three fasteners, tighten t h e m to the specified
NOTE; Do not wash the rubber parts w i t h solvent. torque in the following order: the nut on the front
(C), the nut on the rear (D), then the bolt (E).
6. Insert the inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
differential (B) or the intermediate shaft (C) until the
set ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
NOTE: Insert the driveshaft horizontally to prevent

damaging the oil seal.
12 x 1.25 m m
59 N-m
(6.0 k g f - m ,
4 3 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 m m
59 N m 12 x 1.25 m m
(6.0 k g f - m , 59 N m
4 3 Ibf-ft)
(6.0 kgf m , 4 3 Ibf-ft)
Replace. Replace.
9. Apply small amount of engine oil to the seating

surface of a new spindle nut (A).
7. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B).
A"
2 2 x 1.5 m m
181 N - m
(18.5 k g f - m , 134 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
10. Install the spindle nut, then tighten it. After

tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
(cont'd)
16-21
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Installation (cont'd) Intermediate Shaft Removal
11. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake discs and 1. Drain the transmission fluid, then reinstall the drain
the front wheels, then install the front wheels. plug w i t h a new sealing washer (see page 14-176).
12. Turn the front wheels by hand, and make sure there 2. Remove the right driveshaft (see page 16-4).
is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts. 3. Remove the three dowel bolts (A).
A
14. Refill the transmission w i t h the recommended

transmission fluid (see page 14-176).
15. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

necessary (see page 18-6).
16. Test-drive the vehicle.
4. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) f r o m the

differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontally
until it is clear of the differential to prevent
damaging the oil seal (B).
16-22
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
• Support base attachment 07JAF-SH20400 intermediate shaft bearing (B) using the support
• Oil seal driver, 44.5 m m 07947-SB00100 base attachment (C), the support base (D), and a
• Support base 07965-SD90100 press. Be careful not to damage the bearing
support ring (E) on the intermediate shaft during
1, Remove the heat shield (A). disassembly.
2. Remove the outer seal (A) and the external snap 4. Remove the internal snap ring (A) f r o m the bearing
ring (B). support (B).
(cont'd)
16-23
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly (cont'd)
5. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out of the
bearing support (B) using the support base
attachment (C), the support base '(D), the 44.5 m m
oil seal driver (E), and a press.
16-24
intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
SNAP RING /
OUTER SEAL
Replace.
(cont'd)
16-25
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft
•Oil seal driver, 64 m m 07GAD-PH70201 bearing (B) using the 35 m m inner bearing driver
•Support base attachment 07JAF-SH20400 attachment (C) and a press.
• Bearing driver attachment, 52 x 55 m m 07746-0010400
PRESS
• Inner bearing driver attachment, 35 m m
07746-0030400
•Driver handle, 15 x 135L 07749-0010000
•Support base 07965-SD90100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts w i t h solvent, and dry

t h e m w i t h compressed air.
NOTE: Do not wash the rubber parts w i t h solvent.
2. Press a new intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the

bearing support (B) using the 52 x 55 m m bearing
driver attachment (C), the 15 x 135L driver handle
(D), and a press.
07746-0030400
PRESS
5. Install the external snap ring (A) into the groove of

the intermediate shaft (B).
07749-0010000
07746-0010400
3. Install the internal snap ring (A) into the groove of

the bearing support (B).
16-26
Install a new outer seal (A) into the bearing support 7. Install the heat shield (A).
(B) using the 64 m m oil seal driver (C), the support
8 x 1.25 m m
base attachment (D), the support base (E), and a 22 N m
press. Press in the seal flush w i t h the surface of the (2.2 k g f - m ,
intermediate shaft. 16 I b f f t )
PRESS
07GAD-PH70201
A
Replace.
Pack t h e i n t e r i o r
of t h e outer seal.
07965-SD90100
16
Driveline/Axle
Intermediate Shaft Installation
1. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft 5. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-20).
contacts the differential thoroughly w i t h solvent or
break cleaner, and dry w i t h compressed air. 6. Refill the transmission w i t h the recommended
t j j i f | j d (see page 14-176).
r a r i s r r i s s o r u
NO i t : Do not w a s h the rubber parts w i t h solvent.

2. Install a new set ring (A) into the groove of the necessary (see page 18-6).
intermediate shaft (B).
3. Insert the intermediate shaft into the differential

correctly.
NOTE: Insert the intermediate shaft carefully to

prevent damaging the oil seal (C).
4. Install the three dowel bolts (A).
A
10 M 1.25 mm
39 N-m
(4.0 kgf-m, 2 9 Ibfft)
16-28
INTRODUCTION
r How t o Use This Manual

This manual is divided into multiple sections. The first page of
each section is marked with a black tab that lines up with its
corresponding thumb index tab on this page and the back cover.
You can quickly find the first page of each section without
looking through a full table of contents. The symbols printed at
the top corner of each page can also be used as a quick
reference system.
Each section includes:
1. A table of contents, or an exploded view index showing:
* Parts disassembly sequence.
* Bolt torques and thread sizes.
* Page references to descriptions in text.
2. Disassembly/assembly procedures and tools.
3. Inspection.
4. Testing/troubleshooting.
5. Repair.
6. Adjustments.
r- Safety Messages
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help
you make informed decisions, we have provided safety
messages, and other safety information throughout this manual.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle. You must use
your own good judgment.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms

including:
9
Safety Labels — on the vehicle.
• Safety Messages — preceded by a safety alert symbol fa and
one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
•Steering
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if
Hi
.WARNING You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if Suspension V- i l l

'w'SHEH
,x
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow
(Including TPMS)
instructions.
Instructions — how to service this vehicle correctly and safely. Brakes i
(Including VSA) • iB
All information contained in this manual is based on the latest

product information available at the time of printing. We reserve
the right to make changes at anytime without notice. No part of Body
this publication may be reproduced, or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the *Heating, Ventilation, A p u s
prior written permission of the publisher. This includes text, • • • • 3 Hp I
figures, and tables.
and Air Conditioning u
As you read this manual, you will find information that is

preceded by a I NOTICE | symbol. The purpose of this message is *Body Electrical
to help prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the
environment.
*Audio, Navigation,
First Edition 12/2008 H O N D A M O T O R CO., LTD.
and Telematics IL—LJBI
All Rights Reserved S e r v i c e P u b l i c a t i o n Office
Specifications apply to USA and Canada
Restraints
As sections with * include S R S components;
s p e c i a l p r e c a u t i o n s a r e required when s e r v i c i n g .
m a r k e d sections are not included in this
manual, see Volume 1 .
2006-09 Civic Hybrid
Vol . 2 of 2
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (If steering maintenance is required)
The Civic Hybrid S R S includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard
necessary to safely service the S R S is included in this Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the
contents page include or are located near S R S components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items
• To avoid rendering the S R S inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all S R S service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the S R S , could lead to personal injury
• Do not bump or impact the S R S unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor when the
• S R S electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
Steering
Steering
Special Tools 17-2
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check 17-4
Power Assist Check ............... 17-4
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection 17-5
* Steering Wheel Removal 17-6
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly ................ 17-7
* Steering Wheel Installation 17-9
Column Cover Removal and Installation .................... 17-10
* Steering Column Removal and Installation 17-11
Steering Column Inspection 17-15
Steering Lock Replacement 17-15
Rack Guide Adjustment 17-16
EPS (Electrical Power Steering)

Components 17-17
Steering
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty
© 07AAF-SDAA100 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 12 m m
© 07AAK-SN AA120 Universal Eyelet 1
® 07JAF-SH20330 Bushing Base 1
® 07MAA-SL0020A Locknut Wrench, 43 m m 1
© 07MAC-SL0A202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 m m 1
17-2
/ DRIVER'S A I R B A G
STEERING WHEEL
R e m o v a l , p a g e 17-6
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 17-7
STEERING C O L U M N
C o l u m n Cover Removal and Installation,
p a g e 17-10
R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 17-11
S t e e r i n g Lock R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 17-15
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack G u i d e A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 1 7 - 1 6
EPS C o m p o n e n t L o c a t i o n I n d e x , p a g e 17-18
17-3
Steering
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check
Check
NOTE: This test should be done w i t h original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
2. Measure h o w far you can turn the steering wheel
left and right without m o v i n g the front wheels. 2. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
• If the play is within the limit, the steering gearbox vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
and the steering linkage are OK. s h o w n , and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-16). If the play is still excessive after
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering
linkage and the steering gearbox (see page 17-5).
Rotational play: 0—10 mm (0—0.39 in.)
3. If the scale reads no more than 34 N (3.5 kgf, 7.7 Ibf),

the power assist is OK. If it reads more, check these
items:
• Steering linkage (see page 17-5)

• Rack guide adjustment (see page 17-16)
• EPS system (see page 17-19)
17-4
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
TIE-ROD L O C K N U T
Check for loose locknut.
17-5
Steering
Steering Wheel Removal
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Install a commercially available steering wheel
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the puller (A) on the steering wheel (B). Free the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before steering wheel f r o m the steering column shaft by
doing repairs or service. turning the pressure bolt (C) of the puller.
1. DO the battery terminal disconnection procedure Note these items w h e n removing the steering
(see page 22-62). wheel;
• Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
2. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove column shaft w h e n removing the steering wheel,
the driver's airbag f r o m the steering wheel • If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel
(see page 24-184). hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
3. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A). a pair of j a m nuts five threads up on each puller
bolt.
4. Loosen the steering wheel bolt (B).

6. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the
steering wheel bolt and the steering wheel f r o m the
steering c o l u m n .
17-6
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly
'06-08 models
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH
ACCESS PANEL
(cont'd)
17-7
Steering
#
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly (cont d)
'09 model
AUDIO REMOTE
SWITCH •
17-8
Steering Wheel Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the 3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to
front wheels are pointing straight ahead, then the specified torque. Connect the cable reel
center the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the subharness connector (B). Make sure the wire
cable reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it harness is routed and fastened properly.
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow
mark (B) on the cable reel label should point
straight up.
B A
4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the

system operating properly (see page 24-184).

2. Position the t w o tabs (A) of the turn signal (see page 22-62), and do these tasks:
canceling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering
wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure NOTE: If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays
the steering wheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of no segments, start the engine, and hold it between
the cable reel and tabs of the turn signal canceling 3,500 r p m and 4,000 rpm without load (in Park or
sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering neutral) until the BAT displays at least three
column shaft w h e n installing the steering wheel. segments.
• Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that

the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off.
• Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
work properly.
• Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
6. After installation, check the steering wheel spoke

angle. If the steering spoke angles to the right and
left are not equal (steering wheel is not centered),
correct the engagement of the wheel/column shaft
splines.
B D
17-9
Steering
Column Cover Removal and Installation
NOTE; 4. Turn the steering wheel to the left, and release the
• Take care not to scratch or damage the c o l u m n left pawl (I) of the upper column cover while
covers. pushing the lower column cover f r o m the front side.
• Do not pry the cover surface w i t h any tools.
5. Turn the steering wheel to the right, and release the
1. Release the lock lever (A), and adjust the steering right pawl (J) of the upper column cover in the
column to full tilt d o w n position and to the full same w a y as in step 4.
telescopic pull position.
Remove the cover by lightly pulling it up by
releasing the right side hook of the upper column
cover.
I NOTICE I
Carefully release the pawls, note the hooks
(K) may break when the upper column cover
is pulled up too hard.
7, Remove the three screws, then remove the lower

column cover (A).
2. Insert a suitable sized screwdriver or equivalent

tool (B) along the guide rib (C) into the lever hole
(D) in the lower column cover (E).
3. Release the hook (F) located on the left side of the

upper column cover (G). The right side hook (H) of
the upper column cover cannot be released f r o m
the inside.
8, Install the upper and the lower column cover in the

reverse order of removal, and push the hooks into
place securely.
17-10
Steering Column Removal and installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
Removal
I NOTICE I
Be careful not to pull the bracket (A) on the front
side of the steering column out of its normal
position. If the bracket accidentally comes out,
replace the steering column as an assembly.
Norma! position
6. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering

column to the full tilt up position, and to the full
telescopic in position.
7. Tighten the lock lever.
8. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column w i t h a

piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the
lower slide shaft and the joint yoke (D) of the upper
shaft to prevent the slider shaft f r o m pulling out.

(see page 22-62).
2. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-184) and

the steering wheel (see page 17-6). 9. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering
column to the full telescopic out position, then
3. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover tighten the lock lever.
(see page 20-90).
NOTE: Do not release the lock lever when removing
4. Remove the column covers (see page 17-10). the steering column from the frame.
(cont'd)
17-11
Steering
#
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont d)
10. Disconnect the wire harness connectors f r o m the combination switch assembly/cable reel (A).
11. Remove the combination switch assembly/cable reel f r o m the steering column shaft by removing the screws (B).
12. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips f r o m the steering c o l u m n .
13. Remove the steering joint bolt (C), then disconnect the steering joint (D) f r o m the pinion shaft.
NOTE;
• If the center guide is in place and has not m o v e d , leave it in place.
• If the center guide has come off, discard it.
14. Remove the steering column (E) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts. If the lower slide shaft (F) is removed,
slip it into the upper shaft (G) by aligning the paint or stamped marks (H).
17-12
Installation 2. Center the steering rack w i t h i n its stroke in the
steering joint connection.
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items: 3. W i t h the rack in the straight ahead driving position,
cut the wire (A) and slip the lower end of the
• Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by steering joint onto the pinion shaft (B).
any parts.
• Tighten the three screws (A) in the sequence NOTE:
shown. • Pinion shaft w i t h center guide; install the steering
joint by aligning the center guide.
• Pinion shaft without center guide; position the
steering column by aligning the gap (C) w i t h i n
the angle.
4. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint w i t h the

groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely
install the steering joint bolt (C). Be sure that the
joint bolt is securely in the groove in the pinion
shaft. Pull on the steering joint to make sure that
the steering joint is fully seated. Tighten the
steering joint bolt to the specified torque.
C
8
28
(cont'd)
17-13
Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the steering joint cover (A). 9. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
(see page 22-62), and do these tasks:
• Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check that

the SRS indicator comes on for about 6 seconds
and then goes off.
• Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
w o r k properly.
• Make sure the steering wheel switches work
properly.
10. After installation, do these checks:
• Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If the

steering spoke angles to the right and left are not
equal (steering wheel and rack are not centered),
correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
splines.
6. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-9). • Set the steering column to the center tilt position,
and to the center telescopic position, then do the
7. Install the column covers (see page 17-10). front toe inspection (see page 18-8).
8. Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page

20-90).
17-14
Steering Column inspection Steering Lock Replacement
• Check the steering c o l u m n ball bearing (A) and the 1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-11).
steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper
movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive 2. Center-punch both of the t w o shear bolts, and drill
play, replace the steering column as an assembly. the heads of the bolts off w i t h a 5 m m (3/16 in.) drill
• Check the lower slide shaft (C) for smooth movement bit. Be careful not to damage the switch body when
in and out. If the lower slide shaft is removed, slip it removing the shear bolts.
into the upper shaft by aligning the paint or stamped
marks <D). If it sticks or binds, replace the steering
column as an assembly.
• Check the sliding capsules (E) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism
for movement and damage.
• Check the absorbing plates (F) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
3. Remove the shear bolts f r o m the switch body.
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
6. .Insert the ignition key, and check for proper

operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
ignition key turns freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
8. Rewrite the immobilizer control unit-receiver

(see page 22-301), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.
9. Install the steering column (see page 17-13).
17-15
Steering
Rack Guide Adjustment
Special Tools Required 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N-m
Lockout w r e n c h , 43 m m 07MAA-SL0020A (2.5 kgf-m, 18 Ibf-ft), then loosen it.
7±3°
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position.
2. Loosen the rack guide screw lockout (A) with the

locknut w r e n c h , then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 3.9 N-m

(0.4 kgf-m, 2.9 Ibf-ft), then back it off to the specified
angle.
Specified return angle: 7 ±3 °

3. Remove the old sealant f r o m the rack guide screw
(A), and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or 6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary w i t h a wrench,
Loctite 5699) to the middle of the threads (B). and install the locknut (B) by hand until it's fully
Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering seated.
gearbox.
7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut, and hold
NOTE: If more than 5 minutes has passed after the rack guide screw stationary w i t h a wrench.
applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and Tighten the locknut to the specified torque.
residue, and reapply new sealant
8. Check for unusual steering effort through out the
A complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotational play (see page

17-4), and the power assist (see page 17-4).
17-16
Steering
Steering . aBQBB9Bsa . 17=1

EPS (Electrical Power Steering) Components
General Troubleshooting Information ... 17-19
Memorizing the Torque Sensor Neutral Position 17-22
System Description . 17-26
Symptom Troubleshooting 17-60
EPS Motor Removal and Installation .......................... 17-63
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation 17-65
Rack End Removal and Installation 17-77
Rack Guide Removal/Installation ». 17-81
EPS Control Unit Removal/Installation 17-82
Tie-rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement 17-83
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement 17-84
EPS Components
STEERING GEARBOX
Removal and Installation, page 17-65
Rack E n d R e m o v a l a n d I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 17-77
Rack G u i d e R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , p a g e 17-81
T i e - r o d E n d Ball J o i n t B o o t R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 17-83
G e a r b o x M o u n t C u s h i o n R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 17-84
17-18
EPS Indicator Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Under normal conditions, the EPS indicator comes on • If the CPU cannot be activated, or it fails, the EPS
when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), then goes indicator comes on, but the DTC is not memorized.
off after the engine is started. This indicates that the • The m e m o r y can hold any number of DTCs. However,
LED and its circuit are operating correctly. w h e n the same DTC is detected more than once, the
If there is a failure in the system after the engine is most recent DTC is written over the prior DTC,
started, the EPS indicator will stay on, and the power therefore only one occurrence is memorized.
assist is turned off or restricted. • The lowest DTC is indicated f i r s t The DTCs are
indicated in ascending order, not in the order that
When the EPS indicator comes o n , the control unit they occurred.
memorizes the DTC. In this case, the control unit will • The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-
not activate the EPS system after the engine starts volatile memory) therefore the memorized DTCs
again, but it keeps the EPS indicator on. cannot be erased by disconnecting the battery. Do the
specified procedures to clear the DTCs.
When DTC 51-01, 51-02 or 51-06 is stored in the control
unit, the EPS indicator will stay on until the DTC is Sefif-dfegoTOsos
erased. When a problem is detected and the EPS
indicator comes on, there are cases when the indicator Self-diagnosis can be classified into three categories:
stays on until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0),
and cases w h e n the indicator goes off automatically • Initial diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts
when the system returns to normal. Even though the and until the EPS indicator goes off.
system is operating normally, the EPS indicator will • Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
come on under the following conditions: diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to
LOCK (0).
• The vehicle speed decreases abruptly f r o m 12 mph • Steering diagnosis: Done during regular diagnosis
(20 km/h) or more (by applying brake), and it is less while turning the steering wheel.
than 1 m p h (1 km/h) and engine speed is 2,000 rpm or
above for 5 seconds (continuously) after the abrupt The EPS control unit does these functions w h e n a
deceleration. problem is detected by self-diagnosis:
• While turning the steering wheel with the vehicle
speed of 1 mph (1 km/h) or less for 20 seconds, and 1. Turns on the EPS indicator.
the engine speed is 2,000 rpm or above for at least
10 seconds. 2. Memorizes the DTC.
• W h e n the engine speed is 500 rpm or less, and the
vehicle is traveling at a speed of 6 mph (10 km/h) or 3. Stops power assist and manual steering operation
more for about 3 seconds. resumes.
To determine the actual cause of the problem, question NOTE: For DTCs 11-01, 11-02, 12-01, 21-01, 21-02,
the customer about the conditions during which the 22-01, and 35-04 the EPS indicator will go off
problem occurred, taking the above conditions into automatically, and the system returns to normal.
consideration.
(cont'd)
17-19
EPS Components
Restriction on Power Assist Operation How to Troubleshoot DTCs
Repeated extreme steering force, such as turning the The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
steering wheel continuously back-and-forth w i t h the . of the problem is still present and the EPS indicator is
vehicle stopped, causes an increase of power still on. Following the procedure when the EPS
consumption in the EPS motor. The increase of electric indicator does not come on can result in incorrect
current causes the EPS motor to heat up. Because this diagnosis.
heat adversely affects the system, the control unit
monitors the electric current of the EPS motor. 1. Question the customer about the conditions w h e n
the problem occurred, and try to reproduce the
When the control unit detects heat build-up in the EPS same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
motor, it reduces the electric current to the EPS motor w h e n the EPS indicator came on, such as while
gradually to protect the system, and it restricts the t u r n i n g , after turning, when the vehicle was at a
power assist operation. The EPS indicator does not certain speed, etc.
come on during this function.
2. W h e n the EPS indicator does not come on during
When steering torque is not applied to the steering the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on
wheel, or w h e n the ignition is turned to LOCK (0) and the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor terminal
the EPS motor cools, the control unit will restore the contact, etc., in the affected circuit before you start
power assist gradually until it's fully restored (after troubleshooting.
about 8 minutes).
3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTC and test-drive
Torque Sensor Neutral Position the vehicle. Be sure the EPS indicator does not
come on.
The EPS control unit stores the torque sensor neutral
position in the EEPROM. The torque sensor neutral
position must be memorized whenever the gearbox, the
EPS motor, or the EPS control unit is replaced.
NOTE: The torque sensor neutral position is not

effected w h e n erasing the DTCs.
17-20
How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear DTCs
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
HDS (Honda diagnostic system) to the DLC (data HDS to the DLC (data link connector) (A) located
link connector) (A) located under the driver's side of under the driver's side of the dashboard.
the dashboard.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the EPS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
and the EPS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the on the HDS.
DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting. NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
17-21
EPS Components
Memorizing the Torque Sensor Neutral Position
The torque sensor neutral position must be memorized
whenever the steering gearbox, the torque sensor, the
EPS motor, or the EPS control unit is replaced. Note that
the torque sensor neutral position is not affected w h e n
erasing the DTC.
NOTE: The torque sensor is temperature sensitive.

When memorizing the torque sensor neutral position,
the ambient temperature must be above 68 °F (20 °C).
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the

HDS to the DLC (data link connector) (A) located
under the driver's side of the dashboard.

and the EPS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot
the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
4. From the EPS M E N U , select MISCELLANEOUS

TEST then TORQUE SENSOR LEARN and f o l l o w
the screen prompts on the HDS.

instructions.
17-22
DTC Detection Item Note
11-01 Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-33)
11-02 Low/High JG1-terminaI Voltage (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-33)
12-01 Low/High VBU Voltage (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-34)
21-01 Excessive Change of the Vehicle Speed Signal (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-35)
21-02 Comparison between the Vehicle Speed and the Engine Speed Signal (see page 17-35)
(Regular Diagnosis)
22-01 Engine Speed Signal (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-37)
31-01 No writing the Torque Sensor Neutral Position (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-22)
32-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Current Sensor) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
32-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Current Sensor) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
32-07 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Current Sensor) (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-40)
32-08 Current Sensor (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-40
32-09 Current Sensor (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-40)
33-01 Lower FET Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-42)
33-02 Upper FET Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-43)
33-06 Lower FET Stuck ON (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-42)
33-07 Upper FET Stuck ON (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-43)
34-01 Power Relay Stuck ON (Ignition Switch is in LOCK (0)) (see page 17-45)
34-02 Fail-safe Relay Stuck ON (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-45)
35-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU) (Initial Diagnosis/Regular (see page 17-39)
Diagnosis)
35-02 EPS Control Unit internal Circuit (EEPROM) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
35-03 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (EPS CPU) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-46)
35-04 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (CPU Communication) (Regular (see page 17-39)
Diagnosis)
35-05 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (EPS Motor/EPS CPU) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-46)
35-06 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (ITN Communication) (Regular (see page 17-39)
Diagnosis)
35-07 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (INHL/INHR Ports) (Initial Diagnosis/ (see page 17-39)
Regular Diagnosis)
NOTE:
• Initial Diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the EPS indicator goes off.
• Regular Diagnosis: Done right after the initial Diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
• Steering Diagnosis: Done during regular Diagnosis while turning the steering wheel.
(cont'd)
17-23
EPS Components
DTC Detection Item Note
36-02 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (INH Output Circuit) (initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
37-01 EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit (Step-up Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-39)
51-01 Low/High Voltage for the Torque Sensor (VT1 and VT2) (Regular (see page 17-47)
Diagnosis)
51-02 Torque Sensor (VT3 Differential-amplification Function) ( R e g u l a r (see page 17-50)
Diagnosis)
51-03 Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Rapid Change) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-50)
51-06 Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Average) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-50)
51-07 Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Initial Check) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-50)
61-04 Open/Short in the EPS Motor Harness (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-53)
71-01 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-55)
71-02 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Neutral Position Learning of SIN/COS) (Initial (see page 17-55)
Diagnosis)
71-03 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis) (see page 17-55)
71-04 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Check Signal) (Regular Diagnosis) (see page 17-58)
71-05 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/COS Signals Changing Amount) (Steering (see page 17-55)
Diagnosis)
71-06 EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Neutral Position of SIN/COS) (Initial Diagnosis) (see page 17-55)
NOTE:
• Initial Diagnosis: Done right after the engine starts and until the EPS indicator goes off.
• Regular Diagnosis: Done right after the initial Diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0).
• Steering Diagnosis: Done during regular Diagnosis while turning the steering wheel.
17-24
HDS does not communicate w i t h the Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213)
EPS control unit or the vehicle
EPS indicator does not come on S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 17-60)
EPS indicator does not go off, and no S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 17-60)
DTCs are stored
EPS indicator is not o n , no DTCs are 1. Check the EPS motor power wires between the EPS control unit .
stored, but there is no power assist or and the EPS motor for a short to body ground. Repair as needed.
power assist is reduced 2. If the EPS motor power wires are OK, replace the EPS motor (short
in the EPS motor) (see page 17-63).
3. Check the power and body ground connections at the EPS control
unit.
17-25
EPS Components
System Description
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector A (2P)
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal

number
1 BLK PG G r o u n d f o r t h e a c t u a t o r EPS Continuity to ground
(Power g r o u n d ) motor
2 WHT -f-B Power source for the B a t t e r y v o l t a g e at all t i m e s
(Plus b a t t e r y ) a c t u a t o r EPS m o t o r
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector B (2P)
Terminal W i r e color Terminal sign Description Signal

number
1 GRN H-W D r i v e s t h e a c t u a t o r EPS
motor
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (2P)
]_
2
Terminal W i r e color Terminal sign Description Signal

number
1 RED H-U D r i v e s t h e a c t u a t o r EPS
motor
2 BLU H-V D r i v e s t h e a c t u a t o r EPS
motor
17-26
EPS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs for Connector D (28P)
n
1 3 / / / 7 8 9 10 / 12 13 14
15 16 17 26 27 28

number
1 WHT CAN-H CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit
(CAN-HI)
3 BLU NEP Detects t a c h o m e t e r s i g n a l W i t h engine r u n n i n g : pulses
(Enqine pulse)
7 BRN SCS Detects s e r v i c e c h e c k W i t h service check signal not g r o u n d : battery voltage
(Service check siqnal) connector signal ( a b o u t 12 V) at all t i m e s
8 LT G R N VS2 Detects t o r q u e s e n s o r
( V o l t a g e s e n s o r 2) signal
9 BRN PVF Drives the t o r q u e sensor
(Voltage fade)
10 GRN VS1 Detects t o r q u e s e n s o r
( V o l t a q e s e n s o r 1) signal
12 PNK S1 Detects EPS m o t o r a n g l e
( S i q n a l 1) sensor signal
13 BLU R1 Detects EPS m o t o r a n g l e
(EPS M o t o r a n g l e sensor signal
s e n s o r 1)
14 BRN S2 Detects EPS m o t o r a n g l e
15 RED CAN-L C A N c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit
(CAN-LO)
16 YEL* 1
IG 1 Power source for activating W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e ( a b o u t 12 V)
2
GRY' ( I g n i t i o n 1) the system
17 LT B L U K-LINE Communicates w i t h HDS W i t h s e r v i c e c h e c k s i g n a l o p e n e d : a b o u t 5.0 V
(Data link c o n n e c t o r )
26 BRN S3 Detects EPS m o t o r a n g l e
27 PNK R2 Detects EPS m o t o r a n g l e
(EPS M o t o r a n g l e sensor signal
s e n s o r 2)
28 BLU S4 Detects EPS m o t o r a n g l e
( S i g n a l 4) sensor signal
* 1: '06 m o d e l
* 2: '07-09 m o d e l s
(cont'd)
17-27
EPS Components

EPS S f stem Outline
The power steering system adopts the electric power steering assisting for the control force of the steering wheel in
the driving force of the electric motor.
The EPS control unit is doing an appropriate steering force control according to the running situation of the vehicle (at
time of low speed, lightness, by the control of emphasis and high-speed running time, control w i t h the steady weight
and the control which will be switched f r o m low speed to high speed smoothly later) by the EPS motor.
The EPS control unit is designed for use w i t h an automotive power steering for the primary purpose of controlling the
assist motor (brushless motor) for the power steering by using as inputs the steering torque signals received f r o m the
"steering torque sensor" installed in the steering gearbox as w e l l as the speed signals received f r o m the "vehicle
speed sensor" installed in the vehicle. In addition to the above function, the EPS control unit also provides the failsafe
function, self diagnosis function and motor output limiting function.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE PCM
Indicator drive signal

1 Idle c o n t r o l Parking brake switch
I demand signal
Transmission range
switch signal
EPS C O N T R O L UNIT
Motor angle signal Motor drive signal Torque signal

\7
EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR EPS MOTOR TORQUE SENSOR
| C o m m u n i c a t i o n via F - C A N
17-28
Steering Gearbox
The EPS motor engages w i t h a pinion and one w o r m wheel gear, w h i c h is transmitted to a direct pinion, to move the
rack.
W o r m gear
Torque Sensor
When the steering wheel is turned, twist occurs in the torsion bar between the steering side of the input shaft and the
output shaft on the road reaction force side. Inductance is changed by the movement of the core. The amount this
voltage changes (varies w i t h the amount of movement, and direction of the core) is amplified with the interface
circuitry of the sensor coil, and output to the EPS control unit as a steer signal.
I n p u t v o l t a g e (V)
S t e e r e d to r i g h t Center S t e e r e d to left
17-29
EPS Components
Circuit Diagram
RATTFRV
Or) UNDER-HOOD
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
B1
No. 1 (70 A) fl-WHT •

IGNITION
SWITCH
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
HI D2 F16 1
BLU YEL*
—WHT GRY*
No. 1 (100 A ) No. 2 (50 A ) No. 4 ( 7 . 5 A)
IG1 HOT in ON (II) «——c~ _ 1 2 L •BRN

and START (III) No. 10 (7.5 A) J
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE (TACH)
17
-BRN -
IG1
1
-WHT PCM
CANH
19
RED - •BLU <
NEP
CAN-L
A36
•WHT
CAN-H
A37
•RED •
CAN-L
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR ( D L C )
6
WHT
CANH
14
RED -
CAN-L
9
ORN — 3RN
SCS
7
LT BLU -
KLINE
17-30
EPS CONTROL UNIT
STEERING GEARBOX
EPS MOTOR ANGLE
SENSOR
POWER RELAY
-WHT • -BLU - -BRN
+B R1
-PNK -
YEL* 1
D16 R2
2
GRY* t REGULATOR T
"PNK -YEL
-BRN -
S3
-BRN - -BLK
S2
-BLU
D3
•BLU EPS MOTOR
NEP
-GRN • •RED
A1
-RED - BLK
C2
-BLU WHT -
PG
-BLK
1
G402
TORQUE
SENSOR
VS1
GRN H p— PNK VS1
WHT •
CANH CAN D9
CONTROLLER -BRN - •BLU/RED-
D15 PVF
RED
CANL
D8 3
T
— L T GRN - WHT/GRN-
r
D7 VS2
BRN VS2
SCS
D17
LT BLU •
-a-:12V
-O- :5V
* 1 : '06 m o d e l
«2: '07-09 m o d e l s
(cont'd)
17-31
EPS Components
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX U N D E R - D A S H FUSE/RELAY B O X

CONNECTOR B (IP) CONNECTOR Q(16P)
p n n n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 161
U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R F (34P)
1/ 3 4 51/ / | 8 9 / 11 /V 14|15 16|17 18 19

.20 / /
22 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
L u
G A U G E C O N T R O L M O D U L E (TACH) 36P C O N N E C T O R E P S C O N T R O L UNIT E P S C O N T R O L UNIT

C O N N E C T O R A (2P) C O N N E C T O R B (2P)
n n
/
1/, , 4 j 5 I 6 7 8 | 9 |10|11 / | 1 3 14 15 ' 6 17 18
/
K ) 2C! 21
/ / VV 2 7 | 2 8 | 2 9 | / '32 3c V VV
E P S C O N T R O L UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT TORQUE SENSOR

C O N N E C T O R C (2P) C O N N E C T O R D (28P) 3P C O N N E C T O R
p 7 8 9
1 ,/ | 3 , 4 r 'A 1 1 /112|13|14
1E; 16 r AA A A/ V ' / 26 27 28
EPS MOTOR EPS MOTOR EPS MOTOR ANGLE SENSOR

C O N N E C T O R A (2P) CONNECTOR B(1P) 6P C O N N E C T O R
Terminal side of m a l e terminals
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P) D A T A LINK C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
r
A /I 4 I5 I 6 7 8 I 9
m
10 / I 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 / / 4 5 6 7
/
19 / 12 / 14 / 16/
•
20 21 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 | / 3 1 | / 33 34 35
/
| 3613T 38 39 40 | / 42 43 44
17-32
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-01: Low/High IG1-terminal Voltage 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(Initial Diagnosis)
9. Wait at least 60 seconds.
DTC 11-02; Low/High IG1-terminai Voltage
(Regular Diagnosis) 10. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminals No. 16 and body
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ground.
EPS C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D ( 2 8 P )
2. Clear t h e DTC with the HDS.

iM3M//I7|8|9 10|/|12|13|14|
4. Start the engine, 115| 1 6 1 1 7 | / | / | / | / | / M / | / | 2 6 | 2 7 | 2 8
1 2
IG1 ( Y E L ) * ( G R Y ) *
5. Wait at least 60 seconds.
Does the EPS indicator come on?
Y E S — G o t o step 6. *1 : ' 0 6 m o d e l
* 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s
NO—Check for loose terminals or poor connections. W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

If the connections are good, the system is OK at
this time.B
is there battery voltage?
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). YES—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control
unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-82). •
NO—If there is no voltage, or the voltage is lower

than specified, repair an open or high resistance in
the wire between the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse In the
under-dash fuse/relay box and EPS control unit. If
the wire checks OK, check for a poor connection at
the 12 V battery (see page 22-61). If they are good,
go to the charging system indicator circuit
17-3
EPS Components
DTC 12-01: Low-High VBU Voltage (Regular 7. Reconnect the EPS control unit connector A (2P).
Diagnosis)
2. Check t h e BATTERY in t h e EPS DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is the voltage at 9.2- 17.4 V? 11. Start the engine.
YES—Check for loose terminals or poor 12. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
connections. If the connections are g o o d , the
system is OK at this time. • Is DTC 12-01 indicated?
N O — G o t o step 3. YES—Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-82).

NO—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
4. Check the No. 1 (70 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
relay box. troubleshooting. •
Is the fuse OK ? 13. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P) and
connector D (28P).
YES—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step
14. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit
13. connector A (2P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
NO—Go step 5.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A ( 2 P )
5. Disconnect the EPS control unit connector A (2P).

6. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector A (2P) terminal No. 2 and body ground.
E P S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A ( 2 P )
YES—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control

W i r e side of female terminals unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-82). H
NO—Repair open in the wire between the EPS
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire control unit and the No. 1 (70 A) fuse in the under-
between the EPS control unit and the No. 1 (EPS) hood fuse/relay b o x . H
(70 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay b o x . i l
NO—Install a new No. 1 (EPS) (70 A) fuse in the

under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 7.
17-34
DTC 21-01: Excessive Change of the Vehicle 7. Check for DTCs in the A/T system w i t h the HDS.
Speed Signal (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 21-02; Comparison between the Vehicle
Speed and the Engine Speed Signal (Regular YES—Troubleshoot the indicated DTC(s).B
Diagnosis)
NO—Go to step 8.
NOTE:
• If the MIL is on, troubleshoot the fuel and emissions 8. Start the engine, and check the tachometer.
systems first.
• Even though the system is operating normally, the Is the tachometer working correctly?
EPS indicator will come on caused by the detecting
condition of DTC 21-01 or DTC 21-02 w h e n you raise Y E S — G o t o step9.
the engine speed w i t h the vehicle stopped.
• Clear the DTC related to the ABS or VSA. NO—Troubleshoot the gauge control module (tach)
(see page 22-223). •
2. Raise the vehicle, and support it w i t h safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-10), and allow 10. Short the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
all wheels to rotate freely.
11. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P) and EPS control
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). unit connector D (28P).
4. VSA: Turn off the VSA by using the VSA OFF switch.
5. Start the engine, test the vehicle while in the D

position.
6. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST

with the HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
Y E S — T h e system is OK at this time. M
NO—Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
17-35
EPS Components
12, Check for continuity between EPS control unit 13. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminal No. 1 and PCM connector D (28P) terminal No. 15 and PCM
connector A (44P) terminal No. 36. connector A ( 4 4 P ) terminal No. 37.
EPS CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P) E P S CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR D (28P)

CAN-H (WHT)
1 | / | 3 | / | / / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/112|13|14|
/ | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14|
|15|16|17|/1/|/1^/1/1/I/I26l27|28
lWl6fm7M/l/l/V1/T/|26|27|28
1
,
1 7 ? !/1 4 7 8 |9
| 5 | 6 | L 1 7 ? / I 41 5 1 6 1 78 I 9 I
i
a
12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 10
/ 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19 •
p
10
20 21 / 23 24 25 • •
20 21 23 24 25
•
26 27 28 29|/|31|/ 33 34 35
26 27 28 291/1311/ 33 34 35
|36|37 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 L / | 4 2 43|44|
13613T 3 8 | 3 9 | 4 0 | / | 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
u i i u
CAN-H (WHT) CAN-L (RED)

Y E S — G o t o step 13. YES—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control

NO—Repair open in the wire between the EPS connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit
control unit and the PCM. • (see page 17-82). •

control unit and the PCM.B
17-36
DTC 22-01; Engine Speed Signal (initial 8. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit
Diagnosis) connector D (28P) terminal No. 3 and body ground.
NOTE: If the MIL is o n , troubleshoot the fuel and E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)

emissions systems first.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) . NEP (BLU)
"l l / l 3 1 / 1 / / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14|
2.. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
H5|16|17|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|26|27|28
4. Check the ENGINE SPEED in the EPS DATA LIST

X
w i t h the HDS.
Is there 0 rpm at idle?
YES—Goto step 5. Is there any voltage?
NO—The system is OK at this time. • Y E S — C h e c k for loose terminals in the EPS control
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-82). •
(cont'd)
17-37
EPS Components

9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 13. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminal No. 3 and PCM
10. Short the SCS line w i t h the HDS. connector A (44P) terminal No. 28.
11. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). W i r e side of female terminals
12. Check for continuity between EPS control unit NEP (BLU)
connector D (28P) terminal No. 3 and body g r o u n d .
/ l 7 1 8 1 9 10|/|12|13|14|
115|16|17|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|/126|27|28
NEP (BLU) /I 4 I5 I 6 I 7 8 I 9 I
•
'il/lsl/l/ A 7 I 8 | 910|/|12|13|14|
10
/
20 21
12. 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 25
m
H
|15|16|17|/I/|/|/|/|/|/|/126|Z7|28 26 27 2cJ 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35
136137 3|39|40 | / l 4 2 4 3 | 4 4 |
y
1 1 u
NEP (BLU)
Is there continuity? YES.—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1 and
between the EPS control unit and the PCM.B check. If the PCM was updated and DTCs are not
indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM
N O — G o t o step 13. was substituted and DTCs are not indicated,

control unit and the PCM.B
17-38
DTC 32-01: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit 5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
(Current Sensor) (Initial Diagnosis)
is DTC 32-01, 32-02, 35-01, 35-02, 35-04, 35-06,
DTC 32-02: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit 35-07, 36-02, or 37-01 indicated?
(Current Sensor) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 35-01: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
(CPU) (Initial Diagnosis/Regular Diagnosis) connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-82). •
DTC 35-02: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
(EEPROM) (Initial Diagnosis) NO—Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. •
(CPU Communication) (Regular Diagnosis)

(ITN Communication) (Regular Diagnosis)

(INHL/INHR Ports) (Initial Diagnosis/Regular
Diagnosis)

(iNH Output Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis)

(Step-up Circuit) (Initial Diagnosis)
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Check for loose terminals or poor connections.
this time. •
17-39
EPS Components
DTC 32^07: EPS Control Unit internal Circuit DTC 32-08; Current Sensor (Regular
(Current Sensor) (Steering Diagnosis) Diagnosis)
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC 32-09: Current Sensor (Initial Diagnosis)
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Start the engine. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and w a i t 4. Start the engine.
10 seconds or more.
5. Turn the steering wheel to the right or left, and wait
Does the EPS indicator come on? 10 seconds or more.
Y E S — G o t o step 6. Does the EPS indicator come on?
NO—Check for loose terminals or poor connections. YES—Goto step 6.

this t i m e . D NO—Check for loose terminals or poor connections.
6. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. this t i m e . H
Is DTC 32-07 indicated? 6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control Is DTC 32-08 or 32-09 indicated?
connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit YES—Goto step 7.
(see page 17-82). •
NO—Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are
NO—Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. •
17-40
8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (2P) and 10. Disconnect EPS motor connector B (1P) and EPS
connector C (2P). motor connector A (2P).
9. Check for continuity between the following 11... On the EPS motor side, check for continuity
terminals of the EPS control unit connector B (2P) between EPS motor connector B (1P) and EPS
and connector C (2P). motor connector A (2P).
EPS CONTROL U N I T EPS C O N T R O L U N I T EPS M O T O R EPS M O T O R

CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR C CONNECTOR B (IP) C O N N E C T O R A (2P)
No. 1 No. 1 No. 1
No. 1 Mo. 2 I No. 2
j No. 1 No. 1 No. 1
I wo. 2 No. 1 No. 2
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (2P) EPS M O T O R C O N N E C T O R B ( I P )
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Terminal side of male terminals
H-V (WHT)
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (2P) E P S M O T O R C O N N E C T O R A (2P)
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s Terminal side of male terminals
YES—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control YES—Repair open in the wire between the EPS
unit connectors and EPS motor connectors, and control unit and the EPS motor. •
repair if necessary. If no poor connections are
f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-82). NO—Open in the EPS motor wire, or the EPS motor
internal circuit, replace the EPS motor (see page
17-63).•
17-41
EPS Components
DTC 33-01: Lower FET Stuck ON (Initial 8. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
Diagnosis) control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C
DTC 33-06: Lower FET Stuck ON (Regular (2P) terminal No. 2 individually.
nmnnnsis)
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (2P)

Y E S — G o t o step 5. W i r e side of female terminals

If the connections are g o o d , the system is OK at
this t i m e . U E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (2P)
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC 33-01 or 33-06 indicated?

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Wire side of female terminals
7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector B (2P) and

connector C (2P). Is there continuity?
NO—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control

(see page 17-82).
17-42
9. Disconnect EPS motor connector B (1P) and EPS DTC 33-02: Upper FET Stuck ON (Initial
motor connector A (2P). Diagnosis)
10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS DTC 33-07: Upper FET Stuck ON (Regular
control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1, Diagnosis)
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
E P S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R B (2P)

Wire side of female terminals If the connections are good, the system is OK at
this t i m e . B

E P S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R C (2P)


Wire side of female terminals connector C (2P).


between the EPS control unit and EPS motor. M
NO—Short to body ground in the EPS motor w i r e ;

or a short in the EPS motor internal circuit, replace
the EPS motor (see page 17-63). •
(cont'd)
17-43
EPS Components

9. Measure the voltage between body ground and 11. Disconnect EPS motor connector B (1P) and EPS
EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1, motor connector A (2P).
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually. 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (2P) .
EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually.
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (2P)
YES—Go to step 10. W i r e side of female terminals
NO—Check for loose terminals at the EPS control

unit connectors and the EPS motor connectors, and Is there battery voltage?
repair if necessary. If no poor connections are
f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-82). YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
the EPS control unit and the EPS motor. •
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO—Short to power in the EPS motor w i r e ; or a
short in the EPS motor internal circuit, replace the
EPS motor (see page 17-63). •
17-44
DTC 34-01; Power Relay Stuck ON (IG Switch DTC 34-02; Fall-safe Relay Stuck ON (Initial
Is in LOCK (0)) Diagnosis)
1. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (ll). 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Does the EPS indicator come on? Does the EPS indicator come on?
Y E S — G o t o step 5. Y E S — G o to step 5.
NO—Check for loose terminals or poor connections. NO—Check for loose terminals or poor connections.
If the connections are g o o d , the system is OK at . If the connections are. g o o d , the system Is OK at
this time. • this time. 11
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC 34-01 indicated? Is DTC 34-02 indicated?
YES—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control Y E S — G o to step 6.

connections are found, replace the EPS control unit NO—Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are
(see page 17-82). • no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. ®
NO—Troubleshoot the indicated DTC. If there are 6 . Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connector C (2P).
(cont'd)
17-45
EPS Components
9. Measure the voltage between body ground and DTC 35-03: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
EPS control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1, (EPS CPU) (initial Diagnosis)
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually. DTC 35-05: EPS Control Unit Internal Circuit
(EPS Motor/EPS CPU) (Initial Diagnosis)
E P S C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R B (2P)
4 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals Y E S — G o t o step 5.

If the connections are g o o d , the system is OK at
this t i m e . B
6. Wait 10 seconds or more.

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
connections are found, replace the EPS control unit
(see page 1 7 - 8 2 ) . •
YES—-Repair short to power in the wire between no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. •
the EPS control unit and the EPS motor. H
NO—Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-82).

I
17-46
DTC 51-01: Low/High Voltage for the Torque 7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
Sensor (VT1 and VT2) (Regular Diagnosis)
8. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). connector D (28P) terminals No. 9 and No. 10.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC). E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)

k
4. Check the ADVT1 in the EPS DATA LIST with the
v
HDS. pV F (BRN)
VS1 (GRN)
PI
Is the voltage at 0.90- 3.55 V? 1 1 / 1 3 1 / 1 / / 7 | 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14|

115|16| 1 7 | / | / | / | / | / | / | / | / | 2 6 | 2 7 | 2 8
YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Go to step 6. W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
5. Check the ADVT2 in the EPS DATA LIST with the Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q?
HDS.
YES—Goto step 9.
Is the voltage at 1.02-3.73 V?
YES—Check for loose terminals or poor
connections. If the connections are good, the
system is OK at this time. •
(cont'd)
17-47
EPS Components
9. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit 11. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector f r o m
connector D (28P) terminals No. 8 and No. 9. the steering gearbox.

EPS C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)
connector D (28P) terminal No. 9 and body ground.
-\ E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)
V S 2 (LT GRN) PVF(BRN)

P V F (BRN)
\\Az\A/ / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/]12|13|14|
1 1/1 3 | / | // | 7 | 8 | 9 1 0 / | 1 2 | 1 3 | 1 4 |
|15|16|17|/|/|/|/|///|/|26|27|28
115|16| 1 7 | / | / | / / | / | / | / | / | 2 6 | 2 7 | 2 8
Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q? W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit between the torque sensor and the EPS control
connector D (28P) terminal No. 9 and body g r o u n d . unit.B
NO—Faulty torque sensor (short in the sensor

internal circuit), replace the steering gearbox
(see page 17-65). •
P V F (BRN)
/ | 7 | 8 | 9 10L/|12|13|14|
|l5|l6|n|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|26|27|28

(see page 1 7 - 8 2 ) . •
17-48
13. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector f r o m 15. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector f r o m
the steering gearbox. the steering gearbox.
14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance 16. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
between torque sensor terminals No. 1 and No. 2. between torque sensor terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
T O R Q U E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R T O R Q U E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
T e r m i n a l side of male terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q? Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q?
YES—Repair open or short between the PNK and YES—Repair open or short between the WHT/GRN
BLU/RED wires in the torque sensor circuit between and BLU/RED wires in the torque sensor circuit
the torque sensor and the EPS control unit.H between the torque sensor and the EPS control
unit.H
NO—Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the
internal circuit), replace the steering gearbox NO—Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the
(see page 17-65). • internal circuit), replace the steering gearbox
(see page 1 7 - 6 5 ) . •
17-49
EPS Components
DTC 51-02; Torque Sensor (VT3 Differential- 7. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P).
amplification Function) (Regular Diagnosis)
8. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
DTC 51-03: Torque Sensor (VT1 VT2 Rapid- f
connector D (28P) terminals No. 9 and No. 10.
change) (Regular Diagnosis)
EPS C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O h D (28P)
DTC 51-06: Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2
Average) (Regular Diagnosis)
DTC 51-07: Torque Sensor (VT1, VT2 Initial

Check) (Initial Diagnosis)
il/lsbV / ] 7 | 8 | 9 10|/112|13|14|
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). |15|16|17|/1/|/|/|/|/|/I/|26|27|28

4. Start the engine. Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q ?
Does the EPS indicator come on? YES—Goto step 9.
YES—Goto step 5. N O — G o t o step 13.

If the connections are g o o d , the system is OK at 9. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
this t i m e . B connector D (28P) terminals No. 8 and No. 9.
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)
Is DTC 51-02, 51-03, 51-06, or 51-07 indicated?
VS2 (LT G R N ) PVF (BRN)
no DTCs, the system is OK at this t i m e . • 1 V\ 3 \/\A/\ T I S j 9 lloL/112113114
Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q?
YES—Goto step 10.
NO—Go to step 15.
17-50
10. Check for continuity between EPS control unit 12. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector D (28P) terminal No. 9 and body ground. connector D (28P) terminal No. 9 and body ground.
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P) E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)
P V F (BRN) P V F (BRN)
1 | / | 3 | / | / / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14| / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/12|13|14|
V | 3 / /
115|16| 17|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|26|27|28 H5|16|17|/|/|/|/|//|/|/26|27|28
Wire side of female terminals W i r e side of female terminals
YES—Goto step 11. YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the torque sensor and the EPS control
NO—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control unit.H
connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit NO—Faulty torque sensor (short in the sensor
(see page 17-65). •
11. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector f r o m
the steering gearbox.
(cont'd)
17-51
EPS Components
13. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector f r o m 15. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector f r o m
the steering gearbox. the steering gearbox.
14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance 16. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
between torque sensor terminals No. 1 and No. 2. between torque sensor terminals No. 2 and No. 3.
T O R Q U E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R T O H Q U E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q? Is the resistance between 12— 15 Q?
YES—Repair open or short between the PNK and YES —Repair open or short between the BLU/RED
BLU/RED wires in the torque sensor circuit between and WHT/GRN wires in the torque sensor circuit
the torque sensor and the EPS control u n i t . B between the torque sensor and the EPS control
unit.B
NO—Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the
internal circuit), replace the steering gearbox NO—Faulty torque sensor (short or open in the
(see page 17-65). •
17-52
DTC 61-04: Open/Short In the EPS Motor 9. Check for continuity between the following
Harness (Steering Diagnosis) terminals of EPS control unit connector B (2P) and
connector C (2P).
E P S CONTROL UNIT EPS CONTROL UNIT
CONNECTOR B CONNECTOR C
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. No. 1 No. 1
No. 1 No. 2
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). No. 1
No. 2
10 seconds or more.

this t i m e . B E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (2P)

is DTC 61-04 indicated?
no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. B

connector C (2P).
(cont'd)
17-53
EPS Components

10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS 12. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1, control unit connector B (2P) terminal No. 1,
connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C connector C (2P) terminal No. 1, and connector C
(2P) terminal No. 2 individually. (2P) terminal No. 2 individually.
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (2P) E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (2P)
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (2P) E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R C (2P)
Y E S — G o t o step 11. YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the EPS control unit and the EPS motor. •
unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor NO—Short to the body ground in the EPS motor
connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit w i r e , or EPS motor internal circuit, replace the EPS
(see page 17-82). • motor (see page 17-63). •
11. Disconnect EPS motor connector B (1P) and EPS

motor connector A (2P).
17-54
13. Disconnect EPS motor connector B (1P) and EPS DTC 71-01: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/
motor connector A (2P). COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis)
14. On the EPS motor side, check for continuity DTC 71-02: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Neutral
between the following terminals of EPS motor Position Learning of SIN/COS) (Initial
connector B (1P) and EPS motor connector A (2P). Diagnosis)
EPS MOTOR EPS MOTOR
CONNECTOR B(1P) C O N N E C T O R A (2P)
DTC 71-03: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/
I No. 1
COS Signals) (Steering Diagnosis)
I __ N o . 2
No. 1 ^ No. 1 DTC 71-05: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (SIN/
No. 1 ^ No. 2 COS Signals Changing Amount) (Steering
Diagnosis)
E P S M O T O R C O N N E C T O R B (1P)
DTC 71-06: EPS Motor Angle Sensor (Neutral
Position of SIN/COS) (Initial Diagnosis)
E P S M O T O R C O N N E C T O R A <2P) 4. Start the engine.

Is there continuity? 10 seconds or more.
YES—Repair open in the wire between the EPS Does the EPS indicator come on?
control unit and the EPS motor. •
NO—Open in the EPS motor wire , or EPS motor
internal circuit, replace the EPS motor (see page NO—Check for loose terminals or poor connections.
17-63). • If the connections are good, the system is OK at
this t i m e . B
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 71-01, 71-02, 71-03, 71-05, or 71-06

indicated?

no DTCs, the system is OK at this time. H
(cont'd)
17-55
EPS Components

8. Disconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). 10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
control unit connector D (28P) terminal No. 12,
9. Measure the resistance between the f o l l o w i n g terminal No. 13, terminal No. 14, terminal No. 26,
terminals of EPS control unit connector D (28P). terminal No. 27, and terminal No. 28 individually.
E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R 0 (28P)
S1 (PNK)
N o . 13 ( R l ) N o . 2 7 (R2)
Rl(BLU)
N o . 12 ( S I ) No. 26 (S3)
S 2 (BRN)
N o . 14 ( S 2 ) No. 28 (S4)
1 l / l 3 1/1/ / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/12|13|14|
|15|16|17|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|26|27|28
R1(BLU)
S1 (PNK) S2
(BRN)
V115|16|
- 3 1. /7 V / | 7 | 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14|
|/|/|//|/|/|/|/|26|27|28
S 3 (BRN)

Is the resistance between R1—R2 13—25 Q, Is there continuity?

S1-S3 26- 49 Q , and S2- S4 26- 49 Q ?
Y E S - G o t o s t e p 11.
N O — G o t o step 13. unit connectors, and repair if necessary. If no poor
(see page 17-82). H
11. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P

connector.
17-56
On the sensor side, check for continuity between 13. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P
body ground and EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector.
connector terminal No. 1, terminal No. 2, terminal
No. 3, terminal No. 4, terminal No. 5, and terminal 14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
No. 6 individually. between the following terminals of the EPS motor
angle sensor 6P connector.
EPS M O T O R A N G L E S E N S O R 6 P C O N N E C T O R
E P S M O T O R A N G L E S E N S O R 6P C O N N E C T O R
R1 ( B R N )
No.2(R1) N o . 5 (R2)
No. 1 (S1) No. 4 (S3)
No. 3 (S2) No. 6 (S4)
R l (BRN)
S I (YEL)
S3 (BLU)
R2 (GRN)
YES—Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (Internal

failure), or short to body ground in the wire (sensor
side), replace the EPS motor (see page 17-63). •
Is the resistance between R1—R2 13-25 Q,
NO —Repair short to body ground in the wire S1-S3 26-49 Q, and S2- S4 26- 49 Q ?
between the EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector
and the EPS control unit. • YES—Open in the wire between the EPS motor
angle sensor 6P connector and the EPS control
unit. •
NO—Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (internal

failure), or open in the wire (sensor side), replace
the EPS motor (see page 17-63). •
17-57
EPS Components
DTC 71-04: Motor Angle Sensor (Check 9. Measure the resistance between EPS control unit
Signals) (Regular diagnosis) connector D (28P) terminals No. 13 and No. 27.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R D (28P)
2. Clear the rrrr w i t h the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). R1(BLU)

1 8 9
A11 10|/112|13|14|
|15|16|17|/|/1/|/|/1/1/I/|26|Z7|28
R2 (PNK)
10 seconds or more.
Does the EPS indicator come on? W i r e side of female terminals
Is the resistance between 13—25 Q ?
If the connections are good, the system is OK at Y E S — G o t o step 10.
this time. • NO—Go to step 13.
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 10. Check for continuity between body ground and EPS
control unit connector D (28P) terminal No. 13 and
Is DTC 71-04 indicated? the terminal No. 27 individually.
R1(BLU)
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). A 7 I 8 I 10|/|12|13|14|

9
|15|16|17|/|/|/V|/VM/|26|27|28
R2 (PNK)

(see page 17-82). H
17-58
11. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P 13. Disconnect the EPS motor angle sensor 6P
connector. connector.
12. On the sensor side, check for continuity between 14. On the sensor side, measure the resistance
body ground and EPS motor angle sensor 6 P between the EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector
connector terminal No. 2 and the terminal No. 5 terminals No. 2 and No. 5.
individually.
EPS M O T O R ANGLE S E N S O R SP C O N N E C T O R
R1 (BRN)
R1 ( B R N ) JfjtJ LJf)l
1 2 3 \
u 5 6 If
R2 (GRN)
(C
^

Is the resistance between 13—25 Q ?

YES—Open in the wire between the EPS motor
YES—Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (internal angle sensor 6P connector and EPS control u n l t . B
failure), or short to body ground in the wire (sensor
side), replace the EPS motor (see page 17-63). • NO—Faulty EPS motor angle sensor (internal
failure), or open in the wire (sensor side), replace
NO—Repair short to body ground in the wire the EPS motor (see page 17-63). •
between the EPS motor angle sensor 6 P connector
and the EPS control unit. •
17-59
EPS Components
Symptom Troubleshooting
EPS indicator does not come on EPS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs
are stored
EPS indicator. NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs w i t h the HDS (see page
22-6). If gauge DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those
Does the EPS indicator come on? DTCs first.
Y E S — T h e system is OK at this t i m e . • 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO—Troubleshoot the gauge control module (tach) 2. Check the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
(see page 22-223). • relay box.
Is the fuse OK ?
YES—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 7.

l/l 3 | / | // | 7 | 8 | 9 10/|12|13|14|
|15|16|17|/|/|/|/1/|/|/|/|26|Z7|28
1 2
IG1 ( Y E L ) * (GRY)*
*1 : ' 0 6 m o d e l
* 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s ,

between the EPS control unit and the No. 4 (7.5 A)
fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. 11
NO—Install a new No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-

dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 5.
17-60
5. Reconnect EPS control unit connector D (28P). 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and watch the 11. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P).
EPS indicator.
Dose the EPS indicator come on, then go off? connector A (2P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. If any other E P S C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (2P)

DTCs are indicated, go to the indicated DTCs
PG (BLK)
NO—Replace the EPS control unit (see page 17-82).
9. Measure the voltage between EPS control unit W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

YES—Goto step 13.

\\AAAA A 7 I 8 | 9 10|/|12|13|14|
|15|16|17|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|/|26|27|28 NO—Repair open in the wire between the EPS
IG1 ( Y E L ) * 1
(GRY)* 2 control unit and body ground (G402). •
*1 : ' 0 6 m o d e l
*2: '07-09 m o d e l s
is there battery voltage?

control unit and under-dash fuse/relay b o x . B
(cont'd)
17-61
EPS Components
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd!
13. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P 15. Check for continuity between EPS control unit
connector. connector D (28P) terminal No. 15 and gauge
control module (tach) 36P connector terminal
14. Check f o r continuity between EPS control unit No. 19.
connector D (28P) terminal No. 1 and gauge control
module (tach) 36P connector terminal No. 1.
W i r e side of female terminals / ] 7 | 8 | 9 10M12|13|14J
CAN-H (WHT) 115|16| 17|/M/|/|/|/M/|26|27|28

I C A N - L (RED)
/17I8I9 10|/|12|13|14|
H5|l6|l7M/|/M/|/!//|/|26|27|28 1 1
1 | / | / | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 | 1 0 | 1 1 / | 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 | 1 7 1B|
119)20(211/1/1/|/|/|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/1/|/
—I C A N - L ( R E D )
/ l / | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9|10|11 / | 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 | 1 7 18
|19|20|21I/|/|/1/|/|27|28|29|/|/|32|33|/|/|/ Wire side of female terminals
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity ?
Is there continuity? YES—Check for loose terminals in the EPS control

YES—Goto step 15. connections are f o u n d , replace the EPS control unit
(see page 17-82). •
NO —Repair open in the wire between the EPS
control unit and the gauge control module (tach).H NO—Repair open in the wire between the EPS
control unit and the gauge control module (tach). a
17-62
EPS motor Removal and instaiiatiot
NOTE: 3. Remove the EPS motor (A) f r o m the steering
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials to gearbox, then remove the O-ring (B) and discard it.
enter the steering gearbox.
• Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if you have silicone grease on your hands
or gloves.
Removal
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-65).
2. Disconnect the torque sensor 3P connector (A) f r o m

the steering gearbox, then remove the w i r e 8 x 1.25 mm
harness clamp bolts and the ground terminal (B).
(cont'd)
17-63
EPS Components
EPS Motor Removal and Installation (cont'd!
Installation 8. Connect the torque sensor 3P connector (A) to the

wire steering gearbox, then install the wire harness
1. Clean the mating surface of the EPS motor (A) and clamp bolts and the ground terminal (B).
the steering gearbox.
9. Finish the installation, and note these items;

2. Apply a thin coat of silicone grease to the new
O-ring (B), and carefully fit it on the EPS motor. • Make sure the torque sensor 3P connector is
properly connected.
3. Apply steering grease into the EPS motor shaft (C). • Make sure the EPS motor and the EPS wires are
not caught or pinched by any parts.
4. Set the EPS motor on the steering gearbox by
engaging the EPS motor shaft and the w o r m shaft 10. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-71).
(D).
5. Turn the EPS motor t w o or three times to the right

and left about 45 degrees. Make sure the EPS
motor is evenly seated on the steering gearbox,
and that the O-ring is not pinched between the
mating surfaces.
6. Loosely install the EPS motor mounting bolts (E),

then turn the steering shaft t w o or three times to
the right and left about 45 degrees.
7. Tighten the EPS motor mounting bolts to the

specified torque.
17-64
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required 8. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering
• Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120 column to the full tilt up position, and to the full
• Ball joint remover, 28 m m 07MAC-SL0A202 telescopic in position.
• 2006 Civic engine hanger VSB02C000025 * 9. Tighten the lock lever.
• : These special tools are available through the Honda 10. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column w i t h a
Tool and Equipment Program, 888-424-6857 piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (C) of the
, lower slide shaft and the joint yoke (D) of the upper •
Note these items during removal; shaft to prevent the slider shaft f r o m pulling out.
• Use solvent and a brush to wash any oil and dirt off
the end of the steering gearbox. Avoid any electrical
parts. Blow dry w i t h compressed air. Wear eye
protection.
• Make sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint to avoid damaging
the cable reel may occur.
Removal

(see page 22-62).
2. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel

(see page 20-140).
3. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it w i t h

safety stands in the proper locations (see page 11. Release the lock lever, and adjust the steering
1-10). column to the full telescopic out position, then
tighten the lock lever.
12. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), and disconnect
5. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-6). the steering joint by moving the steering joint (B)
toward the column.
6. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-184), and
the driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-90).
7. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
A
8 x 1.25 mm
(cont'd)
17-65
EPS Components
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation (cont'd)
13. Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped), and 15. Install the front leg assembly (A), hook (B), and
discard it. The center guide is for factory assembly w i n g nut (C) f r o m an A and Reds engine support
use only. hanger (AAR-T1256) onto the 2006 civic engine
to the universal eyelet (D). Tighten the w i n g nut by
hand to lift and support the engine/transmission.

windshield.
VSB02C000025
AAR-T1256
14. Install the universal eyelet (07AAK-SNAA120) to the

threaded hole (A) on the cylinder head w i t h a 10 x
1.25 m m bolt (B).
07 A A K - S N A A 1 2 0
16. Remove the cotter pin (A) f r o m the 12 m m nut (B),

and loosen the nut.
Replace.
12 M 1.25 m m
07MAC-SL0A202
17. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and the knuckle using
the ball joint remover (see page 18-12).
17-66
18. Remove the front splash shield (A) (see page 20. Remove the lower ball joint mounting bolt (A) and
20-148), and the front undercover (B) (see page the self-locking nuts (B) f r o m the lower a r m .
20-150).
19. Disconnect the EPS motor connector A (2P), the 12 x 1.25 mm

EPS motor connector B (1P), torque sensor 4P Replace.
connector (C), the EPS motor angle sensor 6P
connector (D) f r o m passenger's side of the steering 2 1 . Disconnect the lower arm f r o m the lower ball
gearbox. Wrap the connectors w i t h vinyl tape to housing.
avoid contamination f r o m grease or water.
22. Remove the exhaust hanger (A) f r o m the under-
floor three w a y catalytic converter (TWC) (B).
(cont'd)
17-67
EPS Components
Steering Gearbox Removal and Installation (cont'd!
23. Note the reference marks (A) on both sides of the 26. Remove the front subframe middle mount bolt (A)
front subframe that line up w i t h the body (B). f r o m the left side.
27. Remove the front subframe middle mount bolt (A)

24. Attach the front subframe adaptor (VSB02C000016) f r o m the right side.
(A) to the front subframe (B) and the transmission
VSB02C000016
25. Make sure the front subframe is securely supported

by the jack w i t h the front subframe adaptor.
17-68
28. Remove the lower torque rod mounting bolts (A) 30. Remove the front subframe rear mounting bolts (A)
f r o m the lower torque rod bracket. f r o m the right and left sides of the vehicle.
A
14x 1.5 mm
Replace.
3 1 . Lower the front subframe and steering gearbox as

an assembly by lowering the jack slowly.
32. Remove the heat shield (A) f r o m the front subframe,

then remove the harness clips (B).
(cont'd)
17-69
EPS Components
33. Remove the EPS motor connector A (2P), the EPS 35. Remove the t w o 10 m m bolts from the right side of
motor connector B (1P), torque sensor 4P connector the steering gearbox, then remove the gearbox
(C) the EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector (D)
r mounting bracket (A) and the mounting cushion (B).
f r o m the passenger's side of the gearbox mounting
bracket (E).
36. Remove the four 10 m m flange bolts f r o m the left

side of the steering gearbox, then remove the
34. Remove the pinion shaft g r o m m e t (A) f r o m the top stiffener plates (A).
of the torque sensor.
37. Remove the steering gearbox (B) f r o m the front

subframe.
17-70
Installation 5. Tighten the 10 m m bolts on both sides of the
steering gearbox to the specified torque alternately
1. Place the steering gearbox in position on the front in t w o or more steps.
subframe.
6. Install the pinion shaft g r o m m e t (A). Align the slot
2. Loosely install the stiffener plates (A), and the in the pinion shaft g r o m m e t with the lug portion (B)
gearbox mounting bolts on the left side of the on the torque sensor. The g r o m m e t must not have
steering gearbox. a gap at the mating surface of the g r o m m e t and the
torque sensor.
10 x 1.25 mm 1 0 x 1.25 m m
5 9 N-m 54 N-m
(6.0 k g f - m , 4 3 ibf-ft) (5.5 k g f - m ,
4 0 Ibf-ft)
10 x 1.25 m m
54 N m
(5.5 k g f - m ,
4 0 Ibf-ft)
Install the EPS motor connector A (2P), the EPS

motor connector B (1P), torque sensor 4P connector
Position the cutout (A) on the mounting cushion (B) (C), the EPS motor angle sensor 6P connector (D)
as shown, and install it on the right side of the on the right side of the gearbox mounting bracket.
steering gearbox securely.
10 x 1.25 m m
38 N m
(3.9 k g f - m ,
2 8 Ibf-ft)
4. Install the gearbox mounting bracket (C) over the

mounting cushion, and loosely install the t w o
10 m m bolts.
(cont'd)
17-71
EPS Components

8. Install the harness clips (A) to the heat shield (B), 11. Tighten the new front subframe rear mounting
then Install the heat shield to the front subframe. bolts (A) to the specified torque.
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibfft)
A
14 x 1.5 mm
103 N m
(10.5 kgf-m, 75.9 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
9. Carefully raise the front subframe w i t h the front
subframe adapter and the transmission jack or the
powertrain lift until the front subframe is in position, 12. Tighten the new front subframe front mounting
then loosely install the new front subframe bolts (A) to the specified torque.
m o u n t i n g bolts.
NOTE: Be sure that the pinion shaft g r o m m e t is in

place securely. Check whether the pinion shaft
g r o m m e t is not turning up. Incorrect installation
can cause leakage of water, m u d , and noise.
10. Align the front subframe reference marks (A) to the

body (B), as noted during removal.
14 x 1.5 m m
1 0 3 N-m
f^Sy (10.5 kgf-m,
75.9 Ibfft)
Replace.
17-72
13. Install the lower torque rod mounting bolts (A), and 15. Install the new front subframe middle mount bolt
tighten t h e m to the specified torque. (A) on the right side, and tighten it to the specified
torque.
12 x 1.25 m m
6 4 N-m
(6.5 k g f - m ,
47 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
A*~ \ o
12 x 1.25 mm
6 4 N-m 16. Lower the transmission jack supporting the front
subframe.
14. Install the new front subframe middle mount bolt 17. Install the exhaust hanger (A) to the under-floor
(A) on the left side, and tighten it to the specified three way catalytic converter (TWC) (B).
torque.
1 2 x 1.25 m m
64 N-m
(6.5 k g f - m ,
47 lbf-ft)
Replace.
(cont'd)
17-73
EPS Components
#
Steering Gearbox Removal and :ion (cont d)
18. Connect the lower arm (A) to the lower ball joint (B). 2 1 . Install the front splash shield (A) (see page 20-148),
and the front undercover (B) (see page 20-150).
E
12x1.25 m m 12x1.25 m m Replace.
59 Nm 5 9 N-m
22. Wipe off any grease contamination f r o m the ball
(6.0 kgf-m, 4 3 Ibf-ft) (6.0 kgf-m, 4 3 Ibf-ft) joint tapered section and the threads. Reconnect
Replace. Replace. the tie-rod ends (A) to the steering knuckles. Install
the 12 m m nut (B), and tighten it.
19. Install a new flange bolt and the new self-locking
C
nuts. After lightly tightening all three fasteners,
Replace.
tighten t h e m to the specified torque in the
following order; the self-locking nut on the front (C),
the self-locking nut on the rear (D), then the flange
bolt(E).
20. Remove the vinyl tape, then connect the EPS motor
connector A (2P), the EPS motor connector B (1P),
torque sensor 4P connector (C), the EPS motor
angle sensor 6P connector (D) to the steering
gearbox. Make sure to push these connectors until
you hear a click so that the connectors are secured.
23. Install the new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown
(D)or(E).
24. Install the front wheel, then set the wheels in the
straight ahead position.
NOTE; Before installing the wheel, clean the mating

surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
25. Lower the vehicle. Remove the engine hanger and

universal eyelet.
26. Remove the engine hanger and universal eyelet
17-74
27. Center the steering rack w i t h i n its stroke in the 30. Install the steering joint cover (A).
steering joint connection.
28. W i t h the rack in the straight ahead driving position,

cut the wire (A) and slip the lower end of the
steering joint onto the pinion shaft (B) in the range
shown.
3 1 . Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page

20-90).
32. Install the under-cowl panel and cowl cover

(see page 20-140).
33. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-9), and the
driver's airbag (see page 24-184).
29. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, and loosely
install the joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint bolt is
securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. Pull on
the steering joint to make sure that the steering
joint is fully seated. Tighten the steering joint bolt
to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
17-75
EPS Components
34. W i t h the tires raised off the ground (vehicle on a 35. Do the battery reconnection procedure (see page
lift), check for the following s y m p t o m s by turning 22-62), and do these tasks:
the steering wheel fully to the right and left several
times. NOTE: If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays
Symptom Probable cause 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in P or N)
Rubbing sound Steering column joint until the BAT displays at least three segments.
coming f r o m the is contacting the cover.
lower steering • Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and check that
c o l u m n area. the SRS indicator should comes on for about 6
Grating sound f r o m Poor engagement of seconds and then goes off.
the lower steering the pinion shaft splines. • Make sure the horn and turn signal switches
column area, or a work properly.
rough feeling during • Make sure the steering wheel switches w o r k
steering. properly.
Noise f r o m around Poor engagement of
the steering wheel the SRS cable reel w i t h 36. After installation, do the following checks:
during steering. the steering wheel, or a
damaged cable reel. • Check the steering wheel spoke angle. If steering
spoke angles to the right and left are not equal
(steering wheel and rack are not centered),
correct the engagement of the joint/pinion shaft
• splines.
•' Do the memorizing for the torque sensor neutral
position (see page 17-22).
• Set the steering column to the center tilt position,
and to the center telescopic position, then do the
front toe inspection (see page 18-6).
• Start the engine, and let it idle. Turn the steering
wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several times. Check that
the EPS indicator does not come on.
17-76
Rack End Removal and Installation
Exploded view
O-RING • 8 x 1.25 mm
GROUND TERMINAL Replace. 20 N-m
(2.0 k g f - m , 14 Ibf-ft)
TORQUE SENSOR
EPS MOTOR
If t h e E P S m o t o r i s f a u l t y ,
r e p l a c e it.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
TORQUE SENSOR
ASSEMBLY
If t h e t o r q u e s e n s o r
is d a m a g e d o r f a u l t y ,
replace t h e steering gearbox
as a n a s s e m b l y .
GEARBOX HOUSING
MOUNT CUSHION
Inspect f o r d a m a g e a n d deterioration. LOCKNUT
RACK GUIDE SCREW
SPRING
GEARBOX MOUNT CUSHION

Inspect f o r d a m a g e a n d deterioration.
R U B B E R STOP
Replace.
TIE-ROD CLIP
LOCK WASHER
Replace.
-LOCKNUT
14 x 1.5 mm
4 4 N-m
RACKEND (4.5 k g f - m ,
93 N m 33 Ibfft)
(9.5 k g f - m , 6 9 I b f f t )
Inspect for faulty BOOT
movement and damage Inspect f o r d a m a g e a n d deterioration.
(cont'd)
17-77
EPS Components
#
Rack End Removal and Installation (cont d)
Removal 2. Unbend the lock washer (A).
A
NOTE: Do not allow d u s t d i r t or other foreign materials
to enter the steering gearbox.
1. Remove the boot bands (A), and discard t h e m .

Remove the tie-rod clips (B), and pull the boots
away f r o m the ends of the gearbox.
A
Replace.
3. Hold the surface sections (A) of the steering rack (B)

w i t h one wrench, and unscrew both rack ends (C)
w i t h another wrench. Be careful not to damage the
rack shaft surface w i t h the wrench.
Replace. E'
Replace.
4. Remove the lock washer (D) and rubber stop (E).
17-78
Installation 4. Apply multipurpose grease to the circumference of
the rack end joint housing (A) and lock washer.
1. Install a new rubber stop (A) and a new lock washer
(B). Align the lock washer tabs <C) w i t h the slots (D)
on the rack end (E) while holding the lock washer in
place. Repeat this step for the other side of the rack
shaft.
(P/N 0 8 7 9 8 - 9 0 1 3 )
5. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (P/N

08798-9013) to the boot fitting grooves (B) on the
rack ends.
NOTE: Make sure not to get any silicone grease on

the terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if you have silicone grease on your
hands or gloves.
2. Hold the flat surface sections of the steering rack

w i t h one wrench, and tighten both rack ends w i t h
another wrench. Be careful not to damage the rack
surface w i t h the wrench.
3. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots
(B) on the rack end ball joint housing.
A
(cont'd)
17-79
EPS Components
Rack End Removal and Installation t'd)
6. Center the steering rack within its stroke. 10. Close the ear portion (A) of the band (B) w i t h
commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098' or
7. Clean off any grease or contamination f r o m the equivalent (C).
boot installation grooves (A) around the gearbox
housing. Install the boots (B) on the rack ends w i t h
the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end in the
installation grooves in the housing properly.
11. Slide the rack shaft right and left to be certain that
the boots are not deformed or twisted.
8. After Installing the boots, w i p e the grease off the

thread section (D) of the rack end.
9. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)

w i t h the holes (B) of the band.
17-80
Rack Guide Removal/Installation
NOTE: During removal/installation, do not allow dust, 4. Apply multipurpose grease to the new O-ring, t h e n
dirt, or other foreign materials to enter the steering install it to the rack guide.
gearbox.
5. A p p l y multipurpose grease to the sliding surface
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-65). and the circumference of the rack guide, and install
it onto the gearbox housing. Wipe the grease off
2. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide the threaded section of the housing.
screw (B), the spring (C), the disc washer (D), and
the rack guide (E). 6. Apply multipurpose grease to both ends of the
spring and install it onto the gearbox housing.
7. Install the disc washer with its convex side facing

the rack guide.
8. Remove the old sealant f r o m the rack guide screw

and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or Loctite
5699) to the middle of the threads. Loosely install
the rack guide screw on the steering gearbox.
NOTE: if more than 5 minutes has passed after

applying the sealant, remove the old sealant and
residue, and reapply new sealant.
9. Loosely install the locknut.
10. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-16).

After adjusting, check that the rack moves
smoothly by sliding the rack right and left.
3. Replace the O-ring (F) f r o m the rack guide. Wipe
the grease off the sliding surface of the rack guide.
17-81
EPS Components
EPS Control Unit Removal/lnstallati© i
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure 7. Install the EPS control unit in the reverse order of
(see page 22-62). removal.
2. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover 8. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
(see page 20-90). (see page 22-62), and do these tasks:
3. Remove the passenger's kick panel (see page NOTE:

20-54). • If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays no
4. Disconnect EPS control unit connector A (2P), 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in Park or
connector B (2P), connector C (2P), and connector D neutral) until the BAT displays at least three
(28P). segments.
• If the EPS control unit is replaced, the EPS control
unit must memorize the torque sensor neutral
position (see page 17-22).
9. After installation, start the engine, and let it idle.

Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock-to-lock several
times. Check that the EPS indicator does not come
on.
B D
5. Remove the nuts (E) f r o m the EPS control unit (F).
6. Remove the EPS control unit.
17-82
Tie-rod End Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Install the new tie-rod ball joint boot (A) using the
Bushing base 07JAF-SH20330 bushing base. The boot must not have a gap at the
boot installation sections (B). After installing the
1. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint f r o m the knuckle boot, check the ball pin tapered section for grease
(see step 16 on page 17-66). contamination, and wipe it if necessary.
2. Remove the tie-rod end f r o m the rack end.
3. Remove the tie-rod ball joint boot f r o m the tie-rod

end, and wipe the old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area of the ball pin (A) w i t h fresh

multipurpose grease.
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
8. Connect the tie-rod ball joint to the knuckle (see


5. Pack the interior of the new tie-rod ball joint boot

(B) and lip (C) w i t h fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:

• Keep grease off the boot mounting area (D) and
the tapered section (E) of the ball pin.
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot.
17-83
EPS Components
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove a steering gearbox (see page 17-65). 6. Position a 34 m m socket wrench on the flange part
of the gearbox housing w i t h a washer, flange bolt,
2. Position a 34 m m socket wrench (A) on the flange and a nut as shown.
part of the gearbox housing w i t h a washer (B), a
10 x 105 m m flange bolt (C), and a 10 m m nut (D) as 7. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the
shown. nut until the mount cushion edges (A) contact the
gearbox flange surface.
TOT
8. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-71).
3. Hold the 10 m m nut with a wrench, and tighten the 9. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
10 x 105 m m flange bolt w i t h another wrench. necessary (see page 18-6).
Remove the gearbox mount cushion (E).
4. Apply a m i l d soap and water solution to the new

gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place the
mount cushion on the gearbox mounting cushion
hole.
5. Using a flat-tipped screwdriver, push the edge of

the mount cushion (B) until it is about 1/3 of the
w a y into the gearbox housing.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the surface of the

mount cushion w h e n pushing it w i t h the flat-tipped
screwdriver.
17-84
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension

Special Tools 18-2
Component Location Index ....... 18-3
Wheel Alignment 18-6
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection 18-10
Wheel Runout Inspection 18-10
Wheel Bolt Replacement 18-11
BallJoint Removal 18-12
Ball Joint Boot Inspection/Replacement 18-13
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement 18-14
Lower BallJoint Replacement 18-20
Lower A r m Removal/Installation 18-22
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation 18-25
Stabilizer Bar Replacement 18-25
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation .................. 18-26
Damper/Spring Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly 18-28
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement .................... 18-31
Upper A r m Removal/Installation 18-38
Trailing A r m Removal/Installation 18-39
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation 18-40
Stabilizer Bar Replacement 18-41
Damper Replacement 18-42
Spring Replacement 18-45
TPMS {Tire Pressure Monitoring Sf stem)

('08-09 USA Models) 18-51
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool N u m b e r Description Qty
© 07AAA-SVAA100 Strut Nut Adapter
® 07AAF-SDAA100 Ball J o i n t Thread Protector, 12 m m 1
© 07 AAF-S VAA100 Bushing Driver 1
© 07AAF-SVAA200 Receiver Set 1
® 07GAF-SE00100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
© 07GAF-SE00200 Attachment, 40 m m 1
® 07MAC-SL0A102 Ball Joint Remover, 32 m m 1
© 07MAC-SL0A202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 m m 1
© 071AF-S3VA000 Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 m m 1
- ® 07746-0010500 Attachment, 62 x 68 m m 1
© 07749-0010000 Driver Handle 1
© • 07965-SD90100 Support Base 1
© © ® © ©
© ®,® © ® ©
18-2
Front Suspension
WHEEL BOLT
Component Location index (cont'd)
Rear Suspension - Disc Brake Type
SPRING
R e m o v a l , p a g e 18-46
DAMPER
R e m o v a l , p a g e 18-43
KNUCKLE/
HUB BEARING UNIT
{MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement,
p a g e 18-33
Knuckle Replacement,
p a g e 18-35
UPPER ARM
TRAILING ARM
Removal/lnstallati
WHEEL BOLT
18-4
Rear Suspension - Drum Brake Type
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front 6. Check the suspension ball joints (Hold a tire w i t h
toe, and rear toe. However, each of these adjustments your hands, and move it up and d o w n and right and
are related to each other. For example, w h e n you adjust left to check for movement).
camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust
the front wheel alignment whenever y o u adjust camber
or toe.
Pra-Aflogiromeinitt Checks
For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel
alignment, do these checks:
1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect

measurement.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
3. Make sure the fuel tank is full, and that the spare
tire, the jack, and the tools are in place on the
vehicle.
7. Before doing alignment inspections, be sure to
4. Check the tire size and tire pressure. remove all extra weight f r o m the vehicle, and no
one should be inside the vehicle (driver or
Tire size: passengers).
Front/Rear: P195/65R15 89S
8. Bounce the vehicle up and d o w n several times to
Tire pressure (at cold): stabilize the suspension.
2
Front/Rear: 220 kPa (2.2 k g f / c m , 3 2 psi)
9. Check that the steering column is set at the center
5. Check the runout of the wheels and tires (see page tilt and telescopic position.
18-10).
C a s t e r BGDspeetoocn
Use commercially available computerized four wheel

alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Check the caster angle.
C a s t e aogfle: 7 ° 06 ' ±H °
• If the measurement is within specifications,

measure the camber angle.
• If the measurement is not within specifications,
check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
18-6
Camber Inspection Front Camber Adjustment
Use commercially available computerized four wheel The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or
alignment equipment t o measure wheel alignment . both of the damper pinch bolts w i t h a smaller diameter
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the adjusting bolt. The difference between the adjusting
equipment manufacturer's instructions. bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter allows
for a small range of adjustment.
1. Check the camber angle.
D a m p e r p i n c h bolt Adjusting bolt set:
NOTE: There are t w o types of rear upper arms: (P/N 04512-SNA-305)
those that are marked w i t h " C " (A), and those with
•
no marks. Be sure t o use the correct alignment
specifications.
Camber angle:
Front: -0°03'±30'
(Maximum difference between the front right and
left side: 0 ° 35 ')
Rear (without " C " marks
on the upper arm): —1 ° 3 9 ' ' - o » 4 '
+ r 0 5
5 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it w i t h
Rear (with " C " marks safety stands in the proper locations (see page
on the upper arm): —0 °54 ' ° ' _ = 5 '
+ 1 0 5
0 4 1-10).
• If the measurement is within specification, 2. Remove the front wheels.

measure the toe-in.
• If the measurement for the front camber is 3. Loosen the damper pinch bolts (A), and adjust the
outside the specification, go t o the front camber camber angle by moving the bottom of the damper
adjustment. within the range of the damper pinch bolt free play.
• If the measurement for the rear camber is outside
A
0-
the specification, check for bent or damaged 14 x 1.5 m m
suspension components. 9 0 N-m
(9.2 k g f - m ,
6 7 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts t o the specified

torque.
5. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheels.
6. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the

front of the vehicle up and d o w n several times to
stabilize the suspension.
(cont'd)
18-7
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)

7. Measure the camber angle. Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment
• If the measurement is within specification, Use commercially available computerized four wheel
measure the toe-in. alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
• If the measurement is not within specification, go (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
to step 8. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
8. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it w i t h 1. Set the steering column to the middle tilt and
safety stands in the proper locations (see page center telescopic positions. Center the steering
1-10). wheel spokes, and install a steering wheel holder
tool.
2. Check the toe w i t h the wheels pointed straight
10. Replace the damper pinch bolts w i t h the adjusting ahead.
bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle.
Front toe-in: 0 ± 2 m m ( 0 ± 0 . 0 8 in.)
NOTE:
• Install the washers (B) included the adjusting bolt • If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
set between the front damper and the self- • If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe
locking nut. inspection/adjustment.
• The camber angle can be adjusted up to ± 2 5 '
(center of tolerance) by replacing one damper 3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the
pinch bolt w i t h the adjusting bolt. flat surface sections (B) of the tie-rod end w i t h a
• The camber angle can be adjusted up to 50 ' by w r e n c h , and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe
replacing both damper pinch bolts w i t h the is w i t h i n specifications.
adjusting bolts.
A
14 x 1.5 m m
4 4 N-m (4.5 k g f - m , 3 3 I b f f t )
11. Tighten the adjusting bolts to the specified torque B C

value.
4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts to the
12. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the specified torque value. Reposition the rack-end
inside of the w h e e l , then install the front wheels. boot if it is twisted or displaced.
13. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the 5. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment.
front of the vehicle up and d o w n several times to
stabilize the suspension.
14. Measure the camber angle. If the camber angle is

not within specification, repeat steps 8 through 13
to readjust the camber angle. If the camber
measurement is correct, measure the toe-in, and
adjust it if necessary.
18-8
Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment Turning Angle Inspection
Use commercially available computerized four wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment t o measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Release the parking brake t o avoid an incorrect 1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the
measurement. brake, and measure the turning angle of both
wheels.
2. Check the toe.
Turning angle:
+2
Rear toe-in: 2 - i mm (0.08 + 0 0 8
-oo4 in.) Inward wheel: 39°53'±2°
Outward wheel (reference): 31 °48 '
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
• If no adjustment is required, go to turning angle
inspection.
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on the trailing arm (B),

and loosen the self-locking nut (C).
2. If the measurement is not w i t h i n the specifications,

even up both sides of the tie-rod threaded section
length while adjusting the front toe. If it is correct,
but the turning angle is not within the
specifications, check for bent or damaged
suspension components.
4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and

lightly tighten it.
NOTE:
• Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it
has been tightened t o the specified torque.
• Reassemble the adjusting bolt and the adjusting
cam plate w i t h the eccentric facing up.
5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt

until the toe is correct.
6. Tighten the self-locking nut to the specified torque

value while holding the adjusting bolt.
18-9
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection Wheel Runout Inspection

1. Raise the vehicle, and support it w i t h safety stands 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it w i t h safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-10). in the proper locations (see page 1-10).
2. Remove the wheels. 2. Check for bent or deformed wheels.
3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts. 3. Set up the dial gauge as shown, and measure the
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the axial runout by turning the wheel.
brake disc or the brake d r u m securely against the
hub. Front and rear wheel axial runout:
Standard: 0—0.7 mm (0—0.03 in.)
Front Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
108 N m
(11.0 kgf m , 7 9 . 6 Ibf-ft)
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position s h o w n , and
measure the radial runout.
Rear
Front and rear wheel radial runout:
Standard: 0—0.7 mm (0—0.03 in.)
Service limit: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
108 N m
(11.0 kgf m, 79.6 Ibf-ft)
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against

the hub flange.
5. Measure the bearing end play while moving the 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,
brake disc or the brake d r u m inward and outward. check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-10),
and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake
Wheel bearing end play: disc or the brake d r u m and the inside of the wheel
Front/Rear: 0—0.05 mm (0—0.002 in.) are clean.
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than 6. If the bearing end play is within the specification
the standard, replace the wheel bearing or the hub but the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
bearing unit. replace the wheel.
18-10
Wheel Bolt Replacement
S p e c i a l Tools Required 4. Insert the new wheel bolt (A) into the hub (B) while
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202 aligning the splined surfaces (C) on the hub hole
w i t h the wheel bolt. Adjust the measurement (D)
1 NOTICE 1 w i t h the washers (P/N 94101-12800 or equivalent)
• Do not use a hammer or impact tools (pneumatic (E), then install a nut (P/N 90304-SC2-000 or
or electric) to remove and install the wheel bolts. equivalent) (F) hand-tight.
• Be careful not to damage the threads of the
wheel bolts. NOTE:
• Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands threaded section of the nut.
in the proper locations (see page 1-10). • Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
2. Remove the brake disc or the brake d r u m : front • Do not install the nut and the washers that have
(see page 19-18), rear disc brake type (see page been used as tools on a vehicle.
19-25), rear d r u m brake type (see page 19-29).
D
11 — 1 4 m m
3. Separate the wheel bolt (A) f r o m the hub (B) using ( 0 . 4 3 - 0 . 5 5 in.) F G
the ball joint remover (C), and keep the j a w (D) of
ball joint remover vertical against the wheel bolt
(see page 18-12).
NOTE:
• If the angle of the remover against the wheel bolt
is not square, readjust the ball joint remover by
turning the head (E) of the adjusting bolt (F).
• Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the
mating surfaces on the bolt and the hub.
5. Tighten the nut until the wheel bolt is drawn fully
into the hub. Do not exceed the m a x i m u m torque
limit. Make sure there is no gap (G) between the
bolt and the hub.
Limited torque:
108 N m (11.0 kgf-m, 79.6 Ibfft) max.
6. Install the brake disc or the brake d r u m : front

(see page 19-18), rear disc brake type (see page
19-25), rear d r u m brake type (see page 19-29).
NOTE:
• If you cannot tighten the wheel nut to the
specified torque value w h e n installing the wheel,
replace the front hub or the rear hub bearing unit
as an assembly.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces of the brake disc or the brake d r u m and
the inside of the wheel.
18-11
Ball Joint Removal
Special T o o l s Required 3 . Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball
• Ball joint thread protector, 1 2 m m 07AAF-SDAA100 joint remover as s h o w n . Insert the jaws carefully,
• Ball joint thread protector, 1 4 m m 071AF-S3VA000 making sure not to damage the ball joint boot.
• Ball joint remover, 32 m m 07MAC-SL0A102 Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt
• Ball joint remover, 28 m m 07MAC-SL0A202 (B).
I NOTICE I NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a

Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten
joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of it to a brake line or wire harness.
the ball joint connection to disconnect it.
1. Install a hex nut (A) or the ball joint thread protector

onto the threads of the ball joint (B).
NOTE; Using a hex nut, make sure the nut is flush

w i t h the ball joint pin end to prevent damage to the
. threaded end of the ball joint pin.
B A
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the

head of the adjusting bolt is in the position shown
to allow the jaw (E) to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the

ball joint pin pops loose f r o m the ball joint
2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas connecting hole. If necessary, apply penetrating
shown (A). This w i l l ease the installation of the tool, type lubricant to loosen the ball joint pin.
and prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B)
threads. NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on
the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the

nut f r o m the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the
ball joint out of the ball joint connecting hole.
Inspect the ball joint boot, and replace it if
damaged.
07MAC-SL0A102 or
07MAC-SL0A202
18-12
Bail Joint Boot inspection/Replacement
Special Tools Required 7. Press the boot w i t h the attachment until the bottom
A t t a c h m e n t 40 m m 07GAF-SE00200 seats on the lower ball joint housing (A) all the w a y
around.
1. Check the ball joint boot for weakness, damage,
Press
cracks, and grease leaks.
NOTE;
• If the ball joint boot is damaged w i t h grease leaks,
replace the appropriate part as an assembly.
• If the ball joint boot is soft and cracked without
grease leaks, go to step 2 . Replace the
appropriate ball joint boot.
A
2. Disconnect the appropriate ball joint connection,
and remove the component including the ball joint:
The lower ball joint (see page 18-20).
3. Remove the boot.
4. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot w i t h 8. After installing a boot, wipe any grease off the
grease. Keep the grease off of the boot-to-lower exposed portion of the ball joint pin.
ball joint housing mating surfaces (B).
9. Install all of the removed parts.
5. Pack fresh grease into the base (C). Do not let dirt
or other foreign materials get into the boot.
6. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it

gently to force out any air, then w i p e the grease off
the tapered portion of the ball joint pin (D).
18-13
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Exploded View
• D A M P E R PINCH B O L T
14 x 1.5 m m
90 N-m
(9.2 k g f - m , 6 7 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replace.
SPLASH GUARD
SELF-LOCKING NUT
Check for corrosion,
Replace.
deformation, and damage.
R e p l a c e if r u s t e d .
5 x 0.8 m m
6 N-m
(0.6 k g f - m ,
4 Ibfft)
KNUCKLE
Check f o r d e f o r m a t i o n a n d
damage.
FLAT S C R E W
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
FRONT HUB
Check for d a m a g e a n d
cracks.
SPINDLE NUT
2 2 x 1.5 m m
181 N-m (18.5 k g f - m , 1 3 4 Ibf-ft)
FRONT BRAKE DISC
Replace.
Check for wear, d a m a g e ,
a n d rust.
1
A p p l y a small a m o u n t of engine oil
to t h e seating surface of t h e nut.
18-14
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A) from the
• Ball joint thread protector, 12 mm 07AAF-SDAA100 damper.
• Bail joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SL0A202
• Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VA000
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SL0A102
• Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SE00100
• Driver handle 07749-0010000
•Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
•Support base 07965-SD90100
Knuckle/Hub Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with

safety stands in the proper locations (see page
1-10). 12 x 1.25 m m
108 N - m (11.0 k g f - m , 7 9 . 6 I b f f t )
2. Remove the center cap (A), the wheel nuts (B) and
the front wheel. 4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts
(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or the brake hose, use a short piece of
wire to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
excessively.
5. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) from the

knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel speed
sensor connector.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
18-15
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement fcont'd)
6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B). 11. Remove the flange bolt and the self-locking nuts
f r o m the lower arm (A).
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange

2 2 x 1.5 m m bolt and the new self-locking nuts. After lightly
181 N - m tightening all three fasteners, tighten them t o the
(18.5 k g f - m ,
134 Ibf-ft) specified torque in the f o l l o w i n g order; the nut on
Replace. the front (B), the nut on the rear (C), then the bolt
(D).
12 x 1.25 m m
59 N
(6.0
7. Remove the front brake disc (see page 19-18). 4 3 Ibf
Rep!
8. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
9. Remove the cotter pin (A) f r o m the tie-rod end ball 12 x 1.25 m m
59 N-m
joint, then remove the nut (B). (6.0 k g f - m , 4 3 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
12 x 1.25 m m
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin 5 9 N - m (6.0 k g f - m , 4 3 Ibf-ft)
after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown. Replace.
12. Disconnect the lower ball joint (E) f r o m the lower

arm.
07AAF-SDAA100
07MAC-SL0A202
10. Disconnect the tie-rod end ball joint f r o m the

knuckle using the ball joint thread protector and the
ball joint remover (see page 18-12).
18-16
13. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the self- 15. Remove the lock pin (A) f r o m the lower ball joint,
locking nuts (B) f r o m the damper. then remove the castle nut (B).
NOTE; Use new damper pinch bolts and new self- NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin as
locking nuts during reassembly. shown after tightening the new castle nut.
07MAC-SL0A102
B
A 14 x 2.0 m m
14 x 1.5 m m 6 9 - 7 8 N-m
90 N-m ( 7 . 0 - 8 . 0 kgf-m
(9.2 k g f - m , 5 1 - 5 8 Ibf-ft)
67 Ibfft) Replace.
Replace.
071AF-S3VA000
14. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) f r o m the

knuckle (D) by tapping the driveshaft end (E) w i t h a
soft face hammer while drawing the hub outward,
then remove the knuckle. 16. Disconnect the lower ball joint (C) f r o m the knuckle
using the ball joint thread protector and the ball
NOTE: joint remover (see page 18-12).
• Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
• During installation, apply grease to the mating
surfaces of the wheel bearing and the driveshaft
outboard joint (see step 1 on page 16-20).
(cont'd)
18-17
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
17. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of Wheel Bearing Replacement
removal, and note these items;
1. Separate the hub (A) f r o m the knuckle (B) using the
• First install all of the components, and lightly hub dis/assembly tool and a hydraulic press. Hold
tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the the knuckle with the attachment (C) of the hydraulic
suspension to load it w i t h the vehicle's w e i g h t press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to damage
before fully tightening to the specified torque or deform the splash guard (D). Hold onto the hub
values. to keep it f r o m falling w h e n pressed clear.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot w h e n
connecting the knuckle.
07GAF-SE00100
• Before connecting the lower ball joint to the
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and the
tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the ball joint
connecting hole, the threaded section, and the
• mating surfaces o f the castle nut.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot w i t h the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
• Use a new spindle nut on reassembly.
• Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
surfaces of the front hub and the inside of the 2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the
brake disc, hub (B) using the hub dis/assembly tool, a
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating commercially available bearing separator (C), and a
surfaces of the brake disc and the inside of the press.
wheel.
Press
07GAF-SE00100
18-18
3 . Remove the splash guard (A) and the snap ring (B) 5. Wash the knuckle and the hub thoroughly in high
f r o m the knuckle (C). flash point solvent before reassembly.
6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B)

using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the
support base and a press.
NOTE:
• Install the wheel bearing w i t h the wheel speed
sensor magnetic encoder (E) (brown color),
t o w a r d the inside of the knuckle.
• Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and
other foreign material f r o m the encoder surface.
• Keep all magnetic tools away f r o m the encoder
surface.
• Be careful not to damage the encoder surface
w h e n y o u insert the wheel bearing.
Press
4. Press the wheel bearing (A) out of the knuckle (B)

using the attachment, the driver handle, and a
press.
Press
07749-0010000
07746-0010500
07965-SD90100
(cont'd)
18-19
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Lower Ball Joint Replacement
Replacement (cont'd)
• Ball joint remover, 32 m m 07MAC-SL0A102
7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B). •Ball joint thread protector, 14 m m 071AF-S3VA000
1. Remove the front wheel.
D
5 x 0.8 mm
2. Remove the flange bolt and the self-locking nuts
6 N-m f r o m the lower arm (A).
(0.6 k g f - m ,
4 ibf-ft)
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange
bolt and the new self-locking nuts. After lightly
tightening all three fasteners, tighten them to the
specified torque in the following order; the nut on
the front (B), the nut on the rear (C) then the bolt (D).
1 2 x 1.25 m m
59 N m
(6.0 k g f - m
4 3 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws
(D) to the specified torque value.
9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the
attachment, the driver handle, the support base,
and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to damage the
splash guard (C).
12 x 1.25 m m
59 N m
Press
12 x 1.25 m m (6.0 kgf m , 4 3 Ibf-ft)
59 N-m Replace.
07749-0010000 (6.0 k g f - m , 4 3 Ibf-ft)
Replace.

07746-0010500
arm.
07965-SD90100
18-20
4. Remove the spindle nut (see step 6 on page 18-16), 5. Remove the lock pin (A) f r o m the lower ball joint,
and remove the outboard joint (A) f r o m the knuckle then remove the castle nut (B).
(B) by tapping the driveshaft end (C) w i t h a soft face
hammer while drawing the hub outward. NOTE: During installation, install a lock pin as
shown after tightening the new castle n u t
NOTE:
• Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The
driveshaft inboard joint may come apart.
• During installation, apply grease to the mating
surfaces of the wheel bearing and the driveshaft
outboard joint (see step 1 on page 16-20).
071AF-S3VA000
6. Disconnect the lower ball joint f r o m the knuckle

using the ball joint thread protector and the ball
joint remover (see page 18-12), then remove the
lower ball joint.
(cont'd)
18-21
Front Suspension
Lower Ball Joint Replacement Lower Arm Removal/Installation

(cont'd)
• Bushing driver 07AAF-SVAA100
7. Install the lower ball joint in the reverse order of • Receiver set 07AAF-SVAA200
Removal/Installation
• First install all of the components, and lightly
tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it w i t h
suspension t o load it w i t h the vehicle's w e i g h t safety stands in the proper locations (see page
before fully tightening to the specified torque 1-10).
values.
• Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot w h e n 2. Remove the front wheels.
connecting the knuckle.
• Before connecting the lower ball joint t o the 3. Remove the flange nut (A) w h i l e holding the joint
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and the pin (B) w i t h a hex wrench (C), then disconnect both
tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the ball joint sides of the stabilizer link f r o m the lower arm (D).
connecting hole, the threaded section, and the
mating surfaces of the castle nuts. NOTE: Use the new flange nut during reassembly.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
specification, then tighten It only far enough to
align the slot w i t h the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
• Use a n e w spindle nut during reassembly.
surfaces on the brake disc and the Inside of the
wheel.
8. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust It If

4. Turn the stabilizer bar backward to gain easier

access to the front side of the lower arm mounting
bolt.
18-22
Remove the flange bolt and the self-locking nuts 7. Remove the front side of the lower a r m mounting
f r o m the lower a r m (A). bolt (A).
NOTE: During installation, install the new flange NOTE: Use the new mounting bolt during
bolt and the new self-locking nuts. After lightly reassembly.
tightening all three fasteners, tighten t h e m to the
specified torque in the following order; the nut on
the front (B), the nut on the rear (C), then the bolt
(D).
12 x 1.25 m m
59 N m
(6.0 k g f - m ,
43 Ibfft)
Replace.
A
14 x 1.5 m m
83 N-m 12 x 1.25 m m
(8.5 k g f - m , 61 I b f f t ) 6 4 N - m (6.5 k g f - m , 4 7 Ibf-ft)
1 2 x 1.25 m m
Replace. Replace.
59 N m
12 x 1.25 m m (6.0 kgf-m, 4 3 Ibf-ft)
59 N-m Replace. 8. Remove the rear side of the lower a r m mounting
(6.0 k g f - m , 4 3 I b f f t )
Replace. bolt (B), then remove the lower a r m (C) f r o m the
front suspension subframe (D).
arm. NOTE: Use the new mounting bolt during
reassembly.
9. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items:

tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
wheel.

(cont'd)
18-23
Front Suspension
Lower Arm Removal/Installation (cont'd)

Bushing Replacement 3 . Position the tab (A) of the bushing (B) w i t h the
lower a r m (C) as shown.
NOTE: Replace the lower a r m (A) as an assembly If the
Press
lower a r m has the paint mark (B) around the hole near
the front bushing. The paint mark can also be seen
07 A A F - S V A A 1 0 0
around a hole on the bottom side of the lower a r m in
the same area. Paint marks indicate a oversize bushing
has been installed. 21 ° 2 © ' ± 3 ° / ^
FRONT
07AAF-SVAA200
( A t t a c h m e n t B)
07AAF-SVAA200
( A t t a c h m e n t A)
Using a hydraulic press, bushing driver, and

receiver set (attachments A and B), press in the
bushing into the lower a r m .
1. Press out the bushing (A) w i t h the bushing driver,
receiver set (attachment A), and a hydraulic press, Using a yellow oil-based paint marker, paint a mark
and remove the bushing f r o m the lower a r m (B). (A) around the hole (B) near the front bushing (C).
Also paint a mark around the hole on the bottom
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the inside of the side of the lower arm in the same area.
bushing hole w h e n pressing on the bushing.
NOTE: These marks are used to identify a lower
Press
arm that has had the bushing replaced. Do not
replace the bushing in a lower arm that has paint
marks; y o u must replace the lower a r m .
07AAF-SVAA100
07AAF-SVAA200
(Attachment A)
2. Clean the mating surfaces of the new bushing and

the lower a r m .
18-24
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation StaMlozefr Bair Repte©enient
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page safety stands in the proper locations (see page
1-10). 1-10).
2. Remove the front wheel. 2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut 3. Disconnect both stabilizer links f r o m the stabilizer
(B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) w i t h a bar (see page 18-25).
hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing
holders (B), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D).
NOTE: During installation, align the paint marks (E)

on the stabilizer bar w i t h the sides of the bushings.
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and

the lower arm (G) with the joint pins set at the
center of their range of movement.
NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). Align

the paint mark on the stabilizer link facing rearward.
5. Install the new self-locking nut and the new flange

nut, and tighten them to the specified torque values
while holding the respective joint pin w i t h a hex
wrench. 5. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel. • Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar.
7 . Test-drive the vehicle. • Note the direction of installation for the bushings
and the bushing holders.
8. After 5 minutes of driving, torque the self-locking • Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
nut again to the specified torque value. connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
18-25).
wheels.

18-25
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation
Removal 6. Remove the service cap (A) and the lid (B).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the

windshield wipers. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0) w h e n the wipers are near the A-pillars.

1-10).
4. Remove the wheel speed sensor harness clip (A)

and the brake hose bracket (B) f r o m the damper. Do
not disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector.
7. Remove the three flange nuts (C) f r o m the top of

A the damper.
8. Remove the damper/spring (A).
NOTE:
• The left and right damper springs are different.
Mark the springs L and R before you continue.
5. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the self- • Be careful not to damage the body.
locking nuts (B) f r o m the damper.
NOTE: Do not allow the knuckle to rotate t o o far

o u t w a r d . This may allow the driveshaft inboard
joint to come apart.
18-26
Installation 3. Loosely install the new damper pinch bolts (A) and
the new self-locking nuts (B) to the damper (C).
1. Install the damper/spring (A) onto the frame. Note
the direction of the damper mounting base as
shown.
NOTE; Be careful not to damage the body.
•A
4. Raise the front suspension w i t h a floor jack to load

the suspension with the vehicle's weight.
5. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the

specified torque value.
6 . Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified

torque value.
7. Install the wheel speed sensor harness clip (A) and

the brake hose bracket (B) to the damper (C).
2. Loosely install the new flange nuts (A).
NOTE: Install the service cap (B) and the lid (C) after
tightening the flange nuts to the specified torque
value.
8. Install the service cap and the lid.

inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.

11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll), then turn the

wipers to the park positions, and turn the ignition
switch to LOCK (0).
18-27
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View
CAP
SELF-LOCKING NUT
12 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N-m
(4.5 kgf m, 33 ibf-ft)
Replace.
BUMP STOP
Check for weakness,
oil c o n t a m i n a t i o n , a n d d a m a g e .
DAMPER MOUNTING BEARING

Check for any play or roughness.
DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
and smooth operation.
LOWER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration and d a m a g e .
18-28
Special Tools Required Inspection
Strut nut adapter 07AAA-SVAA100
1. Reassemble the damper mounting base and the
NOTE; When compressing the damper spring, use a self-locking nut.
commercially available strut spring compressor
(Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent) 2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
according to the manufacturer's instructions. check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
Disassembly should extend smoothly and constantly when
compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
1. Remove the cap (A) f r o m the top of the damper. leaking and the damper should be replaced.
2. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self-

locking nut (A) using the strut nut adapter (B) while Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding
holding the damper shaft with a hex wrench (C). Do during these tests.
not compress the spring more than necessary to
remove the nut.
B
07 A A A - S V A A 1 0 0
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
3. Release the pressure f r o m the strut spring

compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown in the Exploded View.
(cont'd)
18-29
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
Reassembly 5. Align the damper bracket (A) and the damper

mounting base (B) so that the " A " stamp (C) points
1. Install the damper spring (A) on the upper spring t o w a r d the front.
mounting cushion (B) by aligning the upper end (C)
of the damper spring w i t h the ledge portion (D) of Right
tne upper spring mourning cusnion. FHOlMT HKUIMT
•A
6. Align the angle of the strut bolt (D) on the damper

bracket as s h o w n .
7. Install the new self-locking nut (A).

2. Compress the damper spring.
3. Install all the parts except the self-locking nut and
the cap onto the damper unit (A) by referring to the
Exploded View.
12 x 1.25 m m
4 4 N m (4.5 kgf m , 3 3 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
8. Hold the damper shaft using a hex wrench (B), and

tighten the self-locking nut using the strut nut
adapter (C) to the specified torque value.
9. Remove the damper/spring f r o m the strut spring

4. Align the bottom of the spring (B) and the stepped compressor.
part of the lower spring seat (C) on the damper unit.
10. Install the cap.
18-30
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Exploded View - Disc Brake Type
S.8 N - m REAR KNUCKLE UPPER BRACKET
REAR BRAKE DISC

Check for wear, damage, and rust.
(cont'd)
18-31
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)

Exploded View - Drum Brake Type
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N - m REAR K N U C K L E UPPER BRACKET
REAR BRAKE D R U M
Check for w e a r , d a m a g e , a n d rust.
18-32
1
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement - Disc Brake 5. Remove the t w o washers (A).
Type
NOTE: During installation, make sure the washers
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with are installed between the brake caliper bracket and
safety stands in the proper locations (see page the knuckle.
1-10). •
2. Remove the center cap (A), the wheel nuts (B), and
the rear wheel.
6. Remove the rear brake disc (see page 19-25).
7. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B).
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A) f r o m the

bracket.
Replace.
8. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.

54 ibf-ft)
9. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts removal, and note these items:
(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) f r o m the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper • Use a new O-ring on reassembly.
assembly or the brake hose, use a short piece of • Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
wire to hang the caliper assembly f r o m the surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the inside of
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose the brake disc.
excessively. • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
wheel.

(cont'd)
18-33
Rear Suspension

Hub Bearing Unit Replacement - Drum Brake 6. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
Type removal, and note these items:
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h • Use a new O-ring on reassembly.
safety stands in the proper locations (see page • Before installing the brake d r u m , clean the
1-10). mating surfaces of the hub bearing unit and the
inside of the brake d r u m .
2. Remove the center cap (A), the wheel nuts (B), and • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
the rear wheel. surfaces of the brake d r u m and the inside of the
wheel.

3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear

brake d r u m (see page 19-29).
4. Remove the hub bearing unit (A) and the O-ring (B).
(6.5 kgf.m,
47 Ibfft)
5. Check the hub bearing unit for damage and cracks.
18-34
Knuckle Replacement - Disc Brake Type 5. Place a floor jack under the trailing arm to support
it.
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate
2. Remove the splash guard (A). section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage
any suspension components.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 6. Remove the upper arm mounting bolt (A), and
7.2 Ibfft)
disconnect the upper arm (B) f r o m the knuckle.
NOTE: Use the new upper arm mounting bolt

during reassembly.
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N
(1.0
7.2 I b f
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A), and the brake

hose mounting bracket (B) f r o m the knuckle (C). Do
not disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector.
NOTE:
• Apply multipurpose grease to the mating
surfaces on the knuckle and the O-ring during
reassembly.
• To prevent O-ring damage, the wheel speed 7. Remove the rear knuckle upper bracket (C).
sensor must be installed w i t h the guide pin tool
during reassembly (see step 5 on page 19-158).
D
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N m
( 2 . 2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t ) (Multipurpose)
4. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolt (D)

f r o m the knuckle.
(cont'd)
Rear Suspension
8. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and Knuckle Replacement - Drum Brake Type
the adjusting cam plate (B) with the frame, then
remove the self-locking nut (C), the adjusting cam 1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
plate, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-
locking nut. 2. Disconnect the brake line (A) f r o m the wheel
cylinder (B), Remove the backing plate (C) w i t h
NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut and a new brake shoes assembly f r o m the knuckle.
adjusting bolt during reassembly.
NOTE:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint,
wash it off immediately w i t h water.
• Plug the end of the joint to prevent spilling brake
fluid.
A
10 x 1.0 m m
15 N - m
(1.5 k g f - m , 11 I b f - f t )
12 x 1.25 m m
69 N - m (7.0 k g f - m , 5 1 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
9. Remove the flange bolt (D), and remove the

knuckle.
NOTE: Use the new flange bolt during reassembly.
10. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items:

tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it w i t h the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque
values.
• Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and
the adjusting cam plate with the marked
positions w h e n tightening the self-locking nut.
wheel.

18-36
3. Remove the wheal speed sensor (A), and the brake 7. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (A) and
hose mounting bracket (B) f r o m the knuckle (C). Do the adjusting cam plate (B) w i t h the frame, then
not disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector. remove the self-locking'nut (C), the adjusting cam .
plate, and the adjusting bolt. Discard the self-
NOTE; locking nut.
surfaces on the knuckle and the O-ring during NOTE: Use a new self-locking nut and a new
reassembly. adjusting bolt during reassembly.
• To prevent O-ring damage, the wheel speed
sensor must be installed w i t h the guide pin tool
during reassembly (see step 5 on page 19-240).
12 x 1.25 mm
6 9 N - m (7.0 kgf-m, 5 1 ibf-ft)
Replace.
8. Remove the flange bolt (D), and remove the

4. Place a floor jack- under the trailing arm to support knuckle.
it.
NOTE: Do not place the jack against the plate
section of the lower arm. Be careful not to damage 9. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
any suspension components. and note these items:
5. Remove the upper arm mounting bolt (A), and • First install all of the components, and lightly
disconnect the upper arm (B) f r o m the knuckle. tighten the bolts and the nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
NOTE: Use the new upper arm mounting bolt before fully tightening to the specified torque
during reassembly. values.
• Align the cam positions of the adjusting bolt and
the adjusting cam plate w i t h the marked
positions w h e n tightening the self-locking nut.
• Fill the master cylinder reservoir to the M A X
(upper) level line, and bleed the normal brake
system (except the servo unit and power unit)
(see page 19-97). Check for a leak at the brake
hose/line joint, and retighten it if necessary.
surfaces of the brake d r u m and the inside of the
wheel.

6. Remove the rear knuckle upper bracket (C).
18-37
Rear Suspension
Upper Arm R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n
NOTE: There are t w o types of rear upper arms: those 4. Remove the flange bolts (A) f r o m the vehicle.
that are marked w i t h "C" (A), and those w i t h no marks.
Be sure to use the correct alignment specifications. NOTE: Use new flange bolts during reassembly.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h

1-10). 5. Remove the flange bolt (B) f r o m the knuckle, and
remove the upper arm (C).
2. Remove the rear wheel.
3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the
trailing a r m (A) and the knuckle (B). Raise the floor 6. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
jack until the suspension begins to compress. removal, and note these items:

tighten the bolts, then raise the suspension to
load it w i t h the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque values.

A necessary (see page 18-6).
18-38
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h 7. Disconnect the stabilizer link f r o m the trailing a r m
safety stands in the proper locations (see page (see page 18-40).
1-10).
8. Remove the rear spring (see page 18-46).
2. Remove the rear w h e e l .
9. Remove the trailing a r m rear mounting bolt (A).
3. Remove the rear floor undercover (see page
20-151). NOTE: Use the new mounting bolt during
reassembly.
4. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolt (A)
f r o m the trailing a r m (B). 12 x 1.25 m m
5 9 N - m (6.0 k g f - m , 4 3 ibf-ft)
Replace.
A B
8 x 1.25 m m
2 2 N-m
( 2 . 2 k g f - m , I S Ibf-ft)

trailing arm (A) and the knuckle (B). Raise the floor
jack until the suspension begins to compress. 10. Lower the jack and remove the trailing a r m .
6. Remove the knuckle w i t h the hub bearing unit: Disc

brake type (see page 18-33), drum brake type
(see page 18-34).
(cont'd)
118-33
Rear Suspension
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation
(cont'd)
11. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of 1-10).
• F i r s t i n s t a l l all of t h e c o m p o n e n t s and lightly
tighten the bolts, then raise the suspension to 3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut
load it w i t h the vehicle's weight before f u l l y (B) while holding the respective joint pin (C) w i t h a
tightening to the specified torque values. hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
• Check the brake hose for interference and
twisting.

4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and

the trailing arm (G) w i t h the joint pins set at the
center of their range of movement.
NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). Align

the paint mark on the stabilizer link facing rearward.
5. Install the new self-locking nut and the new flange

nut, and tighten t h e m to the specified torque values
while holding the respective joint pin w i t h a hex
wrench.
6. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc or the

brake d r u m and the inside of the wheel, then install
the rear wheel.
8. After 5 minutes of driving, torque the self-locking

nut again to the specified torque value.
18-40
Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h 6. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page removal, and note these items:
1-10).
• Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
2. Remove the rear wheels. bar.
• Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
3. Disconnect both stabilizer links f r o m the stabilizer connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
bar (see page 18-40). 18-40).
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing surfaces of the brake disc or the brake d r u m and
holders (B), then remove the bushings (C) and the the inside of the wheel.
stabilizer bar (D).
NOTE: During installation, align the paint marks (E) necessary (see page 18-6).
on the stabilizer bar w i t h the sides of the bushings.
5. Replace the stabilizer bar bracket (A) if necessary.
18-41
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement
Exploded V i e w
SELF LOCKING N U T
10 x 1.25 m m
29 N - m
13.0 k g f - m , 2 2 Ibf-ft)
Replace.
DAMPER MOUNTING WASHER

Check for bending and d a m a g e .
DAMPER MOUNTING BUSHING

Check for weakness.
D U S T COVER
Check for deterioration and damage.
• DAMPER UNIT
Check f o r oil leaks,
g a s leaks, a n d s m o o t h
operation.
18-42
Removal 7. Compress the damper unit (A) by hand, and
remove it f r o m the vehicle.
1 R a i s e the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h
safety stands in the proper locations (see page NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
1-10).

trailing arm (A) and the knuckle (B). Raise the floor B
jack until the suspension begins to compress.
8. Remove the damper mounting bushing (B).
4. Remove the flange bolt (C) that connects the

trailing arm and the damper (D).
5. Remove the trunk side trim panel (see page 20-68).
6. Remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the

damper shaft (B) with a hex wrench (C).
(cont'd)
18-43
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement (cont'd)
Inspection Installation
1. Push on the damper as shown. 1. Install the damper mounting bushing (A) onto the
damper unit. Position the damper assembly (B)
between the body and trailing arm.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and

check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
should extend smoothly and constantly w h e n
compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
leaking and the damper should be replaced.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding 2. Position a floor jack under the trailing arm to
during these tests. support the suspension, then install the new
damper mounting bolt (A).
3. Loosely tighten the damper mounting bolt.
4. Raise the rear suspension w i t h the jack until the

vehicle just lifts off of the safety stands, then
tighten the damper mounting bolt to the specified
torque value.
18-44
Spring Replacement
5. Install the damper mounting bushing (A), the E x p l o d e d View
damper mounting washer (B), and the new self-
locking nut (C) on the damper shaft.
1 0 x 1.25 m m
Replace.
SPRING MOUNTING RUBBER

Check for weakness
and damage.
6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) to the specified SPRING

Check for d a m a g e .
torque value while holding the damper shaft (B)
with a hex wrench (C).
A
10 x 1.25 m m
29 N-m
(3.0 k g f - m ,
2 2 Ibf ft)
Replace.
LOWER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration
and damage.
7. Install the trunk side t r i m panel (see page 20-68).

brake d r u m and the inside of the wheel, then install
the rear wheel.

(cont'd)
18~4§
Rear Suspension
Spring Replacement (cont'd)
Removal 8. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the
knuckle (B) and the upper arm (C).
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, a n d support it with
1-10).
3. Remove the wheel speed sensor (A) f r o m the

knuckle (B). Do not disconnect the wheel speed
sensor connector.
6 x 1.0 m m
9. Remove the trailing arm front mounting bolts (A).
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C) f r o m the

bracket (D).

trailing arm (A) and the knuckle (B). Raise the floor
jack until the suspension begins to compress.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
12 x 1.25 mm
Replace.
6. Remove the flange bolt (C) that connects the

trailing arm and the damper (D).
7. Disconnect the stabilizer link f r o m the trailing arm

(see page 18-40).
18-46
10. Lower the floor jack gradually. Installation
(cont'd)
18-47
Rear Suspension
Spring Replacement {cont'd)

3. Loosely install the new trailing arm front m o u n t i n g 5. Slowly raise the jack until you can align the bolt
bolts (A). hole w i t h the holes in the trailing arm (A) and the
damper (B), and install the new flange bolt (C).
. A ^ ^
'06 m o d e l :
12x1.25 mm
108 N - m (11.0 k g f - m , 7 9 . 6 I b f - f t ) 6. Install the stabilizer link on the trailing arm
Replace.
'07-09 m o d e l s :
(see page 18-40).
12x1.25 m m
110 N-m (11.2 k g f - m , 8 1 . 0 i b f - f t ) 7. Raise the rear suspension with a floor jack to load
Replace.
the vehicle weight.
4. Loosely install the new flange bolt (A) that connects
the knuckle (B) and the upper arm (C). 8. Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
18-48
9. Install the wheel speed sensor (A) and the brake
hose mounting bracket (B) to the knuckle (C).
NOTE:
surfaces on the knuckle and the O-ring during
reassembly.
• To prevent O-ring damage, the wheel speed
sensor must be installed with the guide pin tool:
rear disc brake type (see step 5 on page 19-158),
rear drum brake type (see step 5 on page 19-240).
8 x 1.25 m m 6 x 1.0 m m
22 N-m 9.8 N m
(2.2 k g f - m , 16 Ibf-ft) (1.0 k g f - m , 7 2 Ibf-ft)
B (Multipurpose)

brake d r u m and the inside of the w h e e l , then install
the rear wheel.
11. Check the wheel alignment, adjust it if necessary

(see page 18-6).
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension 18-2

Front Suspension , 18-14
Rear Suspension . - 18-31
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
('08-49 USA Models)
General Troubleshooting Information . 18-53
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID 18-56
Tire Pressure Sensor Location 18-57
Symptom Troubleshooting Index . 18-60
DTC Troubleshooting • 18-67
Symptom Troubleshooting ••• 18-75
TPMS Control Unit Replacement 18-79
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement •• 18-80
TPMS
18-52
S f stem Indicator DTC 11,13,15,17
The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) has the If the system detects low pressure in any of the four
l o w tire pressure indicator and the TPMS indicator. tires, the low tire pressure indicator comes o n , and the
control unit sets one or more of these codes; DTC 11,
13,15,17. When the tire pressure returns to normal,
and the TPMS control unit receives the normal pressure
signal f r o m the tire pressure sensor, the control unit
turns off the indicator. However TPMS control unit still
retains the DTC(s).
NOTE: It is necessary to test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph

(45 km/h) or more for at least 1 minute so that tire
pressure sensor transmits the signal.
Pressure Changing by Temperature
Tire pressures increase slightly as the temperature in

the tires rises during driving. Pressures can also
increase or decrease slightly w i t h changes in outside air
T P M S Indicator L o w Tire Pressure
Indicator
temperature. A temperature change of about 18 °F
(10 °C) changes tire pressure by about 10 kPa
The Low Tire Pressure Indicator 2
(0.1 kgf/cm ,1.5 psi). If the temperature drops, tire
pressure could decrease just enough to turn on the low
• If the system detects low pressure in any of the four tire pressure indicator, but later, the tire temperature
tires, the low tire pressure indicator comes on. could increase enough to turn the indicator off. To
• When this happens, inflate the air and test-drive the resolve a complaint of such intermittent indications,
vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more for at least 1 confirm and clear the stored DTC(s) and check the tire
minute, and the low tire pressure indicator will go off. pressures. Then explain to the customer h o w
• If the control unit detects a problem in the system temperature changes can affect the system.
during an indication of low tire pressure, it turns off -
the low tire pressure indicator, stores the DTC(s), and fkgf/cnr, kPa)
turns on the TPMS indicator.
The TPMS Indicator
• If a problem is detected in the system, the TPMS

indicator comes on.
• If low tire pressure and a problem in the system are
detected, only the TPMS indicator comes on.
If the system is OK, the TPMS indicator and the low tire
pressure indicator should come on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (ll), and then go off 2 seconds
later. If they don't, there is a problem with the system.
(1.4, 140)
-20 0 20 40 60 "C
-4 32 §8 104 140 °F
(cont'd)
18-53
TPMS
Problems That Are Not System Faults Mow to Troubleshoot DTCs
• Tire Sealant DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of

Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator Is
damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each still on. Do not use a troubleshooting procedure unless
wheel. It can prevent the system f r o m detecting the the system has set the DTC listed for It.
correct tire pressure, w h i c h sets a DTC 11,1.3, 15, or
17 even though the system is normal. NOTE: For DTCs 11,13, 15, and 17 (tire low pressure),
• Cold Weather the TPMS Indicator comes on only If the DTCs are
W h e n the weather is extremely cold, about -—40 °F caused by a system problem rather than low tire
(—40 °C) or colder, the output of the lithium battery in pressure.
each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that
the control unit sets a DTC for low battery voltage (31, 1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when
33,35, or 37) even though the system is normal. the Indicator came o n , and try to reproduce the
• Non-TPMS Wheels (Including Spare Tire) same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if the
Vehicles equipped w i t h TPMS must use wheels made customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
for the system. Every TPMS wheel has an exclusive since the indicator came on.
mark; do not use any other type of wheel.
2. If an Indicator does not come on during the test-
W h e n a flat tire is replaced w i t h the spare tire, the drive, check for loose terminals, poor contact due
TPMS indicator comes on (DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38) to damaged terminals, etc. before you start
because the system is no longer receiving the signal troubleshooting.
f r o m the flat tire's transmitter.
This is not a problem w i t h the spare tire. 3. After troubleshooting, repair and clear the DTCs,
and test-drive the vehicle. Make sure no Indicators
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Is Set come on.
• W h e n the system detects a problem, the TPMS 4. Check for DTCs f r o m other control units that are
control unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode, connected via the F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
and does not alert the driver to low tire pressures. related to the F-CAN, the most likely cause was that
• If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the the ignition switch was turned to ON (II) w i t h the
TPMS indicator comes o n , but no DTCs are set. TPMS control unit connector disconnected. Clear
• The m e m o r y can hold all the DTCs that could the DTCs. Check for PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and
possibly be set. However, w h e n the same DTC is troubleshoot those first.
detected more than once, the most recent one
overwrites the previous one, so only the latest DTC of
each type is stored.
• DTCs are Indicated in ascending order, not in the
order they occurred.
• Set DTCs are stored In the EEPROM (nonvolatile
m e m o r y ) , and cannot be cleared by disconnecting the
battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
and f o l l o w the screen prompts.
18-54
How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear DTCs
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
HDS (Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side under the driver's side of the dashboard.
of the dashboard.

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the on the HDS.
* DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC troubleshooting. NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
instructions. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
18-55
TPMS
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID
Special Tools Required 5. Follow HDS screen prompts to turn on the TPMS
TPMS sensor initializer too! AKS0620006 sensor initializer tool (A). Verify the power switch
Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment (B) is in the " L o w " position.
Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: If the power switch is in the " H i g h " position,
AN four tire pressure sensor IDs must be memorized to more than one sensor or sensors on other vehicles
the TPMS control unit whenever you do any of these may be activated. Make sure the power switch is in
actions: the " L o w " position.
• Replace the TPMS control unit.

• Replace the tire pressure sensor.
• Substitute a known-good wheel w i t h tire pressure
sensor.
NOTE:
• To ensure the control unit memorizes the correct ID,
the vehicle w i t h the new sensor must be at least 10 ft
(3 m) away f r o m other vehicles that have tire
pressure sensors.
• When doing a tire rotation, memorizing the sensors
in not needed.
AKS0620006
HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located 6. Hold the TPMS sensor initializer tool near one
under the driver's side of the dashboard. wheel, memorize the pressure sensor ID by
following the screen prompts on the HDS.
NOTE:
• If you turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) before
memorizing all four sensor IDs, the memorizing
ID is canceled.
• If more than one sensor ID is displayed on the
HDS, verify that the power switch is in the " L o w "
position, the vehicle has not been driven for 5
minutes, and there are no other vehicles w i t h i n
10 ft (3 m).
• See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.

and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213). AKS0620006
4. Select Sensor ID Learning f r o m the mode menu on

the HDS.
7. Repeat step 6 for each wheel until all four sensor

IDs are memorized. When all four IDs are
memorized, the low tire pressure indicator blinks.
18-56
Tire Pressure Sensor Location
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Special Tools Required
TPMS sensor initializer tool AKS0620006
9. Disconnect the HDS f r o m the DLC. Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
10. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more
for at least 1 minute. NOTE:
• This procedure locates where the tire pressure
11. Make sure the low tire pressure indicator does not sensors 1, 2, 3, 4 are mounted, w h e n activated by the
blink. TPMS sensor initializer tool.
9
Position the vehicle at least 10 ft (3 m) away f r o m
12. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire other vehicles that have tire pressure sensors.
pressure listed on the doorjamb sticker.
1. With the ignition switch at LOCK (0), connect the
13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located
under the driver's side of the dashboard.

and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Select Function Test f r o m the mode menu, then

select Sensor Position Check on the HDS.
(cont'd)
18-57
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Location (cont'd!
5. Follow HDS screen prompts to turn on the TPMS 6. Follow the prompts on the HDS to activate the tire
sensor initializer tool (A). Verify the power switch pressure sensors using the TPMS sensor initializer
(B) is in the " L o w " position. tool.
NOTE: If the power switch is in the " H i g h " position, NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
more than one sensor or sensors on other vehicles instructions.
may be activated. Make sure the power switch is in
the " L o w " position.
7. Check the HDS screen, and note the active sensor

reception order of tire pressure sensor 1, 2, 3, 4.
NOTE:
• If the sensor does not respond to the TPMS
sensor initializer tool, make sure the tool was
turned on properly. Refer to the HDS.
• If the tool start mode is OK, then rotate the tire
1/4 turn and retry.
• If the sensor still does not respond after one full
rotation of the tire, then check for DTC 32, 34, 36,
and 38 w i t h the HDS.
18-58
DTC D-stection Item Troubleshooting
11 Tire 1 Low Air Pressure (see page 18-67)
21 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Abnormally High Temperature (see page 18-68)
31 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Low Battery Voltage (see page 18-69)
32 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Transmission Failure (see page 18-70)
41 Abnormal Signal Reception Error (see page 18-71)
51 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Registration Error (see page 18-71)
81 TPMS Control Unit Failure (see page 18-72)
83 No VSP Signal (see page 18-73)
85 F-CAN Communication Failure (see page 18-73)
91 Tire 1 Pressure Sensor Internal Error (see page 18-74)
18-59
TPMS
HDS does not communicate w i t h the Troubleshooting the DLC circuit {see page
TPMS control unit or the vehicle 11-213)
Low tire pressure indicator does not come S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 18-75)
on, and no DTCs are stored
Low tire pressure indicator does not go off, S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 18-76)
and no DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 18-77)
DTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 18-77)
DTCs are stored
18-60
TPMS Control Unit inputs and Outputs for 20P Connector

number
2 WHT CAN H (F-CAN F CAN Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
communication signal communication circuit
high)
3 BLK , GND (Ground) Ground for the TPMS Less than 0.1 V at all times
control unit
7 LT BLU K-LINE (Data link Communications w i t h
connector) the HDS
8 BRN SG1 (Ignition switch 1) Power source for Ignition switch ON (II): battery
activating the system voltage (about 12 V)
Ignition switch in LOCK (0): less than
0.1 V
10 BLU + B (Battery positive) Power source for the Battery voltage at all times (about
TPMS control unit 12 V)
11 RED CAN L (F-CAN F-CAN Ignition switch ON (II): pulses
communication signal communication circuit
low)
(cont'd)
18-61
TPMS

S f stem Structure
Once the vehicle speed exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h), the TPMS control unit monitors all four tire pressure sensors and
the system function. If it detects low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low tire pressure Indicator.
If it detects a problem In the system, It turns on the TPMS indicator.
Control unit
Mounted inside of the dash, the TPMS control unit receives wireless pressure sensor ID signals every time the vehicle
speeds exceeds 28 mph (45 km/h). It also receives wireless signals f r o m the transmitters for tire pressure and the
sensor condition, and it continuously monitors and controls the system. The TPMS control unit cannot directly
determine the position (location) of a tire pressure sensor(s) on the vehicle since it is a wireless system. TPMS sensor
locations will change during scheduled vehicle maintenance (tire rotation).
NOTE: To determine the actual location of each TPMS wheel sensor on the vehicle, do the tire pressure sensor
location procedure (see page 18-57). Once the tire pressure sensor locations are identified, write the sensor ID on the
side wall of the tire w i t h a tire crayon to eliminate confusion.
Indicators
T w o indicators are in the gauge control module (tach): The low tire pressure indicator comes on when any tire
pressure is low, and the TPMS indicator that comes on only if there's a problem with the system.
The low tire pressure indicator alerts the driver that a tire(s) pressure is low, but does not specify the tire(s) location.
Vehicle
G a u g e Control Module (Tach)
Tire Pressure S e n s o r Indicators (LED) Tire Pressure S e n s o r

(sensor-transmitter (sensor-transmitter
with acceleration sensor) with acceleration sensor)
Communication
via F-CAN
Wheel Wheel
( T P M S type) C o n t r o l U nit (TPMS type)
(with rad o
frequency( a n t e n n a )
Tire Pressure S e n s o r Tire Pressure S e n s o r

(sensor-transmitter (sensor-transmitter
with acceleration sensor) with acceleration sensor)
Wheel Wheel
( T P M S type) (TPMS type)
18-62
Tire pressure sensor
Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a tire pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of the wheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits the internal tire information to the
control unit once every 60 seconds when the vehicle speed exceeds 28 m p h (45 km/h). When the TPMS control unit
2
receives a tire pressure signal that is less than 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm , 25 psi), the TPMS control unit then turns on the
2
low tire pressure indicator. When that tire's pressure is increased to more than 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm , 29 psi), and the
vehicle is driven above 28 m p h (45 km/h) the transmitter sends the tire pressure signal to the control unit, and then the
control unit turns the indicator off.
NOTE: Do not mix the TPMS tire pressure sensors or wheels w i t h other TPMS types. Be sure to use the correct type
sensors and wheels for this system.
Sensor are active:
• When the wheel rotates over 28 mph (45 km/h), the sensor detects the m o m e n t u m , switches the sensor to the
normal function mode.
• The LF (low frequency) signal of the TPMS initializer tool makes the sensor active even t h o u g h the vehicle is stopped.
The tire pressure sensor goes into sleep mode w h e n the acceleration sensor detects the wheel is stationary for
5 minutes or more continuously.
Wheels
The TPMS will not w o r k unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. The original equipment wheels have a
' T P M S " mark (A) on t h e m and are counterweighted (B) the opposite of the tire pressure sensor (C), and
counterbalance the weight of the sehsor.
(cont'd)
18-63
TPMS
S f stem Communication
• W h e n the vehicle is traveling more than 28 m p h (45 km/h), an RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is transmitted
f r o m each tire pressure sensor to the control unit.
• W h e n the wheels rotate, and the tire pressure sensors m o m e n t u m is detected, switching them f r o m sleep mode to
u u i m a i f u i l u i i w n (awake) mode. After the vehicle is stationary for 5 minutes, the sensors switch f r o m normal
function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.

• Each tire pressure sensor has its o w n ID to prevent j a m m i n g by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the control unit recognizes only those specific signals.
• A n ID cannot be memorized automatically. The control unit knows which ID belongs to each tire pressure sensor.
This recurring ID confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit: Misalignment of the control unit could interfere
w i t h sending and receiving signals.
Control Unit Tire Pressure S e n s o r

(With Radio Frequecy Antenna) (Sensor-transmitter with acceleration sensor)
18-64
Circuit Diagram
W UNDER-HOOD UNDER-DASH
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
No. 7
(7.5 A)
-RED
IGNITION SWITCH
No. 10
(7.5 A)
WHT (o BLU — C A P -
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III)
POWER CIRCUIT
LOW TIRE PRESSURE TPMS CONTROL UNIT
INDICATOR
•WHT
TPMS INDICATOR CANH CAN
11 CONTROLLER
-RED -
INDICATOR
jn
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
+B
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
-WHT
-WHT
•RED ' GND

DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
HB-: 12 V
-0-:5V G504
(cont'd)
18-65
TPMS
U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R Q (16P)
p _j , — a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
n n
T P M S C O N T R O L UNIT 20P C O N N E C T O R
n n
7 2 3
/// 8
/ 10
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P) D A T A LINK C O N N E C T O R (DLC)
12 14
18-66
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11,13,15,17: Tire Low Air Pressure 5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the
indicated DTC.
NOTE; If low tire pressure is detected, the control unit
sets one or more of these DTCs, and turns on the low DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number
tire pressure indicator. If the low tire pressure indicator 11 No. 1
comes on because of a low tire pressure, and the 13 No. 2
customer corrects it before bringing the vehicle in, the 15 No. 3
DTCs will be stored, but the indicator turns off. 17 No. 4
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
determine the affected tire location and relate it to
2. Make sure the tires are inflated to the specified tire the tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-57).
pressure listed on the doorjamb sticker.
J. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 AIR
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 m p h (45 km/h) or more PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST w i t h the HDS,
for at least 1 minute. and compare it with the actual measured tire
pressure.
Does the low tire pressure indicator go off?
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within
YES—The system is OK at this time. Check for and 2
40 kPa (0.4 kgf/cm , 6 psi) of the actual tire
repair the cause of air loss. • pressure?
NO—Go to step 4. Y E S — G o t o step 8.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. NO—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
(see page 18-80). •

for at least 1 minute.
Is DTC 11, 13, 15, or 17 indicated?
YES—Replace the TPMS control unit (see page

18-79). •
NO—If any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot

the appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the
18-67
TPMS
DTC 21,22,23,24: Tire Pressure Sensor 6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
Abnormally High Temperature determine the affected tire location and relate it to
the tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-57).
7. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 AIR
2. Make sure the tires have cooled d o w n . TEMPERATURE in the TPMS DATA LIST w i t h the
HDS.
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature
of the tires can be caused by Is 176 °F (80 °C) or more indicated?
• Excessive braking
• Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires YES—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
only) (see page 18-80). •
• Leaving the vehicle running while parked (front
tires only) N O — G o t o step 8.
• Improper assembly of a wheel and tire
for at least 1 minute. 9. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more
Does the TPMS indicator go off?
Y E S — T h e system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
w i t h the HDS.B Is DTC 21, 22, 23, or 24 indicated?
NO—Go to step 4. YES—Check for loose terminals and poor

connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-79), and recheck. H
5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the
indicated DTC. NO —If any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot
the appropriate DTC. If no DTC are indicated, the
DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Wumber system is OK at this time. •
21 No. 1
22 No. 2
23 No. 3
24 No. 4
18-68
DTC 31,33,35,37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low 4. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to '
Battery Voltage determine the affected tire location and relate it to
NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature
around the sensor is —40 °F (—40 °C) or less. Note that Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the
the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient TPMS initializer tool ?
temperature is —40 °F (—40 °C) or more.
for at least 1 minute. NO—Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire
Does the TPMS indicator go off? . pressure sensor (see page 1 8 - 8 0 ) . •
Y E S — T h e system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC 5. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4
w i t h the HDS.B PRESSURE SENSOR TRANSMITTER BATTERY in
the TPMS DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is LOW indicated?
YES—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
3. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the (see page 18-80). •
indicated DTC.
NO—Check for loose terminals and poor
DTC i] ore FYsssiors Sensor Number connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
31 No. 1 substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
33 No. 2 (see page 18-79), and r e c h e c k . •
35 No. 3
37 No. 4
18-69
TPMS
#
DTC 3 2 , 3 4 , 3 6 , 3 8 : Tire Pressure Sensor 6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
Transmission Failure determine the affected tire location and relate it t o
NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s)
(such as an inverter, battery charger, etc) interfering Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the
w i t h the RF signal f r o m the sensors w h e n driving the TPMS initializer tool?
vehicle.
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Check for an aftermarket electrical device(s)
2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS wheels w i t h interfering w i t h the RF signals f r o m the sensors. If
the mounted tire pressure sensor. there are no electrical devices causing interference,
replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor (see page 18-80). •
mounted on the vehicle?
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 5
Y E S — G o t o step 3. minutes or more.
NO—Install the TPMS wheel, and then memorize 8. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 mph (45 km/h) or more
the pressure sensor ID w i t h the HDS (see page for at least 1 minute.
18-56). •
9. Check the TIRE 1, TIRE 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). PRESSURE SENSOR TRANSMITTER STATUS in
the TPMS DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
Is NORMAL indicated for all four tires within one
5. Note the tire pressure sensor(s) number by the full turn of each tire?
indicated DTC.
YES—The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
DTC Ye ire Pressure Sensor Number w i t h the HDS.B
32 No. 1
34 No. 2 NO—Replace the appropriate pressure sensor
36 No. 3 (see page 18-80). •
38 No. 4
18-70
DTC 41: Abnormal Signal Reception Error DTC 5 1 , 53, 55, 57: Tire Pressure Sensor
Registration Error
NOTE:
• Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as NOTE:
an inverter, battery charger, etc) interfering with the • These DTCs will only set during initialization with the
RF signal f r o m the sensors when driving the vehicle. HDS.
• If DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38 is also set, troubleshoot those • Inspect for an aftermarket electrical device(s) (such as
DTCs first. an inverter, battery charger, etc) interfering w i t h the
RF signal f r o m the sensors when driving the vehicle.
2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS wheels w i t h
the mounted tire pressure sensors. 2. Make sure all four wheels are TPMS wheels with
the mounted tire pressure sensors.
Are TPMS type wheels with tire pressure sensors
mounted on the vehicle? Are TPMS type wheels with a tire pressure sensor
mounted on the vehicle?
YES—Goto step 3.
YES—Goto step 3.
NO—Install the TPMS wheel, and then memorize
the pressure sensor ID with the HDS (see page NO—Install the TPMS wheel, and then memorize
18-56). • the pressure sensor ID w i t h the HDS (see page
18-56). •
3. Memorize the tire pressure sensor ID w i t h the HDS
(see page 18-56). 3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
TPMS initializer tool?
YES—The system is OK at this time, clear the DTC indicated DTC.
w i t h the HDS.B
DTC i Tire Pressure Sensor Number
NO—Replace the TPMS control unit (see page 51 No. 1
18-79). • 53 No. 2
55 No. 3
57 No. 4 _ _ _ _ _ _ _
(cont'd)
18-71
TPMS

6. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to DTC 8 1 : TPMS Control Unit Failure
determine the affected tire location and relate it to
the tire pressure sensor number (see page 18-57). NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this DTC. Make
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the (see page 22-60).
TPMS initializer tool?
NO—Check for an aftermarket electrical device
interfering w i t h the RF signals f r o m the sensors. If 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
there are no electrical devices causing interference, ignition switch to ON (II) again.
replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
{see page 18-80).B 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and wait 5 Is DTC 81 indicated?
minutes or more.
YES—Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
8. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 m p h (45 km/h) or more 18-79). •
NO—The system is OK at this t i m e . •
Is DTC 51, 53, 55, or 57 indicated?
YES—Check for loose terminals and poor

substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-79), and recheck. •
NO—The system is OK at this t i m e . Clear the DTC

w i t h the HDS.11
18-72
DTC 83; No VSP Signal DTC 85: F-CAN Communication Failure
NOTE: If DTC 85 stored at the same time as DTC 83, NOTE: Check for fuel and emission systems DTCs w i t h
troubleshoot DTC 85 first, then recheck for DTC 83. the HDS, and troubleshoot the PCM and F-CAN
communication errors first (see page 11-3).
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn the
4. Check the speedometer. ignition switch to ON (II) again.
Does the speedometer register speed? 4. Wait about 5 seconds.
Y E S — G o t o step 5. 5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest Is DTC 85 indicated?
good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1 and Y E S — G o t o step 6.
recheck. If the PCM was updated and DTCs are not
indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM NO—The system is OK at this time. •
was substituted and DTCs are not indicated,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). • 6. Test-drive the vehicle.
5. Check the VEHICLE SPEED in the TPMS DATA LIST Does the speedometer work?
w i t h the HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
Y E S — T h e system is OK at this time. •
NO—Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-79), and recheck. • 8. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
Does the speedometer work?

NO—Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and

reconnect all the connectors, then check and
troubleshoot the fuel and emissions system
(see page 11-3).B
(cont'd)
18-73
TPMS
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 91,93,95,97: Tire Pressure Sensor
Internal Error
11. Short the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
13. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
14. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit indicated DTC.
20P connector terminals and the PCM connector A
( 4 4 P ) terminals according t o the table. DTC Tire Pressure Sensor Number
91 No. 1
l erminal TPMS Control mm 93 No. 2
Name Unit 20P Connector A 95 No. 3
Connector (44P) 97 No. 4
Terminal Terminal
CAN L No. 11 No. 37 4. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
CAN H No. 2 No. 36 determine the affected tire location and relate it to
TPMS CONTROL U N I T 2 0 P C O N N E C T O R
Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the
CAN H TPMS initializer tool?
(WHT)
NO—Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly

mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire
• pressure sensor (see page 18-80). •
I
/ |4 | 5 | 6 f 7 8 r 9
10
/ 12 13114115116 17 18 19
•
•
20 21 22
^><C 23 24 25
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35
6. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 m p h (45 km/h) or more
I 36 |37 IT
38 | 39 | 40 | / |42 43 44
I I u for at least 1 minute.
C A N H (WHT) C A N L (RED) 7. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

Terminal side of female terminals Is DTC 91, 93, 95, or 97 indicated?
Is there continuity ? YES—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor

(see page 18-80) and recheck. If DTCs are still
YES—Check for loose terminals and poor present, substitute a known-good TPMS control
connections at the TPMS control unit and G504. If unit (see page 18-79), and recheck. •
necessary, substitute a known-good TPMS control
unit (see page 18-79), and recheck. • NO—If any other DTCs are indicated, troubleshoot
the appropriate DTC. If no DTCs are indicated, the
NO—Repair open in the wire between the TPMS system is OK at this time. •
control unit and the PCM. •
18-74
L o w tire pressure indicator does not c o m e 5. Do the tire pressure sensor location procedure to
o n , a n d n o DTCs a r e s t o r e d determine the affected tire location and relate it to
NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs w i t h the HDS (see page
22-6). If gauge DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those Did each tire pressure sensor respond to the
DTCs first. TPMS initializer tool?
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Y E S — G o t o step 6.
2. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several NO—Check that the tire pressure sensor is properly
seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON (II). mounted. If necessary, replace the appropriate tire
pressure sensor (see page 18-80).H
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
6. Check the TIRE 1, T I R E 2, TIRE 3, or TIRE 4 AIR
YES—Goto step 3. PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST w i t h the HDS,
and compare w i t h the actual measured tire
NO—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control pressure.
module (see page 22-223). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (tach) (see page Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within
2 2 - 2 5 5 ) , and recheck. • 40 kPa (0.4 kgf/crrf, 6 psi) of the actual tire
pressure?
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 28 m p h (45 km/h) or more
for at least 1 minute. Y E S — G o t o step 7.
4. Stop the vehicle, and lower the pressure in each NO—Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
tire until the low tire pressure indicator comes on (see page 18-80).H
(see table).
7 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) .
NOTE:
• Reinflate the tire before continuing to the next
tire.
• After noting whether the low tire pressure
indicator came on, make sure it goes off w h e n
y o u reinflate the tire before proceeding to the
next tire.
9
If 5 minutes has passed since finishing the last
test-drive, reactivate the appropriate tire
pressure sensor using the TPMS sensor initializer
tool (see page 18-57).
Does the indicator come on when the pressure

drops below 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/crrf, 25 psi) or less?
YES—The system is OK at this t i m e . •
NO—Go to step 5 .
(cont'd)
18-75
TPMS
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. Low tire pressure indicator does not go off,
and no DTCs are stored
9. Measure the voltage between TPMS control unit
20P connector terminals No. 3 and No. 8. 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

TPMS CONTROL UNIT 2 0 P CONNECTOR
4. Check the low tire pressure indicator for several

GND (BLK)j p.
seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on, and then go off?

Wire side of female terminals substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
Is there battery voltage? NO—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-223). If necessary, substitute a
YES—Repair short to power in the wire between known-good gauge control module (tach) (see page
the TPMS control unit and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in 22-255), and r e c h e c k . •
the under-dash fuse/relay box.H
NO—Check for loose terminals and poor

18-76
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no TPMS indicator d o e s n o t g o off, a n d n o DTCs
DTCs are stored are stored
1. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). NOTE: Check for gauge DTCs w i t h the HDS (see page
22-6). If gauge DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those
2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. DTCs first.
3 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds 2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds
when the ignition switch is turned ON (II). w h e n the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on? Did the indicator come on, and then go off?
YES—Check for loose terminals and poor Y E S — T h e system is OK at this time. •

substitute a known-good TPMS control unit NO—Go to step 3.
(see page 18-79), and recheck.«
NO—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-223). If necessary, substitute a 4. Check the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
known-good gauge control module (tach) (see page relay box.
22-255), and recheck. •
Is the fuse blown?
YES—Replace the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck. If

the fuse blows again, check for a short to body
ground in the wire between the TPMS control unit
and the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box. •
NO —Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5.

fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES—Replace the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse, and recheck.

If the fuse blows again, check for a short to body
ground in the wire between the TPMS control unit
and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay b o x . B
NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 6.
(cont'd)
18-77
TPMS
7. Measure the voltage between body ground and 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 10.
11. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
+ B (BLU) 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and

n n
711 2 3
/// i 8 10
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
NO—Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the No. 7 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box. • Is there 0,1 V or more?
8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). YES—Repair open or high resistance in the wire
between the TPMS control unit and body ground
9. Measure the voltage between body ground and (G504J.B
NO—Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR module (see page 22-223). If the gauge control
module (tach) is OK, check for loose terminals and
poor connections at the TPMS control unit. If
necessary, substitute a known-good TPMS control
unit (see page 18-79), and recheck. •
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the TPMS

control unit and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay b o x . B
18-78
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting 6. Install the new TPMS control unit in the reverse
bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its order of removal,
communication w i t h the tire pressure sensors.
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit is properly
1. Turn the Ignition switch t o LOCK (0). Installed. You will hear a click w h e n the TPMS
control unit Is securely mounted on the bracket.
2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover
(see page 20-90). 7. Connect the HDS, and memorize the pressure
sensor IDs using the TPMS sensor initializer tool
3. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector (A). (see page 18-56).
4. Remove the TPMS control unit (B) f r o m the bracket

(C).
NOTE: To disconnect the TPMS control unit f r o m Its

bracket Insert a small flat-tipped screwdriver
between the TPMS control unit and the bracket
shown In (D) to release the hook (E), then slide out
the TPMS unit.
5. Replace the bracket if necessary.
18-79
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal 5. Position the wheel so the tire machine (A) and tire
iron (B) are next to the valve stem (C), and will
1. Raise t h e vehicle, and support it w i t h safety stands move away f r o m it when the machine starts. Then
in the proper locations (see page 1-10). remove the tire f r o m the wheel.
2. Remove t h e wheel w i t h t h e faulty sensor.
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap and the valve stem
core, to deflate the tire.
4. Remove any balance weights, and then break the

bead loose f r o m the wheel w i t h a commercially
available tire changer (A).
I NOTICE!
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire
pressure sensor:
• Do the outside of the wheel first.
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve
stem ( B ) is 90 degrees f r o m the bead
breaker (C) as s h o w n . 6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and the washer (B),
• Do not position the bead breaker of the tire then remove the tire pressure sensor w i t h the valve
changer too close to the rim. stem (C) f r o m the wheel.
NOTE: Check the nut and the washer, if they have

deterioration or damage, replace them w i t h new
ones during reassembly.
18-80
Remove and replace the valve stem g r o m m e t (A) installation'
f r o m the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE: Use only wheels that have a " T P M S " stamp (A)
NOTE: on t h e m .
• The valve stem g r o m m e t might stay in the wheel;
make sure you remove it,
• Always use a new valve stem g r o m m e t
whenever the tire pressure sensor has been
removed f r o m the w h e e l , or w h e n replacing the
tire.
Replace.
(cont'd)
18-81
TPMS
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
1. Before Installing the tire pressure sensor, clean the 4. Lube the tire bead sparingly w i t h a paste-type tire
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel. mounting lubricant, and position the wheel so the
tire machine (A) and tire iron (B) are next to the
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) and the washer valve stem (C) and will move away f r o m it w h e n
(B) t o the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stem nut the machine starts. Then install the tire onto the
(D) finger tight. Make sure the pressure sensor is wheel.
resting on the wheel.
NOTE: Install the tire pressure sensor so that

sensor housing surface (E) should not exceed
protrusion (F) of wheel to prevent the sensor
housing f r o m being caught onto the bead of the tire
w h e n assembling the tire.
OUTSIDE
5. W i t h a dry air source, inflate the tire to 300 kPa

2
(3.1 kgf/cm , 44 psi) to seat the tire bead to the r i m ,
WHEEL CENTER D then adjust the tire pressure (see page 18-6), then
4 N-m
install the valve stem cap.
(0.4 kgf m,
3 Ibf-ft)
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both
sides of the rim uniformly.
6. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the

wheels on the vehicle.
7. Remove the jack stands, and lower the vehicle.

Torque the wheel nuts to specification.
8. Connect the HDS, and memorize the pressure

sensor IDs using the TPMS sensor initializer tool
(see page 18-56).
3. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque
w h i l e holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE:
• Do not use air or electric impact tools to tighten a
valve stem nut.
• Do not t w i s t the tire pressure sensor to adjust its
position w i t h the w h e e l , as this w i l l damage or
deform the valve stem g r o m m e t .
18-82
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) (if brake maintenance Is required)
IMA components are located In this area. The IMA Is a high-voltage system. The high voltage cables and their covers
You must be familiar w i t h the IMA system before w o r k i n g around it. Make sure y o u have read the Service Precautions
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Special Tools 19-2
Brake System Inspection and Test 19-4
Symptom Troubleshooting .. 19-5
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment ...........................................................«..=. 19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment 19-7
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test 19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement 19-12
Front Brake Disc Inspection 19-16
Front Brake Disc Replacement 19-18
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-19
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement 19-20
Rear Brake Disc Inspection 19-23
Rear Brake Disc Replacement ... 19-25
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul 19-26
Rear Drum Brake Inspection ........................................ 19-27
Rear Brake Drum Replacement 19-29
Rear Brake Shoe Replacement 19-30
Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement 19-33
Brake Hose and Line Inspection 19-34
Brake Hose Replacement 19-35
Parking Brake Cable Replacement 19-37
Parking Brake Lever Grip and Cover
Replacement ............................................ 19-39
Advanced Hydraulic Booster .... 19-43

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Components ('06-09 Models) 19-111
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System
Components ('09 Model) .............................. 19-159
Special Tools
© 07AAE-SEPA101 Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 1
CD 07LAF-SM40200 Brake Spring Installer' 1
® 07AAG-SVBA100 Guide Pin Tool 1
19-2
BRAKE S Y S T E M INDICATOR
Circuit D i a g r a m , p a g e 19-10
P a r k i n g Brake S w i t c h T e s t , p a g e 19-11
Brake F l u i d Level S w i t c h Test, p a g e 19-11
BRAKE H O S E and LINE

Brake H o s e R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-35
REAR BRAKE
Pad Inspection a n d Replacement,
p a g e 19-20
Disc I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-23
Disc R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-25
Caliper O v e r h a u l , p a g e 19-26
D r u m Brake I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-27
D r u m R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-29
BRAKE PEDAL S h o e R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-30
Brake Pedal a n d Brake Pedal FRONT BRAKE Rear W h e e l Cylinder
Position Switch A d j u s t m e n t Pad Inspection a n d Replacement, R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-33
p a g e 19-6 p a g e 19-12
Disc I n s p e c t i o n , p a g e 19-16
Disc R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-18
C a l i p e r O v e r h a u l , p a g e 19-19 PARKING BRAKE
I n s p e c t i o n a n d A d j u s t m e n t , p a g e 19-7
Cable R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-37
Lever G r i p a n d C o v e r R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-39
19
Brake System Inspection and Test

Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Component Inspections:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seal at reservoir c a p . This is a
• Reservoir tank, subreservoir or master sign of fluid contamination.
cylinder body.
• Lines, reservoir tank hose and g r o m m e t s ,
and their joints.
• Between master cylinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
• Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
• Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
• Piston seal.
• Banjo bolt connections.
• Bleed screw.
Wheel Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
• Wheel cylinder.
• Line joints.
• Bleed screw.
ABS or VSA Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
Modulator-control • Line joints.
Unit • Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test
Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
2. Press the brake pedal several times until there is a hard brake pedal.
3. Attach a 50 m m (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it.
4. Holding the brake pedal, w i t h about 98 N (10 kgf, 22 Ibf), hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal,
then pull the tape up t o the steering w h e e l . Note the measurement between the brake pedal and reference mark
on the steering wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure.
• If the measurement increases 10 m m (3/8 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK.
• If the measurement increases more than 10 m m (3/8 in.), check the advanced hydraulic booster system
(see page 19-45).
19-4
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration 5. Remove the brake pedal position switch, then spin
(after a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal the wheels t o check for brake drag.
1 NOTICE 1 Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?

If the brake system indicator is on w i t h the buzzer
sounding, do not drive the vehicle. Check the Y E S — G o t o step 6.
advanced hydraulic booster system (see page
19-45). NO—Check the brake pedal position switch
adjustment and pedal free play (see page 19-6). •
NOTE; Make sure that the caliper pins are installed
correctly. 6. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder,
Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different. then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
If the pins are installed in the w r o n g location, it will
cause vibration, uneven and rapid pad wear, and Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
possibly uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin
location (see page 19-19). YES—Go to step 7.
1. Check the advanced hydraulic booster system NO—Check the master cylinder reservoir for
(see page 19-45). Make sure the indicators are not contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
turned on. contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid is OK, replace
2. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the. the master cylinder (see page 19-100) H
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more
brake pedal applications during an extended test- 7 . Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper or wheel
drive. cylinder, then spin the wheels to check for brake
drag.
3. With the engine running, raise the vehicle, on a lift,
and spin all four wheels by hand. Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels? YES—Check the master cylinder reservoir for
contamination in the brake fluid. If you find
Y E S — G o t o step 4. contamination, flush the entire brake system of all
contaminated fluid. If the brake fluid Is OK,
NO—Look for other causes of pad wear, high pedal, disassemble and repair the caliper or wheel
or vehicle vibration. • cylinder on the wheel(s) experiencing brake drag. I I
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), press the NO—Look for and replace any damaged brake lines.
brake pedal to deplete the advanced hydraulic If all brake lines are OK, replace the ABS or VSA
booster system, then spin the wheels again to modulator-control unit: ABS (see page 19-154),
check for brake drag. VSA (see page 19-236). •
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
19-5
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height 3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the
pushrod (B) in or out w i t h pliers until the standard
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) pedal height f r o m the floor is reached. After
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
longer touching the brake pedal. adjust the ped»i height with the pushrod p r c G G o d .
Raise
the pedal
Lower
A the pedal
15 Nm
(1.5 kgf m , 11 Ibf-ft)
Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance
Lift up on the brake pedal by hand. Push in the

brake pedal position switch until its plunger is fully
pressed (threaded end (A) touching the pad (B) on
the pedal arm). Turn the switch 45 °clockwise to
lock it. The gap between the brake pedal position
switch and the pad is automatically adjusted to
0.7 m m (0.028 in.) by locking the switch. Make sure
the brake lights go off w h e n the pedal is released.
2. Pull back the carpet, and find the cutout in the

insulation. Lift up the insulation cutout and
measure the pedal height (B) at the middle of the
left side center of the pedal pad (C) to the floor
w i t h o u t the insulation.
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):

158 mm (61/4 in.)
0.7 m m ( 0 . 0 2 8 in.)
5. Check the brake pedal free play.
6. Do the sensor 0 (zero) position memorization

(see page 19-48).
19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and
Adjustment
Pedal Free Play
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the Inspection

play (A) at the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal
by hand. If the brake pedal free play is out of 1. Pull the parking brake lever (A) w i t h 196 N (20 kgf,
specification, adjust the brake pedal position switch 4 4 Ibf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
(C). If the brake pedal free play is insufficient, it parking brake lever should be locked within the
may result in brake drag. specified number of clicks.
Free play: 1—i m m (1/16—3/16 in.) Lever locked clicks: 8 t o 10
P u l l e d b a c k w i t h 196 IM (20 kgf, 4 4 Ibf)
2. If the number of lever clicks is not as specified,

adjust the parking brake.
(cont'd)
19-7
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment (cont'd)

Adjustment - Rear Disc Brake Type 6. Make sure the lever (A) on the rear brake caliper
contacts the stop pin (B).
1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-79).
NOTE: The lever will only contact the stop pin w h e n
2. Release the parking brake lever fully. the p o k i n g brake adjusting nut is loosened.

1-10).
5. Remove the rear wheels.
19-8
7. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc Adjustment - Rear Drum Brake Type
and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheels. 1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-79).
8. Pull the parking brake lever 1 click. 2. Release the parking brake lever fully.
9. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut until the 3. Loosen the parking brake adjusting nut (A).
parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels
A
are turned.
10. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check

that the parking brakes do not drag w h e n the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
11. Make sure the parking brake lever is within the

specified number of clicks (8 to 10 clicks).
12. Install the center console panel (see page 20-79).
4. Press the brake pedal several times to set the self-

adjusting brake before adjusting the parking brake.
5. Pull the parking brake lever 1 click.

1-10).
7. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut until the

parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels
are turned.
8. Release the parking brake lever fully, and check

that the parking brakes do not drag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
9. Make sure the parking brake lever is within the

specified number of clicks (8 to 10 clicks).
10. Install the center console panel (see page 20-79).
19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram

INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT -WHT • ABS or VSA
MODULATOR-
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR CONTROL UNIT
" RED - (EBD INDICATOR)
-WHT <
SERVO UNIT
-RED -
BRAKE FLUID PARKING BRAKE

LEVEL SWITCH SWITCH
CLOSED; Float d o w n CLOSED: Lever pulled
OPEN: Float up OPEN: Lever released
19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid L e v e l Switch Test
NOTE: If the ABS indicator or the AHB indicator, and the 1. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
brake system indicator come on at the same time, check
the advanced hydraulic booster system for DTCs first 2. Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and
{see page 19-45), then check the ABS or VSA: ABS (2) w i t h the float in the d o w n position and in the up
(see page 19-154), VSA (see page 19-236). position.
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). NOTE:

• Remove the brake fluid completely f r o m the
2. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) subreservoir. With the float d o w n , there should
f r o m the parking brake switch (B). be continuity.
• Fill the subreservoir w i t h brake fluid to the MAX
(upper) level (A). With the float up, there should
be no continuity.
• If the ABS indicator or the AHB indicator, and the
brake system indicator come on at the same time,
check the advanced hydraulic booster system for
DTCs first (see page 19-45), then check the ABS
or VSA: ABS (see page 19-154), VSA (see page
19-236).
• If the parking brake switch and the fluid level
switches are OK, but the brake system indicator
does not function, do the gauge control module
self-diagnostic function (see page 22-223).
2 1
3. Check for continuity between the switch terminal

(C) and body ground.
• With the parking brake lever pulled, there should

be continuity.
• With the parking brake lever released, there
should be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and the fluid

level switches are OK, but the brake system
indicator does not function, do the gauge control
module self-diagnostic function (see page 22-223). 3. Reconnect the brake fluid level switch connector.
4. Reconnect the parking brake switch connector.
5. Reinstall the center console (see page 20-79).
19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
Brake caliper piston compressor 07AAE-SEPA101 outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
IF0» Brake pad thickness:

Frequent inhalation of brake pad d u s t regardless of Standard: 9 . 5 - 1 0 . 5 mm ( 0 . 3 7 - 0 . 4 1 in.)
material composition, could be hazardous to your Service limit: 1.6 m m (0.06 in.)
health.
• A v o i d breathing dust particles. Inner pad
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved v a c u u m
cleaner.
I n s p e c t i o n

1-10).
Outer pad
4.. If any part of t h e brake pad thickness is less than

the service limit, replace the front brake pads as a
set.
5. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc

and the inside of the wheel, then install the front
wheels.
19-12
Replacement 6. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B).
1. Remove some of the brake fluid f r o m the master

cylinder.

1-10).
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) w h i l e holding the

caliper pin (B) w i t h a wrench. Be careful not to
damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (C) up
out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
/
A
7. Remove the pad retainers (A). .
C
8 x1.0 m m 8 5
c
5. Remove the pad return springs (A).
8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove

any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. Verify
that the caliper pins (C) move in and out smoothly.
Clean and lube the pins if needed.
9. Inspect the brake disc for runout, thickness,

parallelism (see page 19-16), and check for damage
and cracks.
10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N

08798-9010) to the retainer mating surface of the
caliper bracket (indicated by the arrows).
11. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly

paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
the brake disc and the brake pads.
(cont'd)
19-13
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)

12. Install the brake caliper piston compressor tool (A) 15. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N
on the caliper body (B). 08798-9010) t o the pad side of the shims (A), the
back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly
07AAE-SEPA101 paste off the pad shims and the brake pads friction
material. Keep grease and assembly paste off the
brake disc and the brake pads. Contaminated brake
disc or brake pads reduce stopping ability.
13. Press In the piston w i t h the brake caliper piston

compressor tool so the caliper w i l l fit over the
brake pads. Make sure the piston boot Is In position
to prevent damaging It w h e n pivoting the caliper
down.
NOTE: Be careful w h e n pressing in the piston;

brake fluid might overflow f r o m the master
cylinder's reservoir. If brake fluid gets on any
painted surface, wash it off Immediately w i t h water.
16. Install the brake pads and the pad shims correctly.
14. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor tool. Install the brake pad w i t h the wear indicator (C) on
the upper Inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking,
efficiency.
19-14
17. Install the pad return springs (A). 19, Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc
wheels.
20. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work.
NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal

stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
21 A d d brake fluid as needed.
22 After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
18. Pivot the caliper d o w n into position. Install the Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks
flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque (see page 19-34).
while holding the caliper pin (B) w i t h a wrench. Be
careful not to damage the pin boot.
19-15
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout 7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish

the brake disc with a Honda-approved
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it w i t h commercially available on-car brake lathe.
1-10). Max. refinishing limit; 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
2. Remove the front wheels. NOTE:

• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-13). refinishing, replace it (see page 19-18).
• If the brake disc is replaced w i t h a new one,
4. Inspect the brake disc to wheel surface for damage check the new disc for runout. If the new disc is
and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and out of specification, refinish the disc.
remove all rust.
8. Install the brake pads (see page 19-13).
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B),
and tighten the wheel nuts t o the specified torque 9. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc
to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. and the Inside of the wheel, then Install the front
wheels.
B
108 N-m
( 1 1 . 0 kgf m, 7 9 . 6 I b f - f t )
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

s h o w n , and measure the runout at 10 m m (3/8 in.)
f r o m the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout;

Service limit; 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
19-16
Thickness and Parallelism 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
parallelism, refinish the brake disc w i t h a Honda-
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it w i t h approved commercially available on-car brake
safety stands In the proper locations (see page lathe.
1-10).
NOTE; If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
2. Remove the front wheels. for refinishing, replace It (see page 19-18).
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-13). 6. Install the brake pads (see page 19-13).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc 7. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc
thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and and the Inside of the wheel, then install the front
10 m m (3/8 in.) In f r o m the outer edge of the brake wheels.
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
measurement Is less than the m a x i m u m refinishing
limit.
Brake disc thickness;

Standard; 20.9—21.1 mm (0.82—0.83 in.)
Max. refinishing limit; 19.0 mm (0.75 in.)
Brake disc parallelism; 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This Is the m a x i m u m allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
10 m m (3/8 in.)
19-17
Front Brake Disc Replacement

NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake 5. Remove the brake disc flathead screws (A).
pads.

1-10).

damper.
6. Remove the brake disc (B) f r o m the front hub.
NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the front hub,

thread t w o 8 x 1.25 m m bolts (C) into the brake disc
to push it away f r o m the front hub. Turn each bolt
90 degrees at a t i m e to prevent the brake disc f r o m
1 2 x 1.25 m m binding.
1 0 8 N - m (11.0 k g f - m , 7 9 . 6 Ibf-ft)
7. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts removal.
(B), and remove the caliper assembly (C) f r o m the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper NOTE: Before installing the brake disc, clean the
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of w i r e mating surfaces between the front hub and the
to hang the caliper assembly f r o m the inside of the brake disc.
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
excessively. 8. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-16).

wheel.
19-18
®
? , V ^ W A ID).
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• A v o i d breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different.
If these caliper pins are installed in the w r o n g location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, and
possibly uneven tire wear.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately w i t h water.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages w i t h compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts w i t h new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall t h e m in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid f r o m an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Coat the piston, the piston seal groove, and the caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
• Use recommended greases in the front caliper set.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
"GREASEKI : Honda silicone grease ( P / N 08C30-B0234M)
8 x 1 . 0 mm PIN B O O T
23 N-m PISTON S E A L Replace.
(2.3 kgf-m, 17 Ibfft) Replace. r^ffff
CALIPER
BRACKET
BLEED SCREW W E A R INDICATOR
9 Nm Install inner brake p a d w i t h
(0.9 kgf-m, its w e a r i n d i c a t o r u p w a r d .
7 Ibfft) \
PAD R E T A I N E R
PAD R E T U R N S P R I N G S O U T E R PAD SHIM
19-19
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Replacement
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of 1. Remove some brake fluid f r o m the master cylinder.
material c o m p o s i t i o n , could be hazardous to your
health. 2. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h
• A v o i d breathing dust particles. safety stands in the proper locations (see page
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake 1-10).
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner. 3. Remove the rear wheels.
4. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).

Inspection
A
8 x 1.25 mm
1-10).
3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and the
outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate. 8 x 1.0 m i n
Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 8.3—9.4 mm (0.33—0.37 in.)
5. Remove the flange bolts (B) while holding

respective caliper pin (C) with a wrench. Be careful
not to damage the pin boot, and remove the caliper
(D). Check the hose and pin boots for damage and
deterioration.
NOTE: Do not twist the brake hose and the parking

brake cable to prevent damage.
4. If any part of the brake pad thickness is less than

the service limit, replace the rear brake pads as a
set.

and the inside of the w h e e l , then install the rear
wheels.
19-20
6. Remove the pad shims (A) and the brake pads (B). 11. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the retainers. Keep the assembly paste off
the brake disc and brake pads.
12. A p p l y a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste

(P/N 08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A),
the back of the brake pads (B), and the other areas
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the pad shims and the brake pads friction
material. Keep grease and assembly paste off the
brake disc and the brake pads. Contaminated brake
disc or brake pads reduce stopping ability.
7. Remove the pad retainers (A).
13. Install the brake pads and the pad shims correctly.
Install the brake pad w i t h the wear indicator (C) on
"A the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads,
always reinstall the brake pads in their original
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency.
8. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove

any r u s t and check for grooves and cracks.
Verify that the caliper pins (C) move in and out
smoothly. Clean and lube if needed.
9. Inspect the brake disc for runout, thickness,

parallelism (see page 19-23) and check for damage
and cracks.
10. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste

(P/N 08798-9010) to the retainer mating surface of
the caliper bracket (indicated by the arrows).
(cont'd)
19-21
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)

14. Rotate t h e caliper piston (A) clockwise into the 18. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure
cylinder, then align the cutout (B) in the piston w i t h the brakes work.
the tab (C) on the inner pad by turning the piston
back. Lubricate the boot w i t h rubber grease to - NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
avoid twisting the piston boot. If the piston boot is stroke Immediately after the brake pads have been
twisted, back It out so it Is positioned properly. replaced as a s e t Several applications of the brake
pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
NOTE: Be careful w h e n moving the piston back In
the caliper; brake fluid might overflow f r o m the 19. A d d brake fluid as needed.
: master cylinder's reservoir. If brake fluid gets on
^, any p* inted surface, wash it off immediately w i t h 20. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line
water joints or connections, and retighten If necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then recheck for leaks
E
8xi.: (see page 19-34).
22 N i
( 2 . 2 k<
15. Install the caliper. Install the flange bolts (D), and
tighten It to the specified torque while holding the
respective caliper pin w i t h a wrench being careful
not to damage the pin boots.
16. Install the brake hose mounting bolt (E).

wheels.
19-22
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout -. 7. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish

the brake disc w i t h a Honda-approved
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h commercially available on-car brake lathe.
1-10). Max. refinishing limit: 8.© mm (0.31 in.)
2. Remove the rear wheels. NOTE:

• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-20). refinishing, replace it (see page 19-25).
• If the brake disc is replaced w i t h a new one,
4. Inspect the brake disc to wheel surface for damage check the new disc for runout. If the new disc is
and cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and out of specification, refinish the disc.
remove all rust.
8. Install the brake pads (see page 19-20).
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B),
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque 9. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc
to hold the brake disc securely against the hub. and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheels.
10 m m
B
108 N-m
(11.0 k g f - m , 7 9 . 6 Ibf-ft)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

s h o w n , and measure the runout at 10 m m (3/8 in.)
f r o m the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:

(cont'd)
19-23
Rear Brake Disc inspection (cont'd)
Thickness and Parallelism 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
parallelism, refinish the brake disc w i t h a Honda-
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h approved commercially available on-car brake
safety stands in the proper locations (see page lathe.
1-10).
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
2. Remove the rear wheels. for refinishing, replace it (see page 19-25).
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-20). 6. Install the brake pads (see page 19-20).
4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc 7. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc
thickness at eight points, about 45 ° apart and and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
10 m m (3/8 in.) in f r o m the outer edge of the brake wheels.
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
Brake disc thickness:

Standard: 8.9—9.1 mm (0.35—0.36 in.)
Max. refinishing limit: 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the m a x i m u m allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
10 mm (3/8 in.)
19-24
Rear Brake Disc Replacement
NOTE: Keep any grease off the brake disc and brake 6. Remove the brake disc flathead screws (A).
pads.

1-10).
3. Release the parking brake lever fully.

bracket.
8 x 1.25 m m
7. Remove the brake disc (B) f r o m the hub bearing

unit.
J NOTE: If the brake disc is stuck to the hub bearing

unit, thread t w o 8 x 1.25 m m bolts (C) into the brake
I disc to push it away f r o m the hub bearing unit.
' Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent the
brake disc f r o m binding.
i
i
8. Install the brake disc in the reverse order of
54 Ibfft) | removal, and note these items:
ij
5. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts
• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
(B), then remove the caliper assembly (C) f r o m the
surfaces between the hub bearing unit and the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
inside of the brake disc.
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire
• Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-7).
to hang the caliper assembly f r o m the
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose and the 9. Inspect the brake disc runout (see page 19-23).
parking brake cable excessively.
NOTE: Make sure the washers (D) position on and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
reassembly, if they are removed (see step 5 on wheel.
page 18-33).
19-25
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush t o clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are different.
If these caliper pins are installed in the w r o n g location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and possibly
uneven tire wear.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints w i t h rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blow out all passages w i t h compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts w i t h new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets into the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• W h e n reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Honda DOT 3 Brake Fluid f r o m an unopened container. Using a
non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Coat the piston, piston seal groove, and caliper bore with clean brake fluid.
• Use recommended greases in the rear caliper set.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
r-^=^REASEH : Honda silicone grease (P/N 08C30-B0234M)

BANJO BOLT
34 N m
(3.5 kgf m, 25 Ibfft)
19-26
Rear Drum Brake inspection
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-10).
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake d r u m (see page 19-29).
WHEEL CYLINDER
Inspect for leakage.
6 x 1.0 mm
9 N-m
(0.9 k g f - m , 7 Ibf-ft) PARKING BRAKE LEVER
M a r k e d left a n d r i g h t .
UPPER R E T U R N SPRING
Check for weakness
ADJUSTER BOLT and damage.
Check ratchet teeth
for wear and damage. BRAKE SHOE
If b r a k e s h o e s a r e t o b e
CONNECTING reused, mark and reassemble
ROD A n the same position.
WAVE WASHER
T E N S I O N PIN U-CLIP
Replace.
BRAKE SHOE BOSSES

Check f o r d e e p g r o o v e s
and rust.
BACKING PLATE
Check for d e f o r m a t i o n . SELF-ADJUSTER LEVER
SELF-ADJUSTER SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
RETAINER SPRING
Check for weakness
and damage.
LOWER RETURN SPRING BRAKE DRUM

Check for w e a k n e s s Check for w e a r and damage.
and damage.
(cont'd)
19-27
Rear Drum Brake Inspection (cont'd)

4. Check the wheel cylinder (A) for leakage. 9. Measure the inside diameter of the brake d r u m
w i t h inside vernier calipers.
A
Drum inside diameter:
Standard: 219.9-220.0 mm (8.657-8.661 in.)
Service limit: 221 mm (8.70 in.)
5. Check the brake linings (B) for cracking, glazing,

wear, and contamination.
10. If the inside diameter of the brake d r u m is more
NOTE: Contaminated brake linings or drums than the service limit, replace the brake d r u m .
reduce stopping ability.
11. Check the brake d r u m for scoring, grooves,
6. Measure the brake lining thickness (C). corrosion, and cracks.
Measurement does not include brake shoe
thickness. 12. Install the brake d r u m (see page 19-29).
Brake lining thickness: 13. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake disc
Standard: 4.5 mm (0.18 in.) and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) wheels.
7. If any part of the brake lining thickness is less than

the service limit, replace the brake shoes as a set.
8. Check the hub bearing unit (D) for smooth

operation. If it requires servicing, replace the hub
bearing unit (see page 18-34).
19-28
Rear Brake Drum Replacement
NOTE; Keep any grease off the brake d r u m and brake 4. Install the brake d r u m in the reverse order of
shoes. removal.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it w i t h NOTE:

safety stands in the proper locations (see page • Before installing the brake d r u m , clean the
1-10). mating surfaces between the rear hub bearing
unit and the inside of the brake d r u m .
2. Remove the rear wheel. • After installation, press the brake pedal several
times to make sure the brakes w o r k and self
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake adjust the brake shoes. Do not drive the vehicle
d r u m (A) f r o m the hub bearing unit. before doing this procedure.
NOTE: 5. Clean the outside mating surfaces between the

• If necessary, turn the adjuster bolt (B) with a flat- brake d r u m and the inside of the wheel, then install
tip screwdriver until the shoes become loose. the rear wheel.
• If the brake d r u m is stuck to the hub bearing unit,
thread t w o 8 x 1.25 m m bolts (C) into the brake
d r u m to push it away f r o m the hub bearing u n i t
Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a time to prevent
the brake drum f r o m binding.
19-29
Rear Brake Shoe Replacement

Special Tools Required 4. Unhook the upper return spring (A) f r o m the
Brake spring installer 07LAF-SM40200 rearward shoe using the brake spring installer (B).
A
r r e q u e n i irtnalation of brake pad u u b i , i c y c u u i e s ^ oT

material composition, could be hazardous to your
health.
• A v o i d breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved v a c u u m
cleaner.
Disassemblf

B
1-10). 07LAF-SM40200
2. Remove the rear wheels. 5. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing respective
retainer spring (B), and turning the pin.
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake
d r u m (see page 19-29).
19-30
6. Remove the lower return spring (A), and remove Reassembly
the brake shoe assembly over the hub.
1. Apply Molykote 44MA to the sliding surface of the
C
pivot pin (A) on the parking brake lever (B).
D
7. Remove the forward brake shoe (B) by removing

the upper return spring (C), and disassemble the
brake shoe assembly.
8. Remove the rearward brake shoe (D) by 2. Install the rearward brake shoe (C) and the wave
disconnecting the parking brake cable f r o m the washer (D) on the pivot pin, and secure w i t h a new
parking brake lever (E). U-clip (E).
9. Remove the U-clip (A), and the wave washer (B), NOTE: Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the
then separate the parking brake lever (C) f r o m the parking brake lever f r o m coming out of the brake
brake shoe (D). shoe.
3. Connect the parking brake cable to the parking

brake lever.
4. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 44MA to the

connecting rod ends (A), and the sliding surfaces
(B) as shown. Wipe off any excess. Keep grease off
the brake linings.
Greasing symbols:
• • • • Connecting rod ends and sliding surfaces
(cont'd)
19-31
;
Rear Brake Si m Replacement (c< tf'd)
5. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 44MA to the shoe 8. Install the tension pins (A) and the retainer springs
ends (A) and to the edge of the shoe surfaces (B) (B) by pushing in the respective spring and turning
that make contact with the backing plate as s h o w n . the pin.
Wipe off any excess. Keep grease off the brake
linings.
Greasing symbols:
• Brake shoe ends
c^>o E d g e o f t h e s h o e syrf •
9. Install the lower return spring.
NOTE: Make sure the brake shoes positioning on

6. Install connecting rods A and B on the adjuster bolt the brake shoe bosses of the backing plate, and
(C). fitting the top of the brake shoes onto the wheel
cylinder pistons.
NOTE:
• Clean the threaded portions of connecting rod A 10. Hook the end (A) of the upper return spring (B) with
and the sliding surface of connecting rod B, then the brake spring installer (C).
coat t h e m w i t h Molykote 44MA.
• Shorten connecting rod A by fully turning the
adjuster bolt.
07LAF-SM40200
7. Assemble the brake shoes, the upper return spring

(D), and the connecting rods w i t h the adjuster bolt
against the backing plate, then install the self-
adjuster lever (E) and the self-adjuster spring (F) on
the f o r w a r d brake shoe (G).
19-32
Rear Wheel Cylinder Replacement
11. Install the brake d r u m (see page 19-29). NOTE:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
NOTE: Before Installing the brake d r u m , clean the the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
mating surfaces between the rear hub and the off immediately with water.
inside of the brake d r u m . • To prevent spills, cover the hose joints w i t h clean
rags or shop towels.
12. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake drum
and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear 1. Remove the brake shoes (see page 19-30).
wheels.
2. Disconnect the brake line (A) f r o m the wheel
13. Press the. brake pedal several times to make sure cylinder (B).
the brakes work and to set the self-adjusting brake.
NOTE: Engagement of the brakes may require a

greater pedal stroke immediately after the brake
shoes have been replaced as a set. Several
applications of the brake pedal will restore the
normal pedal stroke.
14. Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-7).
3. Remove the bolts (C) and the wheel cylinder f r o m

the backing plate.
NOTE: Use the special bolts on reassembly.
4. Apply Cemedine 366E sealant or equivalent

between the wheel cylinder and backing plate (D),
and install the wheel cylinder, then connect the
brake line.
5. Install the brake shoes (see page 19-31).
6. Bleed the normal brake system (except the servo

unit and power unit) (see page 19-97).
7. Inspect and adjust the parking brake (see page

19-7).
8. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
9. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-34).
19-33
Brake Hose and Line Inspection

1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, Interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. ' Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder, the servo unit, the power unit, and the ABS o.r VSA modulator-control unit for damage
and leaks.
Connection Component Connected t o Specified Torque Value Note

Point
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 Ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
Bleed screw 9 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 34 N-m (3.5 kgf-m, 25 ibf-ft) Banjo bolt
(disc type) Bleed screw 9 N-m (0.9 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
Rear wheel cylinder Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
(drum type) Bleed screw 7 N-m (0.7 kgf-m, 5 Ibf-ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder (ABS) Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
Master cylinder (VSA) 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
E ABS modulator-control unit Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
VSA modulator-control unit Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft)
(10 m m nut)
Brake line 22 N-m (2.2 kgf-m, 16 Ibf-ft)
(12 m m nut)
F 4-way joint Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
G Servo unit Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
Brake hose Hose clamp
H Power unit Brake line 15 N-m (1.5 kgf-m, 11 Ibf-ft) Flare nut
Brake hose Hose clamp
19-34
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE; 3. With clip type: Remove the brake hose clip (A) f r o m
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of the brake hose (B).
dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to
do so.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
• Plug the ends of the hoses and the joints to prevent
spilling brake fluid.
• The illustrations show only the front of the vehicle
except where the procedure is different for the rear.
1. Remove the wheel.
2. Disconnect the brake hose (A) f r o m the brake line

(B) using a 10 m m flare-nut wrench (C).
4. Disc brake type; Remove the banjo bolt (C), and

disconnect the brake hose f r o m the caliper.
5. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt(s) (D), then

remove the brake hose.
NOTE: Without clip type: Remove the brake hose

w i t h the bracket.
(cont'd)
19-35
Brake Hose Replacement (cont'd)
6. Install the brake hose (A) w i t h the brake hose 8. Position the brake hose ends (A).
mounting bolt (B).
NOTE:
• With clip type: Install the brake hose on the brake
hose bracket (B) w i t h a new brake hose clip (C).
• Without clip type: Install the brake hose bracket
(D) to the frame.
With clip type
Without clip type
D
Replace.
7. Disc brake type: Connect the brake hose to the
caliper w i t h the banjo bolt (C) and the new sealing
washers (D).
9. Connect the brake line (E) to the brake hose.
10. After installing the brake hose, bleed the normal

brake system (except the servo unit and power
unit) (see page 19-97).
11. Do the following checks:
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
tighten if necessary.
• Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.

or the brake d r u m and the inside of the wheel, then
install the wheel.
19-36
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
REAR D R U M BRAKE TYPE:

•l
P A R K I N G BRAKE LEVER 22 N-m

Check f o r s m o o t h (2.2 kgf-m, 1 6 Ibf-ft)
operation.
(cont'd)
19-37
#
Parking Brake Cable" Replacement : d)
NOTE: Rear Drum Brake Type
• The parking brake cables must not be bent or
distorted. This will lead to stiff operation and 1. Loosen the parking brake cable adjustment nut
premature failure. (see page 19-9).
• Refer to the Exploded View as needed d u r i n g this
procedure. 2. Remove the brake d r u m and shoes, and disconnect
the parking brake cable f r o m the parking brake
Rear Disc Brake Type lever (see page 19-30).
1. Release the parking brake lever fully. 3. Remove the flange bolt (A) and parking brake cable
(B) f r o m the backing plate (C).
2. Loosen the parking brake cable adjustment nut
(see page 19-8).
3. 'Remove the parking brake cable clip (A) f r o m the

brake cable (B).
4. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse

A order of removal, and note these items:
4. Disconnect the parking brake cable f r o m the lever • Be careful not to bend or distort the cable.
(C). • Connect the parking brake cable to the brake
lever, and Install the brake shoes and d r u m
5. Remove the parking brake cable mounting (see page 19-31).
hardware, then remove the cable. • Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-9). Apply
the parking brake f i r m l y 10 times then adjust It
6. Install the parking brake cable in the reverse order again.
of removal, and note these Items:
• Be careful not to bend or distort the cable and

boot (D).
• Make sure the parking brake cable clip is fully
seated on the cable housing.
• Adjust the parking brake (see page 19-8).
19-38
Parking Brake Lever Grip and Cover Replacement
Removal 5. Remove the lever grip (A) by sliding it up.
Lever Grip
2. Pull up the parking brake fully (8 to 10 clicks).
3. Start at the front edge (A), peel the lever grip away
f r o m lever cap (B). Continue to peel the grip f r o m
the lever to gain access to the hooks (C).
4. Push in both sides of the hook (A) on the lever cap

(B), and remove the lever cap and the pushrod (C)
with the knob (D).
7. Separate the parking brake lever covers, and

remove t h e m .
(cont'd)
19-39
Parking Brake Lever Grip and Cover Replacement (cont'd)
Installation Lever Grip
Lever Cower 3. Install a new lever grip (A) by sliding It over the
cover.
1. Install the clip (A) on the driver's side of the parking
brake lever cover (B) to the lever (C).
4. Install a new lever cap (A) on to the lever by

aligning the notch (B) In the cap w i t h the tab (C) on
the lever.
2. Install the passenger's side of the parking brake

lever cover (D), and squeeze both sides of the cover
together.
5. With the lever cap and grip in position, push d o w n

on the cap to lock the hooks (D) Into place.
19-40
Carefully peel back the front edge (A) of the lever 7. Install a new pushrod (A) w i t h the knob (B), and
grip, and apply a small amount of gel type super push them into the parking brake lever (C).
glue (B). Carefully push the grip back into place and
hold while waiting a minute for the glue to dry. NOTE: Do not use the removed pushrod and knob.
8. Release and pull the parking brake about 10 times.
B 9. Check if the push knob play is about 2 m m (0.08 in.)

and that the parking brake lever moves smoothly,
then do the parking brake inspection (see page
19-7).
10. Install the center console (see page 20-79).
19-41
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components 19-1

Advanced Hydraulic Booster
Component Location Index . .... 19-44
Memorizing 0 (Zero) Position • 19-48
DTC Troubleshooting Index - 19-49
Circuit Diagram — 19-56
Brake System Bleeding 19-95
Master Cylinder and Servo Unit Replacement 19-100
Master Cylinder Inspection 19-104
Power Unit Replacement 19-105
Power Unit Disassembly 19-107
Accumulator Disposal .... 19-108
Brake Pedal Replacement ••• 19-108
Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Replacement 19-109
Buzzer Replacement 19-109
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Components ('06-09 Models) .... . 19-111
Components T09 Model) 19-159
DATA LINK
C O N N E C T O R (DLC)' BUZZER
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
ABS or
VSA
MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
M A S T E R CYLINDER and S E R V O UNIT

Brake S y s t e m B l e e d i n g , p a g e 19-95
POWER UNIT M a s t e r Cylinder I n sp e ct i o n , page 19-104
D i s a s s e m b l y , p a g e 19-107
A c c u m u l a t o r D i s p o s a l , p a g e 19-108
BRAKE PEDAL
S t r o k e S e n s o r R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-109
19-44
AHB Indicator
[ NOTICE 1
A serious advanced hydraulic booster problem w i l l The AHB indicator comes on w h e n the advanced
decrease the braking power of the vehicle, and hydraulic booster function is lost, and this may affect
increase the risk of a collision. normal brake operation.
If the system indicators come on and the buzzer If AHB indicator comes on, press the brake pedal slowly,
sounds while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe and check the braking effectiveness then stop the
place as soon as possible, and do not drive the vehicle and inspect above system.
vehicle until the system returns to normal.
Brake System Indicator
System Indicators
The brake system indicator comes on when the
This system has t w o indicators and a buzzer: advanced hydraulic booster function is lost, the EBD
function is lost, the parking brake is applied, and/or the
• AHB indicator (A) (amber color) brake fluid level is low.
• Brake system indicator (B) (red color)
• Buzzer (audible alert) Buzzer
When the system detects a problem, it turns on the AHB The buzzer indicates audibly, in conjunction w i t h the
indicator and buzzer, and/or the brake system indicator. brake system indicator, when the advanced hydraulic
Depending on the failure, the servo unit determines booster function is lost, and this may affect normal
which indicators are turned on. brake operation.
When the system is OK, the AHB indicator and brake
system indicator come on for about 2 seconds after
turning the ignition switch to ON (II), then they go off.
(cont'd)
19-45
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs
• The m e m o r y holds all DTGs. However, w h e n the The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
same DTC is detected more than once, the more of the problem is still present, and the AHB and/or
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. brake system indicator is still on. Following a
Therefore, w h e n the same problem is detected troubleshooting procedure for a code that has been
repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC. cleared but does not reset can result in incorrect
• The DTCs are indicated in ascending number order, diagnosis.
not in the order they occur.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, 1. Question the customer about the conditions w h e n
the memorized DTCs cannot be erased by the problem occurred, and try to reproduce the
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out
procedures to clear the DTCs. w h e n the AHB and/or brake system indicator came
on, such as during activation, after activation, w h e n
Self-diagnosis the vehicle was traveling at a certain speed, etc. If
necessary, have the customer demonstrate the
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into t w o categories: concern.
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
is turned to ON (II) and until the AHB indicator and 2. W h e n the AHB and/or brake system indicator does
the brake system indicator go off. not come on during the test-drive, but
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial troubleshooting is done based on the DTC, check
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to for loose connectors, poor contact of the terminals,
LOCK (0). etc. in the circuit indicated by the DTC before you
• W h e n the system detects a problem, the servo unit start troubleshooting.
shifts to fail-safe mode.
3. After troubleshooting, or repairs are done, clear the
Pump Motor DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
• The p u m p motor in the power unit operates w h e n the the AHB and/or brake system indicators do not
accumulator inner pressure becomes low while the come on.
ignition switch is turned to ON (11).
• The p u m p motor is operated by the servo unit. The 4. Check for DTCs f r o m other systems which are
servo unit has independent main activation and connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
subactivation circuits in the ECU (electric control unit). related to F-CAN, one possible cause was that the
If either circuit has a problem, the other one w i l l run ignition switch was turned to ON (ll) w i t h the servo
the p u m p motor. unit connector disconnected. Clear the DTCs. Check
for fuel and emissions DTCs first.
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding
NOTE: Always troubleshoot fuel and emissions
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures for DTCs first.
the servo unit and power unit are independent of the
•conventional brake system (see page 19-95). Intermittent Failures
The t e r m ' i n t e r m i t t e n t f a i l u r e " means a system may

have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If you cannot
reproduce the condition, check for loose connectors or
terminal pins related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting.
19-46
H o w to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic Mom to Retrieve DTCs
System)
1. If the AHB indicator and the brake system indicator HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
stay on, connect the HDS to the data link connector driver's side of the dashboard.
(DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the
dashboard. 2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II).

and the servo unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the
DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the

refer to the DTC troubleshooting. Do the all
systems DTC check, and troubleshoot any
powertrain DTCs first.
How t o Clear DTCs
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle driver's side of the dashboard.
DLC circuit (see page 11-213). 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for all 3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle
systems, troubleshoot the powertrain DTCs first and the servo unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the
and note It. Then refer to the indicated DTCs DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
troubleshooting, and do the appropriate
troubleshooting procedure. 4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
on the HDS.
NOTE:
• The HDS can read the DTC, the current data, and 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
other system data.
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu
that came w i t h the HDS.
19-47
Memorizing 0 (Zero) Position
Do the memorizing 0 (zero) position whenever you do 6. Check for DTCs and make sure no DTC is indicated,
any of these actions; then memorize the 0 (zero) position of the brake
pedal stroke sensor and the servo unit by following
• Replace the servo unit. the screen prompts on the HDS.
• Replace the brake pedal.
• Replace the brake pedal stroke sensor. NOTE:
• Adjust the brake pedal height. • See the HDS Help menu for specific instructions.
• If the memorization process does not work,
1. With the ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the replace the servo unit (see page 19-100).
HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located
under the driver's side of the dashboard. 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).

DLC circuit (see page 11-213).

on the HDS.

ON (II) again.
19-48
DTC Detection Item AHB Brake Buzzer Note
Indicator System (by sound)
Indicator
11 M o t o r Lock a n d C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-60)
12 Motor Voltaqe Malfunction 1 ON ON/OFF ON/OFF (see p a g e 19-60)
13 Motor Voltaqe Malfunction 2 ON ON/OFF ON/OFF (see p a g e 19-60)
14 M o t o r Stuck O N ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-63)
21 PACC S e n s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-64)
22 PREG S e n s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-64)
23 PMC Sensor Malfunction ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-64)
24 Brake Pedal S t r o k e S e n s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-64)
31 NO Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-66)
32 NC Solenoid Valve M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-66)
33 RNO Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-66)
34 RNC S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-66)
35 NO Solenoid Valve Duty Limit Out ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-67)
36 NC S o l e n o i d V a l v e D u t y L i m i t O u t ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-67)
37 RNO Solenoid Valve Duty Limit Out ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-67)
38 RNC S o l e n o i d V a l v e D u t y L i m i t O u t ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-67)
41 A c c u m u l a t o r S t o r e d Pressure L o w ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-68)
42 Requlator Malfunction ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-69)
43 Master Cylinder Malfunction ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-69)
44 Partial Brake Pedal S t r o k e S e n s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-70)
45 R e l a t i o n of Brake Pedal S t r o k e S e n s o r a n d P M C S e n s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-70)
46 R e l a t i o n o f Brake Pedal S t r o k e S e n s o r a n d PREG S e n s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-71)
47 R e l a t i o n o f P M C S e n s o r a n d PREG S e n s o r M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-72)
51 M o t o r Circuit O N ON ON/OFF ON/OFF (see p a g e 19-72)
52 M o t o r Circuit OFF ON ON/OFF ON/OFF (see p a g e 19-73)
54 Fail-safe Relay M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-73)
61 Control Unit L o w Voltaqe ON ON/OFF ON/OFF (see p a g e 19-74)
62 Control Unit Hiqh Voltaqe ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-76)
63 Back U p C i r c u i t V o l t a q e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON/OFF (see p a g e 19-76)
64 Brake Pedal S t r o k e S e n s o r , PREG S e n s o r a n d P M C S e n s o r V o l t a g e ON OFF OFF (see p a g e 19-78)
Malfunction
65 Control Unit Circuit Stuck ON ON OFF OFF (see page 19-79)
66 C o n t r o l U n i t C i r c u i t S t u c k OFF ON OFF OFF (see page 19-80)
67 IG1 V o l t a q e M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see page 19-80)
68 IG2 V o l t a q e M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see page 19-81)
71 Brake Pedal P o s i t i o n S w i t c h S t u c k O N ON OFF OFF (see page 19-82)
72 Brake Pedal P o s i t i o n S w i t c h S t u c k OFF ON OFF OFF (see page 19-82)
73 Brake Fluid Level S w i t c h M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF OFF (see page 19-83)
81 Control Unit Internal M a i n Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF ON/OFF (see page 19-84)
82 Control Unit Internal Subcircuit Malfunction ON ON/OFF ON/OFF (see page 19-84)
83 F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON OFF (see page 19-84)
84 S e n s o r 0 (Zero) P o s i t i o n n o t M e m o r i z e d ON OFF OFF (see page 19-85)
86 F-CAN M a l f u n c t i o n (Bus-off, C o m m u n i c a t i o n ) ON OFF OFF (see page 19-85)
19-49
W h e n the vehicle has one of these s y m p t o m s , check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) w i t h the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until you find the case.

HDS does not communicate w i t h the servo Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
unit or the vehicle
AHB indicator and brake system indicator 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-223).
do not come on 2. Substitute a known-good servo unit, then recheck. If it is OK,
replace the original servo unit (see page 19-100).
AHB indicator does not go off, and no 1. S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 19-88).
DTCs are stored 2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-223).
Brake system indicator comes on w h e n the Substitute a known-good accumulator, then recheck. If it is OK,
brake pedal is pressed, then goes off replace the original accumulator (see page 19-107).
suddenly (check while pressing the brake
pedal for several seconds)
Brake system indicator comes on while the Substitute a known-good servo unit, then recheck. If it is OK, replace
brake pedal is pressed, and goes off w h e n the original servo unit (see page 19-100).
the brake pedal is released (check after
pressing the brake pedal several seconds)
Buzzer does not sound (during the buzzer S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 19-91).
test)
Buzzer sounds continually S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 19-94).
19-50
System Description
Servo Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector (Connector Disconnected)
1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9
10 12 14 16
/
17 18 /// 23 24 25
Terminal Wire color Terminal Description Signal

number sign
1 WHT CAN-H F-CAN communication circuit
2 RED SVccA Detects brake pedal stroke
sensor signal
5 GRN BUZZER Detects buzzer signal
6 BRN IG2 Power source for activating the W i t h ignition switch ON (II): battery
system voltage (about 12 V)
7 BLK GND2 Ground for the servo unit Continuity to ground
8 WHT MS+B Power source for the fail-safe Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
relay
9 RED MR+B Power source for the motor Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
relay
10 LT BLU K-LINE Communications w i t h HDS
12 BLU BS+B Power source for activating the Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
system
14 BLU BPS Detects brake pedal stroke
sensor signal
16 YEL* 1
IG1 Power source for activating the With ignition switch ON (II): battery
2
GRY* system voltage (about 12 V)
17 RED CAN-L F-CAN communication circuit
18 GRY SGNDA Ground for the brake pedal
stroke sensor
25 WHT MOT(+) Power source for power unit
* 1 : '06 model
* 2 : '07-09 models
(cont'd)
19-51
System Communication
The advanced hydraulic booster system has a quick-reacting servo unit and a power unit functioning as a brake
booster. This makes it possible to stabilize the braking power w h i l e the auto idle stop is operating. This system can
raise the brake fluid pressure control quickly, and it works in conjunction with the other systems.
P o w e r unit w i t h m o t o r
(on t h e right sidevehicle)
S e n d s the buzzer Buzzer
drive signal. (on the d r i v e r ' s
side on thedash)
Sends the brake pedal

stroke position signal.
Brake pedal stroke sensor

Sends the motor control signal and
(on t h e b r a k e p e d a l )
manages the accumulator inner pressure,
( m o t o r is c o n t r o l l e d b y m a i n c i r c u i t
or subcircuit)
S e r v o unit w i t h m a s t e r cylinder
(on t h e d r i v e r ' s s i d e of e n g i n e
compartment)
Via F-CAN
• Indicator drive signal

• B r a k e fluid level s w i t c h signal
• Parking brake switch signal
Indicators • Brake pedal position switch signal
(on t h e g a u g e control m o d u l e (tach)) • C r e e p aid s y s t e m (CAS) control requires ( C V T s y s t e m )
• R e g e n e r a t i v e c o n t r o l c o o p e r a t i o n s i g n a l (IMA s y s t e m )
• Vehicle speed signal
• A B S or V S A modulator-control unit functioning signal
PCM
( o n t h e left s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t )
A B S or V S A modulator-control unit
( o n t h e r i g h t s i d e of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t )
19-52
Servo Unit Internal Construction
The servo unit has mechanical and electrical components.
* ECU (electronic control unit)

* Mechanical valves: mechanical IN (inlet) valve, mechanical OUT (outlet) valve.
* Solenoid valves: N O * , NC* , RNO* , RNC*
1
2 1 2
* Pressure sensors: PMC sensor, PACC sensor, PREG sensor.
* 1: Normally open
* 2 : Normally closed
SERVO U N I T POWER UNIT
ECU (electronic control unit)

The ECU monitors the pressure in the servo unit and feedback f r o m other system controls.
(cont'd)
19-53
Mechanical Valves for Conventional B r a k e Operations
W h e n the brake pedal Is pressed, force Is applied to the regulator valve through the compressed spring, the bushing,
and the stroke simulator.
The regulator valve applies accumulator pressure t o the master cylinder in proportion to the brake pedal stroke.
The mechanical IN valve and the mechanical OUT valve In the regulator valve are operated by the conventional brake.
The hydraulic control has three operations: Pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
Operation Mechanical Valve

IN OUT
Pressure Intensifying Open Closed
Pressure Retaining Closed Closed
Pressure Reducing Closed Open
NOTE: If the power unit has a- problem, -and the accumulator pressure (PACC) is low or depleted, the normal brake
system Is affected. The primary and the secondary pistons in the master cylinder are pushed by the brake pedal
without assist f r o m the booster.
Solenoid Valves for Master Cylinder Electrical Controls

The pressure to the master cylinder is controlled by four solenoid valves.
The solenoid valves control these operations: Regenerate cooperation control, CAS control, brake assist control.
Control Solenoid Valve

NO NC RNO RNC
Regenerate Cooperation Control Linear Control Linear Control
CAS Control Linear Control
Brake Assist Control Linear Control Linear Control
Pressure Sensors
The servo unit monitors the master cylinder pressure (PMC), the accumulator pressure (PACC), and the regulator
pressure (PREG) w i t h independent pressure sensors that send feedback to the CPU.
NOTE: The regulator pressure sensor recognizes brake pedal operation. The brake pedal stroke sensor checks for
regulator pressure sensor or servo unit CPU malfunctions.
19-54
Servo Unit Electronic Control
The servo unit has a ECU (electronic control unit) that does these functions:
• Checks for system failures.

• Controls the motor on the power unit.
• Controls the indicators.
• Controls the buzzer.
• Receives the brake pedal stroke sensor signal.
• Creep aid system (CAS), in conjunction w i t h the PCM (CVT system).
• Controls-the regenerative system in conjunction w i t h the PCM (IMA system).
• Brake assist.
• Receives the pressure sensors signal.
Safety Structure of Motor Control

The p u m p motor is operated by the servo unit. The servo unit has independent main activation and subactivation
circuits in the ECU (electronic control unit). If either circuit has a problem, the other one w i l l run the p u m p motor.
Creep Aid System (CAS)
The CAS keeps the brakes applied w h e n CVT control requires it during auto idle stop. This prevents the vehicle f r o m
rolling forward or backward while the driver releases the brake pedal (to press the accelerator pedal) and the engine
starts. When the CVT requires the CAS function, the servo unit operates the solenoid valves to maintain the brake fluid
pressure to the master cylinder. The brake fluid pressure is reduced gradually while the solenoid valves in the servo
unit are operating.
After the engine starts and the brake pedal is released, the CVT no longer requires the CAS.
Regenerative Control Cooperation

When the driver decelerates or stops by pressing the brake pedal, the servo unit communicates w i t h the PCM to
control the balance between the regenerative control and the normal brake system.
In this case, the brake pedal reaction force is the same as a conventional brake system, and the driver is unaware of
these controls.
Brake Assist
W h e n the driver does emergency braking the servo unit senses the quick rise in the brake pressure. In this case, the
servo unit adds pressure to the inner cylinder, and assists the brake pedal application for the driver.
This control ends at the end of the brake application, w h e n the vehicle stops, the brake pedal is released, or if the
system has a problem.
19-55
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD
©
No. 61 (10 A)
L,
——CTMD—-
No. 63 (15 A)
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y B O X
No. 4 (7.5 A) 1
YEL*
No. 1 (100 A) No. 2 (50 A) GRY* 2
IG1 HOT in ON (II)

and S T A R T (III)
7-
No. 5 (40 A)
— 0 X 0 — - RED
No. 1 2 { 1 5 A )
««—0x0—« WHT
BRAKE PEDAL a
POSITION S W I T C H WHT
Closed: Brake pedal pressed
-RED «
GAUGE CONTROL
M O D U L E (TACH)
— WHT - "WHT -WHT

BRAKE S Y S T E M
INDICATOR -RED «
— RED - -RED «
AHB • LT GRN •
INDICATOR
— GRN -
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
-WHT i
— RED •
BRAKE FLUID
L E V E L SWITCH • LT BLU
Closed: Low fluid
PARKING » WHT • + B
BRAKE SWITCH
BLK Closed: Parking
brake applied — BLK
1 JL
19-56
S E R V O UNIT
MS +B
YEL* 1 16
2
GRY* IG1
6
M a i n C P U
^[4-3 REGULATOR f l l
FAIL-SAFE R E L A Y F E T
V S A MODULATOR-
4
C O N T R O L UNIT*
A B S MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT* 3
"Li PUMP MOTOR RELAY F E T
SOLENOIDS
WHT > WHT «
NO
: RED . . RED .
NC
•WHT -WHT " -WHT

CAN-H CAN
17 CONTROLLER
-RED * -RED - -RED •
l_.
KLINE
BRAKE PEDAL
STROKE SENSOR
-RED '
SVccA
14
-BLU •
BPS
18
-GRY «
POWER UNIT SGND/i
25
PUMP MOTOR
(j§r -WHT
-BLK
MOT(+)
GND2
7
23
-BLK •
GIMD3
24
BLK -
-®-:12V *1: '06 model • 3 ; With A B S

•2: '07-09 models *4: With V S A
-O :5V
(cont'd)
19-57
U N D E R - H O O D F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R F (20P) BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH

2P CONNECTOR
—i, 10
2 3
\/ 5 6 7 8
9
11 12
/ i 14 15 16 17
/ 19 20
FUSE/RELAY BOX PEDAL POSITION

BUZZER
UNDER-DASH BRAKE
CONNECTOR Q(16P) SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
2P CONNECTOR
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 3 ><
BRAKE PEDAL
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)
STROKE SENSOR
3P CONNECTOR
r U
1 / 3 4 5|/ /18 14|15 16|17 18 19 n 1
1 2
1 n
3
,20 / 22 23 24
b—
25 2 6 2 7 2 8 29 30 31 32 33
/ J 1
i —
POWER UNIT
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR G (21P) 2P CONNECTOR
TJ
1 2 3 /
5 6 7 /
y 11 12 13 / 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
XL
S E R V O UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
1 2
/ 5 6 7 8 9
10 12 14 16
17 18
/ 23
24 25
19-58
4 | 5 1 6 | J | 8 1 9 [10111 I/I\3|l4ll5|l6|l7|l8
19 20 21 27 28 29 32 33
A B S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 25P C O N N E C T O R V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 37P C O N N E C T O R
(With ABS) (With V S A )
1 2 3 / 5 6
8 9 1 / 3 / / 6 7 8 9 10 11 / 13 14
10 / 12 / 14 15 16
/ / 1 5 / 1 7 X / 1 9 2 0 X 2 1
2 2 /
24 25
17 18
/ / / 36 37
/ 26 28 34
PCM C O N N E C T O R A ( 4 4 P ) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
12 14 16 J
Terminal side o f f e m a l e terminals
19
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11: Motor Lock and Circuit Malfunction 8. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P
DTC 12: Motor Voltage Malfunction 1
DTC 12: Motor Voltage Malfunction 2
MR +B (RED)

1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9
10 12 14 16
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 24 25
17 18 / / 23

ON (II) again.

Is DTC 11, 12, or 13 indicated?
NO-—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the power unit 2P between the No. 5 (40 A) fuse and the servo unit. •
connector and the servo unit 25P connector. Refer
to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page NO—Install a new No. 5 (40 A) fuse in the under-
19-46). • hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 9.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 9. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
6. Check the No. 5 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
Y E S — G o t o step 7. ON (II) again.
NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 14. 13. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
7. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step Is DTC 11, 12, or Vindicated?
13 on page 19-101).
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. H
19-60
14. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step 17. Disconnect the power unit 2P connector.
13 on page 19-101).
18. Check for continuity between power unit 2P
15. Measure the voltage between servo unit 25P connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
P O W E R UNIT 2P C O N N E C T O R
MR +B (RED)
J = Z L
1 2
/ / 5 6 7 8 9 CpD
10 / 12 14 1 ft
ID
I MOT
/ / 23 24 25
{+) (WHT)
17 18
/ (Q)
Y E S — G o t o step 16. between the power unit and the servo unit. •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 5 NO—Replace the power unit (see page 19-105).
(40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the servo unit.H
16. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P

1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9
10 12
/ 14 16
/ /
24 25
17 18
/ 23
MOT (+) (WHT)
NO—Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
19-61
19. Check for continuity between power unit 2P 20. Check for continuity between power unit 2P
connector terminal No. 1 and servo unit 25P connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
P O W E R U N I T 2P C O N N E C T O R
S E R V O UNIT 2 S P CONNECTOR
BLK
MOT (+) (WHT)
MOT (+) (WHT)
P O W E R UNIT 2P C O N N E C T O R
Is there continuity? YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
Y E S — G o t o step 20. NO—Repair open in the wire between the power

unit and the body ground (G202).B
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the power
unit and the servo u n i t . B
19-62
DTC 14: Motor Stuck ON 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). 9. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then press the
brake pedal 20 times.
ON (II) again. 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Wait at least 2 minutes. 12. Wait at least 2 minutes.
Is DTC 14 indicated? Is DTC 14 indicated?
YES—Goto step 6. YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO—If DTC 11 is indicated, do the DTC 11
time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit troubleshooting first (see page 19-60). If no DTC are
25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures indicated the system is OK at this time. Check for
. troubleshooting (see page 19-46).B loose terminals at the servo unit. •
7. Check for brake fluid leakage at the servo unit and

the power unit hose and line joints (see page 19-34).
Is there a fluid leak?
YES—Repair the brake fluid leak (see page 19-34).
19-63
DTC 2 1 : PACC Sensor Malfunction DTC 24: Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor
Malfunction
DTC 22: PREG Sensor Malfunction
DTC 23: PMC Sensor Malfunction
3. W i t h the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. pedal several times.
3. W i t h the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
pedal several times.
is DTC 24 indicated?
YES—Go to step 5.
Is DTC 21,22, or 23 indicated?
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). • time. Check for loose terminals at the brake pedal
stroke sensor 3P connector and the servo unit 25P
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connector. Refer to intermittent failures
time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit troubleshooting (see page 19-46). •
25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-46).H
19-64
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 10. Substitute a known-good brake pedal stroke sensor
(see page 19-109).
6. Check the brake pedal stroke sensor and its
connector for damage and proper installation 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(see page 19-109).
Is the brake pedal stroke sensor installation OK?
13. W i t h the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake
YES—Goto s t e p 7 . pedal several times.
NO—Reinstall the brake pedal stroke sensor, and 14. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
check the mounting position (see page 19-109). H
Is DTC 24 indicated?
7. Disconnect the brake pedal stroke sensor 3P
connector. YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
8. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step NO —Replace the original brake pedal stroke sensor
13.on page 19-101). (see page 19-109). •

connector terminals No. 2, No. 14, No. 18, and
brake pedal stroke sensor 3P connector terminals
No. 3, No. 2, No. 1 individually.
SERVO U N I T 25P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e s i d e of female terminals
SVccA (RED)
/
1
10
/
2
/ 12 / 5
14
/
6
/
1
16
8 9
24 25
17 18
/ 23
SGNDA BPS (BLU)
(GRY)
SGNDA
BPS (BLU)
(GRY)
1 2 3
J "T
S V c c A (RED)
B R A K E P E D A L S T R O K E S E N S O R 3P C O N N E C T O R
YES—Goto step 10.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the brake

pedal stroke sensor and the servo unit.H
19-65
DTC 3 1 : NO Solenoid Valve Malfunction DTC 33: RNO Solenoid Valve Malfunction
DTC 32: NC Solenoid Valve Malfunction DTC 34: RNC Solenoid Valve Malfunction
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again. ON (II) again.
Is DTC 31 or 32 indicated? Is DTC 33 or 34 indicated?
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). • YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
N O — G o t o step 5. N O — G o t o step 5.
5. Do the INCREASING MASTER CYLINDER 5. Do the REGENERATIVE BRAKE TEST in the

PRESSURE TEST in the FUNCTION TEST w i t h the FUNCTION TEST w i t h the HDS.
HDS.
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the servo unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page 19-46).B
19-66
DTC 35: NO Solenoid Valve Duty Limit Out DTC 37: RNO Solenoid Valve Duty Limit Out
DTC 36: NC Solenoid Valve Duty Limit Out DTC 38: RNC Solenoid Valve Duty Limit Out
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
4. Do the INCREASING MASTER CYLINDER 4. Do the REGENERATIVE BRAKE TEST in the

PRESSURE TEST in the FUNCTION TEST with the FUNCTION TEST with the HDS.
HDS.
Is DTC 37 or 38 indicated?
Is DTC 35 or 36 indicated?
YES—-Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page 19-46). •
19-67
DTC 41: Accumulator Stored Pressure Low 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
1. Check for brake fluid leakage at the servo unit and 8. Replace the accumulator (see page 19-107).
the power unit (see page 19-34).
NOTE: Check the high pressure lines for leaks,
particularly on the power unit, the servo unit, and 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
the master cylinder.
Is there a fluid leak? ON (II) again.
YES—Repair the brake fluid leak (see page 19-34). 12. Wait at least 2 minutes.
•
NO—The system is OK at this time. •
ON (II) again.
5. Wait at least 2 minutes.

time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
troubleshooting (see page 19-46). H
19-68
DTC 42: Regulator Malfunction DTC 43: Master Cylinder Malfunction
3. With the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake 3. With the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake
pedal several times. pedal several times.
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). B YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO —Go to step 5.

25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures 5. Do the HYDRAULIC BOOSTER CAS TEST in the
troubleshooting (see page 19-46). • FUNCTION MENU w i t h the HDS.

troubleshooting (see page 1 9 - 4 6 ) . •
19-69
#
DTC 44: Partial Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor DTC 45: Relation of Brake Pedal Stroke
Malfunction Sensor and PMC Sensor Malfunction
3. W i t h the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake 3. W i t h the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO —Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-46). • troubleshooting (see page 19-46). •
6. Substitute a known-good brake pedal stroke sensor 6. Substitute a known-good brake pedal stroke sensor
(see page 19-109). (see page 19-109).
7. Turn t h e ignition switch to ON (II). 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9. W i t h the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake 9. W i t h the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake
10. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). • YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). H
NO—Replace the original brake pedal stroke sensor NO—Replace the original brake pedal stroke sensor
(see page 19-109). • (see page 19-109). •
19-70
DTC 46: Relation of Brake Pedal Stroke 9. With the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake
Sensor and PREG Sensor Malfunction pedal several times.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 10. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. Is DTC 46 indicated?
3. With the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
NO—Replace the original brake pedal stroke sensor
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. (see page 19-109). •
YES—Goto step 5.

time. Check for loose terminals the brake pedal
stroke sensor 3P connector and the servo unit 25P
connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-46).B
6. Substitute a known-good brake pedal stroke sensor

(see page 19-109).
19-71
DTC 47: Relation of PMC Sensor and PREG DTC 51: Motor Circuit ON
Sensor Malfunction
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), press the
3. With the ignition switch in ON (II), press the brake brake pedal 20 times.
t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the servo unit NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
troubleshooting (see page 19-46). • 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
19-72
DTC 52: Motor Circuit OFF DTC 54: Fail-safe Relay Malfunction
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then t u r n it to
4. Wait until the power unit stops operating (When 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
y o u hear the motor stop.).
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). • time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this troubleshooting (see page 19-46).B
time. Check for loose terminals at the power unit 2P
connector and the servo unit 25P connector. Refer
to intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-46). •
19-73
DTC 6 1 : Control Unit Low Voltage 8. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step
13 on page 19-101).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. connector terminal No. 8 and body ground.
3. Start the engine, then wait 10 seconds. S E R V O UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
MS +B (WHT)
1 2
/ 5 6 1 8 9
10 12
/
14 16
/ / //
24 25
17 18 23

troubleshooting (see page 1 9 - 4 6 ) . • W i r e side of female terminals
5. Check the 12 V battery voltage.

Is the voltage OK ?
Y E S — G o t o step 6. between the No. 63 (15 A) fuse and the servo
unit.B
NO—Check the 12 V battery performance (see page
22-61), then go to step 1 and recheck. NO—Install a new No. 63 (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary
10. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
7. Check the No. 63 (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-
hood fuse/relay box. 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is the fuse blown? 12. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 8. 13. Start the engine, then wait 10 seconds.
NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 15. 14. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO—Troubleshooting is complete. •
19-74
®
15. Check the No, 61 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary under- 18. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
Is the fuse blown?
2 1 . Start the engine, then wait 10 seconds.
16. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step
13 on page 19-101). Is DTC 61 indicated?
17. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
NO—Troubleshooting is complete •
SERVO U N I T 25P CONNECTOR
13 on page 19-101).
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9
10
/
12
/
14 16
24 25 3 24. Measure the voltage between body ground and
servo unit 25P connector terminals No. 8 and
17 18
BS + B / 23
(BLU) No. 12 individually.
MS + B (WHT)

between the No. 61 (10 A) fuse and the servo
unit.H
NO—Install a new No. 61 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 63

(15 A) fuse or the No. 61 (10 A) fuse and the servo
unit.B
19-75
DTC 62: Control Unit High Voltage DTC 63: Back Up Circuit Voltage Malfunction
3. Start the engine, then wait 10 seconds. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
troubleshooting (see page 19-46). • 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
Is the voltage OK?
6. Check the No. 61 (10 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). • hood fuse/relay box.
NO—Do the charging system indicator circuit Is the fuse blown?

troubleshooting (see page 12-179),then g o t o
step 1 and recheck. Y E S - G o t o step 7.

13 on page 19-101).
19-76
8. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P 14. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step
connector terminal No. 12 and body ground. 13 on page 19-101).
S E R V O U N I T 25P C O N N E C T O R
15. Measure the voltage between servo unit 25P
1
8 9
10 12 14
24 25
17 18
B S + B (BLU)
Is there continuity? W i r e side of female terminals

between the No. 61 (10 A) fuse and the servo Is there battery voltage?
unit.B
under-hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 9. NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 61
(10 A) fuse and the servo unit. •

ON (II) again.
19-77
DTC 64: Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor, PREG 7. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P
Sensor and PMC Sensor Voltage Malfunction connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). S E R V O UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. S V c c A (RED)

1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 10 12 14 16
/
/ A
24 25
ON (II) again. 17 18 23
Y E S — G o t o step 5. Wire side of female terminals

time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit Is there continuity?
troubleshooting (see page 1 9 - 4 6 ) . • Y E S - G o t o step 8.
6. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step 8. Disconnect the brake pedal stroke sensor 3P
13 on page 19-101). connector.

S V c c A (RED)
1 2 5 6 7 8 9
10 12 14 16
24 25
17 18
/ 23

between the brake pedal stroke sensor and the
servo unit. • ' .
NO—Replace the brake pedal stroke sensor

(see page 1 9 - 1 0 9 ) . •
19-78
10. Disconnect the brake pedal stroke sensor 3P DTC 65: Control Unit Circuit Stuck ON
connector.
connector terminals No. 2 and No. 18. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
S E R V O UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.

SVccA (RED)
1 2
10 12
/ 5
14
6 7
16
8 9 Is DTC 65 indicated?
17 18
A
S G N D A (GRY)
/ 23 24 25
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). B

W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-46).B
YES—Repair short in the wires between the brake

pedal stroke sensor and the servo unit. B
NO—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). B
19-79
DTC 66: Control Unit Circuit Stuck OFF DTC 67: IG1 Voltage Malfunction
NOTE: If the battery terminal is disconnected and 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
connected repeatedly, five times or more, while the
ignition switch is ON (IS), DTC 66 may be indicated. 2. Check the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
Y E S — G o t o step 8. . -
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) and to LOCK (0)
at least three times. NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 3.
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. 3. Check the 12 V battery voltage.
Is DTC 66 indicated? Is the voltage OK ?
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). • Y E S — G o t o step 4.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO—Check the 12 V battery performance (see page
time. Check for loose terminals at the servo unit 22-61), then go to step 1 and recheck.
troubleshooting (see page 19-46).H 4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

ON (II) again.

t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the servo unit

13 on page 19-101).
19-80
9. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P DTC 68: IG2 Voltage Malfunction
S E R V O U N I T 2SP C O N N E C T O R
2. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
1 2
/ 5 6 7 8 9
10 12 14 16 Is the fuse blown?
24 25
17 18
/ / / 23
IGKYEL)* 1
2
JL (GRY)*

Is the voltage OK ?
* 1 : '06 mode!
* 2 : ' 0 7 - 0 9 models
NO—Check the 12 V battery performance (see page
Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the wire 22-61), then go to step 1 and recheck.
between the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse and the servo u n i t . H
dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 10. 5. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
10. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector. 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
ON (II) again. YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
14. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Is DTC 67 indicated? 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
NO—Troubleshooting is complete.H 13 on page 19-101).
9. Disconnect the buzzer 2P connector (see page

19-109).
(cont'd)
19-81

10. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P DTC 7 1 : Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck
connector terminal No. 6 and body ground. ON
SERVO UNIT 25P CONNECTOR DTC 72: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck
OFF
1. Check the brake lights while pressing the brake
pedal.
Do the brake lights come on when the brake pedal

is pressed and go off when the brake pedal is
released?

W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s t i m e . II
NO—Do the brake pedal position switch test

Is there continuity 7 (see page 22-168). •

between the No. 36 (10 A) fuse and the buzzer or
the servo unit. II
NO—Install a new No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-

12. Reconnect the buzzer 2P connector.

ON (II) again.
19-82
DTC 73: Brake Fluid Level Switch Malfunction 11. Check for continuity between brake level switch 2P
B R A K E F L U I D L E V E L S W I T C H 2P C O N N E C T O R
2. Check the brake fluid level in the subreservoir.
Is brake fluid level OK?
NO—Do the brake pad inspection: Front (see page

19-12), rear (see page 19-20), check for brake fluid
leaks or replace w o r n pads. Fill the fluid reservoir
to the correct level or replace the pads, then go to
step 3. Wire side of female terminals

YES —Repair short to body ground in the wire
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to between the gauge control module (tach) and the
ON (II) again. brake fluid level switch. •
6. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. NO—Replace the subreservoir (brake fluid level
switch is included) (see page 19-100). •
YES—Go to step 7.

time.B
9. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch 2P

connector.

connector.
19-83
DTC 8 1 : Control Unit Internal Main Circuit DTC 83: F-CAN Malfunction
Malfunction
DTC 82: Control Unit Internal Subcircuit
Malfunction
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ON (II) again.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
ON (II) again. Is DTC 83 indicated?
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). •
Is DTC 81 or 82 indicated? NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). B 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the servo unit
19-84
DTC 84: Sensor 0 (Zero) Position not DTC 86: F-CAN Malfunction (Bus-off,
Communication)
Memorized
3. Do the sensor 0 (zero) position memorization 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
(see page 19-48). ON (II) again.
NOTE: If the memorization process does not work, 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
replace the servo unit (see page 19-100).
ON (II) again. Y E S - G o t o step 5.
time. Check for loose terminals at the gauge control
Is DTC 84 indicated? module (tach), the ABS modulator-control unit (if
equipped), the PCM, the VSA modulator-control
YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100). • unit (if equipped), and the servo unit. •
NO—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . • 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Short the SCS line with the HDS.

13 on page 19-101).
(cont'd)
19-85
9. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P 10. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P
connector terminals and PCM connector A (44P) connector.
terminals (see table).
Sign Servo Unit 2SP PCM Connector connector terminals and gauge control module
Connector A (44P) Terminal (tach) 36P connector terminals (see table).
Terminal
CAN-L No. 17 No. 37 Sign Servo Unit 25P Gauge Control
CAN-H No. 1 No. 36 Connector Module (Tach) 36P
Terminal Connector Terminal
SERVO U N I T 2 5 P C O N N E C T O R CAN-L No. 17 No. 19
CAN-H No. 1 No. 1
CAN-H (WHT)
1
10
/
2
/ //
12
5
14
6 7
16
8 9
23 24 25
17 18
/ / /
CAN-L (RED)
C A N - H (WHT)
n n
lI/VU|5|6|7 8 | 9 |10|11 / 1 / ^ 1 4 j l 5 | l 6 | l 7 | l 8 |
|19|20|21|/1/|/|/1/127|^|/1/1/132|33|/M/
CAN-L (RED)
CAN-H (WHT) C A N - L (RED)
(TACH) 36P C O N N E C T O R
P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P) Wire side of female terminals
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM and NO—Repair open in the wire between the gauge
the servo u n i t . H control module (tach) and the servo unit.H
19-86
12. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P With VSA
connector (see step 2 on page 19-145) or VSA
modulator-control unit 37P connector (see step 2 S E R V O UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
on page 19-236).
13. Check for continuity between the following servo

unit 25P connector terminals and ABS or VSA
modulator-control unit terminals (see table).
Sign ' Servo Unit ABS VSA

25P Modulator- Modulator-
Connector control control
Terminal Unit 25P Unit 37P
Connector Connector 13 14
Terminal Terminal
,J5Ml7lXlXll9l20[X|2ll^M :
CAN-H m 37
CAN-L No. 17 No. 17 No. 1 (WHT) ]/]/|26|/lJ!/l7lXl>L>lMM
CAN-H No. 1 No. 1 No. 15
V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 37P C O N N E C T O R
W i t h ABS
YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
softwear (see page 11-236), or substituted a known-
good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1, and
indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM
was substituted and DTCs are not indicated,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). if DTCs
are indicated, replace the servo unit (see page
19-100).
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ABS or

1
10
2 3
/ 12
/ 5 6
14 15 16
/ 8 9
VSA modulator-control unit and the servo u n i t . B
24 25
17 18
/ / /
C A N - L (RED)
/
A B S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
19-87
AHB Indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 5. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
air© stmed
7. Clear the AHB indicator for several seconds w h e n
2. Check the No. 63 (15 A) fuse in the auxiliary under- the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
Does the indicator come on then go off?
Is the fuse blown?
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
3. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step 13 on page 19-101).
13 on page 19-101).
4. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P connector terminal No. 8 and body ground.
S E R V O UMT 25P C O N N E C T O R
SERVO U N I T 25P C O N N E C T O R M S + B (WHT)
MS + B (WHT)
1 2
/ / 5 6 7 8 9
10 / 12 14 16
/ 23 24 25
17 18
/ /

between the No. 63 (15 A) fuse and the servo NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 63
unit. B (15 A) in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box
and the servo u n i t . a
19-88
10. Check the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 12. Reconnect the servo unit 25P connector.
relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES—Goto step 11. the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 15. Does the indicator come on then go off?
11. Check for continuity between servo unit 25P YES—Troubleshooting is c o m p l e t e . •

SERVO U N I T 25P CONNECTOR
1 2 / / 5 6 7 8 9 16. Measure the voltage between servo unit 25P

10 / 12 14 16 connector terminal No. 16 and body ground.
/ 23 24 25
17 18
/ / IG1 (YELP 1
2
ft (GRY)*
8 9
10 14
24 25
Wire side of f e m a l e terminals 18
1
IG1 ( Y E L ) *
* 1 : '06 m o d e l h (GRY)* 2
* 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals

between the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse and the servo unit.
* 1 : '06 m o d e l
* 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s
dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 12. is there battery voltage?
YES—Goto step 17.

(7.5 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
servo unit.H
(cont'd)
19-89
18. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 21. Reconnect all connectors.
relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES—Go to step 19. the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 24. Does the indicator come on then go off?
19. Disconnect the buzzer 2P connector (see page YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •

19-109),
NO—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100) •
connector terminal No. 6 and body ground. 24. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
IG2 (BRN)
/
1 2 5 6 7 9
8
10 12 14 / 16
/ / / // 24 25
17 18
/ 23
1 2
/ 5 6
IG2 (BRN)
7 8 9
1 c
10 12 14 ID
/ /
24 25
17 18 23
Is there continuity? W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s

between the No. 36 (10 A) fuse or the buzzer and Is there battery voltage?
the servo u n i t . H
dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 2 1 . NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 36
(10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
servo unit.H
19-90
27. Check for continuity between body ground and Buzzer does not sound (during the buzzer
servo unit 25P connector terminals No. 7, No. 23, test)
SERVO UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
2. Do the BUZZER ON in the FUNCTION TEST w i t h the
G N D 2 (BLK) HDS.
1 2 / 5 6 7 8 9
10 12 14 16 Does the buzzer sound?
17 18
A / 23 24 25
G N D 3 (BLK) GND1 Y E S — T h e system is OK at this time.
(BLK)

4. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the servo
unit and body ground (G202). • NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 11.

19-109).

13 on page 19-101).
(cont'd)
19-91
7. Check for continuity between buzzer 2P connector 8. Reconnect all connectors.

B U Z Z E R 2P C O N N E C T O R
HDS.
nJZZI
Does the buzzer sound?
1G2 (LT GRN) YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Replace the buzzer (see page 19-109). •

Wire side of female terminals 19-109).

13. Measure the voltage between buzzer 2P connector
YES—Repair short to body ground in the w i r e terminal No. 2 and body ground.
between the No. 36 (10 A) fuse or the buzzer and
the servo unit.H B U Z Z E R 2P C O N N E C T O R
NO—Install a new No. 36 (10 A) fuse In the under-

IG2 (LT G R N )
NO—Repair open In the wire between the No. 36

(10 A) in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
buzzer. •
19™32
15. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (see step 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
13 on page 19-101).
19. Connect buzzer 2P connector terminal No. 1 to
16. Check for continuity between buzzer 2P connector body ground w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
terminal No. 1 and servo unit 25P connector
terminal No. 5. B U Z Z E R 2P C O N N E C T O R
IBUZZER (GRN)
1
10
2
12 /
/
5
14
6 7
16
8 9
B U Z Z E R (ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
// /
17 18 24 25
23
1 W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
B U Z Z E R (ORN)
BUZZER 2P C O N N E C T O R Does the buzzer sound?

YES—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100).

NO—Replace the buzzer (see page 19-109). •
YES—Goto step 17.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the buzzer

and the servo unit.H
19-
Buzzer sounds continually 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NOTE: Check for advanced hydraulic booster DTCs 7. Connect the buzzer 2P connector.
before doing this troubleshooting (see page 19-47). If
any DTCs are present, troubleshoot them first. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Does the buzzer sound?
2. Disconnect the buzzer 2P connector (see page YES—Replace the buzzer (see page 19-109). •
19-109).
NO—Replace the servo unit (see page 19-100).
13 on page 19-101).
5. Check for continuity between buzzer 2P connector

B U Z Z E R 2P C O N N E C T O R
B U Z Z E R (ORN)

between the buzzer and body ground. •
NO—Go to step 6.
19-94
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE: Fluid Removal
• Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Honda
DOTS Brake Fluid f r o m an unopened container. NOTE: Because the conventional brake system and the
Using a non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion AHB system use the same brake fluid reservoir, fluid
and shorten the life of the system. removal is necessary in order to purge old fluid f r o m
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed the AHB system.
to contaminate the brake fluid.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage 1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately w i t h water. 2. Press the brake pedal 20 times to release the
• When you turn the ignition switch to ON (II), the pressure in the accumulator.
power unit may operate (you can hear the motor
sound). 3. Attach a length of drain tube (A) to the bleed screw
(B) on the caliper or wheel cylinder.
Brake Fluid Level Inspection
2. Press the brake pedal several times.

ON (II) again.
4. Wait several seconds for the brake fluid in the

subreservoir (A) t o stabilize.
NOTE: Do not operate the brake pedal while doing

this procedure.
*: The illustration s h o w s the front brake.
4. Loosen the bleed screw, and p u m p the brake pedal

until brake fluid stops coming out.
5. Check that the brake fluid level in the subreservoir

is at the M A X (upper) level line (B).
(cont'd)
19-95
Brake System Bleeding (cont'd)
6. Remove the IMA system power cable clamp (A). 8. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed
screw (B) under the servo unit (C), and loosen the
bleed screw.
NOTE: Turn the bleed screw about 180 °.
NOTE: Do not operate the p u m p motor for more

than 110 seconds or It may be damaged.
10. W h e n the brake fluid is drained out, tighten the

bleed screw, then turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0).
NOTE: After draining the brake fluid f r o m the servo

unit and the power unit, the sound of the power
unit function changes.
11. Do the brake system bleeding.
12. Install all removed parts and reconnect all

connectors.
19-96
Bleeding - Normal Brake (Except Servo Unit 6. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed
and Power Unit) screw (B), then loosen the bleed screw to allow air
to escape f r o m the system. Then tighten the bleed
NOTE: screw securely.
• The brake fluid reservoir tank must be at least 1/2 full
at the start of the bleeding procedure and checked Front
after bleeding each brake caliper or wheel cylinder.
B
Add fluid as required. 9 N-m
• Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) while doing this (0.9 kgf-m, 7 Ibf-ft)
procedure.
2. Press the brake pedal several times until it

becomes a hard brake pedal to release the pressure
in the accumulator.
3. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank

(A) is at the middle of the tank line (B).
Rear-disc type
B
9 N-m
(0.9 kgf-m,
7 Ibf-ft)
4. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal
several times, then apply steady pressure.
5. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front

brake system. Rear-drum type
NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in

the sequence shown.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
(D Front Right ) Rear Right
B
r w i 7 N-m
© Front Left @ Rear left (0.7 kgf-m, 5 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
19-97
Brake S f stem Bleeding (cont'd)

7. Repeat the procedure for each brake circuit until Bleeding - Servo Unit and Power Unit
there are no air bubbles in the fluid.
8. Refill the master cylinder reservoir tank to the
. middle of the tank line. 2. Remove the IMA system power cable clamp (A).
9. Inspect the brake fluid level.
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check for the
AHB indicator or brake system indicator t o come on
In the gauge control module (tach).
• If the indicator(s) come on and stay on, turn the

ignition switch to LOCK (0), and do the servo unit
and power unit bleeding procedure.
• If the indicators come on and then go off, the
system is OK. Inspect the brake fluid level.
3. Disconnect the auxiliary electric water pump

connector (A).
19-98
4, A d d the brake fluid to the reservoir tank (A) and 6. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and add the
keep the level at the middle line (B). brake fluid to the reservoir tank.
NOTE: Do not operate the pump motor for more

than 110 seconds or it may be damaged.
7. Make sure the brake fluid is discharged f r o m the

bleed screw to allow air to escape f r o m the system,
then tighten the bleed screw securely.
y. Add the brake fluid in the reservoir tank, and keep it

at the middle of the tank line.
5. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed 11. Wait several seconds until the AHB indicator and/or
screw (B) under the servo unit (C), and loosen the brake system indicator goes off (see page 19-45).
bleed screw.
NOTE: Turn the bleed screw about 180 °.
13. Press the brake pedal 20 times.
14. Wait about 5 minutes.
15. Repeat step 11 to step 15 t w o times.
16. Make sure the bleed screw is tightened.
17. Inspect the brake fluid level.
18. Check the brake pedal stroke.
19. Install all removed parts and reconnect all

connectors.
20. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS, if necessary (see page

19-47).
19-99
Master Cylinder and Servo Unit Replacement
[NOTICE] 5. Remove the wire harness clamps (A).
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
C D
wash it off immediately w i t h water.
A
NOTE:
• Plug the ends of the hoses and the joints to prevent
spilling brake fluid.
• The illustrations shows w i t h ABS.
2. Remove the IMA system power cable clamps (A).
6. Disconnect the wire harness connector (B) and the

locked connector (C) by pulling d o w n the lever (D).
7. Remove the reservoir tank bracket (A).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
3. Remove the reservoir cap (B), and remove the

brake fluid (see page 19-95).
4. Remove the reservoir tank mounting bolt (A).
19-100
8. Remove the w i r e harness clamps stay (A). 12. Disconnect the brake line (A) f r o m the servo unit (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
9. Disconnect the brake lines (A) f r o m the master 13. Disconnect the servo unit 25P connector (A) by
cylinder (B). pulling d o w n the lock (B).
A
V S A : 2 2 N-m
(2.2 k g f - m , 16 Ibf-ft)
ABS:15N-m
(1.5 k g f - m , 11 Ibf-ft)
10. Disconnect the suction hose (C) f r o m the brake line

(D).
11. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector

(E).
(cont'd)
19-101
Master Cylinder and Servo Unit Replacement (cont'd)
14. Remove the brake lines (A) f r o m the clamp (B). 16. Remove the lock pin (A) and the clevis pin (B), then
disconnect the yoke (C) f r o m the brake pedal.
8 x 1.25 m m
13 N - m (1.3 k g f - m , 9.4 Ibfft)
15. Disconnect the brake lines (A) f r o m the ABS or VSA
modulator-control unit (B). 17. Remove the servo unit mounting nuts (D).
18. Remove the servo unit (A) w i t h master cylinder

f r o m the engine compartment.
NOTE:
• Be careful not to bend or damage the brake lines.
• Use the new servo unit gasket (B) during
reassembly.
A
V S A : 22 N-m
(2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
A B S : 15 N m
19. Remove the subreservoir (A) and the reservoir 2 1 . Install the master cylinder and the servo unit in the
grommets (B) f r o m the servo unit (C) w i t h the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
master cylinder (D).
• Coat the new O-ring with the Shin-Etsu silicone
NOTE: When removing the subreservoir, replace grease (P/N 08798-9013).
the reservoir grommets with new ones. • Make sure not to get any silicone grease on the
terminal part of the connectors and switches,
especially if you have silicone grease on your
hands or gloves.
• Check the brake pedal height and free play, and
adjust it if necessary (see page 19-6).
22. Do the normal brake system bleeding (except servo

unit and power unit) (see page 19-97).
23. Do the servo unit and power unit system bleeding

(see page 19-98).
24. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.

(see page 19-48).
20. Remove the master cylinder mounting bolts (A),

and separate the master cylinder (B) f r o m the servo
unit (C).
19-103
Ac9vain)©@dl Hydraulic Booster
[Master Cylinder inspection
1. Inspect and note these items: 2. If the suction hose (A) f r o m the subreservoir (B)
was removed, install the hose.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free
of dirt and other foreign particles. NOTE: Position the clamp (C) as shown.
• Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly
w i t h a new part if necessary.
• Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to
contaminate the brake fluid.
FRONT
RESERVOIR CAP
Check for blockage
of v e n t holes.
RESERVOIR SEAL
Check for d a m a g e
and deterioration. SERVO UNIT
Check f o r leaks
and damage.
STRAINER
Remove accumulated
sediment
SUBRESERVOIR
RESERVOIR T A N K Check for d a m a g e .
Check for d a m a g e .
MASTER CYLINDER If the reservoir tank hose was disconnected, install
RESERVOIR Check f o r leaks, the reservoir tank (A) and the reservoir tank hose
TANKHOSE rust, and d a m a g e .
(B) to the subreservoir (C).
Check for d a m a g e
and deterioration.
NOTE:
• Align the " A " mark (D) on the reservoir tank and
subreservoir with the paint mark (E) on the hose.
9
Position the clamps (F) as s h o w n .
19-104
Power Unit Replacement
[NOTICE I 4. Disconnect the brake line (A) f r o m the power unit
Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may (B).
wash It off immediately w i t h water.
NOTE: Plug the ends of the hoses and t h e joints to

prevent spilling brake fluid.

(see page 20-140).
2. Remove the brake fluid (see page 19-95).
3. Remove the heat shield (A).
6. Disconnect the power unit 2P connector (A), and

remove the clip (B).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
9.8 N m D
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove the power unit (C) w i t h the bracket (D)

f r o m the frame.
(cont'd)
19-105
Power Unit Replacement (cont'd)
8. Separate the power unit (A) and the bracket (B), and
remove the suction hose (C).
9. Install the power unit in the reverse order of

removal.
10. Do the normal brake system bleeding (except the

servo unit and the power unit) (see page 19-97).
11. Do the servo unit and power unit system bleeding

(see page 19-98).
19-106
Power Unit Disassembly
Exploded View
19-107
Accumulator Disposal Brake Pedal Replacement

1. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch
connector (A).
The accumulator contains nitrogen gas under
pressure.
The pressure must be relieved before disposal to
prevent explosion and possible injury w h e n
scrapping.
Always wear eye protection to avoid getting metal

shavings in y o u r eyes w h e n the accumulator
pressure is relieved.
Firmly clamp the accumulator in a vise, and drill a hole

of 2—3 m m (0.078—0.118 in.) diameter in marked area
(A) of the body to release the gas.
2. Disconnect the brake pedal stroke sensor connector

(B).
3. Remove the lock pin (C) and clevis pin (D).
4. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (E)

and nuts (F).
5. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (G).
6. Remove the brake pedal position switch (H) by

turning it counterclockwise.
7. Install the brake pedal in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: Make sure movement of the brake pedal and

the brake pedal stroke sensor.
8. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch

adjustment (see page 19-6).

(see page 19-48).
19-108
Brake Pedal Stroke Sensor Buzzer Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the subdisplay visor (see page 20-87).
1. Remove the brake pedal (see page 19-108). 2. Remove the clip (A), and disconnect the buzzer 2P
connector (B).
2. Remove the bolts (A), and remove the brake pedal
stroke sensor (B).
3. Remove the buzzer (C).
4. Install the buzzer in the reverse order of removal.

3. Install the brake pedal stroke sensor in the reverse HDS, and check that the buzzer can sound.
order of removal.

(see page 19-48).
19-109
Brakes

Advanced Hydraulic Booster 19-43
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Components
('06-08 Models)
System Description ... 19-120
ABS Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation 19-154
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement 19-156

Components ('09 Model) .............................. 19-159
ABS Components
RIGHT-REAR W H E E L SPEED S E N S O R
HUB B E A R I N G UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 18-31
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

HUB B E A R I N G UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

ABS MODULATOR- R e p l a c e m e n t , page 19-156
C O N T R O L UNIT WHEEL BEARING
Removal and Installation (MAGNETIC ENCODER)
p a g e 19-154 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 18-18
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
19-112
System indicator ABS Indicator
This system has t w o indicators: The ABS indicator comes on w h e n the ABS function is
lost. The brakes still w o r k like a conventional system
• A B S indicator (A) w i t h the advanced hydraulic booster.
• Brake system indicator (B)
Brake System Indicator
The brake system indicator comes on w h e n the EBD

function is lost, the advanced hydraulic booster
brake fluid level is low.
NOTE: If t w o or more wheel speed sensors fail, the

brake system indicator comes on.
When the system is O K , each indicator comes on for

about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to
ON (II), then goes off. *
When the system detects a problem, a DTC is set and,
depending upon the failure, the ABS modulator-control
unit determines which indicator(s) are turned on. If the
problem goes away (system returns to normal), the
indicator(s) are controlled in the following w a y
depending upon the DTC that is set:
• The indicator(s) will come on and stay on when the

ignition switch is ON (II).
• The indicator(s) automatically go off.
• The indicator(s) go off after the vehicle is driven.
(cont'd)
19-113
A i S Components
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Mow to Troubleshoot DTCs
• The m e m o r y holds all DTCs. However, w h e n the The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
same DTC Is detected more than once, the more of the problem is still present, and the ABS indicator is .
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, still on. Following a troubleshooting procedure for a
w h e n the same problem is detected repeatedly, it i s code that has been cleared but d o e s not reset can result
memorized as a single DTC. in incorrect diagnosis.
• The DTCs are indicated in the order they occur.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, 1. Question the customer about the conditions when
procedures to clear the DTCs. w h e n the ABS indicator came on, such as during
activation, after activation, when the vehicle was
Self-diagnosis traveling at a certain speed, etc. If necessary, have
the customer demonstrate the concern.
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into t w o categories:
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch 2. When the ABS indicator does not come on during
is turned to ON (11) and until the ABS indicator goes the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done based on
off. the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor contact
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial of the terminals, etc. in the circuit indicated by the
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to DTC before you start troubleshooting.
LOCK (0).
• W h e n the system detects a problem, the ABS 3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode. the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
Kickback the ABS indicator does not come on.
The p u m p motor operates w h e n the ABS modulator- 4. Check for DTCs f r o m other systems which are
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at related to F-CAN, one possible cause was that the
the brake pedal. ignition switch was turned to ON (ll) w i t h the ABS
modulator-control unit connector disconnected.
Pump Motor Clear the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions DTCs
first.
• The p u m p motor operates w h e n the ABS modulator-
control unit is functioning. NOTE: Always troubleshoot fuel and emissions
• The ABS modulator-control unit checks the p u m p DTCs first.
motor operation one time after completing initial
diagnosis, during regular diagnosis w h e n the vehicle Intermittent Failures
is driven over 10 m p h (15 km/h).
The t e r m "intermittent f a i l u r e " means a system may
Brake Fly id Replacement/Air Bleeding have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If you cannot
reproduce the condition, check for loose connectors or
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures terminal pins related to the circuit that you are
are identical to the procedures of advanced hydraulic troubleshooting.
booster (see page 19-95).
19-114
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs
System)
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). <
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle

and the ABS modulator-control unit If it doesn't,

refer to the DTC troubleshooting. Do all systems
DTC check, and troubleshoot any powertrain DTCs
* first.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). How to Clear DTCs

1. With the Ignition switch in LOCK (0), connect the
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle HDS to the.data link connector (DLC) under the
and the ABS modulator-control unit. If it doesn't, driver's side of the dashboard.
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for all
systems, troubleshoot the powertrain DTCs first 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and note it. Then refer to the indicated DTCs and the ABS modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshooting, and do the appropriate troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
NOTE: on the HDS.
• The HDS communication stops when the vehicle
speed is at 31 mph (50 km/h) or more. 5. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0).
• The HDS reads the DTC, the current data, and
other system data.
that came with the HDS.
19-115
ABS Components
DTC D e t e c t i o n Item A B S Indicator Brake S y s t e m Note
Indicator
11 -13 Riqht-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-129)
12 -11 R i g h t - f r o n t W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-132)
Intermittent Interruption
-12 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-133)
Circuit
-21 Riqht-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* (see p a q e 19-135)
-22 Right-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ( 1 9 m p h ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-135)
(30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 R i g h t - f r o n t W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r (0 t o ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-136)
9 m p h < 0 t o 15 k m / h ) )
13 -13 Left-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* (see p a q e 19-129)
14 -11 L e f t - f r o n t W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-132)
-12 Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other Sensor ON ON/OFF' (see p a g e 19-133)
Circuit
-21 Left-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* (see p a q e 19-135)
-22 L e f t - f r o n t W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r (19 m p h ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-135)
(30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 L e f t - f r o n t W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r (0 t o 9 m p h ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-136)
( O t o 15 k m / h ) )
15 -13 Right-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* (see p a q e 19-129)
16 -11 R i g h t - r e a r W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-132)
-12 Right-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor S h o r t to the Other Sensor ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-133)
Circuit
-21 Riqht-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* (see p a q e 19-135)
-22 R i g h t - r e a r W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r (19 m p h ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-135)
(30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 R i g h t - r e a r W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r (0 t o 9 m p h ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-136)
( O t o 15 k m / h ) )
17 -13 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* (see p a q e 19-129)
18 -11 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-132)
-12 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r S h o r t t o t h e O t h e r S e n s o r ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-133)
Circuit
-21 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r ON ON/OFF* (see p a q e 19-135)
,-22 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r (19 m p h ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-135)
(30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r (0 t o 9 m p h ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-136)
( O t o 15 k m / h ) )
21 -11 Right-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) Malfunction ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-136)
(Pulse M i s s i n q )
22 -11 Left-front M a g n e t i c Encoder (Wheel Bearing) M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF' (see p a g e 19-136)
23 -11 Right-rear M a g n e t i c Encoder (Wheel Bearing) M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-136)
24 -11 Left-rear M a g n e t i c E n c o d e r ( W h e e l B e a r i n g ) M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* (see p a g e 19-136)
31 -01 A B S R i g h t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S R i g h t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Pulse)
Speculative)
Stuck ON)
32 -01 A B S Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
( S o l e n o i d Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
( S o l e n o i d Pulse)
•-22 ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
(Solenoid Speculative)
-23 ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
* ; Brake s y s t e m indicator t u r n s O N w h e n t w o or m o r e w h e e l s fail.
19-116
DTC Detection Item A B S Indicator Brake S y s t e m Note
Indicator
33 -01 A B S L e f t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S L e f t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n { S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Pulse)
-22 A B S L e f t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Speculative)
-23 A B S L e f t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Stuck ON)
34 -01 ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction (Solenoid ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction (Solenoid ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Pulse)
Speculative)
Stuck ON)
35 -01 A B S R i g h t - r e a r Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S R i g h t - r e a r Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Pulse)
Speculative)
Stuck ON)
36 -01 A B S Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction (Solenoid ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction (Solenoid ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Pulse)
-22 A B S R i g h t - r e a r O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Speculative)
-23 A B S Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction (Solenoid ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Stuck ON)
37 -01 A B S Left-rear Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S Left-rear Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Pulse)
Speculative)
Stuck ON)
38 -01 A B S Left-rear O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Initial Pulse)
-21 A B S Left-rear O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ( S o l e n o i d ON ON (see p a g e 19-137)
Pulse)
Speculative)
Stuck ON)
41 -21 R i g h t - f r o n t W h e e l Lock ON ON/OFF* (see page 19-138)
42 -21 L e f t - f r o n t W h e e l Lock ON ON/OFF* (see page 19-138)
43 -21 R i g h t - r e a r W h e e l Lock ON ON/OFF* (see page 19-138)
44 -21 L e f t - r e a r W h e e l Lock ON ON/OFF' (see page 19-138)
51 -11 M o t o r Lock ON OFF (see page 19-139)
-12 M o t o r Drive Circuit Malfunction ON OFF (see page 19-140)
-13 M o t o r Drive Circuit Malfunction ON OFF (see page 19-139)
52 -12 M o t o r S t u c k OFF ON OFF (see page 19-142)
53 -01 M o t o r Relay S t u c k O N 1 ON OFF (see page 19-142)
-12 M o t o r Relay Stuck O N 2 ON OFF (see page 19-142)
54 -03 Fail-safe Relay 1 S t u c k O N ON ON (see page 19-143)
-04 Fail-safe Relay 1 S t u c k OFF (Initial) ON ON (see page 19-144)
-21 Fail-safe R e l a y 1 S t u c k OFF ( M a i n ) ON ON (see page 19-144)
* ; Brake s y s t e m i n d i c a t o r t u r n s O N w h e n t w o or more w h e e l s f a i l .
(cont'd)
19-117
A B S Components

DTC D e t e c t i o n Item A B S Indicator Brake S y s t e m Note
Indicator
61 -01 A B S M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l U n i t i n i t i a l IG L o w V o l t a g e ON ON (see page 19-145)
-21 A B S Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low Voltage 1 ON ON (see page 19-145)
-22 ABS Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low Voltage 2 ON OFF (see page 19-145)
-23 ABS Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low Voltage 3 ON ON (see page 19-145)
62 -21 A B S M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l U n i t IG H i g h Voltage ON ON (see page 19-146)
71 -21 R i g h t - f r o n t o r Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r T i r e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON (see page 19-147)
-22 Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tire M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON (see page 19-147)
-23 Right-front and Right-rear Different Diameter Tire ON ON (see page 19-147)
Malfunction
-24 L e f t - f r o n t a n d Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r T i r e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON (see p a g e 19-147)
-25 Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tire ON ON (see p a g e 19-147)
Malfunction
-26 R i g h t - r e a r a n d Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r T i r e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON (see page 19-147)
81 -01 C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) I n t e r n a l C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON (see page 19-148)
-05 C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) I n t e r n a l C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON (see page 19-148)
-71 C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) I n t e r n a l C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF (see page 19-148)
86 -01 F-CAN B u s - o f f M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF (see page 19-149)
-24 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h E n g i n e M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF (see page 19-150)
-25 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h E n g i n e M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF (see page 19-150)
-FF F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h A B S M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF (see page 19-151)
19-118
S f mptom Troubleshooting Index
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) w i t h the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

HDS does not communicate with the ABS Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
modulator-control unit or the vehicle
ABS indicator and brake system indicator 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-223).
do not come on 2. Substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the original ABS modulator-control
unit (see page 19-154).
ABS indicator and brake system indicator 1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair those first.
do not go off 2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-223).
3. S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 19-152).
19-119
ABS Components
System Description
ABS Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 25P Connector (Connector Disconnected)

number sign
1 WHT CAN-H F-CAN c o m m u n i c a t i o n circuit
2 GRN FR+B Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
3 RED FL-GND Detects left-front wheel speed
sensor signal
5 PUR RL-GND Detects left-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
6 LT GRN RR+B Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
8 WHT FSR+B Power source for the fail-safe Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
relay
9 RED MR + B Power source for the m o t o r Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
relay
* 1:'06 model
* 2: '07-09 models
19-120
numb-3 ;R
sign
10 LT BLU K-LINE Communication w i t h HDS
12 WHT FL+B Detects left-front wheel speed
sensor signal
14 YEL RL+B Detects left-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
15 BLU RR-GND Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
16 YEL* 1
IG1 Power source for activating the W i t h ignition switch ON (II): battery
GRY* 2
17 RED CAN-L F-CAN
communication circuit
18 PNK FR-GND Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
24 BLK GND Ground for the ABS modulator- Continuity to ground
control unit
25 BLK MR-GND Ground for the pump motor Continuity to ground
* 1:'06 model
* 2:'07-09 models
(cont'd)
19-121
ABS Components
#
System Description (cont d)
S f stem Outline
This system is composed of the ABS modulator-control unit, the servo unit, the wheel speed sensors, and the system
indicators in the gauge control module (tach). The ABS modulator-control unit controls the anti-lock brake and the
brakes distribution functions.
BRAKE BRAKE
PARKING FLUID PEDAL
BRAKE LEVEL POSITION
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
Indicators drive signal Control mode signal • Brake pedal position switch signal
• Service check signal
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
Wheel rotation pulse signal
S E R V O UNIT
Wheel speed
signal
Control mode
signal
r v
C O N T R O L UNIT
• Solenoid control ABS MODULATOR-

• Motor control C O N T R O L UNIT
7
V
M O D U L A T O R UNIT
Communication via F-CAN
19-122
ABS Features
Without ABS, w h e n the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of
the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. W i t h ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure m a x i m u m grip force f r o m the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface

COEFFICIENT OF T A R G E T SLIP R A T E
FRICTION
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
Main Control
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel speed sensor signals it receives, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration
based on the wheel speeds.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve when the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure reducing, and pressure retaining.
C O N T R O L UNIT
Detect
Vehicle S p e e d
RIGHT-REAR
RIGHT-REAR
Detect Detect
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR Wheel S p e e d Slip Rate
LEFT-REAR
Detect Select L o w Detect
WHEEL SPEED
Wheel S p e e d S p e e d Wheel Slip Rate
SENSOR
RIGHT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
Detect Detect
WHEEL SPEED
Wheel S p e e d Slip Rate
SENSOR
LEFT-FRONT
LEFT-FRONT LEFT-FRONT
Detect ABS Drive
WHEEL SPEED Solenoid SOLENOID
Slip Rate Control
SENSOR
(cont'd)
19-123
ABS Components

EBD Features
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in
accordance w i t h the rear wheel load before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel speed sensor signals, the control
unit uses the modulator t o control the rear brakes individually. W h e n the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel
speed, the ABS modulator-control unit retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the
modulator. As the rear wheel speed increases, and approaches the front wheel speed, the ABS modulator-control unit
increases the rear brake fluid pressure by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very
rapidly. While this is happening, kickback may be felt at the brake pedal.
With E B Dunder H E A V Y LOAD

REAR WHEEL
at R E A R W H E E L
BRAKE PRESSURE
With E B D under LIGHT LOAD

FRONT WHEEL BRAKE PRESSURE
19-124
Modulator Unit
The A B S modulator consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the reservoir, the p u m p , the p u m p
motor, and the damping chamber. The modulator reduces the caliper fluid pressure directly. It is a circulating-type
modulator because the brake fluid circulates through the caliper, the reservoir, and the master cylinder. The hydraulic
control has three modes; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining,, and pressure reducing. The hydraulic circuit is an
independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
MASTER CYLINDER
FR RL RR FL
IN: I N L E T S O L E N O I D V A L V E ( N O R M A L L Y OPEN)
OUT: O U T L E T SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Mode Inlet Solenoid Outlet Solenoid Brake Fluid

Valve Valve
Pressure intensifying mode open closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out
to the caliper.
Pressure retaining mode closed closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet
and outlet valves.
Pressure reducing mode closed open • Caliper fluid flows through the
outlet valve to the reservoir.
• The motor pumps the reservoir
fluid through the damping
chamber to the master cylinder*.
* : The motor will keep running until the operation of the one anti-lock brake control is finished w i t h the first pressure
reducing mode.
19-125
ABS Components
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER-DASH
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX IGNITION SWITCH FUSE/RELAY BOX
3 / 1 c i \ 6 D2 tvo. 4 f/.6 M) F16 YFI *'
WHT tO O) 1
GRY*'
SGI HOT in ON (II) and S T A R T (III)
No. 3 (30 A)
No. 12 (15 A)
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
Closed: Brake pedal pressed
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE (TACH)
-WHT -WHT
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR -RED •
-RED -
ABS • LT GRN •
INDICATOR
— GRN —
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
6
•—•WHT —
— RED •
BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH • LT BLU
Closed: Low fluid
PARKING — WHT +B
BRAKE SWITCH
1 1
BLK Closed: Parking VJJQL
19-126
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT ! MODULATOR UNIT
YEL* 1
SV
GRY* 2
REGULATOR
-WHT
FSR+B
F A I L S A F E RELAY
9
-RED
Is
A40 ,
LT GRN - PUMP MOTOR R E L A Y
A36
A37
-WHT •WHT
CAN-H CAN
17 CONTROLLER
-RED - -RED •
SOLENOIDS
LEFT-FRONT
IG1 RIGHT-FRONT
T
ELECTRIC
CURRENT
LIMITATION
O
GND
O-
•J-*KM;OUT1 '
PUMP MOTOR
-fir
ifF
• 1 : '06 model
•m- • 12 V * 2 : '07-09 models
-O- :5V
(cont'd)
19-127
ABS Components
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX BRAKE PEDAL POSITION BRAKE FLUID L E V E L SWITCH

CONNECTOR C (2P) SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
I 1 I 9 I
UliLl L_ k I ~ J
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (34P) 1P CONNECTOR
u
1
/ 3 4 5 ^ /|8 9
/ 11
p26 27 28 29
7^ 14|15 16|17 18 19
.20
/ 22 23 24 25 30 31 32 33
/
G A U G E CONTROL MODULE (TACH) 36P CONNECTOR
A B S MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 2SP CONNECTOR WHEEL SPEED S E N S O R

2P CONNECTOR
1
10
//
2 3
12 / / 5 6
14 15 16
8 9 JTUNL
24 25
17 18
////
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) D A T A L I N K CONNECTOR (DLC)
f
n
II II n
12
19-128
DTC Troubleshootsiig
DTC 11-13: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor 8. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS
Circuit Malfunction modulator-control unit 25P connector wheel speed
sensor + B and GND terminals (see table).
DTC 13-13: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Circuit Malfunction DTC ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P
Connector Terminal
DTC 15-13: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor 11-13 No. 2 No. 18
Circuit Malfunction 13-13 No. 12 No. 3
15-13 No. 6 No. 15
DTC 17-13: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor 17-13 No. 14 No. 5
Circuit Malfunction
FL-GND (RED) RL-GND (PUR)

FR +B (GRN) RR + B (LT G R N )
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 8 9

12 1 4 15 16
ON (II) again.
24 25
17
F R - G N D (PNK) R R - G N D (BLU)
FL + B (WHT) R L + B (YEL)
Is DTC 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13

indicated? W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
YES—Goto step 5.
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel YES—Repair short in the wires between the
speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator- appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS
control unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent modulator-control unit.H
failures troubleshooting (see page 1 9 - 1 1 4 ) . •

7. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P

connector.
(cont'd)
19-129
ABS Components
9. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS 10. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS
modulator-control unit 25P connector terminals modulator-control unit 25P connector terminals
and the wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminal and the wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminal
(see table). (see table).
ABS Modulator- Appropriate DTC A B S Modulator- Appropriate

control Unit 25P Wheel Speed control Unit 25P Wheel Speed
Connector Sensor 2P Connector Sensor2P
Terminal connector Terminal Connector
Terminal Terminal
11-13 No. 2 Right-front 11-13 No. 18 Right-front
13-13 No. 12 Left-front 13-13 No. 3 Left-front
15-13 No. 6 Right-rear 15-13 No. 15 Right-rear
17-13 No. 14 .eft-rear 17-13 No. 5 Left-rear
W H E E L S P E E D S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR W H E E L S P E E D S E N S O R 2P CONNECTOR
T e r m i n a l side of female t e r m i n a l s T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
LEFT- RIGHT- RIGHT- LEFT- RIGHT- LEFT- LEFT- RIGHT-

FRONT FRONT REAR REAR FRONT FRONT REAR REAR
flAL
I I
Jk^fL J K M I JK^K AK^K
\Z | 1 } <2 1} {2 1 } ^2 | 1 > W < 2 h > <2]T>
RL+B FR-GND FL-GND RL-GND RR-GND
(YEL) (PNK) (RED) (RED) (GRY)
FL-GND RL-GND
(RED) (PUR)
1 2 3
/ 5 6
/ 8 9
// //
10 12 14 15 16
17 18 24 25
FR-GND (PNK) RR-GND (BLU)

A B S MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals A B S MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
NO—Repair open in the wire between the
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS NO—Repair open in the wire between the
modulator-control unit. II appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS
modulator-control unit.il
19-130
11. Check for continuity between body ground and the 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector terminals (see table). 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
appropriate ABS modulator-control unit 25P
DTC ABS Modulator-control Unit 25P connector terminals (see table).
Connector Terminal
11-13 No. 2 No. 18 DTC A B S Modulator-control Unit 25P
13-13 No. 12 No. 3 Connector Terminal
15-13 No. 6 No. 15 11-13 No. 2 No. 18
17-13 No. 14 No. 5 13-13 No. 12 No. 3
15-13 No. 6 No. 15
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR
17-13 No. 14 No. 5
FL-GND (RED) R L - G N D (PUR) ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 25P CONNECTOR

FR +B (GRN) RR + B (LT G R N )
1 2
/3 5 6
/ 8 9 FL-GND (RED) R L - G N D (PUR)
+B
10
// /12 14 15 16
/ / / 24 25
©CD FR + B (GRN) RR (LT G R N )
17 18
/ / 10 12 14 15 16
8
24 25
9
1
FR-GND FL+B RL+B RR-GND 17
(PNK) ft (WHT) (YEL) , (BLU)
FR-GND FL+B R L + B RR-GND

( P N K ) /C (WHT) , i (YEL) S (BLU)
Is there continuity? Wire side of f e m a l e terminals
Y E S —Repair short to body ground in the wire Is there 0.1 V or more?

between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and
the ABS modulator-control unit. • YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS
N O — G o t o step 12. modulator-control unit.H
(cont'd)
19-131
ABS Components
14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 12-11: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
15. Substitute the appropriate wheel speed sensor w i t h
opposite wheel speed sensor, or w i t h a known- DTC 14-11: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
good wheel speed sensor. Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
16. Reconnect all connectors. DTC 16-11: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 18-11: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
18. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to NOTE: These DTCs may be caused by electrical
ON (II) again. interference. Check for aftermarket devices installed in
the vehicle w h e n these DTCs are indicated.
Is DTC indicated that is indicated in step 4?
YES—Check for loose terminals in the ABS
modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary, 3. Test-drive the vehicle.
substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control
unit (see page 19-154), and retest. • NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
NO—Replace the original wheel speed sensor 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(see page 19-156). •
Is DTC 12-11, 14-11, 16-11, and/or 18-11
indicated?
Y E S - l f DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 is

indicated at the same time, do the DTC 12-12,
14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 troubleshooting first
(see page 19-133). If DTC 12-12, 14-12,16-12, or
18-12 is not indicated, go to step 5.
NO —If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the

indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If DTCs are not
indicated, there is an intermittent failure, the
system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals
between the wheel speed sensor 2P connector and
the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector.
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting
(see page 19-114). P
19-132
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), DTC 12-12: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
6. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is
properly mounted (see page 19-156), DTC 14-12: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
12-11 Right-front DTC 16-12: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
14-11 Left-front Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
16-11 Right-rear
18-11 Left-rear DTC 18-12: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK?
modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary, 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
unit (see page 19-154), and retest. • 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 13 mph (20 km/h) or more,
and go a distance of 328 ft (100 m) or more.
NO—Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check
the mounting position (see page 19-156). • NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
is DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, and/or 18-12

indicated?

time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator-
control unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-114). •

(cont'd)
19-133
ABS Components

7. Check for continuity between the appropriate ABS Is there continuity?
modulator-control unit 25P connector wheel speed
sensor GND terminals (see table). YES—Repair short in the wires between the
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the ABS
DTC A B S Modulator-control Unit 25P modulator-control u n i t . B
Connector Terminal
Appropriate Other Terminals NO—Check for loose terminals in the ABS
Terminal modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary,
12-12 No. 18 No. 3 No. 15 No. 5 substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control
14-12 No. 3 No. 18 No. 15 No. 5 unit (see page 19-154), and retest. •
16-12 No. 15 No. 18 No. 3 No. 5
18-12 No. 5 No. 18 No. 3 No. 15
D T C 12-12
RL-GND (PUR)
FL-GND (RED) R R - G N D (BLU)
1 2 123 / 145 /16 8 9 6

10 / 15
/
24
25
17 18
/ / /
F R - G N D (PNK)
D T C 14-12
D T C 16-12
D T C 18-12
R L - G N D (PUR)
89
1170 14 16 24 25
12 15
F R - G N D (PNK)
18 RR-GND (BLU)
F L - G N D (RED)
19-134
DTC 12-21: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 12-22: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Installation Error Installation Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More)
DTC 14-21: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 14-22: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 16-21: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 16-22: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
DTC 18-21: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 18-22: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
1. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h). 1. Test-drive the vehicle between 19 mph (30 km/h)
and 31 m p h (50 km/h) for 70 seconds or more.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPEED in the ABS
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. 2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPEED in the ABS
Are all four values the same?
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator- time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
control unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator-
• failures troubleshooting (see page 19-114). • control unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent
properly mounted (see page 19-156). 4. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is
properly mounted (see page 19-156).
12-21 Right-front DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
14-21 Left-front 12-22 Right-front
16-21 Right-rear 14-22 Left-front
18-21 Left-rear 16-22 Right-rear
18-22 Left-rear
YES—Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor
(see page 19-156). • YES—Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor
(see page 19-156).•
the mounting position (see page 1 9 - 1 5 6 ) . • NO—Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check
the mounting position (see page 19-156).•
19-135
ABS Components

DTC 12-23; Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 21-11: Right-front Magnetic Encoder
installation Error (0 to 9 mph (0 to 16 km/h)) (Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 14-23: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 22-11: Left-front Magnetic Encoder
Installation Error (0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h)) (Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 16-23: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 23-11: Right-rear Magnetic Encoder
Installation Error (0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h)) (Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
DTC 18-23: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 24-11: Left-rear Magnetic Encoder
Installation Error (0 to 9 mph (Oto 15 km/h)) (Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing)
1. Test-drive the vehicle between 1 mph (1 km/h) and 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
9 m p h (15 km/h).
NOTE; Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 13 mph (20 km/h) or more,
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPEED in the ABS and go a distance of 328 ft (100 m) or more.
Are ail four values the same?
t i m e . Check for loose terminals between the wheel Is DTC 21-11, 22-11, 23-11, and/or 24-11
speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator- indicated?
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-114). KS Y E S — G o t o step 5.
NO—Go to step 3. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator-
4. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is failures troubleshooting (see page 19-114).•
12-23 Right-front
14-23 Left-front
16-23 Right-rear
18-23 Left-rear

(see page 1 9 - 1 5 6 ) . •

the mounting position (see page 19-156).H
19-136
6. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for DTC 31-xx*: ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid
damage, debris, and correct installation. Valve Malfunction
DTC Appropriate Note DTC 32-xx*: ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid

Magnetic Valve Malfunction
Encoder
21-11 Right-front Remove the DTC 33-xx*: ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid
22-11 Left-front driveshaft outboard Valve Malfunction
joint f r o m the
appropriate wheel DTC 34-xx '. ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid
hub (see page 18-14). Valve Malfunction
23-11 Right-rear Remove the hub
24-11 Left-rear bearing unit DTC 35-xx*: ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid
(see page 18-31). Valve Malfunction
Is the magnetic encoder surface OK? DTC 36-xx*: ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid
Valve Malfunction
YES—Remove the debris f r o m the magnetic
encoder, or replace the wheel bearing (front) or the DTC 37-xx*: ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid
hub bearing unit (rear):H Valve Malfunction
• F r o n t Replace the front wheel bearing (see page DTC 38-xx*: ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid
18-18). Valve Malfunction
• Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-31). * : Any two-character subcode (see table)
NO—Clean off debris f r o m the appropriate Subcode Malfunction Note (DTC)

magnetic encoder surface on the wheel bearing or 01 Solenoid 31-01,32-01,33-01,
the hub bearing unit, then go to step 1, and Initial Pulse 34-01,35-01,36-01,
recheck. If the DTC is still present, replace the 37-01,38-01
appropriate wheel bearing or hub bearing u n i t 21 Solenoid Pulse 31-21,32-21,33-21,
34-21,35-21,36-21,
37-21,38-21
22 Solenoid 31-22, 32-22, 33-22,
Speculative 34-22, 35-22, 36-22,
37-22, 38-22
23 Solenoid 31-23, 32-23, 33-23,
Stuck ON 34-23, 35-23, 36-23,
37-23, 38-23

ON (II) again.
(cont'd)
19-137
ABS Components
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. DTC 41-21: Right-front Wheel Lock
Is DTC 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx, DTC 42-21: Left-front Wheel Lock
37-xx, or 38-xx indicated?
DTC 43-21: Right-rear Wheel Lock
YES—Replace the ABS modulator-control unit
(see page 19-154). • DTC 44-21: Left-rear Wheel Lock
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this The DTCs may be indicated under these conditions:
time.B • The vehicle goes into a spin.
• The ABS continues to operate for a long time.
• Snow, dirt, or debris build-up on the wheel speed
sensor or magnetic encoder.
• Misadjusted brake pedal position switch.
9
Contaminated brake fluid.

in the proper locations (see page 1-10).
2. Turn the appropriate wheel by hand.
DTC Appropriate Wheel

41-21 Right-front
42-21 Left-front
43-21 Right-rear
44-21 Left-rear
Is there brake drag?
YES—Repair the brake drag. •
NO—Go to step 3.


the mounting position (see page 19-156).•
19-138
Turn the Ignition switch to ON (11). DTC 51-11: Motor Lock
Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. DTC 51-13: Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction
Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h) for 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
20 seconds or more. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
NOTE; Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it t o
ON (II) again.
Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
4. Wait 5 seconds.
YES—Check for loose terminals between the wheel 5. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in
speed sensor 2P connector and the ABS modulator- the ABS FUNCTION TEST five times w i t h the HDS.
control unit 25P connector. If necessary, substitute
a known-good ABS modulator-control unit -LFT FT SOLENOID
(see page 19-154), and retest. • -RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
NO —If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the -RT REAR SOLENOID
indicated, intermittent failure, the system is OK at 6. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
the t i m e B
YES —Replace the ABS modulator-control unit

(see page 19-154).•

time.B
19-139
ABS Components
DTC 51-12: Motor Drive Circuit Malfunction 8. Check for continuity between ABS modulator-
control unit 25P connector terminal No. 9 and body
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). ground.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. A B S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to MR - f B (RED)

ON (II) again.

1
10
2
/
3
12 / / 5 6
14 15 16
8
24 25
9
I s DTC 51-12 indicated?

17 18
/// /
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s

t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the ABS
modulator-control unit 25P connector. Refer to
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page Is there continuity ?
19-114).B
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). between the No. 3 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the ABS modulator-control
6. Check the No. 3 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/ unit.H
relay box.
Is the fuse blown? hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 9.

19-140
9. Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P 14. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
connector. connector (see step 2 on page 19-154).
10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 15. Measure the voltage between ABS modulator-
control unit 25P connector terminal No. 9 and body
11. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. ground.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to A B S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
ON (II) again.
MR + B (RED)
1 2 3 5 6
/ 8 9
10 / 12 14 15 16
Is DTC 51-12 indicated? /
7/
24 25

17 18
//
(see page 1 9 - 1 5 4 ) . •
X

modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary,
unit (see page 19-154), and retest. •

the ABS modulator-control unit. I I
19-141
ABS Components

DTC 52-12: Motor Stuck OFF DTC 53-01: Motor Relay Stuck ON 1
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC 53-12: Motor Relay Stuck ON 2
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
ON (II) again.
4. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in ON (II) again.
the ABS FUNCTION TEST five times w i t h the HDS.
-LFT FT SOLENOID
-RT FT SOLENOID Is DTC 53-01 or 53-12 indicated?
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID Y E S — G o t o step 5.
t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the ABS
Is DTC 52-12 indicated? modulator-control unit 25P connector. Refer to
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
YES—Replace the ABS modulator-control unit 19-114).B
(see page 19-154). •
time.B 6. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
19-142
7. Check for continuity between ABS modulator- DTC §4-§3; Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck ON
control unit 25P connector terminal No. 25 and
body ground. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

ON (II) again.
1
10
2
/
3
12 / 5 6
14 15 16/ 8 9
/ 24 25 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.

17 18
/ / MR-GND (BLK)
is DTC 54-03 indicated?

(see page 19-154). •
time.!

NO—Repair open in the wire between the ABS

modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).H
19-143
ABS Components

DTC 54-04: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF 8. Check for continuity between ABS modulator-
(Initial) control unit 25P connector terminal No. 8 and body
ground.
DTC 54-21: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Main)
A B S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 25P C O N N E C T O R
FSR +B (WHT)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1
10
2
/
3
12
/ 5 6
14 15 16 / 8 9
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to /

/////
24 25
17 18
ON (ll) again.

NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

time. Check for loose terminals at the ABS
modulator-control unit 25P connector. Refer to YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page between the No. 3 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
19-114).• fuse/relay box and the ABS modulator-control
unit. I I
6. Check the No. 3 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood hood fuse/relay box, then go to step 9.
fuse/relay box.
9. Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
Is the fuse blown? connector.
Y E S — G o t o step 7. 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 14. 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
7. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
connector (see step 2 on page 19-154). ON (II) again.

(see page 19-154). •
19-144
14. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P DTC 61-01: ABS Modulator-control Unit Initial
connector (see step 2 on page 19-154). IG Low Voltage
15. Measure the voltage between ABS modulator- DTC 61-21: ABS Modulator-control Unit
control unit 25P connector terminal No. 8 and body Power Source Low Voltage 1
ground.
DTC 61-22: ABS Modulator-control Unit
ABS M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 25P CONNECTOR
Power Source Low Voltage 2 .
FSR + B (WHT) DTC 61-23: ABS Modulator-control Unit

Power Source Low Voltage 3
1
10
/
2 3
12
/ 5
/ 6
14 15 16
8 9
17 /18 24 25 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

/ //
X 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the
engine.
Is there battery voltage? Is DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22, or 61-23 indicated?
YES—Check for loose terminals in the ABS Y E S — G o t o step 5.

substitute a known-good ABS modulator-control NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
unit (see page 19-154), and retest. • t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the ABS
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 3 intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
(30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and 19-114KB
the ABS modulator-control unit.H
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the ABS DATA
6. Using a voltmeter, measure and note the voltage

between the battery terminals.
NOTE: If the battery voltage is below 9.5 V, check

the 12 V battery performance (see page 22-61), and
troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
(see page 12-179).
(cont'd)
19-145
ABS Components
7. Compare the data list voltage noted In step 5 to the DTC 62-21: ABS Modulator-control Unit IG
battery voltage in step 6. High Voltage
Is the difference between the two voltage 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
readings less than 3 V?
t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the ABS 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the
modulator-control unit 25P connector. Refer to engine.
19-114). If the code resets after clearing, replace the 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
ABS modulator-control unit (see page 19-154). •
Is DTC 62-21 indicated?
NO—Check for loose terminals in the ABS
modulator-control unit 25P connector. If necessary, Y E S — G o t o step 5.
unit (see page 19-154), and retest. • NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the ABS DATA


NOTE: If the voltage is above 15.1 V, troubleshoot

the charging system indicator circuit (see page
12-179).
7. Compare the data list voltage noted in step 5 to the

battery voltage in step 6.
Is the difference between the two voltage

readings less than 3 V?
Y E S —Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time. Check for loose terminals at the ABS
19-114). If the code resets after clearing, replace the
ABS modulator-control unit (see page 19-154). B
NO—Replace the ABS modulator-control unit

(see page 19-154), and retest. fl
19-146
DTC 71-21: Right-front or Left-rear Different 1. Check the tires for proper inflation and the correct
Diameter Tire Malfunction size (see page 18-6).
DTC 71-22^ Left-front or Right-rear Different - 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Diameter Tire Malfunction
DTC 71-23: Right-front and Right-rear
Different Diameter Tire Malfunction 4. Test-drive the vehicle.
DTC 71-24: Left-front and Left-rear Different NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
Diameter Tire Malfunction'
DTC 71-25: Right-front and Left-front
Different Diameter Tire Malfunction Is DTC 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, or
71-26 indicated?
DTC 71-26: Right-rear and Left-rear Different
Diameter Tire Malfunction YES—Replace tires as needed until all their
diameters match (see page 1 8 - 6 ) . •
NOTE: The DTC is indicated when the vehicle has a
different diameter tire(s) compared to the other tires. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
DTC Sectional
71-21 Right-front or left-rear
71-22 Left-front or right-rear
71-23 Right-front and right-rear
71-24 Left-front and left-rear
71-25 Right-front and left-front
71-26 Right-rear and left-rear
19-147
ABS Components
DTC 81-xx*: Central Processing Unit (CPU) DTC 81-11: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Internal Circuit Malfunction Internal Circuit Malfunction
* : Any two-character subcode (Except these DTC 81-51: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
combinations: DTC 81-11, 81-51, and 81-52) Internal Circuit Malfunction
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). DTC 81-52: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
ON (II) again. 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. 3. Test-drive the vehicle.
Is DTC 81-xx indicated? NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
Y E S - l f DTC 81-11, 81-51, or 81-52 is indicated at 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
the same t i m e , do the appropriate troubleshooting
first. If DTC 81-11, 81-51, or 81-52 is not indicated, IsDTC81-11, 81-51, or81-52indicated?
replace the ABS modulator-control unit (see page
19-154), and retest. • YES —Replace the ABS modulator-control unit
(see page 1 9 - 1 5 4 ) . •
time.B NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.H
19-148
DTC 86-01: F-CAN Bus-off Malfunction 9. Check for continuity between ABS modulator-
control unit 25P connector terminals and PCM
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). connector A (44P) terminals (see table).
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. Sign ABS Modulator- PCM Connector
control Unit 25P A (44P) Terminal
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to Connector Terminal
ON (II) again. CAN-L No. 17 No. 37
CAN-H No. 1 No. 36
C A N - H (WHT)
1 2 3/ 5 6/ 8 9
1
YES—Goto step 5.
10 12 14 15 16 24
time. Check for loose terminals between PCM
17C1A8N - L ( R E D )
//// 25
connector A (44P) and the ABS modulator-control
unit 25P connector. Refer to intermittent failures

C A N - H (WHT) C A N - L (RED)


the ABS modulator-control u n i t . H
19-149
ABS Components

DTC 86-24: F-CAN Communication with 9. Check for continuity between ABS modulator-
Engine Malfunction control unit 25P connector terminals and PCM
connector A (44P) terminals (see table).
DTC 86-25: F-CAN Communication with
Engine Malfunction Sign ASS Mociuiaior- rvim Connector
1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). Connector Terminal
CAN-L No. 17 No. 37
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. CAN-H No. 1 No. 36
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 m p h (10 km/h) or more. Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. C A N - H (WHT)

1 2 3
10 A 12
/
/ 5
14 15 16
6
/ 8 9
17 18 24 25
Is DTC 86-24 and/or 86-26 indicated? CAN-L (RED)

t i m e . Check for loose terminals between PCM
connector A (44P) and the ABS modulator-control 4 5 6 7 8 9
10
20 21
/ 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
23 24 25

26 27 28 29
36 37 38 39 40
/ 31
/ 33 34 35
42 43 44

C A N - H (WHT) C A N - L (RED)

connector (see step 2 on page 19-154). Is there continuity?

the ABS modulator-control unit. 11
19-150
10. Reconnect all connectors. DTC 86-FF: F-CAN Communication with ABS
Malfunction
13. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h) or more. ON (II) again.
NOTE; Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
14. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is DTC 86-FF indicated?
Is DTC 86-24 and/'or 86-25 indicated? YES—Replace the ABS modulator-control unit
(see page 19-154). •
(see page 19-154). NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
original PCM (see page 11-238). •
19-151
ABS Components
ABS indicator and brake system indicator do 5. Reconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P
not go off connector.
2. Check the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 7. Check the ABS indicator and the brake system
relay box. indicator for several seconds when the ignition
switch is turned to ON (II).
Is the fuse blown?
Does the indicators come on then go off?
YES—Go to step 3.
YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Replace the ABS modulator-control unit
3. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P (see page 19-154). •
4. Check for continuity between ABS modulator- connector (see step 2 on page 19-154).
body ground. 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
10. Measure the voltage between ABS modulator-
body ground.
9
10 15 16 24 25
14
17 18 IG1 ( Y E L ) * 1
1 2 3 5 6/ 8 9
/
2
(GRY)*
10/ 12 14 15 16/ 24 25
17 18 / / / / 1
IG1 ( Y E L ) *
2
(GRY)*
*1:'06 model
* 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s
Is there continuity ? W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
*1:'06 model
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire * 2 : '07-09 m o d e l s
between the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the ABS modulator-control Is there battery voltage?
unit.H
dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 5. NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 4
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the ABS modulator-control unit.H
19-152
12. Check for continuity between ABS modulator- 14. Check for continuity between the ABS modulator-
control unit 25P connector terminal No. 24 and control unit 25P connector terminal and gauge
body ground. control module (tach) 36P connector terminal (see
table).
A B S M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 25P C O N N E C T O R
Sign ABS M o d u l a t o r - G a u g e Control
control Unit 25P M o d u l e (Tach)36P
1 2 3/ 5
6 89 Connector Terminal Connector Termir.s 1
1170// 12 14 15 16
CAN-L No. 17 No. 19
18 /
24 25
/// G N D (BLK)
CAN-H No. 1 No. 1
CAN-H (WHT)
1 2 3 / 5 6/ 8 9
10 // 12
17 18
14 15 16
24 25
1
////
C A N - L (RED)
CAN-H (WHT)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the ABS
P 1
modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).l 1 L / V U | B | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|11/ / | / | l 4 J l 5 | l 6 | l 7 h 8 |
|19|20|21M/|/|/|/|27|28|/|/|/]32|33|/|/|^
13. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P C A N - L (RED)
connector.
(TACH) 36P C O N N E C T O R
YES—Check f o r loose terminals in the ABS

unit (see page 19-154), and r e t e s t . •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the gauge

control module (tach) and the ABS modulator-
control unit.H
19-153
ABS Components
ABS Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE;
immediately with water.
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• Plug the ends of the hoses and the joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
Removal
2. Disconnect the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector (A) by pulling up the lock (B); the connector disconnects
itself.
9.8 N m
{1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
3. Disconnect the six brake lines f r o m the ABS modulator-control unit.
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and to the right-front (D), the left-rear (E), the right-rear
(F), and the left-front (G) brake systems.
4. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit (H) w i t h the brackets (I) f r o m the body.
5. Remove the ABS modulator-control unit f r o m the brackets.
6. Separate the bracket if necessary.
19-154
Installation
1. Install the ABS modulator-control unit onto the brackets.
2. Install the bracket with the ABS modulator-control unit to the body.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector to the ABS modulator-control unit.
5. Lower the lock of the ABS modulator-control unit 25P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
6. Bleed the brake system (except the servo unit and power unit) (see page 19-97).
7. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS indicator goes off.
8. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS indicator does not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into
the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system (except the servo unit and power unit) again
(see page 19-97).
19-155
ABS Components
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Guide pin tool 07AAG-SVBA100
Front
2. Release the connector clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
3. Remove the clips, the bolt, and the wheel speed sensor (C).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.

• If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact w i t h the wheel bearing, it is faulty. Investigate the cause before
replacing the sensor.
5. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS indicator goes off.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS indicator does not come on.
19-156
Rear
2. Release the connector clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
3. Remove the clips, the bolt, and the wheel speed sensor (C).
(cont'd)
19-157
ABS Components
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
4. Apply multi-purpose grease to the wheel speed 6. Insert the wheel speed sensor (A) and the guide pin
sensor O-ring (A) and the sensor hole (B) in the tool (B) into the bolt hole on the knuckle.
knuckle.
NOTE: To ensure proper alignment w h e n pushing
the wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing,
do not hold the sensor bracket during installation,
hold the sensor wire.
B
07 A A G - S V B A 1 0 0
Insert the guide pin tool (A) into the wheel speed
sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool
contacts the wheel speed sensor bracket.
NOTE: To prevent O-ring damage, the wheel speed

sensor must be installed w i t h the guide pin t o o l .
7. Gently push and pull the wheel speed sensor in and

out to make sure the O-ring is sliding properly in its
housing. While y o u are doing this, make sure the
sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If
the sliding effort is too high, remove the wheel
speed sensor, inspect the O-ring for damage, and
start the installation process again.
8. Remove the guide pin tool, then install the bolt, and
tighten it to specified torque.
9. Clean the mating surfaces between the brake d r u m

wheel.
10. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS indicator
goes off.
11. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS

indicator does not come on.
19-158
Brakes

Advanced Hydraulic Booster ........................... 19-43
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System!
Components ('06-08 Models) 19-111
Components ('09 Model)
DTC Troubleshooting Index . 19-165
Symptom Troubleshooting Index - 19-170
System Description ... ••• 19-171
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement 19-233
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration
Sensor Replacement 19-234
VSA Sensor Neutral Position Memorization 19-234
VSA OFF Switch Test 19-235
VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation 19-236
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement 19-238
VSA S f stem Components
RIGHT-REAR
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-REAR
W H E E L SPEED SENSOR
LEFT-REAR
HUB BEARING UNIT
RIGHT-FRONT (MAGNETIC ENCODER)
WHEEL BEARING Replacement,
(MAGNETIC ENCODER) p a g e 18-31
RIGHT-FRONT LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WHEEL BEARING
R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 19-238 (MAGNETIC ENCODER)
LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
19-160
D A T A L I N K C O N N E C T O R (DLC) R e p l a c e m e n t page 19-234
19-161
S f stem Indicator , ABS Indicator
This system has four indicators: The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is
lost. The brakes still work like a conventional system.
• ABS indicator (A)
• Brake system indicator (B) Brake System Indicator
• VSA indicator (C)
• VSA activation indicator (D) The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD
function is lost, the advanced hydraulic booster
brake fluid level is low.
NOTE: If t w o or more wheel speed sensors fail, the

B
brake system indicator comes on.
V S A Indicator
The VSA indicator comes on when the VSA function is

lost.
V S A Activation Indicator
The VSA activation indicator blinks when the VSA

function is activating. The VSA activation indicator
W h e n the system is OK, each indicator comes on for comes on and stays on when the VSA is turned OFF by
about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch to using the VSA OFF switch, or when the VSA function is
ON (II), then goes off. lost.
When the system detects a p r o b l e m , a DTC is set and,
depending upon the failure, the VSA modulator-control
unit determines w h i c h indicator(s) are turned on. If the
problem goes away (system returns to normal), the
indicator(s) are controlled in the following w a y
depending upon the DTC that is set:
• The indicator(s) w i l l come on and stay on w h e n the

ignition switch Is ON (II).
• The indicator(s) automatically go off.
• The indicator(s) go off after the vehicle is driven.
19-162
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs
• The m e m o r y holds all DTCs. However, w h e n the The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
same DTC is detected more than once, the more of the problem is still present, and the ABS and/or VSA
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting
w h e n the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is procedure for a code that has been cleared but does not
memorized as a single DTC. reset can result in incorrect diagnosis.
• The DTCs are indicated in the order they occur.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, 1. Question the customer about the conditions w h e n
procedures to clear the DTCs. w h e n the ABS and/or VSA indicator came on, such
as during activation, after activation, when the
Self-diagnosis vehicle was traveling at a certain speed, etc. If
necessary, have the customer demonstrate the
-• Self-diagnosis can be classified into t w o categories: concern.
- Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch
is turned to ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA 2. W h e n the ABS or VSA indicator does not come on
indicators go off. during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned to contact of the terminals, etc. in the circuit indicated
LOCK (0). by the DTC before you start troubleshooting.
• When the system detects a problem, the VSA
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode. 3. After troubleshooting, or the repairs are done, clear
the DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
Kickback conditions that originally set the DTCs. Make sure
the ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator-
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir 4. Check for DTCs f r o m other systems which are
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at connected via F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are
the brake pedal. related to F-CAN, one possible cause was that the
ignition switch was turned to ON (II) with the VSA
Pump Motor modulator-control unit connector disconnected.
Clear the DTCs. Check for fuel and emissions DTCs
• The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- first.
control unit is functioning.
• The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump NOTE: Always troubleshoot fuel and emissions
motor operation one time after completing initial DTCs first.
diagnosis during regular diagnosis w h e n the vehicle
is driven over 10 m p h (15 km/h). Intermittent Failures
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If you cannot
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures reproduce the condition, check for loose connectors or
are identical to the procedures of advanced hydraulic terminal pins related to the circuit that you are
booster (see page 19-95). troubleshooting.
(cont'd)
19-163
VSA Sf s t e m C o m p o n e n t s
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd!
H o w t o Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve DTCs

System)
1. If the system indicators stay on, connect the HDS to HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.

and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't

refer to the DTC troubleshooting. Do the all
systems DTC check, and troubleshoot any
powertrain DTCs first.
How to Clear DTCs

3. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle HDS to the data link connector (DLC) under the
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't, driver's side of the dashboard.
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) for all
systems, troubleshoot the powertrain DTCs first 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and note it. Then refer to the indicated DTCs and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't
troubleshooting, and do the appropriate troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
NOTE: on the HDS.
• The HDS communication stops when the vehicle
speed is at 31 m p h (50 km/h) or more. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
• The HDS reads the DTC, current data, and other
system data.
that came w i t h the HDS.
19-164
DTC Detection Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation
Indicator Indicator
11 -13 Riqht-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-181)
12 -11 R i g h t - f r o n t W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-184)
-12 Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Short to the Other ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see p a g e 19-185)
Sensor Circuit
-21 Right-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-187)
-22 Right-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
(19 m p h (30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 Right-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OI-F ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
(0 t o 9 m p h ( O t o 15 k m / h ) )
13 -13 Left-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-181)
14 -11 L e f t - f r o n t W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-184)
-12 Left-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Short to the Other ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see p a g e 19-185)
Sensor Circuit
-21 Left-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-187)
-22 Left-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
(19 m p h (30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 Left-front W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
(0 t o 9 m p h (0 t o 15 k m / h ) )
15 -13 Right-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-181)
16 -11 R i g h t - r e a r W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-184)
-12 Right-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor Short t o the Other ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see p a g e 19-185)
Sensor Circuit
-21 Right-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-187)
-22 Right-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
(19 m p h (30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 Right-rear W h e e l Speed Sensor Installation Error ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
( 0 t o 9 m p h ( O t o 15 k m / h ) )
17 -13 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-181)
18 11 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r Electrical N o i s e o r ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see p a g e 19-184)
-12 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r S h o r t t o t h e O t h e r ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-185)
Sensor Circuit
-21 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r ON ON/OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-187)
-22 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
(19 m p h (30 k m / h ) o r M o r e )
-23 Left-rear W h e e l S p e e d S e n s o r I n s t a l l a t i o n E r r o r ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-188)
(0 t o 9 m p h (0 t o 15 k m / h ) )
21 -11 Right-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-189)
M a l f u n c t i o n (Pulse M i s s i n g )
22 -11 Left-front Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see p a g e 19-189)
23 -11 Right-rear Magnetic Encoder (Wheel Bearing) ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-189)
24 -11 Left-rear M a g n e t i c E n c o d e r ( W h e e l B e a r i n g ) ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see p a g e 19-189)
25 -12 Y a w Rate S e n s o r I n t e r n a l C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-190)
(Open, Short)
-13 Y a w Rate S e n s o r C o m m u n i c a t i o n E r r o r OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-190)
-17 Y a w Rate/Lateral Acceleration Sensor Power OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-190)
Source Voltage Malfunction
-18 Y a w Rate/Lateral A c c e l e r a t i o n S e n s o r I n t e r n a l OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-190)
Circuit M a l f u n c t i o n
-19 Y a w Rate/Lateral A c c e l e r a t i o n S e n s o r S t a r t u p T i m e OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-191)
Malfunction
-21 Y a w Rate S e n s o r N e u t r a l P o s i t i o n M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-190)
-22 Y a w Rate S e n s o r S t u c k OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-191)
-23 Y a w Rate S e n s o r C i r c u i t I n t e r m i t t e n t I n t e r r u p t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-191)
-24 Y a w Rate S e n s o r G a i n L o w OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-192)
-25 Y a w Rate S e n s o r G a i n H i g h OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-192)
* : Brake s y s t e m i n d i c a t o r t u r n s O N w h e n t w o o r m o r e w h e e l s f a i l .
(cont'd)
19-165
VSA System Components
DTC D e t e c t i o n Item ABS Brake VSA VSA Note
Indicator Indicator
26 -12 Lateral A c c e l e r a t i o n S e n s o r I n t e r n a l C i r c u i t OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-190)
Malfunction (Open, Short)
-13 Lateral Acceleration Sensor C o m m u n i c a t i o n Error OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-190)
Lateral A c c e l e r a t i o n S e n s o r N e u t r a l P o s i t i o n rscr, \jifT UN (see p a g e 19-192)
-21 UIM
Malfunction
-22 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Stuck OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-193)
-23 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Circuit I n t e r m i t t e n t OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-192)
Interruption
-24 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain L o w OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-192)
-25 Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain High OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-192)
27 -11 S t e e r i n q A n q l e S e n s o r D I A G S i g n a l E r r o r (Initial) OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-194)
-21 Steering A n g l e Sensor Stuck Neutral Position OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-196)
-22 Steering A n g l e Sensor Stuck Offset Position OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-196)
-23 Steering Angle Sensor Counter Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-199)
-24 Steering Angle Sensor Exchange Malfunction OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-199)
-26 Steering Angle Sensor DIAG Signal Error (main) OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-194)
31 -01 A B S R i g h t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see page 19-200)
-21 A B S R i g h t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
32 -01 A B S Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-21 A B S Right-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
33 -01 A B S L e f t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-21 A B S L e f t - f r o n t Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
34 -01 A B S Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-21 A B S Left-front Outlet Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
35 -01 A B S R i g h t - r e a r Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-21 A B S R i g h t - r e a r Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
19-166
Indicator Indicator
36 -01 A B S Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-21 A B S Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-22 A B S Right-rear Outlet Solenoid Valve M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-23 ' A B S R i g h t - r e a r O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
37 -01 A B S Left-rear Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-21 A B S Left-rear Inlet S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
38 -01 A B S Left-rear O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-21 A B S Left-Rear O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-22 A B S Left-rear O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
-23 A B S Left-rear O u t l e t S o l e n o i d V a l v e M a l f u n c t i o n ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-200)
(Solenoid Stuck ON)
41 -21 Right-front W h e e l Lock ON ON/OFF' ON ON (see page 19-201)
42 -21 Left-front Wheel Lock ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see page 19-201)
43 -21 R i g h t - r e a r W h e e l Lock ON •ON/OFF" ON ON (see page 19-201)
44 -21 Left-rear W h e e l Lock ON ON/OFF* ON ON (see page 19-201)
51 -11 M o t o r Lock ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-202)
-12 M o t o r Lock C i r c u i t M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-202)
-13 M o t o r Relay OFF M a l f u n c t i o n ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-202)
52 -12 M o t o r S t u c k OFF ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-204)
53 -01 M o t o r Relay S t u c k O N 1 ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-205)
-12 M o t o r Relay S t u c k O N 2 ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-205)
54 -03 Fail-safe Relay 1 S t u c k O N ON ON ON ON (see page 19-206)
-04 Fail-safe Relay 1 S t u c k OFF (Initial) ON ON ON ON (see page 19-206)
-21 Fail-safe Relay 1 S t u c k OFF ( M a i n ) ON ON ON ON (see page 19-206)
56 -01 Initial VIG FET S t u c k OFF ON ON ON ON (see page 19-206)
-02 Initial V I G FET S t u c k O N ON ON ON ON (see page 19-206)
-11 V I G FET S t u c k OFF ON ON ON ON (see page 19-206)
61 -01 V S A M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l U n i t Initial IG l o w V o l t a q e ON ON ON ON (see page 19-207)
-21 VSA Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low ON ON ON ON (see page 19-207)
Voltage 1
-22 V S A Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low ON OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-207)
Voltage 2
-23 VSA Modulator-control Unit Power Source Low ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-207)
Voltage 3
62 -21 V S A M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l U n i t IG H i q h V o l t a q e ON ON ON ON (see page 19-208)
64 -11 Steering A n g l e Sensor Power Circuit Short OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-208)
-12 Steering Angle Sensor Power Circuit Open OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-209)
65 -21 Brake F l u i d Level S t u c k O N OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-211)
66 -11 Pressure S e n s o r (Inside o f V S A M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-212)
Unit) Malfunction
-12 P r e s s u r e S e n s o r (Inside o f V S A M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-212)
Unit) Malfunction
-13 Pressure S e n s o r (Inside o f V S A M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-212)
Unit) Malfunction
Unit) Malfunction
Unit) Malfunction
-16 Pressure S e n s o r (Inside o f V S A M o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l OFF OFF ON ON I (see p a g e 19-212)
Unit) Malfunction
68 -21 Brake Pedal P o s i t i o n S w i t c h S t u c k OFF OFF OFF ON ON j (see p a g e 19-213)
-22 Brake Pedal P o s i t i o n S w i t c h S t u c k O N OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-215)
* ; Brake s y s t e m i n d i c a t o r t u r n s O N w h e n t w o o r m o r e w h e e l s f a i l .
(cont'd)
19-167
Indicator Indicator
71 -21 R i g h t - f r o n t or Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r T i r e ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-22 Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tire ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-23 R i g h t - f r o n t a n d R i g h t - r e a r D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r Tire ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-24 L e f t - f r o n t a n d Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r T i r e ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-25 Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tire ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-26 R i g h t - r e a r a n d Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r T i r e ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-27 Right-front or Left-rear Different Diameter Tire OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-28 Left-front or Right-rear Different Diameter Tire OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-29 Right-front and Right-rear Different Diameter Tire OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-2A L e f t - f r o n t a n d Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r T i r e OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-2B Right-front and Left-front Different Diameter Tire OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
-2C R i g h t - r e a r a n d Left-rear D i f f e r e n t D i a m e t e r Tire OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-216)
Malfunction
81 -01 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-217)
-02 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-217)
noer Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-217)
-36 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON 1 ON (see page 19-217)
-3A Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-217)
-3C Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-217)
-3D Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-219)
-3E Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-219)
41 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-217)
-71 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Internal Circuit Malfunction ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-217)
19-168
DTC Detection I t e m ABS Brake VSA VSA Note
indicator Indicator
83 -13 PCM C o m m u n i c a t i o n Error OFf OFF ON ON (see page 19-219)
-14 PCM C o m m u n i c a t i o n Error OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-219)
84 -21 V S A Sensor Neutral Position not W r i t i n g OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-220)
86 -01 F-CAN B u s - o f f M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-220)
11 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h P C M M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-221)
-21 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h E n g i n e M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-221)
-31 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h G a u g e C o n t r o l M o d u l e OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-223)
Malfunction
-41 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h C V T M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-221)
-71 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h Y a w Rate-Lateral OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-224)
Acceleration Sensor Malfunction
-81 F-CAN C o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h A H B M a l f u n c t i o n OFF OFF ON ON (see p a g e 19-226)
107 -22 C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) I n t e r n a l C i r c u i t OFF OFF OFF ON (see p a g e 19-227)
Malfunction
108 -21 Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction OFF OFF OFF ON (see p a g e 19-227)
112 -01 C e n t r a l P r o c e s s i n g U n i t (CPU) I n t e r n a l C i r c u i t ON ON ON ON (see p a g e 19-228)
Malfunction
121 -01 VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-229)
-02 VSA Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-229)
-11 V S A Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-229)
122 -01 V S A Solenoid Valve Malfunction ON ON ON ON (see page 19-229)
19-169
W h e n the vehicle has one of these s y m p t o m s , check for VSA diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) w i t h the HDS. If there
are no DTCs, do the diagnostic procedure for the s y m p t o m , in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.

HDS does not communicate with the VSA modulator- Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
control unit or the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on at start-up 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(bulb check) (see page 22-223).
2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
then recheck. If it is OK, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-236).
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 1. S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 19-230).
are stored 2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
indicator do not come on (see page 22-223).
2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit,
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and VSA 1. Check for F-CAN DTCs, and troubleshoot and repair
indicator do not go off those first.
2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting
(see page 22-223).
3. S y m p t o m Troubleshooting (see page 19-231).
19-170
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 37P Connector (Connector Disconnected)

number sign
1 RED CAN-L F-CAN communication circuit
3 BLU STR-D Detects steering angle sensor
signal
6 PNK FR-GND Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
7 ORN SVCC Power source for the steering W i t h ignition switch ON (ll): about 5.0 V
angle sensor
8 PUR RL-GND Detects left-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
9 LT GRN RR + B Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
10 BRN SGND Ground for the steering angle
sensor
11 RED FL-GND Detects left-front wheel speed
sensor signal
13 WHT FSR+B Power source for the fail-safe Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
relay
14 RED MR+B Power source for the motor Battery voltage (about 12 V) at all times
relay
(cont'd)
19-171

number sign
15 WHT CAN-H F-CAN communication circuit
17 PUR STR-B Detects steering angle sensor
signal
19 GRN FR+B Detects right-front wheel speed
sensor signal
20 YEL RL+B Detects left-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
21 BLU RR-GND Detects right-rear wheel speed
sensor signal
22 WHT FL+B Detects left-front wheel speed
sensor signal
26 LT BLU K-LINE Communication w i t h HDS
28 GRY IG1 Power source for activating the With ignition switch ON (II): battery
34 GRN STR-A Detects steering angle sensor
signal
36 BLK GND Ground for the VSA modulator- Continuity to ground
control unit
37 BLK MR-GND Ground for the pump motor Continuity to ground
19-172
VSA
System Outline
This system is composed of the VSA modulator-control u n i t the wheel speed sensors, the steering angle sensor, the
y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor, and the system indicators in the gauge control module (tach). The VSA
modulator-control unit controls the ABS, EBD, TCS, and VSA, w i t h the brake pressure of each wheel and reduces
engine torque.
^ . .—. ^ :
^ " ^ ^ \
BRAKE BRAKE
VSA PARKING PEDAL
OFF FLUID
BRAKE LEVEL POSITION
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH
• V S A O F F s w i t c h signal V S A control enable/disable

• Parking brake s w i t c h signal Throttle open angle signal
Indicators • Brake fluid level s w i t c h signal Engine torque Engine revolution signal
drive signal control request Shift lever position signal
Control mode Brake pedal
YAW RATE-LATERAL signal position s w i t c h signal
ACCELERATION Service check signal
SENSOR
• Y a w rate signal WHEEL SPEED SENSORS

• Lateral acceleration signal
Wheel rotation pulse signal
STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR
Steering angle signal
V
C O N T R O L UNIT
• Solenoid control Brake pressure VSA MODULATOR-

• Motor control signal C O N T R O L UNIT
M O D U L A T O R UNIT
Communication via F-CAN
(cont'd)
19-173
ABS Features
Anti-lock control *
Without ABS, when the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of
the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. With ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip.rate of the wheels to ensure m a x i m u m grip force f r o m the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, and then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface
COEFFICIENT OF T A R G E T SLIP R A T E
FRICTION
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
RADIAL
DIRECTION
OF THE
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP R A T E
Wain Control
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel speed sensor signals it receives, then it calculates the
vehicle speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration
based on the wheel speeds.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve w h e n the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure reducing, and pressure retaining.
C O N T R O L UNIT
Detect Reference
Vehicle S p e e d Slip Rate
RIGHT-REAR
Detect
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR Wheel Speed
LEFT-REAR
Detect Select Low Detect . ,
WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR Wheel Speed j S p e e d Wheel S l i p Rate j J J
RIGHT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED
Detect
Wheel Speed
Detect
Slip Rate
ABS Drive j RIGHT-FRONT
SENSOR 9 H Control Solenoid SOLENOID
LEFT-FRONT
LEFT-FRONT
WHEEL SPEED
Detect Detect ABS Drive | fr LEFT-FRONT
SENSOR Wheel Speed Slip Rate Control Solenoid SOLENOID
19-174
EBD Features
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in
accordance w i t h the rear wheel load before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel speed sensor signals, the control
unit uses the modulator to control the rear brakes individually. W h e n the rear wheel speed is less than the front wheel
speed, the VSA modulator-control unit retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the
modulator. As the rear wheel speed increases, and approaches the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit
increases the rear brake fluid pressure by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very
rapidly. While this is happening, kickback may be felt at the brake pedal.
W i t h E B D under H E A V Y L O A D
REAR WHEEL
BRAKE PRESSURE
With E B D under LIGHT L O A D

FRONT W H E E L BRAKE P R E S S U R E
T C S Features
W h e n a drive wheel loses traction on a slippery road surface and starts t o spin, the VSA modulator-control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheel, and sends an engine torque control request t o the PCM to slow the spinning
wheel and keep traction.
ANTI-POWER of B R A K E F O R C E
DRIVING P O W E R
•TOTAL T R A C T I O N
BRAKE FORCE
N O R M A L ROAD S U R F A C E S L I P P E R Y ROAD S U R F A C E
(cont'd)
19-175
V S A System Features
Oversteer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear outside wheels
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

to the t u r n i n g direction
Understeer control
• Applies the brake to the rear inside wheel
• Controls the engine torque when accelerating
The brake increases the yaw rate toward

the t u r n i n g direction
The throttle control effect;

• reduces vehicle speed
• increases cornering force
19-176
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the V S A NO (normally open)
solenoid valve, the V S A NC (normally closed) solenoid valve, the reservoir, the p u m p , the p u m p motor, and the
damping chamber.
The hydraulic control has three modes at A B S action; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure-reducing.
Pressure adding mode is combined the TCS and VSA action.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
MASTER CYLINDER
IN : INLET SOLENOID VALVE {NORMALLY OPEN)

OUT : OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Mode VSA NO VSA NC Inlet Outlet Brake Fluid

Valve Valve Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Valve
Pressure open closed open closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to
intensifying the caliper.
mode
Pressure open closed closed closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet
retaining and outlet valves.
mode
Pressure open closed closed open • Caliper fluid flows through the
reducing outlet valve to the reservoir.
mode • The motor pumps the reservoir fluid
through the damping chamber to
the master cylinder*.
Pressure closed open open closed • Master cylinder fluid is pumped out
adding by pump w i t h motor through VSA
mode NC valve to the caliper.
• Caliper fluid pressure exceeds
master cylinder pressure.
* : The motor will keep running until the operation of the one anti-lock brake control is finished w i t h the first pressure
reducing mode.
19-177
V S A System Components
Circuit Diagram
IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH

UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
No. 1 {100 A) No. 2 {50 A) 3 /1GT\ 6

— WHT — K 5 C4-—-BI
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and S T A R T (III)
No. 3 (30 A)
No. 12 (15 A)
' — L
——o\o— YAW RATE-
BRAKE PEDAL LATERAL
POSITION SWITCH ACCELERATION
Closed: Brake pedal pressed V S A O F F SWITCH SENSOR
+B -GRY '
•RED '
-®1
WHT
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE (TACH)
-BRN < RED •
• RED •
BRAKE S Y S T E M
-BLK • 3 BLK •
INDICATOR
-BRN - r r
ABS
INDICATOR •WHT ' •WHT
VSA -RED • -RED •

INDICATOR
• LT G R N
VSA ACTIVATION AHB S E R V O
INDICATOR UNIT
-GRN —
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
— WHT
— RED '
BRAKE FLUID
L E V E L SWITCH — LT BLU
Closed: Low fluid
PARKING — WHT
1
BRAKE SWITCH
i
BI_K Closed: Parking
19-178
V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL U N I T
CONTROL UNIT ! MODULATOR UNIT
28 5V
REGULATOR
IG1
Hr
-WHT '
FSR+B
FAIL-SAFE RELAY
14
-RED -
STEERING PUMP MOTOR RELAY
ANGLE
SENSOR
-WHT -GRN «
STR-A
17
-RED • -PUR •
STR-B
3 PRESSURE
-BLU «
STR-D SENSOR
7
-ORN "
SVCC
10
-BRN •
-WHT -WHT
CAN-H CAN
1 CONTROLLER
-RED • -RED -
» LT BLU ' LEFT-FRONT
-WHT
FL+B
11
~KM;OUT I '
-RED RIGHT-FRONT
FL-GND IG1
19
-GRN
ELECTRIC
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR CURRENT
-PNK LIMITATION
»YEL
GND
-RED -PUR •
RL-GMD
9
- LT BLU LT GRr
RR 4-B
21
— GRY — -BLU •
RR-GND
37
-BLK PUMP MOTOR
MR-GND
36
BLK
HBh : 12 V
-O- :5V
(cont'd)
19-179
VSA Sf s t e m C o m p o n e n t s
UNDER-HOOD BRAKE PEDAL POSITION BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
FUSE/RELAY BOX S W I T C H 4P C O N N E C T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R I P CONNECTOR
C O N N E C T O R C (2P)
Gnu
1 2
3
X 4
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R F (34P)
V S A OFF SWITCH
5P CONNECTOR
I
1
/ 3 4
51/ /18 11 717
26|2728 29
f4|T5 16117
19
i r
/
~ir
,20
/
J
22 23
Li
24 25 B 30 31 32 33 1 2 4 5
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR E (42P) YAW RATE-LATERAL

ACCELERATION S E N S O R
5P CONNECTOR
\1
A/ 7P* 14 15 /
17 / 19 20 21
24|25l26l27l28[/ 33 • 34 35
36 3738 39 40 41 [
"t
G A U G E CONTROL MODULE (TACH) 3 6 P CONNECTOR

STEERING ANGLE S E N S O R
5P CONNECTOR
n n n
r/
n
/ / 4 5 6 7 i8 9 10 11 13 14 15 16 17 18 <;-7
1 2 3 |4 5
V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 3 7 P CONNECTOR
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

2P CONNECTOR
[
c
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
14 16
19-180
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 11-13: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
Circuit Malfunction modulator-control unit 37P connector wheel speed
sensor + B and GND terminals (see table).
DTC 13-13: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Circuit Malfunction DTC VSA Modulator-control Unit 37P
Connector Terminal
DTC 15-13: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor 11-13 No. 19 No. 6
Circuit Malfunction 13-13 No. 22 No. 11
15-13 No. 9 No. 21
DTC 17-13: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor 17-13 No. 20 No. 8
Circuit Malfunction
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). VSA M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 37P CONNECTOR
R L - G N D (PUR) R R + B (LT GRN)

F R - G N D (PNK) F L - G N D (RED)
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to 8 7 13 14

ON (I!) again. h5|>[lT[Xl>ll9l20]Xl2l]^[/l
36 37
]
4 . Check for DTCs with the HDS. FR + B (GRN) FL + B (WHT)
RL + B (YEL) RR-GND (BLU)
Is DTC 11-13, 13-13, 15-13, and/or 17-13

indicated? W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
YES—Goto step 5.
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel YES—Repair short in the wires between the
speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator- appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
control unit 37P connector. Refer to intermittent modulator-control unit.B

7. Disconnect the appropriate wheel speed sensor 2P

connector.
(cont'd)
19-181

9. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA 10. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
modulator-control unit 37P connector terminal and modulator-control unit 37P connector terminal and
the wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminal (see the wheel speed sensor 2P connector terminal (see
table). table).
DTC VSA Modulator- Appropriate Wheel VSA Modulator- Appropriate Wheel

control Unit 37P Speed Sensor 2P control Unit 37P Speed Sensor 2P
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
11-13 No. 19 Right-front 11-13 No. 6 Right-front
13-13 No. 22 Left-front 13-13 No. 11 Left-front
15-13 No. 9 Right-rear 15-13 No. 21 Right-rear
17-13 No. 20 Left-rear 17-13 No. 8 Left-rear
W H E E L S P E E D S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R W H E E L S P E E D S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Terminal side of female terminals T e r m i n a l side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
LEFT- RIGHT- RIGHT- LEFT- RIGHT- LEFT- LEFT- RIGHT-

REAR F R O N T R E A R F R O N T F R O N T REAR F R O N T REAR
JKsIL JKML J k M L J k ^ L
<2 [ 1 > { 2 1 1 y <2[1> {211 y ^{zJTy <T[T> \zJTy ^zJTy
R L + B F R + B R R + B FL+B FR G N D RL-GND FL-GND R R - G N D
(YEL) (GRN) (LT B L U ) (WHT) (PNK) (RED) (RED) (GRY)
R L - G N D (PUR)
F R - G N D (PNK) JFL-GND (RED)
JRR + B (LT G R N )
dlW?WiU'?L ' , 'V^' 9 1 0 13
' ^
13
] [1 36 37
36 37
R R - G N D (BLU)
FR + B (GRN) FL + B (WHT)
V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 37P C O N N E C T O R
RL + B (YEL) W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Y E S — G o t o step 11.
Y E S — G o t o step 10. NO—Repair open in the wire between the

appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the modulator-control u n i t . H
appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
modulator-control u n i t . B
19-182
11. Check for continuity between body ground and the 12. Turn the ignition switch t o ON (II).
appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 37P
connector terminal (see table). 13. Measure the voltage between body ground and t h e
appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 37P
DTC VSA Modulator-control Unit 37P connector terminal (see table).
Connector Terminal
11-13 No. 19 No. 6 DTC V S A Modulator-control Unit 37P
13-13 No. 22 No. 11 Connector Terminal
15-13 No. 9 No. 21 11-13 No. 19 No. 6
17-13 No. 20 No. 8 13-13 No. 22 No. 11
15-13 No. 9 No. 21
17-13 No. 20 No. 8
RL-GND (PUR)
F R - G N D (PNK)
RL-GND (PUR)
1
1/13I/1/ISI slahol"/
7
ll5|Xil7|X|>|l9|20|Xl2l|22| /| /
F R - G N D (PNK)
h 5 l > 1 7 M / l 9 20M21 22/1
FR + B (GRN) FL + B (WHT)
RL+B RR-GND
(YEL) (BLU)

YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire Is there 0.1 V or more?

between the appropriate wheel speed sensor and
the VSA modulator-control unit. • YES—Repair short t o power in the wire between
the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
N O — G o t o step 12. modulator-control u n i t . H
(cont'd)
19-183

14. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). D T C 12-11: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
15. Substitute the appropriate wheel speed sensor w i t h
opposite wheel speed sensor, or w i t h a known- D T C 14-11: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
good wheel speed sensor. Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
16. Reconnect all connectors. D T C 16-11: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor

D T C 18-11: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
18. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Electrical Noise or Intermittent Interruption
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then t u r n it to NOTE: These DTCs may be caused by electrical
ON (II) again. interference. Check for aftermarket devices installed in
the vehicle when these DTCs are indicated.
Are any of the DTCs from step 4 indicated?
YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary, 3. Test-drive the vehicle.
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-236), then retest. • NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
NO—Replace the original wheel speed sensor 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(see page 1 9 - 2 3 8 ) . •
Is DTC 12-11, 14-11, 16-11, and/or 18-11
indicated?
Y E S - l f DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 is

indicated at the same time, do the DTC 12-12,
14-12, 16-12, or 18-12 troubleshooting first,
(see page 19-185). If DTC 12-12, 14-12,16-12, or
18-12 is not indicated, go to step 5.
NO—If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the

indicated, there is an intermittent failure, the
between the wheel speed sensor 2P connector and
the VSA modulator-control unit 37P connector.
Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting
(see page 19-163). •
19-184
5. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). DTC 12-12: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
properly mounted (see page 19-238). DTC 14-12: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
12-11 Right-front DTC 16-12: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
14-11 Left-front Short to the Other Sensor Circuit
16-11 Right-rear
18-11 Left-rear DTC 18-12: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
modulator-control unit 3 7 P connector. If necessary, 2.. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
unit (see page 19-236), and retest. • 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 13 m p h (20 km/h) or more,
and go a distance of 328 ft (100 m) or more.
the mounting position (see page 19-238).• NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
Is DTC 12-12, 14-12, 16-12, and/or 18-12

indicated?
NO —Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

t i m e . Check for loose terminals between the wheel
speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
(cont'd)
19-185
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). Is there continuity?
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P YES—Repair short in the wires between the
connector (see step 2 on page 19-236). appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
modulator-control u n i t . E
7. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
modulator-control unit 37P connector wheel speed NO—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
sensor GND terminals (see table). modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary,
DTC VSA Modulator-control U n i t 37P unit (see page 19-236), and retest. •
Connector Terminal
Appropriate Other Terminals
Terminal
12-12 No. 6 No. 11 No. 21 No. 8
14-12 No. 11 No. 6 No. 21 No. 8
16-12 No. 21 No. 6 No. 11 No. 8
18-12 No. 8 No. 6 No. 11 No. 21
D T C 12-12
8 l
iki?k^giTi, J?i ,°ivi^
36 37
R L - G N D (PUR) RR-GND (BLU)
D T C 14-12 F L - G N D (RED)
F R - G N D (PNK)
13
ll5|Xh7D^ll9l20[^2l|^lXI
36 37
R L - G N D (PUR) RR-GND
(BLU)
D T C 16-12 R L - G N D (PUR)
Ml/l3l/l/l6l7l8l9|l0llll/l
R R - G N D (BLU)
D T C 18-12
F R - G N D (PNK) R L - G N D (PUR)
0
llk1ji<lîl|l>JJ?K IV,l^l
\/\/\m/m/\/\7\7\7mA
R R - G N D (BLU) F L - G N D (RED)
19-186
DTC 12-21: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Installation Error
DTC 14-21: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor properly mounted (see page 19-238).
Installation Error
DTC 16-21: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor 12-21 Right-front
Installation Error 14-21 Left-front
16-21 Right-rear
DTC 18-21: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor 18-21 Left-rear
Installation Error
1. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 m p h (10 km/h).
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. (see page 19-238). •
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPEED in the VSA NO—Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. the mounting position (see page 19-238). •
YES—-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
19-187
DTC 12-22: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 12-23: Right-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Installation Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More) Installation Error (0 to 9 mph (Oto 15 km/h))
DTC 14-22: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 14-23: Left-front Wheel Speed Sensor
Installation Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More) Instaiiation Error (0 to 9 mph (C to 15 km/h))
DTC 16-22: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 16-23: Right-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Installation Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More) Installation Error (0 to 9 mph (0 to 15 km/h))
DTC 18-22: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor DTC 18-23: Left-rear Wheel Speed Sensor
Installation Error (19 mph (30 km/h) or More) Installation Error (0 to 9 mph (Oto 15 km/h))
1. Test-drive the vehicle between 19 mph (30 km/h) 1. Test-drive the vehicle between 1 mph (1 km/h) and
and 31 mph (50 km/h) for 70 seconds or more. 9 mph (15 km/h).
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPEED in the VSA 2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR WHEEL SPEED in the VSA
DATA LIST w i t h the HDS. DATA LIST with the HDS.
Are all four values the same? Are all four values the same?
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this •. YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
t i m e . Check for loose terminals between the wheel t i m e . Check for loose terminals between the wheel
speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator- speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 37P connector. Refer to intermittent control unit 37P connector. Refer to intermittent
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-163). • failures troubleshooting (see page 19-163). H
N O — G o t o step 3. N O — G o t o step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is 4. Check that the appropriate wheel speed sensor is
properly mounted (see page 19-238). properly mounted (see page 19-238).
DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor DTC Appropriate Wheel Speed Sensor
12-22 Right-front 12-23 Right-front
14-22 Left-front 14-23 Left-front
16-22 Right-rear 16-23 Right-rear
18-22 Left-rear 18-23 Left-rear
Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK? Is the wheel speed sensor installation OK?
YES—Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor YES—Replace the appropriate wheel speed sensor
(see page 1 9 - 2 3 8 ) . • (see page 1 9 - 2 3 8 ) . •
NO—Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check NO—Reinstall the wheel speed sensor, and check
the mounting position (see page 1 9 - 2 3 8 ) . • the mounting position (see page 1 9 - 2 3 8 ) . •
19-188
DTC 21-11: Right-front Magnetic Encoder 6. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder f o r
(Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing) damage, debris, and correct installation.
DTC 22-11: Left-front Magnetic Encoder DTC Appropriate Note

(Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing) Magnetic
Encoder
DTC 23-11: Right-rear Magnetic Encoder 21-11 Right-front Remove the
(Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing) 22-11 Left-front driveshaft
outboard joint
DTC 24-11: Left-rear Magnetic Encoder f r o m the
(Wheel Bearing) Malfunction (Pulse Missing) appropriate wheel
hub (see page
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 18-18).
23-11 Right-rear Remove the hub
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 24-11 Left-rear bearing unit
(see page 18-31).
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 13 mph (20 km/h) or more,
and go a distance of 328 ft (100 m) or more. Is the magnetic encoder surface OK?
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. Y E S — R e m o v e the debris f r o m the magnetic
encoder, or replace the wheel bearing (front) or the
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. hub bearing unit (rear):H
Is DTC 21-11, 22-11,23-11, and/or 24-11 • Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page
indicated? 18-18).
• Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
Y E S — G o t o step 5. 18-31).
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO—Clean off debris f r o m the appropriate
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel magnetic encoder surface on the wheel bearing or
speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator- the hub bearing unit, then go to step 1, and recheck.
control unit 37P connector. Refer to intermittent If the DTC is still present, replace the appropriate
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-163). • wheel bearing or hub bearing unit. 11
19-189
DTC 25-12: Yaw Rate Sensor Internal Circuit DTC 25-17: Yaw Rate/Lateral Acceleration
Malfunction (Open, Short) Sensor Power Source Voltage Malfunction
DTC 25-13: Yaw Rate Sensor Communication 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Error
DTC 25-18: Yaw Rate/Lateral Acceleration
Sensor Internal Circuit Malfunction 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
DTC 25-21: Yaw Rate Sensor Neutral Position
Malfunction 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
DTC 26-12: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Is DTC25-17 indicated?

Internal Circuit Malfunction (Open, Short)
Y E S - I f DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22, 61-23, and/or
DTC 26-13: Lateral Acceleration Sensor 62-21 is indicated at the same t i m e , check the 12 V
Communication Error battery performance (see page 22-61), and
troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). first (see page 12-179). If DTC 61-01, 61-21, 61-22,
61-23, and/or 62-21 is not indicated at the same
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. t i m e , replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
sensor (see page 19-234).•
ON (II) again. NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
Is DTC 25-12, 25-13, 25-18, 25-21, 26-12, or 26-13

indicated?
YES—Replace the y a w rate-lateral acceleration

sensor (see page 19-234). •

time.B
19-190
VSA
DTC 25-19; Yaw Rate/Lateral Acceleration DTC 25-22: Yaw Rate Sensor Stuck
Sensor Startup Time Malfunction
DTC 25-23: Yaw Rate Sensor Circuit
Intermittent Interruption 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 7 m p h
(10 km/h) or more.
ON (II) again. 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
4. Wait 60 seconds or more. Is DTC 25-22 indicated?
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Y E S — G o t o step 5.
Is DTC 25-19 or 25-23 indicated? NO—If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES—Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration indicated, there was an intermittent failure, the
sensor (see page 19-234) • system is OK at this time. M
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 5. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the Y A W RATE S in
time.ll the VSA DATA LIST w i t h the HDS while driving in
corners.
Does the indicated value change?

time.B
NO—Replace the y a w rate-lateral acceleration

sensor (see page 19-234) fl
19-191
DTC 25-24: Yaw Rate Sensor Gain Low DTC 26-21: Lateral Acceleration Sensor
Neutral Position Malfunction
DTC 25-25: Yaw Rate Sensor Gain High
DTC 26-23: Lateral Acceleration Sensor
DTC 26-24: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain Circuit Intermittent Interruption
Low
NOTE: While doing this troubleshooting, avoid
DTC 26-25: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Gain vibrations or shaking the vehicle.
High
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 m p h (15 km/h) or more. ON (II) again.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 4. Wait 60 seconds or more.
Is DTC 25-24, 25-25, 26-24, or 26-25 indicated? Is DTC 26-21 or 26-23 indicated?
YES—Replace the y a w rate-lateral acceleration YES—Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration

sensor (see page 19-234). • sensor (see page 19-234). •
time.B time.B
19-192
DTC 26-22: Lateral Acceleration Sensor Stuck 5. Test-drive the vehicle. Check the Y A W RATE S in
the VSA DATA LIST w i t h the HDS while driving in
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). corners.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the indicated value change?
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h)' or more. YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
NO—Replace the y a w rate-lateral acceleration
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. , sensor (see page 19-234) •
Is DTC 26-22 Indicated?
YES—Goto step 5.

indicated, there was an intermittent failure, the
19-193
DTC 27-11: Steering Angle Sensor DIAG 8. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor
Signal Error (Initial) 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body ground.
DTC 27-26: Steering Angle Sensor DIAG S T E E R I N G A N G L E S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R

Signal Error (Main)

1
r
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 1 2 3 4 5
STR-D (BLU)
ON (II) again.

NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
time. Check for loose terminals between the between the steering angle sensor and the VSA
steering angle sensor 5P connector and the VSA modulator-control unit.H
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page N O — G o t o step 9.
19-163). •
6. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.

19-194
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator- 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
' control unit 37P connector terminal and the
steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal 11. Measure the voltage between steering angle
individually (see table). sensor 5P connector terminal No. 3 and body
ground.
Sign V S A Modulator- Steering Angle
control Unit 37P Sensor 5P S T E E R I N G A N G L E S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
Connector Connector
Terminal Terminal
STR-D No. 3 No. 3
SVCC No. 7 No. 5
SGND No. 10 No. 1
STR-D (BLU)
S T E E R I N G A N G L E S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
S G N D (BRN)
1 2 3 4 5 Wire side of female terminals

STR-D (BLU) SVCC
m m
;o) ( a y
Is there 0.1 ¥ or more?
YES—Repair short to power in the w i r e between

STR-D SVCC
(BLU) (ORN) S G N D (BRN) the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-
control u n i t . H
13 14
36 37 NO—Replace the steering angle sensor (see page

19-233). •
YES—Goto step 10.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the steering

angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control
unit.H
19-195

DTC 27-21: Steering Angle Sensor Stuck 6. Check for continuity between body ground and
Neutral Position steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2
DTC 27-22: Steering Angle Sensor Stuck
Offset Position S T E E R I N G A N G L E S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
2. Turn the steering wheel left and right 90 degrees or

more. Check the STEERING ANGLE in the VSA
DATA LIST with the HDS. S T R - A (GRN) I S T R - B (PUR)
Is there + 90 °or more, and —90 °or less? @ @

time. Check for loose terminals between the W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
steering angle sensor 5P connector and the VSA
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page Is there continuity?
19-163). •
N O — G o t o step 3. between the steering angle sensor and the VSA
modulator-control unit.H
NO—Go to step 7.

19-196
7. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator- 8. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor
control unit 37P connector terminal and the 5P connector terminals No. 2 and No. 4.
steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal
individually.
Sign VSA Modulator- Steering Angle

control Unit S I P Sensor 5P
Connector Connector f
Terminal Terminal 1 2 3 4 5
STR-A No. 34 No. 2 S T R - A (GRN) S T R - B (PUR)
STR-B No. 17 No. 4
SVCC No. 7 No. 5
SGND No. 10 No. 1
S G N D (BRN)
1 2 3 4 5
S T R - A (GRN) S V C C (ORN) YES—Repair short in the wires between the
STR-B steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-
(PUR)
control unit.H
9. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor

STR-B SVCC
(PUR) (ORN) S G N D (BRN) 5P connector terminals No. 5 and No. 2, and -
between No. 5 and No. 4 individually.
13
S T R - A (GRN)
W i r e side of female terminals STR-A SVCC
1 2 3 4 |5
S T R - B (PUR) I |
NO—Repair open in the wire between the steering

angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control Wire side of female terminals
unit.H
YES—Repair short in the wires between the

steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-
control unit.H
(cont'd)
19-197

10. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor 12. Measure the voltage between body ground and
5P connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2, and steering angle sensor 5P connector terminals No. 2
between No. 1 and No. 4 individually. and No. 4 individually.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR i P CONNECTOR STEERING ANGLE SENSOR i P CONNECTOR
SGND S T R - A (GRN)
1 2 3 4 5
S T R - A (GRN) S T R - B (PUR)
S T R - B (PUR)
@ (2)
Wire side of female terminals W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
is there continuity? Is there 0.1 V or more?
YES—Repair short in the wires between the YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator- the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-
control u n i t . H control u n i t . H
N O — G o t o step 11. NO—Replace the steering angle sensor (see page

19-233). •
19-198
DTC 27-23: Steering Angle Sensor Counter DTC 27-24: Steering Angle Sensor Exchange
Malfunction Malfunction
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 2. Turn the steering wheel one turn f r o m where the
center. Check the STEERING ANGLE in the VSA
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to DATA LIST w i t h the HDS.
ON (II) again.
Is there about 288- 432 ° ( -288 --432 °)?
4. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock to lock.
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. time.B
Is DTC 27-23 indicated? NO—Replace the steering angle sensor (see page
19-233). •
YES—Replace the steering angle sensor (see page
19-233).•

time.B
19-199
DTC 31-xx*: ABS Right-front Inlet Solenoid 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Valve Malfunction
Is DTC 31-xx, 32-xx, 33-xx, 34-xx, 35-xx, 36-xx,
DTC 32-xx*: ABS Right-front Outlet Solenoid 37-xx, or 38-xx indicated?
Valve Malfunction
YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
DTC 33-xx*: ABS Left-front Inlet Solenoid (see page 19-236). •
Valve Malfunction
DTC 34~xx*: ABS Left-front Outlet Solenoid time.B
Valve Malfunction
DTC 35-xx*: ABS Right-rear Inlet Solenoid

Valve Malfunction
DTC 36-xx*: ABS Right-rear Outlet Solenoid

Valve Malfunction
DTC 37-xx*: ABS Left-rear Inlet Solenoid

Valve Malfunction
DTC 38-xx*: ABS Left-rear Outlet Solenoid

Valve Malfunction
* : Any two-character subcode (see table)
Subcode Malfunction Note (DTC)

01 Solenoid 31-01,32-01,33-01,
Initial Pulse 34-01,35-01,36-01,
37-01,38-01
21 Solenoid Pulse 31-21,32-21,33-21,
34-21,35-21,36-21,
37-21,38-21
22 Solenoid 31-22,32-22,33-22,
Speculative 34-22, 35-22, 36-22,
37-22, 38-22
23 Solenoid 31-23, 32-23, 33-23,
Stuck ON 34-23, 35-23, 36-23,
37-23, 38-23

ON (II) again.
19-200
DTC 41-21: Right-front Wheel Lock 7. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
DTC 42-21: Left-front Wheel Lock Is DTC 41-21, 42-21, 43-21, and/or 44-21
indicated?
DTC 43-21: Right-rear Wheel Lock
YES—Check for loose terminals between the wheel
DTC 44-21: Left-rear Wheel Lock speed sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 37P connector. If necessary, substitute
The DTCs may be indicated under these conditions: a known-good VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-236), and retest. •
• The vehicle goes into a spin.
• The ABS or VSA continues to operate for a long t i m e . NO—If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
• Snow, dirt, or debris build-up on the wheel speed indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If DTCs are not
sensor or magnetic encoder. indicated, intermittent failure, the system is OK at
• Misadjusted brake pedal position switch. this t i m e . B
• Contaminated brake fluid.

in the proper locations (see page 1-10).
2. Turn the appropriate wheel by hand.
DTC Appropriate Wheel

41-21 Right-front
42-21 Left-front
43-21 Right-rear
44-21 Left-rear
Is there brake drag?
YES—Repair the brake drag.H


the mounting position (see page 1 9 - 2 3 8 ) . •
6. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 7 mph

(10 km/h) for 20 seconds or more.
19-201
DTC 51-11: Motor Lock DTC 51-12: Motor Lock Circuit Malfunction
DTC 51-13: Motor Relay OFF Malfunction 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
4. Wait 5 seconds. is DTC 51-12 indicated?
5. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in YES—Goto step 5.

the VSA FUNCTION TEST five times w i t h the HDS.
-LFT FT SOLENOID time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
-RT FT SOLENOID modulator-control unit 37P connector. Refer to
-LFT REAR SOLENOID intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
-RT REAR SOLENOID 19-163).B
6. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is DTC51-11 or 51-13 Indicated? 6. Check the No. 3 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/
relay box.
(see page 19-236). • Is the fuse biown?
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES—Goto step 7.

time.B

19-202
8. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 9. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
control unit 37P connector terminal No. 14 and connector.
body ground.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 37P CONNECTOR
M R + B (RED)
if h5l>|l7l><l>ll9l20l><|2ll22l>|
ON (II) again.
36 37
\AAkAMAAAAA\kA 13. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.

W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals (see page 19-236). •

between the No. 3 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control
unit.H

hood fuse/relay box, then go t o step 9.
(cont'd)
19-203

14. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P DTC 52-12: Motor Stuck OFF
15. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
control unit 37P connector terminal No. 14 and 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
body ground.
ON (II) again.
MR + B (RED) 4. Operate any one of the four solenoids, as listed, in

\ the VSA FUNCTION TEST five times w i t h the HDS.
Hi/|3|/|/|6[7|8i9il0hlÎ 13 14
|1B|/|17|XI/|19|2D|X|21|22|/1
36 37 -LFT FT SOLENOID
\/\A2B\Am\/\AAAAm\/\ J
-RT FT SOLENOID
-LFT REAR SOLENOID
-RT REAR SOLENOID

Is there battery voltage? YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit

(see page 19-236). •
modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary, NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control time.B

the VSA modulator-control unit. 11
19-204
DTC 53-01: Motor Relay Stuck ON 1 7. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
DTC 53-12: Motor Relay Stuck ON 2 body ground.
1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 37P CONNECTOR

13
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn It to h5|Xh7|X^

36 37
ON (ll) again.
MR-GND (BLK)
YES—Goto step 5. Wire side of female terminals
NO—Intermittent failure, the system Is OK at this

time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA Is there continuity?
Intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
19-163). • modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary,
5. Turn the Ignition switch to LOCK (0). unit (see page 19-236), and retest •
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P NO—Repair open In the wire between the VSA
connector (see step 2 on page 19-236). modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).B
19-205
DTC 54-03: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck ON DTC 56-01: Initial VIG FET Stuck OFF
DTC 54-04: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF DTC 56-02: Initial VIG FET Stuck ON
(Initial)
DTC 56-11: VIG FET Stuck OFF
DTC 54-21: Fail-safe Relay 1 Stuck OFF (Main)
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to ON (II) again.
ON (II) again.
Is DTC 56-01, 56-02, or 56-11 indicated?
Is DTC 54-03, 54-04, or 54-21 indicated?
YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-236). B
(see page 19-236). •
NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.B
time.B
19-206
DTC 61-01: VSA Modulator-control Unit Initial 7. Compare the data list voltage noted in step 5 to the
IG Low Voltage battery voltage in step 6.
DTC 61-21: VSA ModuIator-controI Unit Is the difference between the two voltage
Power Source Low Voltage 1 readings less then 3 V?
DTC 61-22: VSA Modulator-control Unit YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Power Source Low Voltage 2 time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
DTC 61-23: VSA Modulator-control Unit intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
Power Source Low Voltage 3 19-163). If the code resets after clearing, replace the
VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-236).•
NO—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary,
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the unit (see page 19-236), and retest. •
engine.
YES—Goto step 5.

time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
19-163).•
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the VSA DATA

LIST with the HDS.

NOTE: If the battery voltage is below 9.5 V, check

the 12V battery performance (see page 22-61), and
troubleshoot the charging system (see page
12-179).
19-207

DTC 62-21: VSA Modulator-control Unit IG DTC 64-11: Steering Angle Sensor Power
:
Circuit Short ~
High Voltage
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then start the 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
engine. ON (II) again.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 62-21 indicated? Is DTC 64-11 indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5. YES—Goto step 5.
time.B time.fl
5. Check and note BATTERY voltage in the VSA DATA 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). «
between the battery terminals. 7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
NOTE: If the battery voltage is above 15.1 V,
troubleshoot the charging system (see page
12-179).
7. Compare the data list voltage noted in step 5 to the

battery voltage in step 6.
Is the difference between the two voltage

readings less then 3 V?

t i m e . Check for loose terminals at the VSA
19-163). If the code resets after clearing, replace the
VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-236) B
NO—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit

(see page 19-236), and retest. fl
19-208
8. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor DTC 64-12: Steering Angle Sensor Power
5P connector terminal No. 5 and body ground. Circuit Open

1 2 3 4 5 ON (II) again.
ISVCC(ORN)
Is DTC 64-12 indicate^?
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s YES—Goto step 5.

Is there continuity? time. Check for loose terminals between the
steering angle sensor 5P connector and the VSA
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire modulator-control unit 37P connector. Refer to
between the steering angle sensor and the VSA intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page *
modulator-control u n i t ! 19-163).B
NO—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(see page 19-236). •

(cont'd)
19-209

8. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
steering angle sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5. 10. Measure the voltage between steering angle
ground.
1
r
1 2 3 4 5
[ S V C C (ORN)
S V C C (ORN)
MUl3|XI/|6l7lil9liolii|/r S V C C (ORN)
13
Il5f/117M
36 37
Is there 0.1 V or more?
YES—Go to step 9.
YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the steering the steering angle sensor and the VSA modulator-
angle sensor and the VSA modulator-control control u n i t . n
unit.H
NO—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
19-210
DTC 65-21; Brake Fluid Level Stuck ON 9. Check the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH in the VSA
NOTE: Bleeding the brake system while the ignition
Does the HDS indicate the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
switch is ON can cause this DTC. SWITCH as OFF?
1. Check the brake fluid level in the subreservoir. YES—Substitute a known-good gauge control
module (tach), then go to step 1, and recheck. If no
Is the brake fluid level OK? DTCs are indicated, replace the original gauge
control module (tach) (see page 22-255).
NO—Do the brake pad inspection: Front (see page N O — G o t o step 10.
19-12), rear (see page 19-20), check for brake fluid
leaks or replace w o r n brake pads, then go to step 2, 10. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch 2P
and recheck. connector, then check the BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST.
Does the HDS indicate OFF?
Y E S — Replace the brake fluid subreservoir (the
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to brake fluid level switch is included) (see page
ON (II) again. 19-100).
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. N O — G o t o step 11.
Is DTC 65-21 indicated? 11. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P
connector.
' Y E S — G o t o step 6.

time.B
6. Release the parking brake.

ON (II) again.
8. Check the brake system indicator in the gauge


(cont'd)
19-211
12. Check for continuity between brake fluid level DTC 66-11. Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA
switch 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body Modulator-control Unit) Malfunction
ground.
DTC 66-12: Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA
BRAKE FLoiD LEVEL SWITCH I? CONNECTOR
Modulator-control Unit) Malfunction

<±n> ORN

W i r e side of female terminals 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire ON (II) again.
between the gauge control module (tach) and the
brake fluid level switch. • 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control Is DTC 66-11, 66-12, 66-13, 66-14, or 66-16
module (tach), then go to step 1 and recheck. If no indicated?
DTCs are indicated, replace the original gauge
control module (tach) (see page 22-255). YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-236). •

time.B
19-212
DTC 66-15: Pressure Sensor (Inside of VSA DTC 68-21: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck
Modulator-control Unit) Malfunction OFF
1. Test-drive the vehicle. 1. Start the engine.
NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift. 2. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST
with the HDS. Do not press the brake pedal.
Is there 10 MPa or less?
in the proper locations (see page 1-10). YES—Goto step 3.
4. Turn all four wheels by hand. NO—Check for brake drag or a misadjusted brake
pedal position switch. If they are normal, replace
Is there brake drag? the VSA modulator-control unit (see page 19-236).
YES—Repair the brake drag. •

3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST
N O — G o t o step 5. with the HDS while moving the brake pedal.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed,
and OFF when the pedal is released?
6. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS while moving the brake pedal. YES —Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for loose terminals between the brake
Does the indicated value change? pedal position switch 4P connector, PCM connector
A (44P), and the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
YES—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connector. Refer to intermittent failures
time.B troubleshooting (see page 19-163).•
NO—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit N O — G o t o step 4.

(see page 19-236). •
5. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P

connector.
(cont'd)
19-213
6. Connect the brake pedal position switch 4P 13. Check for continuity between brake pedal position
connector terminal No. 1 and No. 2 to w i t h a switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 and PCM
j u m p e r wire. connector A (44P) terminal No. 40.
BRAKE P E D A L P O S I T I O N S W I T C H 4P C O N N E C T O R Terminal fem^'e terminals
JUMPER WIRE I
> | 4 | 5 | 6 7 8 I 9I
+B
(WHT)
BKSW
(LT G R N )
10
/ 12
20 21
13|14|15|16 17 18 19
23 24 25 •
• •
1 26 27 28 34 35
291/| 311/ 33
| 36 | 37
38 1 39 140 | / | 4423 | 4 4 |
B K S W (LT G R N )
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals B K S W (LT G R N )
1 2
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 3 ><
8. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST B R A K E PEDAL POSITION S W I T C H 4P C O N N E C T O R
w i t h the HDS. W i r e side of female terminals
Does it indicate ON? Is there continuity ?
YES—Check the brake pedal position switch YES—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
adjustment (see page 19-6). If it is OK, replace the software (see page 11-236), or substitute a known-
brake pedal position switch. • g o o d PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1, and
N O — G o t o step 9. indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM
w a s substituted and DTCs are not indicated,
9. Disconnect the jumper wire. replace the original PCM (see page 11-238).
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the brake pedal position s w i t c h . •
19-214
DTC 68-22; Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
ON
2. Check the BRAKE PRESS in the VSA DATA LIST
w i t h the HDS. Do not press the brake pedal. 8. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is it 10 MPa or more? 9. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position

switch 4P connector terminal No. 2 and body
YES—Check the brake pedal height and the brake ground.
pedal position switch adjustment (see page 19-6). If
the brake pedal height and the brake pedal position B R A K E P E D A L P O S I T I O N S W I T C H 4P C O N N E C T O R
switch adjustment is OK, replace the VSA
B K S W (LT G R N )
modulator-control unit (see page 19-236). •
N O — G o t o step 3. 1 2
3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST

3 X
w i t h the HDS while moving the brake pedal.
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed,

and OFF when the pedal is released?
• time.H
NO—Go to step 4.
YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
4. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST the PCM and the brake pedal position switch. •
w i t h the HDS, and disconnect the brake pedal
position switch 4P connector. NO—Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Does the indicator change from ON to OFF? good PCM (see page 11-7), then go to step 1, and
YES—Inspect the brake pedal position switch and indicated, troubleshooting is complete. If the PCM
adjustment (see page 19-6). If the brake pedal was substituted and DTCs are not indicated,
position switch and adjustment are OK, replace the replace the original PCM (see page 11-238).
brake pedal position switch (see page 19-6). •
NO—Go to step 5.
19-215
DTC 71-21: Right-front or Left-rear Different 1. Check the tires for proper inflation and the correct
Diameter Tire Malfunction size (see page 18-6).
DTC 71-22: Left-front or Right-rear Different 2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Different Diameter Tire Malfunction 4. Test-drive the vehicle.
DTC 71-24: Left-front and Left-rear Different NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
DTC 71-25: Right-front and Left-front
Different Diameter Tire Malfunction Is DTC 71-21, 71-22, 71-23, 71-24, 71-25, 71-26,
71-27, 71-28, 71-29, 71-2A, 71-2B, or 71-2C
DTC 71-26: Right-rear and Left-rear Different Indicated?
YES—Replace tires as needed until all their
DTC 71-27: Right-front or Left-rear Different diameters match (see page 18-6). •
DTC 71-28: Left-front or Right-rear Different time.B

Different Diameter Tire Malfunction
DTC 71-2A: Left-front and Left-rear Different

DTC 71-2B: Right-front and Left-front

Different Diameter Tire Malfunction
DTC 71-2C: Right-rear and Left-rear Different

NOTE: The DTC is indicated w h e n the vehicle has a

different diameter tire(s) compared to the other tire(s).
DTC Sectional
71-24 Left-front and left-rear
71-25 Right-front and left-front
71-26 Right-rear and left-rear
71-2 A Left-front and left-rear
71-2B Right-front and left-front
71-2C Right-rear and left-rear
19-216
DTC 81-xx*: Central Processing Unit (CPU) DTC 81-11: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Internal Circuit Malfunction Internal Circuit Malfunction
* : Any two-character subcode (Except these DTC 81-52: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
combinations: DTC 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51, Internal Circuit Malfunction
81-52, 81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57, 81-58, and
81-59) DTC 81-54: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
DTC 81-56: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. Internal Circuit Malfunction
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to DTC 81-58: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
ON (il) again. Internal Circuit Malfunction
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Is DTC 81-xx indicated? 2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Y E S - l f DTC 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E, 81-51, 81-52, 3. Test-drive the vehicle.

81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57, 81-58, or 81-59 is
indicated at the same time, do the appropriate NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
troubleshooting first. If DTC 81-11, 81-3D, 81-3E,
81-51, 81-52, 81-53, 81-54, 81-55, 81-56, 81-57, 4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
81-58, or 81-59 is not indicated. Replace the VSA
modulator-control unit (see page 19-236). • Is DTC 81-11, 81-52, 81-54, 81-56, or 81-58
indicated ?
time. • YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-236). •

ttme.il
19-217
DTC 81-51: Central Processing Unit (CPU) 8. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
Internal Circuit Malfunction appropriate VSA modulator-control unit 37P
connector terminals (see table).
DTC 81-53: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Internal Circuit Malfunction DTC VSA Modulator-control Unit 37P
Connector Terminals
DTC 81-55: Central Processing Unit (CPU) 81-51 No. 19
Internal Circuit Malfunction 81-53 No. 22
81-55 No. 9
DTC 81-57: Central Processing Unit (CPU) 81-57 No. 20
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). RR +B (LT G R N )
9 1 0 1 1 13
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. r^Ki^'i'iL ! , ' , ^
li5l>li7M>li9l2oM2ila[y1 36 37
l/]Xl26l/|28[/|i/]Kl/|4[34l/]
FR +B (GRN) F L + B (WHT)
RL +B (YEL)

time.B YES—Repair short to power in the wire between
the appropriate wheel speed sensor and the VSA
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). modulator-control unit. B
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P NO—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
connector (see step 2 on page 19-236). (see page 19-236).B
19-218
DTC 81-3D: Central Processing Unit (CPU) DTC 83-13: PCM Communication Error
DTC 83-14: PCM Communication Error
DTC 81-3E: Central Processing Unit (CPU)
Internal Circuit Malfunction 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
DTC 81-59: Central Processing Unit (CPU) 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
4. Turn the steering wheel f r o m lock to lock several
times. Y E S — G o t o step 5.
Is DTC 81-3D, 81-3E, or 81-59 indicated? connector A (44P) and the VSA modulator-control
YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit troubleshooting (see page 19-163). •
(see page 19-236). •
time.B 6. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

(see page 19-236). •
NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

original PCM (see page 11-238).
19-219
DTC 84-21: VSA Sensor Neutral Position not DTC 86-01: F-CAN Bus-off Malfunction
Writing
3. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization ON (II) again.
(see page 19-234).
ON (II) again. Is DTC 86-01 indicated?
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Y E S — G o t o step 5.
Is DTC 84-21 indicated? NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA connector A (44P) and the VSA modulator-control
modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary, unit 37P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control troubleshooting (see page 19-163).•
NO—The system is OK at this t i m e . •

19-220
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator- DTC 86-11: F-CAN Communication with PCM
control unit 37P connector terminal and PCM Malfunction
connector A (44P) terminal (see table).
Sign PCM Connector Engine Malfunction
Connector DTC 86-22: F-CAN Communication with
Term Snail Engine Malfunction
CAN-L No. 1 No. 37
CAN-H No. 15 No. 36 DTC 86-23: F-CAN Communication with
Engine Malfunction
Wire side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
C A N - L (RED) Engine Malfunction
13
36 37
Engine Malfunction
C A N - H (WHT)
DTC 86-41: F-CAN Communication with CVT
Malfunction
,1/1/ > | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 I 9 |
10 / 12 13|14|15|16 17 18 19
•
20 21 23 24 25
c
26 27 28 33 34 35
291/| 31 \ /
CAN-H
(WHT)
| 36 1 38|39|40|/]42
37 43 144-1 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 m p h (10 km/h) or more.
C A N - L (RED)
Is there continuity? Is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25,

and/or 86-41 indicated?
modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary, YES—If DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control the DTC 86-01 troubleshooting first (see page
unit (see page 19-236), and retest. • 19-220). If DTC 86-01 is not indicated, go to step 5.
NO—Repair open in the wire between the PCM and NO—If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the
the VSA modulator-control unit. • indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If DTCs are not
between PCM connector A (44P) and the VSA
19-163).B
(cont'd)
19-221
6. Short the SCS line w i t h the HDS. 11. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). good PCM (see page 11-7).
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P 12. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
13. Test-drive the vehicle at 7 mph (10 km/h) or more.
9. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
control unit 37P connector terminal and PCM NOTE: Drive the vehicle on the road, not on a lift.
connector A (44P) terminal (see table).
Sign V S A Modulator- PCM Connector
control Unit 37P A (44P) Terminal Is DTC 86-11, 86-21, 86-22, 86-23, 86-24, 86-25,
Connector and/or 86-41 indicated?
Terminal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 37 YES—Check for loose terminals in the VSA
CAN-H No. 15 No. 36 modulator-control unit 37P connector. If necessary,
unit (see page 11-236), and retest.B
CAN-L (RED) NO—If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

•|l|/|3l/|/|e|7|8|8|l0|lll/l 13 14
fHl5|/h7|><|/|l9|20|><|2l|22|/| original PCM (see page 1 1 - 2 3 8 ) . •
| / M 2 6 | / | 2 8 | / | / | / ! / | / | 3 4 | / | 36 37
C A N - H (WHT)
X\ 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |
10 / 12 13|T4|T5|T6 17 18 19 •
•
20 21 23 24 25
• •
26 27 28 2 9 | / | 3 1 | / 33 34 35
| 36 | 37 38 | 39 140 | / l 42 43 144 |
CAN-H
(WHT)
C A N - L (RED)

the VSA modulator-control u n i t . i l
19-222
DTC 86-31: F-CAN Communication w i t h 8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
Gauge Control Module Malfunction
1. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). control unit 37P connector terminal and gauge
control module (tach) 36P connector terminal (see
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the "HDS. table).
ON (II) again. Sign VSA Modulator- Gauge Control
control Unit 37P Module (Tach)
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Connector 36P Connector
Terminal Terminal
Is DTC 86-31 indicated? CAN-L No. 1 No. 19
CAN-H No. 15 No. 1
YES—If DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do
the DTC 86-01 troubleshooting first (see page W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
19-220). If DTC 86-01 is not indicated, go to step 5.
C A N - L (RED)
NO—If any other DTCs are Indicated, go to the .— >

|1|/|3|/M6|7|8|9|10|11|/| 13 14
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If DTCs are not -H15|/11T|XI/119|20|XJ21|Z2|/1
^ | > | i | > | 2 8 | / | / | > | / | / | i | / | 36 37
Indicated, there was an Intermittent failure, the J
system is OK at this time. Check for loose terminals CAN-H (WHT)
between the, gauge control module (tach) 36P
connector and the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
CAN-H (WHT)
troubleshooting (see page 1 9 - 1 6 3 ) . • l l / | / | 4 | 6 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 110111 / | 1 3 | 1 4 | 1 5 | 1 6 | 1 7 | 1 8 |
1 1 9 1 2 0 1 21 l / l / l / l / l / l 2712812932133
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to C A N - L (RED)

ON (II) again.
Does the gauge indicators come on?
YES — G o t o step 6. Is there continuity?
NO—Do the gauge control module troubleshooting YES—Check for loose terminals in the gauge
(see page 22-223). • control module (tach) 36P connector. If necessary,
substitute a known-good gauge control module
6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). (tach), then go to step 1, and recheck. If no DTCs
are indicated, replace the original gauge control
7. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P module (tach) (see page 22-255). If DTC 86-31
connector. resets, replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-236).

control module (tach) and the VSA modulator-
control u n i t . B
19 ""223
DTC 86-71: F-CAN Communication with Yaw 8. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
control unit 37P connector terminal and the yaw
Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P connector
terminal (see table).
Sign V S A Modulator- Y a w Rate-lateral
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. control Unit 37P Acceleration
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to Connector Sensor5P
ON (II) again. Terminal Connector
Terminal
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. CAN-L No. 1 No. 4
CAN-H No. 15 No. 3
Y E S — I f DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do
the DTC 86-01 troubleshooting first (see page C A N - L (RED)
19-220). If DTC 86-01 is not indicated, go to step 5. HI/|3M/|6|7|8|9|10|11|/| 13 14

r Hl5|/|l7|XI/|l9|20|X|2l|Z2|/l
36 37
indicated DTCs troubleshooting. If DTCs are not CAN-H (WHT)
at the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor 5P CAN-H (WHT)
connector and the VSA modulator-control unit 37P n n s-
troubleshooting (see page 1 9 - 1 6 3 ) . •
A/ 4 5
J C A N - L (RED)
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). S E N S O R 5P C O N N E C T O R
6. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor

5P connector (see page 19-234). Is there continuity?
7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P Y E S — G o t o step 9.

NO—Repair open in the wire between the y a w rate-
lateral acceleration sensor and the VSA modulator-
control unit.H
19-224
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (11). 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
10. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-lateral 12. Reconnect the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor
acceleration sensor 5P connector terminal No. 1 5P connector.
and body ground.
Y A W RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR
5P C O N N E C T O R 14. Measure the voltage between y a w rate-lateral
acceleration sensor 5P connector terminal No. 5
and body ground.
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR

YEL
mi BLK
YES—Goto step 11. W i r e side of female terminals
NO—Check the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash

fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair open in the Is there 0.1 V or less?
wire between the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse and yaw rate-
lateral acceleration sensor. • YES—Replace the y a w rate-lateral acceleration
sensor (see page 19-234). •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the y a w rate-

lateral acceleration sensor and body ground
(G602).B
19-225
DTC 86-81: F-CAN Communication w i t h AHB 7. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P
Malfunction connector (see step 2 on page 19-236).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 8. Check for continuity between the VSA modulator-
control unit 37P connector terminal and AHB servo
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. unit 25P connector terminal (see table).
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to Sign V S A Modulator- AHB Servo Unit
ON (II) again. control Unit 37P 25P Connector
Connector Terminal
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Terminal
CAN-L No. 1 No. 17
Is DTC 86-81 indicated? CAN-H No. 15 No. 1
Y E S — I f DTC 86-01 is indicated at the same t i m e , do Wire side of female terminals
the DTC 86-01 troubleshooting first (see page
19-220). If DTC 86-01 is not indicated, go to step 5. CAN-L (RED)
•|1|/|3|/I/18|7|8|9|10|11|/| 13 14
NO—If any other DTCs are indicated, go to the -H15|/|"IXI/|18|20|X|2I|Z2|/I
36 37
indicated, intermittent failure, the system is OK at I C A N - H (WHT)
this time. Check for loose terminals between the
AHB servo unit 25P connector and the VSA
modulator-control unit 37P connector. Refer to I C A N - H (WHT)
19-163).•
1 2 / 5 6 1 8 9
10 12 14 16

17 18 / 23 24 25
C A N - L (RED)
6. Disconnect the AHB servo unit 25P connector (see

AHB S E R V O UNIT 25P C O N N E C T O R
step 13 on page 19-101). Wire side of female terminals
YES—Check for loose terminals in the AHB servo

unit 25P connector. If necessary, substitute a
known-good AHB servo unit, then go to step 1, and
recheck. If no DTCs are indicated, replace the
original AHB servo unit (see page 19-100). If DTC
86-81 resets, replace the VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-236).
NO—Repair open in the wire between the AHB

servo unit and the VSA modulator-control unit. •
19-226
DTC 107-22; Central Processing Unit (CPU) DTC 108-21: Steering Angle Sensor
Internal Circuit Malfunction Malfunction
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cool the VSA 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
modulator-control unit, and wait 1 hour or more.
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is DTC 108-21 indicated?
Is DTC 107-22 indicated? Y E S — G o t o step 5.
YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
(see page 19-236). • time.B
NO—The system is OK at this time. • 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Substitute a known-good steering angle sensor

(see page 19-233).

(see page 19-236). •
NO—Replace the original steering angle sensor

(see page 19-233). •
19-227
DTC 112-01; Central Processing Unit (CPU) 6. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
Internal Circuit Malfunction control unit 37P connector terminal No. 28 and
body ground.
V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 37P C O N N E C T O R -
|1|/|3M/|8|7|8|9|10|11|/1 13 14
|1B|/|17!XI/|19|20|X|21|22|/I
36 37
. l / M » M » l / U V l / M a * l / l
IG1 ( G R Y )
5. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-

body ground. W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T 37P CONNECTOR
Is there 0 V?
FSR + B (WHT)
, Y E S — G o t o step 7.
|1|/|3|/|/|6|7|8|9|10|11|/| 13 14
H5Ml7|XI/|l9|20|Xt2l|22|/| NO —Repair short to power in the wire between the
36 37
M/1Z6|/|28|/|/|/|/|/|34M ) No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse-relay box
and the VSA modulator-control unit.H
Wire side of female terminals 8. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
body ground.
NO—Check the 12V battery performance (see page

22-61), and troubleshoot the charging system
indicator circuit (see page 12-179). •
IG1 ( G R Y )

unit (see page 19-236), and r e t e s t . •

(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse-relay box and
the VSA modulator-control unit.H
19-228
DTC 121-xx*: VSA Solenoid Valve 1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Malfunction
DTC 122-xx*: VSA Solenoid Valve
Malfunction 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), then turn it to
ON (II) again.
DTC 123-xx*:VSA Solenoid Valve
Malfunction 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
DTC 124-xx*: VSA Solenoid Valve Is DTC 121-xx, 122-xx, 123-xx, or 124-xx
Malfunction indicated?
* ; A n y two-character subcode (see table) YES—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit

(see page 19-236). •
DTC Sectional Valve
121 -01 Right-front and Regulator NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
-02 left-rear time.B
-11
-21
-24
122 -01 Suction
-21
-22
-23
123 -01 Left-front and Regulator
-02 right-rear
-11
-21
-24
124 -01 Suction
-21
-22
-23
19-229
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and 7. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
no DTCs are stored connector terminal No. 2 and body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). V S A O F F S W I T C H 5P C O N N E C T O R
2. Check the VSA activation indicator for several

seconds w h e n the ignition switch is turned to
ON (II).
u
1 I /2
BRN
4 j5
U
YES—The system is OK at this time. •
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector. is there continuity?
5. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-235). YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the gauge control module (tach) and the
Is the VSA OFF switch OK ? VSA OFF s w i t c h . •
Y E S — G o t o step 6. NO—Substitute a known-good gauge control

module (tach) (see page 22-255), then go to step 1
NO—Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page and recheck. If it is OK, replace the original gauge
19-235).• control module (tach) (see page 22-255). •

connector.
19-230
ABS Indicator, brake system indicator, and 6. Reconnect all connectors.
VSA indicator do n o t go off
8. Check the ABS indicator, the brake system
2. Check the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ indicator and the VSA indicator for several seconds
relay box. when the ignition switch is turned to ON (II).
Is the fuse blown? Do the indicators come on then go off?
YES — G o t o step 3. YES—Troubleshooting is complete. •
NO—Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 9. NO—Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 1 9 - 2 3 6 ) . •
connector (see step 2 on page 19-236). 9. Disconnect the VSA moduIator-controI unit 37P
4. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
5P connector (see page 19-234). 10. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
5. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 11. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
control unit 37P connector terminal No. 28 and control unit 37P connector terminal No. 28 and
body ground. body ground.
V S A M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L UNIT 37P CONNECTOR V S A MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 37PCONNECTOR .
13 Ml/|3|/l/|e|7|B|9|lO|ll|/| 13 14
|l5|/|l7|Xi/|l9|20rX|2l|22l/|
36 37 36 37
IG1 (GRY) !G1 (GRY)
W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity? is there battery voltage?
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire Y E S - G o t o step 12.

between the No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control unit NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 4
or the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor. H (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
NO —Install a new No. 4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box, then go to step 6. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(cont'd)
19-231
13. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 15. Disconnect the gauge control module (tach) 36P
control unit 37P connector terminal No. 36 and connector.
body g r o u n d .
control unit 37P connector terminal and gauge
control module (tach) 36P connector terminal (see
table).
14
36
Sign V S A Modulator- Gauge Control
M/l26l/lSlXM/l>l>l34l>]
control Unit 37P Module (Tach)
G N D (BLK) Connector 36P Connector
Terminal Tesrmmcimai
CAN-L No. 1 No. 19
CAN-H No. 15 No. 1
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
C A N - L (RED)
Is there continuity? 14
37
C A N - H (WHT)
NO—Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and body ground (G202).H
TcAN-H (WHT)
n—-—^—n
14. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator- l l / | / | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8 | 9 |10|11 / | 1 3 | 1 4 J 1 5 | 1 6 | 1 7 " 1 8 |
control unit 37P connector terminal No. 13 and 1191201 21 \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ 27128129 \ / \ / \ 32133 \ / \ / \ /
body g r o u n d . CAN-L (RED)
F S R + B (WHT)
13 14
36 37 Y E S —Check for loose terminals in the VSA


W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s control module (tach) and the VSA modulator-
control unit.H
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the No. 3

19-232
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
NOTE; Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
1. With the wheels in the straight-ahead position and the steering wheel centered, remove the steering wheel
(see page 17-6).
2. Remove the steering column covers and the cable reel (see page 24-196).
3. Remove the combination switch assembly .(see page 17-11).
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (B) f r o m the combination switch body
assembly (C).
5. Install the combination switch body assembly In the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
• Do not remove the steering angle sensor f r o m the combination switch body.
• When installing the cable reel, set the turn signal canceling sleeve position so that the arrow points straight up
(see page 24-197).
• When Installing the combination switch, tighten the m o u n t i n g screws to the specified torque and sequence
shown (see page 17-13).
19-233
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration VSA Sensor Neutral Position
Sensor Replacement Memorization
NOTE: NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal during this

• Do.not.damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive. procedure.
e
Do not use power tools.
1. Park the vehicle on a flat and level surface, w i t h the
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). steering wheel in the straight ahead position.
2. Remove the center console (see page 20-79). 2. With the ignition switch at to LOCK (0), connect the
HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) under the
3. Remove the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor driver's side of the dashboard.
(A) mounting bolts.

9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf m, 7.2 Ibfft) 4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't
4. Pull out the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213).
then disconnect the sensor connector (B).
5. Select VSA ADJUSTMENT w i t h the HDS, and
5. Install the y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor in follow the screen prompts.
the reverse order of removal.
6. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization instructions.
(see page 19-234).
19-234
VSA OFF Switch Test
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 6. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
connector terminals No. 4 and No. 5. There should
2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover be continuity at all times.
(see page 20-89).
V S A O F F S W I T C H 5P C O N N E C T O R
3. Push out the VSA OFF switch (A) f r o m the back of
the instrument panel.
II Li
1 Z / 4 5
u
ILL ( + ) ILL (-)
Terminal side of m a l e t e r m i n a l s
7. Install the VSA OFF switch in the reverse order of

removal.
4. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector (B).
5. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P

connector terminals No. 1 and No. 2. There should
be continuity when the button is pressed, and no
continuity when the button is released.
V S A O F F S W I T C H 5P C O N N E C T O R
GND V S A OFF S W
11 11
u
1 2 / 4 5
u
19-235
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and installation
NOTE:
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• Plug the ends of the hoses and the joints to prevent spilling brake fluid.
Removal
1. Turn the.ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2.. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 37P connector (A) by pushing the lock (B) and pulling d o w n the lever
(C); the connector disconnects itself.
3. Disconnect the six brake lines f r o m the VSA modulator-control unit.
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (D) and to the right-front (E), the left-rear (F), the right-rear
(G), and the left-front (H) brake systems.
4. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit (I) w i t h the bracket (J) f r o m the body.
5. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit f r o m the bracket.
19-236
Installation
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit onto the bracket.
2. Install the bracket w i t h the VSA modulator-control unit to the body.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 37P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. Pull up the lever of the VSA modulator-control unit 37P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
6. Bleed the brake system (except the AHB servo unit and power unit) (see page 19-97).
7. Do the VSA sensor neutral position memorization (see page 19-234).
8. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
9. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator which could then be induced into
the normal brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system (except the AHB servo unit and power unit)
again (see page 19-97).
19-237
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement
Guide pin tool 07AAG-SVBA100 '
Front
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) .
2 . Release the connector clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 I b f f t )
3 . Remove the clips, the bolt, and the wheel speed sensor (C).
4. Install the wheel speed sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.

• If the wheel speed sensor comes in contact with the wheel bearing. Investigate the cause before replacing the
wheel speed sensor.
5. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and VSA Indicators go off.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and VSA Indicators do not come on.
Rear
2 . Release the clamp (A), then disconnect the wheel speed sensor connector (B).
3 . Remove the clips, the bolt, and the wheel speed sensor (C).
(cont'd)
19-239
Wheel Speed Sensor Replacement :'d)
4. Apply multi-purpose grease to the wheel speed 6. Insert the wheel speed sensor (A) and the guide pin
sensor O-ring (A) and the sensor hole (B) in the tool (B) into the bolt hole on the knuckle.
knuckle.
NOTE: To ensure proper alignment when pushing
the wheel speed sensor into the knuckle housing,
do not hold the sensor bracket during installation,
hold the sensor wire.
A
5. Insert the guide pin tool (A) into the wheel speed
sensor bolt hole until the shoulder of the tool
contacts the wheel speed sensor bracket.
NOTE: To prevent O-ring damage, the wheel speed

sensor must be installed w i t h the guide pin tool.
7. Gently push and pull the wheel speed sensor in and

out to make sure the O-ring is sliding properly in its
housing. While you are doing this, make sure the
sensor doesn't come out of the knuckle assembly. If
the sliding effort is too high, remove the wheel
speed sensor, inspect the O-ring for damage, and
start the installation process again.
8. Remove the guide pin tool, then install the bolt, and
tighten it to specified torque.

wheel.
10. Start the engine, and make sure the ABS and the
VSA indicators go off.
11. Test-drive the vehicle, and make sure the ABS and
. the VSA indicators do not come on.
19-240
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (If body maintenance is required)
T h e C i v i c H y b r i d SRS i n c l u d e s a d r i v e r ' s a i r b a g i n t h e s t e e r i n g w h e e l h u b , a p a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g i n t h e d a s h b o a r d

a b o v e t h e g l o v e box, seat belt t e n s i o n e r s in t h e f r o n t seat belt retractors, seat belt buckle t e n s i o n e r s in t h e f r o n t seat
belt buckles, side c u r t a i n a i r b a g s in t h e s i d e s o f t h e roof, a n d s i d e a i r b a g s in t h e f r o n t seat-backs. I n f o r m a t i o n ,
n e c e s s a r y t o s a f e l y s e r v i c e t h e SRS is i n c l u d e d i n t h i s S e r v i c e M a n u a l . I t e m s m a r k e d w i t h a n a s t e r i s k ( * ) o n t h e
c o n t e n t s p a g e i n c l u d e o r a r e l o c a t e d n e a r SRS c o m p o n e n t s . S e r v i c i n g , d i s a s s e m b l i n g , o r r e p l a c i n g t h e s e i t e m s
requires special p r e c a u t i o n s and t o o l s , a n d s h o u l d be d o n e by an a u t h o r i z e d H o n d a dealer.
• T o a v o i d r e n d e r i n g t h e SRS i n o p e r a t i v e , w h i c h c o u l d l e a d t o p e r s o n a l I n j u r y o r d e a t h In t h e e v e n t o f a s e v e r e f r o n t a l
o r s i d e c o l l i s i o n , a l l SRS s e r v i c e w o r k s h o u l d b e d o n e b y a n a u t h o r i z e d H o n d a d e a l e r .
• I m p r o p e r s e r v i c e p r o c e d u r e s , I n c l u d i n g I n c o r r e c t r e m o v a l a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e SRS, c o u l d l e a d t o p e r s o n a l i n j u r y
c a u s e d b y u n i n t e n t i o n a l d e p l o y m e n t of t h e airbags, side airbags, and/or side c u r t a i n airbags.
• D o n o t b u m p o r i m p a c t t h e SRS u n i t , f r o n t I m p a c t s e n s o r s , s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r s , o r r e a r s a f i n g s e n s o r w h e n t h e
i g n i t i o n s w i t c h Is In ON (II), o r f o r a t l e a s t 3 m i n u t e s a f t e r t h e I g n i t i o n s w i t c h is t u r n e d t o LOCK (0); o t h e r w i s e , t h e
s y s t e m m a y f a i l In a c o l l i s i o n , o r t h e a i r b a g s m a y d e p l o y .
• SRS e l e c t r i c a l c o n n e c t o r s a r e i d e n t i f i e d b y y e l l o w c o l o r c o d i n g . R e l a t e d c o m p o n e n t s a r e l o c a t e d i n t h e s t e e r i n g
c o l u m n , f r o n t console, d a s h b o a r d , d a s h b o a r d l o w e r panel, in t h e d a s h b o a r d a b o v e t h e g l o v e box, in t h e f r o n t seats,
In t h e r o o f s i d e , a n d a r o u n d t h e f l o o r . D o n o t u s e e l e c t r i c a l t e s t e q u i p m e n t o n t h e s e c i r c u i t s .
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) SYSTEM (If body maintenance is required)
I M A c o m p o n e n t s a r e l o c a t e d in t h i s a r e a . T h e I M A is a h i g h - v o l t a g e s y s t e m . T h e h i g h v o l t a g e c a b l e s a n d t h e i r c o v e r s
a r e i d e n t i f i e d b y o r a n g e c o l o r i n g . T h e s a f e t y l a b e l s a r e a t t a c h e d t o h i g h v o l t a g e a n d o t h e r r e l a t e d p a r t s (see p a g e 1-7).
Y o u m u s t b e f a m i l i a r w i t h t h e I M A s y s t e m b e f o r e w o r k i n g a r o u n d it. M a k e s u r e y o u h a v e r e a d t h e S e r v i c e P r e c a u t i o n s
i n t h e I M A s e c t i o n b e f o r e p e r f o r m i n g r e p a i r s o r s e r v i c e (see p a g e 12-3). ,
Body
Special Tools 20-2 Dashboard
Instrument Panel Removal/Installation ........ 20-85
Doors Gauge Control Module (Speedo) Trim
Component Location Index - Front Door ..... 20-3 Removal/Installation 20-86
Index - Rear Door ....... 20-5
C o m p o n e n t Location Subdisplay Visor Removal/Installation 20-87
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation 20-7 Driver's Dashboard Lower Cover
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement 20-9 Removal/Installation 20-89
Front Door Latch Replacement 20-12 Driver's Dashboard Undercover
Front Door Glass and Regulator Removal/Installation 20-90
Replacement 20-14 Center Pocket Removal/Installation 20-90
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
Replacement 20-15 Removal/Installation 20-91
Front Door Weatherstrip Replacement 20-16 * Glove Box Removal/Installation 20-91
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation 20-17 Dashboard Vent Removal/Installation 20-92
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement 20-19 * Glove Box Striker Replacement 20-94
Rear Door Latch Replacement 20-21 Dashboard Side Trim
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Removal/Installation 20-94
Replacement ............................................... 20-23 Side Defogger Vent Trim
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Removal/Installation 20-95
Replacement 20-26 * Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement .20-27 Removal/Installation 20-95
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment 20-28 Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Front and Rear Door Position Disassembly/Reassembly 20-101
Adjustment 20-29
Front and Rear Door Striker Seats
Adjustment 20-31 Component Location Index ........................... 20-103
Front Seat Active Head Restraint
Mirrors Inspection 20-104
Component Location Index 20-32 * Front Seat Removal/Installation 20-105
Power Mirror Replacement 20-33 Front Seat Frame Replacement 20-107
Mirror Holder Replacement 20-34 * Front Seat-back Cover Replacement 20-110
Rearview Mirror Replacement 20-35 * Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement ...... 20-114
Rear Seat Removal/Installation 20-118
Glass Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement ............. 20-119
Component Location Index 20-36 Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement 20-121
Windshield Replacement 20-38
Front Corner Glass Replacement 20-43 Bumpers
Rear Window Replacement 20-47 Front Bumper Removal/Installation 20-122
Front Bumper Lower Grille Replacement .... 20-124
Interior Trim Front Air Spoiler Replacement 20-125
Component Location Index 20-53 Front Bumper Air Deflector Replacement .... 20-126
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas ....... 20-54 Rear Bumper Removal/Installation 20-127
* Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas ...... 20-57
* T r i m Removal/Installation Hood
- Rear Shelf Area 20-66 Hood Adjustment 20-129
Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area ....... 20-68 Hood Seal Replacement 20-130
Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Lid 20-69 Hood Insulator Replacement 20-131
Grab Handle Removal/Installation 20-70
* Headliner Removal/Installation 20-71 Trunk Lid
* Carpet Replacement 20-75 Trunk Lid Adjustment 20-132
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement 20-133
Consoles Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Replacement ........... 20-134
* Center Console Removal/Installation 20-79 Trunk Lid Cushion Replacement 20-134
Center Console
Disassembly/Reassembly 20-81 Fuel Fill Door
Center Console Armrest Replacement ......... 20-82 Fuel Fill Door Adjustment 20-135
Armrest Lock Replacement 20-83 Fuel Cap Adapter Replacement 20-136
Exterior Trim
Front G r i l l e Replacement 20-137
. Front Fender Trim Replacement ................... 20-138
Front Grille Cover Replacement 20-139
Cowl Cover Replacement 20-140
Roof Molding Replacement 20-141
Door Molding Replacement .......................... 20-143
Side Sill Protection Tape Replacement 20-144
Rear License Trim Replacement 20-144
Trunk Lid Spoiler Replacement 20-145
E m b l e m / S t i c k e r Replacement 20-146
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender Replacement .................. 20-147
Splash Shield Replacement 20-148
Front Fender Fairing Replacement 20-149
Front Undercover Replacement 20-150
Front Floor Undercover Replacement 20-150
Middle Floor Undercover Replacement ....... 20-151
Rear Floor Undercover Replacement 20-151
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement 20-152
Rear Fender Cover Replacement 20-152
Rear Strake Replacement 20-153
Rear Air Outlet Replacement 20-153
Openers
Hood Opener Cable Replacement ................ 20-155
* Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Door
Opener Cable Replacement 20-156
Hood Latch Replacement 20-158
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener
Replacement 20-159
Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement 20-161
Trunk Lid Latch Replacement ........................ 20-162
Frame
Upper Dashboard Support Gusset
Replacement 20-164
Rear Floor Upper Cross-member
Gusset Replacement 20-164
Rear Floor Brace Replacement 20-165
Subframe Replacement 20-166
Frame Repair Chart 20-168
Body
Special Tools
Ref. N o . Tool N u m b e r Description Qty
® 07AAF-SNAA100 Torsion Bar Assembly Tooi 1
20-2
Doors 3^)
Component Location Index - Front Door
(cont'd)
20-3
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door (cont'd)
INNER HANDLE CAP
20-4
Component Location Index - Rear Door
SWITCH PANEL
(cont'd)
20-5
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door (cont'd)
GLASS RUN CHANNEL
20-6
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the power w i n d o w switch panel (A).
• KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 *
• T r i m pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, -1 Pry up on the rear edge of the switch panel
commercially available w i t h the appropriate t r i m tool to release the
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment rear clip.
Program; call 888-424-6857 -2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release
all of the hooks (B).
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool -3 Pull the switch panel rearward to release the
set to avoid damage w h e n removing components. front hook (C).
-4 Disconnect the power mirror switch connector
1. Raise the glass fully. (D) (driver's) and the power w i n d o w switch
connector (E).
2. Pry out on the rear portion of the inner handle cap
Fastener Location
(A) to release the hooks (B, C) w i t h the appropriate
t r i m tool. D>: Clip, 1
5. Remove the screw.

3. Remove the screw and clip securing the inner
Fastener Location
handle (A).
• : Screw, 1
Fastener Locations
• : Screw, 1 > ; Clip, 1
(cont'd)
20-7
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)

6. Remove the door panel (A) w i t h as little bending as 8. Remove the door panel (A) while pulling the Inner
possible to avoid creasing or breaking i t handle (B) out through the hole in the door panel.
-1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,

release the clips (B, C) that are just above the
marks (D) on the edge of the panel w i t h a
commercially available t r i m pad remover.
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-3 Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
NOTE: The Inner handle cable (E) and the latch

cable (F) are connected to the Inner handle (G).
Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these
cables will be damaged.
Fastener Locations
B | > : Clip, 6 C > : Clip, 1
If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A)

and the latch cable (B) f r o m the Inner handle (C),
then remove the handle.
-1 Detach the Inner handle cable fastener (D),

then disconnect the inner handle cable f r o m
the cable fastener (E).
- 2 Detach the latch cable fastener (F) w i t h a flat-
tip screwdriver, then disconnect the latch cable
f r o m the cable fastener (G).
NOTE: If the cable fasteners are damaged or

stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
7. While holding the door panel (A) away f r o m the

door, remove the inner handle (B) f r o m the door
panel by releasing the hooks (C).
20-8
Front Door Outer Handle
Replacement
10. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace t h e m w i t h new ones. 1. Raise the glass fully.
• Replace any damaged cable fasteners w i t h new
ones. 2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-7).
• The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (B) w i t h the latch in lock position as 3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
shown. (A).
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly, and the cables are connected securely. C
• Make sure the w i n d o w and the power door lock
operate properly.
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
4 Remove the plug caps (B), then remove the plastic

cover (C), as needed.
5. Detach the rod fastener (A).
(cont'd)
20-9
Doors
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
6 . Remove the maintenance cap (A). Disconnect the 8. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A).
outer handle rod (B) w i t h a clip remover.
F a s t e n e r Location
• : Bolt, 1
9.8 N - m (1.0 kgf m, 7.2 ibf-ft)

9 . Remove the bolt securing the outer handle
protector (A), then remove the protector by
releasing the hook (B).
Fastener Location
• : Bolt, 1
20-10
10. If necessary, remove the special screws, then 12. Remove the rod fastener (A) f r o m the outer handle
separate the door cylinder (A) and the outer handle (B), then replace it with a new one.
protector (B). If the retainer (C) is damaged, release
the hooks (D), and replace it.
NOTE: If removed, the special screws (P/N

90101-SJK-003) must be replaced.
Fastener Locations
• : Screw, 2
13. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the cylinder cable and each rod is

connected securely.
• Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks
operate properly.
• Make sure the door handle works properly.
11. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the • Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-29).
handle f r o m the holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door.
20-11
Doors
Front Door Latch Replacement
NOTE; Put on gloves to protect your hands. 8. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (B) from the holder (C), then remove the
1. Raise the glass fully. screws (D, E) securing the latch (F). Remove the
latch through the hole in the door. Take care not to
2. Remove the door panel and the inner handle bend the outer handle rod (G), the latch cable, or
(see page 20-7). the inner handle cable.
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed {see step 3 on
page 20-9). D • : Screw, 3 E • : Screw, 1
4. Detach the rod fastener (see step 5 on page 20-9).
5. Disconnect the outer handle rod f r o m the outer

handle (see step 6 on page 20-10).
6. Disconnect the cylinder cable f r o m the latch (see

7. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and

remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (B) by pulling it d o w n w a r d .
Fastener Location
• : Bolt, 1
6 x 1.0 mm
8 N-m
(0.8 k g f - m , 6 I b f f t )
20-12
9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector 11. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
(A) by releasing the hook (B). note these items:
Fastener Location
• Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
• : Screw, 1
properly and each rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
• W h e n reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
A
• Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-29).
10. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (B) f r o m the latch (C).
20-13
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE; Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Disconnect the connector (A), and detach the
harness clip (B) f r o m the regulator (C).
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-7).
Fastener Locations
2, Disconnect the power H o o r \nrM actuator connector

(Black) ' (Gold)
(A), and remove the plug caps (B).
6 x 1.0 mm
3. Pass the cables (C) and the harnesses (D) t h r o u g h 9.8 N-m
the slits (E) in the plastic cover (F), then remove (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
them.
6. Remove the bolts (D), and loosen the bolts (E), then
4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until y o u can see the remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
bolts, then remove t h e m . Carefully pull the glass
out t h r o u g h the w i n d o w slot. Take care not t o drop
the glass inside the door.
Fastener Locations
• Bolt, 2
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
20-14
Front Door Glass Outer
Weatherstrip Replacement
7. Apply multipurpose grease to all the sliding
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
NOTE;
• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Take care not to scratch the door.
1. Lower the glass fully.
2. Release the front hook (A) f r o m inside of the door,

then pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip
(B).
8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items;
• Roll the glass up and d o w n to verify it moves

freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and the glass run channel w h e n the glass is
closed.
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-28).
• Do the power w i n d o w control unit reset
• W h e n reinstalling the door panel, make sure the 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the front door
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed glass outer weatherstrip (A).
A
• Make sure the power door locks, the w i n d o w s ,
and the power mirror operate properly.
• Test-drive, and check for w i n d noise and rattles.
(cont'd)
20-15
Doors
Front Door Glass Outer Front Door Weatherstrip
Weatherstrip Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
4. Slide the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) NOTE:

forward. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the door checker mounting bolt (A) at the

A-pillar.
Fastener Locations
A • : Bolt, 1 B [> : Clip, 14 C > : Clip, 2
(Left: Pink (White)
Right: Blue)
5. Twist the front door glass outer weatherstrip (A) to

pull the rear hook (B) out f r o m the inside of the
door, then remove the weatherstrip.
6. Push the clip portions of new front door glass outer

weatherstrip into place securely.
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door

weatherstrip (E).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of

removal, and note these Items:

replace them with new ones.
• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed In the
holder (F) securely.
• Apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the
door checker mounting bolt before Installation.
20-16
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the power w i n d o w switch panel (A).
• KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 *
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, -1 Pry up on the rear edge of the switch panel
commercially available w i t h the appropriate t r i m tool to release the
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment rear clip.
Program; call 888-424-6857 -2 Pull out along the edge of the panel to release
the hooks (B).
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool -3 Pull the switch panel rearward to release the
set to avoid damage w h e n removing components. front hook (C).
-4 Disconnect the power w i n d o w switch
1. Raise the glass fully. connector (D).
Fastener Location
2. Pry out on the rear portion of the inner handle cap
(A) to release the hooks (B, C) with the appropriate L> : C l i p , 1
t r i m tool.
Fastener Location
3. Remove the screw and clip securing the inner
• ; Screw, 1
handle (A).
Fastener Locations
• : Screw, 1 > : Clip, 1
(cont'd)
20-17
Doors
Rear Door Panel R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n (cont'd)
• 6. Remove the door panel (A) w i t h as little bending as 8. Remove the door panel (A) while pulling the inner
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it. handle (B) out through the hole in the door panel.
-1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,

release the clips (B, C) that are just above the
marks (D) on the edge of the panel w i t h a
commercially available t r i m pad remover.
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-3 Stating at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
NOTE: The inner handle cable (E) and the latch

cable (F) are connected to the inner handle (G).
Do not pull the door panel up too far, or these
cables will be damaged.
Fastener Locations
B > : Clip, 5 C | > : Clip, 1
9. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A)

and the latch cable (B) f r o m the inner handle (C).
-1 Detach the inner handle cable fastener (D),

then disconnect the inner handle cable f r o m
the cable fastener (E).
• -2 Detach the latch cable fastener (F) w i t h a flat-
* tip screwdriver, then disconnect the latch cable
f r o m the cable fastener (G).
NOTE: If the cable fasteners are damaged or

stress-whitened, replace them with new ones.
7. While holding the door panel (A) away f r o m the

door, remove the inner handle (B) f r o m the door
panel by releasing the hooks (C).
20-18
Rear Door Outer Handle
Replacement
10. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
replace t h e m w i t h new ones. 1. Raise the glass fully.
• Replace any damaged cable fasteners w i t h new
ones. 2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-17).
• The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (B) w i t h the latch in lock position as 3. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the
shown. power door lock actuator connector (B).
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,
and the cables are connected securely.
• Make sure the w i n d o w and power door lock
operate properly.
4. Remove the rear portion of the plug caps (C), then

remove the plastic cover (D), as needed.
5. Remove the latch mounting screws, then lower the

latch (see step 4 on page 20-21).
6. Detach the rod fastener (A).
(cont'd)
20-19
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
7. Disconnect the outer handle rod (A) w i t h a clip 9. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the
remover (B) f r o m the outer handle (C). handle f r o m the holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door.
8. Remove the maintenance seal (A). Remove the

bolts securing the outer handle protector (B), then
remove the protector by releasing the hook (C).
Fastener Locations
• : Bolt, 2 10. Remove the rod fastener (A) f r o m the outer handle
(B), then replace it with a new one.
20-20
Rear Door Latch Replacerr
Install the handle in the reverse order of removal, NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
and note these items;
1. Raise the glass fully.
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the 2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-17).
around its outside perimeter to seal out water. 3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-19).
4. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (C),

then lower i t
Fastener Locations
A • : Screw, 3 B • : Screw, 1
6 x 1.0 m m
6 N-m
(0.6 k g f - m , 4 Ibf-ft)
5. Detach the rod fastener (see step 6 on page 20-19).
6. Disconnect the outer handle rod f r o m the outer

handle (see step 7 on page 20-20).
(cont'd)
20-21
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement (cont'd)
7 . Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle 9. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (B) f r o m the holder (C), then remove the latch cable (B) f r o m the latch (C).
(D) out f r o m between the rear lower channel (E)
and t h e door. Take care not to bend the outer
handle rod (F), the latch G a b l e , or the Inner handle
cable.
8. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector

(A) by releasing the hook (B).
Fastener Location
10. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
• Screw, 1 note these items:
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,

and each rod is connected securely.
• W h e n reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
20-22
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Remove the bolt (A) f r o m the rear lower channel (B).
Pull the glass run channel (C) away as needed, and
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-17). remove the screw (D).
Fastener Locations
2. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the
power door lock actuator connector (B). Remove A • : Bolt, 1 D • :Screw, 1
the plug caps (C).
4 x 0.7 m m
4 N-m
(0.4 k g f - m , 3 Ibf-ft)
3. Pass the cable (D) and the harnesses (E) through

the holes (F) and slit (G) in the plastic cover (H),
then remove it.
4. Carefully move the glass (A) until y o u can see the

bolts, then remove t h e m . Release the glass f r o m
the holder (B), then remove it f r o m the regulator (C),
and carefully lower the glass. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door. B
Fastener Locations
8 N-m
(0.8 k g f - m , 6 Ibf-ft)
(cont'd)
20-23
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
6. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull 8. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the
the rear lower channel (B) f o r w a r d f r o m the quarter w i n d o w slot. Take care not to drop the glass inside
glass seal (C), then release the upper hook (D) f r o m the door,
the door. Remove the rear lower channel f r o m the
A
rear door glass (E), then pull the channel up to A /
remove it. M /
20-24
10. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the regulator (B). 12. Grease all the sliding surfaces of the regulator (A)
where shown.
Fastener Locations
C• : Bolt, 4 D• : Bolt, 1
(Black) (Gold)
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 I b f f t )
13. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order

of removal, and note these items:
6 x 1.0 m m • Roll the glass up and down to verify it moves

9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7 . 2 I b f f t ) freely without binding.
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
11. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D), then glass and the glass run channel w h e n the glass is
remove the regulator through the hole in the door. closed.
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
(see page 20-28).
20^25
Doors
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE; 3. Starting at the front, slowly pull up the rear door
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. glass outer weatherstrip (A).
• Take care not t o scratch the door.
1. Remove these items:
• Door panel (see page 20-17)

• Plastic cover (see step 3 on page 20-19)
• Rear door glass (see page 20-23)
• Quarter glass (see step 9 on page 20-24)
2. Release the front hook (A) f r o m inside of the door,

then pull up the front portion of the rear door glass
outer weatherstrip (B).
4. Push the rear hook (A) out f r o m inside of the door,

then remove the rear door glass outer weatherstrip
(B).
5. Push the clip portions of the rear door glass outer

weatherstrip into place securely.
20-26
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE: 3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of
• Put on glove to protect your hands. removal, and note these items:
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips. • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
1. Remove the door checker mounting bolt (A) at the • Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
B-pillar. holder (F) securely.
• Apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the
Fastener Locations
door checker mounting bolt before installation.
A • : Bolt, 1 B > : C l i p , 13 C > : Clip, 2 • Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-29).
(Left: Yellow (White)
Right: Green)
D t> : Clip, 1
(Black)
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door

weatherstrip (E).
20-27
Doors
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: If the weatherstrip or the glass run channel are
damaged or deteriorated, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
1. Place the vehicle on a f i r m , level surface.
• Door panel:
- Front door (see page 20-7)
- Rear door (see page 20-17)
• Plastic cover:
- Front door (see step 2 on page 20-14)
- Rear door (see step 3 on page 20-19)
3. Carefully move the glass (A) until y o u can see the

glass mounting bolts .(B), then loosen t h e m .
Front
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
4. Push the glass against the channel (C), then tighten

the glass mounting bolts.
5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also make
sure that the glass (A) contacts the glass run
channel (B) evenly.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7 . 2 I b f f t )
20-28
Front and Rear Door Position
Adjustment
7. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed
NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for
8. Reinstall the door panel: equal gaps between the front, the rear, and bottom
door edges and the body. Check that the door and the
• Front door (see page 20-7) body edges are parallel. If necessary, replace the
• Rear door (see page 20-17) mounting bolts before adjusting the door position.
9. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and 1. Place the vehicle on a f i r m , level surface when
on the sealing area as s h o w n , and note these items: adjusting the doors.
• Use a 12 m m (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A). 2. Adjust at the hinges (A):
• Adjust the rate of water f l o w as shown (B).
• Do not use a nozzle. • Pad a floor jack (B) w i t h shop towels (C), then use
• Hold the hose about 300 m m (12 in.) away f r o m the jack to support the door to prevent damage to
the door (C). the door while adjusting it.
• On the front door: Remove the front inner fender
(see page 20-147). Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (D) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or d o w n as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
• On the rear door: Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (E) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or d o w n as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
Front door
(cont'd)
20-29
Doors
Front and Rear Door Position t (cont'd)
Rear door 4. Check that the door and body edges are parallel. If
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the
A
rear of the doors flush w i t h the body.
5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts,

and around the hinges.
6. Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-29).

E
8 x 1,25 m m
29 N m (3.0 k g f - m , 2 2 I b f f t )
3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts w i t h

the adjusting bolts (P/N 90102-SFA-305) made
specifically for door adjustment, then adjust at the
door: Loosen the door mounting bolts (F) slightly,
and move the door up or d o w n as necessary to
equalize the gaps, and move it in or out until it's
flush w i t h the body.
20-30
Front and Rear Door Striker Adjustment
Make sure the door latches securely without slamming
it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
d o w n , and in or out.
1. Loosen the screws (B).
18 N m (1.8 k g f - m , 13 I b f f t )
2. Wrap the striker with a shop t o w e l , then adjust the

striker by tapping it w i t h a plastic hammer (C). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door

against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws to the specified torque, and recheck.
Mirrors
20-32
Power Mirror Replacement
1. Raise the door glass fully. 5. While holding the mirror (A), detach the clip (B),
then remove the mirror, and pull the harness (C)
2. Remove these items: out through the hole in the door. Take care not to
scratch the door.
* Door panel (see page 20-7)
• Plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on page 20-9)
3. Disconnect the connector (A), and detach the

harness clip (B).
4. Remove the maintenance caps (A), and remove the

nuts.
Fastener Locations
: Nut, 3
6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the connector is plugged in properly.
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf m ,
7.2 I b f - f t )
20-33
Mirrors
Mirror Holder Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Before reinstalling the mirror holder to the inner
holder (A) on the actuator, check the actuator rods
1. Carefully push on the top edge of the mirror holder (B) and the actuator boots (C). Make sure the
(A) by hand. actuator rods are securely mounted in the holes,
and that the boots properly cover each rod.
2. Put a shop towel in the opening between the lower

edge of the mirror holder and the mirror housing
(B) to prevent scratches, and detach the bottom
clips (C) w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver wrapped w i t h
protective tape.
3. Carefully pull out the bottom edge of the mirror

holder (A) to separate the adhesive (B), and then
release the side clips (C).
NOTE: In cold weather, gently heat the mirror

holder to at least 68 °F (20 °C) before removing it.
6. If equipped, reconnect the mirror defogger

connectors.
7. Reattach the hooks of the mirror holder to the

actuator, then position the mirror holder on the
actuator. Carefully push on the clip portions of the
mirror holder until the mirror holder locks into
place.
4. Separate the mirror holder f r o m the actuator (D) by 8. Check the actuator operation.
releasing the hooks (E). If equipped, disconnect the
mirror defogger connectors (F).
20-34
Rearview Mirror Replacement
3. Install t h e rearview mirror in the reverse order of

removal.
Glass
^p7„ent Location index
UPPER RUBBER DAM c u p 2
MOLDING UPPER SEAL
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
SIDE R U B B E R DAM
LOWER RUBBER DAM
WINDSHIELD 3 8
Replacement, page ^
CLIP, 2
RUBBER DAM
2
CLIP.
FRONT CORNER TRIM
FRONT CORNER GtASf 3
Replacement, page ^
20-36
UPPER RUBBER DAM
LOWER RUBBER DAM
20-37
Glass
Windshield Replacement
NOTE: With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
• Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive wire as close to the windshield (B) as possible to
w i t h a piano wire. prevent damage to the body and the dashboard.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat. Carefully cut through the rubber dam and the
• When replacing a broken windshield, a commercially adhesive (C) around the entire windshield.
available windshield cutter can be efficiently used for
cutting the adhesive. For details, f o l l o w the tool
manufacturer's instructions.
• Windshield wiper arms (see page 22-215)

• Cowl covers (see page 20-140)
• Rearview mirror (see page 20-35)
• A-pillar t r i m , both sides (see page 20-57)
• Roof moldings (see page 20-141)
2. Remove the molding (A) f r o m the upper edge of the

windshield (B). If necessary, cut the molding w i t h a
utility knife.
Cutting positions
If the old windshield will be reinstalled, make

alignment marks across the glass and the body 7. Carefully remove the windshield.
w i t h a grease pencil.
Pull d o w n the front portion of the headliner

(see page 20-71). Take care not to bend the
headliner excessively, or you may crease or break
it.
Apply protective tape along the edge of the

dashboard and the body. Make a hole w i t h an awl
through the rubber d a m and the adhesive f r o m
inside the vehicle at a corner of the windshield.
Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and
w r a p each end around a piece of w o o d .
20-38
8. Scrape smooth the old adhesive, using a putty 11. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), the side rubber
knife or similar tool, until there is a thickness of dam (B), and the clips (C) w i t h adhesive tape to the
about 2 m m {0.08 in.) on the bonding surface inside face of the windshield (D) as shown:
around the entire windshield opening flange:
• Be sure the rubber d a m and the clips line up with
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the the alignment marks (E).
body; damaged paint will interfere w i t h proper • Be sure the index tabs (F) of the left and the right
bonding. clips faces the left side.
• Remove the rubber dam and the fasteners f r o m • Be careful not to touch the windshield where the
the body. adhesive will be applied.
• Replace the dashboard seal w i t h a new one.
Rubber dams adhesive tape:
9. Clean the body bonding surface w i t h a shop towel Thickness 0.16 m m (0.006 in.)
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, Width 3.5 m m (0.14 in.)
keep oil, grease and water f r o m getting on the Clips adhesive tape:
clean surface. Thickness 0.4 m m (0.016 in.)
Width 10 m m (0.39 in.)
10. If the old windshield will be reinstalled, scrape off
the old adhesive, the fasteners, and the rubber dam E 12.3 m m (0.48 in.)
f r o m the windshield w i t h a putty knife. Clean the

bonding surfaces on the inside face and the edge of
the windshield with isopropyl alcohol. Make sure
the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and
grease.
(cont'd)
20-39
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
12. Attach the molding (A) w i t h adhesive tape (B) to the 14. Attach the lower rubber dam (A) with adhesive tape
upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful not to to the body as shown.
touch the windshield where the adhesive w i l l be Do not peel the glass side adhesive backing.
applied.
Rubber dam adhesive tape:
Molding adhesive tape: Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.) Width 5 mm (0.2 in.)
Width 4 oimm fCD.116 imj
6 m m (0.24 in.)
15. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it.

Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield
and the body w i t h a grease pencil at the four points
13. A p p l y primer to the molding (A), then attach the shown. Make sure both clips (B) contact with the
m o l d i n g upper seal (B) w i t h adhesive tape to the edge of the body holes. Be careful not to touch the
inside surface of the molding as shown. windshield where the adhesive will be applied.
Seals adhesive tape: Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)

Width 1 mm (©.28 on.)
: Apply primer here.
16. Remove the windshield.
20-40
17. Apply a light coat of glass primer w i t h a sponge 18. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer w i t h a
applicator around the edge of the windshield (A) sponge applicator to any exposed paint or metal
between the dams (B) and the molding (C) as around the flange where the new adhesive will be
s h o w n , then lightly wipe it off with a gauze or applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
cheesecloth:
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining
• Apply glass primer to the molding. original adhesive on the flange.
• Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and • Be careful not to mix up the body and the glass
do not get the body and the glass primer sponge primer sponge applicators.
applicators mixed up. • Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands.
• Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands.
:
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the '////////, Apply body primer to e x p o s e d paint a s s h o w n .
windshield properly, causing a leak after the

windshield is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
f r o m primed surfaces.
y///////, : Apply glass primer here.
19. Cut a " V " in the end of the nozzle (A) on the
adhesive cartridge as shown.
12 m m (0.47 in.)
7 m m (0.28 in.)
(cont'd)
20-41
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd!
20. Put the cartridge in a caulking g u n , and run a 2 1 . Pull out the glass side adhesive backing away f r o m
continuous bead of adhesive (A) around the edge the lower rubber dam.
of the windshield (B) between the dams (C) and the
molding (D) as s h o w n . Apply the adhesive w i t h i n 22. Hold the windshield with suction cups over the
30 minutes after applying the glass primer. Make a opening, align it w i t h the alignment marks made in
slightly thicker bead at each corner. step 15, and set it d o w n on the adhesive. Lightly
push on the windshield until its edges are fully
seated on the adhesive all the w a y around.
NOTE; Do not open or close any of the doors for

about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
23, Scrape or w i p e off the excess adhesive with a putty

knife or t o w e l . To remove the adhesive f r o m a
painted surface or the windshield, wipe w i t h a soft
shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
24. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
windshield and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, let the windshield dry, then seal w i t h sealant:
NOTE: Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours

after windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be
used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
25, Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following

things for 2 to 3 days:
• Slam the doors w i t h all the w i n d o w s rolled up.
• Twist the body excessively {such as w h e n going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
over rough, uneven roads).
20-42
Front Corner Glass Replacement
NOTE; 3. From outside the vehicle, pry the front corner glass
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. clips (A) and the front corner t r i m clips (B), then
• Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive carefully remove the glass (C) and the t r i m (D)
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surface. together. The t r i m is not attached to the glass.
'Fastener Locations
1. Remove the A-pillar t r i m (see page 20-57).
A > : Clip, 2 B > : Clip, 2
2. From inside the vehicle,, cut through the front

corner glass adhesive (A) w i t h a utility knife (B) all
the w a y around. Apply protective tape along the
edge of the entire front corner glass opening flange.
(cont'd)
20-43
Glass
Front Corner Glass Replacement (cont'd)
4. Scrape smooth the old adhesive, using a putty Attach the rubber dam (A) and the clips (B) w i t h
knife or similar tool, until there is a thickness of adhesive tape to the inside face of the front corner
about 2 m m (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface glass (C) as shown.
around the entire front corner glass opening flange: Be careful not to touch the front corner glass where
the adhesive will be applied.
• Do not scrape d o w n to the painted surface of the
body; damaged paint will interfere w i t h proper Rubber dam adhesive tape:
bonding. Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
• If any of the clips are broken, remove t h e m f r o m Width 3 mm (0.12 in.)
the body. Clip adhesive tape:
Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.)
5. Clean the body bonding surface w i t h a shop t o w e l Width 9 mm (0.35 in.)
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning,
keep oil, grease, and water f r o m getting on the
surface. 19 m m
(0.75 in,
6. If the old front corner glass will be reinstalled,
scrape off the old adhesive with a putty knife f r o m
the front corner glass. Clean the bonding surfaces
on the inside face of the front corner glass and the
edge of the glass w i t h isopropyl alcohol. Make sure
the bonding surface is kept free of water, o i l , and
grease.
3 mm
(0.12 i n .
15.5 m m
(0.61 in.)
33.5 mm
(1.32 in.)
20-44
8. Apply a light coat of glass primer with a sponge 9. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer w i t h a
applicator to the Inside face of the front corner sponge applicator to any exposed paint or metal
glass (A) as shown, then lightly wipe it off w i t h a around the flange where the new adhesive w i l l be
gauze or cheesecloth: applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
6
With the printed dots (B) on the front corner glass • Do not apply body primer to any remaining
as a guide, apply the glass primer to both lower original adhesive on the flange.
corner portions of the front corner glass. • Be careful not to mix up the body and the glass
• Do not apply body primer to the front corner primer sponge applicators.
glass, and do not get the body and the glass • Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands.
primer sponge applicators mixed up. • Mask off the dashboard before painting the
• Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands. flange.
• If you do the adhesive may not bond to the front
corner glass properly, causing a leak after the '////////, : A p p l y b o d y p r i m e r h e r e .
front corner glass is installed.

^///////f : Apply glass primer here.
{0.63 in.)
adhesive cartridge as shown.
7 mm (0.28 in.)
(conf d)
20-45
Glass
Front Corner Glass Replacement (cont'd)
11. Put the cartridge in a caulking g u n , and run a 12. Set the front corner glass (A) to the front corner
continuous bead of adhesive (A) around the front t r i m (B) quickly. Be careful not to touch the
corner glass (B) as s h o w n : adhesive.
• With the printed dots (C) on the front corner glass NOTE: Make sure there is no clearance between the
as a guide, apply the adhesive to both side glass and the front lower sash.
portions of the front corner glass.
• Apply the adhesive w i t h i n 30 minutes after
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
bead at each corner.
10 mm
(0.39 in.)
7 mm
{ 0 . 2 8 in.)
V 8 1 m m
t_ {0.33 in.)
Inside
2 mm 2 mm
{0.08 in.) (0.08 in.)
2 mm
(0.08 in.)
Y
Inside
Inside
f mm
9 r
1 (0.3 5 in.)
20-46
Rear Window Replacement
13. Hold the front corner glass (A) with a suction cup NOTE:
over the opening while holding the front corner • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
- t r i m (B) by the other hand, align the clips, and set it • Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive
d o w n on the adhesive. Lightly push on the front w i t h a piano wire.
corner glass until Its edges are fully seated on the • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
adhesive all the way around. • Do not damage the rear w i n d o w defogger grid lines,
w i n d o w antenna grid lines, and terminals.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for
about an hour until the adhesive is dry. 1. Remove these items:
• Trunk lid
• C-pillar t r i m (see page 20-63)
• Rear shelf (see page 20-66)
2. Disconnect the rear w i n d o w defogger connectors

(A).
A A
14. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off w i t h a putty

knife or towel. To remove the adhesive f r o m a
painted surface or the front corner glass, wipe with
a soft shop towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol. 3. If the old rear w i n d o w will be reinstalled, make
alignment marks across the glass and the body
15. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the w i t h a grease pencil.
corner glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, let the corner glass dry, then seal w i t h
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after corner glass installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.

• Twist the body excessively (such as w h e n going
(cont'd)
20-47
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
4. Pull d o w n the rear portion of the headliner (A) by 6. Remove the lower rubber dam (A) f r o m the lower
detaching the clips. Take care not to bend the edge of the rear w i n d o w (B). If necessary, cut the
headliner excessively, or you may crease or break molding w i t h a utility knife.
it.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
7. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)

5. Apply protective tape along the inside and the back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
outside edges of the body. Make a hole w i t h an awl wire as close to the rear w i n d o w (B) as possible to
through the adhesive f r o m inside the vehicle at a prevent damage to the body, and carefully cut
corner of the rear w i n d o w . Push a piece of piano through the adhesive (C) around the entire rear
wire through the hole, and w r a p each end around a window.
piece of w o o d .
20-48
Cutting positions 12. Apply primer to the edge of the rear w i n d o w (A)
where the lower rubber dam adhesive tape w i l l be
attached as shown. Attach the lower rubber d a m
(B) with adhesive tape (C) to the lower edge of the
rear w i n d o w :
• After installing the rubber dam, cut the ends (D)

of the rubber dam w i t h a utility knife as shown.
• Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive will be applied.
Molding adhesive tape:

Thickness 0.2 m m (0.008 in.)
Width 4 m m (0.16 in.)
: Apply primer here.
8. Carefully remove the rear w i n d o w .
9. Scrape smooth the old adhesive, using a putty

knife or similar t o o l , until there is a thickness of
about 2 m m (0.08 in.) on the bonding surface
around the entire rear w i n d o w opening flange:
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the

body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
• Remove the fasteners f r o m the body.
10. Clean the body bonding surface w i t h a shop towel

dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning,
keep oil, grease, and water f r o m getting on the
surface.
11. If the old rear w i n d o w will be reinstalled, scrape off

the old adhesive, the fasteners, and the rubber dam
f r o m the rear w i n d o w w i t h a putty knife. Clean the
bonding surfaces on the inside face and the edge of
the rear w i n d o w with isopropyl alcohol. Make sure
the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil, and
grease.
5 mm
(0.2 in
(cont'd)
20-49
Glass

13. Attach the upper rubber dams (A), side rubber 14. Attach the fasteners with adhesive tape to the rear
dams (B), clips (C), and side fasteners (D) w i t h w i n d o w opening flange of the body on both sides.
adhesive tape to the inside face of the rear w i n d o w
(E) as s h o w n : Fasteners adhesive tape:
Thn^hmmcc AJJ {Q.0-31 i f l j
m m
• First attach the upper rubber d a m , then attach the Width 9 mm (0.35 in.)
side rubber dams around the edge of the rear
Fastener Locations
w i n d o w . Be sure the top of the side rubber d a m
contacts w i t h the bottom of the upper rubber P>: Fastener, 2
d a m . If necessary, cut the rubber dam w i t h a

utility knife.
• Be sure the clips, and fasteners line up w i t h the
alignment marks (F).
• Be careful not to touch the rear w i n d o w where
adhesive will be applied.
Rubber dams adhesive tape:

Width 5 mm (0.2 in.)
Clips adhesive tape:
Width 13 mm (0.51 in.)
Side fasteners adhesive tape: 15. Set the rear w i n d o w in the opening, and center it.
Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.) Make alignment marks (A) across the rear w i n d o w
Width 7 mm (0.28 in.) and the body with a grease pencil at the four points
are s h o w n :
• Make sure both clips (B) are in the body holes.

• Be careful not to touch the rear w i n d o w where
the adhesive will be applied.
16. Remove the rear window.
20-50
7. Apply a light coat of glass primer w i t h a sponge 18. Carefully apply a light coat of body primer w i t h a
applicator along the edge of the rear w i n d o w (A) sponge applicator to any exposed paint or metal
between the dams (B) as s h o w n , then lightly wipe it around the flange where the new adhesive will be
off w i t h a gauze or cheesecloth: applied. Let the primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
• With the printed dots (C) on the rear w i n d o w as a • Do not apply body primer to any remaining
guide, apply the glass primer to both lower original adhesive on the flange.
corner portions of the rear w i n d o w . • Be careful not to mix up the body and the glass
• Do not apply body primer to the rear w i n d o w , primer sponge applicators.
and do not get the body and the glass primer • Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands.
sponge applicators mixed up.
• Never touch the primed surfaces w i t h your hands. : Apply body primer to e x p o s e d point a s s h o w n .
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear 16 mm

).63 in.)
w i n d o w properly, causing a leak after the rear
w i n d o w is installed.
V///////, '• A p p l y glass p r i m e r h e r e .
5 mm adhesive cartridge as shown.
2 2 in.)
12 m m (0.47 in.)
7 m m (0.28 in.)
(cont'd)
20-51
Glass
20. Put the cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a 21. Hold the rear w i n d o w w i t h suction cups over the
continuous bead of adhesive (A) around the edge opening, align it w i t h the alignment marks y o u
of the rear w i n d o w (B) between the dams (C) as made in step 15, and set it d o w n on the adhesive.
shown: . Lightly push on the rear w i n d o w until its edges are
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around.
• With the printed dots (D) on the rear w i n d o w as a
guide, apply the adhesive to both side portions of NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for
the rear w i n d o w . about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
• Apply the adhesive w i t h i n 30 minutes after
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker 22. Scrape or wipe off the excess adhesive with a putty
bead at each corner. knife or towel. To remove the adhesive f r o m a
painted surface or the rear w i n d o w , use a soft shop
towel dampened with isopropyl alcohol.
23. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
rear w i n d o w and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, let the rear w i n d o w dry, then seal w i t h
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after rear w i n d o w installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.

• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
20-52
Interior Trim
(A\c:
• CARPET
HEADLINER
Removal/Installation, page 20-71
•A-PILLAR TRIM
FRONT DOOR OPENING SEAL

B-PILLAR U P P E R TRIM
REAR DOOR OPENING SEAL

B-PILLAR L O W E R TRIM P A N E L
R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n , page 20-60
C-P1LLAR T R I M
page 20-63
KICK PANEL
page 20-54
FRONT DOOR SILL TRIM

Removal/Installation, T R U N K LID T R I M
p a g e 20-54 Removal/Installation,
page 20-69
GRAB HANDLE T R U N K REAR TRIM PANEL

Removal/Installation Removal/Installation,
page 20-70 page 20-68
TRUNK SIDE TRIM PANEL

REAR DOOR SILL TRIM Removal/Installation, page 20-68
page 20-55 REAR SHELF
TRUNK TOOL BOX

TRUNK FLOOR
T R U N K FRONT TRIM PANEL

20-53
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Special Tools Required Passenger's side
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 *
Fastener Locations
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program; call 888-424-6857 F > : Clip, 1 G > : Clip, 4 E
Front Door Sill Area
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or scratch the t r i m and the
panels.
• Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to
avoid damage w h e n removing components.
1. Driver's side: Remove the footrest (see step 4 on

page 20-76).
2. Driver's side: Remove the front side cap f r o m the

front door sill t r i m , and remove the trunk lid/fuel fill
door opener lock cylinder and the screw (see page
20-159).
3. Detach the hooks (A) and the tabs (B) f r o m the kick
panel (C) and the B-pillar lower t r i m (D), and pull
the front door sill t r i m (E) up by hand to detach the
clips (F, G), then remove it. 4. Pull out the front door opening seal (A) f r o m the
t r i m hooks (B) and around the front door opening
Driver's side flange, then remove the seal.
Fi
20-54
5. Pull the driver's kick panel (A) or the passenger's Special Tools Required
kick panel (B) back by hand to detach the clips KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 *
(C, D), then remove them. * Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Driver's side
Rear Door Sill Area

Fastener Locations
C > : Clip, 2 NOTE:
e
Take care not to bend or scratch the t r i m and the
panels.
° Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to
avoid damage when removing components.
1 . Detach the hook (A) and the tab (B) f r o m the B-pillar
lower t r i m (C), and pull the rear door sill trim (D) up
by hand to detach the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
D> : C l i p , 2
(White)
Passenger's side
Fastener Locations
C P> ; Clip, 1 D [> : Clip, 1
6. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:

replace them w i t h new ones.
• Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
(cont'd)
20-55
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Ar (cont'd)
2. Pull the rear seat cushion (A) up to release the hook 4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
(B). While pulling the cushion up, detach the clips note these items:
and remove the rear door sill t r i m (C) f r o m the rear
door opening seal (D). • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
Fastener Locations • Push the clips and the hooks into place securely.
> : Clip, 2
(White)
3. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) f r o m the

t r i m hooks (B) and around the rear door opening
flange, then remove the seal.
20-56
Trim R e m o v a l / I n s t a l l a t i o n - Pillar Areas
Special Tools Required 1. Pull the front door opening seal away f r o m the
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * A-pillar as needed (see step 4 on page 20-54).
Program; call 888-424-6857 2. Hit the upper clip in the A-pillar t r i m (A) with a
rubber mallet. The clip is under the "SIDE CURTAIN
A-Pillar Trim A I R B A G " mark (B). Hitting the clip breaks the
projections (C) on the pin (D) and pushes it into the
SRS components are located in this area. Review the g r o m m e t (E) on the body (F).
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before NOTE: The clip must be replaced w i t h a new one
doing repairs or service. w h e n the A-pillar t r i m is reinstalled.
NOTE:
• Follow the A-piliar t r i m installation procedure
carefully; improper installation could cause the side
curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
• Take care not to scratch the t r i m and the panels.
• The upper clip in the A-pillar t r i m (A) consists of a
g r o m m e t (B) and a pin (C). The g r o m m e t expanded
with the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The
projections (E) on the pin are broken during removal,
so the clip must be replaced with a new one when the
t r i m is reinstalled.
(cont'd)
20-57
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
3 . Pull the front of the A-pillar t r i m (A) back by hand to 5. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
remove the upper clip (B) f r o m the body (C). A-pillar t r i m and all the clips on the t r i m w i t h new
ones (see page 24-181).
6, If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove

the upper clip (A) f r o m the removed A-pillar t r i m (B)
and discard it. Then check the t r i m :
• To prevent the side curtain airbags f r o m

deploying improperly and possibly causing
injury, inspect the A-pillar t r i m and replace it if it
has any of the following damage:
- Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitening
in the A-pillar t r i m
- A n y cracks or stress-whitening in the clip
seating surfaces (C, D)
• Replace the lower clips (E) if they are damaged or
stress-whitened.
• Replace the upper clip with a new one.
4, Pull the A-pillar t r i m (A) by hand to detach the clips.

Pull the t r i m up f r o m the dashboard (B), then
remove it.
Fastener Locations
P>: Clip, 2
(Black)
20-58
7 . Before installing the A-pillar t r i m (A), whether it is 1 0 . Reinstall the A-pillar t r i m (A).
being replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove
the new upper clip ( B ) . -1 Insert the bottom of the t r i m into the
dashboard (B).
- 2 Place the trim over the A-pillar (C), and fit its
upper clip (D), and the lower clips into the
holes (E) in the A-pillar, then lightly push the
t r i m into place.
NOTE:
• Make sure the side curtain airbag is not
tucked under the clips or the t r i m ribs.
• Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too
hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not
hold the t r i m properly.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
(Black)
8. Check the overlap between the headliner and

A-pillar t r i m , and if necessary, adjust it (see page
24-183).
9. Carefully install a new upper clip (A) to the A-pillar

t r i m (B). Be sure that the g r o m m e t (C) is nearest to
the t o p of the pin (D) as shown.
11. Reinstall the front door opening seal.
20-59
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Ai
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the B-pillar lower t r i m (A).
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment -1 Pull the upper portion of the t r i m back to
Program; call 8 8 8 - 4 2 4 - 6 8 5 7 release the upper hooks (B).
- 2 Detach the lower clips by pulling the bottom of
B-Pillar U p p e r / L o w e r T r i m the t r i m back by hand.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the Fastener Locations
SRS c o m p o n e n t locations (see page 24-11) and the \> : Clip, 2
(White)
NOTE:
panels.
• Front door sill t r i m (see page 20-54)

• Rear door sill t r i m (see page 20-55)
• Front door opening seal, as needed (see step 4
on page 2 0 - 5 4 )
• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-56)
2 . Slide the front seat forward fully. 4. Remove the front seat belt lower anchor (see page
24-4).
5, Pull the bottom of the B-pillar upper trim (A) back 7. Pass the front seat belt (A) lower anchor out
by hand to detach the lower hooks (B). through a hole in the slider (B), then remove the
B-pillar upper trim (C).
6. Detach the upper clip by pulling the top of the

B-pillar upper trim (A). Pull the trim down to release 8. Remove the slider (A) from the B-pillar upper trim
the upper hooks (B) from the side curtain airbag (B).
B-pillar bracket (C).
Fastener Location
. [> : Clip, 1
(Pink)
(cont'd)
20-61
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar At (cont'd)
9. Install the t r i m in the reverse order of removal, and Slider engagement with shoulder anchor adjuster
note these items:
G
• If the clips (A) are damaged or stress-whitened,

• If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
the B-pillar upper and lower trim and all the clips
on the t r i m w i t h new ones (see page 24-181).
injury, inspect the t r i m and replace it if it has any
of the following damage:
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
upper t r i m (B) or the upper hooks (C), or any
stress-whitening in the upper part of the t r i m
- A n y cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
lower trim (D), or any breakage in the part (E)
fitted w i t h the B-pillar upper t r i m
- A n y cracks or stress-whitening in the clip
seating surfaces (F)
• Replace any damaged parts with new ones.
• Make sure the top of the t r i m overlaps w i t h the
headliner correctly (see page 24-183).
• Make sure the pin (G) on the front seat belt
shoulder anchor adjuster (H) and the hole (I) on
the back of the slider are engaged w h e n
installing the B-pillar upper t r i m .
• Make sure the t r i m hook is installed into the side
curtain airbag B-pillar bracket securely.
• Push the clip and the hooks into place securely.
• Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
20-62
Special Tools Required 1. Remove these items:
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment • Rear seat cushion (see page 20-118)
Program; call 888-424-6857 • Rear seat-back (see page 20-118)
• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 3 on
C-Pillar Trim page 20-56)
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 2. Hit the front clip in the C-pillar t r i m (A) with a
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the rubber mallet. The clip is near the triangle mark (B).
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before Hitting the clip breaks the projections (C) on the pin
doing repairs or service. (D) and pushes it into the g r o m m e t (E) on the body
(F).
NOTE:
• Follow the C-pillar t r i m installation procedure NOTE: The front clip must be replaced w i t h a new
carefully; improper installation could cause the side one w h e n the C-pillar t r i m is reinstalled.
curtain airbag to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
• Take care not to scratch the trim and the panels.
• The front clip in the C-pillar trim (A) consists of a
g r o m m e t (B) and a pin (C). The g r o m m e t expanded
w i t h the pin secures it to the body panel (D). The
projections (E) on the pin are broken during removal,
so the clip must be replaced w i t h a new one when the
t r i m is reinstalled.
(cont'd)
20-63
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
3. Pull the front of the C-pillar t r i m (A) back by hand to 5. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the
remove the front clip (B) f r o m the body (C). C-pillar t r i m and all the clips on the t r i m w i t h new
ones (see page 24-181).
6. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, remove

the front clip (A) f r o m the removed C-pillar t r i m (B)
and discard it. Then check the t r i m :

injury, inspect the C-pillar t r i m and replace it if it
has any of the following damage:
- Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitening
in the C-pillar t r i m
- Any cracks or stress-whitening in the clip
seating surfaces (C, D)
• If the clips (E) are damaged or stress-whitened,
• Replace the front clip with a new one.
4. Pull the C-pillar t r i m (A) by hand to detach the clips,

then pull the t r i m up f r o m the rear shelf (B).
Fastener Locations
> Clip, 3
(Red)
20-64
7. Before installing the C-pillar trim (A), whether it is 10. Reinstall the C-pillar t r i m (A).
being replaced or reinstalled, temporarily remove
the new front clip <B). -1 Insert the bottom of the t r i m into the rear shelf
(B).
-2 Place the t r i m over the C-pillar (C), and fit its
front clip (D) and the rear clips into the holes in
the C-pillar, then lightly push the t r i m into
place.
NOTE:
• Make sure the side curtain airbag is not
tucked under the clips or the t r i m ribs.
• Push lightly on the front clip. If you push too
hard, the clip will be damaged, and it will not
hold the t r i m properly.
Fastener Locations
t>: Clip, 3
8. Check the overlap between the headliner and

C-pillar t r i m , and if necessary, adjust it (see page
24-183).
9. Carefully reinstall the front clip (A) to the C-pillar

t r i m (B). Be sure that the g r o m m e t (C) is nearest to
the top of the pin (D) as shown.
11. Reinstall the rear door opening seal.
12. Reinstall the rear seat-back (see page 20-118) and

rear seat cushion (see page 20-118).
20-65
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Shelf Area
Special Tools Required 3. From the trunk compartment, release the six white
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * clips by tapping on t h e m .
Program; call 888-424-6857 Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 6
(White)
Rear Shelf
SRS components are located in this area. Review the

NOTE;
• Take care not to bend or scratch the rear shelf and
trim.
1. Remove these items;
• Rear seat cushion (see page 20-118)

• Rear seat-back (see page 20-118)
• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see page
20-55)
• C-pillar t r i m , both sides (see page 20-63)
2. From the trunk compartment, disconnect the high

mount brake light connector (A).
20-66
4. Lift the rear shelf (A) upward to detach the 6. Install the shelf in the reverse order of removal, and
remaining four clips, and release the hook (B) f r o m note these items:
the rear shelf. Release the pin (C) f r o m the hole on
the body. • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
Fastener Locations
• When installing the rear shelf, slip the rear seat
> : Clip, 4 belt through the slit and the rear center seat belt
(White)
into the lid opening in the rear shelf.
• Make sure the high mount brake light connector
is connected securely.
5. Release each tether anchor striker (D) out through

the hole in the rear shelf, and pull both rear seat
belts (E) and the rear center seat belt (F) out
through the slits (G) in the rear shelf.
20-67
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Trunk Area
Special Tools Required 4. Remove t h e clips, then remove the trunk front t r i m
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * panel (A) f r o m the trunk compartment.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 6
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands,
panels.
1. Remove the trunk floor (A).
5. Remove the clips (A, B), then remove the trunk side
t r i m panel (C). Release the wire harness (D) f r o m
the slit (E) in the t r i m panel.
Fastener Locations
A t> : C l i p , 3 B > : Clip, 1
2. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip near the trunk

rear t r i m panel.
3. Detach the clips, and release the hooks (A) by

pulling the trunk rear t r i m panel (B) up, then
remove it.
• Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 4
(White)
20-68
Trim Removal/installation - Trunk
Lid
6. If necessary, remove the trunk tool box (A).

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
NOTE:
- panels.
1. Remove the clips f r o m both trunk lid hinge covers

(A), then remove the covers.
7. Install the t r i m in the reverse order of removal, and

" note these items:

replace t h e m with new ones.
• Push the clips into place securely.
2. Remove the clips (A, B), then remove the trunk lid
t r i m (C).
Fastener Locations
A P> : Clip, 4 B > : Clip, 4

if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
t h e m w i t h new ones.
20-69
Interior Trim
Grab Handle Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Remove all of the clips (A) by pinching the hooks
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * w i t h a pair of pliers.
* Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool

set to avoid damage w h e n removing components.
1. Lower the grab handle (A), then pull out the stops
(B).
4. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the

grab handle w i t h a new one.
5. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, to

prevent the side curtain airbags f r o m deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect the
removed pieces and replace them if they have any
the following of damage:
• Any cracks or breakage in the grab handle (A).

B • Any cracks or stress-whitening in the stops (B).
2. While pinching the clips (A), release the hooks (B),

then remove the grab handle (C).
20-70
Headliner Removaf/lnstallafion
6. Install the clips (A) to the grab handle (B), then Special Tools Required
install the stops (C) fully into the clips. KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *

NOTE:
panels.
° Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to
C 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure

(see page 22-62), then wait at least 3 minutes
7. Position the grab handle (A) on the bracket (B), and before beginning work.
push on the grab handle until the clips (C) snap into
place securely. 2. Remove these items:

• Ceiling light (see page 22-183)
• Front seat belt upper anchor, both sides (see step
6 on page 24-4)
• B-pillar lower t r i m , both sides (see page 20-60)
• B-pillar upper t r i m , both sides (see page 20-60)
• C-pillar t r i m , both sides (see page 20-63)
• Grab handles, four places (see page 20-70)
3. Release the tabs (A) of the sunvisor cap (B) f r o m

the bracket (C) with an appropriate t r i m tool.
(cont'd)
20-71
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Remove the sunvisor cap (A) f r o m the bracket ( B ) . 6. Push the hook (A) w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver
wrapped in protective tape, and turn the holder (B)
90 °, then pull it out.
5. From both sides, remove the sunvisor (A).
-1 Unhook the sunvisor f r o m the holder (B). 7. Remove the map light assembly (A).
-2 Remove the screws w i t h a TORX T 2 5 bit.
-3 Remove the sunvisor f r o m the body. -1 Remove the lenses (B).
-2 Remove the bolts.
Fastener Locations
-3 If equipped, release the four tabs (C), then pull
• : TORX Screw, 2 out the navigation microphone (D).
-4 Disconnect the front individual map light
connector (E). If equipped, disconnect the
navigation microphone connector (F).
Fastener Locations
• : Bolt, 2
5 x 0.8 m m
5 N-m
(0.5 k g f - m ,
4 Ibfft)
20-72
8. Detach the harness clips (A) f r o m the front pillar (B), 12. Lower the headliner (A).
and disconnect the roof wire harness connector <C).
-1 Remove the front door opening seals (B), and
the rear door opening seals (C) f r o m each roof
portion.
-2 With the help of an assistant, detach the rear
clips by pulling the rear portion of the
headliner d o w n .
Fastener Locations
> ; Clip, 2
(White)
10. Slide both front seats all the w a y back, and recline
the seat-backs fully.
13. Lower the front of the headliner below the steering
11. Remove the bolts securing the parking brake base wheel. Rotate the liner, and pull it along w i t h the
frame (A), and lay it d o w n as needed. roof wire harness (D) out through the passenger's
front door. Do not bend the liner. Bending the liner
Fastener Locations
will crease or damage it.
(cont'd)
20-73
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)

14. If necessary, remove the cushion tape (A, B) 16. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,
fastening the interior wire harness (C) to the and note these items:
headliner (D), then remove the harness f r o m the
headliner. • If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
the headliner and the removed t r i m pieces with
Cushion tape A: P/N 91903-SNA-003 new ones (see page 24-181).
1 0 0 x 5 0 m m (3.94x1.97 in.) • To prevent the side curtain airbags f r o m
Cushion tape B: P/N 91902-SNA-003 deploying improperly and possibly causing
50 x 50 m m (1.97 x 1.97 in.) injury, inspect the removed pieces and replace
t h e m if they have any the following of damage:
Fastener Locations
- - A n y crease or tears in the headliner (A)
A, B [> : Cushion tape, 8
- Any cracks or breakage in the grab handle (B)
- Any damage around the grab handle holes (C)
or sunvisor holes in the headliner
- Any cracks in the sunvisor mounting bracket
(D)
- Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft
(E)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor base (F)
- Any cracks or breakage in the vanity mirror
base (G)
- A n y clip mounts (H) which have come off the
headliner
• When installing the grab handle, push on the
handle against the bracket (I) until the clips (J)
snap into place securely.
• Replace the removed cushion tape pieces with
15. If necessary, remove the side curtain airbag new ones.
mounting bolt (A) and the grab handle bracket • Check that both sides of the headliner are
mounting bolts (B), then remove the grab handle securely attached to the body.
bracket (C) f r o m each side by releasing the hooks • Make sure the headliner overlaps the t r i m pieces
(D). correctly (see page 24-183).
• When reinstalling the headliner through the front
Fastener Locations
passenger's door opening, be careful not to fold
A • : Bolt, 1 B ^ : Bolt, 2
or bend it. Also, be careful not to scratch the
5 x 0.8 m m body.
5 N-m
(0.5 kgf-m, 4 Ibf-ft) • Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
(see page 22-62). If the IMA battery level gauge
(BAT) displays no segments, start the engine,
and hold it between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm
w i t h o u t load (in Park or Neutral) until the BAT
displays at least three segments.
• Check for any DTCs that may have been set
during repairs, and clear t h e m .
5 x 0.8 mm
5 N-m
(0.5 kgf m, 4 Ibf-ft)
20-74
Carpet Replacement
Headliner Special Tools Required
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014*

NOTE;
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle, or twist the carpet.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
interior t r i m pieces.
1. Remove these items;

Grab handle
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-105)
• Front door sill t r i m , both sides (see page 20-54)
• Rear door sill t r i m , both sides (see page 20-55)
• Kick panels, both sides (see step 5 on page 20-55)
• B-pillar lower t r i m , both sides (see page 20-60)
• Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-90)
• Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-91)
• Center console (see page 20-79)
• Steering joint cover (see page 17-11)
(cont'd)
20-75
Interior Trim
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
2. '06-08 models: Push the knob (A) back to release 4. Remove the footrest (A).
the hooks (B), then pull up the accelerator pedal (C).
-1 Remove the lower clip (B) f r o m the stud bolt
(C) w i t h a 6 m m hexagon socket wrench.
-2 Remove the upper clip (D) f r o m the stud bolt
w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver.
Fastener Locations
B > : Clip, 1 D [> : Clip, 1
3. '09 model: Release the hooks (A) to remove the

accelerator pedal clip (B). While pushing d o w n the
back-up spring (C), pull back the accelerator pedal
(D) to release the hook (E).
5. Disconnect the SRS unit connector A, and detach

the wire harness clips (B). Using a TORX T30 bit,
remove the ground bolt (C).
C
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
U s e a T O R X T 3 0 bit.
20-76
6. Remove the bolts (A, B), then remove the center 8. Disconnect the parking brake cables f r o m the
pipe extension (C). equalizer (see page 19-37).
Fastener Locations
9. Remove the floor mat holders (A) f r o m the driver's
A • : Bolt, 2 B • : Bolt, 1 side.
10. Remove the clips.
Fastener Locations
7. Remove the rear heater joint duct (A).
> : Clip, 2
(cont'd)
20-77
Interior Trim
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
11. Release the Velcro fasteners (A), then pull the 12. Pull the seat harnesses (C) out through the hole in
carpet (B) out f r o m under the dashboard. the carpet, then remove the carpet.
13. Install the carpet in the reverse order of removal,

• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the

carpet.
• Make sure the seat harnesses and the parking
brake cables are routed correctly.
• Push the Velcro fasteners and the clips into place
securely.
• Push the accelerator pedal hooks into place
securely, and verify that the pedal is properly
fastened to the floor.
20-78
Consoles
Center Console Removal/Installation

Special Tools Required 3. Gently pull out along the rear of the center console
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * panel (A) to release the clips (B, C).
Fastener Locations
B > : Clip, 3 C [ > : Clip, 2

NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the front s e a t the dashboard,
and related parts.
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover

(see page 20-91).
2. Detach the clips by pulling the front inner panel (A)

up.
Fastener Locations
[> : Clip, 4
4. Pull the center console panel (A) up and rearward

to release the tabs (B).
(cont'd)
20-79
Consoles
Center Console Removal/Installation (cont'd)
5. Open the armrest (A), then remove the console box 7. Slide both front seats all the w a y back, and fully
mat (B) and the bolts. recline both seat-backs.
Fastener Locations
8. Slide the center console (A) rearward to release the
• : Bolt 2 I pins (B) f r o m the bracket (C).
B C
6. Remove the bolts and the clips f r o m the front

portion of the center console. Disconnect the
console subharness connector (A), and detach the
connector clip (B). 9. Lift up the rear of the console (A), and remove it
f r o m the dashboard.
Fastener L o c a t i o n s
• ; Bolt 2 > " Clip, 2
10. If equipped, disconnect the seat heater switch

connectors (B).
20-80
Irk
1
Center Console Disassembly/
Reassembly
11. Install the console in the reverse order of removal,
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly. KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, • Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
replace them w i t h new ones. Program; call 888-424-6857
• When installing the center console panel, install NOTE:
the tabs (A) into the notch (B) of the parking brake • Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to
base frame (C). avoid damage w h e n removing components.
• Take care not to scratch the center console, the
dashboard, and related parts.
2. Remove the center console armrest (see page

20-82).
3. Remove the screws with a TORX T20 bit, and

disconnect the console accessory power socket
connector (A).
Fastener Locations
• TORX Screw, 8
(cont'd)
20-81
Consoles
Center Console Disassembly/ Center Console Armrest
Reassembly (cont'd) Replacement
4. Release the hooks (A) and the pins (B), then NOTE: Take care not to scratch the armrest, the center
separate the left console side panel (C), the right console, and related parts.
console side panel ID), the console beverage holder
(E) and the console box (F). Detach the harness 1. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
clips (G), then remove the console subharness (H)
f r o m the hooks (I). 2. Gently pull out the center console rear cover (A) to
detach the clips.
A
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 5
5. Release the hooks (A, B), then separate the console

upper box (C) and the console lower box (D).
3. Open the armrest (A), pull the pin (B) off the
armrest, then separate the armrest and the center
console (C).
4. Install the center console armrest in the reverse

6. Assemble the console in the reverse order of order of removal, and if the clips are damaged or
disassembly, and make sure the console stress-whitened, replace them w i t h new ones.
subharness connector is plugged in properly.
20-82
Armrest Lock Replacement
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the armrest and related 4. Slide the armrest (A) all the w a y forward, remove
parts. the screws w i t h a TORX T15 bit, then remove the
armrest frame (B).
1. Remove the center console armrest (see page
Fastener Locations
20-82).
• : TORX Screw, 2
2. Remove the screws w i t h a TORX T15 bit. Slide the

armrest liner (A) d o w n w a r d to release the hooks (B),
then remove the armrest liner and the armrest
spring (C).
Fastener Locations
• : TORX Screw, 2
5. From the back of the armrest frame (A), push the

edge of the armrest lock pin (B) w i t h a flat-tip
screwdriver, then slide the armrest lock pin fully.
3. Remove the screws w i t h a TORX T15 bit.
Fastener Locations
• : TORX Screw, 2
(cont'd)
20-83
Consoles
#
Armrest Lock Replacement (cont d)
6. Remove the armrest lock (A) w i t h the armrest lock
pin (B) f r o m the armrest frame (C).
7. Remove the armrest lock pin (A), then separate the

armrest lock (B) and the armrest lock spring (C).
8 . Install the armrest lock in the reverse order of

removal.
20-84
Dashboard
Instrument Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Detach the clips along the lower edge of the
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * instrument panel (A).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
NOTE;
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC t r i m tool set to
• Subdisplay visor (see page 20-87)

• Navigation unit, with navigation system:
- '06-08 models (see page 23-143)
- '09 model (see page 23-330)
• Audio unit, w i t h o u t navigation system:
- '06-08 models (see page 23-70)
2. Remove the screws.

Detach the clips along the upper edge of the
Fastener Locations
instrument panel (A). Gently pull out the instrument
• : Screw, 3 panel to release the hooks (B) f r o m the holder (C) of
the gauge control module.
Fastener Locations
0 : Clip, 6
Install the instrument panel in the reverse order of


20-85
Dashboard
Gauge Control Module (Speedo) Trim Removai/instaliation
Special Tools Required 2. Detach the clips with a t r i m tool, and release the
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * hooks (A) and the pins (B) along the edge of the
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment gauge control module (speedo) t r i m (C), then
Program; call 888-424-6857 remove the t r i m .
ra5tei~i£ir L o c a t i o n s
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related > : Clip, 5
parts.
• Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set t o
1. Pry up on the inside edge of the gauge control

module (speedo) t r i m (A) with a t r i m tool to detach
the clips.
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 4

note these items:

20-86
Sufodasplay Visor Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Pull the back of the driver's pocket (A) by hand f r o m
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * the driver's lower cover opening t o release the clips
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment (B) and the hook (C) on the outside;
Fastener Locations
NOTE: B, E t> : C l i p , 4

9
Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related
parts.
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover

(see page 20-89).
2. Tilt the steering column d o w n , and pull it fully out.
Fastener Location
• : Screw, 1
5. Pry up on the inside edge of the subdisplay visor

(D) with a trim tool to detach the clip (E), and
release the pin (F).
(cont'd)
20-87
Dashboard
Subdisplay Visor RemovaS/EnsfaSIation (cont'd)
6. Detach the clips along the upper edge of the 8. If necessary, remove the screws, then remove the
subdisplay visor (A). Gently pull out the visor to illumination control switch (A), a n d the driver's
release the hooks (B). pocket (B) f r o m the subdisplay visor (C).
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations
D>: C l i p , 6 • : Screw, 5
9. Install the subdisplay visor in the reverse order of

• Make sure all connectors are plugged in properly.

20-88
Driver's Dashboard Lower Cower Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Detach the upper clips, and release the hook (A)
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014* and the pin (B) by pulling the driver's dashboard
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment lower cover (C) back.
Fastener Locations
NOTE; t > ; Clip, §

parts.
1. Tilt the steering column fully u p w a r d .
2. Gently pull out on the lower edge of the dashboard

lower cover (A) to detach the lower clips.
Fastener Locations
O: Clip, 3
4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,


Dashboard
Driver's Dashboard Undercover Center Pocket Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
related parts.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
related parts. 1. Disassemble the dashboard/steering hanger beam
(see page 20-101).
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (A).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the center pocket
-1 Turn the lock knob (B) 90 °. (A).
-2 Gently pull d o w n the rear edge to detach the
Fastener Locations
clips.
-3 Pull the undercover away to release the pin (C) • : Screw, 4
f r o m the holder (D).

-4 For some models: Disconnect the foot light
illumination connector (E).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 2
3. Install the center pocket in the reverse order of

removal.
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of


• Make sure the foot light illumination connector is
plugged in properly (for some models).
20-90
Passenger's Dashboard Undercover Glove Box Removal/Installation
SRS component locations (see page 2 4 - 1 1 ) and the
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and precautions and procedures,(see page 2 4 - 1 3 ) before
related parts. doing repairs or service.
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (A). NOTE; Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
related parts.
-1 Gently pull out the rear edge to detach the clips
(B, C). 1. Remove the bolts.
-2 Pull the undercover away to release the pins
Fastener Locations
(D) f r o m the holders (E).
- 3 For some models: Disconnect the foot light • : Bolt, 2
illumination connector (F).
Fastener Locations
B > : Clip, 2 C > : Clip, 2
5x 0.8 m m
5 N-m
(0.5 k g f - m , 4 Ibf-ft)
2. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove

box stops (B) on each side of the glove box by
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of pushing them in, then remove the glove box.
• Make sure the foot light illumination connector is

plugged in properly (for some models).
3 . Install the glove box in the reverse order of

removal.
20-91
Dashboard
Dashboard Went Removal/installation

Special Tools Required Driver's Center Vent
* Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
Program; call 888-424-6857 related parts.
Driver's Outer Vent 1. Remove these items:
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and • Navigation unit, w i t h navigation system:
related parts. - '06-08 models (see page 23-143)
1. Remove the subdisplay visor (see page 20-87). • Audio unit, without navigation system:
2. Remove the screws securing the driver's outer vent - ' ' 0 9 model (see page 23-232)
(A), then remove the driver's outer vent f r o m the
subdisplay visor (B). 2. Remove the screws securing the driver's center
vent (A), then remove the driver's center vent f r o m
Fastener Locations
the center panel (B).
• : Screw, 3
Fastener Locations
• ; Screw, 3
3. Install the center vent In the reverse order of

- removal.
3. Install the outer vent In the reverse order of

removal.
20-92
Passenger's Vent 2. From inside the glove box opening, push on the
side hooks (A) by hand to release t h e m . Gently pull
SRS components are located in this area. Review the out the side vent (B) to release the other hooks (C),
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the then remove the passenger's vent.
doing repairs or service. Outer
NOTE;
.parts.
1. While holding the glove box (A), release the glove

box stops (B) on each side of the glove box by
pushing t h e m in, then let the glove box hang d o w n .
3. Install the passenger's vents in the reverse order of

removal.
20-93
Dashboard
Glove Box Striker Replacement Dashboard Side Trim Removal/
Installation
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and
doing repairs or service. related parts.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard and 1. Remove the dashboard side t r i m (A).
related parts.
-1 Gently pull up the rear edge to release the rear
1. While holding the glove box, release the glove box hooks (B).
stops on each side of the glove box by pushing -2 Pull the t r i m away to release the front hook (C)
them in, then let the glove box hang d o w n (see step f r o m the A-pillar t r i m (D).
1 on page 20-93).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the glove box

striker (A).
Fastener Locations
• : Screw, 2
2. Install the side t r i m in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal.
20-94
Side Defogger Vent Trim Removal/ Dashboard/Steering Hanger Bomm
Installation Removal/Installation

KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 *
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment • Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Program; call 888-424-6857 Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: SRS components are located in this area. Review the

• Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the
avoid damage when removing components. precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard and related doing repairs or service.
parts.
NOTE:
1. Insert the appropriate t r i m tool into a gap between • Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to
the side defogger vent t r i m (A) and the dashboard avoid damage when removing components.
(B), and release the hook (C). • Have an assistant help you when removing and
installing the dashboard/steering hanger beam.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, the body and
other related parts.

(see page 22-62), then wait at least 3 minutes
before beginning work.
• Driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 20-89)

• Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-90)
• Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-91)
2. Install the side defogger vent t r i m in the reverse • Center console (see page 20-79)
order of removal. • Glove box (see page 20-91)
• Kick panel, both sides (see page 20-54)
• Steering column (see page 17-11)
• EPS control unit (see page 17-82)
(cont'd)
20-95
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
.Driver's side Middle portion
3. Remove the bolt securing the under-dash fuse/ 5. Disconnect the SRS unit connector (A), and detach
relay box (A). Disconnect the roof wire harness the wire harness clips (B). Remove the ground bolt
connector (B), then lower the box. (C) w i t h a TORX T30 bit.
Fastener Location
• Bolt 1
C
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
U s e a T O R X T 3 0 bit.
6. Disconnect the A/C subharness connector (A) in the

glove box opening.
4. From under the dash, disconnect the engine

compartment wire harness connectors (C), the
driver's door wire harness connectors (D), and the
floor wire harness connectors (E) f r o m the
dashboard w i r e harness connectors or the under-
20-96
Passenger's side 8. Remove the special bolts (A) f r o m outside the
passenger's door.
7. From under the dash, disconnect the passenger's
door wire harness connectors (A) and the antenna -1 Remove the caps (B).
connector (B). -2 Loosen the special bolts until they disengage
f r o m the threads on the hanger beam sleeves
(C) . Continue loosening the bolts until they
engage the inside threads of the adjusting nuts
(D) . The thread lock on the special bolts makes
the special bolts and the adjusting nuts turn
together.
-3 Tighten the special bolts to turn the adjusting
nuts until they bottom in the sleeves. This
creates a gap (E) between the adjusting nuts
and the body.
-4 Loosen the special bolts to disengage them
f r o m the adjusting nuts. Remove the special
bolts.
(cont'd)
20-97
Dashboard

9. If necessary, remove the dashboard side cover (A). 11. Remove the caps (A), then remove the bolts
(B, C, D) f r o m outside the driver's door.
-1 Gently pull out along the rear edge to release
Fastener Locations
the hooks (B).
-2 Gently pull out on the side cover to release the B • : Bolt, 3 C • : Bolt, 1 D • : Bolt, 4
hooks (C), then remove the side cover.
8 x 1.25 m m
22 N m
(2.2 k g f - m
1.0 m m
N-m
0 kgf-m,
~ Ibf-ft)
10. If the adjusting nuts (A) were not fully bottomed in

the sleeves in step 8, finish screwing the adjusting
nuts into the sleeves w i t h a 21 m m open-end 1.0 m m
8 N-m
wrench (B). In this case, replace the special bolts 8 x 1.25 m m (1.0 k g f - m ,
w i t h new ones because the thread lock is w o r n out. 2 2 N-m 7.2 Ibf-ft)
(2.2 k g f - m , 16 Ibf-ft)
20-98
12. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it f r o m the 13. Remove the bolt, then remove the center pipe
guide pins (B). Carefully remove the dashboard extension (A).
through the front door opening. Take care not to
Fastener Location
scratch the body w i t h the adjusting nuts on the
passenger's side. • : Bolt, 1
NOTE: Do not rest the dashboard on its lower

center cover opening, or it may be damaged. Lay it
on its front or back.
(cont'd)
20-99
Dashboard
14. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of Special bolt tightening on passenger's side
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire

harnesses are not pinched.
properly, and the antenna lead and each cable
are connected properly.
• Before reinstalling the dashboard, screw the
special bolts (A) into the adjusting nuts (B), and
check that they turn together. If they do not
turn together, replace the special bolts.
• After setting the dashboard in the body, reinstall
all of the m o u n t i n g bolts but do not tighten
t h e m . First tighten the driver's side bracket bolts
to the specified torque. Next, tighten the special
bolts. As you tighten the bolts, the adjusting
nuts screw out of the sleeves (C) until they
contact the body. Continue tightening the special
bolts to the specified torque.
• Tighten all remaining mounting bolts to the
specified torque.
• Apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the A
8 x 1.25 mm
bolts securing the center bracket and the 2 2 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 1.6 Ibf-ft)
dashboard before reinstallation.
• Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
(see page 22-62). If the IMA battery level gauge
and hold it between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm
without load (in Park or Neutral) until the BAT
displays at least three segments.
during repairs, and clear t h e m .
20-100
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Disassembly/Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the bolts.

• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment Fastener Locations
Program; call 888-424-6857 • :Boit, 5
NOTE:
parts.
• Take care not to bend the brackets.
1. Remove the dashboard/steering hanger beam

(see page 20-95).
2. Remove these items f r o m the dashboard;
• Instrument panel (see page 20-85)

• Gauge control module (speedo) t r i m (see page
20-86) 4. From the back of the dashboard, release the hooks
• Subdisplay visor (see page 20-87) (A), then remove the center joint duct (B).
• Navigation unit, w i t h navigation system;
- '06-08 models (see page 23-143)
• Audio unit, w i t h o u t navigation system:
• Passenger's airbag (see page 24-185)
• Gauge control module (speedo) (see page
22-255)
• Gauge control module (tach) (see page 22-255)
(cont'd)
20-101
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Disassembly/Reassembly (cont'd)
5. From the back of the dashboard, disconnect the 6. From the back of the dashboard/ remove the
tweeter connectors (A), the front accessory power screws (A, B), then separate the dashboard (C) f r o m
socket connector (B), and the sunlight sensor the steering hanger beam (D).
connector (C), then detach the harness clips (D).
Fastener Locations
• Make sure the dashboard wire harness is not

pinched.
properly.
20-102
Seats
REAR S E A T
Seat-backCover Replacement, p a g e 20-119
Seat C u s h i o n C o v e r R e p l a c e m e n t , page 2 0 - 1 2 1
FRONT S E A T
(Driver's)
A c t i v e Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-104
Removal/Installation, p a g e 20-105
Seat F r a m e Replacement, page 20-109
Seat-back Cover R e p l a c e m e n t , page 20-110
Seat Cushion Cover Replacement, page 20-114
FRONTSEAT
(Passenger's)
Active Head Restraint Inspection, page 20-104
Seat F r a m e R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 20-107
Seat-back Cover Replacement, page 20-110
Seat C u s h i o n Cover Replacement, page 20-114
20-103
Seats
Front Seat Active Head Restraint Inspection
NOTE: If the vehicle has been in a collision, always Inspection

inspect the active head restraints, even if they appear
reusable, by doing the following procedure. 3. Fold the seat-back f o r w a r d , then recline the seat-
back to the first lock position, and adjust the head
Resetting Head Restraint Position restraint to the highest position,
1. Push the head restraint (A) forward fully f r o m the 4. Apply masking tape on the top of the head restraint.
locked position to release the inertial lock (B).
5. Make marks (A) on both sides at 250 m m (9.84 in.)
upward f r o m the roots of the head restraint frame
(B) along the back of the head restraint (C) surface.
Make a center of these points as a datum point (D).
Push the head restraint (A) f o r w a r d , and measure

the level amount of the head restraint movement.
The head restraint should move than 50 m m (2.0 in.)
without resistance. If it is less than 50 m m (2.0 in.),
2. Slowly raise the head restraint into the normal or the head restraint doesn't move smoothly,
position. replace the seat-back frame assembly:
• Passenger's seat (see page 20-107)

• Driver's seat (see page 20-109)
A b o v e 50 m m (2.0 in.)
(Level)
20-104
Front Seat Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the lower anchor bolt (A).
SRS components are located In this area. Review the

NOTE:
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h
protective tape to prevent damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers.
• Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC t r i m tool set to (3.3 k g f m , 24 Ibfft)
5. Remove the seat track outer end covers (A) and the
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure seat track center end covers (B) f r o m the back of
(see page 22-62), then wait at least 3 minutes both seat tracks.
before beainnina work.
(cont'd)
20-105
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
6. Remove the rear seat track bolts. 8. Lift up the front seat, then detach the harness clips
(A), and disconnect the side airbag connector (B),
Fastener Locations the seat belt switch connector (C), the seat belt
• : Bolt, 2 buckle tensioner connector (D). On the driver's seat,
disconnect the seat heater subharness connector
(E), if equipped, and the seat position sensor
connector. On the passenger's seat, disconnect the
seat heater subharness connector (F), if equipped,
and the ODS unit subharness connector.
Passenger's seat
10 x 1.25 mm
7. Slide the front seat rearward fully, and remove the

front seat track bolts.
Fastener Locations
• Bolt, 2
10 x 1.25 m m
20-106
Front Seat Frame Replacement
9. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the Passenger's Seat
front seat through the front door opening.
Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions
10. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and (see page 24-27):
note these items:
• Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
• Apply m e d i u m strength liquid thread lock to the seat components)
seat mounting bolts before reinstallation. • Replacement of the front seat weight sensors
• Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified • After a vehicle collision
torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat (A)
all the w a y back and tighten © and @, then slide NOTE:
it f o r w a r d and tighten ® and ® . The driver's seat e
Put on gloves to protect your hands.
is s h o w n ; the passenger's seat is similar. • Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide locks.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten t h e m • Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of
to specification w i t h a torque wrench. the seat tracks.
9
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly. If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat
• Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure frame and related parts w i t h new ones (see page
(see page 22-62). If the IMA battery level gauge 24-181).
and hold it between 3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm 1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-105).
w i t h o u t load (in Park or Neutral) until the BAT
displays at least three segments. A, Remove these items:
during repairs, and clear t h e m . • Front seat-back cover (see page 20-110)
• Front seat cushion cover (see page 20-114)
Fastener Locations
• ODS unit (see page 24-205)
• : Bolt, 4
• Front seat belt buckle (see page 24-6)
3. Remove the clip, then remove the recline inner

covers (A) f r o m the seat frame (B), and remove the
module holder (C).
Fastener Locations
t > : Clip, 4
(cont'd)
20-107
Seats
Front Seat Frame Replacement (cont'd)
Remove the bolts, and release the seat cushion 6. If necessary, remove the bushing (A, B) f r o m the
springs (A) f r o m the hooks (B), then remove the seat cushion frame (C).
seat cushion f r a m e (C).
Fastener Locations
j r : Bolt, 4 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m ,
7.2 Ibf-ft)
B
(White)
7. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of
5. Remove the front seat weight sensors (see page • Make sure the ODS unit connector is plugged in
24-203). properly.
• Make sure the seat w i r i n g harnesses are routed
properly and are not pinched.
• Calibrate the ODS unit, if necessary (see page
24-27).
20-108
Driver's Seat 3. Remove the clips, then remove the recline inner
covers (A), the outer upper rail cover (B), the inner
Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor upper rail cover (C) and the module holder (D) f r o m
after any of these actions (see page 24-29): the seat frame (E).
Fastener Locations
• Driver's seat position sensor replacement
• Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail) > : Clip, 3
replacement
NOTE:
• Apply oil t o the pivot portions of the slide lock.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions
and pivot portions of the seat tracks.
• If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat
frame and related parts with new ones (see page
24-181).
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-105).
• Front seat back cover/pad (see page 20-110)

• Front seat cushion cover/pad (see page 20-114)
• Driver's seat position sensor (see page 24-207)
• Front seat belt buckle (see page 24-6)
4. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of

• Make sure the driver's seat position sensor

connector is plugged in properly.
• if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
• Make sure the seat wiring harnesses are routed
properly and are not pinched.
20-109
Seats
Front Seat-back Cower Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. From under the seat cushion, detach the side
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * airbag connector clip (A). On the driver's seat,
• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment disconnect the seat-back heater connector (B).
Passenger's seat
A
• Check the operation of the driver's seat position

sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-29):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
• Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions
(see page 24-27):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (Including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the front seat weight sensors
- After a vehicle collision
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
• On the passenger's seat, do not touch the OPDS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away f r o m oil. Driver's seat
Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail.
2. Remove the head restraint.
4. Release the hooks (C) f r o m the seat cushion frame

spring (D). Remove the wire ties (E) and pull the
side airbag harness (F) and seat-back heater
harness (G) (driver's seat) out through slits (H) In
the seat cushion cover (I). Turn over the seat
cushion cover, and release the hooks (J).
20-110
5. Detach the clips and hooks (A) by pulling the 7. Detach the harness clip (A), and pull the side airbag
bottom of the back cover (B) back, then gently pull harness (B) out through the harness hole (C) in the
d o w n the cover to release the hooks (C) f r o m the seat-back cover and seat frame. Passenger's seat is
seat frame, and remove the panel. s h o w n ; driver's seat is similar.
Fastener Locations
t>: Clip, 2
8. Remove the side airbag (see page 24-187).
9. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-

back cover (B). Driver's seat is s h o w n ; passenger's
seat is similar.
6. Pull the side airbag harness (A) out through the

loop (B), and release the hook (C), then pull the
seat-back cover (D) back.
(cont'd)
20-111
Seats
Front Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
10. Turn over the reinforcing cloth (A), then release the 12. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the head restraint
hooks (B) f r o m the module holder (C). guides (A), and remove t h e m f r o m the seat-back.
'06-07 models
11. Passenger's seat: Disconnect the OPDS sensor

connectors (A) and the ODS unit subharness
connector (B) f r o m the ODS unit <C), and pull t h e m '08-09 models
in through the hole in the seat frame. Pull the ODS
unit subharness (D) out through the harness hole
(E) in the seat-back cover (F). Detach the harness
clips (G), and remove the wire tie (H).
20-112
13. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) f r o m the seat 15. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
(B). and note these items:
• Reinitialize the ODS unit (see page 24-26).

• To prevent wrinkles w h e n installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the clips, hooks,
and hook strips.
• Replace any clips (A) y o u removed w i t h new
ones.
• Before installing the side airbag (B), make sure
B the reinforcing cloth (C) is fixed on the seat-back
frame (D) securely.
• Make sure the side airbag harness and seat
heater harness (some driver's seat) or ODS unit
subharness (passenger's seat) are routed
properly.
14. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the
w a y around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat-back cover.
Replace. Replace.
20-113
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the recline cover (A).

• Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment -1 Remove the recline knob (B) and the screw.
Program; call 888-424-6857 -2 Gently pull out the cover, then detach the clip,
and release the hooks (C).
Fastener Locations
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before • . Screw, 1 > : Clip, 1
• Check the operation of the driver's seat position

sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-29);
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement Passenger's seat
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
• Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions
(see page 24-27):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the front seat weight sensors
- After a vehicle collision
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. Driver's seat
2. Remove the front seat belt buckle (see page 24-6).
3. Pull back the cap (A) to release the hooks (B), and
remove the screws, then remove the height
adjuster handle (C).
Fastener Locations
• : Screw, 2
20-114
5. Gently pull out the center cover (A), then detach the Driver's seat
clip, and release the hooks (B). Driver's, seat is
s h o w n ; passenger's seat is similar. B
Fastener Location
> : Clip, 1
6. If equipped, disconnect the seat heater connector(s)

(A) and side airbag connector (B) f r o m under the
seat cushion.
7. Release the hooks (C) f r o m the seat cushion frame
Passenger's seat spring (D). Remove the wire ties (E), and pull the
side airbag harness (F) and seat-back heater
harness (G) (driver's seat) out through the slits (H)
in the seat cushion cover (I). Turn over the seat
cushion cover, and release the hooks (J).
8. Pull the side airbag harness (A) out through the

loop (B).
A'
(cont'd)
20-115
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover Replacement (cont'd)
9. Release the hook strips (A, B) f r o m the seat frame 10. Release the hook (A) f r o m under the seat cushion.
(C).
Passenger' seat
11. Remove the seat cushion cover/pad (A) f r o m the

Driver's seat seat frame (B).
20-116
12. Release the hooks (A) f r o m under the seat cushion 14. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
(B). and note these items:
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back

over the pad before securing the clips, the hooks,
and the hook strips.
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones.
13. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the
w a y around, and release the clips (A), then remove
Replace.
20-117
Seats
Rear Seat Removal/Installation
NOTE; Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat 3. Remove all of the head restraints.
covers.
4. Release the center seat belt (A) f r o m the center belt
1. Remove the bolt between the seat-back (A) and the guide (B).
seat cushion (B).
Fastener Location
• : Bolt, 1
5. Remove the bolts (A, B) securing the seat-back (C).
Fastener Locations
A • : Bolt, 1 B • : Bolt, 2
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
20-118
L .J
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement

6. Lift the seat-back (A) up to release the wire loops NOTE:
w i t h collars (B) f r o m the hooks (C) on the body, • Take care not to tear or damage the seat covers.
then remove the seat-back. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1 . Remove the seat-back (see page 2 0 - 1 1 8 ) .
2. Remove the screw, then remove the center belt

guide (A).
Fastener Location
• : Screw, 1
7. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
3. From the back of the seat-back, pass the four
• Guide the belts over the front of the seat-back as retainers (A) through the slots in the seat-back pad,
y o u install it. release all the upholstery rings (B), and fold back
• Before attaching the rear seat-back and cushion, the seat-back cover (C).
make sure there are no twists or kinks in the seat
belts.
• W h e n installing the seat cushion, slip the seat
belt buckles through the slits in the seat cushion.
(cont'd)
20-119
Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover Replacement (cont'd)
4. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the head restraint 5. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover (A) all the
guides (A), and remove t h e m f r o m the seat-back. w a y around, release the upholstery rings (B), and
release the hooks (C) of the horizontal wires (D)
'06-07 models f r o m the vertical wires (E) on the pad, then remove
'08-09 models
6. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back

over the pad before securing the upholstery rings.
• Replace all of the upholstery rings (A) fastening
the seat-back cover (B) and the pad wires (C) with
new ones using commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (D).
20-120
Rear Seat Cushion Cover Replacement
NOTE; 4. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
• Take care not to tear the s e a m s or damage the seat and note these items:
covers.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat
cushion cover, make sure the material is
1. Remove the s e a t cushion ( s e e p a g e 20-118). stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the upholstery rings.
2. From the back of the seat-back, pass both lower • Replace all of the upholstery rings (A) fastening
retainers (A) through the slots in the seat cushion the seat cushion cover (B) and the pad wires (C)
pad, release all the upholstery rings ( B ) , and fold with new ones using commercially available
back the seat cushion cover. upholstery ring pliers (D).
3. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
way around, and release the upholstery rings (A),
f r o m the seat cushion cover (B) through the hole in
the seat cushion pad, then remove the seat cushion
cover.
20-121
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: '09 model

• Have an assistant help you w h e n removing and
Fastener Locations
installing the front bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper or the body. A • : Bolt, 2 B • : Screw, 2 C j > : Clip, 4
• Front fender t r i m (see page 20-138)

• Front grille cover (see page 20-139)
2. Remove the bolts ( A ) , the screws (B), and the clips

(C, D) securing the front bumper (E).
NOTE: To release the clips C and D, pry up on the

center pin at the notch ( F ) .
'06-08 models
Fastener Locations
A ^ : Bolt, 2 B • : S c r e w , 2 C [ > : C l i p , 4 D|>: Clip, 4
6x1.0 mm F F
Ibf-ft)
9.8 N m 3. Pull on the front bumper ( A ) at the wheel arch areas
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 to release it f r o m the hooks ( B ) on the side spacers
(C).
20-122
4. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the 6. Release the hooks (A), then remove the front
wheel arch portion a w a y f r o m the side spacer (A), bumper absorber (B) f r o m the front bumper beam
p u l l the front bumper to r e l e a s e the bumper f r o m (C).
the hooks (B) on the corner upper beam (C).
5. Remove the front bumper (A).

7. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
• Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks

(of both corner upper beams and side spacers)
on each side securely.
20-123
Bumpers
Front Bumper Lower Grille Replacement
r
09 Model 3. Release the hooks (F), then remove the left front
bumper lower grille (G) and the right front bumper
NOTE: lower grille (H) f r o m the front bumper.
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. 4. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal,
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-122).
2. Detach the clips and release the hooks (A, B), then replace them w i t h new ones.
remove the center front bumper lower grille (C) • Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
f r o m the front bumper (D).
NOTE: To release the clips, pry up on the center pin

at the notch (E).
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 6
20-124
Front Air Spoiler Replacement
'06-08 Models '03 Model
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper. • Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the clips (A, B) securing the air spoiler (C). 1. Detach the clips (A), then remove the left front
bumper air spoiler (B) and the right front bumper
NOTE: To release the clips A and B, pry up on the air spoiler (C) f r o m the front bumper (D).
center pin at the notch (D).
Fastener Locations at the notch (E).
Fastener Locations
A, F > : Clip, 16
D D D D
2. Pull the front air spoiler out to detach the hooks (E)
and remove the spoiler.
3 . Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal: 2. Detach the clips (F) and release the hooks (G), then
remove the center front bumper air spoiler (H) f r o m
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, the front bumper.
(cont'd)
20-125
Bumpers
Front Air Spoiler Replacement Front Bumper Air Deflector

(cont'd) Replacement
3. Install the spoiler sections in the reverse order of NOTE:

removal; • Take care not to scratch the front bumper.
replace t h e m with new ones. 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-122).
• Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
2. Remove the screws, and release the hooks (A)
('09 model), then remove the front bumper air
deflector (B) f r o m the back of the front bumper (C).
'06-08 models
Fastener Locations
• : Screw, 5
20-126
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
'09 model NOTE;
Fastener Locations
installing the rear bumper.
• : Screw, 2
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper or the body.
1. Remove the clips (A), screws (B, C), and bolts (D)
securing the rear bumper (E).
Fastener Locations
A > : Clip, 2 B ^ : S c r e w , 2 C ^ : S c r e w , 6 D ^ : Bolt, 2
3 . Install the air deflector in the reverse order of

removal.
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
20-127
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation :'d)
2 . Pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas 4. W i t h the help of an assistant, pull the rear bumper
to release it f r o m the hooks (B) on the side spacers to release the bumper (A) f r o m the hooks (B) on the
(C). upper bracket (C).
3. With the help of an assistant w h i l e pulling the 5. Remove the hooks (A), then remove the rear
wheel arch portion away f r o m the side spacer (A), bumper absorber (B) f r o m the rear bumper beam
pull the rear bumper to release the bumper f r o m (C).
the hooks (B) on the side bracket (C).
6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks

(of both the side bracket and side spacers) on
each side securely.
20-128
Hood
Hood Adjustment
• Front fender t r i m (see page 20-138)

• Cowl cover (see page 20-140)
2. Slightly loosen of the hinge mounting bolts (A) on both sides.
(1.0 kgf-m, 7 2 Ibf ft)
3. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence:
• Adjust the hood right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes in the hood
hinges (B).
• Turn the hood edge cushions (C), in or out as necessary, to make the hood fit flush with the body at the front and
side edges.
4. Adjust the hood latch (D) to obtain the proper position at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left
until the striker (E) is centered in the hood latch.
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
20-129
Hood
Hood Adjustment (cont'd) Hood Seal Replacement
6. Check that the hood opens properly and closes 1. Detach the clips w i t h a clip remover, then remove
securely. the hood seals (A) and the hood corner seals (B).
Take care not to scratch the hood.
7. Apply touch-up paint t o the hinge mounting bolts
Fastener Locations.
and around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
> : C l i p , 12
8 . Apply multipurpose grease to the hood latch and

hood hinges as indicated by the arrows.
2. Install the seals in the reverse order of removal,

and if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
9. Reinstall all of the removed parts.
20-130
Hood Insulator Replacement
1. Detach the clips w i t h a clip remover. Release the
hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (B). Take
care not to scratch the hood.
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 7
Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal,


Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid Adjustment
1. Remove the rear shelf (see page 20-66).
2. Pry up on the notch (A) to release the rear hooks (B) and pivot the striker t r i m cap (C) on the front hooks (D), then
remove the cap.
3 . Slightly loosen the mounting bolts (E).
4. Adjust the trunk lid alignment in the following sequence:
• Adjust the trunk lid hinges (F) right and left, as well as forward and rearward, by using the elongated holes. Take
care not to hit the rear w i n d o w w h e n loosening the bolts.
• Turn the trunk lid edge cushions (G), in or out as necessary, to make the trunk lid fit flush w i t h the body at the
rear and side edges.
• Adjust the fit between the trunk lid and the trunk lid opening by moving the striker (H).
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
6. Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks securely.
7. Reinstall all removed parts.
20-132
Trunk Lid Torsion Bar Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the torsion bar center clip (A) f r o m the
Torsion bar assembly tool 07AAF-SNAA100 body.
1. Remove the torsion bars (A) f r o m the torsion bar

center clip (B).
4. Install the torsion bars in the reverse order of

B removal, and note these items:
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the • The shapes of the right torsion bar (A) and the
torsion bars with the torsion bar assembly tool left torsion bar (B) are s h o w n . Install the torsion
f r o m both trunk lid hinges. First remove the left bars properly.
torsion bar (A), then remove the right torsion bar • Adjust the torsion bars forward or rearward w i t h
(B). the torsion bar assembly tool.
• The torsion bars were installed at the factory in
the normal position, as s h o w n .
• Make sure the trunk lid opens properly and locks
securely.
• =Higher t e n s i o n
20-133
Trunk Lid
Trunk Lid Weatherstrip Trunk Lid Cushion Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the trunk lid weatherstrip (A) by pulling it 1. Remove the trunk lid t r i m (see page 20-69).
off.
2. Detach the clips (A) by pushing it f r o m the hole In
the trunk lid (B), then remove the trunk lid cushion
(C). Take care not to scratch the trunk lid.
2. Apply clear weatherstrip sealant (B) into the

channel of the trunk lid weatherstrip all the w a y
around.
3. Locate the painted alignment mark (C or D) on the

trunk lid weatherstrip. Align the painted mark in the 3. Install the cushion in the reverse order of removal.
center of the trunk lid opening, and install the trunk
lid weatherstrip all the w a y around in the direction
s h o w n . Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
weatherstrip.
4. Check for water leaks (see step 9 on page 20-29).
20-134
Fuel Fill Door •
Fuel Fill Door Adjustment
1. Slightly loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A). 5. Apply multipurpose grease to each location
indicated by the arrows.
6. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts

A and around the hinges.
6 x 1.0 m m
9 . 8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibfft)
2. Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it's flush
w i t h the body, and up or d o w n as necessary to
equalize the gaps.
3. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
4. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and

locks securely, and check that the rear of the door is
flush w i t h the body.
20-135
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Cap Adapter Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 2. Remove the bolts, and the lower the fuel filler pipe
(A), then remove it f r o m the fuel cap adapter (B).
• 1. Remove the screw, then remove the fuel cap (A) by
Fastener Locations
turning it counterclockwise.
Fastener Location
• Screw, 1
3. Turn the fuel cap adapter (A), then remove it.
4. Install the adapter in the reverse order of removal.
20-136
Exterior Trim
Front Grille Replacement
'06-08 Models
m Model
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the bumper and grille. NOTE: Take care not to scratch the bumper and grille.
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-122). 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-122).
2. Remove the nuts, and release the hooks (A), then 2. Remove the clips, then remove the front grille (A)
remove the front grille (B) f r o m the front bumper f r o m the front bumper (B).
(C).
Fastener Locations
at the notch (C).
• : Nut, 4
Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 3
5x 0.8 m m
3. If necessary, remove the screw, and release the

hooks, then remove the front e m b l e m base (A)
f r o m the front grille molding (B).
Fastener Location
• : Screw, 1 3. Remove the screws, then separate the front grille

molding (A) and the front grille base (B).
Fastener Locations
• : Screw, 8
4. Replace the e m b l e m (C), if necessary (see page

20-146).
5. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
20-137
Exterior Trim
Front Grille Replacement (cont'd) Front Fender Trim Replacement
4. Replace the e m b l e m , if necessary (see page NOTE;
20-146). • Take care not to scratch the fender t r i m or the body.
5. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal. avoid damage w h e n removing components.
1. 'Remove the clips w i t h a clip remover.
Fastener Locations
t > : Clip
2. Disconnect the washer fill tube (A) f r o m the washer

reservoir (B). Release the hook (C), then remove the
front fender t r i m (D) and the washer fill tube.
20-138
Front Grille Cover Replacement
Install the fender trim in the reverse order of NOTE; •
removal, and note these items; • When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, w r a p it w i t h
protective tape to prevent damage.
• If the clips (A) are damaged or stress-whitened, • Take care not to scratch the bumper or the body.
• Push the clips into place,securely. 1. Remove the front fender t r i m f r o m both sides
(see page 20-138).
2. Remove the clips by carefully pulling the front grille

cover (A) up, then remove the cover by releasing
the front edge of the cover f r o m the grille (B). Take
care not to scratch the body.

at the notch <C).
Fastener Locations
3. Install the covers in the reverse order of removal,


• Push the clip portions into place securely.
20-139
Exterior Trim
Cowl Cover Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 4. If necessary, remove the bolts (A, B), then remove
the under-cowl panel (C).
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then turn on the
Fastener Locations
wiper switch. When the wiper arms reach about
A • : Bolt, 5 B• : Bolt, 4
90 °, quickly turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Remove the center cowl cover (A).
-1 Remove the hood rear seal (B) by pu lling it out.

-2 Remove the clips (C).
-3 Release three front hooks (D) f r o m the edge of
the under-cowl panel (E).
-4 Detach the clips (F, G) by carefully pulling the
cover up, then remove the cover by releasing
the hooks (H). Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
C > : Clip, 3 F | > : Clip, 5 G > : Clip, 1
(White) (Light Blue)
• Windshield wiper arms (see page 22-215)

• Front fender t r i m , both sides (see page 20-138)
6. Detach the clips by carefully pulling the side cowl

cover (A) up, then remove the cover by releasing
the hooks (B) f r o m the front fender. Take care not to
scratch the body. Repeat this step for the other side
cowl cover, and disconnect the windshield washer
tube.
Fastener Location
7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal,

E and note these items:
3. Disconnect the windshield washer tube (I). • If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened,
• Make sure the washer tubes are connected
securely.
20-140
Roof Molding Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the windshield portion of the roof molding
KTC t r i m tool set SOJATP2014 * (A).
Program; call 888-424-6857 -1 Carefully insert a plastic spatula (B) in under
the molding next to the lower clip (C).
Molding Replacement -2 While pulling the clip portion of the molding up
' by hand, push t h e hooks (D) t o release the clip
NOTE; f r o m the retainer (E). Do not pry on the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. windshield t r i m with any tools.
• Take care not to damage the windshield. -3 Gradually work your w a y up t o release each of
• Do not use any metallic tools to remove the roof the clips (F, G).
m o l d i n g , or you may damage the windshield.
Fastener Locations
avoid damage w h e n removing components. C , F P> : C l i p (Light G r e e n )
G > : Clip (Light Y e l l o w )
• Take care not to bend the roof molding.
" " ~j—r 7 m m
1. Remove the cowl cover (see page 20-140).'
_ ^—' * (0.28 in.)
—i 1 m m
r
2. Detach the bottom clip (A) at the lower corner of the *—J (0.04 in.)
windshield.
Fastener Location
A > : Clip
(cont'd)
20-141
Exterior Trim
Roof Molding Replacement (cont'd)
4. Pull up the middle portion of the roof m o l d i n g (A) Retainer Replacement
t o release it f r o m the retainers (B).
1. While prying t h e middle hooks (A) w i t h a flat-tip ,
screwdriver, slide the upper retainers (B, C) upward
to release t h e m f r o m the pins (D) on the A-pillar
and the' roof drip portion. Take care not t o scratch
the body.
5. Pull up and release the rear end of the roof m o l d i n g

(A) f r o m the pin (B), then remove the roof moldi
20-142
Door Molding Replacement
NOTE:
• Be careful not to pry too far or you may bend the molding.
• When removing components, use the t r i m tool or equivalent.
• Front door panel (see page 20-7) and plastic cover (see step 2 on page 20-14)
• Rear door panel (see page 20-17) and plastic cover (see step 3 on page 20-19)
2. Release the clips, and gently pry the front door molding (A) or the rear door molding (B) away f r o m the door while
separating the adhesive tape (C, D, E, F).
Adhesive tape (C): Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) Width 5 mm (0.2 in.) Length 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Adhesive tape (D): Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) Width 10 mm (0.4 in.) Length 930 mm (36.6 in.)
Adhesive tape (E): Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) Width 10 mm (0.4 in.) Length 580 mm (22.8 in.)
Adhesive tape (F): Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.) Width 5 mm (0.2 in.) Length 24 mm (0.9 in.)
Fastener Locations
3. Install the moldings in the reverse order of removal, if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them
w i t h new ones.
20-143
Exterior Trim
Side Sill Protection Tape Rear License Trim Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the trunk lid t r i m (see page 20-69).
' 1 . Slowly pee! up the old side sill protection tape. 2. Remove the bolt securing the trunk lid lock cylinder
2. Clean the body bonding surface w i t h a shop t o w e l
dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, 3. Detach the clips by pushing t h e m through the holes
keep oil, grease, and water f r o m getting on the in the trunk lid (A) f r o m the inside, then remove the
surface. rear license t r i m (B). Take care not to scratch the
trunk lid.
3. Peel the adhesive backing f r o m the side sill
protection tape. Fastener Locations
> : Clip, 5
4. Align the alignment marks (A) of the side sill
protection tape (B) w i t h the body line (C), and align
the alignment marks (D) of the application tape (E)
w i t h the round body bulge (F), then press the side
sill protection tape into place.

if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace
t h e m with'new ones.
20-144
Trunk Lid Spoiler Replacement
NOTE: 4. Close the trunk lid. Pull the trunk lid spoiler (A) up
• Put on gloves to protect your hands, to release the clips f r o m the trunk lid, then remove
• Take care not to scratch the trunk lid. the spoiler.
1. Remove the trunk lid t r i m (see page 20-69).
2. Remove the nuts f r o m inside the trunk lid.

A
Fastener Locations
• :Nut,2
6x1.0 mm
t 9.8 N-m
( 1 . 0 k g f - m 7.2 ibf-ft)
r
5. Install the spoiler in the reverse order of removal,


3. Detach the clips (A, B) by pushing t h e m through the

holes in the trunk lid f r o m the inside. Carefully
insert a t r i m tool next to the side clips (C), and
detach the clips by prying on the spoiler (D). Take
care not to scratch the trunk lid.
Fastener Locations
A [> : Clip, 2 B > : Clip, 3 C > : Clip, 2
20-145
Exterior Trim
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems/sticker, take care not t o scratch the body.
1. To remove the front " H " e m b l e m , remove the front grille; '06-08 models (see page 20-137), '09 model (see page
20-137).
2. Clean the body surface w i t h a shop towel dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and
water f r o m getting on the surface.
3. Apply the emblem/sticker where s h o w n . W h e n installing the PZEV sticker on the inside surface of the left rear
door quarter glass, align the sticker w i t h the edge of the glass mark as s h o w n , then press the sticker into place,
and remove the application tape.
4. After installing the front " H " e m b l e m , reinstall the front grille; '06-08 models (see page 20-137), '09 model
(see page 20-137).
FRONT " H " E M B L E M REAR " H " E M B L E M
HYBRID E M B L E M
PZEV STICKER
Unit: m m (in.) CIVIC E M B L E M
Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 m m (0.03 in.)

'09 model
'06-08 models -PUSH NUTS
FRONT " H " EMBLEM FRONT " H " E M B L E M
FRONT E M B L E M FRONT G R I L L E
BASE BASE
REAR " H " E M B L E M

CLIP
ADHESIVE TAPE T R U N K LID
/
—_
I
- P Z E V STICKER
HYBRID E M B L E M \ /
- R E A R DOOR
/ n^rwMuâio)\ If QUARTER G L A S S
1
4 i
86
(3.4)
\J/ (2.3)
(3.7) f
Edge of the rear door panel
Edge of the trunk lid
20-146
Fenderwefl
Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE: Take care not t o scratch the body. '
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B), and remove the front splash guard (C) (Canada models).
-2 From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E) securing the splash shield (F) and the front inner fender
to the front bumper.
-3 From the wheel arch, remove the clips (G, H, I) securing the front inner fender (and the splash shield) to the
body.
-4 Release the hook (J) of the splash shield, then remove the front inner fender.
NOTE: To release the clips E and G, pry up on the center pin at the notch (K).
Fastener Locations
B • :Screw, 3 E , G[> : Clip, 3 H>:Clip,8 1 >:Clip,3
K K
B
Canada models
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.

20-147
Fenderwell
Splash Shield Replacement
NOTE: Take care not t o scratch the body.
1. Remove the splash shield (A).
-1 Remove the clips (B) that secure the front inner fender (C) and front splash shield to the body.
-2 From under the front bumper (D), remove the clips (E, F).
-3 From under the body, remove the clips (G).
-4 Release the hooks (H) of the front splash shield, then pull the splash shield out.
NOTE: To release the clips B, E, F, and G, pry up on the center pin at the notch (I).
Fastener Locations
B , E | > : Clip, 6 F , G > : Clip, 6
2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• If the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace t h e m w i t h new ones.

20-148
Front Fender Fairing Replacement
1. Remove the front inner fender as needed (see page 4. Remove the front fender fairing (A).
• 20-147).
2. From the wheel arch, remove the clips.
Fastener Locations
t> : Clip, 2
5. Install the fender fairing In the reverse order of

removal, and note these Items:

3. Open the front door. Detach the hooks (A) securing
the front fender fairing (B).
20-149
Fenderwell
Front Undercover Replacement Front Floor Undercover
Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not t o scratch the body.
• Put on gloves t o protect y o u r hands. NOTE:
• Have an assistant help y o u w h e n removing and • Take care not t o scratch the body.
installing the undercover. • Put on gloves t o protect your hands.
1. Remove the bolts (A), and the clips {B, C), then installing the undercover.
remove the front undercover (D) f r o m the splash
shield (E), the right front floor undercover (F), and 1. Remove the bolts (A), and the clips (B, C), then
the left f r o n t floor undercover (G). remove the right front floor undercover (D), the left
f r o n t floor undercover (E) f r o m the front
NOTE: To release the clips B and C, pry up on the . . undercover (F), the right middle floor undercover
center pin at the notch (H). (G), and the left middle floor undercover (H).
Fastener Locations
NOTE: To release the clips B and C, pry up on the
A • : Bolt 2 B > : Clip, 2 C > : Clip, 7 center pin at the notch (I).
Fastener Locations
A ^ : Bolt, 4 B > : Clip, 8 C > : Clip, 4
/
6 x 1.0 mm
9.S N m
(1.0 kgf-m,
7.2 Ibfft)
A
A
removal, and note these items: Sx 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
• Push the clips into place securely. 2. Install the undercovers in the reverse order of

20-150
Middle Floor Undercover Rear Floor Undercover
Replacement Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the clips and bolts, then remove the rear
floor undercover (A). Take care not to scratch the
1. Remove the bolts, and detach the clips, then rear bumper (B).
remove the left middle floor undercover (A) and the
Fastener Locations
right middle undercover (B), f r o m the right front
floor undercover (C), the left front floor undercover > : Clip, 3 • : Bolt, 3
(D), and the body.

at the notch (E).
Fastener Locations
• Bolt, 4 > •* Clip, 8


A B
2. Install the undercovers in the reverse order of


20-151
Fenderwell
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement Rear Fender Cover Replacement
NOTE: NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rear bumper or the
• Take care not to scratch the body. body.
* Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the screws, then remove the rear fender
1. Remove the left rear wheel (see page 18-33). cover (A) f r o m the rear bumper (B) and body.
Fastener Locations
2. Remove the clips, then remove the fuel pipe
protector (A). • : Screw, 3
Fastener L o c a t i o n s
> : Clip, 3
2. Install the fender cover in the reverse order of

removal.
3. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal,


20-152
Rear Strake Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body. 1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-127).
1. Remove the bolts, then remove the rear strake (A) 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air
f r o m the body. outlet (B). Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
• ; Bolt, 2
3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook

9.8 N-m portions until the hooks snap into place.
(1.0 k g f - m ,
7.2 I b f - f t )
2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal.
20-
Openers
HOOD OPENER CABLE

20-154
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.

• Front inner fender (see page 20-147)
• Kick panel (see page 20-54)
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (B) (see page 20-158), and remove the bolts (C), then
remove the hood release handle (D). Take care not to kink the cable.
Fastener Locations
C • : Bolt, 2 E > : Clip, 4 F [ > : Clip, 1
3. Detach the clips (E) w i t h a clip remover, then release the hood opener cable f r o m the clip (F). Remove the
grommet (G) f r o m the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, replace them
with new ones.
20-155
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener Cable/Fuel Fill Do Opener Cable Replacement

SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. While pinching the hooks (A) f r o m inside the
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the vehicle, remove the g r o m m e t (B) f r o m the body.
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.

• Front door sill t r i m , driver's side (see page 20-54)
• Kick panels, driver's side (see page 20-54)
• Rear door sill t r i m , both sides (see page 20-55)
• B-pillar lower t r i m , driver's side (see page 20-60)
• Trunk side t r i m panel, left side (see step 5 on
page 20-68)
• Trunk lid t r i m (see page 20-69)
• Trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener (see page
20-159)
• Fuel cap adapter (see page 20-136)
2. Pull the carpet back as needed.
3. Release the opener cable (A) f r o m the clips (B).

Remove the cushion tape (C).
Fastener Locations
B t> : C l i p , 2 C |> : Cushion tape, 2
6. Remove the fuel fill door opener cable f r o m inside

the body.
20-156
7. Detach the opener cable junction box (A) f r o m the 10. Remove the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener
body. cable f r o m the vehicle. Take care not to kink the
cable.
Fastener Locations
| > : Clip, 4 11. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of
• Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (B) w i t h

the cable clips (C) as s h o w n .
• Replace any damaged clips, and replace the
cushion tape.
Front
8. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (B) f r o m the

trunk lid latch (C) (see page 20-162).
9. Release the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener

cable f r o m the clips.
20-157
Openers
Hood Latch Replacement
1. Remove the front grille cover (see page 20-139). 4. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
2. Remove the clip (A), then disconnect and detach
the hood latch switch connector (B). • A p p l y multipurpose grease to each location of
the hood latch indicated by the arrows.
Fastener Locations
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and the hood latch switch connector is
plugged in properly.
• Adjust the hood latch alignment (see step 4 on
page 20-129).
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (C)

f r o m the body, and disconnect the hood opener
cable (D) f r o m the hood latch.
20-158
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the screw securing the front door sill t r i m
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * (A) and the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener.
* Available through the Honda Tool and Equipment
Fastener Location
• : Screw, 1
NOTE: Use the appropriate tool f r o m the KTC trim tool

set to avoid damage w h e n removing components.
1. Pry out the bottom edge of the front side cap (A) at
the notch with the t r i m tool to detach the hooks (B),
and release the hooks (C), then remove the cap
f r o m the front door sill t r i m (D).
Fastener Location
• : Bolt, 1
4. Remove the front door sill t r i m (see step 3 on page

20-54).
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
2. Remove the opener lock cylinder (E), and loose the

bolt.
(cont'd)
20-159
Openers
Trunk Lid Opener/Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the bolt, then remove the trunk lid opener/ 6. Disconnect the trunk lid opener/fuel fill door opener
fuel fill door opener (A) f r o m the bolt (B). cable (A), then remove the opener (B). Take care
not to kink the cable.
Fastener Location
• : Bolt, 1
7. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal,

6 x 1.0 m m
• Make sure the opener cable is connected
9.8 N - m properly.
(1.0 k g f - m , • Make sure the trunk lid and the fuel fill door open
7.2 Ibf-ft)
properly and lock securely.
• If the trunk lid or the fuel fill door does not open
properly, adjust the position of the cable end on
the opener.
20-160
Trunk Lid Lock Cylinder Replacement
1. Remove the trunk lid t r i m (see page 20-69). 4. Remove the rear license t r i m (see page 20-144).
2. Disconnect the cylinder rod (A), and if equipped, 5. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A).
disconnect the cylinder switch connector (B).
Fastener Location
NOTE; If the rod fastener (C) is damaged or stress- • ; Bolt, 1 6 x 1.0 m m

9.8 N-m
whitened, replace it w i t h a new one. (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Turn the lock cylinder (A) to release the hook (B)

f r o m the trunk lid (C), then remove the lock cylinder.
3. Remove the bolt securing the lock cylinder (A).
Fastener Location
• : Bolt, 1
7. Install the lock cylinder in the reverse order of

6 x 1.0 m m removal, and note these items:
9.8 N - m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
• Replace the rod fastener if it is damaged.
• Make sure the cylinder switch connector is
plugged in properly (if equipped), and the
cylinder rod is connected properly.
securely.
20-161
Openers
Trunk Lid Latch Replacement
1. Remove the trunk lid t r i m (see page 20-69). 4. Remove the bolts f r o m the trunk lid latch (A).
2. Disconnect the cylinder rod f r o m the lock cylinder Fastener Locations

(see step 2 on page 20-161). • : Bolt, 2
3. Disconnect the trunk lid opener cable (A), and

disconnect the trunk lid latch switch connector (B).
Take care not to bend the opener cable.
Power t r u n k lid latch
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
5. Pull the trunk lid latch (A) out, and disconnect the
cylinder rod (B) f r o m the trunk lid latch. Take care
not to bend the cylinder rod.
NOTE: If the rod fastener (C) is damaged or stress-

Manual t r u n k Sid Batch w i t h security s w i t c h whitened, replace it with a new one.
A B
20-162
Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
• Replace the rod fastener if it is damaged.

• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly
and the opener cable is connected properly.
securely..
• If the trunk latch does not operate properly,
adjust the position of the cable end (A) on the
latch.
Frame
Upper Dashboard Support Gusset Rear Floor Upper Cross-member
Replacement Gusset Replacement
Upper Dashboard Support Gusset Torque Rear Floor Upper Cross-member Gusset
Torque
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8 x 1.25 m m
8 x 1.25 m m 22 N m
UPPER D A S H B O A R D 22 N m (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
SUPPORT GUSSET (2.2 k g f - m , 16 I b f f t )
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 k g f - m , 7 . 2 I b f f t )
REAR FLOOR UPPER

CROSS-MEMBER GUSSET
20-164
Rear Floor Brace Replacement
Rear Floor Brace Torque

6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 ibf-ft)
REAR FLOOR BRACE
20-165
Frame
Subframe Replacement
Front Subframe Torque
NOTE;
• After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace t h e m w i t h new ones.
• W h e n installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe w i t h both reference holes in the body using
a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide.
Reference hole alignment
20-166
20-167
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top V i e w
Unit: m m (in.) V E R T I C A L LINE
0 : Inner diameter
POINT g
P O I N T b3
POINT h
P O I N T b2
P O I N T b1
POINT a
C E N T E R LINE
a For front s u b f r a m e m o u n t 0I6 (0.63) f o r w a r d

b1 For e n g i n e s i d e m o u n t 0 1 5 (0.59)
cl For t r a n s m i s s i o n m o u n t 0 1 5 (0.59)
c2 For t r a n s m i s s i o n m o u n t 0 1 5 (0.59)
d For t r a n s m i s s i o n m o u n t 011 (0.43)
e1 For front d a m p e r m o u n t 011.5 (0.45)
e3 F r o n t d a m p e r c e n t e r 074 (2.9)
f For front s u b f r a m e m o u n t 0 1 3 (0.51) middle
g For front s u b f r a m e m o u n t 0I6 (0.63) r e a r w a r d
h Outrigger locating hole 0 2 5 (0.98)
i F r o n t floor locating hole 050 (1.97)
20-168
POINT m3
P O I N T o2
POINT m 2
P O I N T p2
POINT ml
POINT j POINT k \ \ \ P O I N T n2
POINT I \ \ \ \ POINT n l
. P O I N T p2
POINT p3
Front floor locating h o l e 0 2 5 10.981

Rear f r a m e locating h o l e 0 2 0 (0.79) f o r w a r d
Rear f l o o r l o c a t i n g h o l e 0 2 5 (0.98) f o r w a r d
For trailing a r m m o u n t 017 (0.67)
Trailing a r m c e n t e r point
For trailing a r m m o u n t 017 (0.67)
For upper a r m m o u n t 0 1 4 (0.55)
U p p e r a r m center point
For upper a r m m o u n t 0 1 4 (0.55)
R e a r s p r i n g c e n t e r 0 8 . 5 (0.33)
For rear d a m p e r m o u n t 0 2 4 (0.94)
For l o w e r a r m m o u n t 0 1 3 . 8 (0.54)
L o w e r a r m center point
For l o w e r a r m m o u n t 0 1 3 (0.51)
C r o s s - m e m b e r locating h o l e 0 1 3 (0.51) right
C r o s s - m e m b e r locating h o l e 0 1 5 (0.59) left
R e a r floor locating hole 0 5 0 (1.97) r e a r w a r d
R e a r f r a m e locating hole 0 2 5 (0.98) r e a r w a r d
(cont'd)
20-169
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side V i e w
Unit: m m (in.)
0 : inner diameter
a For f r o n t s u b f r a m e m o u n t 0 l 8 (0.63) f o r w a r d P O I N T e3
bl For e n g i n e s i d e m o u n t o 1 5 (0.59)
0110(43.3)
POINT e2
b2 For e n g i n e s i d e m o u n t o 1 5 (0.59)
d For t r a n s m i s s i o n m o u n t 0 1 5 (0.59)
c2 For t r a n s m i s s i o n m o u n t 0 1 5 (0.59) P O I N T e4
d For t r a n s m i s s i o n m o u n t 011 (0.43)
el For front d a m p e r m o u n t 011.5 (0.45)
e2 For front d a m p e r m o u n t 011.5 (0.45) POINT e l
e3 F r o n t d a m p e r c e n t e r 074 (2.9)
f For front s u b f r a m e m o u n t 0 1 3 (0.51) m i d d l e
g For front s u b f r a m e m o u n t 0I6 (0.63) r e a r w a r d
h Outrigger locating hole 0 2 5 (0.98)
i Front floor locating hole 0 5 0 (1.97)
[ SECTION: AA ]
20-170
j F r o n t floor locating h o l e 0 2 5 (0.98)
k R e a r frame locating hole 0 2 0 (0.79) f o r w a r d
1 R e a r floor locating h o l e 0 2 5 (0.98) f o r w a r d
ml For trailing a r m m o u n t 017 (0.67)
m2 Trailing a r m c e n t e r point
m3 For trailing a r m m o u n t 017 (0.67)
nl For upper a r m m o u n t 014 (0.55)
n2 U p p e r a r m c e n t e r point
n3 For upper a r m m o u n t 0 1 4 (0.55)
01 R e a r s p r i n g c e n t e r 0 8 . 5 (0.33)
02 For rear d a m p e r m o u n t 0 2 4 (0.94)
pi For l o w e r a r m m o u n t 0 1 3 . 8 (0.54)
p2 L o w e r a r m c e n t e r point
p3 For l o w e r a r m m o u n t 0 1 3 (0.51)
ql C r o s s - m e m b e r locating hole 0 1 3 (0.51) right
q2 C r o s s - m e m b e r locating hole 015 (0.59) left
r R e a r floor locating hole 0 5 0 (1.97) r e a r w a r d
s R e a r f r a m e locating hole 0 2 5 (0.98) r e a r w a r d
[ S E C T I O N : DD ]
P O I N T o2
POINT m 3
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (if HVAC maintenance is required)
The Civic Hybrid SRS includes a driver's airbag In the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard
above the glove box, seat belt tensioners In the front seat belt retractors, seat belt buckle tensioners in the front seat
belt buckles, side curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags In the front seat-backs. Information
necessary to safely service the SRS is Included in this Service Manual. Items marked w i t h an asterisk ( * ) on the
contents page Include or are located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these Items
• To avoid rendering the SRS Inoperative, w h i c h could lead to personal Injury or death In the event of a severe frontal
• Improper service procedures, including Incorrect removal and installation of t h e SRS, could lead t o personal injury
• Do not b u m p or impact the SRS unit, front Impact sensors, side Impact sensors, or rear safing sensor w h e n the
Ignition switch is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0); otherwise, the
• SRS electrical connectors are Identified by y e l l o w color coding. Related components are located In the steering
c o l u m n , f r o n t console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M (If HVAC maintenance is required)
IMA components are located In this area. The IMA is a high-voltage system. The high voltage cables and their covers
You must be familiar w i t h the IMA system before w o r k i n g around It. Make sure y o u have read the Service Precautions
In the IMA section before performing repairs or service (see page 12-3).
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Heater Core Temperature Sensor Test ........ 21-93
Air Conditioning) Heater Core Temperature Sensor
Special Tools 21-2 Replacement 21-93
Power Transistor Test 21-94
Climate Control Air Mix Control Motor Test 21-95
Component Location Index 21-3 Air Mix Control Motor Replacement 21-95
A/C Service Tips and Precautions 21-8 Mode Control Motor Test 21-96
A/C System Inspection 21-6 Mode Control Motor Replacement ............... 21-96
A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement 21-7 Recirculation Control Motor Test 21-97
A/C Line Replacement 21-9 Recirculation Control Motor
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 21-10 Replacement • 21-97
DTC Troubleshooting Index 21-18 Climate Control Unit
Symptom Troubleshooting Index 21-20 Removal/Installation 21-98
System Description 21-24 Climate Control Unit Bulb Replacement ...... 21-98
Circuit Diagram 21-34 Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement 21-99
DTC Troubleshooting 21-36 Blower Unit Removal/Installation 21-99
Climate Control Power and Ground Blower Unit Component Replacement 21-101
Circuit Troubleshooting 21-75 Evaporator Core Replacement 21-101
Navigation Communication Line Circuit Expansion Valve Replacement 21-103
Troubleshooting 21-76 * Heater Unit/Core Replacement 21-104
Radiator and A/C Condenser Fan Low Heater Valve Cable Adjustment 21-107
Speed Circuit Troubleshooting 21-78 Auxiliary Electric Water Pump
A/C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Replacement 21-108
Troubleshooting 21-82 A/C Compressor Driver
A/C Compressor Clutch Circuit Removal/Installation 21-109
Troubleshooting 21-84 A/C Compressor Replacement 21-110
A/C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting 21-86 A/C Compressor Clutch Check 21-113
A/C Compressor Driver Power Circuit A/C Compressor Clutch Overhaul 21-115
Troubleshooting 21-88 A/C Compressor Thermal Protector
Humidity/ln-car Temperature Sensor Replacement • 21-117
Test 21-89 A/C Compressor Relief Valve
Humidity/ln-car Temperature Sensor Replacement . • 21-117
Replacement 21-90 A/C Condenser Replacement 21-118
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test 21-90 Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement ....... 21-119
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test 21-91 Refrigerant Recovery 21-120
Outside Air Temperature Sensor System Evacuation ........................................ 21-121
Replacement 21-91 System Charging • 21-122
Sunlight Sensor Test 21-92 Refrigerant Leak Check .................................. 21-123
Sunlight Sensor Replacement 21-92 A/C System Noise Check 21-127
A/C System Test 21-129
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools
© 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe Set 2
21-2
Climate Control
/ SERVICE VALVE
(HIGH-PRESSURE SIDE)
SERVICE VALVE
( L O W - P R E S S U R E SIDE)
EVAPORATOR CORE
( L o c a t e d in t h e h e a t e r unit)
EXPANSION VALVE
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT
SIGHT G L A S S
A/C CONDENSER
A/C COMPRESSOR
Clutch Check, page 21-113
Clutch O v e r h a u l , page 21-115
T h e r m a l Protector Check, page 21-113
T h e r m a l Protector R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-117
Relief V a l v e R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-117
(cont'd)
21-3
Climate Control
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-64
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-64
FAN CONTROL RELAY

Test, p a g e 22-64
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-64
A / C COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
Test, page 22-64
page 21-109 / A / C CONDENSER FAN Test, page 21-91

/ R e p l a c e m e n t , page 21-91
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR
21-4
•
j HEATER VALVE CABLE

' A d j u s t m e n t , page 21-107
EXPANSION VALVE
BLOWER UNIT
page 21-99
Component Replacement,
page 21-101
RECIRCULATION
CONTROL MOTOR
Test, p a g e 21-97
Replacement,
p a g e 21-97
DUST AND POLLEN

FILTER
Replacement,
p a g e 21-99
MODE CONTROL MOTOR

Test, page 21-96
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R
Test, page 21-95
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

Bulb Replacement, page 21-98
POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-94
EVAPORATOR HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE S E N S O R

TEMPERATURE SENSOR Test, page 21-89
Test, p a g e 21-90 R e p l a c e m e n t , p a g e 21-90
HEATER CORE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Test, page 21-93
21
Oumafe Coo*©!
A/O S ® i r w G c e Taps aumcfl P i r o c s y t t D O O T i s A / C System Inspection
Before troubleshooting any problem with the air
conditioning system, do the f o l l o w i n g .
• Compressed air m i x e d w i t h the R-134a forms a
combustible vapor. 1. W i t h the ignition switch in LOCK (0), inspect the A/C
• The vapor can burn or explode causing serious components, the pressure lines, and the hoses for
injury. stains that may indicate a refrigerant or a
• Never use compressed air to pressure test compressor oil leak.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning systems.
C h e c k for stains.
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapoi

can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat.
• Be careful w h e n connecting service equipment.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a)

Refrigerant and polyol ester (POE) refrigerant, which
are not compatible w i t h CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant,
mineral oil, or polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil. 2. Check the A/C condenser for material clogging the
Do not use R-12 refrigerant or any refrigerant oil other fins or for damage to the fins:
than the specified POE refrigerant oil (Sanden SE-10Y)
in the system. Do not use R-12 servicing equipment, as • Carefully clean any material f r o m the A/C
this w i l l damage the air conditioning system or the condenser (A) fins w i t h water and detergent. If
servicing e q u i p m e n t deeper cleaning is required, clean the fins w i t h
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is Honda Brite cleaner (P/N 08732-0020B).
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to • Be sure to dry the A/C condenser completely.
remove R-134a f r o m the air conditioning system. • Refer to the Refrigerant Leak Check (see page
21-123) to confirm leaks if there is visible damage
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the to the A/C condenser.
w o r k area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning

systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested
w i t h compressed air.
Additional health and safety information may be

obtained f r o m the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
• Always disconnect the negative cable f r o m the
battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
• Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
• Before connecting any hose or line, apply a f e w drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
• W h e n tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
• W h e n discharging the system, use an R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
21-6
• ¥
tD
A / C BmMmomnt Ool IR@©!!©©@inni®!nif

3. Inspect the drive belt (see page 10-9).
4. Make sure no material is blocking the air f l o w to the Using the w r o n g refrigerant oil increases the
A/C condenser. chance of electric shock or death.
• Use only SANDEN SE-10Y refrigerant oil w h e n
5. Check the dust and pollen filter. Replace it if it is servicing the A/C system.
clogged (see page 21-99).
6. Check for kinks or sharp bends in the A/C lines and Required POE refrigerant oil: SANDEN SE-10Y
hoses, which can greatly reduce,system
performance. Replace A/C lines and hoses if they • P/N 38899-RCJ-A01: 120 mL (4 fl-oz)
are kinks or damaged (see page 21-9). • P/N 38899-RMX-A01: 5 0 m L ( 1 2/3 fl-oz)
7. Start the engine, turn the air conditioning system The A/C compressor in this vehicle is powered by the
on, and allow it to run for a f e w minutes and reach IMA battery module, and this oil is required because it
stable operation. has unique electrical insulting qualities.
It is important to have the correct amount of refrigerant
• Check that the A/C operates at each position of oil in the A/C system to ensure proper lubrication of the
the blower fan switch (except OFF). If the A/C compressor. Too little oil damages the compressor; too
does not operate, refer to the S y m p t o m much oil reduces the cooling capacity of the system,
Troubleshooting. and can produce high vent temperatures.
. • Check that the A/C compressor clutch (A) is
engaged. The pressure plate should be rotating NOTE:
at the same speed as the pulley. If the pressure • To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
plate does not engage, refer to the S y m p t o m container once dispensed, and never m i x it w i t h other
Troubleshooting. refrigerant oils.
• Check that the radiator fan (B) and A/C condenser • Use the refrigerant oil immediately after opening the
fan (C) operate w h e n the A/C compressor clutch container, and dispose of any unused oil. The oil
is engaged. If either fan fails to operate w h e n the rapidly absorbs moistures, which damages its
A/C compressor clutch is engaged, refer to the electrical insulating properties.
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting. • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
• Check that the engine idle speed is correctly damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
maintained w h e n the A/C is switched on and off immediately.
and the A/C compressor clutch is engaged and
disengaged.
(cont'd)
21-7
Climate Control
A / C Refrigerant Oil Replacement (cont'd)
Adding refrigerant oil to the system Repairs needed if the wrong refrigerant oil
was added
A d d the recommended refrigerant oil to the suction port
of the A/C compressor in the amount listed if you Use only the required polyol ester (POE) refrigerant oil
replace any of the following parts. SANDEN SE-10Y designed for the dual scroll hybrid
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (POE)
A/C condenser refrigerant oil w i t h any other refrigerant oil (PAG or
(including Receiver/ mineral oil, for example) will result in A/C compressor
Dryer Desiccant) .... 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz) failure. Using the w r o n g refrigerant oil can also be a
Evaporator 40 mL (1 1/3 fl-oz) safety hazard (see page 21-6).
Line or hose ........... 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz)
Receiver/Dryer If the w r o n g refrigerant oil was added, and the A/C
Desiccant ................ 10 mL (1/3 fl-oz) system is operated, the f o l l o w i n g components must be
Leakage repair ....... 25 mL (5/6 fl-oz) replaced:
A/C compressor For A/C compressor replacement,
subtract the v o l u m e of oil drained • A/C compressor
f r o m the removed A/C • A/C condenser
compressor f r o m 130 mL • A/C evaporator
(4 2/5 fl-oz), and drain the • Receiver/dryer
calculated v o l u m e of oil f r o m the • A/C system lines and hoses
new A/C compressor: 130 mL
(4 2/5 fl-oz) — V o l u m e of removed If the A/C system was not operated, then only the A/C
A/C compressor = Volume t o compressor needs to be replaced.
drain f r o m new A/C compressor.
NOTE: Even if no oil is drained

f r o m the removed A/C
compressor, don't drain more
than 50 mL (1 2/3 fl-oz) f r o m the
new A/C compressor.
REMOVED NEW
A/C COMPRESSOR A/C COMPRESSOR
A : 1 3 0 m L (4 2 / 5 fl-oz)
21-8
A / C Line Replacement
© D i s c h a r g e h o s e t o t h e A / C c o m p r e s s o r (6 x 1 . 0 m m ) : 9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7 . 2 Ibf-ft)

® D i s c h a r g e h o s e t o t h e A / C c o n d e n s e r ( 6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© R e c e i v e r l i n e t o t h e A / C c o n d e n s e r (6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
© A / C p r e s s u r e s e n s o r t o t h e r e c e i v e r l i n e (11 x 1.0 m m ) : 1 1 . 8 N - m (1.2 k g f - m , 8.7 I b f f t )
© R e c e i v e r l i n e t o t h e A / C l i n e ( 1 6 x 1.5 m m ) : 13.7 N - m (1.4 k g f - m , 10.1 I b f f t )
© A / C l i n e s t o t h e e v a p o r a t o r ( 6 x 1.0 m m ) : 9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f - f t )
® A / C l i n e t o t h e s u c t i o n h o s e (24 x 1.5 m m ) : 3 1 . 4 N - m (3.2 k g f - m , 23.1 I b f f t )
© S u c t i o n h o s e t o t h e A / C c o m p r e s s o r ( 6 x 1 . 0 m m ) : 9.8 N - m (1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
© A / C c o m p r e s s o r t o t h e e n g i n e b l o c k (10 x 1.25 m m ) : 4 5 N - m (4.6 k g f - m , 3 3 . 2 I b f f t )
© A / C c o m p r e s s o r t o t h e oil p a n (10 x 1.25 m m ) : 4 5 N - m (4.6 k g f - m , 3 3 . 2 Ibf-ft)
Climate Control
How to Check for DTCs with the HDS
1. Make sure the Ignition switch is In LOCK (0).
2, Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
3 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the climate control u n i t If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL In the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u .
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are Indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If
no DTCs are Indicated, refer to s y m p t o m troubleshooting.
NOTE:
• After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.
• For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came w i t h the HDS.
21-10
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function with the HDS
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u .
6. Select INSPECTION in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL m e n u .
7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION menu.
8. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write d o w n the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting.
NOTE:
• After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS.
• For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came w i t h the HDS.
(cont'd)
21-11
Climate Control
.How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function without the HDS
The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the f o l l o w i n g :
2. Press and hold the AUTO and RECIRCULATION buttons, turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then release the AUTO
and RECIRCULATION buttons.
3. ALL LCD segments come on for 2 seconds, then the self-diagnostic function begins.
NOTE:
• The blower motor w i l l run at various speeds w h e n in the self-diagnostic mode, regardless of w h a t the panel is
displaying.
• If there is any problem in the system, the system flashes " A U T O 8 8 " or alternately flashes " A U T O 8 8 " and one
or more of the 1 4 segments (A through P). Refer to checking for DTCs.
• If there are no problems detected, the segments w i l l not illuminate, and the system w i l l appear to be turned off.
A U T O BUTTON T E M P E R A T U R E INDICATOR FAN CONTROL DIAL
AUTO INDICATOR / MODE BUTTON
<-
4 ^ .
A / C O F F f nn * in
H f l
AUTO MODE
O N AUTO o o ^ ill!!!!
O |
[J
w1
OFF '1 A / C
s. „ „.„ , ,
F R E S H INDICATOR
RECIRCULATION BUTTON A / C BUTTON
Canceling the Self-diagnostic Function
4. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0) to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the
self-diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.
21-12
Checking for DTCs
The temperature display indicates single or multiple DTCs. The DTC(s) will be displayed on one of three screens (I, II,
III). The system always starts on screen I. Turn the fan control dial clockwise to go to screens II and III, and
counterclockwise to go from a higher numbered screen to a lower numbered screen. Check all three screens for DTCs.
• If the DTC is displayed on screen I, the system alternately flashes "AUTO 8 8 " and one or more of segments A
through P.
• If the DTC is displayed on screen II, " A U T O " is on steady, and the system alternately flashes " 8 8 " and one or more
of segments A through P. ,
• If the DTC is displayed on screen III (the FRESH indicator comes on in screen III), the system alternately flashes
"AUTO 8 8 " and one or more of segments A through P.
T E M P E R A T U R E INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR
A E GC
K J MM
(cont'd)
21-13
Climate Control
Screen DTC Detection Item

(Temperature
Indicator
Segment,
AUTO and
FRESH
Indicator)
(1) A An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-39)
B A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-40)
C An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-41)
D A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-42)
E An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-43)
F A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-44)
G An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-45)
H A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-47)
J A n open in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-48)
K A short in the air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-49)
L A problem in the air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-50)
M An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-52)
N A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-54)
P A problem in the blower motor circuit (see page 21-55)
(II) A and AUTO A n open in the recirculation control motor circuit (see page 21-64)
B and AUTO A problem in the recirculation control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-63)
C and AUTO Climate control unit internal error (see page 21-36)
D and AUTO Climate control unit lost communication w i t h gauge control module (TACH)
(ILLUMI message) (see page 21-36)
E and AUTO A short in the recirculation control motor circuit (see page 21-37)
F and AUTO Climate control unit lost communication w i t h gauge control module (TACH)
(ECT message) (see page 21-36)
H and AUTO A short in the heater core temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-72)
J and AUTO Climate control unit lost communication w i t h gauge control module (TACH)
(VSP message) (see page 21-36)
K and AUTO Communication bus line error (see page 22-104)
L a n d AUTO Climate control unit lost communication w i t h gauge control module (TACH)
(NE message) (see page 21-36)
M and AUTO An open in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-59)
N and AUTO A short in the humidity sensor circuit (see page 21-60)
P and AUTO A n open in the heater core temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-71)
(III) A and FRESH A problem in the auxiliary electric water p u m p circuit (see page 21-68)
B a n d FRESH A problem in the auxiliary electric water pump connection (see page 21-74)
F a n d FRESH An open in the thermal protector circuit (see page 21-66)
J a n d FRESH IMA communication bus line error (see page 21-74)
L a n d FRESH A short in the thermal protector circuit (see page 21-67)
21-14
6 V
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit
The climate control unit has a mode that displays the sensor inputs it receives, This mode shows you w h a t data the
climate control unit is receiving f r o m each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a sensor is
faulty.
Check these items before using the sensor input display mode
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to
switch f r o m FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. W h e n selecting the test temperature, note these
items:
• " L o " temperature setting will default to M A X COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
• " H i " temperature setting will default to M A X HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
• 58 through 86 °F settings will use the automatic climate control logic.
3 . Turn the ignition switch to LOCK ( 0 ) .
(cont'd)
21 15
Climate Control
To run the sensor input display m o d e , follow these steps
1. Make sure the ignition switch is in LOCK (0).
2. Press and hold both the AUTO and MODE buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release both buttons. The display panel control unit will flash the sensor number, and then
the value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the A/C button.
Sensor Item Displayed Value

1 Mode Positioning BIT
2 ln-car Temperature °C
3 Outside Air Temperature °C
2
4 Solar Radiation Sensor Value: Dark = 00, Flashlight = 04, Cloudy = 10, 10kcal/m -h
Sunny = 65
5 Evaporator Outlet Air Temperature °C
6 Humidity Sensor Valve %
7 Heater Core Temperature °C
8 Air M i x Opening (Low value indicates cooler air distribution, higher value % of opening
indicates w a r m e r air distribution)
9 Recirculation Opening % of opening
A Vehicle Speed (Vehicle must be driven to display speed) km/h
B Engine Coolant Temperature °C
C A/C Compressor Revolution Feedback 100 rpm
D Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) °C
E Solar Radiation azimuth (With navigation system) 10°
F Solar Radiation angle of elevation (With navigation system) 10°
NOTE:
• The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert
the value to degrees Fahrenheit (°F).
• If the sensor value displays " E r " this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Check for DTCs
using the HDS, or use the climate control self-diagnostic function.
• If necessary, compare the sensor input display to a known-good vehicle under the same test conditions.
• If the sensor is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test or substitute a known-good sensor, and recheck.
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button or turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
21-16
Celsius t o Fahrenheit Conversion Table
°C
0
op °C °F °c op °C op °C op
32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 , 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
°C
50
op °C
°F °C op °C op °C °F
122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
Alphanumeric Conversion Table

Display Reading °C op
%
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9 — 1 thru —9 30 thru 16 — 1 thru —9
B0 thru B9 — 10thru —19 14thru —2 — 10 thru —19
CO thru C9 —20 thru —29 —4 thru —20 —20 thru —29
DO thru D9 —30 thru —39 - 2 2 thru -38 —30 thru —39
E0 thru E9 — 40 thru —49 — 40 thru —58 —40 thru —49
F 0 t h r u F9 + 100 thru +109
Alphanumeric Conversion Table (Mode Positioning)

Display Reading Mode Position
(Alphanumeric)
2 OVER VENT
A VENT
8 VENT-HEAT/VENT
c HEAT/VENT
d HEAT/VENT-HEAT
9 HEAT
b HEAT-HEAT/DEF
3 HEAT/DEF
7 HEAT/DEF-DEF
6 DEF
E OVER DEF
21-17
Climate Control
Checking the DTCs by HDS
DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTC type Page
B1200 Communication bus line error Climate control Loss of (see page 22-104)
unit communication
B1202 Climate control unit internal error Climate control Internal error (see page 21-36)
unit
B1205 Climate control unit lost communication Climate control Loss of (see page 21-36)
with gauge control module (TACH) unit communication
(VSP/NE message)
with gauge control module (TACH) unit communication
(ECT message)
w i t h gauge control module (TACH) unit communication
(ILLUMI message)
w i t h MICU (MICU/DOOR SW message) unit communication
B1220 A short in the recirculation control motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-37)
circuit unit
B1225 An open in the in-car temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-39)
sensor circuit unit
B1226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-40)
circuit unit
B1227 An open in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-41)
sensor circuit unit
B1228 A short in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-42)
sensor circuit unit
B1229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-43)
unit
B1230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-44)
unit
B1231 An open in the evaporator temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-45)
sensor circuit unit
B1232 A short in the evaporator temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-47)
sensor circuit unit
B1233 An open in the air m i x control motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-48)
circuit unit
B1234 A short in the air mix control motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-49)
circuit unit
B1235 A problem in the air mix control linkage, Climate control Signal error (see page 21-50)
door, or motor unit
B1239 An open or short in the mode control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-52)
motor circuit unit
B1240 A problem in the mode control linkage, Climate control Signal error (see page 21-54)
doors, or motor unit
B1241 A problem in the blower motor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-55)
unit
21-18
Checking t h e PTCs by HPS
DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU )TC t y p e rage
B2967 An open in the humidity sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-59)
unit
B2968 A short in the humidity sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-60)
unit
B2983 A problem in the recirculation control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-63)
linkage, door, or motor unit
B2986 An open in the recirculation control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-64)
motor circuit unit
B2989 A problem in the A/C compressor motor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-65)
unit
B2990 A problem in the A/C compressor driver Climate control Signal error (see page 21-65)
unit
B2992 An open in the thermal protector circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-66)
unit
B2993 A short in the thermal protector circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-67)
unit
B2995 A problem in the auxiliary electric water Climate control Signal error (see page 21-68)
pump circuit unit
B2996 An open in the heater core temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-71)
sensor circuit unit
B2997 A short in the heater core temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-72)
sensor circuit unit
B2998 A problem in the A/C compressor driver Climate control Signal error (see page 21-73)
unit
B2999 A problem in the A/C compressor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-73)
delivery valve unit
21-19
Climate Control

The blower and heater • Probable cause: Climate control unit malfunction • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
controls and the A/C ° Do the climate control power and ground circuit • Blown fuse No. 36 (10 A) in the
system do not w o r k troubleshooting (see page 21-75) driver's under-dash fuse/relay
box
• Poor ground at G504 (see page
22-26)
• Poor or loose connections at the
terminals
The A/C compressor 1. Probable cause: A/C pressure sensor circuit ° HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
clutch and the A/C malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page
condenser/radiator 2. Troubleshoot the pressure sensor circuit: 11-3)
fans are inoperative, • A/C pressure sensor circuit low voltage • A/C signal circuit
but the blower and (see page 11-323) troubleshooting (see page
heater controls work • A/C pressure sensor circuit high voltage 21-86)
(see page 11-325) • Poor or loose connections at the
terminals
NOTE: The A/C pressure sensor can
malfunction w i t h o u t setting a DTC
The A/C compressor • Probable cause: No power to the A/C compressor - HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
clutch does not engage, clutch • Blown fuse No. 20 (7.5 A) in the
but the A/C condenser/ • Do the A/C compressor clutch circuit under-hood fuse/relay box
radiator fans operate, troubleshooting (see page 21-84) • A/C system pressure is normal
and the blower and (see page 21-29)
heater controls w o r k • A/C thermal protector has
continuity (see step 5 on page
21-114)
terminals
The A/C condenser fan • Probable cause: Condenser/radiator fan low • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
and/or the radiator fan speed circuit malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page
do not run w i t h the A/C • Do the radiator and A/C condenser fan low speed 11-3)
on circuit troubleshooting (see page 21-78) • Blown fuse No. 7 (20 A) in the
under-hood fuse/relay box
22-20)
terminals
The condenser/radiator 1. Probable cause: Malfunction in the fan(s) high HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
fans do not run at high speed circuit • Powertarin DTCs (see page
speed, but do run at 2. Do the f o l l o w i n g troubleshooting as needed: 11-3)
low speed ° A/C condenser fan high speed circuit • Blown fuse No. 6 (20 A) and/or
troubleshooting (see page 21-75) No.7 (20 A) in the under-hood
• Radiator fan high speed circuit fuse/relay box
troubleshooting (see page 10-19) • Poor ground at G301 (see page
22-20)
terminals
2! 1 ™20
During auto idle stop, • Probable cause: A/C compressor driver circuit • Powertrain DTCs (see page
the A/C does not work malfunction 11-3)
• Do the A/C compressor driver power circuit • Blown fuse No. 22 (7.5 A) in the
troubleshooting (see page 21-88) under-hood fuse/relay box
22-37)
• A/C signal circuit
troubleshooting (see page
21-86)
Voice commands do • Probable cause: Communication problem • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
not work between the climate control unit and the • Navi system link (see page
navigation system 23-124)
• Do the navigation communication line circuit • Poor or loose connections at the
troubleshooting (see page 21-76) terminals
Blower fan runs slower 1. Probable cause: Engine coolant temperature • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
than expected in cold (ECT) circuit malfunction • Powertrain DTCs (see page
weather (when in 2. Troubleshooting the ECT sensor circuit: 11-3)
AUTO mode) • ECT sensor 2 circuit low voltage (see page • Blower motor operation
NOTE: It is normal for 11-151)
the blower fan to run • ECT sensor 2 circuit high voltage (see page
slowly until the coolant 11-152)
temperature rises
w h e n in AUTO mode
The A/C compressor • Probable cause: A/C system is very low on • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
clutch cycles rapidly on refrigerant, indicating a possible leak • If there is no leak and the
and off • Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-123) refrigerant level is normal, do
and repair any leaks. Replace the receiver/dryer the A/C compressor clutch
(see page 21-119), then recharge the system to circuit troubleshooting
specifications (see page 21-122) (see page 21-84), and look for
an intermittent problem
W a r m air comes out of • Probable causes: The A/C system is overcharged • Incorrect tension or abnormal
the vents, and the high (too much refrigerant), or the condenser is wear on the drive belt. Replace
pressure liquid line is malfunctioning the belt and/or the belt
very hot • Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-120), then tensioner as needed
check the condenser for restrictions or poor • Proper operation of the
airflow. Repair as needed. Recharge the system condenser/radiator fans. Repair
to specifications (see page 21-122) as needed
• Signs of an overheated engine.
Repair as needed
(cont'd)
21-21
Climate Control
S y m p t o m Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

W a r m air comes out of • Probable cause; A/C system is low on refrigerant, • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
the vents. The suction Indicating a possible leak • Add refrigerant oil damaging on
line Is cool to w a r m , • Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-123) the part you replaced (see page
and the discharge line and repair any leaks. Recharge the system to 21-7)
is w a r m to hot specifications (see page 21-122)
W a r m air comes out of • Probable cause: Excessive air and/or moisture in • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
the vents. The suction the system, Indicating a possible leak • Check the amount of refrigerant
line is cool to w a r m , • Do the refrigerant leak check (see page 21-123) oil in the system. Adjust the oil
the discharge line is and repair any leaks. Replace the receiver/dryer level as needed
w a r m to hot, and there (see page 21-119), then recharge the system to
is no frost on the specifications (see page 21-122)
expansion valve
W a r m air comes out of • Probable cause: A restriction in the high-pressure HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
the vents. The liquid side of the system
line or the condenser • Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-120), then
outlet is abnormally check the liquid line, the receiver/dryer, and the
cool, or there is frost or condenser for restrictions. Repair as needed.
condensation on the Recharge the system to specifications (see page
receiver/dryer 21-122)
There is heavy frost or • Probable cause; A restriction in the low-pressure HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
condensation on the side of the system
expansion valve, and • Recover A/C refrigerant (see page 21-120), then
frost on the suction line check the suction line and the expansion valve
for restrictions. Repair as needed. Recharge the
system to specifications (see page 21-122)
W a r m air comes out of • Probable cause: The expansion valve is stuck * HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
the vents, and there is closed • Check the old expansion valve
frost on the expansion • Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-103) for contamination. If
valve contaminants are f o u n d ,
replace the A/C system
component that caused the
contamination
The temperature of the • Probable cause; The expansion valve is stuck • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
liquid line is the same open • Check the old expansion valve
on both sides of the • Replace the expansion valve (see page 21-103) for contamination. If
expansion valve, and contaminants are f o u n d ,
the evaporator coil or replace the A/C system
suction line has heavy component that caused the
condensation contamination
21-22
W a r m air comes out of 9
Probable cause: Compressor failure • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
the vents, but • Do the A/C system test (see page 21-129), and • A d d refrigerant oil depending
operation is normal correct any problems. If necessary, replace the on the part you replaced
otherwise compressor (see page 21-110) (see page 21-7)
Driver's and 1. Probable causes: The recirculation control door • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
passenger's side vent or the air mix door is malfunctioning • Poor or loose connections at the
temperatures vary by 2. Do the following troubleshooting: terminals
more than 20 °F (11 °C) • Recirculation control motor test (see page
" 21-97)
• Air mix control motor test (see page 21-95)
HDS does not Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-213)
communicate w i t h the
climate control unit or
the vehicle
Insufficient heating 1. Check the coolant level (see page 10-6) • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-10)
2. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3) • Damaged cylinder head gasket
3. Check the coolant temperature during normal
operation
4. Check the heater core inlet hose temperature:
• If it is COLD, check for restrictions in the hose,
a damaged or leaking thermostat, or a
damaged or leaking water p u m p
• If it is HOT, check for restrictions in the
heater core. Back flush or replace the heater
core
5. Do the air mix control motor test (see page
21-95)
6. Check the blower motor unit for obstructions
7. Check for air leaks around the ducts and vents
21-23
Climate Control
System Description
The air conditioning A/C system removes heat f r o m the passenger compartment by transferring heat f r o m the
ambient air to the evaporator. The A/C system refrigerant expands in the evaporator, and the evaporator becomes
very cold and adsorbs the heat f r o m the ambient air. The blower fan pushes air across the evaporator where the heat
is absorbed, and then it blows the cool air into the passenger compartment.
EXPANSION V A L V E
(Meters the required amount of
refrigerant into the evaporator)
BLOWER FAN
EVAPORATOR
(Absorption of heat)
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE S E N S O R
RELIEF V A L V E
(Relieves pressure at the A / C compressor
A/C PRESSURE SENSOR when the pressure is too high)
(Triple function)
W h e n t h e r e f r i g e r a n t is b e l o w
2
1 9 6 kPa ( 2 . 0 k g f / c m , 2 8 p s i )
2
o r a b o v e 3 , 1 3 8 k P a (32 k g f / c m ,
455 psi), t h e P C M t u r n s t h e
c o m p r e s s o r relay off to protect
the A/C compressor.
W h e n t h e r e f r i g e r a n t is a b o v e
2
1,470 kPa ( 1 5 . 0 k g f / c m , 2 1 3 p s i ) ,
the A/C pressure sensor
switches the radiator and A / C COMPRESSOR
A/C condenser fans to high speed. (Suction and compression)
HIGH P R E S S U R E VAPOR
HIGH P R E S S U R E LIQUID
A / C CONDENSER
(Radiation of heat)
L O W P R E S S U R E LIQUID
RECEIVER/DRYER
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and (,.,.. - ] LOW P R E S S U R E VAPOR
removes moisture)
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
f o l l o w i n g service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the required Polyol Ester (POE) refrigerant oil (SANDEN SE-10Y) designed for the R-134a A/C compressor.
Intermixing the recommended (POE) refrigerant oil w i t h any other refrigerant oil will result in A/C compressor
failure. Using the w r o n g refrigerant oil can also be a safety hazard (see page 21-7).
• All A/C system parts (A/C compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, A/C condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange w i t h R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air
conditioning systems.
• Always recover refrigerant R-134a w i t h an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
A/C fitting.
21-24
A/C Compressor
The dual scroll hybrid compressor is a t w i n chamber dual compressor, that can use both mechanical (belt-driven) and
electric power (motor-driven) to compress refrigerant.
The mechanical side uses a normal electric clutch controlled by the climate control module, and is diagnosed using
traditional diagnostic procedures.
The electric motor side uses a brushless, three-phase motor driven by a controller in the intelligent power unit (IPU).
The climate control module controls the hybrid compressor motor operation, and actual motor speed is determined by
the A/C compressor driver in the IMA battery module.
Compressor Operation Logic

The Hybrid A/C Compressor has 3 stages. The climate control module determines which stage the compressor should
be in and sends the request to the PCM.
Stage 1 (start up)- combined operation (mechanical and electric power).

Stage 2-Mechanical only
Stage 3-Variable speed electric motor only
NOTE: The system will not transition f r o m stage 1 to stage 3 directly or f r o m stage 3 to stage 1 directly. The
compressor transitions through each stage in sequence.
(cont'd)
21-25
Climate Control
Stage 1. Uses both sides of the compressor for m a x i m u m cool d o w n . The electric motor runs at M a x i m u m RPM
anytime the evaporator temperature is above a predetermined threshold, and then drops the RPM as the evaporator
temperature decreases. '
Stage 2. The mechanically driven side is used w h e n a stable temperature is reached inside the vehicle. This is
determined by blower fan speed. If the fan speed is high, the electric compressor cannot maintain the evaporator
temperature.
Stage 3. Once the vehicle's interior temperature stabilizes, the electric compressor is used to maintain the interior
temperature. The PCM decides h o w fast to turn the electric compressor based on all inputs. If the interior temperature
rises above the threshold value, the system switches t o the mechanically driven compressor, and shuts d o w n the
electric compressor.
During idle stop, the compressor speed initially drops to a m a x i m u m of 1,000 RPM to reduce under hood noise. The
speed will then slowly increase w h e n additional cooling is called for. Blower fan speed also adjusts w i t h compressor
speed.
Auxiliary Electric Water Pump
A 12 V auxiliary electric water p u m p is used to circulate coolant to maintain heater performance during idle stop.
Auxiliary Electric Water Pump logic

The climate control unit operates the p u m p , based on an idle stop signal f r o m the PCM. The pump maintains heater
temperature during idle stop. However, using hot coolant f r o m the engine will cool the engine. If the ECT temperature
drops below a predetermined setting the engine will restart. There is also a temperature sensor located at the heater
core. It is used to monitor the auxiliary electric water p u m p operation. If the pump fails, the temperature sensor
detects rapid cooling of the heater core. In addition, the auxiliary electric water pump connector includes a second set
of contacts to establish continuity t h r o u g h the connector. If these contacts open, the climate control unit will set a DTC.
PERMANENT DRIVEN MAGNET PERMANENT DRIVE M A G N E T
WITH THE IMPELLER /
From engine
T o heater valve
21-26
A / C Compressor Driver
The A/C compressor driver supplies the A/C motor compressor w i t h switched high voltage f r o m the IMA battery
module. The A/C compressor driver receives signals f r o m the MCM/PCM and the HVAC climate control panel through
a CAN Bus, which the compressor driver uses to match A/C compressor speed to the driving conditions and the
cooling request. In case of a system failure the A/C compressor driver will communicate a DTC through the CAN Bus.
The DTC is displayed through the HVAC and/or the IMA system depending on the failure.
IMA
A/C COMPRESSOR A/C COMPRESSOR
BATTERY
DRIVER MOTOR
MODULE
CAN BUS
MCM/PCM
CAN BUS
D C 12 V B A T T E R Y
(cont'd)
21-27
Climate Control

Humidity/ln-car Temperature Sensor
The humidity/in-car temperature sensor contains t w o sensors. One sensor is for humidity detection, and the other for
in-car temperature detection. When the climate control unit receives signals f r o m the humidity sensor, that the
humidity in the vehicle is very low, the climate control unit reduces the compressor run-time. Engine power loss is
kept to a m i n i m u m , and fuel economy is increased.
Humidity/ln-car Temperature Sensor Quality
The resistance of the humidity sensor changes by the adsorption and the evaporation of moisture. The resistance
change of humidity sensor changes the output voltage.
100
0 1 2 3 4
V O L T A G E (V)
21-28
A/C Pressure Sensor
The A/C pressure sensor converts A/C pressure Into electrical signals to the PCM.
A / C S f s t e m Pressure* Sensor O u t p u t System Operation

Voltage (V out)
Abnormally low pressure: Below 196 kPa The PCM disengages the compressor clutch.
Below 0.685 V
2
(2.0 kgf/cm , 28 ps!) The radiator and condenser fans operate based
on engine coolant temperature.
Normal operating pressure: 0.686 V to 1.944 V The PCM cycles the compressor clutch based
2
• Above 195 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm , 28 psi) on cooling d e m a n d . The radiator and
2
• Below 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm , 213 psi) condenser fans operate at low speed unless
the engine coolant temperature exceeds 206 °F
High operating pressure: 1.945 V to 4.575 V The PCM cycles the compressor clutch based
2
* Above 1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm , 213 psi) on cooling d e m a n d . The radiator and
2
* Below 3,138 kPa (32 kgf/cm , 455 ps!) condenser fans operate at high speed.
Abnormally high pressure: More than Above 4.575 V The PCM disengages the compressor clutch.
2
3,138 kPa (32 kgf/cm , 455 psi) The radiator and condenser fans operate based
on engine coolant temperature.
* : The A/C system pressure can be monitored In the HDS PGM-FI Data List
The response of the A/C pressure sensor is shown in the graph.
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
(Vout)
-99 § 196 3,138 kPa
Vcc S V Vout GND
(cont'd)
21-29
Climate Control
Climate Control Door Positions
21-30
(cont'd)
21-31
Climate Control

Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
n n
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 / 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
Cavity Wire Terminal Description Signal

color name
1 GRY ILL + Power source for illumination W i t h lighting switch O N : battery voltage
2 BRN RrDEF Ry S i g n a l f o r rear w i n d o w d e f f o g e r r e l a y W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d d e f o g g e r O N : a b o u t 0 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d d e f o g g e r OFF: b a t t e r y
voltage
3 LT G R N IG2 IG2 p o w e r s o u r c e W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
5 BLK GND G r o u n d f o r c l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t (G504) Less t h a n 0.5 V at all t i m e s
6 RED ACS Outputs A/C request signal to PCM W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d A / C r e q u e s t OFF: b a t t e r y
voltage. W h e n A/C request switches O N , voltage changes
t o a b o u t 0 V.
7 BLK S5V Sensor 5 V output W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V
8 BRN Teva Detects evaporator t e m p e r a t u r e sensor W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b e t w e e n 1.0 V a n d 4.0 V
signal d e p e n d i n g o n e v a p o r a t o r t e m p e r a t u r e . A b o u t 2.5 V at
72 °F (22 °C).
9 LT B L U M-COOL D r i v e s air m i x c o n t r o l m o t o r t o C O O L W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d air m i x c o n t r o l m o t o r
m o v i n g to COOL: battery voltage
10 WHT M-VENT Drives m o d e control m o t o r to VENT W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d m o d e c o n t r o l m o t o r
m o v i n g to VENT: battery voltage
11 PNK M-HOT D r i v e s air m i x c o n t r o l m o t o r t o H O T W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d air m i x c o n t r o l m o t o r
m o v i n g t o HOT: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
12 GRN M-DEF D r i v e s m o d e c o n t r o l m o t o r t o DEF W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d m o d e c o n t r o l m o t o r
m o v i n g t o DEF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
13 YEL BLW-G Voltage o u t p u t of p o w e r transistor gate W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b l o w e r OFF: 0 V. V o l t a g e
i n c r e a s e s as b l o w e r s p e e d i n c r e a s e s
14 BLU BLW-V Feedback signal of p o w e r transistor drain W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d b l o w e r OFF: b e t w e e n 5 V
voltage a n d 12 V. V o l t a g e d e c r e a s e s as b l o w e r s p e e d i n c r e a s e s
15 ORN REC D r i v e s r e c i r c u l a t i o n c o n t r o l m o t o r t o REC W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d r e c i r c u l a t i o n c o n t r o l m o t o r
m o v i n g t o REC: a b o u t 0 V
16 PUR FRS Drives recirculation control m o t o r to W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d r e c i r c u l a t i o n c o n t r o l m o t o r
FRESH m o v i n g t o FRESH: a b o u t 0 V
17 RED ILL — Ground for illumination W i t h c o m b i n a t i o n l i g h t s w i t c h O N : v o l t a g e d e c r e a s e s as
dash lights brightness increases
19 RED S-COM Sensor ground Less t h a n 0.5 V at all t i m e s
20 BLU MODE 4 Input for m o d e m o t o r signal 4 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V o r a b o u t 0 V,
depending upon mode
21-32
color name
21 PUR MODE 3 Input for m o d e m o t o r signal 3 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V o r a b o u t 0 V,
depending upon mode
22 LT G R N MODE 2 Input for m o d e m o t o r signal 2 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V o r a b o u t 0 V,
depending upon mode
23 ORN MODE 1 Input f o r m o d e m o t o r signal 1 W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 5 V o r a b o u t 0 V ,
depending upon mode
24 PUR Tsun Detects s u n l i g h t s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d s u n l i g h t s e n s o r o u t o f
d i r e c t s u n l i g h t : 3.6 V o r m o r e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d s u n l i g h t s e n s o r i n d i r e c t
s u n l i q h t : 3.5 V o r less
25 BLU Tarn Detects o u t s i d e air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 1.0—4.0 V ( d e p e n d i n g
signal o n o u t s i d e air t e m p e r a t u r e )
26 LT B L U Tr Detects in-car t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 1.0—4.0 V ( d e p e n d i n g
o n in-car t e m p e r a t u r e )
27 GRY AMD-P Detects air m i x c o n t r o l m o t o r W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d air m i x d o o r at H O T : a b o u t
potentiometer signal 4.5 V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d air m i x d o o r at C O O L :
a b o u t 1.5 V
28* RED AC SO SO f o r n a v i g a t i o n c o m m u n i c a t i o n (A/C W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s ( a b o u t 2.5 V)
side receiving)
29* BLU ACCLK CLK f o r n a v i g a t i o n c o m m u n i c a t i o n W i t h i q n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s ( a b o u t 2.5 V)
30* YEL A C SI SI f o r n a v i g a t i o n c o m m u n i c a t i o n W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s ( a b o u t 2.5 V)
(A/C side t r a n s m i s s i o n )
31 YEL RFD-P Detects r e c i r c u l a t i o n c o n t r o l m o t o r W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.5—4.5 V ( d e p e n d i n g
potentiometer signal o n recirculation control motor position)
32 PNK B-CAN CAN communication W i t h i q n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): p u l s e s ( a b o u t 2.5 V)
* : With navigation
Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R B (16P)
n n
1 3 4
9 11 12

color name
1 YEL HUM Detects h u m i d i t y s e n s o r s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 0.5 V t o 3.0 V
(depending upon humidity)
3 ORN ACTW Detects h e a t e r c o r e t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): a b o u t 1.0—4.0 V ( d e p e n d i n g
signal o n heater core temperature)
4 ORN EWPV Detects a u x i l i a r y electric w a t e r p u m p W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d electric w a t e r p u m p r e l a y
signal OFF:0V
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d electric w a t e r p u m p relay
O N : battery voltage
9 BRN EWP D r i v e s a u x i l i a r y electric w a t e r p u m p r e l a y W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d electric w a t e r p u m p relay
OFF: b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d electric w a t e r p u m p r e l a y
ON: about 0 V
11 GRN T H IN Detects t h e r m a l p r o t e c t o r s i g n a l W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d t h e r m a l p r o t e c t o r c l o s e d :
battery voltage
W i t h i g n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II) a n d t h e r m a l p r o t e c t o r o p e n :
about 0 V
12 BRN THOUT Outputs thermal protector signal W i t h i q n i t i o n s w i t c h O N (II): b a t t e r y v o l t a g e
21-33
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
IGNITION SWITCH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IG1 HOT in ON (II)
. a n d START (III) Q10
3 ,
0 "
21-34
»1: '06-08 models
•2:'09 model
- :CAN line
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
21-35
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1202 or DTC indicator C and AUTO: DTC B1205, DTC indicator J and AUTO or L
Climate Control Unit Internal Error and AUTO: Climate Control Unit Lost
Communication with Gauge Control Module
NOTE: Check the battery condition (see page 22-61) and (TACH) (VSP/NE message)
the charging system (see page 12-179).
DTC B1206 or DTC indicator F and AUTO:
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. Climate Control Unit Lost Communication
w i t h Gauge Control Module (TACH) (ECT
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn message)
to ON (II).
DTC B1207 or DTC indicator D and AUTO:
3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page Climate Control Unit Lost Communication
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). w i t h Gauge Control Module (TACH) (ILLUMI
message)
4. Check for DTCs.
DTC B1209: Climate Control Unit Lost
Is DTC B1202 or C and AUTO indicated? Communication with Gauge Control Module
(TACH) (ILLUMI message)
Y E S — T h e climate control unit is faulty, replace the
climate control u n i t . • 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
NO—Intermittent failure, the climate control unit is 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn
OK at this t i m e . B to ON (II).
3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page

21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12).
4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B1205, J and AUTO or L and AUTO, and/

or DTC B1206 or F and AUTO, and/or DTC B1207
or D and AUTO, and/or DTC B1209 indicated?
NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or

poor connections on the gauge control module
(TACH) and the climate control unit.H
5. Select UNIT INFORMATION in the BODY

ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select CONNECTED UNIT in the UNIT

INFORMATION menu.
Is gauge control module detected?
YES—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control u n i t . B
21-36
0 .
1 v
:
n
7. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q DTC B1220 or DTC Indicator E and AUTO:
(16P). A Short in the Recirculation Control Motor
Circuit
8. Disconnect the gauge control module (TACH) 36P
connector. 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
9. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn
box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 6 and the to ON (II).
gauge control module (TACH) 36P connector
terminal No. 2 1 . 3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page
UN > DASh Fl •' E W IU I 30 < 7 Q\\ , if C I OR Q (16P)
4. Check for DTCs.
PNK
Is DTC B1220 or E and AUTO indicated?
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Y E S — G o t o step 5.
9 11 12 13 14 15 16
poor connections on the recirculation control motor
circuit. •
HTVl ^ | B | 6 I 7 j 8 [ 9 j 10 I 11 j / l / l 14 j 16 j 16 | l7|"^f
PNK
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
- i € - <: G»\!Til€ . ÎCDUS • (T ..C !) 36P C %
- ECTOS 21-97).
Is the recirculation control motor OK?
Y E S — G o to the MICU input test (see page 22-106).
NO—Replace the recirculation control motor
(see page 2 1 - 9 7 ) . •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the MICU
and the gauge control module (TACH). • 7. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P).
(cont'd)
21-37
Climate Control
9. Check for continuity between body ground and 11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals same terminals for voltage between the terminals
No. 7 and No. 31 individually. and body ground.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P) C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
r . —
BLK
r
n „ - •
1 | 2 | 3 I/] 57 || 68 | 911| 10 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 | r r

] 17 !/| 19J 20 j 21 [ 22 I 23 | 24 I 25 j 26 | 27| 28 | 29 | 30 j 31 j 32 1 | 2 | 3 [/] 57 || 68 | 911| 10| 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
YEL | 17 1/ 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | Y26E L | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s W i r e side of female t e r m i n a l s
Is there continuity? Is there any voltage?
Y E S — R e p a i r short to body ground in the wire(s) YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between
between the climate control unit and the the climate control unit and the recirculation
recirculation control m o t o r . • control motor. This short may also damage the
climate control unit. Repair the short to power
NO—Go to step 10. before replacing the climate control u n i t . l l
10. Check for continuity between climate control unit NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
connector A (32P) terminals as follows. and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
From terminal To terminals
7 19,31
19 31
is there continuity between any of the terminals?
YES—Repair the short in the wires. •
NO—Go to step 11.

DTC B122S or DTC indicator A: An Open in 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
the In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit connector A (32P) terminal No. 26 and the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. terminal No. 1.
CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P)
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn Wire side of female terminals
to ON (II). 3 1 1
I f 1, l/l f I f f * I f I f Ifl . If I f I f M
I 17 |/j 19 j 20 [ 21 | 22 | 23 j 24 j 25 I 26 j Z71 28 j 29 j 30 j 31 j 32
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page I LT B L U ,
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1225 or A indicated? HUMIDITY/IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R

poor connections on the in-car temperature sensor Y E S — G o t o step 9.
circuit.•
NO—Repair open in the wire between the climate
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). control unit and the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor. •
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
(see page 21-90), and test it (see page 21-89). 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (32P) terminal No. 19 and the
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK? humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector
terminal No. 2.
Y E S — G o t o step 7. CLIMATE C O N T R O L UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P)
NO—Replace the humidity/in-car temperature 1

1 j 2 j 3 j/] S | 6 fTj B | 9 11pf"il 112 113 114 (15 116 \
sensor. • j 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 j 23 j 24 | 26 | 26 | 271 2B | 29 j30 | 31 I 32
RED |

RED!
A
1 2 3 4
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
4P CONNECTOR
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at

climate control unit connector A (32P) and at the
humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P connector. If
the connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit.H

control unit and the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor. •
2 1 ™39
Climate Control

DTC B1226 or DTC indicator B: A Short in the 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
In-car Temperature Sensor Circuit climate control unit connector A (32P) terminal
No. 26.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn
to ON (II).
r 1 —f 1 ] 12 I 13 114 I 15 116 I
7 j 8 I 9 I 10
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). |117| 2
\ / I\ 319/ |]205| 2
I 16| 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
LT BLU
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1226 or B Indicated?
NO —Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or

poor connections on the in-car temperature sensor Is there continuity?
circuit. •
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). between the climate control unit and the humidity/
in-car temperature sensor. •
6. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
(see page 21-90), and test it (see page 21-89). N O — G o t o step 9.
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK? 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (32P) terminals No. 19 and No. 26.
NO—Replace the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor. •
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). 1 1 n

1 I 2 ] 3 / I 5 I 67 1 8 9 J 11 01 | 12 I 13 | 14 | 15 I 16 |
I l / l 19 I 20 I 21 I 22 j 23 | 24 ! 25 I 26 | 27 j 28 I 29 j 30 I 31 I 32
1 7
RED LT B L U
YES—Repair short in the wires between the climate

control unit and the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor. •
NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

replace the original climate control u n i t . i l
21-40
DTC B1227 or DTC indicator C: An Open in 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
the Outside Air Temperature Sensor Circuit connector A (32P) terminal No. 25 and the outside
air temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.
to ON (II). 1 1
1 I 2 I 3 I/I 5 I 6 7 | 8 | 9 |10 11 | 12 |13 114 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / | 1 9 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
BLU
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1227 or C indicated?
Y E S — G o to step 5. O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

poor connections on the outside air temperature Is there continuity?
sensor circuit. •
6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor control unit and the outside air temperature
(see page 21-91), and test it (see page 21-91). sensor. •
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
NO—Replace the outside air temperature sensor. •
(cont'd)
21-41
Climate Control
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC B1228 or DTC indicator D: A Short in the
connector A (32P) terminal No. 19 and the outside Outside Air Temperature Sensor Circuit
air temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P)
1 f to ON (II).
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
RED
• 21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1228 or D indicated?

O U T S I D E A I R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s Y E S — G o t o step 5.
Is there continuity? poor connections on the outside air temperature
circuit. •
climate control unit connector A (32P) and at the 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good 6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor
climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m / (see page 21-91), and test it (see page 21-91).
control unit. • Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
NO—Repair open in the w i r e between the climate Y E S — G o t o step 7.

control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor. • NO—Replace the outside air temperature sensor. •
21-42
8. Check for continuity between body ground and DTC B1229 or DTC indicator E: An Open In
climate control unit connector A (32P) terminal the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
No. 25.
'to ON (II).
i r
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 8 I 9 110 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
BLU
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1229 or E indicated?
W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals Y E S — G o to step 5.

Is there continuity? poor connections on the sunlight sensor circuit. •
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
between the climate control unit and the outside air
temperature sensor. • 6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
NO—Go to step 9. 7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P).
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (32P) terminals No. 19 and No. 25. connector A (32P) terminal No. 24 and the sunlight
sensor 2P connector terminal No. 2.
17 | 8 | 9 rj
n
T i rj 1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 | 101 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 j 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 | | 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
PUR
RED BLU
PUR

S U N L I G H T S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
control unit and the outside air temperature YES—Goto step 9.
sensor. •
NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit, control unit and the sunlight sensor. •
replace the original climate control unit. •
(cont'd)
21-43
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting (conf d)
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC B1230 or DTC indicator F: A Short in the
connector A (32P) terminal No. 19 and the sunlight Sunlight Sensor Circuit
sensor 2P connector terminal No. 1.
r T \ n
to ON (II).
1 I2 I 3 1/1 5 1 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 1 2 | 13 114 115 116 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
RED
4. Check for DTCs.

RED
Is DTC B1230 or F indicated?
S U N L I G H T SENSOR 2P C O N N E C T O R Y E S — G o t o step 5.
Is there continuity? poor connections on the sunlight sensor circuit.'•
YES—Goto step 10. 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
NO—Repair open in the wire between the climate 6. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
control unit and the sunlight sensor. •
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
8. Check for continuity between body ground and
11. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). climate control unit connector A (32P) terminal
No. 24.
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-92).
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at p T 1 n

1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 |
sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are | 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, PUR

NO—Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-92).


between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor. •
NO—Go to step 9.
21-44
9. Check for continuity between climate control unit DTC B1231 or DTC indicator G: An Open in
connector A (32P) terminals No, 19 and No. 24. the Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit


to ON (II).
n,, , , 1 • -
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 j 29 [ 30 | 31 | 32
RED PUR
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1231 or G indicated?

YES — G o t o step 5.
Is there continuity? NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or

poor connections on the evaporator temperature
YES—Repair short in the wires between the climate sensor circuit. •
control unit and the sunlight sensor. •
NO—Go to step 10.
6. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor
10. Reconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.
. (see page 21-101), and test it (see page 21-90).
11. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P).
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK?
12. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-92).
YES—Goto step 7.
Is the sunlight sensor OK? NO—Replace the evaporator temperature
sensor. B
* and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
NO—Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-92).
(cont'd)
21-45
Climate Control
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (32P) terminal No. 19 and the
8. Check for continuity between climate control unit evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector
connector A (32P) terminal No. 8 and the terminal No. 1.
* evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector
terminal No. 2.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P) I ™t
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 1 | 2 | 3 | / 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10
11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 116 |
| 17 | / 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
BRN
RED
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 |10 11 | 12 113 114 | 15 | 16 |

)
| 17 | / 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
RED r—i
hi
1 2
L
E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
BRN W i r e side of female terminals
E V A P O R A T O R T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Is there continuity? climate control unit connector A (32P) and at the
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
YES—Go to step 9. connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
NO—Repair open in the wire between the climate indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit and the evaporator temperature control unit. •
sensor. •
control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor. •
21-46
DTC B1232 or DTC indicator H: A Short in the Check for continuity between body ground and
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Circuit climate control unit connector A (32P) terminal
No. 8.

to ON (II).
BRN

n r——r
1 I2I 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 8 9 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). | 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1232 or H indicated?
YES—Goto step 5.

poor connections on the evaporator temperature Is there continuity?
circuit. •
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). between the climate control unit and the
evaporator temperature sensor. •
6. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor
(see page 21-101), and test it (see page 21-90). NO—Go to step 9.
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK? 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector A (32P) terminals No. 8 and No. 19.
YES—Goto step 7.
NO—Replace the evaporator temperature sensor.
•
BRN
p1 | 2 I T— r
3 | / | 5 I 6 7 | 8 I 9 I 10 11 | 12 | 13 I 14 | 15 | 16 f
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
RED

control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor. H

and recheck. if the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit.H
21-47
Climate Control
DTC Troubleshooting {cont'd!
DTC B1233 or DTC indicator J : An Open in 9. Check for continuity between the following
the Air Mix Control Motor Circuit terminals of climate control unit connector A (32P)
and the air mix control motor 7P connector.
32P; 7P:
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn No. 7 No. 5
to ON (II). No. 19 No. 7
No. 27 No. 3
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page
4. Check for DTCs. BLK

n r f rj
Is DTC B1233 or J indicated?

1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 67 | 8 | 9 | 1011 | 12 | 13 | 14 I 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
Y E S — G o t o step 5. RED ; GRY

poor connections on the air mix control motor
circuit. •
GRY
RED
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 1 2 3 / / 7
cn
BLK
6. Test the air mix control motor (see page 21-95).
AIR M I X C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R
Is the air mix control motor OK? W i r e side of female terminals
Y E S — G o t o step7. Is there continuity?
NO—Replace the air mix control motor (see page YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
21-95).H climate control unit connector A (32P) and at the air
m i x control motor 7P connector. If the connections
7. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector. are g o o d , substitute a known-good climate control
unit and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). away, replace the original climate control unit.H
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the air mix control
motor. •
21-48
DTC B1234 or DTC indicator K: A Short in the 9. Check for continuity between body g r o u n d and
Air Mix Control Motor Circuit climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals
No. 7 and No. 27 individually.

to ON (II).
BLK
r 1
3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page 1 I2 I 3 I/I 5 I 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 116 |
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). | 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
GRY
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1234 or K indicated?
YES—Goto step 5.

poor connections on the air mix control motor Is there continuity?
circuit. •
YES—Repair any short to body ground in the
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). wire(s) between the climate control unit and the air
mix control motor. •
Is the air mix control motor OK?
10. Check for continuity between climate control unit
YES—Goto s t e p 7 . connector A (32P) terminals as follows.
NO—Replace the air m i x control motor (see page From terminal To terminals
21-95).B 7 19, 27
19 27
7. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
(cont'd)
21-49
Climate Control
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the I DTC B1235 or DTC indicator L: A Problem in
same terminals for voltage between the terminals the Air Mix Control Linkage, Door, or Motor
and body ground.

to ON (II).
BLK
p r f
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 |10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 | 3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12).
I GRY
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1235 or L indicated?
Is there any voltage? poor connections on the air m i x control motor
circuit. H
YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between
the climate control unit and the air mix control 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
motor. This short may also damage the climate
control unit. Repair the short to power before 6. Disconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector.
replacing the climate control u n i t . H
21-50
8. Check for continuity between the f o l l o w i n g 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
terminals of the climate control unit connector A climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals
(32P) and the air mix control motor 7P connector. No. 9 and No. 11 individually.
32P: 7P:
No. 9 No. 2
No. 11 No. 1
LT B L U
PNK
CLIMATE CONTROL U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 1 | 2 | 3 / | 5 | 67 8 9 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 116 |
| 17 | / 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
LT B L U
I 1 1 I
1 1 1
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 67 | 8 | 9 | 10- H — r n — i — r — f l
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 2411| 2152 |13
261|42715| 21
86| 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
1 2 3 5 / 7
PNK / YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the air mix
AIR MIX C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R control motor. •
Is the air mix control motor OK?
climate control unit and the air mix control YES—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
motor. • and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
NO—Replace the air mix control motor (see page

21-95), or repair the air mix control linkage or
door.B
21-51
Climate Control
DTC B1239 or DTC indicator M: An Open or 9. Check for continuity between the following
Short in the Mode Control Motor Circuit terminals of climate control unit connector A (32P)
and the mode control motor 7P connector.
32P: 7P;
No. 21 No. 4
3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page No. 22 No. 5
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). No. 23 No. 6
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1239 or M indicated?

1 2 3 / 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 / 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
RED ORN
NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or BLU LT G R N

poor connections on the mode control motor
PUR
circuit, a
PUR
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). BLU c J RED I

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
6. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-96). LT G R N ORN
Is the mode control motor OK?

M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R
NO—Replace the mode control motor (see page Is there continuity?
21-96).•
7. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). climate control unit and the mode control motor.
21-52
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 12. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the
climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals same terminals for voltage between the terminals
No. 20, 21, 22, and No. 23 individually. and body ground.
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P) C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
3ZL
W i r e side of female terminals W i r e side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there any voltage?
YES—-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between
between the climate control unit and the mode the climate control unit and the mode control motor.
control motor. • This short may also damage the climate control
unit. Repair the short to power before replacing the
N O — G o t o step 11. climate control unit.H
11. Check for continuity between climate control unit NO—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
connector A (32P) terminals as follows. climate control unit connector A (32P) and at the
mode control motor IP connector. If the
From terminal To terminals connections are good, substitute a known-good
19 2 0 , 2 1 , 2 2 , 23 climate control unit, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
20 21, 22, 23 indication goes away, replace the original climate
21 22, 23 control unit.H
22 23
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
21-53
Climate Control
DTC B1240 or DTC indicator N: A Problem in 8. Check for continuity between the following
the Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or Motor terminals of climate control unit connector A (32P)
and the mode control motor 7P connector.
32P: 7P:
to ON (II). • No. 12 No. 2
WHT
4. Check for DTCs. GRN
.„„ , , „ , , , _n
1 | 2 | 3 \ / \ 5 | 6 7 j 8 j 9 | 10
Is DTC B1240 or N indicated? 11 | 12 | 13I 14 | 15 116 j
| 17 \ / \ 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or GRN

poor connections on the mode control motor
WHT
circuit. • 5 6
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). M O D E C O N T R O L M O T O R 7P C O N N E C T O R

6. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.

YES—Goto step 9.

climate control unit and the mode control m o t o r . •
21-54
9. Check for continuity between body ground and DTC B1241 or DTC indicator P: A Problem in
climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals the Blower Motor Circuit

to ON (II).
WHT
p, GRN
T 3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page
1 | 2 I 3 \ / \ 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 \ / \ 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B1241 or P indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5. •

Is there continuity? poor connections on the blower motor circuit. •
YES—Repair short t o body ground in the wire(s) 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor. • 6. Check the No. 9 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
N O — G o t o step 10. under-dash fuse/relay box.
10. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-96). Are the fuses OK?
Is the mode control motor OK? Y E S — G o to step 7.
YES—Substitute a known-good climate control unit, NO—Replace the fuses, and recheck. If fuses blow
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, again, check for a short in the No. 9 (40 A) and
replace the original climate control u n i t . B No, 36 (10 A) fuses c i r c u i t . •
NO—Replace the mode control motor (see page 7. Connect the blower motor 2P connector terminal
21-96), or repair the mode control linkage or No. 2 to body ground with a j u m p e r wire.
doors. •
B L O W E R M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
GRN
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
21-55
Climate Control
8. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
Does the blower motor run? Does the blower motor run at high speed?
NO—Go to step 24. NO—Repair open in the wire between the power
transistor and the blower motor. •
10. Disconnect the jumper wire.
11. Disconnect the power transistor 4P connector.
12. Check for continuity between power transistor 4P
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. 18. Check for continuity between body ground and
climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 4P C O N N E C T O R No. 13 and No. 14 individually.
_J -" L, B L K
1 2
3 4
YEL BLU
j j . j . JT
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 I 9 | 10
11 |J 27
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 j
12 | 2813| ]29
14| J15 31 | J
30 | j16 32

NO—Check for an open in the wire between the
power transistor and body ground. If the wire is OK, YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
check for poor ground at G401 (see page 2 2 - 2 0 ) . • between the climate control unit and the power
transistor. L:
13. Connect power transistor 4P connector terminals
No. 2 and No. 4 w i t h a j u m p e r wire. N O — G o t o step 19.
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 4P C O N N E C T O R
1 BLK
1 2
JUMPER WIRE
3 4
GRN
21-56
19. Check for continuity between the following 22. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P).
terminals of climate control unit connector A (32P)
and the power transistor 4P connector. 23. Test the power transistor (see page 21-94).
32P: 4P: Is the power transistor OK?

No. 13 No. 1
No. 14 No. 3 YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
power transistor 4P connector. If the connections
are good, substitute a known-good climate control
unit, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original climate control u n i t . B
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | a | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 23 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
NO—Replace the power transistor, a

YEL -i
2
i 25. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
BLU
3 4
26. Measure the voltage between the blower motor 2P
P O W E R T R A N S I S T O R 4P C O N N E C T O R connector terminal No. 1 and body ground.
B L O W E R M O T O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the 1

climate control unit and the power t r a n s i s t o r . • WHT
2 1 . Measure the voltage between body ground and

climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals Wire side of female terminals
C L I M A T E C O N T R O L UNIT C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
YES—Replace the blower motor. •
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 - i F N O — G o t o step 27.
11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 116 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32

(vxy)
28. Remove the blower motor relay f r o m the under-
hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-64).
Is the relay OK ?
Is there voltage? Y E S — G o t o step 29.
YES—Repair short to power in the wires. NO—Replace the blower motor relay. B
NO—Go to step 22.
(cont'd)
21-57
Climate Control
29. Measure the voltage between blower motor relay 32. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
4P socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
33. Check for continuity between blower motor relay
B L O W E R M O T O R R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
f
1
2
4 3
V
BLK
Is there battery voltage? Terminal side of female terminals
Y E S — G o to step 30. Is there continuity?
NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box YES—Repair open in the wire between the blower
(see page 22-59). • motor relay and the blower motor. •
30. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). NO—Check for an open in the wire between the
blower motor relay and body ground. If the wire is
3 1 . Measure the voltage between blower motor relay OK, check for poor ground at G301 (see page 22-20)
f
1
4 3
j
BRN
I)

(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
blower motor relay. •
21-58
DTC B2967 or DTC indicator M and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between the following
An Open In the Humidity Sensor Circuit terminals of climate control unit connector A (32P)
and B (16P) and humidity/in-car temperature
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. sensor 4P connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn 32P: 4P:
No. 19 No. 2
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). 16P: 4P:
No. 1 No. 3
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2967 or M and AUTO indicated?
BLK
YES—Goto step 5.
1 I 2 I 3 1/1 5 1 67 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 \ / \ 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
poor connections on the humidity sensor circuit. •
HUMIDITY/
6. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P) IN-CAR T E M P E R A T U R E
and B (16P). SENSOR4PCONNENTOR
7. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
4P connector.
YES—Goto step 9.

climate control unit and the humidity/in-car
temperature sensor. •
(cont'd)
21-59
Climate Control
9. Reconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor DTC 12988 or DTC indicator N and AUTO:
4P connector. A Short in the Humidity Sensor Circuit
10. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P) 1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
and B (16P). n
11. Test the humidity temperature sensor (see page j| to ON (II).
21-89). |
Is the humidity sensor OK ? 21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12).
YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at 4 Check for DTCs.

climate control unit connector A (32P) and B (16P)
and at the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 4P Is DTC B2968 or N and AUTO indicated?
connector. If the connections are good, substitute a
known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If YES—Goto step 5.
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original climate control unit.H NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or
poor connections on the humidity sensor c i r c u i t •
NO—Replace the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor (see page 21-90). • 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
6. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P)

and B (16P).
7. Disconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor

4P connector.
21-60
8. Check for continuity between body ground and 9. Check for continuity between terminals of climate
climate control unit connector A (32P) terminal control unit connector A (32P) and B (16P) as
No. 1, and between climate control unit connector follows.
B (16P) terminal No. 1 and body ground.
From terminal To terminals
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P)' A7 A19, B1
A19 B1
BLK Is there continuity between any of the terminals?

H r r
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 ] 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 116 |
| 17 | / j 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 j 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 j 31 | 32
St
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the climate control unit and the humidity/
in-car temperature sensor. •
(cont'd)
21-61
Climate Control
10. Turn the Ignition switch to ON (II), and measure the 11. Reconnect the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
same terminals for voltage between the terminals 4P connector.
and body ground.
12. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P)
and B (16P).
13. Test the humidity temperature sensor (see page

21-89).
r •—f n
1 I 2 I 3 I/I 5 1 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 \/\ 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
Is the humidity temperature sensor OK ?
RED
(V) (V) and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
IMO—Replace the humidity/in-car temperature

Wire side of female terminals sensor (see page 21-90). •
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (ISP)
Is there any voltage?
YES—Repair short to power in the wire(s) between

the climate control unit and the humidity/in-car
temperature sensor. This short may also damage
the climate control unit. Repair the short to power
before replacing the climate control u n i t . B
IMO—Go to step 11.
21-62
DTC B2983 or DTC indicator B and AUTO: 9. Check for continuity between body ground and
A Problem in the Recirculation Control climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals
Linkage, Door, or Motor No. 15 and No. 16 individually.

to ON (II). PUR

1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 j 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 |16 |
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). I 1 7

l / l 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
4. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B2983 or B and AUTO indicated?
Y E S — G o t o step 5. W i r e side of female terminals
NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or Is there continuity?

circuit. • YES—Repair short t o body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the
5. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). recirculation control m o t o r . •
6. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P N O — G o t o step 10.

connector.
10. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). 21-97).
8. Check for continuity between the following Is the recirculation control motor OK?
and the recirculation control motor 7P connector. YES—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
32P: 7P: replace the original climate control u n i t . H
No. 15 No. 1
No. 16 No. 2 NO—Replace the recirculation control motor
(see page 21-97), or repair the recirculation control
Wire side of female terminals linkage or door. •
n II ORN Ij PUR
j j
117 l / l 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 [ 231 24 | 25 [ 26 [ 27[ 28 | 2flJ3o| 31 | 32
2 3 [/] 6 | 6 | 7 | 6 | 9 [ 10 [ 11 112 113 [ 14- | 15 [ 16 |
12 3
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor. •
21-63
Climate Control
DTC B2986 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: 9. Check for continuity between the following
An Open in the Recirculation Control Motor terminals of climate control unit connector A (32P)
Circuit and the recirculation control motor 7P connector.
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. 32P: 7P:

No. 7 No. 5
BLK
4. Check for DTCs. n r r
1 I 2 I 3 l/l 5 I 6 7 8 9 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
Is DTC B2986 or A and AUTO? | 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
RED YEL

circuit. •
/
H
1 2 3
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). BLK
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page R E C I R C U L A T I O N C O N T R O L M O T O R IP C O N N E C T O R

21-97). W i r e side of f e m a l e terminals
Is the recirculation control motor OK? Is there continuity?
Y E S — G o t o step 7. YES—Check for loose wires or poor connections at

NO—Replace the recirculation control motor recirculation control motor 7P connector. If the
(see page 21-97). • connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
climate control unit and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
7. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P indication goes away, replace the original climate
connector. control u n i t . B
8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor. •
21-64
DTC B2989: A Problem In the A/C DTC B2990: A Problem in the A/C
Compressor Motor Compressor Driver
NOTE: Stop the engine for at least 1 hour. NOTE:

• Put on gloves to protect your hands f r o m electrical
1. Check the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash shock.
• Stop the engine for at least 1 hour.
fuse/relay box. • IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is
a high-voltage system. You must be familiar w i t h the
Is the fuse OK? IMA system before w o r k i n g on or around it. Make
sure you have read the IMA service precautions
YES—Goto step 2. before doing repairs or service (see page 12-3).
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse
blows again, check for a short in the No. 22 (7.5 A) 1. Check the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse circuit. • fuse/relay box.
2. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. Is the fuse OK?
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn Y E S — G o t o step 2.
to ON (II).
4. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page blows again, check for a short in the No. 22 (7.5 A)
fuse circuit. S
21-11).
5. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2989 indicated? to ON (II).
Y E S — G o t o step 6. 4. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page

NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or 21-11).
poor connections at the A/C compressor connector
(3P) and climate control unit connector B (16P).B 5. Check for DTCs.
6. Check for DTCs. Is DTC B2990 or B2998 indicated?
Is DTC B2998 indicated? YES-

• B2990 indicated: go to step 6.
YES—Troubleshooting DTC B2998 (see page 21-73). • B2998 indicated: Troubleshooting DTC B2998
(see page 21-73).
NO—Replace the A/C compressor (see page NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
21-110).H time.B
(cont'd)
21-65
Climate Control
7. Check that the A/C compressor driver 3P connector DTC B2992 or DTC indicator F and FRESH:
An Open in the Thermal Protector Circuit
is properly connected on the A/C compressor driver.
Is it connected properly?
Y E S — G o t o step 8. to ON (II).
NO—Reconnect the connector and recheck the
. function. • 3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page
21-11) or the climate control unit (see page 21-12).
8. From the under h o o d , disconnect the A/C
compressor power 3P connector. 4. Check for DTCs.
9. At the IPU, disconnect the A/C compressor driver Is DTC B2992 or F and FRESH indicated?
3P connector f r o m the A/C compressor driver.
10. Check for continuity between the f o l l o w i n g
terminals of the A/C compressor power 3P NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or
connector and the A/C compressor driver 3P poor connections on the thermal protector
connector. circuit. •
Compressor 3P: Driver 3P: 5. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.

No. 1 No. 3
No. 2 No. 1 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
No. 3 No. 2
7. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector.
A / C C O M P R E S S O R POWER 3P C O N N E C T O R
8. Connect A/C compressor clutch 3P connector
r
f
1 A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H 3P C O N N E C T O R
o
o z_
V J
]
BLU/RED
J U M P E R WIRE
9. Start the engine, and push the A/C button ON.
YES—Replace the A/C compressor (see page

21-110).•
NO—Replace the A/C compressor power cable.
21-66
10. Check for DTCs using the HDS or self-diagnostic. DTC B2993 or DTC indicator L and FRESH:
A Short in the Thermal Protector Circuit
Is DTC B2992 or F and FRESH indicated?
YES—Goto step 11.
NO—Check the A/C compressor clutch (see page to ON (II).
21-113) and the thermal protector (see page 21-113).
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2993 or L and FRESH indicated?
13. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (16P).
14. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of climate control unit connector B (16P) NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or
and the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector. poor connections on the thermal protector
circuit. •
16P: 3P:
No. 11 No. 1 5. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
No. 12 No. 3
7. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector.
8. Connect the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector

terminals No. 1 and No. 3 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H 3P C O N N E C T O R
BLU/RED RED
JUMPER WIRE


climate control unit and the A/C c o m p r e s s o r . •
(cont'd)
21-67
Climate Control
9. Start the engine, and turn on the A/C. DTC B2995 or DTC indicator A and FRESH:
A Problem in the Auxiliary Electric Water
10. Check for DTCs using the HDS or self-diagnostic. Pump Circuit
Is DTC B2993 or L and FRESH indicated? 1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS.
Y E S — G o t o step 11. 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn
to ON (II).
IMO—Check the A/C compressor clutch (see page
21-113) and the thermal protector (see page 21-113). 3. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page
• 21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12).
11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 4. Check for DTCs.
12. Disconnect the jumper wire. Is DTC B2995 or A and FRESH indicated?
13. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (16P). Y E S — G o t o step 5.
14. Check for continuity between body ground and NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or
climate control unit connector B (16P) terminals poor connections on the auxiliary electric water
No. 11 and No. 12 individually. pump circuit. •
5. Check the No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK ?
NO—Replace the fuses, and recheck. If the fuse

blows again, check for a short in the No. 22 (7.5 A)
or No. 36 (10 A) fuse circuit. M
W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Is there continuity? 7. Remove the auxiliary electric water p u m p relay

f r o m the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box, and
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) test it (see page 22-64).
between the climate control unit and the A/C
compressor. • Is the relay OK?
NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit, Y E S — G o t o step 8.

replace the original climate control unit. • NO—Replace the auxiliary electric water p u m p
relay. •
21-68
8. Measure the voltage between auxiliary electric 11. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
water pump relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and
body ground. 12. Disconnect the auxiliary electric water pump 2P
connector.
A U X I L I A R Y E L E C T R I C W A T E R P U M P R E L A Y 4P SOCKET
f '1 R E D 13. Check for continuity between auxiliary electric

•1
water p u m p relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and
auxiliary electric water p u m p 2P connector terminal
2
No. 1.
4 3 A U X I L I A R Y E L E C T R I C W A T E R P U M P R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
v J
ORN

1 2
ORN
AUXILIARY E L E C T R I C W A T E R PUMP 2P C O N N E C T O R
(7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and Is there continuity?
the auxiliary electric water p u m p relay. •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the auxiliary
10. Measure the voltage between auxiliary electric electric water p u m p relay and the auxiliary electric
water p u m p relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and water p u m p . H
body ground.
14. Check for continuity between auxiliary electric
A U X I L I A R Y E L E C T R I C W A T E R P U M P R E L A Y 4P SOCKET
water p u m p 2P connector terminal No. 2 and body
ground.
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC W A T E R PUMP 2P C O N N E C T O R
BRN
P
Is there battery voltage? is there continuity?
NO—Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 NO—Check f o r an open in the wire between the
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the auxiliary electric water pump and body ground. If
auxiliary electric water pump relay. • the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G301
(see page 2 2 - 2 0 ) . •
(cont'd)
21-69
Climate Control
15. Reinstall the auxiliary electric water p u m p relay. 20. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector B (16P) terminal No. 4 and auxiliary
16. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (16P). electric water p u m p relay 4P socket terminal No. 2.
18. Measure the voltage between climate control unit

connector B (16P) terminal No. 9 and body g r o u n d .
A U X I L I A R Y E L E C T R I C W A T E R P U M P R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
NO—Repair open in the wire between the auxiliary
electric water p u m p relay and the climate control Y E S — G o t o step 2 1 .
unit.B
NO—Repair open in the auxiliary electric water
19. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). pump feedback wire. •
21. Reconnect the auxiliary electric water p u m p 2P

connector.
22. Reconnect climate control unit connector B (16P).
23. Run the auxiliary electric water pump by selecting

the CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST Menu f r o m the
HDS.
24. Listen to the auxiliary electric water pump by

touching it with a flat-tip screwdriver or a
stethoscope.
Can you hear the pump running?
YES—Substitute a known-good climate control,

replace the original climate control u n i t s
NO—Replace the auxiliary electric water pump. •
21-70
DTC B2996 or DTC indicator P and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between climate control unit
An Open in the Heater Core Temperature connector A (32P) terminal No. 19 and the heater
Sensor Circuit core temperature sensor 2 P connector terminal
No. 2.
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
to ON (II). 1 i 2 | 3 | / | 5 I 6 7 | 8 | 9 110 11 | 12 |13 114 116 116 |
| 17 | / | 19 |2o|2l|22|23|z4|zs|28|27|28|29|30|3l|32

4. Check the DTCs.

H E A T E R C O R E T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R
Is DTC B2996 or P and AUTO indicated? Wire side of female terminals
NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or Y E S — G o t o step 9.

poor connections on the heater core temperature
sensor circuit. • NO—Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the heater core temperature
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). sensor. •
6. Remove the heater core temperature sensor 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
(see page 21-93), and test it (see page 21-93). connector B (16P) terminal No. 3 and the heater
core temperature sensor 2P connector terminal
Is the heater core temperature sensor OK? No. 1.
NO—Replace the heater core temperature

sensor. H

and B (16P).

climate control unit connector A (32P) and B (16P)
and at the heater core temperature sensor 2P
connector. If the connections are good, substitute a
known-good climate control unit, and recheck. If
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original climate control unit.H

sensor. •
21-71
Climate Control
DTC B2997 or DTC indicator H and AUTO: 8. Check for continuity between body ground and the
A Short in the Heater Core Temperature heater core temperature sensor 2P connector
Sensor Circuit terminals No. 1 and No. 2 individually.
1. Clear the DTC w i t h the HDS. H E A T E R C O R E T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R 2P C O N N E C T O R

to ON (II).

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2997 or H and AUTO indicated?

NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or Is there continuity?

poor connections on the heater core temperature
sensor circuit. • YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the heater
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). core temperature sensor. •
6. Remove the heater core temperature sensor NO—Go to step 9.

(see page 21-93), and test it (see page 21-93).
9. Check for continuity between the heater core
Is the heater core temperature sensor OK? temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No. 1
and No. 2.
NO—Replace the heater core temperature
sensor. •

andB(16P).

sensor. •

replace the original climate control unit. 11
21-72
DTC B2998: A Problem i n the A/C DTC B2999: A problem in the A/C
Compressor Driver Compressor Delivery Valve
1. Check the No. 22 ( 7 . 5 A) fuse in the under-dash 1. Check the No. 22 ( 7 . 5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box. fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK ? Is the fuse OK?
Y E S — G o to step 2. Y E S — G o t o step 2.
NO—Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse NO —Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse
blows again, check for a short in the No. 22 ( 7 . 5 A) blows again, check for a short in the No. 22 ( 7 . 5 A)
fuse circuit. • fuse circuit. •
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn 3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then turn
to ON (II). to ON (II).
4. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page 4. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page
21-11). 21-11).
5 . Check for DTCs. 5 . Check for DTCs.
Is DTC B2998 indicated? Is DTC B2999 indicated?
YES—Substitute a known-good A/C compressor YES—Replace the A/C compressor (see page
driver, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes 21-110).B
away, replace the original A/C compressor driver
(see page 21-109). • NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.B
time.B
21-73
Climate Control

DTC i n d i c a t o r B a n d FRESH: A Problem In the DTC indicator J and FRESH: IMA
Auxiliary Electric Water Pump Connection Communication Bus Line Error
1. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the climate'control unit 1. Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the climate control unit
2. Check the DTCs. 2. Check the DTCs.
Is DTC B and FRESH indicated? Is DTC J and FRESH indicated?
YES—Go t o step 3 . YES—Check for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3). •
NO—Intermittent failure. Check for loose wires or NO—Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
poor connections on the auxiliary electric water time.B
p u m p circuit. •
3 . Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK ( 0 ) .
4 . Disconnect the auxiliary electric water p u m p 2P

connector.
5. Disconnect climate control unit connector B (16P).

connector B (16P) terminal No. 4 and the auxiliary
electric water pump 2P connector terminal No. 1.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B ( 1 6 P )

ORN
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC WATER P U M P 2 P CONNECTOR


and recheck. I f the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control u n i t . H
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the

climate control unit and the auxiliary electric water
pump.B
21-74
Climate Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
relay box.
Is the fuse OK? connector A (32P) terminal No. 5 and body ground.

blows again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A) BLK
fuse circuit. • p—p ...j—-,—-a—I— 7 8 9 10

I t |
11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
1 2 3 / 5 6
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32

LT G R N YES—Check for loose wires and poor connections

i - - r
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
at climate control unit connector A (32P). If
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
climate control unit and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
X control unit.B
NO—Check for an open in the wire between the

climate control unit and body g r o u n d . If the wire is
Wire side of female terminals OK, check for poor ground at G504 (see page 22-26).
NO—Repair an open in the wire between the No. 36

climate control unit. •
21-75
Climate Control
Navigation Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Operate the climate control system in several 7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
modes.
8. Disconnect navigation unit connector D (12P).
Is the climate control system OK?
10. Check for continuity between the following
NO—Do the self-diagnostic w i t h the HDS (see page terminals of climate control unit connector A (32P)
21-11) or climate control unit (see page 21-12). • and navigation unit connector D (12P).
2. Do the Navi system link (see page 23-124). • 32P: 12P:

No. 28 No. 6
Is the Air-Con icon red? No. 29 No. 12
No. 30 No. 5
YES—
• '06-08 models: Go to step 3. Wire side of female terminals
• '09 model: Go to step 7.
NO—Go to step 13.
4. Disconnect navigation unit connector F (5P).
5 . Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P).

6. Check for continuity between the following .
and navigation unit connector F (5P).
32P: 5P:
No. 28 No. 4 NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR D (12P)
No. 29 No. 2 Wire side of female terminals
No. 30 No. 3
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (32P) Is there continuity?
YES—Goto step 11.

1 | 2 [ 3 [/] 6 | 6 f T j 8 [ 9 11Q] 11 | 12 J 13 114 j 16 116 |
1
' 17 \/\ 1
9 | 20 | 211 22 [ 23 j 241 28 | 26 [ 271 28 ( 29 j 30 j 31j NO—Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the navigation u n i t . I
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR F (5P)

YES—Goto step 11.

NO —Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the navigation u n i t . I
21-76
11. Check for continuity between body ground and 14. Connect climate control unit connector A (32P)
climate control unit connector A (32P) terminals terminals No. 28, 29, and No. 30 with a j u m p e r wire.
No. 28, 29, and No. 30 individually.
n r— " " - r
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 13 H 15 | 16 ]
r ~ - - —
| 17 / j 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 23 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
RED YEL
RED YEL
| BLU
BLU
J U M P E R WlKfc

16. Press the RECIRCULATION and OFF buttons.
YES—Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)
between the climate control unit and the navigation Does the RECIRCULATION indicator turn on?
' unit.H
YES—Do the Unit check w i t h the navigation system
N O — G o t o step 12. (see page 23-127). •
12. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). NO—Substitute a known-good climate control unit,
and recheck. If the s y m p t o m goes away, replace
13. '06-08 models: Disconnect navigation unit the original climate control unit. 11
connector F (5P).
'09 model: Disconnect navigation unit connector D
(12P).
21-77
Climate Control
Radiator and A / C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 8. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the s y m p t o m
troubleshooting index.
• If A/C refrigerant pressure is abnormal, the radiator
fans are controlled based on engine coolant
temperature (see page 21-29).
• Before doing s y m p t o m troubleshooting, check for
powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check the No. 7 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK ?

NO—Replace the fuses, and recheck. If either fuse
blows again, check for a short in the No. 7 (20 A) Y E S — G o t o step 9.
and No. 36 (10 A) fuse circuits. •
NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box
2. Remove the radiator fan relay f r o m the under-hood (see page 22-59). •
fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-64).
9. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals
Is the relay OK ? No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
NO—Replace the radiator fan relay. •
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 1

JUMPER WIRE
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 2

BRN
5. Turn on the A/C. 4 3
6. Check the FAN LOW CTRL in the PGM-FI Data List

w i t h the HDS. T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
Is the FAN LOW CTRL on?

Do the A/C condenser and radiator fans run on
Y E S — G o t o step 7. low?
NO—Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), Y E S — G o t o step 10.

and retest. If the symptom/indication goes away
w i t h a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM N O — G o t o step 19.
(see page 1 1 - 2 3 8 ) . •
21-78
10. Disconnect the jumper wire. 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). 14. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.
12. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P 15. J u m p the SCS line w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
. RADIATOR F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
powertrain control module (PCM) f r o m damage.
f \
1 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
2
17. Connect PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 4 to
4 3
V. J P C M C O N N E C T O R A (44P)
PUR
®
4 5 6 7 8 9

L/ 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
•
20 21 23 24 25
.•
26 27 28 29 31 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 / /
40 42 43 44
YES—Go to step 13. JUMPER WIRE

/
NO—Go to step 37.
Do the A/C condenser and radiator fans run on

low?

PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 4. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-238). •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the radiator

fan relay and the PCM. •
20. Reinstall the radiator fan relay.
21. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.
22. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
button and fan control dial ON.
(cont'd)
21-79
Climate Control
Radiator and A / C Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
(cont'd)
23. Measure the voltage between radiator fan 2P 28. Set the A/C button and fan control dial OFF, then
connector terminal No. 2 and body ground. turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
R A D I A T O R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R 29. Disconnect the jumper wire.
30. Remove the fan control relay f r o m the under-hood

relay box, and test it (see page 22-64).
BRN Is the relay OK ?
YES—Goto s t e p 3 1 .
NO—Replace the fan control relay. •

3 1 . Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
32. Measure the voltage between fan control relay 5P
Y E S — G o t o step 24. socket terminal No. 1 and body ground.
F A N C O N T R O L R E L A Y 5P S O C K E T
fan relay and the radiator fan. •
RED
24. Set the A/C button and fan control dial OFF, then
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
25. Reconnect the radiator fan 2P connector.
26. Connect radiator fan 2P connector terminal No. 1 to

body ground w i t h a jumper w i r e .
R A D I A T O R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R

1
RED YES—Goto step 33.
JUMPER WIRE
fan and the fan control relay. •
Wire side of female terminals 33. Set the A/C button and fan control dial OFF, then
turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
27. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), then set the A/C
Does the radiator fan run?
NO—Replace the radiator fan motor (see page

10-12).B
21-80
34. Disconnect the A/C condenser fan 2P connector. 37. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
35. Check for continuity between fan control relay 5P 38. Remove A/C diode A f r o m the under-hood fuse/
socket terminal No. 4 and A/C condenser fan 2P relay box.
39. Using the diode setting (*-W-) on a DVOM, check
F A N C O N T R O L R E L A Y 5P S O C K E T
for current f l o w in both directions between the A/C
diode A terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
1
A / C DIODE A
2
5 4 3
BLU
A / C C O N D E N S E R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R
Is there current flow in only one direction?
NO—Replace A/C diode A. •
NO—Repair open in the wire between the fan
control relay and the A/C condenser f a n . B 40. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
36. Check for continuity between A/C condenser fan 2P 41. Measure the voltage between A/C diode A 2P
connector terminal No. 1 and body ground. socket terminal No. 2 and body g r o u n d .
A / C C O N D E N S E R F A N 2P C O N N E C T O R A / C D I O D E A 2P S O C K E T
r
2 1

YES—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box
YES—Replace the A/C condenser fan motor (see page 22-59). •
(see page 10-12). •
NO—Check for an open in the w i r e between the A/C (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
condenser fan and body ground. If the wire is OK, A/C diode AM
check for poor ground at G301 (see page 2 2 - 2 0 ) . •
21-81
Climate Control
A / C Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 4. Connect A/C condenser fan relay 4P socket

• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a jumper wire.
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the s y m p t o m
troubleshooting index. A / C C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
• If A/C refrigerant pressure is abnormal, the radiator
fans are controlled based on engine coolant
r >
temperature (see page 21 -29). 1
• Before doing s y m p t o m troubleshooting, check for JUMPER WIRE
powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3). 2
BLU
1. Check the No. 6 (20 A) and No. 15 (7.5 A) fuses in 4 3

the under-hood fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?

NO—Replace the fuses, and recheck. If either fuse Does the A/C condenser fan run on high?
blows again, check for a short in the No. 6 (20 A)
and No. 15 (7.5 A) fuse circuits. H YES—Goto step 5.
2. Remove the A/C condenser fan relay f r o m the NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page (see page 22-59). •
22-64).
Is the relay OK ?
7. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan
NO—Replace the A/C condenser fan relay. • relay 4P socket terminal No. 4 and body ground.
A / C C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
3. Measure the voltage between A/C condenser fan
relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body g r o u n d . r
1
A / C C O N D E N S E R F A N R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
2
4 3

YES—Goto step 8.
NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-59). •
21-82
8. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0). 14. Remove the A/C diode B f r o m the under-hood fuse/
relay box.
9. Reinstall the A/C condenser fan relay.
16. Measure the voltage between the A/C diode B 2P
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the socket terminal No. 2 and body ground.
powertrain control module (PCM) f r o m damage.
A / C DIODE B 2P S O C K E T
12. Connect the PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 5

to body ground w i t h a jumper wire.
GRY

JUMPER WIRE
Terminal side of female terminals NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-59). •
17. Using the diode setting (-44-*) on a DVOM, check
Does the A/C condenser fan run on high? for current f l o w in both directions between the A/C
diode B terminals No. 1 and No. 2.
PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 5. If the
A / C DIODE B
connections are good, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-7), and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-238). •

condenser fan relay and the PCM.B
1 O
Is there current flow in only one direction?
YES—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-59). H
NO—Replace the A/C diode B. •
21-83
Climate Control
A / C Compressor Clutch Circuit Trou ieshooting
NOTE: 7. Remove the A/C compressor clutch relay f r o m the
• It is normal for the A/C compressor to turn off under under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page
certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine 22-64).
coolant temperature, or hard acceleration.
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans Is the relay OK ?
are also inoperative w i t h the A/C on. Refer to the
s y m p t o m troubleshooting index. Y E S — G o t o step 8.
• Before doing any s y m p t o m troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3). NO —Replace the A/C compressor clutch relay. •
1. Check the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood 8. Measure the voltage between the A/C compressor
fuse/relay box, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the clutch relay 4P socket terminal No. 1 and body
under-dash fuse/relay box. ground.
• A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
Are the fuses OK?
YES—Goto step 2. 1
CM
NO—Replace the fuses and recheck. If either fuse
4 3
and No. 36 (10 A) fuse circuits. •
J
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
3. Start the engine. T
4. Turn on the A/C. T e r m i n a l side of female terminals
5. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the Is there battery voltage?
PGM-FI Data List at idle.
ECT Sensor 2 1 9 8 - 2 1 2 °F
( 9 2 - 1 0 0 °C) NO—Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box
TP Sensor About 0.5 V a t idle (see page 22-59). H
RPM More than 770
A/C Switch ON
A/C Clutch ON
A/C Pressure 1 9 6 - 4 5 5 kPa ( 2 8 - 4 5 5 psi)
Sensor
Are all the values within specifications?
• Y E S — G o t o step 6.
NO—Troubleshoot the value that is not within the

specifications. •
21-84
9. Connect A/C compressor clutch relay 4P socket 13. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
terminals No. 1 and No. 2 w i t h a j u m p e r wire.
14. Reinstall the A/C compressor clutch relay.
A / C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the

1
JUMPER WIRE powertrain control module (PCM) f r o m damage.
2
PUR 16. Disconnect PCM connector A (44 P).
4 3
.j 17. Connect PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 14 to
4 5 6 7 8 9
Does the A/C compressor clutch click? Ll 10 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
/
20 21 23 24 25
Y E S — G o t o step 10. _• /
26 27 28 29 / / 31 / 33 34 35
36 37 38 39 40 42 43
U |
/ 1 u
44
RED
JUMPER WIRE

12. Measure the voltage between A/C compressor
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No. 3 and body 18. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
ground.
Does the A/C compressor click?
A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T

1 PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are good,
check the PCM grounds. If the grounds are good,
2
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-7), and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
4 3
replace the original PCM (see page 11-238). m
v
compressor clutch relay and the PCM.B

A/C compressor clutch relay. •
(cont'd)
21-85
Climate Control
A / C Compressor Clutch Circuit A / C Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting (cont'd)
NOTE:
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of
19. Disconnect the j u m p e r wire. the following items are operative: A/C condenser fan,
radiator fan, A/C compressor. Refer to the s y m p t o m
20. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch 3P connector. troubleshooting index.
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the A/C
2 1 . Check for continuity between A/C compressor system pressure is abnormal (see page 21-29).
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No. 2 and A/C • Before doing s y m p t o m troubleshooting, check for
compressor clutch 3P connector terminal No. 2. powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
A / C C O M P R E S S O R C L U T C H R E L A Y 4P S O C K E T
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
3. Turn on the A/C.
4. Check the A/C switch in the PGM-FI Data List w i t h

the HDS.
Is the A/C switch on?

BLK/RED
Y E S — T h e A/C signal is OK at this time.
Is there continuity? 6. Disconnect the climate control unit connector A

(32P).
YES—Check the A/C compressor clutch clearance,
and the compressor clutch field coil (see page 7. Measure the evaporator temperature sensor
21-113). Repair as n e e d e d . • resistance between climate control unit connector
A (32P) terminals No. 8 and No. 19.
compressor clutch relay and the A/C compressor C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P)
clutch. •
BRN
n 1 1 n
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 |
| 17 | / | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
RED
Is the resistance less than 24 kQ ?
NO—Test the evaporator temperature sensor

(see page 21-90). •
21-86
8. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). 15. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
9. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), 16. Reconnect climate control unit connector A (32P).
10. Check that the blower motor operates at all speeds. 17. Set the A/C button and fan control switch ON, then
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Does the blower motor operate at all speeds?
YES—Goto step 11. connector A (32P) terminal No. 6 and body ground.
NO—Repair the problem in the blower motor
circuit. •
RED
n
1 | 2 | 3 /I 5 | 6
n———-r
I 7 I 8 | 9 I 1011 | 12 | 13 114 | 15 | 16 |
12. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (32P). 17
I l/l 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32

C L I M A T E C O N T R O L U N I T C O N N E C T O R A (32P) Wire side of female terminals
Is there 0.5 V or less?

RED
1 | 2 | 3 | / | 5 | 6 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 11 | 12 113 114 | 15 116 |

YES—Replace the MICU (see page 22-60). B
| 17 | / 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32
NO—Check for loose wires or poor connections at
climate control unit connector A (32P). If the
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good
T climate control unit and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
control u n i t . B

control unit and M I C U . B
21-87
Climate Control
A / C Compressor Driver Power Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE;
shock.
• IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is
IMA system before w o r k i n g on or around it. Make
sure y o u have read the IMA service precautions
before doing repairs or service (see page 12-3).

fuse/relay box.
I s the fuse OK ?
YES—Go to step 2.
NO—Replace the fuse and recheck. If the fuse

fuse circuit. •
4. Measure the voltage between the A/C compressor

driver 4P connector terminal No, 4 and body
ground.

A/C compressor driver 4P connector. If the
connections are g o o d , substitute a known-good A/C
compressor driver, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away, replace the A/C compressor
driver. •

(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the A/C compressor driver. •
21-88
Humidity/In-car Temperature Sensor Test
Humidity Sensor Test In-car Temperature Sensor Test
1. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor 1. Remove the humidity/in-car temperature sensor
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (ll). Measure the 2. Test the humidity/in-car temperature sensor while
voltage between the terminals with the ( + ) probe holding it in front of the dashboard center vent.
on terminal No. 3 and the (—) probe on terminal
No. 2 w i t h the connector connected. • Measure the resistance w i t h the system set to
Max Cool.
• Measure the resistance w i t h the system set to
Max Hot.
3. Compare the resistance reading between terminals

No. 1 and No. 2 of the humidity/in-car temperature
sensor w i t h the specifications s h o w n in the graph;
the resistance should be w i t h i n the specifications.
HUMIDITY/IN-CAR TEMPERATURE S E N S O R
1 2 3 4
RESISTANCE
ikQ)
VOLTAGE
(V)
14 32 50 68 86 104 T
-10 0 10 20 30 4 0 "C
TEMPERATURE
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 21-90).
H U M I D I T Y L E V E L (%)
3. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the

humidity/in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-90).
21-89
Climate Control
Humidity/ln-car Temperature Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Sensor Replacement Test
1. Remove the center panel: 1. Remove the evaporator core and the evaporator
temperature sensor (see page 21-101).
• '06-08 models w i t h navigation (see page 23-143)
• '06-08 models w i t h o u t navigation (see page 2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the
23-70) resistance between its terminals..
• '09 model w i t h navigation (see page 23-330)
• '09 model w i t h o u t navigation (see page 23-232) EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
2. Remove the self-tapping screw and the humidity/

in-car temperature sensor (A) f r o m the center panel
(B).
3. Pour w a r m water on the sensor, and check for a

change in resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings w i t h the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be w i t h i n the specifications.
RESISTANCE
(kQ)
3. Install the sensor in the reverse- order of removal,

Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
32 50 68 8 6 °F
0 10 20 3 0 <C
TEMPERATURE
5. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-101)
21-90
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Outside Air Temperature So^scir
Test Replacement
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-122).
(see page 21-91).
2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the outside air temperature sensor (B) from the
resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, • receiver/dryer desiccant bracket Disconnect the 2P
and check for a change in resistance. connector (C) from the outside air temperature
sensor.
3. Compare the resistance reading between terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 of the outside air temperature C
sensor with the specifications shown in the graph;
the resistance should be within the specifications.
O U T S I D E AIR T E M P E R A T U R E S E N S O R
3., Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
14 32 50 68 86 1 0 4 °F
-10 0 10 20 30 40*0
TEMPERATURE
4. If the resistance Is not as specified, replace the

outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-91).
2s 1 1
Climate Control
Sunlight Sensor Test Sunlight Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) f r o m the 1. Remove the gauge control module (SPEEDO)
dashboard (see page 21-92). (see page 22-255).
2. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) f r o m the

dashboard by pushing up on the bottom of the
sensor w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver or similar tool,
then disconnect the connector (B). Be careful not to
damage the sensor and the dashboard.
RED PUR
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II). Measure the

voltage between the terminals w i t h the ( + ) probe
on terminal No. 2 and the (—) probe on terminal
No. 1 w i t h the connector connected. 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: The voltage readings will not change under

the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp.
Voltage should be:

• 3.6—3.7 V or more w i t h the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
• 3.3—3.5 V or less w i t h the sensor in direct
sunlight.
3. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the

sunlight sensor (see page 21-92).
21-92
Heater Core Temperature Sensor Heater Core Temperature S t B n m i r
Test Replacement
1. Remove the heater core temperature sensor 1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the 2. Remove the center console (see page 20-79).
resistance between its terminals.
3. Remove the accelerator pedal module (see page
HEATER CORE TEMPERATURE SENSOR
11-277).
4. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the air mix

control motor and heater core temperature sensor,
then remove the harness clip (B) and the connector
clip (C). Remove the self-tapping screws and the
heater core cover (D).
3. Then pour w a r m water on the sensor, and check for

a change in resistance.
4. Compare the'resistance readings w i t h the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
15 I —r——r 1 r ^ — 1
5. Remove the heater core sensor (A).
14 32 50 68 86 104 °F
-10 0 10 20 30 40 <€
TEMPERATURE
5, If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

heater core temperature sensor (see page 21-93).
6. Install the sensor in the reverse order removal.
21-93
Climate Control
Power Transistor Test
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover 4. Carefully release the lock tab on the terminal No. 1
(see page 20-91). (YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it f r o m body ground.
2. Disconnect the 4P connector f r o m the power
transistor.
3. Measure the resistance between terminals No. 3

and No. 4 of the power transistor. It should be
about 1.5 k Q .
• If the resistance is w i t h i n the specifications, go to

step 4.
• if the resistance is not w i t h i n the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the blower motor, Power

transistor failure can be caused by a defective
blower motor.
JUMPER WIRE
POWER TRANSISTOR
V
(To 12 V Power source on vehicle)
I K
\ i j 5. Reconnect the 4P connector t o the power transistor.
1
! A
S. Make sure the YEL wire is completely isolated, then
J
supply 12 V to the cavity No. 1 w i t h a j u m p e r w i r e .
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (I!), and check that

the blower motor runs.
• If the blower motor does not run, replace the

power transistor.
NOTE: A faulty blower motor can cause the

power transistor to fail. If the power transistor is
replaced, also check the blower motor for
binding, and -replace it if necessary.
• If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is

OK.
21-94
Air Mix Control Motor Test Air Mix Control Motor Replacement
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page 1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover
21-10). (see page 20-90).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the air mix 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the air mix
control motor. control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the air mix control motor f r o m the heater unit.
I NOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the air mix control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the air

mix control motor, and ground terminal No. 2; the
air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max
Hot. If it doesn't, reverse the connections; the air
mix control motor should run, and stop at Max Cool.
W h e n the air mix control motor stops running,
disconnect battery power immediately.
AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
J L
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the pin on the motor is properly
engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
sure the motor runs smoothly.
3. If the air mix control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the air mix control linkage
and door for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace

the air mix control motor (see page 21-95).
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair t h e m
as needed.
• If the air mix control motor runs smoothly, go to
step 4.

and No. 7. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 k Q .
5. Reconnect the air mix control motor 7P connector,

then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage

between terminals No. 3 and No. 7.
M a x Cool: A b o u t 0.5 V
M a x Hot: A b o u t 4.5 V
7. If either the resistance or the voltage readings are

not as specified, replace the air mix control motor
(see page 21-95).
21-95
Climate Control
Mode Control Motor Test Mode Control Motor Replacement
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page 1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-91).
21-10).
2. Remove the wire harness clip (A), the self-tapping
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the mode control screws, and the passenger's heater duct (B).
motor.
A
I NOTICE I
Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the mode control m o t o r will damage it.
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the

mode control motor, and ground terminal No. 2
terminal; the mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Vent. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Defrost. W h e n the mode
control motor stops running, disconnect battery
power immediately.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the mode

control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the mode control motor f r o m the heater unit.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2,

remove it, then check the mode control linkage and
doors for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace

the mode control motor (see page 21-96).
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair t h e m
as needed.
• If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to
step 4. 4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
4. Use a digital multimeter w i t h an output of 1 m A or engaged w i t h the linkage. After installation, make
less at the 20 k Q range. With the mode control sure the motor runs smoothly.
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity
between terminals No. 3, 4, 5, and No. 6 and
terminal No. 7 individually. There should be
continuity for a m o m e n t at each terminal as the
motor moves through its travel.
5. If there is no continuity for a m o m e n t at each

terminal, replace the mode control motor (see page
21-96).
21-96
• 0
Recirculation Control Motor Test Recirculation Control Motor

Replacement
NOTE; Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page
21-10).
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-91) and the
1. Disconnect the 7P connector f r o m the recirculation passenger's kick panel (see page 20-54).
control motor.
2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the
I NOTICE I •recirculation control motor (B). Remove the self-
Incorrectly applying power and ground to tapping screws and the recirculation control motor
the recirculation control motor will damage it. f r o m the blower unit.
2. Connect battery power to terminal No. 1 of the

recirculation control motor, and ground terminal
No. 2; the recirculation control motor should run,
and stop at Recirculate. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the recirculation control motor should
run, and stop at Fresh. When the recirculation
control motor stops running, disconnect battery
power immediately.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
J L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
engaged w i t h the linkage. After installation, make
3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in step sure the motor runs smoothly.
2, remove it, then check the recirculation control
linkage and door for smooth movement.
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace

the recirculation control motor (see page 21-97).
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair t h e m
as needed.
• If the recirculation control motor runs smoothly,
go to step 4.

and No. 7. It should be between 4.2 and 7.8 k Q .
5. Reconnect the recirculation control motor 7P

connector, then turn the ignition switch to ON (ll).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage

between terminals No. 3 and No. 7.
Recirculate: A b o u t 4.0 V
Fresh: A b o u t 1.0 V
7. If either the resistance or the voltage readings are

not as specified, replace the recirculation control
motor (see page 21-97).
21-97
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Removal/ Climate Control Unit Bulb
Installation ^> Replacement
1. Remove the center panel: 1. Remove the climate control unit (see page 21-98).
• '06-08 models w i t h navigation (see page 23-143) 2. Discharge the static electricity (which may have
• '06-08 models w i t h o u t navigation (see page accumulated on you w h e n you removed the
23-70) climate control unit) by touching the door striker or
• '09 model w i t h navigation (see page 23-330) another unpainted metal body part.
• '09 model w i t h o u t navigation (see page 23-232)
3. Remove the self-tapping screws, then carefully
2. Remove the dials (A), the self-tapping screws, and separate the climate control unit display (A) f r o m
the climate control unit (B). the control unit (B). Do not kink or pull on the wires
between the display and the control panel. Do not
touch the electronic components on the printed
circuit board in the control panel.
3. Install the control unit in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the various
functions to see whether works properly. 4. Remove the bulbs w i t h a flat-tip screwdriver.
4. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that

there are no problems in the system (see page
21-11).
5. Install the bulbs in the reverse order of removal.
21-98
Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement Blower Unit Removal/Installation
1, Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on 1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-91).
each side, then let the glove box hang d o w n
(see page 20-91). 2. Cut the plastic cross brace (A) in the glove box
opening with diagonal cutters in the area s h o w n ,
2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly (A) and discard it.
f r o m the blower unit.
3. Remove the filter (A) f r o m the housing (B), and

replace the filter. 3. Remove the bolts and the glove box frame (A).
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the
blower unit.
(cont'd)
21-99
Climate Control
Blower Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Remove the wire harness clip (A), the self-tapping 6. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the recirculation
screws, and the passenger's heater duct (B). control motor. Remove the self-tapping screws, the
bolt, the mounting nuts, and the blower unit (B).
5. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the blower 6 x 1.0 m m

motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). 9.8 N m
(1.0 kgf m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
7. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure that there is no air leakage.
21-100
Blower Unit Component Evaporator Core Replacement
Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant w i t h a recovery/recycling/
charging station (see page 21-120).
Note these items w h e n overhauling the blower unit:
2. Remove the b o l t
• The recirculation control motor (A), the blower motor
6 x 1.0 mm
(B), and the dust and pollen filter (C) can be replaced
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ibf-ft)
without removing the blower unit.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and door move smoothly w i t h o u t
binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
motor runs smoothly (see page 21-97).
3. Remove the nut, then disconnect the A/C lines (A)

f r o m the evaporator core.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibfft)
(cont'd)
21-101
Climate Control
Evaporator Core Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the stud b o l t 7. Carefully pull out the evaporator core (A) without
bending the lines, then remove the plate (B).
6 x1.0 mm
9.8 W-mra {1.0 kgf-in, 7.2 ibf-ft)
5. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-99).
6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the evaporator

temperature sensor and the power transistor, then
remove the connector clip (B). Remove the
self-tapping screws, the expansion valve cover (C),
and the seal (D). 8. Remove the clips (A) and the evaporator
temperature sensor (B).
21-102
Expansion Waive Replacement
Install the core In the reverse order of removal, and 1. Remove the evaporator core (see page 21-101).
note these items;
2. Remove the bolts (A) and expansion valve (B).
• If you're installing a new evaporator core, add
(POE) refrigerant oil (SANDEN SE-10Y). Using the
w r o n g refrigerant oil can be a safety hazard
(see page 21-7).
• Replace the O-rings w i t h new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing t h e m . Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, dispose of any
remaining oil in the container, due to moisture
absorption and short shelf life.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Charge the system (see page 21-122). 3. Install the expansion valve in the reverse order of
removal, and note these Items;
• If you're Installing a new expansion valve, add

w r o n g refrigerant oil can be a safety hazard
(see page 21-7).
remaining oil in the container, due to moisture
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; It
contacts the paint, wash It off Immediately.
• Make sure that there Is no air leakage.
• Charge the system (see page 21-122).
21-103
Climate Control
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Slide the hose clamps (A) back. Remove the nut
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and the and the water valve (B), then disconnect the inlet
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before heater hose (C) and the outlet heater hose (D) f r o m
doing repair or servicing. the heater unit. Engine coolant will run out w h e n
the hoses are disconnected; drain it into a clean
1. DO the battery terminal disconnection procedure drip pan. Be sure not to let coolant spill on the
(see page 22-62). electrical parts or the painted surfaces. If any
coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
2. Disconnect the A/C lines f r o m the evaporator core
(see page 21-101).
3. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly

(see page 11-370).
4. From under the hood, open the cable c l a m p (A),

then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) f r o m the
heater valve arm (C). Turn the heater valve a r m to
the fully opened position as shown.
6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
Remove the mounting nut f r o m the heater u n i t

Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or
brake lines, etc.
5. W h e n the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant

f r o m the radiator (see page 10-6).
8 x 1.25 mm
12.3 N-m
(1.3 kgf-m, S.O ibf-ft)
21-104
8. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-95). 11. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the mode
control motor, the evaporator temperature sensor,
9. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the blower and the power transistor. Remove the wire harness
motor. Remove the wire harness clip (B). clip(B).
10. Disconnect the connector (A) f r o m the recirculation

control motor.
12. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the air mix

control motor, the heater core temperature sensor,
and the A/C wire harness. Remove the connector
clip (B), the wire harness clips (C), and the wire
harness (D).
.B
(cont'd)
21-105
Climate Control
Heater Unit/Core Replacement (cont'd)
13. Remove the mounting bolt, the mounting nuts, and 15. Install the heater core, and the evaporator core in
the blower-heater unit (A). the reverse order of removal.
16. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of

• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater

hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
• Refill the cooling system w i t h engine coolant
(see page 10-6).
• Adjust the heater valve cable (see page 21-107).
• Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
(see page 22-62).
6x1.0 mm • If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays no
9.8 N - m segments, start the engine, and hold it between
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 ibf-ft)
3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in Park or
14. Remove the connector clip (A), the self-tapping neutral) until the BAT displays at least three
screws, the heater core cover (B), and the g r o m m e t segments.
(C), then carefully pull out the heater core (D).
21-106
Heater Waive Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), 3. With the heater valve cable detached at both ends,
then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the make sure the cable moves freely with no binding.
heater valve arm (C). Replace the heater valve cable if it does not move
freely.
4. Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool (Lo)

with the ignition switch turned to ON (ll).
5. Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the air mix

control linkage (C) as shown step 2. Hold the end of
the heater valve cable housing against the stop (D) r
then snap the heater valve cable housing into the

cable clamp (A).
NOTE: Make sure the ring-end of the cable is

pushed all the way to the base of the pin on air mix
control linkage.
i , From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (A)
to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve Attach the heater valve cable (B) to the heater valve
cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the air housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
mix control linkage (C). valve cable housing into the cable clamp (C).
A D
21-107
Climate Control
Auxiliary Electric Water Pump Replacement
1. W h e n the engine is cool, drain engine coolant f r o m 4. Remove the bolt, the upper bracket (A), the
the radiator (see page 10-6). bushings (B), and the auxiliary electric water pump
(C).
2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly
(see page 11-370).
3. Disconnect the connector (A). Slide the hose

clamps (B) back, then disconnect the inlet heater
hose (C) and the outlet heater hose (D). Remove the
bolts and the auxiliary electric water p u m p (E).
NOTE: Engine coolant will run out w h e n the hoses

are disconnected; drain into a clean drip pan. Be
sure not to let coolant spill on the auxiliary
electrical parts or the painted, surfaces. If any
coolant spills, rinse it off immediately.
5.4 N m (0.6 kgf-m, 4 Ibfft)
5. Install the p u m p In the reverse order of removal,
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N-m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
21-108
A / C Compressor Driver Removal/Installation
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands f r o m 4. Remove the bolts and the A/C compressor driver
electrical shock. (A).
IMA components are located in this area. The IMA is a 6 x 1.0 mm

high-voltage s y s t e m ; You must be familiar with the IMA 9.35 N m (0.95 kgf-m, 6.9 Ibf-ft)
system before working on or around it. Make sure you
2. Disconnect the DC-DC converter (see page 12-182).
3. Disconnect the connectors (A) f r o m the A/C

compressor driver.
5. Install the parts in the reverse order removal.
21-109
Climate Control
A / C Compressor Replacement
NOTE: 7. Remove the bolt and the shield connector cover (A).
• Do not install an A / C compressor into a system unless Slide the retainer (B), then disconnect the
y o u are completely sure that the system is free of connector (C). Remove the wire harness clips (D).
contamination. Installing the A / C compressor into a
contaminated system can result in premature A/C
compressor failure.
shock.
• I M A components are located in this area. The IMA is
IMA system before working on or around it. Make
sure you have read the IMA service precautions
before doing repairs or service (see page 12-3).
1. If the A / C compressor is marginally operable, run

the engine at idle speed, and let the air
conditioning work for few minutes, then shut the
engine off.
2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/

3. Remove the bulkhead (see step 13 on page 10-13).
5. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly 8. Remove the dipstick (A). Disconnect the connectors
(see page 11-370). (B), then remove the wire harness clips (C).
6. Remove the battery (see page 22-63) and battery C

box.
21-110
9. Remove the bolt and the holder (A). 11. Disconnect the A/C compressor clutch connector
(A). Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
the suction hose (B) and the discharge hose (C)
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft) f r o m the A/C compressor. Plug or cap the lines
immediately after disconnecting t h e m t o avoid
moisture and dust contamination.
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N-m .
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 I b f f t )
10. Remove the bolt and the auxiliary under-hood fuse/

relay box bracket (A). Disconnect the connectors (B),
then remove the wire harness clips (C). Remove the
upper mounting bolts, the A/C condenser fan
shroud (D), and the radiator fan shroud (E). Be
careful not t o damage the radiator fins when
removing the A/C condenser fan shroud and 12. Remove the mounting bolts and the A/C
radiator fan shroud. compressor (A). Be careful not to damage the
radiator fins w h e n removing the A/C compressor.
6x1.0 mm
9.8 N - m (1.0 kgf m , 7.2 ibf-ft)
NOTE: Install the bolts loosely, then tighten the
mounting bolts in the (B), (C), and (D) in that order
w h e n installing.
10 x 1.25 m m
45 N-m
(4.6 k g f - m , 3 3 . 2 I b f f t )
(cont'd)
21-111
Climate Control
A / C Compressor Replacement (cont'd)
13. Pull out on the power cable (A), then lift up the A/C 14. Install the A/C compressor in the reverse order of
compressor (B). removal, and note these items:
• Inspect the A/C lines for any signs of

contamination.
• If you're installing a new A/C compressor, you
must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed f r o m it (see page 21-7). A new A/C
compressor comes w i t h a full charge of oil.
• Use only SANDEN SE-10Y POE refrigerant oil.
Using the w r o n g refrigerant oil can be a safety
hazard (see page 21-7).
remaining oil in the container. The oil rapidly
absorbs moisture and has a short shelf life.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
• Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
installing the A/C compressor, the alternator or
the A/C condenser fan shroud.
• Charge the system (see page 21-122).
• If the IMA battery level gauge (BAT) displays no
3,500 rpm and 4,000 rpm without load (in Park or
neutral) until the BAT displays at least three
segments.
21-112
A/C Compressor Clutch Check
1. Check the armature plate for discoloration, peeling, 3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A)
or other damage. If there is damage, replace the and the armature plate (B) all the w a y around. If the
clutch set (see page 21-115). clearance is not w i t h i n specified limits, remove the
armature plate (see page 21-115) and add or
2. Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by remove shims as needed to increase or decrease
rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Also check for clearance.
grease leakage from the bearing. Replace the
clutch set with a new one if it is noisy, has Clearance: 0.35—0.65 m m (0.014±0.026 in.)
excessive play/drag, or has bearing grease
contamination on the clutch faces (see page NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:
21-115). 0.1 m m , 0.2 m m , 0.4 m m , and 0.5 m m .
NOTE: The rotor pulley and the armature plate B

were mated at the factory by a burnishing
operation. Always replace the pulley and the plate
as a set. Replacing only one part of the clutch set
will cause clutch slippage. A
(cont'd)
21-113
Climate Control
A / C Compressor Clutch Check (cont'd)
4. Measure the resistance between t h e A/C 5. Remove the bolt and,the holders (A), then
compressor clutch connector terminal No. 2 and disconnect 1P connectors (B). Check the thermal
the compressor housing. If resistance is not w i t h i n protector for continuity. If there is no continuity,
specifications, replace the field coil (see page replace the thermal'protector (see page 21-117).
21-115).
NOTE; The thermal protector will have no
Field Coil Resistance; 3 . 0 5 - 3 . 3 5 Q at §8 °F . continuity above about 252 to 262 °F (122 to 128 °C).
(20 °C) W h e n the temperature drops below about 241 to
219 °F (116 to 104 °C), the thermal protector will
have continuity.
7.4 N-m
(0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 Ibf-ft)
21-114
A / C Compressor Clutch Overhaul
8. Check the thermal fuse for continuity between the Special Tools Required
A/C compressor clutch connector terminal No. 1 A/C clutch holder; Robinair 10290, Kent-Moore
and the I P connector (A). If there is no continuity, J37872, Honda Tool and Equipment A C T 499A, or a
replace the field coil (see page 21-115). commercially available equivalent
1. Remove the center nut while holding the armature

plate (A) with a commercially available A / C clutch
holder (B).
NOTE:
• Do not use a hammer to remove the snap rings,
Using a hammer damages the compressor.
• Do not hammer or pry on the pulley to remove it.
If the pulley is difficult to remove, use a
commercially available pulley removing tool.
Make sure the jaws of the pulling tool engage the
back face of the pulley, not the pulley grooves.
25.5 N-m
(2.6 kgf-m, 18.8 Ibf-ft)
7. Remove the armature palate (see page 21-115), and
Inspect the armature palate and pulley friction •
surfaces for wear. If there Is excessive wear,
roughness, or scoring, replace the clutch set.
A
8. Inspect the friction surfaces and the compressor
shaft hub for excess o i l . If excess oil Is present, and
it Is not from the engine or power steering system,
then the compressor shaft seal is leaking. Replace
the compressor (see page 21-110).
(cont'd)
21-115
Climate Contro
A / C Compressor Clutch Overhaul fcont'd)
2. Remove the armature plate (A) and the shim(s) (B), 4. Remove the bolts and the holders (A), then
taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch disconnect the field coil connector. Remove the
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the snap ring (B) w i t h snap ring pliers, then remove the
number and thickness of shims as necessary, then field coil (C). Be careful not to damage the field coil
reinstall the armature plate, and recheck its . or the A/C compressor.
clearance (see page 21-113).
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:

0.1 m m , 0.2 m m , 0.4 m m , and 0.5 m m .
1.3 Nm
(0.1 kgf m, 1.0 Ibf-ft)
7.4 N-m
(0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 Ibf-ft)
7.4 N-m
(0.8 kgf-m,
5.5 ibf-ft)
If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap 5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of
ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the rotor disassembly, and note these items:
pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the rotor pulley
or the A/C compressor. • When replacing the field coil, check that the new
coil has the correct resistance (see step 4 on page
21-114).
• Install the field coil with the wire side facing
d o w n , and align the boss on the field coil w i t h the
hole in the A/C compressor.
• Clean the rotor pulley and the A/C compressor
sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other
non-petroleum solvent.
• Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the grooves.
• Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly
after it's reassembled.
• Route and clamp the wires properly to prevent
damage by the rotor pulley.
6. After reinstallation, cycle the A/C clutch

approximately 20 times by running the engine at
1,500—2,000 rpm and setting the A/C system to
M A X A/C mode. This procedure seats the clutch
friction surfaces, and increases clutch torque
capacity.
21-116
A / C Compressor Thermal Protector A / C Compressor Relief Valve
Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the bolts and the holders (A). Disconnect NOTE: If the A/C compressor relief valve released
1P connectors (B), then remove the thermal refrigerant t o the atmosphere, determine and correct
protector (C). the cause of the excessive system pressure, then
replace the relief valve.
7.4 N m
1. Recover the refrigerant w i t h a recovery/recycling/
(0.8 k g f - m , 5 . 5 ibf-ft)
2. Remove the relief valve cover (A), the relief valve

(B), and the O-ring (C). Plug the opening t o keep
foreign matter f r o m entering the system, and the
A/C compressor oil f r o m running out.
2. Replace the thermal protector (A) with a new one,

and apply silicone grease (P/N 08798-9028) (B) to
the bottom of the thermal protector.
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
3. Clean the mating surfaces.
4. Replace the O-ring with a new one, and apply a thin

coat of refrigerant oil before Installing it.
5. Remove the plug, Installed In step 2, then Install

and tighten the relief valve.
6. Charge the system (see page 21-122).
3. Install the thermal protector in the reverse order of

removal.
21-117
Climate Control
A / C Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant w i t h a recovery/recycling/ 5. Remove the bolts and the A / C condenser upper
charging station (see page 21-120). mount brackets (A).
2. Remove the f r o n t bumper (see page 20-122). A
3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge

hose (A) f r o m the A/C condenser.
Sx 1.0mm
9.8 N-m
6x1.0 mm (1.0 kgf m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
9.8 N-m (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 Ibf-ft)
6. Lift the tab (A) t o release the lock, then remove the
4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line outside air temperature sensor (B) f r o m the
(A) f r o m the A / C condenser. receiver/dryer desiccant bracket. Disconnect the 2P
connector (C), then remove the clip (D).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N - m (1.0 kgf m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
D
Receiver/Dryer Desiccant
Replacement
7. Remove the A/C condenser (A), Be careful not to
damage the radiator and A/C condenser fins when
removing the A/C condenser. NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible
to prevent the system f r o m absorbing moisture f r o m
the air.
1. Remove the A/C condenser (see page 21-118).
2. Remove the bolts f r o m the A/C condenser, then

remove the receiver/dryer (A), the bracket (B), and
the O-rings (C).
6 x 1.0 m m
9.8 N m
(1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
8. install the A/C condenser in the reverse order of

• If you're installing a new A/C condenser, add

w r o n g refrigerant oil can be safety hazard
(see page 21-7).
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N-m
installing t h e m . Be sure to use the correct O-rings {1.0 k g f - m , 7.2 Ibf-ft)
• Immediately after using the oil, dispose of any 3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of
remaining oil in the container, due to moisture removal, and note these items:
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it • When replacing the receiver/dryer, add the
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil appropriate amount of refrigerant oil (SANDEN
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately. SE-10Y) (see page 21-7). Using the w r o n g
• Be careful not t o damage the radiator or the A/C refrigerant oil can be a safety hazard.
condenser fins w h e n installing the A/C condenser. • Replace the O-rings w i t h new ones, and apply a
• Charge the system (see page 21-122). thin coat of refrigerant oil before installing them
Be sure t o use the correct O-rings for HFC-134a
(R-134a) to avoid leakage.
21-119
Climate Control
Refrigerant Recovery
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed
f r o m the A/C system after the recovery process is
° Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
can Irritate your eyes, nose, or t h r o a t refrigerant oil back into the A/C system before
• Be careful when connecting service e q u i p m e n t charging.
* Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
NOTE: Use only SANDEN SE-10Y POE refrigerant
oil. Using the w r o n g refrigerant oil can be a safrety
NOTE: hazard (see page 21-7).
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
• Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
s h o w n , following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
21-120
S f stem Evacuation
2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. s h o w n , f o l l o w i n g the equipment manufacturer's
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. Instructions. Recover the refrigerant, If any, f r o m
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. the A/C system (see page 21-120).
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
• Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturers.
• Do not allow moisture to contaminate the A/C system
oil. Moisture In the oil Is difficult to remove, and It can
damage the A/C compressor.
1. W h e n an A/C System has been opened to the .

atmosphere, such as during Installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station. If the system
has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced. Recover the refrigerant, If any,
f r o m the A/C system (see page 21-120), and the
system should be evacuated for several hours.
3. Evacuate the system. The vacuum p u m p should

run for a m i n i m u m of 45 minutes to eliminate all
moisture f r o m the system. When the suction gauge
reads —93.3 kPa (700 m m H g , 27.6 in.Hg) for at least
45 minutes, close all valves, and turn off the
vacuum pump.
4. If the suction gauge dose not reach approximately

—93.3 kPa (700 m m H g , 27.6 in.Hg) In 15 minutes,
there is probably a leak in the system. Partially
charge the system, and check for leaks (see page
21-123).
21-121
Climate Control
System Charging
2. Recover the refrigerant in the A/C system (see page
• 21-120).
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. 3. Evacuate the system (see page 21-121). If the
• Be careful w h e n connecting service equipment. system cannot reach a vacuum of —93.3 kPa
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. (700 m m H g , 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, or cannot
hold a vacuum for at least 15 minutes, these is
probably a leak. Do the refrigerant leak check
NOTE: (see page 21-123), and repair any leaks before
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the charging the system.
• Additional health and safety information may be 4. A d d the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
obtained f r o m the refrigerant and lubricant system that was removed during recovery. Use
manufacturers. only SANDEN SE-10Y (POE) refrigerant oil.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ 5. Charge the system w i t h the specified amount of
charging station {A) to the high-pressure service R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as the A/C compressor will be damaged.
s h o w n , f o l l o w i n g the equipment manufacturer's
instructions. Select the appropriate units of measure for your
refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
400 to 450 g
0.40 to 0.45 kg
0.9 to 1.0 (bs
14.1 to 15.9 oz
6. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-123).
7. Check the system performance (see page 21-129).
21-122
Refrigerant Leak Check
Special Tools Reruired Leak Detector Usage Tips (Refer to the Operator's
• Leak detector YGK-H-10PM Manual for complete operating instructions):
• Leak detector HLD-100
• Leak detector TIFZX-1, or commercially available • Position the vehicle in a wind-free work area. This will
These tools are available through the Honda Tool and aid in detecting small leaks.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 • When using the leak detector for the first t i m e , allow
it to w a r m up for 2 minutes w i t h the probe in a clean
atmosphere. This lets the temperature sensor in the
detector stabilize.
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor • The calibration check should be done in the "Search
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. 2 " mode. Once that is done, the other check modes
• Be careful w h e n connecting service equipment. do not need calibrating.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. • When leak checking through the HVAC module drain
• IMA components are located near A/C system hose, avoid drawing water into the probe. Water can
components. Make sure you have read the IMA damage the internal pump and sensor.
service precautions (see page 12-3) before doing • Avoid creasing the flexible probe extension. Creases
repairs or service. can restrict air f l o w and give false readings.
• Because the detector recalibrates itself for ambient
gases, it may be necessary to move the detector
These tools are available through the Honda Tool and away f r o m the leak to clear the sensor. Once the
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857. sensor has cleared, recheck the suspected leak.
• When removing the clear probe tip, be careful not to
NOTE: lose the f l o w ball.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the • R-134a is heavier than air, always check below and to
work area before resuming service. the sides of all potential leak sources.
• Additional health and safety information may be • Halogen leak detectors are sensitive to chemicals:
obtained f r o m the refrigerant and lubricant windshiled washing solutions, solvents/cleaners, and
manufacturers. some vehicle adhesives. Keep these chemicals out of
• Check the system for leaks using an R-134a the area w h e n doing leak detection.
refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
(0.5 oz) per year or better
(cont'd)
21-123
Climate Control
Refrigerant Leak Check (cont'd)
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ 2. Recover refrigerant f r o m the A/C system (see page
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service 21-120), and evacuate the system (see page 21-121)
port (B) and the low-Connect an R-134a refrigerant If the system achieves a vacuum of approximately
recovery/recycling/charging station (A) to the high- 93.3 kPa (700 m m H g , 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes, and
pressure service port(B) and the low-pressure holds the vacuum for 15 minutes, then the system
service port (C), as s h o w n , f o l l o w i n g the equipment dose not have a leak at this time. If the system
manufacturer's instructions. cannot achieve or hold a v a c u u m , continue the
refrigerant leak check.
3. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system

to the specified capacity.
Select the appropriate units of measure for your
refrigerant charging station.
Refrigerant Capacity:
400 to 450 g
0.40 to 0.45 kg
0.9 to 1.0 lbs
14.1 to 15.9 oz
21-124
W i t h the engine OFF, use a halogen leak detector first to detect the leak source. Follow a continuous path in order
to ensure that you will not miss any possible leaks. Test the following areas of system for leaks.
Possible Leak Diagnostic Procedure with the Leak Notes

Area Detector
Service Ports Check the service ports with the When capping the service ports, ensure that the
detector. seals on the port caps are in place, and that the
caps are tight. The caps are used as the final seals
in the system.
Condenser Check all fittings, couplings, brazed/ 9
Check for joints or connections coated w i t h oily
welded areas and areas around dust.
attachment points. • Check for damaged and corroded areas.
• Move the probe slowly (1 inch/second or less),
and keep it w i t h i n 1/4 inch of the component
being checked. This maximizes the chance of
detecting a leak.
• If you detected a leak, blow compressed air over
the area, then recheck for leaks. For large leaks,
clearing the area with compressed air may help
you pinpoint the leak source.
A/C Lines (Low Wiggle the hose w h e n checking • Check all fittings, couplings, pressure switches,
pressure side) crimped metal ends on rubber hoses. brazed/welded areas, and areas around
attachment points on A/C lines and components.
• Check for damaged and corroded areas.
• Move the probe slowly (1 inch/second or less),
and keep it within 1/4 inch of the component
being checked. This maximizes the chance of
detecting a leak.
21-125
T h i s page intentionally left blank.
21 -126
A / C System Noise Check
3. Operate the blower at each speed w i t h the engine
and A/C off, and check for unusual noises and
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor excessive vibration. If noise and/or vibration are
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. present, do the following checks:
• Be careful w h e n connecting service equipment.
• Do not breathe refrigerant vapor. -1 If the noise or vibration occurs only in a
• IMA components are located near A/C system specific mode or setting, then check these
components. Make sure you have read the IMA items:
service precautions (see page 12-3) before doing • Operation of the mode control motor, door,
repairs or service. and linkage
• Operation of the air mix control motor(s),
door(s), and linkage
The A/C system noise check will help you determine the • Operation of the recirculation motor, door,
source of abnormal A/C system noise. and linkage
-2 If there is a squeaking or chirping noise, but no
NOTE: unusual vibration, replace the blower motor
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the (see page 21-101).
work area before resuming service. -3 Remove the blower unit (see page 21-99), and
• Additional health and safety information may be check for foreign material (leaves or twigs, for
obtained f r o m the refrigerant and lubricant example) on the blower motor and fan. If
manufacturers. foreign material is present, remove it, and
• Identify the conditions when the noise occurs. The recheck for noise. If you don't find any foreign
weather, the vehicle speed, the vehicle being in gear material, remove the blower motor (see page
or in neutral, the engine temperature, or other • 21-101), and check these items:
conditions may be factors in determining the noise • Check if the fan blades are cracked or broken
source. • Make sure the fan retainer is tight
• Do an A/C system inspection (see page 21-6), and • Inspect the fan alignment on the blower
correct any problems found prior to diagnosing motor shaft
abnormal noises. Replace the blower motor if any problems are
• Abnormal A/C noises can be misleading. For example, present.
a sound similar to a failed bearing may be caused by
loose fasteners, loose mounting brackets, or faulty 4. Set up the vehicle for the running A/C checks:
compressor clutch assembly.
• Select a quiet area for testing
1. Inspect the air inlet grille in the cowl cover for • Apply the parking brake
debris. If debris is present, remove it. • Shift the vehicle in PARK or in Neutral
• Start the engine
2. Sit inside the vehicle, close the doors and w i n d o w s , • Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool
and turn the ignition switch to ON (II), but do not • Set the mode control switch to Vent
start the engine. Cycle the HVAC system through all • Set the fan control dial to m i n i m u m (but not OFF)
blower speeds and all air distribution modes to • Turn the A/C switch ON
determine where and when the noise occurs.
Switch the compressor on and off several times to
clearly identify the sound during A/C compressor
operation. Listen to the noise while the A/C
compressor clutch is engaged and disengaged.
Probe the A/C system with a stethoscope to
pinpoint the noise.
NOTE: If the noise does not change when the A/C

compressor clutch engages or disengages, the
noise may be caused by an engine-related
component. Probe the engine area with a
stethoscope to pinpoint the noise.
(cont'd)
21-127
Climate Control
A / C System Noise Check (cont'd)
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and check the 8. Listen w i t h a stethoscope for noises coming f r o m
drive belt for excessive wear, oil contamination, the A/C compressor, and check these items:
improper routing (see page 10-9), or a faulty belt
tenssioner (see page 10-10). Correct any problems • The noise changes when the compressor clutch
f o u n d . Start the engine, run the A/C system, and disengages. If the noise does not change when
check if the noise is c o m i n g f r o m the drive belt, the the A/C compressor disengages, the noise may
belt tensioner or any of the pulleys. Repair or be caused by an engine-related component.
replace any faulty components. Probe the engine area w i t h a stethoscope to
pinpoint the noise.
6. Listen for noises coming f r o m the A/C lines, the A/C • The A/C system operating pressures are normal.
hoses, the condenser, the evaporator, the receiver- If the system pressures are abnormal,
drier, or the expansion valve, and check these troubleshoot the problem using the pressure test
items: table in the A/C system check (see page 21-129).
Correct the pressure-related problem(s), and
• Noises caused by A/C components touching recheck for noise.
other components or the body. Reroute or • The compressor hose connections, mounting
insulate the A/C component(s) as needed, and brackets, and fasteners are in good condition. If
recheck for noise. any of these components are loose, damaged, or
• Loose, damaged or excessively w o r n A/C excessively w o r n , repair or replace the faulty
components or mounting hardware. Repair or component(s), and recheck for noise. If these
replace the faulty component(s) of hardware, and components are in good condition, and the noise
recheck for noise. is still present, replace the A/C compressor
• A moaning noise c o m i n g f r o m the A/C suction (see page 21-110).
line. If there is a moaning noise, check the • Teat-drive the vehicle to enable the auto idle stop
system refrigerant charge (see page 21-122). If mode (see page 12-22). Have an assistant sit in
the refrigerant charge is OK, replace the receiver/ the driver's seat and press the brake pedal with
dryer. the shift lever in D (engages auto idle stop mode).
Listen for abnormal noises coming f r o m the
7. Check the operation of the A/C compressor clutch: electric motor-driven section of the A/C
compressor. If unusual noises are present,
• Make sure compressor clutch engages w i t h o u t replace the A/C compressor (see page 21-110).
slipping. If the clutch does not engage,
troubleshoot the A/C compressor clutch circuit
(see page 21-84). If the compressor clutch slips,
replace the complete clutch assembly (see page
21-115).
• Make sure the compressor clutch disengages. If
the clutch does not disengage, do the A/C
compressor clutch check (see page 21-113). If the
compressor clutch is OK, replace the A/C
compressor (see page 21-110).
• Make sure the compressor clutch cycles normally.
If the compressor clutch is cycling rapidly, the
A/C system is probably low on refrigerant due to
a leak. Do the refrigerant leak check (see page
21-123). If the refrigerant charge is OK, and there
are no leaks, troubleshoot the A/C compressor
clutch circuit (see page 21-84).
21-128
A / C System Test
Performance Test 5. Place a thermometer (B) near the blower unit's

recirculation inlet duct.
ACAUTION 6. Test conditions:

° Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Avoid direct sunlight.
• Be careful w h e n connecting service equipment. • Open hood.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. • Open front doors.
• Set the temperature control dial to Max Cool, the
mode control switch to Vent, and the
The performance test will help determine if the A/C recirculation control switch to Recirculate.
system is operating w i t h i n specifications. • Turn the A/C switch ON and the fan switch to
Max.
NOTE: • Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the • No driver or passengers in vehicle.
work area before resuming service.
• Additional health and safety information may be / . After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
obtained f r o m the refrigerant and lubricant under the above test conditions, read the delivery
manufacturers. temperature f r o m the thermometer in the center
vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit,
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ and the discharge (high) and suction (low)
charging station to the high-pressure service port pressures on the A/C gauges.
and the low-pressure service port, following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air

temperature.
3. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on

each side, then let the glove box hang d o w n
(see page 20-91).
4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.
(cont'd)
21-129
Climate Control
A / C System Test (cont'd)
8. To complete the vent (delivery)/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
• Mark the vent (delivery) temperature on the vertical line.

• Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottom line.
• Draw a vertical line f r o m the ambient air (intake) temperature mark.
• Draw a horizontal line f r o m the vent (delivery) temperature mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The vent and intake temperatures should intersect in the shaded area. Any measurements outside the line
may indicate the need for further inspection.
A m b i e n t (Intake) T e m p e r a t u r e v s . V e n t (Delivery) T e m p e r a t u r e
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
VENT
(DELIVERY)
TEMPERATURE
60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 °F

(16) (18) (21) (24) (27) (29) (32) (35) (38) (41) (43) (46) (49) (°C)
A M B I E N T (INTAKE) T E M P E R A T U R E
21-130
9. To complete the high side (discharge) pressure/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
• Mark the high side (discharge) pressure temperature on the vertical line.
• Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature on the bottom line.
• Draw a horizontal line f r o m the high side (discharge) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE: The high side pressure and intake temperature should intersect in the shaded area. Any measurements
outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
A m b i e n t (Intake) T e m p e r a t u r e v s . High S i d e (Discharge) P r e s s u r e
psi
(kPa)
350
(2413)
325
(2241) HUMIDITY
LEVEL
300
(2068)
80%
275
(1896)
250
(1724)
225
(1551)
HIGH SIDE
(DISCHARGE) 200
PRESSURE (1379)
175
(1207)
30%
150
(1034)
125
(862)
100
(689)
75
(517)
60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 °F

(16) (18) (21) (24) (27) (29) (32) (35) (38) (41) (43) (46) (49) m
A M B I E N T (INTAKE) T E M P E R A T U R E
(cont'd)
21-131
Climate Control
A / C S f stem Test (cont'd)
10. To complete the low side (suction) pressure/ambient air (intake) temperature chart:
• Mark the low side (suction) pressure along the vertical line.
• Mark the ambient air (intake) temperature along the bottom line.
• Draw a horizontal line f r o m the low side (suction) pressure mark until it intersects the vertical line.
NOTE; The low side pressure and intake temperature should intersect in the shaded area. A n y measurements
outside the line may indicate the need for further inspection.
A m b i e n t (Intake) T e m p e r a t u r e v s . L o w Side (Suction) Pressure
21-132
Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy

Suction and W a r m air f r o m the vents. The A/C system • Recover refrigerant (see page
discharge pressures contains too much 21-120) and evacuate the system
are normal refrigerant oil. (see page 21-121). Adjust the
The air mix door is amount of oil in the system, then
not operating recharge the system (see page
properly. 21-122).
• Check air mix door operation
(see page 21-95), and repair as
needed.
Suction and The Suction and The A/C compressor • Check whether the A/C compressor
discharge pressures discharge pressures clutch or the drive clutch or the drive belt is slipping.
are roughly equal equalize w h e n the engine belt is slipping, or the • If the drive belt is slipping, replace
and steady is revved compressor shaft the drive belt (see page 10-10). Also
seal is leaking. inspect the drive belt auto-tensioner
(see page 10-10).
• If the A/C compressor clutch is
slipping, replace it (see page 21-115).
• Check the A/C compressor shaft seal.
If it's leaking, replace the A/C
compressor (see page 21-110).
Suction and Suction and discharge The compressor Replace the A/C compressor (see page
discharge pressures pressures fluctuate while discharge valve or 21-110).
are roughly equal but running. Pressures the compressor
fluctuate equalize as soon as the gasket is faulty.
A/C compressor
disengages.
Suction and The suction and The A/C system is Recover refrigerant (see page 21-120),
discharge pressures discharge pressures do undercharged. then do the refrigerant leak check
are roughly equal not change during (see page 21-123). Repair any leaks,
and abnormally low continued operation. then recharge the system (see page
21-122).
Suction and The suction pressure The A/C system is Recover refrigerant (see page 21-120),
discharge pressures decreases w h e n cool overcharged. evacuate the system (see page 21-121),
are abnormally high, water is sprayed on the and recharge the system to
but normalize w h e n A/C condenser. specifications (see page 21-122).
the condenser is
cooled
Suction and • The high pressure The A/C system Replace the restricted line or
discharge pressures vapor line to the refrigerant flow is component.
are abnormally high, condenser is too hot. restricted.
and refrigerant line • The low pressure liquid
temperatures are line f r o m the
abnormal expansion valve is not
cold.
• There is an abrupt
temperature drop
along a refrigerant line,
or in the condenser or
1 evaporator.
(cont'd)
21-133
Climate Control
A/C System Test (cont'd)
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Suction and • After stopping the A / C There is excess air in Recover refrigerant (see page 21-120),
discharge pressures compressor, the the A/C system. evacuate the system (see page 21-121),
are abnormally high, discharge pressure and recharge the system (see page
but drop rapidly quickly drops about 21-122).
w h e n the 196 kPa (28 psi), then
compressor falls gradually.
disengages • The input and output
temperatures at the
expansion valve are
not similar.
Suction and • The condenser • Clean debris f r o m the condenser
discharge pressures and/or radiator fins and/or radiator fins.
are abnormally high, are clogged • Comb the condenser fins to repair
9
and there is little or The condenser fins any damage.
no airflow through are damaged • Troubleshoot the A/C condenser fan
the A/C condenser ° The condenser and/or the radiator fan circuit(s).
and/or radiator
fans are not
working properly
The suction pressure ° The liquid line The expansion valve Replace the expansion valve (see page
is high and the temperature is similar is stuck open. 21-103).
discharge pressure is on both sides of
low. Both pressures expansion valve.
are steady • System pressures do
not vary at a steady
engine speed.
The suction pressure • The high pressure The A/C system Replace the restricted line or
is low, the discharge liquid line going into refrigerant f l o w is component.
pressure is high, and expansion valve is cold. restricted.
the refrigerant • There is an abrupt
' temperature changes temperature drop in
abnormally the line between the
somewhere in the compressor and the
system condenser, or in the
line between the
condenser and the
expansion valve.
The suction pressure The expansion valve The A/C compressor Replace the A/C compressor (see page
is high, the discharge and/or the compressor is malfunctioning. 21-110). If the system is contaminated
pressure is low, and discharge hose are with desiccant, replace the receiver/
there are particle contaminated w i t h metal dryer (see page 21-119).
contaminants in the flakes or desiccant
refrigerant lines. particles.
21-134
Test results Related s y m p t o m s Probable cause Remedy
The suction pressure The discharge and The A/C compressor Replace the A/C compressor (see page
is high, the discharge suction pressures seal is faulty. 21-110).
pressure is low, and equalize soon after the
the pressures quickly A/C compressor stops.
change when the A/C
disengages
Suction and There is no frost on the The A/C system has a Do the refrigerant leak check
discharge pressures expansion valve, and the leak (very low (see page 21-123), repair any leaks,
are both low and low-pressure liquid line is refrigerant charge). and recharge the A/C system
none of the not cold. (see page 21-122).
refrigerant lines are
cold
Suction and • The temperature • The discharge Repair or replace the faulty A/C line
discharge pressures around the expansion hose/line is (see page 21-9).
are both low, and the valve is too low clogged or kinked,
expansion valve or compared to the which is restricting
the suction line is temperature around refrigerant f l o w .
abnormally cold the receiver/dryer. • The suction hose/
• The low pressure line is clogged or
(suction) hose/line is kinked, which is
cooler than the restricting
evaporator. refrigerant f l o w .
Initially, the suction During extended ' The evaporator is Run the fan with A/C compressor off to
and discharge operation, the a i r f l o w freezing up. w a r m the evaporator, then test the
pressure are normal, f r o m the vents decreases. evaporator temperature sensor
b u t both become (see page 21-90). If necessary, replace
abnormally low the evaporator temperature sensor.
during operation
Suction and ° During extended The expansion valve • Replace the expansion valve
discharge pressures operation, w a r m air is stuck closed. (see page 21-103) and the receiver/
are both low and comes out of the vents, dryer (see page 21-119).
there are abnormal the suction pressure • Check the old expansion valve for
temperature changes decreases, and heavy contamination. If contaminants are
at the expansion frost occurs on the low found, replace the component that
valve pressure liquid line. caused the contamination.
• The low pressure liquid
line is cold at the
expansion valve, but
w a r m after the valve.
• There is frost on the
expansion valve.
The discharge There is no frost on the There is excessive • Recover refrigerant (see page
pressure is low, the expansion valve outlet, moisture in the A/C 21-120), then replace the receiver/
suction pressure is and the liquid line system. dryer (see page 21-119).
extremely low, and temperature changes • Evacuate the system (see page
the expansion valve significantly across the 21-121) and recharge the system
outlet is abnormally expansion valve. (see page 21-122).
warm
(cont'd)
21-135
Climate Control
A / C System Test (cont'd)

T e s t results Related s y m p t o m s Probable cause Remedy
The discharge There is frost on the line The evaporator is Recover refrigerant (see page 2 1 - 1 2 0 ) ,
pressure is low, the from the evaporator to internally then replace the evaporator (see page
suction pressure is the compressor. contaminated or 2 1 - 1 0 1 ) . Evacuate the system
extremely low, and plugged. (see page 21-121) and recharge t h e
t h e suction line is system (see page 21-122).
abnormally cold
The discharge • There is no frost on the The expansion valve Replace the expansion valve (see page
pressure is low, the expansion valve, and is faulty. 21-103).
suction pressure is the low pressure liquid
extremely low, and line is not cold.
the refrigerant • The liquid line
temperature doesn't temperatures are
change going similar on both sides of
through the expansion valve.
expansion valve
The discharge There is frost on the Excessive moisture Recover refrigerant (see page 2 1 - 1 2 0 ) ,
pressure is low, the expansion valve. in the system is the replace the receiver/dryer.
suction pressure is freezing the Evacuate the system (see page 2 1 - 1 2 1 ) ,
extremely low, and expansion valve. and recharge the system (see page
the expansion valve 21-122).
is abnormally cold
The discharge There is frost on the line The receiver/dryer is Recover refrigerant (see page 2 1 - 1 2 0 ) ,
pressure is low, the from the receiver/dryer to clogged. then replace the receiver/dryer.
suction pressure is the expansion valve. Evacuate the system (see page 21-121)
extremely low, and and recharge the system (see page
the high pressure 21-122).
liquid line is
abnormally cold
21-136
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT S Y S T E M (SRS) (if electrical maintenance is required)
or side collision, all SRS service work should be done by an authorized Honda dealer.
• Improper service procedures, Including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal Injury
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, side impact sensors, or rear safing sensor when the
ignition switch Is in ON (II), or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch Is turned to LOCK ( 0 ) ; otherwise, the
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, i n the front seats,
INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M (If electrical maintenance is required)
You must be familiar with the IMA system before working around it. Make sure you have read the Service Precautions
Body Electrical
Body Electrical Horns
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 22-3 Circuit Diagram 22-143
Horn Test/Replacement 22-144
Relay and Control Unit Horn Switch Test 22-144
Locations 22-7
Exterior Lights
Connectors and Harnesses 22-13 Component Location Index 22-146
Fyse/Relay Boxes 22-49 DTC Troubleshooting 22-152
MICU Input Test 22-158
Power Distribution 22-52 Combination Light Switch
Ground Distribution 22-57 Headlight Adjustment 22-163
Headlight Replacement 22-164
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Bulb Replacement 22-165
Removal and Installation 22-59 Taillight Replacement 22-166
Inner Taillight Replacement 22-166
* Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box License Plate Light Replacement 22-167
Removal and Installation 22-60 High Mount Brake Light Replacement ...... 22-167
Brake Pedal Position Switch Test 22-168
12 Volt Battery
12 Volt Battery Test 22-61 Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights
Battery Terminal Disconnection and Component Location Index 22-169
Reconnection 22-62 Circuit Diagram 22-170
Battery Removal and Installation 22-63 DTC Troubleshooting 22-172
Relays Hazard Warning Switch
Power Relay Test 22-64 Test/Replacement 22-178
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement ........ 22-179
* Ignition Switch
Test 22-66 Interior Lights
Replacement 22-66 Component Location Index 22-180
Multiplex Integrated Control System Front Individual Map Light
Component Location Index 22-67 Test/Replacement 22-182
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 22-68 Ceiling Light Test/Replacement 22-183
DTC Troubleshooting Index 22-70 Trunk Light Test/Replacement .................. 22-183
System Description 22-74 Trunk Lid Latch Switch Test 22-184
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A 22-89 Entry Lights Control System
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System Component Location Index ....................... 22-185
Diagnosis Test Mode B 22-90 Circuit Diagram 22-186
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System MICU Input Test 22-187
Diagnosis Test Mode C 22-91 Ignition Key Switch Test 22-190
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode D 22-92 Power Windows
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System Component Location Index 22-191
Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test System Description 22-192
Mode 2 (without the HDS) 22-93 Resetting the Power Window
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test 22-95 Control Unit 22-193
Circuit Diagram 22-96 Circuit Diagram 22-194
DTC Troubleshooting 22-98 - Master Switch Input Test 22-196
MICU Input Test 22-106 Driver's Power Window Motor Test 22-199
Passenger's Power Window Motor
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security Test 22-200
System Master Switch Test/Replacement 22-201
Component Location Index 22-109 Passenger's Power Window Switch
System Description 22-111 Test/Replacement 22-202
Tripped Sensor History 22-129
Door Lock Actuator Test 22-134
Door Lock Knob Switch Test 22-135
Door Lock Switch Test 22-136
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test 22-137
Trunk Lid Release Actuator Test 22-137
Trunk Key Cylinder Switch Test 22-138
Hood Switch Test 22-138
Transmitter Test/Replacement 22-139
Wipers/Washers Rear Window Defogger
Component Location Index 22-203 Component Location Index
Circuit Diagram •• 22-205 Circuit Diagram
DTC Troubleshooting 22-206 Function Test ............
MICU Input Test 22-210 Defogger Wire Repair
Wiper/Washer Switch Test 22-213
Wiper Motor Test 22-213 Immobilizer System
Washer Motor Test ..................................... 22-214 Component Location Index .,
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test System Description
(Canada models) 22-214 Circuit Diagram .............................
Wiper Motor Replacement 22-215 DTC Troubleshooting
Wiper/Washer Switch Replacement ......... 22-216 Symptom Troubleshooting
Washer Reservoir Replacement 22-216 Information
Wiper Blade Replacement 22-217 Symptom Troubleshooting .........
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment 22-218 System Check
Washer Tube Replacement 22-219 Status Log -
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Gauges Input Test
Component Location Index 22-220 Immobilizer Key Registration
Self-diagnostic Function 22-223 Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Circuit Diagram 22-226 Replacement •
Gauge Control Module (Tach)
Input Test 22-248
Gauge Control Module (Speedo)
input Test 22-252
Rewriting the ODO Data and Transferring
the Maintenance Minder Data to a New
Gauge Control Module 22-254
Gauge Control Module
Replacement 22-255
Dash Lights Brightness Controller and
Odometer Select/Reset Switch
Outside Air Temperature Indicator
Calibration 22-257
Reminder S f stems
Accessory Power Socket

Front Accessory Power Socket
Console Accessory Power Socket
Seat Heaters
Switch Test/Replacement 22-272
Seat Heater Test ......................................... 22-272
Power Mirrors
Function Test 22-276
Power Mirror Switch
Power Mirror Actuator Test 22-277
Power Mirror Actuator Replacement 22-278
Body Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. N o . Tool Number Description Qty

© 07WAZ-001010A MFCS (MCIC) Service Connector 1
(D 07TAZ-001020A Back Probe Adaptor - 2
(D 07AAC-000A1A0 Relay Puller 1
© ® ©
22-2
BODY

Tips and Precautions * Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Before Troubleshooting another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
• Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay unless y o u first release the lock and remove the
box.. connector f r o m its mount bracket (A).
2 . Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and

clean and tight connections.
fi\JOT!CE]
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the
battery ground cable has been
disconnected, otherwise you will damage
the DC-DC converter.
• Do not attempt to crank the engine w i t h
the battery ground cable loosely
connected or you will severely damage the
wiring.
Handling Connectors .
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no ° Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
loose wire terminals. wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed w i t h • Always reinstall plastic covers.
dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
• Before connecting connectors, make sure the

A terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont'd)
22-3
Bodf Electrical
• Check for loose retainers (A) and rubber seals ( B ) . Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame w i t h
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
A • Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
• The backs of s o m e connectors are packed w i t h

dielectric grease. A d d grease if necessary. If the
grease Is contaminated, replace It.
• After installing harness clips, make sure the harness
doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
• Keep wire harnesses away f r o m exhaust components
and other hot parts, f r o m sharp edges of brackets and
holes, and f r o m exposed screws and bolts.
• Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave g r o m m e t s distorted (B).
A B
• Insert the connector all the w a y and make sure It Is

securely locked.
• Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces
down.
22-4
Testing and Repairs Five-step Troubleshooting
• Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace t h e m or repair them by wrapping the break 1. Verify The Complaint:
w i t h electrical tape. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS w i r i n g . to verify the client complaint. Note the symptoms.
If there is an open or damage is SRS wiring or Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
terminals, replace the harness. narrowed d o w n the problem area.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under t h e m . 2. Analyze The Schematic:
• W h e n using electrical test equipment, f o l l o w the Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
manufacturer's instructions and those described in Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
this manual. tracing the current paths f r o m the power feed
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester f r o m the wire through the circuit components to ground. If
side (except waterproof connector). several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or a
ground is a likely cause.
Based on the s y m p t o m s and your understanding of

the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:

Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
Fix The Problem:

Once the specific problem is identified, make the
Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
Make Sure The Circuit Works:

Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.
Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont'd)
22-5
Body Electrical
Wire Color Codes How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
The f o l l o w i n g abbreviations are used to identify wire
colors in the circuit schematics: NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's
WHT White manual that came w i t h the Honda Diagnostic System
YEL.... Yellow (HDS).
BLK.... Black
BLU Blue 1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
GRN...... Green Data Link Connector (DLC) (A) located under the
RED Red driver's side of the dashboard.
ORN...................... Orange
PNK Pink
BRN ...... Brown
GRY... Gray
PUR. Purple
LT BLU Light Blue
LT GRN ............................... Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color w i t h

another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle.

If it d o e s n ' t troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-213).
4. Enter BODY ELECTRICAL, then select the TEST

MODE menu.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note t h e m , and go to the

indicated DTC troubleshooting.
22-6
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Engine Compartment
AUXILIARY UNDER-
HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
AUXILIARY ELECTRIC
WATER PUMP RELAY
Wire colors; RED, O R N ,
PUR, and BRN
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL U N I T o r PGM-FI M A I N R E L A Y 2

VSA M O D U L A T O R - C O N T R O L U N I T (FUEL PUMP)
[Wire colors: GRN, BRN,
[BRN, and ORN
S E R V O UNIT
RADIATOR FAN RELAY A / C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL S Y S T E M (ETCS) FAN CONTROL RELAY
CONTROL RELAY
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
POWER MIRROR DEFOGGER RELAY

PGM-FI S U B R E L A Y
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
IGNITION COIL RELAY
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1
A / C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
UNDER-HOOD F U S E / R E L A Y BOX
22 -7
Dashboard
FRONT ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET RELAY CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET RELAY
[Wire colors: B L U , W H T , BLK, a n d PUR] [Wire colors: YEL, G R N , BLK, a n d P U R ]
V i e w of f r o n t s i d e V i e w of r e a r s i d e
22-8
EPS
CONTROL UNIT
22-9
Floor and Rear
22-10
SODY
Door
Driver's Door
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH

( H a s b u i l t - i n c o n t r o l unit)
22-11
Seat
Driver's Seat
DRIVER'S SEAT HEATER RELAY (LOW) W i t h seat heater)

[Wire colors:
B R N , R E D , B L K , BLK, and B L U / Y E L ]
Front Passenger's Seat
FRONT PASSENGER'S SEAT HEATER RELAY (LOW) (With seat heater)

[Wire colors: B R N , RED, B L K , B L K , and BLU/YEL ]
22-12
[-- -r I
30DY ;
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector Index
I d e n t i f i c a t i o n n u m b e r s h a v e b e e n a s s i g n e d t o i n - l i n e c o n n e c t o r s , j u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r s , a n d t e r m i n a l s . T h e n u m b e r is p r e c e d e d b y t h e letter " C "
for connector, " G " for g r o u n d terminals, or " T " for non-ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine • Dashboard O t h e r s (Floor, Door, Notes
Compartment T r u n k , a n d Roof)
A/C w i r e harness C205, C505 (see page 22-43)
Battery g r o u n d cable (-),G1 (see page 22-14)
Console subharness C551,C601 (see page 22-44)
Dashboard wire harness C 2 0 1 C202, C203, C 5 0 1 ,
f
(see page 22-24)
(View of driver's side) C502, C 7 5 1 , C 7 5 2 , C801
G501,G503
Dashboard wire harness C503, C 5 5 1 , C 5 5 2 (see p a g e 22-26)
(View of middle) G504, G506
Dashboard wire harness C505, C 7 6 1 , C 7 6 2 (see p a g e 22-28)
( V i e w o f p a s s e n g e r ' s side) G502, G505
DC-DC c o n v e r t e r c a b l e T101 G901,G904 (see page 22-36)
Driver's door wire harness C751,C752 C753 (see page 22-39)
D r i v e r ' s seat p o s i t i o n s e n s o r h a r n e s s ' 1
C602 (see page 22-45)
D r i v e r ' s seat p o s i t i o n s e n s o r h a r n e s s 4 2
C604 (see page 22-46)
D r i v e r ' s seat w i r e h a r n e s s * 2
C602, C604 (see page 22-46)
Engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness C101,C102,C103, C201 t h r o u g h C 2 0 5 , C209 (see page 22-18)
(Left b r a n c h ) C208 G401
T 5 , G301
Engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness C206, C207 G 4 0 2 , G403 (see p a g e 22-22)
(Right b r a n c h ) G201,G202
Engine g r o u n d cable A T1,G2 (see p a g e 22-14)
Engine g r o u n d cable B T2, G3 (see p a g e 22-14)
Engine w i r e harness C101,C102,C103, (see p a g e 22-16)
C105,C106
G101,G102
Floor w i r e harness C204, C209, C 5 0 1 , C 5 0 2 , C602, C 7 0 1 , C 7 7 1 (see p a g e 22-30)
(Left b r a n c h ) C552, C601 G601,G603
Floor w i r e harness C 6 5 1 , C 7 8 1 , C 7 8 2 , C901 (see p a g e 22-32)
(Right b r a n c h ) G602
Front passenger's door w i r e harness C761,C762 (see page 22-40)
F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat w i r e h a r n e s s * 2
C782, C783 (see page 22-48)
Fuel p u m p s u b h a r n e s s C651 (see page 22-32)
IPU c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s C 9 0 1 , C 9 0 2 , C903, C904 (see page 22-37)
G902, G903
IPU m o d u l a t o r f a n s u b h a r n e s s C904 (see page 22-37)
Left rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s C771 (see page 22-41)
ODS unit harness 1
C782 (see page 22-47)
ODS unit harness* 2
C783 (see page 22-48)
Rear w i n d o w d e f o g g e r g r o u n d w i r e G801 (see page 22-35)
Rear w i r e h a r n e s s C701 (see page 22-34)
(Left b r a n c h ) G701
Rear w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-35)
(Right b r a n c h )
R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s C781 (see page 22-42)
Roof wire harness C801 (see page 22-38)
Starter cable ( + ) , T 3 , T4 (see page 22-14)
3
USB harness" C671 (see page 22-30)
USB subharness* 3
C671 (see page 22-44)
* 1: W i t h o u t seat h e a t e r
* 2: W i t h seat heater
* 3: '09 m o d e l
22-13
Connector to Harness Index
Battery Ground Cable
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location C o n n e c t s to Notes

<-) 6 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Battery negative t e r m i n a l
G1 4 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d , via battery
g r o u n d cable
Engine Ground Cable A
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location C o n n e c t s to Notes

T1 9 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Engine
G2 1 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d , via e n g i n e
g r o u n d cable A
Engine Ground Cable B

T2 2 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Transmission housing
G3 3 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d , via e n g i n e
g r o u n d cable B
Starter Cable
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes

<-B 7 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Battery positive terminal
T3 5 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Under-hood fuse/relay box
T4 8 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Starter m o t o r
22-14
22-15
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Engine Wire Harness
A/C c o m p r e s s o r clutch 43 3 Middle of engine compartment
A / F s e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) 16 4 Exhaust manifold
Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 12 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
C r a n k s h a f t p o s i t i o n (CKP) s e n s o r 46 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
CVT drive pulley pressure control 33 8 Transmission housing
valve/CVT driven pulley pressure
control valve/CVT start clutch pressure
control valve/Inhibitor solenoid
CVT input shaft (Drive pulley) speed 31 3 Transmission housing
sensor
CVT o u t p u t shaft (Driven pulley) speed 19 3 Transmission housing
sensor
CVT speed sensor 18 3 Transmission housing
CVT speed sensor (Secondary) 20 3 Transmission housing *
E n g i n e c o o l a n t t e m p e r a t u r e (ECT) 11 2 Middle of engine compartment
sensor 1
EVAP canister purge valve 14 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
E x h a u s t g a s r e c i r c u l a t i o n (EGR) v a l v e 45 6 Middle of engine compartment
and position sensor
Exhaust side ignition coil N o . 1 2 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Exhaust side ignition coil N o . 2 4 3 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Exhaust side ignition coil N o . 3 6 3 Middle of engine compartment
Exhaust side ignition coil N o . 4 8 2 Middle of engine compartment
IMA motor 17 6 Transmission housing
Injector No. 1 44 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Injector N o . 2 39 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Injector N o . 3 38 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Injector N o . 4 35 2 Middle of engine compartment
Intake s i d e i g n i t i o n c o i l N o . 1 1 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Intake s i d e i g n i t i o n c o i l N o . 2 3 3 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Knock sensor 40 1 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) 36 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
sensor
M a s s air f l o w ( M A F ) s e n s o r / I n t a k e air 27 5 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
t e m p e r a t u r e (IAT) s e n s o r
Oil p r e s s u r e s w i t c h 41 1 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
PCM connector B 26 44 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
PCM connector C 25 44 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Rocker a r m o i l c o n t r o l s o l e n o i d 1 34 2 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Rocker a r m o i l c o n t r o l s o l e n o i d 2 30 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Rocker a r m o i l p r e s s u r e s e n s o r 9 3 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Rocker a r m o i l p r e s s u r e s w i t c h 10 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( S e n s o r 2) 15 4 Exhaust manifold
Starter solenoid 37 1 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Throttle position sensor 29 6 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
Transmission range switch 24 8 Transmission housing
C101 23 23 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
C102 22 1 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Engine c o m p a r t m e n t wire
C103 21 6 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Engine c o m p a r t m e n t wire
C105 ( J u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r ) 28 24 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
C106 ( J u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r ) 13 12 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
G101 42 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d , via engine
w i r e harness
G102 32 M i d d l e of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d , via engine
w i r e harness
* : '06 m o d e l
22-16
22-17
Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Left branch)

A/C condenser fan motor 1 2 Front of engine c o m p a r t m e n t
APP sensor 7 6 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
A u x i l i a r y electric w a t e r p u m p 25 2 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
A u x i l i a r y electric w a t e r p u m p relay 5 4 Auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay
Brake f l u i d level s w i t c h 9 2 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t

Brake p e d a l p o s i t i o n s w i t c h 12 4 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Brake p e d a l s t r o k e s e n s o r 13 3 Under right side of dash
ECT s e n s o r 2 43 2 F r o n t of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
H o o d switch (security) 3 2 F r o n t of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Horn 40 1 B e h i n d left s i d e o f f r o n t b u m p e r
Left f r o n t i m p a c t s e n s o r 37 2 U n d e r left h e a d l i g h t
Left f r o n t t u r n s i g n a l / p a r k i n g l i g h t s 36 3 B e h i n d left h e a d l i g h t
Left f r o n t w h e e l s p e e d s e n s o r 45 2 Left side o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Left h e a d l i g h t ( h i g h b e a m ) 41 2 B e h i n d left h e a d l i g h t
Left h e a d l i g h t ( l o w b e a m ) 38 2 B e h i n d left h e a d l i g h t
O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r (for f o g l i g h t ) 14 1 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
O u t s i d e air t e m p e r a t u r e s e n s o r 42 2 Front of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
PCM connector A 46 44 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 2 4 4 Auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay
Radiator fan m o t o r 44 2 Front of engine c o m p a r t m e n t

Servo unit 23 25 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Test tachometer connector 2 2 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t *
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector F 15 34 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector G 16 21 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector A 28 3 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(ELD) (see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector B 29 1 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector C 30 2 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector D 32 8 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector E 31 10 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector F 34 20 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector G 26 1 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector H 27 1 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector J 33 4 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector K 35 2 Behind under-hood fuse/relay box
(see p a g e 22-49)
* : '06-08 C a n a d a m o d e l s
22-18
22-19
Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Left branch)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities' Location Connects to Notes

C101 11 23 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Engine w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-16)
C102 10 1 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Engine w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-16)
C103 8 6 Middle of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Engine w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-16)
C201 19 14- U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Dashboard w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-24)
C202 18 20 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Dashboard w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-24)
(see p a g e 22-24)
C204 21 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h F l o o r w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e * 1
22-30)
C204 21 16 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h F l o o r w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e *2
22-30)
C205 6 2 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h A / C w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e
22-43)
C208 ( J u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r ) 24 6 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t *3
C209 22 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h F l o o r w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e
22-30)
T5 47 Left side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Battery positive terminal
G301 39 Left s i d e o f e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t B o d y g r o u n d , via e n g i n e
c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e harness
G401 20 Left kick p a n e l B o d y g r o u n d , via engine
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
* 1: ' 0 6 m o d e l
* 2: '07-09 m o d e l s
* 3: ' 0 6 - 0 8 m o d e l s
22-20
22-21
Engine C o m p a r t m e n t Wire Harness (Right branch)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes

A/C pressure sensor 15 3 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
A B S modulator-control unit 18 25 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t * 4
EPS c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r A 26 2 Under right side of dash
EPS c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r B 24 2 Under right side o f dash
EPS c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r C 23 2 U n d e r right side of dash
EPS c o n t r o l u n i t c o n n e c t o r D 25 28 Under right side of dash
EPS m o t o r A 22 2 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
EPS m o t o r B 21 1 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
M o t o r rotor position sensor 5 6 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Optional connector (for f o g light) 13 1 Behind right headlight
Power unit 20 2 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right front impact sensor 14 2 Under right headlight
Right front t u r n signal/parking lights 16 3 Behind right headlight
Right front w h e e l speed sensor 19 2 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
Right headlight (high beam) 7 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low beam) 12 2 Behind right headlight
Torque sensor 6 4 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t
V S A modulator-control unit 18 37 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t *5
W i n d s h i e l d w a s h e r f l u i d level switch 11 2 Behind right side of front b u m p e r * 1
Windshield washer motor 10 2 Behind right side of front b u m p e r
Windshield wiper motor 3 5 Under right side o f windshield
C206 (Junction connector) 17 6 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t *2
C207 ( J u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r ) 4 6 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t *2
C207 ( J u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r ) 4 12 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t *3
G201 8 Right side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d , via engine
G202 9 Right side of engine c o m p a r t m e n t Body g r o u n d , via engine
G402 1 Under right side of dash Body g r o u n d , via engine
G403 2 Under right side of dash Body g r o u n d , via engine
c o m p a r t m e n t wire harness
* 1: C a n a d a m o d e l s
* 2; '06-08 m o d e l s
* 3: ' 0 9 m o d e l
* 4: W i t h o u t V S A
* 5: W i t h V S A
22-22
22-23
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of driver's side)

A H B buzzer 28 2 Left s i d e o f d a s h
Dash lights brightness controller 15 7 Left s i d e o f d a s h
Gauge control m o d u l e (speedo) 11 12 Behind gauge
G a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e (tach) 12 36 Behind gauge
Left t w e e t e r 1 2 Left s i d e o f d a s h
M e m o r y erase s i g n a l ( M E S ) c o n n e c t o r 19 2 Left kick p a n e l
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector C 18 4 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector D 17 2 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector J 3 4 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector K 4 8 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector M 6 10 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector N 8 14 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector P 5 10 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q 7 16 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector R 9 20 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector S 10 20 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
(see p a g e 22-50)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector T 2 34 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
(see p a g e 22-50)
V S A OFF s w i t c h 16 5 Left s i d e o f d a s h *3
C201 25 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Engine c o m p a r t m e n t wire
22-30)
22-30)
C751 26 23 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Driver's door w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-39)
C752 27 18 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Driver's d o o r w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-39)
C801 21 6 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h R o o f w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e *2
22-38)
C801 21 20 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h R o o f w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e * 1
22-38)
G501 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Body g r o u n d , via dashboard
w i r e harness
G503 13 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Body g r o u n d , via dashboard
w i r e harness
* 1: W i t h navigation s y s t e m
* 2: W i t h o u t navigation s y s t e m
* 3: W i t h V S A
22-24
22-25

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle)

A u d i o unit connector A 25 17 Middle of dash *4
A u d i o unit connector B 26 20 Middle of dash * 4
Auxiliary jack assembly 36 5 Middle of dash
Console accessory p o w e r socket relay 13 4 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Data l i n k c o n n e c t o r 35 16 Middle of dash
Front accessory p o w e r socket 33 2 Middle of dash
Front accessory p o w e r socket relay 16 4 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Hazard w a r n i n g switch 37 5 Middle of dash
Humidity sensor 38 2 Middle of dash
Under-dash junction box connector A 7 6 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector B 8 6 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector C 2 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector D 5 6 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector E 6 18 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector F 9 10 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector G 4 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector H 12 10 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector J 10 22 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector K 3 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector L 11 10 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Under-dash junction box connector M 1 10 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Navigation unit connector A 24 17 Middle of dash * 1
Navigation unit connector A 24 24 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector B 21 22 Middle of dash * 1
Navigation unit connector B 21 24 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector C 20 12 Middle of dash * 1
Navigation unit connector C 20 8 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector D 23 5 Middle of dash * 1
Navigation unit connector D 23 12 Middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector E 22 14 M i d d l e of dash *3
Navigation unit connector F 24 5 Middle of dash *3
O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r (for a u x i l i a r y jack) 34 6 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r (l/F b o x c o n n e c t o r A ) 18 20 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h *5
O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r (l/F b o x c o n n e c t o r B) 19 16 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h * 5
O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r (l/F b o x c o n n e c t o r C) 27 2 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h *5
O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r (l/F b o x c o n n e c t o r D) 28 2 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h *5
Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator 39 4 Middle of dash
SRS unit connector A 32 28 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
Sunlight sensor 17 2 U n d e r left o f d a s h
TPMS control unit 40 20 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h * 6
C503 ( J u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r ) 15 12 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
C551 30 24 Under center console Console subharness *7
(see p a g e 22-44)
C552 29 4 Under center console Floor w i r e harness *7
(see p a g e 22-30)
G504 14 Under middle of dash Body g r o u n d , via floor w i r e
harness
G506 31 Under middle of dash B o d y g r o u n d , via f l o o r w i r e
harness
* 1: '06-08 m o d e l s w i t h n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
* 2: '09 m o d e l w i t h n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
* 3: W i t h n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
* 4: W i t h o u t n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
* 5: ' 0 6 U S A C A R L I N K
* 6: '08-09 U S A m o d e l s
* 7: '09 m o d e l
22-26
22-27
Dashboard Wire Harness (View of passenger's side)

C a b l e reel c o n n e c t o r A 16 4 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r Driver's airbag inflator
C a b l e reel c o n n e c t o r B 2 20 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r Steering switches (audio,
cruise, navigation, horn)
Climate control unit connector A 12 32 Middle of dash
Climate control unit connector B 11 16 Middle of dash
Combination light switch 1 12 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r
Ignition key switch 14 6 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r
Ignition switch 13 7 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 15 7 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r
Passenger's airbag inflator 8 4 Under right side of dash
Right tweeter 4 2 Right side of dash
Steering angle sensor 17 5 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r *3
Wiper/washer switch 3 8 In s t e e r i n g c o l u m n c o v e r
C505 9 24 B e h i n d left s i d e o f g l o v e b o x A / C w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e * 1
22-43)
C505 9 20 B e h i n d left s i d e o f g l o v e b o x A / C w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e *2
22-43)
C761 5 23 Under right side of dash Front passenger's door wire
C762 6 18 U n d e r right side of dash Front passenger's d o o r w i r e
G502 7 U n d e r right side of dash Body g r o u n d , via
dashboard w i r e harness
G505 10 B e h i n d left s i d e o f g l o v e b o x B o d y g r o u n d , via
dashboard w i r e harness
* 1: '06-07 m o d e l s
* 2: ' 0 8 - 0 9 m o d e l s
* 3: '09 m o d e l
22-28
22-29
Floor Wire Harness (Left branch)
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location C o n n e c t s to Noti
A/T gear position indicator panel light 12 4 Under center console
Driver's buckle tensioner 31 4 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat
Driver's d o o r switch 29 1 Left B-pillar
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 25 3 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat
Driver's seat belt tensioner 27 4 L e f t B-pillar
Driver's side airbag inflator 24 2 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat
Junction board connector 14 12 Middle of floor *7
Junction board connector 15 12 Middle of floor *7
Left rear d o o r s w i t c h 20 1 Left C-pillar
Left rear w h e e l s p e e d s e n s o r 23 2 U n d e r left s i d e o f f l o o r
Left s i d e c u r t a i n a i r b a g 17 2 Left C-pillar
Left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (FIRST) 30 4 Left s i d e o f f l o o r
Left s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r ( S E C O N D ) 22 2 Left s i d e o f f l o o r
N o i s e c o n d e n s e r ( f o r rear w i n d o w 21 2 L e f t C-pillar
defogger)
Parking brake switch 13 1 Under console panel
Rear w i n d o w d e f o g g e r c o n n e c t o r A ( + ) 16 1 L e f t C-pillar
S h i f t lock s o l e n o i d 11 2 U n d e r console panel
SRS unit connector B 7 28 Under middle of dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector E 5 42 Left kick p a n e l
(see p a g e 22-50)
Y a w rate-lateral acceleration sensor 6 5 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash * 8
C204 3 14 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e * 1
C204 3 16 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Engine c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e *2
(see p a g e 22-24)
(see p a g e 22-24)
C552 8 4 Under m i d d l e of dash Dashboard w i r e harness *4
(see p a g e 22-26)
C601 10 2 Under middle of dash Console subharness *3
(see p a g e 22-44)
C601 10 13 Under middle of dash Console subharness *4
(see p a g e 22-44)
C602 24 2 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat D r i v e r ' s seat p o s i t i o n *5
s e n s o r h a r n e s s (see p a g e
22-45)
C602 24 8 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat D r i v e r ' s seat w i r e h a r n e s s *6
(see p a g e 22-46)
C701 19 14 Left C-pillar Rear w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e
22-34)
C771 26 18 Left B-pillar Left rear d o o r w i r e h a r n e s s
(see p a g e 22-41)
G601 27 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat Body g r o u n d , via floor w i r e
harness
G603 13 Left s i d e o f f l o o r Body g r o u n d , via floor w i r e
harness
* 1:'06 m o d e l
* 2: '07-09 m o d e l s
* 3: '06-08 m o d e l s
* 4: '09 m o d e l
* 5: W i t h o u t s e a t h e a t e r
* 6: W i t h seat h e a t e r
* 8: W i t h V S A
USB Harness
C671 9 5 U n d e r m i d d l e of dash U S B s u b h a r n e s s (see p a g e *
22-44)
*: '09 m o d e l
22-30
USB HARNESS
22-31
Connector to Harness index (cont'd)
Floor W i r e Harness (Right branch)
Connector or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes

EVAP canister vent shut valve 3 2 Fuel t a n k
Front passenger's buckle tensioner 15 4 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Front passenger's door switch 8 1 R i g h t B-pillar
Front passenger's seat belt buckle 14 3 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
switch
F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat b e l t t e n s i o n e r 11 4 R i g h t B-pillar
Front passenger's side airbag inflator 12 2 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Fuel t a n k p r e s s u r e (FTP) s e n s o r 2 3 Fuel t a n k
Rear s a f i n g s e n s o r 4 4 Middle of floor
Right rear d o o r switch 17 1 R i g h t C-pillar
Right rear w h e e l speed sensor 19 2 Right side of f l o o r
Right side curtain airbag 21 2 Right side of f l o o r
R i g h t s i d e i m p a c t s e n s o r (FIRST) 9 4 Right side of f l o o r
Right side impact sensor (SECOND) 18 2 Right side of floor
USB adapter unit connector A 6 15 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *2
X M receiver 20 14 Right side of t r u n k * 1
C651 1 4 Middle of floor Fuel p u m p s u b h a r n e s s
C781 10 18 R i g h t B-pillar R i g h t rear d o o r w i r e
C782 13 4 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat O D S u n i t h a r n e s s (see p a g e *3
22-47)
C782 13 8 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat w i r e * 4
C901 16 20 Right side of floor IPU c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
G602 7 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat Body g r o u n d , via floor w i r e
harness
* 1: ' 0 7 - 0 9 m o d e l s w i t h n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
* 2:'09 m o d e l
* 3: W i t h o u t s e a t h e a t e r
* 4: W i t h s e a t h e a t e r
Fuel P u m p Subharness

Fuel t a n k u n i t ( f u e l p u m p a n d f u e l 22 4 Fuel t a n k
gauge s e n d i n g unit)
C651 1 4 Middle of floor Floor w i r e harness
USB Harness

USB adapter unit connector B 5 5 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat *
* : '09 m o d e l
22-32
22-33
Rear Wire Harness (Left branch)

High m o u n t brake light 2 2 M i d d l e o f rear s h e l f
Left b a c k - u p l i g h t 10 2 B e h i n d left t a i l l i g h t
Left i n n e r t a i l l i g h t 7 . 2 B e h i n d left s i d e o f t r u n k l i d
Left license plate light 6 2 B e h i n d m i d d l e o f t r u n k lid
Left t a i l l i g h t / b r a k e l i g h t 8 4 ' B e h i n d left t a i l l i g h t
Left r e a r s i d e m a r k e r l i g h t 12 2 B e h i n d left t a i l l i g h t
Left rear s p e a k e r 13 2 Left rear s h e l f
Left rear t u r n s i g n a l l i g h t 11 3 B e h i n d left t a i l l i g h t
R i g h t license p l a t e l i g h t 4 2 Behind m i d d l e of t r u n k lid
R i g h t rear s p e a k e r 1 •2 R i g h t rear s h e l f
T r u n k lid latch s w i t c h 5 2 M i d d l e o f t r u n k lid * 1
Trunk light 3 2 M i d d l e o f rear s h e l f
T r u n k lid release a c t u a t o r / t r u n k lid 5 3 M i d d l e o f t r u n k lid *2
latch s w i t c h
C701 14 14 Left C-pillar Floor w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-30)
G701 9 Left s i d e o f t r u n k B o d y g r o u n d , v i a rear
w i r e harness
* 1: '06-08 C a n a d a m o d e l s
* 2: '06-08 U S A m o d e l s , a n d '09 m o d e l
REAR WIRE HARNESS
22-34
Rear Wire Harness (Right branch)
Connector or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location C o n n e c t s to Notes

R i g h t back-up l i g h t 5 2 Behind right taillight
R i g h t inner t a i l l i g h t 7 2 Behind r i g h t s i d e of t r u n k lid
Right taillight/brake light 6 4 Behind right taillight
R i g h t rear s i d e m a r k e r l i g h t 3 2 Behind right taillight
R i g h t rear t u r n s i g n a l l i g h t 4 3 Behind right taillight
T r u n k key c y l i n d e r s w i t c h 8 3 Middle of t r u n k lid *
* : '06-08 m o d e l s
Rear W i n d o w Defogger Ground Wire

Rear w i n d o w d e f o q q e r c o n n e c t o r (B) (—) 1 1 R i g h t C-pillar
G801 2 R i g h t C-pillar B o d y g r o u n d , v i a rear
w i n d o w defogger ground
wire
22-35
DC-DC Converter Cable

DC-DC converter terminal { + ) 1 DC-DC converter
D C - D C c o n v e r t e r t e r m i n a l (—) 2 DC-DC converter
T101 4 Left side of e n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t Under-hood fuse/relay
box
G901 3 Under right side of rear shelf Body g r o u n d , via DC-DC
converter cable
G904 5 U n d e r right side of rear shelf Body g r o u n d , via DC-DC
converter cable
22-36
I P U C o m p a r t m e n t Wire Harness

A/C compressor driver 4 4 Behind the IPU lid
BCM module 8 40 Behind the IPU lid
DC-DC c o n v e r t e r 11 4 Behind the IPU lid
Junction board connector 9 12 Behind the IPU lid
Motor control module (MCM) 7 20 Behind the IPU lid
M o t o r control m o d u l e ( M C M ) relay 1 3 4 Behind the IPU lid
M o t o r control m o d u l e ( M C M ) relay 2 2 4 Behind the IPU lid
C901 12 20 Behind the rear seat back Floor w i r e h a r n e s s
(see p a g e 22-32)
C902 (Junction connector) 5 20 Behind the rear seat back * 1
C903 (Junction connector) 6 12 Behind the rear seat back *2
C904 12 4 Behind the IPU lid IPU m o d u l e f a n
subharness
G902 1 B e h i n d t h e rear seat Body g r o u n d , via right
floor w i r e harness
G903 10 B e h i n d t h e r e a r seat Shield g r o u n d
* 1:'06-07 m o d e l s
* 2: '08-09 m o d e l s
IPU M o d u l e Fan Subharness

IPU m o d u l e f a n 14 4 B e h i n d t h e IPU lid
C904 12 4 B e h i n d t h e IPU l i d IPU c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e
harness
22-37

Roof Wire Harness
Ceiling light 3 3 Rear of roof
Front individual map light 2 3 Front of roof
Microphone 1 10 Front of roof * 1
C801 4 6 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness *2
(see page 22-24)
C801 4 20 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness * 1
(see page 22-24)
* 1: With navigation system
* 2: Without navigation system
22-38
Driver's Door Wire Harness

D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock a c t u a t o r / k n o b 1 10 Driver's door
switch/key cylinder switch
Driver's d o o r speaker 8 2 Driver's door
Driver's power w i n d o w m o t o r 9 6 Driver's d o o r
Left p o w e r m i r r o r 4 6 Driver's d o o r * 1
Left p o w e r m i r r o r 4 8 Driver's d o o r *2
Power mirror switch 3 13 Driver's d o o r
Power w i n d o w master switch 2 22 Driver's d o o r
C751 6 23 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Dashboard wire harness
(see p a g e 22-24)
C752 7 18 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h Dashboard wire harness
(see p a g e 22-24)
C753 ( J u n c t i o n c o n n e c t o r ) 5 12 Driver's d o o r
* 1: W i t h o u t m i r r o r d e f o g g e r
* 2: W i t h m i r r o r d e f o g g e r
3 4
22-39
Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness

F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s d o o r lock a c t u a t o r / 6 10 Front passenger's d o o r
knob switch
Front p a s s e n g e r ' s d o o r speaker 7 2 Front passenger's d o o r
Front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w 5 2 Front passenger's d o o r
motor
Front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w 4 8 Front passenger's d o o r
switch
Right p o w e r m i r r o r 3 6 Front passenger's d o o r * 1
Right p o w e r m i r r o r 3 8 Front passenger's d o o r *2
C761 1 23 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see p a g e 22-28)
C762 2 18 Under right side of dash Dashboard w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-28)
* 1: W i t h o u t m i r r o r d e f o g g e r
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR WIRE HARNESS
22-40
Left Rear Door Wire Harness
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location Connects t o Notes

Left rear d o o r l o c k a c t u a t o r / k n o b 1 10 Left rear d o o r
switch
Left rear p o w e r w i n d o w m o t o r 4 2 Left rear d o o r
Left rear p o w e r w i n d o w s w i t c h 2 8 Left rear d o o r
C771 3 18 Left B-pillar Floor w i r e harness
(see p a q e 22-30)
LEFT REAR D O O R W I R E H A R N E S S
22-41
Bight Rear Door Wire Harness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects t o Notes

R i g h t rear d o o r lock a c t u a t o r / k n o b 3 10 R i g h t rear d o o r
switch
Right rear p o w e r w i n d o w m o t o r 4 2 Right rear door
R i g h t rear p o w e r w i n d o w s w i t c h 2 8 Right rear d o o r
C781 1 18 R i g h t B-pillar Floor w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-32)
22-42
EDM
A / C Wire Harness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to [Motes

Air mix control motor 1 7 U n d e r left s i d e of d a s h
Blower motor 9 2 Under right side of dash
Evaporator temperature sensor 5 2 Under middle of dash
Mode control motor 7 7 Behind glove box
Power transistor 4 4 Under right side of dash
Recirculation control m o t o r 8 7 Behind glove box
Heater core t e m p e r a t u r e sensor 2 2 U n d e r left s i d e o f d a s h
h a r n e s s {see p a g e 22-18)
C505 6 24 B e h i n d left s i d e o f g l o v e b o x Dashboard w i r e harness * 1
(see p a g e 22-28)
C505 6 20 B e h i n d left s i d e o f g l o v e b o x Dashboard w i r e harness *2
(see p a g e 22-28)
* 1:'06-07 m o d e l s
* 2: '08-09 m o d e l s
A/C WIRE HARNESS
22-43
Console Subharness
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to ilYJotes
Console accessory p o w e r socket 5 2 B e h i n d rear c o n s o l e * 4
Driver's s e a t h e a t e r s w i t c h 7 6 Behind rear console *5
Front passenger's seat heater s w i t c h 4 7 Behind rear console * 5
HandsFreeLink control unit 5 28 Behind rear console *3
C551 1 24 U n d e r middle o f d a s h Dashboard w i r e harness *2
(see p a g e 22-26)
C601 2 2 Under middle of dash Floor w i r e harness * 1
(see p a g e 22-30)
C601 2 13 Under middle of dash Floor w i r e harness *2
(see p a g e 22-30)
* 1: '06-08 m o d e l s
* 2: ' 0 9 m o d e l
* 3: ' 0 9 m o d e l w i t h n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
* 4: ' 0 6 - 0 8 m o d e l s , a n d '09 m o d e l w i t h o u t n a v i g a t i o n s y s t e m
USB Subharness

USB jack 6 5 Behind rear c o n s o l e *
C671 3 5 Under middle of dash U S B h a r n e s s (see p a g e *
22-30)
* : '09 m o d e l
CONSOLESUBHARNESS
22-44
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Harness (Without seat heater)

D r i v e r ' s seat p o s i t i o n s e n s o r 1 2 I n s i d e o f d r i v e r ' s seat
C602 2 2 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat Floor wire harness
(see p a g e 22-30)
22-45
Driver's Seat Wire Harness (With seat heater)
C o n n e c t o r or T e r m i n a l Ref ' Cavities Location Connects to Notes

D r i v e r ' s seat h e a t e r 2 3 Under driver's seat
D r i v e r ' s seat h e a t e r r e l a y ( h i g h ) 5 4 Under driver's seat
D r i v e r ' s seat h e a t e r r e l a y ( l o w ) 6 5 Under driver's seat
C602 3 8 Under driver's seat Floor w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-30)
C604 4 2 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat D r i v e r ' s seat p o s i t i o n
sensor harness
Driver's Seat Position Sensor Harness (With seat heater)

D r i v e r ' s seat p o s i t i o n s e n s o r 1 2 Inside o f d r i v e r ' s seat
C604 4 2 U n d e r d r i v e r ' s seat D r i v e r ' s seat w i r e
harness
DRIVER'S SEAT WIRE HARNESS
22-46
ODS Unit Harness (Without seat heater)
:
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects t o Notes
O D S unit 1 18 Left s i d e of f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Front inner seat w e i g h t sensor 3 3 R i g h t s i d e o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Front outer seat w e i g h t sensor 5 3 Left side o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Rear i n n e r s e a t w e i g h t s e n s o r 2 3 R i g h t s i d e o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Rear o u t e r s e a t w e i g h t s e n s o r 6 3 Left s i d e o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
C782 4 4 U n d e r f r o n t passenger's seat Floor w i r e harness
(see page 22-32)
22-47
Front Passenger's Seat Wire Harness (With seat heater)
Connector or T e r m i n a l Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes

Front passenger's seat h e a t e r 5 3 U n d e r f r o n t passenger's seat
Front passenger's seat h e a t e r r e l a y 10 4 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
(high)
Front passenger's seat h e a t e r r e l a y 9 5 U i . J c i r i c M . l p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
(low)
C782 6 8 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat Floor w i r e harness
(see p a g e 22-32)
C783 4 4 U n d e r f r o n t passenger's seat ODS unit harness
ODS Unit Harness (With seat heater)

F r o n t i n n e r seat w e i g h t s e n s o r 3 3 Left s i d e o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Front outer seat w e i g h t sensor 7 3 R i g h t s i d e o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
ODS unit 1 18 Left s i d e o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat-
back
Rear i n n e r s e a t w e i g h t s e n s o r 2 3 Left s i d e o f f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
Rear o u t e r s e a t w e i g h t s e n s o r 8 3 R i g h t s i d e o f p a s s e n g e r ' s seat
C783 4 4 U n d e r f r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat w i r e
harness
22-48
BODY !
Fuse/Relay Boxes J
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to

A (ELD) 21 3 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 2 2 - 1 8 )
A/C c o m p r e s s o r clutch relay 12 4
A/C condenser f a n relay 3 4
B 22 1 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
Blower m o t o r relay 2 4
C 23 2 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
D 25 8 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
D i o d e (for m a i n f a n ) 8
D i o d e (for s u b f a n ) 9
E 24 10 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
E l e c t r o n i c t h r o t t l e c o n t r o l s y s t e m (ETCS) c o n t r o l 14 4
relay
F 17 20 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
Fan c o n t r o l r e l a y 4 5
G 19 1 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
H 20 1 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
Ignition coil relay 7 4
J 16 4 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
K 18 2 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 1 13 4
PGM-FI s u b r e l a y 6 4
Power m i r r o r d e f o g g e r relay 5 5
Radiator f a n relay 15 4
Rear w i n d o w d e f o q q e r relay 1 4
T3 10 Starter cable
T101 11 DC-DC c o n v e r t e r
1 2 3 4 5 6 16 17 18 19
9 8 22 . 21
( V i e w of f r o n t s i d e ) ( V i e w of b a c k s i d e )
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)

Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal C o n n e c t s to

A (Optional connector) 8 6 Not used
C 9 4 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
D 3 2 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
E 4 42 F l o o r w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-30)
F 5 34 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
G 6 21 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
H (MICU service check connector) 7 3
J 19 4 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
K 11 8 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
M 12 10 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
M e m o r y erase signal connector socket 10
N 13 14 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
P 18 10 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
Power w i n d o w relay 1 4
Q 16 16 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
R 14 20 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
Starter cut relay 2 4
S 15 20 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
T 17 34 D a s h b o a r d w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-24)
1 2 11 12 13
•••••••••••
( V i e w of f r o n t s i d e ) ( V i e w of b a c k s i d e )
22-50
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Number Ref Terminal C o m p o n e n t ( s ) or Circuit(s) Protected
Auxiliary electric w a t e r p u m p relay 1 4 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 2 2 4 E n g i n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i r e h a r n e s s (see p a g e 22-18)
FUSE/RELAY BOX
c •
22-51
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index
Fuse Amps C o m p o n e n t ( s ) or Circuit(s) P r o t e c t e d

Number
1 100 A Battery, Power d i s t r i b u t i o n
(BAT)
70 A EPS c o n t r o l u n i t
(EPS)
2 50 A Ignition switch
(IG)
80 A * 1
N o . 5, N o . 6, N o . 7, N o . 2 7 , N o . 2 8 , N o . 2 9 , a n d N o . 31 f u s e s (in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
2
60 A *
{OPTION)
3 4
3 30 A ABS modulator-control unit* , VSA modulator-control unit*
(ABS MTR)
3 4
30 A * 3
ABS modulator-control unit' , VSA modulator-control unit*
4
40 A *
( A B S FSR)
4 50 A N o . 18, N o . 19, N o . 2 0 , a n d N o . 21 f u s e s (in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
(H/L)
40 A N o . 2 4 , N o . 25, N o . 2 6 , N o . 3 0 , N o . 3 2 , a n d N o . 3 3 f u s e s (in t h e u n d e r - d a s h f u s e / r e l a y b o x ) , P o w e r w i n d o w
(P/W) relay
5 40 A Servo unit
6 20 A A / C c o n d e n s e r f a n m o t o r (via A / C c o n d e n s e r f a n relay)
7 20 A R a d i a t o r f a n m o t o r (via r a d i a t o r f a n relay)
8 30 A N o i s e c o n d e n s e r (via r e a r w i n d o w d e f o g g e r r e l a y ) , Rear w i n d o w d e f o g g e r (via rear w i n d o w d e f o g g e r relay)
9 40 A B l o w e r m o t o r (via b l o w e r m o t o r relay)
10 10 A Hazard w a r n i n g l i g h t s w i t c h , M I C U
11 15 A A / F s e n s o r ( S e n s o r 1) (via PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 1), E V A P c a n i s t e r v e n t s h u t v a l v e (via PGM-FI m a i n relay 1),
PGM-FI s u b r e l a y , N o . 15 f u s e (in t h e U n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x )
12 15 A Brake l i g h t s , H o r n , M I C U , P C M
13 15 A Exhaust side ignition coils, PCM
14 15 A Intake s i d e i g n i t i o n c o i l s , P C M
15 7.5 A A/C condenser fan relay
16 Not used
17 Not used
18 20 A N o . 13, N o . 14 f u s e (in t h e U n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x ) , I g n i t i o n c o i l relay
19 15 A CKP s e n s o r , C M P s e n s o r , ETCS r e l a y , I n j e c t o r s , P C M , PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 1 , PGM-FI m a i n r e l a y 2
20 7.5 A A / C c o m p r e s s o r c l u t c h (via A / C c o m p r e s s o r c l u t c h relay)
21 15A P C M (via ETCS r e l a y )
22 7.5 A A u x i l i a r y electric w a t e r p u m p (via A u x i l i a r y e l e c t r i c w a t e r p u m p r e l a y ) , C e i l i n g l i g h t , C l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t (via
A u x i l i a r y electric w a t e r p u m p r e l a y ) , F r o n t i n d i v i d u a l m a p l i g h t s , T r u n k l i g h t
5
23 10 A A u d i o u n i t ' , B C M m o d u l e , Data link c o n n e c t o r (DLC), G a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e ( s p e e d o ) , G a u g e c o n t r o l
m o d u l e (tach), H a n d s F r e e L i n k c o n t r o l u n i t , I m m o b i l i z e r - k e y l e s s c o n t r o l u n i t , M I C U , M o t o r c o n t r o l m o d u l e
6
(MCM), Navigation unit*
* 1:'06-07 m o d e l s
* 2:'08-09 m o d e l s
* 3; W i t h o u t V S A
* 4:With VSA
22-52
(cont'd)
22-53
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Fuse Amps C o m p o n e n t ( s ) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
1 7.5 A Power m i r r o r switch light
2 15A P C M , Fuel p u m p (via P G M - F I m a i n r e l a y 2), I m m o b i l i z e r - k e y l e s s c o n t r o l u n i t
3 10 A DC-DC c o n v e r t e r , E L D , E V A P c a n i s t e r p u r g e v a l v e , M A F s e n s o r , P C M (via b r a k e p e d a l p o s i t i o n s w i t c h ) ,
S e c o n d a r y H 0 2 S ( s e n s o r 2)
6 7
4 7.E A A B S m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l u n i t * , EPS c o n t r o l u n i t , S e r v o u n i t , V S A m o d u l a t o r - c o n t r o l u n i t * , Y a w rate-lateral
7
acceleration sensor*
3 3
5 15A D r i v e r ' s s e a t h e a t e r (via seat h e a t e r r e l a y ) * , F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s seat h e a t e r (via seat h e a t e r r e l a y ) *
6 20 A Not used
8
7 7.5 A TPMS control unit*
8 Not used
9 7.5 A O D S unit, Passenger's airbag cutoff indicator, SRS unit
10 7.5 A B C M m o d u l e , G a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e ( s p e e d o ) , G a u g e c o n t r o l m o d u l e (tach), M I C U , O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r
1 8
( I n t e r f a c e b o x ) * , S h i f t lock s o l e n o i d , T P M S c o n t r o l u n i t *
11 10A SRS unit
12 10 A Right headlight (High beam)
13 10A Left h e a d l i g h t ( H i g h b e a m )
5
14 7.5 A A / T gear position indicator panel light, A u d i o r e m o t e switch light, A u d i o unit light* , Climate control unit,
C r u i s e c o n t r o l c o m b i n a t i o n s w i t c h l i g h t , D a s h l i g h t s b r i g h t n e s s c o n t r o l l e r l i g h t , D r i v e r ' s seat h e a t e r s w i t c h
3 9 4
light* , Hazard w a r n i n g switch light, HFL-voice control switch light* , Navigation unit* , Optional connector
1 3
(Interface b o x ) * , P a s s e n g e r ' s a i r b a g c u t o f f i n d i c a t o r l i g h t , P a s s e n g e r ' s seat heater s w i t c h l i g h t ' , V S A OFF
7
switch light*
15 7.5 A F r o n t s i d e m a k e r / p a r k i n g l i g h t s , I n n e r t a i l l i g h t s , License p l a t e l i g h t s , Rear side m a r k e r l i g h t s , T a i l l i g h t s
16 10A Right headlight (Low beam)
17 10A Left h e a d l i g h t ( L o w b e a m )
18 20 A M I C U ( + B H/L HI)
19 15A M I C U ( + B S M A L L LT)
20 Not used
21 20 A M I C U ( + B H/L LO)
22 7.5 A A/C compressor driver
23 7.5 A PCM (Starter switch signal)
24 20 A Not used
25 20 A M I C U ( + B DR LOCK)
26 20 A Power w i n d o w master switch
27 Not used
28 15A C o n s o l e a c c e s s o r y p o w e r s o c k e t (via c o n s o l e a c c e s s o r y p o w e r socket relay)
29 15A F r o n t a c c e s s o r y p o w e r s o c k e t (via f r o n t a c c e s s o r y p o w e r s o c k e t relay)
30 20 A Front passenger's p o w e r w i n d o w m o t o r
31 Not used
32 20 A Right rear p o w e r w i n d o w m o t o r
33 20 A Left rear p o w e r w i n d o w m o t o r
34 Not used
5
35 7.5 A A u d i o u n i t * , C o n s o l e a c c e s s o r y p o w e r s o c k e t r e l a y , F r o n t a c c e s s o r y p o w e r socket r e l a y , H a n d s F r e e L i n k
9 4
c o n t r o l u n i t * , I g n i t i o n key s w i t c h , M I C U , N a v i g a t i o n u n i t ' , O p t i o n a l c o n n e c t o r (Interface b o x )
36 10A A H B b u z z e r , A u x i l i a r y e l e c t r i c w a t e r p u m p r e l a y , C l i m a t e c o n t r o l u n i t , P o w e r m i r r o r s (via p o w e r m i r r o r
s w i t c h ) , S e r v o u n i t , U n d e r - h o o d f u s e / r e l a y b o x (A/C c o m p r e s s o r c l u t c h r e l a y , B l o w e r m o t o r r e l a y , C o o l i n g
2
f a n c o n t r o l r e l a y , P o w e r m i r r o r d e f o g g e r r e l a y * , R a d i a t o r f a n relay, Rear w i n d o w d e f o g g e r relay)
37 7.5 A MICU (Daytime running lights p o w e r supply)
38 30 A M I C U (IG1 W I P E R )
* 1:'06 U S A C A R L I N K
* 6: W i t h o u t V S A
* 7: W i t h V S A
* 8: ' 0 8 - 0 9 U S A m o d e l s
22-54
(cont'd)
22-55
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse/Relay box
Fuse Amps C o m p o n e n t s ) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
61 10 A IPU modulator fan (via M C M relay 2), M C M (via M C M relay 2), Servo unit
62 7.5 A BCM module (via M C M relay 1), M C M relay 1, M C M relay 2
63 15A Servo unit
F U S E / R E L A Y BOX A
•
| 82
•
| 63
•
•
22-56
BODY
Ground Distribution
Ground to Components Sndex
Ground Component or circuit grounded
G1 Battery
G2 Engine
G3 Transmission housing
G101 PCM (CVTPG 1) (2 wire)
2
G102 BCM module (2 w i r e ) * , CKP sensor, CMP sensor, EGR valve and position sensor, Exhaust side ignition
2
coils, Intake side ignition coils, Motor control module (MCM) ( L G ) (2 w i r e ) * , PCM (LG 1), PCM (LG 2),
PCM (PG 1), PCM (PG 2|, Rocker arm oil control solenoid (1 and 2), Rocker arm oil pressure switch,
Transmission range switch
Shielding between the PCM and the Knock sensor (KS)
Shielding between the PCM and the Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
Shielding between the motor control module (MCM) and the motor position sensor
G201 Right front side marker/parking light, Right front turn signal light, Right headlight (high beam), Right
headlight (low beam), Windshield washer motor, Windshield wiper motor
4
G202 ABS modulator-control unit (2 w i r e ) * , Power unit, Servo unit (3 wire), VSA modulator-control unit
5
(2 w i r e ) "
G301 A/C condenser fan motor, Auxiliary electric water p u m p , Blower motor relay, ELD, Fan control relay,
Left front side marker/parking light, Left headlight (high beam), Left headlight (low beam), Left front
turn signal light
G401 ~ Brake fluid level switch, Hood switch, MICU (PG), Power transistor, Washer fluid level switch (Canada
models) (G401 connects to G601 via under-dash fuse/relay box)
G402 EPS control unit
G403 Torque sensor
G501 Dash lights brightness controller and odometer select/reset switch, Driver's door key cylinder switch,
9
Driver's door lock knob switch, HandsFreeLink control unit* , MICU (SG), Navigation unit, VSA OFF
5
switch*
6
G 5 0 2 Data link connector (DLC), Front accessory power socket, Right power mirror defogger* , Right side
turn signal light
G503 Console accessory power socket relay, Front accessory power socket relay, Gauge control module
6
(tach), Left power mirror defogger* , Left side turn signal light, Power mirror switch (2 wire), Power
w i n d o w master switch (2 wire)
G504 Cable reel (steering wheel switches ground), Climate control unit, Front passenger's door lock knob
switch, Front passenger's door lock switch, Gauge control module (speedo), Gauge control module
1 8 3
(tach), l/F box* , Ignition key switch, Navigation unit* , TPMS control unit*
G505 7
Audio unit* , Navigation unit* 8
G506 M e m o r y erase signal (MES) connector, SRS unit (2 wire)

* 1:'06 USA CARLINK
* 2: '06-07 models
* 3: '08-09 USA models
* 4: Without VSA
* 5: With VSA
* 6: With mirror defogger
* 7: Without navigation system
* 8: With navigation system
* 9: '09 model w i t h navigation system
(cont'd)
22-57
Ground Distribution
G r o u n d t o C o m p o n e n t s Index (cont'd)
Ground Component or circuit grounded

G601 A/T gear position indicator light/Park-pin switch, Console accessory power socket, Driver's seat
6 6 6
heater* , Driver's seat heater relays* , Driver's seat heater switch* , Fuel p u m p , MICU (PG), Passenger's
6 6 6
seat heater* , Passenger's seat heater relays* , Passenger's seat heater s w i t c h * (G601 connects to
G401 via under-dash fuse/relay box)
G602 Driver's seat belt buckle switch, Front passenger's seat belt buckle switch, Left rear door lock knob
5
switch, MICU (SG), ODS unit, Right rear door lock knob switch, Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor*
G603 Noise condenser (for rear w i n d o w defogger)
G701 High mount brake light, Left back-up light, Left inner taillight, Left license plate light, Left rear side
marker light, Left taillight, Left rear turn signal light, Right back-up light, Right inner taillight, Right
license plate light, Right rear side marker light, Right taillight, Right rear turn signal light, Trunk key
3 2 4
cylinder s w i t c h * , Trunk lid latch s w i t c h * , Trunk lid release actuator/trunk lid latch s w i t c h *
G801 Rear w i n d o w defogger (—)
G901 DC-DC converter
1
G902 A/C compressor driver, BCM module {2 w i r e ) * , Intelligent power unit (IPU) module fan
G903 Shielding between the motor control module (MCM) and the motor position sensor
G904 Shielding between the DC converter and the under-hood fuse/relay box
Shielding between the DC converter and the G901
* 1:'06-07 models
* 2: '06-07 Canada models
* 3: '06-08 models
* 4; '06-08 USA models and '09 model
* 5: With VSA
* 6: With seat heater
22-58
Removal and Installation

Relay puller 07AAC-000A1A0
1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
Removal under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the under-
hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
(see page 22-62). 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
2. Remove the starter cable (A) and the DC-DC
converter cable (B) f r o m the under-hood fuse/relay 3. Do the battery terminal reconnection procedure
box. (see page 22-62).
4. Confirm that all systems work properly..
3. Remove the bottom cover f r o m the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
4 . Disconnect the connectors f r o m the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
5. Carefully remove the relays using the relay puller.
NOTE; Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the

relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
22-59
Remowal and Installation
Relay puller 07AAC-000A1 AO
1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
S R S components are located In this area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-11) and
1 under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-
dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
doing repairs or servicing. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
Remowal
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure (see page 22-62).
(see page 22-62).
4. Register the immobilizer system w i t h the HDS
2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover (see page 22-301).
(see page 20-89).
NOTE: The imoes unit is built into the MICU which
3. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the fuse side of the is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of
under-dash fuse/relay box (A). this construction, the imoes must be registered, or
the vehicle will not start.
5 . Confirm that all systems work properly.
4. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay

box away f r o m the body.
5. Disconnect the connectors f r o m the back side of the

under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-
6. Carefully remove the relays using the relay puller.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers w i l l damage the

relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
22-60
12 ¥ © l l t BmUmy
2 ¥©!'! Bstttsn? 1"©st
3. Here are the five possible battery conditions:
A battery can explode if you do not follow the • Good Battery: The battery has at'least 60 percent
proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone of its charge and requires no action.
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep • Good-Recharge: The battery condition appears to
sparks and open flames away f r o m the battery. be good, but charging is recommended and then
retest. See your battery charger's instructions t o
fully charge the battery, then recheck. Do not
Required Test Equipment charge the battery using the vehicle's alternator.
Honda Electrical System Analyzer (ED-18 Battery • Charge and Retest: The battery condition is not •
tester): T/N INBED18LLH known because its charge is too low. Recharge
the battery, then retest. See your battery's
Ordering information instructions to fully charge the battery, then
To order an Electrical System Analyzer, go to the Honda recheck. Do not charge the battery using the
Tool and Equipment catalog o n the i N , or call vehicle's alternator.
888-424-6857. • Replace Battery: The battery condition is poor.
Replace it.
Software Version • Bad Cell: There is a problem w i t h the battery.
Make sure you have the latest software in the ED-18. To Replace it.
check the version on the do this:
• Press the POWER button.

• Select Reports, then press ENTER.
• Select i Version, then press ENTER.
If you do not have the correct version, Tools Hotline at

800-346-6327.
Using the ED-18 Battery Tester
NOTE: For set up, customization, and other available

features, refer to the ED-18 user's manual.
1. Connect the leads to the, positive and negative

terminal of the battery.
2. Use the arrow keys to select the battery test, then

press enter, then f o l l o w the prompts.
NOTE: Make sure to enter the correct cold cranking

ampere rating of the battery. If the number is not
entered correctly, the result w i l l not be accurate.
22-61
12 Volt Battery
Battery Terminal Disconnection and Reconnection
Disconnection Reconnection
Some systems store data in m e m o r y that is lost w h e n Some systems store data in m e m o r y that is lost w h e n
the battery is disconnected. Do the f o l l o w i n g steps the battery is disconnected. Do the f o l l o w i n g steps to
before disconnecting the battery. restore the systems back to normal operation.
1. Make sure y o u have the anti-theft code(s) f o r the 1 . Clean the battery terminals.
audio and/or the navigation system (if equipped).
2. Test the battery (see page 22-61).
2 . If you are replacing the audio u n i t w r i t e d o w n the
audio presets (AM and FM), and the X M audio 3. Reconnect the positive cable (A) to the battery (B)
presets (if equipped), because the audio unit does first, then reconnect the negative cable (C) to the
not retain the presets after the battery is battery.
disconnected.
NOTE: Always connect the positive cable to the
3 . Make sure the ignition switch is in L O C K ( 0 ) . battery first.
2.9-5.9 N m
4 . Disconnect and isolate the negative cable f r o m the ( 0 . 3 - 0 . 6 k g f - m , 2 . 1 - 4 . 4 Ibf-ft)
battery.
NOTE: A l w a y s disconnect the negative cable f r o m

the battery first.
5. Disconnect the positive cable f r o m the battery.
4. A p p l y multipurpose grease to the terminals to

prevent corrosion.


3,500 r p m and 4,000 r p m without load (in P or N)
7. Enter the anti-theft code(s) for the audio system

and/or the navigation system (if equipped).
8. Enter the audio presets (if applicable), and enter the

X M audio presets (if equipped).
9. Set the clock (for vehicles without navigation).
22-62
Battery Removal and Installation
The battery terminal disconnection/reconnection Installation
procedure (see page 22-62) must be done before and
after doing this procedure. Some systems store data in 1. Install the battery (A), then install the battery
m e m o r y that is lost when the battery is disconnected. setting plate (B).
C
Removal

(see page 22-62).
2. Remove the t w o nuts (A) securing the battery

setting plate, then remove the battery setting plate
(B) and the battery (C).
2. Tighten the t w o nuts (C) equally until the battery is

stable.
NOTE: Do not deform the battery setting plate by

over-tightening the nuts.

(see page 22-62).
NOTE: Make sure the positive terminal and the

negative terminal are not reverse-connected.
22-63
Relays
Power Relay Test

Special Tools R e q u i r e d Normally-open type
Relay puller 07AAC-000A1A0
Check for continuity between the terminals.
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the
test listed for it. Carefully remove the relays using the • There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
relay puller. Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the and No. 2 w h e n the battery positive terminal is
relay. connected to terminal No. 4, and the battery negative
terminal is connected to terminal No. 3.
• There should be no continuity between terminals
No. 1 and No. 2 w h e n power is disconnected.
0 ©
4 2 4 2
3 1 3 1
e e
07AAC-000A1A0
Relay Test
A/C compressor clutch relay Normally-
A/C condenser fan relay open type
Auxiliary electric water p u m p
relay
Blower motor relay
Console accessory power socket
relay
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM (ETCS)
CONTROL RELAY
Front accessory power socket
relay
Ignition coil relay
Motor control module (MCM)
relay 1
Motor control module (MCM)
relay 2
PGM-FI main relay 1
PGM-FI main relay 2
PGM-FI subrelay
Power w i n d o w relay
Radiator fan relay
Rear w i n d o w defogger relay
Seat heater relay (HIGH)
Starter cut relay
Fan control relay Five-terminal
Power mirror defogger relay type
Seat heater relay (LOW)
22-64
Five-terminal type
Check for continuity between the terminals.. .
• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1

and No. 2 when the battery positive terminal is
connected t o terminal No. 5, and the battery negative
terminal is connected to terminal No. 3.
• There should be continuity between terminals No. 1
and No. 4 w h e n power is disconnected.
1 5 1 5
Ignition Switch
Test . Replacement
SRS components are located in the area. Review the SRS components are located in the area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and SRS component locations (see page 24-11), and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before precautions and procedures (see page 24-13) before
doing repairs or servicing. doing repairs or servicing.
1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure 1. Do the battery terminal disconnection procedure
2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover 2. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover
(see page 20-89), and the steering column covers (see page 20-89), and the steering column covers
3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the ignition 3. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) f r o m the ignition
switch (B). switch (B).
RED BLU 4. Remove the t w o screws and the ignition switch.
4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
switch position according to the table.
\ ^ Terminal
RED WHT BLU ORN YEL
(see page 22-62).
(ACC) (BAT) (IG1) 0G2) (ST)
Position \ ^
0 (LOCK)
1 (ACC) o -o
II ( O N )
111 ( S T A R T )
o- -o
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the

ignition switch (see page 22-66).

(see page 22-62).
22-66
Multiplex Integrated Control System
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT

Self-diagnostic F u n c t i o n , p a g e 23-342
Input Test, page 23-362
Using the HDS (Preferred method)
1. Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A t o check for "Connected u n i t s " and DTCs (see page 22-89).
2. If no DTCs are retrieved, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-91) or D (see page 22-92).
Without HDS (Use only if the HDS is unavailable)
1. Check for communication circuit problems using B-CAN System Diagnostic Test (see page 22-93).
2. Check for DTCs.
3. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DTCs in the order below.
-1. Battery voltage DTCs

-2 Internal error DTCs
~3 Loss of communication DTCs
NOTE: If the DTC B1000 is stored, troubleshoot DTC B1000 first (see page 22-98).
-4 Signal error DTCs
4. If no DTCs are retrieved, use B-CAN System Diagnostic Test Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure (see step
10 on page 22-93).
Mow to display DTCs on the gauge control module (tach)
While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller
Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on the odometer/trip meter display when the communication between
the MICU and the gauge control module (tach) is normal. To scroll through the DTCs, press the select/reset button.
i. mnn i n
u I U U U ILJ D T C d e t e c t e d (the l o w e r four digits is
a decimal number representing the DTC)
n._
- • No D T C s detected
c n j
l l ! IU All D T C s h a v e b e e n d i s p l a y e d
The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number s h o w n on the multi-information display.
MICU 10
Gauge control module 50
Climate control unit 51
HandsFreeLink control unit 94
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 96
H o w t o clear the DTC
While in Test Mode 1, press and hold d o w n the SEL/RESET switch button for more than 10 seconds.
22-68
Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems
NOTE; Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first.
Loss of Communication DTC Cross-reference Chart
When an ECU is unable to communicate w i t h the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control unit will set loss, of
communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating.
1. Find the transmitting control unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit.
B U S OFF and Internal Error Codes

DTC type Related Unit
MICU Gauge Control Climate Hands- Immobilizer-
Module Control Unit FreeLink Keyless
Control Unit Control Unit
BUS OFF B1000 B1150 B1200 B1750 B1900
ECU (CPU) Error B1001
ECU (EEPROM) Error B1002 B1152 B1202
ECU (Internal) Error 31792
Transmitting Control Message Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication DTC

Unit MICU Gauge Control Climate Control Immobilizer-
Module Unit Key I ess Control
Unit
MICU RM B1188
HLSW B1155
WIPSW B1156
MICU B1157 B1211
DOORSW B1159
DRLOCKSW B1160 B1905
Gauge Control VSP/NE B1011 B1205
Module A/T B1008 B1906
ENGTEMP B1206
ILLUMI B1207
CDS (SRS) B1032
PCM ENG B1168
A/T B1169
VSA or ABS VSA or ABS B1170
Modulator-Control
Unit
TPMS Control Unit TPMS B1173
EPS Control Unit EPS B1183
Servo Unit RBS B1184
Motor Control BATT B1185
Module (MCM)
SRS SRS B1187
22-69

NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first,
then record all DTCs, and sort t h e m by DTC type using the DTC troubleshooting index, then troubleshoot the DTC(s) in
this order.
• Battery voltage DTCs
• Internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and B1011 are retrieved,
troubleshoot B1008 first).
• Signal error DTCs
MICU
DTC Description DTC t y p e Page
B1000 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of (see page 22-98)
communication
B i o o r MICU internal error (CPU error)
1
Internal error (see page 22-100)
B1002 MICU internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error (see page 22-100)
B1008 MICU lost communication w i t h gauge control module (A/T Loss of (see page 22-101)
message) communication
B1011 MICU lost communication w i t h gauge control module (VSP/ Loss of (see page 22-101)
NE message) communication
B1026 Front passenger's door lock switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal Signal error (see page 22-118)
error
B1032 MICU lost communication w i t h SRS unit (CDS message) Signal error (see page 22-102)
B1036 IG1 line input error Signal error (see page 22-102)
B1077 Windshield wiper (As) signal error Signal error (see page 22-206)
B1078 Daytime running lights system error (Canada) Signal error (see page 22-152)
B1079 Daytime running lights system error (USA) Signal error (see page 22-152)
B1127 Driver's door key cylinder switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal error Signal error (see page 22-120)
B1128 Driver's door lock switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal error Signal error (see page 22-121)
B1129 Driver's door lock knob switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal error Signal error (see page 22-123)
B1275* Combination light switch OFF position circuit malfunction
2
Signal error (see page 22-154)
B1276* Combination light switch parking (SMALL) position circuit
2
malfunction
B1278* Headlight switch ON position circuit malfunction
2
B1279* Headlight switch DIMMER position circuit malfunction
2
B1280* Turn signal switch circuit malfunction
2
B128V Windshield wiper switch MIST position circuit malfunction
2
B1282* Windshield wiper switch INT position circuit malfunction
2
B1283* Windshield wiper switch LOW position circuit malfunction
2
B1284* Windshield wiper switch HIGH position circuit malfunction
2
* 1:'06-08 models
* 2: '07-09 models
22-70
Gauge Control Module
DTC Description DTCtype Page
communication
B1152 Gauge control module internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error (see page 22-235)
B1155 Gauge control module lost communication w i t h MICU Loss of (see page 22-235)
(Headlight switch message) communication
B1156 Gauge control module lost communication w i t h MICU (Wiper Loss of (see page 22-235)
switch message) communication
B1157 Gauge control module lost communication with MICU (MICU Loss of (see page 22-236)
B1159 Gauge control module lost communication with MICU Loss of (see page 22-235)
(DOORSW message) communication
B1160 Gauge control module lost communication with MICU Loss of (see page 22-236)
(DRLOCKSW message) communication
B1168 Gauge control module lost communication with PCM (Engine Loss of (see page 22-237)
messages) communication
B1169 Gauge control module lost communication with PCM (A/T Loss of (see page 22-237)
B1170 Gauge control module lost communication with VSA Loss of (see page 22-238)
modulator-control unit (VSA message) communication
B1173 Gauge control module lost communication with TPMS control Loss of (see page 22-239)
unit (TPMS message) communication
B1175 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending unit) circuit open Signal error (see page 22-240)
B1176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending unit) circuit short Signal error (see page 22-241)
B1177* Abnormal battery voltage Battery voltage (see page 22-242)
B1178 F-CAN communication line error Loss of (see page 22-243)
communication
B1183 Gauge control module lost communication with EPS control Loss of (see page 22-243)
unit (EPS message) communication
B1184 Gauge control module lost communication with AHB SERVO Loss of (see page 22-244)
UNIT (RBS message) communication
B1185 Gauge control module lost communication w i t h MCM (BATT Loss of (see page 22-245)
B1187 Gauge control module lost communication w i t h SRS unit Loss of (see page 22-246)
(SRS message) communication
B1188 Gauge control module lost communication w i t h MICU (RM Loss of (see page 22-235)
* : '06-08 models
(cont'd)
22-71

Climate Control Unit
DTC Description DTC t y p e Page
communication
B1202 Climate control unit i n t e r n a l prmr (EEPROM error) Internal error (see page 21-36)
B1205 Climate control unit lost communication w i t h gauge control Loss of (see page 21-36)
module (VSP/NE message) communication
B1206 Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control Loss of (see page 21-36)
module (ENGTEMP message) communication
B1207 Climate control unit lost communication w i t h gauge control Loss of (see page 21-36)
module (ILLUMI message) communication
B1209 Climate control unit lost communication w i t h MICU (MICU/ Loss of (see page 21-36)
DOORSW message) communication
B1220 Recirculation control motor circuit short Signal error (see page 21-37)
B1225 In-car temperature sensor circuit open Signal e r r c (see page 21-39)
B1226 In-car temperature sensor circuit short Signal error (see page 21-40)
B1227 Outside air temperature sensor circuit open Signal error (see page 21-41)
B1228 Outside air temperature sensor circuit short Signal error (see page 21-42)
B1229 Sunlight sensor circuit open Signal error (see page 21-43)
B1230 Sunlight sensor circuit short Signal error (see page 21-44)
B1231 Evaporator temperature sensor circuit open Signal error (see page 21-45)
B1232 Evaporator temperature sensor circuit short Signal error (see page 21-47)
B1233 Air mix control motor circuit open Signal error (see page 21-48)
B1234 Air mix control motor circuit short Signal error (see page 21-49)
B1235 Air mix control motor stuck Signal error (see page 21-50)
B1239 Mode control motor circuit open or short Signal error (see page 21-52)
B1240 Mode control motor, linkage, door malfunction Signal error (see page 21-54)
B1241 Blower motor circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 21-55)
B2967 An open in the humidity sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-59)
B2968 A short in the humidity sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-60)
B2983 Recirculation control motor, linkage, door malfunction Signal error (see page 21-63)
B2986 Recirculation control motor circuit open Signal error (see page 21-64)
B2989 A problem in the A/C compressor motor Signal error (see page 21-65)
B2990 A problem in the A/C compressor driver Signal error (see page 21-65)
B2992 An open in the thermal protector circuit Signal error (see page 21-66)
B2993 A short in the thermal protector circuit Signal error (see page 21-67)
B2995 A problem in the auxiliary electric water p u m p circuit Signal error (see page 21-68)
B2996 An open in the heater core temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-71)
B2997 A short in the heater core temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-72)
B2998 A problem in the A/C inverter driver Signal error (see page 21-73)
B2999 A problem in the A/C compressor driver valve Signal error (see page 21-73)
22-72
HandsFreeLink Control Unit
DTC Description DTC type Pag©
communication
B1775 Microphone input/output short to power/open Signal error (see page 23-350)
B1776 Microphone input/output short to ground/open Signal error (see page 23-351)
B1779 HFL switch (HFL talk/HFL back buttons) circuit open/short Signal error (see page 23-353)
B1780 HFL switch (HFL talk/HFL back buttons) circuit short Signal error (see page 23-355)
B1792 HandsFreeLink control unit internal error Internal error (see page 23-356)
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit

DTC Description DTC type Page
communication
B1905 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost communication w i t h Loss of (see page 22-287)
MICU (DRLOCKSW message) communication
B1906 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost communication w i t h Loss of (see page 22-288)
gauge control module (A/T message) communication
B1925 Ignition key switch signal input error Signal error (see page 22-289)
22-73
S f stem Description ,~
Multiplex Integrated Control S f stem
The MICU (built into the under-dash fuse/relay box) is one of the B-CAN components. The MICU controls many
systems related to the body controller area and a security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other
B-CAN connected ECUs w i t h the HDS.
Refer to each system circuit diagram for details.
:
System •- •• Function
Multiplex Control Sends the switch input signal information to the MICU and outputs the information. The
MICU controls the ECUs electric load and communication based upon the information
received the B-CAN.
On-Board Diagnosis The MICU has a gateway function which sends the results of the MICU internal diagnosis
and the B-CAN connected ECUs diagnosis to the HDS.
Self-Diagnosis Test mode 1 diagnoses the communication line between the MICU and B-CAN connected
unit. Test mode 2 checks the switch inputs connected to the MICU.
Interior Light(s) The MICU controls the interior lights ON, OFF and d i m m i n g based upon the information of
the related switches and/or the B-CAN related information.
Sleep Function The MICU has a sleep function, w h i c h it enters during the power d o w n mode.
The MICU also controls the function of these circuits:
• Entry lights control (map lights and ceiling light)

• Exterior lights control (including the daytime running lights control)
• Horn
• Interlock system
• Key-in reminder
• Keyless entry
• Lights-on reminder
• Power door locks
• Power w i n d o w key-off timer
• Seat belt reminder
• Security alarm
• Turn signal/hazard warning lights
• Wiper/washer
22-74
+
BODY
Communication Line
The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
multiple electronic control units (ECUs), B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience
related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real t i m e " functions
such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates
information f r o m B-CAN to F-CAN and f r o m F-CAN t o B-CAN.
(F-CAN)
CANH
PCM F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
CANL
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
DATA LINK CONNECTOR

SRS UNIT (B-CAN)
ABS MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT*
1
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT*

2
• YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR* 2
• EPS CONTROL UNIT

• BCM MODULE
> SERVO UNIT
• MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE (MCM)
- TPMS CONTROL UNIT*
3 IMMOBILIZER-
KEYLESS CONTROL
UNIT
CLIMATE
CONTROL
UNIT
*1: Without VSA

*2: With VSA
*3:'08-09 USA models
*4: '09 model with navigation system HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT**
• The single wire method is used between the units not requiring the communication t o move at a faster speed for
"real t i m e " functions such as fuel and emissions data.
• Using a single wire method reduces the number of the wires used on the body controller area network.
(cont'd)
22-75
Gateway Function
The gauge control module (tach) acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information, the gauge control
module translates information f r o m B-CAN to F-CAN and f r o m F-CAN to B-CAN.
CANH GND BAT

CAN H
I
5V
CPU CANH -CAN

(GATEWAY)
RTH
77T
CANL
CANL
Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function
The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the odo/trip
display on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-223). There are three types of messages as follows:
Error Code List

Error code Type of communication line(s) error
Error 1 F-CAN communication
Error 2 B-CAN communication
Error 3 UART communication
Error 12 F-CAN and B-CAN communication
Error 13 F-CAN and UART communication
Error 23 B-CAN and UART communication
Error 123 F-CAN, B-CAN and UART communication
Example: Error 1
i _ t i I J I f
22-76
Self-diagnostic Function
By connecting the HDS t o the data link connector (DLC),the HDS can retrieve and indicate the diagnostic results f r o m
the MICU via a diagnostic line called K-LINE. The K-LINE is distinguished f r o m the CAN line, and connected to the CAN
related ECUs. The MICU is a gateway between the HDS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic results
t o the HDS.
G A U G E CONTROL
M O D U L E (TACH)
CAN H CAN L B-CAN
F - C A N (500 kbps) B - C A N ( 3 3 . 3 3 kbps)
SRS UNIT MICU
IMMOBILIZER-
PCM KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
CLIMATE
EPS CONTROL
CONTROL
UNIT
UNIT
ABS HANDSFREELINK
MODULATOR- CONTROL
1
CONTROL UNIT* UNIT* 6
VSA
NAVIGATION
MODULATOR- 5
CONTROL UNIT* 2 UNIT*
YAW
RETE-LATERAL A U D I O UNIT* 4
ACCELERATION
2
SENSOR*
TPMS CONTROL
UNIT* 3
K-LINE
S E R V O UNIT
MOTOR
CONTROL
M O D U L E (MCM)
BCM MODULE
DATA LINK
*1: Without V S A CONNECTOI
*2: With V S A
*3: '08-09 U S A m o d e l s
*4: Without navigation s y s t e m
*5: W i t h navigation s y s t e m HDS
*6: '09 m o d e l w i t h navigation s y s t e m
(cont'd)
22-77
Multiplex integrated Control System
Wake-up and Sleep Function

The multiplex integrated control system has " w a k e - u p " and " s l e e p " functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
battery when the ignition switch in LOCK (0).
• In the sleep mode, the MICU stops functioning (communication and CPU control) w h e n it is not necessary for the
system to operate.
• As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode
immediately wakes up and begins to function.
• W h e n the ignition switch is turned to LOCK (0), and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay of about
40 seconds before the control unit goes f r o m the wake-up mode t o the sleep mode.
• The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or if a key is in the ignition switch.
• The draw is reduced f r o m 200 m A to less than 35 m A w h e n in the sleep mode.
NOTE; Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test (see page 22-95).
Fail-safe Function
To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed w h e n
any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal w h e n there is a CPU malfunction, and a
software fail-safe function that ignores the signal f r o m a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to
operate normally.
Hardware Fail-safe Control
Fail-safe function
W h e n a CPU problem or a abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe
mode, and each system output load is set to a pre-programmed fail-safe value.
Software Fail-safe Control
W h e n any of the data f r o m the B-CAN circuit cannot be received w i t h i n a specified time, or an unusual combination of
the data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a
pre-programmed value.
22-78
Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function
T h e M I C U m o n i t o r s t h e p o w e r s u p p l y v o l t a g e ( b a c k - u p v o l t a g e ) . If t h e v o l t a g e g o e s b e l o w 10 V, t h e M I C U s e n d s a M I C U m e s s a g e a n d w i l l n o t
s t o r e DTCs.
Input Output
MICU Battery voltage MICU*
* : MICU internal circuit
Entry Lights Control System

The MICU controls the ceiling light ON/OFF a n d d i m m i n g based u p o n input signals f r o m each s w i t c h .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y Interior light
I g n i t i o n key s w i t c h
Driver's door switch
Front passenger's door switch
Left rear d o o r s w i t c h
R i g h t rear d o o r s w i t c h
D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h (LOCK)
B-CAN K e y l e s s LOCK s i g n a l
Lighting System (Headlights, Parking Lights, Side Marker Lights, License Plate Lights, and
Taillights)
The MICU contains the relay circuits for the headlight h i g h / l o w beams and taillights, and controls the lighting system ON/OFF based u p o n input
signals f r o m the c o m b i n a t i o n light switch.
Input Output
MICU H e a d l i g h t OFF s w i t c h Headlights (low beam)
Headlight ON switch Headlights (high beam)
Dimmer switch Parking lights
C o m b i n a t i o n light switch (parking lights, side marker lights, Side marker lights
license p l a t e l i g h t s , a n d t a i l l i g h t s ) L i c e n s e plate l i g h t s
Passing switch Taillights
Daytime Running Lights

T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e e x t e r i o r l i g h t s as d a y t i m e r u n n i n g l i g h t s b a s e d u p o n i n p u t s i g n a l s f r o m e a c h s w i t c h .
Input Output
MICU H e a d l i g h t OFF s w i t c h Headlights (low beam)
Headlight ON switch Headlights (high beam)
Dimmer switch Parking lights
C o m b i n a t i o n light switch (parking lights, side marker lights, Side marker lights
license p l a t e l i g h t s , a n d t a i l l i g h t s ) License plate l i g h t s
Passing s w i t c h Taillights
B-CAN T r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e s w i t c h (P p o s i t i o n )
Parking brake switch
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Lights

T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e t u r n s i g n a l / h a z a r d w a r n i n g l i g h t s b a s e d u p o n i n p u t s i g n a l s f r o m t h e t u r n s i g n a l a n d hazard w a r n i n g s w i t c h e s .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y T u r n signal lights (left/right)
T u r n signal switch (left/right)
Hazard w a r n i n g switch
(cont'd)
22-79

Power Door Locks (Vehicle Speed Sensor)
The M I C U controls the d o o r lock actuators based u p o n B-CAN signals and input signals f r o m each s w i t c h .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y D o o r lock (LOCK)
T r u n k lid latch s w i t c h
D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
Left rear d o o r l o c k k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
R i g h t rear d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
T r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e s w i t c h (P p o s i t i o n )
B-CAN Vehicle speed pulse
Engine RPM
Power Door Locks (Normally LOCK/UNLOCK Operation)

T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e d o o r lock a c t u a t o r s b a s e d u p o n i n p u t s i g n a l s f r o m e a c h s w i t c h .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y D o o r lock actuator (LOCK/UNLOCK)
I g n i t i o n key s w i t c h D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock a c t u a t o r ( U N L O C K )
D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h (LOCK)
D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock s w i t c h ( L O C K / U N L O C K )
D r i v e r ' s d o o r key c y l i n d e r s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s d o o r lock s w i t c h ( L O C K / U N L O C K )
Door Lock Response Operation

T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e d o o r lock a c t u a t o r s b a s e d u p o n B - C A N s i g n a l s .
Input Output
B-CAN D o o r lock s i g n a l s D o o r lock a c t u a t o r ( L O C K / U N L O C K )
D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock a c t u a t o r ( U N L O C K )
T r u n k l i d release a c t u a t o r
Power Windows Key-off Operation

The M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e p o w e r w i n d o w s key-off o p e r a t i o n based u p o n input signals f r o m each s w i t c h .
Input Output .
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y Power w i n d o w key-off t i m e r
I g n i t i o n key s w i t c h
22-80
Keyless Entry System
T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e d o o r lock a c t u a t o r s b a s e d u p o n B - C A N s i g n a l s a n d i n p u t s i g n a l s f r o m e a c h s w i t c h .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y D o o r lock a c t u a t o r ( L O C K / U N L O C K )
I g n i t i o n key s w i t c h Driver's d o o r lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Driver's d o o r switch T r u n k lid release a c t u a t o r
Driver's d o o r lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's d o o r lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s d o o r lock s w i t c h ( L O C K / U N L O C K )
Keyless PANIC
T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e keyless P A N I C b a s e d u p o n B - C A N s i g n a l s .
Input Output
B-CAN Keyless P A N I C s i g n a l ( a c t i o n , h e a d l i g h t l o w , p a r k i n g l i g h t Headlights (low beam)
and horn) Parking l i g h t s
Side marker lights
License p l a t e l i g h t s
Taillights
Horn
Security Alarm System

The MICU controls the lighting s y s t e m and h o r n based u p o n B-CAN signals and input signals f r o m each s w i t c h .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y Horn
I g n i t i o n key s w i t c h Headlights
Audio switch Parking l i g h t s
Driver's door switch Side marker lights
Front passenger's door switch License p l a t e l i g h t s
Left rear d o o r s w i t c h Taillights
Driver's d o o r lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
F r o n t p a s s e n g e r ' s d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
Left rear d o o r l o c k k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
R i g h t rear d o o r l o c k k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
T r u n k key c y l i n d e r s w i t c h
Hood switch
D o o r lock s i g n a l
(cont'd)
22-81

Key-in Reminder
T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e d o o r lock a c t u a t o r s b a s e d u p o n i g n i t i o n key s w i t c h , d r i v e r ' s d o o r s w i t c h , a n d d r i v e r ' s d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h s i g n a l s .
Output
I | input
| MICU | I g n i t i o n key s w i t c h D o o r lock a c t u a t o r ( L O C K / U N L O C K )
1 Driver's door switch D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock a c t u a t o r ( U N L O C K )
1 D r i v e r ' s d o o r lock k n o b s w i t c h ( U N L O C K )
1
K e y Interlock
T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e key i n t e r l o c k s o l e n o i d b a s e d u p o n I G 1 , t r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e s w i t c h , a n d p a r k - p i n s w i t c h s i g n a l s .
Input Output
MICU Ignition switch ACC Key interlock solenoid
T r a n s m i s s i o n r a n g e s w i t c h (P p o s i t i o n )
Park-pin switch
Answer Back Response Operation

The MICU controls t h e lighting s y s t e m a n d horn based u p o n B-CAN signals.
Input Output
B-CAN A n s w e r back signals (headlight l o w , h o r n , parking lights) Horn
Headlights
Parking lights
Side marker lights
License p l a t e l i g h t s
Taillights
Wiper/Washer
T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e w i p e r m o t o r a n d t h e w a s h e r m o t o r b a s e d u p o n IG1 a n d w i p e r / w a s h e r s w i t c h s i g n a l s .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y Wiper motor
W i p e r s w i t c h (INT a n d LO) Washer motor
W i p e r s w i t c h (LO a n d HI)
W i p e r switch (MIST)
Washer switch
Wiper intermittent volume
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)

T h e M I C U c o n t r o l s t h e d o o r lock a c t u a t o r s b a s e d u p o n IG 1 a n d B-CAN s i g n a l s .
Input Output
MICU IG1 p o w e r s u p p l y D o o r lock ( L O C K / U N L O C K )
B-CAN S R S s i g n a l ( f r o n t , s i d e a n d rear)
22-82
HDS inputs and Commands
Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while
monitoring the Data List. This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List.
Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not u n c o m m o n to see system
function tests that are not supported.
Make sure that the most current software is loaded.
Input:
System Menu Data List Indication Data List and Operation T i m e
Lighting Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Hazard switch OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (High Beam) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING) - OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF/ON
Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Ignition Key Cylinder Light Command OFF/ON
Interior Light Command OFF/ON
Left Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Right Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Fog Light C o m m a n d OFF/ON
DRL Command OFF/ON
(cont'd)
22-83
Input:
System Menu Data List Indication Data List and Operation Time
Gauge . Cruise Control Main Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Set Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Resume Switch OFF/ON
Washer Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
VSA/TCS Off Switch OFF/ON
Gauge Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
Parking Brake Switch OFF/ON
Brake Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Illumination Volume Plus Switch OFF/ON
Illumination Volume Minus Switch OFF/ON
Km/h m p h Select Switch OFF/ON
Fuel Sending Unit Input 1 deg
Fuel Sending Unit Input 2 V
VSA/TCS Active Indicator OFF/ON
VSA/TCS Indicator (Warning) OFF/ON
ABS Indicator OFF/ON
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake OFF/ON
Distribution)
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator OFF/ON
MIL Indicator OFF/ON
Washer Fluid Level Indicator (Canada) OFF/ON
DRL Indicator OFF/ON
Low Oil Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
Charging System Indicator OFF/ON
Cruise Main Switch ON Indicator OFF/ON
Maintenance Minder Indicator OFF/ON
High Beam Indicator OFF/ON
Parking Light ON Indicator OFF/ON
Low Fuel Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Security Indicator OFF/ON
Fog Light Indicate OFF/ON
Seat Belt Indicator OFF/ON
IMA Auto-stop Indicator OFF/ON
IMA Indicator OFF/ON
IMA Battery Level xxx (Number of segment to turn on)
IMA Assist/Charge Indicator A/B/C (Neutral and Charge/Neutral/Neutral
and Assist)
Speed Indicator (km/h) 0—249 km/h, over 250 km/h, Fail
Speed Indicator (mph) 0—154 m p h , over 155 m p h , Fail
Driver's Seat Belt Buckle Switch OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (R) OFF/ON
A/T Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
Low Tire Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
TPMS Indicator OFF/ON
22-84
Input:
S f stem Menu Data List Indication Data List and Operation Time
Door Locks Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Sw. OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Wipers Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch.(HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (INT) OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Intermittent Wiper Dwell Timer 0 . 0 - 1 . 0 kQ/OPEN
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
A/C A/C Pressure Switch/Thermal Protector OFF/ON
(cont'd)
22-85
Input:
System M e n u Data List Indication Data List and Operation Time
Security Ignition Key Cylinder Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
r
Front Passenêf'? Doo Switch Opp/QjVJ
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
(UNLOCK)
(UNLOCK)
(UNLOCK)
Trunk Key Cylinder (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Radio Switch OFF/ON
Hazard Switch OFF/ON
Hood Switch OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Look Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Look Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Look Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Look Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Security Hazard Signal C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Headlight C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Parking Light C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Horn C o m m a n d OFF/ON
22-86
BODY
Input:
S f s t e m Menu Data List Indication Data List and Operation Time

Keyless Driver's' Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Trunk Lid/Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
(UNLOCK)
(UNLOCK)
(UNLOCK)
Trunk Key Cylinder (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
(UNLOCK)
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK C o m m a n d OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
1 Trunk Lid Release Command OFF/ON
(cont'd)
22-87

Output:
System Menu Data List Indication Data List and Operation Time
Gauge Self Diagnostic Test
Lighting Interior Light C o m m a n d Illuminate for 30 seconds
Hazard flasher Blinks turn signal (left and right) for 15
seconds
Left Turn Signal C o m m a n d Blink for 5 seconds
Right Turn Signal C o m m a n d Blink for 5 seconds
Headlight C o m m a n d Operates head light (low) for 15 seconds
Headlight HIGH Beam C o m m a n d Operates head light (high) for 15 seconds
Fog Light Operates a relay of front fog light for 15
seconds
Parking Light C o m m a n d Operates small light for 15 seconds
Door Locks LOCK all doors Outputs LOCK signal 1 time (0.6 sec) to all
door
UNLOCK driver's side door Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (0.6 sec) to
driver side door
UNLOCK all doors Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (0.6 sec) to
all door
Keyless Trunk Lid/Tailgate Release C o m m a n d Unlock trunk
Security Horn C o m m a n d Operates horn for 1 second
Wipers Windshield Wiper Motor LOW C o m m a n d Operates front wiper for 5 seconds (low
speed)
Windshield Wiper Motor HIGH C o m m a n d Operates front wiper for 5 seconds (high
speed)
Windshield Washer C o m m a n d Operates front washer for 5 seconds
22-88
I - +
| BODY
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A

Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM 3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u , select UNIT
(see page 1 1 - 3 ) or F-CAN loss of communication errors INFORMATION, and then select CONNECTED UNIT
f i r s t then do this diagnosis first if the s y m p t o m is listed to see if the following control units are
related to the B-CAN system. communicating w i t h the HDS.
NOTE: Always cycle the ignition switch w i t h i n • MICU

3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting • Gauge control module
procedures in this section. • Climate control unit
• Immobilizer-keyless control unit
1. Compare the s y m p t o m with this list of B-CAN • HandsFreeLink control unit
related systems:
NOTE:
• Gauge control module • If a unit is communicating w i t h the HDS, DETECT
• Exterior lights will be displayed.
• Turn signals • If a unit is not communicating or the vehicle is
• Entry light control not equipped, " N o t Available" will be displayed.
• Interior lights
• Door-open and trunk-open indicators Are all control units communicating with the HDS?
• Horns (security and panic)
• Chimes (key-in, seat belt, lights-on, and parking YES — G o t o step 4.
brake)
• Power w i n d o w NO—If any of the control units are not
• Wiper/washer communicating, g o t o B-CAN System Diagnosis
• Security Test Mode B (see page 22-90). If all units are not
• Keyless entry communicating or only the MICU is communicating,
• Power door locks go to DTC B1000 troubleshooting (see page 22-98).
• Climate control
• Key interlock
• Dash light brightness
Is the symptom related to the B-CAN system?
YES — G o t o step 2.
NO—Go to the system troubleshooting for the

system with the s y m p t o m . •
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A),

then turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
(cont'd)
22-89
Troubleshooting - B-CAN S f stem Troubleshooting - B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (cont'd) Diagnosis Test Mode B
4. Select the system that has the problem f r o m the Do this diagnosis if any of the control units are not
BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u , then select DTCs. communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS)
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Are any DTCs indicated? (see page 22-89).
Y E S — G o t o step 5. 1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the
s y m p t o m f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
NO—If the problem is related to one of the
f o l l o w i n g items, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis 2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of
Test Mode C (see page 22-91) if the system does communication DTCs.
not stop or turn off. Go to test mode D (see page
22-92) if the system does not run or turn o n . Are any loss of communication DTCs indicated?
• Exterior lights YES—Goto step 3.

• Turn signals
° Entry light control NO —Replace the MICU.H
• Interior lights
• Horns (security and panic) 3. Do the input test for the unit not communicating
• Wiper/washer w i t h the HDS.
If the problem is related to one of the following Unit not communicating

items, go to the troubleshooting for that individual MICU (see page 22-106)
system. • Gauge control module (see page 22-248)
Climate control unit (see page 21-32)
• Gauge control module Immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
• Door-open and trunk-open indicators 22-299)
• Chimes (key-in, parking brake, seat belt and HandsFreeLink control unit (see page 23-362)
lights-on)
• Security
• Keyless entry
• Climate control
• Key interlock
• Dash light brightness
• Audio system
• Navigation
• HandsFreeLink
5. Record all DTCs, and sort t h e m by DTC type.
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order:
• Battery voltage DTCs.

• Internal error DTCs.
• Loss of communication DTCs. Begin
troubleshooting w i t h the lowest number first
(Example: if DTC B1008 and B1011 are retrieved,
begin by troubleshooting B1008).
• Signal error DTCs.
22-90
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by 5. Check the relay, if applicable, then check for a short
the B-CAN system does not stop or turn off. in the wire between the relay and the component,
the relay and control unit, or the component and
NOTE: control unit.
• If the component does not turn on, go to B-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-92). Are the relay and the wire harness OK?
• See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a
list of input and output devices and the control units YES—Replace the control unit that controls the
that monitor the inputs and control the output devices component that w i l l not turn OFF. •
(see page 22-83).
• Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds NO—Replace the relay or repair the wire
w h e n prompted in the DTC troubleshooting harness. •
procedures in this section.
6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the w i r e
1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu between the switch and the control unit that
f r o m the HDS. monitors the switch.
Are any DTCs indicated? Are the switch and wire harness OK?
Y E S — G o to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A Y E S —Replace the control unit that monitors the
(see page 22-89). • switch. •
N O — G o t o step 2. NO—Replace the switch or repair the wire

harness. •
2. Turn off the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component.
3. Select DATA LIST f r o m the TEST MODE m e n u , and

check the input of the switch that controls the
component.
Does the HDS indicate the switch is OFF?
4. In the DATA LIST, check the output signal of the

malfunctioning component.
Is the output signal OFF?
NO—Replace the control unit that controls the

device that w i l l not turn OFF (see page 22-83). •
22-91
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D
Do this diagnosis if a component that is controlled by 6. Do the function test for the malfunctioning
the B-CAN system does not run or come on. component.
NOTE; Does the output device pass the function test?

• If the component does not turn off or stop, go to P-
CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-91). Y E S - G o t o step 7.
• See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a
list of input and output devices and the control units NO—Replace the component. •
that monitor the inputs and control the output devices
(see page 22-83). 7. W i t h the malfunctioning output device connected,
• Always cycle the ignition switch w i t h i n 3 seconds connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting output device and body ground on the wire that the
procedures in this section. control unit uses to control the output device circuit.
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device. 8. Select MISC. TEST f r o m the TEST MODE menu,
and do the forced operation test of the
Is the fuse OK? malfunctioning component.
Y E S — G o t o step 2. Is there a change in voltage (12 V to 0 V or

0 V to 12 V)?
NO—Replace the fuse and recheck. •
YES—Inspect the ground for the component. If OK,
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu replace the component. •
f r o m the HDS.
NO—Replace the control unit that controls the
Are any DTCs indicated ? malfunctioning component. •
Y E S — G o t o B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A 9. Select DATA LIST f r o m the TEST MODE menu, and
(see page 22-89). • make sure the switch signal input for the
malfunctioning system indicates a change w h e n
N O — G o t o step 3. operated.
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the Does the switch input indicate ON when the switch
malfunctioning component. is ON?
4. Select DATA LIST f r o m the TEST MODE m e n u , and YES—Replace the control unit that controls the
check output signal for the malfunctioning malfunctioning c o m p o n e n t . •
component.
Is there an output signal?
10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
Y E S — G o t o step 5. check for an open or a short in the wire between
the switch and the control unit that monitors it.
Is the switch and the wire harness OK ?
5. Check the relay and g r o u n d , then check for an open
or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning YES—Replace the control unit that monitors the
component. switch. •
Are the relay and circuit OK? NO—Replace the switch or repair the wire
harness. •
NO—Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit. B
22-92
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
{without the HDS! '
Special Tools Required 6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge
MPCS (MCIC) service connector 07WAZ-001010A control module (tach) odometer/trip meter display
while still in Test Mode 1. Push the SEL/RESET
Test Mode 1 switch button to display the next code. After you
get to the last code, the display shows END. If no
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM or DTCs are stored, the display will read NO.
F-CAN loss of communication errors first (see page
11-3), then do this diagnosis if the HDS is not available. Are any DTCs indicated?
1. Check the No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood YES—Goto step 7.

fuse/relay box and No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box. N O — G o t o step 10.
Are the fuses OK ? 7. Record all DTCs and sort t h e m .
YES—Goto step2. 8. Troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
NO—Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse. M • Battery voltage DTCs
• Internal error DTCs
2. Remove the left kick panel (see page 20-54). • Loss of communication DTCs (begin w i t h the
lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II), and move the B1011 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1008 first)
ceiling light switch to the middle (door) position. • Signal error DTCs
4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the 9. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the SEL/
MICU service check connector (B) in the under- RESET switch button for about 10 seconds. You will
dash fuse/relay box. hear a beep to confirm the codes have been cleared.
Operate the devices that failed, and recheck for
codes.
Test Mode 2
10. Remove the MPCS service connector f r o m the

under-dash fuse/relay box socket for
5—10 seconds, then re-insert it to enter Mode 2.
When the system enters Mode 2, the ceiling light
will flash t w o times quickly and then go off.
NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for

too short or too long of a t i m e , or the ignition
switch is turned to LOCK (0), the system will return
to Test Mode 1.
11. The following tables list the circuits that can be

5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the ceiling light. When checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is
the ceiling light flashes quickly once, and then go most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is
off, the system is in Test Mode 1. OK, the ceiling light will blink once. If the circuit is
faulty, there will be no indication.
(cont/d)
22-93
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2

(without the HDS) (cont'd)
MICU Does the ceiling light work properly in all switch
Item positions?
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK) YES—Go to function and input test for the system
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) related to the failure •
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch * (UNLOCK) NO—Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty
Driver's door key cylinder switch * (LOCK) switch. •
Front passenger's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch
(UNLOCK) _
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
Right rear door switch (OPEN)
Trunk lid latch switch (OPEN)
Trunk key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Audio switch
Windshield wiper HI/LO switch
Windshield wiper INT/LO switch
Windshield wiper MIST switch
Windshield washer switch (ON)
Windshield wiper intermittent dwell t i m e
controller
Turn signal switch (LEFT)
Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Headlight switch (ON)
Headlight switch (OFF)
Lighting switch (ON)
Dimmer switch (ON)
Passing switch (ON)
Hood switch (OPEN)
Transmission range switch (P)
Brake switch (ON)
Ignition key cylinder switch
Windshield wiper motor park switch
A/C pressure switch/thermal protector
* A second key is necessary to check the key
cylinder inputs.
Be sure to rotate the key cylinder switch t w o
times to each position (lock and lock, unlock and
unlock) to ensure the door lock knob switch is in
the appropriate position.
22-94
I
L
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test
1. Shift to the sleep mode:
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and remove the key. If the MICU receives no signals f r o m the inputs listed
below, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds.
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)

Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Trunk lid latch switch (Trunk lid closed)
Hazard warning switch (OFF)
2. Confirm the sleep mode:

Measure the frequency on the B-CAN communication line (PNK wires); there should be 0 Hz w h e n the system is in
the sleep mode. Check the parasitic draw at the battery while shifting into the sleep mode; amperage should
change f r o m about 200 m A to less than 35 mA.
3. Shift to the wake up mode:

W h e n the ignition switch is turned to ON (II), the MICU, gauge control module, immobilizer-keyless control unit,
and PCM wake up at the same time without " t a l k i n g " to each other through the communication lines. When any
switch in the multiplex integrated control system is turned o n , it wakes up its related control unit which, in turn,
wakes up the other units. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the following table for the switch most related
to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same
time. In the table below, the control unit is f o l l o w e d by a list of the switches and input signals that can wake it up.
Door switches (door open)

Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch
Right rear door lock knob switch
Trunk key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)*
Trunk lid latch switch (Trunk lid open)
Hood switch (with security) (hood open)
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, Dimmer, Passing ON)
Ignition key switch (key inserted)
* : '06-08 models
22-95
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
No. 1 (BAT} (100 A) No.2(IG) (50 A} No. 10 (7.5 A) IG1 Q9

«cr\jD—- - WHT- —CTVJ3—
G2
LTBLU
Y
CEILING
LIGHT
PNK
*1
K4
No. 35 (7.5 A) No. 23 (10 A)
FUSE FUSE
(UNDER-DASH (UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX) FUSE/RELAY BOX)
SG PG K-LINE
PUR WHT
1
I-
VBU
115
ACC
T34 E33 F28
HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL UNIT
MICU
SERVICE GND B-CAN
CHECK
CONNECTOR
I
BLK BLK BLK LTBLU LTBLU LTBLU BLK PNK
A A A
VSA or ABS EPS CONTROL • AUDIO UNrr
MODULATOR- UNIT • NAVIGATION UNIT
CONTROL UNIT > DATA LINK CONNECTOR
• IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
> SRS UNIT
2
- TPMS CONTROL UNIT* » (B-CAN) j •
A A A -LL
G501 G401 G601 G501
22-96
BODY
*1: '09 model with navigation system

•2; '08-09 USA models
*3: With VSA
: CAN line
• ; Other communication line
WHT

No. 2 (15 A) FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
LCD DISPLAY
(DTC CODE DISPLAY)
No. 36 (10 A) FUSE
IL
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
1
LTGRN
F-CAN TRANSCEIVER VBU
B-CAN
A3 TRANSCEIVER
CANH CANL
IG2 IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
CLIMATE 1
2.6 k o 1
CONTROL UNIT
3-CAN GND +—w»—# B-CAN
I A32 A5 8 21 11 I 19
l i
l
PNK
V V
VSA or ABS MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
SRS UNIT
DATA LINK CONNECTOR
EPS CONTROL UNIT
SERVO UNIT
BCM MODULE BRN/YEL
MOTOR CONTROL
MODULE (MCM)
PCM
TPMS CONTROL UNIT* 2
YAW RATE-LATERAL
(B-CAN) (B-CAN) ACCELERATION SENSOR* 3
- PNK • - ® - - PNK-
-9r ~9r _0_

G102
G504 G504
22-97
Multiplex integrated Control System
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1000: Communication Bus Line Error 6. T u r n the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
(BUS-OFF)
7. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each
NOTE: If y o u are trobleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure control unit in the table one at a time. Clear the DTC,
to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis then recheck for DTCs after each unit is
Test Mode A (see page 22-89). disconnected.
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS. Control Unit Connector

Gauge control module (tach) 36P connector
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back Immobilizer-keyless control 7P connector
to ON (II). unit
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. Climate control unit 32P connector
4. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is DTC B1000 indicated with each individual unit
disconnected?
Is DTC B1000 indicated?
YES—Go to step 5.
NO—Check the power and grounds to the control
NO—Intermittent failure, the communication bus unit that was disconnected when B1000 did not
line is OK at this t i m e . Check for loose or poor reset. If OK, replace the control u n i t . H
connections, or worn/shorted wires. If the
connections are g o o d , check the battery condition
(see page 22-61) and the charging system. •
Are DTCs B1008, B1011, and B1032 also

indicated?
' YES—Go to step 6.
NO—Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box (see page 22-60). •
22-98
BODY ! |
L .^5fcRECZZZ±—J
8. Disconnect all the appropriate connectors for each 11. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/
of the units in the table. relay box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 6 and
body g r o u n d .
Control U n i t Appropriate
Connector U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R Q (16P)
Gauge control module (tach) 36P connector
Immobilizer-keyless control 7P connector B - C A N (PNK)
unit
HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Climate control unit 32P connector 15
9 10 11 12 13 1 4 16
9. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q

(16P).
10. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay

box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 6 and body W i r e side of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
ground.
U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R Q (ISP)
B - C A N (PNK) YES—Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box

(see page 22-60). •
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NO—Repair a short to power in the wire between
the under-dash fuse/relay box and the affected
control u n i t . i l
YES—Repair a short to ground in the wire between

the under-dash fuse/relay box and the affected
control unit. •
22-99

DTC B1001: MICU (CPU) Error ('06-08 models) DTC Bl0§2; MICU (EEPROM) Error
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System sure to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-89). Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-89).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
Is DTC B1001 Indicated? Is DTC B1002 indicated?
YES—Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ YES—Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box (see page 22-60). • relay box (see page 22-60). •
NO—Intermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this NO—Intermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this
time. Check for loose or poor connections. If the time. Check for loose or poor connections. If the
connections are g o o d , check the battery condition connections are g o o d , check the battery condition
(see page 22-61) and the charging system. • (see page 22-61) and the charging system. •
22-100
j~\ r~\y$
- I •
BODY \
DTC B1008: MICU Lost Communication with DTC B1011: MICU Lost Communication with
Gauge Control Module (A/T Message) Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE Message)
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Is DTC B1008 indicated? Is DTC B1011 indicated?
YES—Goto step 5. YES—Goto step 5.
NO—Intermittent failure, the gauge control module NO—Intermittent failure, the gauge control module
is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the gauge control module (tach) 36P connections at the gauge control module (tach) 36P
connector and at under-dash fuse/relay box connector and at under-dash fuse/relay box
connector Q (16P). If the connections are good, connector Q (16P). If the connections are g o o d ,
check the battery condition (see page 22-61) and check the battery condition (see page 22-61) and
the charging system. M the charging system. •
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Are DTCs B1011 and B1032 also indicated with Are DTCs B1008 and B1032 also indicated with
DTCB1008? DTCB1011?
YES—Check for an open in the communication YES—Check for an open in the communication
circuit between the MICU and the gauge control circuit between the MICU and the gauge control
module (tach). If the circuit is bad, repair the module (tach). If the circuit is bad, repair the
open.B open.B
NO—Go to the gauge control module (tach) input NO—Go to the gauge control module (tach) input
test (see page 22-248). • test (see page 2 2 - 2 4 8 ) . •
22-101

DTC B1032: MICU Lost Communication with DTC B1036: IG1 Line Input Error
SRS Unit (CDS Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
NOTE: If y o u are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System
sure to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-89).
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-89).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back to ON (II).
to ON (II).
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
NO—Intermittent failure, the gauge control module time. Check for loose or poor connection at the
is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor gauge control module (tach) 36P connector, and at
connections at the gauge control module (tach) 36P under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P). If the
connector, and at under-dash fuse/relay box connections are good, check the battery condition
connector Q (16P). If the connections are g o o d , (see page 22-61) and the charging system, fl
check the battery condition (see page 22-61) and
the charging s y s t e m . • 5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS.
5. Check for DTCs w i t h the HDS. Is DTC B1008 indicated with DTC B1036?
Are DTCs B1008 and B1011 also indicated with YES—Troubleshoot the indicated DTC.fl
DTCB1032?
YES—Check for an open in the communication
circuit between the MICU and the gauge control 6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
module (tach). If the circuit is bad, repair the
open.B 7. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
NO—Do the gauge control module (tach) input test

(see page 22-248). B
22-102
8. Measure the voltage between gauge control DTC B1150: Communication Bus Line Error
module (tach) 36P connector terminal No. 17 and (BUS-OFF)
body ground.
sure to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System
IG1 ( B R N ) 1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.

, l / l / l 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 8J9ho|l1 7|13 114 115 116 11T 118 |
119 | 20 | 2, \/\/\/\A/\ W | » 129 | / ] / M a. 1 / 1 / 1 / 2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back
to ON (II).
X 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.

Are DTCs B1000, B1008, B1011, B1032, and or
B1900 also indicated with DTC B1150?
YES—Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-98). •
YES—Faulty MICU; substitute a known-good
under-dash fuse/relay box (see page 22-60), and NO—If only DTC B1150 is present, replace the
recheck. H gauge control module (tach) assembly. If no DTCs
are present, it's an intermittent failure, the system
NO—Check No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an open connections at the gauge control module (tach) 36P
in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box connector, and at under-dash fuse/relay box
and the gauge control module (tach), or repair a connector Q ( 1 6 P ) . H
short in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay
box and the gauge control module ( t a c h ) . H
22-103

DTC B1200: Communication Bus Line Error DTC B1750: Communication Bus Line Error
(BUS-OFF) (BUS-OFF)
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.
Are DTCs B1000, B1008, B1011, B1032, and or Are DTCs B1000, B1008, B1011, B1032, and or
B1900 also Indicated with DTC B1200? B1900 also indicated with DTCB1750?
YES—Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-98). • YES—Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-98). •
NO—If only DTC B1200 is present, replace the NO—If only DTC B1750 is present, replace the
climate control unit. If no DTCs are present, it's an HandsFreeLink control unit. If no DTCs are present,
intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time. it's an intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Check for loose or poor connections at the climate t i m e . Check for loose or poor connections at the
control unit 32P connector, and at under-dash fuse/ HandsFreeLink control unit 28P connector, and at
relay box connector Q (16P).Hi under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P).B
22-104
V
DTC B1900: Communication Bus Line Error

(BUS-OFF)

sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.

to ON (II).
Are DTCs B1000, B1008, B1011, and B1032 also

indicated with DTC B1900?
YES—Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-98). •
NO—If only DTC B1900 is present, replace the

immobilizer-keyless control unit. If no DTCs are
present, it's an intermittent failure, the system is
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the immobilizer control unit IP
connector, and at under-dash fuse/relay box
connector Q(16P).B
22-1
MICU Input Test
1. Before testing the multiplex integrated control system, troubleshoot the system using B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-89).
2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is b l o w n , replace it and go to step 3.
3. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are shown f r o m wire side of female terminals.
U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R E (42P)
BLK
U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R F (34P)
1/ 3
i—' i
5/ / n 9 / 11 / 7 14 15 16 17
n
C
18 19
20 / 22 /4 24 258 26 27 28 29 r 30 31 32 33/
C 1
J
BLK
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR G (21P)
ORN
TT
2 3 5 6 7
ri
1
r/ / 1 1 12 13 / •15 16 17 18 19 20
XL
22-106
U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R K (8P)
7 2
1=1 7
//
LO
4 8
U V I— L
U N D E R - D A S H F U S E / R E L A Y B O X C O N N E C T O R T (34P)
BLK
Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are b e n t loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system.
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 5.
MICU Input Test (cont'd)

5. W i t h the connector still disconnected, do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test; Desired result Possible cause if desired
result is not obtained
G2 ORN Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
• A n open in the wire
K4 PNK Under all conditions Attach to g r o u n d : • Blown No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
The ceiling light should come under-hood fuse/relay box
on. • Blown bulb(s)
• Faulty ceiling light
9
An open in the wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and do these input tests at the following connectors.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if desired
result is not obtained
E6 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: Poor ground (G602)
There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
E33 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage t o ground: • Poor ground (G601)
F20 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G401)
T34 BLK Under all conditions Measure the voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
There should be less than 0.5 V. * An open in the wire
22-108
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System • Jans
N A V I G A T I O N U N I T (With navigation s y s t e m ) or
A U D I O UNIT ( W i t h o u t n a v i g a t i o n system)
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
(With built-in receiver)
Symptom Troubleshooting,
page 22-125
Replacement,
page 22-302

(SPEEDO)
HOOD SWITCH
Test, page 22-138 MICU
(Built i n t o t h e u n d e r -
d a s h f u s e / r e l a y box)
Input Test, page 22-130
HORN HEADLIGHTS
Test/Replacement, Replacement, page 22-164
page 22-144 A d j u s t m e n t , page 22-163
Bulb Replacement, p a g e 22-165
TRANSMITTER
Test/Replacement, page 22-139
LOCK BUTTON
UNLOCK BUTTON
TRUNK BUTTON
('06-08 U S A m o d e l s , a n d ' 0 9 m o d e l )
PANIC B U T T O N
IGNITION K E Y
(cont'd)
22-109
Kef less/Power Door Locks/Security System
IGNITION K E Y SWITCH
T e s t page 22-190
/ DRIVER'S DOOR KEYCYLINDER SWITCH

T e s t page 22-137
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH

(Built i n t o t h e p o w e r
window master switch)
T e s t page 22-136
T R U N K LID R E L E A S E A C T U A T O R /
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK LATCH SWITCH
ACTUATOR/ ACTUATOR/ ('06-08 U S A m o d e l s a n d ' 0 9 m o d e l )
KNOB SWITCH KNOB SWITCH A c t u a t o r Test, page 22-137
Acutuator Test, Actuator Test, Latch Switch Test, page 22-184
p a g e 22-134 page 22-134 LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH or
Knob Switch Test, K n o b Switch Test, T R U N K LID L A T C H S W I T C H
page 22-135 page 22-135 ('06-08 C a n a d a m o d e l s )
Test, page 22-184
R e p l a c e m e n t page 20-162
22-110
Security Alarm System
The security alarm system is armed automatically after the doors, hood, and trunk are closed and locked. For the
system to a r m , the ignition switch must be off, the key must be removed f r o m the ignition switch, and the MICU must
receive signals that the doors, hood, and trunk are closed and locked. The alarm can be disarmed at any time by
unlocking the driver's door w i t h the key or pressing the UNLOCK button on the transmitter.
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK position), and the audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped). In other w o r d s , all of the other switches are
open, and have about 10 to 12 V, including the key cylinder switches. The security indicator in the gauge control
module (speedo) begins to flash immediately after the vehicle is completely closed and locked, and 15 seconds later,
the security system arms. If the security indicator does not flash, the system is not arming. A beep sounds and the
parking lights flash to confirm the security alarm system is armed if the LOCK button is pressed a second time w i t h i n
5 seconds.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted internally, or there is a short in the circuit, the security system will not
a r m . As long as the control unit continues to receive a ground signal (0 V), it senses that the vehicle is not closed and
locked, and the system will not a r m . A switch that is slightly misadjusted can cause the alarm to sound for no apparent
reason. In this case, a significant change in outside air temperature, the vibration of a passing truck, or someone
bumping into the vehicle could cause the alarm to sound. There is no glass breakage or motion detector feature.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the system is armed, the control unit receives a ground signal f r o m
that switch, and the 10 to 12 V reference drops to 0 V. If the audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped) is disconnected,
the input loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 10 to 12 V. The system sounds the alarm w h e n any of these
occur:
• A door or the trunk is forced open.

• A door is unlocked without using the key or the transmitter.
• The hood is opened.
• The audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped) is disconnected.
• The transmitter PANIC button is pressed.
W h e n the system sounds the alarm, the horn sounds and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can be
stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door w i t h the key or by pressing any button on the transmitter.
Panic Mode
The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract attention. W h e n the PANIC button on the transmitter is pressed
and held for 2 seconds, the horn sounds and the exterior lights flash for about 20 seconds.
The panic mode can be cancelled at anytime by pressing any button on the transmitter or by turning the ignition
switch to ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the ignition switch is to ON (II).
(cont'd)
22-111
Kef less Entry System
The keyless entry system Is Integrated w i t h the multiplex integrated control system. The multiplex integrated control
unit (MICU) receives LOCK, UNLOCK and PANIC signals f r o m the immobilizer-keyless control unit (keyless receiver).
The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle w i t h the transmitter. When you press the LOCK
button, all doors lock. When you press the UNLOCK button once, only the driver's door unlocks. The other doors will
unlock w h e n you press the button a second t i m e . The doors w i l l not lock w i t h the transmitter if a door is not fully
closed, or if the key is in the ignition switch.
NOTE: Using the custom setting in the HDS, the functionality of the system can be changed so that all the doors unlock
w i t h the first press of the transmitter UNLOCK button.
W h e n the switch for the ceiling light is in the center (DOOR) position, it w i l l come on when the UNLOCK button Is
pressed. If a door is not opened, the light w i l l go off In about 30 seconds, and the doors will relock. If the doors are
locked w i t h the transmitter w i t h i n 30 seconds, the light w i l l go off Immediately.
22-112
f m
BODY
22-113
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System
Circuit Diagram
MICU
i-B BACK UP
22-114
f
; '06-'08 USA models, and '09 model
: CAN line
: Other communication line
GAUGE CONTROL GAUGE CONTROL

(1RANSMITTER~) MODULE (TACH) MODULE (SPEEDO)
MAIN CIRCUIT
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS 3ZE SECURITY

CONTROL UNIT
B-CAN INDICATOR
TRANSCEIVER (V, (LED)
: 4
PNK UART
: 20
LT GRN
JjL .XL -Q- _£L
G501 G602 G601 G401
(cont'd)
22-115
Kef less/Power Door Locks/Securitf S f stem
No. 4 (H/L) (50 A) No. 12 (15 A) FUSE

(UNDER-HOOD (UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX) FUSE/RELAY BOX)
V V
22-116
H# BODY H
*1: DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door open)

*2: FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door open)
•3: LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door open)
•4: RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door open)
MICU
G13
LT BLU GRN
2
HOOD TRUNK
SWITCH 0 o KEY
(Closed: UN- CYLINDER
1 Hood open) LOCK SWITCH
XL
G701 | G701 G701 J

('06-08 models) ('06-08 USA models, and '09 model) ('06-08 Canada models)
22-117
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC B1026: Front Passenger's Door Lock 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Switch Signal Error (LOCK/UNLOCK)
10. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector T
NOTE: If y o u are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be (34P).
sure to f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-89). 11. Check for continuity between front passenger's
power w i n d o w switch 8P connector terminals No. 1
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS. (UNLOCK) and No. 6 (LOCK), and body ground.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER
to ON (II). W I N D O W S W I T C H 8P C O N N E C T O R
3. Operate the front passenger's door lock switch n I LOCK (YEL)

several times.
4 5 6 7 8
U N L O C K (PUR)
NO—Intermittent failure. The front passenger's
door lock system is OK at this t i m e . •
5. With the front passenger's door lock switch in the
neutral position, select SECURITY f r o m the HDS YES—Repair a short in the LOCK or UNLOCK
and enter the DATA LIST. wire. •
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT NO—Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and relay box (see page 22-60). •
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Are both information indicators OFF? 13. Disconnect the front passenger's power w i n d o w
switch 8P connector.
NO—Go to step 7. (34P).
7. Disconnect the front passenger's power w i n d o w

switch 8P connector.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT

PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Are both information indicators OFF?
Y E S — F a u l t y door lock switch; replace the front

passenger's power w i n d o w switch (see page
22-202). •
NO—Go to step 9.
22-118
15. Check for continuity between front passenger's
power w i n d o w switch 8P connector terminals No. 1
(UNLOCK) and No. 6 (LOCK).
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER

W I N D O W S W I T C H 8P C O N N E C T O R
U N L O C K (PUR)
YES—Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK

and UNLOCK wires. •
NO—Substitute a known-good front passenger's

power w i n d o w switch, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original front passenger's power w i n d o w switch. If
not, the MICU Is faulty, replace the under-dash
fuse/relay box (see page 22-60). •
DTC B1127: Driver's Door Key Cylinder 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
Switch Signal Error (LOCK/UNLOCK)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be (34P).
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page, 22-89). 11. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
box connector T (34P) terminals No. 31 (UNLOCK)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. and No. 32 (LOCK), and body ground.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0), and then back UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)
to ON (II).
3. Insert the ignition key into the driver's door key

cylinder switch, and turn the key in LOCK and
UNLOCK positions ten times.
YES—Goto step5. W i r e side of female terminals
NO—Intermittent failure. The driver's door key

cylinder switch system is OK at this time.B Are there continuity?
5. With the driver's door key cylinder in the neutral YES—Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/
position, select KEYLESS with the HDS, and enter relay box (see page 22-60). a
the DATA LIST.
NO—Goto step 12.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. 13. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
connector.
14 Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector T
YES—Go to step 12. (34P).
NO—Goto step?.
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P

connector.

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
YES—Faulty driver's door key cylinder switch;

replace the driver's door lock actuator. •
NO—Go to step 9.
22-120
1 5 . Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay DTC B1128: Driver's Door Lock Switch Signal
box connector T ( 3 4 P ) terminals No. 31 (UNLOCK) Error (LOCK/UNLOCK)
and No. 3 2 (LOCK).
UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR T ( 3 4 P ) sure t o f o l l o w the instructions in B-CAN System
1. Clear the DTCs w i t h the HDS.

to ON (II).
3. Operate the driver's door lock switch LOCK/

UNLOCK several times.
Wire side of female terminals 4. Check f o r DTCs w i t h the HDS.

YES—Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK
and UNLOCK wires. • NO—Intermittent failure. The driver's door lock
system is OK at this time ffl
NO-—Substitute a known-good MICU, and recheck.
If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the 5. W i t h the driver's door lock switch in the neutral
original MICU, if not, replace the driver's door lock position, select SECURITY f r o m the HDS and enter
actuator. • the DATA LIST.

DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) i n t h e DATA LIST.
7. Disconnect the driver's power w i n d o w switch 22P

connector.
(cont'd)
22-121
8. Check the ON/OFF Information of the DRIVER'S 12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK (0).
DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. 13. Disconnect the power w i n d o w master switch 22P
connector.
YES—Faulty.door lock switch; replace the power (34P).
w i n d o w master switch (see page 22-201). S
NO—Go to step 9. box connector T (34P) terminals No. 28 (LOCK) and
No. 27 (UNLOCK).
10. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box - -
connector T (34P).

box connector T (34P) terminals No. 28 (LOCK) and
No. 27 (UNLOCK), and body ground.
Y E S - R e p a i r a short in the wire between the LOCK

and UNLOCK wires. •
Wire side of female terminals NO—Substitute a known-good power w i n d o w

master switch, and recheck. If the s y m p t o m /
indication goes away, replace the original power
Is there continuity? w i n d o w master switch. If not, the MICU is faulty,
replace the under-dash fuse/relay box (see page
Y E S - R e p a i r a short in the LOCK or UNLOCK 22-60). •
wire.B
NO—Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/

22-122
DTC B1129: Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch 7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
Signal Error (LOCK/UNLOCK) connector.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-89). DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the
DATA LIST.
to ON (II). YES—Check for an open in the driver's door lock
switch (LOCK) wire or the driver's door lock knob
3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch several switch (UNLOCK) wire between the MICU and the
times. driver's door lock knob switch. If OK, replace the
driver's door lock actuator.
NO—Intermittent failure. The system is OK at this (34P),
time. Check for loose or poor connections. •
1 1 . Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay
5. Select KEYLESS f r o m the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, box connector T (34P) terminals No. 23 (UNLOCK)
and enter the DATA LIST. and No. 24 (LOCK) and body ground.
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S UNDER-DASH F U S E / R E L A Y BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and the
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Is the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB the

SWITCH (LOCK) information indicator ON and
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH
(UNLOCK) information indicator OFF with the
driver's door lock knob switch in the LOCK
position, and is the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK
KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) information indicator
OFF and the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB W i r e s i d e of f e m a l e t e r m i n a l s
SWITCH (UNLOCK) information indicator ON
with the driver's door lock knob switch in the
UNLOCK position? Is there continuity?
YES—Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/ YES—Repair a short to ground in the LOCK or
relay box (see page 22-60). • UNLOCK wire. •
NO—Go to step 7. NO—Goto step 12.
(cont'd)
22-123

box connector T (34P) terminals No. 23 (UNLOCK)
and No. 24 (LOCK).
YES—-Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK

wire and UNLOCK wire. •
NO—Faulty MICU, replace the under-dash fuse/

22-124
BODY
Power Door Locks/Kef less .
1. If the door lock system works properly, but the keyless operation' does not, refer to the immobilizer-keyless control
unit s y m p t o m troubleshooting information (see page 22-291).
NOTE; The door lock system does not function w h e n ;

• A n y of the doors is open.
• Ignition key is in the ignition key switch.
° Ignition switch is ON (II).
No. Symptom Check Items

1 The doors will not lock or unlock.* • MICU input test (see page 22-130)
• Driver's door key cylinder switch test (see page 22-137)
• Door lock switch test (see page 22-136)
• Door lock knob switch test (see page 22-135)
• Keyless remote transmitter test (see page 22-139)
2 The doors will not lock.* • MICU input test (see page 22-130)
° Door lock knob switch test (see page 22-135)
• Driver's door switch test (check the door switch ON/OFF
information w i t h the HDS)
3 The doors will not unlock. * • MICU input test (see page 22-130)
• Door lock knob switch test (see page 22-135)
4 Keyless operation does not work S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 22-126).
(LOCK, UNLOCK, PANIC).
5 Doors will not unlock with the S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 22-128).
transmitter, but will unlock w i t h the
door switch.
6 Doors will not lock w i t h the transmitter, S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 22-128).
but will lock w i t h the door switch.
7 Doors automatically relock 30, 60, or S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 22-129).
90 seconds after being unlocked w i t h
the transmitter even though a door
has been opened.
8 The horn does not sound and/or the S y m p t o m troubleshooting (see page 22-128).
headlight do not flash w h e n PANIC
button on the transmitter pressed
('06-08 USA models, and '09 model).
9 Keyless operation will w o r k even Ignition key switch test (see page 22-190).
though the ignition key is in the
ignition switch.
* : If only one door is not working properly, check that door's lock actuator first, then check the other items listed
in this table.
22-125
Kef less/Power Door Locks/Security S f stem
Keyless operation does not work (LOCK, 9. Measure the voltage between Immobilizer-keyless
UNLOCK, PANIC) control unit 7P connector terminal No. 1 and body
ground.
NOTE;
• Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any I M M O B I L I Z E R - K E Y L E S S C O N T R O L UNIT 7P C O N N E C T O R
DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC first.
• Before troubleshooting, do the keyless transmitter
test (see page 22-139). | CEEEO .

1 I 2 3 4 5 6 7
I V B U (WHT)
2. Try to start the engine. X)
Does the engine start?
YES—The immobilizer system is OK, go to step 3. Wire side of female terminals
NO—Go to the immobilizer s y m p t o m

troubleshooting (see. page 22-291). • Is there battery voltage?
3. Turn the ignition switch t o LOCK (0). Y E S — G o t o step 10.
4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. NO—Check fuse No. 23 (10 A) in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. If the fuse is b l o w n , replace the fuse
5. Close all doors, then turn the ignition switch to and repair a short to ground in the wire. If the fuse
ON (II). is OK, repair an open in the wire. •
6. Enter the BODY ELECTRICAL m e n u , and check

(TM) Honda Manual de Taller Honda Civic 2006 Al 2009 en Ingles

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

(TM) Honda Manual de Taller Honda Civic 2006 Al 2009 en Ingles

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

INTRODUCTION

• How to Use This Manual G e n e r a l I n f o r m a t i o n

All information contained in this manual is based on the latest

As you read this manual, you will find information that is

First Edition 12/2008 HONDA M O T O R C O . , LTD.

A s sections with * include S R S components;

marked sections are not included in this

INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M

Chassis and Paint Codes

Identification Number Locations 1-6

'06 Model Engine Number

Vehicle Identification Number LDA2 - 1000001

JHm rAo o 2 G 5 000001 I

Vehicle Identification Number LDA2 - 2000001

JHM FA3 6 2 * 7 S 000001

m Model Engine Number

Vehicle Identification Number LDA2 - 3000001

J H M TAS G 2 ""' S 3 GGG001

Vehicle Identification Number LDA2 - 4000001

JHM FAS 6 2 * 9 S 000001

Located on driver's and passenger's doorjambs. TENSIONER CAUTION

Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations (cont'd)

HIGH V O L T A G E BATTERY MODULE

Example: Test Group

VEHICLE EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION

8 "E ' cWTIfLTw AND IN bS"

W U - T W C , T W C , A/F SENSOR, H 0 2 S , EG R, SFI

CONFORMS TO REGULATION: 2008 M Y

2. Raise the lift a f e w inches, and rock the vehicle

3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the

Safety Stands 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.

To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

Flat-bed Tow Truck Equipment — The operator loads

To accommodate flat-bed t o w truck equipment, the

The t o w i n g hooks can be used w i t h a winch to pull the

Towing (cont'd) Parts Marking

If the vehicle cannot be transported by a flat-bed t o w

• Release the parking brake.

It is best to t o w the vehicle no farther than 50 miles

Standards and Service Limits

"C" marks on the

Front w h e e l t u r n i n g angle Inward 39°53'±2'

Lubricants and Fluids

Application Lubricant or Fluid

MAINTENANCE MINDER INDICATOR INFORMATION DISPLAY

Driver's Side Dashboard:

4 . W h e n the ignition switch is ON (II), and the

• Complete list of maintenance main items (C)

Resetting the Maintenance Information Resetting Individual Maintenance Items

4. Press and hold the SEL/RESET button for another

Symbol Maintenance Main Items

INTEGRATED MOTOR ASSIST (IMA) S Y S T E M (If engine electrical maintenance is required)

Overhaul, page 4-12

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

No. 23 (7.5 A) Q15

Does the starter crank the engine?

YES—Repairing the loose connection corrected the

NO—Based on the following symptoms, take the

• If the starter does not crank the engine at all, go

3. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

5. Make sure the HDS communicates w i t h the vehicle